[Title 40 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - July 1, 1999 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]


          40



          Protection of Environment



[[Page 1]]

          PART 63 (Secs. 63.1200--End)

                         Revised as of July 1, 1999

          CONTAINING
          A CODIFICATION OF DOCUMENTS
          OF GENERAL APPLICABILITY
          AND FUTURE EFFECT

          AS OF JULY 1, 1999
          With Ancillaries
          Published by
          the Office of the Federal Register
          National Archives and Records
          Administration

          as a Special Edition of
          the Federal Register

[[Page ii]]

                                      

               ----------------------------------------------------------
               As of July 1, 1999
               Title 40, Parts 63
               Revised as of July 1, 1998
               Is Replaced by Two Volumes
               Title 40, Part 63, (Secs. 63.1-63.1199)
               and
               Title 40, Parts 63, (Sec. 63.1200-End
                                      
               ----------------------------------------------------------


                     U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
                            WASHINGTON : 1999



               For sale by U.S. Government Printing Office
 Superintendent of Documents, Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-9328

[[Page iii]]




                            Table of Contents



                                                                    Page
  Explanation.................................................       v

  Title 40:
          Chapter I--Environmental Protection Agency 
          (Continued)                                                3
  Finding Aids:
    Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference..........     701
    Table of CFR Titles and Chapters..........................     703
    Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR........     721
    List of CFR Sections Affected.............................     731

[[Page iv]]


      


                     ----------------------------

                     Cite this Code:  CFR
                     To cite the regulations in 
                       this volume use title, 
                       part and section number. 
                       Thus,  40 CFR 63.1211 
                       refers to title 40, part 
                       63, section 1211.

                     ----------------------------

[[Page v]]



                               EXPLANATION

    The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and 
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive 
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided 
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal 
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the 
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into 
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
    Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year 
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:

Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1

    The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each 
volume.

LEGAL STATUS

    The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially 
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie 
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).

HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

    The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual 
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used 
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
    To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its 
revision date (in this case, July 1, 1999), consult the ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative 
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of 
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal 
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.

EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES

    Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal 
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source 
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page 
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication 
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be 
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In 
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the 
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In 
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register 
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be 
inserted following the text.

OMB CONTROL NUMBERS

    The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires 
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information 
collection request.

[[Page vi]]

Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as 
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are 
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.

OBSOLETE PROVISIONS

    Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on 
the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text 
of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the 
appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before 
January 1, 1986, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, or 1973-1985, published in seven separate volumes. For 
the period beginning January 1, 1986, a ``List of CFR Sections 
Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

    What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was 
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the 
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring 
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be 
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal 
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as 
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). 
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force 
of law.
    What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the 
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when 
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which 
approval is based are:
    (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of 
material published in the Federal Register.
    (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent 
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative 
process.
    (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for 
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
    Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are 
listed in the Finding Aids at the end of this volume.
    What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If 
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed in 
the Finding Aids of this volume as an approved incorporation by 
reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation 
containing that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find 
the material is not available, please notify the Director of the Federal 
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington DC 
20408, or call (202) 523-4534.

CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES

    A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a 
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index 
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Statutory 
Authorities and Agency Rules (Table I). A list of CFR titles, chapters, 
and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are 
also included in this volume.
    An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within 
that volume.
    The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. 
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in 
the daily Federal Register.
    A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to 
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.

[[Page vii]]


REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL

    There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing 
in the Code of Federal Regulations.

INQUIRIES

    For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this 
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at 
the top of odd-numbered pages.
    For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-523-5227 
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National 
Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408.

SALES

    The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and 
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call 202-512-1800, 
M-F, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202-512-2233, 24 hours 
a day. For payment by check, write to the Superintendent of Documents, 
Attn: New Orders, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954. For GPO 
Customer Service call 202-512-1803.

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

    The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, The United States 
Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public Laws, Weekly Compilation 
of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available 
in electronic format at www.access.gpo.gov/nara (``GPO Access''). For 
more information, contact Electronic Information Dissemination Services, 
U.S. Government Printing Office. Phone 202-512-1530, or 888-293-6498 
(toll-free). E-mail, [email protected].
    The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the 
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web 
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related 
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.nara.gov/fedreg. The NARA 
site also contains links to GPO Access.

                              Raymond A. Mosley,
                                    Director,
                          Office of the Federal Register.

July 1, 1999.

[[Page ix]]



                               THIS TITLE

    Title 40--Protection of Environment is composed of twenty-four 
volumes. The parts in these volumes are arranged in the following order: 
parts 1-49, parts 50-51, part 52 (52.01-52.1018), part 52 (52.1019-End), 
parts 53-59, part 60, parts 61-62, part 63 (63.1-63.1199), part 63 
(63.1200-End), parts 64-71, parts 72-80, parts 81-85, part 86, parts 87-
135, parts 136-149, parts 150-189, parts 190-259, parts 260-265, parts 
266-299, parts 300-399, parts 400-424, parts 425-699, parts 700-789, and 
part 790 to End. The contents of these volumes represent all current 
regulations codified under this title of the CFR as of July 1, 1999.

    Chapter I--Environmental Protection Agency appears in all twenty-
four volumes. A Pesticide Tolerance Commodity/Chemical Index appears in 
parts 150-189. A Toxic Substances Chemical--CAS Number Index appears in 
parts 700-789 and part 790 to End. Redesignation Tables appear in the 
volumes containing parts 50-51, parts 150-189, and parts 700-789. 
Regulations issued by the Council on Environmental Quality appear in the 
volume containing part 790 to End. The OMB control numbers for title 40 
appear in Sec. 9.1 of this chapter.

    For this volume, Ruth Reedy Green was Chief Editor. The Code of 
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of 
Frances D. McDonald, assisted by Alomha S. Morris.

[[Page x]]




[[Page 1]]



                   TITLE 40--PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT




                      (This book contains part 63)

  --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Part

chapter i--Environmental Protection Agency (Continued)......          63

[[Page 3]]



               CHAPTER I--ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

                 SUBCHAPTER C--AIR PROGRAMS (CONTINUED)

Part                                                                Page
63              National emission standards for hazardous 
                    air pollutants for source categories....           5


  Editorial Note: Subchapter C--Air Programs is contained in volumes 40 
CFR parts 50-51, part 52 (52.01-52.1018), part 52 (52.1019-end), parts 
53-59, part 60, parts 61-62, part 63 (63.1-63.1199, part 63 (63.1200-
End), parts 64-71, parts 72-80, parts 81-85, part 86, and parts 87-135.

[[Page 5]]



                 SUBCHAPTER C--AIR PROGRAMS (Continued)





PART 63--NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS FOR SOURCE CATEGORIES--Table of Contents




 Subpart EEE--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                     From Hazardous Waste Combustors

63.1200-63.1210  [Reserved]
63.1211  Notification requirements.
63.1212  Progress reports.
63.1213  Certification.
63.1214  Extension of the compliance date.
63.1215  Sources that become affected sources after the effective date 
          of this subpart.
63.1216  Extension of compliance date to install pollution prevention or 
          waste minimization controls.

Subpart FFF  [Reserved]

 Subpart GGG--National Emission Standards for Pharmaceuticals Production

63.1250  Applicability.
63.1251  Definitions.
63.1252  Standards: General.
63.1253  Standards: Storage tanks.
63.1254  Standards: Process vents.
63.1255  Standards: Equipment leaks.
63.1256  Standards: Wastewater.
63.1257  Test methods and compliance procedures.
63.1258  Monitoring requirements.
63.1259  Recordkeeping requirements.
63.1260  Reporting requirements.
63.1261  Delegation of authority.

Table 1 to Subpart GGG--General Provisions Applicability to Subpart GGG
Table 2 to Subpart GGG--Partially Soluble HAP
Table 3 to Subpart GGG--Soluble HAP
Table 4 to Subpart GGG--Monitoring Requirements for Control Devices
Table 5 to Subpart GGG--Control Requirements for Items of Equipment That 
          Meet the Criteria of Sec. 63.1252(f)
Table 6 to Subpart GGG--Wastewater--Compliance Options for Wastewater 
          Tanks
Table 7 to Subpart GGG--Wastewater--Inspection and Monitoring 
          Requirements for Waste Management Units
Table 8 to Subpart GGG--Fraction Measured (Fm) for HAP 
          Compounds in Wastewater Streams
Table 9 to Subpart GGG--Default Biorates for List 1 Compounds

 Subpart HHH--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
          From Natural Gas Transmission and Storage Facilities

63.1270  Applicability and designation of affected source.
63.1271  Definitions.
63.1272  Startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions.
63.1273  [Reserved]
63.1274  General standards.
63.1275  Glycol dehydration unit process vent standards.
63.1276-63.1280  [Reserved]
63.1281  Control equipment requirements.
63.1282  Test methods, compliance procedures, and compliance 
          demonstrations.
63.1283  Inspection and monitoring requirements.
63.1284  Recordkeeping requirements.
63.1285  Reporting requirements.
63.1286  Delegation of authority.
63.1287  Alternative means of emission limitation.
63.1288-63.1289  [Reserved]

Appendix to Subpart HHH--Tables

 Subpart III--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                for Flexible Polyurethane Foam Production

63.1290  Applicability.
63.1291  Compliance schedule.
63.1292  Definitions.
63.1293  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production.
63.1294  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          diisocyanate emissions.
63.1295  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          HAP ABA storage vessels.
63.1296  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          HAP ABA equipment leaks.
63.1297  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          HAP ABA emissions from the production line.
63.1298  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          HAP emissions from equipment cleaning.
63.1299  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--
          source-wide emission limitation.
63.1300  Standards for molded flexible polyurethane foam production.
63.1301  Standards for rebond foam production.
63.1302  Applicability of subpart A requirements.
63.1303  Monitoring requirements.
63.1304  Testing requirements.

[[Page 6]]

63.1305  Alternative means of emission limitation.
63.1306  Reporting requirements.
63.1307  Recordkeeping requirements.
63.1308  Compliance demonstrations.
63.1309  Delegation of authority.

Appendix to Subpart III--Tables

  Subpart JJJ--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutant 
                 Emissions: Group IV Polymers and Resins

63.1310  Applicability and designation of affected sources.
63.1311  Compliance schedule and relationship to existing applicable 
          rules.
63.1312  Definitions.
63.1313  Emission standards.
63.1314  Storage vessel provisions.
63.1315  Continuous process vents provisions.
63.1316  PET and polystyrene affected sources--emissions control 
          provisions.
63.1317  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--
          monitoring provisions.
63.1318  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--
          testing and compliance demonstration provisions.
63.1319  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--
          recordkeeping provisions.
63.1320  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--
          reporting provisions.
63.1321  Batch process vents provisions.
63.1322  Batch process vents--reference control technology.
63.1323  Batch process vents--methods and procedures for group 
          determination.
63.1324  Batch process vents--monitoring provisions.
63.1325  Batch process vents--performance test methods and procedures to 
          determine compliance.
63.1326  Batch process vents--recordkeeping provisions.
63.1327  Batch process vents--reporting requirements.
63.1328  Heat exchange systems provisions.
63.1329  Process contact cooling towers provisions.
63.1330  Wastewater provisions.
63.1331  Equipment leak provisions.
63.1332  Emissions averaging provisions.
63.1333  Additional test methods and procedures.
63.1334  Parameter monitoring levels and excursions.
63.1335  General recordkeeping and reporting provisions.
Table 1 to Subpart JJJ--Applicability of General Provisions to Subpart 
          JJJ Affected Sources
Table 2 to Subpart JJJ--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing Affected 
          Sources
Table 3 to Subpart JJJ--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing Affected 
          Sources Producing the Listed Thermoplastics
Table 4 to Subpart JJJ--Group 1 Storage Vessels at New Affected Sources
Table 5 to Subpart JJJ--Group 1 Storage Vessels at New Affected Sources 
          Producing the Listed Thermoplastics
Table 6 to Subpart JJJ--Known Organic Hazardous Air Pollutants From 
          Thermoplastics Products
Table 7 to Subpart JJJ--Group 1 Batch Process Vents--Monitoring, 
          Recordkeeping, and Reporting Requirements
Table 8 to Subpart JJJ--Operating Parameters for Which Levels are 
          Required to be Established for Continuous and Batch Process 
          Vents and Aggregate Batch Vent Streams

Subpart KKK  [Reserved]

 Subpart LLL--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
             From the Portland Cement Manufacturing Industry

                                 General

63.1340  Applicability and designation of affected sources.
63.1341  Definitions.

                 Emission Standards and Operating Limits

63.1342  Standards: General.
63.1343  Standards for kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills.
63.1344  Operating limits for kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills.
63.1345  Standards for clinker coolers.
63.1346  Standards for new and reconstructed raw material dryers.
63.1347  Standards for raw and finish mills.
63.1348  Standards for affected sources other than kilns; in-line kiln 
          raw mills; clinker coolers; new and reconstructed raw material 
          dryers; and raw and finish mills.

                  Monitoring and Compliance Provisions

63.1349  Performance testing requirements.
63.1350  Monitoring requirements.
63.1351  Compliance dates.
63.1352  Additional test methods.

                Notification, Reporting and Recordkeeping

63.1353  Notification requirements.
63.1354  Reporting requirements.
63.1355  Recordkeeping requirements.

                                  Other

63.1356  Exemption from new source performance standards.
63.1357  Temporary, conditioned exemption from particulate and opacity 
          standards.
63.1358  Delegation of authority.
63.1359  [Reserved]

[[Page 7]]


Table 1 to Subpart LLL of Part 63--Applicability of General Provisions

 Subpart MMM--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
               for Pesticide Active Ingredient Production

63.1360  Applicability.
63.1361  Definitions.
63.1362  Standards.
63.1363  Standards for equipment leaks.
63.1364  Compliance dates.
63.1365  Test methods and initial compliance procedures.
63.1366  Monitoring and inspection requirements.
63.1367  Recordkeeping requirements.
63.1368  Reporting requirements.
63.1369  Delegation of authority.

Table 1 to Subpart MMM of part 63--General Provisions Applicability to 
          Subpart MMM.
Table 2 to Subpart MMM of part 63--Standards for New and Existing PAI 
          Sources.
Table 3 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--Monitoring Requirements for Control 
          Devices.
Table 4 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--Control Requirements for Items of 
          Equipment that Meet the Criteria of Sec. 63.1362(k).

 Subpart NNN--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                    for Wool Fiberglass Manufacturing

63.1380  Applicability.
63.1381  Definitions.
63.1382  Emission standards.
63.1383  Monitoring requirements.
63.1384  Performance test requirements.
63.1385  Test methods and procedures.
63.1386  Notification, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements.
63.1387  Compliance dates.
63.1388--63.1399  [Reserved]

Table 1 to Subpart NNN of part 63--Applicability of general provisions 
          (40 CFR part 63, subpart A) to subpart NNN.
Appendix A to Subpart NNN of part 63--Method for the determination of 
          LOI
Appendix B to Subpart NNN of part 63--Free formaldehyde analysis of 
          insulation resins by hydroxylamine hydrochloride
Appendix C to Subpart NNN of part 63--Method for the determination of 
          product density

Subpart OOO  [Reserved]

  Subpart PPP--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutant 
               Emissions for Polyether Polyols Production

63.1420  Applicability and designation of affected sources.
63.1421  Delegation of authority.
63.1422  Compliance dates and relationship of this rule to existing 
          applicable rules.
63.1423  Definitions.
63.1424  Emission standards.
63.1425  Process vent control requirements.
63.1426  Process vent requirements for determining organic HAP 
          concentration, control efficiency, and aggregated organic HAP 
          emission reduction for a PMPU.
63.1427  Process vent requirements for processes using extended cookout 
          as an epoxide emission reduction technique.
63.1428  Process vent requirements for group determination of PMPUs 
          using a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product.
63.1429  Process vent monitoring requirements.
63.1430  Process vent reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
63.1431  Process vent annual epoxides emission factor plan requirements.
63.1432  Storage vessel provisions.
63.1433  Wastewater provisions.
63.1434  Equipment leak provisions.
63.1435  Heat exchanger provisions.
63.1436  [Reserved]
63.1437  Additional requirements for performance testing.
63.1438  Parameter monitoring levels and excursions.
63.1439  General recordkeeping and reporting provisions.

Table 1 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Applicability of General Provisions 
          to Subpart PPP Affected Sources
Table 2 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Applicability of Subparts F, G, H, 
          and U to Subpart PPP Affected Sources
Table 3 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing 
          and New Affected Sources
Table 4 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Known Organic HAP From Polyether 
          Polyol Products
Table 5 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Process Vents From Batch Unit 
          Operations--Monitoring, Recordkeeping, and Reporting 
          Requirements
Table 6 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Process Vents From Continuous Unit 
          Operations--Monitoring, Recordkeeping, and Reporting 
          Requirements
Table 7 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Operating Parameters for Which 
          Monitoring Levels are Required to be Established for Process 
          Vents Streams
Table 8 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Routine Reports Required by This 
          Subpart

[[Page 8]]

Subparts QQQ--SSS  [Reserved]

 Subpart TTT--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                        for Primary Lead Smelting

63.1541  Applicability.
63.1542  Definitions.
63.1543  Standards for process and process fugitive sources.
63.1544  Standards for fugitive dust sources.
63.1545  Compliance dates.
63.1546  Test methods.
63.1547  Monitoring requirements.
63.1548  Notification requirements.
63.1549  Recordkeeping and reporting requirements.
63.1550  Delegation of authority.

Subparts UUU--WWW  [Reserved]

 Subpart XXX--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
     for Ferroalloys Production: Ferromanganese and Silicomanganese

63.1620-63.1649  [Reserved]
63.1650  Applicability and compliance dates.
63.1651  Definitions.
63.1652  Emission standards.
63.1653  Opacity standards.
63.1654  Operational and work practice standards.
63.1655  Maintenance requirements.
63.1656  Performance testing, test methods, and compliance 
          demonstrations.
63.1657  Monitoring requirements.
63.1658  Notification requirements.
63.1659  Reporting requirements.
63.1660  Recordkeeping requirements.
63.1661  Delegation of authorities.
63.1662-63.1679  [Reserved]

Appendix A to Part 63--Test Methods
Appendix B to Part 63--Sources Defined for Early Reduction Provisions
Appendix C to Part 63--Determination of the Fraction Biodegraded 
          (Fbio) in a Biological Treatment Unit
Appendix D to Part 63--Alternative Validation Procedure for EPA Waste 
          and Wastewater Methods

    Authority: 42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.

    Source: 57 FR 61992, Dec. 29, 1992, unless otherwise noted.



 Subpart EEE--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                     From Hazardous Waste Combustors

    Source: 63 FR 33820, June 19, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. Sec. 63.1200-63.1210  [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1211  Notification requirements.

    (a) Notification of Intent To Comply (NIC). (1) All hazardous waste 
combustors subject to this subpart shall prepare a Notification of 
Intent to Comply that includes the following information:
    (i) General information:
    (A) The name and address of the owner/operator and the source;
    (B) Whether the source is a major or an area source;
    (C) Waste minimization and emission control technique(s) being 
considered;
    (D) Emission monitoring technique(s) being considered;
    (E) Waste minimization and emission control technique(s) 
effectiveness;
    (F) A description of the evaluation criteria used or to be used to 
select waste minimization and/or emission control technique(s); and
    (G) A statement that the source intends to comply with this subpart 
by controlling emissions from the combustion of hazardous waste pursuant 
to the standards of this subpart.
    (ii) Information on key activities and estimated dates for these 
activities that will bring the source into compliance with emission 
control requirements of this subpart. The submission of key activities 
and dates is not intended to be static and may be revised by the source 
during the period the NIC is in effect. Revisions shall be submitted to 
the regulatory authority and be made available to the public. The 
following are the key activities and dates that shall be included:
    (A) The dates for beginning and completion of engineering studies to 
evaluate emission control systems or process changes for emissions;
    (B) The date by which contracts for emission control systems or 
process changes for emission control will be awarded, or the date by 
which orders will be issued for the purchase of component parts to 
accomplish emission control or process changes;
    (C) The date by which construction applications will be submitted;
    (D) The date by which on-site construction, installation of emission 
control equipment, or process change is to be initiated;

[[Page 9]]

    (E) The date by which on-site construction, installation of emission 
control equipment, or process change is to be completed; and
    (F) The date by which final compliance is to be achieved. The 
individual dates and milestones listed in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) 
through (F) of this section as part of the NIC are not requirements and 
therefore are not enforceable deadlines; the Agency is requiring 
paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) through (F) of this section as part of the NIC 
only to inform the public of the source's intentions towards coming into 
compliance.
    (iii) A summary of the public meeting required under paragraph (b) 
of this section.
    (iv) For any source that does not intend to comply, but will not 
stop burning hazardous waste as required under paragraph (c) of this 
section, a certification that the designated source will:
    (A) Stop burning hazardous waste on or before the compliance date of 
the emission standards of this Subpart; and
    (B) Be necessary to combust the hazardous waste from another on-site 
source, during the year prior to the compliance date of the emission 
standards of this Subpart, because that other source is:
    (1) Installing equipment to come into compliance with the emission 
standards of this Subpart; or
    (2) Installing source reduction modifications to eliminate the need 
for further combustion of wastes.
    (2) A draft of the NIC must be made available for public review no 
later than 30 days prior to the public meeting required under paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section.
    (3) The final NIC must be submitted to the permitting agency no 
later than one year following the effective date of the emission 
standards of this subpart.
    (b) NIC Public Meeting and Notice. (1) Prior to the submission of 
the NIC to the permitting agency, and no later than 10 months after the 
effective date of the emission standards of this subpart, the source 
shall hold at least one informal meeting with the public to discuss 
anticipated activities described in the draft NIC for achieving 
compliance with the MACT standards promulgated in this subpart. The 
source must post a sign-in sheet or otherwise provide a voluntary 
opportunity for attendees to provide their names and addresses.
    (2) The source shall submit a summary of the meeting, along with the 
list of attendees and their addresses developed under paragraph (b)(1) 
of this section, and copies of any written comments or materials 
submitted at the meeting, to the permitting agency as part of the final 
NIC, in accordance with paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section.
    (3) The source must provide public notice of the NIC meeting at 
least 30 days prior to the meeting. The source shall provide public 
notice in all of the following forms:
    (i) Newspaper advertisement. The source shall publish a notice in a 
newspaper of general circulation in the county or equivalent 
jurisdiction of the source. In addition, the source shall publish the 
notice in newspapers of general circulation in adjacent counties or 
equivalent jurisdiction where such publication would be necessary to 
inform the affected public. The notice must be published as a display 
advertisement.
    (ii) Visible and accessible sign. The source shall post a notice on 
a clearly marked sign at or near the source. If the source places the 
sign on the source's property, then the sign must be large enough to be 
readable from the nearest spot where the public would pass by the 
source.
    (iii) Broadcast media announcement. The source shall broadcast a 
notice at least once on at least one local radio station or television 
station.
    (iv) Notice to the facility mailing list. The source shall provide a 
copy of the notice to the facility mailing list in accordance with 
Sec. 124.10(c)(1)(ix) of this chapter.
    (4) The notices required under paragraph (b)(3) of this section must 
include:
    (i) The date, time, and location of the meeting;
    (ii) A brief description of the purpose of the meeting;
    (iii) A brief description of the source and proposed operations, 
including the address or a map (e.g., a sketched or

[[Page 10]]

copied street map) of the source location;
    (iv) A statement encouraging people to contact the source at least 
72 hours before the meeting if they need special access to participate 
in the meeting;
    (v) A statement describing how the draft NIC can be obtained; and
    (vi) The name, address, and telephone number of a contact person for 
the NIC.
    (c) Sources that do not intend to comply. Those sources subject to 
the requirements of this subpart, except those sources meeting the 
requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section:
    (1) Who signify in their NIC an intent not to comply with the 
requirements of this Subpart, must stop burning hazardous waste on or 
before two years after the effective date of the emmission standards of 
this subpart;
    (2) Who do not intend to comply with this subpart must include in 
their NIC a schedule that includes key dates for the steps to be taken 
to stop burning hazardous waste. Key dates include the date for 
submittal of RCRA closure documents.



Sec. 63.1212  Progress reports.

    (a) General. Not later than two years after the effective date of 
the emission standards of this subpart, all sources subject to this 
Subpart except those hazardous waste combustion sources that comply with 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall:
    (1) Complete engineering design for any physical modifications to 
the source needed to comply with the emissions standards of this 
subpart;
    (2) Submit applicable construction applications to the applicable 
regulatory authority; and
    (3) Enter into a binding contractual commitment to purchase, 
fabricate, and install any equipment, devices, and ancillary structures 
needed to comply with the emission requirements of this subpart.
    (b) Demonstration. (1) Hazardous waste combustion sources shall 
submit to the regulatory authority a progress report on or before two 
years after the effective date of the emission standards of this subpart 
which contains information demonstrating that the source has met the 
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section. This information will be 
used by the regulatory authority to determine if the source has made 
adequate progress towards compliance with the applicable emission 
standards.
    (2) Sources that intend to come into compliance with the emissions 
standards of this subpart, but can do so without undertaking any of the 
activities described in paragraph (a) of this section, shall submit 
documentation either:
    (i) Demonstrating that the source, at the time of the progress 
report, is in compliance with the emissions requirements; or
    (ii) Specifying the steps that will be taken to bring the source 
into compliance, without undertaking any of the activities listed in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (3) Sources that fail to comply with paragraph (a) above or 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall stop burning hazardous waste on 
or before the date two years after the effective date of the emission 
standards of this subpart.
    (c) Schedule. (1) The progress report shall contain a detailed 
schedule that lists key dates for all projects that will bring the 
source into compliance with the requirements of this subpart (i.e., key 
dates for the activities required under paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through 
(iii) of this section). Dates shall cover the time frame from the 
progress report through the compliance date of the emission standards of 
this subpart.
    (2) The schedule shall contain the following dates:
    (i) Bid and award dates for construction contracts and equipment 
supply contractors;
    (ii) Milestones such as ground breaking, completion of drawings and 
specifications, equipment deliveries, intermediate construction 
completions, and testing;
    (iii) The dates on which applications were submitted for or obtained 
operating and construction permits or licenses;
    (iv) The dates by which approvals of any permits or licenses are 
anticipated; and

[[Page 11]]

    (v) The projected date by which the source will be in compliance 
with the requirements of this subpart.
    (d) Notice of intent to comply. The progress report shall contain a 
statement that the source intends or does not intend to come into 
compliance with the applicable emission control requirements of this 
subpart.
    (e) Sources that do not intend to comply. (1) Sources that: 
indicated in their NIC their intent not to comply with this subpart and 
stop burning hazardous waste prior to the submittal of a progress 
report; or meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section 
are not required to include the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) 
of this section to their progress report, but shall include in their 
progress report: the date on which the source stopped burning hazardous 
waste; and the date(s) on which RCRA closure documents were submitted.
    (2) Those sources that signify in the progress report, submitted not 
later than two years after the effective date of the emission standards 
of this subpart, their intention not to comply with the requirements of 
this subpart must stop burning hazardous waste on or before the date two 
years after the effective date of the emission standards of this 
subpart.



Sec. 63.1213  Certification.

    (a) The Notice of Intent to Comply (NIC) and Progress Report 
submitted shall contain the following certification signed and dated by 
an authorized representative of the source:

    I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and 
am familiar with the information submitted in this document and all 
attachments and that, based on my inquiry of those individuals 
immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that 
the information is true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there 
are significant penalties for submitting false information, including 
the possibility of fine and imprisonment.

    (b) An authorized representative should be a responsible corporate 
officer (for a corporation), a general partner (for a partnership), the 
proprietor (of a sole proprietorship), or a principal executive officer 
or ranking elected official (for a municipality, State, Federal, or 
other public agency).



Sec. 63.1214  Extension of the compliance date.

    (a) A source that intends to come into compliance with the 
requirements of this subpart, but due to the installation of controls 
will not meet the compliance date, may request an extension of the 
compliance date for one year.
    (b) Sources subject to this subpart shall follow the requirements of 
Sec. 63.6(i)(4) or Sec. 63.1216 to request an extension of the 
compliance date.



Sec. 63.1215  Sources that become affected sources after the effective date of the emission standards of this subpart.

    (a) A source that begins to burn hazardous waste after the effective 
date of the emission standards of this subpart, therefore becoming an 
affected source, but prior to 9 months after the effective date of the 
emission standards of this subpart shall comply with all the 
requirements of Secs. 63.1211 through 63.1213 and associated time frames 
for public meetings and document submittals.
    (b) A source that intends to begin burning hazardous waste more than 
9 months after the effective date of the emission standards of this 
subpart, therefore becoming an affected source, shall meet all the 
requirements of Secs. 63.1211 through 63.1213 prior to burning hazardous 
waste.
    (1) Such sources shall make a draft NIC available, notice their 
public meeting, hold their public meeting, and submit a final NIC prior 
to burning hazardous waste.
    (2) Such sources also shall submit their progress report at the time 
of the submittal of their final NIC.



Sec. 63.1216  Extension of the compliance date to install pollution prevention or waste minimization controls.

    (a) Applicability. The owner or operator of any source subject to 
the requirements of this subpart may request from the Administrator or 
State with an approved Title V program an extension of one year to 
comply with the emission standards in this subpart, if the owner or 
operator can reasonably

[[Page 12]]

document that the installation of pollution prevention or waste 
minimization measures will significantly reduce the amount and/or 
toxicity of hazardous wastes entering the feedstream(s) of the 
combustion device(s) subject to this subpart, and that the facility 
could not otherwise install the necessary control measures and comply 
within three years after the effective date of the emission standards of 
this subpart.
    (b) Requirements for requesting an extension. Requests for a one-
year extension must be in writing, must be received not later than 12 
months before the affected source's compliance date, and must contain 
the following information:
    (1) A description of pollution prevention or waste minimization 
controls that, when installed, will significantly reduce the amount and/
or toxicity of hazardous wastes entering the feedstream(s) of the 
combustion device(s) subject to this subpart. Pollution prevention or 
waste minimization measures may include: equipment or technology 
modifications, reformulation or redesign of products, substitution of 
raw materials, improvements in work practices, maintenance, training, 
inventory control, or recycling practices conducted as defined in 40 CFR 
261.1(c);
    (2) A description of other pollution controls to be installed that 
are necessary to comply with the emission standards;
    (3) A reduction goal or estimate of the annual reductions in 
quantity and/or toxicity of hazardous waste(s) entering combustion 
feedstream(s) that will occur by installing the proposed pollution 
prevention or waste minimization measures;
    (4) A comparison of reductions in the amounts and/or toxicity of 
hazardous wastes combusted after installation of pollution prevention or 
waste minimization measures to the amounts and/or toxicity of hazardous 
wastes combusted prior to the installation of these measures; and, if 
the difference is less than a fifteen percent reduction, a comparison to 
pollution prevention and waste minimization reductions recorded during 
the previous five years;
    (5) Reasonable documentation that installation of the pollution 
prevention or waste minimization changes will not result in a net 
increase (except for documented increases in production) of hazardous 
constituents released to the environment through other emissions, wastes 
or effluents;
    (6) Reasonable documentation that the design and installation of 
waste minimization and other measures that are necessary for compliance 
cannot otherwise be installed within the three year compliance period, 
and
    (7) The information required in 40 CFR 63.6(i)(6)(i)(B) through (D).
    (8) Documentation prepared under an existing State required 
pollution prevention program that contains the information may be 
enclosed with a request for extension in lieu of paragraphs (b)(1) 
through (7) of this section.
    (c) Approval of request for extension of compliance. Based on the 
information provided in any request made under paragraph (a) of this 
section, the Administrator or State with an approved Title V program may 
grant an extension of compliance with the emission standards identified 
in paragraph (a) of this section. The extension will be in writing in 
accordance with Secs. 63.6(i)(10)(i) through 63.6(i)(10)(v)(A). EPA and 
States must consider the information required in paragraph (a) of this 
section in approving or denying requests for one-year compliance 
extensions.

Subpart FFF  [Reserved]



 Subpart GGG--National Emission Standards for Pharmaceuticals Production

    Source: 63 FR 50326, Sept. 21, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1250  Applicability.

    (a) Definition of affected source. The affected source subject to 
this subpart is the pharmaceutical manufacturing operation, as defined 
in Sec. 63.1251. Except as specified in paragraph (d) of this section, 
the provisions of this subpart

[[Page 13]]

apply to pharmaceutical manufacturing operations that meet the criteria 
specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section as 
follows:
    (1) Manufacture a pharmaceutical product, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1251;
    (2) Are located at a plant site that is a major source as defined in 
section 112(a) of the Act; and
    (3) Process, use, or produce HAP.
    (b) New source applicability. A new affected source subject to this 
subpart and to which the requirements for new sources apply is: an 
affected source for which construction or reconstruction commenced after 
April 2, 1997 and the standard was applicable at the time of 
construction or reconstruction; or a pharmaceutical manufacturing 
process unit (PMPU), dedicated to manufacturing a single product, that 
has the potential to emit 10 tons per year of any one HAP or 25 tons per 
year of combined HAP, for which construction commenced after April 2, 
1997.
    (c) General Provisions. Table 1 of this subpart specifies the 
provisions of subpart A of this part that apply to an owner or operator 
of an affected source subject to this subpart, and clarifies specific 
provisions in subpart A of this part as necessary for this subpart.
    (d) Processes exempted from the affected source. The provisions of 
this subpart do not apply to research and development facilities.
    (e) Storage tank ownership determination. The owner or operator 
shall follow the procedures specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through 
(e)(5) of this section to determine to which PMPU a storage tank shall 
belong.
    (1) If a storage tank is dedicated to a single PMPU, the storage 
tank shall belong to that PMPU.
    (2) If a storage tank is shared among PMPU's, then the storage tank 
shall belong to that PMPU located on the same plant site as the storage 
tank that has the greatest annual volume input into or output from the 
storage tank (i.e., said PMPU has the predominant use of the storage 
tank).
    (3) If predominant use cannot be determined for a storage tank that 
is shared among PMPU's and if one of those PMPU's is subject to this 
subpart, the storage tank shall belong to said PMPU.
    (4) If the predominant use of a storage tank varies from year to 
year, then predominant use shall be determined based on the utilization 
that occurred during the year preceding September 21, 1998 for existing 
affected sources. For new affected sources, predominant use will be 
based on the first year after initial startup. The determination of 
predominant use shall be reported in the Notification of Compliance 
Status required by Sec. 63.1260(f). If the predominant use changes, the 
redetermination of predominant use shall be reported in the next 
Periodic Report.
    (5) If the storage tank begins receiving material from (or sending 
material to) another PMPU; or ceases to receive material from (or send 
material to) a PMPU; or if the applicability of this subpart to a 
storage tank has been determined according to the provisions of 
paragraphs (e)(1) through (4) of this section and there is a significant 
change in the use of the storage tank that could reasonably change the 
predominant use, the owner or operator shall reevaluate the 
applicability of this subpart to the storage tank, and report such 
changes to EPA in the next Periodic report.
    (f) Compliance dates. The compliance dates for affected sources are 
as follows:
    (1) An owner or operator of an existing affected source must comply 
with the provisions of this subpart within 3 years after September 21, 
1998.
    (2) An owner or operator of a new or reconstructed affected source 
must comply with the provisions of this subpart on September 21, 1998 or 
upon startup, whichever is later.
    (3) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs (f)(1) and (2) of 
this section, a new source which commences construction or 
reconstruction after April 2, 1997 and before September 21, 1998 shall 
not be required to comply with such promulgated standard until 3 years 
after September 21, 1998 if:
    (i) The promulgated standard is more stringent than the proposed 
standard; and
    (ii) The owner or operator complies with the standard as proposed 
during the 3-year period immediately after September 21, 1998.

[[Page 14]]

    (4) Pursuant to section 112(i)(3)(B) of the Act, an owner or 
operator may request an extension allowing the existing source up to 1 
additional year to comply with section 112(d) standards.
    (i) For purposes of this subpart, a request for an extension shall 
be submitted no later than 120 days prior to the compliance dates 
specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section, except as 
provided in paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section. The dates specified in 
Sec. 63.6(i) for submittal of requests for extensions shall not apply to 
sources subject to this subpart.
    (ii) An owner or operator may submit a compliance extension request 
after the date specified in paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section provided 
the need for the compliance extension arose after that date and before 
the otherwise applicable compliance date, and the need arose due to 
circumstances beyond reasonable control of the owner or operator. This 
request shall include the data described in Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i)(A), (B), 
(C), and (D).
    (g) Applicability of this subpart except during periods of startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction. (1) Each provision set forth in this subpart 
shall apply at all times except that emission limitations shall not 
apply during periods of: startup; shutdown; and malfunction, if the 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction precludes the ability of a particular 
emission point of an affected source to comply with one or more specific 
emission limitations to which it is subject and the owner or operator 
follows the provisions for periods of startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction, as specified in Secs. 63.1259(a)(3) and 63.1260(i). 
Startup, shutdown, and malfunction are defined in Sec. 63.1251.
    (2) The provisions set forth in Sec. 63.1255 of this subpart shall 
apply at all times except during periods of nonoperation of the PMPU (or 
specific portion thereof) in which the lines are drained and 
depressurized resulting in the cessation of the emissions to which 
Sec. 63.1255 of this subpart applies.
    (3) The owner or operator shall not shut down items of equipment 
that are required or utilized for compliance with the emissions 
limitations of this subpart during times when emissions (or, where 
applicable, wastewater streams or residuals) are being routed to such 
items of equipment, if the shutdown would contravene emissions 
limitations of this subpart applicable to such items of equipment. This 
paragraph does not apply if the item of equipment is malfunctioning, or 
if the owner or operator must shut down the equipment to avoid damage 
due to a malfunction of the PMPU or portion thereof.
    (4) During startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions when the emissions 
limitations of this subpart do not apply pursuant to paragraphs (g)(1) 
through (3) of this section, the owner or operator shall implement, to 
the extent reasonably available, measures to prevent or minimize excess 
emissions to the extent practical. For purposes of this paragraph, 
``excess emissions'' means emissions in excess of those that would have 
occurred if there were no startup, shutdown, or malfunction and the 
owner or operator complied with the relevant provisions of this subpart. 
The measures to be taken shall be identified in the applicable startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan, and may include, but are not limited to, 
air pollution control technologies, work practices, pollution 
prevention, monitoring, and/or changes in the manner of operation of the 
source. Back-up control devices are not required, but may be used if 
available.
    (h) Consistency with other regulations. (1) Consistency with other 
MACT standards. After the compliance dates specified in this section, an 
affected source subject to the provisions of this subpart that is also 
subject to the provisions of any other subpart of 40 CFR part 63 may 
elect, to the extent the subparts are consistent, which subpart under 
which to maintain records and report to EPA. The affected source shall 
identify in the Notification of Compliance Status report required by 
Sec. 63.1260(f) under which authority such records will be maintained.
    (2) Consistency with 40 CFR parts 264 and 265, subparts AA, BB, and/
or CC. After the compliance dates specified in this section, if any 
affected source subject to this subpart is also subject to monitoring, 
recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in 40 CFR part 264, subpart 
AA, BB, or CC, or is subject to

[[Page 15]]

monitoring and recordkeeping requirements in 40 CFR part 265, subpart 
AA, BB, or CC and the owner or operator complies with the periodic 
reporting requirements under 40 CFR part 264, subpart AA, BB, or CC that 
would apply to the device if the facility had final-permitted status, 
the owner or operator may elect to comply either with the monitoring, 
recordkeeping, and reporting requirements of this subpart, or with the 
monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in 40 CFR parts 
264 and/or 265, as described in this paragraph, which shall constitute 
compliance with the monitoring, record keeping, and reporting 
requirements of this subpart. If the owner or operator elects to comply 
with the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in 40 CFR 
parts 264 and/or 265, the owner or operator shall report all information 
required by Sec. 63.1260(g). The owner or operator shall identify in the 
Notification of Compliance Status required by Sec. 63.1260(f) the 
monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting authority under which the owner 
or operator will comply.
    (3) Consistency with 40 CFR 60.112b. After the compliance dates 
specified in this section, a storage tank controlled with a floating 
roof and in compliance with the provisions of 40 CFR 60.112b, subpart 
Kb, constitutes compliance with the provisions of this subpart GGG. A 
storage tank with a fixed roof, closed vent system, and control device 
in compliance with the provisions of 40 CFR 60.112b, subpart Kb must 
comply with the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting provisions of 
this subpart GGG. The owner or operator shall identify in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report required by Sec. 63.1260(f) 
which tanks are in compliance with subpart Kb.
    (4) Consistency with subpart I of this part. After the compliance 
dates specified in this section, for equipment at an affected source 
subject to this subpart that is also subject to subpart I of this part, 
an owner or operator may elect to comply with either the provisions of 
this subpart GGG or the provisions of subpart I of this part. The owner 
or operator shall identify in the Notification of Compliance Status 
report required by Sec. 63.1260(f) the provisions with which the owner 
elects to comply.
    (5) Consistency with other regulations for wastewater. After the 
compliance dates specified in this section, the owner or operator of an 
affected wastewater that is also subject to provisions in 40 CFR parts 
260 through 272 shall comply with the more stringent control 
requirements (e.g., waste management units, numerical treatment 
standards, etc.) and the more stringent testing, monitoring, recording, 
and recordkeeping requirements that overlap between the provisions of 
this subpart and the provisions of 40 CFR parts 260 through 272. The 
owner or operator shall keep a record of the information used to 
determine which requirements were the most stringent and shall submit 
this information if requested by the Administrator.
    (i) For the purposes of establishing whether a person is in 
violation of this subpart, nothing in this subpart shall preclude the 
use of any credible evidence or information relevant to whether a source 
would have been in compliance with applicable requirements.



Sec. 63.1251  Definitions.

    Terms used in this subpart are defined in the Act, in subpart A of 
this part, or in this section. If the same term is defined in subpart A 
of this part and in this section, it shall have the meaning given in 
this section for the purposes of this subpart.
    Active ingredient means any component that is intended to furnish 
pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, 
mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or to affect the 
structure or any function of the body of man or other animals. The term 
includes those components that may undergo chemical change in the 
manufacture of the pharmaceutical product and be present in the 
pharmaceutical product in a modified form intended to furnish the 
specified activity or effect.
    Actual HAP emissions means the HAP emitted to the atmosphere from 
either uncontrolled or controlled emission points.

[[Page 16]]

    Air pollution control device or Control device means equipment 
installed on a process vent, storage tank, wastewater treatment exhaust 
stack, or combination thereof that reduces the mass of HAP emitted to 
the air. The equipment may consist of an individual device or a series 
of devices. Examples include, but are not limited to, incinerators, 
carbon adsorption units, condensers, flares, boilers, process heaters, 
and gas absorbers. Process condensers are not considered air pollution 
control devices or control devices.
    Annual average concentration, as used in the wastewater provisions, 
means the annual average concentration as determined according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(1).
    Automated monitoring and recording system means any means of 
measuring values of monitored parameters and creating a hard copy or 
computer record of the measured values that does not require manual 
reading of monitoring instruments and manual transcription of data 
values. Automated monitoring and recording systems include, but are not 
limited to, computerized systems and strip charts.
    Batch emission episode means a discrete venting episode that may be 
associated with a single unit operation. A unit operation may have more 
than one batch emission episode. For example, a displacement of vapor 
resulting from the charging of a vessel with HAP will result in a 
discrete emission episode that will last through the duration of the 
charge and will have an average flowrate equal to the rate of the 
charge. If the vessel is then heated, there will also be another 
discrete emission episode resulting from the expulsion of expanded 
vapor. Both emission episodes may occur in the same vessel or unit 
operation. There are possibly other emission episodes that may occur 
from the vessel or other process equipment, depending on process 
operations.
    Batch operation or Batch process means a noncontinuous operation 
involving intermittent or discontinuous feed into equipment, and, in 
general, involves the emptying of the equipment after the batch 
operation ceases and prior to beginning a new operation. Addition of raw 
material and withdrawal of product do not occur simultaneously in a 
batch operation.
    Bench-scale batch process means a batch process (other than a 
research and development facility) that is capable of being located on a 
laboratory bench top. This bench-scale equipment will typically include 
reagent feed vessels, a small reactor and associated product separator, 
recovery and holding equipment. These processes are only capable of 
producing small quantities of product.
    Block means a time period that comprises a single batch.
    Cleaning operation means routine rinsing, washing, or boil-off of 
equipment in batch operations between batches.
    Closed biological treatment process means a tank or surface 
impoundment where biological treatment occurs and air emissions from the 
treatment process are routed to either a control device by means of a 
closed-vent system or by means of hard-piping. The tank or surface 
impoundment has a fixed roof, as defined in this section, or a floating 
flexible membrane cover that meets the requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(c).
    Closed-loop system means an enclosed system that returns process 
fluid to the process and is not vented to the atmosphere except through 
a closed-vent system.
    Closed-purge system means a system or combination of system and 
portable containers, to capture purged liquids. Containers must be 
covered or closed when not being filled or emptied.
    Closed-vent system means a system that is not open to the atmosphere 
and is composed of piping, ductwork, connections, and, if necessary, 
flow inducing devices that transport gas or vapor from an emission point 
to a control device.
    Combustion device means an individual unit of equipment, such as a 
flare, incinerator, process heater, or boiler, used for the combustion 
of HAP vapors.
    Component means any ingredient for use in the manufacture of a drug 
product, including those that may not appear in such drug product.
    Connector means flanged, screwed, or other joined fittings used to 
connect

[[Page 17]]

two pipe lines or a pipe line and a piece of equipment. A common 
connector is a flange. Joined fittings welded completely around the 
circumference of the interface are not considered connectors for the 
purpose of this regulation. For the purpose of reporting and 
recordkeeping, connector means joined fittings that are not 
inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-lined as described in 
Sec. 63.1255(b)(1)(vii) and Sec. 63.1255(f)(3).
    Construction means the onsite fabrication, erection, or installation 
of an affected source or a PMPU.
    Consumption means the quantity of HAP entering a process that is not 
used as reactant (makeup). If the same HAP component is generated in the 
process as well as added as makeup, consumption shall include the 
quantity generated in the process, as calculated assuming 100 
theoretical conversion. The quantity of material used as reactant is the 
theoretical amount needed assuming a 100 percent stoichiometric 
conversion. Makeup is the net amount of material that must be added to 
the process to replenish losses.
    Container, as used in the wastewater provisions, means any portable 
waste management unit that has a capacity greater than or equal to 0.1 
m3 in which a material is stored, transported, treated, or 
otherwise handled. Examples of containers are drums, barrels, tank 
trucks, barges, dumpsters, tank cars, dump trucks, and ships.
    Continuous process means a process where the inputs and outputs flow 
continuously throughout the duration of the process. Continuous 
processes are typically steady state.
    Continuous recorder means a data recording device that either 
records an instantaneous data value at least once every 15 minutes or 
records 15-minute or more frequent block average values.
    Continuous seal means a seal that forms a continuous closure that 
completely covers the space between the wall of the storage tank and the 
edge of the floating roof. A continuous seal may be a vapor-mounted, 
liquid-mounted, or metallic shoe seal.
    Control device, for purposes of this Sec. 63.1255, means any 
equipment used for recovering or oxidizing organic hazardous air 
pollutant vapors. Such equipment includes, but is not limited to, 
absorbers, carbon adsorbers, condensers, flares, boilers, and process 
heaters.
    Controlled HAP emissions means the quantity of HAP discharged to the 
atmosphere from an air pollution control device.
    Cover, as used in the wastewater provisions, means a device or 
system which is placed on or over a waste management unit containing 
wastewater or residuals so that the entire surface area is enclosed to 
minimize air emissions. A cover may have openings necessary for 
operation, inspection, and maintenance of the waste management unit such 
as access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells provided that each 
opening is closed when not in use. Examples of covers include a fixed 
roof installed on a wastewater tank, a lid installed on a container, and 
an air-supported enclosure installed over a waste management unit.
    Dedicated PMPU means a PMPU that is composed of equipment that is 
used to manufacture the same product for a continuous period of 6 months 
or greater. The PMPU includes any shared storage tank(s) that are 
determined to belong to the PMPU according to the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1250(e).
    Double block and bleed system means two block valves connected in 
series with a bleed valve or line that can vent the line between the two 
block valves.
    Duct work means a conveyance system such as those commonly used for 
heating and ventilation systems. It is often made of sheet metal and 
often has sections connected by screws or crimping. Hard-piping is not 
ductwork.
    Enhanced biological treatment system or enhanced biological 
treatment process means an aerated, thoroughly mixed treatment unit(s) 
that contains biomass suspended in water followed by a clarifier that 
removes biomass from the treated water and recycles recovered biomass to 
the aeration unit. The mixed liquor volatile suspended solids (biomass) 
is greater than 1 kilogram per cubic meter throughout each aeration 
unit. The biomass is suspended and aerated in the water of the aeration 
unit(s) by either submerged air flow or mechanical agitation. A 
thoroughly mixed treatment unit is a unit

[[Page 18]]

that is designed and operated to approach or achieve uniform biomass 
distribution and organic compound concentration throughout the aeration 
unit by quickly dispersing the recycled biomass and the wastewater 
entering the unit.
    Equipment, for purposes of Sec. 63.1255, means each pump, 
compressor, agitator, pressure relief device, sampling connection 
system, open-ended valve or line, valve, connector, and instrumentation 
system in organic hazardous air pollutant service; and any control 
devices or closed-vent systems required by this subpart.
    Excipient means any substance other than the active drug or product 
which have been appropriately evaluated for safety and are included in a 
drug delivery system to either aid the processing of the drug delivery 
system during its manufacture; protect, support or enhance stability, 
bioavailability, or patient acceptability; assist in product 
identification; or enhance any other attribute of the overall safety and 
effectiveness of the drug delivery system during storage or use.
    External floating roof means a pontoon-type or double-deck type 
cover that rests on the liquid surface in a storage tank or waste 
management unit with no fixed roof.
    Fill or filling means the introduction of material into a storage 
tank or the introduction of a wastewater stream or residual into a waste 
management unit, but not necessarily to complete capacity.
    First attempt at repair means to take action for the purpose of 
stopping or reducing leakage of organic material to the atmosphere.
    Fixed roof means a cover that is mounted on a waste management unit 
or storage tank in a stationary manner and that does not move with 
fluctuations in liquid level.
    Floating roof means a cover consisting of a double deck, pontoon 
single deck, internal floating cover or covered floating roof, which 
rests upon and is supported by the liquid being contained, and is 
equipped with a closure seal or seals to close the space between the 
roof edge and waste management unit or storage tank wall.
    Flow indicator means a device which indicates whether gas flow is, 
or whether the valve position would allow gas flow to be, present in a 
line.
    Formulation means the process of mixing, blending, or diluting one 
or more active or inert ingredients with one or more active or inert 
ingredients, without an intended chemical reaction, to obtain a 
pharmaceutical dosage form. Formulation operations include mixing, 
compounding, blending, and tablet coating.
    Group of processes means all of the equipment associated with 
processes in a building, processing area, or facility-wide. For a 
dedicated process, a group of processes may consist of a single process.
    Halogen atoms mean atoms of chlorine or fluorine.
    Halogenated compounds means organic HAP compounds that contain 
halogen atoms.
    Halogenated vent stream or Halogenated stream means a process, 
storage tank, or waste management unit vent determined to have a 
concentration of halogenated compounds of greater than 20 ppmv, as 
determined through process knowledge, test results using Method 18 of 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, or test results using any other test method 
that has been validated according to the procedures in Method 301 of 
appendix A of this part.
    Hard-piping means piping or tubing that is manufactured and properly 
installed using good engineering judgment and standards, such as ANSI 
B31-3.
    Hydrogen halides and halogens means hydrogen chloride (HCl), 
chlorine (Cl2), and hydrogen fluoride (HF).
    In gas/vapor service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
hazardous air pollutant service contains a gas or vapor at operating 
conditions.
    In heavy liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
hazardous air pollutant service is not in gas/vapor service or in light 
liquid service.
    In light liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
hazardous air pollutant service contains a liquid that meets the 
following conditions:

[[Page 19]]

    (1) The vapor pressure of one or more of the organic compounds is 
greater than 0.3 kilopascals at 20 deg.C;
    (2) The total concentration of the pure organic compounds 
constituents having a vapor pressure greater than 0.3 kilopascals at 
20 deg.C is equal to or greater than 20 percent by weight of the total 
process stream; and
    (3) The fluid is a liquid at operating conditions. (Note: Vapor 
pressures may be determined by the methods described in 40 CFR 
60.485(e)(1).)
    In liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
hazardous air pollutant service is not in gas/vapor service.
    In organic hazardous air pollutant or in organic HAP service means 
that a piece of equipment either contains or contacts a fluid (liquid or 
gas) that is at least 5 percent by weight of total organic HAP's as 
determined according to the provisions of Sec. 63.180(d). The provisions 
of Sec. 63.180(d) also specify how to determine that a piece of 
equipment is not in organic HAP service.
    In vacuum service means that equipment is operating at an internal 
pressure which is at least 5 kilopascals below ambient pressure.
    In-situ sampling systems means nonextractive samplers or in-line 
samplers.
    Individual drain system means the stationary system used to convey 
wastewater streams or residuals to a waste management unit. The term 
includes hard piping; all process drains and junction boxes; and 
associated sewer lines, other junction boxes, manholes, sumps, and lift 
stations conveying wastewater streams or residuals. A segregated 
stormwater sewer system, which is a drain and collection system designed 
and operated for the sole purpose of collecting rainfall-runoff at a 
facility, and which is segregated from all other individual drain 
systems, is excluded from this definition.
    Initial startup means the first time a new or reconstructed source 
begins production. Initial startup does not include operation solely for 
testing equipment. Initial startup does not include subsequent start ups 
(as defined in this section) of processes following malfunctions or 
process shutdowns.
    Internal floating roof means a cover that rests or floats on the 
liquid surface (but not necessarily in complete contact with it) inside 
a storage tank or waste management unit that has a permanently affixed 
roof.
    Instrumentation system means a group of equipment components used to 
condition and convey a sample of the process fluid to analyzers and 
instruments for the purpose of determining process operating conditions 
(e.g., composition, pressure, flow, etc.). Valves and connectors are the 
predominant type of equipment used in instrumentation systems; however, 
other types of equipment may also be included in these systems. Only 
valves nominally 0.5 inches and smaller, and connectors nominally 0.75 
inches and smaller in diameter are considered instrumentation systems 
for the purposes of this subpart. Valves greater than nominally 0.5 
inches and connectors greater than nominally 0.75 inches associated with 
instrumentation systems are not considered part of instrumentation 
systems and must be monitored individually.
    Junction box means a manhole or access point to a wastewater sewer 
system line or a lift station.
    Large control device means a control device that controls process 
vents with total emissions of greater than or equal to 10 tons of HAP 
per year, before control.
    Liquid-mounted seal means a foam- or liquid-filled seal mounted in 
contact with the liquid between the wall of the storage tank or waste 
management unit and the floating roof. The seal is mounted continuously 
around the tank or unit.
    Liquids dripping means any visible leakage from the seal including 
dripping, spraying, misting, clouding, and ice formation. Indications of 
liquid dripping include puddling or new stains that are indicative of an 
existing evaporated drip.
    Malfunction means any sudden, infrequent, and not reasonably 
preventable failure of air pollution control equipment, emissions 
monitoring equipment, process equipment, or a process to operate in a 
normal or usual manner. Failures that are caused all or in

[[Page 20]]

part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions.
    Maximum true vapor pressure means the equilibrium partial pressure 
exerted by the total organic HAP in the stored or transferred liquid at 
the temperature equal to the highest calendar-month average of the 
liquid storage or transferred temperature for liquids stored or 
transferred above or below the ambient temperature or at the local 
maximum monthly average temperature as reported by the National Weather 
Service for liquids stored or transferred at the ambient temperature, as 
determined:
    (1) In accordance with methods described in Chapter 19.2 of the 
American Petroleum Institute's Manual of Petroleum Measurement 
Standards, Evaporative Loss From Floating-Roof Tanks (incorporated by 
reference as specified in Sec. 63.14); or
    (2) As obtained from standard reference texts; or
    (3) As determined by the American Society for Testing and Materials 
Method D2879-97, Test Method for Vapor Pressure-Temperature Relationship 
and Initial Decomposition Temperature of Liquids by Isoteniscope 
(incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 63.14); or
    (4) Any other method approved by the Administrator.
    Metallic shoe seal or mechanical shoe seal means metal sheets that 
are held vertically against the wall of the storage tank by springs, 
weighted levers, or other mechanisms and connected to the floating roof 
by braces or other means. A flexible coated fabric (envelope) spans the 
annular space between the metal sheet and the floating roof.
    Nondedicated formulation operations means equipment used to 
formulate numerous products.
    Nondedicated recovery device(s) means a recovery device that 
receives material from more than one PMPU.
    Nonrepairable means that it is technically infeasible to repair a 
piece of equipment from which a leak has been detected without a process 
shutdown.
    Open biological treatment process means a biological treatment 
process that is not a closed biological treatment process as defined in 
this section.
    Open-ended valve or line means any valve, except pressure relief 
valves, having one side of the valve seat in contact with process fluid 
and one side open to atmosphere, either directly or through open piping.
    Operating scenario for the purposes of reporting and recordkeeping, 
means any specific operation of a PMPU and includes for each process:
    (1) A description of the process and the type of process equipment 
used;
    (2) An identification of related process vents and their associated 
emissions episodes and durations, wastewater PODs, and storage tanks;
    (3) The applicable control requirements of this subpart, including 
the level of required control;
    (4) The control or treatment devices used, as applicable, including 
a description of operating and/or testing conditions for any associated 
control device;
    (5) The process vents, wastewater PODs, and storage tanks (including 
those from other processes) that are simultaneously routed to the 
control or treatment device(s);
    (6) The applicable monitoring requirements of this subpart and any 
parametric level that assures compliance for all emissions routed to the 
control or treatment device;
    (7) Calculations and engineering analyses required to demonstrate 
compliance; and
    (8) A verification that the operating conditions for any associated 
control or treatment device have not been exceeded and that any required 
calculations and engineering analyses have been performed. For reporting 
purposes, a change to any of these elements not previously reported, 
except for paragraph (5) of this definition, shall constitute a new 
operating scenario.
    Partially soluble HAP means a HAP listed in Table 2 of this subpart.
    Pharmaceutical manufacturing operations means the facility-wide 
collection of PMPU's and any other equipment such as heat exchanger 
systems, or cooling towers that are not associated with an individual 
PMPU, but that are located at a facility for the purpose of 
manufacturing pharmaceutical products and are under common control.

[[Page 21]]

    Pharmaceutical manufacturing process unit (PMPU) means the process, 
as defined in this subpart, and any associated storage tanks, equipment 
identified in Sec. 63.1252(f), and components such as pumps, 
compressors, agitators, pressure relief devices, sampling connection 
systems, open-ended valves or lines, valves, connectors, and 
instrumentation systems that are used in the manufacturing of a 
pharmaceutical product.
    Pharmaceutical product means:
    (1) Any material described by the standard industrial classification 
(SIC) code 2833 or 2834;
    (2) Any material whose manufacturing process is described by north 
american industrial classification system (NAICS) code 325411 or 325412;
    (3) A finished dosage form of a drug, for example, a tablet, 
capsule, solution, etc., that contains an active ingredient generally, 
but not necessarily, in association with inactive ingredients; or
    (4) Any component whose intended primary use is to furnish 
pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, 
mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or to affect the 
structure or any function of the body of man or other animals (the term 
does not include excipients, but includes drug components such as raw 
starting materials or precursors that undergo chemical change or 
processing before they become active ingredients).
    Plant site means all contiguous or adjoining property that is under 
common control, including properties that are separated only by a road 
or other public right-of-way. Common control includes properties that 
are owned, leased, or operated by the same entity, parent entity, 
subsidiary, or any combination thereof.
    Point of determination (POD) means the point where a wastewater 
stream exits the process, storage tank, or last recovery device. If 
soluble and/or partially soluble HAP compounds are not recovered from 
water before discharge, the discharge point from the process equipment 
or storage tank is a POD. If water streams are routed to a recovery 
device, the discharge from the recovery device is a POD. There can be 
more than 1 POD per process or PMPU.
    Pressure release means the emission of materials resulting from the 
system pressure being greater than the set pressure of the pressure 
relief device. This release can be one release or a series of releases 
over a short time period due to a malfunction in the process.
    Pressure relief device or valve means a safety device used to 
prevent operating pressures from exceeding the maximum allowable working 
pressure of the process equipment. A common pressure relief device is a 
spring-loaded pressure relief valve. Devices that are actuated either by 
a pressure of less than or equal to 2.5 psig or by a vacuum are not 
pressure relief devices.
    Primary use means the single largest use of a material.
    Process means all equipment which collectively function to produce a 
pharmaceutical product. A process may consist of one or more unit 
operations. For the purposes of this subpart, process includes all or a 
combination of reaction, recovery, separation, purification, or other 
activity, operation, manufacture, or treatment which are used to produce 
a pharmaceutical product. Cleaning operations conducted are considered 
part of the process. The holding of the pharmaceutical product in tanks 
or other holding equipment for more than 30 consecutive days, or 
transfer of the pharmaceutical product to containers for shipment, marks 
the end of a process, and the tanks are considered part of the PMPU that 
produced the stored material. When material from one unit operation is 
used as the feedstock for the production of two or more different 
pharmaceutical products, the unit operation is considered the endpoint 
of the process that produced the material, and the unit operations into 
which the material is routed mark the beginning of the other processes. 
Nondedicated recovery devices located within a contiguous area within 
the affected source are considered single processes. Nondedicated 
formulation operations occurring within a contiguous area are considered 
a single process that is used to formulate numerous materials and/or 
products. Quality Assurance and Quality Control laboratories are not 
considered part of any process.

[[Page 22]]

    Process condenser means a condenser whose primary purpose is to 
recover material as an integral part of a process. The condenser must 
support a vapor-to-liquid phase change for periods of source equipment 
operation that are at or above the boiling or bubble point of 
substance(s) at the liquid surface. Examples of process condensers 
include distillation condensers, reflux condensers, and condensers used 
in stripping or flashing operations. In a series of condensers, all 
condensers up to and including the first condenser with an exit gas 
temperature below the boiling or bubble point of the substance(s) at the 
liquid surface are considered to be process condensers. All condensers 
in line prior to a vacuum source are included in this definition.
    Process shutdown means a work practice or operational procedure that 
stops production from a process or part of a process during which it is 
technically feasible to clear process material from a process or part of 
a process consistent with safety constraints and during which repairs 
can be effected. An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure 
that stops production from a process or part of a process for less than 
24 hours is not a process shutdown. An unscheduled work practice or 
operational procedure that would stop production from a process or part 
of a process for a shorter period of time than would be required to 
clear the process or part of the process of materials and start up the 
process, and would result in greater emissions than delay of repair of 
leaking components until the next scheduled process shutdown, is not a 
process shutdown. The use of spare equipment and technically feasible 
bypassing of equipment without stopping production are not process 
shutdowns.
    Process tank means a tank that is used to collect material 
discharged from a feedstock storage tank or unit operation within the 
process and transfer this material to another unit operation within the 
process or to a product storage tank. Surge control vessels and bottoms 
receivers that fit these conditions are considered process tanks.
    Process vent means a vent from a unit operation or vents from 
multiple unit operations within a process that are manifolded together 
into a common header, through which a HAP-containing gas stream is, or 
has the potential to be, released to the atmosphere. Examples of process 
vents include, but are not limited to, vents on condensers used for 
product recovery, bottom receivers, surge control vessels, reactors, 
filters, centrifuges, and process tanks. Emission streams that are 
undiluted and uncontrolled containing less than 50 ppmv HAP, as 
determined through process knowledge that no HAP are present in the 
emission stream or using an engineering assessment as discussed in 
Sec. 63.1257(d)(2)(ii), test data using Methods 18 of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, or any other test method that has been validated according 
to the procedures in Method 301 of appendix A of this part, are not 
considered process vents. Process vents do not include vents on storage 
tanks regulated under Sec. 63.1253, vents on wastewater emission sources 
regulated under Sec. 63.1256, or pieces of equipment regulated under 
Sec. 63.1255.
    Production-indexed HAP consumption factor is the result of dividing 
the annual consumption of total HAP by the annual production rate, per 
process.
    Production-indexed volatile organic compound (VOC) consumption 
factor is the result of dividing the annual consumption of total VOC by 
the annual production rate, per process.
    Publicly owned treatment works (POTW) means any devices and systems 
used in the storage, treatment, recycling, and reclamation of municipal 
sewage or industrial wastes of a liquid nature as defined in section 
212(2)(A) of the Clean Water Act, as amended [33 U.S.C. 
Sec. 1292(2)(A)]. A POTW includes the treatment works, intercepting 
sewers, outfall sewers, sewage collection systems, pumping, power, and 
other equipment. The POTW is defined at 40 CFR 403.3(o).
    Reactor means a device or vessel in which one or more chemicals or 
reactants, other than air, are combined or decomposed in such a way that 
their molecular structures are altered and one or more new organic 
compounds are formed.
    Recovery device, as used in the wastewater provisions, means an 
individual

[[Page 23]]

unit of equipment used for the purpose of recovering chemicals for fuel 
value (i.e., net positive heating value), use, reuse, or for sale for 
fuel value, use or reuse. Examples of equipment that may be recovery 
devices include organic removal devices such as decanters, strippers, or 
thin-film evaporation units. To be a recovery device, a decanter and any 
other equipment based on the operating principle of gravity separation 
must receive only two-phase liquid streams.
    Repaired means that equipment is adjusted, or otherwise altered, to 
eliminate a leak as defined in the applicable sections of Sec. 63.1255.
    Research and development facility means any stationary source whose 
primary purpose is to conduct research and development into new 
processes and products, where such source is operated under the close 
supervision of technically trained personnel, and is not engaged in the 
manufacture of products for commercial sale in commerce, except in a de 
minimis manner.
    Residual means any HAP-containing liquid or solid material that is 
removed from a wastewater stream by a waste management unit or treatment 
process that does not destroy organics (nondestructive unit). Examples 
of residuals from nondestructive waste management units are: the organic 
layer and bottom residue removed by a decanter or organic-water 
separator and the overheads from a steam stripper or air stripper. 
Examples of materials which are not residuals are: silt; mud; leaves; 
bottoms from a steam stripper or air stripper; and sludges, ash, or 
other materials removed from wastewater being treated by destructive 
devices such as biological treatment units and incinerators.
    Safety device means a closure device such as a pressure relief 
valve, frangible disc, fusible plug, or any other type of device which 
functions exclusively to prevent physical damage or permanent 
deformation to a unit or its air emission control equipment by venting 
gases or vapors directly to the atmosphere during unsafe conditions 
resulting from an unplanned, accidental, or emergency event. For the 
purposes of this subpart, a safety device is not used for routine 
venting of gases or vapors from the vapor headspace underneath a cover 
such as during filling of the unit or to adjust the pressure in this 
vapor headspace in response to normal daily diurnal ambient temperature 
fluctuations. A safety device is designed to remain in a closed position 
during normal operations and open only when the internal pressure, or 
another relevant parameter, exceeds the device threshold setting 
applicable to the air emission control equipment as determined by the 
owner or operator based on manufacturer recommendations, applicable 
regulations, fire protection and prevention codes, standard engineering 
codes and practices, or other requirements for the safe handling of 
flammable, combustible, explosive, reactive, or hazardous materials.
    Sampling connection system means an assembly of equipment within a 
process unit used during periods of representative operation to take 
samples of the process fluid. Equipment used to take nonroutine grab 
samples is not considered a sampling connection system.
    Sensor means a device that measures a physical quantity or the 
change in a physical quantity, such as temperature, pressure, flow rate, 
pH, or liquid level.
    Set pressure means the pressure at which a properly operating 
pressure relief device begins to open to relieve atypical process system 
operating pressure.
    Sewer line means a lateral, trunk line, branch line, or other 
conduit including, but not limited to, grates, trenches, etc., used to 
convey wastewater streams or residuals to a downstream waste management 
unit.
    Shutdown means the cessation of operation of a PMPU or an individual 
piece of equipment required or used to comply with this part or for 
emptying and degassing storage tanks. Shutdown occurs for purposes 
including but not limited to: periodic maintenance, replacement of 
equipment, or repair. Shutdown does not apply to routine batch 
operations or the rinsing or washing of equipment in batch operations 
between batches.
    Single-seal system means a floating roof having one continuous seal 
that completely covers the space between

[[Page 24]]

the wall of the storage tank and the edge of the floating roof. This 
seal may be a vapor-mounted, liquid-mounted, or metallic shoe seal.
    Small control device means a control device that controls process 
vents with total emissions of less than 10 tons of HAP per year, before 
control.
    Soluble HAP means a HAP listed in Table 3 of this subpart.
    Startup means the first time a new or reconstructed source begins 
production, or, for new equipment added, including equipment used to 
comply with this subpart, the first time the equipment is put into 
operation, or for the introduction of a new product/process, the first 
time the product or process is run in equipment. As used in 
Sec. 63.1255, startup means the setting in operation of a piece of 
equipment or a control device that is subject to this subpart.
    Storage tank means a tank or other vessel that is used to store 
organic liquids that contain one or more HAP as feedstocks or products 
of a PMPU. The following are not considered storage tanks for the 
purposes of this subpart:
    (1) Vessels permanently attached to motor vehicles such as trucks, 
railcars, barges, or ships;
    (2) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 
kilopascals and without emissions to the atmosphere;
    (3) Vessels storing organic liquids that contain HAP only as 
impurities;
    (4) Wastewater storage tanks; and
    (5) Process tanks.
    Surface impoundment means a waste management unit which is a natural 
topographic depression, manmade excavation, or diked area formed 
primarily of earthen materials (although it may be lined with manmade 
materials), which is designed to hold an accumulation of liquid wastes 
or waste containing free liquids. A surface impoundment is used for the 
purpose of treating, storing, or disposing of wastewater or residuals, 
and is not an injection well. Examples of surface impoundments are 
equalization, settling, and aeration pits, ponds, and lagoons.
    Total organic compounds (TOC) means those compounds measured 
according to the procedures of Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    Treatment process means a specific technique that removes or 
destroys the organics in a wastewater or residual stream such as a steam 
stripping unit, thin-film evaporation unit, waste incinerator, 
biological treatment unit, or any other process applied to wastewater 
streams or residuals to comply with Sec. 63.1256. Most treatment 
processes are conducted in tanks. Treatment processes are a subset of 
waste management units.
    Uncontrolled HAP emissions means a gas stream containing HAP which 
has exited the process (or process condenser, if any), but which has not 
yet been introduced into an air pollution control device to reduce the 
mass of HAP in the stream. If the process vent is not routed to an air 
pollution control device, uncontrolled emissions are those HAP emissions 
released to the atmosphere.
    Unit operation means those processing steps that occur within 
distinct equipment that are used, among other things, to prepare 
reactants, facilitate reactions, separate and purify products, and 
recycle materials. Equipment used for these purposes includes but is not 
limited to reactors, distillation columns, extraction columns, 
absorbers, decanters, dryers, condensers, and filtration equipment.
    Vapor-mounted seal means a continuous seal that completely covers 
the annular space between the wall, the storage tank or waste management 
unit and the edge of the floating roof and is mounted such that there is 
a vapor space between the stored liquid and the bottom of the seal.
    Volatile organic compounds (VOC) means those materials defined in 40 
CFR 51.100.
    Waste management unit means the equipment, structure(s),and or 
devices used to convey, store, treat, or dispose of wastewater streams 
or residuals. Examples of waste management units include wastewater 
tanks, air flotation units, surface impoundments, containers, oil-water 
or organic-water separators, individual drain systems, biological 
wastewater treatment units, waste incinerators, and organic removal 
devices such as steam and air stripper units, and thin film evaporation 
units. If such equipment is used

[[Page 25]]

for recovery then it is part of a pharmaceutical process and is not a 
waste management unit.
    Wastewater means any portion of an individual wastewater stream or 
any aggregation of wastewater streams.
    Wastewater stream means water that is discarded from a PMPU through 
a single POD, that contains an annual average concentration of partially 
soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds of at least 5 parts per million by 
weight and a load of at least 0.05 kg/yr, and that is not exempted by 
the provisions of Sec. 63.1256(a)(3). For the purposes of this subpart, 
noncontact cooling water is not considered a wastewater stream. 
Wastewater streams are generated by both process operations and 
maintenance activities.
    Wastewater tank means a stationary waste management unit that is 
designed to contain an accumulation of wastewater or residuals and is 
constructed primarily of nonearthen materials (e.g., wood, concrete, 
steel, plastic) which provide structural support. Wastewater tanks used 
for flow equalization are included in this definition.
    Water seal controls means a seal pot, p-leg trap, or other type of 
trap filled with water (e.g., flooded sewers that maintain water levels 
adequate to prevent air flow through the system) that creates a water 
barrier between the sewer line and the atmosphere. The water level of 
the seal must be maintained in the vertical leg of a drain in order to 
be considered a water seal.



Sec. 63.1252  Standards: General.

    Each owner or operator of any affected source subject to the 
provisions of this subpart shall control HAP emissions to the level 
specified in this section on and after the compliance dates specified in 
Sec. 63.1250(f). Compliance with the emission limits may be demonstrated 
initially through the provisions of Sec. 63.1257 (Test methods and 
compliance procedures) and continuously through the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1258 (Monitoring requirements).
    (a) Opening of a safety device. Opening of a safety device, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1251, is allowed at any time conditions require it to 
do so to avoid unsafe conditions.
    (b) Closed-vent systems. The owner or operator of a closed-vent 
system that contains bypass lines that could divert a vent stream away 
from a control device used to comply with the requirements in 
Secs. 63.1253, 63.1254, and 63.1256 shall comply with the requirements 
of Table 4 to this subpart and paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section. 
Equipment such as low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, 
open-ended valves or lines, rupture disks and pressure relief valves 
needed for safety purposes are not subject to this paragraph.
    (1) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a flow indicator that 
determines whether vent stream flow is present at least once every 15 
minutes. Records shall be maintained as specified in 
Sec. 63.1259(i)(6)(i). The flow indicator shall be installed at the 
entrance to any bypass line that could divert the vent stream away from 
the control device to the atmosphere; or
    (2) Secure the bypass line valve in the closed position with a car 
seal or lock and key type configuration. A visual inspection of the seal 
or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every month to 
ensure that the valve is maintained in the closed position and the vent 
stream is not diverted through the bypass line. Records shall be 
maintained as specified in Sec. 63.1259(i)(6)(ii).
    (c) Heat exchange systems. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section, owners and operators of affected sources shall comply with 
the requirements in paragraph (c)(1) of this section for heat exchange 
systems that cool process equipment or materials used in pharmaceutical 
manufacturing operations.
    (1) The heat exchange system shall be treated according to the 
provisions of Sec. 63.104, except that the monitoring frequency shall be 
no less than quarterly.
    (2) For identifying leaking equipment, the owner or operator of heat 
exchange systems on equipment which meet current good manufacturing 
practice (CGMP) requirements of 21 CFR part 211 may elect to use the 
physical integrity of the reactor as the surrogate indicator of heat 
exchange system leaks around the reactor.
    (d) Emissions averaging provisions. Except as specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1)

[[Page 26]]

through (5) of this section, owners or operators of storage tanks or 
processes subject to the provisions of Secs. 63.1253 and 63.1254 may 
choose to comply by using emissions averaging requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1257(g) or (h) for any storage tank or process.
    (1) A State may prohibit averaging of HAP emissions and require the 
owner or operator of an existing source to comply with the provisions in 
Secs. 63.1253 and 63.1254.
    (2) Only emission sources subject to the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1253(b)(1) and (c)(1) or Sec. 63.1254(a)(2), (a)(3)(ii)(A) or 
(a)(3)(iii) may be included in any averaging group.
    (3) Processes which have been permanently shutdown or storage tanks 
permanently taken out of HAP service may not be included in any 
averaging group.
    (4) Processes and storage tanks already controlled on or before 
November 15, 1990 may not be included in an emissions averaging group, 
except where the level of control is increased after November 15, 1990. 
In these cases, the uncontrolled emissions shall be the controlled 
emissions as calculated on November 15, 1990 for the purpose of 
determining the uncontrolled emissions as specified in Sec. 63.1257(g) 
and (h).
    (5) Emission points controlled to comply with a State or Federal 
rule other than this subpart may not be included in an emission 
averaging group, unless the level of control has been increased after 
November 15, 1990 above what is required by the other State or Federal 
rule. Only the control above what is required by the other State or 
Federal rule will be credited. However, if an emission point has been 
used to generate emissions averaging credit in an approved emissions 
average, and the point is subsequently made subject to a State or 
Federal rule other than this subpart, the point can continue to generate 
emissions averaging credit for the purpose of complying with the 
previously approved average.
    (6) Not more than 20 processes subject to Sec. 63.1254(a)(2)(i), 20 
storage tanks subject to Sec. 63.1253(b)(1), and 20 storage tanks 
subject to Sec. 63.1253(c)(1)(i) at an affected source may be included 
in an emissions averaging group.
    (7) Compliance with the emissions standards in Sec. 63.1253 shall be 
satisfied when the annual percent reduction efficiency is greater than 
or equal to 90 percent for those tanks meeting the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1253(a)(1) and 95 percent for those tanks meeting the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1253(a)(2), as demonstrated using the test 
methods and compliance procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(g).
    (8) Compliance with the emissions standards in Sec. 63.1254(a)(2) 
shall be satisfied when the annual percent reduction efficiency is 
greater than or equal to 93 percent, as demonstrated using the test 
methods and compliance procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(h).
    (e) Pollution prevention alternative. Except as provided in 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, owners and operators may choose to 
meet the pollution prevention alternative requirement specified in 
either paragraph (e)(2) or (3) of this section for any PMPU, in lieu of 
the requirements specified in Secs. 63.1253, 63.1254, 63.1255, and 
63.1256. Compliance with paragraphs (e)(2) and (3) of this section shall 
be demonstrated through the procedures in Sec. 63.1257(f).
    (1) The HAP that are generated in the PMPU that are not part of the 
production-indexed consumption factor must be controlled according to 
the requirements of Secs. 63.1253, 63.1254, 63.1255, and 63.1256. The 
HAP that are generated as a result of combustion control of emissions 
must be controlled according to the requirements of paragraph (g) of 
this section.
    (2) The production-indexed HAP consumption factor (kg HAP consumed/
kg produced) shall be reduced by at least 75 percent from a 3 year 
average baseline established no earlier than the 1987 calendar year, or 
for the time period from startup of the process until the present in 
which the PMPU was operational and data are available, whichever is the 
lesser time period. If a time period less than 3 years is used to set 
the baseline, the data must represent at least 1 year's worth of data. 
For any reduction in the HAP factor achieved by reducing a HAP that is 
also a VOC, an equivalent reduction in the VOC factor is also required. 
For any reduction in the HAP factor that is achieved

[[Page 27]]

by reducing a HAP that is not a VOC, the VOC factor may not be 
increased.
    (3) Both requirements specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of 
this section are met.
    (i) The production-indexed HAP consumption factor (kg HAP consumed/
kg produced) shall be reduced by at least 50 percent from a 3-year 
average baseline established no earlier than the 1987 calendar year, or 
for the time period from startup of the process until the present in 
which the PMPU was operational and data are available, whichever is 
less. If a time period less than 3 years is used to set the baseline, 
the data must represent at least 1 year's worth of data. For any 
reduction in the HAP factor achieved by reducing a HAP that is also a 
VOC, an equivalent reduction in the VOC factor is also required. For any 
reduction in the HAP factor that is achieved by reducing a HAP that is 
not a VOC, the VOC factor may not be increased.
    (ii) The total PMPU HAP emissions shall be reduced by an amount, in 
kg/yr, that, when divided by the annual production rate, in kg/yr, and 
added to the reduction of the production-indexed HAP consumption factor, 
in kg/kg, yields a value of at least 75 percent of the average baseline 
HAP production-indexed consumption factor established according to 
paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section according to the equation provided 
in Sec. 63.1257(f)(2)(ii)(A). The total PMPU VOC emissions shall be 
reduced by an amount calculated according to the equation provided in 
Sec. 63.1257(f)(2)(ii)(B). The annual reduction in HAP and VOC air 
emissions must be due to the use of the following control devices:
    (A) Combustion control devices such as incinerators, flares or 
process heaters.
    (B) Control devices such as condensers and carbon adsorbers whose 
recovered product is destroyed or shipped offsite for destruction.
    (C) Any control device that does not ultimately allow for recycling 
of material back to the PMPU.
    (D) Any control device for which the owner or operator can 
demonstrate that the use of the device in controlling HAP emissions will 
have no effect on the production-indexed consumption factor for the 
PMPU.
    (f) Control requirements for certain liquid streams in open systems 
within a PMPU. (1) The owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions of Table 5 of this subpart, for each item of equipment 
meeting all the criteria specified in paragraphs (f)(2) through (4) and 
either paragraph (f)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (2) The item of equipment is of a type identified in Table 5 of this 
subpart;
    (3) The item of equipment is part of a PMPU, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1251;
    (4) The item of equipment is controlled less stringently than in 
Table 5 of this subpart and the item of equipment is not otherwise 
exempt from controls by the provisions of this subpart or subpart A of 
this part; and
    (5) The item of equipment:
    (i) Is a drain, drain hub, manhole, lift station, trench, pipe, or 
oil/water separator that conveys water with an annual average 
concentration greater than or equal to 1,300 parts per million by weight 
(ppmw) of partially soluble HAP compounds; or an annual average 
concentration greater than or equal to 5,200 ppmw of partially soluble 
and/or soluble HAP compounds. The annual average concentration shall be 
determined according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1257(e)(1)(ii).
    (ii) Is a tank that receives one or more streams that contain water 
with an annual average concentration greater than or equal to 1,300 ppmw 
of partially soluble HAP compounds, or greater than or equal to 5,200 
ppmw of total partially soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds. The owner 
or operator of the source shall determine the average concentration of 
the stream at the inlet to the tank and according to the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(1)(ii).
    (g) Control requirements for halogenated vent streams that are 
controlled by combustion devices. If a combustion device is used to 
comply with the provisions of Secs. 63.1253 (storage tanks), 63.1254 
(process vents), 63.1256(h) (wastewater vent streams) for a halogenated 
vent stream, then the vent stream shall be ducted to a halogen reduction 
device such as, but not limited to, a scrubber, before it is discharged

[[Page 28]]

to the atmosphere. The halogen reduction device must reduce emissions by 
the amounts specified in either paragraph (g)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) A halogen reduction device after the combustion control device 
must reduce overall emissions of hydrogen halides and halogens, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1251, by 95 percent or to a concentration less than 
or equal to 20 ppmv.
    (2) A halogen reduction device located before the combustion control 
device must reduce the halogen atom content of the vent stream to a 
concentration less than or equal to 20 ppmv.



Sec. 63.1253  Standards: Storage tanks.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, 
the owner or operator of a storage tank meeting the criteria of 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section is subject to the requirements of 
paragraph (b) of this section. Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and 
(e) of this section, the owner or operator of a storage tank meeting the 
criteria of paragraph (a)(2) of this section is subject to the 
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section. Compliance with the 
provisions of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section is demonstrated 
using the initial compliance procedures in Sec. 63.1257(c) and the 
monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1258.
    (1) A storage tank with a design capacity greater than or equal to 
38 m3 (10,000 gallons [gal]) but less than 75 m3 
(20,000 gal), and storing a liquid for which the maximum true vapor 
pressure of total HAP is greater than or equal to 13.1 kPa (1.9 psia).
    (2) A storage tank with a design capacity greater than or equal to 
75 m3 (20,000 gal) storing a liquid for which the maximum 
true vapor pressure of total HAP is greater than or equal to 13.1 kPa 
(1.9 psia).
    (b) The owner or operator of a storage tank shall equip the affected 
storage tank with either a fixed roof with internal floating roof, an 
external floating roof, an external floating roof converted to an 
internal floating roof, or a closed-vent system meeting the conditions 
of Sec. 63.1252(b) with a control device that meets any of the following 
conditions:
    (1) Reduces inlet emissions of total HAP by 90 percent by weight or 
greater;
    (2) Is an enclosed combustion device that provides a minimum 
residence time of 0.5 seconds at a minimum temperature of 760 deg. C;
    (3) Is a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (4) Is a control device specified in Sec. 63.1257(a)(4).
    (c) The owner or operator of a storage tank shall equip the affected 
storage tank with either a fixed roof with internal floating roof, an 
external floating roof, an external floating roof converted to an 
internal floating roof, or a closed-vent system meeting the conditions 
of Sec. 63.1252(b) with a control device that meets any of the following 
conditions:
    (1) Reduces inlet emissions of total HAP as specified in paragraph 
(c)(1) (i) or (ii) of this section:
    (i) By 95 percent by weight or greater; or (ii) If the owner or 
operator can demonstrate that a control device installed on a storage 
tank on or before April 2, 1997 is designed to reduce inlet emissions of 
total HAP by greater than or equal to 90 percent by weight but less than 
95 percent by weight, then the control device is required to be operated 
to reduce inlet emissions of total HAP by 90 percent or greater.
    (2) Is an enclosed combustion device that provides a minimum 
residence time of 0.5 seconds at a minimum temperature of 760 deg. C;
    (3) Is a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (4) Is a control device specified in Sec. 63.1257(a)(4).
    (d) As an alternative standard, the owner or operator of an existing 
or new affected source may comply with the storage tank standards by 
routing storage tank vents to a control device achieving an outlet TOC 
concentration, as calibrated on methane or the predominant HAP, of 20 
ppmv or less, and an outlet concentration of hydrogen halides and 
halogens of 20 ppmv or less. Compliance with the outlet concentrations 
shall be determined by the initial compliance procedures of 
Sec. 63.1257(c)(4) and the continuous emission monitoring requirements 
of Sec. 63.1258(b)(5).

[[Page 29]]

    (e) Planned routine maintenance. The specifications and requirements 
in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section for control devices do not 
apply during periods of planned routine maintenance. Periods of planned 
routine maintenance of the control devices, during which the control 
device does not meet the specifications of paragraphs (b) through (d) of 
this section, as applicable, shall not exceed 240 hours per year.



Sec. 63.1254  Standards: Process vents.

    (a) Existing sources. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this 
section, the owner or operator of an existing affected source must 
control the collection of all gas streams originating from processes 
subject to this standard so as to comply with the requirements in 
paragraph (a)(1) or the requirements of paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of 
this section. If any vent within a process meets the criteria of 
paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section, the owner or operator must comply 
with the provisions in paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) for that process. 
The requirements of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this section apply to 
all process vents within a process, as a group, and do not apply to 
individual vents. An owner or operator may switch from compliance with 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section to compliance with paragraphs (a) (2) 
and (3) of this section only after at least 1 year of operation in 
compliance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section. An owner or operator 
may switch from compliance with paragraphs (a) (2) and (3) of this 
section to compliance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section at any time. 
Notification of such a change in the compliance method shall be reported 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1260(h) of this subpart. 
Compliance with the required emission limits or reductions in paragraphs 
(a) (1) through (3) of this section may be demonstrated using the 
initial compliance procedures described in Sec. 63.1257(d) and the 
monitoring requirements described in Sec. 63.1258.
    (1) Except for processes with a vent that meets the conditions in 
paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section, actual HAP emissions shall not 
exceed 900 kilograms (kg) per year [2,000 pounds per year] from the sum 
of all process vents within a process.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, the 
owner or operator is limited to 7 processes in any 365-day period that 
can be selected to comply with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator may exclude processes with less than 100 
lb/yr HAP, on an uncontrolled basis, from the 7-process limit described 
in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section.
    (2) Uncontrolled HAP emissions from the sum of all process vents 
within a process that do not meet the conditions in paragraph (a)(3)(i) 
of this section or are not controlled according to any of the 
requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i), (a)(2)(ii), (a)(2)(iii), or (c) of 
this section shall be reduced by 93 percent or greater by weight.
    (i) To outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv as TOC 
and less than or equal to 20 ppmv as hydrogen halides and halogens;
    (ii) By a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or 
(iii) By a control device specified in Sec. 63.1257(a)(4).
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(3)(iii) of this section, 
uncontrolled HAP emissions from each process vent that meets the 
conditions in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section shall be reduced as 
specified in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) Uncontrolled HAP emissions from a process vent shall be reduced 
as specified in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) if the vent meets either of the 
criteria described in paragraph (a)(3)(i) (A) or (B) of this section:
    (A) The flow-weighted average flowrate calculated using Equation 1 
of this subpart is less than or equal to the flowrate calculated using 
Equation 2 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.000

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.001

Where:


[[Page 30]]


FRa = flow-weighted average flowrate for the vent, scfm
Di = duration of each emission event, min
FRi = flowrate of each emission event, scfm
n = number of emission events
FR = flowrate, scfm
HL = annual uncontrolled HAP emissions, lb/yr, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1251

    (B) As an alternative to the criteria described in paragraph 
(a)(3)(i)(A) of this section, uncontrolled HAP emissions from a process 
vent shall be reduced or controlled as specified in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) 
of this section if the process vent meets the criteria specified in 
paragraphs (a)(3)(i)(B)(1) and (2) of this section or the criteria 
specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(i)(B)(1) and (3) of this section.
    (1) Uncontrolled HAP emissions from the process vent exceed 25 tons 
per year.
    (2) The flow-weighted average flowrate for the vent, as calculated 
in Equation 1 of this section, is less than or equal to 100 scfm.
    (3) The flow weighted average is greater than 100 scfm and less than 
or equal to the flowrate calculated using Equation 2 of this section.
    (ii) Uncontrolled HAP emissions shall be reduced:
    (A) By 98 percent by weight or greater; or
    (B) To outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv as TOC 
and less than or equal to 20 ppmv as hydrogen halides and halogens; or
    (C) By a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (D) By a control device specified in Sec. 63.1257(a)(4).
    (iii) If the owner or operator can demonstrate that a control 
device, installed on a process vent that meets the conditions of 
paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section on or before April 2, 1997, was 
designed to reduce uncontrolled HAP emissions of total HAP by greater 
than or equal to 93 percent by weight, but less than 98 percent by 
weight, then the control device is required to be operated to reduce 
inlet emissions of total HAP by 93 percent by weight or greater.
    (b) New sources. Uncontrolled HAP emissions from the sum of all 
process vents within a process at a new affected source that are not 
controlled according to any of the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1), 
(2), or (3) of this section or paragraph (c) of this section shall be 
reduced by 98 percent or greater by weight if the uncontrolled HAP 
emissions from the sum of all process vents within a process is greater 
than 180 kg/yr (400 lb/yr). Compliance with the required emission limit 
or reduction is demonstrated using the initial compliance procedures in 
Sec. 63.1257(d) and the monitoring requirements described in 
Sec. 63.1258.
    (1) To outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv as TOC 
and less than or equal to 20 ppmv as hydrogen halides and halogens;
    (2) By a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (3) By a control device specified in Sec. 63.1257(a)(4).
    (c) As an alternative standard, the owner or operator of an existing 
or new affected source may comply with the process vent standards by 
routing all vents from a process to a control device achieving an outlet 
TOC concentration, as calibrated on methane or the predominant HAP, of 
20 ppmv or less, and an outlet concentration of hydrogen halides and 
halogens of 20 ppmv or less. Any process vents within a process that are 
not routed to this control device must be controlled in accordance with 
the provisions of paragraphs (a)(2),(a)(3), and (b) of this section, as 
applicable. Compliance with the outlet concentrations shall be 
determined by the initial compliance procedures described in 
Sec. 63.1257(d)(1)(iv) and the continuous emission monitoring 
requirements described in Sec. 63.1258(b)(5).



Sec. 63.1255  Standards: Equipment leaks.

    (a) General Equipment Leak Requirements. (1) The provisions of this 
section apply to pumps, compressors, agitators, pressure relief devices, 
sampling connection systems, open-ended valves or lines, valves, 
connectors, instrumentation systems, control devices, and closed-vent 
systems required by this subpart that are intended to operate in organic 
hazardous air pollutant service 300 hours or more during

[[Page 31]]

the calendar year within a source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart.
    (2) Consistency with other regulations. After the compliance date 
for a process, equipment subject to both this section and either of the 
following will be required to comply only with the provisions of this 
subpart:
    (i) 40 CFR part 60.
    (ii) 40 CFR part 61.
    (3) [Reserved]
    (4) The provisions in Sec. 63.1(a)(3) of subpart A of this part do 
not alter the provisions in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (5) Lines and equipment not containing process fluids are not 
subject to the provisions of this section. Utilities, and other 
nonprocess lines, such as heating and cooling systems which do not 
combine their materials with those in the processes they serve, are not 
considered to be part of a process.
    (6) The provisions of this section do not apply to bench-scale 
processes, regardless of whether the processes are located at the same 
plant site as a process subject to the provisions of this subpart.
    (7) Each piece of equipment to which this section applies shall be 
identified such that it can be distinguished readily from equipment that 
is not subject to this section. Identification of the equipment does not 
require physical tagging of the equipment. For example, the equipment 
may be identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, or by 
designation of process boundaries by some form of weatherproof 
identification. If changes are made to the affected source subject to 
the leak detection requirements, equipment identification for each type 
of component shall be updated, if needed, within 15 calendar days of the 
end of each monitoring period for that component.
    (8) Equipment that is in vacuum service is excluded from the 
requirements of this section.
    (9) Equipment that is in organic HAP service, but is in such service 
less than 300 hours per calendar year, is excluded from the requirements 
of this section if it is identified as required in paragraph (g)(9) of 
this section.
    (10) When each leak is detected by visual, audible, or olfactory 
means, or by monitoring as described in Sec. 63.180(b) or (c), the 
following requirements apply:
    (i) A weatherproof and readily visible identification, marked with 
the equipment identification number, shall be attached to the leaking 
equipment.
    (ii) The identification on a valve or connector in light liquid or 
gas/vapor service may be removed after it has been monitored as 
specified in paragraph (e)(7)(iii) of this section and Sec. 63.174(e), 
and no leak has been detected during the follow-up monitoring.
    (iii) The identification on equipment, except on a valve or 
connector in light liquid or gas/vapor service, may be removed after it 
has been repaired.
    (b) References. (1) The owner or operator of a source subject to 
this section shall comply with the following sections of subpart H, 
except for Sec. 63.160, Sec. 63.161, Sec. 63.162, Sec. 63.163, 
Sec. 63.167, Sec. 63.168, Sec. 63.170, Sec. 63.171, Sec. 63.172, 
Sec. 63.173, Sec. 63.181, and Sec. 63.182 of this subpart. In place of 
Sec. 63.160 and Sec. 63.162, the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (a) of this section; in place of Sec. 63.161, the owner or 
operator shall comply with Sec. 63.1251 of this subpart; in place of 
Sec. 63.163 and Sec. 63.173, the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (c) of this section; in place of Sec. 63.167, the owner or 
operator shall comply with paragraph (d) of this section; in place of 
Sec. 63.168, the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (e) of 
this section; in place of Sec. 63.170, the owner or operator shall 
comply with Sec. 63.1254 of this subpart; in place of Sec. 63.171, the 
owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section; 
in place of Sec. 63.172, the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section; in place of Sec. 63.181, the owner 
or operator shall comply with paragraph (g) of this section; in place of 
Sec. 63.182, the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (h) of 
this section. The term ``process unit'' as used in subpart H shall be 
considered to be defined the same as ``group of processes'' for sources 
subject to this subpart GGG.
    (i) Section 63.164, Compressors;
    (ii) Section 63.165, Pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service;
    (iii) Section 63.166, Sampling connection systems;

[[Page 32]]

    (iv) Section 63.169, Pumps, valves, connectors, and agitators in 
heavy liquid service; instrumentation systems; and pressure relief 
devices in liquid service;
    (v) Section 63.171, Delay of repair, shall apply except 
Sec. 63.171(a) shall not apply. Instead, delay of repair of equipment 
for which leaks have been detected is allowed if one of the following 
conditions exist:
    (A) The repair is technically infeasible without a process shutdown. 
Repair of this equipment shall occur by the end of the next scheduled 
process shutdown.
    (B) The owner or operator determines that repair personnel would be 
exposed to an immediate danger if attempting to repair without a process 
shutdown. Repair of this equipment shall occur by the end of the next 
scheduled process shutdown.
    (vi) Section 63.172, Closed-vent systems and control devices, for 
closed-vent systems used to comply with this subpart, and for control 
devices used to comply with this section only, except
    (A) Sections 63.172(k) and (l) shall not apply. In place of 
Sec. 63.172(k) and (l), the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (B) Owners or operators may, instead of complying with the 
provisions of Sec. 63.172(f), design a closed-vent system to operate at 
a pressure below atmospheric pressure. The system shall be equipped with 
at least one pressure gage or other pressure measurement device that can 
be read from a readily accessible location to verify that negative 
pressure is being maintained in the closed-vent system when the 
associated control device is operating.
    (vii) Section 63.174, Connectors, except:
    (A) Sections 63.174(f) and (g) shall not apply. In place of 
Sec. 63.174(f) and (g), the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (B) Days that the connectors are not in organic HAP service shall 
not be considered part of the 3 month period in Sec. 63.174(e).
    (C) Section 63.174(b)(3)(ii) shall not apply. Instead, if the 
percent leaking connectors in the process unit was less than 0.5 
percent, but equal to or greater than 0.25 percent, during the last 
required monitoring period, monitoring shall be performed once every 4 
years. An owner or operator may comply with the requirements of this 
paragraph by monitoring at least 40 percent of the connectors in the 
first 2 years and the remainder of the connectors within the next 2 
years. The percent leaking connectors will be calculated for the total 
of all monitoring performed during the 4 year period.
    (D) Section 63.174(b)(3)(iv) shall not apply. Instead, the owner or 
operator shall increase the monitoring frequency to once every 2 years 
for the next monitoring period if leaking connectors comprise at least 
0.5 percent but less than 1.0 percent of the connectors monitored within 
the 4 years specified in paragraph (b)(1)(vii)(C) of this section or the 
first 4 years specified in Sec. 63.174(b)(3)(iii). At the end of that 2 
year monitoring period, the owner or operator shall monitor once per 
year while the percent leaking connectors is greater than or equal to 
0.5 percent; if the percent leaking connectors is less than 0.5 percent, 
the owner or operator may return to monitoring once every 4 years or may 
monitor in accordance with Sec. 63.174(b)(3)(iii), if appropriate.
    (E) Section 63.174(b)(3)(v) shall not apply. Instead, if an owner or 
operator complying with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(vii)(C) and 
(D) of this section or Sec. 63.174 (b)(3)(iii) for a group of processes 
determines that 1 percent or greater of the connectors are leaking, the 
owner or operator shall increase the monitoring frequency to one time 
per year. The owner or operator may again elect to use the provisions of 
paragraphs (b)(1)(vii)(C) or (D) of this section after a monitoring 
period in which less than 0.5 percent of the connectors are determined 
to be leaking.
    (F) Section 63.174(b)(3)(iii) shall not apply. Instead, monitoring 
shall be required once every 8 years, if the percent leaking connectors 
in the process unit was less than 0.25 percent during the last required 
monitoring period. An owner or operator shall monitor at least 50 
percent of the connectors in the first 4 years and the remainder of the 
connectors within the next 4 years. If the percent leaking connectors in 
the first 4 years is equal to or greater

[[Page 33]]

than 0.35 percent, the monitoring program shall revert at that time to 
the appropriate monitoring frequency specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(vii)(C), (D), or (E) of this section.
    (viii) Section 63.177, Alternative means of emission limitation: 
General;
    (ix) Section 63.178, Alternative means of emission limitation: Batch 
processes, except that Sec. 63.178(b), requirements for pressure 
testing, shall apply to all processes, not just batch processes;
    (x) Section 63.179, Alternative means of emission limitation: 
Enclosed-vented process units;
    (xi) Section 63.180, Test methods and procedures, except 
Sec. 63.180(b)(4)(ii)(A) through (C) shall not apply. Instead 
calibration gases shall be a mixture of methane and air at a 
concentration of approximately, but less than, 10,000 parts per million 
methane for agitators; 2,000 parts per million for pumps; and 500 parts 
per million for all other equipment, except as provided in section 
63.180(b)(4)(iii).
    (2) [Reserved]
    (c) Standards for Pumps in Light Liquid Service and Agitators in 
Gas/Vapor Service and in Light Liquid Service. (1) The provisions of 
this section apply to each pump that is in light organic HAP liquid 
service, and to each agitator in organic HAP gas/vapor service or in 
light organic HAP liquid service.
    (2)(i) Monitoring. Each pump and agitator subject to this section 
shall be monitored quarterly to detect leaks by the method specified in 
Sec. 63.180(b) of subpart H, except as provided in Sec. 63.177 of 
subpart H, paragraph (f) of this section, and paragraphs (c)(5) through 
(c)(9) of this section.
    (ii) Leak definition. The instrument reading, as determined by the 
method as specified in Sec. 63.180(b), that defines a leak is:
    (A) For agitators, an instrument reading of 10,000 parts per million 
or greater.
    (B) For pumps, an instrument reading of 2,000 parts per million or 
greater.
    (iii) Visual Inspections. Each pump and agitator shall be checked by 
visual inspection each calendar week for indications of liquids dripping 
from the pump or agitator seal. If there are indications of liquids 
dripping from the seal, a leak is detected.
    (3) Repair provisions. (i) When a leak is detected, it shall be 
repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days 
after it is detected, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this 
section.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after the leak is detected. First attempts at repair 
include, but are not limited to, the following practices where 
practicable:
    (A) Tightening of packing gland nuts.
    (B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and 
temperature.
    (4) Calculation of percent leakers. (i) The owner or operator shall 
decide no later than the end of the first monitoring period what groups 
of processes will be developed. Once the owner or operator has decided, 
all subsequent percent calculations shall be made on the same basis.
    (ii) If, calculated on a 1 year rolling average, the greater of 
either 10 percent or three of the pumps in a group of processes leak, 
the owner or operator shall monitor each pump once per month.
    (iii) The number of pumps in a group of processes shall be the sum 
of all the pumps in organic HAP service, except that pumps found leaking 
in a continuous process within 1 quarter after startup of the pump shall 
not count in the percent leaking pumps calculation for that one 
monitoring period only.
    (iv) Percent leaking pumps shall be determined by the following 
Equation 3:

%PL = [(PL--PS)/(PT--
PS)]  x  100 (Eq. 3)

Where:
%PL = percent leaking pumps
PL = number of pumps found leaking as determined through 
quarterly monitoring as required in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (c)(2)(ii) 
of this section.
PT = total pumps in organic HAP service, including those 
meeting the criteria in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section
PS = number of pumps in a continuous process leaking within 1 quarter of 
startup during the current monitoring period


[[Page 34]]


    (5) Exemptions. Each pump or agitator equipped with a dual 
mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system is exempt 
from the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4)(iii) of this 
section, provided the following requirements are met:
    (i) Each dual mechanical seal system is:
    (A) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is at all 
times greater than the pump/agitator stuffing box pressure; or
    (B) Equipped with a barrier fluid degassing reservoir that is 
connected by a closed-vent system to a control device that complies with 
the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section; or
    (C) Equipped with a closed-loop system that purges the barrier fluid 
into a process stream.
    (ii) The barrier fluid is not in light liquid service.
    (iii) Each barrier fluid system is equipped with a sensor that will 
detect failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
    (iv) Each pump/agitator is checked by visual inspection each 
calendar week for indications of liquids dripping from the pump/agitator 
seal.
    (A) If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump/
agitator seal at the time of the weekly inspection, the pump/agitator 
shall be monitored as specified in Sec. 63.180(b) to determine if there 
is a leak of organic HAP in the barrier fluid.
    (B) If an instrument reading of 2,000 parts per million or greater 
is measured for pumps, or 10,000 parts per million or greater is 
measured for agitators, a leak is detected.
    (v) Each sensor as described in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this 
section is observed daily or is equipped with an alarm unless the pump 
is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site.
    (vi)(A) The owner or operator determines, based on design 
considerations and operating experience, criteria applicable to the 
presence and frequency of drips and to the sensor that indicate failure 
of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
    (B) If indications of liquids dripping from the pump/agitator seal 
exceed the criteria established in paragraph (c)(5)(vi)(A) of this 
section, or if, based on the criteria established in paragraph 
(c)(5)(vi)(A) of this section, the sensor indicates failure of the seal 
system, the barrier fluid system, or both, a leak is detected.
    (C) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, 
except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section.
    (D) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after each leak is detected.
    (6) Any pump/agitator that is designed with no externally actuated 
shaft penetrating the pump/agitator housing is exempt from the 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section, except 
for the requirements of paragraph (c)(2)(iii) and, for pumps, paragraph 
(c)(4)(iv).
    (7) Any pump/agitator equipped with a closed-vent system capable of 
capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals back to 
the process or to a control device that complies with the requirements 
of paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section is exempt from the requirements 
of paragraphs (c)(2) through (c)(5) of this section.
    (8) Any pump/agitator that is located within the boundary of an 
unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection 
requirement of paragraphs (c)(2)(iii) and (c)(5)(iv) of this section, 
and the daily requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section, 
provided that each pump/agitator is visually inspected as often as 
practicable and at least monthly.
    (9) If more than 90 percent of the pumps in a group of processes 
meet the criteria in either paragraph (c)(5) or (c)(6) of this section, 
the process is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this 
section.
    (d) Standards: Open-Ended Valves or Lines. (1)(i) Each open-ended 
valve or line shall be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a 
second valve, except as provided in Sec. 63.177 and paragraphs (d)(4) 
through (6) of this section.
    (ii) The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve shall seal the 
open end at all times except during operations requiring process fluid 
flow through the open-ended valve or line, or during

[[Page 35]]

maintenance or repair. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve 
shall be in place within 1 hour of cessation of operations requiring 
process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line, or within 1 
hour of cessation of maintenance or repair.
    (2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve shall 
be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is 
closed before the second valve is closed.
    (3) When a double block and bleed system is being used, the bleed 
valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the 
line between the block valves but shall comply with paragraph (d)(1) of 
this section at all other times.
    (4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which 
are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this 
section.
    (5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would 
autocatalytically polymerize are exempt from the requirements of 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section.
    (6) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which could 
cause an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if 
capped or equipped with a double block and bleed system as specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section are exempt from the 
requirements of paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section.
    (e) Standards: Valves in Gas/Vapor Service and in Light Liquid 
Service. (1) The provisions of this section apply to valves that are 
either in gas organic HAP service or in light liquid organic HAP 
service.
    (2) For existing and new affected sources, all valves subject to 
this section shall be monitored, except as provided in paragraph (f) of 
this section and in Sec. 63.177, by no later than 1 year after the 
compliance date.
    (3) Monitoring. The owner or operator of a source subject to this 
section shall monitor all valves, except as provided in paragraph (f) of 
this section and in Sec. 63.177, at the intervals specified in paragraph 
(e)(4) of this section and shall comply with all other provisions of 
this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section, 
Sec. 63.178, and Sec. 63.179.
    (i) The valves shall be monitored to detect leaks by the method 
specified in Sec. 63.180(b).
    (ii) An instrument reading of 500 parts per million or greater 
defines a leak.
    (4) Subsequent monitoring frequencies. After conducting the initial 
survey required in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall monitor valves for leaks at the intervals specified 
below:
    (i) For a group of processes with 2 percent or greater leaking 
valves, calculated according to paragraph (e)(6) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall monitor each valve once per month, except as 
specified in paragraph (e)(9) of this section.
    (ii) For a group of processes with less than 2 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator shall monitor each valve once each 
quarter, except as provided in paragraphs (e)(4)(iii) through (e)(4)(v) 
of this section.
    (iii) For a group of processes with less than 1 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
2 quarters.
    (iv) For a group of processes with less than 0.5 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
4 quarters.
    (v) For a group of processes with less than 0.25 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
2 years.
    (5) Calculation of percent leakers. For a group of processes to 
which this subpart applies, an owner or operator may choose to subdivide 
the valves in the applicable group of processes and apply the provisions 
of paragraph (e)(4) of this section to each subgroup. If the owner or 
operator elects to subdivide the valves in the applicable group of 
processes, then the provisions of paragraphs (e)(5)(i) through 
(e)(5)(viii) of this section apply.
    (i) The overall performance of total valves in the applicable group 
of processes must be less than 2 percent leaking valves, as detected 
according to paragraphs (e)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section and as 
calculated according to

[[Page 36]]

paragraphs (e)(6) (ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (ii) The initial assignment or subsequent reassignment of valves to 
subgroups shall be governed by the provisions of paragraphs (e)(5)(ii) 
(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) The owner or operator shall determine which valves are assigned 
to each subgroup. Valves with less than 1 year of monitoring data or 
valves not monitored within the last 12 months must be placed initially 
into the most frequently monitored subgroup until at least 1 year of 
monitoring data has been obtained.
    (B) Any valve or group of valves can be reassigned from a less 
frequently monitored subgroup to a more frequently monitored subgroup 
provided that the valves to be reassigned were monitored during the most 
recent monitoring period for the less frequently monitored subgroup. The 
monitoring results must be included with the less frequently monitored 
subgroup's monitoring event and associated next percent leaking valves 
calculation for that group.
    (C) Any valve or group of valves can be reassigned from a more 
frequently monitored subgroup to a less frequently monitored subgroup 
provided that the valves to be reassigned have not leaked for the period 
of the less frequently monitored subgroup (e.g., for the last 12 months, 
if the valve or group of valves is to be reassigned to a subgroup being 
monitored annually). Nonrepairable valves may not be reassigned to a 
less frequently monitored subgroup.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall determine every 6 months if the 
overall performance of total valves in the applicable group of processes 
is less than 2 percent leaking valves and so indicate the performance in 
the next periodic report. If the overall performance of total valves in 
the applicable group of processes is 2 percent leaking valves or 
greater, the owner or operator shall revert to the program required in 
paragraphs (e)(2) through (e)(4) of this section. The overall 
performance of total valves in the applicable group of processes shall 
be calculated as a weighted average of the percent leaking valves of 
each subgroup according to the following Equation 4:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.002

where:

%VLO = overall performance of total valves in the applicable 
process or group of processes
%VLi = percent leaking valves in subgroup I, most recent 
value calculated according to the procedures in paragraphs (e)(6) (ii) 
and (iii) of this section
Vi = number of valves in subgroup I
n = number of subgroups

    (iv) Records. In addition to records required by paragraph (g) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall maintain records specified in 
paragraphs (e)(5)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Which valves are assigned to each subgroup,
    (B) Monitoring results and calculations made for each subgroup for 
each monitoring period,
    (C) Which valves are reassigned and when they were reassigned, and
    (D) The results of the semiannual overall performance calculation 
required in paragraph (e)(5)(iii) of this section.
    (v) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator no later 
than 30 days prior to the beginning of the next monitoring period of the 
decision to subgroup valves. The notification shall identify the 
participating processes and the valves assigned to each subgroup.
    (vi) Semiannual reports. In addition to the information required by 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit in 
the periodic reports the information specified in paragraphs 
(e)(5)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) Valve reassignments occurring during the reporting period, and
    (B) Results of the semiannual overall performance calculation 
required by paragraph (e)(5)(iii) of this section.

[[Page 37]]

    (vii) To determine the monitoring frequency for each subgroup, the 
calculation procedures of paragraph (e)(6)(iii) of this section shall be 
used.
    (viii) Except for the overall performance calculations required by 
paragraphs (e)(5)(i) and (e)(5)(iii) of this section, each subgroup 
shall be treated as if it were a process for the purposes of applying 
the provisions of this section.
    (6)(i) The owner or operator shall decide no later than the 
implementation date of this subpart or upon revision of an operating 
permit how to group the processes. Once the owner or operator has 
decided, all subsequent percentage calculations shall be made on the 
same basis.
    (ii) Percent leaking valves for each group of processes or subgroup 
shall be determined by the following Equation 5:

%VL = [VL/VT]  x  100    (Eq. 5)

Where:

%VL = percent leaking valves
VL = number of valves found leaking excluding nonrepairables 
as provided in paragraph (e)(6)(iv)(A) of this section
VT = total valves monitored, in a monitoring period excluding 
valves monitored as required by (e)(7)(iii) of this section

    (iii) When determining monitoring frequency for each group of 
processes or subgroup subject to monthly, quarterly, or semiannual 
monitoring frequencies, the percent leaking valves shall be the 
arithmetic average of the percent leaking valves from the last two 
monitoring periods. When determining monitoring frequency for each group 
of processes or subgroup subject to annual or biennial (once every 2 
years) monitoring frequencies, the percent leaking valves shall be the 
arithmetic average of the percent leaking valves from the last three 
monitoring periods.
    (iv)(A) Nonrepairable valves shall be included in the calculation of 
percent leaking valves the first time the valve is identified as leaking 
and nonrepairable and as required to comply with paragraph (e)(6)(iv)(B) 
of this section. Otherwise, a number of nonrepairable valves (identified 
and included in the percent leaking calculation in a previous period) up 
to a maximum of 1 percent of the total number of valves in organic HAP 
service at a process may be excluded from calculation of percent leaking 
valves for subsequent monitoring periods.
    (B) If the number of nonrepairable valves exceeds 1 percent of the 
total number of valves in organic HAP service at a process, the number 
of nonrepairable valves exceeding 1 percent of the total number of 
valves in organic HAP service shall be included in the calculation of 
percent leaking valves.
    (7) Repair provisions. (i) When a leak is detected, it shall be 
repaired as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days 
after the leak is detected, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of 
this section.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after each leak is detected.
    (iii) When a leak is repaired, the valve shall be monitored at least 
once within the first 3 months after its repair. Days that the valve is 
not in organic HAP service shall not be considered part of this 3 month 
period.
    (8) First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the 
following practices where practicable:
    (i) Tightening of bonnet bolts,
    (ii) Replacement of bonnet bolts,
    (iii) Tightening of packing gland nuts, and
    (iv) Injection of lubricant into lubricated packing.
    (9) Any equipment located at a plant site with fewer than 250 valves 
in organic HAP service in the affected source is exempt from the 
requirements for monthly monitoring specified in paragraph (e)(4)(i) of 
this section. Instead, the owner or operator shall monitor each valve in 
organic HAP service for leaks once each quarter, or comply with 
paragraphs (e)(4)(iii) or (e)(4)(iv) of this section.
    (f) Unsafe to Monitor, Difficult to Monitor, and Inaccessible 
Equipment. (1) Equipment that is designated as unsafe to monitor, 
difficult to monitor, or inaccessible is exempt from the monitoring 
requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iv) of this 
section provided the owner or operator meets the requirements specified 
in paragraph (f)(2), (f)(3), or (f)(4) of this

[[Page 38]]

section, as applicable. Ceramic or ceramic-lined connectors are subject 
to the same requirements as inaccessible connectors.
    (i) For pumps and agitators, paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) 
of this section do not apply.
    (ii) For valves, paragraphs (e)(2) through (e)(7) of this section do 
not apply.
    (iii) For closed-vent systems, Sec. 63.172(f)(1) and (2), and (g) do 
not apply.
    (iv) For connectors, Sec. 63.174(b) through (e) do not apply.
    (2) Equipment that is unsafe to monitor. (i) Equipment may be 
designated as unsafe to monitor if the owner or operator determines that 
monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a 
consequence of complying with the monitoring requirements in paragraphs 
(f)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator of equipment that is designated as 
unsafe-to-monitor must have a written plan that requires monitoring of 
the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, 
but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise 
applicable.
    (3) Equipment that is difficult to monitor. (i) Equipment may be 
designated as difficult to monitor if the owner or operator determines 
that the equipment cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring 
personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface or it is not 
accessible at anytime in a safe manner;
    (ii) At an existing source, any equipment within a group of 
processes that meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section 
may be designated as difficult to monitor. At a new affected source, an 
owner or operator may designate no more than 3 percent of each type of 
equipment as difficult to monitor.
    (iii) The owner or operator of equipment designated as difficult to 
monitor must follow a written plan that requires monitoring of the 
equipment at least once per calendar year.
    (4) Inaccessible equipment and ceramic or ceramic-lined connectors. 
(i) A connector, agitator, or valve may be designated as inaccessible if 
it is:
    (A) Buried;
    (B) Insulated in a manner that prevents access to the equipment by a 
monitor probe;
    (C) Obstructed by equipment or piping that prevents access to the 
equipment by a monitor probe;
    (D) Unable to be reached from a wheeled scissor-lift or hydraulic-
type scaffold which would allow access to equipment up to 7.6 meters (25 
feet) above the ground; or
    (E) Not able to be accessed at any time in a safe manner to perform 
monitoring. Unsafe access includes, but is not limited to, the use of a 
wheeled scissor-lift on unstable or uneven terrain, the use of a 
motorized man-lift basket in areas where an ignition potential exists, 
or access would require near proximity to hazards such as electrical 
lines, or would risk damage to equipment.
    (ii) At an existing source, any connector, agitator, or valve that 
meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section may be 
designated as inaccessible. At a new affected source, an owner or 
operator may designate no more than 3 percent of each type of equipment 
as inaccessible.
    (iii) If any inaccessible equipment or ceramic or ceramic-lined 
connector is observed by visual, audible, olfactory, or other means to 
be leaking, the leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no 
later than 15 calendar days after the leak is detected, except as 
provided in paragraph (g) of this section.
    (g) Recordkeeping Requirements. (1) An owner or operator of more 
than one group of processes subject to the provisions of this section 
may comply with the recordkeeping requirements for the groups of 
processes in one recordkeeping system if the system identifies with each 
record the program being implemented (e.g., quarterly monitoring) for 
each type of equipment. All records and information required by this 
section shall be maintained in a manner that can be readily accessed at 
the plant site. This could include physically locating the records at 
the plant site or accessing the records from a central location by 
computer at the plant site.

[[Page 39]]

    (2) General recordkeeping. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of 
this section and in paragraph (a)(9) of this section, the following 
information pertaining to all equipment subject to the requirements in 
this section shall be recorded:
    (i)(A) A list of identification numbers for equipment (except 
connectors that are not subject to paragraph (f) of this section and 
instrumentation systems) subject to the requirements of this section. 
Connectors, except those subject to paragraph (f) of this section, need 
not be individually identified if all connectors in a designated area or 
length of pipe subject to the provisions of this section are identified 
as a group, and the number of subject connectors is indicated. The list 
for each type of equipment shall be completed no later than the 
completion of the initial survey required for that component. The list 
of identification numbers shall be updated, if needed, to incorporate 
equipment changes within 15 calendar days of the completion of each 
monitoring survey for the type of equipment component monitored.
    (B) A schedule for monitoring connectors subject to the provisions 
of Sec. 63.174(a) and valves subject to the provisions of paragraph 
(e)(4) of this section.
    (C) Physical tagging of the equipment to indicate that it is in 
organic HAP service is not required. Equipment subject to the provisions 
of this section may be identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, 
or by other appropriate methods.
    (ii)(A) A list of identification numbers for equipment that the 
owner or operator elects to equip with a closed-vent system and control 
device, under the provisions of paragraph (c)(7) of this section, 
Sec. 63.164(h), or Sec. 63.165(c).
    (B) A list of identification numbers for compressors that the owner 
or operator elects to designate as operating with an instrument reading 
of less than 500 parts per million above background, under the 
provisions of Sec. 63.164(i).
    (iii)(A) A list of identification numbers for pressure relief 
devices subject to the provisions in Sec. 63.165(a).
    (B) A list of identification numbers for pressure relief devices 
equipped with rupture disks, under the provisions of Sec. 63.165(d).
    (iv) Identification of instrumentation systems subject to the 
provisions of this section. Individual components in an instrumentation 
system need not be identified.
    (v) The owner or operator may develop a written procedure that 
identifies the conditions that justify a delay of repair. The written 
procedures may be included as part of the startup/shutdown/malfunction 
plan, required by Sec. 63.1260(i), for the source or may be part of a 
separate document that is maintained at the plant site. Reasons for 
delay of repair may be documented by citing the relevant sections of the 
written procedure.
    (vi) The following information shall be recorded for each dual 
mechanical seal system:
    (A) Design criteria required by paragraph (c)(5)(vi)(A) of this 
section and Sec. 63.164(e)(2), and an explanation of the design 
criteria; and
    (B) Any changes to these criteria and the reasons for the changes.
    (vii) A list of equipment designated as unsafe to monitor, difficult 
to monitor, or inaccessible under paragraphs (f) or (b)(1)(v)(B) of this 
section and a copy of the plan for monitoring or inspecting this 
equipment.
    (viii) A list of connectors removed from and added to the process, 
as described in Sec. 63.174(i)(1), and documentation of the integrity of 
the weld for any removed connectors, as required in Sec. 63.174(j). This 
is not required unless the net credits for removed connectors is 
expected to be used.
    (ix) For batch processes that the owner or operator elects to 
monitor as provided under Sec. 63.178(c), a list of equipment added to 
batch product processes since the last monitoring period required in 
Secs. 63.178(c)(3)(ii) and (3)(iii). This list must be completed for 
each type of equipment within 15 calendar days of the completion of each 
monitoring survey for the type of equipment monitored.
    (3) Records of visual inspections. For visual inspections of 
equipment subject to the provisions of paragraphs

[[Page 40]]

(c)(2)(iii) and (c)(5)(iv)(A) of this section, the owner or operator 
shall document that the inspection was conducted and the date of the 
inspection. The owner or operator shall maintain records as specified in 
paragraph (g)(4) of this section for leaking equipment identified in 
this inspection, except as provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this section. 
These records shall be retained for 2 years.
    (4) Monitoring records. When each leak is detected as specified in 
paragraph (c) of this section and Sec. 63.164; paragraph (e) of this 
section and Sec. 63.169; and Secs. 63.172 and 63.174 of subpart H, the 
following information shall be recorded and kept for 2 years onsite and 
3 years offsite (5 years total):
    (i) The instrument and the equipment identification number and the 
operator name, initials, or identification number.
    (ii) The date the leak was detected and the date of the first 
attempt to repair the leak.
    (iii) The date of successful repair of the leak.
    (iv) If postrepair monitoring is required, the maximum instrument 
reading measured by Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A after the 
leak is successfully repaired or determined to be nonrepairable.
    (v) ``Repair delayed'' and the reason for the delay if a leak is not 
repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the leak.
    (A) The owner or operator may develop a written procedure that 
identifies the conditions that justify a delay of repair. In such cases, 
reasons for delay of repair may be documented by citing the relevant 
sections of the written procedure.
    (B) If delay of repair was caused by depletion of stocked parts, 
there must be documentation that the spare parts were sufficiently 
stocked onsite before depletion and the reason for depletion.
    (vi) If repairs were delayed, dates of process shutdowns that occur 
while the equipment is unrepaired.
    (vii)(A) If the alternative in Sec. 63.174(c)(1)(ii) is not in use 
for the monitoring period, identification, either by list, location 
(area or grouping), or tagging of connectors disturbed since the last 
monitoring period required in Sec. 63.174(b), as described in 
Sec. 63.174(c)(1).
    (B) The date and results of follow-up monitoring as required in 
Sec. 63.174(c). If identification of disturbed connectors is made by 
location, then all connectors within the designated location shall be 
monitored.
    (viii) The date and results of the monitoring required in 
Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(i) for equipment added to a batch process since the 
last monitoring period required in Secs. 63.178(c)(3)(ii) and 
(c)(3)(iii). If no leaking equipment is found in this monitoring, the 
owner or operator shall record that the inspection was performed. 
Records of the actual monitoring results are not required.
    (ix) Copies of the periodic reports as specified in paragraph (h)(3) 
of this section, if records are not maintained on a computerized data 
base capable of generating summary reports from the records.
    (5) Records of pressure tests. The owner or operator who elects to 
pressure test a process equipment train and supply lines between storage 
and processing areas to demonstrate compliance with this section is 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (g)(2), (g)(3), (g)(4), and 
(g)(6) of this section. Instead, the owner or operator shall maintain 
records of the following information:
    (i) The identification of each product, or product code, produced 
during the calendar year. It is not necessary to identify individual 
items of equipment in the process equipment train.
    (ii) Records demonstrating the proportion of the time during the 
calendar year the equipment is in use in the process that is subject to 
the provisions of this subpart. Examples of suitable documentation are 
records of time in use for individual pieces of equipment or average 
time in use for the process unit. These records are not required if the 
owner or operator does not adjust monitoring frequency by the time in 
use, as provided in Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(iii).
    (iii) Physical tagging of the equipment to identify that it is in 
organic HAP service and subject to the provisions of this section is not 
required. Equipment in a process subject to the provisions of this 
appendix may be

[[Page 41]]

identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, or by other appropriate 
methods.
    (iv) The dates of each pressure test required in Sec. 63.178(b), the 
test pressure, and the pressure drop observed during the test.
    (v) Records of any visible, audible, or olfactory evidence of fluid 
loss.
    (vi) When a process equipment train does not pass two consecutive 
pressure tests, the following information shall be recorded in a log and 
kept for 2 years:
    (A) The date of each pressure test and the date of each leak repair 
attempt.
    (B) Repair methods applied in each attempt to repair the leak.
    (C) The reason for the delay of repair.
    (D) The expected date for delivery of the replacement equipment and 
the actual date of delivery of the replacement equipment.
    (E) The date of successful repair.
    (6) Records of compressor compliance tests. The dates and results of 
each compliance test required for compressors subject to the provisions 
in Sec. 63.164(i) and the dates and results of the monitoring following 
a pressure release for each pressure relief device subject to the 
provisions in Secs. 63.165(a) and (b). The results shall include:
    (i) The background level measured during each compliance test.
    (ii) The maximum instrument reading measured at each piece of 
equipment during each compliance test.
    (7) Records for closed-vent systems. The owner or operator shall 
maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) 
through (g)(7)(iii) of this section for closed-vent systems and control 
devices subject to the provisions of paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this 
section. The records specified in paragraph (g)(7)(i) of this section 
shall be retained for the life of the equipment. The records specified 
in paragraphs (g)(7)(ii) and (g)(7)(iii) of this section shall be 
retained for 2 years.
    (i) The design specifications and performance demonstrations 
specified in paragraphs (g)(7)(i)(A) through (g)(7)(i)(D) of this 
section.
    (A) Detailed schematics, design specifications of the control 
device, and piping and instrumentation diagrams.
    (B) The dates and descriptions of any changes in the design 
specifications.
    (C) The flare design (i.e., steam assisted, air assisted, or 
nonassisted) and the results of the compliance demonstration required by 
Sec. 63.11(b).
    (D) A description of the parameter or parameters monitored, as 
required in paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section, to ensure that control 
devices are operated and maintained in conformance with their design and 
an explanation of why that parameter (or parameters) was selected for 
the monitoring.
    (ii) Records of operation of closed-vent systems and control 
devices.
    (A) Dates and durations when the closed-vent systems and control 
devices required in paragraph (c) of this section and Secs. 63.164 
through 63.166 are not operated as designed as indicated by the 
monitored parameters, including periods when a flare pilot light system 
does not have a flame.
    (B) Dates and durations during which the monitoring system or 
monitoring device is inoperative.
    (C) Dates and durations of startups and shutdowns of control devices 
required in paragraph (c)(7) of this section and Secs. 63.164 through 
63.166.
    (iii) Records of inspections of closed-vent systems subject to the 
provisions of Sec. 63.172.
    (A) For each inspection conducted in accordance with the provisions 
of Sec. 63.172(f)(1) or (f)(2) during which no leaks were detected, a 
record that the inspection was performed, the date of the inspection, 
and a statement that no leaks were detected.
    (B) For each inspection conducted in accordance with the provisions 
of Sec. 63.172(f)(1) or (f)(2) during which leaks were detected, the 
information specified in paragraph (g)(4) of this section shall be 
recorded.
    (8) Records for components in heavy liquid service. Information, 
data, and analysis used to determine that a piece of equipment or 
process is in heavy liquid service shall be recorded. Such a 
determination shall include an analysis or demonstration that the 
process fluids do not meet the criteria of ``in light liquid or gas 
service.'' Examples of information that could document this include, but 
are not limited to, records of chemicals purchased for the process,

[[Page 42]]

analyses of process stream composition, engineering calculations, or 
process knowledge.
    (9) Records of exempt components. Identification, either by list, 
location (area or group) of equipment in organic HAP service less than 
300 hours per year subject to the provisions of this section.
    (10) Records of alternative means of compliance determination. 
Owners and operators choosing to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.179 shall maintain the following records:
    (i) Identification of the process(es) and the organic HAP they 
handle.
    (ii) A schematic of the process, enclosure, and closed-vent system.
    (iii) A description of the system used to create a negative pressure 
in the enclosure to ensure that all emissions are routed to the control 
device.
    (h) Reporting Requirements. (1) Each owner or operator of a source 
subject to this section shall submit the reports listed in paragraphs 
(h)(1)(i) through (ii) of this section.
    (i) A Notification of Compliance Status Report described in 
paragraph (h)(2) of this section,
    (ii) Periodic Reports described in paragraph (h)(3) of this section, 
and
    (2) Notification of compliance report. Each owner or operator of a 
source subject to this section shall submit the information specified in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section in the Notification 
of Compliance Status Report described in Sec. 63.1260(f).
    (i) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section for each process 
subject to the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (g) of this 
section.
    (A) Process group identification.
    (B) Approximate number of each equipment type (e.g., valves, pumps) 
in organic HAP service, excluding equipment in vacuum service.
    (C) Method of compliance with the standard (for example, ``monthly 
leak detection and repair'' or ``equipped with dual mechanical seals'').
    (ii) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section for each process 
subject to the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(ix) of this section and 
Sec. 63.178(b).
    (A) Products or product codes subject to the provisions of this 
section, and
    (B) Planned schedule for pressure testing when equipment is 
configured for production of products subject to the provisions of this 
section.
    (iii) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section for each process 
subject to the requirements in Sec. 63.179.
    (A) Process identification.
    (B) A description of the system used to create a negative pressure 
in the enclosure and the control device used to comply with the 
requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section.
    (iv) Any change in the information submitted under paragraph (h) of 
this section shall be provided to the Administrator as a part of 
subsequent Periodic Reports. Section 63.9(j) shall not apply to the 
Notification of Compliance Status Report described in this paragraph 
(h)(2) of this section.
    (3) Periodic reports. The owner or operator of a source subject to 
this section shall submit Periodic Reports.
    (i) A report containing the information in paragraphs (h)(3)(ii), 
(h)(3)(iii), and (h)(3)(iv) of this section shall be submitted 
semiannually starting 6 months after the Notification of Compliance 
Status Report, as required in paragraph (h)(2) of this section. The 
first periodic report shall cover the first 6 months after the 
compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1250(e). Each subsequent periodic 
report shall cover the 6 month period following the preceding period.
    (ii) For equipment complying with the provisions of paragraphs (b) 
through (g) of this section, the summary information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(3)(ii)(A) through (L) of this section for each monitoring 
period during the 6-month period.
    (A) The number of valves for which leaks were detected as described 
in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, the percent leakers, and the total 
number of valves monitored;
    (B) The number of valves for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in

[[Page 43]]

paragraph (e)(7) of this section, identifying the number of those that 
are determined nonrepairable;
    (C) The number of pumps and agitators for which leaks were detected 
as described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the percent leakers, 
and the total number of pumps and agitators monitored;
    (D) The number of pumps and agitators for which leaks were not 
repaired as required in paragraph (c)(3) of this section;
    (E) The number of compressors for which leaks were detected as 
described in Sec. 63.164(f);
    (F) The number of compressors for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in Sec. 63.164(g);
    (G) The number of connectors for which leaks were detected as 
described in Sec. 63.174(a), the percent of connectors leaking, and the 
total number of connectors monitored;
    (H) The number of connectors for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in Sec. 63.174(d), identifying the number of those that are 
determined nonrepairable;
    (I) The facts that explain any delay of repairs and, where 
appropriate, why a process shutdown was technically infeasible.
    (J) The results of all monitoring to show compliance with 
Secs. 63.164(i), 63.165(a), and 63.172(f) conducted within the 
semiannual reporting period.
    (K) If applicable, the initiation of a monthly monitoring program 
under either paragraph (c)(4)(ii) or paragraph (e)(4)(i) of this 
section.
    (L) If applicable, notification of a change in connector monitoring 
alternatives as described in Sec. 63.174(c)(1).
    (iii) For owners or operators electing to meet the requirements of 
Sec. 63.178(b), the report shall include the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(3)(iii)(A) through (E) of this paragraph for each 
process.
    (A) Product process equipment train identification;
    (B) The number of pressure tests conducted;
    (C) The number of pressure tests where the equipment train failed 
either the retest or two consecutive pressure tests;
    (D) The facts that explain any delay of repairs; and
    (E) The results of all monitoring to determine compliance with 
Sec. 63.172(f) of subpart H.
    (iv) Any revisions to items reported in earlier Notification of 
Compliance Status Report, if the method of compliance has changed since 
the last report or any other changes to the information reported has 
occurred.



Sec. 63.1256  Standards: Wastewater.

    (a) General. Each owner or operator of any affected source (existing 
or new) shall comply with the general wastewater requirements in 
paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (1) Identify wastewater that requires control. For each POD, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the requirements in either paragraph 
(a)(1)(i), or (ii) of this section to determine whether a wastewater 
stream is an affected wastewater stream that requires control for 
soluble and/or partially soluble HAP compounds or to designate the 
wastewater stream as an affected wastewater stream, respectively. The 
owner or operator may use a combination of the approaches in paragraphs 
(a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section for different affected wastewater 
generated at the source. The owner or operator shall also comply with 
the requirements for multiphase discharges in paragraph (a)(4) of this 
section. Wastewater identified in paragraph (a)(3) of this section is 
exempt from the provisions of this subpart.
    (i) Determine characteristics of a wastewater stream. At new and 
existing sources, a wastewater stream is an affected wastewater stream 
if the annual average concentration and annual load exceed any of the 
criteria specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this 
section. At new sources, a wastewater stream is subject to additional 
control requirements if the annual average concentration and annual load 
exceed the criteria specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(D) of this 
section. The owner or operator shall comply with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(1) to determine the annual average concentrations and 
annual load of partially soluble and soluble HAP compounds.

[[Page 44]]

    (A) The wastewater stream contains partially soluble HAP compounds 
at an annual average concentration greater than 1,300 ppmw, and the 
total soluble and partially soluble HAP load in all wastewater from the 
PMPU exceeds 1 Mg/yr.
    (B) The wastewater stream contains partially soluble and/or soluble 
HAP compounds at an annual average concentration of 5,200 ppmw, and the 
total soluble and partially soluble HAP load in all wastewater from the 
PMPU exceeds 1 Mg/yr.
    (C) The wastewater stream contains partially soluble and/or soluble 
HAP at an annual average concentration of greater than 10,000 ppmw, and 
the total partially soluble and/or soluble HAP load in all wastewater 
from the affected source is greater than 1 Mg/yr.
    (D) The wastewater stream contains soluble HAP compounds at an 
annual average concentration greater than 110,000 ppmw, and the total 
soluble and partially soluble HAP load in all wastewater from the PMPU 
exceeds 1 Mg/yr.
    (ii) Designate wastewater as affected wastewater. For existing 
sources, the owner or operator may elect to designate wastewater streams 
as meeting the criteria of either paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A),(B), or (C) of 
this section. For new sources, the owner or operator may elect to 
designate wastewater streams meeting the criterion in paragraph 
(a)(1)(i)(D) or for wastewater known to contain no soluble HAP, as 
meeting the criterion in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section. For 
designated wastewater the procedures specified in paragraphs 
(a)(1)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section shall be followed, except as 
specified in paragraphs (g)(8)(i), (g)(9)(i), and (g)(10) of this 
section. The owner or operator is not required to determine the annual 
average concentration or load for each designated wastewater stream for 
the purposes of this section.
    (A) From the POD for the wastewater stream that is designated as an 
affected wastewater stream to the location where the owner or operator 
elects to designate such wastewater stream as an affected wastewater 
stream, the owner or operator shall comply with all applicable emission 
suppression requirements specified in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this 
section.
    (B) From the location where the owner or operator designates a 
wastewater stream as an affected wastewater stream, such wastewater 
stream shall be managed in accordance with all applicable emission 
suppression requirements specified in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this 
section and with the treatment requirements in paragraph (g) of this 
section.
    (iii) Scrubber Effluent. Effluent from a water scrubber that has 
been used to control Table 2 HAP-containing vent streams that are 
controlled in order to meet the process vent requirements in 
Sec. 63.1254 of this subpart is considered an affected wastewater 
stream.
    (2) Requirements for affected wastewater. (i) An owner or operator 
of a facility shall comply with the applicable requirements for 
wastewater tanks, surface impoundments, containers, individual drain 
systems, and oil/water separators as specified in paragraphs (b) through 
(f) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (g)(3) of this 
section.
    (ii) Comply with the applicable requirements for control of soluble 
and partially soluble compounds as specified in paragraph (g) of this 
section. Alternatively, the owner or operator may elect to comply with 
the treatment provisions specified in paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
    (iii) Comply with the applicable monitoring and inspection 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258.
    (iv) Comply with the applicable recordkeeping and reporting 
requirements specified in Secs. 63.1259 and 63.1260.
    (3) Exempt wastewater. The following wastewaters are not subject to 
the wastewater provisions of this part:
    (i) Stormwater from segregated sewers;
    (ii) Water from fire-fighting and deluge systems, including testing 
of such systems;
    (iii) Spills; and
    (iv) Water from safety showers.
    (4) Requirements for multiphase discharges. The owner or operator 
shall not discharge a separate phase that can be isolated through 
gravity separation from the aqueous phase to a waste management or 
treatment unit, unless

[[Page 45]]

the stream is discharged to a treatment unit in compliance with 
paragraph (g)(13) of this section.
    (5) Offsite treatment or onsite treatment not owned or operated by 
the source. The owner or operator may elect to transfer affected 
wastewater streams that contain less than 50 ppmw of partially soluble 
HAP or a residual removed from such affected wastewater to an onsite 
treatment operation not owned or operated by the owner or operator of 
the source generating the wastewater or residual, or to an offsite 
treatment operation, provided that the waste management units up to the 
activated sludge unit are covered or the owner or operator demonstrates 
that less than 5 percent of the total soluble HAP is emitted from the 
these units.
    (i) The owner or operator transferring the wastewater or residual 
shall:
    (A) Comply with the provisions specified in paragraphs (b) through 
(f) of this section for each waste management unit that receives or 
manages affected wastewater or a residual removed from affected 
wastewater prior to shipment or transport.
    (B) Include a notice with each shipment or transport of affected 
wastewater or residual removed from affected wastewater. The notice 
shall state that the affected wastewater or residual contains organic 
HAP that are to be treated in accordance with the provisions of this 
subpart. When the transport is continuous or ongoing (for example, 
discharge to a publicly-owned treatment works), the notice shall be 
submitted to the treatment operator initially and whenever there is a 
change in the required treatment. The owner or operator shall keep a 
record of the notice in accordance with Sec. 63.1259(g).
    (ii) The owner or operator may not transfer the affected wastewater 
or residual unless the transferee has submitted to the EPA a written 
certification that the transferee will manage and treat any affected 
wastewater or residual removed from affected wastewater received from a 
source subject to the requirements of this subpart in accordance with 
the requirements of either:
    (A) Paragraphs (b) through (i) of this section; or
    (B) Subpart D of this part if alternative emission limitations have 
been granted the transferor in accordance with those provisions; or
    (C) Section 63.6(g).
    (iii) The certifying entity may revoke the written certification by 
sending a written statement to the EPA and the owner or operator giving 
at least 90 days notice that the certifying entity is rescinding 
acceptance of responsibility for compliance with the regulatory 
provisions listed in this paragraph. Upon expiration of the notice 
period, the owner or operator may not transfer the wastewater stream or 
residual to the treatment operation.
    (iv) By providing this written certification to the EPA, the 
certifying entity accepts responsibility for compliance with the 
regulatory provisions listed in paragraph (a)(5)(ii) of this section 
with respect to any shipment of wastewater or residual covered by the 
written certification. Failure to abide by any of those provisions with 
respect to such shipments may result in enforcement action by the EPA 
against the certifying entity in accordance with the enforcement 
provisions applicable to violations of these provisions by owners or 
operators of sources.
    (v) Written certifications and revocation statements, to the EPA 
from the transferees of wastewater or residuals shall be signed by the 
responsible official of the certifying entity, provide the name and 
address of the certifying entity, and be sent to the appropriate EPA 
Regional Office at the addresses listed in Sec. 63.13. Such written 
certifications are not transferable by the treater.
    (b) Wastewater tanks. For each wastewater tank that receives, 
manages, or treats affected wastewater or a residual removed from 
affected wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements of either paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section as 
specified in Table 6 of this subpart.
    (1) The owner or operator shall operate and maintain a fixed roof 
except when the contents of the wastewater tank are heated, treated by 
means of an exothermic reaction, or sparged, during which time the owner 
or operator shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 
(b)(2) of

[[Page 46]]

this section. For the purposes of this paragraph, the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section are satisfied by operating and 
maintaining a fixed roof if the owner or operator demonstrates that the 
total soluble and partially soluble HAP emissions from the wastewater 
tank are no more than 5 percent higher than the emissions would be if 
the contents of the wastewater tank were not heated, treated by an 
exothermic reaction, or sparged.
    (2) The owner or operator shall comply with the requirements in 
paragraphs (b)(3) through (9) of this section and shall operate and 
maintain one of the emission control techniques listed in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) A fixed roof and a closed-vent system that routes the organic 
HAP vapors vented from the wastewater tank to a control device; or
    (ii) A fixed roof and an internal floating roof that meets the 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.119(b), with the differences noted in 
Sec. 63.1257(c)(3)(i) through (iii) for the purposes of this subpart; or
    (iii) An external floating roof that meets the requirements 
specified in Secs. 63.119(c), 63.120(b)(5), and 63.120(b)(6), with the 
differences noted in Sec. 63.1257(c)(3)(i) through (v) for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (3) If the owner or operator elects to comply with the requirements 
of paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, the fixed roof shall meet the 
requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, the control device 
shall meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, and 
the closed-vent system shall meet the requirements of paragraph 
(b)(3)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The fixed roof shall meet the following requirements:
    (A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, the 
fixed roof and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and 
gauge wells) shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements 
specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed position (e.g., 
covered by a lid) at all times that the wastewater tank contains 
affected wastewater or residual removed from affected wastewater except 
when it is necessary to use the opening for wastewater sampling, 
removal, or for equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
    (ii) The control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected 
in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, 
the closed-vent system shall be inspected in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iv) For any fixed roof tank and closed-vent system that is operated 
and maintained under negative pressure, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (4) If the owner or operator elects to comply with the requirements 
of paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, the floating roof shall be 
inspected according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.120(a)(2) and 
(3), with the differences noted in Sec. 63.1257(c)(3)(iv) for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (5) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, if the 
owner or operator elects to comply with the requirements of paragraph 
(b)(2)(iii) of this section, seal gaps shall be measured according to 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.120(b)(2)(i) through (b)(4) and the 
wastewater tank shall be inspected to determine compliance with 
Sec. 63.120(b)(5) and (6) according to the schedule specified in 
Sec. 63.120(b)(1)(i) through (iii).
    (6) If the owner or operator determines that it is unsafe to perform 
the seal gap measurements specified in Sec. 63.120(b)(2)(i) through 
(b)(4) or to inspect the wastewater tank to determine compliance with 
Sec. 63.120(b)(5) and (6) because the floating roof appears to be 
structurally unsound and poses an imminent or potential danger to 
inspecting personnel, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements in either paragraph (b)(6)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall empty and remove the wastewater 
tank from service within 45 calendar days of determining that the roof 
is unsafe. If the wastewater tank cannot be emptied within 45 calendar 
days, the owner or operator may utilize up to two extensions of up to 30 
additional

[[Page 47]]

calendar days each. Documentation of a decision to utilize an extension 
shall include an explanation of why it was unsafe to perform the 
inspection or seal gap measurement, shall document that alternate 
storage capacity is unavailable, and shall specify a schedule of actions 
that will ensure that the wastewater tank will be emptied as soon as 
possible.
    (7) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, each 
wastewater tank shall be inspected initially, and semiannually 
thereafter, for improper work practices in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(g). For wastewater tanks, improper work practice includes, 
but is not limited to, leaving open any access door or other opening 
when such door or opening is not in use.
    (8) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, each 
wastewater tank shall be inspected for control equipment failures as 
defined in paragraph (b)(8)(i) of this section according to the schedule 
in paragraphs (b)(8)(ii) and (iii) of this section in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(g).
    (i) Control equipment failures for wastewater tanks include, but are 
not limited to, the conditions specified in paragraphs (b)(8)(i)(A) 
through (I) of this section.
    (A) The floating roof is not resting on either the surface of the 
liquid or on the leg supports.
    (B) There is stored liquid on the floating roof.
    (C) A rim seal is detached from the floating roof.
    (D) There are holes, tears, cracks or gaps in the rim seal or seal 
fabric of the floating roof.
    (E) There are visible gaps between the seal of an internal floating 
roof and the wall of the wastewater tank.
    (F) There are gaps between the metallic shoe seal or the liquid 
mounted primary seal of an external floating roof and the wall of the 
wastewater tank that exceed 212 square centimeters per meter of tank 
diameter or the width of any portion of any gap between the primary seal 
and the tank wall exceeds 3.81 centimeters.
    (G) There are gaps between the secondary seal of an external 
floating roof and the wall of the wastewater tank that exceed 21.2 
square centimeters per meter of tank diameter or the width of any 
portion of any gap between the secondary seal and the tank wall exceeds 
1.27 centimeters.
    (H) Where a metallic shoe seal is used on an external floating roof, 
one end of the metallic shoe does not extend into the stored liquid or 
one end of the metallic shoe does not extend a minimum vertical distance 
of 61 centimeters above the surface of the stored liquid.
    (I) A gasket, joint, lid, cover, or door has a crack or gap, or is 
broken.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall inspect for the control equipment 
failures in paragraphs (b)(8)(i)(A) through (H) according to the 
schedule specified in paragraphs (b)(4) and (5) of this section.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall inspect for the control equipment 
failures in paragraph (b)(8)(i)(I) of this section initially, and 
semiannually thereafter.
    (9) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when an 
improper work practice or a control equipment failure is identified, 
first efforts at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days 
after identification and repair shall be completed within 45 calendar 
days after identification. If a failure that is detected during 
inspections required by this section cannot be repaired within 45 
calendar days and if the tank cannot be emptied within 45 calendar days, 
the owner or operator may utilize up to two extensions of up to 30 
additional calendar days each. Documentation of a decision to utilize an 
extension shall include a description of the failure, shall document 
that alternate storage capacity is unavailable, and shall specify a 
schedule of actions that will ensure that the control equipment will be 
repaired or the tank will be emptied as soon as practical.
    (c) Surface impoundments. For each surface impoundment that 
receives, manages, or treats affected wastewater or a residual removed 
from affected wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(1), (2), and (3) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall operate and maintain on each surface 
impoundment either a cover (e.g., air-supported structure or rigid 
cover) and a

[[Page 48]]

closed-vent system that routes the organic hazardous air pollutants 
vapors vented from the surface impoundment to a control device in 
accordance with paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (iii), (iv), and (v) of this 
section, or a floating flexible membrane cover as specified in paragraph 
(c)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The cover and all openings shall meet the following 
requirements:
    (A) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(iv) of this section, the 
cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge 
wells) shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements specified 
in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed position (e.g., 
covered by a lid) at all times that affected wastewater or residual 
removed from affected wastewater is in the surface impoundment except 
when it is necessary to use the opening for sampling, removal, or for 
equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
    (C) The cover shall be used at all times that affected wastewater or 
residual removed from affected wastewater is in the surface impoundment 
except during removal of treatment residuals in accordance with 40 CFR 
268.4 or closure of the surface impoundment in accordance with 40 CFR 
264.228.
    (ii) Floating flexible membrane covers shall meet the requirements 
specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(ii)(A) through (F) of this section.
    (A) The floating flexible cover shall be designed to float on the 
liquid surface during normal operations, and to form a continuous 
barrier over the entire surface area of the liquid.
    (B) The cover shall be fabricated from a synthetic membrane material 
that is either:
    (1) High density polyethylene (HDPE) with a thickness no less than 
2.5 millimeters (100 mils); or
    (2) A material or a composite of different materials determined to 
have both organic permeability properties that are equivalent to those 
of the material listed in paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(B)(1) of this section, 
and chemical and physical properties that maintain the material 
integrity for the intended service life of the material.
    (C) The cover shall be installed in a manner such that there are no 
visible cracks, holes, gaps, or other open spaces between cover section 
seams or between the interface of the cover edge and its foundation 
mountings.
    (D) Except as provided for in paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(E) of this 
section, each opening in the floating membrane cover shall be equipped 
with a closure device designed to operate such that when the closure 
device is secured in the closed position there are no visible cracks, 
holes, gaps, or other open spaces in the closure device or between the 
perimeter of the cover opening and the closure device.
    (E) The floating membrane cover may be equipped with one or more 
emergency cover drains for removal of stormwater. Each emergency cover 
drain shall be equipped with a slotted membrane fabric cover that covers 
at least 90 percent of the area of the opening or a flexible fabric 
sleeve seal.
    (F) The closure devices shall be made of suitable materials that 
will minimize exposure of organic HAP to the atmosphere, to the extent 
practical, and will maintain the integrity of the equipment throughout 
its intended service life. Factors to be considered in designing the 
closure devices shall include: the effects of any contact with the 
liquid and its vapor managed in the surface impoundment; the effects of 
outdoor exposure to wind, moisture, and sunlight; and the operating 
practices used for the surface impoundment on which the floating 
membrane cover is installed.
    (G) Whenever affected wastewater or residual from affected 
wastewater is in the surface impoundment, the floating membrane cover 
shall float on the liquid and each closure device shall be secured in 
the closed position. Opening of closure devices or removal of the cover 
is allowed to provide access to the surface impoundment for performing 
routine inspection, maintenance, or other activities needed for normal 
operations and/or to remove accumulated sludge or other residues from 
the bottom of surface impoundment. Openings shall be maintained in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iii) The control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected 
in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.

[[Page 49]]

    (iv) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this section, the 
closed-vent system shall be inspected in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (v) For any cover and closed-vent system that is operated and 
maintained under negative pressure, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (2) Each surface impoundment shall be inspected initially, and 
semiannually thereafter, for improper work practices and control 
equipment failures in accordance with Sec. 63.1258(g).
    (i) For surface impoundments, improper work practice includes, but 
is not limited to, leaving open any access hatch or other opening when 
such hatch or opening is not in use.
    (ii) For surface impoundments, control equipment failure includes, 
but is not limited to, any time a joint, lid, cover, or door has a crack 
or gap, or is broken.
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when an 
improper work practice or a control equipment failure is identified, 
first efforts at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days 
after identification and repair shall be completed within 45 calendar 
days after identification.
    (d) Containers. For each container that receives, manages, or treats 
affected wastewater or a residual removed from affected wastewater, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 
(d)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall operate and maintain a cover on each 
container used to handle, transfer, or store affected wastewater or a 
residual removed from affected wastewater in accordance with the 
following requirements:
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, if 
the capacity of the container is greater than 0.42 m3, the 
cover and all openings (e.g., bungs, hatches, sampling ports, and 
pressure relief devices) shall be maintained in accordance with the 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (ii) If the capacity of the container is less than or equal to 0.42 
m3, the owner or operator shall comply with either paragraph 
(d)(1)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) The container must meet existing Department of Transportation 
specifications and testing requirements under 49 CFR part 178; or
    (B) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, the 
cover and all openings shall be maintained without leaks as specified in 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iii) The cover and all openings shall be maintained in a closed 
position (e.g., covered by a lid) at all times that affected wastewater 
or a residual removed from affected wastewater is in the container 
except when it is necessary to use the opening for filling, removal, 
inspection, sampling, or pressure relief events related to safety 
considerations.
    (2) For containers with a capacity greater than or equal to 0.42 
m3, either a submerged fill pipe shall be used when a 
container is being filled by pumping with affected wastewater or a 
residual removed from affected wastewater or the container shall be 
located within an enclosure with a closed-vent system that routes the 
organic HAP vapors vented from the container to a control device.
    (i) The submerged fill pipe outlet shall extend to no more than 6 
inches or within two fill pipe diameters of the bottom of the container 
while the container is being filled.
    (ii) The cover shall remain in place and all openings shall be 
maintained in a closed position except for those openings required for 
the submerged fill pipe and for venting of the container to prevent 
physical damage or permanent deformation of the container or cover.
    (3) During treatment of affected wastewater or a residual removed 
from affected wastewater, including aeration, thermal or other 
treatment, in a container, whenever it is necessary for the container to 
be open, the container shall be located within an enclosure with a 
closed-vent system that routes the organic HAP vapors vented from the 
container to a control device.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, the 
enclosure and all openings (e.g., doors, hatches) shall be maintained in 
accordance with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).

[[Page 50]]

    (ii) The control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected 
in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, 
the closed-vent system shall be inspected in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iv) For any enclosure and closed-vent system that is operated and 
maintained under negative pressure, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (4) Each container shall be inspected initially, and semiannually 
thereafter, for improper work practices and control equipment failures 
in accordance with Sec. 63.1258(g).
    (i) For containers, improper work practice includes, but is not 
limited to, leaving open any access hatch or other opening when such 
hatch or opening is not in use.
    (ii) For containers, control equipment failure includes, but is not 
limited to, any time a cover or door has a gap or crack, or is broken.
    (5) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when an 
improper work practice or a control equipment failure is identified, 
first efforts at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days 
after identification and repair shall be completed within 15 calendar 
days after identification.
    (e) Individual drain systems. For each individual drain system that 
receives or manages affected wastewater or a residual removed from 
affected wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements of paragraphs (e) (1), (2), and (3) or with paragraphs (e) 
(4), (5), and (6) of this section.
    (1) If the owner or operator elects to comply with this paragraph, 
the owner or operator shall operate and maintain on each opening in the 
individual drain system a cover and if vented, route the vapors to a 
process or through a closed-vent system to a control device. The owner 
or operator shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) (i) 
through (v) of this section.
    (i) The cover and all openings shall meet the following 
requirements:
    (A) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) of this section, the 
cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports) shall be 
maintained in accordance with the requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (B) The cover and all openings shall be maintained in a closed 
position at all times that affected wastewater or a residual removed 
from affected wastewater is in the drain system except when it is 
necessary to use the opening for sampling or removal, or for equipment 
inspection, maintenance, or repair.
    (ii) The control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected 
in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(1)(iv) of this section, 
the closed-vent system shall be inspected in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iv) For any cover and closed-vent system that is operated and 
maintained under negative pressure, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (v) The individual drain system shall be designed and operated to 
segregate the vapors within the system from other drain systems and the 
atmosphere.
    (2) Each individual drain system shall be inspected initially, and 
semiannually thereafter, for improper work practices and control 
equipment failures, in accordance with Sec. 63.1258(g).
    (i) For individual drain systems, improper work practice includes, 
but is not limited to, leaving open any access hatch or other opening 
when such hatch or opening is not in use for sampling or removal, or for 
equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
    (ii) For individual drain systems, control equipment failure 
includes, but is not limited to, any time a joint, lid, cover, or door 
has a gap or crack, or is broken.
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when an 
improper work practice or a control equipment failure is identified, 
first efforts at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days 
after identification and repair shall be completed within 15 calendar 
days after identification.
    (4) If the owner or operator elects to comply with this paragraph, 
the owner

[[Page 51]]

or operator shall comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e)(4) (i) 
through (iii) of this section:
    (i) Each drain shall be equipped with water seal controls or a 
tightly fitting cap or plug. The owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraphs (e)(4)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) For each drain equipped with a water seal, the owner or operator 
shall ensure that the water seal is maintained. For example, a flow-
monitoring device indicating positive flow from a main to a branch water 
line supplying a trap or water being continuously dripped into the trap 
by a hose could be used to verify flow of water to the trap. Visual 
observation is also an acceptable alternative.
    (B) If a water seal is used on a drain receiving affected 
wastewater, the owner or operator shall either extend the pipe 
discharging the wastewater below the liquid surface in the water seal of 
the receiving drain, or install a flexible shield (or other enclosure 
which restricts wind motion across the open area between the pipe and 
the drain) that encloses the space between the pipe discharging the 
wastewater to the drain receiving the wastewater. (Water seals which are 
used on hubs receiving wastewater that is not subject to the provisions 
of this subpart for the purpose of eliminating cross ventilation to 
drains carrying affected wastewater are not required to have a flexible 
cap or extended subsurface discharging pipe.)
    (ii) Each junction box shall be equipped with a tightly fitting 
solid cover (i.e., no visible gaps, cracks, or holes) which shall be 
kept in place at all times except during inspection and maintenance. If 
the junction box is vented, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements in paragraph (e)(4)(ii) (A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) The junction box shall be vented to a process or through a 
closed-vent system to a control device. The closed-vent system shall be 
inspected in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1258(h) and the 
control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected in accordance 
with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (B) If the junction box is filled and emptied by gravity flow (i.e., 
there is no pump) or is operated with no more than slight fluctuations 
in the liquid level, the owner or operator may vent the junction box to 
the atmosphere provided that the junction box complies with the 
requirements in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(B) (1) and (2) of this section.
    (1) The vent pipe shall be at least 90 centimeters in length and no 
greater than 10.2 centimeters in nominal inside diameter.
    (2) Water seals shall be installed and maintained at the wastewater 
entrance(s) to or exit from the junction box restricting ventilation in 
the individual drain system and between components in the individual 
drain system. The owner or operator shall demonstrate (e.g., by visual 
inspection or smoke test) upon request by the Administrator that the 
junction box water seal is properly designed and restricts ventilation.
    (iii) Each sewer line shall not be open to the atmosphere and shall 
be covered or enclosed in a manner so as to have no visible gaps or 
cracks in joints, seals, or other emission interfaces. (Note: This 
provision applies to sewers located inside and outside of buildings.)
    (5) Equipment used to comply with paragraphs (e)(4) (i), (ii), or 
(iii) of this section shall be inspected as follows:
    (i) Each drain using a tightly fitting cap or plug shall be visually 
inspected initially, and semiannually thereafter, to ensure caps or 
plugs are in place and that there are no gaps, cracks, or other holes in 
the cap or plug.
    (ii) Each junction box shall be visually inspected initially, and 
semiannually thereafter, to ensure that there are no gaps, cracks, or 
other holes in the cover.
    (iii) The unburied portion of each sewer line shall be visually 
inspected initially, and semiannually thereafter, for indication of 
cracks or gaps that could result in air emissions.
    (6) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when a gap, 
hole, or crack is identified in a joint or cover, first efforts at 
repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after identification, 
and repair shall be completed

[[Page 52]]

within 15 calendar days after identification.
    (f) Oil-water separators. For each oil-water separator that 
receives, manages, or treats affected wastewater or a residual removed 
from affected wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements of paragraphs (f)(1) through (6) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall maintain one of the following:
    (i) A fixed roof and a closed-vent system that routes the organic 
HAP vapors vented from the oil-water separator to a control device. The 
fixed roof, closed-vent system, and control device shall meet the 
requirements specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section;
    (ii) A floating roof that meets the requirements in 40 CFR 60.693-
2(a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii), (a)(2), (a)(3), and (a)(4). For portions of the 
oil-water separator where it is infeasible to construct and operate a 
floating roof, such as over the weir mechanism, the owner or operator 
shall operate and maintain a fixed roof, closed-vent system, and control 
device that meet the requirements specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this 
section.
    (2) A fixed roof shall meet the requirements of paragraph (f)(2)(i) 
of this section, a control device shall meet the requirements of 
paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section, and a closed-vent system shall 
meet the requirements of (f)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The fixed roof shall meet the following requirements:
    (A) Except as provided in (f)(2)(iv) of this section, the fixed roof 
and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells) 
shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position 
(e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that 
the oil-water separator contains affected wastewater or a residual 
removed from affected wastewater except when it is necessary to use the 
opening for sampling or removal, or for equipment inspection, 
maintenance, or repair.
    (ii) The control device shall be designed, operated, and inspected 
in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (f)(2)(iv) of this section, 
the closed-vent system shall be inspected in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (iv) For any fixed-roof and closed-vent system that is operated and 
maintained under negative pressure, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.1258(h).
    (3) If the owner or operator elects to comply with the requirements 
of paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, seal gaps shall be measured 
according to the procedures specified in 40 CFR part 60, subpart QQQ 
Sec. 60.696(d)(1) and the schedule specified in paragraphs (f)(3)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) Measurement of primary seal gaps shall be performed within 60 
calendar days after installation of the floating roof and introduction 
of affected wastewater or a residual removed from affected wastewater 
and once every 5 years thereafter.
    (ii) Measurement of secondary seal gaps shall be performed within 60 
calendar days after installation of the floating roof and introduction 
of affected wastewater or a residual removed from affected wastewater 
and once every year thereafter.
    (4) Each oil-water separator shall be inspected initially, and 
semiannually thereafter, for improper work practices in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(g). For oil-water separators, improper work practice 
includes, but is not limited to, leaving open or ungasketed any access 
door or other opening when such door or opening is not in use.
    (5) Each oil-water separator shall be inspected for control 
equipment failures as defined in paragraph (f)(5)(i) of this section 
according to the schedule specified in paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) and (iii) 
of this section.
    (i) For oil-water separators, control equipment failure includes, 
but is not limited to, the conditions specified in paragraphs 
(f)(5)(i)(A) through (G) of this section.
    (A) The floating roof is not resting on either the surface of the 
liquid or on the leg supports.

[[Page 53]]

    (B) There is stored liquid on the floating roof.
    (C) A rim seal is detached from the floating roof.
    (D) There are holes, tears, or other open spaces in the rim seal or 
seal fabric of the floating roof.
    (E) There are gaps between the primary seal and the separator wall 
that exceed 67 square centimeters per meter of separator wall perimeter 
or the width of any portion of any gap between the primary seal and the 
separator wall exceeds 3.8 centimeters.
    (F) There are gaps between the secondary seal and the separator wall 
that exceed 6.7 square centimeters per meter of separator wall perimeter 
or the width of any portion of any gap between the secondary seal and 
the separator wall exceeds 1.3 centimeters.
    (G) A gasket, joint, lid, cover, or door has a gap or crack, or is 
broken.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall inspect for the control equipment 
failures in paragraphs (f)(5)(i)(A) through (F) according to the 
schedule specified in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall inspect for control equipment 
failures in paragraph (f)(5)(i)(G) of this section initially, and 
semiannually thereafter.
    (6) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, when an 
improper work practice or a control equipment failure is identified, 
first efforts at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days 
after identification and repair shall be completed within 45 calendar 
days after identification.
    (g) Performance standards for treatment processes managing 
wastewater and/or residuals removed from wastewater. This section 
specifies the performance standards for treating affected wastewater. 
The owner or operator shall comply with the requirements as specified in 
paragraphs (g)(1) through (6) of this section. Where multiple compliance 
options are provided, the options may be used in combination for 
different wastewater and/or for different compounds (e.g., soluble 
versus partially soluble compounds) in the same wastewater, except where 
otherwise provided in this section. Once affected wastewater or a 
residual removed from affected wastewater has been treated in accordance 
with this subpart, it is no longer subject to the requirements of this 
subpart.
    (1) Existing source. For a wastewater stream at an existing source 
that exceeds or is designated to exceed the concentration and load 
criteria in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall comply with a control option in paragraph (g)(8) of this 
section. For a wastewater stream at an existing source that exceeds the 
concentration and load criteria in either paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) or (C) 
of this section, the owner or operator shall comply with a control 
option in paragraph (g)(8) of this section and a control option in 
paragraph (g)(9) of this section. As an alternative to the control 
options in paragraphs (g)(8) and (g)(9) of this section, the owner or 
operator may comply with a control option in either paragraph (g)(10), 
(11) or (13) of this section, as applicable.
    (2) New source. For a wastewater stream at a new source that exceeds 
or is designated to exceed the concentration and load criteria in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section, the owner or operator shall 
comply with a control option in paragraph (g)(8) of this section. For 
wastewater at a new source that exceeds the concentration and load 
criteria in either paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) or (C) of this section, but 
does not exceed the criteria in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(D) of this section, 
the owner or operator shall comply with a control option in paragraph 
(g)(8) of this section and a control option in paragraph (g)(9) of this 
section. As an alternative to the control options in paragraphs (g)(8) 
and/or (9) of this section, the owner or operator may comply with a 
control option in either paragraph (g)(10), (11), or (13) of this 
section, as applicable. For a wastewater stream at a new source that 
exceeds or is designated to exceed the concentration and load criteria 
in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(D) of this section, the owner or operator shall 
comply with a control option in paragraph (g)(12) or (13) of this 
section.
    (3) Biological treatment processes. Biological treatment processes 
in compliance with this section may be either open or closed biological 
treatment processes as defined in Sec. 63.1251. An open biological 
treatment process in

[[Page 54]]

compliance with this section need not be covered and vented to a control 
device. An open or a closed biological treatment process in compliance 
with this section and using Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(E) or (F) to 
demonstrate compliance is not subject to the requirements of paragraphs 
(b) and (c) of this section. A closed biological treatment process in 
compliance with this section and using Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(G) to 
demonstrate compliance shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 
(b) and (c) of this section. Waste management units upstream of an open 
or closed biological treatment process shall meet the requirements of 
paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section, as applicable.
    (4) Performance tests and design evaluations. If the Resource 
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) option [paragraph (g)(13) of this 
section] or the enhanced biological treatment process for soluble HAP 
compounds option [paragraph (g)(10) of this section] is selected to 
comply with this section, neither a design evaluation nor a performance 
test is required. For any other nonbiological treatment process, and for 
closed biological treatment processes as defined in Sec. 63.1251, the 
owner or operator shall conduct either a design evaluation as specified 
in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(ii) or performance test as specified in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii). For each open biological treatment process as 
defined in Sec. 63.1251, the owner or operator shall conduct a 
performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(E) or (F).
    (5) Control device requirements. When gases are vented from the 
treatment process, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
applicable control device requirements specified in paragraph (h) of 
this section and Sec. 63.1257(e)(3), and the applicable leak inspection 
provisions specified in Sec. 63.1258(h). This requirement is in addition 
to the requirements for treatment systems specified in paragraphs (g)(8) 
through (14) of this section. This requirement does not apply to any 
open biological treatment process that meets the mass removal 
requirements.
    (6) Residuals: general. When residuals result from treating affected 
wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements for 
residuals specified in paragraph (g)(14) of this section.
    (7) Treatment using a series of treatment processes. In all cases 
where the wastewater provisions in this subpart allow or require the use 
of a treatment process or control device to comply with emissions 
limitations, the owner or operator may use multiple treatment processes 
or control devices, respectively. For combinations of treatment 
processes where the wastewater stream is conveyed by hard-piping, the 
owner or operator shall comply with either the requirements of paragraph 
(g)(7)(i) or (ii) of this section. For combinations of treatment 
processes where the wastewater stream is not conveyed by hard-piping, 
the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 
(g)(7)(ii) of this section. For combinations of control devices, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 
(g)(7)(i) of this section.
    (i) Compliance across the combination of all treatment units or 
control devices in series. (A) For combinations of treatment processes, 
the wastewater stream shall be conveyed by hard-piping between the 
treatment processes. For combinations of control devices, the vented gas 
stream shall be conveyed by hard-piping between the control devices.
    (B) For combinations of treatment processes, each treatment process 
shall meet the applicable requirements of paragraphs (b) through (f) of 
this section, except as provided in paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
    (C) The owner or operator shall identify, and keep a record of, the 
combination of treatment processes or of control devices, including 
identification of the first and last treatment process or control 
device. The owner or operator shall include this information as part of 
the treatment process description reported in the Notification of 
Compliance Status.
    (D) The performance test or design evaluation shall determine 
compliance across the combination of treatment processes or control 
devices. If a performance test is conducted, the ``inlet'' shall be the 
point at which the wastewater stream or residual enters the

[[Page 55]]

first treatment process, or the vented gas stream enters the first 
control device. The ``outlet'' shall be the point at which the treated 
wastewater stream exits the last treatment process, or the vented gas 
stream exits the last control device.
    (ii) Compliance across individual units. (A) For combinations of 
treatment processes, each treatment process shall meet the applicable 
requirements of paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section except as 
provided in paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
    (B) The owner or operator shall identify, and keep a record of, the 
combination of treatment processes, including identification of the 
first and last treatment process. The owner or operator shall include 
this information as part of the treatment process description reported 
in the Notification of Compliance Status report.
    (C) The owner or operator shall determine the mass removed or 
destroyed by each treatment process. The performance test or design 
evaluation shall determine compliance for the combination of treatment 
processes by adding together the mass removed or destroyed by each 
treatment process and determine the overall control efficiency of the 
treatment system.
    (8) Control options: Wastewater containing partially soluble HAP 
compounds. The owner or operator shall comply with either paragraph 
(g)(8)(i) or (ii) of this section for the control of partially soluble 
HAP compounds at new or existing sources.
    (i) 50 ppmw concentration option. The owner or operator shall comply 
with paragraphs (g)(8)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) Reduce, by removal or destruction, the concentration of total 
partially soluble HAP compounds to a level less than 50 ppmw as 
determined by the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(B).
    (B) This option shall not be used when the treatment process is a 
biological treatment process. This option shall not be used when the 
wastewater is designated as an affected wastewater as specified in 
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section. Dilution shall not be used to 
achieve compliance with this option.
    (ii) Percent mass removal/destruction option. The owner or operator 
shall reduce, by removal or destruction, the mass of total partially 
soluble HAP compounds by 99 percent or more. The removal destruction 
efficiency shall be determined by the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(C), for noncombustion, nonbiological treatment 
processes; Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(D), for combustion processes; and 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(F) or (G) for biological treatment processes.
    (9) Control options: Wastewater containing soluble HAP compounds. 
The owner or operator shall comply with either paragraph (g)(9)(i) or 
(ii) of this section for the control of soluble HAP compounds at new or 
existing sources.
    (i) 520 ppmw concentration option. The owner or operator shall 
comply with paragraphs (g)(9)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) Reduce, by removal or destruction, the concentration of total 
soluble HAP compounds to a level less than 520 ppmw as determined in the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(B).
    (B) This option shall not be used when the treatment process is a 
biological treatment process. This option shall not be used when the 
wastewater is designated as an affected wastewater as specified in 
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section. Dilution shall not be used to 
achieve compliance with this option.
    (ii) Percent mass removal/destruction option. The owner or operator 
shall reduce, by removal or destruction, the mass of total soluble HAP 
by 90 percent or more. The removal/destruction efficiency shall be 
determined by the procedures in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(C), for 
noncombustion, nonbiological treatment processes; 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(D), for combustion processes; and 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(F) or (G) for biological treatment processes.
    (10) Control option: Enhanced biotreatment for wastewater containing 
soluble HAP. The owner or operator may elect to treat affected 
wastewater streams containing soluble HAP and less than 50 ppmw 
partially soluble HAP in an enhanced biological treatment system, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1251. This option shall not be used when the 
wastewater is designated as an affected wastewater as specified in 
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of

[[Page 56]]

this section. These treatment processes are exempt from the design 
evaluation or performance tests requirements specified in paragraph 
(g)(4) of this section.
    (11) 95-percent mass reduction option, for biological treatment 
processes. The owner or operator of a new or existing source using 
biological treatment for any affected wastewater shall reduce the mass 
of total soluble and partially soluble HAP sent to that biological 
treatment unit by at least 95 percent. All wastewater as defined in 
Sec. 63.1251 entering such a biological treatment unit from PMPU's 
subject to this subpart shall be included in the demonstration of the 
95-percent mass removal. The owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraphs (g)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (g)(11)(iv) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall ensure that all wastewater from PMPU's subject 
to this subpart entering a biological treatment unit are treated to 
destroy at least 95-percent total mass of all soluble and partially 
soluble HAP compounds.
    (ii) For open biological treatment processes, compliance shall be 
determined using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(E). 
For closed aerobic biological treatment processes compliance shall be 
determined using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(E) 
or (G). For closed anaerobic biological treatment processes compliance 
shall be determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(G).
    (iii) For each treatment process or waste management unit that 
receives, manages, or treats wastewater subject to this paragraph, from 
the POD to the biological treatment unit, the owner or operator shall 
comply with paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section for control of 
air emissions. When complying with this paragraph, the term affected 
wastewater in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section shall mean all 
wastewater from PMPU's, not just affected wastewater.
    (iv) If wastewater is in compliance with the requirements in 
paragraph (g)(8), (9), or (12) of this section before entering the 
biological treatment unit, the hazardous air pollutants mass of that 
wastewater is not required to be included in the total mass flow rate 
entering the biological treatment unit for the purpose of demonstrating 
compliance.
    (12) Percent mass removal/destruction option for soluble HAP 
compounds at new sources. The owner or operator of a new source shall 
reduce, by removal or destruction, the mass flow rate of total soluble 
HAP from affected wastewater by 99 percent or more. The removal/
destruction efficiency shall be determined by the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(C), for noncombustion, nonbiological treatment 
processes; Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(D), for combustion processes; and 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(F) or (G) for biological treatment processes.
    (13) Treatment in a RCRA unit option. The owner or operator shall 
treat the affected wastewater or residual in a unit identified in, and 
complying with, paragraph (g)(13)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section. 
These units are exempt from the design evaluation or performance tests 
requirements specified in paragraph (g)(4) of this section and 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2), and from the monitoring requirements specified in 
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section, as well as recordkeeping and 
reporting requirements associated with monitoring and performance tests.
    (i) The wastewater or residual is discharged to a hazardous waste 
incinerator for which the owner or operator has been issued a final 
permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with the requirements of 40 
CFR part 264, subpart O, or has certified compliance with the interim 
status requirements of 40 CFR part 265, subpart O;
    (ii) The wastewater or residual is discharged to a process heater or 
boiler burning hazardous waste for which the owner or operator:
    (A) Has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and 
complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; or
    (B) Has certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 
40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (iii) The wastewater or residual is discharged to an underground 
injection well for which the owner or operator has been issued a final 
permit under 40 CFR part 270 or 40 CFR part 144 and

[[Page 57]]

complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 122. The owner or operator 
shall comply with all applicable requirements of this subpart prior to 
the point where the wastewater enters the underground portion of the 
injection well.
    (14) Residuals. For each residual removed from affected wastewater, 
the owner or operator shall control for air emissions by complying with 
paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section and by complying with one of 
the provisions in paragraphs (g)(14)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) Recycle the residual to a production process or sell the 
residual for the purpose of recycling. Once a residual is returned to a 
production process, the residual is no longer subject to this section.
    (ii) Return the residual to the treatment process.
    (iii) Treat the residual to destroy the total combined mass flow 
rate of soluble and/or partially soluble HAP compounds by 99 percent or 
more, as determined by the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1257(e)(2)(iii)(C) or (D).
    (iv) Comply with the requirements for RCRA treatment options 
specified in paragraph (g)(13) of this section.
    (h) Control devices. For each control device or combination of 
control devices used to comply with the provisions in paragraphs (b) 
through (f) and (g)(5) of this section, the owner or operator shall 
operate and maintain the control device or combination of control 
devices in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (h) (1) 
through (4) of this section.
    (1) Whenever organic HAP emissions are vented to a control device 
which is used to comply with the provisions of this subpart, such 
control device shall be operating.
    (2) The control device shall be designed and operated in accordance 
with paragraph (h)(2) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), or (v) of this section, as 
demonstrated by the provisions in Sec. 63.1257(e)(3).
    (i) An enclosed combustion device (including but not limited to a 
vapor incinerator, boiler, or process heater) shall meet the conditions 
in paragraph (h)(2)(i) (A), (B), or (C) of this section, alone or in 
combination with other control devices. If a boiler or process heater is 
used as the control device, then the vent stream shall be introduced 
into the flame zone of the boiler or process heater.
    (A) Reduce the organic HAP emissions vented to the control device by 
95 percent by weight or greater;
    (B) Achieve an outlet TOC concentration of 20 ppmv on a dry basis 
corrected to 3 percent oxygen. The owner or operator shall use either 
Method 18 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, or any other method or data 
that has been validated according to the applicable procedures in Method 
301 of appendix A of this part; or
    (C) Provide a minimum residence time of 0.5 seconds at a minimum 
temperature of 760 deg.C.
    (ii) A vapor recovery system (including but not limited to a carbon 
adsorption system or condenser), alone or in combination with other 
control devices, shall reduce the organic HAP emissions vented to the 
control device by 95 percent by weight or greater or achieve an outlet 
TOC concentration of 20 ppmv. The 20 ppmv performance standard is not 
applicable to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) or (d) of 
this section.
    (iii) A flare shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b).
    (iv) A scrubber, alone or in combination with other control devices, 
shall reduce the organic HAP emissions in such a manner that 95 weight-
percent is either removed, or destroyed by chemical reaction with the 
scrubbing liquid, or achieve an outlet TOC concentration of 20 ppmv. The 
20 ppmv performance standard is not applicable to compliance with the 
provisions of paragraphs (c) or (d) of this section.
    (v) Any other control device used shall, alone or in combination 
with other control devices, reduce the organic HAP emissions vented to 
the control device by 95 percent by weight or greater or achieve an 
outlet TOC concentration of 20 ppmv. The 20 ppmv performance standard is 
not applicable to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) or 
(d) of this section.
    (3) If the control device is a combustion device, the owner or 
operator shall comply with the requirements in Sec. 63.1252(g) to 
control halogenated vent streams.

[[Page 58]]

    (4) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, if gaps, 
cracks, tears, or holes are observed in ductwork, piping, or connections 
to covers and control devices during an inspection, a first effort to 
repair shall be made as soon as practical but no later than 5 calendar 
days after identification. Repair shall be completed no later than 15 
calendar days after identification or discovery of the defect.
    (i) Delay of repair. Delay of repair of equipment for which a 
control equipment failure or a gap, crack, tear, or hole has been 
identified, is allowed if the repair is technically infeasible without a 
shutdown, as defined in Sec. 63.1251, or if the owner or operator 
determines that emissions of purged material from immediate repair would 
be greater than the emissions likely to result from delay of repair. 
Repair of this equipment shall occur by the end of the next shutdown.
    (1) Delay of repair of equipment for which a control equipment 
failure or a gap, crack, tear, or hole has been identified, is allowed 
if the equipment is emptied or is no longer used to treat or manage 
affected wastewater or residuals removed from affected wastewater.
    (2) Delay of repair of equipment for which a control equipment 
failure or a gap, crack, tear, or hole has been identified is also 
allowed if additional time is necessary due to the unavailability of 
parts beyond the control of the owner or operator. Repair shall be 
completed as soon as practical. The owner or operator who uses this 
provision shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.1259(h) to 
document the reasons that the delay of repair was necessary.



Sec. 63.1257   Test methods and compliance procedures.

    (a) General. Except as specified in paragraph (a)(5) of this 
section, the procedures specified in paragraphs (c), (d), (e), and (f) 
of this section are required to demonstrate initial compliance with 
Secs. 63.1253, 63.1254, 63.1256, and 63.1252(e), respectively. The 
provisions in paragraphs (a) (2) through (3) apply to performance tests 
that are specified in paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section. The 
provisions in paragraph (a)(5) of this section are used to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the alternative standards specified in 
Secs. 63.1253(d) and 63.1254(c). The provisions in paragraph (a)(6) of 
this section are used to comply with the outlet concentration 
requirements specified in Secs. 63.1253(c), 63.1254 (a)(2)(i) and 
(a)(3)(ii)(B), 63.1254(b)(i) and 63.1256(h)(2).
    (1) Design evaluation. To demonstrate that a control device meets 
the required control efficiency, a design evaluation must address the 
composition and organic HAP concentration of the vent stream entering 
the control device. A design evaluation also must address other vent 
stream characteristics and control device operating parameters as 
specified in any one of paragraphs (a)(1) (i) through (vi) of this 
section, depending on the type of control device that is used. If the 
vent stream is not the only inlet to the control device, the efficiency 
demonstration also must consider all other vapors, gases, and liquids, 
other than fuels, received by the control device.
    (i) For an enclosed combustion device used to comply with the 
provisions of 63.1253 (b)(2) or (c)(2), or 63.1256(h)(2)(i)(C) with a 
minimum residence time of 0.5 seconds and a minimum temperature of 
760 deg.C, the design evaluation must document that these conditions 
exist.
    (ii) For a combustion control device that does not satisfy the 
criteria in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, the design evaluation 
must document control efficiency and address the following 
characteristics, depending on the type of control device:
    (A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, the design evaluation must 
consider the autoignition temperature of the organic HAP, must consider 
the vent stream flow rate, and must establish the design minimum and 
average temperature in the combustion zone and the combustion zone 
residence time.
    (B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, the design evaluation shall 
consider the vent stream flow rate and shall establish the design 
minimum and average temperatures across the catalyst bed inlet and 
outlet.
    (C) For a boiler or process heater, the design evaluation shall 
consider the vent stream flow rate; shall establish the design minimum 
and average flame

[[Page 59]]

zone temperatures and combustion zone residence time; and shall describe 
the method and location where the vent stream is introduced into the 
flame zone.
    (iii) For a condenser, the design evaluation shall consider the vent 
stream flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature and shall establish 
the design outlet organic HAP compound concentration level, design 
average temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream, and the design 
average temperatures of the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and 
outlet. The temperature of the gas stream exiting the condenser must be 
measured and used to establish the outlet organic HAP concentration.
    (iv) For a carbon adsorption system that regenerates the carbon bed 
directly onsite in the control device such as a fixed-bed adsorber, the 
design evaluation shall consider the vent stream flow rate, relative 
humidity, and temperature and shall establish the design exhaust vent 
stream organic compound concentration level, adsorption cycle time, 
number and capacity of carbon beds, type and working capacity of 
activated carbon used for carbon beds, design total regeneration stream 
mass or volumetric flow over the period of each complete carbon bed 
regeneration cycle, design carbon bed temperature after regeneration, 
design carbon bed regeneration time, and design service life of carbon. 
For vacuum desorption, the pressure drop shall be included.
    (v) For a carbon adsorption system that does not regenerate the 
carbon bed directly onsite in the control device such as a carbon 
canister, the design evaluation shall consider the vent stream mass or 
volumetric flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature and shall 
establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration 
level, capacity of carbon bed, type and working capacity of activated 
carbon used for carbon bed, and design carbon replacement interval based 
on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source 
operating schedule.
    (vi) For a scrubber, the design evaluation shall consider the vent 
stream composition; constituent concentrations; liquid-to-vapor ratio; 
scrubbing liquid flow rate and concentration; temperature; and the 
reaction kinetics of the constituents with the scrubbing liquid. The 
design evaluation shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic 
compound concentration level and will include the additional information 
in paragraphs (a)(1)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section for trays and a 
packed column scrubber.
    (A) Type and total number of theoretical and actual trays;
    (B) Type and total surface area of packing for entire column, and 
for individual packed sections if column contains more than one packed 
section.
    (2) Calculation of TOC or total organic HAP concentration. The TOC 
concentration or total organic HAP concentration is the sum of the 
concentrations of the individual components. If compliance is being 
determined based on TOC, the owner or operator shall compute TOC for 
each run using Equation 6 of this subpart. If compliance with the 
wastewater provisions is being determined based on total organic HAP, 
the owner or operator shall compute total organic HAP using Equation 6 
of this subpart, except that only the organic HAP compounds shall be 
summed; when determining compliance with paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this 
section, only the soluble and partially soluble HAP compounds shall be 
summed.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.003

where:
    CGT=total concentration of TOC in vented gas stream, 
average of samples, dry basis, ppmv
CGSi,j=concentration of sample components in vented gas 
stream for sample j, dry basis, ppmv
i=identifier for a compound
n=number of components in the sample
j=identifier for a sample
m=number of samples in the sample run

    (3) Percent oxygen correction for combustion control devices. If the 
control device is a combustion device, the TOC or total organic HAP 
concentrations must be corrected to 3 percent oxygen. The

[[Page 60]]

integrated sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3B of 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A shall be used to determine the actual oxygen 
concentration (%02d). The samples shall be taken during the 
same time that the TOC or total organic HAP samples are taken. The 
concentration corrected to 3 percent oxygen (Cd) shall be 
computed using Equation 7 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.004

where:

Cc = concentration of TOC or total organic HAP corrected to 3 
percent oxygen, dry basis, ppmv
Cm = total concentration of TOC in vented gas stream, average 
of samples, dry basis, ppmv
%02d = concentration of oxygen measured in vented gas stream, 
dry basis, percent by volume

    (4) Exemptions from compliance demonstrations. An owner or operator 
using any control device specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (iv) 
of this section is exempt from the initial compliance provisions in 
paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.
    (i) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 
44 megawatts or greater.
    (ii) A boiler or process heater into which the emission stream is 
introduced with the primary fuel.
    (iii) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which 
the owner or operator:
    (A) Has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and 
complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H, or
    (B) Has certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 
40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (iv) A hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator 
has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with 
the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O, or has certified 
compliance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 265, 
subpart O.
    (5) Initial compliance with alternative standard. Initial compliance 
with the alternative standards in Secs. 63.1253(d) and 63.1254(c) is 
demonstrated when the outlet TOC concentration is 20 ppmv or less, and 
the outlet hydrogen halide and halogen concentration is 20 ppmv or less. 
To demonstrate initial compliance, the owner or operator shall be in 
compliance with the monitoring provisions in Sec. 63.1258(b)(5) on the 
initial compliance date. The owner or operator shall use Method 18 to 
determine the predominant organic HAP in the emission stream if the TOC 
monitor is calibrated on the predominant HAP.
    (6) Initial compliance with the 20 ppmv outlet limit. Initial 
compliance with the 20 ppmv TOC and hydrogen halide and halogen 
concentration is demonstrated when the outlet TOC concentration is 20 
ppmv or less, and the outlet hydrogen halide and halogen concentration 
is 20 ppmv or less. To demonstrate initial compliance, the operator 
shall use test methods described in paragraph (b) of this section. The 
owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring provisions in 
Sec. 63.1258(b)(1) through (5) of this subpart on the initial compliance 
date.
    (b) Test methods. When testing is conducted to measure emissions 
from an affected source, the test methods specified in paragraphs (b)(1) 
through (10) of this section shall be used.
    (1) EPA Method 1 or 1A of appendix A of part 60 is used for sample 
and velocity traverses.
    (2) EPA Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of appendix A of part 60 is used for 
velocity and volumetric flow rates.
    (3) EPA Method 3 of appendix A of part 60 is used for gas analysis.
    (4) EPA Method 4 of appendix A of part 60 is used for stack gas 
moisture.
    (5) [Reserved]
    (6) Concentration measurements shall be adjusted to negate the 
dilution effects of introducing nonaffected gaseous streams into the 
vent streams prior to control or measurement. The following methods are 
specified for concentration measurements:
    (i) Method 18 may be used to determine HAP concentration in any 
control device efficiency determination.
    (ii) Method 25 of appendix A of part 60 may be used to determine 
total gaseous nonmethane organic concentration for control efficiency 
determinations in combustion devices.

[[Page 61]]

    (iii) Method 26 of appendix A of part 60 shall be used to determine 
hydrogen chloride concentrations in control device efficiency 
determinations or in the 20 ppmv outlet hydrogen halide concentration 
standard.
    (iv) Method 25A of appendix A of part 60 may be used to determine 
the HAP or TOC concentration for control device efficiency 
determinations under the conditions specified in Method 25 of appendix A 
for direct measurement of an effluent with a flame ionization detector, 
or in demonstrating compliance with the 20 ppmv TOC outlet standard. If 
Method 25A is used to determine the concentration of TOC for the 20 ppmv 
standard, the instrument shall be calibrated on methane or the 
predominant HAP. If calibrating on the predominant HAP, the use of 
Method 25A shall comply with paragraphs (b)(6)(iv)(A) through (C) of 
this section.
    (A) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume.
    (B) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is acceptable 
if the response from the high level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (C) The span value of the analyzer must be less than 100 ppmv.
    (7) Testing conditions for continuous processes. Testing of 
emissions on equipment operating as part of a continuous process will 
consist of three l-hour runs. Gas stream volumetric flow rates shall be 
measured every 15 minutes during each 1-hour run. The HAP concentration 
shall be determined from samples collected in an integrated sample over 
the duration of each l-hour test run, or from grab samples collected 
simultaneously with the flow rate measurements (every 15 minutes). If an 
integrated sample is collected for laboratory analysis, the sampling 
rate shall be adjusted proportionally to reflect variations in flow 
rate. For continuous gas streams, the emission rate used to determine 
compliance shall be the average emission rate of the three test runs.
    (8) Testing and compliance determination conditions for batch 
processes. Testing of emissions on equipment where the flow of gaseous 
emissions is intermittent (batch operations) shall be conducted as 
specified in paragraphs (b)(8)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(9) of this section for 
condensers, testing shall be conducted at absolute worst-case conditions 
or hypothetical worst-case conditions. Gas stream volumetric flow rates 
shall be measured at 15-minute intervals. The HAP or TOC concentration 
shall be determined from samples collected in an integrated sample over 
the duration of the test, or from grab samples collected simultaneously 
with the flow rate measurements (every 15 minutes). If an integrated 
sample is collected for laboratory analysis, the sampling rate shall be 
adjusted proportionally to reflect variations in flow rate. The absolute 
worst-case or hypothetical worst-case conditions shall be characterized 
by the criteria presented in paragraphs (b)(8)(i)(A) and (B)of this 
section. In all cases, a site-specific plan shall be submitted to the 
Administrator for approval prior to testing in accordance with 
Sec. 63.7(c) and Sec. 63.1260(l). The test plan shall include the 
emission profile described in paragraph (b)(8)(ii) of this section.
    (A) Absolute worst-case conditions are defined by the criteria 
presented in paragraph (b)(8)(i)(A)(1) or (2) of this section if the 
maximum load is the most challenging condition for the control device. 
Otherwise, absolute worst-case conditions are defined by the conditions 
in paragraph (b)(8)(i)(A)(3) of this section.
    (1) The period in which the inlet to the control device will contain 
at least 50 percent of the maximum HAP load (in lb) capable of being 
vented to the control device over any 8 hour period. An emission profile 
as described in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section shall be used to 
identify the 8-hour period that includes the maximum projected HAP load.
    (2) A 1-hour period of time in which the inlet to the control device 
will contain the highest HAP mass loading rate, in lb/hr, capable of 
being vented

[[Page 62]]

to the control device. An emission profile as described in paragraph 
(b)(8)(ii)(A) of this section shall be used to identify the 1-hour 
period of maximum HAP loading.
    (3) The period of time when the HAP loading or stream composition 
(including non-HAP) is most challenging for the control device. These 
conditions include, but are not limited to the following:
    (i) Periods when the stream contains the highest combined VOC and 
HAP load, in lb/hr, described by the emission profiles in (b)(8)(ii);
    (ii) Periods when the streams contain HAP constituents that approach 
limits of solubility for scrubbing media;
    (iii) Periods when the streams contain HAP constituents that 
approach limits of adsorptivity for carbon adsorption systems.
    (B) Hypothetical worst-case conditions are simulated test conditions 
that, at a minimum, contain the highest hourly HAP load of emissions 
that would be predicted to be vented to the control device from the 
emissions profile described in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(B) or (C) of this 
section.
    (ii) Emissions profile. The owner or operator may choose to perform 
tests only during those periods of the worst-case conditions that the 
owner or operator selects to control as part of achieving the required 
emission reduction. The owner or operator must develop an emission 
profile for the vent to the control device that describes the 
characteristics of the vent stream at the inlet to the control device 
under worst case conditions. The emission profile shall be developed 
based on any one of the procedures described in (b)(8)(ii)(A) through 
(C) of this section, as required by paragraph (b)(8)(i).
    (A) Emission profile by process. The emission profile must consider 
all emission episodes that could contribute to the vent stack for a 
period of time that is sufficient to include all processes venting to 
the stack and shall consider production scheduling. The profile shall 
describe the HAP load to the device that equals the highest sum of 
emissions from the episodes that can vent to the control device in any 
given hour. Emissions per episode shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. Emissions per 
episode shall be divided by the duration of the episode only if the 
duration of the episode is longer than 1 hour.
    (B) Emission profile by equipment. The emission profile must consist 
of emissions that meet or exceed the highest emissions, in lb/hr, that 
would be expected under actual processing conditions. The profile shall 
describe equipment configurations used to generate the emission events, 
volatility of materials processed in the equipment, and the rationale 
used to identify and characterize the emission events. The emissions may 
be based on using a compound more volatile than compounds actually used 
in the process(es), and the emissions may be generated from all 
equipment in the process(es) or only selected equipment.
    (C) Emission profile by capture and control device limitation. The 
emission profile shall consider the capture and control system 
limitations and the highest emissions, in lb/hr, that can be routed to 
the control device, based on maximum flowrate and concentrations 
possible because of limitations on conveyance and control equipment 
(e.g., fans, LEL alarms and safety bypasses).
    (iii) Three runs, at a minimum of 1 hour each and a maximum of 8 
hours each, are required for performance testing. Each run must occur 
over the same worst-case conditions, as defined in paragraph (b)(8)(i) 
of this section.
    (9) Testing requirements for condensers. For emission streams 
controlled using condensers, continuous direct measurement of condenser 
outlet gas temperature to be used in determining concentrations per the 
design evaluation described in Sec. 63.1257(a)(1)(iii) is required.
    (10) Wastewater testing. Wastewater analysis shall be conducted in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(i), (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this 
section.
    (i) Method 305. Use procedures specified in Method 305 of 40 CFR 
part 63, appendix A and comply with requirements specified in paragraph 
(b)(10)(v) of this section.
    (ii) Method 624, 625, 1624, 1625, or 8270. Use procedures specified 
in Method 624, 625, 1624, 1625, or 8270 of 40 CFR part 136,

[[Page 63]]

appendix A and comply with requirements in paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this 
section.
    (iii) Other EPA Methods. Use procedures specified in the method, 
validate the method using the procedures in paragraph (b)(10)(iii)(A) or 
(B) of this section, and comply with the procedures in paragraph 
(b)(10)(v) of this section.
    (A) Validate the method according to section 5.1 or 5.3 of Method 
301 of 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.
    (B) Follow the procedure as specified in ``Alternative Validation 
Procedure for EPA Waste Methods'' 40 CFR part 63, appendix D.
    (iv) Methods other than an EPA method. Use procedures specified in 
the method, validate the method using the procedures in paragraph 
(b)(10)(iii)(A) of this section, and comply with the requirements in 
paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section.
    (v) Sampling plan. The owner or operator shall prepare a sampling 
plan. Wastewater samples shall be collected using sampling procedures 
which minimize loss of organic compounds during sample collection and 
analysis and maintain sample integrity. The sample plan shall include 
procedures for determining recovery efficiency of the relevant partially 
soluble and soluble HAP compounds. An example of an acceptable sampling 
plan would be one that incorporates similar sampling and sample handling 
requirements to those of Method 25D of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. The 
sampling plan shall be maintained at the facility.
    (c) Initial compliance with storage tank provisions. The owner or 
operator of an affected storage tank shall demonstrate initial 
compliance with Sec. 63.1253(b) or (c), as applicable, by fulfilling the 
requirements of paragraph (c)(1),or (c)(2), or (c)(3) of this section.
    (1) Performance test. If this option is chosen to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the percent reduction requirement of 
Sec. 63.1253(b)(1) or (c)(1)(i), the efficiency of the control device 
shall be calculated using performance test data as specified in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section. Initial compliance 
with the outlet concentration requirement of Sec. 63.1253(b)(2) or 
(c)(1)(ii) is demonstrated by fulfilling the requirements of paragraph 
(a)(6) of this section.
    (i) Equations 8 and 9 of this subpart shall be used to calculate the 
mass rate of total HAP reasonably expected maximum filling rate at the 
inlet and outlet of the control device for standard conditions of 
20 deg.C: where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.005

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.006

where:

Cij, Coj = concentration of sample component j of 
the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, 
respectively, dry basis, ppmv
Ei, Eo = mass rate of total HAP at the inlet and 
outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, kg/hr
Mij, Moj = molecular weight of sample component j 
of the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, 
respectively, gram/gram-mole
Qi, Qo = flow rate of gas stream at the inlet and 
outlet of the control device, respectively, dry standard cubic meter per 
minute
K2 = constant, 2.494  x  10-6 (parts per million) 
-1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/gram) 
(minute/hour), where standard temperature is 20 deg.C
n = number of sample components in the gas stream

    (ii) The percent reduction in total HAP shall be calculated using 
Equation 10 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.007

where:

R = control efficiency of control device, percent
Ei = mass rate of total HAP at the inlet to the control 
device as calculated under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, 
kilograms organic HAP per hour

[[Page 64]]

Eo = mass rate of total HAP at the outlet of the control 
device, as calculated under paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, 
kilograms organic HAP per hour

    (iii) A performance test is not required to be conducted if the 
control device used to comply with Sec. 63.1253 (storage tank 
provisions) is also used to comply with Sec. 63.1254 (process vent 
provisions), and compliance with Sec. 63.1254 has been demonstrated in 
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) Design evaluation. If this option is chosen to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the percent reduction requirement of 
Sec. 63.1253(b) or (c), a design evaluation shall be prepared in 
accordance with the provisions in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. The 
design evaluation shall include documentation demonstrating that the 
control device being used achieves the required control efficiency 
during reasonably expected maximum filling rate.
    (3) Floating roof. If the owner or operator of an affected source 
chooses to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1253(b) or (c) by 
installing a floating roof, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
procedures described in Secs. 63.119(b), (c), (d), and 63.120(a), (b), 
and (c), with the differences noted in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (v) 
of this section for the purposes of this subpart.
    (i) When the term ``storage vessel'' is used in Secs. 63.119 and 
63.120, the definition of ``storage tank'' in Sec. 63.1251 shall apply 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (ii) When December 31, 1992 is referred to in Sec. 63.119, April 2, 
1997 shall apply instead for the purposes of this subpart.
    (iii) When April 22, 1994 is referred to in Sec. 63.119, September 
21, 1998 shall apply instead for the purposes of this subpart.
    (iv) When the phrase ``the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.100 
of subpart F of this part'' is referred to in Sec. 63.120, the phrase 
``the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1250'' shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (v) When the phrase ``the maximum true vapor pressure of the total 
organic HAP's in the stored liquid falls below the values defining Group 
1 storage vessels specified in table 5 or table 6 of this subpart'' is 
referred to in Sec. 63.120(b)(1)(iv), the phrase ``the maximum true 
vapor pressure of the total organic HAP in the stored liquid falls below 
13.1 kPa (1.9 psia)'' shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) Initial compliance with alternative standard. Initial compliance 
with Sec. 63.1253(d) is demonstrated by fulfilling the requirements of 
paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
    (5) Planned maintenance. The owner or operator shall demonstrate 
compliance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1253(e) by including the 
periods of planned routine maintenance specified by date and time in 
each Periodic Report required by Sec. 63.1260.
    (d) Initial compliance with process vent provisions. An owner or 
operator of an affected source complying with the process vent standards 
in Sec. 63.1254 shall demonstrate compliance using the procedures 
described in paragraphs (d)(1) through (4) of this section.
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, initial 
compliance with the process vent standards in Sec. 63.1254 shall be 
demonstrated using the procedures specified in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) 
through (iv), as applicable.
    (i) Initial compliance with Sec. 63.1254(a)(1)(i) is demonstrated 
when the actual emissions of HAP from the sum of all process vents 
within a process that do not meet the criteria specified in 
Sec. 63.1254(a)(3) is less than or equal to 2,000 lb/yr. Initial 
compliance with Sec. 63.1254(a)(1)(ii) is demonstrated when the 
uncontrolled emissions of HAP from the sum of all process vents within a 
process is less than or equal to 100 lb/yr. Uncontrolled HAP emissions 
and controlled HAP emissions shall be determined using the procedures 
described in paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section.
    (ii) Initial compliance with the percent reduction requirements in 
Secs. 63.1254(a)(2), (a)(3), and (b) is demonstrated by:
    (A) Determining controlled HAP emissions using the procedures 
described in paragraph (d)(3) of this section and uncontrolled HAP 
emissions

[[Page 65]]

determined using the procedures described in paragraph (d)(2) of this 
section and demonstrating that the reductions required by 
Secs. 63.1254(a)(2), (a)(3), and (b) are met; or
    (B) Controlling the process vents using a device meeting the 
criteria specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
    (iii) Initial compliance with the outlet concentration requirements 
in Sec. 63.1254(a)(2)(ii) and (3) is demonstrated when the outlet TOC 
concentration is 20 ppmv or less and the outlet hydrogen halide and 
halogen concentration is 20 ppmv or less. The owner or operator shall 
demonstrate compliance by fulfilling the requirements in paragraph 
(a)(6) of this section.
    (iv) Initial compliance with Sec. 63.1254(c) is demonstrated by 
fulfilling the requirements of paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
    (2) Uncontrolled emissions. An owner or operator of an affected 
source complying with the emission limitation required by 
Sec. 63.1254(a)(1), or emissions reductions specified in 
Sec. 63.1254(a)(2), (a)(3), or (b), for each process vent within a 
process, shall calculate uncontrolled emissions from all equipment in 
the process according to the procedures described in paragraph (d)(2)(i) 
or (ii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Emission estimation procedures. Owners or operators shall 
determine uncontrolled emissions of HAP using measurements and/or 
calculations for each batch emission episode within each unit operation 
according to the engineering evaluation methodology in paragraphs 
(d)(2)(i)(A) through (H) of this section. Except where variations are 
noted, individual HAP partial pressures in multicomponent systems shall 
be determined by the following methods: If the components are miscible 
in one another, use Raoult's law to calculate the partial pressures; if 
the solution is a dilute aqueous mixture, use Henry's law to calculate 
partial pressures; if Raoult's law or Henry's law are not appropriate or 
available, use experimentally obtained activity coefficients or models 
such as the group-contribution models, to predict activity coefficients, 
or assume the components of the system behave independently and use the 
summation of all vapor pressures from the HAP as the total HAP partial 
pressure. Chemical property data can be obtained from standard reference 
texts.
    (A) Vapor displacement. Emissions from vapor displacement due to 
transfer of material shall be calculated using Equation 11 of this 
subpart. The individual HAP partial pressures may be calculated using 
Raoult's law.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.008

where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
V = volume of gas displaced from the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel vapor space; absolute
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP
MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream i = identifier for a 
HAP compound

    (B) Purging. Emissions from purging shall be calculated using 
Equation 12 of this subpart. The partial pressures of individual 
condensable compounds may be calculated using Raoult's law, the pressure 
of the vessel vapor space may be set equal to 760 mmHg, and the partial 
pressure of HAP shall be assumed to be 25 percent of the saturated value 
if the purge flow rate is greater than 100 standard cubic feet per 
minute (scfm).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.009


[[Page 66]]


Where:
E = mass of HAP emitted
V = purge flow rate at the temperature and pressure of the vessel vapor 
space
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel vapor space; absolute
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP
Pj = partial pressure of individual condensable VOC compounds 
(including HAP)
PT = pressure of the vessel vapor space
MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP
t = time of purge
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound
j = identifier for a condensable compound
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
stream

    (C) Heating. Emissions caused by the heating of a vessel to a 
temperature equal to or lower than 10 K below the boiling point shall be 
calculated using the procedures in either paragraph (d)(2)(i)(C)(1) or 
(3) of this section. Emissions caused by heating a vessel to a 
temperature that is higher than 10 K below the boiling point and less 
than the boiling point, must be calculated using the procedures in 
either paragraph (d)(2)(i)(C) (2) or (3) of this section. If the 
contents of a vessel are heated to the boiling point, emissions must be 
calculated using the procedures in paragraph (d)(2)(i)(C)(4) of this 
section.
    (1) This paragraph describes procedures to calculate emissions if 
the final temperature to which the vessel contents are heated is 10 K 
below the boiling point of the HAP in the vessel, or lower. The owner or 
operator shall calculate the mass of HAP emitted per episode using 
either Equation 13 or 14 of this subpart. The moles of noncondensable 
gas displaced are calculated using Equation 15 of this subpart. The 
initial and final pressure of the noncondensable gas in the vessel shall 
be calculated using Equation 16 of this subpart. The average molecular 
weight of HAP in the displaced gas shall be calculated using Equation 17 
of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.010

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.011

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.012

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.013


[[Page 67]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.014

Where:

E = mass of HAP vapor displaced from the vessel being heated
xi = mole fraction of each HAP in the liquid phase
xj = mole fraction of each condensable VOC (including HAP) in 
the liquid phase
(Pi*) = vapor pressure of each HAP in the vessel headspace at 
any temperature between the initial and final heatup temperatures, mmHg
(Pj*) = vapor pressure of each condensable VOC (including 
HAP) in the vessel headspace at any temperature between the initial and 
final heatup temperatures, mmHg
760 = atmospheric pressure, mmHg
MWHAP = the average molecular weight of HAP present in the 
displaced gas
 = number of moles of noncondensable gas displaced
V = volume of free space in the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = initial temperature of vessel contents, absolute
T2 = final temperature of vessel contents, absolute
Pan = partial pressure of noncondensable gas in the vessel 
headspace at initial (n=1) and final (n=2) temperature
Patm = atmospheric pressure (when  is used 
in Equation 13 of this subpart, Patm may be set equal to 760 
mmHg for any vessel)
(Pj)Tn = partial pressure of each condensable 
compound (including HAP) in the vessel headspace at the initial 
temperature (n=1) and final (n=2) temperature
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the displaced 
vapor
j = identifier for a condensable compound
(Pi)Tn = partial pressure of each HAP in the 
vessel headspace at initial (T1) and final (T2) 
temperature; [for use in Equation 13, replace 
(Pi)T1+(Pi)T2 with 
Pi at the temperature used to calculate vapor pressure of HAP 
in Equation 13]
MWi = molecular weight of each HAP
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound

    (2) If the vessel contents are heated to a temperature that is 
higher than 10 K below the boiling point and less than the boiling 
point, emissions must be calculated using the procedures in paragraph 
(d)(2)(i)(C)(2)(i), or (ii), or (iii) of this section.
    (i) Use Equation 13 of this subpart. In Equation 13 of this subpart, 
the HAP vapor pressures must be determined at the temperature 10 K below 
the boiling point. In the calculation of  for 
Equation 13 of this subpart, T2 must be the temperature 10 K 
below the boiling point, and Pa2 must be determined at the 
temperature 10 K below the boiling point. In the calculation of 
MWHAP, the HAP partial pressures must be determined at the 
temperature 10 K below the boiling point.
    (ii) Use Equation 14 of this subpart. In Equation 14 of this 
subpart, the HAP partial pressures must be deter mined at the 
temperature 10 K below the boiling point. In the calculation of 
 for Equation 14 of this subpart, T2 must 
be the temperature 10 K below the boiling point, and Pa2 must 
be determined at the temperature 10 K below the boiling point. In the 
calculation of MWHAP, the HAP partial pressures must be 
determined at the temperature 10 K below the boiling point.
    (iii) Use Equation 14 of this subpart over specific temperature 
increments. If the initial temperature is lower than 10 K below the 
boiling point, emissions must be calculated as the sum over two 
increments; one increment is from the initial temperature to 10 K below 
the boiling point, and the second is from 10 K below the boiling point 
to the lower of either the final temperature or the temperature 5 K 
below the boiling

[[Page 68]]

point. If the initial temperature is higher than 10 K below the boiling 
point, emissions are calculated over one increment from the initial 
temperature to the lower of either the final temperature or the 
temperature 5 K below the boiling point.
    (3)(i) Emissions caused by heating a vessel are calculated using 
Equation 18 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.015

Where:

E = mass of HAP vapor displaced from the vessel being heated
Navg = average gas space molar volume during the heating 
process
PT= total pressure in the vessel
Pi,1 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
T1
Pi,2 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
T2
MWHAP = average molecular weight of the HAP compounds
ni,1 = number of moles of condensable in the vessel headspace 
at T1
ni,2 = number of moles of condensable in the vessel headspace 
at T2
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream

    (ii) The average gas space molar volume during the heating process 
is calculated using Equation 19 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.016

Where:

Navg = average gas space molar volume during the heating 
process
V = volume of free space in vessel
PT = total pressure in the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = initial temperature of the vessel
T2 = final temperature of the vessel

    (iii) The difference in the number of moles of condensable in the 
vessel headspace between the initial and final temperatures is 
calculated using Equation 20 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.017

Where:

V = volume of free space in vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = initial temperature in the vessel
T2 = final temperature in the vessel
Pi,1 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
T1
Pi,2 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
T2
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream

    (4) If the vessel contents are heated to the boiling point, 
emissions must be

[[Page 69]]

calculated using the procedure in paragraphs (d)(2)(i)(c)(4)(i) and (ii) 
of this section.
    (i) Use either of the procedures in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(B)(3) of 
this section to calculate the emissions from heating to the boiling 
point (note that Pa2=0 in the calculation of; and
    (ii) While boiling, the vessel must be operated with a properly 
operated process condenser. An initial demonstration that a process 
condenser is properly operated is required for vessels that operate 
process condensers without secondary condensers that are air pollution 
control devices. The owner or operator must either measure the condenser 
exhaust gas temperature and show it is less than the boiling point of 
the substance(s) in the vessel, or perform a material balance around the 
vessel and condenser to show that at least 99 percent of the material 
vaporized while boiling is condensed. Uncontrolled emissions are assumed 
to be zero under these conditions. The initial demonstration shall be 
conducted for all appropriate operating scenarios and documented in the 
Notification of Compliance report described in Sec. 63.1260(f).
    (D) Depressurization. Emissions from depressurization shall be 
calculated using the procedures in either paragraphs (d)(2)(i)(D)(1) 
through (4), paragraphs (d)(2)(i)(D)(5) through (9), or paragraph 
(d)(2)(i)(D)(10) of this section.
    (1) Equations 21 and 22 of this subpart are used to calculate the 
initial and final volumes of noncondensable gas present in the vessel, 
adjusted to atmospheric pressure. The HAP partial pressures may be 
calculated using Raoult's law.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.018

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.019

Where:

Vnc1 = initial volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
Vnc2 = final volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
V = free volume in the vessel being depressurized
Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 23 of this subpart, mmHg
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 24 of this subpart, mmHg
760 = atmospheric pressure, mmHg

    (2) The initial and final partial pressures of the noncondensable 
gas in the vessel are determined using Equations 23 and 24 of this 
subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.020

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.021

Where:
Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas
P1 = initial vessel pressure
P2 = final vessel pressure
Pj* = vapor pressure of each condensable (including HAP) in 
the emission stream
xj = mole fraction of each condensable (including HAP) in the 
emission stream
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
stream
j = identifier for a condensable compound

(3) The average ratio of moles of noncondensable to moles of HAP is 
calculated using Equation 25 of this subpart:

[[Page 70]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.022

Where:

nR = average ratio of moles of noncondensable to moles of HAP
Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 23 of this subpart
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 24 of this subpart
Pi* = vapor pressure of each individual HAP
xi = mole fraction of each individual HAP in the liquid phase
n = number of HAP compounds
i = identifier for a HAP compound

    (4) The mass of HAP emitted shall be calculated using Equation 26 of 
this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.023

Where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
Vnc1 = initial volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel, as 
calculated using Equation 21 of this subpart
Vnc2 = final volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel, as 
calculated using Equation 22 of this subpart nR = average 
ratio of moles of noncondensable to moles of HAP, as calculated using 
Equation 25 of this subpart
Patm = atmospheric pressure, standard
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel, absolute
MWHAP = average molecular weight of the HAP, as calculated 
using Equation 17 of this subpart

    (5) The moles of HAP vapor initially in the vessel are calculated 
using the ideal gas law using Equation 27 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.024

Where:

YHAP = mole fraction of HAP (the sum of the individual HAP 
fractions, Yi)
V = free volume in the vessel being depressurized
P1 = initial vessel pressure
R = ideal gas law constant
T = vessel temperature, absolute

    (6) The initial and final moles of noncondensable gas present in the 
vessel are calculated using Equations 28 and 29 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.025

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.026

Where:

n1 = initial number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
vessel
n2 = final number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
vessel
V = free volume in the vessel being depressurized
Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 23 of this subpart
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 24 of this subpart
R = ideal gas law constant

[[Page 71]]

T = temperature, absolute

    (7) The initial and final partial pressures of the noncondensable 
gas in the vessel are determined using Equations 23 and 24 of this 
subpart.
    (8) The moles of HAP emitted during the depressurization are 
calculated by taking an approximation of the average ratio of moles of 
HAP to moles of noncondensable and multiplying by the total moles of 
noncondensables released during the depressurization, using Equation 30 
of this subpart:
where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.027

nHAP = moles of HAP emitted
n1 = initial number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
vessel, as calculated using Equation 28 of this subpart
n2 = final number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
vessel, as calculated using Equation 29 of this subpart

    (9) The mass of HAP emitted can be calculated using Equation 31 of 
this subpart:

E =NHAP * MWHAP    (Eq. 31)

where:
E = mass of HAP emitted
nHAP = moles of HAP emitted, as calculated using Equation 30 
of this subpart
MWHAP = average molecular weight of the HAP as calculated 
using Equation 17 of this subpart

    (10) Emissions from depressurization may be calculated using 
Equation 32 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.028

where:

V = free volume in vessel being depressurized
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel, absolute
P1 = initial pressure in the vessel
P2 = final pressure in the vessel
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds
    MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP compounds
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound

    (E) Vacuum systems. Emissions from vacuum systems may be calculated 
using Equation 33 of this subpart if the air leakage rate is known or 
can be approximated.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.029


[[Page 72]]


where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
Psystem = absolute pressure of receiving vessel or ejector 
outlet conditions, if there is no receiver
Pi* = vapor pressure of the HAP at the receiver temperature 
or the ejector outlet conditions
La = total air leak rate in the system, mass/time
MWnc = molecular weight of noncondensable gas
t = time of vacuum operation
MWHAP = average molecular weight of HAP in the emission 
stream, as calculated using Equation 17 of this subpart, with HAP 
partial pressures calculated at the temperature of the receiver or 
ejector outlet, as appropriate

    (F) Gas evolution. Emissions from gas evolution shall be calculated 
using Equation 12 of this subpart with V calculated using Equation 34 of 
this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.030

Where:

V = volumetric flow rate of gas evolution
Wg = mass flow rate of gas evolution
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature at the exit, absolute
PT = vessel pressure
MWg = molecular weight of the evolved gas

    (G) Air drying. Emissions from air drying shall be calculated using 
Equation 35 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.031

Where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
B = mass of dry solids
PS1 = HAP in material entering dryer, weight percent
PS2 = HAP in material exiting dryer, weight percent

    (H) Empty vessel purging. Emissions from empty vessel purging shall 
be calculated using Equation (36) of this subpart (Note: The term -Ft/v 
can be assumed to be 1):
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.032

Where:

V = volume of empty vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel vapor space; absolute
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP at the beginning 
of the purge
(MWi) = molecular weight of the individual HAP
F = flowrate of the purge gas
t = duration of the purge
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound


[[Page 73]]


    (ii) Engineering assessments. The owner or operator shall conduct an 
engineering assessment to calculate uncontrolled HAP emissions for each 
emission episode that is not due to vapor displacement, purging, 
heating, depressurization, vacuum operations, gas evolution, or air 
drying. For emission episodes caused by any of these types of 
activities, the owner or operator also may calculate uncontrolled HAP 
emissions based on an engineering assessment if the owner or operator 
can demonstrate to the Administrator that the methods in paragraph 
(d)(2)(i) of this section are not appropriate. One criterion the owner 
or operator could use to demonstrate that the methods in paragraph 
(d)(2)(i) of this section are not appropriate is if previous test data 
are available that show a greater than 20 percent discrepancy between 
the test value and the estimated value. An engineering assessment 
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
    (A) Previous test results, provided the tests are representative of 
current operating practices at the process unit.
    (B) Bench-scale or pilot-scale test data representative of the 
process under representative operating conditions.
    (C) Maximum flow rate, HAP emission rate, concentration, or other 
relevant parameter specified or implied within a permit limit applicable 
to the process vent.
    (D) Design analysis based on accepted chemical engineering 
principles, measurable process parameters, or physical or chemical laws 
or properties. Examples of analytical methods include, but are not 
limited to:
    (1) Use of material balances based on process stoichiometry to 
estimate maximum organic HAP concentrations.
    (2) Estimation of maximum flow rate based on physical equipment 
design such as pump or blower capacities.
    (3) Estimation of HAP concentrations based on saturation conditions.
    (E) All data, assumptions, and procedures used in the engineering 
assessment shall be documented in accordance with Sec. 63.1260(e). Data 
or other information supporting a finding that the emissions estimation 
equations are inappropriate shall be reported in the Precompliance 
report.
    (3) Controlled emissions. An owner or operator shall determine 
controlled emissions using the procedures in either paragraph (d)(3)(i) 
or (ii) of this section. For condensers, controlled emissions shall be 
calculated using the emission estimation equations described in 
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(B) of this section.
    (i) Small control devices. Except for condensers, controlled 
emissions for each process vent that is controlled using a small control 
device shall be determined by using the design evaluation described in 
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of this section, or conducting a performance test 
in accordance with paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section. Whenever a 
small control device becomes a large control device, the owner or 
operator must comply with the provisions in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this 
section and submit the test report in the next Periodic report.
    (A) Design evaluation. The design evaluation shall include 
documentation demonstrating that the control device being used achieves 
the required control efficiency under worst-case conditions, as 
determined from the emission profile described in 
Sec. 63.1257(b)(8)(ii). The control efficiency determined from this 
design evaluation shall be applied to uncontrolled emissions to estimate 
controlled emissions. The documentation must be conducted in accordance 
with the provisions in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. The design 
evaluation shall also include the value(s) and basis for the 
parameter(s) monitored under Sec. 63.1258.
    (B) Emission estimation equations. An owner or operator using a 
condenser as a control device shall determine controlled emissions using 
exhaust gas temperature measurements and calculations for each batch 
emission episode within each unit operation according to the engineering 
methodology in paragraphs (d)(3)(i)(B)(1) through (8) of this section. 
Individual HAP partial pressures shall be calculated as specified in 
paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section.
    (1) Emissions from vapor displacement shall be calculated using 
Equation 11 of this subpart with T set equal to the temperature of the 
receiver and

[[Page 74]]

the HAP partial pressures determined at the temperature of the receiver.
    (2) Emissions from purging shall be calculated using Equation 12 of 
this subpart with T set equal to the temperature of the receiver and the 
HAP partial pressures determined at the temperature of the receiver.
    (3) Emissions from heating shall be calculated using either Equation 
13 of this subpart or Equation 37 of this subpart. In Equation 13, the 
HAP vapor pressures shall be determined at the temperature of the 
receiver. In Equations 13 and 37 of this subpart,  is 
equal to the number of moles of noncondensable displaced from the 
vessel, as calculated using Equation 15 of this subpart. In Equations 13 
and 37 of this subpart, the HAP average molecular weight shall be 
calculated using Equation 17 with the HAP partial pressures determined 
at the temperature of the receiver.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.033

Where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
 = moles of noncondensable gas displaced
PT = pressure in the receiver
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP at the receiver 
temperature
Pj = partial pressure of the individual condensable 
(including HAP) at the receiver temperature
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound
MWHAP = the average molecular weight of HAP in vapor exiting 
the receiver, as calculated using Equation 17 of this subpart
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
stream
    (4)(i) Emissions from depressurization shall be calculated using 
Equation 38 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.034

Where:

E = mass of HAP vapor emitted
Vnc1 = initial volume of noncondensable in the vessel, 
corrected to the final pressure, as calculated using Equation 39 of this 
subpart
Vnc2 = final volume of noncondensable in the vessel, as 
calculated using Equation 40 of this subpart
Pi = partial pressure of each individual HAP at the receiver 
temperature
Pj = partial pressure of each condensable (including HAP) at 
the receiver temperature
PT = receiver pressure
T = temperature of the receiver
R = ideal gas law constant
MWHAP = the average molecular weight of HAP calculated using 
Equation 17 of this subpart with partial pressures determined at the 
receiver temperature
i = identifier for a HAP compound
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
stream
j = identifier for a condensable compound


[[Page 75]]


    (ii) The initial and final volumes of noncondensable gas present in 
the vessel, adjusted to the pressure of the receiver, are calculated 
using Equations 39 and 40 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.035

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.036

Where:

Vnc1 = initial volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
Vnc2 = final volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
V = free volume in the vessel being depressurized
Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 41 of this subpart
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
calculated using Equation 42 of this subpart
PT = pressure of the receiver

    (iii) Initial and final partial pressures of the noncondensable gas 
in the vessel are determined using Equations 41 and 42 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.037

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.038

Where:

Pnc1 = initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas in 
the vessel
Pnc2 = final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas in 
the vessel
P1 = initial vessel pressure
P2 = final vessel pressure
Pj = partial pressure of each condensable compound (including 
HAP) in the vessel
m = number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
stream
j = identifier for a condensable compound

    (5) Emissions from vacuum systems shall be calculated using Equation 
33 of this subpart.
    (6) Emissions from gas evolution shall be calculated using Equation 
12 with V calculated using Equation 34 of this subpart, T set equal to 
the receiver temperature, and the HAP partial pressures determined at 
the receiver temperature. The term for time, t, in Equation 12 of this 
subpart is not needed for the purposes of this calculation.
    (7) Emissions from air drying shall be calculated using Equation 11 
of this subpart with V equal to the air flow rate and Pi 
determined at the receiver temperature.
    (8) Emissions from empty vessel purging shall be calculated using 
equation 43 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.039

Where:

V = volume of empty vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = temperature of the vessel vapor space at beginning of 
purge
T2 = temperature of the receiver, absolute
(Pi)T1 = partial pressure of the individual HAP at 
the beginning of the purge
(Pi)T2 = partial pressure of the individual HAP at 
the receiver temperature

[[Page 76]]

MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP
F = flowrate of the purge gas
t = duration of the purge
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
i = identifier for a HAP compound

    (ii) Large control devices. Except for condensers, controlled 
emissions for each process vent that is controlled using a large control 
device shall be determined by applying the control efficiency of the 
large control device to the estimated uncontrolled emissions. The 
control efficiency shall be determined by conducting a performance test 
on the control device as described in paragraphs (d)(3)(ii)(A) through 
(C) of this section, or by using the results of a previous performance 
test as described in paragraph (d)(4) of this section. If the control 
device is intended to control only hydrogen halides and halogens, the 
owner or operator may assume the control efficiency of organic HAP is 
zero percent. If the control device is intended to control only organic 
HAP, the owner or operator may assume the control efficiency for 
hydrogen halides and halogen is zero percent. Owners and operators are 
not required to conduct performance tests for devices described in 
paragraphs (a)(4) and (d)(4) of this section that are large control 
devices, as defined in Sec. 63.1251.
    (A) The performance test shall be conducted by performing emission 
testing on the inlet and outlet, or, if complying with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1254(c), on the outlet of the control device, following the test 
methods and procedures of Sec. 63.1257(b). Concentrations shall be 
calculated from the data obtained through emission testing according to 
the procedures in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. If the control 
device is a combustion device that uses supplemental combustion air, the 
concentrations shall be corrected to 3 percent oxygen according to the 
procedures in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (B) Performance testing shall be conducted under absolute, or 
hypothetical worst-case conditions, as defined in paragraphs 
(b)(8)(i)(A) through (B) of this section.
    (C) The owner or operator may elect to conduct more than one 
performance test on the control device for the purpose of establishing 
more than one operating condition at which the control device achieves 
the required control efficiency.
    (4) An owner or operator is not required to conduct a performance 
test for the following:
    (i) Any control device for which a previous performance test was 
conducted, provided the test was conducted using the same procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1257(b) over conditions typical of the appropriate 
worst-case, as defined in Sec. 63.1257(b)(8)(i). The results of the 
previous performance test shall be used to demonstrate compliance.
    (e) Compliance with wastewater provisions. (1) Determining annual 
average concentration and annual load. To determine the annual average 
concentration and annual load of partially soluble and/or soluble HAP 
compounds in a wastewater stream, as required by Sec. 63.1256(a)(1), an 
owner or operator shall comply with the provisions in paragraphs 
(e)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section. A wastewater stream is exempt 
from the requirements of Sec. 63.1256(a)(2) if the owner or operator 
determines the annual average concentration and annual load are below 
all of the applicability cutoffs specified in Sec. 63.1256(a)(1)(i)(A) 
through (D). For annual average concentration, only initial rinses are 
included. Concentration measurements based on Method 305 shall be 
adjusted by dividing each concentration by the compound-specific Fm 
factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart. Concentration measurements 
based on methods other than Method 305 may not be adjusted by the 
compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart.
    (i) Annual average concentration definition. (A) When complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(a)(1)(i)(A), the annual average concentration means the 
total mass of partially soluble HAP compounds occurring in the 
wastewater stream during the calendar year divided by the total mass of 
the wastewater stream discharged during the same calendar year.
    (B) When complying with Sec. 63.1256(a)(1)(i) (B) or (C), the annual

[[Page 77]]

average concentration means the total mass of partially soluble and/or 
soluble HAP compounds occurring in the wastewater stream during the 
calendar year divided by the total mass of the wastewater stream 
discharged during the same calendar year.
    (C) When complying with Sec. 63.1256(a)(1)(i)(D), the annual average 
concentration means the total mass of soluble HAP compounds occurring in 
the wastewater stream during the calendar year divided by the total mass 
of the wastewater stream discharged during the same calendar year.
    (ii) Determination of annual average concentration. An owner or 
operator shall determine annual average concentrations of partially 
soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds in accordance with the provisions 
specified in paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section. The 
owner or operator may determine annual average concentrations by process 
simulation. Data and other information supporting the simulation shall 
be reported in the Precompliance Report for approval by the 
Administrator. The annual average concentration shall be determined 
either at the POD or downstream of the POD with adjustment for 
concentration changes made according to paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(D) of this 
section.
    (A) Test methods. The concentration of partially soluble HAP, 
soluble HAP, or total HAP shall be measured using any of the methods 
described in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (B) Knowledge of the wastewater stream. The concentration of 
partially soluble HAP, soluble HAP, or total HAP shall be calculated 
based on knowledge of the wastewater stream according to the procedures 
in paragraphs (e)(1)(ii)(B)(1) and (2) of this section. The owner or 
operator shall document concentrations in the Notification of Compliance 
Status report described in Sec. 63.1260(f).
    (1) Mass balance. The owner or operator shall calculate the 
concentrations of HAP compounds in wastewater considering the total 
quantity of HAP discharged to the water, the amount of water at the POD, 
and the amounts of water and solvent lost to other mechanisms such as 
reactions, air emissions, or uptake in product or other processing 
materials. The quantities of HAP and water shall be based on batch 
sheets, manufacturing tickets, or FDA bills of materials. In cases where 
a chemical reaction occurs that generates or consumes HAP, the amount of 
HAP remaining after a reaction shall be based on stoichometry assuming 
100 percent theoretical consumption or yield, as applicable.
    (2) Published water solubility data. For single components in water, 
owners and operators may use the water solubilities published in 
standard reference texts at the POD temperature to determine maximum HAP 
concentration.
    (C) Bench scale or pilot-scale test data. The concentration of 
partially soluble HAP, soluble HAP, or total HAP shall be calculated 
based on bench scale or pilot-scale test data. The owner or operator 
shall provide sufficient information to demonstrate that the bench-scale 
or pilot-scale test concentration data are representative of actual HAP 
concentrations. The owner or operator shall also provide documentation 
describing the testing protocol, and the means by which sample 
variability and analytical variability were accounted for in the 
determination of HAP concentrations. Documentation of the pilot-scale or 
bench scale analysis shall be provided in the precompliance report.
    (D) Adjustment for concentrations determined downstream of the POD. 
The owner or operator shall make corrections to the annual average 
concentration when the concentration is determined downstream of the POD 
at a location where: two or more wastewater streams have been mixed; one 
or more wastewater streams have been treated; or, losses to the 
atmosphere have occurred. The owner or operator shall make the 
adjustments either to the individual data points or to the final annual 
average concentration.
    (iii) Determination of annual load. An owner or operator shall 
calculate the partially soluble and/or soluble HAP load in a wastewater 
stream based on the annual average concentration determined in paragraph 
(e)(1)(ii) (A), (B), or (C) of this section and the total volume of the 
wastewater stream, based

[[Page 78]]

on knowledge of the wastewater stream in accordance with paragraphs 
(e)(1)(ii)(B) of this section. The owner or operator shall maintain 
records of the total liters of wastewater discharged per year as 
specified in Sec. 63.1259(b).
    (2) Compliance with treatment unit control provisions. (i) 
Performance tests and design evaluations-general. To comply with the 
control options in Sec. 63.1256(g) (10) or (13), neither a design 
evaluation nor a performance test is required. For any other 
nonbiological treatment process, the owner or operator shall conduct 
either a design evaluation as specified in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this 
section, or a performance test as specified in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of 
this section to demonstrate that each nonbiological treatment process 
used to comply with Sec. 63.1256(g) (8), (9), and/or (12) achieves the 
conditions specified for compliance. The owner or operator shall 
demonstrate by the procedures in either paragraph (e)(2) (ii) or (iii) 
of this section that each closed biological treatment process used to 
comply with Sec. 63.1256 (g)(8)(ii), (g)(9)(ii), (g)(11), or (g)(12) 
achieves the conditions specified for compliance. If an open biological 
treatment unit is used to comply with Sec. 63.1256 (g)(8)(ii), 
(g)(9)(ii), (g)(11), or (g)(12), the owner or operator shall comply with 
the performance test requirements in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this 
section.
    (ii) Design evaluation. A design evaluation and supporting 
documentation that addresses the operating characteristics of the 
treatment process and that is based on operation at a wastewater stream 
flow rate and a concentration under which it would be most difficult to 
demonstrate compliance. For closed biological treatment processes, the 
percent reduction from removal/destruction in the treatment unit and 
control device shall be determined by a mass balance over the unit. The 
mass flow rate of soluble and/or partially soluble HAP compounds exiting 
the treatment process shall be the sum of the mass flow rate of soluble 
and/or partially soluble HAP compounds in the wastewater stream exiting 
the biological treatment process and the mass flow rate of the vented 
gas stream exiting the control device. The mass flow rate entering the 
treatment process minus the mass flow rate exiting the process 
determines the actual mass removal. Compounds that meet the requirements 
specified in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this section are not 
required to be included in the design evaluation; the term ``performance 
test'' in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this section shall mean 
``design evaluation'' for the purposes of this paragraph.
    (iii) Performance tests. Performance tests shall be conducted using 
test methods and procedures that meet the applicable requirements 
specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(A) through (G) of this section.
    (A) General. This paragraph specifies the general procedures for 
performance tests that are conducted to demonstrate compliance of a 
treatment process with the control requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(g).
    (1) Representative process unit operating conditions. Compliance 
shall be demonstrated for representative operating conditions. 
Operations during periods of malfunction and periods of nonoperation 
shall not constitute representative conditions. The owner or operator 
shall record the process information that is necessary to document 
operating conditions during the test.
    (2) Representative treatment process operating conditions. 
Performance tests shall be conducted when the treatment process is 
operating at a representative inlet flow rate and concentration. If the 
treatment process will be operating at several different sets of 
representative operating conditions, the owner or operator shall comply 
with paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(A)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The owner 
or operator shall record information that is necessary to document 
treatment process or control device operating conditions during the 
test.
    (i) Range of operating conditions. If the treatment process will be 
operated at several different sets of representative operating 
conditions, performance testing over the entire range is not required. 
In such cases, the performance test results shall be supplemented with 
modeling and/or engineering assessments to demonstrate performance over 
the operating range.

[[Page 79]]

    (ii) Consideration of residence time. If concentration and/or flow 
rate to the treatment process are not relatively constant (i.e., 
comparison of inlet and outlet data will not be representative of 
performance), the owner or operator shall consider residence time, when 
determining concentration and flow rate.
    (3) Testing equipment. All testing equipment shall be prepared and 
installed as specified in the applicable test methods, or as approved by 
the Administrator.
    (4) Compounds not required to be considered in performance tests. 
Compounds that meet the requirements specified in (e)(2)(iii)(A)(4)(i), 
(ii), or (iii) of this section are not required to be included in the 
performance test. Concentration measurements based on Method 305 shall 
be adjusted by dividing each concentration by the compound-specific Fm 
factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart. Concentration measurements 
based on methods other than Method 305 shall not be adjusted by the 
compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart.
    (i) Compounds not used or produced by the PMPU; or
    (ii) Compounds with concentrations at the POD that are below 1 ppmw; 
or
    (iii) Compounds with concentrations at the POD that are below the 
lower detection limit where the lower detection limit is greater than 1 
ppmw. The method shall be an analytical method for wastewater which has 
the compound of interest as a target analyte.
    (5) Treatment using a series of treatment processes. In all cases 
where the wastewater provisions in this subpart allow or require the use 
of a treatment process to comply with emissions limitations, the owner 
or operator may use multiple treatment processes. The owner or operator 
complying with the requirements of Sec. 63.1256(g)(7)(i), when 
wastewater is conveyed by hard-piping, shall comply with either 
paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section. The owner or 
operator complying with the requirements of Sec. 63.1256(g)(7)(ii) shall 
comply with the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5)(ii) of this 
section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall conduct the performance test across 
each series of treatment processes. For each series of treatment 
processes, inlet concentration and flow rate shall be measured either 
where the wastewater enters the first treatment process in a series of 
treatment processes, or prior to the first treatment process as 
specified in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(6) of this section. For each 
series of treatment processes, outlet concentration and flow rate shall 
be measured where the wastewater exits the last treatment process in the 
series of treatment processes, except when the last treatment process is 
an open or a closed aerobic biological treatment process demonstrating 
compliance by using the procedures in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(E) or (F) 
of this section. When the last treatment process is either an open or a 
closed aerobic biological treatment process demonstrating compliance by 
using the procedures in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(E) or (F) of this 
section, inlet and outlet concentrations and flow rates shall be 
measured at the inlet and outlet to the series of treatment processes 
prior to the biological treatment process and at the inlet to the 
biological treatment process, except as provided in paragraph 
(e)(2)(iii)(A)(6)(ii) of this section. The mass flow rate destroyed in 
the biological treatment process for which compliance is demonstrated 
using paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E) or (F) of this section shall be added to 
the mass flow rate removed or destroyed in the series of treatment units 
before the biological treatment unit. This sum shall be used to 
calculate the overall control efficiency.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall conduct the performance test across 
each treatment process in the series of treatment processes. The mass 
flow rate removed or destroyed by each treatment process shall be added 
together and the overall control efficiency calculated to determine 
whether compliance has been demonstrated using paragraphs 
(e)(2)(iii)(C), (D), (E), (F), or (G) of this section, as applicable. If 
a biological treatment process is one of the treatment processes in the 
series of treatment processes, the inlet to the biological treatment 
process shall be the point at which the wastewater enters the biological 
treatment process, or the inlet to the equalization tank if

[[Page 80]]

all the criteria of paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(6)(ii) of this section are 
met.
    (6) The owner or operator determining the inlet for purposes of 
demonstrating compliance with paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E), or (F)of this 
section may elect to comply with paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(6)(i) or (ii) 
of this section.
    (i) When wastewater is conveyed exclusively by hard-piping from the 
point of determination to a treatment process that is either the only 
treatment process or the first in a series of treatment processes (i.e., 
no treatment processes or other waste management units are used upstream 
of this treatment process to store, handle, or convey the wastewater), 
the inlet to the treatment process shall be at any location from the 
point of determination to where the wastewater stream enters the 
treatment process. When samples are taken upstream of the treatment 
process and before wastewater streams have converged, the owner or 
operator shall ensure that the mass flow rate of all affected wastewater 
is accounted for when using Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), (g)(9)(ii) or 
(g)(12) of this subpart to comply and that the mass flow rate of all 
wastewater, not just affected wastewater, is accounted for when using 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(11) to comply, except as provided in paragraph 
(e)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator may consider the inlet to the 
equalization tank as the inlet to the biological treatment process if 
the wastewater is conveyed by hard-piping from either the last previous 
treatment process or the point of determination to the equalization 
tank; or the wastewater is conveyed from the equalization tank 
exclusively by hard-piping to the biological treatment process and no 
treatment processes or other waste management units are used to store, 
handle, or convey the wastewater between the equalization tank and the 
biological treatment process; or the equalization tank is equipped with 
a fixed roof and a closed-vent system that routes emissions to a control 
device that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.1256(b)(1)(i) through (iv) 
and Sec. 63.1256(b)(2)(i). The outlet from the series of treatment 
processes prior to the biological treatment process is the point at 
which the wastewater exits the last treatment process in the series 
prior to the equalization tank, if the equalization tank and biological 
treatment process are part of a series of treatment processes. The owner 
or operator shall ensure that the mass flow rate of all affected 
wastewater is accounted for when using Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) or (12) to 
comply and that the mass flow rate of all wastewater, not just affected 
wastewater is accounted for when using Sec. 63.1256(g)(11) to comply, 
except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this section.
    (B) Noncombustion treatment process--concentration limits. This 
paragraph applies to performance tests that are conducted to demonstrate 
compliance of a noncombustion treatment process with the ppmw wastewater 
stream concentration limits at the outlet of the treatment process. This 
compliance option is specified in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(i) and (9)(i). 
Wastewater samples shall be collected using sampling procedures which 
minimize loss of organic compounds during sample collection and analysis 
and maintain sample integrity per paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this 
section. Samples shall be collected and analyzed using the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this section. 
Samples may be grab samples or composite samples. Samples shall be taken 
at approximately equally spaced time intervals over a 1-hour period. 
Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the performance test shall 
consist of a minimum of three runs. Concentration measurements based on 
methods other than Method 305 may be adjusted by multiplying each 
concentration by the compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of 
this subpart. (For affected wastewater streams that contains both 
partially soluble and soluble HAP compounds, compliance is demonstrated 
only if the sum of the concentrations of partially soluble HAP compounds 
is less than 50 ppmw, and the sum of the concentrations of soluble HAP 
compounds is less than 520 ppmw.)
    (C) Noncombustion, nonbiological treatment process: percent mass 
removal/destruction option. This paragraph applies to performance tests 
that are conducted to demonstrate compliance of a

[[Page 81]]

noncombustion, nonbiological treatment process with the percent mass 
removal limits specified in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) and (9)(ii) for 
partially soluble and soluble HAP compounds, respectively. The owner or 
operator shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs 
(e)(2)(iii)(C)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) Concentration. The concentration of partially soluble and/or 
soluble HAP compounds entering and exiting the treatment process shall 
be determined as provided in this paragraph. Wastewater samples shall be 
collected using sampling procedures which minimize loss of organic 
compounds during sample collection and analysis and maintain sample 
integrity per paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section. The method shall be 
an analytical method for wastewater which has the compound of interest 
as a target analyte. Samples may be grab samples or composite samples. 
Samples shall be taken at approximately equally spaced time intervals 
over a 1-hour period. Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the 
performance test shall consist of a minimum of three runs. Concentration 
measurements based on Method 305 shall be adjusted by dividing each 
concentration by the compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of 
this subpart. Concentration measurements based on methods other than 
Method 305 shall not be adjusted by the compound-specific Fm factor 
listed in Table 8 of this subpart.
    (2) Flow rate. The flow rate of the entering and exiting wastewater 
streams shall be determined using inlet and outlet flow meters, 
respectively. Where the outlet flow is not greater than the inlet flow, 
a single flow meter may be used, and may be used at either the inlet or 
outlet. Flow rate measurements shall be taken at the same time as the 
concentration measurements.
    (3) Calculation of mass flow rate--for noncombustion, nonbiological 
treatment processes. The mass flow rates of partially soluble and/or 
soluble HAP compounds entering and exiting the treatment process are 
calculated using Equations 44 and 45 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.040

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.041

Where:

QMWa, QMWb = mass flow rate of partially soluble 
or soluble HAP compounds, average of all runs, in wastewater entering 
(QMWa) or exiting (QMWb) the treatment process, 
kg/hr
 = density of the wastewater, kg/m3
Qa,k, Qbb,k = volumetric flow rate of wastewater 
entering (Qa,k) or exiting (Qb,k) the treatment 
process during each run k, m3/hr
CT,a,k, CT,b,k = total concentration of partially 
soluble or soluble HAP compounds in wastewater entering 
(CT,a,k) or exiting (CT,b,k) the treatment process 
during each run k, ppmw
p = number of runs
k = identifier for a run
106 = conversion factor, mg/kg

    (4) Percent removal calculation for mass flow rate. The percent mass 
removal across the treatment process shall be calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.042

Where:

E = removal or destruction efficiency of the treatment process, percent
QMWa, QMWb = mass flow rate of partially soluble 
or soluble HAP compounds in wastewater entering (QMWa) and 
exiting (QMWb) the

[[Page 82]]

treatment process, kg/hr (as calculated using Equations 44 and 45 of 
this subpart)

    (5) Compare mass removal efficiency to required efficiency. Compare 
the mass removal efficiency (calculated in Equation 44 of this subpart) 
to the required efficiency as specified in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) or 
(9)(ii). If complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), compliance is 
demonstrated if the mass removal efficiency is 99 percent or greater. If 
complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii), compliance is demonstrated if the 
mass removal efficiency is 90 percent or greater.
    (D) Combustion treatment processes: percent mass removal/destruction 
option. This paragraph applies to performance tests that are conducted 
to demonstrate compliance of a combustion treatment process with the 
percent mass destruction limits specified in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) for 
partially soluble HAP compounds, and/or Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) for 
soluble HAP compounds. The owner or operator shall comply with the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(D)(1) through (8) of 
this section.
    (1) Concentration in wastewater stream entering the combustion 
treatment process. The concentration of partially soluble and/or soluble 
HAP compounds entering the treatment process shall be determined as 
provided in this paragraph. Wastewater samples shall be collected using 
sampling procedures which minimize loss of organic compounds during 
sample collection and analysis and maintain sample integrity per 
paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section. The method shall be an analytical 
method for wastewater which has the compound of interest as a target 
analyte. Samples may be grab samples or composite samples. Samples shall 
be taken at approximately equally spaced time intervals over a 1-hour 
period. Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the performance test 
shall consist of a minimum of three runs. Concentration measurements 
based on Method 305 of appendix A of this part shall be adjusted by 
dividing each concentration by the compound-specific Fm factor listed in 
Table 8 of this subpart. Concentration measurements based on methods 
other than Method 305 shall not be adjusted by the compound-specific Fm 
factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart.
    (2) Flow rate of wastewater entering the combustion treatment 
process. The flow rate of the wastewater stream entering the combustion 
treatment process shall be determined using an inlet flow meter. Flow 
rate measurements shall be taken at the same time as the concentration 
measurements.
    (3) Calculation of mass flow rate in wastewater stream entering 
combustion treatment processes. The mass flow rate of partially soluble 
and/or soluble HAP compounds entering the treatment process is 
calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.043

Where:

QMWa = mass flow rate of partially soluble or soluble HAP 
compounds entering the combustion unit, kg/hr
= density of the wastewater stream, kg/m3
Qa,k = volumetric flow rate of wastewater entering the 
combustion unit during run k, m3/hr
CT,a,k = total concentration of partially soluble or soluble 
HAP compounds in the wastewater stream entering the combustion unit 
during run k, ppmw
 = number of runs
k = identifier for a run

    (4) Concentration in vented gas stream exiting the combustion 
treatment process. The concentration of partially soluble and/or soluble 
HAP compounds (or TOC) exiting the combustion treatment process in any 
vented gas stream shall be determined as provided in this

[[Page 83]]

paragraph. Samples may be grab samples or composite samples. Samples 
shall be taken at approximately equally spaced time intervals over a 1-
hour period. Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the performance 
test shall consist of a minimum of three runs. Concentration 
measurements shall be determined using Method 18 of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A. Alternatively, any other test method validated according to 
the procedures in Method 301 of appendix A of this part may be used.
    (5) Volumetric flow rate of vented gas stream exiting the combustion 
treatment process. The volumetric flow rate of the vented gas stream 
exiting the combustion treatment process shall be determined using 
Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as appropriate. 
Volumetric flow rate measurements shall be taken at the same time as the 
concentration measurements.
    (6) Calculation of mass flow rate of vented gas stream exiting 
combustion treatment processes. The mass flow rate of partially soluble 
and/or soluble HAP compounds in a vented gas stream exiting the 
combustion treatment process shall be calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.044

where:

QMGb = mass rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total 
partially soluble and/or soluble HAP, in vented gas stream, exiting 
(QMGb) the combustion device, dry basis, kg/hr
CGb,i = concentration of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
total partially soluble and/or soluble HAP, in vented gas stream, 
exiting (CGb,i) the combustion device, dry basis, ppmv
MWi = molecular weight of a component, kilogram/kilogram-mole
QGb = flow rate of gas stream exiting (QGb) the 
combustion device, dry standard cubic meters per hour
K2 = constant, 41.57 x 10-9 (parts per 
million)-1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/
gram), where standard temperature (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) 
is 20 deg.C
i = identifier for a compound
n = number of components in the sample

    (7) Destruction efficiency calculation. The destruction efficiency 
of the combustion unit for partially soluble and/or soluble HAP 
compounds shall be calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.045

Where:

E = destruction efficiency of partially soluble or soluble HAP compounds 
for the combustion unit, percent
QMW2a = mass flow rate of partially soluble or soluble HAP 
compounds entering the combustion unit, kg/hr
QMGb = mass flow rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
partially soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds in vented gas stream 
exiting the combustion treatment process, kg/hr
    (8) Compare mass destruction efficiency to required efficiency. 
Compare the mass destruction efficiency (calculated in Equation 49 of 
this subpart) to the required efficiency as specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) or (g)(9)(ii). If complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), compliance is demonstrated if the mass 
destruction efficiency is 99 percent or greater. If complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii), compliance is demonstrated if the mass 
destruction efficiency is 90 percent or greater.
    (E) Open or closed aerobic biological treatment processes: 95-
percent mass destruction option. This paragraph applies

[[Page 84]]

to performance tests that are conducted for open or closed aerobic 
biological treatment processes to demonstrate compliance with the 95-
percent mass destruction provisions in Sec. 63.1256(g)(11) for partially 
soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds.
    (1) Concentration in wastewater stream. The concentration of 
partially soluble and/or soluble HAP as provided in this paragraph. 
Concentration measurements to determine E shall be taken as provided in 
paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5) of this section for a series of treatment 
processes. Wastewater samples shall be collected using sampling 
procedures which minimize loss of organic compounds during sample 
collection and analysis and maintain sample integrity per paragraph 
(b)(10)(v) of this section. The method shall be an analytical method for 
wastewater which has the compound of interest as a target analyte. 
Samples may be grab samples or composite samples. Samples shall be taken 
at approximately equally spaced time intervals over a 1-hour period. 
Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the performance test shall 
consist of a minimum of three runs. Concentration measurements based on 
Method 305 shall be adjusted by dividing each concentration by the 
compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of this subpart. 
Concentration measurements based on methods other than Method 305 shall 
not be adjusted by the compound-specific Fm factor listed in Table 8 of 
this subpart.
    (2) Flow rate. Flow rate measurements to determine E shall be taken 
as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5) of this section for a series 
of treatment processes. Flow rate shall be determined using inlet and 
outlet flow measurement devices. Where the outlet flow is not greater 
than the inlet flow, a single flow measurement device may be used, and 
may be used at either the inlet or outlet. Flow rate measurements shall 
be taken at the same time as the concentration measurements.
    (3) Destruction efficiency. The owner or operator shall comply with 
the provisions in either paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E)(3)(i), (ii) or (iii) 
of this section. Compliance is demonstrated if the destruction 
efficiency, E, is equal to or greater than 95 percent.
    (i) If the performance test is performed across the open or closed 
biological treatment system only, compliance is demonstrated if E is 
equal to Fbio, where E is the destruction efficiency of 
partially soluble and/or soluble HAP compounds and Fbio is 
the site-specific fraction of partially soluble and/or soluble HAP 
compounds biodegraded. Fbio shall be determined as specified 
in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E)(4) of this section and appendix C of subpart 
G of this part.
    (ii) If compliance is being demonstrated in accordance with 
paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section, the removal 
efficiency shall be calculated using Equation 49 of this subpart. When 
complying with paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5)(i) of this section, the 
series of nonbiological treatment processes comprise one treatment 
process segment. When complying with paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(5)(ii) of 
this section, each nonbiological treatment process is a treatment 
process segment.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.046

Where:

QMWa,i = the soluble and/or partially soluble HAP load 
entering a treatment process segment
QMWb,i = the soluble and/or partially soluble HAP load 
exiting a treatment process segment
n = the number of treatment process segments
i = identifier for a treatment process element
QMWbio = the inlet load of soluble and/or partially soluble 
HAP to the biological treatment process. The inlet is defined in 
accordance with

[[Page 85]]

paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(6) of this section. If complying with paragraph 
(e)(2)(iii)(A)(6)(ii) of this section, QMWbio is equal to 
QMWb,n
Fbio = site-specific fraction of soluble and/or partially 
soluble HAP compounds biodegraded. Fbio shall be determined 
as specified in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E)(4) of this section and Appendix 
C of subpart G of this part.
QMWall = the total soluble and/or partially soluble HAP load 
to be treated.

    (4) Site-specific fraction biodegraded (Fbio). The 
procedures used to determine the compound-specific kinetic parameters 
for use in calculating Fbio differ for the compounds listed 
in Tables 2 and 3 of this subpart. An owner or operator shall calculate 
Fbio as specified in either paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E)(4)(i) or 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) For biological treatment processes that do not meet the 
definition for enhanced biological treatment in Sec. 63.1251, the owner 
or operator shall determine the Fbio for the compounds in 
Tables 2 and 3 of this subpart using any of the procedures in appendix C 
to part 63, except procedure 3 (inlet and outlet concentration 
measurements). (The symbol ``Fbio'' represents the site-
specific fraction of an individual partially soluble or soluble HAP 
compound that is biodegraded.)
    (ii) If the biological treatment process meets the definition of 
``enhanced biological treatment process'' in Sec. 63.1251, the owner or 
operator shall determine Fbio for the compounds in Table 2 of 
this subpart using any of the procedures specified in appendix C to part 
63. The owner or operator shall calculate Fbio for the 
compounds in Table 3 of this subpart using the defaults for first order 
biodegradation rate constants (K1) in Table 9 of this subpart 
and follow the procedure explained in Form III of appendix C, 40 CFR 
part 63, or any of the procedures specified in appendix C of 40 CFR part 
63.
    (F) Open or closed aerobic biological treatment processes: percent 
removal for partially soluble or soluble HAP compounds. This paragraph 
applies to the use of performance tests that are conducted for open or 
closed aerobic biological treatment processes to demonstrate compliance 
with the percent removal provisions for either partially soluble HAP 
compounds in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) or soluble HAP compounds in 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) or (g)(12). The owner or operator shall comply 
with the provisions in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(E) of this section, except 
that compliance with Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii) shall be demonstrated when E 
is equal to or greater than 99 percent, compliance with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) shall be demonstrated when E is equal to or 
greater than 90 percent, and compliance with Sec. 63.1256(g)(12) shall 
be demonstrated when E is equal to or greater than 99 percent.
    (G) Closed biological treatment processes: percent mass removal 
option. This paragraph applies to the use of performance tests that are 
conducted for closed biological treatment processes to demonstrate 
compliance with the percent removal provisions in 
Secs. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), (g)(9)(ii), (g)(11), or (g)(12). The owner or 
operator shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs 
(e)(2)(iii)(G) (1) through (4) of this section.
    (1) Comply with the procedures specified in paragraphs 
(e)(2)(iii)(C) (1) through (3) of this section to determine 
characteristics of the wastewater entering the biological treatment 
unit, except that the term ``partially soluble and/or soluble HAP'' 
shall mean ``soluble HAP'' for the purposes of this section if the owner 
or operator is complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) or (g)(12), and it 
shall mean ``partially soluble HAP'' if the owner or operator is 
complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii).
    (2) Comply with the procedures specified in paragraphs 
(e)(2)(iii)(D) (4) through (6) of this section to determine the 
characteristics of gas vent streams exiting a control device, with the 
differences noted in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(G)(3) (i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) The term ``partially soluble and/or soluble HAP'' shall mean 
``soluble HAP'' for the purposes of this section if the owner or 
operator is complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii) or (g)(12), and it 
shall mean ``partially soluble HAP'' if the owner or operator is 
complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii).

[[Page 86]]

    (ii) The term ``combustion treatment process'' shall mean ``control 
device'' for the purposes of this section.
    (3) Percent removal/destruction calculation. The percent removal and 
destruction across the treatment unit and any control device(s) shall be 
calculated using Equation 51 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.047

Where:

E = removal and destruction efficiency of the treatment unit and control 
device(s), percent
QMWa, QMWb = mass flow rate of partially soluble 
or soluble HAP compounds in wastewater entering (QMWa) and 
exiting (QMWb) the treatment process, kilograms per hour (as 
calculated using Equations WW1 and WW2)
QMGb = mass flow rate of partially soluble or soluble HAP 
compounds in vented gas stream exiting the combustion treatment process, 
kg/hr

    (4) Compare mass removal/destruction efficiency to required 
efficiency. Compare the mass removal/destruction efficiency (calculated 
using Equation 51 of this subpart) to the required efficiency as 
specified in Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), (g)(9)(ii), (g)(11), or (g)(12). If 
complying with Sec. 63.1256(g)(8)(ii), compliance is demonstrated if the 
mass removal/destruction is 99 percent or greater. If complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(9)(ii), compliance is demonstrated if the mass removal/
destruction efficiency is 90 percent or greater. If complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(11), compliance is demonstrated if the mass removal/
destruction efficiency is 95 percent or greater. If complying with 
Sec. 63.1256(g)(12), compliance is demonstrated if the mass removal/
destruction efficiency is 99 percent or greater.
    (3) Compliance with control device provisions. Except as provided in 
paragraph (e)(3)(iv) of this section, an owner or operator shall 
demonstrate that each control device or combination of control devices 
achieves the appropriate conditions specified in Sec. 63.1256(h)(2) by 
using one or more of the methods specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i), 
(ii), or (iii) of this section.
    (i) Performance test for control devices other than flares. This 
paragraph applies to performance tests that are conducted to demonstrate 
compliance of a control device with the efficiency limits specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(h)(2). If complying with the 95-percent reduction 
efficiency requirement, comply with the requirements specified in 
paragraphs (e)(3)(i) (A) through (J) of this section. If complying with 
the 20 ppm by volume requirement, comply with the requirements specified 
in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) (A) through (G) and (e)(3)(i)(J) of this 
section.
    (A) General. The owner or operator shall comply with the general 
performance test provisions in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii)(A) (1) through (4) 
of this section, except that the term ``treatment unit'' shall mean 
``control device'' for the purposes of this section.
    (B) Sampling sites. Sampling sites shall be selected using Method 1 
or 1A of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as appropriate. For determination 
of compliance with the 95 percent reduction requirement, sampling sites 
shall be located at the inlet and the outlet of the control device. For 
determination of compliance with the 20 ppmv limit, the sampling site 
shall be located at the outlet of the control device.
    (C) Concentration in gas stream entering or exiting the control 
device. The concentration of total organic HAP or TOC in a gas stream 
shall be determined as provided in this paragraph. Samples may be grab 
samples or composite samples (i.e., integrated samples). Samples shall 
be taken at approximately equally spaced time intervals over a 1-hour 
period. Each 1-hour

[[Page 87]]

period constitutes a run, and the performance test shall consist of a 
minimum of three runs. Concentration measurements shall be determined 
using Method 18 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. Alternatively, any other 
test method validated according to the procedures in Method 301 of 
appendix A of this part may be used.
    (D) Volumetric flow rate of gas stream entering or exiting the 
control device. The volumetric flow rate of the gas stream shall be 
determined using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, 
as appropriate. Volumetric flow rate measurements shall be taken at the 
same time as the concentration measurements.
    (E) Calculation of TOC concentration. The owner or operator shall 
compute TOC in accordance with the procedures in paragraph (a)(2) of 
this section.
    (F) Calculation of total organic HAP concentration. The owner or 
operator determining compliance based on total organic HAP concentration 
shall compute the total organic HAP concentration in accordance with the 
provisions in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (G) Requirements for combustion control devices. If the control 
device is a combustion device, the owner or operator shall correct TOC 
and organic HAP concentrations to 3 percent oxygen in accordance with 
the provisions in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, and demonstrate 
initial compliance with the requirements for halogenated streams in 
accordance with paragraph (a)(6) of this section.
    (H) Mass rate calculation. The mass rate of either TOC (minus 
methane and ethane) or total organic HAP for each sample run shall be 
calculated using the following equations. Where the mass rate of TOC is 
being calculated, all organic compounds (minus methane and ethane) 
measured by methods specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i)(C) of this section 
are summed using Equations 52 and 53 of this subpart. Where the mass 
rate of total organic HAP is being calculated, only soluble and 
partially soluble HAP compounds shall be summed using Equations 52 and 
53.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.048

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.049

Where:

CGa,i, CGb,i = concentration of TOC or total 
organic HAP, in vented gas stream, entering (CGa,i) and 
exiting (CGb,i) the control device, dry basis, ppmv
QMGa, QMGb = mass rate of TOC or total organic 
HAP, in vented gas stream, entering (QMGa) and exiting 
(QMGb) the control device, dry basis, kg/hr
Mwi = molecular weight of a component, kilogram/kilogram-mole
QGa,QGb = flow rate of gas stream entering 
(QGa) and exiting (QGb) the control device, dry 
standard cubic meters per hour
K2 = constant, 41.57  x 10-9 (parts per 
million)-1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/
gram), where standard temperature (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) 
is 20 deg.C
i = identifier for a compound
n = number of components in the sample

    (I) Percent reduction calculation. The percent reduction in TOC or 
total organic HAP for each sample run shall be calculated using Equation 
54 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.050


[[Page 88]]


where:

E = destruction efficiency of control device, percent
QMGa,QMGb = mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP, 
in vented gas stream entering and exiting (QMGb) the control 
device, dry basis, kilograms per hour

    (J) Compare mass destruction efficiency to required efficiency. If 
complying with the 95-percent reduction efficiency requirement, 
compliance is demonstrated if the mass destruction efficiency 
(calculated in Equation 51 of this subpart) is 95 percent or greater. If 
complying with the 20 ppmv limit, compliance is demonstrated if the 
outlet TOC concentration is 20 ppmv, or less.
    (ii) Design evaluation. A design evaluation conducted in accordance 
with the provisions in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Compounds that 
meet the requirements specified in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this 
section are not required to be included in the design evaluation.
    (iii) Compliance demonstration for flares. When a flare is used to 
comply with Sec. 63.1256(h), the owner or operator shall comply with the 
flare provisions in Sec. 63.11(b). An owner or operator is not required 
to conduct a performance test to determine percent emission reduction or 
outlet organic HAP or TOC concentration when a flare is used.
    (iv) Exemptions from compliance demonstrations. An owner or operator 
using any control device specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this section 
is exempt from the requirements in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through 
(e)(3)(iii) of this section and from the requirements in Sec. 63.6(f).
    (f) Pollution prevention alternative standard. The owner or operator 
shall demonstrate compliance with Sec. 63.1252(e)(2) using the 
procedures described in paragraph (f)(1) and (f)(3) of this section. The 
owner or operator shall demonstrate compliance with Sec. 63.1252(e)(3) 
using the procedures described in paragraphs (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this 
section.
    (1) Compliance is demonstrated when the annual kg/kg factor, 
calculated according to the procedure in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) and (iii) 
of this section, is reduced by at least 75 percent as calculated 
according to the procedure in paragraph (f)(1)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) The production-indexed HAP consumption factors shall be 
calculated by dividing annual consumption of total HAP by the annual 
production rate, per process. The production-indexed total VOC 
consumption factor shall be calculated by dividing annual consumption of 
total VOC by the annual production rate, per process.
    (ii) The baseline factor is calculated from yearly production and 
consumption data for the first 3-year period in which the PMPU was 
operational, beginning no earlier than the 1987 calendar year, or for a 
minimum period of 12 months from startup of the process until the 
present in which the PMPU was operational and data are available, 
beginning no earlier than the 1987 calendar year.
    (iii) The annual factor is calculated on the following bases:
    (A) For continuous processes, the annual factor shall be calculated 
every 30 days for the 12-month period preceding the 30th day (30-day 
rolling average).
    (B) For batch processes, the annual factor shall be calculated every 
10 batches for the 12-month period preceding the 10th batch (10-batch 
rolling average). The annual factor shall be calculated every 5 batches 
if the number of batches is less than 10 for the 12-month period 
preceding the 10th batch and shall be calculated every year if the 
number of batches is less than 5 for the 12-month period preceding the 
5th batch.
    (2) Compliance is demonstrated when the requirements of paragraphs 
(f)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section are met.
    (i) The annual kg/kg factor, calculated according to the procedure 
in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) and (f)(1)(iii) of this section, is reduced to a 
value equal to or less than 50 percent of the baseline factor calculated 
according to the procedure in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (ii) The yearly reductions associated with add-on controls that meet 
the criteria of Secs. 63.1252(h)(3)(ii)(A) through (D) must be equal to 
or greater than the amounts calculated in paragraphs (f)(2)(ii)(A) and 
(B) of this section:
    (A) The mass of HAP calculated using Equation 55 of this subpart:


[[Page 89]]


[kg reduced]a = [kg/kg]b(0.75-PR)[kg 
produced]a    (Eq. 55)

Where:
[kg/kg]b = the baseline production-indexed HAP consumption 
factor, in kg/kg
[kg produced]a = the annual HAP production rate, in kg/yr
[kg reduced]a = the annual reduction required by add-on 
controls, in kg/yr
PR = the fractional reduction in the annual kg/kg factor 
achieved using pollution prevention where PR is 
0.5

    (B) The mass of VOC calculated using Equation 56 of this subpart:

VOC reduced = (VFbase - VFP - 
VFannual)  x  Mprod    (Eq. 56)

Where:

VOCreduced = required VOC emission reduction from add-on 
controls, kg/yr
VFbase = baseline VOC factor, kg VOC emitted/kg production
VFp = reduction in VOC factor achieved by pollution 
prevention, kg VOC emitted/kg production
VFannual = target annual VOC factor, kg VOC emitted/kg 
production
Mprod = production rate, kg/yr

    (iii) Demonstration that the criteria in Sec. 63.1252(e)(3)(ii)(A) 
through (D) are met shall be accomplished through a description of the 
control device and of the material streams entering and exiting the 
control device.
    (iv) The annual reduction achieved by the add-on control shall be 
quantified using the methods described in Sec. 63.1257(d).
    (3) Each owner or operator of a PMPU complying with the P2 standard 
shall prepare a P2 demonstration summary that shall contain, at a 
minimum, the following information:
    (i) Descriptions of the methodologies and forms used to measure and 
record daily consumption of HAP compounds reduced as part of the P2 
standard.
    (ii) Descriptions of the methodologies and forms used to measure and 
record daily production of products which are included in the P2 
standard.
    (iii) Supporting documentation for the descriptions provided in 
paragraphs (f)(3)(i) and (ii) including, but not limited to, operator 
log sheets and copies of daily, monthly, and annual inventories of 
materials and products.
    (g) Compliance with storage tank provisions by using emissions 
averaging. An owner or operator with two or more affected storage tanks 
may demonstrate compliance with Sec. 63.1253, as applicable, by 
fulfilling the requirements of paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) of this 
section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall develop and submit for approval an 
Implementation Plan containing all the information required in 
Sec. 63.1259(e) 6 months prior to the compliance date of the standard. 
The Administrator shall have 90 days to approve or disapprove the 
emissions averaging plan after which time the plan shall be considered 
approved.
    (2) The annual mass rate of total organic HAP (ETi, 
ETo) shall be calculated for each storage tank included in 
the emissions average using the procedures specified in paragraph 
(c)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.
    (3) Equations 57 and 58 of this subpart shall be used to calculate 
total HAP emissions for those tanks subject to Sec. 63.1253(b) or (c):
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.051

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.052

Where:

Eij = yearly mass rate of total HAP at the inlet of the 
control device for tank j
Eoj = yearly mass rate of total HAP at the outlet of the 
control device for tank j
ETi = total yearly uncontrolled HAP emissions
ETo = total yearly actual HAP emissions
n = number of tanks included in the emissions average

    (4) The overall percent reduction efficiency shall be calculated as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.053

where:


[[Page 90]]


R = overall percent reduction efficiency
D = discount factor = 1.1 for all controlled storage tanks

    (h) Compliance with process vent provisions by using emissions 
averaging. An owner or operator with two or more affected processes 
complying with Sec. 63.1254 by using emissions averaging shall 
demonstrate compliance with paragraphs (h)(1), (2) and (3) of this 
section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall develop and submit for approval an 
Implementation Plan at least 6 months prior to the compliance date of 
the standard containing all the information required in Sec. 63.1259(e). 
The Administrator shall have 90 days to approve or disapprove the 
emissions averaging plan. The plan shall be considered approved if the 
Administrator either approves the plan in writing, or fails to 
disapprove the plan in writing. The 90-day period shall begin when the 
Administrator receives the request. If the request is denied, the owner 
or operator must still be in compliance with the standard by the 
compliance date.
    (2) Owners or operators shall calculate uncontrolled and controlled 
emissions of HAP by using the methods specified in paragraph (d)(2) and 
(3) of this section for each process included in the emissions average.
    (i) Equations 60 and 61 of this subpart shall be used to calculate 
total HAP emissions:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.054

where:

EUi = yearly uncontrolled emissions from process I
ECi = yearly actual emissions for process I
ETU = total yearly uncontrolled emissions
    ETC = total yearly actual emissions
n = number of processes included in the emissions average

    (3) The overall percent reduction efficiency shall be calculated 
using Equation 62 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.055

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21SE98.056

where:

R = overall percent reduction efficiency
D = discount factor = 1.1 for all controlled emission points



Sec. 63.1258  Monitoring Requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of any existing, new, or reconstructed 
affected source shall provide evidence of continued compliance with the 
standard as specified in this section. During the initial compliance 
demonstration, maximum or minimum operating parameter levels, as 
appropriate, shall be established for emission sources that will 
indicate the source is in compliance. Test data, calculations, or 
information from the evaluation of the control device design shall be 
used to establish the operating parameter level.
    (b) Monitoring for control devices. (1) Parameters to monitor. 
Except as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, for each 
control device, the owner or operator shall install and operate 
monitoring devices and operate within the established parameter levels 
to ensure continued compliance with the standard. Monitoring parameters 
are specified for control scenarios in Table 4 of this subpart and in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (xi) of this section.
    (i) Periodic verification. For control devices that control vent 
streams totaling less than 1 ton/yr HAP emissions, before control, 
monitoring shall consist of a daily verification that the device is 
operating properly. If the control device is used to control batch 
process vents alone or in combination with other streams, the 
verification may be on a per batch basis. This 
verification shall include, but not be limited to, a daily or per batch 
demonstration that the unit is working as designed and may include the 
daily measurements of the parameters described in (b)(1)(ii) through (x) 
of this section. This demonstration shall be included in the 
Precompliance report,

[[Page 91]]

to be submitted 6 months prior to the compliance date of the standard.
    (ii) Scrubbers. For affected sources using liquid scrubbers, the 
owner or operator shall establish a minimum scrubber liquid flow rate or 
pressure drop as a site-specific operating parameter which must be 
measured and recorded every 15 minutes during the period in which the 
scrubber is functioning in achieving the HAP removal required by this 
subpart. If the scrubber uses a caustic solution to remove acid 
emissions, the owner or operator shall establish a minimum pH of the 
effluent scrubber liquid as a site-specific operating parameter which 
must be monitored at least once a day. The minimum scrubber flowrate or 
pressure drop shall be based on the conditions anticipated under worst-
case conditions, as defined in Sec. 63.1257(b)(8)(i).
    (A) The monitoring device used to determine the pressure drop shall 
be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within a gage 
pressure of 10 percent of the maximum pressure drop 
measured.
    (B) The monitoring device used for measurement of scrubber liquid 
flowrate shall be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate within 
10 percent of the design scrubber liquid flowrate.
    (C) The monitoring device shall be calibrated annually.
    (iii) Condensers. For each condenser, the owner or operator shall 
establish the maximum condenser outlet gas temperature as a site-
specific operating parameter which must be measured and recorded at 
least every 15 minutes during the period in which the condenser is 
functioning in achieving the HAP removal required by this subpart.
    (A) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
2 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius or 
2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The temperature monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (iv) Regenerative carbon adsorbers. For each regenerative carbon 
adsorber, the owner or operator shall comply with the provisions in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(A) through (F) of this section.
    (A) Establish the regeneration cycle characteristics specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(A)(1) through (4) of this section under worst-case 
conditions, as defined in Sec. 63.1257(b)(8)(i).
    (1) Minimum regeneration frequency (i.e., operating time since last 
regeneration);
    (2) Minimum temperature to which the bed is heated during 
regeneration;
    (3) Maximum temperature to which the bed is cooled, measured within 
15 minutes of completing the cooling phase; and
    (4) Minimum regeneration stream flow.
    (B) Monitor and record the regeneration cycle characteristics 
specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(B)(1) through (4) of this section for 
each regeneration cycle.
    (1) Regeneration frequency (operating time since end of last 
regeneration);
    (2) Temperature to which the bed is heated during regeneration;
    (3) Temperature to which the bed is cooled, measured within 15 
minutes of the completion of the cooling phase; and
    (4) Regeneration stream flow.
    (C) Use a temperature monitoring device that is accurate to within 
2 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius or 
 2.5  deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (D) Use a regeneration stream flow monitoring device capable of 
recording the total regeneration stream flow to within  10 
percent of the established value (i.e., accurate to within  
10 percent of the reading).
    (E) Calibrate the temperature and flow monitoring devices annually.
    (F) Conduct an annual check for bed poisoning in accordance with 
manufacturer's specifications.
    (v) Nonregenerative carbon adsorbers. For each nonregenerative 
carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall establish and monitor the 
maximum time interval between replacement based on the conditions 
anticipated under worst-case, as defined in Sec. 63.1257(b)(8)(i).
    (vi) Flares. For each flare, the presence of the pilot flame shall 
be monitored every 15 minutes during the period in which the flare is 
functioning in

[[Page 92]]

achieving the HAP removal required by this subpart.
    (vii) Thermal incinerators. For each thermal incinerator, the owner 
or operator shall establish the minimum temperature of the gases exiting 
the combustion chamber as the site-specific operating parameter which 
must be measured and recorded at least once every 15 minutes during the 
period in which the combustion device is functioning in achieving the 
HAP removal required by this subpart.
    (A) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
 0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or  2.5  deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (viii) Catalytic incinerators. For each catalytic incinerator, the 
owner or operator shall monitor the temperature of the gas stream 
immediately before and after the catalyst bed. The owner or operator 
shall establish the minimum temperature of the gas stream immediately 
before the catalyst bed and the minimum temperature difference across 
the catalyst bed as the site-specific operating parameter which must be 
monitored and recorded at leastonce every 15 minutes during the period 
in which the catalytic incinerator is functioning in achieving the HAP 
removal required by this subpart.
    (A) The temperature monitoring devices must be accurate to within 
 0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or  2.5  deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The temperature monitoring devices must be calibrated annually.
    (ix) Process heaters and boilers. (A) Except as specified in 
paragraph (b)(1)(ix)(B) of this section, for each boiler or process 
heater, the owner or operator shall establish the minimum temperature of 
the gases exiting the combustion chamber as the site-specific operating 
parameter which must be monitored and recorded at least once every 15 
minutes during the period in which the boiler or process heater is 
functioning in achieving the HAP removal required by this subpart.
    (1) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or 2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (2) The temperature monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (B) The owner or operator is exempt from the monitoring requirements 
specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ix)(A) of this section if either:
    (1) All vent streams are introduced with primary fuel; or
    (2) The design heat input capacity of the boiler or process heater 
is 44 megawatts or greater.
    (x) Continuous emission monitor. As an alternative to the parameters 
specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (ix) of this section, an 
owner or operator may monitor and record the outlet HAP concentration or 
both the outlet TOC concentration and outlet hydrogen halide and halogen 
concentration every 15 minutes during the period in which the control 
device is functioning in achieving the HAP removal required by this 
subpart. The owner or operator need not monitor the hydrogen halide and 
halogen concentration if, based on process knowledge, the owner or 
operator determines that the emission stream does not contain hydrogen 
halides or halogens. The HAP or TOC monitor must meet the requirements 
of Performance Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B of part 60 and must be 
installed, calibrated, and maintained, according to Sec. 63.8. As part 
of the QA/QC Plan, calibration of the device must include, at a minimum, 
quarterly cylinder gas audits.
    (xi) CVS visual inspections. The owner or operator shall perform 
monthly visual inspections of each closed vent system as specified in 
Sec. 63.1252(b).
    (2) Averaging periods. Averaging periods for parametric monitoring 
levels shall be established according to paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through 
(iii) of this section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section, a 
daily (24-hour) or block average shall be calculated as the average of 
all values for a monitored parameter level set according to the 
procedures in (b)(3)(iii) of this section recorded during the operating 
day or block.

[[Page 93]]

    (ii) The operating day or block shall be defined in the Notification 
of Compliance Status report. The daily average may be from midnight to 
midnight or another continuous 24-hour period. The block average is 
limited to a period of time that is, at a maximum, equal to the time 
from the beginning to end of a batch process.
    (iii) Monitoring values taken during periods in which the control 
devices are not functioning in controlling emissions, as indicated by 
periods of no flow, shall not be considered in the averages. Where flow 
to the device could be intermittent, the owner or operator shall 
install, calibrate and operate a flow indicator at the inlet or outlet 
of the control device to identify periods of no flow.
    (3) Procedures for setting parameter levels for control devices used 
to control emissions from process vents. (i) Small control devices. 
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, for devices 
controlling less than 10 tons per year of HAP for which a performance 
test is not required, the parametric levels shall be set based on the 
design evaluation required in Sec. 63.1257(d)(3)(i). If a performance 
test is conducted, the monitoring parameter level shall be established 
according to the procedures in (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) Large control devices. For devices controlling greater than 10 
tons per year of HAP for which a performance test is required, the 
parameter level must be established as follows:
    (A) If the operating parameter level to be established is a maximum, 
it must be based on the average of the values from each of the three 
test runs.
    (B) If the operating parameter level to be established is a minimum, 
it must be based on the average of the values from each of the three 
test runs.
    (C) The owner or operator may establish the parametric monitoring 
level(s) based on the performance test supplemented by engineering 
assessments and manufacturer's recommendations. Performance testing is 
not required to be conducted over the entire range of expected parameter 
values. The rationale for the specific level for each parameter, 
including any data and calculations used to develop the level(s) and a 
description of why the level indicates proper operation of the control 
device shall be provided in the Precompliance report. The procedures 
specified in this section have not been approved by the Administrator 
and determination of the parametric monitoring level using these 
procedures is subject to review and approval by the Administrator.
    (iii) Parameters for control devices controlling batch process 
vents. For devices controlling batch process vents alone or in 
combination with other streams, the parameter level(s) shall be 
established in accordance with paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(A) or (B) of this 
section.
    (A) If more than one batch emission episode has been selected to be 
controlled, a single level for the batch process(es) shall be determined 
from the initial compliance demonstration.
    (B) Instead of establishing a single level for the batch 
process(es), as described in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(A) of this section, 
an owner or operator may establish separate levels for each batch 
emission episode, selected to be controlled. If separate monitoring 
levels are established, the owner or operator must provide a record 
indicating at what point in the daily schedule or log of processes 
required to be recorded per the requirements of Sec. 63.1259(b)(9) the 
parameter being monitored changes levels and must record at least one 
reading of the new parameter level, even if the duration of monitoring 
for the new parameter is less than 15-minutes.
    (4) Request approval to monitor alternative parameters. An owner or 
operator may request approval to monitor parameters other than those 
required by paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (ix) of this section. The 
request shall be submitted according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.8(f) or included in the Precompliance report.
    (5) Monitoring for the alternative standards. For control devices 
that are used to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1253(d) or 
63.1254(c), the owner or operator shall monitor and record the outlet 
TOC concentration and the outlet hydrogen halide and halogen 
concentration every 15 minutes during the period in which the device is 
functioning in achieving the HAP removal

[[Page 94]]

required by this subpart. A TOC monitor meeting the requirements of 
Performance Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B of part 60 shall be 
installed, calibrated, and maintained, according to Sec. 63.8. The owner 
or operator need notmonitor the hydrogen halide and halogen 
concentration if, based on process knowledge, the owner or operator 
determines that the emission stream does not contain hydrogen halides or 
halogens.
    (6) Exceedances of operating parameters. An exceedance of an 
operating parameter is defined as one of the following:
    (i) If the parameter, averaged over the operating day or block, is 
below a minimum value established during the initial compliance 
demonstration.
    (ii) If the parameter, averaged over the operating day or block, is 
above the maximum value established during the initial compliance 
demonstration.
    (iii) Each loss of pilot flame for flares.
    (7) Excursions. Excursions are defined by either of the two cases 
listed in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) When the period of control device operation is 4 hours or 
greater in an operating day and monitoring data are insufficient to 
constitute a valid hour of data, as defined in paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of 
this section, for at least 75 percent of the operating hours.
    (ii) When the period of control device operation is less than 4 
hours in an operating day and more than one of the hours during the 
period of operation does not constitute a valid hour of data due to 
insufficient monitoring data.
    (iii) Monitoring data are insufficient to constitute a valid hour of 
data, as used in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) and (ii) of this section, if 
measured values are unavailable for any of the required 15-minute 
periods within the hour.
    (8) Violations. Exceedances of parameters monitored according to the 
provisions of paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) and (iv) through (ix) of this 
section or excursions as defined by paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (iii) 
of this section constitute violations of the operating limit according 
to paragraphs (b)(8)(i), (ii), and (iv) of this section. Exceedances of 
the temperature limit monitored according to the provisions of paragraph 
(b)(1)(iii) of this section or exceedances of the outlet concentrations 
monitored according to the provisions of paragraph (b)(1)(x) of this 
section constitute violations of the emission limit according to 
paragraphs (b)(8)(i), (ii), and (iv) of this section. Exceedances of the 
outlet concentrations monitored according to the provisions of paragraph 
(b)(5) of this section constitute violations of the emission limit 
according to the provisions of paragraphs (b)(8)(iii) and (iv) of this 
section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for 
episodes occurring more than once per day, exceedances of established 
parameter limits or excursions will result in no more than one violation 
per operating day for each monitored item of equipment utilized in the 
process.
    (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for 
control devices used for more than one process in the course of an 
operating day, exceedances or excursions will result in no more than one 
violation per operating day, per control device, for each process for 
which the control device is in service.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, 
exceedances of the 20 ppmv TOC outlet emission limit, averaged over the 
operating day, will result in no more than one violation per day per 
control device. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this 
section, exceedances of the 20 ppmv hydrogen halide or halogen outlet 
emission limit, averaged over the operating day, will result in no more 
than one violation per day per control device.
    (iv) Periods of time when monitoring measurements exceed the 
parameter values as well as periods of inadequate monitoring data do not 
constitute a violation if they occur during a startup, shutdown, or 
malfunction, and the facility follows its startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan.
    (c) Monitoring for emission limits. The owner or operator of any 
affected source complying with the provisions of Sec. 63.1254(a)(1) 
shall demonstrate continuous compliance with the 2,000 lb/yr emission 
limits by calculating daily a 365-day rolling summation of emissions. 
For owners and operators opting

[[Page 95]]

to switch compliance strategy from the 93 percent control requirement to 
the 2,000 lb/yr compliance method, as decribed in Sec. 63.1254(a), the 
rolling average must include emissions from the past 365 days. Each day 
that the total emissions per process exceeds 2,000 lb/yr will be 
considered a violation of the emission limit.
    (d) Monitoring for equipment leaks. The owner or operator of any 
affected source complying with the requirements of Sec. 63.1255 of this 
subpart shall meet the monitoring requirements described Sec. 63.1255 of 
this subpart.
    (e) Pollution prevention. The owner or operator of any affected 
source that chooses to comply with the requirements of 
Secs. 63.1252(e)(2) and (3) shall calculate a yearly rolling average of 
kg HAP consumption per kg production and kg VOC consumption per kg 
production every month or every 10 batches. Each rolling average kg/kg 
factor that exceeds the value established in Sec. 63.1257(f)(1)(ii) will 
be considered a violation of the emission limit.
    (f) Emissions averaging. The owner or operator of any affected 
source that chooses to comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.1252(d) 
shall meet all monitoring requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) 
and (3) of this section, as applicable, for all processes and storage 
tanks included in the emissions average.
    (g) Inspection and monitoring of waste management units and 
treatment processes. (1) For each wastewater tank, surface impoundment, 
container, individual drain system, and oil-water separator that 
receives, manages, or treats wastewater, a residual removed from 
wastewater, a recycled wastewater, or a recycled residual removed from 
wastewater, the owner or operator shall comply with the inspection 
requirements specified in Table 7 of this subpart.
    (2) For each biological treatment unit used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1256(g), the owner or operator shall monitor TSS, BOD, and the 
biomass concentration at a frequency approved by the permitting 
authority and using methods approved by the permitting authority. The 
owner or operator may request approval to monitor other parameters. The 
request shall be submitted in the Precompliance report according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1260(e), and shall include a description 
of planned reporting and recordkeeping procedures. The owner or operator 
shall include as part of the submittal the basis for the selected 
monitoring frequencies and the methods that will be used. The 
Administrator will specify appropriate reporting and recordkeeping 
requirements as part of the review of the permit application or by other 
appropriate means.
    (3) For nonbiological treatment units, the owner or operator shall 
request approval to monitor appropriate parameters that demonstrate 
proper operation of the selected treatment process. The request shall be 
submitted in the Precompliance report according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1260(e), and shall include a description of planned 
reporting and recordkeeping procedures. The Administrator will specify 
appropriate reporting and recordkeeping requirements as part of the 
review of the permit application or by other appropriate means.
    (h) Leak inspection provisions for vapor suppression equipment. (1) 
Except as provided in paragraph (h)(9) of this section, for each vapor 
collection system, closed-vent system, fixed roof, cover, or enclosure 
required to comply with this section, the owner or operator shall comply 
with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(2) through (8) of this section.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (h)(6) and (7) of this section, 
each vapor collection system and closed-vent system shall be inspected 
according to the procedures and schedule specified in paragraphs 
(h)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section and each fixed roof, cover, and 
enclosure shall be inspected according to the procedures and schedule 
specified in paragraph (h)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i) If the vapor collection system or closed-vent system is 
constructed of hard-piping, the owner or operator shall:
    (A) Conduct an initial inspection according to the procedures in 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section, and
    (B) Conduct annual visual inspections for visible, audible, or 
olfactory indications of leaks.

[[Page 96]]

    (ii) If the vapor collection system or closed-vent system is 
constructed of ductwork, the owner or operator shall:
    (A) Conduct an initial inspection according to the procedures in 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section, and
    (B) Conduct annual inspections according to the procedures in 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
    (C) Conduct annual visual inspections for visible, audible, or 
olfactory indications of leaks.
    (iii) For each fixed roof, cover, and enclosure, the owner or 
operator shall:
    (A) Conduct an initial inspection according to the procedures in 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section, and
    (B) Conduct semiannual visual inspections for visible, audible, or 
olfactory indications of leaks.
    (3) Each vapor collection system, closed-vent system, fixed roof, 
cover, and enclosure shall be inspected according to the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (h)(3)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with Method 21 of 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    (ii) Detection instrument performance criteria. (A) Except as 
provided in paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(B) of this section, the detection 
instrument shall meet the performance criteria of Method 21 of 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A, except the instrument response factor criteria in 
section 3.1.2(a) of Method 21 shall be for the average composition of 
the process fluid not each individual VOC in the stream. For process 
streams that contain nitrogen, air, or other inerts which are not 
organic HAP or VOC, the average stream response factor shall be 
calculated on an inert-free basis.
    (B) If no instrument is available at the plant site that will meet 
the performance criteria specified in paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(A) of this 
section, the instrument readings may be adjusted by multiplying by the 
average response factor of the process fluid, calculated on an inert-
free basis as described in paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(A) of this section.
    (iii) The detection instrument shall be calibrated before use on 
each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A.
    (iv) Calibration gases shall be as follows:
    (A) Zero air (less than 10 parts per million hydrocarbon in air); 
and
    (B) Mixtures of methane in air at a concentration less than 10,000 
parts per million. A calibration gas other than methane in air may be 
used if the instrument does not respond to methane or if the instrument 
does not meet the performance criteria specified in paragraph 
(h)(2)(ii)(A) of this section. In such cases, the calibration gas may be 
a mixture of one or more of the compounds to be measured in air.
    (v) An owner or operator may elect to adjust or not adjust 
instrument readings for background. If an owner or operator elects to 
not adjust readings for background, all such instrument readings shall 
be compared directly to the applicable leak definition to determine 
whether there is a leak. If an owner or operator elects to adjust 
instrument readings for background, the owner or operator shall measure 
background concentration using the procedures in Sec. 63.180(b) and (c). 
The owner or operator shall subtract background reading from the maximum 
concentration indicated by the instrument.
    (vi) The background level shall be determined according to the 
procedures in Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60 appendix A.
    (vii) The arithmetic difference between the maximum concentration 
indicated by the instrument and the background level shall be compared 
with 500 parts per million for determining compliance.
    (4) Leaks, as indicated by an instrument reading greater than 500 
parts per million above background or by visual inspections, shall be 
repaired as soon as practicable, except as provided in paragraph (h)(5) 
of this section.
    (i) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after the leak is detected.
    (ii) Repair shall be completed no later than 15 calendar days after 
the leak is detected, except as provided in paragraph (h)(4)(iii) of 
this section.
    (iii) For leaks found in vapor collection systems used for transfer 
operations, repairs shall be completed no later than 15 calendar days 
after the leak is detected or at the beginning of

[[Page 97]]

the next transfer loading operation, whichever is later.
    (5) Delay of repair of a vapor collection system, closed-vent 
system, fixed roof, cover, or enclosure for which leaks have been 
detected is allowed if the repair is technically infeasible without a 
shutdown, as defined in Sec. 63.1251, or if the owner or operator 
determines that emissions resulting from immediate repair would be 
greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of 
repair. Repair of such equipment shall be complete by the end of the 
next shutdown.
    (6) Any parts of the vapor collection system, closed-vent system, 
fixed roof, cover, or enclosure that are designated, as described in 
paragraph (h)(8)(i) of this section, as unsafe to inspect are exempt 
from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (h)(2)(i), (ii), and 
(iii) of this section if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that the equipment is unsafe to 
inspect because inspecting personnel would be exposed to an imminent or 
potential danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs 
(h)(2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section; and
    (ii) The owner or operator has a written plan that requires 
inspection of the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-
inspect times.
    (7) Any parts of the vapor collection system, closed-vent system, 
fixed roof, cover, or enclosure that are designated, as described in 
paragraph (h)(8)(ii) of this section, as difficult to inspect are exempt 
from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (h)(2)(i), (ii), and 
(iii)(A) of this section if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that the equipment cannot be 
inspected without elevating the inspecting personnel more than 2 meters 
above a support surface; and
    (ii) The owner or operator has a written plan that requires 
inspection of the equipment at least once every 5 years.
    (8) Records shall be maintained as specified in Sec. 63.1259(i) (4) 
through (9).
    (9) If a closed-vent system subject to this section is also subject 
to the equipment leak provisions of Sec. 63.1255, the owner or operator 
shall comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1255 and is exempt from the 
requirements of this section.



Sec. 63.1259  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) Requirements of subpart A of this part. The owner or operator of 
an affected source shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements in 
subpart A of this part as specified in Table 1 of this subpart and in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) Data retention. Each owner or operator of an affected source 
shall keep copies of all records and reports required by this subpart 
for at least 5 years, as specified in Sec. 63.10(b)(1).
    (2) Records of applicability determinations. The owner or operator 
of a stationary source that is not subject to this subpart shall keep a 
record of the applicability determination, as specified in 
Sec. 63.10(b)(3).
    (3) Startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan. The owner or operator 
of an affected source shall develop and implement a written startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3). This 
plan shall describe, in detail, procedures for operating and maintaining 
the affected source during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction 
and a program for corrective action for malfunctioning process, air 
pollution control, and monitoring equipment used to comply with this 
subpart. The owner or operator of an affected source shall keep the 
current and superseded versions of this plan onsite, as specified in 
Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(v). The owner or operator shall keep the startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction records specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) 
through (iii) of this section. Reports related to the plan shall be 
submitted as specified in Sec. 63.1260(i).
    (i) The owner or operator shall record the occurrence and duration 
of each malfunction of air pollution control equipment used to comply 
with this subpart, as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iii).
    (ii) The owner or operator shall record the occurrence and duration 
of each malfunction of continuous monitoring systems used to comply with 
this subpart.
    (iii) For each startup, shutdown, or malfunction, the owner or 
operator shall record all information necessary to demonstrate that the 
procedures specified in the affected source's startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan were followed, as specified in

[[Page 98]]

Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iii); alternatively, the owner or operator shall record 
any actions taken that are not consistent with the plan, as specified in 
Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iv).
    (4) Recordkeeping requirements for sources with continuous 
monitoring systems. The owner or operator of an affected source who 
elects to install a continuous monitoring system shall maintain records 
specified in Sec. 63.10(c)(1) through (14).
    (5) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. For 
new affected sources, each owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions in Sec. 63.5 regarding construction and reconstruction, 
excluding the provisions specified in Sec. 63.5(d)(1)(ii)(H), (d)(2), 
and (d)(3)(ii).
    (b) Records of equipment operation. The owner or operator must keep 
the following records up-to-date and readily accessible:
    (1) Each measurement of a control device operating parameter 
monitored in accordance with Sec. 63.1258 and each measurement of a 
treatment process parameter monitored in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(g)(2) and (3).
    (2) For processes subject to Sec. 63.1252(e), records of 
consumption, production, and the rolling average values of the 
production-indexed HAP and VOC consumption factors.
    (3) For each continuous monitoring system used to comply with this 
subpart, records documenting the completion of calibration checks and 
maintenance of continuous monitoring systems.
    (4) For processes in compliance with the 2,000 lb/yr emission limit 
of Sec. 63.1254(a)(1), records of the rolling annual total emissions.
    (5) Records of the following, as appropriate:
    (i) The number of batches per year for each batch process.
    (ii) The operating hours per year for continuous processes.
    (6) Uncontrolled and controlled emissions per batch for each 
process.
    (7) Wastewater concentration per POD or process.
    (8) Number of storage tank turnovers per year, if used in an 
emissions average.
    (9) Daily schedule or log of each operating scenario prior to its 
operation.
    (10) Description of worst-case operating conditions as determined 
using the procedures described in Sec. 63.1257(b)(8) for control 
devices.
    (11) Periods of planned routine maintenance as described in 
Sec. 63.1257 (c)(5).
    (c) Records of operating scenarios. The owner or operator of an 
affected source shall keep records of each operating scenario which 
demonstrates compliance with this subpart.
    (d) Records of equipment leak detection and repair programs. The 
owner or operator of any affected source implementing the leak detection 
and repair (LDAR) program specified in Sec. 63.1255 of this subpart, 
shall implement the recordkeeping requirements in Sec. 63.1255 of this 
subpart.
    (e) Records of emissions averaging. The owner or operator of any 
affected source that chooses to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1252(d) shall maintain up-to-date records of the following 
information:
    (1) An Implementation Plan which shall include in the plan, for all 
process vents and storage tanks included in each of the averages, the 
information listed in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) The identification of all process vents and storage tanks in 
each emissions average.
    (ii) The uncontrolled and controlled emissions of HAP and the 
overall percent reduction efficiency as determined in 
Secs. 63.1257(g)(1) through (4) or 63.1257(h)(1) through (3) as 
applicable.
    (iii) The calculations used to obtain the uncontrolled and 
controlled HAP emissions and the overall percent reduction efficiency.
    (iv) The estimated values for all parameters required to be 
monitored under Sec. 63.1258(f) for each process and storage tank 
included in an average.
    (v) A statement that the compliance demonstration, monitoring, 
inspection, recordkeeping and reporting provisions in Secs. 63.1257(g) 
and (h), 63.1258(f), and 63.1260(k) that are applicable to each emission 
point in the emissions average will be implemented beginning on the date 
of compliance.
    (2) The Implementation Plan must demonstrate that the emissions from 
the processes and storage tanks proposed to be included in the average 
will

[[Page 99]]

not result in greater hazard or, at the option of the operating permit 
authority, greater risk to human health or the environment than if the 
storage tanks and process vents were controlled according to the 
provisions in Secs. 63.1253 and 63.1254, respectively.
    (i) This demonstration of hazard or risk equivalency shall be made 
to the satisfaction of the operating permit authority.
    (A) The Administrator may require owners and operators to use 
specific methodologies and procedures for making a hazard or risk 
determination.
    (B) The demonstration and approval of hazard or risk equivalency 
shall be made according to any guidance that the Administrator makes 
available for use or any other technically sound information or methods.
    (ii) An emissions averaging plan that does not demonstrate hazard or 
risk equivalency to the satisfaction of the Administrator shall not be 
approved. The Administrator may require such adjustments to the 
emissions averaging plan as are necessary in order to ensure that the 
average will not result in greater hazard or risk to human health or the 
environment than would result if the emission points were controlled 
according to Secs. 63.1253 and 63.1254.
    (iii) A hazard or risk equivalency demonstration must:
    (A) Be a quantitative, comparative chemical hazard or risk 
assessment;
    (B) Account for differences between averaging and non-averaging 
options in chemical hazard or risk to human health or the environment; 
and
    (C) Meet any requirements set by the Administrator for such 
demonstrations.
    (3) Records as specified in paragraphs (a), (b) and (d) of this 
section.
    (4) A rolling quarterly calculation of the annual percent reduction 
efficiency as specified in Sec. 63.1257(g) and (h).
    (f) Records of delay of repair. Documentation of a decision to use a 
delay of repair due to unavailability of parts, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(i), shall include a description of the failure, the reason 
additional time was necessary (including a statement of why replacement 
parts were not kept onsite and when delivery from the manufacturer is 
scheduled), and the date when the repair was completed.
    (g) Record of wastewater stream or residual transfer. The owner or 
operator transferring an affected wastewater stream or residual removed 
from an affected wastewater stream in accordance with Sec. 63.1256(a)(5) 
shall keep a record of the notice sent to the treatment operator stating 
that the wastewater stream or residual contains organic HAP which are 
required to be managed and treated in accordance with the provisions of 
this subpart.
    (h) Records of extensions. The owner or operator shall keep 
documentation of a decision to use an extension, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1256(b)(6)(ii) or (b)(9), in a readily accessible location. The 
documentation shall include a description of the failure, documentation 
that alternate storage capacity is unavailable, and specification of a 
schedule of actions that will ensure that the control equipment will be 
repaired and the tank will be emptied as soon as practical.
    (i) Records of inspections. The owner or operator shall keep records 
specified in paragraphs (i)(1) through (9) of this section.
    (1) A record that each waste management unit inspection required by 
Sec. 63.1256(b) through (f) was performed.
    (2) A record that each inspection for control devices required by 
Sec. 63.1256(h) was performed.
    (3) A record of the results of each seal gap measurement required by 
Sec. 63.1256(b)(5) and (f)(3). The records shall include the date of 
measurement, the raw data obtained in the measurement, and the 
calculations described in Sec. 63.120(b)(2) through (4).
    (4) Records identifying all parts of the vapor collection system, 
closed-vent system, fixed roof, cover, or enclosure that are designated 
as unsafe to inspect in accordance with Sec. 63.1258(h)(6), an 
explanation of why the equipment is unsafe to inspect, and the plan for 
inspecting the equipment.
    (5) Records identifying all parts of the vapor collection system, 
closed-vent system, fixed roof, cover, or enclosure that are designated 
as difficult to inspect in accordance with Sec. 63.1258(h)(7), an 
explanation of why the equipment is difficult to inspect,

[[Page 100]]

and the plan for inspecting the equipment.
    (6) For each vapor collection system or closed-vent system that 
contains bypass lines that could divert a vent stream away from the 
control device and to the atmosphere, the owner or operator shall keep a 
record of the information specified in either paragraph (i)(6)(i) or 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) Hourly records of whether the flow indicator specified under 
Sec. 63.1252(b)(1) was operating and whether a diversion was detected at 
any time during the hour, as well as records of the times and durations 
of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the control device 
or the flow indicator is not operating.
    (ii) Where a seal mechanism is used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1252(b)(2), hourly records of flow are not required. In such 
cases, the owner or operator shall record that the monthly visual 
inspection of the seals or closure mechanisms has been done, and shall 
record the occurrence of all periods when the seal mechanism is broken, 
the bypass line valve position has changed, or the key for a lock-and-
key type lock has been checked out, and records of any car-seal that has 
broken.
    (7) For each inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h)(2) and (3) during which a leak is detected, a record of 
the information specified in paragraphs (i)(7)(i) through (viii) of this 
section.
    (i) The instrument identification numbers; operator name or 
initials; and identification of the equipment.
    (ii) The date the leak was detected and the date of the first 
attempt to repair the leak.
    (iii) Maximum instrument reading measured by the method specified in 
Sec. 63.1258(h)(4) after the leak is successfully repaired or determined 
to be nonrepairable.
    (iv) ``Repair delayed'' and the reason for the delay if a leak is 
not repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the leak.
    (v) The name, initials, or other form of identification of the owner 
or operator (or designee) whose decision it was that repair could not be 
effected without a shutdown.
    (vi) The expected date of successful repair of the leak if a leak is 
not repaired within 15 calendar days.
    (vii) Dates of shutdowns that occur while the equipment is 
unrepaired. (viii) The date of successful repair of the leak.
    (8) For each inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h)(3) during which no leaks are detected, a record that the 
inspection was performed, the date of the inspection, and a statement 
that no leaks were detected.
    (9) For each visual inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h)(2)(i)(B) or (h)(2)(iii)(B) of this section during which 
no leaks are detected, a record that the inspection was performed, the 
date of the inspection, and a statement that no leaks were detected.



Sec. 63.1260  Reporting requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of an affected source shall comply with 
the reporting requirements of paragraphs (b) through (l) of this 
section. Applicable reporting requirements of Secs. 63.9 and 63.10 are 
also summarized in Table 1 of this subpart.
    (b) Initial notification. The owner or operator shall submit the 
applicable initial notification in accordance with Sec. 63.9(b) or (d).
    (c) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. An 
owner or operator who is subject to Sec. 63.5(b)(3) shall submit to the 
Administrator an application for approval of the construction of a new 
major affected source, the reconstruction of a major affected source, or 
the reconstruction of a major source such that the source becomes a 
major affected source subject to the standards. The application shall be 
prepared in accordance with Sec. 63.5(d).
    (d) Notification of CMS performance evaluation. An owner or operator 
who is required by the Administrator to conduct a performance evaluation 
for a continuous monitoring system shall notify the Administrator of the 
date of the performance evaluation as specified in Sec. 63.8(e)(2).
    (e) Precompliance report. The Precompliance report shall be 
submitted at least 6 months prior to the compliance date of the 
standard. For

[[Page 101]]

new sources, the Precompliance report shall be submitted to the 
Administrator with the application for approval of construction or 
reconstruction. The Administrator shall have 90 days to approve or 
disapprove the plan. The plan shall be considered approved if the 
Administrator either approves the plan in writing, or fails to 
disapprove the plan in writing. The 90 day period shall begin when the 
Administrator receives the request. If the request is denied, the owner 
or operator must still be in compliance with the standard by the 
compliance date. To change any of the information submitted in the 
report, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator 90 days 
before the planned change is to be implemented; the change shall be 
considered approved if the Administrator either approves the change in 
writing, or fails to disapprove the change in writing. The Precompliance 
report shall include:
    (1) Requests for approval to use alternative monitoring parameters 
or requests to set monitoring parameters according to 
Sec. 63.1258(b)(4).
    (2) Descriptions of the daily or per batch demonstrations to verify 
that control devices subject to Sec. 63.1258(b)(1)(i) are operating as 
designed.
    (3) A description of test conditions, and the corresponding 
monitoring parameter values for parameters that are set according to 
Sec. 63.1258(b)(3)(ii)(C).
    (4) For owners and operators complying with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1252(e), the P2 demonstration summary required in 
Sec. 63.1257(f).
    (5) Data and rationale used to support an engineering assessment to 
calculate uncontrolled emissions from process vents as required in 
Sec. 63.1257(d)(2)(ii).
    (f) Notification of Compliance Status report. The Notification of 
Compliance Status report required under Sec. 63.9 shall be submitted no 
later than 150 days after the compliance date and shall include:
    (1) The results of any applicability determinations, emission 
calculations, or analyses used to identify and quantify HAP emissions 
from the affected source.
    (2) The results of emissions profiles, performance tests, 
engineering analyses, design evaluations, or calculations used to 
demonstrate compliance. For performance tests, results should include 
descriptions of sampling and analysis procedures and quality assurance 
procedures.
    (3) Descriptions of monitoring devices, monitoring frequencies, and 
the values of monitored parameters established during the initial 
compliance determinations, including data and calculations to support 
the levels established.
    (4) Listing of all operating scenarios.
    (5) Descriptions of worst-case operating and/or testing conditions 
for control devices.
    (6) Identification of emission points subject to overlapping 
requirements described in Sec. 63.1250(h) and the authority under which 
the owner or operator will comply.
    (g) Periodic reports. An owner or operator shall prepare Periodic 
reports in accordance with paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section and 
submit them to the Administrator.
    (1) Submittal schedule. Except as provided in (g)(1) (i), (ii) and 
(iii) of this section, an owner or operator shall submit Periodic 
reports semiannually, beginning 60 operating days after the end of the 
applicable reporting period. The first report shall be submitted no 
later than 240 days after the date the Notification of Compliance Status 
is due and shall cover the 6-month period beginning on the date the 
Notification of Compliance Status is due.
    (i) When the Administrator determines on a case-by-case basis that 
more frequent reporting is necessary to accurately assess the compliance 
status of the affected source; or
    (ii) When the monitoring data are used directly for compliance 
determination and the source experience excess emissions, in which case 
quarterly reports shall be submitted. Once an affected source reports 
excess emissions, the affected source shall follow a quarterly reporting 
format until a request to reduce reporting frequency is approved. If an 
owner or operator submits a request to reduce the frequency of 
reporting, the provisions in Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(ii) and (iii) shall apply, 
except that the

[[Page 102]]

term ``excess emissions and continuous monitoring system performance 
report and/or summary report'' shall mean ``Periodic report'' for the 
purposes of this section.
    (iii) When a new operating scenario has been operated since the last 
report, in which case quarterly reports shall be submitted.
    (2) Content of Periodic report. The owner or operator shall include 
the information in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) through (vii) of this section, 
as applicable.
    (i) Each Periodic report must include the information in 
Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(vi)(A) through (I) and (K) through (M). For each 
continuous monitoring system, the Periodic report must also include the 
information in Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(vi)(J).
    (ii) If the total duration of excess emissions, parameter 
exceedances, or excursions for the reporting period is 1 percent or 
greater of the total operating time for the reporting period, or the 
total continuous monitoring system downtime for the reporting period is 
5 percent or greater of the total operating time for the reporting 
period, the Periodic report must include the information in paragraphs 
(g)(2)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Monitoring data, including 15-minute monitoring values as well 
as daily average values of monitored parameters, for all operating days 
when the average values were outside the ranges established in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report or operating permit.
    (B) Duration of excursions, as defined in Sec. 63.1258(b)(7).
    (C) Operating logs and operating scenarios for all operating 
scenarios for all operating days when the values are outside the levels 
established in the Notification of Compliance Status report or operating 
permit.
    (D) When a continuous monitoring system is used, the information 
required in Sec. 63.10(c)(5) through (13).
    (iii) For each inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1258(h)(2) or (3) during which a leak is detected, the records 
specified in Sec. 63.1259(i)(7) must be included in the next Periodic 
report.
    (iv) For each vapor collection system or closed vent system with a 
bypass line subject to Sec. 63.1252(b)(1), records required under 
Sec. 63.1259(i)(6)(i) of all periods when the vent stream is diverted 
from the control device through a bypass line. For each vapor collection 
system or closed vent system with a bypass line subject to 
Sec. 63.1252(b)(2), records required under Sec. 63.1259(i)(6)(ii) of all 
periods in which the seal mechanism is broken, the bypass valve position 
has changed, or the key to unlock the bypass line valve was checked out.
    (v) The information in paragraphs (g)(2)(iv)(A) through (D) of this 
section shall be stated in the Periodic report, when applicable.
    (A) No excess emissions.
    (B) No exceedances of a parameter.
    (C) No excursions.
    (D) No continuous monitoring system has been inoperative, out of 
control, repaired, or adjusted.
    (vi) For each tank subject to control requirements, periods of 
planned routine maintenance during which the control device does not 
meet the specifications of Sec. 63.1253(b) through (d).
    (vii) Each new operating scenario which has been operated since the 
time period covered by the last Periodic report. For the initial 
Periodic report, each operating scenario for each process operated since 
the compliance date shall be submitted.
    (h) Notification of process change.
    (1) Except as specified in paragraph (h)(2) of this section, 
whenever a process change is made, or a change in any of the information 
submitted in the Notification of Compliance Status Report, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report quarterly. The report may be submitted as 
part of the next Periodic report required under paragraph (g) of this 
section. The report shall include:
    (i) A brief description of the process change.
    (ii) A description of any modifications to standard procedures or 
quality assurance procedures.
    (iii) Revisions to any of the information reported in the original 
Notification of Compliance Status Report under paragraph (f) of this 
section.
    (iv) Information required by the Notification of Compliance Status 
Report under paragraph (f) of this section for changes involving the 
addition of processes or equipment.

[[Page 103]]

    (2) An owner or operator must submit a report 60 days before the 
scheduled implementation date of either of the following:
    (i) Any change in the activity covered by the Precompliance report.
    (ii) A change in the status of a control device from small to large.
    (i) Reports of startup, shutdown, and malfunction. For the purposes 
of this subpart, the startup, shutdown, and malfunction reports shall be 
submitted on the same schedule as the periodic reports required under 
paragraph (g) of this section instead of the schedule specified in 
Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i). These reports shall include the information 
specified in Sec. 63.1259(a)(3)(i) through (iii) and shall contain the 
name, title, and signature of the owner or operator or other responsible 
official who is certifying its accuracy. Reports are only required if a 
startup, shutdown, or malfunction occurred during the reporting period. 
Any time an owner or operator takes an action that is not consistent 
with the procedures specified in the affected source's startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan, the owner or operator shall submit an 
immediate startup, shutdown, and malfunction report as specified in 
Sec. 63.10(d)(4)(ii).
    (j) Reports of LDAR programs. The owner or operator of any affected 
source implementing the LDAR program specified in Sec. 63.1255 of this 
subpart shall implement the reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1255 of 
this subpart. Copies of all reports shall be retained as records for a 
period of 5 years, in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.10(b)(1).
    (k) Reports of emissions averaging. The owner or operator of any 
affected source that chooses to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1252(d) shall submit the implementation plan described in 
Sec. 63.1259(e) 6 months prior to the compliance date of the standard 
and the following information in the periodic reports:
    (1) The records specified in Sec. 63.1259(e) for each process or 
storage tank included in the emissions average;
    (2) All information as specified in paragraph (g) of this section 
for each process or storage tank included in the emissions average;
    (3) Any changes of the processes or storage tanks included in the 
average.
    (4) The calculation of the overall percent reduction efficiency for 
the reporting period.
    (5) Changes to the Implementation Plan which affect the calculation 
methodology of uncontrolled or controlled emissions or the hazard or 
risk equivalency determination.
    (6) Every second semiannual or fourth quarterly report, as 
appropriate, shall include the results according to Sec. 63.1259(e)(4) 
to demonstrate the emissions averaging provisions of Secs. 63.1252(d), 
63.1257(g) and (h), 63.1258(f), and 63.1259(f) are satisfied.
    (l) Notification of performance test and test plan. The owner or 
operator of an affected source shall notify the Administrator of the 
planned date of a performance test at least 60 days before the test in 
accordance with Sec. 63.7(b). The owner or operator also must submit the 
test plan required by Sec. 63.7(c) and the emission profile required by 
63.1257(b)(8)(ii) with the notification of the performance test.
    (m) Request for extension of compliance. An owner or operator may 
submit to the Administrator a request for an extension of compliance in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1250(f)(4).



Sec. 63.1261  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under Sec. 112(d) of the Clean Air Act, the authorities contained 
in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator 
and not transferred to a State.
    (b) The authority conferred in Sec. 63.177; the authority to approve 
applications for determination of equivalent means of emission 
limitation; and the authority to approve alternative test methods shall 
not be delegated to any State.

[[Page 104]]



                    Table 1 To Subpart GGG.--General Provisions Applicability To Subpart GGG
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                   Applies to
 General provisions reference      Summary of requirements         subpart GGG               Comments
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1(a)(1)...................  General applicability of the     Yes.............  Additional terms defined in
                                General Provisions.                                Sec.  63.1251; when overlap
                                                                                   between subparts A and GGG of
                                                                                   this part, subpart GGG takes
                                                                                   precedence.
63.1(a)(2-7).................  ...............................  Yes               ..............................
63.1(a)(8)...................  ...............................  No..............  Discusses state programs.
63.1(a)(9-14)................  ...............................  Yes               ..............................
63.1(b)(1)...................  Initial applicability            Yes.............  Subpart GGG clarifies the
                                determination.                                     applicability in Sec.
                                                                                   63.1250.
63.1(b)(2)...................  Title V operating permit--see    Yes.............  All major affected sources are
                                part 70.                                           required to obtain a title V
                                                                                   permit.
63.1(b)(3)...................  Record of the applicability      Yes.............  All affected sources are
                                determination.                                     subject to subpart GGG
                                                                                   according to the
                                                                                   applicability definition of
                                                                                   subpart GGG.
63.1(c)(1)...................  Applicability after standards    Yes.............  Subpart GGG clarifies the
                                are set.                                           applicability of each
                                                                                   paragraph of subpart A to
                                                                                   sources subject to subpart
                                                                                   GGG.
63.1(c)(2)...................  Title V permit requirement.....  No..............  All major affected sources are
                                                                                   required to obtain a title V
                                                                                   permit. Area sources are not
                                                                                   subject to subpart GGG.
63.1(c)(3)...................  Reserved                         ................  ..............................
63.1(c)(4)...................  Requirements for existing        Yes               ..............................
                                source that obtains an
                                extension of compliance.
63.1(c)(5)...................  No.............................  Notification      Yes
                                                                 requirements
                                                                 for an area
                                                                 source that
                                                                 increases HAP
                                                                 emissions to
                                                                 major source
                                                                 levels.
63.1(d)......................  [Reserved].....................  NA
63.1(e)......................  Applicability of permit program  Yes
                                before a relevant standard has
                                been set.
63.2.........................  Definitions....................  Yes.............  Additional terms defined in
                                                                                   Sec.  63.1251; when overlap
                                                                                   between subparts A and GGG of
                                                                                   this part occurs, subpart GGG
                                                                                   takes precedence.
63.3.........................  Units and abbreviations........  Yes.............  Other units used in subpart
                                                                                   GGG are defined in that
                                                                                   subpart.
63.4.........................  Prohibited activities..........  Yes
63.5(a)......................  Construction and                 Yes.............  Except replace the terms
                                reconstruction--applicability.                     ``source'' and ``stationary
                                                                                   source'' with ``affected
                                                                                   source''.
63.5(b)(1)...................  Upon construction, relevant      Yes
                                standards for new sources.
63.5(b)(2)...................  [Reserved].....................  NA
63.5(b)(3)...................  New construction/reconstruction  Yes
63.5(b)(4)...................  Construction/reconstruction      Yes
                                notification.
63.5(b)(5)...................  Construction/reconstruction      Yes
                                compliance.
63.5(b)(6)...................  Equipment addition or process    Yes
                                change.
63.5(c)......................  [Reserved].....................  NA
63.5(d)......................  Application for approval of      Yes.............  Except for certain provisions
                                construction/reconstruction.                       identified in 63.1259(a)(5)
63.5(e)......................  ...............................  Construction/     Yes
                                                                 reconstruction
                                                                 approval..
63.5(f)......................  Construction/reconstruction      Yes.............  Except replace ``source'' with
                                approval based on prior State                      ``affected source''.
                                review..

[[Page 105]]

 
63.6(a)(1)...................  Compliance with standards and    Yes
                                maintenance requirements.
63.6(a)(2)...................  Requirements for area source     Yes
                                that increases emissions to
                                become major.
63.6(b)(1-2).................  Compliance dates for new and     No..............  Subpart GGG specifies
                                reconstructed sources.                             compliance dates.
63.6(b)(3-6).................  Compliance dates for area        Yes
                                sources that become major
                                sources.
63.6 (b)(7)..................  Compliance dates for new         No..............  Subpart GGG specifies NS
                                sources resulting from new                         applicability and compliance
                                unaffected area sources                            dates
                                becoming subject to standards.
63.6(c)......................  Compliance dates for existing    Yes.............   Except replace ``source''
                                sources.                                           with ``affected source''.
                                                                                   Subpart GGG specifies
                                                                                   compliance dates.
63.6(e)......................  Operation and maintenance        Yes.............  Startup, Shutdown, Malfunction
                                requirements.                                      Plan requirements
                                                                                   specifically include
                                                                                   malfunction process, control
                                                                                   and monitoring equipment.
63.6(f)-(g)..................  Compliance with nonopacity and   Yes.............  Except that subpart GGG
                                alternative nonopacity                             specifies performance test
                                emission standards.                                conditions.
63.6(h)......................  Opacity and visible emission     No..............  Subpart GGG does not contain
                                standards.                                         any opacity or visible
                                                                                   emission standards.
63.6(i)......................  Extension of compliance with     No..............  Sec.  63.1250(f)(4) specifies
                                emission standards.                                provisions for compliance
                                                                                   extensions.
63.6(j)......................  Exemption from compliance with   Yes
                                emission standards.
63.7(a)(1)...................  Performance testing              Yes.............  Subpart GGG specifies required
                                requirements..                                     testing and compliance
                                                                                   procedures.
63.7(a)(2)(I-ix).............  ...............................  Yes
63.7(a)(3)...................  ...............................  Yes
63.7(b)(1)...................  Notification of performance      Yes
                                test.
63.7(b)(2)...................  Notification of delay in         Yes
                                conducting a scheduled
                                performance test.
63.7(c)......................  Quality assurance program......  Yes.............  Except that the test plan must
                                                                                   be submitted with the
                                                                                   notification of the
                                                                                   performance test.
63.7(d)......................  Performance testing facilities.  Yes.............  Except replace ``source'' with
                                                                                   ``affected source''.
63.7(e)......................  Conduct of performance tests...  Yes.............  Subpart GGG also contains test
                                                                                   methods and procedures
                                                                                   specific to pharmaceutical
                                                                                   sources.
63.7(f)......................  Use of alternative test method.  Yes
63.7(g)......................  Data analysis, recordkeeping,    Yes
                                and reporting.
63.7(h)......................  Waiver of performance tests....  Yes
63.8(a)......................  Monitoring requirements........  Yes.............  See Sec.  63.1258.
63.8(b)(1)...................  Conduct of monitoring..........  Yes
63.8(b)(2)...................  CMS and combined effluents.....  No..............  Sec.  63.1258 of subpart GGG
                                                                                   provides specific CMS
                                                                                   requirements.
63.8(b)(3)-(c)(3)............  CMS requirements...............  Yes
63.8(c)(4-5).................  CMS operation requirements.....  Yes
63.8 (c)6-8).................  CMS calibration and malfunction  Yes
                                provisions.
63.8(d)......................  CMS quality control program....  Yes
63.8(e)(1)...................  Performance evaluations of CMS.  Yes
63.8(e)(2)...................  Notification of performance      Yes               ..............................
                                evaluation.
63.8(e)(3-4).................  CMS requirements/alternatives..  Yes               ..............................
63.8(e)(5)(i)................  Reporting performance            Yes.............  See Sec.
                                evaluation results.
63.1260 (a)..................
63.8(e)(5)(ii)...............  Results of COMS performance      No..............  Subpart GGG does not contain
                                evaluation.                                        any opacity or visible
                                                                                   emission standards.
63.8(f)-(g)..................  Alternative monitoring method/   Yes               ..............................
                                reduction of monitoring data.
63.9(a)-(d)..................  Notification requirements--      Yes               ..............................
                                Applicability and general
                                information.
63.9(e)......................  Notification of performance      Yes               ..............................
                                test.
63.9(f)......................  Notification of opacity and      No..............  Subpart GGG does not contain
                                visible emissions observations.                    any opacity or visible
                                                                                   emission standards.
63.9(g)(1)...................  Additional notification          Yes               ..............................
                                requirements for sources with
                                CMS.

[[Page 106]]

 
63.9(g)(2)...................  Notification of compliance with  No..............  Subpart GGG does not contain
                                opacity emission standard.                         any opacity or visible
                                                                                   emission standards.
63.9(g)(3)...................  Notification that criterion to   Yes               ..............................
                                continue use of alternative to
                                relative accuracy testing has
                                been exceeded.
63.9(h)......................  Notification of compliance       Yes.............  Due 150 days after compliance
                                status..                                           date.
63.9(i)......................  Adjustment to time periods or    Yes               ..............................
                                postmark deadlines for
                                submittal and review of
                                required communications.
63.9(j)......................  Change in information provided.  Yes               ..............................
63.10(a).....................  Recordkeeping requirements.....  Yes.............  See Sec.
63.1259......................
63.10(b)(1)..................  Records retention..............  Yes               ..............................
63.10(b)(2)..................  Information and documentation    No..............  Subpart GGG specifies
                                to support notifications.                          recordkeeping requirements.
63.10(b)(3)..................  Records retention for sources    Yes.............   Applicability requirements
                                not subject to relevant                            are given in Sec.  63.1250.
                                standard.
63.10(c)-(d)(2)..............  Other recordkeeping and          Yes.............
                                reporting provisions.
63.10(d)(3)..................  Reporting results of opacity or  No..............  Subpart GGG does not include
                                visible emissions observations.                    any opacity or visible
                                                                                   emission standards.
63.10(d)(4-5)................  Other recordkeeping and          Yes.............
                                reporting provisions.
63.10(e).....................  Additional CMS reporting         Yes.............
                                requirements.
63.10(f).....................  Waiver of recordkeeping or       Yes.............
                                reporting requirements..
63.11........................  Control device requirements for  Yes.............
                                flares.
63.12........................  State authority and delegations  Yes.............  See Sec.  63.1261.
63.13........................  Addresses of State air           Yes.............
                                pollution control agencies.
63.14........................  Incorporations by reference....  Yes.............
63.15........................  Availability of information and  Yes.............
                                confidentiality.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 107]]


             Table 2 To Subpart GGG.--Partially Soluble HAP
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,1,1-Trichloroethane (methyl chloroform)
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene (vinylidene chloride)
1,2-Dibromoethane
1,2-Dichloroethane (ethylene dichloride)
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,3-Dichloropropene
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
2-Butanone (mek)
1,4-Dichlorobenzene
2-Nitropropane
4-Methyl-2-pentanone (mibk)
Acetaldehyde
Acrolein
Acrylonitrile
Allyl chloride
Benzene
Benzyl chloride
Biphenyl
Bromoform (tribromomethane)
Bromomethane
Butadiene
Carbon disulfide
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane (ethyl chloride)
Chloroform
Chloromethane
Chloroprene
Cumene
Dichloroethyl ether
Dinitrophenol
Epichlorohydrin
Ethyl acrylate
Ethylbenzene
Ethylene oxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Hexachloroethane
Methyl methacrylate
Methyl-t-butyl ether
Methylene chloride
N,N-dimethylaniline
Propionaldehyde.
Propylene oxide
Styrene
Tetrachloroethene (perchloroethylene)
Tetrachloromethane (carbon tetrachloride
Toluene
Trichlorobenzene (1,2,4-)
Trichloroethylene
Triethylamine
Trimethylpentane
Vinyl acetate
Vinyl chloride
Xylene (m)
Xylene (o)
Xylene (p)
N-hexane
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                  Table 3 To Subpart GGG.--Soluble HAP
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                Compound
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine.
1,4-Dioxane.
Acetonitrile.
Acetophenone.
Diethyl sulfate.
Dimethyl sulfate.
Dinitrotoluene.
Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether.
Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate.
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
Isophorone.
Methanol (methyl alcohol).
Nitrobenzene.
Toluidene.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 108]]


                     Table 4 to Subpart GGG.--Monitoring Requirements for Control Devices a
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Monitoring equipment        Parameters to be
          Control device                    required                  monitored                 Frequency
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All control devices..............  1. Flow indicator          1. Presence of flow       Hourly records of
                                    installed at all bypass    diverted from the         whether the flow
                                    lines to the atmosphere    control device to the     indicator was operating
                                    and equipped with          atmosphere or.            and whether a diversion
                                    continuous recorder or.                              was detected at any
                                                                                         time during each hour.
                                   2. Valves sealed closed    2. Monthly inspections    Monthly.
                                    with car-seal or lock-     of sealed valves.
                                    and-key configuration.
Scrubber.........................  Liquid flow rate or        1. Liquid flow rate into  1. Every 15 minutes.
                                    pressure drop mounting     or out of the scrubber
                                    device. Also a pH          or the pressure drop
                                    monitor if the scrubber    across the scrubber.
                                    is used to control acid
                                    emissions.
                                                              2. pH of effluent         2. Once a day.
                                                               scrubber liquid.
Thermal incinerator..............  Temperature monitoring     Firebox temperature.....  Every 15 minutes.
                                    device installed in
                                    firebox or in ductwork
                                    immediately downstream
                                    of firebox b.
Catalytic incinerator............  Temperature monitoring     Temperature difference    Every 15 minutes.
                                    device installed in gas    across catalyst bed.
                                    stream immediately
                                    before and after
                                    catalyst bed.
Flare............................  Heat sensing device        Presence of a flame at    Every 15 minutes.
                                    installed at the pilot     the pilot light.
                                    light.
Boiler or process heater 44 mega   Temperature monitoring     Combustion temperature..  Every 15 minutes.
 watts and vent stream is not       device installed in
 mixed with the primary fuel.       firebox b.
Condenser........................  Temperature monitoring     Condenser exit (product   Every 15 minutes.
                                    device installed at        side) temperature.
                                    condenser exit.
Carbon adsorber (nonregenerative)  None.....................  Operating time since      N/A.
                                                               last replacement.
Carbon adsorber (regenerative)...  Stream flow monitoring     1. Total regeneration     1. For each regeneration
                                    device, and.               stream mass or            cycle, record the total
                                                               volumetric flow during    regeneration stream
                                                               carbon bed regeneration   mass or volumetric
                                                               cycle(s).                 flow.
                                   Carbon bed temperature     2. Temperature of carbon  2. For each regeneration
                                    monitoring device.         bed after regeneration.   cycle, record the
                                                                                         maximum carbon bed-
                                                                                         temperature.
                                                              3. Temperature of carbon  3. Within 15 minutes of
                                                               bed within 15 minutes     completing any cooling
                                                               of completing any         cycle, record the
                                                               cooling cycle(s).         carbon bed temperature.
                                                              4. Operating time since   4. Operating time to be
                                                               end of last               based on worst-case
                                                               regeneration.             conditions.
                                                              5. Check for bed          5. Yearly.
                                                               poisoning.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a As an alternative to the monitoring requirements specified in this table, the owner or operator may use a CEM
  meeting the requirements of Performance Specifications 8 or 9 of appendix B of part 60 to monitor TOC every 15
  minutes.
b Monitor may be installed in the firebox or in the ductwork immediately downstream of the firebox before any
  substantial heat exchange is encountered.


[[Page 109]]


  Table 5 To Subpart GGG.--Control Requirements for Items of Equipment
               That Meet the Criteria of Sec.  63.1252(f)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
      Item of equipment                  Control requirement a
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drain or drain hub...........  (a) Tightly fitting solid cover (TFSC);
                                or
                               (b) TFSC with a vent to either a process,
                                or to a fuel gas system, or to a control
                                device meeting the requirements of Sec.
                                63.1256(h)(2); or
                               (c) Water seal with submerged discharge
                                or barrier to protect discharge from
                                wind.
Manhole b....................  (a) TFSC; or
                               (b) TFSC with a vent to either a process,
                                or to a fuel gas system, or to a control
                                device meeting the requirements of Sec.
                                63.1256(h)(2); or
                               (c) If the item is vented to the
                                atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                operating water seal at the entrance or
                                exit to the item to restrict ventilation
                                in the collection system. The vent pipe
                                shall be at least 90 cm in length and
                                not exceeding 10.2 cm in nominal inside
                                diameter.
Lift station.................  (a) TFSC; or
                               (b) TFSC with a vent to either a process,
                                or to a fuel gas system, or to a control
                                device meeting the requirements of Sec.
                                63.1256(h)(2); or
                               (c) If the lift station is vented to the
                                atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                operating water seal at the entrance or
                                exit to the item to restrict ventilation
                                in the collection system. The vent pipe
                                shall be at least 90 cm in length and
                                not exceeding 10.2 cm in nominal inside
                                diameter. The lift station shall be
                                level controlled to minimize changes in
                                the liquid level.
  Trench.....................  (a) TFSC; or
                               (b) TFSC with a vent to either a process,
                                or to a fuel gas system, or to a control
                                device meeting the requirements of Sec.
                                63.1256(h)(2); or
                               (c) If the item is vented to the
                                atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                operating water seal at the entrance or
                                exit to the item to restrict ventilation
                                in the collection system. The vent pipe
                                shall be at least 90 cm in length and
                                not exceeding 10.2 cm in nominal inside
                                diameter.
Pipe.........................  Each pipe shall have no visible gaps in
                                joints, seals, or other emission
                                interfaces
Oil/Water separator..........  (a) Equip with a fixed roof and route
                                vapors to a process or to a fuel gas
                                system, or equip with a closed-vent
                                system that routes vapors to a control
                                device meeting the requirements of Sec.
                                63.1256(h)(2); or
                               (b) Equip with a floating roof that meets
                                the equipment specifications of Sec.
                                60.693 (a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii), (a)(2),
                                (a)(3), and (a)(4).
 Tank........................  Maintain a fixed roof.c If the tank is
                                spargedd or used for heating or treating
                                by means of an exothermic reaction, a
                                fixed roof and a system shall be
                                maintained that routes the organic
                                hazardous air pollutants vapors to other
                                process equipment or a fuel gas system,
                                or a closed-vent system that routes
                                vapors to a control device that meets
                                the requirements of 40 CFR Sec.  63.119
                                (e)(1) or (e)(2).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 AAAa Where a tightly fitting solid cover is required, it shall be
  maintained with no visible gaps or openings, except during periods of
  sampling, inspection, or maintenance.
 AAAb Manhole includes sumps and other points of access to a conveyance
  system.
 AAAc A fixed roof may have openings necessary for proper venting of the
  tank, such as pressure/vacuum vent, j-pipe vent.
 AAA d The liquid in the tank is agitated by injecting compressed air or
  gas.


 Table 6 to Subpart GGG.--Wastewater--Compliance Options for Wastewaster
                                  Tanks
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                               Maximum true
       Capacity, m\3\              vapor         Control requirements
                               pressure, kPa
------------------------------------------------------------------------
75..........................  ..............  Sec.  63.1256(b)(1).
>75 and 151.................            13.1  Sec.  63.1256(b)(1).
                                       >13.1  Sec.  63.1256(b)(2).
>151........................             5.2  Sec.  63.1256(b)(1).
                                        >5.2  Sec.  63.1256(b)(2).
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 110]]


                         Table 7 to Subpart GGG.--Wastewater--Inspection and Monitoring Requirements for Waste Management Units
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Inspection or monitoring   Frequency of inspection or
           To comply with                    requirement                 monitoring                                     Method
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TANKS:
    63.1256(b)(3)(i)...............  Inspect fixed roof and all  Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      openings for leaks.
    63.1256(b)(4)..................  Inspect floating roof in    See Secs.  63.120(a)(2)     Visual.
                                      accordance with Secs.       and (a)(3).
                                      63.120(a)(2) and (a)(3).
    63.1256(b)(5)..................  Measure floating roof seal  ..........................  See Sec.  63.120(b)(2)(i) through (b)(4).
                                      gaps in accordance with
                                      Secs.  63.120(b)(2)(i)
                                      through (b)(4).
                                     --Primary seal gaps.......  Initially Once every 5      ...........................................................
                                                                  years (annually if no
                                                                  secondary seal).
                                     --Secondary seal gaps.....  Initially Semiannually....  ...........................................................
63.1256(b)(7)......................  Inspect wastewater tank     Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
63.1256(b)(8)......................   for control equipment
                                      failures and improper
                                      work practices.
SURFACE IMPOUNDMENTS:
    63.1256(c)(1)(i)...............  Inspect cover and all       Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      openings for leaks.
    63.1256(c)(2)..................  Inspect surface             Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      impoundment for control
                                      equipment failures and
                                      improper work practices.
CONTAINERS:
    63.1256(d)(1)(i)...............  Inspect cover and all       Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
    63.1256(d)(1)(ii)..............   openings for leaks.
    63.1256(d)(3)(i)...............  Inspect enclosure and all   Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      openings for leaks.
    63.1256(d)(4)..................  Inspect container for       Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      control equipment
                                      failures and improper
                                      work practices.
INDIVIDUAL DRAIN SYSTEMS a:
    63.1256(e)(1)(i)...............  Inspect cover and all       Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      openings to ensure there
                                      are no gaps, cracks, or
                                      holes.
    63.1256(e)(2)..................  Inspect individual drain    Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      system for control
                                      equipment failures and
                                      improper work practices.
    63.1256(e)(4)(i)...............  Verify that sufficient      Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      water is present to
                                      properly maintain
                                      integrity of water seals.
    63.1256(e)(4)(ii)..............  Inspect all drains using    Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
    63.1256(e)(5)(i)...............   tightly-fitted caps or
                                      plugs to ensure caps and
                                      plugs are in place and
                                      properly installed.
    63.1256(e)(5)(ii)..............  Inspect all junction boxes  Initially Semiannually....  Visual or smoke test or other means as specified.
                                      to ensure covers are in
                                      place and have no visible
                                      gaps, cracks, or holes.
    63.1256(e)(5)(iii).............  Inspect unburied portion    Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      of all sewer lines for
                                      cracks and gaps.
OIL-WATER SEPARATORS:

[[Page 111]]

 
    63.1256(f)(2)(i)...............  Inspect fixed roof and all  Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      openings for leaks.
    63.1256(f)(3)..................  Measure floating roof seal  Initially b...............  See 40 CFR 60.696(d)(1).
                                      gaps in accordance with
                                      40 CFR 60.696(d)(1).
                                     --Primary seal gaps.......  Once every 5 years........  ...........................................................
    63.1256(f)(3)..................  --Secondary seal gaps.....  Initially b Annually.
    63.1256(f)(4)..................  Inspect oil-water           Initially Semiannually....  Visual.
                                      separator for control
                                      equipment failures and
                                      improper work practices.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a As specified in Sec.  63.1256(e), the owner or operator shall comply with either the requirements of Sec.  63.1256(e)(1) and (2) or Sec.
  63.1256(e)(4) and (5).
b Within 60 days of installation as specified in Sec.  63.1256(f)(3).


[[Page 112]]


  Table 8 To Subpart GGG.--Fraction Measured (Fm) for HAP Compounds in
                           Wastewater Streams
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Chemical name                  CAS No. a          Fm
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetaldehyde............................           75070         1.00
Acetonitrile............................           75058         0.99
Acetophenone............................           98862         0.31
Acrolein................................          107028         1.00
Acrylonitrile...........................          107131         1.00
Allyl chloride..........................          107051         1.00
Benzene.................................           71432         1.00
Benzyl chloride.........................          100447         1.00
Biphenyl................................           92524         0.86
Bromoform...............................           75252         1.00
Butadiene (1,3-)........................          106990         1.00
Carbon disulfide........................           75150         1.00
Carbon tetrachloride....................           56235         1.00
Chlorobenzene...........................          108907         0.96
Chloroform..............................           67663         1.00
Chloroprene (2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene)....          126998         1.00
Cumene..................................           98828         1.00
Dichlorobenzene (p-1,4-)................          106467         1.00
Dichloroethane (1,2-) (Ethylene                   107062         1.00
 dichloride)............................
Dichloroethylether (Bis(2-Chloroethyl             111444         0.76
 ether))................................
Dichloropropene (1,3-)..................          542756         1.00
Diethyl sulfate.........................           64675         0.0025
Dimethyl sulfate........................           77781         0.086
Dimethylaniline (N,N-)..................          121697         0.00080
Dimethylhydrazine (1,1-)................           57147         0.38
Dinitrophenol (2,4-)....................           51285         0.0077
Dinitrotoluene (2,4-)...................          121142         0.085
Dioxane (1,4-) (1,4-Diethyleneoxide)....          123911         0.87
Epichlorohydrin(1-Chloro-2,3-                     106898         0.94
 epoxypropane)..........................
Ethyl acrylate..........................          140885         1.00
Ethylbenzene............................          100414         1.00
Ethyl chloride (Chloroethane)...........           75003         1.00
Ethylene dibromide (Dibromomethane).....          106934         1.00
Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether..........          110714         0.86
Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate.          112072         0.043
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate          110496         0.093
Ethylene oxide..........................           75218         1.00
Ethylidene dichloride (1,1-                        75343         1.00
 Dichloroethane)........................
Hexachlorobenzene.......................          118741         0.97
Hexachlorobutadiene.....................           87683         0.88
Hexachloroethane........................           67721         0.50
Hexane..................................          110543         1.00
Isophorone..............................           78591         0.47
Methanol................................           67561         0.85
Methyl bromide (Bromomethane)...........           74839         1.00
Methyl chloride (Chloromethane).........           74873         1.00
Methyl ethyl ketone (2-Butanone)........           78933         0.99
Methyl isobutyl ketone (Hexone).........          108101         0.98
Methyl methacrylate.....................           80626         1.00
Methyl tert-butyl ether.................         1634044         1.00
Methylene chloride (Dichloromethane)....           75092         1.00
Naphthalene.............................           91203         0.99
Nitrobenzene............................           98953         0.39
Nitropropane (2-).......................           79469         0.99
Phosgene................................           75445         1.00
Propionaldehyde.........................          123386         1.00
Propylene dichloride (1,2-                         78875         1.00
 Dichloropropane).......................
Propylene oxide.........................           75569         1.00
Styrene.................................          100425         1.00
Tetrachloroethane (1,1,2,2-)............           79345         1.00
Tetrachloroethylene (Perchloroethylene).          127184         1.00
Toluene.................................          108883         1.00
Toluidine (o-)..........................           95534         0.15
Trichlorobenzene (1,2,4-)...............          120821         1.00
Trichloroethane (1,1,1-) (Methyl                   71556         1.00
 chloroform)............................
Trichloroethane (1,1,2-) (Vinyl                    79005         0.98
 Trichloride)...........................
Trichloroethylene.......................           79016         1.00
Trichlorophenol (2,4,5-)................           95954         1.00
Triethylamine...........................          121448         1.00
Trimethylpentane (2,2,4-)...............          540841         1.00
Vinyl acetate...........................          108054         1.00

[[Page 113]]

 
Vinyl chloride (Chloroethylene).........           75014         1.00
Vinylidene chloride (1,1-                          75354         1.00
 Dichloroethylene)......................
Xylene (m-).............................          108383         1.00
Xylene (o-).............................           95476         1.00
Xylene (p-).............................          106423         1.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a CAS numbers refer to the Chemical Abstracts Service registry number
  assigned to specific compounds, isomers, or mixtures of compounds.


     Table 9 to Subpart GGG.--Default Biorates for List 1 Compounds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Biorate (K1),
                      Compound name                        L/g MLVSS-hr
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetonitrile............................................           0.100
Acetophenone............................................           0.538
Diethyl sulfate.........................................           0.105
Dimethyl hydrazine(1,1).................................           0.227
Dimethyl sulfate........................................           0.178
Dinitrotoluene(2,4).....................................           0.784
Dioxane(1,4)............................................           0.393
Ethylene glycol dimethyl ether..........................           0.364
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate................           0.159
Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate.................           0.496
Isophorone..............................................           0.598
Methanol................................................             (a)
Nitrobenzene............................................           2.300
Toluidine (-0)..........................................           0.859
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a For direct dischargers, the default biorate for methanol is 3.5 L/g
  MLVSS-hr; for indirect dischargers, the default biorate for methanol
  is 0.2 L/g MLVSS-hr.



 Subpart HHH--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
          From Natural Gas Transmission and Storage Facilities

    Source: 64 FR 32648, June 17, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1270  Applicability and designation of affected source.

    (a) This subpart applies to owners and operators of natural gas 
transmission and storage facilities that transport or store natural gas 
prior to entering the pipeline to a local distribution company or to a 
final end user (if there is no local distribution company), and that are 
major sources of hazardous air pollutants (HAP) emissions as determined 
using the maximum natural gas throughput calculated in either paragraph 
(a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section and paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of 
this section. A compressor station that transports natural gas prior to 
the point of custody transfer, or to a natural gas processing plant (if 
present) is considered a part of the oil and natural gas production 
source category. A facility that is determined to be an area source, 
based on emission estimates using the maximum natural gas throughput 
calculated as specified in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section, 
but subsequently increases emissions or potential to emit above the 
major source levels (without first obtaining and complying with other 
limitations that keep its potential to emit HAP below major source 
levels, becomes a major source and must comply thereafter with all 
applicable provisions of this subpart starting on the applicable 
compliance date specified in paragraph (d) of this section. Nothing in 
this paragraph is intended to preclude a source from limiting its 
potential to emit through other appropriate mechanisms that may be 
available through the permitting authority.
    (1) Facilities that store natural gas or facilities that transport 
and store natural gas shall determine major source status using the 
maximum annual facility natural gas throughput calculated according to 
paragraphs

[[Page 114]]

(a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall determine the number of hours to 
complete the storage cycle for the facility. The storage cycle is the 
number of hours for the injection cycle, calculated according to the 
equation in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section, plus the number of 
hours for the withdrawal cycle, calculated according to the equation in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section.
    (A) The hours for the facility injection cycle are determined 
according to the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.005

Where:

IC = Facility injection cycle in hours/cycle.
WGC = Working gas capacity in cubic meters. The working gas capacity is 
          defined as the maximum storage capacity minus the FERC cushion 
          (as defined in Sec. 63.1271).
IRmax = Maximum facility injection rate in cubic meters per 
          hour.

    (B) The hours for the facility withdrawal cycle are determined 
according to the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.006

Where:

WC = Facility withdrawal cycle, hours/cycle.
WGC = Working gas capacity, cubic meters. The working gas capacity is 
          defined as the maximum storage capacity minus the FERC cushion 
          (as defined in Sec. 63.1271) and shall be the same value as 
          used in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section.
WRmax = Maximum facility withdrawal rate in cubic meters per 
          hour.

    (ii) The owner or operator shall calculate the number of storage 
cycles for the facility per year according to the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.007

Where:

Cycle = Number of storage cycles for the facility per year.
IC = Number of hours for a facility injection cycle, hours/cycle, as 
          calculated in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section.
WC = Number of hours for a facility withdrawal cycle, hours/cycle, as 
          calculated in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall calculate the facilitywide maximum 
annual glycol dehydration unit hours of operation based on the following 
equation:

Operation = Cycles  x  WC

Where:

Operation = Facilitywide maximum annual glycol dehydration unit hours of 
          operation (hr/yr).
Cycles = Number of storage cycles for the facility per year, as 
          calculated in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
WC = Number of hours for a facility withdrawal cycle, hours/cycle, as 
          calculated in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section.

    (iv) The owner or operator shall calculate the maximum facilitywide 
natural gas throughput based on the following equation:

Throughput = Operation  x  WRmax

Where:

Throughput = Maximum facilitywide natural gas throughput in cubic meters 
          per year.
Operation = Maximum facilitywide annual glycol dehydration unit hours of 
          operation in hours per year, as calculated in paragraph 
          (a)(1)(iii) of this section.
WRmax = Maximum facility withdrawal rate in cubic meters per 
          hour.

    (2) Facilities that only transport natural gas shall calculate the 
maximum natural gas throughput as the highest annual natural gas 
throughput over the 5 years prior to June 17, 1999, multiplied by a 
factor of 1.2.
    (3) The owner or operator shall maintain records of the annual 
facility natural gas throughput each year and upon request, submit such 
records to the Administrator. If the facility annual natural gas 
throughput increases above the maximum natural gas throughput calculated 
in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section, the maximum natural gas 
throughput must be recalculated using the higher throughput multiplied 
by a factor of 1.2.
    (4) The owner or operator shall determine the maximum values for 
other parameters used to calculate potential emissions as the maximum 
over the same period for which maximum throughput is determined as 
specified in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section. These 
parameters shall be based

[[Page 115]]

on an annual average or the highest single measured value.
    (b) The affected source is each glycol dehydration unit.
    (c) The owner or operator of a facility that does not contain an 
affected source, as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, is not 
subject to the requirements of this subpart.
    (d) The owner or operator of each affected source shall achieve 
compliance with the provisions of this subpart by the following dates:
    (1) The owner or operator of an affected source, the construction or 
reconstruction of which commenced before February 6, 1998, shall achieve 
compliance with this provisions of the subpart no later than June 17, 
2002 except as provided for in Sec. 63.6(i). The owner or operator of an 
area source, the construction or reconstruction of which commenced 
before February 6, 1998, that increases its emissions of (or its 
potential to emit) HAP such that the source becomes a major source that 
is subject to this subpart shall comply with this subpart 3 years after 
becoming a major source.
    (2) The owner or operator of an affected source, the construction or 
reconstruction of which commences on or after February 6, 1998, shall 
achieve compliance with the provisions of this subpart immediately upon 
initial startup or June 17, 1999, whichever date is later. Area sources, 
the construction or reconstruction of which commences on or after 
February 6, 1998, that become major sources shall comply with the 
provisions of this standard immediately upon becoming a major source.
    (e) An owner or operator of an affected source that is a major 
source or is located at a major source and is subject to the provisions 
of this subpart is also subject to 40 CFR part 70 or part 71 permitting 
requirements.
    (f) Exemptions. A facility with a facilitywide actual annual average 
natural gas throughput less than 28.3 thousand standard cubic meters per 
day, where glycol dehydration units are the only HAP emission source, is 
not subject to the requirements of this subpart. Records shall be 
maintained as required in Sec. 63.10(b)(3).



Sec. 63.1271  Definitions.

    All terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning given to them 
in the Clean Air Act, subpart A of this part (General Provisions), and 
in this section. If the same term is defined in subpart A and in this 
section, it shall have the meaning given in this section for purposes of 
this subpart.
    Boiler means an enclosed device using controlled flame combustion 
and having the primary purpose of recovering and exporting thermal 
energy in the form of steam or hot water. Boiler also means any 
industrial furnace as defined in 40 CFR 260.10.
    Closed-vent system means a system that is not open to the atmosphere 
and is composed of piping, ductwork, connections, and if necessary, flow 
inducing devices that transport gas or vapor from an emission point to 
one or more control devices. If gas or vapor from regulated equipment is 
routed to a process (e.g., to a fuel gas system), the conveyance system 
shall not be considered a closed-vent system and is not subject to 
closed-vent system standards.
    Combustion device means an individual unit of equipment, such as a 
flare, incinerator, process heater, or boiler, used for the combustion 
of organic HAP emissions.
    Compressor station means any permanent combination of compressors 
that move natural gas at increased pressure from fields, in transmission 
pipelines, or into storage.
    Continuous recorder means a data recording device that either 
records an instantaneous data value at least once every hour or records 
hourly or more frequent block average values.
    Control device means any equipment used for recovering or oxidizing 
HAP or volatile organic compounds (VOC) vapors. Such equipment includes, 
but is not limited to, absorbers, carbon adsorbers, condensers, 
incinerators, flares, boilers, and process heaters. For the purposes of 
this subpart, if gas or vapor from regulated equipment is used, reused 
(i.e., injected into the flame zone of a combustion device), returned 
back to the process, or sold,

[[Page 116]]

then the recovery system used, including piping, connections, and flow 
inducing devices, is not considered to be control devices or closed-vent 
systems.
    Custody transfer means the transfer of hydrocarbon liquids or 
natural gas:
    (1) After processing and/or treatment in the producing operations; 
or
    (2) From storage vessels or automatic transfer facilities, or other 
equipment, including product loading racks, to pipelines or any other 
forms of transportation.
    Facility means any grouping of equipment where natural gas is 
processed, compressed, or stored prior to entering a pipeline to a local 
distribution company or (if there is no local distribution company) to a 
final end user. Examples of a facility for this source category are: an 
underground natural gas storage operation; or a natural gas compressor 
station that receives natural gas via pipeline, from an underground 
natural gas storage operation, or from a natural gas processing plant. 
The emission points associated with these phases include, but are not 
limited to, process vents. Processes that may have vents include, but 
are not limited to, dehydration and compressor station engines.
    Facility, for the purpose of a major source determination, means 
natural gas transmission and storage equipment that is located inside 
the boundaries of an individual surface site (as defined in this 
section) and is connected by ancillary equipment, such as gas flow lines 
or power lines. Equipment that is part of a facility will typically be 
located within close proximity to other equipment located at the same 
facility. Natural gas transmission and storage equipment or groupings of 
equipment located on different gas leases, mineral fee tracts, lease 
tracts, subsurface unit areas, surface fee tracts, or surface lease 
tracts shall not be considered part of the same facility.
    Federal Energy Regulatory Commission Cushion or FERC Cushion means 
the minimum natural gas capacity of a storage field as determined by the 
Federal Energy Regulatory Commission.
    Flame zone means the portion of the combustion chamber in a 
combustion device occupied by the flame envelope.
    Flash tank. See the definition for gas-condensate-glycol (GCG) 
separator.
    Flow indicator means a device which indicates whether gas flow is 
present in a line or whether the valve position would allow gas flow to 
be present in a line.
    Gas-condensate-glycol (GCG) separator means a two-or three-phase 
separator through which the ``rich'' glycol stream of a glycol 
dehydration unit is passed to remove entrained gas and hydrocarbon 
liquid. The GCG separator is commonly referred to as a flash separator 
or flash tank.
    Glycol dehydration unit means a device in which a liquid glycol 
(including, but not limited to, ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, or 
triethylene glycol) absorbent directly contacts a natural gas stream and 
absorbs water in a contact tower or absorption column (absorber). The 
glycol contacts and absorbs water vapor and other gas stream 
constituents from the natural gas and becomes ``rich'' glycol. This 
glycol is then regenerated in the glycol dehydration unit reboiler. The 
``lean'' glycol is then recycled.
    Glycol dehydration unit baseline operations means operations 
representative of the glycol dehydration unit operations as of June 17, 
1999. For the purposes of this subpart, for determining the percentage 
of overall HAP emission reduction attributable to process modifications, 
glycol dehydration unit baseline operations shall be parameter values 
(including, but not limited to, glycol circulation rate or glycol-HAP 
absorbency) that represent actual long-term conditions (i.e., at least 1 
year). Glycol dehydration units in operation for less than 1 year shall 
document that the parameter values represent expected long-term 
operating conditions had process modifications not been made.
    Glycol dehydration unit process vent means either the glycol 
dehydration unit reboiler vent and the vent from the GCG separator 
(flash tank), if present.
    Glycol dehydration unit reboiler vent means the vent through which 
exhaust from the reboiler of a glycol dehydration unit passes from the 
reboiler to the atmosphere or to a control device.

[[Page 117]]

    Hazardous air pollutants or HAP means the chemical compounds listed 
in section 112(b) of the Clean Air Act (Act). All chemical compounds 
listed in section 112(b) of the Act need to be considered when making a 
major source determination. Only the HAP compounds listed in Table 1 of 
this subpart need to be considered when determining compliance.
    Incinerator means an enclosed combustion device that is used for 
destroying organic compounds. Auxiliary fuel may be used to heat waste 
gas to combustion temperatures. Any energy recovery section is not 
physically formed into one manufactured or assembled unit with the 
combustion section; rather, the energy recovery section is a separate 
section following the combustion section and the two are joined by ducts 
or connections carrying flue gas. The above energy recovery section 
limitation does not apply to an energy recovery section used solely to 
preheat the incoming vent stream or combustion air.
    Initial startup means the first time a new or reconstructed source 
begins production. For the purposes of this subpart, initial startup 
does not include subsequent startups (as defined in this section) of 
equipment, for example, following malfunctions or shutdowns.
    Major source, as used in this subpart, shall have the same meaning 
as in Sec. 63.2, except that:
    (1) Emissions from any pipeline compressor station or pump station 
shall not be aggregated with emissions from other similar units, whether 
or not such units are in a contiguous area or under common control; and
    (2) Emissions from processes, operations, and equipment that are not 
part of the same facility, as defined in this section, shall not be 
aggregated.
    Natural gas means a naturally occurring mixture of hydrocarbon and 
nonhydrocarbon gases found in geologic formations beneath the earth's 
surface. The principal hydrocarbon constituent is methane.
    Natural gas transmission means the pipelines used for the long 
distance transport of natural gas (excluding processing). Specific 
equipment used in natural gas transmission includes the land, mains, 
valves, meters, boosters, regulators, storage vessels, dehydrators, 
compressors, and their driving units and appurtenances, and equipment 
used for transporting gas from a production plant, delivery point of 
purchased gas, gathering system, storage area, or other wholesale source 
of gas to one or more distribution area(s).
    No detectable emissions means no escape of HAP from a device or 
system to the atmosphere as determined by:
    (1) Instrument monitoring results in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1282(b); and
    (2) The absence of visible openings or defects in the device or 
system, such as rips, tears, or gaps.
    Operating parameter value means a minimum or maximum value 
established for a control device or process parameter which, if achieved 
by itself or in combination with one or more other operating parameter 
values, indicates that an owner or operator has complied with an 
applicable operating parameter limitation, over the appropriate 
averaging period as specified in Sec. 63.1282 (e) and (f).
    Operating permit means a permit required by 40 CFR part 70 or part 
71.
    Organic monitoring device means an instrument used to indicate the 
concentration level of organic compounds exiting a control device based 
on a detection principle such as infra-red, photoionization, or thermal 
conductivity.
    Primary fuel means the fuel that provides the principal heat input 
(i.e., more than 50 percent) to the device. To be considered primary, 
the fuel must be able to sustain operation without the addition of other 
fuels.
    Process heater means an enclosed device using a controlled flame, 
the primary purpose of which is to transfer heat to a process fluid or 
process material that is not a fluid, or to a heat transfer material for 
use in a process (rather than for steam generation) .
    Safety device means a device that meets both of the following 
conditions: the device is not used for planned or routine venting of 
liquids, gases, or fumes from the unit or equipment on which the device 
is installed; and the

[[Page 118]]

device remains in a closed, sealed position at all times except when an 
unplanned event requires that the device open for the purpose of 
preventing physical damage or permanent deformation of the unit or 
equipment on which the device is installed in accordance with good 
engineering and safety practices for handling flammable, combustible, 
explosive, or other hazardous materials. Examples of unplanned events 
which may require a safety device to open include failure of an 
essential equipment component or a sudden power outage.
    Shutdown means for purposes including, but not limited to, periodic 
maintenance, replacement of equipment, or repair, the cessation of 
operation of a glycol dehydration unit, or other affected source under 
this subpart, or equipment required or used solely to comply with this 
subpart.
    Startup means the setting into operation of a glycol dehydration 
unit, or other affected equipment under this subpart, or equipment 
required or used to comply with this subpart. Startup includes initial 
startup and operation solely for the purpose of testing equipment.
    Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that is designed to 
contain an accumulation of crude oil, condensate, intermediate 
hydrocarbon liquids, produced water, or other liquid, and is constructed 
primarily of non-earthen materials (e.g., wood, concrete, steel, 
plastic) that provide structural support.
    Surface site means any combination of one or more graded pad sites, 
gravel pad sites, foundations, platforms, or the immediate physical 
location upon which equipment is physically affixed.
    Temperature monitoring device means an instrument used to monitor 
temperature and having a minimum accuracy of 2 percent of 
the temperature being monitored expressed in  deg.C, or 2.5 
deg.C, whichever is greater. The temperature monitoring device may 
measure temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius, or both.
    Total organic compounds or TOC, as used in this subpart, means those 
compounds which can be measured according to the procedures of Method 
18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    Underground storage means the subsurface facilities utilized for 
storing natural gas that has been transferred from its original location 
for the primary purpose of load balancing, which is the process of 
equalizing the receipt and delivery of natural gas. Processes and 
operations that may be located at an underground storage facility 
include, but are not limited to, compression and dehydration.



Sec. 63.1272  Startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions.

    (a) The provisions set forth in this subpart shall apply at all 
times except during startups or shutdowns, during malfunctions, and 
during periods of non-operation of the affected sources (or specific 
portion thereof) resulting in cessation of the emissions to which this 
subpart applies. However, during the startup, shutdown, malfunction, or 
period of non-operation of one portion of an affected source, all 
emission points which can comply with the specific provisions to which 
they are subject must do so during the startup, shutdown, malfunction, 
or period of non-operation.
    (b) The owner or operator shall not shut down items of equipment 
that are required or utilized for compliance with the provisions of this 
subpart during times when emissions are being routed to such items of 
equipment, if the shutdown would contravene requirements of this subpart 
applicable to such items of equipment. This paragraph does not apply if 
the item of equipment is malfunctioning, or if the owner or operator 
must shut down the equipment to avoid damage due to a contemporaneous 
startup, shutdown, or malfunction of the affected source or a portion 
thereof.
    (c) During startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions when the 
requirements of this subpart do not apply pursuant to paragraphs (a) and 
(b) of this section, the owner or operator shall implement, to the 
extent reasonably available, measures to prevent or minimize excess 
emissions to the maximum extent practical. For purposes of this 
paragraph, the term ``excess emissions'' means emissions in excess of 
those that would have occurred if there were no startup, shutdown, or 
malfunction, and

[[Page 119]]

the owner or operator complied with the relevant provisions of this 
subpart. The measures to be taken shall be identified in the applicable 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan, and may include, but are not 
limited to, air pollution control technologies, recovery technologies, 
work practices, pollution prevention, monitoring, and/or changes in the 
manner of operation of the source. Back-up control devices are not 
required, but may be used if available.
    (d) The owner or operator shall prepare a startup, shutdown, or 
malfunction plan as required in Sec. 63.6(e)(3) except that the plan is 
not required to be incorporated by reference into the source's title V 
permit as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(i). Instead, the owner or 
operator shall keep the plan on record as required by 
Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(v). The failure of the plan to adequately minimize 
emissions during the startup, shutdown, or malfunction does not shield 
an owner or operator from enforcement actions.



Sec. 63.1273  [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1274  General standards.

    (a) Table 2 of this subpart specifies the provisions of subpart A 
(General Provisions) that apply and those that do not apply to owners 
and operators of affected sources subject to this subpart.
    (b) All reports required under this subpart shall be sent to the 
Administrator at the appropriate address listed in Sec. 63.13. Reports 
may be submitted on electronic media.
    (c) Except as specified in paragraph (d) of this section, the owner 
or operator of an affected source (i.e., glycol dehydration unit) 
located at an existing or new major source of HAP emissions shall comply 
with the requirements in this subpart as follows:
    (1) The control requirements for glycol dehydration unit process 
vents specified in Sec. 63.1275;
    (2) The monitoring requirements specified in Sec. 63.1283, and
    (3) The recordkeeping and reporting requirements specified in 
Secs. 63.1284 and 63.1285.
    (d) Exemptions. The owner or operator is exempt from the 
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section if the criteria listed in 
paragraph (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this section are met. Records of the 
determination of these criteria must be maintained as required in 
Sec. 63.1284(d) of this subpart.
    (1) The actual annual average flow of gas to the glycol dehydration 
unit is less than 283 thousand standard cubic meters per day, as 
determined by the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1282(a)(1) of this 
subpart; or
    (2) The actual average emissions of benzene from the glycol 
dehydration unit process vents to the atmosphere are less than 0.90 
megagram per year as determined by the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1282(a)(2) of this subpart.
    (e) Each owner or operator of a major HAP source subject to this 
subpart is required to apply for a part 70 or part 71 operating permit 
from the appropriate permitting authority. If the Administrator has 
approved a State operating permit program under part 70, the permit 
shall be obtained from the State authority. If a State operating permit 
program has not been approved, the owner or operator shall apply to the 
EPA Regional Office pursuant to part 71.
    (f) [Reserved]
    (g) In all cases where the provisions of this subpart require an 
owner or operator to repair leaks by a specified time after the leak is 
detected, it is a violation of this standard to fail to take action to 
repair the leak(s) within the specified time. If action is taken to 
repair the leak(s) within the specified time, failure of that action to 
successfully repair the leak(s) is not a violation of this standard. 
However, if the repairs are unsuccessful, a leak is detected and the 
owner or operator shall take further action as required by the 
applicable provisions of this subpart.



Sec. 63.1275  Glycol dehydration unit process vent standards.

    (a) This section applies to each glycol dehydration unit, subject to 
this subpart, with an actual annual average natural gas flowrate equal 
to or greater than 283 thousand standard cubic meters per day and with 
actual average benzene glycol dehydration unit process vent emissions 
equal to or greater than 0.90 megagrams per year.
    (b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, an owner or 
operator

[[Page 120]]

of a glycol dehydration unit process vent shall comply with the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) For each glycol dehydration unit process vent, the owner or 
operator shall control air emissions by either paragraph (b)(1)(i) or 
(b)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall connect the process vent to a 
control device or a combination of control devices through a closed-vent 
system. The closed-vent system shall be designed and operated in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1281(c). The control 
device(s) shall be designed and operated in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d).
    (ii) The owner or operator shall connect the process vent to a 
control device or a combination of control devices through a closed-vent 
system and the outlet benzene emissions from the control device(s) shall 
be less than 0.90 megagrams per year. The closed-vent system shall be 
designed and operated in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1281(c). The control device(s) shall be designed and operated in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d), except that the 
performance requirements specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(i) and (ii) do 
not apply.
    (2) One or more safety devices that vent directly to the atmosphere 
may be used on the air emission control equipment installed to comply 
with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
    (c) As an alternative to the requirements of paragraph (b) of this 
section, the owner or operator may comply with one of the following:
    (1) The owner or operator shall control air emissions by connecting 
the process vent to a process natural gas line.
    (2) The owner or operator shall demonstrate, to the Administrator's 
satisfaction, that the total HAP emissions to the atmosphere from the 
glycol dehydration unit process vent are reduced by 95.0 percent through 
process modifications or a combination of process modifications and one 
or more control devices, in accordance with the requirements specified 
in Sec. 63.1281(e).
    (3) Control of HAP emissions from a GCG separator (flash tank) vent 
is not required if the owner or operator demonstrates, to the 
Administrator's satisfaction, that total emissions to the atmosphere 
from the glycol dehydration unit process vent are reduced by one of the 
levels specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (c)(3)(ii), through the 
installation and operation of controls as specified in paragraph (b) (1) 
of this section.
    (i) HAP emissions are reduced by 95.0 percent or more.
    (ii) Benzene emissions are reduced to a level less than 0.90 
megagrams per year.



Secs. 63.1276-63.1280  [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1281  Control equipment requirements.

    (a) This section applies to each closed-vent system and control 
device installed and operated by the owner or operator to control air 
emissions as required by the provisions of this subpart. Compliance with 
paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section will be determined by review of 
the records required by Sec. 63.1284, the reports required by 
Sec. 63.1285, by review of performance test results, and by inspections.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Closed-vent system requirements. (1) The closed-vent system 
shall route all gases, vapors, and fumes emitted from the material in a 
HAP emissions unit to a control device that meets the requirements 
specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) The closed-vent system shall be designed and operated with no 
detectable emissions.
    (3) If the closed-vent system contains one or more bypass devices 
that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or 
fumes from entering the control device, the owner or operator shall meet 
the requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and (c)(3)(ii) of 
this section.
    (i) For each bypass device, except as provided for in paragraph 
(c)(3)(ii) of this section, the owner or operator shall either:
    (A) Properly install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a flow 
indicator at the inlet to the bypass device that could divert the stream 
away from the control device to the atmosphere that

[[Page 121]]

takes a reading at least once every 15 minutes, and that sounds an alarm 
when the bypass device is open such that the stream is being, or could 
be, diverted away from the control device to the atmosphere; or
    (B) Secure the bypass device valve installed at the inlet to the 
bypass device in the non-diverting position using a car-seal or a lock-
and-key type configuration. The owner or operator shall visually inspect 
the seal or closure mechanism at least once every month to verify that 
the valve is maintained in the non-diverting position and the vent 
stream is not diverted through the bypass device.
    (ii) Low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, open-ended 
valves or lines, and safety devices are not subject to the requirements 
of paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section.
    (d) Control device requirements. (1) The control device used to 
reduce HAP emissions in accordance with the standards of this subpart 
shall be one of the control devices specified in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) 
through (iii) of this section.
    (i) An enclosed combustion device (e.g., thermal vapor incinerator, 
catalytic vapor incinerator, boiler, or process heater) that is designed 
and operated in accordance with one of the following performance 
requirements:
    (A) Reduces the mass content of either TOC or total HAP in the gases 
vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater, as determined 
in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d);
    (B) Reduces the concentration of either TOC or total HAP in the 
exhaust gases at the outlet to the device to a level equal to or less 
than 20 parts per million by volume on a dry basis corrected to 3 
percent oxygen as determined in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1282(d); or
    (C) Operates at a minimum residence time of 0.5 second at a minimum 
temperature of 760  deg.C.
    (D) If a boiler or process heater is used as the control device, 
then the vent stream shall be introduced into the flame zone of the 
boiler or process heater.
    (ii) A vapor recovery device (e.g., carbon adsorption system or 
condenser) or other control device that is designed and operated to 
reduce the mass content of either TOC or total HAP in the gases vented 
to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater as determined in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d).
    (iii) A flare that is designed and operated in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.11(b).
    (2) [Reserved]
    (3) The owner or operator shall demonstrate that a control device 
achieves the performance requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section by following the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1282(d).
    (4) The owner or operator shall operate each control device in 
accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) Each control device used to comply with this subpart shall be 
operating at all times when gases, vapors, and fumes are vented from the 
emissions unit or units through the closed-vent system to the control 
device, as required under Sec. 63.1275, except when maintenance or 
repair of a unit cannot be completed without a shutdown of the control 
device. An owner or operator may vent more than one unit to a control 
device used to comply with this subpart.
    (ii) For each control device monitored in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1283(d), the owner or operator shall demonstrate 
compliance according to the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(e), or (f) as 
applicable.
    (5) For each carbon adsorption system used as a control device to 
meet the requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall manage the carbon as follows:
    (i) Following the initial startup of the control device, all carbon 
in the control device shall be replaced with fresh carbon on a regular, 
predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service 
life established for the carbon adsorption system.
    (ii) The spent carbon removed from the carbon adsorption system 
shall be either regenerated, reactivated, or burned in one of the units 
specified in paragraphs (d)(5)(ii)(A) through (d)(5)(ii)(G) of this 
section.

[[Page 122]]

    (A) Regenerated or reactivated in a thermal treatment unit for which 
the owner or operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 
270 that implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart X.
    (B) Regenerated or reactivated in a thermal treatment unit equipped 
with and operating organic air emission controls in accordance with this 
section.
    (C) Regenerated or reactivated in a thermal treatment unit equipped 
with and operating organic air emission controls in accordance with a 
national emissions standard for HAP under another subpart in 40 CFR part 
61 or this part.
    (D) Burned in a hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or 
operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that 
implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O.
    (E) Burned in a hazardous waste incinerator which the owner or 
operator has designed and operates in accordance with the requirements 
of 40 CFR part 265, subpart O.
    (F) Burned in a boiler or industrial furnace for which the owner or 
operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that 
implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (G) Burned in a boiler or industrial furnace which the owner or 
operator has designed and operates in accordance with the interim status 
requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (e) Process modification requirements. Each owner or operator that 
chooses to comply with Sec. 63.1275(c)(2) shall meet the requirements 
specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(3) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall determine glycol dehydration unit 
baseline operations (as defined in Sec. 63.1271). Records of glycol 
dehydration unit baseline operations shall be retained as required under 
Sec. 63.1284(b)(9).
    (2) The owner or operator shall document, to the Administrator's 
satisfaction, the conditions for which glycol dehydration unit baseline 
operations shall be modified to achieve the 95.0 percent overall HAP 
emission reduction, either through process modifications or through a 
combination of process modifications and one or more control devices. If 
a combination of process modifications and one or more control devices 
are used, the owner or operator shall also establish the percent HAP 
reduction to be achieved by the control device to achieve an overall HAP 
emission reduction of 95.0 percent for the glycol dehydration unit 
process vent. Only modifications in glycol dehydration unit operations 
directly related to process changes, including, but not limited to, 
changes in glycol circulation rate or glycol-HAP absorbency, shall be 
allowed. Changes in the inlet gas characteristics or natural gas 
throughput rate shall not be considered in determining the overall HAP 
emission reduction.
    (3) The owner or operator that achieves a 95.0 percent HAP emission 
reduction using process modifications alone shall comply with paragraph 
(e)(3)(i) of this section. The owner or operator that achieves a 95.0 
percent HAP emission reduction using a combination of process 
modifications and one or more control devices shall comply with 
paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (e)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall maintain records, as required in 
Sec. 63.1284(b)(10), that the facility continues to operate in 
accordance with the conditions specified under paragraph (e)(2) of this 
section.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall comply with the control device 
requirements specified in paragraph (d) of this section, except that the 
emission reduction achieved shall be the emission reduction specified in 
paragraph (e)(2) of this section.



Sec. 63.1282  Test methods, compliance procedures, and compliance demonstrations.

    (a) Determination of glycol dehydration unit flowrate or benzene 
emissions. The procedures of this paragraph shall be used by an owner or 
operator to determine glycol dehydration unit natural gas flowrate or 
benzene emissions to meet the criteria for the exemption from control 
requirements under Sec. 63.1274(d).
    (1) The determination of actual flowrate of natural gas to a glycol 
dehydration unit shall be made using the

[[Page 123]]

procedures of either paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall install and operate a monitoring 
instrument that directly measures natural gas flowrate to the glycol 
dehydration unit with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent or better. 
The owner or operator shall convert the annual natural gas flowrate to a 
daily average by dividing the annual flowrate by the number of days per 
year the glycol dehydration unit processed natural gas.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall document, to the Administrator's 
satisfaction, that the actual annual average natural gas flowrate to the 
glycol dehydration unit is less than 85 thousand standard cubic meters 
per day.
    (2) The determination of actual average benzene emissions from a 
glycol dehydration unit shall be made using the procedures of either 
paragraph (a)(2)(i) or (a)(2)(ii) of this section. Emissions shall be 
determined either uncontrolled or with federally enforceable controls in 
place.
    (i) The owner or operator shall determine actual average benzene 
emissions using the model GRI-GLYCalcTM, Version 3.0 or 
higher, and the procedures presented in the associated GRI-
GLYCalcTM Technical Reference Manual. Inputs to the model 
shall be representative of actual operating conditions of the glycol 
dehydration unit and may be determined using the procedures documented 
in the Gas Research Institute (GRI) report entitled ``Atmospheric Rich/
Lean Method for Determining Glycol Dehydrator Emissions'' (GRI-95/
0368.1); or
    (ii) The owner or operator shall determine an average mass rate of 
benzene emissions in kilograms per hour through direct measurement by 
performing three runs of Method 18 in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A (or an 
equivalent method), and averaging the results of the three runs. Annual 
emissions in kilograms per year shall be determined by multiplying the 
mass rate by the number of hours the unit is operated per year. This 
result shall be converted to megagrams per year.
    (b) No detectable emissions test procedure. (1) The procedure shall 
be conducted in accordance with Method 21, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    (2) The detection instrument shall meet the performance criteria of 
Method 21, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, except the instrument response 
factor criteria in section 3.1.2(a) of Method 21 shall be for the 
average composition of the fluid, and not for each individual organic 
compound in the stream.
    (3) The detection instrument shall be calibrated before use on each 
day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (4) Calibration gases shall be as follows:
    (i) Zero air (less than 10 parts per million by volume hydrocarbon 
in air); and
    (ii) A mixture of methane in air at a methane concentration of less 
than 10,000 parts per million by volume.
    (5) An owner or operator may choose to adjust or not adjust the 
detection instrument readings to account for the background organic 
concentration level. If an owner or operator chooses to adjust the 
instrument readings for the background level, the background level value 
must be determined according to the procedures in Method 21 of 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A.
    (6)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, 
the detection instrument shall meet the performance criteria of Method 
21 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, except the instrument response factor 
criteria in section 3.1.2(a) of Method 21 shall be for the average 
composition of the process fluid not each individual volatile organic 
compound in the stream. For process streams that contain nitrogen, air, 
or other inerts which are not organic hazardous air pollutants or 
volatile organic compounds, the average stream response factor shall be 
calculated on an inert-free basis.
    (ii) If no instrument is available at the facility that will meet 
the performance criteria specified in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this 
section, the instrument readings may be adjusted by multiplying by the 
average response factor of the process fluid, calculated on an inert-
free basis as described in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section.
    (7) An owner or operator must determine if a potential leak 
interface operates with no detectable emissions using the applicable 
procedure specified in

[[Page 124]]

paragraph (b)(7)(i) or (b)(7)(ii) of this section.
    (i) If an owner or operator chooses not to adjust the detection 
instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, then 
the maximum organic concentration value measured by the detection 
instrument is compared directly to the applicable value for the 
potential leak interface as specified in paragraph (b)(8) of this 
section.
    (ii) If an owner or operator chooses to adjust the detection 
instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, the 
value of the arithmetic difference between the maximum organic 
concentration value measured by the instrument and the background 
organic concentration value as determined in paragraph (b)(5) of this 
section is compared with the applicable value for the potential leak 
interface as specified in paragraph (b)(8) of this section.
    (8) A potential leak interface is determined to operate with no 
detectable organic emissions if the organic concentration value 
determined in paragraph (b)(7) is less than 500 parts per million by 
volume.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Control device performance test procedures. This paragraph 
applies to the performance testing of control devices. The owners or 
operators shall demonstrate that a control device achieves the 
performance requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii) using 
either a performance test as specified in paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section or a design analysis as specified in paragraph (d)(4) of this 
section. The owner or operator may elect to use the alternative 
procedures in paragraph (d)(5) of this section for performance testing 
of a condenser used to control emissions from a glycol dehydration unit 
process vent.
    (1) The following control devices are exempt from the requirements 
to conduct performance tests and design analyses under this section:
    (i) A flare that is designed and operated in accordance with 
Sec. 63.11(b);
    (ii) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 
44 megawatts or greater;
    (iii) A boiler or process heater into which the vent stream is 
introduced with the primary fuel or is used as the primary fuel;
    (iv) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which 
the owner or operator has either been issued a final permit under 40 CFR 
part 270 and complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart 
H, or has certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 
40 CFR part 266, subpart H;
    (v) A hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator 
has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with 
the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O, or has certified 
compliance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 265, 
subpart O.
    (vi) A control device for which a performance test was conducted for 
determining compliance with a regulation promulgated by the EPA, and the 
test was conducted using the same methods specified in this section, and 
either no process changes have been made since the test, or the owner or 
operator can demonstrate that the results of the performance test, with 
or without adjustments, reliably demonstrate compliance despite process 
changes.
    (2) An owner or operator shall design and operate each flare in 
accordance with the requirements specified in Sec. 63.11(b) and in 
paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The compliance determination shall be conducted using Method 22 
of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, to determine visible emissions.
    (ii) An owner or operator is not required to conduct a performance 
test to determine percent emission reduction or outlet organic HAP or 
TOC concentration when a flare is used.
    (3) For a performance test conducted to demonstrate that a control 
device meets the requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), the 
owner or operator shall use the test methods and procedures specified in 
paragraphs (d)(3)(i) through (d)(3)(iv) of this section. The performance 
test shall be conducted according to the schedule specified in 
Sec. 63.7(a)(2), and the results of the performance test shall be 
submitted in the Notification of Compliance Status Report as required in 
Sec. 63.1285(d)(1)(ii).

[[Page 125]]

    (i) Method 1 or 1A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as appropriate, 
shall be used for selection of the sampling sites specified in 
paragraphs (d)(3)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. Any references to 
particulate mentioned in Methods 1 and 1A do not apply to this section.
    (A) To determine compliance with the control device percent 
reduction requirements specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(i)(A),(d)(1)(ii), 
or (e)(3)(ii), sampling sites shall be located at the inlet of the first 
control device and at the outlet of the final control device.
    (B) To determine compliance with the enclosed combustion device 
total HAP concentration limit specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(i)(B), the 
sampling site shall be located at the outlet of the device.
    (ii) The gas volumetric flowrate shall be determined using Method 2, 
2A, 2C, or 2D, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as appropriate.
    (iii) To determine compliance with the control device percent 
reduction performance requirement in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(i)(A), 
63.1281(d)(1)(ii), or 63.1281(e)(3)(ii), the owner or operator shall use 
either Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A; alternatively, any other method or data that have been 
validated according to the applicable procedures in Method 301 of 
appendix A of this part may be used. The following procedures shall be 
used to calculate the percentage of reduction:
    (A) The minimum sampling time for each run shall be 1 hour in which 
either an integrated sample or a minimum of four grab samples shall be 
taken. If grab sampling is used, then the samples shall be taken at 
approximately equal intervals in time, such as 15-minute intervals 
during the run.
    (B) The mass rate of either TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total 
HAP (Ei, Eo) shall be computed.
    (1) The following equations shall be used:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.008
    
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.009
    
Where:

Cij, Coj = Concentration of sample component j of 
          the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, 
          respectively, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Ei, Eo = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and 
          ethane) or total HAP at the inlet and outlet of the control 
          device, respectively, dry basis, kilogram per hour.
Mij, Moj = Molecular weight of sample component j 
          of the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control 
          device, respectively, gram/gram-mole.
Qi, Qo = Flowrate of gas stream at the inlet and 
          outlet of the control device, respectively, dry standard cubic 
          meter per minute.
K2 = Constant, 2.494x10 -6 (parts per million) 
          -1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/
          gram) (minute/hour), where standard temperature is 20 deg.C.

    (2) When the TOC mass rate is calculated, all organic compounds 
(minus methane and ethane) measured by Method 18, of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A; or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be summed 
using the equations in paragraph (d)(3)(iii)(B)(1) of this section.
    (3) When the total HAP mass rate is calculated, only HAP chemicals 
listed in Table 1 of this subpart shall be summed using the equations in 
paragraph (d)(3)(iii)(B)(1) of this section.
    (C) The percentage of reduction in TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
total HAP shall be calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.010

Where:

Rcd = Control efficiency of control device, percent.
Ei = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total HAP 
          at the inlet to the control device as calculated under 
          paragraph (d)(3)(iii)(B) of this section, kilograms TOC per 
          hour or kilograms HAP per hour.
Eo = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total HAP 
          at the outlet of the control device, as calculated under 
          paragraph (d)(3)(iii)(B) of this section, kilograms TOC per 
          hour or kilograms HAP per hour.


[[Page 126]]


    (D) If the vent stream entering a boiler or process heater with a 
design capacity less than 44 megawatts is introduced with the combustion 
air or as a secondary fuel, the weight-percentage of reduction of total 
HAP or TOC (minus methane and ethane) across the device shall be 
determined by comparing the TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total HAP 
in all combusted vent streams and primary and secondary fuels with the 
TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total HAP exiting the device, 
respectively.
    (iv) To determine compliance with the enclosed combustion device 
total HAP concentration limit specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(i)(B), the 
owner or operator shall use either Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A; or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, to measure either TOC 
(minus methane and ethane) or total HAP. Alternatively, any other method 
or data that have been validated according to Method 301 of appendix A 
of this part, may be used. The following procedures shall be used to 
calculate parts per million by volume concentration, corrected to 3 
percent oxygen:
    (A) The minimum sampling time for each run shall be 1 hour in which 
either an integrated sample or a minimum of four grab samples shall be 
taken. If grab sampling is used, then the samples shall be taken at 
approximately equal intervals in time, such as 15-minute intervals 
during the run.
    (B) The TOC concentration or total HAP concentration shall be 
calculated according to paragraph (d)(3)(iv)(B)(1) or (d)(3)(iv)(B)(2) 
of this section.
    (1) The TOC concentration (CTOC) is the sum of the 
concentrations of the individual components and shall be computed for 
each run using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.011

Where:

CTOC = Concentration of total organic compounds minus methane 
          and ethane, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Cji = Concentration of sample components j of sample i, dry 
          basis, parts per million by volume.
n = Number of components in the sample.
x = Number of samples in the sample run.

    (2) The total HAP concentration (CHAP) shall be computed 
according to the equation in paragraph (d)(3)(iv)(B)(1) of this section, 
except that only HAP chemicals listed in Table 1 of this subpart shall 
be summed.
    (C) The TOC concentration or total HAP concentration shall be 
corrected to 3 percent oxygen as follows:
    (1) The emission rate correction factor for excess air, integrated 
sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3B, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A, shall be used to determine the oxygen concentration 
(%O2d). The samples shall be taken during the same time that 
the samples are taken for determining TOC concentration or total HAP 
concentration.
    (2) The concentration corrected to 3 percent oxygen (Cc) 
shall be computed using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JN99.012

Where:

Cc = TOC concentration of total HAP concentration corrected 
          to 3 percent oxygen, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Cm = TOC concentration or total HAP concentration, dry basis, 
          parts per million by volume.
%O2d = Concentration of oxygen, dry basis, percent by volume.

    (4) For a design analysis conducted to meet the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), the owner or operator shall meet the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) and (d)(4)(ii) of this 
section. Documentation of the design analysis shall be submitted as a 
part of the Notification of Compliance Status Report as required in 
Sec. 63.1285(d)(1)(i).
    (i) The design analysis shall include analysis of the vent stream 
characteristics and control device operating parameters for the 
applicable control device as specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) (A) 
through (F) of this section.
    (A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, the design analysis shall 
include the vent stream composition, constituent

[[Page 127]]

concentrations, and flowrate and shall establish the design minimum and 
average temperatures in the combustion zone and the combustion zone 
residence time.
    (B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, the design analysis shall 
include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and 
flowrate and shall establish the design minimum and average temperatures 
across the catalyst bed inlet and outlet, and the design service life of 
the catalyst.
    (C) For a boiler or process heater, the design analysis shall 
include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and 
flowrate; shall establish the design minimum and average flame zone 
temperatures and combustion zone residence time; and shall describe the 
method and location where the vent stream is introduced into the flame 
zone.
    (D) For a condenser, the design analysis shall include the vent 
stream composition, constituent concentrations, flowrate, relative 
humidity, and temperature, and shall establish the design outlet organic 
compound concentration level, design average temperature of the 
condenser exhaust vent stream, and the design average temperatures of 
the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and outlet. As an alternative 
to the design analysis, an owner or operator may elect to use the 
procedures specified in paragraph (d)(5) of this section.
    (E) For a regenerable carbon adsorption, the design analysis shall 
include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, 
flowrate, relative humidity, and temperature, and shall establish the 
design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level, 
adsorption cycle time, number and capacity of carbon beds, type and 
working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon beds, design 
total regeneration stream flow over the period of each complete carbon 
bed regeneration cycle, design carbon bed temperature after 
regeneration, design carbon bed regeneration time, and design service 
life of the carbon.
    (F) For a nonregenerable carbon adsorption system, such as a carbon 
canister, the design analysis shall include the vent stream composition, 
constituent concentrations, flowrate, relative humidity, and 
temperature, and shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic 
compound concentration level, capacity of the carbon bed, type and 
working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon bed, and design 
carbon replacement interval based on the total carbon working capacity 
of the control device and source operating schedule. In addition, these 
systems will incorporate dual carbon canisters in case of emission 
breakthrough occurring in one canister.
    (ii) If the owner or operator and the Administrator do not agree on 
a demonstration of control device performance using a design analysis, 
then the disagreement shall be resolved using the results of a 
performance test performed by the owner or operator in accordance with 
the requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section. The Administrator 
may choose to have an authorized representative observe the performance 
test.
    (5) As an alternative to the procedures in paragraphs (d)(3) and 
(d)(4)(i)(D) of this section, an owner or operator may elect to use the 
procedures documented in the GRI report entitled, ``Atmospheric Rich/
Lean Method for Determining Glycol Dehydrator Emissions,'' (GRI-95/
0368.1) as inputs for the model GRI-GLYCalcTM, Version 3.0 or 
higher, to determine condenser performance.
    (e) Compliance demonstration for control devices performance 
requirements. This paragraph applies to the demonstration of compliance 
with the control device performance requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) and (e)(3)(ii). Compliance shall be demonstrated 
using the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(3) of this 
section. As an alternative, an owner or operator that installs a 
condenser as the control device to achieve the requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(2)(ii) or Sec. 63.1275(c)(2), may demonstrate compliance 
according to paragraph (f) of this section. An owner or operator may 
switch between compliance with paragraph (e) of this section and 
compliance with paragraph (f) of this section only after at least 1 year 
of operation in compliance with the selected approach. Notification of 
such a change

[[Page 128]]

in the compliance method shall be reported in the next Periodic Report, 
as required in Sec. 63.1285(e), following the change.
    (1) The owner or operator shall establish a site specific maximum or 
minimum monitoring parameter value (as appropriate) according to the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1283(d)(5)(i).
    (2) The owner or operator shall calculate the daily average of the 
applicable monitored parameter in accordance with Sec. 63.1283(d)(4).
    (3) Compliance is achieved when the daily average of the monitoring 
parameter value calculated under paragraph (e)(2) of this section is 
either equal to or greater than the minimum or equal to or less than the 
maximum monitoring value established under paragraph (e)(1) of this 
section.
    (f) Compliance demonstration with percent reduction performance 
requirements--condensers. This paragraph applies to the demonstration of 
compliance with the performance requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(ii) for condensers. Compliance shall be demonstrated 
using the procedures in paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(3) of this 
section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall establish a site-specific condenser 
performance curve according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(5)(ii).
    (2) Compliance with the percent reduction requirement in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(ii) or Sec. 63.1275(c)(2) shall be demonstrated by 
the procedures in paragraphs (f)(2)(i) through (f)(2)(iii) of this 
section.
    (i) The owner or operator must calculate the daily average condenser 
outlet temperature in accordance with Sec. 63.1283(d)(4).
    (ii) The owner or operator shall determine the condenser efficiency 
for the current operating day using the daily average condenser outlet 
temperature calculated in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section and the 
condenser performance curve established in paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraphs (f)(2)(iii) (A), (B), and (D) 
of this section, at the end of each operating day the owner or operator 
shall calculate the 30-day average HAP emission reduction from the 
condenser efficiencies determined in paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this 
section for the preceding 30 operating days. If the owner or operator 
uses a combination of process modifications and a condenser in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1275(c)(2), the 30-day 
average HAP emission reduction shall be calculated using the emission 
reduction achieved through process modifications and the condenser 
efficiency determined in paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section, both for 
the preceding 30 operating days.
    (A) After the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1270(f), an owner 
or operator of a facility that stores natural gas that has less than 30 
days of data for determining the average HAP emission reduction, shall 
calculate the cumulative average at the end of the withdrawal season, 
each season, until 30 days of condenser operating data are accumulated. 
For a facility that does not store natural gas, the owner or operator 
that has less than 30 days of data for determining average HAP emission 
reduction, shall calculate the cumulative average at the end of the 
calendar year, each year, until 30 days of condenser operating data are 
accumulated.
    (B) After the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1270(f), an owner 
or operator that has less than 30 days of data for determining the 
average HAP emission reduction, compliance is achieved if the average 
HAP emission reduction calculated in paragraph (f)(2)(iii)(A) of this 
section, is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
    (C) For the purposes of this subpart, a withdrawal season begins the 
first time gas is withdrawn from the storage field after July 1 of the 
calendar year and ends on June 30 of the next calendar year.
    (D) Glycol dehydration units that are operated continuously have the 
option of complying with the requirements specified in 40 CFR 63.772(g).
    (3) Compliance is achieved with the emission limitation specified in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1)(ii) or Sec. 63.1275(c)(2) if the average HAP emission 
reduction calculated in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section is equal 
to or greater than 95.0 percent.

[[Page 129]]



Sec. 63.1283  Inspection and monitoring requirements.

    (a) This section applies to an owner or operator using air emission 
controls in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1275.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Closed-vent system inspection and monitoring requirements. (1) 
For each closed-vent system required to comply with this section, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 
(c)(2) through (7) of this section.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (c) (5) and (6) of this 
section, each closed-vent system shall be inspected according to the 
procedures and schedule specified in paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of 
this section.
    (i) For each closed-vent system joints, seams, or other connections 
that are permanently or semi-permanently sealed (e.g., a welded joint 
between two sections of hard piping or a bolted or gasketed ducting 
flange), the owner or operator shall:
    (A) Conduct an initial inspection according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1282(b) to demonstrate that the closed-vent system 
operates with no detectable emissions.
    (B) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result 
in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible 
cracks, holes, or gaps in piping; loose connections; or broken or 
missing caps or other closure devices. The owner or operator shall 
monitor a component or connection using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1282(b) to demonstrate that it operates with no detectable 
emissions following any time the component or connection is repaired or 
replaced or the connection is unsealed.
    (ii) For closed-vent system components other than those specified in 
paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section, the owner or operator shall:
    (A) Conduct an initial inspection according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1282(b) to demonstrate that the closed-vent system 
operates with no detectable emissions.
    (B) Conduct annual inspections according to the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.1282(b) to demonstrate that the components or connections 
operate with no detectable emissions.
    (C) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result 
in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible 
cracks, holes, or gaps in ductwork; loose connections; or broken or 
missing caps or other closure devices.
    (3) In the event that a leak or defect is detected, the owner or 
operator shall repair the leak or defect as soon as practicable, except 
as provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
    (i) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after the leak is detected.
    (ii) Repair shall be completed no later than 15 calendar days after 
the leak is detected.
    (4) Delay of repair of a closed-vent system for which leaks or 
defects have been detected is allowed if the repair is technically 
infeasible without a shutdown, as defined in Sec. 63.1271, or if the 
owner or operator determines that emissions resulting from immediate 
repair would be greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result 
from delay of repair. Repair of such equipment shall be completed by the 
end of the next shutdown.
    (5) Any parts of the closed-vent system or cover that are 
designated, as described in paragraphs (c)(5) (i) and (ii) of this 
section, as unsafe to inspect are exempt from the inspection 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that the equipment is unsafe to 
inspect because inspecting personnel would be exposed to an imminent or 
potential danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (c)(2) (i) 
or (ii) of this section; and
    (ii) The owner or operator has a written plan that requires 
inspection of the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-
inspect times.
    (6) Any parts of the closed-vent system or cover that are 
designated, as described in paragraphs (c)(6) (i) and (ii) of this 
section, as difficult to inspect are exempt from the inspection 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section if:

[[Page 130]]

    (i) The owner or operator determines that the equipment cannot be 
inspected without elevating the inspecting personnel more than 2 meters 
above a support surface; and
    (ii) The owner or operator has a written plan that requires 
inspection of the equipment at least once every 5 years.
    (7) Records shall be maintained as specified in Sec. 63.1284(b)(5) 
through (8).
    (d) Control device monitoring requirements. (1) For each control 
device except as provided for in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall install and operate a continuous parameter 
monitoring system in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs 
(d)(3) through (9) of this section that will allow a determination to be 
made whether the control device is achieving the applicable performance 
requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d) or (e)(3). The continuous parameter 
monitoring system must meet the following specifications and 
requirements:
    (i) Each continuous parameter monitoring system shall measure data 
values at least once every hour and record either:
    (A) Each measured data value; or
    (B) Each block average value for each 1-hour period or shorter 
periods calculated from all measured data values during each period. If 
values are measured more frequently than once per minute, a single value 
for each minute may be used to calculate the hourly (or shorter period) 
block average instead of all measured values.
    (ii) The monitoring system must be installed, calibrated, operated, 
and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications or 
other written procedures that provide reasonable assurance that the 
monitoring equipment is operating properly.
    (2) An owner or operator is exempted from the monitoring 
requirements specified in paragraphs (d)(3) through (9) of this section 
for the following types of control devices:
    (i) A boiler or process heater in which all vent streams are 
introduced with the primary fuel or are used as the primary fuel;
    (ii) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity 
equal to or greater than 44 megawatts.
    (3) The owner or operator shall install, calibrate, operate, and 
maintain a device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure the 
values of operating parameters appropriate for the control device as 
specified in either paragraph (d)(3)(i), (d)(3)(ii), or (d)(3)(iii) of 
this section.
    (i) A continuous monitoring system that measures the following 
operating parameters as applicable:
    (A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring device 
equipped with a continuous recorder. The monitoring device shall have a 
minimum accuracy of 2 percent of the temperature being 
monitored in  deg.C, or 2.5  deg.C, whichever value is 
greater. The temperature sensor shall be installed at a location in the 
combustion chamber downstream of the combustion zone.
    (B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring 
device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device shall be capable 
of monitoring temperatures at two locations and have a minimum accuracy 
of 2 percent of the temperatures being monitored in  deg.C, 
or 2.5  deg.C, whichever value is greater. One temperature 
sensor shall be installed in the vent stream at the nearest feasible 
point to the catalyst bed inlet and a second temperature sensor shall be 
installed in the vent stream at the nearest feasible point to the 
catalyst bed outlet.
    (C) For a flare, a heat sensing monitoring device equipped with a 
continuous recorder that indicates the continuous ignition of the pilot 
flame.
    (D) For a boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity 
of less than 44 megawatts, a temperature monitoring device equipped with 
a continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device shall have a 
minimum accuracy of 2 percent of the temperature being 
monitored in  deg.C, or 2.5  deg.C, whichever value is 
greater. The temperature sensor shall be installed at a location in the 
combustion chamber downstream of the combustion zone.
    (E) For a condenser, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a 
continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device shall have a 
minimum accuracy of 2 percent of the

[[Page 131]]

temperature being monitored in  deg.C, or 2.5  deg.C, 
whichever value is greater. The temperature sensor shall be installed at 
a location in the exhaust vent stream from the condenser.
    (F) For a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system:
    (1) A continuous parameter monitoring system to measure and record 
the average total regeneration stream mass flow or volumetric flow 
during each carbon bed regeneration cycle. The integrating regenerating 
stream flow monitoring device must have an accuracy of 10 
percent; and
    (2) A continuous parameter monitoring system to measure and record 
the average carbon bed temperature for the duration of the carbon bed 
steaming cycle and to measure the actual carbon bed temperature after 
regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle. The 
temperature monitoring device shall have a minimum accuracy of 
2 percent of the temperature being monitored in  deg.C, or 
2.5  deg.C, whichever value is greater.
    (G) For a nonregenerative-type carbon adsorption system, the owner 
or operator shall monitor the design carbon replacement interval 
established using a performance test performed in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1282(d)(3) or a design analysis in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1282(d)(4)(i)(F) and shall be based on the total carbon working 
capacity of the control device and source operating schedule.
    (ii) A continuous monitoring system that measures the concentration 
level of organic compounds in the exhaust vent stream from the control 
device using an organic monitoring device equipped with a continuous 
recorder. The monitor must meet the requirements of Performance 
Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60 and must be 
installed, calibrated, and maintained according to the manufacturer's 
specifications.
    (iii) A continuous monitoring system that measures alternative 
operating parameters other than those specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i) 
or (d)(3)(ii) of this section upon approval of the Administrator as 
specified in Sec. 63.8(f)(1) through (5).
    (4) Using the data recorded by the monitoring system, the owner or 
operator must calculate the daily average value for each monitored 
operating parameter for each operating day. If HAP emissions unit 
operation is continuous, the operating day is a 24-hour period. If the 
HAP emissions unit operation is not continuous, the operating day is the 
total number of hours of control device operation per 24-hour period. 
Valid data points must be available for 75 percent of the operating 
hours in an operating day to compute the daily average.
    (5) For each operating parameter monitored in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section, the owner or operator 
shall comply with paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section for all control 
devices, and when condensers are installed, the owner or operator shall 
also comply with paragraph (d)(5)(ii) of this section for condensers.
    (i) The owner or operator shall establish a minimum operating 
parameter value or a maximum operating parameter value, as appropriate 
for the control device, to define the conditions at which the control 
device must be operated to continuously achieve the applicable 
performance requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii). Each 
minimum or maximum operating parameter value shall be established as 
follows:
    (A) If the owner or operator conducts performance tests in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d)(3) to demonstrate 
that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements 
specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), then the minimum 
operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value shall 
be established based on values measured during the performance test and 
supplemented, as necessary, by control device design analysis or control 
device manufacturer's recommendations or a combination of both.
    (B) If the owner or operator uses a control device design analysis 
in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d)(4) to demonstrate 
that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements 
specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), then the minimum 
operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value

[[Page 132]]

shall be established based on the control device design analysis and may 
be supplemented by the control device manufacturer's recommendations.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall establish a condenser performance 
curve showing the relationship between condenser outlet temperature and 
condenser control efficiency. The curve shall be established as follows:
    (A) If the owner or operator conducts a performance test in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d)(3) to demonstrate 
that the condenser achieves the applicable performance requirements in 
Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), then the condenser performance curve 
shall be based on values measured during the performance test and 
supplemented as necessary by control device design analysis, or control 
device manufacturer's recommendations, or a combination or both.
    (B) If the owner or operator uses a control device design analysis 
in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1282(d)(4)(i)(D) to 
demonstrate that the condenser achieves the applicable performance 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii), then the 
condenser performance curve shall be based on the condenser design 
analysis and may be supplemented by the control device manufacturer's 
recommendations.
    (C) As an alternative to paragraphs (d)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this 
section, the owner or operator may elect to use the procedures 
documented in the GRI report entitled, ``Atmospheric Rich/Lean Method 
for Determining Glycol Dehydrator Emissions'' (GRI-95/0368.1) as inputs 
for the model GRI-GLYCalcTM, Version 3.0 or higher, to 
generate a condenser performance curve.
    (6) An excursion for a given control device is determined to have 
occurred when the monitoring data or lack of monitoring data result in 
any one of the criteria specified in paragraphs (d)(6)(i) through 
(d)(6)(iv) of this section being met. When multiple operating parameters 
are monitored for the same control device and during the same operating 
day, and more than one of these operating parameters meets an excursion 
criterion specified in paragraphs (d)(6)(i) through (d)(6)(iv) of this 
section, then a single excursion is determined to have occurred for the 
control device for that operating day.
    (i) An excursion occurs when the daily average value of a monitored 
operating parameter is less than the minimum operating parameter limit 
(or, if applicable, greater than the maximum operating parameter limit) 
established for the operating parameter in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section.
    (ii) An excursion occurs when average condenser efficiency 
calculated according to the requirements specified in 
Sec. 63.1282(f)(2)(iii) is less than 95.0 percent, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1282(f)(3).
    (iii) An excursion occurs when the monitoring data are not available 
for at least 75 percent of the operating hours.
    (iv) If the closed-vent system contains one or more bypass devices 
that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or 
fumes from entering the control device, an excursion occurs when:
    (A) For each bypass line subject to Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(A) the 
flow indicator indicates that flow has been detected and that the stream 
has been diverted away from the control device to the atmosphere.
    (B) For each bypass line subject to Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(B), if the 
seal or closure mechanism has been broken, the bypass line valve 
position has changed, the key for the lock-and-key type lock has been 
checked out, or the car-seal has broken.
    (7) For each excursion, except as provided for in paragraph (d)(8) 
of this section, the owner or operator shall be deemed to have failed to 
have applied control in a manner that achieves the required operating 
parameter limits. Failure to achieve the required operating parameter 
limits is a violation of this standard.
    (8) An excursion is not a violation of the operating parameter limit 
as specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) and (d)(8)(ii) of this section.
    (i) An excursion does not count toward the number of excused 
excursions allowed under paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section when the 
excursion occurs during any one of the following periods:

[[Page 133]]

    (A) During a period of startup, shutdown, or malfunction when the 
affected facility is operated during such period in accordance with the 
facility's startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan; or
    (B) During periods of non-operation of the unit or the process that 
is vented to the control device (resulting in cessation of HAP emissions 
to which the monitoring applies).
    (ii) For each control device, or combinations of control devices, 
installed on the same HAP emissions unit, one excused excursion is 
allowed per semiannual period for any reason. The initial semiannual 
period is the 6-month reporting period addressed by the first Periodic 
Report submitted by the owner or operator in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1285(e) of this subpart.
    (9) Nothing in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(8) of this section 
shall be construed to allow or excuse a monitoring parameter excursion 
caused by any activity that violates other applicable provisions of this 
subpart.



Sec. 63.1284  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) The recordkeeping provisions of subpart A of this part, that 
apply and those that do not apply to owners and operators of facilities 
subject to this subpart are listed in Table 2 of this subpart.
    (b) Except as specified in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, 
each owner or operator of a facility subject to this subpart shall 
maintain the records specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(10) of 
this section:
    (1) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to the 
provisions of this subpart shall maintain files of all information 
(including all reports and notifications) required by this subpart. The 
files shall be retained for at least 5 years following the date of each 
occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, report or 
period.
    (i) All applicable records shall be maintained in such a manner that 
they can be readily accessed.
    (ii) The most recent 12 months of records shall be retained on site 
or shall be accessible from a central location by computer or other 
means that provides access within 2 hours after a request.
    (iii) The remaining 4 years of records may be retained offsite.
    (iv) Records may be maintained in hard copy or computer-readable 
form including, but not limited to, on paper, microfilm, computer, 
floppy disk, magnetic tape, or microfiche.
    (2) Records specified in Sec. 63.10(b)(2);
    (3) Records specified in Sec. 63.10(c) for each monitoring system 
operated by the owner or operator in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1283(d). Notwithstanding the previous sentence, monitoring data 
recorded during periods identified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through 
(b)(2)(iv) of this section shall not be included in any average or 
percent leak rate computed under this subpart. Records shall be kept of 
the times and durations of all such periods and any other periods during 
process or control device operation when monitors are not operating.
    (i) Monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and 
zero (low-level) and high-level adjustments;
    (ii) Startup, shutdown, and malfunction events. During startup, 
shutdown and malfunction events, the owner or operator shall maintain 
records indicating whether or not the startup, shutdown, or malfunction 
plan, required under Sec. 63.1272(d), was followed.
    (iii) Periods of non-operation resulting in cessation of the 
emissions to which the monitoring applies; and
    (iv) Excursions due to invalid data as defined in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(6)(iii).
    (4) Each owner or operator using a control device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1274 shall keep the following records up-to-date and readily 
accessible:
    (i) Continuous records of the equipment operating parameters 
specified to be monitored under Sec. 63.1283(d) or specified by the 
Administrator in accordance with Sec. 63.1283(d)(3)(iii). For flares, 
the hourly records and records of pilot flame outages specified in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(3)(i)(C) shall be maintained in place of continuous 
records.
    (ii) Records of the daily average value of each continuously 
monitored parameter for each operating day determined according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1283(d)(4) of this subpart. For flares, 
records of the times and duration of all periods during

[[Page 134]]

which all pilot flames are absent shall be kept rather than daily 
averages.
    (iii) Hourly records of whether the flow indicator specified under 
Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(A) was operating and whether flow was detected at 
any time during the hour, as well as records of the times and durations 
of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the control device 
or the monitor is not operating.
    (iv) Where a seal or closure mechanism is used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(B), hourly records of flow are not required. In 
such cases, the owner or operator shall record that the monthly visual 
inspection of the seals or closure mechanism has been done, and shall 
record the duration of all periods when the seal mechanism is broken, 
the bypass line valve position has changed, or the key for a lock-and-
key type lock has been checked out, and records of any car-seal that has 
broken.
    (5) Records identifying all parts of the closed-vent system that are 
designated as unsafe to inspect in accordance with Sec. 63.1283(c)(5), 
an explanation of why the equipment is unsafe to inspect, and the plan 
for inspecting the equipment.
    (6) Records identifying all parts of the closed-vent system that are 
designated as difficult to inspect in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1283(c)(6), an explanation of why the equipment is difficult to 
inspect, and the plan for inspecting the equipment.
    (7) For each inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1283(c), during which a leak or defect is detected, a record of 
the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (b)(7)(viii) 
of this section.
    (i) The instrument identification numbers, operator name or 
initials, and identification of the equipment.
    (ii) The date the leak or defect was detected and the date of the 
first attempt to repair the leak or defect.
    (iii) Maximum instrument reading measured by the method specified in 
Sec. 63.1283(c)(3) after the leak or defect is successfully repaired or 
determined to be nonrepairable.
    (iv) ``Repair delayed'' and the reason for the delay if a leak or 
defect is not repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the 
leak or defect.
    (v) The name, initials, or other form of identification of the owner 
or operator (or designee) whose decision it was that repair could not be 
effected without a shutdown.
    (vi) The expected date of successful repair of the leak or defect if 
a leak or defect is not repaired within 15 calendar days.
    (vii) Dates of shutdowns that occur while the equipment is 
unrepaired.
    (viii) The date of successful repair of the leak or defect.
    (8) For each inspection conducted in accordance with Sec. 63.1283(c) 
during which no leaks or defects are detected, a record that the 
inspection was performed, the date of the inspection, and a statement 
that no leaks or defects were detected.
    (9) Records of glycol dehydration unit baseline operations 
calculated as required under Sec. 63.1281(e)(1).
    (10) Records required in Sec. 63.1281(e)(3)(i) documenting that the 
facility continues to operate under the conditions specified in 
Sec. 63.1281(e)(2).
    (c) An owner or operator that elects to comply with the benzene 
emission limit specified in Sec. 63.1275(b)(1)(ii) shall document, to 
the Administrator's satisfaction, the following items:
    (1) The method used for achieving compliance and the basis for using 
this compliance method; and
    (2) The method used for demonstrating compliance with 0.90 megagrams 
per year of benzene.
    (3) Any information necessary to demonstrate compliance as required 
in the methods specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this 
section.
    (d) An owner or operator that is exempt from control requirements 
under Sec. 63.1274(d) shall maintain the records specified in paragraph 
(d)(1) or (d)(2) of this section, as appropriate, for each glycol 
dehydration unit that is not controlled according to the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1274(c).
    (1) The actual annual average natural gas throughput (in terms of 
natural gas flowrate to the glycol dehydration unit per day), as 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1282(a)(1); or
    (2) The actual average benzene emissions (in terms of benzene 
emissions

[[Page 135]]

per year), as determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1282(a)(2).
    (e) Record the following when using a flare to comply with 
Sec. 63.1281(d):
    (1) Flare design (i.e., steam-assisted, air-assisted, or non-
assisted);
    (2) All visible emission readings, heat content determinations, 
flowrate measurements, and exit velocity determinations made during the 
compliance determination required by Sec. 63.1282(d)(2); and
    (3) All periods during the compliance determination when the pilot 
flame is absent.



Sec. 63.1285  Reporting requirements.

    (a) The reporting provisions of subpart A, of this part that apply 
and those that do not apply to owners and operators of facilities 
subject to this subpart are listed in Table 2 of this subpart.
    (b) Each owner or operator of a facility subject to this subpart 
shall submit the information listed in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(6) 
of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
    (1) The initial notifications required for existing affected sources 
under Sec. 63.9(b)(2) shall be submitted by 1 year after an affected 
source becomes subject to the provisions of this subpart or by June 17, 
2000, whichever is later. Affected sources that are major sources on or 
before June 17, 2000 and plan to be area sources by June 17, 2002 shall 
include in this notification a brief, nonbinding description of a 
schedule for the action(s) that are planned to achieve area source 
status.
    (2) The date of the performance evaluation as specified in 
Sec. 63.8(e)(2), required only if the owner or operator is requested by 
the Administrator to conduct a performance evaluation for a continuous 
monitoring system. A separate notification of the performance evaluation 
is not required if it is included in the initial notification submitted 
in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
    (3) The planned date of a performance test at least 60 days before 
the test in accordance with Sec. 63.7(b). Unless requested by the 
Administrator, a site-specific test plan is not required by this 
subpart. If requested by the Administrator, the owner or operator must 
also submit the site-specific test plan required by Sec. 63.7(c) with 
the notification of the performance test. A separate notification of the 
performance test is not required if it is included in the initial 
notification submitted in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section.
    (4) A Notification of Compliance Status Report as described in 
paragraph (d) of this section;
    (5) Periodic Reports as described in paragraph (e) of this section; 
and
    (6) Startup, shutdown, and malfunction reports, as specified in 
Sec. 63.10(d)(5), shall be submitted as required. Separate startup, 
shutdown, or malfunction reports as described in Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i) are 
not required if the information is included in the Periodic Report 
specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (7) Each owner or operator of a glycol dehydration unit subject to 
this subpart that is exempt from the control requirements for glycol 
dehydration unit process vents in Sec. 63.1275, is exempt from all 
reporting requirements for major sources in this subpart for that unit.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Each owner or operator of a source subject to this subpart shall 
submit a Notification of Compliance Status Report as required under 
Sec. 63.9(h) within 180 days after the compliance date specified in 
Sec. 63.1270(d). In addition to the information required under 
Sec. 63.9(h), the Notification of Compliance Status Report shall include 
the information specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(10) of this 
section. This information may be submitted in an operating permit 
application, in an amendment to an operating permit application, in a 
separate submittal, or in any combination of the three. If all of the 
information required under this paragraph have been submitted at any 
time prior to 180 days after the applicable compliance dates specified 
in Sec. 63.1270(d), a separate Notification of Compliance Status Report 
is not required. If an owner or operator submits the information 
specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(9) of this section at 
different times, and/or different submittals, later submittals may refer 
to

[[Page 136]]

earlier submittals instead of duplicating and resubmitting the 
previously submitted information.
    (1) If a closed-vent system and a control device other than a flare 
are used to comply with Sec. 63.1274, the owner or operator shall 
submit:
    (i) The design analysis documentation specified in 
Sec. 63.1282(d)(4) of this subpart if the owner or operator elects to 
prepare a design analysis; or
    (ii) If the owner or operator elects to conduct a performance test, 
the performance test results including the information specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section. Results of a 
performance test conducted prior to the compliance date of this subpart 
can be used provided that the test was conducted using the methods 
specified in Sec. 63.1282(d)(3), and that the test conditions are 
representative of current operating conditions.
    (A) The percent reduction of HAP or TOC, or the outlet concentration 
of HAP or TOC (parts per million by volume on a dry basis), determined 
as specified in Sec. 63.1282(d)(3) of this subpart; and
    (B) The value of the monitored parameters specified in 
Sec. 63.1283(d) of this subpart, or a site-specific parameter approved 
by the permitting agency, averaged over the full period of the 
performance test.
    (2) If a closed-vent system and a flare are used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1274, the owner or operator shall submit performance test 
results including the information in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (ii) of 
this section.
    (i) All visible emission readings, heat content determinations, 
flowrate measurements, and exit velocity determinations made during the 
compliance determination required by Sec. 63.1282(d)(2) of this subpart, 
and
    (ii) A statement of whether a flame was present at the pilot light 
over the full period of the compliance determination.
    (3) The owner or operator shall submit one complete test report for 
each test method used for a particular source.
    (i) For additional tests performed using the same test method, the 
results specified in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section shall be 
submitted, but a complete test report is not required.
    (ii) A complete test report shall include a sampling site 
description, description of sampling and analysis procedures and any 
modifications to standard procedures, quality assurance procedures, 
record of operating conditions during the test, record of preparation of 
standards, record of calibrations, raw data sheets for field sampling, 
raw data sheets for field and laboratory analyses, documentation of 
calculations, and any other information required by the test method.
    (4) For each control device other than a flare used to meet the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1274, the owner or operator shall submit the 
information specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) through (iii) of this 
section for each operating parameter required to be monitored in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.1283(d).
    (i) The minimum operating parameter value or maximum operating 
parameter value, as appropriate for the control device, established by 
the owner or operator to define the conditions at which the control 
device must be operated to continuously achieve the applicable 
performance requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or (e)(3)(ii).
    (ii) An explanation of the rationale for why the owner or operator 
selected each of the operating parameter values established in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(5) of this subpart. This explanation shall include any 
data and calculations used to develop the value, and a description of 
why the chosen value indicates that the control device is operating in 
accordance with the applicable requirements of Sec. 63.1281(d)(1) or 
(e)(3)(ii).
    (iii) A definition of the source's operating day for purposes of 
determining daily average values of monitored parameters. The definition 
shall specify the times at which an operating day begins and ends.
    (5) Results of any continuous monitoring system performance 
evaluations shall be included in the Notification of Compliance Status 
Report.
    (6) After a title V permit has been issued to the owner or operator 
of an affected source, the owner or operator

[[Page 137]]

of such source shall comply with all requirements for compliance status 
reports contained in the source's title V permit, including reports 
required under this subpart. After a title V permit has been issued to 
the owner or operator of an affected source, and each time a 
notification of compliance status is required under this subpart, the 
owner or operator of such source shall submit the notification of 
compliance status to the appropriate permitting authority following 
completion of the relevant compliance demonstration activity specified 
in this subpart.
    (7) The owner or operator that elects to comply with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1275(b)(1)(ii) shall submit the records required 
under Sec. 63.1284(c).
    (8) The owner or operator shall submit an analysis demonstrating 
whether an affected source is a major source using the maximum 
throughput calculated according to Sec. 63.1270(a).
    (9) The owner or operator shall submit a statement as to whether the 
source has complied with the requirements of this subpart.
    (10) The owner or operator shall submit the analysis prepared under 
Sec. 63.1281(e)(2) to demonstrate that the conditions by which the 
facility will be operated to achieve an overall HAP emission reduction 
of 95.0 percent through process modifications or a combination of 
process modifications and one or more control devices.
    (e) Periodic Reports. An owner or operator shall prepare Periodic 
Reports in accordance with paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section and 
submit them to the Administrator.
    (1) An owner or operator shall submit Periodic Reports semiannually, 
beginning 60 operating days after the end of the applicable reporting 
period. The first report shall be submitted no later than 240 days after 
the date the Notification of Compliance Status Report is due and shall 
cover the 6-month period beginning on the date the Notification of 
Compliance Status Report is due.
    (2) The owner or operator shall include the information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(2)(i) through (viii) of this section, as applicable.
    (i) The information required under Sec. 63.10(e)(3). For the 
purposes of this subpart and the information required under 
Sec. 63.10(e)(3), excursions (as defined in Sec. 63.1283(d)(6)) shall be 
considered excess emissions.
    (ii) A description of all excursions as defined in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(6) of this subpart that have occurred during the 6-month 
reporting period.
    (A) For each excursion caused when the daily average value of a 
monitored operating parameter is less than the minimum operating 
parameter limit (or, if applicable, greater than the maximum operating 
parameter limit), as specified in Sec. 63.1283(d)(6)(i), the report must 
include the daily average values of the monitored parameter, the 
applicable operating parameter limit, and the date and duration of the 
period that the excursion occurred.
    (B) For each excursion caused when the 30-day average condenser 
control efficiency is less than 95.0 percent, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1283(d)(6)(ii), the report must include the 30-day average 
values of the condenser control efficiency, and the date and duration of 
the period that the excursion occurred.
    (C) For each excursion caused by lack of monitoring data, as 
specified in Sec. 63.1283(d)(6)(iii), the report must include the date 
and duration of period when the monitoring data were not collected and 
the reason why the data were not collected.
    (iii) For each inspection conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1283(c) during which a leak or defect is detected, the records 
specified in Sec. 63.1284(b)(7) must be included in the next Periodic 
Report.
    (iv) For each closed-vent system with a bypass line subject to 
Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(A), records required under Sec. 63.1284(b)(4)(iii) 
of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the control device 
through a bypass line. For each closed-vent system with a bypass line 
subject to Sec. 63.1281(c)(3)(i)(B), records required under 
Sec. 63.1284(b)(4)(iv) of all periods in which the seal or closure 
mechanism is broken, the bypass valve position has changed, or the key 
to unlock the bypass line valve was checked out.
    (v) If an owner or operator elects to comply with 
Sec. 63.1275(b)(1)(ii), the records required under Sec. 63.1284(c)(3).
    (vi) The information in paragraphs (e)(2)(vi)(A) and (B) of this 
section shall

[[Page 138]]

be stated in the Periodic Report, when applicable.
    (A) No excursions.
    (B) No continuous monitoring system has been inoperative, out of 
control, repaired, or adjusted.
    (vii) Any change in compliance methods as specified in 
Sec. 63.1275(b).
    (viii) If the owner or operator elects to comply with 
Sec. 63.1275(c)(2), the records required under Sec. 63.1284(b)(10).
    (f) Notification of process change. Whenever a process change is 
made, or a change in any of the information submitted in the 
Notification of Compliance Status Report, the owner or operator shall 
submit a report within 180 days after the process change is made or as a 
part of the next Periodic Report as required under paragraph (e) of this 
section, whichever is sooner. The report shall include:
    (1) A brief description of the process change;
    (2) A description of any modification to standard procedures or 
quality assurance procedures;
    (3) Revisions to any of the information reported in the original 
Notification of Compliance Status Report under paragraph (d) of this 
section; and
    (4) Information required by the Notification of Compliance Status 
Report under paragraph (d) of this section for changes involving the 
addition of processes or equipment.



Sec. 63.1286  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under section 112(l) of the Act, the authorities contained in 
paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and 
not transferred to a State.
    (b) Authorities will not be delegated to States for Secs. 63.1282 
and 63.1287 of this subpart.



Sec. 63.1287  Alternative means of emission limitation.

    (a) If, in the judgment of the Administrator, an alternative means 
of emission limitation will achieve a reduction in HAP emissions at 
least equivalent to the reduction in HAP emissions from that source 
achieved under the applicable requirements in Secs. 63.1274 through 
63.1281, the Administrator will publish a notice in the Federal Register 
permitting the use of the alternative means for purposes of compliance 
with that requirement. The notice may condition the permission on 
requirements related to the operation and maintenance of the alternative 
means.
    (b) Any notice under paragraph (a) of this section shall be 
published only after public notice and an opportunity for a hearing.
    (c) Any person seeking permission to use an alternative means of 
compliance under this section shall collect, verify, and submit to the 
Administrator information showing that this means achieves equivalent 
emission reductions.



Secs. 63.1288-63.1289  [Reserved]

                     Appendix to Subpart HHH--Tables

    Table 1.--List of Hazardous Air Pollutants (HAP) for Subpart HHH
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              CAS Number a                        Chemical name
------------------------------------------------------------------------
75070..................................  Acetaldehyde
71432..................................  Benzene (includes benzene in
                                          gasoline)
75150..................................  Carbon disulfide
463581.................................  Carbonyl sulfide
100414.................................  Ethyl benzene
107211.................................  Ethylene glycol
75050..................................  Acetaldehyde
50000..................................  Formaldehyde
110543.................................  n-Hexane
91203..................................  Naphthalene
108883.................................  Toluene
540841.................................  2,2,4-Trimethylpentane
1330207................................  Xylenes (isomers and mixture)
95476..................................  o-Xylene
108383.................................  m-Xylene
106423.................................  p-Xylene
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a CAS numbers refer to the Chemical Abstracts Services registry number
  assigned to specific compounds, isomers, or mixtures of compounds.


[[Page 139]]


           Table 2 to Subpart HHH.--Applicability of 40 CFR Part 63 General Provisions to Subpart HHH
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    General provisions reference      Applicable to  subpart HHH                    Explanation
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  63.1(a)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(5)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.1(a)(6) through (a)(8)....  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(9)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.1(a)(10)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(11)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(12) through (a)(14)..  Yes
Sec.  63.1(b)(1)...................  No.........................  Subpart HHH specifies applicability.
Sec.  63.1(b)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(b)(3)...................  No.........................
Sec.  63.1(c)(1)...................  No.........................  Subpart HHH specifies applicability.
Sec.  63.1(c)(2)...................  No
Sec.  63.1(c)(3)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.1(c)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(c)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(d)......................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.1(e)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.2.........................  Yes........................  Except definition of major source is unique
                                                                   for this source category and there are
                                                                   additional definitions in subpart HHH.
Sec.  63.3(a) through (c)..........  Yes
Sec.  63.4(a)(1) through (a)(3)....  Yes
Sec.  63.4(a)(4)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.4(a)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.4(b)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.4(c)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(a)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(a)(2)...................  No.........................  Preconstruction review required only for major
                                                                   sources that commence construction after
                                                                   promulgation of the standard.
Sec.  63.5(b)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(2)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.5(b)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(6)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(c)......................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.5(d)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(d)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(d)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(d)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(e)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(f)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(f)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(a)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(6)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.

[[Page 140]]

 
Sec.  63.6(b)(7)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(c)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(c)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(c)(3) and (c)(4)........  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.6(c)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(d)......................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.6(e)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)......................  Yes                          Except as otherwise specified.
Sec.  63.6(e)(1)(i)................  No.........................  Addressed in Sec.  63.1272.
Sec.  63.6(e)(1)(ii)...............  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(1)(iii)..............  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(i)................  Yes........................  Except as otherwise specified.
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(i)(A).............  No.........................  Addressed by Sec.  63.1272(c).
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(i)(B).............  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(i)(C).............  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(ii) through         Yes
 (3)(vi).
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(vii)..............
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(vii) (A)..........  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(vii) (B)..........  Yes........................  Except that the plan must provide for
                                                                   operation in compliance with Sec.
                                                                   63.1272(c).
Sec.  63.6(e)(3)(vii) (C)..........  Yes
Sec.  63.6(e)3)(viii)..............  Yes
Sec.  63.7(e)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(e)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(e)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(e)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(f)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(g)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(h)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(a)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(a)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(a)(3)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.8(a)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(b)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(b)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(b)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(c)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(c)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(c)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(c)(4)...................  No.........................
Sec.  63.8(c)(5) through (c)(8)....  Yes
Sec.  63.8(d)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(e)......................  Yes........................  Subpart HHH does not specifically require
                                                                   continuous emissions monitor performance
                                                                   evaluations, however, the Administrator can
                                                                   request that one be conducted.
Sec.  63.8(f)(1) through (f)(5)....  Yes
Sec.  63.8(f)(6)...................  No.........................  Subpart HHH does not require continuous
                                                                   emissions monitoring.
Sec.  63.8(g)......................  No.........................  Subpart HHH specifies continuous monitoring
                                                                   system data reduction requirements.
Sec.  63.9(a)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(b)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(b)(2)...................  Yes........................  Sources are given 1 year (rather than 120
                                                                   days) to submit this notification.
Sec.  63.9(b)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(b)(4)...................  Yes

[[Page 141]]

 
Sec.  63.9(b)(5)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(c)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(d)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(e)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(f)......................  No.........................
Sec.  63.9(g)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(h)(1) through (h)(3)....  Yes
Sec.  63.9(h)(4)...................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.9(h)(5) and (h)(6)........  Yes
Sec.  63.9(i)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(j)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(a).....................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(b)(1)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(b)(2)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(b)(3)..................  No
Sec.  63.10(c)(1)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(c)(2) through (c)(4)...  No.........................  Sections reserved.
Sec.  63.10(c)(5) through (c)(8)...  Yes
Sec.  63.10(c)(9)..................  No.........................  Section reserved.
Sec.  63.10(c)(10) through (c)(15).  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(1)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(2)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(3)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(4)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(5)..................  Yes........................  Subpart HHH requires major sources to submit a
                                                                   startup, shutdown and malfunction report semi-
                                                                   annually.
Sec.  63.10(e)(1)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(2)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)(i)...............  Yes........................  Subpart HHH requires major sources to submit
                                                                   Periodic Reports semi-annually.
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)(i)(A)............  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)(i)(B)............  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)(i)(C)............  No.........................  Subpart HHH does not require quarterly
                                                                   reporting for excess emissions.
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)(ii) through        Yes
 (e)(3)(viii).
Sec.  63.10(f).....................  Yes
Sec.  63.11(a) and (b).............  Yes
Sec.  63.12(a) through (c).........  Yes
Sec.  63.13(a) through (c).........  Yes
Sec.  63.14(a) and (b).............  Yes
Sec.  63.15(a) and (b).............  Yes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 142]]



 Subpart III--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                for Flexible Polyurethane Foam Production

    Source: 63 FR 53996, Oct. 7, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1290  Applicability.

    (a) The provisions of this subpart apply to each new and existing 
flexible polyurethane foam or rebond foam process that meets the 
criteria listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (1) Produces flexible polyurethane or rebond foam;
    (2) Emits a HAP, except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section; and
    (3) Is located at a plant site that is a major source, as defined in 
Sec. 63.2 of subpart A.
    (b) For the purpose of this subpart, an affected source includes all 
processes meeting the criteria in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of 
this section that are located at a contiguous plant site, with the 
exception of those processes listed in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) A process meeting one of the following criteria listed in 
paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section shall not be subject to 
the provisions of this subpart:
    (1) A process exclusively dedicated to the fabrication of flexible 
polyurethane foam;
    (2) A research and development process; or
    (3) A slabstock flexible polyurethane foam process at a plant site 
where the total amount of HAP, excluding diisocyanate reactants, used 
for slabstock foam production and foam fabrication is less than or equal 
to five tons per year, provided that slabstock foam production and foam 
fabrication processes are the only processes at the plant site that emit 
HAP. The amount of non-diisocyanate HAP used, HAPused, shall 
be calculated using Equation 1. Owners or operators of slabstock foam 
processes exempt from the regulation in accordance with this paragraph 
shall maintain records to verify that total non-diisocyanate HAP use at 
the plant site is less than 5 tons per year (4.5 megagrams per year).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.012

Where,
HAPused = amount of HAP, excluding diisocyanate reactants, 
used at the plant site for slabstock foam production and foam 
fabrication, tons per year
VOLABA,i = volume of HAP ABA i used at the facility, gallons 
per year
DABA,i = density of HAP ABA i, pounds per gallon
m = number of HAP ABAs used
VOLclean,j = volume of HAP used as an equipment cleaner, 
gallons per year
Dclean,j = density of HAP equipment cleaner j, pounds per 
gallon
WTHAPclean,k = HAP content of equipment cleaner j, weight 
percent
n = number of HAP equipment cleaners used
VOLadh,k = volume of adhesive k, gallons per year
Dadh,k = density of adhesive k, pounds per gallon
WTHAPadh,k = HAP content of adhesive k, weight percent
o = number of adhesives used



Sec. 63.1291  Compliance schedule.

    (a) Existing affected sources shall be in compliance with all 
provisions of this subpart no later than October 8, 2001.
    (b) New or reconstructed affected sources shall be in compliance 
with all provisions of this subpart upon initial startup.

[[Page 143]]



Sec. 63.1292  Definitions.

    All terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning given them in 
the Act, in subpart A of this part, and in this section. If a term is 
defined in subpart A and in this section, it shall have the meaning 
given in this section for purposes of this subpart.
    Auxiliary blowing agent, or ABA, means a low-boiling point liquid 
added to assist foaming by generating gas beyond that resulting from the 
isocyanate-water reaction.
    Breakthrough means that point in the adsorption step when the mass 
transfer zone (i.e., the section of the carbon bed where the HAP is 
removed from the carrier gas stream) first reaches the carbon bed outlet 
as the mass transfer zone moves down the bed in the direction of flow. 
The breakthrough point is characterized by the beginning of a sharp 
increase in the outlet HAP or organic compound concentration.
    Calibrate means to verify the accuracy of a measurement device 
against a known standard. For the purpose of this subpart, there are two 
levels of calibration. The initial calibration includes the verification 
of the accuracy of the device over the entire operating range of the 
device. Subsequent calibrations can be conducted for a point or several 
points in a limited range of operation that represents the most common 
operation of the device.
    Canned motor pump means a pump with interconnected cavity housings, 
motor rotors, and pump casing. In a canned motor pump, the motor 
bearings run in the process liquid and all seals are eliminated.
    Carbon adsorption system means a system consisting of a tank or 
container that contains a specific quantity of activated carbon. For the 
purposes of this subaprt, a carbon adsorption system is used as a 
control device for storage vessels. Typically, the spent carbon bed does 
not undergo regeneration, but is replaced.
    Connector means flanged, screwed, or other joined fittings used to 
connect two pipe lines or a pipe line and a piece of equipment. A common 
connector is a flange. Joined fittings welded completely around the 
circumference of the interface are not considered to be connectors for 
the purposes of this subpart.
    Cured foam means flexible polyurethane foam with fully developed 
physical properties. A period of 12 to 24 hours from pour is typically 
required to completely cure foam, although mechanical or other devices 
are sometimes used to accelerate the curing process.
    Curing area means the area in a slabstock foam production facility 
where foam buns are allowed to fully develop physical properties.
    Diaphragm pump means a pump where the driving member is a flexible 
diaphragm made of metal, rubber, or plastic. In a diaphragm pump, there 
is no packing or seals that are exposed to the process liquid.
    Diisocyanate means a compound containing two isocyanate groups per 
molecule. The most common diisocyanate compounds used in the flexible 
polyurethane foam industry are toluene diisocyanate (TDI) and methylene 
diphenyl diisocyanate (MDI).
    Flexible polyurethane foam means a flexible cellular polymer 
containing urea and carbamate linkages in the chain backbone produced by 
reacting a diisocyanate, polyol, and water. Flexible polyurethane foams 
are open-celled, permit the passage of air through the foam, and possess 
the strength and flexibility to allow repeated distortion or compression 
under stress with essentially complete recovery upon removal of the 
stress.
    Flexible polyurethane foam process means the equipment used to 
produce a flexible polyurethane foam product. For the purpose of this 
subpart, the flexible polyurethane foam process includes raw material 
storage; production equipment and associated piping, ductwork, etc.; and 
curing and storage areas.
    Foam fabrication process means an operation for cutting or bonding 
flexible polyurethane foam pieces together or to other substrates.
    Grade of foam means foam with a distinct combination of indentation 
force deflection (IFD) and density values.
    HAP ABA means methylene chloride, or any other HAP compound used as 
an auxiliary blowing agent.

[[Page 144]]

    HAP-based means to contain 5 percent (by weight) or more of HAP. 
This applies to equipment cleaners (and mixhead flushes) and mold 
release agents. The concentration of HAP may be determined using EPA 
test method 18, material safety data sheets, or engineering 
calculations.
    High-pressure mixhead means a mixhead where mixing is achieved by 
impingement of the high pressure streams within the mixhead.
    Indentation Force Deflection (IFD) means a measure of the load 
bearing capacity of flexible polyurethane foam. IFD is generally 
measured as the force (in pounds) required to compress a 50 square inch 
circular indentor foot into a four inch thick sample, typically 15 
inches square or larger, to 25 percent of the sample's initial height.
    In diisocyanate service means a piece of equipment that contains or 
contacts a diisocyanate.
    In HAP ABA service means a piece of equipment that contains or 
contacts a HAP ABA.
    Initial startup means the first time a new or reconstructed affected 
source begins production of flexible polyurethane foam.
    Isocyanate means a reactive chemical grouping composed of a nitrogen 
atom bonded to a carbon atom bonded to an oxygen atom; or a chemical 
compound, usually organic, containing one or more isocyanate groups.
    Magnetic drive pump means a pump where an externally-mounted magnet 
coupled to the pump motor drives the impeller in the pump casing. In a 
magnetic drive pump, no seals contact the process fluid.
    Metering pump means a pump used to deliver reactants, ABA, or 
additives to the mixhead.
    Mixhead means a device that mixes two or more component streams 
before dispensing foam producing mixture to the desired container.
    Molded flexible polyurethane foam means a flexible polyurethane foam 
that is produced by shooting the foam mixture into a mold of the desired 
shape and size.
    Mold release agent means any material which, when applied to the 
mold surface, serves to prevent sticking of the foam part to the mold.
    Plant site means all contiguous or adjoining property that is under 
common control, including properties that are separated only by a road 
or other public right-of-way. Common control includes properties that 
are owned, leased, or otherwise operated by the same entity, parent 
entity, subsidiary, or any combination thereof.
    Polyol, for the purpose of this subpart, means a polyether or 
polyester polymer with more than one reactive hydroxyl group attached to 
the molecule.
    Rebond foam means the foam resulting from a process of adhering 
small particles of foam (usually scrap or recycled foam) together to 
make a usable cushioning product. Various adhesives and bonding 
processes are used. A typical application for rebond foam is for carpet 
underlay.
    Rebond foam process means the equipment used to produce a rebond 
foam product. For the purpose of this subpart, the rebond foam process 
includes raw material storage; production equipment and associated 
piping, ductwork, etc.; and curing and storage areas.
    Reconstructed source means an affected source undergoing 
reconstruction, as defined in subpart A. For the purposes of this 
subpart, process modifications made to reduce HAP ABA emissions to meet 
the existing source requirements of this subpart shall not be counted in 
determining whether or not a change or replacement meets the definition 
of reconstruction.
    Recovery device means an individual unit of equipment capable of and 
used for the purpose of recovering chemicals for use, reuse, or sale. 
Recovery devices include, but are not limited to, carbon adsorbers, 
absorbers, and condensers.
    Research and development process means a laboratory or pilot plant 
operation whose primary purpose is to conduct research and development 
into new processes and products, where the operations are under the 
close supervision of technically trained personnel, and which is not 
engaged in the manufacture of products for commercial sale except in a 
de minimis manner.
    Run of foam means a continuous production of foam, which may consist 
of several grades of foam.

[[Page 145]]

    Sealless pump means a canned-motor pump, diaphragm pump, or magnetic 
drive pump, as defined in this section.
    Slabstock flexible polyurethane foam means flexible polyurethane 
foam that is produced in large continuous buns that are then cut into 
the desired size and shape.
    Slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production line includes all 
portions of the flexible polyurethane foam process from the mixhead to 
the point in the process where the foam is completely cured.
    Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that is used to store 
diisocyanate or HAP ABA for use in the production of flexible 
polyurethane foam. Storage vessels do not include vessels with 
capacities smaller than 38 cubic meters (or 10,000 gallons).
    Transfer pump means all pumps used to transport diisocyanate or HAP 
ABA that are not metering pumps.
    Transfer vehicle means a railcar, tank truck, or other vehicle used 
to transport HAP ABA to the flexible polyurethane foam facility.



Sec. 63.1293  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source shall comply with Sec. 63.1294 and either paragraph (a) or (b) of 
this section:
    (a) The emission point specific limitations in Secs. 63.1295 through 
63.1298; or
    (b) For sources that use no more than one HAP as an ABA and an 
equipment cleaner, the source-wide emission limitation in Sec. 63.1299.



Sec. 63.1294  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--diisocyanate emissions.

    Each new and existing slabstock affected source shall comply with 
the provisions of this section.
    (a) Diisocyanate storage vessels. Diisocyanate storage vessels shall 
be equipped with either a system meeting the requirements in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, or a carbon adsorption system meeting the 
requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (1) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a vapor return line 
from the storage vessel to the tank truck or rail car that is connected 
during unloading.
    (i) During each unloading event, the vapor return line shall be 
inspected for leaks by visual, audible, or any other detection method.
    (ii) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than the subsequent unloading event.
    (2) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a carbon adsorption 
system, meeting the monitoring requirements of Sec. 63.1303(a), that 
routes displaced vapors through activated carbon before being discharged 
to the atmosphere. The owner or operator shall replace the existing 
carbon with fresh carbon upon indication of breakthrough before the next 
unloading event.
    (b) Transfer pumps in diisocyanate service. Each transfer pump in 
diisocyanate service shall meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) or 
(b)(2) of this section.
    (1) The pump shall be a sealless pump; or
    (2) The pump shall be a submerged pump system meeting the 
requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) The pump shall be completely immersed in bis(2-
ethylhexyl)phthalate (DEHP, CAS #118-81-7), 2(methyloctyl)phthalate 
(DINP, CAS #68515-48-0), or another neutral oil.
    (ii) The pump shall be visually monitored weekly to detect leaks,
    (iii) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired in accordance 
with the procedures in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(A) and (B) of this 
section, except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (A) The leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later 
than 15 calendar days after it is detected.
    (B) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after the leak is detected. First attempts at repair include, but 
are not limited to, the following practices where practicable:
    (1) Tightening of packing gland nuts.
    (2) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and 
temperature.
    (c) Other components in diisocyanate service. If evidence of a leak 
is found by

[[Page 146]]

visual, audible, or any other detection method, it shall be repaired as 
soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is 
detected, except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section. The first 
attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each 
leak is detected.
    (d) Delay of repair. (1) Delay of repair of equipment for which 
leaks have been detected is allowed for equipment that is isolated from 
the process and that does not remain in diisocyanate service.
    (2) Delay of repair for valves and connectors is also allowed if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that diisocyanate emissions of 
purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the 
fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
    (ii) The purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in 
a control device when repair procedures are effected.
    (3) Delay of repair for pumps is also allowed if repair requires 
replacing the existing seal design with a sealless pump, and repair is 
completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the 
leak was detected.



Sec. 63.1295  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--HAP ABA storage vessels.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source complying with the emission point specific limitation option 
provided in Sec. 63.1293(a) shall control HAP ABA storage vessels in 
accordance with the provisions of this section.
    (a) Each HAP ABA storage vessel shall be equipped with either a 
vapor balance system meeting the requirements in paragraph (b) of this 
section, or a carbon adsorption system meeting the requirements of 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a vapor balance 
system. The owner or operator shall ensure that the vapor return line 
from the storage vessel to the tank truck or rail car is connected 
during unloading.
    (1) During each unloading event, the vapor return line shall be 
inspected for leaks by visual, audible, olfactory, or any other 
detection method.
    (2) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than the subsequent unloading event.
    (c) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a carbon adsorption 
system, meeting the monitoring requirements of Sec. 63.1303(a), that 
routes displaced vapors through activated carbon before discharging to 
the atmosphere. The owner or operator shall replace the existing carbon 
with fresh carbon upon indication of breakthrough before the next 
unloading event.



Sec. 63.1296  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--HAP ABA equipment leaks.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source complying with the emission point specific limitation option 
provided in Sec. 63.1293(a) shall control HAP ABA emissions from leaks 
from transfer pumps, valves, connectors, pressure-relief valves, and 
open-ended lines in accordance with the provisions in this section.
    (a) Pumps. Each pump in HAP ABA service shall be controlled in 
accordance with either paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section.
    (1) The pump shall be a sealless pump, or
    (2) Each pump shall be monitored for leaks in accordance with 
paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. Leaks shall be repaired 
in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i) Each pump shall be monitored quarterly to detect leaks by the 
method specified in Sec. 63.1304(a). If an instrument reading of 10,000 
parts per million (ppm) or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
    (ii) Each pump shall be checked by visual inspection each calendar 
week for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal. If there 
are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, a leak is 
detected.
    (iii) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired in accordance 
with the procedures in paragraphs (a)(2)(iii)(A) and (B) of this 
section, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section.

[[Page 147]]

    (A) The leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later 
than 15 calendar days after it is detected.
    (B) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after the leak is detected. First attempts at repair include, but 
are not limited to, the following practices, where practicable:
    (1) Tightening of packing gland nuts.
    (2) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and 
temperature.
    (b) Valves. Each valve in HAP ABA service shall be monitored for 
leaks in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section, except as 
provided in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section. Leaks shall be 
repaired in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) Each valve shall be monitored quarterly to detect leaks by the 
method specified in Sec. 63.1304(a). If an instrument reading of 10,000 
parts per million or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
    (2) When a leak is detected, the owner or operator shall repair the 
leak in accordance with the procedures in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) 
of this section, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (i) The leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later 
than 15 calendar days after it is detected.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after the leak is detected. First attempts at repair 
include, but are not limited to, the following practices where 
practicable:
    (A) Tightening of bonnet bolts;
    (B) Replacement of bonnet bolts;
    (C) Tightening of packing gland nuts; and
    (D) Injection of lubricant into lubricated packing.
    (3) Any valve that is designated as an unsafe-to-monitor valve is 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this 
section if:
    (i) The owner or operator of the valve determines that the valve is 
unsafe to monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an 
immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs (b)(1) 
and (2) of this section; and
    (ii) The owner or operator of the valve has a written plan that 
requires monitoring of the valve as frequently as practicable during 
safe-to-monitor times. The plan shall also include requirements for 
repairing leaks as soon as possible after detection.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall monitor the unsafe-to-monitor 
valve in accordance with the written plan, and
    (iv) The owner or operator shall repair leaks in accordance with the 
written plan.
    (4) Any valve that is designated as a difficult-to-monitor valve is 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this 
section if:
    (i) The owner or operator of the valve determines that the valve 
cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 
2 meters above a support surface or it is not accessible at any time in 
a safe manner;
    (ii) The process within which the valve is located is an existing 
source, or the process within which the valve is located is a new source 
that has less than 3 percent of the total number of valves designated as 
difficult to monitor; and
    (iii) The owner or operator of the valve develops a written plan 
that requires monitoring of the valve at least once per calendar year. 
The plan shall also include requirements for repairing leaks as soon as 
possible after detection.
    (iv) The owner or operator shall monitor the difficult-to-monitor 
valve in accordance with the written plan, and
    (v) The owner or operator shall repair leaks in accordance with the 
written plan.
    (c) Connectors. Each connector in HAP ABA service shall be monitored 
for leaks in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, except as 
provided in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. Leaks shall be repaired in 
accordance with (c)(2) of this section, except as provided in paragraph 
(c)(4) of this section.
    (1) Connectors shall be monitored at the times specified in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section to detect leaks by 
the method specified in Sec. 63.1304(a). If an instrument reading of 
10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.

[[Page 148]]

    (i) Each connector shall be monitored annually, and
    (ii) Each connector that has been opened or has otherwise had the 
seal broken shall be monitored for leaks within the first 3 months after 
being returned to HAP ABA service.
    (iii) If a leak is detected, the connector shall be monitored for 
leaks in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section within the 
first 3 months after its repair.
    (2) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired in accordance with 
the procedures in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, except 
as provided in paragraph (c)(4) and paragraph (f) of this section.
    (i) The leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no later 
than 15 calendar days after the leak is detected.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after the leak is detected.
    (3) Any connector that is designated as an unsafe-to-monitor 
connector is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that the connector is unsafe to 
monitor because personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a 
result of complying with paragraph (c)(1) of this section; and
    (ii) The owner or operator has a written plan that requires 
monitoring of the connector as frequently as practicable during safe-to-
monitor periods.
    (4) Any connector that is designated as an unsafe-to-repair 
connector is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that repair personnel would be 
exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section; and
    (ii) The connector will be repaired as soon as practicable, but not 
later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
    (d) Pressure-relief devices. Each pressure-relief device in HAP ABA 
service shall be monitored for leaks in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) 
of this section. Leaks shall be repaired in accordance with paragraph 
(d)(2) of this section.
    (1) Each pressure-relief device in HAP ABA service shall be 
monitored within 5 calendar days by the method specified in 
Sec. 63.1304(a) if evidence of a potential leak is found by visual, 
audible, olfactory, or any other detection method. If an instrument 
reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
    (2) When a leak is detected, the leak shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, 
except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section. The owner or 
operator shall make a first attempt at repair no later than 5 calendar 
days after the leak is detected.
    (e) Open-ended valves or lines. (1)(i) Each open-ended valve or line 
in HAP ABA service shall be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or 
a second valve, except as provided in paragraph (e)(4) of this section.
    (ii) The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve shall seal the 
open end at all times except during operations requiring process fluid 
flow through the open-ended valve or line, or during maintenance or 
repair.
    (2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve shall 
be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is 
closed before the second valve is closed.
    (3) When a double block and bleed system is being used, the bleed 
valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the 
line between the block valves but shall comply with paragraph (e)(1) of 
this section at all other times.
    (4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which 
are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1), (2), and (3) of this 
section.
    (f) Delay of repair. (1) Delay of repair of equipment for which 
leaks have been detected is allowed for equipment that is isolated from 
the process and that does not remain in HAP ABA service.
    (2) Delay of repair for valves and connectors is also allowed if:
    (i) The owner or operator determines that emissions of purged 
material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive 
emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and

[[Page 149]]

    (ii) The purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in 
a control device when repair procedures are effected.
    (3) Delay of repair for pumps is also allowed if repair requires 
replacing the existing seal design with a sealless pump, and repair is 
completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the 
leak was detected.



Sec. 63.1297  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--HAP ABA emissions from the production line.

    (a) Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source complying with the emission point specific limitation option 
provided in Sec. 63.1293(a)(1) shall control HAP ABA emissions from the 
slabstock polyurethane foam production line in accordance with the 
provisions in this section. Compliance shall be determined on a rolling 
annual basis as described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. As an 
alternative, the owner or operator can determine compliance on a monthly 
basis, as described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (1) Rolling annual compliance. In determining compliance on a 
rolling annual basis, actual HAP ABA emissions shall be compared to 
allowable HAP ABA emissions for each consecutive 12-month period. The 
allowable HAP ABA emission level shall be calculated based on the 
production for the 12-month period, resulting in a potentially different 
allowable level for each 12-month period. Compliance shall be determined 
each month for the previous 12-month period. The compliance requirements 
are provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Monthly compliance alternative. As an alternative to determining 
compliance on a rolling annual basis, an owner or operator can determine 
compliance by comparing actual HAP ABA emissions to allowable HAP ABA 
emissions for each month. The allowable HAP ABA emission level shall be 
calculated based on the production for the month, resulting in a 
potentially different allowable level each month. The requirements for 
this monthly compliance alternative are provided in paragraph (c) of 
this section.
    (3) Each owner or operator electing to change between the compliance 
methods described under paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this section 
shall notify the Administrator no later than 180 calendar days prior to 
the change.
    (b) Rolling annual compliance. At each slabstock foam production 
source complying with the rolling annual compliance provisions described 
in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, actual HAP ABA emissions shall not 
exceed the allowable HAP ABA emission level for a consecutive 12-month 
period. The actual HAP ABA emission level for a consecutive 12-month 
period shall be determined using the procedures in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, and the allowable HAP ABA emission level for the 
corresponding 12-month period shall be calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) The actual HAP ABA emissions for a 12-month period shall be 
calculated as the sum of actual monthly HAP ABA emissions for each of 
the individual 12 months in the period. Actual monthly HAP ABA emissions 
shall be equal to the amount of HAP ABA added to the slabstock foam 
production line at the mixhead, determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b), unless a recovery device is used. Slabstock foam 
production sources using recovery devices to reduce HAP ABA emissions 
shall determine actual monthly HAP ABA emissions using the procedures in 
paragraph (e) of this section.
    (2) The allowable HAP ABA emissions for a consecutive 12-month 
period shall be calculated as the sum of allowable monthly HAP ABA 
emissions for each of the individual 12 months in the period. Allowable 
HAP ABA emissions for each individual month shall be calculated using 
Equation 2.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.004


[[Page 150]]


Where:
emissallow,month = Allowable HAP ABA emissions from the 
slabstock foam production source for the month, pounds.
m = Number of slabstock foam production lines.
polyoli = Amount of polyol used in the month in the 
production of foam grade i on foam production line j, determined in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, pounds.
n = Number of foam grades produced in the month on foam production line 
j.
limiti = HAP ABA formulation limit for foam grade i, parts 
HAP ABA per 100 parts polyol. The HAP ABA formulation limits are 
determined in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) The amount of polyol used for specific foam grades shall be 
based on the amount of polyol added to the slabstock foam production 
line at the mixhead, determined in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1303(b).
    (c) Monthly compliance alternative. At each slabstock foam 
production source complying with the monthly compliance alternative 
described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, actual HAP ABA emissions 
shall not exceed the corresponding allowable HAP ABA emission level for 
the same month. The actual monthly HAP ABA emission level shall be 
determined using the procedures in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, and 
the allowable monthly HAP ABA emission level shall be calculated in 
accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (1) The actual monthly HAP ABA emissions shall be equal to the 
amount of HAP ABA added to the slabstock foam production line at the 
mixhead, determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b), unless a 
recovery device is used. Slabstock foam production sources using 
recovery devices to reduce HAP ABA emissions shall determine actual 
monthly HAP ABA emissions using the procedures in paragraph (e) of this 
section.
    (2) The allowable HAP ABA emissions for the month shall be 
determined in accordance with Equation 2 of this section.
    (d) HAP ABA formulation limitations. For each grade, the HAP ABA 
formulation limitation shall be determined in accordance with paragraphs 
(d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section. For any grade, the owner or 
operator may designate zero as the HAP ABA formulation limitation and 
not determine the HAP ABA formulation limitation in accordance with 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section.
    (1) For existing sources, the HAP ABA formulation limitation for 
each grade of slabstock foam produced shall be determined using Equation 
3 of this section. Zero shall be the formulation limitation for any 
grade of foam where the result of the formulation limitation equation 
(Equation 3) is negative (i.e., less than zero).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.005

Where:
ABAlimit= HAP ABA formulation limitation, parts HAP ABA 
allowed per hundred parts polyol (pph).
IFD = Indentation force deflection, pounds.
DEN = Density, pounds per cubic foot.
    (2) For new sources, the HAP ABA formulation limitation for each 
grade of slabstock foam produced shall be determined as described in 
paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (d)(2)(iv) of this section and in Table 1 
of this subpart.
    (i) For each foam grade with a density of 0.95 pounds per cubic foot 
or less, the HAP ABA formulation limitation shall be determined using 
Equation 3. Zero shall be the formulation limitation for any grade of 
foam where the result of the formulation limitation equation (Equation 3 
of this section) is negative (i.e., less than zero).

[[Page 151]]

    (ii) For each foam grade with a density of 1.4 pounds per cubic foot 
or less, and an IFD of 15 pounds or less, the HAP ABA formulation 
limitation shall be determined using Equation 3.
    (iii) For each foam grade with a density greater than 0.95 pounds 
per cubic foot and an IFD greater than 15 pounds, the HAP ABA 
formulation limitation shall be zero.
    (iv) For each foam grade with a density greater than 1.40 pounds per 
cubic foot, the HAP ABA formulation limitation shall be zero.
    (3) With the exception of those grades for which the owner or 
operator has designated zero as the HAP ABA formulation limitation, the 
IFD and density for each foam grade shall be determined in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1304(b) and recorded in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1307(c)(1)(i)(B) or Sec. 63.1307(c)(2)(i)(B) within 10 working 
days of the production of the foam.
    (e) Compliance using recovery devices. If a recovery device is used 
to comply with paragraphs (b) or (c) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall determine the allowable HAP ABA emissions for each month 
using Equation 2 in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and the actual 
monthly HAP ABA emissions in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this 
section. The owner or operator shall also comply with the provisions of 
paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (1) The actual monthly HAP ABA emissions shall be determined using 
Equation 4:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.006

Where:
Eactual = Actual HAP ABA emissions after control, pounds/
month.
Eunc = Uncontrolled HAP ABA emissions, pounds/month, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
HAPABArecovered = HAP ABA recovered, pounds/month, determined 
in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (2) The amount of HAP ABA recovered shall be determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(c).



Sec. 63.1298  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--HAP emissions from equipment cleaning.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source complying with the emission point specific limitation option 
provided in Sec. 63.1293(a)(1) shall not use a HAP or a HAP-based 
material as an equipment cleaner.



Sec. 63.1299  Standards for slabstock flexible polyurethane foam production--source-wide emission limitation.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing slabstock affected 
source complying with the source-wide emission limitation option 
provided in Sec. 63.1293(b) shall control HAP ABA storage and equipment 
leak emissions, HAP ABA emissions from the production line, and 
equipment cleaning HAP emissions in accordance with the provisions in 
this section. Compliance shall be determined on a rolling annual basis 
in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section. As an alternative, the 
owner or operator can determine compliance monthly, as described in 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (a) Rolling annual compliance. Under the rolling annual compliance 
provisions, actual source-wide HAP ABA storage and equipment leak 
emissions, HAP ABA emissions from the production line, and equipment 
cleaning HAP emissions are compared to allowable source-wide emissions 
for each consecutive 12-month period. The allowable source-wide HAP 
emission level is calculated based on the production for the 12-month 
period, resulting in a potentially different allowable level for each 
12-month period. While compliance is on an annual basis, compliance 
shall be determined monthly for the preceding 12-month period. The 
actual source-wide HAP emission level for a consecutive 12-month period 
shall be determined using the procedures in

[[Page 152]]

paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section, unless a recovery device 
is used. Slabstock foam production sources using recovery devices shall 
determine actual source-wide HAP emissions in accordance with paragraph 
(e) of this section. The allowable HAP emission level for a consecutive 
12-month period shall be determined using the procedures in paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (b) Monthly compliance alternative. As an alternative to determining 
compliance on a rolling annual basis, an owner or operator can determine 
compliance by comparing actual HAP emissions to allowable HAP emissions 
for each month. The allowable source-wide emission level is calculated 
based on the production for the month, resulting in a potentially 
different allowable level each month. The actual monthly emission level 
shall be determined using the procedures in paragraphs (c)(1) through 
(3) of this section, unless a recovery device is used. Slabstock foam 
production sources using recovery devices shall determine actual source-
wide HAP emissions in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section. The 
allowable monthly HAP ABA emission level shall be determined in 
accordance with Equation 6.
    (c) Procedures for determining actual source-wide HAP emissions. The 
actual source-wide HAP ABA storage and equipment leak emissions, HAP ABA 
emissions from the production line, and equipment cleaning HAP emissions 
shall be determined using the procedures in this section. Actual source-
wide HAP emissions for each individual month shall be determined using 
the procedures specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this 
section.
    (1) Actual source-wide HAP emissions for a month shall be determined 
using Equation 5 and the information determined in accordance with 
paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.007

Where:
PWEactual = Actual source-wide HAP ABA and equipment cleaning 
HAP emissions for a month, pounds/month.
n = Number of HAP ABA storage vessels.
STi, begin = Amount of HAP ABA in storage vessel i at the 
beginning of the month, pounds, determined in accordance with the 
procedures listed in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
STi, end = Amount of HAP ABA in storage vessel i at the end 
of the month, pounds, determined in accordance with the procedures 
listed in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
ADDi = Amount of HAP ABA added to storage vessel i during the 
month, pounds, determined in accordance with the procedures listed in 
paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
    (2) The amount of HAP ABA in a storage vessel shall be determined by 
monitoring the HAP ABA level in the storage vessel in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(d).
    (3) The amount of HAP ABA added to a storage vessel for a given 
month shall be the sum of the amounts of all individual HAP ABA 
deliveries that occur during the month. The amount of each individual 
HAP ABA delivery shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(e).
    (4) Actual source-wide HAP emissions for each consecutive 12-month 
period shall be calculated as the sum of actual monthly source-wide HAP 
emissions for each of the individual 12 months in the period, calculated 
in accordance with paragraphs (c) (1) through (3) of this section.
    (d) Allowable source-wide HAP emissions for a consecutive 12-month 
period shall be calculated as the sum of allowable monthly source-wide 
HAP emissions for each of the individual 12 months in the period. 
Allowable

[[Page 153]]

source-wide HAP emissions for each individual month shall be calculated 
using Equation 6.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.008

Where:
emissallow, month = Allowable HAP ABA storage and equipment 
leak emissions, HAP ABA emissions from the production line, and 
equipment cleaning HAP emissions from the slabstock foam production 
source for the month, pounds.
m = Number of slabstock foam production lines.
polyoli = Amount of polyol used in the month in the 
production of foam grade i on foam production line j, determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b), pounds.
n = Number of foam grades produced in the month on foam production line 
j.
limiti = HAP ABA formulation limit for foam grade i, parts 
HAP ABA per 100 parts polyol. The HAP ABA formulation limits are 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1297(d).
    (e) Compliance using recovery devices. If a recovery device is used 
to comply with paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall determine the allowable source-wide HAP emissions for 
each month using Equation 6 in paragraph (d) of this section, and the 
actual monthly source-wide HAP emissions in accordance with paragraph 
(e)(1) of this section. The owner or operator shall also comply with the 
provisions of paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (1) Actual monthly source-wide HAP emissions shall be determined 
using Equation 7.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.009

Where:
Eactual = Actual source-wide HAP emissions after control, 
pounds/month.
Eunc = Uncontrolled source-wide HAP emissions, pounds/month, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (c) (1) through (3) of this 
section.
HAPABArecovered = HAP ABA recovered, pounds/month, determined 
in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (2) The amount of HAP ABA recovered shall be determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(c).



Sec. 63.1300  Standards for molded flexible polyurethane foam production.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing molded affected source 
shall comply with the provisions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section.
    (a) A HAP or HAP-based material shall not be used as an equipment 
cleaner to flush the mixhead, nor shall it be used elsewhere as an 
equipment cleaner in a molded flexible polyurethane foam process, with 
the following exception. Diisocyanates may be used to flush the mixhead 
and associated piping during periods of startup or maintenance, provided 
that the diisocyanate compounds are contained in a closed-loop system 
and are re-used in production.
    (b) A HAP-based mold release agent shall not be used in a molded 
flexible polyurethane foam source process.



Sec. 63.1301  Standards for rebond foam production.

    Each owner or operator of a new or existing rebond foam affected 
source

[[Page 154]]

shall comply with the provisions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section.
    (a) A HAP or HAP-based material shall not be used as an equipment 
cleaner at a rebond foam source.
    (b) A HAP-based mold release agent shall not be used in a rebond 
foam source.



Sec. 63.1302  Applicability of subpart A requirements.

    The owner or operator of an affected source shall comply with the 
applicable requirements of subpart A of this part, as specified in Table 
2 of this subpart.



Sec. 63.1303  Monitoring requirements.

    Owners and operators of affected sources shall comply with each 
applicable monitoring provision in this section.
    (a) Monitoring requirements for storage vessel carbon adsorption 
systems. Each owner or operator using a carbon adsorption system to meet 
the requirements of Sec. 63.1294(a) or Sec. 63.1295 shall monitor the 
concentration level of the HAP or the organic compounds in the exhaust 
vent stream (or outlet stream exhaust) from the carbon adsorption system 
at the frequency specified in (a)(1) or (2) of this section in 
accordance with either (a)(3) or (4) of this section.
    (1) The concentration level of HAP or organic compounds shall be 
monitored during each unloading event, or once per month during an 
unloading event if multiple unloading events occur in a month.
    (2) As an alternative to monthly monitoring, the owner or operator 
can set the monitoring frequency at an interval no greater than 20 
percent of the carbon replacement interval, which is established using a 
design analysis described below in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of 
this section.
    (i) The design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, 
constituent concentration, flow rate, relative humidity, and 
temperature.
    (ii) The design analysis shall establish the outlet organic 
concentration level, the capacity of the carbon bed, and the working 
capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon bed, and
    (iii) The design analysis shall establish the carbon replacement 
interval based on the total carbon working capacity of the carbon 
adsorption system and the schedule for filling the storage vessel.
    (3) Measurements of HAP concentration shall be made using 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A, Method 18. The measurement shall be conducted over 
at least one 5-minute interval during which the storage vessel is being 
filled.
    (4) Measurements of organic compounds shall be made using 40 CFR 
part 60, Appendix A, Method 25A. The measurement shall be conducted over 
at least one 5-minute interval during which the storage vessel is being 
filled.
    (b) Monitoring for HAP ABA and polyol added to the foam production 
line at the mixhead. (1) The owner or operator of each slabstock 
affected source shall comply with the provisions in paragraph (b)(1)(i) 
of this section, and, if applicable, the provisions of paragraph 
(b)(1)(ii) of this section. Alternatively, the owner or operator may 
comply with paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
    (i) Owners or operators of all slabstock affected sources shall 
continuously monitor the amount of polyol added at the mixhead when foam 
is being poured, in accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) through (4) of 
this section.
    (ii) Owners or operators of slabstock foam affected sources using 
the emission point specific limitation option provided in 
Sec. 63.1293(a)(1) shall continuously monitor the amount of HAP ABA 
added at the mixhead when foam is being poured, in accordance with 
paragraphs (b)(2)(ii), (b)(3), and (b)(4) of this section.
    (2) The owner or operator shall monitor either:
    (i) Pump revolutions; or
    (ii) Flow rate.
    (3) The device used to monitor the parameter from paragraph (b)(2) 
shall have an accuracy to within +/-2.0 percent of the HAP ABA being 
measured, and shall be calibrated initially, and periodically, in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) For polyol pumps, the device shall be calibrated at least once 
each 6 months.

[[Page 155]]

    (ii) For HAP ABA pumps, the device shall be calibrated at least once 
each month.
    (4) Measurements must be recorded at the beginning and end of the 
production of each grade of foam within a run of foam.
    (5) As an alternative to the monitoring described in paragraphs 
(b)(2) through (4) of this section, the owner or operator may develop an 
alternative monitoring program. Alternative monitoring programs must be 
submitted to the Administrator for approval in the Precompliance Report 
as specified in Sec. 63.1306(c)(4) for existing sources or in the 
Application for approval of construction or reconstruction for new 
sources. If an owner or operator wishes to develop an alternative 
monitoring program after the compliance date, the program shall be 
submitted to the Administrator for approval before the owner or operator 
wishes to begin using the alternative program. If the Administrator does 
not notify the owner or operator of objections to the program, or any 
part of the program, within 45 days after its receipt, the program shall 
be deemed approved. Until the program is approved, the owner or operator 
of an affected source remains subject to the requirements of this 
subpart. The components of an alternative monitoring program shall 
include, at a minimum, the items listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through 
(iv) of this section.
    (i) A description of the parameter to be continuously monitored when 
foam is being poured to measure the amount of HAP ABA or polyol added at 
the mixhead.
    (ii) A description of how the monitoring results will be recorded, 
and how the results will be converted into amount of HAP ABA or polyol 
delivered to the mixhead.
    (iii) Data demonstrating that the monitoring device is accurate to 
within +/-2.0 percent.
    (iv) Procedures to ensure that the accuracy of the parameter 
monitoring results is maintained. These procedures shall, at a minimum, 
consist of periodic calibration of all monitoring devices.
    (c) Recovered HAP ABA monitoring. The owner or operator of each 
slabstock affected source using a recovery device to reduce HAP ABA 
emissions shall develop and comply with a recovered HAP ABA monitoring 
and recordkeeping program. The components of these plans shall include, 
at a minimum, the items listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (5) of this 
section. These plans must be submitted for approval in accordance with 
paragraph (c)(6) of this section.
    (1) A device, installed, calibrated, maintained, and operated 
according to the manufacturer's specifications, that indicates the 
cumulative amount of HAP ABA recovered by the solvent recovery device 
over each 1-month period. The device shall be certified by the 
manufacturer to be accurate to within +/-2.0 percent.
    (2) The location where the monitoring will occur shall ensure that 
the measurements are taken after HAP ABA has been fully recovered (i.e., 
after separation from water introduced into the HAP ABA during 
regeneration).
    (3) A description of the parameter to be monitored, and the times 
the parameter will be monitored.
    (4) Data demonstrating that the monitoring device is accurate to 
within +/-2.0 percent.
    (5) Procedures to ensure that the accuracy of the parameter 
monitoring results is maintained. These procedures shall, at a minimum, 
consist of periodic calibration of all monitoring devices.
    (6) Recovered HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping programs must be 
submitted to the Administrator for approval in the Precompliance Report 
as specified in Sec. 63.1306(c)(6) for existing sources or in the 
Application for approval of construction or reconstruction for new 
sources. If an owner or operator wishes to develop a recovered HAP ABA 
monitoring program after the compliance date, the program shall be 
submitted to the Administrator for approval before the owner or operator 
wishes to begin using the program. If the Administrator does not notify 
the owner or operator of objections to the program within 45 days after 
its receipt, the program shall be deemed approved. Until the program is 
approved, the owner or operator of an affected

[[Page 156]]

source remains subject to the requirements of this subpart.
    (d) Monitoring of HAP ABA in a storage vessel. The amount of HAP ABA 
in a storage vessel shall be determined weekly by monitoring the HAP ABA 
level in the storage vessel using a level measurement device that meets 
the criteria described in paragraphs (d)(1) and either (d)(2) or (d)(3) 
of this section.
    (1) The level measurement device must be calibrated initially and at 
least once per year thereafter.
    (2) With the exception of visually-read level measurement devices 
(i.e., gauge glass), the device must have either a digital or printed 
output.
    (3) If the level measurement device is a visually-read device, the 
device must be equipped with permanent graduated markings to indicate 
HAP ABA level in the storage tank.
    (e) Monitoring of HAP ABA added to a storage vessel. The amount of 
HAP ABA added to a storage vessel during a delivery shall be determined 
in accordance with either paragraphs (e)(1), (2), (3), or (4) of this 
section.
    (1) The volume of HAP ABA added to the storage vessel shall be 
determined by recording the volume in the storage vessel prior to the 
delivery and the volume after the delivery, provided that the storage 
tank level measurement device used to determine the levels meets the 
criteria in (d) of this section.
    (2) The volume of HAP ABA added to the storage vessel shall be 
determined by monitoring the flow rate using a device with an accuracy 
of  2.0 percent, and calibrated initially and at least once 
each six months thereafter.
    (3) The weight of HAP ABA added to the storage vessel shall be 
calculated as the difference of the full weight of the transfer vehicle 
prior to unloading into the storage vessel and the empty weight of the 
transfer vehicle after unloading into the storage vessel. The weight 
shall be determined using a scale meeting the requirements of either 
paragraph (e)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) A scale approved by the State or local agencies using the 
procedures contained in Handbook 44, Specifications, Tolerances, and 
Other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices 1998 
(incorporation by reference--see Sec. 63.14).
    (ii) A scale determined to be in compliance with the requirements of 
the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44 at least 
once per year by a registered scale technician.
    (4) As an alternative to the monitoring options described in 
paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(3) of this section, the owner or operator 
may develop an alternative monitoring program. Alternative monitoring 
programs must be submitted to the Administrator for approval in the 
Precompliance Report as specified in Sec. 63.1306(c)(4) for existing 
sources or in the Application for approval of construction or 
reconstruction for new sources. If an owner or operator wishes to 
develop an alternative monitoring program after the compliance date, the 
program shall be submitted to the Administrator for approval before the 
owner or operator wishes to begin using the alternative program. If the 
Administrator does not notify the owner or operator of objections to the 
program within 45 days after its receipt, the program shall be deemed 
approved. Until the program is approved, the owner or operator of an 
affected source remains subject to the requirements of this subpart. The 
components of an alternative monitoring program shall include, at a 
minimum, the items listed in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through (iv) of this 
section.
    (i) A description of the parameter to be monitored to determine the 
amount of HAP ABA added to the storage vessel during a delivery,
    (ii) A description of how the results will be recorded, and how the 
results will be converted into the amount of HAP ABA added to the 
storage vessel during a delivery,
    (iii) Data demonstrating that the monitoring device is accurate to 
within  2.0 percent, and
    (iv) Procedures to ensure that the accuracy of the monitoring 
measurements is maintained. These procedures shall, at a minimum, 
consist of periodic calibration of all monitoring devices.

[[Page 157]]



Sec. 63.1304  Testing requirements.

    Owners and operators of affected sources shall use the test methods 
listed in this section, as applicable, to demonstrate compliance with 
this subpart.
    (a) Test method and procedures to determine equipment leaks. 
Monitoring, as required under Sec. 63.1296, shall comply with the 
following requirements:
    (1) Monitoring shall comply with Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (2) The detection instrument shall meet the performance criteria of 
Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, except that the instrument 
response factor criteria in section 3.1.2(a) of Method 21 shall be for 
the average composition of the source fluid, rather than for each 
individual VOC in the stream. For source streams that contain nitrogen, 
air, or other inerts which are not HAP or VOC, the average stream 
response factor shall be calculated on an inert-free basis. The response 
factor may be determined at any concentration for which monitoring for 
leaks will be conducted.
    (3) The instrument shall be calibrated before use on each day of its 
use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A.
    (4) Calibration gases shall be:
    (i) Zero air (less than 10 ppm of hydrocarbon in air); and
    (ii) A mixture of methane and air at a concentration of 
approximately, 1,000 ppm for all transfer pumps; and 500 ppm for all 
other equipment, except as provided in paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this 
section.
    (iii) The instrument may be calibrated at a higher methane 
concentration (up to 2,000 ppm) than the leak definition concentration 
for a specific piece of equipment for monitoring that piece of 
equipment. If the monitoring instrument's design allows for multiple 
calibration gas concentrations, then the lower concentration calibration 
gas shall be no higher than 2,000 ppm methane and the higher 
concentration calibration gas shall be no higher than 10,000 ppm 
methane.
    (5) Monitoring shall be performed when the equipment is in HAP ABA 
service, in use with an acceptable surrogate volatile organic compound 
which is not a HAP ABA, or is in use with any other detectable gas or 
vapor.
    (6) If no instrument is available onsite that will meet the 
performance criteria specified in section 3.1.2(a) of Method 21 of 40 
CFR Part 60, appendix A, the readings from an available instrument may 
be adjusted by multiplying by the average response factor for the 
stream.
    (b) Test method to determine foam properties. The IFD and density of 
each grade of foam produced during each run of foam shall be determined 
using ASTM D3574-91, Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular 
Materials--Slab, Bonded, and Molded (incorporation by reference--see 
Sec. 63.14), using a sample of foam cut from the center of the foam bun. 
The maximum sample size for which the IFD and density is determined 
shall not be larger than 24 inches by 24 inches by 4 inches. For grades 
of foam where the owner or operator has designated the HAP ABA 
formulation limitation as zero, the owner or operator is not required to 
determine the IFD and density in accordance with this paragraph.



Sec. 63.1305  Alternative means of emission limitation.

    An owner or operator of an affected source may request approval to 
use an alternative means of emission limitation, following the 
procedures in this section.
    (a) The owner or operator can request approval to use an alternative 
means of emission limitation in the precompliance report for existing 
sources, the application for construction or reconstruction for new 
sources, or at any time.
    (b) This request shall include a complete description of the 
alternative means of emission limitation.
    (c) Each owner or operator applying for permission to use an 
alternative means of emission limitation under Sec. 63.6(g) shall be 
responsible for collecting and verifying data to demonstrate the 
emission reduction achieved by the alternative means of emission 
limitation.
    (d) Use of the alternative means of emission limitation shall not 
begin

[[Page 158]]

until approval is granted by the Administrator in accordance with 
Sec. 63.6(g).



Sec. 63.1306  Reporting requirements.

    Owners and operators of affected sources shall comply with each 
applicable reporting provision in this section.
    (a) Initial notification. Each affected source shall submit an 
initial notification in accordance with Sec. 63.9(b).
    (b) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. Each 
owner or operator shall submit an application for approval of 
construction or reconstruction in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.5(d).
    (c) Precompliance report. Each slabstock affected source shall 
submit a precompliance report no later than 12 months before the 
compliance date. This report shall contain the information listed in 
paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(8) of this section, as applicable.
    (1) Whether the source will comply with the emission point specific 
limitations described in Sec. 63.1293(a), or with the source-wide 
emission limitation described in Sec. 63.1293(b).
    (2) For a source complying with the emission point specific 
limitations, whether the source will comply on a rolling annual basis in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1297(b), or will comply with the monthly 
alternative for compliance contained in Sec. 63.1297(c).
    (3) For a source complying with the source-wide emission limitation, 
whether the source will comply on a rolling annual basis in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1299(a), or will comply with the monthly alternative for 
compliance contained in Sec. 63.1299(b).
    (4) A description of how HAP ABA and/or polyol added at the mixhead 
will be monitored. If the owner or operator is developing an alternative 
monitoring program, the alternative monitoring program containing the 
information in Sec. 63.1303(b)(5)(i) through (iv) shall be submitted.
    (5) Notification of the intent to use a recovery device to comply 
with the provisions of Sec. 63.1297 or Sec. 63.1299.
    (6) For slabstock affected sources complying with Sec. 63.1297 or 
Sec. 63.1299 using a recovery device, the continuous recovered HAP ABA 
monitoring and recordkeeping program, developed in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(c).
    (7) For sources complying with the source-wide emission limitation, 
a description of how the amount of HAP ABA in a storage vessel shall be 
determined.
    (8) For sources complying with the source-wide emission limitation, 
a description of how the amount of HAP ABA added to a storage vessel 
during a delivery will be monitored. If the owner or operator is 
developing an alternative monitoring program, the alternative monitoring 
program containing the information in Sec. 63.1303(e)(4)(i) through (iv) 
shall be submitted.
    (9) If the Administrator does not notify the owner or operator of 
objections to an alternative monitoring program submitted in accordance 
with (c)(4) or (c)(6) of this section, or a recovered HAP ABA monitoring 
and recordkeeping program submitted in accordance with (c)(7) of this 
section, the program shall be deemed approved 45 days after its receipt 
by the Administrator.
    (d) Notification of compliance status. Each affected source shall 
submit a notification of compliance status report no later than 180 days 
after the compliance date. For slabstock affected sources, this report 
shall contain the information listed in paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of 
this section, as applicable. This report shall contain the information 
listed in paragraph (d)(4) of this section for molded foam processes and 
in paragraph (d)(5) for rebond foam processes.
    (1) A list of diisocyanate storage vessels, along with a record of 
the type of control utilized for each storage vessel.
    (2) For transfer pumps in diisocyanate service, a record of the type 
of control utilized for each transfer pump.
    (3) If the source is complying with the emission point specific 
limitations of Secs. 63.1294 through 63.1298, the information listed in 
paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) A list of HAP ABA storage vessels, along with a record of the 
type of control utilized for each storage vessel.
    (ii) A list of pumps, valves, connectors, pressure-relief devices, 
and open-

[[Page 159]]

ended valves or lines in HAP ABA service.
    (iii) A list of any modifications to equipment in HAP ABA service 
made to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1296.
    (4) A statement that the molded foam affected source is in 
compliance with Sec. 63.1300, or a statement that molded foam processes 
at an affected source are in compliance with Sec. 63.1300.
    (5) A statement that the rebond foam affected source is in 
compliance with Sec. 63.1301, or that rebond processes at an affected 
source are in compliance with Sec. 63.1301.
    (e) Semiannual reports. Each slabstock affected source shall submit 
a report containing the information specified in paragraphs (e)(1) 
through (5) of this section semiannually no later than 60 days after the 
end of each 180 day period. The first report shall be submitted no later 
than 240 days after the date that the Notification of Compliance Status 
is due and shall cover the 6-month period beginning on the date that the 
Notification of Compliance Status Report is due.
    (1) For slabstock affected sources complying with the rolling annual 
compliance provisions of either Sec. 63.1297 or Sec. 63.1299, the 
allowable and actual HAP ABA emissions (or allowable and actual source-
wide HAP emissions) for each of the 12-month periods ending on each of 
the six months in the reporting period. This information is not required 
to be included in the initial semi-annual compliance report.
    (2) For sources complying with the monthly compliance alternative of 
either Sec. 63.1297 or Sec. 63.1299, the allowable and actual HAP ABA 
emissions (or allowable and actual source-wide HAP emissions) for each 
of the six months in the reporting period.
    (3) For sources complying with the storage vessel provisions of 
Sec. 63.1294(a) or Sec. 63.1295 using a carbon adsorption system, 
unloading events that occurred after breakthrough was detected and 
before the carbon was replaced.
    (4) Any equipment leaks that were not repaired in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1294(b)(2)(iii), Sec. 63.1294(c), Sec. 63.1296(a)(2)(iii), 
(b)(2), (b)(3)(iv), (b)(4)(v), (c)(2), (c)(4)(ii), and (d)(2).
    (5) Any leaks in vapor return lines that were not repaired in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(a)(1)(ii) or Sec. 63.1295(b)(2).
    (f) Other reports. (1) Change in selected emission limitation. An 
owner or operator electing to change their slabstock flexible 
polyurethane foam emission limitation (from emission point specific 
limitations to a source-wide emission limitation, or vice versa), 
selected in accordance with Sec. 63.1293, shall notify the Administrator 
no later than 180 days prior to the change.
    (2) Change in selected compliance method. An owner or operator 
changing the period of compliance for either Sec. 63.1297 or 
Sec. 63.1299 (between rolling annual and monthly) shall notify the 
Administrator no later than 180 days prior to the change.
    (g) Annual compliance certifications. Each affected source subject 
to the provisions in Secs. 63.1293 through 63.1301 shall submit a 
compliance certification annually.
    (1) The compliance certification shall be based on information 
consistent with that contained in Sec. 63.1308 of this section, as 
applicable.
    (2) A compliance certification required pursuant to a State or local 
operating permit program may be used to satisfy the requirements of this 
section, provided that the compliance certification is based on 
information consistent with that contained in Sec. 63.1308 of this 
section, and provided that the Administrator has approved the State or 
local operating permit program under part 70 of this chapter.
    (3) Each compliance certification submitted pursuant to this section 
shall be signed by a responsible official of the company that owns or 
operates the affected source.



Sec. 63.1307  Recordkeeping requirements.

    The applicable records designated in paragraphs (a) through (c) of 
this section shall be maintained by owners and operators of all affected 
sources.
    (a) Storage vessel records. (1) A list of diisocyanate storage 
vessels, along with a record of the type of control utilized for each 
storage vessel.
    (2) For each slabstock affected source complying with the emission 
point specific limitations of Secs. 63.1294 through

[[Page 160]]

63.1298, a list of HAP ABA storage vessels, along with a record of the 
type of control utilized for each storage vessel.
    (3) For storage vessels complying through the use of a carbon 
adsorption system, paragraph (a)(3)(i) or (ii), and paragraph 
(a)(3)(iii) of this section.
    (i) Records of dates and times when the carbon adsorption system is 
monitored for carbon breakthrough and the monitoring device reading, 
when the device is monitored in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(a); or
    (ii) For affected sources monitoring at an interval no greater than 
20 percent of the carbon replacement interval, in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(a)(2), the records listed in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii)(A) and 
(B) of this section.
    (A) Records of the design analysis, including all the information 
listed in Sec. 63.1303(a)(2)(i) through (iii), and
    (B) Records of dates and times when the carbon adsorption system is 
monitored for carbon breakthrough and the monitoring device reading.
    (iii) Date when the existing carbon in the carbon adsorption system 
is replaced with fresh carbon.
    (4) For storage vessels complying through the use of a vapor return 
line, paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) Dates and times when each unloading event occurs and each 
inspection of the vapor return line for leaks occurs.
    (ii) Records of dates and times when a leak is detected in the vapor 
return line.
    (iii) Records of dates and times when a leak is repaired.
    (b) Equipment leak records. (1) A list of components as specified 
below in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii).
    (i) For all affected sources, a list of components in diisocyanate 
service,
    (ii) For affected sources complying with the emission point specific 
limitations of Secs. 63.1294 through 63.1298, a list of components in 
HAP ABA service.
    (2) For transfer pumps in diisocyanate service, a record of the type 
of control utilized for each transfer pump and the date of installation.
    (3) When a leak is detected as specified in Sec. 63.1294(b)(2)(ii), 
Sec. 63.1294(c), Sec. 63.1296(a)(2), (b)(1), (c)(1), and (d)(1), the 
requirements listed in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section 
apply:
    (i) Leaking equipment shall be identified in accordance with the 
requirements in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) A readily visible identification, marked with the equipment 
identification number, shall be attached to the leaking equipment.
    (B) The identification on a valve may be removed after it has been 
monitored for 2-successive quarters as specified in Sec. 63.1296(b)(1) 
and no leak has been detected during those 2 quarters.
    (C) The identification on equipment, other than a valve, may be 
removed after it has been repaired.
    (ii) The information in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A) through (H) shall 
be recorded for leaking components.
    (A) The instrument and operator identification numbers and the 
equipment identification number.
    (B) The date the leak was detected and the dates of each attempt to 
repair the leak.
    (C) Repair methods applied in each attempt to repair the leak.
    (D) The words ``above leak definition'' if the maximum instrument 
reading measured by the methods specified in Sec. 63.1304(a) after each 
repair attempt is equal or greater than the leak definitions for the 
specified equipment.
    (E) The words ``repair delayed'' and the reason for the delay if a 
leak is not repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the 
leak.
    (F) The expected date of the successful repair of the leak if a leak 
is not repaired within 15 calendar days.
    (G) The date of successful repair of the leak.
    (H) The date the identification is removed.
    (c) HAP ABA records--(1) Emission point specific limitations--
rolling annual compliance and monthly compliance alternative records. 
Each slabstock affected source complying with the emission point 
specific limitations of Sec. 1A63.1294 through 63.1298, and the rolling 
annual compliance provisions of Sec. 63.1297(a)(1), shall maintain the 
records listed in paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), (iii), and (iv) of this 
section. Each flexible polyurethane foam slabstock source complying with 
the emission point specific

[[Page 161]]

limitations of Secs. 63.1294 through 63.1298, and the monthly compliance 
alternative of Sec. 63.1297(a)(2), shall maintain the records listed in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), and (iv) of this section.
    (i) Daily records of the information listed below in paragraphs 
(c)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) A log of foam runs each day. For each run, the log shall include 
a list of the grades produced during the run.
    (B) Results of the density and IFD testing for each grade of foam 
produced during each run of foam, conducted in accordance with the 
procedures in Sec. 63.1304(b). The results of this testing shall be 
recorded within 10 working days of the production of the foam. For 
grades of foam where the owner or operator has designated the HAP ABA 
formulation limitation as zero, the owner or operator is not required to 
keep records of the IFD and density.
    (C) The amount of polyol added to the slabstock foam production line 
at the mixhead for each run of foam, determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b).
    (ii) Monthly records of the information listed in paragraphs 
(c)(1)(ii)(A) through (E) of this section.
    (A) A listing of all foam grades produced during the month,
    (B) For each foam grade produced, the HAP ABA formulation 
limitation, calculated in accordance with Sec. 63.1297(d).
    (C) With the exception of those grades for which the owner or 
operator has designated zero as the HAP ABA formulation limitation, the 
total amount of polyol used in the month for each foam grade produced.
    (D) The total allowable HAP ABA emissions for the month, determined 
in accordance with Sec. 63.1297(b)(2).
    (E) The total amount of HAP ABA added to the slabstock foam 
production line at the mixhead during the month, determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b).
    (iii) Each source complying with the rolling annual compliance 
provisions of Sec. 63.1297(b) shall maintain the records listed in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) The sum of the total allowable HAP ABA emissions for the month 
and the previous 11 months.
    (B) The sum of the total actual HAP ABA emissions for the month and 
the previous 11 months.
    (iv) Records of all calibrations for each device used to measure 
polyol and HAP ABA added at the mixhead, conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(3).
    (2) Source-wide limitations--rolling annual compliance and monthly 
compliance alternative records. Each slabstock affected source complying 
with the source-wide limitations of Sec. 63.1299, and the rolling annual 
compliance provisions in Sec. 63.1299(a), shall maintain the records 
listed in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(vii) of this section. Each 
flexible polyurethane foam slabstock source complying with the source-
wide limitations of Sec. 63.1299, and the monthly compliance alternative 
of Sec. 63.1299(b), shall maintain the records listed in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(iii) and paragraphs (c)(2)(v) through 
(c)(2)(vii) of this section.
    (i) Daily records of the information listed in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) A log of foam runs each day. For each run, the log shall include 
a list of the grades produced during the run.
    (B) Results of the density and IFD testing for each grade of foam 
produced during each run of foam, conducted in accordance with the 
procedures in Sec. 63.1304(b). The results of this testing shall be 
recorded within 10 working days of the production of the foam. For 
grades of foam where the the owner or operator has designated the HAP 
ABA formulation limitation as zero, the owner or operator is not 
required to keep records of the IFD and density.
    (C) With the exception of those grades for which the owner or 
operator has designated zero as the HAP ABA formulation limitation, the 
amount of polyol added to the slabstock foam production line at the 
mixhead for each grade produced during each run of foam, determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b).
    (ii) For sources complying with the source-wide emission limitation, 
weekly records of the storage tank level, determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(d).

[[Page 162]]

    (iii) Monthly records of the information listed below in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(iii)(A) through (E) of this section.
    (A) A listing of all foam grades produced during the month,
    (B) For each foam grade produced, the residual HAP formulation 
limitation, calculated in accordance with Sec. 63.1297(d).
    (C) With the exception of those grades for which the owner or 
operator has designated zero as the HAP ABA formulation limitation, the 
total amount of polyol used in the month for each foam grade produced.
    (D) The total allowable HAP ABA and equipment cleaning emissions for 
the month, determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1297(b)(2).
    (E) The total actual source-wide HAP ABA emissions for the month, 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1299(c)(1), along with the 
information listed in paragraphs (c)(2)(iii)(E)(1) and (2) of this 
section.
    (1) The amounts of HAP ABA in the storage vessel at the beginning 
and end of the month, determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1299(c)(2); 
and
    (2) The amount of each delivery of HAP ABA to the storage vessel, 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1299(c)(3).
    (iv) Each source complying with the rolling annual compliance 
provisions of Sec. 63.1299(a) shall maintain the records listed in 
paragraphs (c)(2)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) The sum of the total allowable HAP ABA and equipment cleaning 
HAP emissions for the month and the previous 11 months.
    (B) The sum of the total actual HAP ABA and equipment cleaning HAP 
emissions for the month and the previous 11 months.
    (v) Records of all calibrations for each device used to measure 
polyol added at the mixhead, conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(3).
    (vi) Records of all calibrations for each device used to measure the 
amount of HAP ABA in the storage vessel, conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(d)(1).
    (vii) Records to verify that all scales used to measure the amount 
of HAP ABA added to the storage vessel meet the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1303(e)(3). For scales meeting the criteria of 
Sec. 63.1303(e)(3)(i), this documentation shall be in the form of 
written confirmation of the State or local approval. For scales 
complying with Sec. 63.1303(e)(3)(ii), this documentation shall be in 
the form of a report provided by the registered scale technician.
    (d) The owner or operator of each affected source complying with 
Sec. 63.1297 or Sec. 63.1299 through the use of a recovery device shall 
maintain the following records:
    (1) A copy of the recovered HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping 
program, developed pursuant to Sec. 63.1303(c);
    (2) Certification of the accuracy of the monitoring device,
    (3) Records of periodic calibration of the monitoring devices,
    (4) Records of parameter monitoring results, and
    (5) The amount of HAP ABA recovered each time it is measured.
    (e) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to 
Sec. 63.1298 of this subpart shall maintain a product data sheet for 
each equipment cleaner used which includes the HAP content, in kg of 
HAP/kg solids (lb HAP/lb solids).
    (f) The owner or operator of an affected source following the 
compliance methods in Sec. 63.1308(b)(1) and (c)(1) shall maintain 
records of each use of a vapor return line during unloading, of any 
leaks detected during unloading, and of repairs of leaks detected during 
unloading.
    (g) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to 
Sec. 63.1300 or Sec. 63.1301 of this subpart shall maintain a product 
data sheet for each compound other than diisocyanates used to flush the 
mixhead and associated piping during periods of startup or maintenance, 
which includes the HAP content, in kg of HAP/kg solids (lb HAP/lb 
solids), of each solvent other than diisocyanates used to flush the 
mixhead and associated piping during periods of startup or maintenance.
    (h) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to 
Sec. 63.1300 or Sec. 63.1301 of this subpart shall maintain a product 
data sheet for each mold release agent used that includes the HAP 
content, in kg of HAP/kg solids (lb

[[Page 163]]

HAP/lb solids), of each mold release agent.



Sec. 63.1308  Compliance demonstrations.

    (a) For each affected source, compliance with the requirements 
listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(2) of this section shall mean 
compliance with the requirements contained in Secs. 63.1293 through 
63.1301, absent any credible evidence to the contrary.
    (1) The requirements described in Tables 3, 4, and 5 of this 
subpart; and
    (2) The requirement to submit a compliance certification annually as 
required under Sec. 63.1306(g).
    (b) All slabstock affected sources. For slabstock affected sources, 
failure to meet the requirements contained in Sec. 63.1294 shall be 
considered a violation of this subpart. Violation of each item listed in 
the paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(6) of this section, as applicable, 
shall be considered a separate violation.
    (1) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(a)(1), each unloading event that occurs 
when the diisocyanate storage vessel is not equipped with a vapor return 
line from the storage vessel to the tank truck or rail car, each 
unloading event that occurs when the vapor line is not connected, each 
unloading event that the vapor line is not inspected for leaks as 
described in Sec. 63.1294(a)(1)(i), each unloading event that occurs 
after a leak has been detected and not repaired, and each calendar day 
after a leak is detected, but not repaired as soon as practicable;
    (2) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(a)(2), each unloading event that the 
diisocyanate storage vessel is not equipped with a carbon adsorption 
system, each unloading event (or each month if more than one unloading 
event occurs in a month) that the carbon adsorption system is not 
monitored for breakthrough in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(a)(3) or (4), 
and each unloading event that occurs when the carbon is not replaced 
after an indication of breakthrough;
    (3) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(a)(2) through the alternative monitoring 
procedures in Sec. 63.1303(a)(2), each unloading event that the 
diisocyanate storage vessel is not equipped with a carbon adsorption 
system, each time that the carbon adsorption system is not monitored for 
breakthrough in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(a)(3) or (4) at the 
interval established in the design analysis, and each unloading event 
that occurs when the carbon is not replaced after an indication of 
breakthrough;
    (4) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(b) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(b)(1), each calendar day that a transfer 
pump in diisocyanate service is not a sealless pump;
    (5) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(b) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1294(b)(2), each calendar day that a transfer 
pump in diisocyanate service is not submerged as described in 
Sec. 63.1294(b)(2)(i), each week that the pump is not visually monitored 
for leaks, each calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection of a 
leak that a first attempt at repair has not been made in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1294(b)(2)(iii)(B), and the earlier of each calendar day after 
15 calendar days after detection of a leak that a leak is not repaired, 
or a leak is not repaired as soon as practicable, each subsequent 
calender day (with the exception of situations meeting the criteria of 
Sec. 63.1294(d));
    (6) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1294(c), each 
calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection of a leak that a 
first attempt at repair has not been made, and the earlier of each 
calendar day after 15 calendar days after detection of a leak that a 
leak is not repaired, or if a leak is not repaired as soon as 
practicable, each subsequent calender day (with the exception of 
situations meeting the criteria of Sec. 63.1296(f)).
    (c) Slabstock affected sources complying with the emission point 
specific limitations. For slabstock affected sources complying with the 
emission point specific limitations as provided in Sec. 63.1293(a), 
failure to meet the requirements contained in Secs. 63.1295 through 
63.1298 shall be considered a violation of this subpart. Violation of 
each item listed in the paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(17) of this 
section, as applicable,

[[Page 164]]

shall be considered a separate violation.
    (1) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1295(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1295(b), each unloading event that occurs when 
the HAP ABA storage vessel is not equipped with a vapor return line from 
the storage vessel to the tank truck or rail car, each unloading event 
that occurs when the vapor line is not connected, each unloading event 
that the vapor line is not inspected for leaks as described in 
Sec. 63.1295(b)(1), each unloading event that occurs after a leak has 
been detected and not repaired, and each calendar day after a leak is 
detected but not repaired as soon as practicable;
    (2) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1295(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1295(c), each unloading event that the HAP ABA 
storage vessel is not equipped with a carbon adsorption system, each 
unloading event (or each month if more than one unloading event occurs 
in a month) that the carbon adsorption system is not monitored for 
breakthrough in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(a)(3) or (4), and each 
unloading event that occurs when the carbon is not replaced after an 
indication of breakthrough ;
    (3) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1295(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1295(c) through the alternative monitoring 
procedures in Sec. 63.1303(a)(2), each unloading event that the HAP ABA 
storage vessel is not equipped with a carbon adsorption system, each 
time that the carbon adsorption system is not monitored for breakthrough 
in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(a)(3) or (4) at the interval established 
in the design analysis, and each unloading event that occurs when the 
carbon is not replaced after an indication of breakthrough;
    (4) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(a)(1), each calendar day that a transfer 
pump in HAP ABA service is not a sealless pump;
    (5) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(a) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(a)(2), each week that a visual inspection 
of a pump in HAP ABA service is not performed, each quarter that a pump 
in HAP ABA service is not monitored to detect leaks in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1304(a), each calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection 
of a leak that a first attempt at repair has not been made in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1296(b)(2)(iii)(B), and the earlier of each calendar day 
after 15 calendar days after detection of a leak that a leak is not 
repaired, or if a leak is not repaired as soon as practicable, each 
subsequent calender day (with the exception of situations meeting the 
criteria of Sec. 63.1296(f));
    (6) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(b) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(b)(1) and (2), each quarter that a valve in 
HAP ABA service is not monitored to detect leaks in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1304(a), each calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection 
of a leak that a first attempt at repair has not been made in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1296(b)(2)(ii), and each calendar day after 15 calendar 
days after detection of a leak that a leak is not repaired, or if a leak 
is not repaired as soon as practicable, whichever is earlier (with the 
exception of situations meeting the criteria of Sec. 63.1296(f));
    (7) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(b)(3) for 
each valve designated as unsafe to monitor as described in 
Sec. 63.1296(b)(3)(i), failure to develop the written plan required by 
Sec. 63.1296(b)(3)(ii), each period specified in the written plan that 
an unsafe-to-monitor valve in HAP ABA service is not monitored, and each 
calendar day in which a leak is not repaired in accordance with the 
written plan;
    (8) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(b)(4) for 
one or more valves designated as difficult-to-monitor in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1296(b)(4)(i) and (ii), failure to develop the written plan 
required by Sec. 63.1296(b)(4)(iii), each calendar year that a 
difficult-to-monitor valve in HAP ABA service is not monitored, and each 
calendar day in which a leak is not repaired in accordance with the 
written plan;
    (9) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(c) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(c)(1) and (2), each year that a connector 
in HAP ABA service is not monitored to detect leaks in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1304(a); each calendar day after 3 months after a connector has 
been opened, has otherwise

[[Page 165]]

had the seal broken, or a leak is repaired, that each connector in HAP 
ABA service is not monitored to detect leaks in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1304(a); each calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection 
of a leak that a first attempt at repair has not been made, and the 
earlier of each calendar day after 15 calendar days after detection of a 
leak that a leak is not repaired, or if a leak is not repaired as soon 
as practicable, each subsequent calendar day (with the exception of 
situations meeting the criteria of Sec. 63.1296(f));
    (10) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(c)(3) for 
one or more connectors designated as unsafe-to-monitor in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1296(c)(3)(i), failure to develop the written plan required 
by Sec. 63.1296(c)(3)(ii), each period specified in the written plan 
that an unsafe-to-monitor valve in HAP ABA service is not monitored, 
each calendar day after 5 calendar days after detection of a leak of an 
unsafe-to-monitor connector that a first attempt at repair has not been 
made, and the earlier of each calendar day after 15 calendar days after 
detection of a leak that a leak is not repaired, or if a leak is not 
repaired as soon as practicable, each subsequent calender day (with the 
exception of situations meeting the criteria of Sec. 63.1296(f));
    (11) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(c)(4) for 
one or more connectors designated as unsafe to repair, each year that 
one or more unsafe-to-repair connectors in HAP ABA service is not 
monitored to detect leaks in accordance with Sec. 63.1304(a); each 
calendar day after 3 months after one or more unsafe-to-repair 
connectors has been opened, has otherwise had the seal broken, or a leak 
is repaired, that each unsafe-to-repair connector in HAP ABA service is 
not monitored to detect leaks in accordance with Sec. 63.1304(a); and 
the earlier of each calendar day after six-months after detection of a 
leak that a leak is not repaired, or if a leak is not repaired as soon 
as practicable, each subsequent calendar day;
    (12) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(d) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(d)(1) and (2), each calendar day after the 
5 days that the pressure-relief device has not been monitored in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1304(a) after a potential leak was discovered as 
described in Sec. 63.1296(d)(1), each calendar day after 5 calendar days 
after detection of a leak that a first attempt at repair has not been 
made, and the earlier of each calendar day after 15 calendar days after 
detection of a leak that a leak is not repaired, or if a leak is 
detected and not repaired as soon as practicable, each subsequent 
calendar day (with the exception of situations meeting the criteria of 
Sec. 63.1296(f));
    (13) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1296(e) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1296(e)(1) through (5), each calendar day that 
an open-ended valve or line has no cap, blind flange, plug or second 
valve as described in Sec. 63.1296(e)(2), and each calendar day that a 
valve on the process fluid end of an open-ended valve or line equipped 
with a second valve is not closed before the second valve is closed;
    (14) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1297(a) in 
accordance with the rolling annual compliance option in 
Sec. 63.1297(a)(1) and (b), each calendar day in the 12-month period for 
which the actual HAP ABA emissions exceeded the allowable HAP ABA 
emissions level, each calendar day in which foam is being poured where 
the amount of polyol added at the mixhead is not monitored (as required) 
in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(i), each calendar day in which 
foam is being poured where the amount of HAP ABA added at the mixhead is 
not monitored (as required) in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(ii), 
each calendar day in a 6-month period in which the polyol pumps are not 
calibrated in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(i), each calendar day 
in a month in which the HAP ABA pumps are not calibrated in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(ii), and each calendar day after 10 working days 
after production where the IFD and density of a foam grade are not 
determined (where required) in accordance with Sec. 63.1304(b);
    (15) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1297(a) in 
accordance with the monthly compliance option in Sec. 63.1297(a)(2) and 
(c), each calendar day of each month for which the actual HAP ABA 
emissions exceeded the allowable HAP ABA emissions level for

[[Page 166]]

that month, each calendar day in which foam is being poured where the 
amount of polyol added at the mixhead is not monitored (as required) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(i), each calendar day in which foam 
is being poured where the amount of HAP ABA added at the mixhead is not 
monitored (as required) in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(ii), each 
6-month period in which the polyol pumps are not calibrated in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(i), each month in which the HAP ABA 
pumps are not calibrated in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(ii), and 
each calendar day after 10 working days after production where the IFD 
and density of a foam grade are not determined (where required) in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1304(b);
    (16) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1297(a) by 
using a recovery device as allowed under Sec. 63.1297(e), the items 
listed in (c)(16)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
    (i) If complying with rolling annual compliance option in 
Sec. 63.1297(a)(1) and (b), each item listed in (c)(14) of this section, 
failure to develop a recovered HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping 
program in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(c), and each instance when an 
element of the program is not followed.
    (ii) If complying with the monthly compliance option in 
Sec. 63.1297(a)(2) and (c), each item listed in (c)(15) of this section, 
failure to develop a recovered HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping 
program in accordance with Sec. 63.1303(c), and each instance when an 
element of the program is not followed.
    (17) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1298, each 
calendar day that a HAP or any HAP-based material is used as an 
equipment cleaner.
    (d) Slabstock affected sources complying with the source-wide 
emission limitation. For slabstock affected sources complying with the 
source-wide emission limitation as provided in Sec. 63.1293(b), failure 
to meet the requirements contained in Sec. 63.1299 shall be considered a 
violation of this subpart. Violation of each item listed in the 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section, as applicable, shall 
be considered a separate violation.
    (1) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1299 in 
accordance with the rolling annual compliance option in Sec. 63.1299(a), 
each calendar day in the 12-month period for which the actual HAP ABA 
emissions exceeded the allowable HAP ABA emissions level, each calendar 
day in which foam is being poured where the amount of polyol added at 
the mixhead is not monitored (as required) in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(i), each calendar day in a week in which the amount 
of HAP ABA in a storage vessel is not determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(d), each delivery of HAP ABA in which the amount of HAP ABA 
added to the storage vessel is not determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(e), each calendar day in a 6-month period in which the 
polyol pumps are not calibrated in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(i), and each calendar day after 10 working days after 
production where the IFD and density of a foam grade are not determined 
(where required) in accordance with Sec. 63.1304(b);
    (2) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1299 in 
accordance with the monthly compliance option in Sec. 63.1299(b), each 
calendar day of each month for which the actual HAP ABA emissions 
exceeded the allowable HAP ABA emissions level for that month, each 
calendar day in which foam is being poured where the amount of polyol 
added at the mixhead is not monitored (as required) in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(1)(i), each calendar day in a week in which the amount 
of HAP ABA in a storage vessel is not determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(d), each delivery of HAP ABA in which the amount of HAP ABA 
added to the storage vessel is not determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(e), and each calendar day in a 6-month period in which the 
polyol pumps are not calibrated in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(b)(3)(i), and each calendar day after 10 working days after 
production where the IFD and density of a foam grade are not determined 
(where required) in accordance with Sec. 63.1304(b).
    (3) For each affected source complying with Sec. 63.1299 by using a 
recovery device as allowed under Sec. 63.1299(e), the items listed in 
(d)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
    (i) If complying with rolling annual compliance option in 
Sec. 63.1299(a), each

[[Page 167]]

item listed in (d)(1) of this section, failure to develop a recovered 
HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping program in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1303(c), and each instance when an element of the program is not 
followed.
    (ii) If complying with the monthly compliance option in 
Sec. 63.1299(b), each item listed in (d)(2) of this section, failure to 
develop a recovered HAP ABA monitoring and recordkeeping program in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1303(c), and each instance when an element of 
the program is not followed.
    (e) Molded and rebond foam affected sources. For molded and rebond 
foam affected sources, failure to meet the requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1300 and Sec. 63.1301, respectively, shall be considered a 
violation of this subpart. Violation of each item listed in the 
following paragraphs shall be considered a separate violation.
    (1) For each molded foam affected source subject to the provisions 
in Sec. 63.1300(a), each calendar day that a HAP-based material is used 
as an equipment cleaner (except for diisocyanates used to flush the 
mixhead and associated piping during periods of startup or maintenance, 
provided that the diisocyanate compounds are contained in a closed-loop 
system and are re-used in production);
    (2) For each molded foam affected source subject to the provisions 
of Sec. 63.1300(b), each calendar day that a HAP-base material is used 
as a mold release agent;
    (3) For each rebond foam affected source subject to the provisions 
of Sec. 63.1301(a), each calendar day that a HAP-based material is used 
as an equipment cleaner; and
    (4) For each rebond foam affected source complying with 
Sec. 63.1301(b), each calendar day that a HAP-based mold release agent 
is used.



Sec. 63.1309  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under Sec. 112(d) of the Clean Air Act, the authorities contained 
in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator 
and not transferred to a State.
    (b) The authority conferred in Sec. 63.1303(b)(5) and 
Sec. 63.1305(d) shall not be delegated to any State.

                     Appendix to Subpart III--Tables

    For the convenience of the readers of subpart III, the tables below 
summarize the requirements in Secs. 63.1290 to 63.1307. These tables are 
intended to assist the reader in determining the requirements applicable 
to affected sources and do not alter an affected source's obligation to 
comply with the requirements in Secs. 63.1290 to 63.1307.
    TABLE 1 TO SUBPART III--HAP ABA FORMULATION LIMITATIONS MATRIX FOR 
NEW SOURCES [see Sec. 63.1297(d)(2)]

[[Page 168]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC98.010


     Table 2 to Subpart III--Applicability of General Provisions (40 CFR Part 63, Subpart A) to Subpart III.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Applies to
                   Subpart A reference                       subpart III                  Comment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  63.1...............................................            YES   Except that Sec.  63.1(c)(2) is not
                                                                            applicable to the extent area
                                                                            sources are not subject to subpart
                                                                            III.
Sec.  63.2...............................................            YES   Definitions are modified and
                                                                            supplemented by Sec.  63.1292.
Sec.  63.3...............................................            YES
Sec.  63.4...............................................            YES
Sec.  63.5...............................................            YES
Sec.  63.6 (a)-(d).......................................            YES
Sec.  63.6(e) (1)-(2)....................................            YES
Sec.  63.6(e)(3).........................................             NO   Owners and operators of subpart III
                                                                            affected sources are not required to
                                                                            develop and implement a startup,
                                                                            shutdown, and malfunction plan.
Sec.  63.6 (f)-(g).......................................            YES
Sec.  63.6(h)............................................             NO   Subpart III does not require opacity
                                                                            and visible emission standards.
Sec.  63.6 (i)-(j).......................................            YES
Sec.  63.7...............................................             NO   Performance tests not required by
                                                                            subpart III.
Sec.  63.8...............................................             NO   Continuous monitoring, as defined in
                                                                            subpart A, is not required by
                                                                            subpart III.
Sec.  63.9 (a)-(d).......................................            YES
Sec.  63.9 (e)-(g).......................................             NO
Sec.  63.9(h)............................................             NO   Subpart III specifies Notification of
                                                                            Compliance Status requirements.
Sec.  63.9 (i)-(j).......................................            YES
Sec.  63.10 (a)-(b)......................................            YES   Except that the records specified in
                                                                            Sec.  63.10(b)(2)(vi) through (xi)
                                                                            and (xiii) are not required.
Sec.  63.10(c)...........................................             NO

[[Page 169]]

 
Sec.  63.10(d)(1)........................................            YES
Sec.  63.10 (d) (2)-(3)..................................             NO
Sec.  63.10 (d) (4)-(5)..................................            YES
Sec.  63.10(e)...........................................             NO
Sec.  63.10(f)...........................................            YES
Sec.  63.11..............................................            YES
Sec.  63.12..............................................            YES
Sec.  63.13..............................................            YES
Sec.  63.14..............................................            YES
Sec.  63.15..............................................            YES
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 170]]


 Table 3 to Subpart III.--Compliance Requirements for Slabstock Foam Production Affected Sources Complying with the Emission Point Specific Limitations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Emission, work
           Emission point                Emission point           practice, and            Monitoring           Recordkeeping            Reporting
                                        compliance option      equipment standards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Diisocyanate storage vessels Sec.    Vapor balance.........  Sec.  63.1294(a)(1)     Sec.  63.1294(a)(1)(i  Sec.  63.1307(a)(1)    Sec.  63.1306(e)(5).
 63.1294(a)                                                   and (1)(ii).            ).                     and (4).
                                     Carbon adsorber.......  Sec.  63.1294(a)(2)...  Sec.  63.1303(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                                                                      (3), and (4).          (3)(i), and (3)(iii).
                                     Carbon adsorber--       Sec.  63.1294(a)(2)...  Sec.  63.1303(a)(2),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                      alternative                                     (3) and (4).           (3)(ii), and
                                      monitoring.                                                            (3)(iii).
Diisocyanate transfer pumps Sec.     Sealless pump.........  Sec.  63.1294(b)(1)...  .....................  Sec.  63.1307          .....................
 63.1294(b)                                                                                                  (b)(1)(i) and (2).
                                     Submerged pump........  Sec.  63.1294(b)(2)(i)  Sec.  63.1294          Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
                                                              and (iii).              (b)(2)(ii).            (b)(1)(i), (2), and
                                                                                                             (3).
Other components in diisocyanate     N/A...................  Sec.  63.1294(c)......  Sec.  63.1294(c).....  Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
 service Sec.  63.1294(c).                                                                                   (b)(1)(i) and (3).
HAP ABA storage vessels Sec.         Vapor balance.........  Sec.  63.1295(b) and    Sec.  63.1295 (b)(1).  Sec.  63.1307(a)(2)    Sec.  63.1306(e)(5).
 63.1295                                                      (b)(2).                                        and (4).
                                     Carbon adsorber.......  Sec.  63.1295(c)......  Sec.  63.1303(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(2),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                                                                      (3), and (4).          (3)(i), (3)(iii).
                                     Carbon adsorber--       Sec.  63.1295(c)......  Sec.  63.1303(a)(2),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(2),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                      alternative                                     (3) and (4).           (3)(ii), and
                                      monitoring.                                                            (3)(iii).
HAP ABA pumps Sec.  63.1296(a):      Sealless pump.........  Sec.  63.1296(a)(1)...  .....................  Sec.  63.1307          .....................
                                                                                                             (b)(1)(ii).
                                     Quarterly monitoring..  Sec.  63.1296(a)(2)     Sec.  63.1296(a)(2)(i  Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1304(e)(4).
                                                              and (2)(iii).           ), (2)(ii) and Sec.    (b)(1)(ii) and (3).
                                                                                      63.1304(a).
HAP ABA valves Sec.  63.1296(b):     Quarterly monitoring..  Sec.  63.1296(b), and   Sec.  63.1296 (b)(1)   Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1304(e)(4).
                                                              (b)(2).                 and Sec.  63.1304(a).  (b)(1)(ii) and (3).
                                     Unsafe-to-monitor.....  Sec.  63.1296(b)(3)     Sec.  63.1296          Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1304(e)(4).
                                                              (i), (ii), and (iv).    (b)(3)(iii).           (b)(1)(ii), and (4).
                                     Difficult-to-monitor..  Sec.  63.1296(b)(4)     Sec.  63.1296(b)(4)(i  Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
                                                              (i), (ii), (iii), and   v) and Sec.            (b)(1)(ii) and (4).
                                                              (v).                    63.1304(a).
HAP ABA Connectors Sec.              Annual monitoring.....  Sec.  63.1296(c) and    Sec.  63.1296(c)(1)    Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
 63.1296(c):.                                                 (c)(2).                 and Sec.  63.1304(a).  (b)(1)(ii) and (3).
                                     Unsafe-to-monitor.....  Sec.  63.1296(c)(2),    Sec.  63.1296(c)(3)    Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
                                                              (3) (i), and (ii).      (iii) and Sec.         (b)(1)(ii) and (4).
                                                                                      63.1304(a).
                                     Unsafe-to-repair......  Sec.  63.1296(c)(4)...  Sec.  63.1296(c)(1)..  Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
                                                                                                             (b)(1)(ii).
Pressure-relief devices Sec.         N/A...................  Sec.  63.1296(d) and    Sec.  63.1296 (d)(1)   Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
 63.1296(d)                                                   (d)(2).                 and Sec.  63.1304(a).  (b)(1)(ii) and (3).
Open-ended valves or lines Sec.      N/A...................  Sec.  63.1296(e)......  .....................  Sec.  63.1307          .....................
 63.1296(e).                                                                                                 (b)(1)(ii).
Production line Sec.  63.1297......  Rolling annual          Sec.  63.1297(a)(1)     Sec.  63.1303 (b)....  Sec.  63.1307(c)(1)..  Sec.  63.1306(e)(1).
                                      compliance.             and (b).
                                     Monthly compliance....  Sec.  63.1297(a)(2)     Sec.  63.1303 (b)....  Sec.  63.1307(c)(1)..  Sec.  63.1306(e)(2).
                                                              and (c).

[[Page 171]]

 
                                     Compliance Using a      Sec.  63.1297(a)(1),    Sec.  63.1303 (b) and  Sec.  63.1307(c)(1)    Sec.  63.1306(e)(1)
                                      Recovery device.        (b), and (e) for        (c).                   and (d).               or (2).
                                                              rolling annual
                                                              compliance or Sec.
                                                              63.1297(a)(2), (c),
                                                              and (e) for monthly
                                                              compliance.
Equipment Cleaning Sec.  63.1298...  N/A...................  Sec.  63.1298.........  .....................  Sec.  63.1307(e).....  .....................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


   Table 4 to Subpart III.--Compliance Requirements for Slabstock Foam Production Affected Sources Complying With the Source-Wide Emission Limitation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Emission, work
           Emission point                Emission point           practice, and            Monitoring           Recordkeeping            Reporting
                                        compliance option      equipment standards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Diisocyanate storage vessels Sec.    Vapor balance.........  Sec.  63.1294(a)(1)     Sec.  63.1294(a)(1)(i  Sec.  63.1307(a)(1)    Sec.  63.1306(e)(5).
 63.1294(a).                                                  and (1)(ii).            ).                     and (4).
                                     Carbon adsorber.......  Sec.  63.1294(a)(2)...  Sec.  63.1303(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                                                                      (3), and (4).          (3)(i), and (3)(iii).
                                     Carbon adsorber--       Sec.  63.1294(a)(2)...  Sec.  63.1303(a)(2),   Sec.  63.1307(a)(1),   Sec.  63.1306(e)(3).
                                      alternative                                     (3) and (4).           (3)(ii), and
                                      monitoring.                                                            (3)(iii).
Diisocyanate transfer pumps Sec.     Sealless pump.........  Sec.  63.1294(b)(1)...  .....................  Sec.  63.1307          .....................
 63.1294(b).                                                                                                 (b)(1)(i) and (2).
                                     Submerged pump........  Sec.  63.1294(b)(2)(i)  Sec.  63.1294          Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
                                                              and (iii).              (b)(2)(ii).            (b)(1)(i), (2), and
                                                                                                             (3).
Other components in diisocyanate     N/A...................  Sec.  63.1294(c)......  Sec.  63.1294(c).....  Sec.  63.1307          Sec.  63.1306(e)(4).
 service Sec.  63.1294(c).                                                                                   (b)(1)(i) and (3).
HAP ABA storage vessels, equipment   Rolling annual          Sec.  63.1299(a),       Sec.  63.1303 (b)      Sec.  63.1307(c)(2)..  Sec.  63.1306(e)(1).
 leaks, production line, and          compliance.             (c)(1) through (4),     except (b)(1)(ii),
 equipment cleaning.                                          and (d).                (d), and (e).
                                     Monthly compliance....  Sec.  63.1299(b),       Sec.  63.1303 (b)      Sec.  63.1307(c)(2)..  Sec.  63.1306(e)(2).
                                                              (c)(1) through (4),     except (b)(1)(ii),
                                                              and (d).                (d), and (e).
                                     Compliance Using a      Sec.  63.1299(a), (d),  Sec.  63.1303 (b)      Sec.  63.1307(c)(2)    Sec.  63.1306(e)(1)
                                      Recovery device.        and (e) for rolling     except (b)(1)(ii)      and (d).               or (2).
                                                              annual compliance or    and (c).
                                                              Sec.  63.1299(b),
                                                              (d), and (e) for
                                                              monthly compliance.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                         Table 5 to Subpart III.--Compliance Requirements for Molded and Rebond Foam Production Affected Sources
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Emission, work
           Emission point                Emission point           practice, and            Monitoring           Recordkeeping            Reporting
                                        compliance option      equipment standards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Molded Foam
Equipment cleaning.................  N/A...................  Sec.  63.1300(a)......  .....................  Sec.  63.1307(g).....  .....................
Mold release agent.................  N/A...................  Sec.  63.1300(b)......  .....................  Sec.  63.1307 (h)....  .....................

[[Page 172]]

 
            Rebond Foam
Equipment cleaning.................  N/A...................  Sec.  63.1301(a)......  .....................  Sec.  63.1307 (g)....  .....................
Mold release agent.................  N/A...................  Sec.  63.1301(b)......  .....................  Sec.  63.1307 (h)....  .....................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 173]]



  Subpart JJJ--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutant 
                 Emissions: Group IV Polymers and Resins

    Source: 61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1310  Applicability and designation of affected sources.

    (a) Definition of affected source. The provisions of this subpart 
apply to each affected source. An affected source is either an existing 
affected source or a new affected source. Existing affected source is 
defined in paragraph (a)(6) of this section, and new affected source is 
defined in paragraph (a)(7) of this section. The affected source also 
includes the emission points and equipment specified in paragraphs 
(a)(1) through (a)(5) of this section that are associated with each 
group of TPPU.
    (1) Each wastewater stream.
    (2) Each wastewater operation.
    (3) Each heat exchange system.
    (4) Each process contact cooling tower used in the manufacture of 
PET that is associated with a new affected source.
    (5) Each process contact cooling tower used in the manufacture of 
PET using a continuous terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end 
finisher process that is associated with an existing affected source.
    (6) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this 
section, an existing affected source is defined as each group of one or 
more thermoplastic product process units (TPPUs) that is not part of a 
new affected source as defined in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, that 
is manufacturing the same primary product, where each TPPU uses as a 
reactant, or uses as a process solvent, or produces as a by-product or 
co-product any organic hazardous air pollutant (organic HAP), and that 
is located at a plant site that is a major source.
    (7) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this 
section, a new affected source is defined as a source meeting the 
criteria of paragraph (a)(7)(i), (a)(7)(ii), or (a)(7)(iii) of this 
section:
    (i) At a plant site previously without HAP emissions points, each 
group of one or more TPPUs manufacturing the same primary product that 
is part of a major source on which construction commenced after March 
29, 1995;
    (ii) A TPPU meeting the criteria in paragraph (i)(1)(i) of this 
section; or
    (iii) A reconstructed affected source meeting the criteria in 
paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section.
    (b) TPPUs exempted from the affected source. For a TPPU to be 
excluded from the designation of affected source due to the fact that it 
does not use as a reactant, or use as a process solvent, or produce as a 
by-product or co-product any organic HAP, the owner or operator shall 
comply with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section and 
shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (b)(2) of this section 
if requested to do so by the Administrator.
    (1) Retain information, data, and analysis used to document the 
basis for the determination that the TPPU does not use as a reactant or 
use as a process solvent, or manufacture as a by-product or a co-product 
any organic HAP. Types of information that could document this 
determination include, but are not limited to, records of chemicals 
purchased for the process, analyses of process stream composition, or 
engineering calculations.
    (2) When requested by the Administrator, demonstrate that the TPPU 
does not use as a reactant, or use as a process solvent, or manufacture 
as a by-product or co-product any organic HAP.
    (c) Emission points exempted from the affected source. The affected 
source does not include the emission points listed in paragraphs (c)(1) 
through (c)(6) of this section:
    (1) Stormwater from segregated sewers;
    (2) Water from fire-fighting and deluge systems in segregated 
sewers;
    (3) Spills;
    (4) Water from safety showers;
    (5) Vessels and equipment storing and/or handling material that 
contain no organic HAP and/or organic HAP as impurities only; and
    (6) Equipment that is intended to operate in organic HAP service for 
less than 300 hours during the calendar year.

[[Page 174]]

    (d) Processes exempted from the affected source. The processes 
specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section are 
exempted from the affected source:
    (1) Research and development facilities;
    (2) Polymerization processes occurring in a mold;
    (3) Processes which manufacture binder systems containing a 
thermoplastic product for paints, coatings, or adhesives;
    (4) Finishing processes including equipment such as compounding 
units, spinning units, drawing units, extruding units, and other 
finishing steps; and
    (5) Solid state polymerization processes.
    (e) Applicability determination of nonthermoplastic equipment 
included in a TPPU producing a thermoplastic product. If a polymer that 
is not subject to this subpart is produced within the equipment (i.e., 
collocated) making up a TPPU and at least 50 percent of said polymer is 
used in the production of a thermoplastic product manufactured by said 
TPPU, the unit operations involved in the production of said polymer are 
considered part of the TPPU and are subject to this rule except as 
specified in this paragraph (e). If said unit operations are subject to 
another MACT standard regulating the same emission points, said unit 
operations are not subject to this subpart.
    (f) Primary product determination and applicability. The primary 
product of a process unit shall be determined according to the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(2) of this 
section. Paragraphs (f)(3) through (f)(4) of this section describe 
whether or not a process unit is subject to this subpart. Paragraphs 
(f)(5) through (f)(7) of this section discuss compliance for those TPPUs 
operated as flexible operation units, as specified in paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section.
    (1) If a process unit only manufactures one product, then that 
product shall represent the primary product of the process unit.
    (2) If a process unit is designed and operated as a flexible 
operation unit, the primary product shall be determined as specified in 
paragraphs (f)(2)(i) or (f)(2)(ii) of this section based on the 
anticipated operations for the 5 years following September 12, 1996 for 
existing affected sources and for the first 5 years after initial start-
up for new affected sources.
    (i) If the flexible operation unit will manufacture one product for 
the greatest operating time over the five year period, then that product 
shall represent the primary product of the flexible operation unit.
    (ii) If the flexible operation unit will manufacture multiple 
products equally based on operating time, then the product with the 
greatest production on a mass basis over the five year period shall 
represent the primary product of the flexible operation unit.
    (3) If the primary product of a process unit is a thermoplastic 
product, then said process unit is considered a TPPU. If said TPPU meets 
all the criteria of paragraph (a) of this section, it is either an 
affected source or is part of an affected source comprised of other TPPU 
subject to this rule at the same plant site with the same primary 
product. The status of a process unit as a TPPU and as an affected 
source or part of an affected source shall not change regardless of what 
products are produced in the future by said TPPU, with the exception 
noted in paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section.
    (i) If a process unit terminates the production of all thermoplastic 
products and does not anticipate the production of any thermoplastic 
product in the future, the process unit is no longer a TPPU and is not 
subject to this rule after notification is made as specified in 
paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator of a process unit that wishes to remove 
the TPPU designation from the process unit, as specified in paragraph 
(f)(3)(i) of this section, shall notify the Administrator. This 
notification shall be accompanied by rationale for why it is anticipated 
that no thermoplastic products will be produced in the process unit in 
the future.
    (iii) If a process unit meeting the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) 
of this section begins the production of a thermoplastic product in the 
future, the owner or operator shall use the procedures in

[[Page 175]]

paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section to determine if the process unit is 
re-designated as a TPPU.
    (4) If the primary product of a process unit is not a thermoplastic 
product, then said process unit is not an affected source nor is it part 
of any affected source subject to this rule. Said process unit is not 
subject to this rule at any time, regardless of what product is being 
produced. The status of a process unit as not being a TPPU, and 
therefore not an affected source nor part of an affected source subject 
to this subpart, shall not change regardless of what products are 
produced in the future by said TPPU, with the exception noted in 
paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section.
    (i) If, at any time beginning September 12, 2001, the owner or 
operator determines that a thermoplastic product is the primary product 
for the process unit based on actual production data for any preceding 
consecutive five-year period, then the process unit shall be designated 
as a TPPU. If said TPPU meets all the criteria of paragraph (a) of this 
section and is not subject to another subpart of 40 CFR part 63, it is 
either an affected source or part of an affected source and shall be 
subject to this rule.
    (ii) If a process unit meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(4)(i) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator 
within 6 months of making this determination. The TPPU, as the entire 
affected source or part of an affected source, shall be in compliance 
with the provisions of this rule within 3 years from the date of such 
notification.
    (iii) If a process unit is re-designated as a TPPU but does not meet 
all the criteria of paragraph (a) of this section, the owner or operator 
shall notify the Administrator within 6 months of making this 
determination. Said notification shall include documentation justifying 
the TPPU's status as not being an affected source or not being part of 
an affected source.
    (5) Once the primary product of a process unit has been determined 
to be a thermoplastic product and it has been determined that all the 
criteria of paragraph (a) of this section are met for said TPPU, the 
owner or operator of the affected source shall comply with the standards 
for the primary product. Owners or operators of flexible operation units 
shall comply with the standards for the primary product as specified in 
either paragraph (f)(5)(i) or (f)(5)(ii) of this section, except as 
specified in paragraph (f)(5)(iii) of this section.
    (i) Each owner or operator shall determine the group status of each 
emission point that is part of said flexible operation unit based on 
emission point characteristics when the primary product is being 
manufactured. Based on this finding, the owner or operator shall comply 
with the applicable standards for the primary product for each emission 
point, as appropriate, at all times, regardless of what product is being 
produced.
    (ii) Alternatively, each owner or operator shall determine the group 
status of each emission point that is part of said flexible operation 
unit based on the emission point characteristics when each product 
produced by the flexible operation unit is manufactured, regardless of 
whether said product is a thermoplastic product or not. Based on these 
findings, the owner or operator shall comply with the applicable 
standards for the primary product for each emission point, as 
appropriate, regardless of what product is being produced.
    Note: Under this scenario it is possible that the group status, and 
therefore the requirement to achieve emission reductions, for an 
emission point may change depending on the product being produced.
    (iii) Whenever a flexible operation unit manufactures a product that 
meets the criteria of paragraph (b) of this section (i.e., does not use 
or produce any organic HAP), all activities associated with the 
manufacture of said product shall be exempt from the requirements of 
this rule, to include the operation and monitoring of control or 
recovery devices.
    (6) The determination of the primary product for a process unit, to 
include the determination of applicability of this subpart to process 
units that are designed and operated as flexible operation units, shall 
be reported in the Notification of Compliance Status required by 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) when the primary product is determined to be a

[[Page 176]]

thermoplastic product. The Notification of Compliance Status shall 
include the information specified in either paragraph (f)(6)(i) or 
(f)(6)(ii) of this section. If the primary product is determined to be 
something other than a thermoplastic product, the owner or operator 
shall retain information, data, and analysis used to document the basis 
for the determination that the primary product is not a thermoplastic 
product.
    (i) If the TPPU manufactures only one thermoplastic product, 
identification of said thermoplastic product.
    (ii) If the TPPU is designed and operated as a flexible operation 
unit, the information specified in paragraphs (f)(6)(ii)(A) through 
(f)(6)(ii)(C) of this section, as appropriate.
    (A) Identification of the primary product.
    (B) Information concerning operating time and/or production mass for 
each product that was used to make the determination of the primary 
product under paragraph (f)(2)(i) or (f)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (C) Identification of which compliance option, either paragraph 
(f)(5)(i) or (f)(5)(ii) of this section, has been selected by the owner 
or operator.
    (7) To demonstrate compliance with the rule during those periods 
when a flexible operation unit that is subject to this subpart is 
producing a product other than a thermoplastic product or is producing a 
thermoplastic product that is not the primary product, the owner or 
operator shall comply with either paragraphs (f)(7)(i) through 
(f)(7)(ii) or paragraph (f)(7)(iii) of this section.
    (i) Establish parameter monitoring levels, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1334, for those emission points designated as Group 1, as 
appropriate.
    (ii) Submit the parameter monitoring levels developed under 
paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section and the basis for them in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (iii) Demonstrate that the parameter monitoring levels established 
for the primary product are also appropriate for those periods when 
products other than the primary product are being produced. Material 
demonstrating this finding shall be submitted in the Notification of 
Compliance Status report as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (g) Storage vessel ownership determination. The owner or operator 
shall follow the procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through 
(g)(8) of this section to determine to which process unit a storage 
vessel shall belong.
    (1) If a storage vessel is already subject to another subpart of 40 
CFR part 63 on September 12, 1996, said storage vessel shall belong to 
the process unit subject to the other subpart.
    (2) If a storage vessel is dedicated to a single process unit, the 
storage vessel shall belong to that process unit.
    (3) If a storage vessel is shared among process units, then the 
storage vessel shall belong to that process unit located on the same 
plant site as the storage vessel that has the greatest input into or 
output from the storage vessel (i.e., said process unit has the 
predominant use of the storage vessel).
    (4) If predominant use cannot be determined for a storage vessel 
that is shared among process units and if one of those process units is 
a TPPU subject to this subpart, the storage vessel shall belong to said 
TPPU.
    (5) If predominant use cannot be determined for a storage vessel 
that is shared among process units and if more than one of the process 
units are TPPUs that have different primary products and that are 
subject to this subpart, then the owner or operator shall assign the 
storage vessel to any one of the said TPPUs.
    (6) If the predominant use of a storage vessel varies from year to 
year, then predominant use shall be determined based on the utilization 
that occurred during the year preceding September 12, 1996 or based on 
the expected utilization for the 5 years following September 12, 1996 
for existing affected sources, whichever is more representative of the 
expected operations for said storage vessel, and based on the first 5 
years after initial start-up for new affected sources. The determination 
of predominant use shall be reported in the Notification of Compliance 
Status required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5). If the predominant use

[[Page 177]]

changes, the redetermination of predominant use shall be reported in the 
next Periodic Report.
    (7) If the storage vessel begins receiving material from (or sending 
material to) another process unit; or ceasing to receive material from 
(or send material to) a process unit; or if the applicability of this 
subpart to a storage vessel has been determined according to the 
provisions of paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(6) of this section and there 
is a significant change in the use of the storage vessel that could 
reasonably change the predominant use, the owner or operator shall 
reevaluate the applicability of this subpart to the storage vessel.
    (8) Where a storage vessel is located at a major source that 
includes one or more process units which place material into, or receive 
materials from the storage vessel, but the storage vessel is located in 
a tank farm, the applicability of this subpart shall be determined 
according to the provisions in paragraphs (g)(8)(i) through (g)(8)(iv) 
of this section.
    (i) The storage vessel may only be assigned to a process unit that 
utilizes the storage vessel and does not have an intervening storage 
vessel for that product (or raw materials, as appropriate). With respect 
to any process unit, an intervening storage vessel means a storage 
vessel connected by hard-piping to the process unit and to the storage 
vessel in the tank farm so that product or raw material entering or 
leaving the process unit flows into (or from) the intervening storage 
vessel and does not flow directly into (or from) the storage vessel in 
the tank farm.
    (ii) If there is no process unit at the major source that meets the 
criteria of paragraph (g)(8)(i) of this section with respect to a 
storage vessel, this subpart does not apply to the storage vessel.
    (iii) If there is only one process unit at the major source that 
meets the criteria of paragraph (g)(8)(i) of this section with respect 
to a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned to that 
process unit.
    (iv) If there are two or more process units at the major source that 
meet the criteria of paragraph (g)(8)(i) of this section with respect to 
a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned to one of those 
process units according to the provisions of paragraph (g)(7) of this 
section. The predominant use shall be determined among only those 
thermoplastic product process units that meet the criteria of paragraph 
(g)(8)(i) of this section.
    (h) Recovery operation equipment ownership determination. The owner 
or operator shall follow the procedures specified in paragraphs (h)(1) 
through (h)(7) of this section to determine to which process unit 
recovery operation equipment shall belong.
    (1) If recovery operation equipment is already subject to another 
subpart of 40 CFR part 63 on September 12, 1996, said recovery operation 
equipment shall belong to the process unit subject to the other subpart.
    (2) If recovery operation equipment is used exclusively by a single 
process unit, the recovery operation shall belong to that process unit.
    (3) If recovery operation equipment is shared among process units, 
then the recovery operation equipment shall belong to that process unit 
located on the same plant site as the recovery operation equipment that 
has the greatest input into or output from the recovery operation 
equipment (i.e., said process unit has the predominant use of the 
recovery operation equipment).
    (4) If predominant use cannot be determined for recovery operation 
equipment that is shared among process units and if one of those process 
units is a TPPU subject to this subpart, the recovery operation 
equipment shall belong to said TPPU.
    (5) If predominant use cannot be determined for recovery operation 
equipment that is shared among process units and if more than one of the 
process units are TPPUs that have different primary products and that 
are subject to this subpart, then the owner or operator shall assign the 
recovery operation equipment to any one of said TPPUs.
    (6) If the predominant use of recovery operation equipment varies 
from year to year, then predominant use shall be determined based on the 
utilization that occurred during the year preceding September 12, 1996 
or based on the expected utilization for the 5 years

[[Page 178]]

following September 12, 1996 for existing affected sources, whichever is 
the more representative of the expected operations for said recovery 
operations equipment, and based on the first 5 years after initial 
start-up for new affected sources. This determination shall be reported 
in the Notification of Compliance Status required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5). 
If the predominant use changes, the redetermination of predominant use 
shall be reported in the next Periodic Report.
    (7) If there is an unexpected change in the utilization of recovery 
operation equipment that could reasonably change the predominant use, 
the owner or operator shall redetermine to which process unit the 
recovery operation belongs by reperforming the procedures specified in 
paragraphs (h)(2) through (h)(6) of this section.
    (i) Changes or additions to plant sites. The provisions of 
paragraphs (i)(1) through (i)(4) of this section apply to owners or 
operators that change or add to their plant site or affected source. 
Paragraph (i)(5) of this section provides examples of what are and are 
not considered process changes for purposes of paragraph (i) of this 
section.
    (1) Adding a TPPU to a plant site. The provisions of paragraphs 
(i)(1)(i) through (i)(1)(ii) of this section apply to owners or 
operators that add TPPUs to a plant site.
    (i) If a TPPU is added to a plant site, said addition shall be a new 
affected source and shall be subject to the requirements for a new 
affected source in this subpart upon initial start-up or by September 
12, 1996, whichever is later, if said addition meets the criteria 
specified in paragraphs (i)(1)(i)(A) through (i)(1)(i)(B) and either 
(i)(1)(i)(C) or (i)(1)(i)(D) of this section:
    (A) Said addition meets the definition of construction in Sec. 63.2;
    (B) Such construction commenced after March 29, 1995; and
    (C) Said addition has the potential to emit 10 tons per year or more 
of any HAP or 25 tons per year or more of any combination of HAP, and 
the primary product of said addition is currently produced at the plant 
site as the primary product of an affected source; or
    (D) The primary product of said addition is not currently produced 
at the plant site as the primary product of an affected source and the 
plant site meets, or after the addition is completed will meet, the 
definition of major source.
    (ii) If a TPPU is added to a plant site, said addition shall be 
subject to the requirements for an existing affected source in this 
subpart upon initial start-up or by 3 years after September 12, 1996, 
whichever is later, if said addition does not meet the criteria 
specified in paragraph (i)(1)(i) of this section and the plant site 
meets, or after the addition is completed will meet, the definition of 
major source.
    (2) Adding emission points or making process changes to existing 
affected sources. The provisions of paragraphs (i)(2)(i) through 
(i)(2)(ii) of this section apply to owners or operators that add 
emission points or make process changes to an existing affected source.
    (i) If any process change is made or emission point is added to an 
existing affected source, or if a process change creating one or more 
additional Group 1 emission point(s) is made to an existing affected 
source, said affected source shall be a new affected source and shall be 
subject to the requirements for a new affected source in this subpart 
upon initial start-up or by September 12, 1996, whichever is later, if 
said process change or addition meets the criteria specified in 
paragraphs (i)(2)(i)(A) through (i)(2)(i)(B) of this section:
    (A) Said process change or addition meets the definition of 
reconstruction in Sec. 63.2; and
    (B) Such reconstruction commenced after March 29, 1995.
    (ii) If any process change is made or emission point is added to an 
existing affected source, or if a process change creating one or more 
additional Group 1 emission point(s) is made to an existing affected 
source and said process change or addition does not meet the criteria 
specified in paragraphs (i)(2)(i)(A) through (i)(2)(i)(B) of this 
section, the resulting emission point(s) shall be subject to the 
requirements for an existing affected source in this subpart. Said 
emission point(s) shall be in compliance upon initial start-up or by

[[Page 179]]

3 years after September 12, 1996, whichever is later, unless the owner 
or operator demonstrates to the Administrator that achieving compliance 
will take longer than making said process change or addition. If this 
demonstration is made to the Administrator's satisfaction, the owner or 
operator shall follow the procedures in paragraphs (i)(2)(iii)(A) 
through (i)(2)(iii)(C) of this section to establish a compliance date.
    (iii) To establish a compliance date for an emission point or points 
specified in paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of this section, the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (i)(2)(iii)(A) through (i)(2)(iii)(C) of this 
section shall be followed.
    (A) The owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator for 
approval a compliance schedule, along with a justification for the 
schedule.
    (B) The compliance schedule shall be submitted within 180 days after 
the process change or addition is made or the information regarding said 
change or addition is known to the owner or operator, unless the 
compliance schedule has been previously submitted to the permitting 
authority. The compliance schedule may be submitted in the next Periodic 
Report if the process change or addition is made after the date the 
Notification of Compliance Status report is due.
    (C) The Administrator shall approve the compliance schedule or 
request changes within 120 calendar days of receipt of the compliance 
schedule and justification.
    (3) Existing source requirements for Group 2 emission points that 
become Group 1 emission points. If a process change or addition that 
does not meet the criteria in paragraph (i)(1) or (i)(2) of this section 
is made to an existing plant site or existing affected source, and the 
change causes a Group 2 emission point to become a Group 1 emission 
point, for said emission point, the owner or operator shall comply with 
the requirements of this subpart for existing Group 1 emission points. 
Compliance shall be achieved as expeditiously as practicable, but in no 
event later than 3 years after said emission point becomes a Group 1 
emission point.
    (4) Existing source requirements for some emission points that 
become subject to the requirements of subpart H of this part. If a 
compressor becomes subject to Sec. 63.164, the owner or operator shall 
be in compliance upon initial start-up or by 3 years after September 12, 
1996, whichever is later, unless the owner or operator demonstrates to 
the Administrator that achieving compliance will take longer than making 
the change. If this demonstration is made to the Administrator's 
satisfaction, the owner or operator shall follow the procedures in 
paragraphs (i)(2)(iii)(A) through (i)(2)(iii)(C) of this section to 
establish a compliance date.
    (5) Determining what are and are not process changes. For purposes 
of paragraph (i) of this section, examples of process changes include, 
but are not limited to, changes in production capacity, feedstock type, 
or catalyst type, or whenever there is a replacement, removal, or the 
addition of recovery equipment. For purposes of paragraph (i) of this 
section, process changes do not include: process upsets, unintentional 
temporary process changes, and changes that are within the equipment 
configuration and operating conditions documented in the Notification of 
Compliance Status report required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (j) Applicability of this subpart except during periods of start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction. Each provision set forth in this subpart or 
referred to in this subpart shall apply at all times except during 
periods of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction if the start-up, 
shutdown, or malfunction precludes the ability of a particular emission 
point of an affected source to comply with one or more specific 
provisions to which it is subject. Start-up, shutdown, and malfunction 
is defined in Sec. 63.1312 for all emission points except equipment 
leaks subject to subpart H of this part, which shall follow the 
provisions for periods of start-up, malfunction, and process unit 
shutdown, as defined in Sec. 63.161. Only then shall an emission point 
not be required to comply with all applicable provisions of this 
subpart.

[[Page 180]]



Sec. 63.1311  Compliance schedule and relationship to existing applicable rules.

    (a) Affected sources are required to achieve compliance on or before 
the dates specified in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section. 
Paragraph (e) of this section provides information on requesting 
compliance extensions. Paragraphs (f) through (l) of this section 
discuss the relationship of this subpart to subpart A of this part and 
to other applicable rules. Where an override of another authority of the 
Act is indicated in this subpart, only compliance with the provisions of 
this subpart is required. Paragraph (m) of this section specifies the 
meaning of time periods.
    (b) New affected sources that commence construction or 
reconstruction after March 29, 1995 shall be in compliance with this 
subpart upon initial start-up or February 27, 1998, whichever is later, 
as provided in Sec. 63.6(b), except that new affected sources whose 
primary product, as determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1310(f), is poly(ethylene terephthalate) (PET) shall be in 
compliance with Sec. 63.1331 upon initial start-up or February 27, 2001, 
whichever is later.

    [Note: The compliance date for new affected sources with an initial 
start-up date on or after March 9, 1999 is stayed indefinitely. The EPA 
will publish a document in the Federal Register establishing a new 
compliance date for new affected sources with an initial start-up date 
on or after March 9, 1999.]

    (c) Existing affected sources shall be in compliance with this 
subpart (except for Sec. 63.1331 for which compliance is covered by 
paragraph (d) of this section) no later than September 12, 1999, as 
provided in Sec. 63.6(c), unless an extension has been granted as 
specified in paragraph (e) of this section, except that the compliance 
date for the provisions contained in Sec. 63.1329 is extended from 
September 12, 1999 to February 27, 2001, for existing affected sources 
whose primary product, as determined using the procedures specified in 
63.1310(f), is PET using a continuous terephthalic acid high viscosity 
multiple end finisher process.

    [Note: The compliance date of September 12, 1999 for existing 
affected sources, except for emission points addressed under 
Sec. 63.1331, which are covered by paragraph (d) of this section, is 
stayed indefinitely. The EPA will publish a document in the Federal 
Register establishing a new compliance date for existing affected 
sources.]
    (d) Except as provided for in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(6) of 
this section, existing affected sources shall be in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1331 no later than February 27, 1998 unless a request for a 
compliance extension is granted pursuant to section 112(i)(3)(B) of the 
Act, as discussed in Sec. 63.182(a)(6).
    (1) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur no later than February 27, 1998 for any compressor meeting one or 
more of the criteria in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iii) of this 
section if the work can be accomplished without a process unit shutdown, 
as defined in Sec. 63.161:
    (i) The seal system will be replaced;
    (ii) A barrier fluid system will be installed;
    (iii) A new barrier fluid will be utilized which requires changes to 
the existing barrier fluid system; or
    (iv) The compressor will be modified to permit connecting the 
compressor to a fuel gas system or a closed vent system or modified so 
that emissions from the compressor can be routed to a process.
    (2) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur no later than March 12, 1998, for any compressor meeting all the 
criteria in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (d)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The compressor meets one or more of the criteria specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) through (d)(1)(i)(B) of this section:
    (A) The work can be accomplished without a process unit shutdown as 
defined in Sec. 63.161; or
    (B) The additional time is actually necessary due to the 
unavailability of parts beyond the control of the owner or operator.
    (ii) The owner or operator submits the request for a compliance 
extension to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regional 
Office at the addresses listed in Sec. 63.13 no later than June 16, 
1997. The request for a compliance extension shall contain the 
information specified in Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i) (A), (B), and (D). Unless 
the EPA Regional

[[Page 181]]

Office objects to the request for a compliance extension within 30 
calendar days after receipt of the request, the request shall be deemed 
approved.
    (3) If compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 
cannot reasonably be achieved without a process unit shutdown, as 
defined in Sec. 63.161, the owner or operator shall achieve compliance 
no later than September 14, 1998. The owner or operator who elects to 
use this provision shall submit a request for a compliance extension in 
accordance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this 
section.
    (4) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur not later than September 12, 1999 for any compressor meeting one 
or more of the criteria in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) through (d)(4)(iii) of 
this section. The owner or operator who elects to use these provisions 
shall submit a request for an extension of compliance in accordance with 
the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Compliance cannot be achieved without replacing the compressor;
    (ii) Compliance cannot be achieved without recasting the distance 
piece; or
    (iii) Design modifications are required to connect to a closed-vent 
or recovery system.
    (5) Compliance with the provisions of Sec. 63.170 shall occur no 
later than September 13, 1999.
    (6) Notwithstanding paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(4) of this 
section, existing affected sources whose primary product, as determined 
using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1310(f), is PET shall be in 
compliance with Sec. 63.1331 no later than February 27, 2001.
    (e) Pursuant to section 112(i)(3)(B) of the Act, an owner or 
operator may request an extension allowing the existing source up to 1 
additional year to comply with section 112(d) standards. For purposes of 
this subpart, a request for an extension shall be submitted to the 
operating permit authority as part of the operating permit application 
or to the Administrator as a separate submittal or as part of the 
Precompliance Report. Requests for extensions shall be submitted no 
later than the date the Precompliance Report is required to be submitted 
in Sec. 63.1335(e)(3)(i). The dates specified in Sec. 63.6(i) for 
submittal of requests for extensions shall not apply to this subpart.
    (1) A request for an extension of compliance shall include the data 
described in Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i) (A),(B), and (D).
    (2) The requirements in Sec. 63.6(i)(8) through Sec. 63.6(i)(14) 
shall govern the review and approval of requests for extensions of 
compliance with this subpart.
    (f) Table 1 of this subpart specifies the provisions of subpart A of 
this part that apply and those that do not apply to owners and operators 
of affected sources subject to this subpart.
    (g)(1) After the compliance dates specified in this section, an 
affected source subject to this subpart that is also subject to the 
provisions of subpart I of this part, is required to comply only with 
the provisions of this subpart. After the compliance dates specified in 
this section, said affected source shall no longer be subject to subpart 
I of this part.
    (2) Said affected sources that elected to comply with subpart I of 
this part through a quality improvement program, as specified in 
Sec. 63.175 or Sec. 63.176 or both, may elect to continue these programs 
without interruption as a means of complying with this subpart. In other 
words, becoming subject to this subpart does not restart or reset the 
``compliance clock'' as it relates to reduced burden earned through a 
quality improvement program.
    (h) After the compliance dates specified in this section, a storage 
vessel that belongs to an affected source subject to this subpart that 
is also subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60, subpart Kb, is 
required to comply only with the provisions of this subpart. After the 
compliance dates specified in this section, said storage vessel shall no 
longer be subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart Kb.
    (i)(1) Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2) of this section, after 
the compliance dates specified in this section, affected sources 
producing PET using a continuous terephthalic acid process, producing 
PET using a continuous dimethyl terephthalate process, or producing 
polystyrene resin using a continuous process subject to this subpart 
that are also subject to the provisions

[[Page 182]]

of 40 CFR part 60, subpart DDD, are required to comply only with the 
provisions of this subpart. After the compliance dates specified in this 
section, said sources shall no longer be subject to 40 CFR part 60, 
subpart DDD.
    (2) Existing affected sources producing PET using a continuous 
terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end finisher process shall 
continue to be subject to 40 CFR 60.562-1(c)(2)(ii)(C). Once said 
affected source becomes subject to and achieves compliance with 
Sec. 63.1329(c) of this subpart, said affected source is no longer 
subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60, subpart DDD.
    (j) Affected sources subject to this subpart that are also subject 
to the provisions of subpart Q of this part shall comply with both 
subparts.
    (k) After the compliance dates specified in this section, an 
affected source subject to this subpart that is also subject to the 
provisions of 40 CFR part 60, subpart VV, is required to comply only 
with the provisions of this subpart. After the compliance dates 
specified in this section, said source shall no longer be subject to 40 
CFR part 60, subpart VV.
    (l) After the compliance dates specified in this section, a 
distillation operation that belongs to an affected source subject to 
this subpart that is also subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60, 
subpart NNN, is required to comply only with the provisions of this 
subpart. After the compliance dates specified in this section, said 
distillation operation shall no longer be subject to 40 CFR part 60, 
subpart NNN.
    (m) All terms in this subpart that define a period of time for 
completion of required tasks (e.g., weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual), 
unless specified otherwise in the section or subsection that imposes the 
requirement, refer to the standard calendar periods.
    (1) Notwithstanding time periods specified in this subpart for 
completion of required tasks, such time periods may be changed by mutual 
agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator, as 
specified in subpart A of this part (e.g., a period could begin on the 
compliance date or another date, rather than on the first day of the 
standard calendar period). For each time period that is changed by 
agreement, the revised period shall remain in effect until it is 
changed. A new request is not necessary for each recurring period.
    (2) Where the period specified for compliance is a standard calendar 
period, if the initial compliance date occurs after the beginning of the 
period, compliance shall be required according to the schedule specified 
in paragraphs (m)(i) or (m)(ii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Compliance shall be required before the end of the standard 
calendar period within which the compliance deadline occurs, if there 
remain at least 3 days for tasks that must be performed weekly, at least 
2 weeks for tasks that must be performed monthly, at least 1 month for 
tasks that must be performed each quarter, or at least 3 months for 
tasks that must be performed annually; or
    (ii) In all other cases, compliance shall be required before the end 
of the first full standard calendar period after the period within which 
the initial compliance deadline occurs.
    (3) In all instances where a provision of this subpart requires 
completion of a task during each multiple successive period, an owner or 
operator may perform the required task at any time during the specified 
period, provided that the task is conducted at a reasonable interval 
after completion of the task during the previous period.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 1838, Jan. 14, 1997; 
62 FR 30995, June 6, 1997; 63 FR 9945, Feb. 27, 1998; 63 FR 15315, Mar. 
31, 1998; 64 FR 11547, Mar. 9, 1999; 64 FR 30409, June 8, 1999; 64 FR 
35028, June 30, 1999]

    Effective Date Notes: 1. At 64 FR 30409, June 8, 1999, Sec. 63.1311 
was amended by revising paragraphs (b) and (d)(6), effective Aug. 9, 
1999. For the convenience of the user, the supersed text is set forth as 
follows:

Sec. 63.1311  Compliance schedule and relationship to existing 
          applicable rules.

                                * * * * *

    (b) New affected sources that commence construction or 
reconstruction after March 29, 1995, shall be in compliance with this 
subpart upon initial start-up or February 27, 1998, whichever is later, 
as provided in Sec. 63.6(b), except that new affected sources whose 
primary product, as determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1310(f), is

[[Page 183]]

poly(ethylene terephthalate) (PET) shall be in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1331 upon initial start-up or by September 12, 1999, whichever 
is later.

                                * * * * *

    (d) * * *
    (6) Notwithstanding paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(4) of this 
section, existing affected sources whose primary product, as determined 
using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1310(f), is PET shall be in 
compliance with Sec. 63.1331 no later than September 12, 1999.

                                * * * * *

    2. At 64 FR 35028, June 30, 1999, Sec. 63.1311 was amended by 
revising paragraphs (b) and (c), effective Aug. 30, 1999. For the 
convenience of the user, paragraph (b) in effect from Aug. 9, 1999 until 
Aug. 30, 1999 and paragraph (c) is set forth as follows:

Sec. 63.1311  Compliance schedule and relationship to existing 
          applicable rules.

                                * * * * *

    (b) New affected sources that commence construction or 
reconstruction after March 29, 1995 shall be in compliance with this 
subpart upon initial start-up or September 12, 1996, whichever is later, 
as provided in Sec. 63.6(b), except that new affected sources whose 
primary product, as determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1310(f), is PET shall be in compliance with Sec. 63.1331 upon 
initial start-up or February 27, 2001, whichever is later.
    (c) Existing affected sources shall be in compliance with this 
subpart (except for Sec. 63.1331 for which compliance is covered by 
paragraph (d) of this section) no later than September 12, 1999, as 
provided in Sec. 63.6(c), unless an extension has been granted as 
specified in paragraph (e) of this section, except that the compliance 
date for the provisions contained in 40 CFR 63.1329 is temporarily 
extended from September 12, 1999, to February 27, 2001, for existing 
affected sources whose primary product, as determined using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1310(f), is PET using a continuous 
terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end finisher process.

                                * * * * *



Sec. 63.1312  Definitions.

    (a) The following terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning 
given them in Sec. 63.2, Sec. 63.101, Sec. 63.111, and Sec. 63.161 as 
specified after each term:
Act (Sec. 63.2)
Administrator (Sec. 63.2)
Automated monitoring and recording system (Sec. 63.111)
Average concentration (Sec. 63.111)
Boiler (Sec. 63.111)
Bottoms receiver (Sec. 63.161)
By compound (Sec. 63.111)
By-product (Sec. 63.101)
Car-seal (Sec. 63.111)
Chemical manufacturing process unit (Sec. 63.101)
Closed-vent system (Sec. 63.111)
Co-product (Sec. 63.101)
Combustion device (Sec. 63.111)
Commenced (Sec. 63.2)
Compliance date (Sec. 63.2)
Compliance schedule (Sec. 63.2)
Connector (Sec. 63.161)
Construction (Sec. 63.2)
Continuous monitoring system (Sec. 63.2)
Continuous record (Sec. 63.111)
Continuous recorder (Sec. 63.111)
Cover (Sec. 63.111)
Distillation unit (Sec. 63.111)
Emission standard (Sec. 63.2)
Emissions averaging (Sec. 63.2)
EPA (Sec. 63.2)
Equipment (Sec. 63.161)
Equipment leak (Sec. 63.101)
Existing source (Sec. 63.2)
External floating roof (Sec. 63.111)
Fill (Sec. 63.111)
Fixed roof (Sec. 63.111)
Flame zone (Sec. 63.111)
Flexible operation unit (Sec. 63.101)
Floating roof (Sec. 63.111)
Flow indicator (Sec. 63.111)
Group 1 wastewater streams (Sec. 63.111)
Group 2 wastewater streams (Sec. 63.111)
Halogens and hydrogen halides (Sec. 63.111)
Hazardous air pollutant (Sec. 63.2)
Impurity (Sec. 63.101)
In organic hazardous air pollutant service (Sec. 63.161)
Incinerator (Sec. 63.111)
Instrumentation system (Sec. 63.161)
Internal floating roof (Sec. 63.111)
Lesser quantity (Sec. 63.2)
Major source (Sec. 63.2)
Malfunction (Sec. 63.2)
Mass flow rate (Sec. 63.111)
Maximum true vapor pressure (Sec. 63.111)
New source (Sec. 63.2)
Open-ended valve or line (Sec. 63.161)
Operating permit (Sec. 63.101)
Organic HAP service (Sec. 63.161)
Organic monitoring device (Sec. 63.111)
Owner or operator (Sec. 63.2)
Performance evaluation (Sec. 63.2)
Performance test (Sec. 63.2)

[[Page 184]]

Permitting authority (Sec. 63.2)
Plant site (Sec. 63.101)
Point of generation (Sec. 63.111)
Potential to emit (Sec. 63.2)
Primary fuel (Sec. 63.111)
Process heater (Sec. 63.111)
Process unit shutdown (Sec. 63.161)
Process wastewater (Sec. 63.101)
Process wastewater stream (Sec. 63.111)
Product separator (Sec. 63.111)
Reactor (Sec. 63.111)
Reconstruction (Sec. 63.2)
Recovery device (Sec. 63.111)
Reference control technology for process vents (Sec. 63.111)
Reference control technology for storage vessels (Sec. 63.111)
Reference control technology for wastewater (Sec. 63.111)
Relief valve (Sec. 63.111)
Research and development facility (Sec. 63.101)
Residual (Sec. 63.111)
Run (Sec. 63.2)
Secondary fuel (Sec. 63.111)
Sensor (Sec. 63.161)
Shutdown (Sec. 63.2)
Specific gravity monitoring device (Sec. 63.111)
Start-up (Sec. 63.2)
Start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan (Sec. 63.101)
State (Sec. 63.2)
Surge control vessel (Sec. 63.161)
Temperature monitoring device (Sec. 63.111)
Test method (Sec. 63.2)
Total resource effectiveness index value (Sec. 63.111)
Treatment process (Sec. 63.111)
Unit operation (Sec. 63.101)
Visible emission (Sec. 63.2)
Waste management unit (Sec. 63.111)
Wastewater (Sec. 63.101)
Wastewater stream (Sec. 63.111)

    (b) All other terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning 
given them in this section. If a term is defined in Secs. 63.2, 63.101, 
63.111, or 63.161 and in this section, it shall have the meaning given 
in this section for purposes of this subpart.
    Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene latex resin (ABS latex) means ABS 
produced through an emulsion process, however the product is not 
coagulated or dried as typically occurs in an emulsion process.
    Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin (ABS) means styrenic 
terpolymers consisting primarily of acrylonitrile, 1,3-butadiene, and 
styrene monomer units. ABS is usually composed of a styrene-
acrylonitrile copolymer continuous phase with dispersed butadiene 
derived rubber.
    Acrylonitrile styrene acrylate resin (ASA) means a resin formed 
using acrylic ester-based elastomers to impact-modify styrene 
acrylonitrile resin matrices.
    Aggregate batch vent stream means a gaseous emission stream 
containing only the exhausts from two or more batch process vents that 
are ducted together before being routed to a control device that is in 
continuous operation.
    Affected source is defined in Sec. 63.1310(a).
    Alpha methyl styrene acrylonitrile resin (AMSAN) means copolymers 
consisting primarily of alpha methyl styrene and acrylonitrile.
    Average flow rate, as used in conjunction with wastewater 
provisions, is determined by the specifications in Sec. 63.144(c); or, 
as used in conjunction with batch process vent provisions, is determined 
by the specifications in Sec. 63.1323(e).
    Batch cycle means the operational step or steps, from start to 
finish, that occur as part of a batch unit operation. Batch cycle 
limitation means an enforceable restriction on the number of batch 
cycles that can be performed in a year for an individual batch process 
vent.
    Batch emission episode means a discrete emission venting episode 
associated with a single batch unit operation. Multiple batch emission 
episodes may occur from a single batch unit operation.
    Batch process means a discontinuous process involving the bulk 
movement of material through sequential manufacturing steps. Mass, 
temperature, concentration, and other properties of the process vary 
with time. Addition of raw material and withdrawal of product do not 
typically occur simultaneously in a batch process. For the purposes of 
this subpart, a process producing polymers is characterized as 
continuous or batch based on the operation of the polymerization 
reactors.

[[Page 185]]

    Batch process vent means a point of emission from a batch unit 
operation having a gaseous emission stream with annual organic HAP 
emissions greater than 225 kilograms per year. Batch process vents 
exclude relief valve discharges and leaks from equipment regulated under 
Sec. 63.1331.
    Batch unit operation means a unit operation operated in a batch 
process mode.
    Combustion device burner means a device designed to mix and ignite 
fuel and air to provide a flame to heat and oxidize waste organic vapors 
in a combustion device.
    Compounding unit means a unit operation which blends, melts, and 
resolidifies solid polymers for the purpose of incorporating additives, 
colorants, or stabilizers into the final thermoplastic product. A unit 
operation whose primary purpose is to remove residual monomers from 
polymers is not a compounding unit.
    Continuous process means a process where the inputs and outputs flow 
continuously through sequential manufacturing steps throughout the 
duration of the process. Continuous processes typically approach steady-
state conditions. Continuous processes typically involve the 
simultaneous addition of raw material and withdrawal of product. For the 
purposes of this subpart, a process producing polymers is characterized 
as continuous or batch based on the operation of the polymerization 
reactors.
    Continuous process vent means a point of emission from a continuous 
unit operation within an affected source having a gaseous emission 
stream containing greater than 0.005 weight percent total organic HAP. 
Continuous process vents exclude relief valve discharges and leaks from 
equipment regulated under Sec. 63.1331.
    Continuous unit operation means a unit operation operated in a 
continuous process mode.
    Control device is defined in Sec. 63.111, except that the term 
``process vents'' shall be replaced with the term ``continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1315'' for the purpose of this subpart.
    Drawing unit means a unit operation which converts polymer into a 
different shape by melting or mixing the polymer and then pulling it 
through an orifice to create a continuously extruded product.
    Emission point means an individual continuous process vent, batch 
process vent, storage vessel, wastewater stream, equipment leak, heat 
exchange system, or process contact cooling tower.
    Emulsion process means a process carried out with the reactants in 
an emulsified form (e.g., polymerization reaction).
    Expandable polystyrene resin (EPS) means a polystyrene bead to which 
a blowing agent has been added using either an in-situ suspension 
process or a post-impregnation suspension process.
    Extruding unit means a unit operation which converts polymer into a 
different shape by melting or mixing the polymer and then forcing it 
through an orifice to create a continuously extruded product.
    Group 1 batch process vent means a batch process vent releasing 
annual organic HAP emissions greater than the level specified in 
Sec. 63.1323(d) and with a cutoff flow rate, calculated in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1323(f), greater than or equal to the annual average flow 
rate.
    Group 2 batch process vent means a batch process vent that does not 
fall within the definition of a Group 1 batch process vent.
    Group 1 continuous process vent means a continuous process vent 
releasing a gaseous emission stream that has a total resource 
effectiveness index value, calculated according to Sec. 63.115, less 
than or equal to 1.0 unless the continuous process vent is associated 
with existing thermoplastic product process units that produce methyl 
methacrylate butadiene styrene resin, then said vent falls within the 
Group 1 definition if the released emission stream has a total resource 
effectiveness index value less than or equal to 3.7.
    Group 2 continuous process vent means a continuous process vent that 
does not fall within the definition of a Group 1 continuous process 
vent.
    Group 1 storage vessel means a storage vessel at an existing 
affected source that meets the applicability criteria specified in Table 
2 or Table 3 of this

[[Page 186]]

subpart, or a storage vessel at a new affected source that meets the 
applicability criteria specified in Table 4 or Table 5 of this subpart.
    Group 2 storage vessel means a storage vessel that does not fall 
within the definition of a Group 1 storage vessel.
    Halogenated aggregate batch vent stream means an aggregate batch 
vent stream determined to have a total mass emission rate of halogen 
atoms contained in organic compounds of 3,750 kilograms per year or 
greater determined by the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(h).
    Halogenated batch process vent means a batch process vent determined 
to have a mass emission rate of halogen atoms contained in organic 
compounds of 3,750 kilograms per year or greater determined by the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(h).
    Halogenated continuous process vent means a continuous process vent 
determined to have a mass emission rate of halogen atoms contained in 
organic compounds of 0.45 kilograms per hour or greater determined by 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.115(d)(2)(v).
    Heat exchange system means any cooling tower system or once-through 
cooling water system (e.g., river or pond water) designed and operated 
to not allow contact between the cooling medium and process fluid or 
gases (i.e., a noncontact system). A heat exchange system can include 
more than one heat exchanger and can include recirculating or once-
through cooling systems.
    Maintenance wastewater means wastewater generated by the draining of 
process fluid from components in the TPPU into an individual drain 
system prior to or during maintenance activities. Maintenance wastewater 
can be generated during planned and unplanned shutdowns and during 
periods not associated with a shutdown. Examples of activities that can 
generate maintenance wastewater include descaling of heat exchanger 
tubing bundles, cleaning distillation column traps, draining of low legs 
and high point bleeds, draining of pumps into an individual drain 
system, reactor and equipment washdown, and draining of portions of the 
TPPU for repair.
    Mass process means a process carried out through the use of thermal 
energy (e.g., polymerization reaction). Mass processes do not utilize 
emulsifying or suspending agents, but can utilize catalysts or other 
additives.
    Material recovery section means the equipment that recovers 
unreacted or by-product materials from any process section for return to 
the TPPU, off-site purification or treatment, or sale. Equipment used to 
store recovered materials are not included. Equipment designed to 
separate unreacted or by-product material from the polymer product are 
to be included in this process section, provided that at the time of 
initial compliance some of the material is recovered for reuse in the 
process, off-site purification or treatment, or sale. Otherwise, such 
equipment are to be assigned to one of the other process sections, as 
appropriate. If equipment are used to recover unreacted or by-product 
material and return it directly to the same piece of process equipment 
from which it was emitted, then said recovery equipment are considered 
part of the process section that contains the process equipment. On the 
other hand, if equipment are used to recover unreacted or by-product 
material and return it to a different piece of process equipment in the 
same process section, said recovery equipment are considered part of a 
material recovery section. Equipment that treats recovered materials are 
to be included in this process section, but equipment that also treats 
raw materials are not to be included in this process section. The latter 
equipment are to be included in the raw materials preparation section. 
Equipment used for the on-site recovery of ethylene glycol from PET 
plants, however, are not included in the material recovery section; they 
are to be included in the polymerization reaction section. Equipment 
used for the on-site recovery of ethylene glycol and other materials 
(e.g., methanol) from PET plants are not included in the material 
recovery section; these equipment are to be included in the 
polymerization reaction section.
    Methyl methacrylate acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin (MABS) 
means styrenic polymers containing methyl

[[Page 187]]

methacrylate, acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene. MABS is prepared by 
dissolving or dispersing polybutadiene rubber in a mixture of methyl 
methacrylate-acrylonitrile-styrene and butadiene monomer. The graft 
polymerization is carried out by a bulk or a suspension process.
    Methyl methacrylate butadiene styrene resin (MBS) means styrenic 
polymers containing methyl methacrylate, butadiene, and styrene. 
Production of MBS is achieved using an emulsion process in which methyl 
methacrylate and styrene are grafted onto a styrene-butadiene rubber.
    Nitrile resin means a resin produced through the polymerization of 
acrylonitrile, methyl acrylate, and butadiene latex using an emulsion 
process.
    Organic hazardous air pollutant(s) (organic HAP) means one or more 
of the chemicals listed in Table 6 of this subpart or any other chemical 
which is:
    (1) Knowingly introduced into the manufacturing process other than 
as an impurity, or has been or will be reported under any Federal or 
State program, such as Title V or the Emergency Planning and Community 
Right-To-Know Act section 311, 312, or 313; and
    (2) Listed in Table 2 of subpart F of this part.
    PET using a dimethyl terephthalate process means the manufacturing 
of PET based on the esterification of dimethyl terephthalate with 
ethylene glycol to form the intermediate monomer bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)-
terephthalate that is subsequently polymerized to form PET.
    PET using a terephthalic acid process means the manufacturing of PET 
based on the esterification reaction of terephthalic acid with ethylene 
glycol to form the intermediate monomer bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)-
terephthalate that is subsequently polymerized to form PET.
    Poly(ethylene terephthalate) resin (PET) means a polymer or 
copolymer comprised of at least 50 percent bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)-
terephthalate by weight.
    Polymerization reaction section means the equipment designed to 
cause monomer(s) to react to form polymers, including equipment designed 
primarily to cause the formation of short polymer chains (e.g., 
oligomers or low polymers), but not including equipment designed to 
prepare raw materials for polymerization (e.g., esterification vessels). 
For the purposes of these standards, the polymerization reaction section 
begins with the equipment used to transfer the materials from the raw 
materials preparation section and ends with the last vessel in which 
polymerization occurs. Equipment used for the on-site recovery of 
ethylene glycol from PET plants, however, are included in this process 
section, rather than in the material recovery process section.
    Polystyrene resin means a thermoplastic polymer or copolymer 
comprised of at least 80 percent styrene or para-methylstyrene by 
weight.
    Primary product is defined in and determined by the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1310(f).
    Process contact cooling tower system means a cooling tower system 
that is designed and operated to allow contact between the cooling 
medium and process fluid or gases.
    Process section means the equipment designed to accomplish a general 
but well-defined task in polymers production. Process sections include, 
but are not limited to, raw materials preparation, polymerization 
reaction, and material recovery. A process section may be dedicated to a 
single TPPU or common to more than one TPPU.
    Process unit means a collection of equipment assembled and connected 
by pipes or ducts to process raw materials and to manufacture a product.
    Process vent means a point of emission from a unit operation having 
a gaseous emission stream. Typical process vents include condenser 
vents, dryer vents, vacuum pumps, steam ejectors, and atmospheric vents 
from reactors and other process vessels, but do not include pressure 
relief valves.
    Product means a compound or material which is manufactured by a 
process unit. By-products, isolated intermediates, impurities, wastes, 
and trace contaminants are not considered products.
    Raw materials preparation section means the equipment at a polymer 
manufacturing plant designed to prepare raw materials, such as monomers 
and solvents, for polymerization. For

[[Page 188]]

the purposes of these standards, this process section begins with the 
equipment used to transfer raw materials from storage and/or the 
equipment used to transfer recovered material from the material recovery 
process sections, and ends with the last piece of equipment that 
prepares the material for polymerization. The raw materials preparation 
section may include equipment that is used to purify, dry, or otherwise 
treat raw materials or raw and recovered materials together; to activate 
catalysts; and to promote esterification including the formation of some 
short polymer chains (oligomers). The raw materials preparation section 
does not include equipment that is designed primarily to accomplish the 
formation of oligomers, the treatment of recovered materials alone, or 
the storage of raw materials.
    Recovery operations equipment means the equipment used to separate 
the components of process streams. Recovery operations equipment 
includes distillation unit, condensers, etc. Equipment used for 
wastewater treatment shall not be considered recovery operations 
equipment.
    Solid state polymerization unit means a unit operation which, 
through the application of heat, furthers the polymerization (i.e., 
increases the intrinsic viscosity) of polymer chips.
    Steady-state conditions means that all variables (temperatures, 
pressures, volumes, flow rates, etc.) in a process do not vary 
significantly with time; minor fluctuations about constant mean values 
can occur.
    Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that is used to store 
liquids that contain one or more organic HAP and that has been assigned, 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1310(g), to a TPPU that is 
subject to this subpart. Storage vessels do not include:
    (1) Vessels permanently attached to motor vehicles such as trucks, 
railcars, barges, or ships;
    (2) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 
kilopascals and without breathing or working losses to the atmosphere;
    (3) Vessels with capacities smaller than 38 cubic meters;
    (4) Vessels and equipment storing and/or handling material that 
contains no organic HAP and/or organic HAP as impurities only; and
    (5) Wastewater storage tanks.
    Supplemental combustion air means the air that is added to a vent 
stream after the vent stream leaves the unit operation. Air that is part 
of the vent stream as a result of the nature of the unit operation is 
not considered supplemental combustion air. Air required to operate 
combustion device burner(s) is not considered supplemental combustion 
air.
    Styrene acrylonitrile resin (SAN) means copolymers consisting 
primarily of styrene and acrylonitrile monomer units.
    Suspension process means a process carried out with the reactants in 
a state of suspension, typically achieved through the use of water and/
or suspending agents (e.g., polymerization reaction).
    Thermoplastic product means one of the following types of products:
    (1) ABS latex;
    (2) ABS using a batch emulsion process;
    (3) ABS using a batch suspension process;
    (4) ABS using a continuous emulsion process;
    (5) ABS using a continuous mass process;
    (6) ASA/AMSAN;
    (7) EPS;
    (8) MABS;
    (9) MBS;
    (10) nitrile resin;
    (11) PET using a batch dimethyl terephthalate process;
    (12) PET using a batch terephthalic acid process;
    (13) PET using a continuous dimethyl terephthalate process;
    (14) PET using a continuous terephthalic acid process;
    (15) PET using a continuous terephthalic acid high viscosity 
multiple end finisher process;
    (16) Polystyrene resin using a batch process;
    (17) Polystyrene resin using a continuous process;
    (18) SAN using a batch process; or
    (19) SAN using a continuous process.

[[Page 189]]

    Thermoplastic product process unit (TPPU) means a collection of 
equipment assembled and connected by process pipes or ducts, excluding 
gas, sanitary sewage, water (i.e., not wastewater), and steam 
connections, used to process raw materials and to manufacture a 
thermoplastic product as its primary product. This collection of 
equipment includes process vents from process vessels; storage vessels, 
as determined in Sec. 63.1310(g); and the equipment (i.e., pumps, 
compressors, agitators, pressure relief devices, sampling connection 
systems, open-ended valves or lines, valves, connectors, and 
instrumentation systems that are associated with the thermoplastic 
product process unit) that are subject to the equipment leak provisions 
as specified in Sec. 63.1331.
    Total organic compounds (TOC) means those compounds excluding 
methane and ethane measured according to the procedures of Method 18 or 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    Year means any consecutive 12-month period or 365 rolling days. For 
the purposes of emissions averaging, the term year applies to any 12-
month period selected by the facility and defined in its Emissions 
Averaging Plan. For the purposes of batch cycle limitations, the term 
year applies to the 12-month period defined by the facility in its 
Notification of Compliance Status.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11547, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1313  Emission standards.

    (a) Except as allowed under paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
the owner or operator of an existing or new affected source shall comply 
with the provisions in:
    (1) Section 63.1314 for storage vessels;
    (2) Sections 63.1315 or 63.1316 through 63.1320, as appropriate, for 
continuous process vents;
    (3) Section 63.1321 for batch process vents;
    (4) Section 63.1328 for heat exchange systems;
    (5) Section 63.1329 for process contact cooling towers;
    (6) Section 63.1330 for wastewater;
    (7) Section 63.1331 for equipment leaks;
    (8) Section 63.1333 for additional test methods and procedures;
    (9) Section 63.1334 for parameter monitoring levels and excursions; 
and
    (10) Section 63.1335 for general recordkeeping and reporting 
requirements.
    (b) Instead of complying with Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 
through 63.1320, 63.1321, and 63.1330, the owner or operator of an 
existing affected source may elect to control any or all of the storage 
vessels, batch process vents, continuous process vents, and wastewater 
streams within the affected source to different levels using an 
emissions averaging compliance approach that uses the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1332. An owner or operator electing to use 
emissions averaging must still comply with the provisions of 
Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 63.1321, and 63.1330 
for affected source emission points not included in the emissions 
average.
    (c) A State may decide not to allow the use of the emissions 
averaging compliance approach specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section.



Sec. 63.1314  Storage vessel provisions.

    (a) This section applies to each storage vessel that belongs to an 
affected source, as determined by Sec. 63.1310(g). Except as provided in 
paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, the owner or operator of 
said storage vessels shall comply with the requirements of Secs. 63.119 
through 63.123 and 63.148, with the differences noted in paragraphs 
(a)(1) through (a)(16) of this section for the purposes of this subpart.
    (1) When the term ``storage vessel'' is used in Secs. 63.119 through 
63.123 and 63.148, the definition of this term in Sec. 63.1312 shall 
apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (2) When the term ``Group 1 storage vessel'' is used in Secs. 63.119 
through 63.123 and 63.148, the definition of this term in Sec. 63.1312 
shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (3) When the term ``Group 2 storage vessel'' is used in Secs. 63.119 
through 63.123 and 63.148, the definition of this term in Sec. 63.1312 
shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) When the emissions averaging provisions of Sec. 63.150 are 
referred to in Secs. 63.119 and 63.123, the emissions averaging 
provisions contained in Sec. 63.1332

[[Page 190]]

shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (5) When December 31, 1992, is referred to in Sec. 63.119, March 29, 
1995 shall apply instead, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When April 22, 1994, is referred to in Sec. 63.119, September 
12, 1996 shall apply instead, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (7) Each owner or operator shall comply with this paragraph (a)(7) 
instead of Sec. 63.120(d)(1)(ii) for the purposes of this subpart. If 
the control device used to comply with this section is also used to 
comply with Secs. 63.1315 through 63.1330, the performance test required 
for these sections is acceptable for demonstrating compliance with 
Sec. 63.119(e) for the purposes of this subpart. The owner or operator 
is not required to prepare a design evaluation for the control device as 
described in Sec. 63.120(d)(1)(i) for the purposes of this subpart if 
the performance test meets the criteria specified in Sec. 63.120 
(d)(1)(ii)(A) and (d)(1)(ii)(B).
    (8) When the term ``operating range'' is used in Sec. 63.120(d)(3), 
the term ``level'' shall apply instead, for the purposes of this 
subpart. This level shall be established using the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.1334.
    (9) When the Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in Secs. 63.120, 63.122, and 
63.123, the Notification of Compliance Status requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (10) When the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Secs. 63.120, 63.122, and 63.123, the 
Periodic Report requirements contained in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6) shall apply 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (11) When other reports as required in Sec. 63.152(d) are referred 
to in Sec. 63.122, the reporting requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(7) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (12) When the Implementation Plan requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.151(c) are referred to in Sec. 63.120 and Sec. 63.122, the owner 
or operator of an affected source subject to this subpart need not 
comply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (13) When the Initial Notification Plan requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.151(b) are referred to in Sec. 63.122, the owner or operator of 
an affected source subject to this subpart need not comply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (14) When the determination of equivalence criteria in 
Sec. 63.102(b) is referred to in Sec. 63.121(a), the provisions in 
Sec. 63.6(g) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (15) When a performance test is required under the provisions of 
Sec. 63.120(d)(1)(ii), the use of Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A is allowed for the purposes of this subpart. The use of 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall comply with paragraphs 
(a)(15)(i) and (a)(15)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (16) The compliance date for storage vessels at affected sources 
subject to the provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1311.
    (b) Owners or operators of Group 1 storage vessels that belong to a 
new affected source producing SAN using a continuous process shall 
control emissions to the levels indicated in paragraphs (b)(1) and 
(b)(2) of this section.
    (1) For storage vessels with capacities greater than or equal to 
2,271 cubic meters (m\3\) containing a liquid mixture having a vapor 
pressure greater than or equal to 0.5 kilopascal (kPa) but less than 0.7 
kPa, emissions shall be controlled by at least 90 percent relative to 
uncontrolled emissions.
    (2) For storage vessels with capacities less than 151 m3 
containing a liquid mixture having a vapor pressure greater than or 
equal to 10 kPa, emissions shall be controlled by at least 98 percent 
relative to uncontrolled emissions.

[[Page 191]]

    (3) For all other storage vessels designated as Group 1 storage 
vessels, emissions shall be controlled to the level designated in 
Sec. 63.119.
    (c) Owners or operators of Group 1 storage vessels that belong to a 
new or existing affected source producing ASA/AMSAN shall control 
emissions by at least 98 percent relative to uncontrolled emissions.
    (d) The provisions of this subpart do not apply to storage vessels 
containing ethylene glycol at existing or new affected sources and 
storage vessels containing styrene at existing affected sources.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11547, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1315  Continuous process vents provisions.

    (a) For each continuous process vent located at an affected source, 
the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of Secs. 63.113 
through 63.118, with the differences noted in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(a)(18) of this section for the purposes of this subpart, except as 
provided in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section.
    (1) When the term ``process vent'' is used in Secs. 63.113 through 
63.118, apply the term ``continuous process vent,'' and the definition 
of this term in Sec. 63.1312 shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (2) When the term ``Group 1 process vent'' is used in Secs. 63.113 
through 63.118, apply the term ``Group 1 continuous process vent,'' and 
the definition of this term in Sec. 63.1312 shall apply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (3) When the term ``Group 2 process vent'' is used in Secs. 63.113 
through 63.118, apply the term ``Group 2 continuous process vent,'' and 
the definition of this term in Sec. 63.1312 shall apply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (4) When December 31, 1992, (i.e., subpart G of this part proposal 
date) is referred to in Sec. 63.113, apply the date March 29, 1995 
(i.e., proposal date for this subpart) for the purposes of this subpart.
    (5) When Sec. 63.151(f), alternative monitoring parameters, and 
Sec. 63.152(e), submission of an operating permit, are referred to in 
Secs. 63.114(c) and 63.117(e), Sec. 63.1335(f), alternative monitoring 
parameters, and Sec. 63.1335(e)(8), submission of an operating permit, 
respectively, shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When the Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in Secs. 63.114, 63.117, and 
63.118, the Notification of Compliance Status requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (7) When the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Secs. 63.117 and 63.118, the Periodic 
Report requirements contained in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6) shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (8) When the definition of excursion in Sec. 63.152(c)(2)(ii)(A) is 
referred to in Sec. 63.118(f)(2), the definition of excursion in 
Sec. 63.1334(f) of this subpart shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (9) Owners and operators shall comply with Sec. 63.1334, parameter 
monitoring levels and excursions, instead of Sec. 63.114(e) for the 
purposes of this subpart. When the term ``range'' is used in 
Secs. 63.117 and 63.118, the term ``level'' shall be used instead for 
the purposes of this subpart. This level is determined in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1334.
    (10) If a batch process vent is combined with a continuous process 
vent prior to being routed to a control device, the combined vent stream 
shall comply with either paragraph (a)(10)(i) or (a)(10)(ii) of this 
section, as appropriate.
    (i) If the continuous process vent is a Group 1 continuous process 
vent, the combined vent stream shall comply with all requirements for a 
Group 1 continuous process vent stream in Secs. 63.113 through 63.118, 
with the differences noted in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(9) of this 
section, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (ii) If the continuous process vent is a Group 2 continuous process 
vent, the total resource effectiveness (TRE) index value for the 
combined vent stream shall be calculated at the exit of any recovery 
device and prior to the control device at maximum representative 
operating conditions. For combined vent streams containing continuous 
and batch process vents, the maximum representative operating conditions 
shall be during periods when

[[Page 192]]

batch emission episodes are venting to the control device, resulting in 
the highest concentration of organic HAP in the combined vent stream.
    (11) If a batch process vent is combined with a continuous process 
vent prior to being routed to a recovery device, the TRE index value for 
the combined vent stream shall be calculated at the exit of the recovery 
device at maximum representative operating conditions for the purposes 
of this subpart. For combined vent streams containing continuous and 
batch process vents, the maximum representative operating conditions 
shall be during periods when batch emission episodes are venting to the 
recovery device, resulting in the highest concentration of organic HAP 
in the combined vent stream.
    (12) When reports of process changes are required under Sec. 63.118 
(g), (h), (i), and (j), paragraphs (a)(12)(i) through (a)(12)(iv) of 
this section shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (i) For the purposes of this subpart, whenever a process change, as 
defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is made that causes a Group 2 continuous 
process vent to become a Group 1 continuous process vent, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report within 180 operating days after the 
process change is made or the information regarding the process change 
is known to the owner or operator. This report may be included in the 
next Periodic Report, as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The 
following information shall be submitted:
    (A) A description of the process change; and
    (B) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of this subpart, 
as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (ii) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with a TRE greater than 4.0 to 
become a Group 2 process vent with a TRE less than 4.0, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report within 180 operating days after the 
process change is made or the information regarding the process change 
is known to the owner or operator. This report may be included in the 
next Periodic Report, as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The 
following information shall be submitted:
    (A) A description of the process change; and
    (B) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of this subpart, 
as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (iii) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with a flow rate less than 0.005 
standard cubic meter per minute to become a Group 2 process vent with a 
flow rate of 0.005 standard cubic meter per minute or greater and a TRE 
index value less than or equal to 4.0, the owner or operator shall 
submit a report within 180 operating days after the process change is 
made or the information regarding the process change is known to the 
owner or operator. This report may be included in the next Periodic 
Report, as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The following 
information shall be submitted:
    (A) A description of the process change; and
    (B) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of this subpart, 
as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (iv) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with an organic HAP 
concentration less than 50 parts per million by volume to become a Group 
2 process vent with an organic HAP concentration of 50 parts per million 
by volume or greater and a TRE index value less than or equal to 4.0, 
the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 operating days 
after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known to the owner or operator. This report may be 
included in the next Periodic Report, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The following information shall be 
submitted:
    (A) A description of the process change; and
    (B) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of this subpart, 
as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (13) When the provisions of Sec. 63.116 (c)(3) and (c)(4) specify 
that Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall be used, Method 18 or 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A may be used for the purposes of 
this subpart. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A

[[Page 193]]

shall comply with paragraphs (a)(13)(i) and (a)(13)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (14) When the provisions of Sec. 63.116(b) identify conditions under 
which a performance test is not required, for purposes of this subpart, 
the exemption in paragraph (a)(14)(i) shall also apply. Further, if a 
performance test meeting the conditions specified in paragraph 
(a)(14)(ii) of this section has been conducted by the owner or operator, 
the results of said performance test may be submitted and a performance 
test, as required by this section, is not required.
    (i) An incinerator burning hazardous waste for which the owner or 
operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O.
    (ii) Performance tests done for other subparts in 40 CFR part 60 or 
part 63 where total organic HAP or TOC was measured, provided the owner 
or operator can demonstrate that operating conditions for the process 
and control or recovery device during the performance test are 
representative of current operating conditions.
    (15) The compliance date for continuous process vents subject to the 
provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1311.
    (16)-(17) [Reserved]
    (18) When a combustion device is used to comply with the 20 parts 
per million by volume outlet concentration standard specified in 
Sec. 63.113(a)(2), the correction to 3 percent oxygen is only required 
when supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions, for 
the purposes of this subpart. In addition, the correction to 3 percent 
oxygen specified in Sec. 63.116(c)(3) and (c)(3)(iii) is only required 
when supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions, for 
the purposes of this subpart. Finally, when a combustion device is used 
to comply with the 20 parts per million by volume outlet concentration 
standard specified in Sec. 63.113(a)(2), an owner or operator shall 
record and report the outlet concentration required in 
Sec. 63.117(a)(4)(ii) and (a)(4)(iv) corrected to 3 percent oxygen when 
supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions, for the 
purposes of this subpart. When supplemental combustion air is not used 
to combust the emissions, an owner or operator may record and report the 
outlet concentration required in Sec. 63.117(a)(4)(ii) and (a)(4)(iv) on 
an uncorrected basis or corrected to 3 percent oxygen, for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (b) Existing affected sources producing MBS shall comply with either 
paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) Comply with paragraph (a) of this section, as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(ii).
    (i) As specified in Sec. 63.1312, Group 1 continuous process vents 
at MBS existing affected sources are those with a total resource 
effectiveness value less than or equal to 3.7.
    (ii) When complying with this paragraph (b), the term ``TRE of 
4.0'', or related terms indicating a TRE value of 4.0, referred to in 
Sec. 63.113 through Sec. 63.118 shall be replaced with ``TRE of 6.7,'' 
for the purposes of this subpart. The TRE range of 3.7 to 6.7 for 
continuous process vents at existing affected sources producing MBS 
corresponds to the TRE range of 1.0 to 4.0 for other continuous process 
vents, as it applies to monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting.
    (2) Not allow organic HAP emissions from the collection of 
continuous process vents at the affected source to be greater than 
0.000590 kg organic HAP/Mg of product. Compliance with this paragraph 
(b)(2) shall be determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1333(b).
    (c) New affected sources producing SAN using a batch process shall 
comply with the applicable requirements in Sec. 63.1321.
    (d) Affected sources producing PET or polystyrene using a continuous 
process are subject to the emissions

[[Page 194]]

control provisions of Sec. 63.1316, the monitoring provisions of 
Sec. 63.1317, the testing and compliance demonstration provisions of 
Sec. 63.1318, the recordkeeping provisions of Sec. 63.1319, and the 
reporting provisions of Sec. 63.1320.
    (e) Owners or operators of affected sources producing ASA/AMSAN 
shall reduce organic HAP emissions from each continuous process vent, 
each batch process vent, and each aggregate batch vent stream by 98 
weight-percent and shall comply with either paragraph (e)(1), (e)(2), or 
(e)(3), as appropriate. Where batch process vents or aggregate batch 
vent streams are combined with continuous process vents, the provisions 
of paragraph (a)(13) of this section shall apply for the purposes of 
this paragraph (e).
    (1) For each continuous process vent, comply with paragraph (a) of 
this section as specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (e)(1)(ii) of 
this section.
    (i) For purpose of this section, each continuous process vent shall 
be considered to be a Group 1 continuous process vent and the owner or 
operator of that continuous process vent shall comply with the 
requirements for a Group 1 continuous process vent.
    (ii) For purposes of this section, the group determination procedure 
required by Sec. 63.115 shall not apply.
    (2) For each batch process vent, comply with Secs. 63.1321 through 
63.1327 as specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) through (e)(2)(ii) of this 
section.
    (i) For purpose of this section, each batch process vent shall be 
considered to be a Group 1 batch process vent and the owner or operator 
of that batch process vent shall comply with the requirements for a 
Group 1 batch process vent contained in Secs. 63.1321 through 63.1327, 
except that each batch process vent shall be controlled to reduce 
organic HAP emissions by 98 weight-percent.
    (ii) For purposes of this section, the group determination procedure 
required by Sec. 63.1323 shall not apply.
    (3) For each aggregate batch vent stream, comply with Secs. 63.1321 
through 63.1327 as specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through (e)(3)(ii) 
of this section.
    (i) For purpose of this section, each aggregate batch vent stream 
shall be considered to be a Group 1 aggregate batch vent stream and the 
owner or operator of that aggregate batch vent stream shall comply with 
the requirements for a Group 1 aggregate batch vent stream contained in 
Secs. 63.1321 through 63.1327, except that each aggregate batch vent 
stream shall be controlled to reduce organic HAP emissions by 98 weight-
percent.
    (ii) For purposes of this section, the group determination procedure 
required by Sec. 63.1323 shall not apply.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11547, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1316  PET and polystyrene affected sources--emissions control provisions.

    (a) The owner or operator of an affected source producing PET using 
a continuous process shall comply with paragraph (b) of this section. 
The owner or operator of an affected source producing polystyrene using 
a continuous process shall comply with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Each owner or operator of an affected source producing PET using 
a continuous process shall comply with the requirements specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section, as appropriate, and not 
with any of the requirements specified in 40 CFR part 60, subpart DDD. 
Compliance can be based on either organic HAP or TOC.
    (1) Each owner or operator of an affected source producing PET using 
a continuous dimethyl terephthalate process shall comply with paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator of an existing affected source with 
organic HAP emissions greater than 0.12 kg organic HAP per Mg of product 
from continuous process vents in the collection of material recovery 
sections (i.e., methanol recovery) within the affected source shall 
comply with either paragraph (b)(1)(i)(A), (b)(1)(i)(B), or (b)(1)(i)(C) 
of this section. Emissions from continuous process vents in the 
collection of material recovery sections within the affected source 
shall be determined by the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1318(b). The 
owner or operator of a new affected source shall comply with either 
paragraph (b)(1)(i)(A),

[[Page 195]]

(b)(1)(i)(B), or (b)(1)(i)(C) of this section.
    (A) Organic HAP emissions from all continuous process vents in each 
individual material recovery section shall, as a whole, be no greater 
than 0.018 kg organic HAP per Mg of product from the associated TPPU(s); 
or alternatively, organic HAP emissions from all continuous process 
vents in the collection of material recovery sections within the 
affected source shall, as a whole, be no greater than 0.018 kg organic 
HAP per Mg product from all associated TPPU(s);
    (B) As specified in Sec. 63.1318(d), the owner or operator shall 
maintain the daily average outlet gas stream temperature from each final 
condenser in a material recovery section at a temperature of +3 deg.C 
(+37 deg.F) or less (i.e., colder); or
    (C) Comply with paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section.
    (ii) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents in 
the collection of polymerization reaction sections within the affected 
source by complying with either paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) or (b)(1)(ii)(B) 
of this section.
    (A) Organic HAP emissions from all continuous process vents in each 
individual polymerization reaction section within the affected source 
(including emissions from any equipment used to further recover ethylene 
glycol, but excluding emissions from process contact cooling towers) 
shall, as a whole, be no greater than 0.02 kg organic HAP per Mg of 
product from the associated TPPU(s); or alternatively, organic HAP 
emissions from all continuous process vents in the collection of 
polymerization reaction sections within the affected source shall, as a 
whole, be no greater than 0.02 kg organic HAP per Mg product from all 
associated TPPU(s); or
    (B) Comply with paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section.
    (iii) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents not 
included in a material recovery section, as specified in paragraph 
(b)(1)(i) of this section, or not included in a polymerization reaction 
section, as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, by 
complying with Sec. 63.1315.
    (iv) Limit organic HAP emissions from all batch process vents by 
complying with Sec. 63.1321.
    (v) Comply with one of the following:
    (A) Reduce the emissions in a combustion device to achieve 98 weight 
percent reduction or to achieve a concentration of 20 parts per million 
by volume (ppmv) on a dry basis, whichever is less stringent. If an 
owner or operator elects to comply with the 20 ppmv standard, the 
concentration shall include a correction to 3 percent oxygen only when 
supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions;
    (B) Combust the emissions in a boiler or process heater with a 
design heat input capacity of 150 million Btu/hr or greater by 
introducing the emissions into the flame zone of the boiler or process 
heater; or
    (C) Combust the emissions in a flare that complies with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1333(e).
    (2) Each owner or operator of an affected source producing PET using 
a continuous terephthalic acid process shall comply with paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents in the 
collection of raw material preparation sections within the affected 
source by complying with either paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A) or (b)(2)(i)(B) 
of this section.
    (A) Organic HAP emissions from all continuous process vents 
associated with the esterification vessels in each individual raw 
materials preparation section shall, as a whole, be no greater than 0.04 
kg organic HAP per Mg of product from the associated TPPU(s); or 
alternatively, organic HAP emissions from all continuous process vents 
associated with the esterification vessels in the collection of raw 
material preparation sections within the affected source shall, as a 
whole, be no greater than 0.04 kg organic HAP per Mg of product from all 
associated TPPU(s). Other continuous process vents (i.e., those not 
associated with the esterification vessels) in the collection of raw 
materials preparation sections within the affected source shall comply 
with Sec. 63.1315; or
    (B) Comply with paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section.

[[Page 196]]

    (ii) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents in 
the collection of polymerization reaction sections within the affected 
source by complying with either paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A) or (b)(2)(ii)(B) 
of this section.
    (A) Organic HAP emissions from all continuous process vents in each 
individual polymerization reaction section (including emissions from any 
equipment used to further recover ethylene glycol, but excluding 
emissions from process contact cooling towers) shall, as a whole, be no 
greater than 0.02 kg organic HAP per Mg of product from the associated 
TPPU(s); or alternatively, organic HAP emissions from all continuous 
process vents in the collection of polymerization reaction sections 
within the affected source shall, as a whole, be no greater than 0.02 kg 
organic HAP per Mg of product from all associated TPPU(s); or
    (B) Comply with paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section.
    (iii) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents not 
included in a raw materials preparation section, as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(2)(i) of this section, or not included in a 
polymerization reaction section, as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of 
this section, by complying with Sec. 63.1315.
    (iv) Limit organic HAP emissions from all batch process vents by 
complying with Sec. 63.1321.
    (v) Comply with one of the following:
    (A) Reduce the emissions in a combustion device to achieve 98 weight 
percent reduction or to achieve a concentration of 20 parts per million 
by volume (ppmv) on a dry basis, whichever is less stringent. If an 
owner or operator elects to comply with the 20 ppmv standard, the 
concentration shall include a correction to 3 percent oxygen only when 
supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions;
    (B) Combust the emissions in a boiler or process heater with a 
design heat input capacity of 150 million Btu/hr or greater by 
introducing the emissions into the flame zone of the boiler or process 
heater; or
    (C) Combust the emissions in a flare that complies with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1333(e).
    (c) Each owner or operator of an affected source producing 
polystyrene resin using a continuous process shall comply with the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this 
section, as appropriate, and not with any of the requirements specified 
in 40 CFR part 60, subpart DDD. Compliance can be based on either 
organic HAP or TOC.
    (1) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents in the 
collection of material recovery sections within the affected source by 
complying with one of the following:
    (i) Not allow emissions to be greater than 0.0036 kg organic HAP/Mg 
of product;
    (ii) Not allow the outlet gas stream temperature from each final 
condenser in a material recovery section to exceed -25 deg.C 
(-13 deg.F); or
    (iii) Comply with one of the following:
    (A) Reduce emissions by 98 weight percent or to a concentration of 
20 parts per million by volume (ppmv) on a dry basis, whichever is less 
stringent. If an owner or operator elects to comply with the 20 ppmv 
standard, the concentration shall include a correction to 3 percent 
oxygen only when supplemental combustion air is used to combust the 
emissions;
    (B) Combust the emissions in a boiler or process heater with a 
design heat input capacity of 150 million Btu/hr or greater by 
introducing the emissions into the flame zone of the boiler or process 
heater; or
    (C) Combust the emissions in a flare that complies with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.11(b).
    (2) Limit organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents not 
included in a material recovery section, as specified in paragraph 
(c)(1)(i) of this section, by complying with Sec. 63.1315.
    (3) Limit organic HAP emissions from all batch process vents by 
complying with Sec. 63.1321.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11548, Mar. 9, 1999]

[[Page 197]]



Sec. 63.1317  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--monitoring provisions.

    Continuous process vents using a control or recovery device to 
comply with Sec. 63.1316 shall comply with the applicable monitoring 
provisions specified for continuous process vents in Sec. 63.1315(a), 
except as specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
    (a) For the purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, owners or 
operators shall ignore references to group determinations (i.e., total 
resource effectiveness) and are not required to comply with Sec. 63.113.
    (b) The monitoring period for condenser exit temperature when 
complying with Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i)(B) or Sec. 63.1316(c)(1)(ii) shall 
be each consecutive 3-hour continuous period (e.g., 6 am to 9 am, 9 am 
to 12 pm). Each owner or operator shall designate said monitoring period 
in the Notification of Compliance Status required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).



Sec. 63.1318  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--testing and compliance demonstration provisions.

    (a) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this 
section, continuous process vents using a control or recovery device to 
comply with Sec. 63.1316 shall comply with the applicable testing and 
compliance provisions for continuous process vents specified in 
Sec. 63.1315, except that, for the purposes of this paragraph (a), 
owners or operators shall ignore references to group determination 
(i.e., total resource effectiveness) and are not required to comply with 
Sec. 63.113.
    (b) PET Affected Sources Using a Dimethyl Terephthalate Process--
Applicability Determination Procedure. Owners or operators shall 
calculate organic HAP emissions from the collection of material recovery 
sections at an existing affected source producing PET using a continuous 
dimethyl terephthalate process to determine whether 
Sec. 63.1316(a)(1)(i) is applicable using the procedures specified in 
either paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) Use Equation 1 of this subpart to determine mass emissions per 
mass product as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(ii) of this 
section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.000


where:

ER=Emission rate of total organic HAP or TOC, kg/Mg product.
Ei=Emission rate of total organic HAP or TOC in continuous 
process vent i, kg/hr.
Pp=The rate of polymer produced, kg/hr.
n=Number of continuous process vents in the collection of material 
recovery sections at the affected source.
0.001=Conversion factor, kg to Mg.

    (i) The mass emission rate for each continuous process vent, 
Ei, shall be determined according to the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.116(c)(4). The sampling site for determining whether 
Sec. 63.1316(a)(1)(i) is applicable shall be before any add-on control 
devices (i.e., those required by regulation) and after those recovery 
devices installed as part of operating the material recovery section. 
When the provisions of Sec. 63.116(c)(4) specify that Method 18, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A shall be used, Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A may be used for the purposes of this subpart. The use of 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall comply with paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i)(A) and (b)(1)(i)(B) of this section.
    (A) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (B) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (ii) The rate of polymer produced, Pp (kg/hr), shall be 
determined by dividing the weight (kg) of polymer pulled from the 
process line during the performance test by the number of hours taken to 
perform the performance test. The

[[Page 198]]

weight of polymer pulled shall be determined by direct measurement or by 
an alternate methodology, such as materials balance. If an alternate 
methodology is used, a description of the methodology, including all 
procedures, data, and assumptions shall be submitted as part of the 
Notification of Compliance Status required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (2) Use engineering assessment, as described in 
Sec. 63.1323(b)(6)(i), to demonstrate that mass emissions per mass 
product are less than or equal to 0.07 kg organic HAP/Mg product. If 
engineering assessment shows that mass emissions per mass product are 
greater than 0.07 kg organic HAP/Mg product and the owner or operator 
wishes to demonstrate that mass emissions per mass product are less than 
the threshold emission rate of 0.12 kg organic HAP/Mg product, the owner 
or operator shall use the procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section.
    (c) Compliance with Mass Emissions per Mass Product Standards. 
Owners or operators complying with Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(i)(A), 
(b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), and (c)(1)(i) shall demonstrate 
compliance with the mass emissions per mass product requirements using 
the procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, except 
that the sampling site specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section 
shall be at the outlet of the last control or recovery device.
    (d) Compliance with Temperature Limits for Final Condensers. Owners 
or operators complying with Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i)(B) or 
Sec. 63.1316(c)(1)(ii) shall perform an initial performance test as 
specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section to demonstrate initial 
compliance with the temperature limit requirements and shall demonstrate 
continuous compliance as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
    (1) Using the temperature monitoring device specified by the 
applicable monitoring provisions specified for continuous process vents 
in Sec. 63.1315, an average exit temperature shall be determined based 
on the average exit temperature for three performance tests. The average 
exit temperature for each 3-hour performance test shall be based on 
measurements taken at least every 15 minutes for 3 hours of continuous 
operation under maximum representative operating conditions for the 
process. For emissions streams containing continuous and batch process 
vents, the maximum representative operating conditions shall be during 
periods when batch emission episodes are venting to the control device 
resulting in the highest concentration of organic HAP in the emissions 
stream.
    (2) As specified in Sec. 63.1317(b), continuous compliance shall be 
determined based on an average exit temperature determined for each 
consecutive 3-hour continuous period. Each 3-hour period where the 
average exit temperature is more than 6  deg.C (10  deg.F) above the 
applicable specified temperature limit shall be considered an exceedance 
of the monitoring provisions.



Sec. 63.1319  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--recordkeeping provisions.

    (a) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
owners or operators using a control or recovery device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1316 shall comply with the applicable recordkeeping provisions 
specified in Sec. 63.1315, except that, for the purposes of this 
paragraph (a), owners or operators shall ignore references to group 
determinations (i.e., total resource effectiveness) and are not required 
to comply with Sec. 63.113.
    (b) Records Demonstrating Compliance With the Applicability 
Determination Procedure for PET Affected Sources Using a Dimethyl 
Terephthalate Process. Each owner or operator, as appropriate, shall 
keep the following data, as appropriate, up-to-date and readily 
accessible:
    (1) Results of the mass emissions per mass product calculation 
specified in Sec. 63.1318(b).
    (2) If complying with Sec. 63.1316 by demonstrating that mass 
emissions per mass product are less than or equal to the level specified 
in Sec. 63.1316(a)(1)(i), the information specified in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (i) Each process operation variable (e.g., pressure, temperature, 
type of catalyst) that may result in an increase in the mass emissions 
per mass product should said variable be changed.

[[Page 199]]

    (ii) Records of any change in process operation that increases the 
mass emissions per mass product.
    (c) Records Demonstrating Compliance with Temperature Limits for 
Final Condensers. Owners or operators of continuous process vents 
complying with Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i)(B) or Sec. 63.1316(c)(1)(ii) shall 
keep the following data, as appropriate, up-to-date and readily 
accessible:
    (1) Records of monitoring data as specified in Sec. 63.1315, except 
that the monitoring period shall be each consecutive 3-hour continuous 
period.
    (2) Results of the performance test specified in Sec. 63.1318(d)(1) 
and any other performance test that may be subsequently required.



Sec. 63.1320  PET and polystyrene continuous process affected sources--reporting provisions.

    (a) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
owners and operators using a control or recovery device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1316 shall comply with the applicable reporting provisions 
specified in Sec. 63.1315, except that, for the purposes of this 
paragraph (a), owners or operators shall ignore references to group 
determinations (i.e., total resource effectiveness) and are not required 
to comply with Sec. 63.113.
    (b) Reporting for PET Affected Sources Using a Dimethyl 
Terephthalate Process. Each owner or operator complying with 
Sec. 63.1316 by demonstrating that mass emissions per mass product are 
less than or equal to the level specified in Sec. 63.1316(a)(1)(i) shall 
comply with paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section.
    (1) Include the information specified in Sec. 63.1319(b)(2)(ii) in 
each Periodic Report, required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(6), as appropriate.
    (2) Include the information specified in Sec. 63.1319 (b)(1) or 
(b)(2) in the Notification of Compliance Status, required by 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5), for the initial determination and in the appropriate 
Periodic Report, required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(6), for any subsequent 
determinations that may be required.
    (3) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is made 
that causes emissions from continuous process vents in the collection of 
material recovery sections (i.e., methanol recovery) within the affected 
source to be greater than 0.12 kg organic HAP/Mg of product, the owner 
or operator shall submit a report within 180 operating days after the 
process change is made or the information regarding the process change 
is known to the owner or operator. This report may be included in the 
next Periodic Report as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The 
following information shall be submitted:
    (i) A description of the process change; and
    (ii) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of this subpart, 
as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii(D)(2).
    (c) Reporting for Affected Sources Complying With Temperature Limits 
for Final Condensers. Each owner or operator complying with 
Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i)(B) or Sec. 63.1316(c)(1)(ii) shall comply with 
paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section.
    (1) Report periods when the 3-hour average exit temperature is more 
than 6 deg. C (10 deg. F) above the applicable specified temperature 
limit in each Periodic Report, required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(6), as 
appropriate.
    (2) Include the information specified in Sec. 63.1319(c)(2) in the 
Notification of Compliance Status, required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5), for 
the initial performance test and in the appropriate Periodic Report, 
required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(6), for any subsequent performance tests 
that may be required.
    (3) Include the information specified in Sec. 63.1317(b) in the 
Notification of Compliance Status, required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).



Sec. 63.1321  Batch process vents provisions.

    (a) Batch process vents. Except as specified in paragraphs (b) and 
(c) of this section, owners and operators of new and existing affected 
sources with batch process vents shall comply with the requirements in 
Secs. 63.1322 through 63.1327. The batch process vent group status shall 
be determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1323. Batch process vents 
classified as Group 1 shall comply with the reference control technology 
requirements for Group 1 batch process

[[Page 200]]

vents in Sec. 63.1322, the monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1324, the 
performance test methods and procedures to determine compliance 
requirements in Sec. 63.1325, the recordkeeping requirements in 
Sec. 63.1326, and the reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1327. All Group 
2 batch process vents shall comply with the applicable reference control 
technology requirements in Sec. 63.1322, the recordkeeping requirements 
in Sec. 63.1326, and the reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1327.
    (b) New SAN batch affected sources. Owners and operators of new SAN 
affected sources using a batch process shall comply with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1322 through Sec. 63.1327 for batch process 
vents and aggregate batch vent streams except as specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1) through (b)(2) of this section. For continuous process vents, 
owners and operators shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.1322 
through Sec. 63.1327 except as specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this 
section.
    (1) For batch process vents, the determination of group status 
(i.e., Group 1/Group 2) under Sec. 63.1323 is not required.
    (2) For batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams, the 
control requirements for individual batch process vents or aggregate 
batch vent streams (e.g., 90 percent emission reduction) as specified in 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(1), (a)(2), (b)(1), and (b)(2) shall not apply.
    (3) Continuous process vents using a control or recovery device to 
comply with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) are subject to the applicable 
requirements in Sec. 63.1315(a), as appropriate, except as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) Said continuous process vents are not subject to the group 
determination procedures of Sec. 63.115 for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (ii) Said continuous process vents are not subject to the reference 
control technology provisions of Sec. 63.113 for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (c) Aggregate batch vent streams. Aggregate batch vent streams, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1312, are subject to the control requirements for 
individual batch process vents, as specified in Sec. 63.1322(b), as well 
as the monitoring, testing, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements 
specified in Sec. 63.1324 through Sec. 63.1327.
    (d) Owners and operators of affected sources producing ASA/AMSAN 
shall comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1315(e).

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1322  Batch process vents--reference control technology.

    (a) Batch process vents. The owner or operator of a Group 1 batch 
process vent, as determined using the procedures in Sec. 63.1323, shall 
comply with the requirements of either paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of 
this section, except as provided for in paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section. Compliance can be based on either organic HAP or TOC.
    (1) For each batch process vent, reduce organic HAP emissions using 
a flare.
    (i) The flare shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b).
    (ii) Halogenated batch process vents, as defined in Sec. 63.1312, 
shall not be vented to a flare.
    (2) For each batch process vent, reduce organic HAP emissions for 
the batch cycle by 90 weight percent using a control device. Owners or 
operators may achieve compliance with this paragraph (a)(2) through the 
control of selected batch emission episodes or the control of portions 
of selected batch emission episodes. Documentation demonstrating how the 
90 weight percent emission reduction is achieved is required by 
Sec. 63.1325(c)(2).
    (3) The owner or operator of a new affected source producing SAN 
using a batch process shall reduce organic HAP emissions from the 
collection of batch process vents, aggregate batch vent streams, and 
continuous process vents by 84 weight percent. Compliance with this 
paragraph (a)(3) shall be demonstrated using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1333(c).
    (b) Aggregate batch vent streams. The owner or operator of an 
aggregate batch vent stream that contains one or more Group 1 batch 
process vents shall comply with the requirements of either paragraph 
(b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section, except as provided for in paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section. Compliance

[[Page 201]]

can be based on either organic HAP or TOC.
    (1) For each aggregate batch vent stream, reduce organic HAP 
emissions using a flare.
    (i) The flare shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b).
    (ii) Halogenated aggregate batch vent streams, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1312, shall not be vented to a flare.
    (2) For each aggregate batch vent stream, reduce organic HAP 
emissions by 90 weight percent or to a concentration of 20 parts per 
million by volume, whichever is less stringent, on a continuous basis 
using a control device. For purposes of complying with the 20 parts per 
million by volume outlet concentration standard, the outlet 
concentration shall be calculated on a dry basis. When a combustion 
device is used for purposes of complying with the 20 parts per million 
by volume outlet concentration standard, the concentration shall be 
corrected to 3 percent oxygen if supplemental combustion air is used to 
combust the emissions. If supplemental combustion air is not used, a 
correction to 3 percent oxygen is not required.
    (3) The owner or operator of a new affected source producing SAN 
using a batch process shall comply with paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section.
    (c) Halogenated emissions. Halogenated Group 1 batch process vents, 
halogenated aggregate batch vent streams, and halogenated continuous 
process vents that are combusted as part of complying with paragraph 
(a)(2), (a)(3), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section, as appropriate, shall 
be controlled according to either paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this 
section.
    (1) If a combustion device is used to comply with paragraph (a)(2), 
(a)(3), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section for a halogenated batch 
process vent, halogenated aggregate batch vent stream, or halogenated 
continuous process vent, said emissions shall be ducted from the 
combustion device to an additional control device that reduces overall 
emissions of hydrogen halides and halogens by 99 percent before said 
emissions are discharged to the atmosphere.
    (2) A control device may be used to reduce the halogen atom mass 
emission rate of said emissions to less than 3,750 kg/yr for batch 
process vents or aggregate batch vent streams and to less than 0.45 
kilograms per hour for continuous process vents prior to venting to any 
combustion control device, and thus make the batch process vent, 
aggregate batch vent stream, or continuous process vent nonhalogenated. 
The nonhalogenated batch process vent, aggregate batch vent stream, or 
continuous process vent must then comply with the requirements of either 
paragraph (a) or (b) of this section, as appropriate.
    (d) If a boiler or process heater is used to comply with the percent 
reduction requirement specified in paragraph (a)(2), (a)(3), (b)(2), or 
(b)(3) of this section, the batch process vent, aggregate batch vent 
stream, or continuous process vent shall be introduced into the flame 
zone of such a device.
    (e) Combination of batch process vents or aggregate batch vent 
streams with continuous process vents. A batch process vent or aggregate 
batch vent stream combined with a continuous process vent is not subject 
to the provisions of Secs. 63.1323 through 63.1327, providing the 
requirements of paragraphs (e)(1), (e)(2), and either (e)(3) or (e)(4) 
of this section are met.
    (1) The batch process vent or aggregate batch vent stream is 
combined with a continuous process vent prior to routing the continuous 
process vent to a control or recovery device. In this paragraph (e)(1), 
the definitions of control device and recovery device as they relate to 
continuous process vents shall be used.
    (2) The only emissions to the atmosphere from the batch process vent 
or aggregate batch vent stream prior to being combined with the 
continuous process vent are from equipment subject to and in compliance 
with Sec. 63.1331.
    (3) If the batch process vent or aggregate batch vent stream is 
combined with a continuous process vent prior to being routed to a 
control device, the combined vent stream shall comply with the 
requirements in Sec. 63.1315(a)(10). In this paragraph (e)(3), the 
definition of control device as it relates to continuous process vents 
shall be used.

[[Page 202]]

    (4) If the batch process vent or aggregate batch vent stream is 
combined with a continuous process vent prior to being routed to a 
recovery device, the combined vent stream shall comply with the 
requirements in Sec. 63.1315(a)(11). In this paragraph (e)(4), the 
definition of recovery device as it relates to continuous process vents 
shall be used.
    (f) Group 2 batch process vents with annual emissions greater than 
or equal to the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d). The owner or 
operator of a Group 2 batch process vent with annual emissions greater 
than or equal to the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d) shall comply 
with the provisions of (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section.
    (1) Establish a batch cycle limitation that ensures the Group 2 
batch process vent does not become a Group 1 batch process vent.
    (2) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements in 
Sec. 63.1326(d)(2), and the reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1327 
(a)(3) and (b).
    (g) Group 2 batch process vents with annual emissions less than the 
level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d). The owner or operator of a Group 2 
batch process vent with annual emissions less than the level specified 
in Sec. 63.1323(d) shall comply with either paragraphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) 
of this section or with paragraphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section.
    (1) Establish a batch cycle limitation that ensures emissions do not 
exceed the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d).
    (2) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements in 
Sec. 63.1326(d)(1), and the reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1327 
(a)(2), (b), and (c).

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1323  Batch process vents--methods and procedures for group determination.

    (a) General requirements. Except as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of 
this section and in Sec. 63.1321(b)(1), the owner or operator of batch 
process vents at affected sources shall determine the group status of 
each batch process vent in accordance with the provisions of this 
section. This determination may be based on either organic HAP or TOC 
emissions.
    (1) The procedures specified in paragraphs (b) through (h) of this 
section shall be followed for the expected mix of products for a given 
batch process vent, as specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, 
or for the worst-case HAP emitting product, as specified in paragraphs 
(a)(1)(ii) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section. ``Worst-case HAP emitting 
product'' is defined in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section.
    (i) If an owner or operator chooses to follow the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (b) through (h) of this section for the expected 
mix of products, an identification of the different products and the 
number of batch cycles accomplished for each is required as part of the 
group determination documentation, as specified in Sec. 63.1326(a)(1).
    (ii) If an owner or operator chooses to follow the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (b) through (h) of this section for the worst-
case HAP emitting product, documentation identifying the worst-case HAP 
emitting product is required as part of the group determination 
documentation, as specified in Sec. 63.1326(a)(1).
    (iii) Except as specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iii)(B) of this 
section, the worst-case HAP emitting product is as defined in paragraph 
(a)(1)(iii)(A) of this section.
    (A) The worst-case HAP emitting product is the one with the highest 
mass emission rate (kg organic HAP per hour) averaged over the entire 
time period of the batch cycle.
    (B) Alternatively, when one product is produced more than 75 percent 
of the time, accounts for more than 75 percent of the annual mass of 
product, and the owner or operator can show that the mass emission rate 
(kg organic HAP per hour) averaged over the entire time period of the 
batch cycle can reasonably be expected to be similar to the mass 
emission rate for other products having emissions from the same batch 
process vent, said product may be considered the worst-case HAP emitting 
product.
    (C) An owner or operator shall determine the worst-case HAP emitting 
product for a batch process vent as specified in paragraphs 
(a)(1)(iii)(C)(1) through (a)(1)(iii)(C)(3) of this section.

[[Page 203]]

    (1) The emissions per batch emission episode shall be determined 
using any of the procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section. 
The mass emission rate (kg organic HAP per hour) averaged over the 
entire time period of the batch cycle shall be determined by summing the 
emissions for each batch emission episode making up a complete batch 
cycle and dividing by the total duration in hours of the batch cycle.
    (2) To determine the worst-case HAP emitting product as specified 
under paragraph (a)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the mass emission rate 
for each product shall be determined and compared.
    (3) To determine the worst-case HAP emitting product as specified 
under paragraph (a)(1)(iii)(B) of this section, the mass emission rate 
for the product meeting the time and mass criteria of paragraph 
(a)(1)(iii)(B) of this section shall be determined, and the owner or 
operator shall provide adequate information to demonstrate that the mass 
emission rate for said product is similar to the mass emission rates for 
the other products having emissions from the same batch process vent. In 
addition, the owner or operator shall provide information demonstrating 
that the selected product meets the time and mass criteria of paragraph 
(a)(1)(iii)(B) of this section.
    (iv) The annual production of the worst-case HAP emitting product 
shall be determined by ratioing the production time of said product up 
to a 12 month period of actual production. It is not necessary to ratio 
up to a maximum production rate (i.e., 8,760 hours per year at maximum 
design production).
    (2) The annual uncontrolled organic HAP or TOC emissions and annual 
average batch vent flow rate shall be determined at the exit from the 
batch unit operation. For the purposes of these determinations, the 
primary condenser operating as a reflux condenser on a reactor or 
distillation column, the primary condenser recovering monomer, reaction 
products, by-products, or solvent from a stripper operated in batch 
mode, and the primary condenser recovering monomer, reaction products, 
by-products, or solvent from a distillation operation operated in batch 
mode shall be considered part of the batch unit operation. All other 
devices that recover or oxidize organic HAP or TOC vapors shall be 
considered control devices as defined in Sec. 63.1312.
    (3) The owner or operator of a batch process vent complying with the 
flare provisions in Sec. 63.1322(a)(1) or Sec. 63.1322(b)(1) or routing 
the batch process vent to a control device to comply with the 
requirements in Sec. 63.1322(a)(2) or Sec. 63.1322(b)(2) is not required 
to perform the batch process vent group determination described in this 
section, but shall comply with all requirements applicable to Group 1 
batch process vents for said batch process vent.
    (b) Determination of annual emissions. The owner or operator shall 
calculate annual uncontrolled TOC or organic HAP emissions for each 
batch process vent using the methods described in paragraphs (b)(1) 
through (b)(8) of this section. Paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of this 
section present procedures that can be used to calculate the emissions 
from individual batch emission episodes. Emissions from batch processes 
involving multicomponent systems are to be calculated using the 
procedures in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of this section. 
Individual HAP partial pressures in multicomponent systems shall be 
determined by the following methods: If the components are miscible in 
one another, use Raoult's law to calculate the partial pressures; if the 
solution is a dilute aqueous mixture use Henry's law constants to 
calculate partial pressures; if Raoult's law or Henry's law are not 
appropriate (or available) use experimentally obtained activity 
coefficients, Henry's law constants, or solubility data; if Raoult's law 
or Henry's law are not appropriate use models, such as the group-
contribution models, to predict activity coefficients; and if Raoult's 
law or Henry's law are not appropriate assume the components of the 
system behave independently and use the summation of all vapor pressures 
from the HAP's as the total HAP partial pressure. Chemical property data 
can be obtained from standard reference texts. Paragraph

[[Page 204]]

(b)(5) of this section describes how direct measurement can be used to 
estimate emissions. If the owner or operator can demonstrate that the 
procedures in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of this section are not 
appropriate to estimate emissions from a batch emission episode, 
emissions may be estimated using engineering assessment, as described in 
paragraph (b)(6) of this section. Owners or operators are not required 
to demonstrate that direct measurement is not appropriate before 
utilizing engineering assessment. Paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section 
describes how an owner or operator shall demonstrate that the procedures 
in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of this section are not appropriate. 
Emissions from a batch cycle shall be calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(7) of this section, and annual emissions from the batch 
process vent shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(8) of 
this section.
    (1) TOC or organic HAP emissions from the purging of an empty vessel 
shall be calculated using Equation 2 of this subpart. Equation 2 of this 
subpart does not take into account evaporation of any residual liquid in 
the vessel.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.001


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
Vves=Volume of vessel, m3.
P=TOC or total organic HAP partial pressure, kPa.
MWwavg=Weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic 
HAP in vapor, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of 
this section, kg/kmol.
R=Ideal gas constant, 8.314 m3kPa/kmolK.
T=Temperature of vessel vapor space, K.
m=Number of volumes of purge gas used.

    (2) TOC or organic HAP emissions from the purging of a filled vessel 
shall be calculated using Equation 3 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.002


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
y=Saturated mole fraction of all TOC or organic HAP in vapor phase.
Vdr=Volumetric gas displacement rate, m3/min.
P=Pressure in vessel vapor space, kPa.
MWwavg=Weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic 
HAP in vapor, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of 
this section, kg/kmol.
R=Ideal gas constant, 8.314 m3kPa/kmolK.
T=Temperature of vessel vapor space, K.
Pi=Vapor pressure of TOC or individual organic HAP i, kPa.
xi=Mole fraction of TOC or organic HAP i in the liquid.
n=Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated.
Tm=Minutes/episode.

    (3) Emissions from vapor displacement due to transfer of material 
into

[[Page 205]]

or out of a vessel shall be calculated using Equation 4 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.003


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
y=Saturated mole fraction of all TOC or organic HAP in vapor phase.
V=Volume of gas displaced from the vessel, m3.
P=Pressure in vessel vapor space, kPa.
MWwavg=Weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic 
HAP in vapor, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(i)(D) of 
this section, kg/kmol.
R=Ideal gas constant, 8.314 m3kPa/kmolK.
T=Temperature of vessel vapor space, K.

    (4) Emissions caused by the heating of a vessel shall be calculated 
using the procedures in either paragraphs (b)(4)(i), (b)(4)(ii), or 
(b)(4)(iii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) If the final temperature to which the vessel contents is heated 
is lower than 50 K below the boiling point of the HAP in the vessel, 
then emissions shall be calculated using the equations in paragraphs 
(b)(4)(i)(A) through (b)(4)(i)(D) of this section.
    (A) Emissions caused by heating of a vessel shall be calculated 
using Equation 5 of this subpart. The assumptions made for this 
calculation are atmospheric pressure of 760 millimeters of mercury (mm 
Hg) and the displaced gas is always saturated with volatile organic 
compounds (VOC) vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.004


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
(Pi)T1, (Pi)T2=Partial pressure (kPa) of TOC or 
each organic HAP i in the vessel headspace at initial (T1) and final 
(T2) temperature.
n=Number of organic HAP in stream. Note: Summation not required if TOC 
emissions are being estimated.
trianglen=Number of kilogram-moles (kg-moles) of 
gas displaced, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(i)(B) of 
this section.
101.325=Constant, kPa.
MWwavg=Weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic 
HAP in vapor, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(i)(D) of 
this section, kg/kmol.

    (B) The moles of gas displaced, trianglen, is 
calculated using Equation 6 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.005


where:

trianglen=Number of kg-moles of gas displaced.
Vfs=Volume of free space in the vessel, m3.
R=Ideal gas constant, 8.314 m3kPa/kmolK.

[[Page 206]]

Pa1=Initial noncondensible gas pressure in the vessel, kPa.
Pa2=Final noncondensible gas pressure, kPa.
T1=Initial temperature of vessel, K.
T2=Final temperature of vessel, K.

    (C) The initial and final pressure of the noncondensible gas in the 
vessel shall be calculated using Equation 7 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.006


where:

Pa=Initial or final partial pressure of noncondensible gas in the vessel 
headspace, kPa.
101.325=Constant, kPa.
(Pi)T=Partial pressure of TOC or each organic HAP i in the 
vessel headspace, kPa, at the initial or final temperature (T1 or T2).
n=Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated.
    (D) The weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic HAP in 
the displaced gas, MWwavg, shall be calculated using Equation 
8 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.007


where:

C=TOC or organic HAP component
n=Number of TOC or organic HAP components in stream.

    (ii) If the vessel contents are heated to a temperature greater than 
50 K below the boiling point, then emissions from the heating of a 
vessel shall be calculated as the sum of the emissions calculated in 
accordance with paragraphs (b)(4)(ii)(A) and (b)(4)(ii)(B) of this 
section.
    (A) For the interval from the initial temperature to the temperature 
50 K below the boiling point, emissions shall be calculated using 
Equation 5 of this subpart, where T2 is the temperature 50 K 
below the boiling point.
    (B) For the interval from the temperature 50 K below the boiling 
point to the final temperature, emissions shall be calculated as the 
summation of emissions for each 5 K increment, where the emissions for 
each increment shall be calculated using Equation 5 of this subpart.
    (1) If the final temperature of the heatup is lower than 5 K below 
the boiling point, the final temperature for the last increment shall be 
the final temperature for the heatup, even if the last increment is less 
than 5 K.
    (2) If the final temperature of the heatup is higher than 5 K below 
the boiling point, the final temperature for the last increment shall be 
the temperature 5 K below the boiling point, even if the last increment 
is less than 5 K.
    (3) If the vessel contents are heated to the boiling point and the 
vessel is not operating with a condenser, the final temperature for the 
final increment shall be the temperature 5 K below the boiling point, 
even if the last increment is less than 5 K.
    (iii) If the vessel is operating with a condenser, and the vessel 
contents are heated to the boiling point, the primary condenser, as 
specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, is considered part of the 
process. Emissions shall be calculated as the sum of emissions 
calculated using Equation 5 of this subpart, which calculates emissions 
due to heating the vessel contents to the temperature of the gas 
existing the condenser, and emissions calculated using Equation 4 of 
this subpart, which calculates emissions due to the displacement of the 
remaining saturated noncondensible gas in the

[[Page 207]]

vessel. The final temperature in Equation 5 of this subpart shall be set 
equal to the exit gas temperature of the condenser. Equation 4 of this 
subpart shall be used as written below in Equation 4a of this subpart, 
using free space volume, and T is set equal to the condenser exit gas 
temperature.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.008


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
y=Saturated mole fraction of all TOC or organic HAP in vapor phase.
Vfs=Volume of the free space in the vessel, m3.
P=Pressure in vessel vapor space, kPa.
MWwavg=Weighted average molecular weight of TOC or organic 
HAP in vapor, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(i)(D) of 
this section, kg/kmol.
R=Ideal gas constant, 8.314 m3kPa/kmolK.
T=Temperature of condenser exit stream, K.

    (5) The owner or operator may estimate annual emissions for a batch 
emission episode by direct measurement. If direct measurement is used, 
the owner or operator shall either perform a test for the duration of a 
representative batch emission episode or perform a test during only 
those periods of the batch emission episode for which the emission rate 
for the entire episode can be determined or for which the emissions are 
greater than the average emission rate of the batch emission episode. 
The owner or operator choosing either of these options must develop an 
emission profile for the entire batch emission episode, based on either 
process knowledge or test data collected, to demonstrate that test 
periods are representative. Examples of information that could 
constitute process knowledge include calculations based on material 
balances and process stoichiometry. Previous test results may be used 
provided the results are still relevant to the current batch process 
vent conditions. Performance tests shall follow the procedures specified 
in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (b)(5)(iii) of this section. The 
procedures in either paragraph (b)(5)(iv) or (b)(5)(v) of this section 
shall be used to calculate the emissions per batch emission episode.
    (i) Method 1 or 1A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A as appropriate, shall 
be used for selection of the sampling sites if the flow measuring device 
is a pitot tube. No traverse is necessary when Method 2A or 2D, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A is used to determine gas stream volumetric flow 
rate.
    (ii) Gas stream volumetric flow rate and/or average flow rate shall 
be determined as specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (iii) Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be 
used to determine the concentration of TOC or organic HAP, as 
appropriate. Alternatively, any other method or data that has been 
validated according to the applicable procedures in Method 301 of 
appendix A of this part may be used. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A shall comply with paragraphs (b)(5)(iii)(A) and 
(b)(5)(iii)(B) of this section.
    (A) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (B) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (iv) If an integrated sample is taken over the entire batch emission 
episode to determine TOC or average total organic HAP concentration, 
emissions shall be calculated using Equation 9 of this subpart.

[[Page 208]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.009


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
K=Constant, 2.494  x  10-6 
(ppmv)-1 (gm-mole/scm) (kg/gm) (min/hr), where 
standard temperature is 20  deg.C.
Cj=Average concentration of TOC or sample organic HAP 
component j of the gas stream, dry basis, ppmv.
Mj=Molecular weight of TOC or sample organic HAP component j 
of the gas stream, gm/gm-mole.
AFR=Average flow rate of gas stream, dry basis, scmm.
Th=Hours/episode.
n=Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated 
using a TOC concentration measured using Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (v) If grab samples are taken to determine TOC or average total 
organic HAP concentration, emissions shall be calculated according to 
paragraphs (b)(5)(v)(A) and (b)(5)(v)(B) of this section.
    (A) For each measurement point, the emission rate shall be 
calculated using Equation 10 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.010


where:

Epoint=Emission rate for individual measurement point, kg/hr.
K=Constant, 2.494  x  10-6 (ppmv)-1 (gm-mole/scm) (kg/gm) 
(min/hr), where standard temperature is 20  deg.C.
Cj=Concentration of TOC or sample organic HAP component j of 
the gas stream, dry basis, ppmv.
Mj=Molecular weight of TOC or sample organic HAP component j 
of the gas stream, gm/gm-mole.
FR=Flow rate of gas stream for the measurement point, dry basis, scmm.
n=Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated 
using a TOC concentration measured using Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (B) The emissions per batch emission episode shall be calculated 
using Equation 11 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.011


where:

Eepisode=Emissions, kg/episode.
DUR=Duration of the batch emission episode, hr/episode.
Ei=Emissions for measurement point i, kg/hr.
n=Number of measurements.

    (6) If the owner or operator can demonstrate that the methods in 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(4) of this section are not appropriate to 
estimate emissions for a batch emissions episode, the owner or operator 
may use engineering assessment to estimate emissions as specified in 
paragraphs (b)(6)(i) and (b)(6)(ii) of this section. All data, 
assumptions, and procedures used in an engineering assessment shall be 
documented.
    (i) Engineering assessment includes, but is not limited to, the 
following:
    (A) Previous test results, provided the tests are representative of 
current operating practices;
    (B) Bench-scale or pilot-scale test data representative of the 
process under representative operating conditions;
    (C) Flow rate, TOC emission rate, or organic HAP emission rate 
specified or implied within a permit limit applicable to the batch 
process vent; and
    (D) Design analysis based on accepted chemical engineering 
principles, measurable process parameters, or physical or chemical laws 
or properties. Examples of analytical methods include, but are not 
limited to:
    (1) Use of material balances;
    (2) Estimation of flow rate based on physical equipment design such 
as pump or blower capacities; and

[[Page 209]]

    (3) Estimation of TOC or organic HAP concentrations based on 
saturation conditions.
    (ii) The emissions estimation equations in paragraphs (b)(1) through 
(b)(4) of this section shall be considered inappropriate for estimating 
emissions for a given batch emissions episode if one or more of the 
criteria in paragraphs (b)(6)(ii)(A) through (b)(6)(ii)(B) of this 
section are met.
    (A) Previous test data are available that show a greater than 20 
percent discrepancy between the test value and the estimated value.
    (B) The owner or operator can demonstrate to the Administrator that 
the emissions estimation equations are not appropriate for a given batch 
emissions episode.
    (C) Data or other information supporting a finding that the 
emissions estimation equations are inappropriate as specified under 
paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(A) of this section shall be reported in the 
Notification of Compliance Status, as required in Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (D) Data or other information supporting a finding that the 
emissions estimation equations are inappropriate as specified under 
paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(B) of this section shall be reported in the 
Precompliance Report, as required in Sec. 63.1335(e)(3).
    (7) For each batch process vent, the TOC or organic HAP emissions 
associated with a single batch cycle shall be calculated using Equation 
12 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.012

where:

Ecycle=Emissions for an individual batch cycle, kg/batch 
cycle
Eepisode i=Emissions from batch emission episode i, kg/
episode
n=Number of batch emission episodes for the batch cycle

    (8) Annual TOC or organic HAP emissions from a batch process vent 
shall be calculated using Equation 13 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.013


where:

AE=Annual emissions from a batch process vent, kg/yr.
Ni=Number of type i batch cycles performed annually, cycles/
year
Ecycle i=Emissions from the batch process vent associated 
with a single type i batch cycle, as determined in paragraph (b)(7) of 
this section, kg/batch cycle
n=Number of different types of batch cycles that cause the emission of 
TOC or organic HAP from the batch process vent

    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Minimum emission level exemption. A batch process vent with 
annual emissions less than 11,800 kg/yr is considered a Group 2 batch 
process vent and the owner or operator of said batch process vent shall 
comply with the requirements in Sec. 63.1322 (f) or (g). The owner or 
operator of said batch process vent is not required to comply with the 
provisions in paragraphs (e) through (g) of this section.
    (e) Determination of average flow rate. The owner or operator shall 
determine the average flow rate for each batch emission episode in 
accordance with one of the procedures provided in paragraphs (e)(1) 
through (e)(2) of this section. The annual average flow rate for a batch 
process vent shall be calculated as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of 
this section.
    (1) Determination of the average flow rate for a batch emission 
episode by direct measurement shall be made using the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (e)(1)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The volumetric flow rate for a batch emission episode, in 
standard cubic meters per minute (scmm) at 20 deg. C, shall be 
determined using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as 
appropriate.
    (ii) The volumetric flow rate of a representative batch emission 
episode shall be measured every 15 minutes.
    (iii) The average flow rate for a batch emission episode shall be 
calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart.

[[Page 210]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.014


where:

AFRepisode = Average flow rate for the batch emission 
episode, scmm.
FRi = Flow rate for individual measurement i, scmm.
n = Number of flow rate measurements taken during the batch emission 
episode.

    (2) The average flow rate for a batch emission episode may be 
determined by engineering assessment, as defined in paragraph (b)(6)(i) 
of this section. All data, assumptions, and procedures used shall be 
documented.
    (3) The annual average flow rate for a batch process vent shall be 
calculated using Equation 15 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.015


where:

AFR = Annual average flow rate for the batch process vent, scmm.
DURi = Duration of type i batch emission episodes annually, 
hrs/yr.
AFRepisode,i = Average flow rate for type i batch emission 
episode, scmm.
n = Number of types of batch emission episodes venting from the batch 
process vent.

    (f) Determination of cutoff flow rate. For each batch process vent, 
the owner or operator shall calculate the cutoff flow rate using 
Equation 16 of this subpart.

CFR = (0.00437) (AE)-51.6 [Eq. 16]

where:

CFR = Cutoff flow rate, scmm.
AE = Annual TOC or organic HAP emissions, as determined in paragraph 
(b)(8) of this section, kg/yr.

    (g) Group 1/Group 2 status determination. The owner or operator 
shall compare the cutoff flow rate, calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (f) of this section, with the annual average flow rate, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(4) of this section. The 
group determination status for each batch process vent shall be made 
using the criteria specified in paragraphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this 
section.
    (1) If the cutoff flow rate is greater than or equal to the annual 
average flow rate of the stream, the batch process vent is classified as 
a Group 1 batch process vent.
    (2) If the cutoff flow rate is less than the annual average flow 
rate of the stream, the batch process vent is classified as a Group 2 
batch process vent.
    (h) Determination of halogenation status. To determine whether a 
batch process vent or an aggregate batch vent stream is halogenated, the 
annual mass emission rate of halogen atoms contained in organic 
compounds shall be calculated using the procedures specified in 
paragraphs (h)(1) through (h)(3) of this section.
    (1) The concentration of each organic compound containing halogen 
atoms (ppmv, by compound) for each batch emission episode shall be 
determined based on any one of the following procedures:
    (i) Process knowledge that no halogens or hydrogen halides are 
present in the process may be used to demonstrate that a batch emission 
episode is nonhalogenated. Halogens or hydrogen halides that are 
unintentionally introduced into the process shall not be considered in 
making a finding that a batch emission episode is nonhalogenated.
    (ii) Engineering assessment as discussed in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of 
this section.
    (iii) Concentration of organic compounds containing halogens and 
hydrogen halides as measured by Method 26 or 26A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (iv) Any other method or data that has been validated according to 
the applicable procedures in Method 301 of appendix A of this part.
    (2) The annual mass emissions of halogen atoms for a batch process 
vent shall be calculated using Equation 17 of this subpart.

[[Page 211]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.016


where:

Ehalogen = Mass of halogen atoms, dry basis, kg/yr.
K = Constant, 0.022 (ppmv)-1 (kg-mole per scm) (minute/yr), 
where standard temperature is 20 deg.C.
AFR = Annual average flow rate of the batch process vent, determined 
according to paragraph (e) of this section, scmm.
Mj,i = Molecular weight of halogen atom i in compound j, kg/
kg-mole.
Lj,i = Number of atoms of halogen i in compound j.
n = Number of halogenated compounds j in the batch process vent.
m = Number of different halogens i in each compound j of the batch 
process vent.
Cavgj = Average annual concentration of halogenated compound 
j in the batch process vent as determined by using Equation 18 of this 
subpart, dry basis, ppmv.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.017


where:

DURi = Duration of type i batch emission episodes annually, 
hrs/yr.
Ci = Average concentration of halogenated compound j in type 
i batch emission episode, ppmv.
n = Number of types of batch emission episodes venting from the batch 
process vent.

    (3) The annual mass emissions of halogen atoms for an aggregate 
batch vent stream shall be the sum of the annual mass emissions of 
halogen atoms for all batch process vents included in the aggregate 
batch vent stream.
    (i) Process changes affecting Group 2 batch process vents. Whenever 
process changes, as described in paragraph (i)(1) of this section, are 
made that affect one or more Group 2 batch process vents, the owner or 
operator shall comply with paragraphs (i) (2) and (3) of this section.
    (1) Examples of process changes include, but are not limited to, 
changes in production capacity, production rate, feedstock type, or 
catalyst type; or whenever there is replacement, removal, or 
modification of recovery equipment considered part of the batch unit 
operation as specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. An increase 
in the annual number of batch cycles beyond the batch cycle limitation 
constitutes a process change. For purposes of this paragraph (i), 
process changes do not include: process upsets; unintentional, temporary 
process changes; and changes that are within the margin of variation on 
which the original group determination was based.
    (2) For each batch process vent affected by a process change, the 
owner or operator shall redetermine the group status by repeating the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (b) through (g) of this section, as 
applicable; alternatively, engineering assessment, as described in 
paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, can be used to determine the 
effects of the process change.
    (3) Based on the results from paragraph (i)(2) of this section, 
owners or operators shall comply with either paragraph (i)(3) (i), (ii), 
or (iii) of this section.
    (i) If the redetermination described in paragraph (i)(2) of this 
section indicates that a Group 2 batch process vent has become a Group 1 
batch process vent as a result of the process change, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report as specified in Sec. 63.1327(b) and shall 
comply with the Group 1 provisions in Sec. 63.1322 through Sec. 63.1327 
in accordance with the compliance schedule described in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (ii) If the redetermination described in paragraph (i)(2) of this 
section indicates that a Group 2 batch process vent with annual 
emissions less than the

[[Page 212]]

level specified in paragraph (d) of this section, that is in compliance 
with Sec. 63.1322(g), now has annual emissions greater than or equal to 
the level specified in paragraph (d) of this section but remains a Group 
2 batch process vent, the owner or operator shall submit a report as 
specified in Sec. 63.1327(c) and shall comply with Sec. 63.1322(f) in 
accordance with the compliance schedule required by 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (iii) If the redetermination described in paragraph (i)(2) of this 
section indicates no change in group status or no change in the relation 
of annual emissions to the levels specified in paragraph (d) of this 
section, the owner or operator is not required to submit a report, as 
described in Sec. 63.1327(e).
    (j) Process changes to new SAN affected sources using a batch 
process. Whenever process changes, as described in paragraph (j)(1) of 
this section, are made to a new affected source producing SAN using a 
batch process, the owner or operator shall comply with paragraphs (j) 
(2) and (3) of this section.
    (1) Examples of process changes include, but are not limited to, 
changes in production capacity, production rate, feedstock type, or 
catalyst type; replacement, removal, or addition of recovery equipment 
considered part of a batch unit operation, as specified in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section; replacement, removal, or addition of control 
equipment associated with a continuous or batch process vent or an 
aggregate batch vent stream. For purposes of this paragraph (j)(1), 
process changes do not include process upsets or unintentional, 
temporary process changes.
    (2) The owner or operator shall redetermine the percent emission 
reduction achieved using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1333(c). If 
engineering assessment, as described in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this 
section, can demonstrate that the process change did not cause the 
percent emission reduction to decrease, it may be used in lieu of 
redetermining the percent reduction using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1333(c).
    (3) Where the redetermined percent reduction is less than 84 
percent, the owner or operator shall submit a report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1327(d) and shall comply with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) and all 
associated provisions in accordance with the compliance schedule 
described in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1324  Batch process vents--monitoring provisions.

    (a) General requirements. Each owner or operator of a batch process 
vent or aggregate batch vent stream that uses a control device to comply 
with the requirements in Sec. 63.1322(a) or Sec. 63.1322(b), shall 
install the monitoring equipment specified in paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (1) This monitoring equipment shall be in operation at all times 
when batch emission episodes, or portions thereof, that the owner or 
operator has selected to control are vented to the control device, or at 
all times when an aggregate batch vent stream is vented to the control 
device.
    (2) The owner or operator shall operate control devices such that 
monitored parameters remain above the minimum level or below the maximum 
level, as appropriate, established as specified in paragraph (f) of this 
section.
    (b) Continuous process vents. Each owner or operator of a continuous 
process vent that uses a control device or recovery device to comply 
with the requirements in Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) shall comply with the 
applicable requirements of Sec. 63.1315(a) as specified in 
Sec. 63.1321(b).
    (c) Batch process vent and aggregate batch vent stream monitoring 
parameters. The monitoring equipment specified in paragraphs (c)(1) 
through (c)(8) of this section shall be installed as specified in 
paragraph (a) of this section. The parameters to be monitored are 
specified in Table 7 of this subpart.
    (1) Where an incinerator is used, a temperature monitoring device 
equipped with a continuous recorder is required.
    (i) Where an incinerator other than a catalytic incinerator is used, 
the temperature monitoring device shall be installed in the firebox or 
in the ductwork immediately downstream of the firebox in a position 
before any substantial heat exchange occurs.

[[Page 213]]

    (ii) Where a catalytic incinerator is used, temperature monitoring 
devices shall be installed in the gas stream immediately before and 
after the catalyst bed.
    (2) Where a flare is used, a device (including but not limited to a 
thermocouple, ultra-violet beam sensor, or infrared sensor) capable of 
continuously detecting the presence of a pilot flame is required.
    (3) Where a boiler or process heater of less than 44 megawatts 
design heat input capacity is used, a temperature monitoring device in 
the firebox equipped with a continuous recorder is required. Any boiler 
or process heater in which all batch process vents or aggregate batch 
vent streams are introduced with the primary fuel or are used as the 
primary fuel is exempt from this requirement.
    (4) Where a scrubber is used with an incinerator, boiler, or process 
heater in concert with the combustion of halogenated batch process vents 
or halogenated aggregate batch vent streams, the following monitoring 
equipment is required for the scrubber.
    (i) A pH monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to 
monitor the pH of the scrubber effluent.
    (ii) A flow meter equipped with a continuous recorder shall be 
located at the scrubber influent to monitor the scrubber liquid flow 
rate.
    (5) Where an absorber is used, a scrubbing liquid temperature 
monitoring device and a specific gravity monitoring device are required, 
each equipped with a continuous recorder.
    (6) Where a condenser is used, a condenser exit temperature (product 
side) monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder is required.
    (7) Where a carbon adsorber is used, an integrating regeneration 
stream flow monitoring device having an accuracy of 10 
percent, capable of recording the total regeneration stream mass flow 
for each regeneration cycle; and a carbon bed temperature monitoring 
device, capable of recording the carbon bed temperature after each 
regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing any cooling cycle are 
required.
    (8) As an alternate to paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(7) of this 
section, the owner or operator may install an organic monitoring device 
equipped with a continuous recorder.
    (d) Alternative monitoring parameters. An owner or operator of a 
batch process vent or aggregate batch vent stream may request approval 
to monitor parameters other than those required by paragraph (c) of this 
section. The request shall be submitted according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1335(f). Approval shall be requested if the owner 
or operator:
    (1) Uses a control device other than those included in paragraph (c) 
of this section; or
    (2) Uses one of the control devices included in paragraph (c) of 
this section, but seeks to monitor a parameter other than those 
specified in Table 7 of this subpart and paragraph (c) of this section.
    (e) Monitoring of bypass lines. Owners or operators of a batch 
process vent or aggregate batch vent stream using a vent system that 
contains bypass lines that could divert emissions away from a control 
device used to comply with Sec. 63.1322(a) or Sec. 63.1322(b) shall 
comply with either paragraph (d)(1), (d)(2), or (d)(3) of this section. 
Equipment such as low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, 
open-ended valves or lines, and pressure relief valves needed for safety 
purposes are not subject to this paragraph (e).
    (1) Properly install, maintain, and operate a flow indicator that 
takes a reading at least once every 15 minutes. Records shall be 
generated as specified in Sec. 63.1326(e)(3). The flow indicator shall 
be installed at the entrance to any bypass line that could divert 
emissions away from the control device and to the atmosphere; or
    (2) Secure the bypass line valve in the non-diverting position with 
a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration. A visual inspection of 
the seal or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every 
month to ensure that the valve is maintained in the non-diverting 
position and emissions are not diverted through the bypass line. Records 
shall be generated as specified in Sec. 63.1326(e)(4).
    (3) Continuously monitor the bypass line valve position using 
computer monitoring and record any periods when the position of the 
bypass line

[[Page 214]]

valve has changed as specified in Sec. 63.1326(e)(4).
    (f) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels. Parameter 
monitoring levels for batch process vents and aggregate batch vent 
streams shall be established as specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through 
(f)(3) of this section. For continuous process vents complying with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(3), parameter monitoring levels shall be established as 
specified in Sec. 63.1315(a), except as specified in paragraph (f)(4) of 
this section.
    (1) For each parameter monitored under paragraph (c) of this 
section, the owner or operator shall establish a level, defined as 
either a maximum or minimum operating parameter as denoted in Table 8 of 
this subpart, that indicates proper operation of the control device. The 
level shall be established in accordance with the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.1334.
    (i) For batch process vents using a control device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(2), the established level shall reflect the control 
efficiency established as part of the initial compliance demonstration 
specified in Sec. 63.1325(c)(2).
    (ii) For aggregate batch vent streams using a control device to 
comply with Sec. 63.1322(b)(2), the established level shall reflect the 
control efficiency requirement specified in Sec. 63.1322(b)(2).
    (iii) For batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams using 
a control device to comply with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3), the established 
level shall reflect the control efficiency established as part of the 
initial compliance demonstration specified in Sec. 63.1325(f)(4).
    (2) The established level, along with supporting documentation, 
shall be submitted in the Notification of Compliance Status or the 
operating permit application as required in Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) or 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(8), respectively.
    (3) The operating day shall be defined as part of establishing the 
parameter monitoring level and shall be submitted with the information 
in paragraph (f)(2) of this section. The definition of operating day 
shall specify the times at which an operating day begins and ends. The 
operating day shall not exceed 24 hours.
    (4) For continuous process vents using a control or recovery device 
to comply with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3), the established level shall reflect 
the control efficiency established as part of the initial compliance 
demonstration specified in Sec. 63.1325(f)(4).



Sec. 63.1325  Batch process vents--performance test methods and procedures to determine compliance.

    (a) Use of a flare. When a flare is used to comply with 
Secs. 63.1322 (a)(1), (a)(3), (b)(1), or (b)(3), the owner or operator 
shall comply with the flare provisions in Sec. 63.11(b).
    (b) Exceptions to performance tests. An owner or operator is not 
required to conduct a performance test when a control device specified 
in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(5) of this section is used to comply 
with Sec. 63.1322 (a)(2) or (a)(3). Further, if a performance test 
meeting the conditions specified in paragraph (b)(6) of this section has 
been conducted by the owner or operator, the results of said performance 
test may be submitted and a performance test, as required by this 
section, is not required.
    (1) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 
44 megawatts or greater.
    (2) A boiler or process heater where the vent stream is introduced 
with the primary fuel or is used as the primary fuel.
    (3) A control device for which a performance test was conducted for 
determining compliance with a New Source Performance Standard (NSPS) and 
the test was conducted using the same procedures specified in this 
section and no process changes have been made since the test. Recovery 
devices used for controlling emissions from continuous process vents 
complying with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) are also eligible for the exemption 
described in this paragraph (b)(3).
    (4) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which the 
owner or operator:
    (i) Has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and 
complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; or

[[Page 215]]

    (ii) Has certified compliance with the interim status requirements 
of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (5) An incinerator burning hazardous waste for which the owner or 
operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O.
    (6) Performance tests done for other subparts in 40 CFR part 60 or 
part 63 where total organic HAP or TOC was measured, provided the owner 
or operator can demonstrate that operating conditions for the process 
and control device during the performance test are representative of 
current operating conditions.
    (c) Batch process vent testing and procedures for compliance with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(2). Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, 
an owner or operator using a control device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(2) shall conduct a performance test using the procedures 
specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section in order to determine the 
control efficiency of the control device. An owner or operator shall 
determine the percent reduction for the batch cycle using the control 
efficiency of the control device as specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) 
through (c)(2)(iii) of this section and the procedures specified in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section. Compliance may be based on either 
total organic HAP or TOC. For purposes of this paragraph (c) and all 
paragraphs that are part of this paragraph (c), the term ``batch 
emission episode'' shall have the meaning ``period of the batch emission 
episode selected for control,'' which may be the entire batch emission 
episode or may only be a portion of the batch emission episode.
    (1) Performance tests shall be conducted as specified in paragraphs 
(c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(v) of this section.
    (i) Except as specified in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) of this section, a 
test shall be performed for the entire period of each batch emission 
episode in the batch cycle that the owner or operator selects to control 
as part of achieving the required 90 percent emission reduction for the 
batch cycle specified in Sec. 63.1322(a)(2). Only one test is required 
for each batch emission episode selected by the owner or operator for 
control. The owner or operator shall follow the procedures listed in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(B) through (c)(1)(i)(D) of this section.
    (A) Alternatively, an owner or operator may choose to test only 
those periods of the batch emission episode during which the emission 
rate for the entire episode can be determined or during which the 
emissions are greater than the average emission rate of the batch 
emission episode. The owner or operator choosing either of these options 
must develop an emission profile for the entire batch emission episode, 
based on either process knowledge or test data collected, to demonstrate 
that test periods are representative. Examples of information that could 
constitute process knowledge include calculations based on material 
balances and process stoichiometry. Previous test results may be used 
provided the results are still relevant to the current batch process 
vent conditions.
    (B) Method 1 or 1A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as appropriate, 
shall be used for selection of the sampling sites if the flow measuring 
device is a pitot tube. No traverse is necessary when Method 2A or 2D, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A is used to determine gas stream volumetric 
flow rate. Inlet sampling sites shall be located as specified in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(B)(1) and (c)(1)(i)(B)(2) of this section. Outlet 
sampling sites shall be located at the outlet of the control device 
prior to release to the atmosphere.
    (1) The control device inlet sampling site shall be located at the 
exit from the batch unit operation before any control device. 
Sec. 63.1323(a)(2) describes those recovery devices considered part of 
the unit operation. Inlet sampling sites would be after these specified 
recovery devices.
    (2) If a batch process vent is introduced with the combustion air or 
as a secondary fuel into a boiler or process heater with a design 
capacity less than 44 megawatts, selection of the location of the inlet 
sampling sites shall ensure the measurement of total organic HAP or TOC 
(minus methane and ethane) concentrations in all batch process vents and 
primary and secondary fuels introduced into the boiler or process 
heater.

[[Page 216]]

    (C) Gas stream volumetric flow rate and/or average flow rate shall 
be determined as specified in Sec. 63.1323(e).
    (D) Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall be 
used to determine the concentration of organic HAP or TOC, as 
appropriate. Alternatively, any other method or data that has been 
validated according to the applicable procedures in Method 301 of 
appendix A of this part may be used. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(D)(1) and 
(c)(1)(i)(D)(2) of this section.
    (1) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (2) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (ii) If an integrated sample is taken over the entire test period to 
determine TOC or average total organic HAP concentration, emissions per 
batch emission episode shall be calculated using Equations 19 and 20 of 
this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.018

      
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.019
    

where:

Eepisode = Inlet or outlet emissions, kg/episode.
K = Constant, 2.494 x 10-6 (ppmv)-1 (gm-mole/scm) 
(kg/gm) (min/hr), where standard temperature is 20 deg.C.
Cj = Average inlet or outlet concentration of TOC or sample 
component j of the gas stream for the batch emission episode, dry basis, 
ppmv.
Mj = Molecular weight of TOC or sample component j of the gas 
stream, gm/gm-mole.
AFR = Average inlet or outlet flow rate of gas stream for the batch 
emission episode, dry basis, scmm.
Th = Hours/episode
n = Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated 
using a TOC concentration measured using Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (iii) If grab samples are taken to determine TOC or total organic 
HAP concentration, emissions shall be calculated according to paragraphs 
(c)(1)(iii) (A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) For each measurement point, the emission rates shall be 
calculated using Equations 21 and 22 of this subpart.

[[Page 217]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.020

      
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.021
    

where:

Epoint = Inlet or outlet emission rate for the measurement 
point, kg/hr.
K = Constant, 2.494 x 10-6 (ppmv)-1 (gm-mole/scm) 
(kg/gm) (min/hr), where standard temperature is 20 deg.C.
Cj = Inlet or outlet concentration of TOC or sample organic 
HAP component j of the gas stream, dry basis, ppmv.
Mj = Molecular weight of TOC or sample organic HAP component 
j of the gas stream, gm/gm-mole.
FR = Inlet or outlet flow rate of gas stream for the measurement point, 
dry basis, scmm.
n = Number of organic HAP in stream.
    Note: Summation not required if TOC emissions are being estimated 
using a TOC concentration measured using Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    (B) The emissions per batch emission episode shall be calculated 
using Equations 23 and 24 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.022

      
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.023
    

where:

Eepisode = Inlet or outlet emissions, kg/episode.
DUR = Duration of the batch emission episode, hr/episode.
Epoint,i = Inlet or outlet emissions for measurement point i, 
kg/hr.
n = Number of measurements.

    (iv) The control efficiency for the control device shall be 
calculated using Equation 25 of this subpart.

[[Page 218]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.024


where:

R = Control efficiency of control device, percent.
Einlet = Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP for batch 
emission episode i at the inlet to the control device as calculated 
under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) or (c)(1)(iii) of this section, kg/hr.
Eoutlet = Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP for batch 
emission episode i at the outlet of the control device, as calculated 
under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) or (c)(1)(iii) of this section, kg/hr.
n = Number of batch emission episodes in the batch cycle selected to be 
controlled.

    (v) If the batch process vent entering a boiler or process heater 
with a design capacity less than 44 megawatts is introduced with the 
combustion air or as a secondary fuel, the weight-percent reduction of 
total organic HAP or TOC across the device shall be determined by 
comparing the TOC or total organic HAP in all combusted batch process 
vents and primary and secondary fuels with the TOC or total organic HAP 
exiting the combustion device, respectively.
    (2) The percent reduction for the batch cycle shall be determined 
using Equation 26 of this subpart and the control device efficiencies 
specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(iii) of this section. 
All information used to calculate the batch cycle percent reduction, 
including a definition of the batch cycle identifying all batch emission 
episodes, must be recorded as specified in Sec. 63.1326(b)(2). This 
information shall include identification of those batch emission 
episodes, or portions thereof, selected for control.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.025


where:

PR = Percent reduction
Eunc = Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP for uncontrolled 
batch emission episode i, kg/hr.
Einlet,con = Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP for 
controlled batch emission episode i at the inlet to the control device, 
kg/hr.
R = Control efficiency of control device as specified in paragraphs 
(c)(2) (i) through (c) (2)(iii) of this section.
n = Number of uncontrolled batch emission episodes, controlled batch 
emission episodes, and control devices. The value of n is not 
necessarily the same for these three items.

    (i) If a performance test is required by paragraph (c) of this 
section, the control efficiency of the control device shall be as 
determined in paragraph (c)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (ii) If a performance test is not required by paragraph (c) of this 
section for a combustion control device, as specified in paragraph (b) 
of this section, the control efficiency shall be 98

[[Page 219]]

percent. The control efficiency for a flare shall be 98 percent.
    (iii) If a performance test is not required by paragraph (c) of this 
section for a noncombustion control device, the control efficiency shall 
be determined by the owner or operator based on engineering assessment.
    (d) Batch process vent and aggregate batch vent stream testing for 
compliance with Sec. 63.1322(c) [halogenated emission streams]. An owner 
or operator controlling halogenated emissions in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1322(c) shall conduct a performance test to determine compliance 
with the control efficiency specified in Sec. 63.1322(c)(1) or the 
emission limit specified in Sec. 63.1322(c)(2) for hydrogen halides and 
halogens.
    (1) Sampling sites shall be located at the inlet and outlet of the 
scrubber or other control device used to reduce halogen emissions in 
complying with Sec. 63.1322(c)(1) or at the outlet of the control device 
used to reduce halogen emissions in complying with Sec. 63.1322(c)(2).
    (2) The mass emissions of each hydrogen halide and halogen compound 
for the batch cycle or aggregate batch vent stream shall be calculated 
from the measured concentrations and the gas stream flow rate(s) 
determined by the procedures specified in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and 
(d)(2)(ii) of this section except as specified in paragraph (d)(5) of 
this section.
    (i) Method 26 or Method 26A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be 
used to determine the concentration, in Mg per dry scm, of total 
hydrogen halides and halogens present in the emissions stream.
    (ii) Gas stream volumetric flow rate and/or average flow rate shall 
be determined as specified in Sec. 63.1323(e).
    (3) To determine compliance with the percent reduction specified in 
Sec. 63.1322(c)(1), the mass emissions for any hydrogen halides and 
halogens present at the inlet of the scrubber or other control device 
shall be summed together. The mass emissions of any hydrogen halides or 
halogens present at the outlet of the scrubber or other control device 
shall be summed together. Percent reduction shall be determined by 
subtracting the outlet mass emissions from the inlet mass emissions and 
then dividing the result by the inlet mass emissions.
    (4) To determine compliance with the emission limit specified in 
Sec. 63.1322(c)(2), the annual mass emissions for any hydrogen halides 
and halogens present at the outlet of the control device and prior to 
any combustion device shall be summed together and compared to the 
emission limit specified in Sec. 63.1322(c)(2).
    (5) The owner or operator may use any other method to demonstrate 
compliance if the method or data has been validated according to the 
applicable procedures of Method 301 of appendix A of this part.
    (e) Aggregate batch vent stream testing for compliance with 
Sec. 63.1322(b)(2) or (b)(3). Except as specified in paragraphs (e)(1) 
through (e)(3) of this section, owners or operators of aggregate batch 
vent streams complying with Sec. 63.1322(b)(2) or (b)(3) shall conduct a 
performance test using the performance testing procedures for continuous 
process vents in Sec. 63.116(c).
    (1) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (2) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (3) When a combustion device is used to comply with the 20 parts per 
million by volume outlet concentration standard specified in 
Sec. 63.1322(b)(2), the correction to 3 percent oxygen specified in the 
performance testing procedures of Sec. 63.116(c)(3) and 
Sec. 63.116(c)(3)(iii) is only required when supplemental combustion air 
is used to combust the emissions, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (f) Compliance with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) [new SAN batch affected 
sources]. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, an owner 
or operator using a control or recovery device to comply with the 
percent reduction requirement in

[[Page 220]]

Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) shall conduct performance tests as specified in 
either paragraph (f)(1), (f)(2), or (f)(3) of this section, as 
applicable. Compliance with Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) shall be determined as 
specified in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
    (1) For batch process vents, performance tests shall be conducted 
using the procedures specified in paragraph (c) of this section, except 
that the owner or operator is not required to determine the percent 
reduction for the batch cycle as specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section.
    (2) For continuous process vents, performance tests shall be 
conducted as required by the applicable requirements of Sec. 63.1315(a) 
as specified in Sec. 63.1321(b).
    (3) For aggregate batch vent streams, performance tests shall be 
conducted as specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (4) Compliance with the percent reduction requirement of 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) shall be demonstrated using the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.1333(c) and the control device efficiencies specified in 
either paragraph (f)(4)(i) or (f)(4)(ii) of this section. Emissions for 
uncontrolled continuous process vents and aggregate batch vent streams 
shall be determined based on the direct measurement procedures specified 
in paragraph (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section, respectively, or based 
on engineering assessment, as specified in Sec. 63.1323(b)(6)(i). At the 
discretion of the owner or operator, emissions for uncontrolled batch 
process vents shall be determined based on any of the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (i) For noncombustion devices, the control efficiency shall be as 
determined by the performance test required by paragraph (f)(1), (f)(2), 
or (f)(3) of this section. Alternatively, if a performance test is not 
required by paragraph (c) of this section, the control efficiency shall 
be determined by the owner or operator based on engineering assessment.
    (ii) For combustion devices, the control efficiency shall be as 
determined by the performance test required by paragraph (f)(1), (f)(2), 
or (f)(3) of this section. Alternatively, if a performance test is not 
required, the control efficiency shall be 98 percent. The control 
efficiency for a flare shall be 98 percent.
    (g) Batch cycle limitation. The batch cycle limitation required by 
Sec. 63.1322 (f) and (g) shall be established as specified in paragraph 
(g)(1) of this section and shall include the elements specified in 
paragraph (g)(2) of this section.
    (1) The batch cycle limitation shall be determined by the owner or 
operator such that annual emissions for the batch process vent remain 
less than the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d) when complying with 
Sec. 63.1322(g). Alternatively, when complying with Sec. 63.1322(f), the 
batch cycle limitation shall ensure that annual emissions remain at a 
level such that said batch process vent remains a Group 2 batch process 
vent, given the actual annual flow rate for said batch process vent 
determined according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(e). The 
batch cycle limitation shall be determined using the same basis, as 
described in Sec. 63.1323(a)(1), used to make the group determination 
(i.e., expected mix of products or worst-case HAP emitting product). The 
establishment of the batch cycle limitation is not dependent upon any 
past production or activity level.
    (i) If the expected mix of products serves as the basis for the 
batch cycle limitation, the batch cycle limitation shall be determined 
such that any foreseeable combination of products which the owner or 
operator desires the flexibility to manufacture shall be allowed. 
Combinations of products not accounted for in the documentation required 
by paragraph (g)(2)(iv) of this section shall not be allowed within the 
restrictions of the batch cycle limitation.
    (ii) If, for a batch process vent with more than one product, a 
single worst-case HAP emitting product serves as the basis for the batch 
cycle limitation, the batch cycle limitation shall be determined such 
that the maximum number of batch cycles the owner or operator desires 
the flexibility to accomplish, using the worst-case HAP emitting product 
and ensuring that the batch process vent remains a Group 2 batch process 
vent or that emissions remain less than the level specified in

[[Page 221]]

Sec. 63.1323(d), shall be allowed. This value shall be the total number 
of batch cycles allowed within the restrictions of the batch cycle 
limitation regardless of which products are manufactured.
    (2) Documentation supporting the establishment of the batch cycle 
limitation shall include the information specified in paragraphs 
(g)(2)(i) through (g)(2)(v) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Identification that the purpose of the batch cycle limitation is 
to comply with Sec. 63.1322 (f)(1) or (g)(1).
    (ii) Identification that the batch cycle limitation is based on a 
single worst-case HAP emitting product or on the expected mix of 
products for said batch process vent as allowed under 
Sec. 63.1323(a)(1).
    (iii) Definition of operating year for purposes of determining 
compliance with the batch cycle limitation.
    (iv) If the batch cycle limitation is based on a single worst-case 
HAP emitting product, documentation specified in Sec. 63.1323 (a)(1)(ii) 
through (a)(1)(iv), as appropriate, describing how the single product 
meets the requirements for worst-case HAP emitting product and the 
number of batch cycles allowed under the batch cycle limitation.
    (v) If the batch cycle limitation is based on the expected mix of 
products, the owner or operator shall provide documentation that 
describes as many scenarios for differing mixes of products (i.e., how 
many batch cycles for each product) that the owner or operator desires 
the flexibility to accomplish. Alternatively, the owner or operator 
shall provide a description of the relationship among the mix of 
products that will allow a determination of compliance with the batch 
cycle limitation under an infinite number of scenarios. For example, if 
a batch process vent has two products, each product has the same flow 
rate and emits for the same amount of time, and product No. 1 has twice 
the emissions as product No. 2, the relationship describing an infinite 
number of scenarios would be that the owner or operator can accomplish 
two batch cycles of product No. 2 for each batch cycle of product No. 1 
within the restriction of the batch cycle limitation.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1326  Batch process vents--recordkeeping provisions.

    (a) Group determination records for batch process vents. Except as 
provided in paragraphs (a)(7) through (a)(9) of this section, each owner 
or operator of an affected source shall maintain the records specified 
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section for each batch 
process vent subject to the group determination procedures of 
Sec. 63.1323. Except for paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the records 
required by this paragraph (a) are restricted to the information 
developed and used to make the group determination under Sec. 63.1323(b) 
through Sec. 63.1323(g), as appropriate. The information required by 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section is required for all batch process vents 
subject to the group determination procedures of Sec. 63.1323. If an 
owner or operator did not need to develop certain information (e.g., 
annual average flow rate) to determine the group status, this paragraph 
(a) does not require that additional information be developed.
    (1) An identification of each unique product that has emissions from 
one or more batch emission episodes venting from the batch process vent.
    (2) A description of, and an emission estimate for, each batch 
emission episode, and the total emissions associated with one batch 
cycle for each unique product identified in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section that was considered in making the group determination under 
Sec. 63.1323.
    (3) Total annual uncontrolled TOC or organic HAP emissions, 
determined at the exit from the batch unit operation before any control 
device, determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (i) For Group 2 batch process vents, said emissions shall be 
determined at the batch cycle limitation.
    (ii) For Group 1 batch process vents, said emissions shall be those 
used to determine the group status of the batch process vent.
    (4) The annual average flow rate for the batch process vent, 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1323(e).
    (5) The cutoff flow rate, determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1323(f).
    (6) The results of the batch process vent group determination, 
conducted in accordance with Sec. 63.1323(g).

[[Page 222]]

    (7) If a batch process vent is in compliance with Sec. 63.1322 (a) 
or (b) and the control device is operating at all times when batch 
emission episodes are venting from the batch process vent, none of the 
records in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section are 
required.
    (8) If a batch process vent is in compliance with Sec. 63.1322 (a) 
or (b), but the control device is operated only during selected batch 
emission episodes, only the records in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) 
of this section are required.
    (9) If the total annual emissions from the batch process vent are 
less than the appropriate level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d), only the 
records in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section are 
required.
    (b) Compliance demonstration records. Each owner or operator of a 
batch process vent or aggregate batch vent stream complying with 
Sec. 63.1322 (a) or (b), shall keep the following records, as 
applicable, up-to-date and readily accessible:
    (1) The annual mass emissions of halogen atoms in the batch process 
vent or aggregate batch vent stream determined according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(h);
    (2) If a batch process vent is in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(2), records documenting the batch cycle percent 
reduction as specified in Sec. 63.1325(c)(2); and
    (3) When using a flare to comply with Sec. 63.1322 (a)(1), (a)(3), 
(b)(1), or (b)(3):
    (i) The flare design (i.e., steam-assisted, air-assisted or non-
assisted);
    (ii) All visible emission readings, heat content determinations, 
flow rate measurements, and exit velocity determinations made during the 
compliance determination required by Sec. 63.1325(a); and
    (iii) All periods during the compliance determination required by 
Sec. 63.1325(a) when the pilot flame is absent.
    (4) The following information when using a control device to meet 
the percent reduction requirement specified in Sec. 63.1322(a)(2), 
(a)(3), (b)(2), or (b)(3):
    (i) For an incinerator or non-combustion control device, the percent 
reduction of organic HAP or TOC achieved, as determined using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1325(c) for batch process vents and 
Sec. 63.1325(e) for aggregate batch vent streams;
    (ii) For a boiler or process heater, a description of the location 
at which the vent stream is introduced into the boiler or process 
heater;
    (iii) For a boiler or process heater with a design heat input 
capacity of less than 44 megawatts and where the vent stream is 
introduced with combustion air or used as a secondary fuel and is not 
mixed with the primary fuel, the percent reduction of organic HAP or TOC 
achieved, as determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1325(c) for batch process vents and Sec. 63.1325(e) for 
aggregate batch vent streams; and
    (iv) For a scrubber or other control device following a combustion 
device to control halogenated batch process vents or halogenated 
aggregate batch vent streams, the percent reduction of total hydrogen 
halides and halogens as determined under Sec. 63.1325(d)(3) or the 
emission limit determined under Sec. 63.1325(d)(4).
    (5) When complying with the 20 parts per million by volume outlet 
concentration standard specified in Sec. 63.1322(b)(2), records of the 
outlet concentration of organic HAP or TOC on a dry basis. If 
supplemental combustion air is used to combust the emissions, the outlet 
concentration shall be corrected to 3 percent oxygen. If supplemental 
combustion air is not used, a correction to 3 percent oxygen is not 
required.
    (c) Establishment of parameter monitoring level records. For each 
parameter monitored according to Sec. 63.1324(c) and Table 7 of this 
subpart, or for alternate parameters and/or parameters for alternate 
control devices monitored according to Sec. 63.1327(f) as allowed under 
Sec. 63.1324(d), maintain documentation showing the establishment of the 
level that indicates proper operation of the control device as required 
by Sec. 63.1324(f) for parameters specified in Sec. 63.1324(c) and as 
required by Sec. 63.1335(e) for alternate parameters. Said documentation 
shall include the parameter monitoring data used to establish the level.
    (d) Group 2 batch process vent continuous compliance records. The 
owner or operator of a Group 2 batch process

[[Page 223]]

vent shall comply with either paragraph (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this 
section, as appropriate.
    (1) The owner or operator of a Group 2 batch process vent complying 
with Sec. 63.1322(g) shall keep the following records up-to-date and 
readily accessible:
    (i) Records designating the established batch cycle limitation 
required by Sec. 63.1322(g)(1) and specified in Sec. 63.1325(g).
    (ii) Records specifying the number and type of batch cycles 
accomplished for each three month period.
    (2) The owner or operator of a Group 2 batch process vent complying 
with Sec. 63.1322(f) shall keep the following records up-to-date and 
readily accessible:
    (i) Records designating the established batch cycle limitation 
required by Sec. 63.1322(f)(1) and specified in Sec. 63.1325(g).
    (ii) Records specifying the number and type of batch cycles 
accomplished for each three month period.
    (e) Controlled batch process vent continuous compliance records. 
Each owner or operator of a batch process vent that uses a control 
device to comply with Sec. 63.1322(a) shall keep the following records, 
as applicable, up-to-date and readily accessible:
    (1) Continuous records of the equipment operating parameters 
specified to be monitored under Sec. 63.1324(c) as applicable, and 
listed in Table 7 of this subpart, or specified by the Administrator in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1327(f) as allowed under Sec. 63.1324(d). Said 
records shall be kept as specified under Sec. 63.1335(d), except as 
specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (e)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) For flares, the records specified in Table 7 of this subpart 
shall be kept rather than averages.
    (ii) For carbon adsorbers, the records specified in Table 7 of this 
subpart shall be kept rather than averages.
    (2) Records of the batch cycle daily average value of each 
continuously monitored parameter, except as provided in paragraph 
(e)(2)(iii) of this section, as calculated using the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) through (e)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The batch cycle daily average shall be calculated as the average 
of all parameter values measured for an operating day during those batch 
emission episodes, or portions thereof, in the batch cycle that the 
owner or operator has selected to control.
    (ii) Monitoring data recorded during periods of monitoring system 
breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero (low-level) and high-
level adjustments shall not be included in computing the batch cycle 
daily averages.
    (iii) If all recorded values for a monitored parameter during an 
operating day are above the minimum or below the maximum level 
established in accordance with Sec. 63.1324(f), the owner or operator 
may record that all values were above the minimum or below the maximum 
level established rather than calculating and recording a batch cycle 
daily average for that operating day.
    (3) Hourly records of whether the flow indicator for bypass lines 
specified in Sec. 63.1324(e)(1) was operating and whether a diversion 
was detected at any time during the hour. Also, records of the times of 
all periods when the vent is diverted from the control device or the 
flow indicator specified in Sec. 63.1324(e)(1) is not operating.
    (4) Where a seal or closure mechanism is used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1324(e)(2) or where computer monitoring of the position of the 
bypass valve is used to comply with Sec. 63.1324(e)(3), hourly records 
of flow are not required.
    (i) For compliance with Sec. 63.1324(e)(2), the owner or operator 
shall record whether the monthly visual inspection of the seals or 
closure mechanisms has been done, and shall record the occurrence of all 
periods when the seal mechanism is broken, the bypass line valve 
position has changed, or the key for a lock-and-key type configuration 
has been checked out, and records of any car-seal that has broken.
    (ii) For compliance with Sec. 63.1324(e)(3), the owner or operator 
shall record the times of all periods when the bypass line valve 
position has changed.
    (5) Records specifying the times and duration of periods of 
monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero 
(low-level) and high-

[[Page 224]]

level adjustments. In addition, records specifying any other periods of 
process or control device operation when monitors are not operating.
    (f) Aggregate batch vent stream continuous compliance records. In 
addition to the records specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this 
section, each owner or operator of an aggregate batch vent stream using 
a control device to comply with Sec. 63.1322(b) shall keep records in 
accordance with the requirements for continuous process vents in 
Sec. 63.118 (a) and (b), as applicable and as appropriate, except that 
when complying with Sec. 63.118(b), owners or operators shall disregard 
statements concerning TRE index values for the purposes of this subpart.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1327  Batch process vents--reporting requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of a batch process vent or aggregate batch 
vent stream at an affected source shall submit the information specified 
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this section, as appropriate, as 
part of the Notification of Compliance Status specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (1) For each batch process vent complying Sec. 63.1322(a) and each 
aggregate batch vent stream complying Sec. 63.1322(b), the information 
specified in Sec. 63.1326 (b) and (c), as applicable.
    (2) For each Group 2 batch process vent with annual emissions less 
than the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d), the information specified 
in Sec. 63.1326(d)(1)(i).
    (3) For each Group 2 batch process vent with annual emissions 
greater than or equal to the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d), the 
information specified in Sec. 63.1326(d)(2)(i).
    (4) For each batch process vent subject to the group determination 
procedures, the information specified in Sec. 63.1326(a), as 
appropriate.
    (b) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1323(i)(1), is 
made that causes a Group 2 batch process vent to become a Group 1 batch 
process vent, the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 
operating days after the process change is made or the information 
regarding the process change is known to the owner or operator. This 
report may be included in the next Periodic Report, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The following information shall be 
submitted:
    (1) A description of the process change; and
    (2) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of Sec. 63.1322 
(a) or (b), as appropriate, as required under 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (c) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1323(i)(1), is 
made that causes a Group 2 batch process vent with annual emissions less 
than the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d) that is in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1322(g) to have annual emissions greater than or equal to the 
level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d) but remains a Group 2 batch process 
vent, the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 operating 
days after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known to the owner or operator. This report may be 
included in the next Periodic Report, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The following information shall be 
submitted:
    (1) A description of the process change;
    (2) The results of the redetermination of the annual emissions, 
average flow rate, and cutoff flow rate required under Sec. 63.1323(i) 
and recorded under Sec. 63.1326 (a)(3) through (a)(5); and
    (3) The batch cycle limitation determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1322(f)(1).
    (d) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1323(j)(1), is 
made that causes the percent reduction for all process vents at a new 
SAN affected source using a batch process to be less than 84 percent, 
the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 operating days 
after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known to the owner or operator. This report may be 
included in the next Periodic Report, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2). The following information shall be 
submitted:
    (1) A description of the process change; and
    (2) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(3), as required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2).
    (e) The owner or operator is not required to submit a report of a 
process

[[Page 225]]

change if one of the conditions specified in paragraphs (e)(1) and 
(e)(2) of this section is met.
    (1) The process change does not meet the description of a process 
change in Sec. 63.1323 (i) or (j).
    (2) The redetermined group status remains Group 2 for an individual 
batch process vent with annual emissions greater than or equal to the 
level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d), a Group 2 batch process vent with 
annual emissions less than the level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d) 
complying with Sec. 63.1322(g) continues to have emissions less than the 
level specified in Sec. 63.1323(d), or the achieved emission reduction 
remains at 84 percent or greater for new SAN affected sources using a 
batch process.
    (f) If an owner or operator uses a control device other than those 
specified in Sec. 63.1324(c) and listed in Table 7 of this subpart or 
requests approval to monitor a parameter other than those specified 
Sec. 63.1324(c) and listed in Table 7 of this subpart, the owner or 
operator shall submit a description of planned reporting and 
recordkeeping procedures, as specified in Sec. 63.1335(f), as part of 
the Precompliance Report required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(3). The 
Administrator will specify appropriate reporting and recordkeeping 
requirements as part of the review of the Precompliance Report.
    (g) Owners or operators complying with Sec. 63.1324(e), shall comply 
with paragraph (g)(1) or (g)(2) of this section, as appropriate.
    (1) Reports of the times of all periods recorded under 
Sec. 63.1326(e)(3) when the batch process vent is diverted from the 
control device through a bypass line.
    (2) Reports of all occurrences recorded under Sec. 63.1326(e)(4) in 
which the seal mechanism is broken, the bypass line valve position has 
changed, or the key to unlock the bypass line valve was checked out.



Sec. 63.1328  Heat exchange systems provisions.

    (a) This section applies to each affected source with the exception 
of each process contact cooling tower that is associated with an 
affected source manufacturing PET. The owner or operator of said 
affected source shall comply with Sec. 63.104, with the differences 
noted in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    (b) When the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Sec. 63.104(b), the Periodic Report 
requirements contained in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6) shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (c) When an owner or operator invokes the delay of repair provisions 
as specified in Sec. 63.104(b)(3), the information required by 
Sec. 63.104 (b)(4)(i) through (b)(4)(v) shall be included in the next 
semi-annual Periodic Report required under Sec. 63.1335(e)(6), for the 
purposes of this subpart. If the leak remains unrepaired, the 
information shall also be submitted in each subsequent Periodic Report, 
until the repair of the leak is reported.
    (d) The compliance date for heat exchange systems subject to the 
provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1311.



Sec. 63.1329  Process contact cooling towers provisions.

    (a) This section applies to each new affected source that 
manufactures PET and each existing affected source that manufactures PET 
using a continuous terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end 
finisher process. The owner or operator a new affected source shall 
comply with paragraph (b) of this section. The owner or operator of an 
existing affected source that manufactures PET using a continuous 
terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end finisher process shall 
comply with paragraph (c) of this section. The compliance data for 
process contact cooling towers subject to the provisions of this section 
is specified in Sec. 63.1311.
    (b) New affected source requirements. The owner or operator of a new 
affected source subject to this section shall comply with paragraphs 
(b)(1) through (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator of a new affected source subject to this 
section shall not send contact condenser effluent associated with a 
vacuum system to a process contact cooling tower.
    (2) The owner or operator of a new affected source subject to this 
section shall indicate in the Notification of Compliance Status, as 
required in

[[Page 226]]

Sec. 63.1335(e)(5), that contact condenser effluent associated with 
vacuum systems is not sent to process contact cooling towers.
    (c) Existing affected source requirements. The owner or operator of 
an existing affected source subject to this section who manufactures PET 
using a continuous terephthalic acid high viscosity multiple end 
finisher process, and who is subject or becomes subject to 40 CFR part 
60, subpart DDD, shall maintain an ethylene glycol concentration in the 
cooling tower at or below 4.0 percent by weight averaged on a daily 
basis over a rolling 14-day period of operating days. Compliance with 
this paragraph (c) shall be determined as specified in paragraphs (c)(1) 
through (c)(4) of this section.
    (1) To determine the ethylene glycol concentration, owners or 
operators shall follow the procedures specified in 40 CFR 60.564(j)(1), 
except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (i) At least one sample per operating day shall be collected using 
the procedures specified in 40 CFR 60.564(j)(1)(i). An average ethylene 
glycol concentration by weight shall be calculated on a daily basis over 
a rolling 14-day period of operating days. Each daily average ethylene 
glycol concentration so calculated constitutes a performance test. 
Exceedance of the standard during the reduced testing program specified 
in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section is a violation of these 
standards.
    (ii) The owner or operator may elect to reduce the sampling program 
to any 14 consecutive day period once every two calendar months, if at 
least seventeen consecutive 14-day rolling average concentrations 
immediately preceding the reduced sampling program are each less than 
1.2 weight percent ethylene glycol. If the average concentration 
obtained over the 14 day sampling during the reduced test period exceeds 
the upper 95 percent confidence interval calculated from the most recent 
test results in which no one 14-day average exceeded 1.2 weight percent 
ethylene glycol, then the owner or operator shall reinstitute a daily 
sampling program. The 95 percent confidence interval shall be calculated 
as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section. A reduced program 
may be reinstituted if the requirements specified in this paragraph 
(c)(1)(ii) are met.
    (iii) The upper 95 percent confidence interval shall be calculated 
using the Equation 27 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.026


where:

Xi = daily ethylene glycol concentration for each day used to 
calculate each 14-day rolling average used in test results to justify 
implementing the reduced testing program.
n = number of ethylene glycol concentrations.

    (2) Measuring an alternative parameter, such as carbon oxygen demand 
or biological oxygen demand, that is demonstrated to be directly 
proportional to the ethylene glycol concentration shall be allowed. Such 
parameter shall be measured during the initial 14-day performance test 
during which the facility is shown to be in compliance with the ethylene 
glycol concentration standard whereby the ethylene glycol concentration 
is determined using the procedures described in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section. The alternative parameter shall be measured on a daily basis 
and the average value of the alternative parameter shall be calculated 
on a daily basis over a rolling 14-day period of operating days. Each 
daily average value of the alternative parameter constitutes a 
performance test.
    (3) During each performance test, daily measurement and daily 
average 14-day rolling averages of the ethylene

[[Page 227]]

glycol concentration in the cooling tower water shall be recorded. For 
the initial performance test, these records shall be submitted in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report.
    (4) All periods when the 14-day rolling average exceeds the standard 
shall be reported in the Periodic Report.



Sec. 63.1330  Wastewater provisions.

    (a) The owner or operator of each affected source shall comply with 
the requirements of Secs. 63.131 through 63.148, with the differences 
noted in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(12) of this section for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (1) When the determination of equivalence criteria in Sec. 63.102(b) 
is referred to in Secs. 63.132, 63.133, and 63.137, the provisions in 
Sec. 63.6(g) shall apply.
    (2) When the storage tank requirements contained in Secs. 63.119 
through 63.123 are referred to in Secs. 63.132 through 63.148, 
Secs. 63.119 through 63.123 are applicable, with the exception of the 
differences referred to in Sec. 63.1314, for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (3) When the owner or operator requests to use alternatives to the 
continuous operating parameter monitoring and recordkeeping provisions 
referred to in Sec. 63.151(g), or the owner or operator submits an 
operating permit application instead of an Implementation Plan as 
specified in Sec. 63.152(e), as referred to in Sec. 63.146(a)(3), 
Sec. 63.1335(g) and Sec. 63.1335(e)(8), respectively, shall apply for 
the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) When the Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in Secs. 63.146 and 63.147, 
the Notification of Compliance Status requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (5) When the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Secs. 63.146 and 63.147, the Periodic 
Report requirements contained in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6) shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When the Initial Notification Plan requirements in 
Sec. 63.151(b) are referred to in Sec. 63.146, the owner or operator of 
an affected source subject to this subpart need not comply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (7) When the Implementation Plan requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.151 are referred to in Sec. 63.146, the owner or operator of an 
affected source subject to this subpart need not comply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (8) When the term ``range'' is used in Sec. 63.143(f), the term 
``level'' shall be used instead for the purposes of this subpart. This 
level shall be determined using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1334.
    (9) For the purposes of this subpart, owners or operators are not 
required to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.138(e)(2) which 
specify that owners or operators shall demonstrate that 95 percent of 
the mass of HAP, as listed in Table 9 of subpart G of this part, is 
removed from the wastewater stream or combination of wastewater streams 
by the procedure specified in Sec. 63.145(i) for a biological treatment 
unit.
    (10) For the purposes of this subpart, owners or operators are not 
required to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.138(j)(3) which 
specify that owners or operators shall use the procedures specified in 
appendix C of this part to demonstrate compliance when using a 
biological treatment unit.
    (11) When the provisions of Sec. 63.139(c)(1)(ii) or the provisions 
of Sec. 63.145(e)(2)(ii)(B) specify that Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, shall be used, Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, may be used for the purposes of this subpart. The use of 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall comply with paragraphs 
(a)(11)(i) and (a)(11)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is 
acceptable if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at 
least 20 times the standard deviation of the response from the zero 
calibration gas when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive 
scale.
    (12) The compliance date for the affected source subject to the 
provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1311.
    (b) For each affected source, the owner or operator shall comply 
with the requirements for maintenance wastewater in Sec. 63.105, except 
that when

[[Page 228]]

Sec. 63.105(a) refers to ``organic HAPs,'' the definition of organic HAP 
in Sec. 63.1312 shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) The provisions of paragraph (b) of this section do not apply to 
each affected source producing ASA/AMSAN.
    (e) The provisions of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section 
do not apply to each affected source producing polystyrene using either 
a continuous or batch process.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1331  Equipment leak provisions.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
the owner or operator of each affected source shall comply with the 
requirements of subpart H of this part, with the differences noted in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section.
    (1) For an affected source producing polystyrene resin, the 
indications of liquids dripping, as defined in subpart H of this part, 
from bleed ports in pumps and agitator seals in light liquid service 
shall not be considered to be a leak. For purposes of this subpart, a 
``bleed port'' is a technologically-required feature of the pump or seal 
whereby polymer fluid used to provide lubrication and/or cooling of the 
pump or agitator shaft exits the pump, thereby resulting in a visible 
dripping of fluid.
    (2) The compliance date for the equipment leak provisions contained 
in this section is provided in Sec. 63.1311.
    (3) Owners and operators of an affected source subject to this 
subpart are not required to submit the Initial Notification required by 
Sec. 63.182(a)(1) and Sec. 63.182(b).
    (4) The Notification of Compliance Status required by paragraphs 
Sec. 63.182(a)(2) and Sec. 63.182(c) shall be submitted within 150 days 
(rather than 90 days) of the applicable compliance date specified in 
Sec. 63.1311 for the equipment leak provisions. Said notification can be 
submitted as part of the Notification of Compliance Status required by 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (5) The Periodic Reports required by Sec. 63.182(a)(3) and 
Sec. 63.182(d) may be submitted as part of the Periodic Reports required 
by Sec. 63.1335(e)(6).
    (6) For an affected source producing PET, an owner or operator shall 
comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a)(6)(i) and (a)(6)(ii) of 
this section instead of with the requirements of Sec. 63.169 for pumps, 
valves, connectors, and agitators in heavy liquid service; pressure 
relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service; and 
instrumentation systems.
    (i) A leak is determined to be detected if there is evidence of a 
potential leak found by visual, audible, olfactory, or any other 
detection method except that Method 21, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall 
not be used to determine if a leak is detected.
    (ii)(A) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, 
except as provided in Sec. 63.171.
    (B) The first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after each leak is detected.
    (C) Repaired shall mean that the visual, audible, olfactory, or 
other indications of a leak have been eliminated; that no bubbles are 
observed at potential leak sites during a leak check using soap 
solution; or that the system will hold a test pressure.
    (7) For each affected source producing PET, an owner or operator is 
not required to develop an initial list of identification numbers for 
the equipment identified in paragraph (a)(6) of this section (i.e., 
pumps, valves, connectors, and agitators in heavy liquid service; 
pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service; and 
instrumentation systems) as would otherwise be required under 
Sec. 63.181(b)(1)(i).
    (8) When the provisions of subpart H of this part specify that 
Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be used, Method 18 or 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, may be used for the purposes of 
this subpart. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall 
comply with paragraphs (a)(8)(i) and (a)(8)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume of the emissions.

[[Page 229]]

    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is 
acceptable if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at 
least 20 times the standard deviation of the response from the zero 
calibration gas when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive 
scale.
    (9) For purposes of this subpart, bottoms receivers and surge 
control vessels are not considered equipment for purposes of this 
section and are not subject to the requirements of subpart H of this 
part.
    (10) The owner or operator of each affected source shall substitute 
the phrase ``the provisions of subparts F, I, or JJJ of this part'' for 
both the phrases ``the provisions of subparts F or I of this part'' and 
the phrase ``the provisions of subpart F or I of this part'' throughout 
Secs. 63.163 and 63.168, for the purposes of this subpart. In addition, 
the owner or operator of each affected source shall substitute the 
phrase ``subparts F, I, and JJJ'' for the phrase ``subparts F and I'' in 
Sec. 63.174(c)(2)(iii), for the purposes of this subpart.
    (b) The provisions of this section do not apply to each TPPU 
producing PET using a process other than a continuous terephthalic acid 
(TPA) high viscosity multiple end finisher process that is part of an 
affected source if all of the components in the TPPU are either in 
vacuum service or in heavy liquid service.
    (1) Owners and operators of a TPPU exempted under paragraph (b) of 
this section shall retain at the facility information, data, and 
analyses used to demonstrate that all of the components in the exempted 
TPPU are either in vacuum service or in heavy liquid service. Such 
documentation shall include an analysis or demonstration that the 
process fluids do not meet the criteria of ``in light liquid service'' 
or ``in gas or vapor service.'' Examples of information that could 
document this include, but are not limited to, records of chemicals 
purchased for the process, analyses of process stream composition, 
engineering calculations, or process knowledge.
    (2) If changes occur at a TPPU exempted under paragraph (b) of this 
section such that all of the components in the TPPU are no longer either 
in vacuum service or in heavy liquid service (e.g., by either process 
changes or the addition of new components), the owner or operator shall 
comply with the provisions of this section for all of the components at 
the TPPU. The owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 days 
after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known to the owner or operator. This report may be 
included in the next Periodic Report, as specified in paragraph (a)(5) 
of this section. The following information shall be submitted:
    (i) A description of the process change; and
    (ii) A schedule for compliance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1331(a), as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A) and 
(b)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
    (A) The owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator for 
approval a compliance schedule and a justification for the schedule.
    (B) The Administrator shall approve the compliance schedule or 
request changes within 120 operating days of receipt of the compliance 
schedule and justification.
    (c) The provisions of this section do not apply to each affected 
source producing PET using a continuous TPA high viscosity multiple end 
finisher process.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 37722, July 15, 1997]



Sec. 63.1332  Emissions averaging provisions.

    (a) This section applies to owners or operators of existing affected 
sources who seek to comply with Sec. 63.1313(b) by using emissions 
averaging rather than following the provisions of Secs. 63.1314, 
63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 63.1321, and 63.1330.
    (1) The following emission point limitations apply to the use of 
these provisions:
    (i) All emission points included in an emissions average shall be 
from the same affected source. There may be an emissions average for 
each affected source located at a plant site.
    (ii)(A) If a plant site has only one affected source for which 
emissions averaging is being used to demonstrate

[[Page 230]]

compliance, the number of emission points allowed in the emissions 
average for said affected source is limited to twenty. This number may 
be increased by up to five additional emission points if pollution 
prevention measures are used to control five or more of the emission 
points included in the emissions average.
    (B) If a plant site has two or more affected sources for which 
emissions averaging is being used to demonstrate compliance, the number 
of emission points allowed in the emissions averages for said affected 
sources is limited to twenty. This number may be increased by up to five 
additional emission points if pollution prevention measures are used to 
control five or more of the emission points included in the emissions 
averages.
    (2) Compliance with the provisions of this section may be based on 
either organic HAP or TOC.
    (3) For the purposes of these provisions, whenever Method 18, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A, is specified within the paragraphs of this section 
or is specified by reference through provisions outside this section, 
Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, may be used. The 
use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall conform with the 
requirements in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (a)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (b) Unless an operating permit application has been submitted, the 
owner or operator shall develop and submit for approval an Emissions 
Averaging Plan containing all of the information required in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(4) for all emission points to be included in an 
emissions average.
    (c) Paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this section describe the 
emission points that may be used to generate emissions averaging credits 
if control was applied after November 15, 1990, and if sufficient 
information is available to determine the appropriate value of credits 
for the emission point. Paragraph (c)(6) of this section discusses the 
use of pollution prevention in generating emissions averaging credits.
    (1) Storage vessels, batch process vents, aggregate batch vent 
streams, continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1315, and process 
wastewater streams that are determined to be Group 2 emission points. 
The term ``continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1315'' includes 
continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(iii), 
(b)(2)(iii), and (c)(2), which reference Sec. 63.1315.
    (2) Continuous process vents located in the collection of material 
recovery sections within the affected source at an existing affected 
source producing PET using a continuous dimethyl terephthalate process 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) where the uncontrolled organic HAP 
emissions from said continuous process vents are equal to or less than 
0.12 kg organic HAP per Mg of product. These continuous process vents 
shall be considered Group 2 emission points for the purposes of this 
section.
    (3) Storage vessels, continuous process vents subject to 
Sec. 63.1315, and process wastewater streams that are determined to be 
Group 1 emission points and that are controlled by a technology that the 
Administrator or permitting authority agrees has a higher nominal 
efficiency than the reference control technology. Information on the 
nominal efficiencies for such technologies shall be submitted and 
approved as provided in paragraph (i) of this section.
    (4) Batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams that are 
determined to be Group 1 emission points and that are controlled to a 
level more stringent than the applicable standard.
    (5) Continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(i), 
(b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) located in the collection 
of process sections within the affected source, as specified in 
paragraphs (c)(5)(i) through (c)(5)(ii) of this

[[Page 231]]

section. The continuous process vents identified in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) 
through (c)(5)(ii) of this section shall be considered to be Group 1 
emission points for the purposes of this section.
    (i) Continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) 
located in the collection of material recovery sections within the 
affected source where the uncontrolled organic HAP emissions for said 
continuous process vents are greater than 0.12 kg organic HAP per Mg of 
product and said continuous process vents are controlled to a level more 
stringent than the applicable standard.
    (ii) Continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(ii), 
(b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) located in the collection of process 
sections within the affected source where the uncontrolled organic HAP 
emissions from said continuous process vents are controlled to a level 
more stringent than the applicable standard.
    (6) The percent reduction for any storage vessel, batch process 
vent, aggregate batch vent stream, continuous process vent, and process 
wastewater stream from which emissions are reduced by pollution 
prevention measures shall be determined using the procedures specified 
in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (i) For a Group 1 storage vessel, batch process vent, aggregate 
batch vent stream, continuous process vent, or process wastewater 
stream, the pollution prevention measure must reduce emissions more than 
if the applicable reference control technology or standard had been 
applied to the emission point instead of the pollution prevention 
measure, except as provided in paragraph (c)(6)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) If a pollution prevention measure is used in conjunction with 
other controls for a Group 1 storage vessel, batch process vent, 
aggregate batch vent stream, continuous process vent, or process 
wastewater stream, the pollution prevention measure alone does not have 
to reduce emissions more than the applicable reference control 
technology or standard, but the combination of the pollution prevention 
measure and other controls must reduce emissions more than if the 
applicable reference control technology or standard had been applied 
instead of the pollution prevention measure.
    (d) The following emission points cannot be used to generate 
emissions averaging credits:
    (1) Emission points already controlled on or before November 15, 
1990, cannot be used to generate credits unless the level of control is 
increased after November 15, 1990. In this case, credit will be allowed 
only for the increase in control after November 15, 1990.
    (2) Group 1 emission points, identified in paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section, that are controlled by a reference control technology cannot be 
used to generate credits unless the reference control technology has 
been approved for use in a different manner and a higher nominal 
efficiency has been assigned according to the procedures in paragraph 
(i) of this section.
    (3) Emission points for nonoperating TPPU cannot be used to generate 
credits. TPPU that are shutdown cannot be used to generate credits or 
debits.
    (4) Maintenance wastewater cannot be used to generate credits. 
Wastewater streams treated in biological treatment units cannot be used 
to generate credits. These two types of wastewater cannot be used to 
generate credits or debits. For the purposes of this section, the terms 
wastewater and wastewater stream are used to mean process wastewater.
    (5) Emission points controlled to comply with a State or Federal 
rule other than this subpart cannot be used to generate credits, unless 
the level of control has been increased after November 15, 1990, to a 
level above what is required by the other State or Federal rule. Only 
the control above what is required by the other State or Federal rule 
will be credited. However, if an emission point has been used to 
generate emissions averaging credit in an approved emissions average, 
and the emission point is subsequently made subject to a State or 
Federal rule other than this subpart, the emission point may continue to 
generate emissions averaging credit for the purpose of complying with 
the previously approved emissions average.
    (e) For all emission points included in an emissions average, the 
owner or

[[Page 232]]

operator shall perform the following tasks:
    (1) Calculate and record monthly debits for all Group 1 emission 
points that are controlled to a level less stringent than the reference 
control technology or standard for those emission points. Said Group 1 
emission points are identified in paragraphs (c)(3) through (c)(5) of 
this section. Equations in paragraph (g) of this section shall be used 
to calculate debits.
    (2) Calculate and record monthly credits for all Group 1 and Group 2 
emission points that are over-controlled to compensate for the debits. 
Equations in paragraph (h) of this section shall be used to calculate 
credits. Emission points and controls that meet the criteria of 
paragraph (c) of this section may be included in the credit calculation, 
whereas those described in paragraph (d) of this section shall not be 
included.
    (3) Demonstrate that annual credits calculated according to 
paragraph (h) of this section are greater than or equal to debits 
calculated for the same annual compliance period according to paragraph 
(g) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator may choose to include more than the 
required number of credit-generating emission points in an emissions 
average in order to increase the likelihood of being in compliance.
    (ii) The initial demonstration in the Emissions Averaging Plan or 
operating permit application that credit-generating emission points will 
be capable of generating sufficient credits to offset the debits from 
the debit-generating emission points shall be made under representative 
operating conditions. After the compliance date, actual operating data 
will be used for all debit and credit calculations.
    (4) Demonstrate that debits calculated for a quarterly (3-month) 
period according to paragraph (g) of this section are not more than 1.30 
times the credits for the same period calculated according to paragraph 
(h) of this section. Compliance for the quarter shall be determined 
based on the ratio of credits and debits from that quarter, with 30 
percent more debits than credits allowed on a quarterly basis.
    (5) Record and report quarterly and annual credits and debits in the 
Periodic Reports as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(6). Every fourth 
Periodic Report shall include a certification of compliance with the 
emissions averaging provisions as required by 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6)(x)(C)(2).
    (f) Debits and credits shall be calculated in accordance with the 
methods and procedures specified in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this 
section, respectively, and shall not include emissions during the 
following periods:
    (1) Emissions during periods of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction, 
as described in the Start-up, Shutdown, and Malfunction Plan.
    (2) Emissions during periods of monitoring excursions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1334(d). For these periods, the calculation of monthly credits 
and debits shall be adjusted as specified in paragraphs (f)(2)(i) 
through (f)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i) No credits would be assigned to the credit-generating emission 
point.
    (ii) Maximum debits would be assigned to the debit-generating 
emission point.
    (iii) The owner or operator may demonstrate to the Administrator 
that full or partial credits or debits should be assigned using the 
procedures in paragraph (l) of this section.
    (g) Debits are generated by the difference between the actual 
emissions from a Group 1 emission point that is uncontrolled or is 
controlled to a level less stringent than the applicable reference 
control technology or standard and the emissions allowed for the Group 1 
emission point. Said Group 1 emission points are identified in 
paragraphs (c)(3) through (c)(5) of this section. Debits shall be 
calculated as follows:
    (1) Source-wide debits shall be calculated using Equation 28 of this 
subpart. Debits and all terms of Equation 28 of this subpart are in 
units of megagrams per month:

[[Page 233]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.008

Where:
ECPViACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 continuous process 
vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 that is uncontrolled or is controlled to 
a level less stringent than the applicable reference control technology. 
ECPViACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph (g)(2) of 
this section.
(0.02)ECPViu = Emissions from each Group 1 continuous process 
vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 if the applicable reference control 
technology had been applied to the uncontrolled emissions. 
ECPViu is calculated according to paragraph (g)(2) of this 
section.
ECPVSjACTUAL = Emissions from Group 1 continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), 
(b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) located in the collection of process sections j 
within the affected source that are uncontrolled or controlled to a 
level less stringent than the applicable standard. 
ECPVSjACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph (g)(3) of 
this section.
ECPVSjSTD = Emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or 
(c)(1) located in the collection of process sections j within the 
affected source if the applicable standard had been applied to the 
uncontrolled emissions. ECPVSjSTD is calculated according to 
paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
ESiACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i that 
is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less stringent than the 
applicable reference control technology or standard. 
ESiACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph (g)(4) of this 
section.
(BL)ESiu = Emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i if 
the applicable reference control technology or standard had been applied 
to the uncontrolled emissions. ESiu is calculated according 
to paragraph (g)(4) of this section. For calculating emissions, BL = 
0.05 for each Group 1 storage vessel i subject to Sec. 63.1314(a); and 
BL = 0.02 for each storage vessel i subject to Sec. 63.1314(c).
EWWiACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i 
that is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less stringent than the 
applicable reference control technology. EWWiACTUAL is 
calculated according to paragraph (g)(5) of this section.
EWWic = Emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i if 
the reference control technology had been applied to the uncontrolled 
emissions. EWWic is calculated according to paragraph (g)(5) 
of this section.
EBPViACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 batch process vent 
i that is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less stringent than 
the applicable standard. EBPVACTUAL is calculated according 
to paragraph (g)(6) of this section.
(0.10)EBPViu = Emissions from each Group 1 batch process vent 
i if the applicable standard had been applied to the uncontrolled 
emissions. EBPViu is calculated according to paragraph (g)(6) 
of this section.
EABViACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 aggregate batch 
vent stream i that is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less 
stringent than the applicable standard. EABPViACTUAL is 
calculated according to paragraph (g)(7) of this section.
(0.10)EABViu = Emissions from each Group 1 aggregate batch 
vent stream i if the applicable standard had been applied to the 
uncontrolled emissions. EABViu is calculated according to 
paragraph (g)(7) of this section.
n = The number of emission points being included in the emissions 
average.

    (2) Emissions from continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1315 
shall be calculated as follows:
    (i) For purposes of determining continuous process vent stream flow 
rate, organic HAP concentrations, and temperature, the sampling site 
shall be after the final product recovery device, if any recovery 
devices are present; before any control device (for continuous process 
vents, recovery devices shall not be considered control devices); and 
before discharge to the atmosphere. Method 1 or 1A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, shall be used for selection of the sampling site.

[[Page 234]]

    (ii) ECPViu for each continuous process vent i shall be 
calculated using Equation 29 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.028

where:

ECPViu=Uncontrolled continuous process vent emission rate 
from continuous process vent i, megagrams per month.
Q=Vent stream flow rate, dry standard cubic meters per minute, measured 
using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as 
appropriate.
h=Monthly hours of operation during which positive flow is present in 
the continuous process vent, hours per month.
Cj=Concentration, parts per million by volume, dry basis, of organic HAP 
j as measured by Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
Mj=Molecular weight of organic HAP j, gram per gram-mole.
n=Number of organic HAP in stream.

    (A) The values of Q and Cj shall be determined during a performance 
test conducted under representative operating conditions. The values of 
Q and Cj shall be established in the Notification of Compliance Status 
and shall be updated as provided in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of this 
section.
    (B) If there is a change in capacity utilization other than a change 
in monthly operating hours, or if any other change is made to the 
process or product recovery equipment or operation such that the 
previously measured values of Q and Cj are no longer representative, a 
new performance test shall be conducted to determine new representative 
values of Q and Cj. These new values shall be used to calculate debits 
and credits from the time of the change forward, and the new values 
shall be reported in the next Periodic Report.
    (iii) The following procedures and equations shall be used to 
calculate ECPViACTUAL:
    (A) If the continuous process vent is not controlled by a control 
device or pollution prevention measure, 
ECPViACTUAL=ECPViu, where ECPViu is 
calculated according to the procedures in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and 
(g)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (B) If the continuous process vent is controlled using a control 
device or a pollution prevention measure achieving less than 98 percent 
reduction, calculate ECPViACTUAL using Equation 30 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.029

    (1) The percent reduction shall be measured according to the 
procedures in Sec. 63.116 if a combustion control device is used. For a 
flare meeting the criteria in Sec. 63.116(a), or a boiler or process 
heater meeting the criteria in Sec. 63.116(b), the percent reduction 
shall be 98 percent. If a noncombustion control device is used, percent 
reduction shall be demonstrated by a performance test at the inlet and 
outlet of the device, or, if testing is not feasible, by a control 
design evaluation and documented engineering calculations.
    (2) For determining debits from Group 1 continuous process vents,

[[Page 235]]

product recovery devices shall not be considered control devices and 
cannot be assigned a percent reduction in calculating 
ECPViACTUAL. The sampling site for measurement of 
uncontrolled emissions is after the final product recovery device. 
However, as provided in Sec. 63.113(a)(3), a Group 1 continuous process 
vent may add sufficient product recovery to raise the TRE index value 
above 1.0 or, for Group 1 continuous process vents at an existing 
affected source producing MBS, above 3.7, thereby becoming a Group 2 
continuous process vent. Such a continuous process vent would not be a 
Group 1 continuous process vent and would, therefore, not be included in 
determining debits under this paragraph (g)(2)(iii)(B)(2).
    (3) Procedures for calculating the percent reduction of pollution 
prevention measures are specified in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (3) Emissions from continuous process vents located in the 
collection of process sections within the affected source subject to 
Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) 
shall be calculated as follows:
    (i) The total organic HAP emissions from continuous process vents 
located in the collection of process sections j within the affected 
source, ECPVSjACTUAL, shall be calculated as follows. The 
procedures in paragraph (g)(2)(iii) of this section shall be used to 
determine the organic HAP emissions for each individual continuous 
process vent, except that paragraph (g)(2)(iii)(B)(2) of this section 
shall not apply and the sampling site shall be after those recovery 
devices installed as part of normal operation; before any add-on control 
devices (i.e., those required by regulation); and prior to discharge to 
the atmosphere. Then, individual continuous process vent emissions shall 
be summed to determine ECPVSjACTUAL.
    (ii)(A) ECPVSjstd shall be calculated using Equation 31 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.030

where:

ECPVSjstd=Emissions if the applicable standard had been 
applied to the uncontrolled emissions, megagrams per month.
EFstd=0.000018 Mg organic HAP/Mg of product, if the 
collection of process sections within the affected source is subject to 
Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i).
    =0.00002 Mg organic HAP/Mg of product, if the collection of process 
sections within the affected source is subject to Sec. 63.1316 
(b)(1)(ii) or (b)(2)(ii).
    =0.00004 Mg organic HAP/Mg of product, if the collection of process 
sections within the affected source is subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(2)(i).
    =0.0000036 Mg organic HAP/Mg of product, if the collection of 
process sections within the affected source is subject to 
Sec. 63.1316(c)(1).
PPj=Polymer produced, Mg/month, for the collection of process sections j 
within the affected source, as calculated according to paragraph 
(g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.

    (B) The amount of polymer produced, Mg per month, for the collection 
of process sections j within the affected source shall be determined by 
determining the weight of polymer pulled from the process line(s) during 
a 30-day period. The polymer produced shall be determined by direct 
measurement or by an alternate methodology, such as materials balance. 
If an alternate methodology is used, a description of the methodology, 
including all procedures, data, and assumptions shall be submitted as 
part of the Emissions Averaging Plan required by Sec. 63.1335(e)(4).
    (C) Alternatively, ECPVSjstd for continuous process vents 
located in the collection of process sections within the affected source 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(c)(1) may be calculated using the procedures in 
paragraph (g)(2)(i) and (g)(2)(ii) of this section to determine the 
organic HAP emissions for each individual continuous process vent, 
except that the sampling site shall be after recovery devices installed 
as part of normal operation; before any add-on control devices (i.e., 
those required by regulation); and prior to discharge to the atmosphere. 
Then, individual continuous process vent emissions shall be summed and 
multiplied by 0.02 to determine ECPVSjstd.

[[Page 236]]

    (4) Emissions from storage vessels shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(g)(3).
    (5) Emissions from wastewater streams shall be calculated using the 
procedures in Sec. 63.150(g)(5).
    (6) Emissions from batch process vents shall be calculated as 
follows:
    (i) EBPViu for each batch process vent i shall be 
calculated using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (ii) The following procedures and equations shall be used to 
determine EBPViACTUAL:
    (A) If the batch process vent is not controlled by a control device 
or pollution prevention measure, 
EBPViACTUAL=EBPViu, where EBPViu is 
calculated using the procedures in Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (B) If the batch process vent is controlled using a control device 
or a pollution prevention measure achieving less than 90 percent 
reduction for the batch cycle, calculate EBPViACTUAL using 
Equation 32 of this subpart, where percent reduction is for the batch 
cycle.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.031

    (1) The percent reduction for the batch cycle shall be calculated 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325(c)(2).
    (2) The percent reduction for control devices shall be calculated 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325 (c)(2)(i) through 
(c)(2)(iii).
    (3) The percent reduction of pollution prevention measures shall be 
calculated using the procedures specified in paragraph (j) of this 
section.
    (7) Emissions from aggregate batch vent streams shall be calculated 
as follows:
    (i) For purposes of determining aggregate batch vent stream flow 
rate, organic HAP concentrations, and temperature, the sampling site 
shall be before any control device and before discharge to the 
atmosphere. Method 1 or 1A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be used 
for selection of the sampling site.
    (ii) EABViu for each aggregate batch vent stream i shall 
be calculated using Equation 33 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.032

where:

EABViu=Uncontrolled aggregate batch vent stream emission rate 
          from aggregate batch vent stream i, megagrams per month.
Q=Vent stream flow rate, dry standard cubic meters per minute, measured 
          using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as 
          appropriate.
h=Monthly hours of operation during which positive flow is present from 
          the aggregate batch vent stream, hours per month.
Cj=Concentration, parts per million by volume, dry basis, of 
          organic HAP j as measured by Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, 
          appendix A.
Mj=Molecular weight of organic HAP j, gram per gram-mole.
n=Number of organic HAP in the stream.

    (A) The values of Q and Cj shall be determined during a performance 
test conducted under representative operating conditions. The values of 
Q and Cj shall be established in the Notification of Compliance Status 
and shall be updated as provided in paragraph (g)(7)(ii)(B) of this 
section.

[[Page 237]]

    (B) If there is a change in capacity utilization other than a change 
in monthly operating hours, or if any other change is made to the 
process or product recovery equipment or operation such that the 
previously measured values of Q and Cj are no longer 
representative, a new performance test shall be conducted to determine 
new representative values of Q and Cj. These new values shall 
be used to calculate debits and credits from the time of the change 
forward, and the new values shall be reported in the next Periodic 
Report.
    (iii) The following procedures and equations shall be used to 
calculate EABViACTUAL:
    (A) If the aggregate batch vent stream is not controlled by a 
control device or pollution prevention measure, EABViACTUAL = 
EABViu, where EABViu is calculated according to 
the procedures in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) and (g)(7)(ii) of this section.
    (B) If the aggregate batch vent stream is controlled using a control 
device or a pollution prevention measure achieving less than 90 percent 
reduction, calculate EABViACTUAL using Equation 34 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.033

    (1) The percent reduction for control devices shall be determined 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325(e).
    (2) The percent reduction for pollution prevention measures shall be 
calculated according to the procedures specified in paragraph (j) of 
this section.
    (h) Credits are generated by the difference between emissions that 
are allowed for each Group 1 and Group 2 emission point and the actual 
emissions from that Group 1 or Group 2 emission point that has been 
controlled after November 15, 1990 to a level more stringent than what 
is required by this subpart or any other State or Federal rule or 
statute. Said Group 1 and Group 2 emission points are identified in 
paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this section. Credits shall be 
calculated using Equation 35 of this subpart.
    (1) Sourcewide credits shall be calculated using Equation 35 of this 
subpart. Credits and all terms of Equation 35 of this subpart are in 
units of megagrams per month, and the baseline date is November 15, 
1990:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.009

Where:
D = Discount factor = 0.9 for all credit generating emission points 
except those controlled by a pollution prevention measure;

[[Page 238]]

discount factor = 1.0 for each credit generating emission point 
controlled by a pollution prevention measure (i.e., no discount 
provided).
ECPV1iACTUAL = Emissions for each Group 1 continuous process 
vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 that is controlled to a level more 
stringent than the reference control technology. ECPV1iACTUAL 
is calculated according to paragraph (h)(2) of this section.
(0.02)ECPV1iu = Emissions from each Group 1 continuous 
process vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 if the applicable reference 
control technology had been applied to the uncontrolled emissions. 
ECPV1iu is calculated according to paragraph (h)(2) of this 
section.
ECPVS1jSTD = Emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or 
(c)(1) located in the collection of process sections j within the 
affected source if the applicable standard had been applied to the 
uncontrolled emissions. ECPVS1jSTD is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
ECPVS1jACTUAL = Emissions from Group 1 continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), 
(b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) located in the collection of process sections j 
within the affected source that are controlled to a level more stringent 
than the applicable standard. ECPVS1jACTUAL is calculated 
according to paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
ECPV2iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 2 continuous process 
vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 that is controlled. 
ECPV2iACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph (h)(2) of 
this section.
ECPV2iBASE = Emissions from each Group 2 continuous process 
vent i subject to Sec. 63.1315 at the baseline date. 
ECPV2iBASE is calculated according to paragraph (h)(2) of 
this section.
ECPVS2jBASE = Emissions from Group 2 continuous process vents 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) located in the collection of material 
recovery sections j within the affected source at the baseline date. 
ECPVS2jBASE is calculated according to paragraph (h)(3) of 
this section.
ECPVS2jACTUAL = Emissions from Group 2 continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) located in the collection of 
material recovery sections j within the affected source that are 
controlled. ECPVS2jACTUAL is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
ES1iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i 
that is controlled to a level more stringent than the applicable 
reference control technology or standard. ES1iACTUAL is 
calculated according to paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
(BL)ES1iu = Emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i if 
the applicable reference control technology or standard had been applied 
to the uncontrolled emissions. ES1iu is calculated according 
to paragraph (h)(4) of this section. For calculating these emissions, BL 
= 0.05 for each Group 1 storage vessel i subject to Sec. 63.1314(a); and 
BL = 0.02 for each storage vessel i subject to Sec. 63.1314(c).
ES2iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 2 storage vessel i 
that is controlled. ES2iACTUAL is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
ES2iBASE = Emissions from each Group 2 storage vessel i at 
the baseline date. ES2iBASE is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
EWW1iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i 
that is controlled to a level more stringent than the reference control 
technology. EWW1iACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph 
(h)(5) of this section.
EWW1ic = Emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i if 
the reference control technology had been applied to the uncontrolled 
emissions. EWW1ic is calculated according to paragraph (h)(5) 
of this section.
EWW2iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 2 wastewater stream i 
that is controlled. EWW2iACTUAL is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(5) of this section.
EWW2iBASE = Emissions from each Group 2 wastewater stream i 
at the baseline date. EWW2iBASE is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(5) of this section.
(0.10)EBPV1iu = Emissions from each Group 1 batch process 
vent i if the applicable standard had been applied to the uncontrolled 
emissions. EBPV1iu is calculated according to paragraph 
(h)(6) of this section.
EBPV1iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 batch process vent 
i that is controlled to a level more stringent than the applicable 
standard. EBPV1iACTUAL is calculated according to paragraph 
(h)(6) of this section.
(0.10)EABV1iu = Emissions from each Group 1 aggregate batch 
vent stream i if the applicable standard had been applied to the 
uncontrolled emissions. EABV1iu is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(7) of this section.
EABV1iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 1 aggregate batch 
vent stream i that is controlled to a level more stringent than the 
applicable standard. EABV1iACTUAL is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(7) of this section.
EBPV2iBASE = Emissions from each Group 2 batch process vent i 
at the baseline date. EBPV2iBASE is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
EBPV2iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 2 batch process vent 
i that is controlled. EBPV2iACTUAL is calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(6) of this section.

[[Page 239]]

EABV2iBASE = Emissions from each Group 2 aggregate batch vent 
stream i at the baseline date. EABV2iBASE is calculated 
according to paragraph (h)(7) of this section.
EABV2iACTUAL = Emissions from each Group 2 aggregate batch 
vent stream i that is controlled. EABV2iACTUAL is calculated 
according to paragraph (h)(7) of this section.
n = Number of Group 1 emission points included in the emissions average. 
The value of n is not necessarily the same for continuous process vents, 
batch process vents, aggregate batch vent streams, storage vessels, 
wastewater streams, or the collection of process sections within the 
affected source.
m = Number of Group 2 emission points included in the emissions average. 
The value of m is not necessarily the same for continuous process vents, 
batch process vents, aggregate batch vent streams, storage vessels, 
wastewater streams, or the collection of process sections within the 
affected source.
    (i) Except as specified in paragraph (h)(1)(iv) of this section, for 
an emission point controlled using a reference control technology, the 
percent reduction for calculating credits shall be no greater than the 
nominal efficiency associated with the reference control technology, 
unless a higher nominal efficiency is assigned as specified in paragraph 
(h)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) For an emission point controlled to a level more stringent than 
the reference control technology, the nominal efficiency for calculating 
credits shall be assigned as described in paragraph (i) of this section. 
A reference control technology may be approved for use in a different 
manner and assigned a higher nominal efficiency according to the 
procedures in paragraph (i) of this section.
    (iii) For an emission point controlled using a pollution prevention 
measure, the nominal efficiency for calculating credits shall be as 
determined as described in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (iv) For Group 1 and Group 2 batch process vents and Group 1 and 
Group 2 aggregate batch vent streams, the percent reduction for 
calculating credits shall be the percent reduction determined according 
to the procedures in paragraphs (h)(6)(ii) and (h)(6)(iii) of this 
section for batch process vents and paragraphs (h)(7)(ii) and 
(h)(7)(iii) of this section for aggregate batch vent streams.
    (2) Emissions from continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1315 
shall be determined as follows:
    (i) Uncontrolled emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents 
(ECPV1iu) shall be calculated according to the procedures and 
equation for ECPViu in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (g)(2)(ii) of 
this section.
    (ii) Actual emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents 
controlled using a technology with an approved nominal efficiency 
greater than 98 percent or a pollution prevention measure achieving 
greater than 98 percent emission reduction (ECPV1iACTUAL) 
shall be calculated using Equation 36 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.035

    (iii) The following procedures shall be used to calculate actual 
emissions from Group 2 continuous process vents 
(ECPV2iACTUAL):
    (A) For a Group 2 continuous process vent controlled by a control 
device, a recovery device applied as a pollution prevention project, or 
a pollution prevention measure, where the control achieves a percent 
reduction less than or equal to 98 percent reduction, use Equation 37 of 
this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.036


[[Page 240]]


    (1) ECPV2iu shall be calculated according to the 
equations and procedures for ECPViu in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) 
and (g)(2)(ii) of this section, except as provided in paragraph 
(h)(2)(iii)(A)(3) of this section.
    (2) The percent reduction shall be calculated according to the 
procedures in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii)(B)(1) through (g)(2)(iii)(B)(3) of 
this section, except as provided in paragraph (h)(2)(iii)(A)(4) of this 
section.
    (3) If a recovery device was added as part of a pollution prevention 
project, ECPV2iu shall be calculated prior to that recovery 
device. The equation for ECPViu in paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of 
this section shall be used to calculate ECPV2iu; however, the 
sampling site for measurement of vent stream flow rate and organic HAP 
concentration shall be at the inlet of the recovery device.
    (4) If a recovery device was added as part of a pollution prevention 
project, the percent reduction shall be demonstrated by conducting a 
performance test at the inlet and outlet of that recovery device.
    (B) For a Group 2 continuous process vent controlled using a 
technology with an approved nominal efficiency greater than 98 percent 
or a pollution prevention measure achieving greater than 98 percent 
reduction, use Equation 38 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.037

    (iv) Emissions from Group 2 continuous process vents at baseline 
shall be calculated as follows:
    (A) If the continuous process vent was uncontrolled on November 15, 
1990, ECPV2iBASE=ECPV2iu and shall be calculated 
according to the procedures and equation for ECPViu in 
paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (g)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (B) If the continuous process vent was controlled on November 15, 
1990, use Equation 39 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.038

    (1) ECPV2iu is calculated according to the procedures and 
equation for ECPViu in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (g)(2)(ii) of 
this section.
    (2) The percent reduction shall be calculated according to the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii)(B)(1) through 
(g)(2)(iii)(B)(3) of this section.
    (C) If a recovery device was added as part of a pollution prevention 
project initiated after November 15, 1990, 
ECPV2iBASE=ECPV2iu, where ECPV2iu is 
calculated according to paragraph (h)(2)(iii)(A)(3) of this section.
    (3) Emissions from continuous process vents subject to 
Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) 
shall be determined as follows:
    (i) Emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents located in the 
collection of process sections j within the affected source if the 
applicable standard had been applied to the uncontrolled emissions 
(ECPVS1jstd) shall be calculated according to paragraph 
(g)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) Actual emissions from Group 1 continuous process vents located 
in the collection of process sections j within the affected source 
controlled to a level more stringent than the applicable standard 
(ECPVS1jACTUAL) shall be calculated using the procedures in 
paragraphs (g)(3)(ii)(A) and (g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section, except that 
the actual emission level, Mg organic HAP/Mg of

[[Page 241]]

product, shall be used as EFstd in Equation 31 of this 
subpart. Further, ECPVS1jACTUAL for continuous process vents 
subject to Sec. 63.1316(c)(1) controlled in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1316(c)(1)(iii) shall be calculated using the procedures in 
paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section for individual continuous process 
vents and then summing said emissions to get ECPVS1jACTUAL, 
except that the sampling site shall be after recovery devices installed 
as part of normal operation; before any add-on control devices (i.e., 
those required by regulation); and prior to discharge to the atmosphere.
    (iii) Actual emissions from Group 2 continuous process vents subject 
to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) located in the collection of material recovery 
sections j within the affected source (ECPVS2jACTUAL) shall 
be calculated using the procedures in paragraphs (g)(3)(ii)(A) and 
(g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section, except that the actual emission level, Mg 
organic HAP/Mg of product, shall be used as EFstd in Equation 
31 of this subpart.
    (iv) Emissions from Group 2 continuous process vents subject to 
Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) located in the collection of material recovery 
sections j within the affected source at baseline 
(ECPVS2jBASE) shall be calculated using the procedures in 
paragraphs (g)(3)(ii)(A) and (g)(3)(ii)(B) of this section, except that 
the actual emission level, Mg organic HAP/Mg of product, at baseline 
shall be used as EFstd in Equation 31 of this subpart.
    (4)(i) Emissions from storage vessels shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(h)(3).
    (ii) Actual emissions from Group 1 storage vessels at an existing 
affected source producing ASA/AMSAN subject to Sec. 63.1314(c) using a 
technology with an approved nominal efficiency greater than 98 percent 
or a pollution prevention measure achieving greater than 98 percent 
emission reduction shall be calculated using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.150(h)(3)(ii).
    (5) Emissions from wastewater streams shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(h)(5).
    (6) Emissions from batch process vents shall be determined as 
follows:
    (i) Uncontrolled emissions from Group 1 batch process vents 
(EBPV1iu) shall be calculated using the procedures 
Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (ii) Actual emissions from Group 1 batch process vents controlled to 
a level more stringent than the standard (EBPV1iACTUAL) shall 
be calculated using Equation 40 of this subpart, where percent reduction 
is for the batch cycle:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.010

    (A) The percent reduction for the batch cycle shall be calculated 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325(c)(2).
    (B) The percent reduction for control devices shall be determined 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325(c)(2)(i) through 
(c)(2)(iii).
    (C) The percent reduction of pollution prevention measures shall be 
calculated using the procedures specified in paragraph (j) of this 
section.
    (iii) Actual emissions from Group 2 batch process vents 
(EBPV2iACTUAL) shall be calculated using Equation 41 of this 
subpart and the procedures in paragraphs (h)(6)(ii)(A) through 
(h)(6)(ii)(C) of this section. EBPV2iu shall be calculated 
using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(b).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.040


[[Page 242]]


    (iv) Emissions from Group 2 batch process vents at baseline 
(EBPV2iBASE) shall be calculated as follows:
    (A) If the batch process vent was uncontrolled on November 15, 1990, 
EBPV2iBASE=EBPV2iu and shall be calculated using 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(b).
    (B) If the batch process vent was controlled on November 15, 1990, 
use Equation 42 of this subpart and the procedures in paragraphs 
(h)(6)(ii)(A) through (h)(6)(ii)(C) of this section. EBPV2iu 
shall be calculated using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1323(b).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.041

    (7) Emissions from aggregate batch vent streams shall be determined 
as follows:
    (i) Uncontrolled emissions from Group 1 aggregate batch vent streams 
(EABV1iu) shall be calculated according to the procedures and 
equation for EABViu in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) and (g)(7)(ii) of 
this section.
    (ii) Actual emissions from Group 1 aggregate batch vent streams 
controlled to a level more stringent than the standard 
(EABV1iACTUAL) shall be calculated using Equation 43 of this 
subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.042

    (A) The percent reduction for control devices shall be determined 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1325(e).
    (B) The percent reduction of pollution prevention measures shall be 
calculated using the procedures specified in paragraph (j) of this 
section.
    (iii) Actual emissions from Group 2 aggregate batch vent streams 
(EABV2iACTUAL) shall be calculated using Equation 44 of this 
subpart and the procedures in paragraphs (h)(7)(ii)(A) through 
(h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section. EABV2iu shall be calculated 
according to the equations and procedures for EABViu in 
paragraphs (g)(7)(i) and (g)(7)(ii) of this section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.043

    (iv) Emissions from Group 2 aggregate batch vent streams at baseline 
shall be calculated as follows:
    (A) If the aggregate batch vent stream was uncontrolled on November 
15, 1990, EABV2iBASE=EABV2iu and shall be 
calculated according to the procedures and equation for 
EABViu in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) and (g)(7)(ii) of this 
section.
    (B) If the aggregate batch vent stream was controlled on November 
15, 1990, use Equation 45 of this subpart and the procedures in 
paragraphs (h)(7)(ii)(A) through (h)(7)(ii)(B) of this section. 
EABV2iu shall be calculated according to the equations and 
procedures for EABViu in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) and (g)(7)(ii) 
of this section.

[[Page 243]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.044

    (i) The following procedures shall be followed to establish nominal 
efficiencies for emission controls for storage vessels, continuous 
process vents, and process wastewater streams. The procedures in 
paragraphs (i)(1) through (i)(6) of this section shall be followed for 
control technologies that are different in use or design from the 
reference control technologies and achieve greater percent reductions 
than the percent efficiencies assigned to the reference control 
technologies in Sec. 63.111.
    (1) In those cases where the owner or operator is seeking permission 
to take credit for use of a control technology that is different in use 
or design from the reference control technology, and the different 
control technology will be used in more than three applications at a 
single plant-site, the owner or operator shall submit the information 
specified in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) through (i)(1)(iv) of this section, as 
specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(7)(ii), to the Director of the EPA Office 
of Air Quality Planning and Standards in writing:
    (i) Emission stream characteristics of each emission point to which 
the control technology is or will be applied including the kind of 
emission point, flow, organic HAP concentration, and all other stream 
characteristics necessary to design the control technology or determine 
its performance.
    (ii) Description of the control technology including design 
specifications.
    (iii) Documentation demonstrating to the Administrator's 
satisfaction the control efficiency of the control technology. This may 
include performance test data collected using an appropriate EPA Method 
or any other method validated according to Method 301, 40 CFR part 63, 
appendix A, of this part. If it is infeasible to obtain test data, 
documentation may include a design evaluation and calculations. The 
engineering basis of the calculation procedures and all inputs and 
assumptions made in the calculations shall be documented.
    (iv) A description of the parameter or parameters to be monitored to 
ensure that the control technology will be operated in conformance with 
its design and an explanation of the criteria used for selection of that 
parameter (or parameters).
    (2) The Administrator shall determine within 120 days whether an 
application presents sufficient information to determine nominal 
efficiency. The Administrator reserves the right to request specific 
data in addition to the items listed in paragraph (i)(1) of this 
section.
    (3) The Administrator shall determine within 120 days of the 
submittal of sufficient data whether a control technology shall have a 
nominal efficiency and the level of that nominal efficiency. If, in the 
Administrator's judgment, the control technology achieves a level of 
emission reduction greater than the reference control technology for a 
particular kind of emission point, the Administrator will publish a 
Federal Register notice establishing a nominal efficiency for the 
control technology.
    (4) The Administrator may grant permission to take emission credits 
for use of the control technology. The Administrator may also impose 
requirements that may be necessary to ensure operation and maintenance 
to achieve the specified nominal efficiency.
    (5) In those cases where the owner or operator is seeking permission 
to take credit for use of a control technology that is different in use 
or design from the reference control technology and the different 
control technology will be used in no more than three applications at a 
single plant site, the owner or operator shall submit the information 
listed in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) through (i)(1)(iv) of this section, as 
specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(7)(ii), to the Administrator.
    (i) In these instances, use and conditions for use of the control 
technology may be approved by the permitting authority as part of an 
operating permit

[[Page 244]]

application or modification. The permitting authority shall follow the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (i)(2) through (i)(4) of this section 
except that, in these instances, a Federal Register notice is not 
required to establish the nominal efficiency for the different 
technology.
    (ii) If, in reviewing the application, the permitting authority 
believes the control technology has broad applicability for use by other 
affected sources, the permitting authority shall submit the information 
provided in the application to the Director of the EPA Office of Air 
Quality Planning and Standards. The Administrator shall review the 
technology for broad applicability and may publish a Federal Register 
notice; however, this review shall not affect the permitting authority's 
approval of the nominal efficiency of the control technology for the 
specific application.
    (6) If, in reviewing an application for a control technology for an 
emission point, the Administrator or permitting authority determines the 
control technology is not different in use or design from the reference 
control technology, the Administrator or permitting authority shall deny 
the application.
    (j) The following procedures shall be used for calculating the 
efficiency (percent reduction) of pollution prevention measures for 
storage vessels, continuous process vents, batch process vents, 
aggregate batch vent streams, and wastewater streams:
    (1) A pollution prevention measure is any practice that meets the 
criteria of paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and (j)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) A pollution prevention measure is any practice that results in a 
lesser quantity of organic HAP emissions per unit of product released to 
the atmosphere prior to out-of-process recycling, treatment, or control 
of emissions, while the same product is produced.
    (ii) Pollution prevention measures may include: substitution of 
feedstocks that reduce organic HAP emissions; alterations to the 
production process to reduce the volume of materials released to the 
environment; equipment modifications; housekeeping measures; and in-
process recycling that returns waste materials directly to production as 
raw materials. Production cutbacks do not qualify as pollution 
prevention.
    (2) The emission reduction efficiency of pollution prevention 
measures implemented after November 15, 1990, may be used in calculating 
the actual emissions from an emission point in the debit and credit 
equations in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section.
    (i) For pollution prevention measures, the percent reduction used in 
the equations in paragraphs (g)(2) through (g)(7) of this section and 
paragraphs (h)(2) through (h)(7) of this section is the percent 
difference between the monthly organic HAP emissions for each emission 
point after the pollution prevention measure for the most recent month 
versus monthly emissions from the same emission point before the 
pollution prevention measure, adjusted by the volume of product produced 
during the two monthly periods.
    (ii) Equation 46 of this subpart shall be used to calculate the 
percent reduction of a pollution prevention measure for each emission 
point.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.045

where:

Percent reduction=Efficiency of pollution prevention measure (percent 
organic HAP reduction).
EB=Monthly emissions before the pollution prevention measure, 
megagrams per month, determined as specified in paragraphs

[[Page 245]]

(j)(2)(ii)(A), (j)(2)(ii)(B), and (j)(2)(ii)(C) of this section.
Epp=Monthly emissions after the pollution prevention measure, 
megagrams per month, as determined for the most recent month, determined 
as specified in either paragraphs (j)(2)(ii)(D) or (j)(2)(ii)(E) of this 
section.
PB=Monthly production before the pollution prevention 
measure, megagrams per month, during the same period over which 
EB is calculated.
Ppp=Monthly production after the pollution prevention 
measure, megagrams per month, as determined for the most recent month.

    (A) The monthly emissions before the pollution prevention measure, 
EB, shall be determined in a manner consistent with the 
equations and procedures in paragraphs (g)(2) and (g)(3) of this section 
for continuous process vents, paragraph (g)(4) of this section for 
storage vessels, paragraph (g)(6) of this section for batch process 
vents, and paragraph (g)(7) of this section for aggregate batch vent 
streams.
    (B) For wastewater, EB shall be calculated using Equation 
47 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.011


Where:
n = Number of wastewater streams.
QBi = Annual average flow rate for wastewater stream i before 
the pollution prevention measure, defined and determined according to 
Sec. 63.144(c)(3), liters per minute, before implementation of the 
pollution prevention measure.
HBi = Number of hours per month that wastewater stream i was 
discharged before the pollution prevention measure, hours per month.
s = Total number of organic HAP in wastewater stream i.
Fem = Fraction emitted of organic HAP m in wastewater from 
Table 34 of subpart G of this part, dimensionless.
HAPBim = Annual average concentration of organic HAP m in 
wastewater stream i, defined and determined according to paragraph 
Sec. 63.150(g)(5)(i) of this section, before the pollution prevention 
measure, parts per million by weight, as measured before the 
implementation of the pollution measure.

    (C) If the pollution prevention measure was implemented prior to 
September 12, 1996 records may be used to determine EB.
    (D) The monthly emissions after the pollution prevention measure, 
Epp, may be determined during a performance test or by a 
design evaluation and documented engineering calculations. Once an 
emissions-to-production ratio has been established, the ratio can be 
used to estimate monthly emissions from monthly production records.
    (E) For wastewater, Epp shall be calculated using 
Equation 48 of this subpart and n, Qppi, Hppi, s, 
Fem, and HAPppim are defined and determined as 
described in paragraph (j)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, except that 
Qppi, Hppi, and HAPppim shall be 
determined after the pollution prevention measure has been implemented.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.047

    (iii) All equations, calculations, test procedures, test results, 
and other information used to determine the percent reduction achieved 
by a pollution prevention measure for each emission point shall be fully 
documented.

[[Page 246]]

    (iv) The same pollution prevention measure may reduce emissions from 
multiple emission points. In such cases, the percent reduction in 
emissions for each emission point shall be calculated.
    (v) For the purposes of the equations in paragraphs (h)(2) through 
(h)(7) of this section used to calculate credits for emission points 
controlled more stringently than the reference control technology or 
standard, the nominal efficiency of a pollution prevention measure is 
equivalent to the percent reduction of the pollution prevention measure. 
When a pollution prevention measure is used, the owner or operator of an 
affected source is not required to apply to the Administrator for a 
nominal efficiency and is not subject to paragraph (i) of this section.
    (k) The owner or operator shall demonstrate that the emissions from 
the emission points proposed to be included in the emissions average 
will not result in greater hazard or, at the option of the 
Administrator, greater risk to human health or the environment than if 
the emission points were controlled according to the provisions in 
Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 63.1321, and 63.1330.
    (1) This demonstration of hazard or risk equivalency shall be made 
to the satisfaction of the Administrator.
    (i) The Administrator may require owners and operators to use 
specific methodologies and procedures for making a hazard or risk 
determination.
    (ii) The demonstration and approval of hazard or risk equivalency 
shall be made according to any guidance that the Administrator makes 
available for use.
    (2) Owners and operators shall provide documentation demonstrating 
the hazard or risk equivalency of their proposed emissions average in 
their operating permit application or in their Emissions Averaging Plan 
if an operating permit application has not yet been submitted.
    (3) An Emissions Averaging Plan that does not demonstrate hazard or 
risk equivalency to the satisfaction of the Administrator shall not be 
approved. The Administrator may require such adjustments to the 
Emissions Averaging Plan as are necessary in order to ensure that the 
emissions average will not result in greater hazard or risk to human 
health or the environment than would result if the emission points were 
controlled according to Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 
63.1321, and 63.1330.
    (4) A hazard or risk equivalency demonstration shall:
    (i) Be a quantitative, bona fide chemical hazard or risk assessment;
    (ii) Account for differences in chemical hazard or risk to human 
health or the environment; and
    (iii) Meet any requirements set by the Administrator for such 
demonstrations.
    (l) For periods of parameter monitoring excursions, an owner or 
operator may request that the provisions of paragraphs (l)(1) through 
(l)(4) of this section be followed instead of the procedures in 
paragraphs (f)(2)(i) and (f)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator of 
monitoring excursions in the Periodic Reports as required in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(6).
    (2) The owner or operator shall demonstrate that other types of 
monitoring data or engineering calculations are appropriate to establish 
that the control device for the emission point was operating in such a 
fashion to warrant assigning full or partial credits and debits. This 
demonstration shall be made to the Administrator's satisfaction, and the 
Administrator may establish procedures of demonstrating compliance that 
are acceptable.
    (3) The owner or operator shall provide documentation of the 
excursion and the other type of monitoring data or engineering 
calculations to be used to demonstrate that the control device for the 
emission point was operating in such a fashion to warrant assigning full 
or partial credits and debits.
    (4) The Administrator may assign full or partial credit and debits 
upon review of the information provided.
    (m) For each emission point included in an emissions average, the 
owner or operator shall perform testing, monitoring, recordkeeping, and 
reporting equivalent to that required for Group 1 emission points 
complying with Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 63.1321, 
and 63.1330, as applicable. The

[[Page 247]]

specific requirements for continuous process vents, batch process vents, 
aggregate batch vent streams, storage vessels, and wastewater operations 
that are included in an emissions average for an affected source are 
identified in paragraphs (m)(1) through (m)(7) of this section.
    (1) For each continuous process vent subject to Sec. 63.1315 
equipped with a flare, incinerator, boiler, or process heater, as 
appropriate to the control technique:
    (i) Determine whether the continuous process vent is Group 1 or 
Group 2 according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1315;
    (ii) Conduct initial performance tests to determine percent 
reduction according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1315; and
    (iii) Monitor the operating parameters, keep records, and submit 
reports according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1315.
    (2) For each continuous process vent subject to Sec. 63.1315 
equipped with a carbon adsorber, absorber, or condenser but not equipped 
with a control device, as appropriate to the control technique:
    (i) Determine the flow rate, organic HAP concentration, and TRE 
index value according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1315; and
    (ii) Monitor the operating parameters, keep records, and submit 
reports according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1315.
    (3) For continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), 
(b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1):
    (i) Determine whether the emissions from the continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i) located in the collection of 
material recovery sections within the affected source are greater than, 
equal to, or less than 0.12 kg organic HAP per Mg of product according 
to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1318(b);
    (ii) Determine the emission rate, ERHAP, for each 
collection of process sections within the affected source according to 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1318(b); and
    (iii) [Reserved]
    (iv) Monitor the operating parameters, keep records, and submit 
reports according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1317, 
Sec. 63.1319, Sec. 63.1320.
    (4) For each storage vessel controlled with an internal floating 
roof, external roof, or a closed vent system with a control device, as 
appropriate to the control technique:
    (i) Perform the monitoring or inspection procedures according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1314;
    (ii) Perform the reporting and recordkeeping procedures according to 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1314; and
    (iii) For closed vent systems with control devices, conduct an 
initial design evaluation and submit an operating plan according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.1314.
    (5) For wastewater emission points, as appropriate to the control 
technique:
    (i) For wastewater treatment processes, conduct tests according to 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1330;
    (ii) Conduct inspections and monitoring according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1330;
    (iii) Implement a recordkeeping program according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1330; and
    (iv) Implement a reporting program according to the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1330.
    (6) For each batch process vent and aggregate batch vent stream 
equipped with a control device, as appropriate to the control technique:
    (i) Determine whether the batch process vent or aggregate batch vent 
stream is Group 1 or Group 2 according to the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1323;
    (ii) Conduct performance tests according to the procedures specified 
in Sec. 63.1325;
    (iii) Conduct monitoring according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1324; and
    (iv) Perform the recordkeeping and reporting procedures according to 
the procedures specified in Secs. 63.1326 and 63.1327.
    (7) If an emission point in an emissions average is controlled using 
a pollution prevention measure or a device or technique for which no 
monitoring parameters or inspection procedures are required by 
Secs. 63.1314, 63.1315, 63.1316 through 63.1320, 63.1321, or 63.1330, 
the

[[Page 248]]

owner or operator shall submit the information specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(f) for alternate monitoring parameters or inspection 
procedures in the Emissions Averaging Plan or operating permit 
application.
    (n) Records of all information required to calculate emission debits 
and credits shall be retained for 5 years.
    (o) Precompliance Reports, Emission Averaging Plans, Notifications 
of Compliance Status, Periodic Reports, and other reports shall be 
submitted as required by Sec. 63.1335.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11549, Mar. 9, 1999]



Sec. 63.1333  Additional test methods and procedures.

    (a) Performance testing shall be conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.7(a)(3), (d), (e), (g), and (h), with the exceptions specified 
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this section and the additions 
specified in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section. Sections 
63.1314 through 63.1330 also contain specific testing requirements.
    (1) Performance tests shall be conducted according to the provisions 
of Sec. 63.7(e), except that performance tests shall be conducted at 
maximum representative operating conditions for the process.
    (2) References in Sec. 63.7(g) to the Notification of Compliance 
Status requirements in Sec. 63.7(h) shall refer to the requirements in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(5).
    (3) Because the site-specific test plans in Sec. 63.7(c)(3) are not 
required, Sec. 63.7(h)(4)(ii) is not applicable.
    (4) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator of the 
intention to conduct a performance test at least 30 calendar days before 
the performance test is scheduled to allow the Administrator the 
opportunity to have an observer present during the test.
    (b) Each owner or operator of an existing affected source producing 
MBS complying with Sec. 63.1315(b)(2) shall determine compliance with 
the mass emission per mass product standard by using Equation 49 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.048

where:
ERMBS=Emission rate of organic HAP or TOC from continuous 
process vents, kg/Mg product.
Ei=Emission rate of organic HAP or TOC from continuous 
process vent i as calculated using the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.116(c)(4), kg/month.
PPM=Amount of polymer produced in one month as determined by 
the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1318(b)(1)(ii), Mg/month.
n=Number of continuous process vents.

When determining Ei, when the provisions of Sec. 63.116(c)(4) 
specify that Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be used, 
Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, may be used for the 
purposes of this subpart. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, shall comply with paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this 
section.
    (1) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume.
    (2) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (c) The owner or operator of an affected source, complying with 
Sec. 63.1322(a)(3) shall determine compliance with the percent reduction 
requirement using Equation 50 of this subpart.

[[Page 249]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE96.049

where:

PR=Percent reduction
Hj=Number of operating hours in a year for control device j.
Ei=Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP at the inlet of 
control device j, calculated as specified in Sec. 63.1325(f), kg/hr. 
This value includes all continuous process vents, batch process vents, 
and aggregate batch vent streams routed to control device j.
Eo=Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP at the outlet of 
control device j, calculated as specified in Sec. 63.1325(f), kg/hr.
Hk=Number of hours of operation during which positive flow is 
present in uncontrolled continuous process vent or aggregate batch vent 
stream k, hr/yr.
Eku=Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP of uncontrolled 
continuous process vent or aggregate batch vent stream k, calculated as 
specified in Sec. 63.1325(f)(4), kg/hr.
AEunc=Mass rate of TOC or total organic HAP of uncontrolled 
batch process vent l, calculated as specified in Sec. 63.1325(f)(4), kg/
yr.
n=Number of control devices, uncontrolled continuous process vents and 
aggregate batch vent streams, and uncontrolled batch process vents. The 
value of n is not necessarily the same for these three items.

    (d) Data shall be reduced in accordance with the EPA approved 
methods specified in the applicable subpart or, if other test methods 
are used, the data and methods shall be validated according to the 
protocol in Method 301 of appendix A of this part.



Sec. 63.1334  Parameter monitoring levels and excursions.

    (a) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels. The owner or 
operator of a control or recovery device that has one or more parameter 
monitoring level requirements specified under this subpart shall 
establish a maximum or minimum level for each measured parameter using 
the procedures specified in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of this section. 
The procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section have been 
approved by the Administrator. The procedures in paragraphs (c) and (d) 
of this section have not been approved by the Administrator and 
determination of the parameter monitoring level using the procedures in 
paragraph (c) or (d) of this section is subject to review and approval 
by the Administrator. Said determination and supporting documentation 
shall be included in the Precompliance Report, specified in 
Sec. 63.1335(e)(3).
    (1) The owner or operator shall operate control and recovery devices 
such that monitored parameters remain above the minimum established 
level or below the maximum established level.
    (2) As specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(5) and Sec. 63.1335(e)(8), all 
established levels, along with their supporting documentation and the 
definition of an operating day, shall be approved as part of and 
incorporated into the Notification of Compliance Status or operating 
permit, respectively.
    (3) Nothing in this section shall be construed to allow a monitoring 
parameter excursion caused by an activity that violates other applicable 
provisions of subpart A, F, or G of this part.

[[Page 250]]

    (b) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels based on 
performance tests. The procedures specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through 
(b)(3) of this section shall be used, as applicable, in establishing 
parameter monitoring levels. Level(s) established under this paragraph 
(b) shall be based on the parameter values measured during the 
performance test.
    (1) Storage tanks and wastewater. The maximum and/or minimum 
monitoring levels shall be based on the parameter values measured during 
the performance test, supplemented, if desired, by engineering 
assessments and/or manufacturer's recommendations.
    (2) Continuous process vents. During initial compliance testing, the 
appropriate parameter shall be continuously monitored during the 
required 1-hour runs. The monitoring level(s) shall then be established 
as the average of the maximum (or minimum) point values from the three 
test runs. The average of the maximum values shall be used when 
establishing a maximum level, and the average of the minimum values 
shall be used when establishing a minimum level.
    (3) Batch process vents. The monitoring level(s) shall be 
established using the procedures specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) 
through (b)(3)(ii) of this section, as appropriate. The procedures 
specified in this paragraph (b)(3) may only be used if the batch 
emission episodes, or portions thereof, selected to be controlled were 
tested, and monitoring data were collected, during the entire period in 
which emissions were vented to the control device, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1325(c)(1)(i). If the owner or operator chose to test only a 
portion of the batch emission episode, or portion thereof, selected to 
be controlled, as specified in Sec. 63.1325(c)(1)(i)(A), the procedures 
in paragraph (c) of this section must be used.
    (i) If more than one batch emission episode or more than one portion 
of a batch emission episode has been selected to be controlled, a single 
level for the batch cycle shall be calculated as follows:
    (A) During initial compliance testing, the appropriate parameter 
shall be monitored continuously at all times when batch emission 
episodes, or portions thereof, selected to be controlled are vented to 
the control device.
    (B) The average monitored parameter value shall be calculated for 
each batch emission episode, or portion thereof, in the batch cycle 
selected to be controlled. The average shall be based on all values 
measured during the required performance test.
    (C) If the level to be established is a maximum operating parameter, 
the level shall be defined as the minimum of the average parameter 
values of the batch emission episodes, or portions thereof, in the batch 
cycle selected to be controlled.
    (D) If the level to be established is a minimum operating parameter, 
the level shall be defined as the maximum of the average parameter 
values of the batch emission episodes, or portions thereof, in the batch 
cycle selected to be controlled.
    (E) Alternatively, an average monitored parameter value shall be 
calculated for the entire batch cycle based on all values measured 
during each batch emission episode, or portion thereof, selected to be 
controlled.
    (ii) Instead of establishing a single level for the batch cycle, as 
described in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, an owner or operator 
may establish separate levels for each batch emission episode, or 
portion thereof, selected to be controlled. Each level shall be 
determined as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) and (b)(3)(i)(B) of 
this section.
    (iii) The batch cycle shall be defined in the Notification of 
Compliance Status, as specified in Sec. 63.1335(e)(5). Said definition 
shall include an identification of each batch emission episode and the 
information required to determine parameter monitoring compliance for 
partial batch cycles (i.e., when part of a batch cycle is accomplished 
during two different operating days).
    (4) Aggregate batch vent streams. For aggregate batch vent streams, 
the monitoring level shall be established in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section.
    (c) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels based on 
performance tests, engineering assessments, and/or manufacturer's 
recommendations. As required in

[[Page 251]]

paragraph (a) of this section, the information specified in paragraphs 
(c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section shall be provided in the Precompliance 
Report.
    (1) Parameter monitoring levels established under this paragraph (c) 
shall be based on the parameter values measured during the performance 
test supplemented by engineering assessments and manufacturer's 
recommendations. Performance testing is not required to be conducted 
over the entire range of expected parameter values.
    (2) The specific level of the monitored parameter(s) for each 
emission point.
    (3) The rationale for the specific level for each parameter for each 
emission point, including any data and calculations used to develop the 
level and a description of why the level indicates proper operation of 
the control or recovery device.
    (d) Establishment of parameter monitoring based on engineering 
assessments and/or manufacturer's recommendations. If a performance test 
is not required by this subpart for a control or recovery device, the 
maximum or minimum level may be based solely on engineering assessments 
and/or manufacturer's recommendations. As required in paragraph (a) of 
this section, the determined level and all supporting documentation 
shall be provided in the Precompliance Report.
    (e) Compliance determinations. The provisions of this paragraph (e) 
apply only to emission points and control or recovery devices for which 
continuous monitoring is required under this subpart.
    (1) The parameter monitoring data for storage vessels, process 
vents, process wastewater streams, and emission points included in 
emissions averages that are required to perform continuous monitoring 
shall be used to determine compliance for the monitored control or 
recovery devices.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (e)(3) and (g) of this section, 
for each excursion, as defined in paragraph (f) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall be deemed out of compliance with the provisions 
of this subpart.
    (3) If the daily average value of a monitored parameter is above the 
maximum level or below the minimum level established, or if monitoring 
data cannot be collected during monitoring device calibration check or 
monitoring device malfunction, but the affected source is operated 
during the periods of start-up, shutdown, or malfunction in accordance 
with the affected source's Start-up, Shutdown, and Malfunction Plan, 
then the event shall not be considered a monitoring parameter excursion.
    (f) Parameter monitoring excursion definitions. (1) For storage 
vessels, continuous process vents, aggregate batch vent streams, and 
wastewater streams, an excursion means any of the three cases listed in 
paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (f)(1)(iii) of this section. For a control 
or recovery device where multiple parameters are monitored, if one or 
more of the parameters meets the excursion criteria in paragraphs 
(f)(1)(i) through (f)(1)(iii) of this section, this is considered a 
single excursion for the control or recovery device.
    (i) When the daily average value of one or more monitored parameters 
is above the maximum level or below the minimum level established for 
the given parameters.
    (ii) When the period of control or recovery device operation is 4 
hours or greater in an operating day and monitoring data are 
insufficient, as defined in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of this section, to 
constitute a valid hour of data for at least 75 percent of the operating 
hours.
    (iii) When the period of control or recovery device operation is 
less than 4 hours in an operating day and more than two of the hours 
during the period of operation do not constitute a valid hour of data 
due to insufficient monitoring data, as defined in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) 
of this section.
    (iv) Monitoring data are insufficient to constitute a valid hour of 
data, as used in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii) and (f)(1)(iii) of this section, 
if measured values are unavailable for any of the 15-minute periods 
within the hour. For data compression systems approved under 
Sec. 63.1335(g)(3), monitoring data are insufficient to calculate a 
valid hour of data if there are less than four data measurements made 
during the hour.
    (2) For batch process vents, an excursion means one of the two cases 
listed

[[Page 252]]

in paragraphs (f)(2)(i) and (f)(2)(ii) of this section. For a control 
device where multiple parameters are monitored, if one or more of the 
parameters meets the excursion criteria in either paragraph (f)(2)(i) or 
(f)(2)(ii) of this section, this is considered a single excursion for 
the control device.
    (i) When the batch cycle daily average value of one or more 
monitored parameters is above the maximum or below the minimum 
established level for the given parameters.
    (ii) When monitoring data are insufficient. Monitoring data shall be 
considered insufficient when measured values are not available for at 
least 75 percent of the 15-minute periods when batch emission episodes, 
or portions thereof, selected to be controlled are being vented to the 
control device during the operating day.
    (g) Excused excursions. A number of excused excursions shall be 
allowed for each control or recovery device for each semiannual period. 
The number of excused excursions for each semiannual period is specified 
in paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(6) of this section. This paragraph (g) 
applies to affected sources required to submit Periodic Reports 
semiannually or quarterly. The first semiannual period is the 6-month 
period starting the date the Notification of Compliance Status is due.
    (1) For the first semiannual period--six excused excursions.
    (2) For the second semiannual period--five excused excursions.
    (3) For the third semiannual period--four excused excursions.
    (4) For the fourth semiannual period--three excused excursions.
    (5) For the fifth semiannual period--two excused excursions.
    (6) For the sixth and all subsequent semiannual periods--one excused 
excursion.



Sec. 63.1335  General recordkeeping and reporting provisions.

    (a) Data retention. Each owner or operator of an affected source 
shall keep copies of all applicable records and reports required by this 
subpart for at least 5 years, unless otherwise specified in this 
subpart.
    (b) Requirements of subpart A of this part. The owner or operator of 
an affected source shall comply with the applicable recordkeeping and 
reporting requirements in subpart A of this part as specified in Table 1 
of this subpart. These requirements include, but are not limited to, the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) Start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan. The owner or operator 
of an affected source shall develop and implement a written start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3). This 
plan shall describe, in detail, procedures for operating and maintaining 
the affected source during periods of start-up, shutdown, and 
malfunction and a program for corrective action for malfunctioning 
process and air pollution control equipment used to comply with this 
subpart. The affected source shall keep this plan onsite and shall 
incorporate it by reference into their operating permit. Records 
associated with the plan shall be kept as specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i)(A) through (b)(1)(i)(D) of this section. Reports related to 
the plan shall be submitted as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this 
section.
    (i) Records of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction. The owner or 
operator shall keep the records specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) 
through (b)(1)(i)(D) of this section.
    (A) Records of the occurrence and duration of each malfunction of 
air pollution control equipment or continuous monitoring systems used to 
comply with this subpart.
    (B) For each start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, a statement that 
the procedures specified in the affected source's start-up, shutdown, 
and malfunction plan were followed; alternatively, documentation of any 
actions taken that are not consistent with the plan.
    (C) For continuous monitoring systems used to comply with this 
subpart, records documenting the completion of calibration checks and 
maintenance of continuous monitoring systems that are specified in the 
manufacturer's instructions.
    (D) Records specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(B) and (b)(1)(i)(C) of 
this section are not required if they pertain solely to Group 2 emission 
points that

[[Page 253]]

are not included in an emissions average or to Group 2 continuous 
process vents subject to Sec. 63.1315(a) with a total resource 
effectiveness value greater than 4.0 or, for Group 2 continuous process 
vents subject to Sec. 63.1315(b), with a total resource effectiveness 
value greater than 6.7.
    (ii) Reports of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction. For the 
purposes of this subpart, the semiannual start-up, shutdown, and 
malfunction reports shall be submitted on the same schedule as the 
Periodic Reports required under paragraph (e)(6) of this section instead 
of the schedule specified in Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i). Said reports shall 
include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) through 
(b)(1)(i)(C) of this section and shall contain the name, title, and 
signature of the owner or operator or other responsible official who is 
certifying its accuracy.
    (2) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. For 
new affected sources, each owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions in Sec. 63.5 regarding construction and reconstruction, 
excluding the provisions specified in Sec. 63.5 (d)(1)(ii)(H), (d)(2), 
and (d)(3)(ii).
    (c) Requirements of subpart H of this part. Owners or operators of 
affected sources shall comply with the reporting and recordkeeping 
requirements in subpart H of this part, except as specified in 
Sec. 63.1331.
    (d) Recordkeeping and documentation. Owners or operators required to 
keep continuous records shall keep records as specified in paragraphs 
(d)(1) through (d)(8) of this section, unless an alternative 
recordkeeping system has been requested and approved as specified in 
paragraph (g) or (h) of this section. Documentation requirements are 
specified in paragraphs (d)(9) and (d)(10) of this section.
    (1) The monitoring system shall measure data values at least once 
every 15 minutes.
    (2) The owner or operator shall record either each measured data 
value or block average values for 1 hour or shorter periods calculated 
from all measured data values during each period. If values are measured 
more frequently than once per minute, a single value for each minute may 
be used to calculate the hourly (or shorter period) block average 
instead of all measured values. Owners or operators of batch process 
vents must record each measured data value.
    (3) Daily average (or batch cycle daily average) values of each 
continuously monitored parameter shall be calculated for each operating 
day as specified in paragraphs (d)(3)(i) through (d)(3)(ii) of this 
section, except as specified in paragraph (d)(6) of this section.
    (i) The daily average value or batch cycle daily average shall be 
calculated as the average of all parameter values recorded during the 
operating day. As specified in Sec. 63.1326(e)(2)(i), only parameter 
values measured during those batch emission episodes, or portions 
thereof, in the batch cycle that the owner or operator has chosen to 
control shall be used to calculate the average. The calculated average 
shall cover a 24-hour period if operation is continuous, or the number 
of hours of operation per operating day if operation is not continuous.
    (ii) The operating day shall be the period the owner or operator 
specifies in the operating permit or the Notification of Compliance 
Status. It may be from midnight to midnight or another 24-hour period.
    (4) Records required when out of compliance. If the daily average 
(or batch cycle daily average) value of a monitored parameter for a 
given operating day is below the minimum level or above the maximum 
level established in the Notification of Compliance Status or operating 
permit, the owner or operator shall retain the data recorded that 
operating day under paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
    (5) Records required when in compliance for daily average value or 
batch cycle daily average value. If the daily average (or batch cycle 
daily average) value of a monitored parameter for a given operating day 
is above the minimum level or below the maximum level established in the 
Notification of Compliance Status or operating permit, the owner or 
operator shall either:
    (i) Retain block average values for 1 hour or shorter periods for 
that operating day; or
    (ii) Retain the data recorded in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.

[[Page 254]]

    (6) Records required when all recorded values are in compliance. If 
all recorded values for a monitored parameter during an operating day 
are above the minimum level or below the maximum level established in 
the Notification of Compliance Status or operating permit, the owner or 
operator may record that all values were above the minimum level or 
below the maximum level rather than calculating and recording a daily 
average (or batch cycle daily average) for that operating day. For these 
operating days, the records required in paragraph (d)(5) of this section 
shall also be retained for 5 years.
    (7) Monitoring data recorded during periods of monitoring system 
breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero (low-level) and high-
level adjustments shall not be included in any average computed under 
this subpart. Records shall be kept of the times and durations of all 
such periods.
    (8) In addition to the periods specified in paragraph (d)(7) of this 
section, records shall be kept of the times and durations of any other 
periods during process operation or control device operation when 
monitors are not operating. For batch process vents, this paragraph 
(d)(8) only applies during batch emission episodes, or portions thereof, 
that the owner or operator has selected to control.
    (9) For each TPPU that is not part of the affected source because it 
does not use as a reactant or process solvent, or produce as a by-
product or co-product any organic HAP, the owner or operator shall 
maintain the documentation specified in Sec. 63.1310(b)(1).
    (10) For each flexible operation unit in which the primary product 
is determined to be something other than a thermoplastic product, the 
owner or operator shall maintain the documentation specified in 
Sec. 63.1310(f)(6).
    (e) Reporting and notification. (1) In addition to the reports and 
notifications required by subparts A and H of this part, as specified in 
this subpart, the owner or operator of an affected source shall prepare 
and submit the reports listed in paragraphs (e)(3) through (e)(8) of 
this section, as applicable.
    (2) All reports required under this subpart shall be sent to the 
Administrator at the addresses listed in Sec. 63.13. If acceptable to 
both the Administrator and the owner or operator of an affected source, 
reports may be submitted on electronic media.
    (3) Precompliance Report. Affected sources requesting an extension 
for compliance, or requesting approval to use alternative monitoring 
parameters, alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping, or 
alternative controls, shall submit a Precompliance Report according to 
the schedule described in paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section. The 
Precompliance Report shall contain the information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) through (e)(3)(vi) of this section, as 
appropriate.
    (i) Submittal dates. The Precompliance Report shall be submitted to 
the Administrator no later than 12 months prior to the compliance date. 
For new affected sources, the Precompliance Report shall be submitted to 
the Administrator with the application for approval of construction or 
reconstruction required in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (ii) A request for an extension for compliance must be submitted in 
the Precompliance Report, if it has not been submitted to the operating 
permit authority as part of the operating permit application. The 
request for a compliance extension will include the data outlined in 
Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i) (A), (B), and (D), as required in Sec. 63.1311(e)(1).
    (iii) The alternative monitoring parameter information required in 
paragraph (f) of this section shall be submitted if, for any emission 
point, the owner or operator of an affected source seeks to comply 
through the use of a control technique other than those for which 
monitoring parameters are specified in this subpart or in subpart G of 
this part or seeks to comply by monitoring a different parameter than 
those specified in this subpart or in subpart G of this part.
    (iv) If the affected source seeks to comply using alternative 
continuous monitoring and recordkeeping as specified in paragraph (g) of 
this section, the information requested in paragraph (e)(3)(iv)(A) or 
(e)(3)(iv)(B) of this section must be submitted in the Precompliance 
Report.

[[Page 255]]

    (A) The owner or operator must submit notification of the intent to 
use the provisions specified in paragraph (g) of this section; or
    (B) The owner or operator must submit a request for approval to use 
alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping provisions as 
specified in paragraph (g) of this section.
    (v) The owner or operator shall report the intent to use alternative 
controls to comply with the provisions of this subpart. Alternative 
controls must be deemed by the Administrator to be equivalent to the 
controls required by the standard, under the procedures outlined in 
Sec. 63.6(g).
    (vi) If an owner or operator demonstrates that the emissions 
estimation equations contained in Sec. 63.1323(b) are inappropriate as 
specified in Sec. 63.1323(b)(6)(ii)(B), the information required by 
Sec. 63.1323(b)(6)(ii)(D) shall be submitted.
    (vii) If an owner or operator establishes parameter monitoring 
levels according to the procedures contained in Sec. 63.1334 (c) or (d), 
the information specified by Sec. 63.1334 (c) or (d), as appropriate.
    (4) Emissions Averaging Plan. For all existing affected sources 
using emissions averaging, an Emissions Averaging Plan shall be 
submitted for approval according to the schedule and procedures 
described in paragraph (e)(4)(i) of this section. The Emissions 
Averaging Plan shall contain the information specified in paragraph 
(e)(4)(ii) of this section, unless the information required in paragraph 
(e)(4)(ii) of this section is submitted with an operating permit 
application. An owner or operator of an affected source who submits an 
operating permit application instead of an Emissions Averaging Plan 
shall submit the information specified in paragraph (e)(8) of this 
section. In addition, a supplement to the Emissions Averaging Plan, as 
required under paragraph (e)(4)(iii) of this section, is to be submitted 
whenever alternative controls or operating scenarios may be used to 
comply with this subpart. Updates to the Emissions Averaging Plan shall 
be submitted in accordance with paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Submittal and approval. The Emissions Averaging Plan shall be 
submitted no later than 18 months prior to the compliance date, and it 
is subject to Administrator approval. The Administrator shall determine 
within 120 operating days whether the Emissions Averaging Plan submitted 
presents sufficient information. The Administrator shall either approve 
the Emissions Averaging Plan, request changes, or request that the owner 
or operator submit additional information. Once the Administrator 
receives sufficient information, the Administrator shall approve, 
disapprove, or request changes to the plan within 120 operating days.
    (ii) Information required. The Emissions Averaging Plan shall 
contain the information listed in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(A) through 
(e)(4)(ii)(K) of this section for all emission points included in an 
emissions average.
    (A) The required information shall include the identification of all 
emission points in the planned emissions average and, where applicable, 
notation of whether each storage vessel, continuous process vent, batch 
process vent, aggregate batch vent stream, and process wastewater stream 
is a Group 1 or Group 2 emission point, as defined in Sec. 63.1312 or as 
designated under Sec. 63.1332 (c)(3) through (c)(5).
    (B) The required information shall include the projected emission 
debits and credits for each emission point and the sum for the emission 
points involved in the average calculated according to Sec. 63.1332. The 
projected credits must be greater than or equal to the projected debits, 
as required under Sec. 63.1332(e)(3).
    (C) The required information shall include the specific control 
technology or pollution prevention measure that will be used for each 
emission point included in the average and date of application or 
expected date of application.
    (D) The required information shall include the specific 
identification of each emission point affected by a pollution prevention 
measure. To be considered a pollution prevention measure, the criteria 
in Sec. 63.1332(j)(1) must be met. If the same pollution prevention 
measure reduces or eliminates emissions from multiple emission points in 
the average, the owner or operator

[[Page 256]]

must identify each of these emission points.
    (E) The required information shall include a statement that the 
compliance demonstration, monitoring, inspection, recordkeeping, and 
reporting provisions in Sec. 63.1332 (m), (n), and (o) that are 
applicable to each emission point in the emissions average will be 
implemented beginning on or before the date of compliance.
    (F) The required information shall include documentation of the data 
listed in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(F)(1) through (e)(4)(ii)(F)(5) of this 
section for each storage vessel and continuous process vent subject to 
Sec. 63.1315 included in the average.
    (1) The required documentation shall include the values of the 
parameters used to determine whether the emission point is Group 1 or 
Group 2. Where TRE index value is used for continuous process vent group 
determination, the estimated or measured values of the parameters used 
in the TRE equation in Sec. 63.115(d) and the resulting TRE index value 
shall be submitted.
    (2) The required documentation shall include the estimated values of 
all parameters needed for input to the emission debit and credit 
calculations in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h). These parameter values shall 
be specified in the affected source's Emissions Averaging Plan (or 
operating permit) as enforceable operating conditions. Changes to these 
parameters must be reported as required by paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this 
section.
    (3) The required documentation shall include the estimated percent 
reduction if a control technology achieving a lower percent reduction 
than the efficiency of the applicable reference control technology or 
standard is or will be applied to the emission point.
    (4) The required documentation shall include the anticipated nominal 
efficiency if a control technology achieving a greater percent emission 
reduction than the efficiency of the reference control technology is or 
will be applied to the emission point. The procedures in Sec. 63.1332(i) 
shall be followed to apply for a nominal efficiency.
    (5) The required documentation shall include the operating plan 
required by Sec. 63.1314, as specified in Sec. 63.122 (a)(2) and (b) for 
each storage vessel controlled with a closed-vent system with a control 
device other than a flare.
    (G) The information specified in paragraph (f) of this section shall 
be included in the Emissions Averaging Plan for:
    (1) Each continuous process vent subject to Sec. 63.1315 controlled 
by a pollution prevention measure or control technique for which 
monitoring parameters or inspection procedures are not specified in 
Sec. 63.114; and
    (2) Each storage vessel controlled by pollution prevention or a 
control technique other than an internal or external floating roof or a 
closed vent system with a control device.
    (H) The required information shall include documentation of the data 
listed in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(H)(1) through (e)(4)(ii)(H)(5) of this 
section for each collection of continuous process vents located in a 
process section within the affected source subject to Sec. 63.1316 
(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) included in the 
average.
    (1) For continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316(b)(1)(i), 
the required documentation shall include the values of the parameters 
used to determine whether the emission point is Group 1 or Group 2. 
Continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), 
(b)(2)(ii), or (c)(1) are considered Group 1 emission points for 
purposes of emissions averaging, as specified in Sec. 63.1332(c)(5).
    (2) The required documentation shall include the estimated values of 
all parameters needed for input to the emission debit and credit 
calculations in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h). These parameter values shall 
be specified in the affected source's Emissions Averaging Plan (or 
operating permit) as enforceable operating conditions. Changes to these 
parameters must be reported as required by paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this 
section.
    (3) For process sections generating debits or credits by comparing 
actual emissions expressed as kg HAP emissions per Mg of product to the 
applicable standard, the required documentation shall include the actual 
emission level expressed as kg HAP emissions per Mg of product.
    (4) For process sections using combustion control devices, the 
required

[[Page 257]]

documentation shall include the estimated percent reduction if a control 
technology achieving a lower percent reduction than the efficiency of 
the applicable reference control technology or standard is or will be 
applied to the emission point.
    (5) For process sections using combustion control devices, the 
required documentation shall include the anticipated nominal efficiency 
if a control technology achieving a greater percent emission reduction 
than the efficiency of the reference control technology is or will be 
applied to the emission point. The procedures in Sec. 63.1332(i) shall 
be followed to apply for a nominal efficiency.
    (I) For each pollution prevention measure or control device used to 
reduce air emissions of organic HAP from each collection of continuous 
process vents located in a process section within the affected source 
subject to Sec. 63.1316 (b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or 
(c)(1) and for which no monitoring parameters or inspection procedures 
are specified in Sec. 63.114, the information specified in paragraph (f) 
of this section, Alternative Monitoring Parameters, shall be included in 
the Emissions Averaging Plan.
    (J) The required information shall include documentation of the data 
listed in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(J)(1) through (e)(4)(ii)(J)(3) of this 
section for each batch process vent and aggregate batch vent stream 
included in the average.
    (1) The required documentation shall include the values of the 
parameters used to determine whether the emission point is Group 1 or 
Group 2.
    (2) The required documentation shall include the estimated values of 
all parameters needed for input to the emission debit and credit 
calculations in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h). These parameter values shall 
be specified in the affected source's Emissions Averaging Plan (or 
operating permit) as enforceable operating conditions. Changes to these 
parameters must be reported as required by paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this 
section.
    (3) For batch process vents, the required documentation shall 
include the estimated percent reduction for the batch cycle. For 
aggregate batch vent streams, the required documentation shall include 
the estimated percent reduction achieved on a continuous basis.
    (K) For each pollution prevention measure or control device used to 
reduce air emissions of organic HAP from batch process vents or 
aggregate batch vent streams and for which no monitoring parameters or 
inspection procedures are specified in Sec. 63.1324, the information 
specified in paragraph (f) of this section, Alternative Monitoring 
Parameters, shall be included in the Emissions Averaging Plan.
    (L) The required information shall include documentation of the data 
listed in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii)(L)(1) through (e)(4)(ii)(L)(4) of this 
section for each process wastewater stream included in the average.
    (1) The required documentation shall include the data used to 
determine whether the wastewater stream is a Group 1 or Group 2 
wastewater stream.
    (2) The required documentation shall include the estimated values of 
all parameters needed for input to the wastewater emission credit and 
debit calculations in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h). These parameter values 
shall be specified in the affected source's Emissions Averaging Plan (or 
operating permit) as enforceable operating conditions. Changes to these 
parameters must be reported as required by paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this 
section.
    (3) The required documentation shall include the estimated percent 
reduction if:
    (i) A control technology that achieves an emission reduction less 
than or equal to the emission reduction that would otherwise have been 
achieved by a steam stripper designed to the specifications found in 
Sec. 63.138(g) is or will be applied to the wastewater stream;
    (ii) A control technology achieving less than or equal to 95 percent 
emission reduction is or will be applied to the vapor stream(s) vented 
and collected from the treatment processes; or
    (iii) A pollution prevention measure is or will be applied.
    (4) The required documentation shall include the anticipated nominal 
efficiency if the owner or operator plans to apply for a nominal 
efficiency under Sec. 63.1332(i). A nominal efficiency shall be applied 
for if:

[[Page 258]]

    (i) A control technology that achieves an emission reduction greater 
than the emission reduction that would have been achieved by a steam 
stripper designed to the specifications found in Sec. 63.138(g), is or 
will be applied to the wastewater stream; or
    (ii) A control technology achieving greater than 95 percent emission 
reduction is or will be applied to the vapor stream(s) vented and 
collected from the treatment processes.
    (M) For each pollution prevention measure, treatment process, or 
control device used to reduce air emissions of organic HAP from 
wastewater and for which no monitoring parameters or inspection 
procedures are specified in Sec. 63.143, the information specified in 
paragraph (f) of this section, Alternative Monitoring Parameters, shall 
be included in the Emissions Averaging Plan.
    (N) The required information shall include documentation of the data 
required by Sec. 63.1332(k). The documentation must demonstrate that the 
emissions from the emission points proposed to be included in the 
average will not result in greater hazard or, at the option of the 
Administrator, greater risk to human health or the environment than if 
the emission points were not included in an emissions average.
    (iii) Supplement to Emissions Averaging Plan. The owner or operator 
required to prepare an Emissions Averaging Plan under paragraph (e)(4) 
of this section shall also prepare a supplement to the Emissions 
Averaging Plan for any alternative controls or operating scenarios that 
may be used to achieve compliance.
    (iv) Updates to Emissions Averaging Plan. The owner or operator of 
an affected source required to submit an Emissions Averaging Plan under 
paragraph (e)(4) of this section shall also submit written updates of 
the Emissions Averaging Plan to the Administrator for approval under the 
circumstances described in paragraphs (e)(4)(iv)(A) and (e)(4)(iv)(B) of 
this section unless the relevant information has been included and 
submitted in an operating permit application or amendment.
    (A) The owner or operator who plans to make a change listed in 
either paragraph (e)(4)(iv)(A)(1) or (e)(4)(iv)(A)(2) of this section 
shall submit an Emissions Averaging Plan update at least 120 operating 
days prior to making the change.
    (1) An Emissions Averaging Plan update shall be submitted whenever 
an owner or operator elects to achieve compliance with the emissions 
averaging provisions in Sec. 63.1332 by using a control technique other 
than that specified in the Emissions Averaging Plan or plans to monitor 
a different parameter or operate a control device in a manner other than 
that specified in the Emissions Averaging Plan.
    (2) An Emissions Averaging Plan update shall be submitted whenever 
an emission point or a TPPU is added to an existing affected source and 
is planned to be included in an emissions average, or whenever an 
emission point not included in the emissions average described in the 
Emissions Averaging Plan is to be added to an emissions average. The 
information in paragraph (e)(4) of this section shall be updated to 
include the additional emission point.
    (B) The owner or operator who has made a change as defined in 
paragraph (e)(4)(iv)(B)(1) or (e)(4)(iv)(B)(2) of this section shall 
submit an Emissions Averaging Plan update within 90 operating days after 
the information regarding the change is known to the affected source. 
The update may be submitted in the next quarterly periodic report if the 
change is made after the date the Notification of Compliance Status is 
due.
    (1) An Emissions Averaging Plan update shall be submitted whenever a 
process change is made such that the group status of any emission point 
in an emissions average changes.
    (2) An Emissions Averaging Plan update shall be submitted whenever a 
value of a parameter in the emission credit or debit equations in 
Sec. 63.1332 (g) or (h) changes such that it is below the minimum or 
above the maximum established level specified in the Emissions Averaging 
Plan and causes a decrease in the projected credits or an increase in 
the projected debits.
    (C) The Administrator shall approve or request changes to the 
Emissions

[[Page 259]]

Averaging Plan update within 120 operating days of receipt of sufficient 
information regarding the change for emission points included in 
emissions averages.
    (5) Notification of Compliance Status. For existing and new affected 
sources, a Notification of Compliance Status shall be submitted within 
150 operating days after the compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1311. 
The notification shall contain the information listed in paragraphs 
(e)(5)(i) through (e)(5)(viii) of this section.
    (i) The results of any emission point group determinations, process 
section applicability determinations, performance tests, inspections, 
continuous monitoring system performance evaluations, any other 
information used to demonstrate compliance, and any other information 
required to be included in the Notification of Compliance Status under 
Sec. 63.122 for storage vessels, Sec. 63.117 for continuous process 
vents, Sec. 63.146 for process wastewater, Sec. 63.1316 through 
Sec. 63.1320 for continuous process vents subject to Sec. 63.1316, 
Sec. 63.1327 for batch process vents, Sec. 63.1329 for process contact 
cooling towers, and Sec. 63.1332 for emission points included in an 
emissions average. In addition, each owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (e)(5)(i)(A) and (e)(5)(i)(B) of this section.
    (A) For performance tests, group determinations, and process section 
applicability determinations that are based on measurements, the 
Notification of Compliance Status shall include one complete test 
report, as described in paragraph (e)(5)(i)(B) of this section, for each 
test method used for a particular kind of emission point. For additional 
tests performed for the same kind of emission point using the same 
method, the results and any other required information shall be 
submitted, but a complete test report is not required.
    (B) A complete test report shall include a brief process 
description, sampling site description, description of sampling and 
analysis procedures and any modifications to standard procedures, 
quality assurance procedures, record of operating conditions during the 
test, record of preparation of standards, record of calibrations, raw 
data sheets for field sampling, raw data sheets for field and laboratory 
analyses, documentation of calculations, and any other information 
required by the test method.
    (ii) For each monitored parameter for which a maximum or minimum 
level is required to be established under Sec. 63.120(d)(3) for storage 
vessels, Sec. 63.114(e) for continuous process vents, Sec. 63.1324 for 
batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams, Sec. 63.143(f) for 
process wastewater, Sec. 63.1332(m) for emission points in emissions 
averages, paragraph (e)(8) or (f) of this section, the Notification of 
Compliance Status shall contain the information specified in paragraphs 
(e)(5)(ii)(A) through (e)(5)(ii)(D) of this section, unless this 
information has been established and provided in the operating permit.
    (A) The required information shall include the specific maximum or 
minimum level of the monitored parameter(s) for each emission point.
    (B) The required information shall include the rationale for the 
specific maximum or minimum level for each parameter for each emission 
point, including any data and calculations used to develop the level and 
a description of why the level indicates proper operation of the control 
device.
    (C) The required information shall include a definition of the 
affected source's operating day, as specified in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of 
this section, for purposes of determining daily average values or batch 
cycle daily average values of monitored parameters.
    (D) For batch process vents, the required information shall include 
a definition of each batch cycle that requires the control of one or 
more batch emission episodes during the cycle, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1325(c)(2) and Sec. 63.1334(b)(3)(iii).
    (iii) For emission points included in an emissions average, the 
Notification of Compliance Status shall contain the values of all 
parameters needed for input to the emission credit and debit equations 
in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h), calculated or measured according to the 
procedures in Sec. 63.1332 (g) and (h), and the resulting calculation of 
credits and debits for the first quarter of the year. The first quarter 
begins on the compliance date specified.

[[Page 260]]

    (iv) The determination of applicability for flexible operation units 
as specified in Sec. 63.1310(f)(6).
    (v) The parameter monitoring levels for flexible operation units, 
and the basis on which these levels were selected, or a demonstration 
that these levels are appropriate at all times, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1310(f)(7).
    (vi) The results for each predominant use determination for storage 
vessels belonging to an affected source subject to this subpart that is 
made under Sec. 63.1310(g)(6).
    (vii) The results for each predominant use determination for 
recovery operation equipment belonging to an affected source subject to 
this subpart that is made under Sec. 63.1310(h)(6).
    (viii) For owners or operators of Group 2 batch process vents 
establishing a batch cycle limitation as specified in Sec. 63.1325(g), 
the affected source's operating year for purposes of determining 
compliance with the batch cycle limitation.
    (6) Periodic Reports. For existing and new affected sources, each 
owner or operator shall submit Periodic Reports as specified in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(i) through (e)(6)(xi) of this section.
    (i) Except as specified in paragraphs (e)(6)(x) and (e)(6)(xi) of 
this section, a report containing the information in paragraph 
(e)(6)(ii) of this section or containing the information in paragraphs 
(e)(6)(iii) through (e)(6)(ix) of this section, as appropriate, shall be 
submitted semiannually no later than 60 operating days after the end of 
each 180 day period. The first report shall be submitted no later than 
240 days after the date the Notification of Compliance Status is due and 
shall cover the 6-month period beginning on the date the Notification of 
Compliance Status is due. Subsequent reports shall cover each preceding 
6-month period.
    (ii) If none of the compliance exceptions specified in paragraphs 
(e)(6)(iii) through (e)(6)(ix) of this section occurred during the 6-
month period, the Periodic Report required by paragraph (e)(6)(i) of 
this section shall be a statement that the affected source was in 
compliance for the preceding 6-month period and no activities specified 
in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) through (e)(6)(ix) of this section occurred 
during the preceding 6-month period.
    (iii) For an owner or operator of an affected source complying with 
the provisions of Secs. 63.1314 through 63.1330 for any emission point 
or process section, Periodic Reports shall include:
    (A) All information specified in Sec. 63.122 for storage vessels; 
Secs. 63.117 and 63.118 and Sec. 63.1320 for continuous process vents, 
as applicable; Sec. 63.1327 for batch process vents and aggregate batch 
vent streams; Sec. 63.104 for heat exchange systems; and Sec. 63.146 for 
process wastewater;
    (B) The daily average values or batch cycle daily average values of 
monitored parameters for both excused excursions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1334(g), and unexcused excursions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1334(f). For excursions caused by lack of monitoring data, the 
duration of periods when monitoring data were not collected shall be 
specified;
    (C) The periods when monitoring data were not collected shall be 
specified;
    (D) The information in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii)(D)(1) through 
(e)(6)(iii)(D)(3) of this section, as applicable:
    (1) Any supplements to the Emissions Averaging Plan, as required in 
paragraph (e)(4)(iii) of this section;
    (2) Notification if a process change is made such that the group 
status of any emission point changes. The information submitted shall 
include a compliance schedule, as specified in paragraphs 
(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2)(i) and (e)(6)(iii)(D)(2)(ii) of this section, for 
emission points that are added or that change from Group 2 to Group 1 as 
specified in Sec. 63.1310(i)(2)(ii); for continuous process vents under 
the conditions listed in Sec. 63.1315(a)(12) or Sec. 63.1320(b)(3), as 
applicable; or for batch process vents under the conditions listed in 
Sec. 63.1327(b) or Sec. 63.1327(d). This information may be submitted in 
a separate report, as specified in Sec. 63.1315(a)(12), 
Sec. 63.1320(b)(3), Sec. 63.1327(b), or Sec. 63.1327(d); and
    (i) The owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator for 
approval a compliance schedule and a justification for the schedule.
    (ii) The Administrator shall approve the compliance schedule or 
request changes within 120 operating days of

[[Page 261]]

receipt of the compliance schedule and justification.
    (3) Notification if one or more emission point(s) or one or more 
TPPU is added to an affected source. The owner or operator shall submit 
the information contained in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii)(D)(3)(i) through 
(e)(6)(iii)(D)(3)(iii) of this section:
    (i) A description of the addition to the affected source;
    (ii) Notification of the group status of the additional emission 
point or all emission points in the TPPU; and
    (iii) A compliance schedule, as required under paragraph 
(e)(6)(iii)(D)(2) of this section.
    (E) The information in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section for 
reports of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction.
    (iv) For each batch process vent with a batch cycle limitation, 
every second Periodic Report shall include the type and number of batch 
cycles accomplished during the preceding 12-month period and a statement 
that the batch process vent is either in or out of compliance with the 
batch cycle limitation.
    (v) If any performance tests are reported in a Periodic Report, the 
following information shall be included:
    (A) One complete test report shall be submitted for each test method 
used for a particular kind of emission point tested. A complete test 
report shall contain the information specified in paragraph (e)(5)(i)(B) 
of this section.
    (B) For additional tests performed for the same kind of emission 
point using the same method, results and any other information required 
shall be submitted, but a complete test report is not required.
    (vi) The Periodic Report shall include the results for each change 
made to a primary product determination for a thermoplastic product made 
under Sec. 63.1310(f)(6).
    (vii) The Periodic Report shall include the results for each change 
made to a predominant use determination for a storage vessel belonging 
to an affected source subject to this subpart that is made under 
Sec. 63.1310(g)(6).
    (viii) The Periodic Report shall include the results for each change 
made to a predominant use determination for recovery operation equipment 
belonging to an affected source subject to this subpart that is made 
under Sec. 63.1310(h)(6).
    (ix) The Periodic Report required by Sec. 63.1331(a)(5) may be 
submitted as part of the Periodic Report required by paragraph (e)(6) of 
this section.
    (x) The owner or operator of an affected source shall submit 
quarterly reports for all emission points included in an emissions 
average.
    (A) The quarterly reports shall be submitted no later than 60 
operating days after the end of each quarter. The first report shall be 
submitted with the Notification of Compliance Status no later than 150 
days after the compliance date.
    (B) The quarterly reports shall include the information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(x)(B)(1) through (e)(6)(x)(B)(7) of this section for 
all emission points included in an emissions average.
    (1) The credits and debits calculated each month during the quarter;
    (2) A demonstration that debits calculated for the quarter are not 
more than 1.30 times the credits calculated for the quarter, as required 
under Sec. 63.1332(e)(4);
    (3) The values of any inputs to the debit and credit equations in 
Sec. 63.1332(g) and (h) that change from month to month during the 
quarter or that have changed since the previous quarter;
    (4) Results of any performance tests conducted during the reporting 
period including one complete report for each test method used for a 
particular kind of emission point as described in paragraph (e)(6)(v) of 
this section;
    (5) Reports of daily average (or batch cycle daily average) values 
of monitored parameters for excursions as defined in Sec. 63.1334(f);
    (6) For excursions caused by lack of monitoring data, the duration 
of periods when monitoring data were not collected shall be specified; 
and
    (7) Any other information the affected source is required to report 
under the operating permit or Emissions Averaging Plan for the affected 
source.
    (C) Sec. 63.1334 shall govern the use of monitoring data to 
determine compliance for Group 1 and Group 2 emission points included in 
emissions averages.

[[Page 262]]

    (D) Every fourth quarterly report shall include the following:
    (1) A demonstration that annual credits are greater than or equal to 
annual debits as required by Sec. 63.1332(e)(3); and
    (2) A certification of compliance with all the emissions averaging 
provisions in Sec. 63.1332.
    (xi) The owner or operator of an affected source shall submit 
quarterly reports for particular emission points and process sections 
not included in an emissions average as specified in paragraphs 
(e)(6)(xi)(A) through (e)(6)(xi)(E) of this section.
    (A) If requested by the Administrator, the owner or operator of an 
affected source shall submit quarterly reports for a period of 1 year 
for an emission point or process section that is not included in an 
emissions average if either condition in paragraph (e)(6)(xi)(A)(1) or 
(e)(6)(xi)(A)(2) of this section is met.
    (1) An emission point has any excursions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1334(f), for a semiannual reporting period.
    (2) A process section subject to Sec. 63.1316 is out of compliance 
with its applicable standard.
    (B) The quarterly reports shall include all information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) through (e)(6)(ix) of this section applicable to 
the emission point or process section for which quarterly reporting is 
required under paragraph (e)(6)(xi)(A) of this section. Information 
applicable to other emission points within the affected source shall be 
submitted in the semiannual reports required under paragraph (e)(6)(i) 
of this section.
    (C) Quarterly reports shall be submitted no later than 60 operating 
days after the end of each quarter.
    (D) After quarterly reports have been submitted for an emission 
point for 1 year, the owner or operator may return to semiannual 
reporting for the emission point or process section unless the 
Administrator requests the owner or operator to continue to submit 
quarterly reports.
    (E) Sec. 63.1334 shall govern the use of monitoring data to 
determine compliance for Group 1 emission points.
    (7) Other reports. Other reports shall be submitted as specified in 
paragraphs (e)(7)(i) through (e)(7)(ii) of this section.
    (i) For storage vessels, the notifications of inspections required 
by Sec. 63.1314 shall be submitted as specified in Sec. 63.122 (h)(1) 
and (h)(2).
    (ii) For owners or operators of affected sources required to request 
approval for a nominal control efficiency for use in calculating credits 
for an emissions average, the information specified in Sec. 63.1332(i) 
shall be submitted.
    (8) Operating permit. An owner or operator who submits an operating 
permit application instead of an Emissions Averaging Plan or a 
Precompliance Report shall submit the following information with the 
operating permit application:
    (i) The information specified in paragraph (e)(4) of this section 
for points included in an emissions average;
    (ii) The information specified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section, 
Notification of Compliance Status, as applicable; and
    (iii) The information specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, 
Precompliance Report, as applicable.
    (f) Alternative monitoring parameters. The owner or operator who has 
been directed by any section of this subpart to set unique monitoring 
parameters, or who requests approval to monitor a different parameter 
than those specified in Sec. 63.1314 for storage vessels, Sec. 63.1315 
or 63.1317, as appropriate, for continuous process vents, Sec. 63.1321 
for batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams, or 
Sec. 63.1330 for wastewater shall submit the information specified in 
paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(3) of this section in the Precompliance 
Report, as required by paragraph (e)(3) of this section. The owner or 
operator shall retain for a period of 5 years each record required by 
paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(3) of this section.
    (1) The required information shall include a description of the 
parameter(s) to be monitored to ensure the recovery device, control 
device, or pollution prevention measure is operated in conformance with 
its design and achieves the specified emission limit, percent reduction, 
or nominal efficiency, and an explanation of the criteria used to select 
the parameter(s).

[[Page 263]]

    (2) The required information shall include a description of the 
methods and procedures that will be used to demonstrate that the 
parameter indicates proper operation, the schedule for this 
demonstration, and a statement that the owner or operator will establish 
a level for the monitored parameter as part of the Notification of 
Compliance Status report required in paragraph (e)(5) of this section, 
unless this information has already been included in the operating 
permit application.
    (3) The required information shall include a description of the 
proposed monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting system, to include the 
frequency and content of monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting. 
Further, the rationale for the proposed monitoring, recordkeeping, and 
reporting system shall be included if either condition in paragraph 
(f)(3)(i) or (f)(3)(ii) of this section is met:
    (i) If monitoring and recordkeeping is not continuous; or
    (ii) If reports of daily average values will not be included in 
Periodic Reports when the monitored parameter value is above the maximum 
level or below the minimum level as established in the operating permit 
or the Notification of Compliance Status.
    (g) Alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping. An owner or 
operator choosing not to implement the provisions listed in Sec. 63.1315 
or 63.1317, as appropriate, for continuous process vents, Sec. 63.1321 
for batch process vents and aggregate batch vent streams, Sec. 63.1314 
for storage vessels, or Sec. 63.1330 for wastewater, may instead request 
approval to use alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping 
provisions according to the procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(1) 
through (g)(4) of this section. Requests shall be submitted in the 
Precompliance Report as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, 
if not already included in the operating permit application, and shall 
contain the information specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(ii) and 
(g)(3)(ii) of this section, as applicable.
    (1) The provisions in Sec. 63.8(f)(5)(i) shall govern the review and 
approval of requests.
    (2) An owner or operator of an affected source that does not have an 
automated monitoring and recording system capable of measuring parameter 
values at least once every 15 minutes and that does not generate 
continuous records may request approval to use a nonautomated system 
with less frequent monitoring, in accordance with paragraphs (g)(2)(i) 
and (g)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The requested system shall include manual reading and recording 
of the value of the relevant operating parameter no less frequently than 
once per hour. Daily average (or batch cycle daily average) values shall 
be calculated from these hourly values and recorded.
    (ii) The request shall contain:
    (A) A description of the planned monitoring and recordkeeping 
system;
    (B) Documentation that the affected source does not have an 
automated monitoring and recording system;
    (C) Justification for requesting an alternative monitoring and 
recordkeeping system; and
    (D) Demonstration to the Administrator's satisfaction that the 
proposed monitoring frequency is sufficient to represent control or 
recovery device operating conditions, considering typical variability of 
the specific process and control or recovery device operating parameter 
being monitored.
    (3) An owner or operator may request approval to use an automated 
data compression recording system that does not record monitored 
operating parameter values at a set frequency (for example, once every 
15 minutes) but records all values that meet set criteria for variation 
from previously recorded values, in accordance with paragraphs (g)(3)(i) 
and (g)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The requested system shall be designed to:
    (A) Measure the operating parameter value at least once every 15 
minutes;
    (B) Except for the monitoring of batch process vents, calculate 
hourly average values each hour during periods of operation;
    (C) Record the date and time when monitors are turned off or on;
    (D) Recognize unchanging data that may indicate the monitor is not 
functioning properly, alert the operator, and record the incident;

[[Page 264]]

    (E) Calculate daily average (or batch cycle daily average) values of 
the monitored operating parameter based on all measured data; and
    (F) If the daily average is not an excursion, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1334(f), the data for that operating day may be converted to 
hourly average values and the four or more individual records for each 
hour in the operating day may be discarded.
    (ii) The request shall contain:
    (A) A description of the monitoring system and data compression 
recording system, including the criteria used to determine which 
monitored values are recorded and retained;
    (B) The method for calculating daily averages and batch cycle daily 
averages; and
    (C) A demonstration that the system meets all criteria in paragraph 
(g)(3)(i) of this section.
    (4) An owner or operator may request approval to use other 
alternative monitoring systems according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.8(f).
    (h) Reduced recordkeeping program. For any parameter with respect to 
any item of equipment, the owner or operator may implement the 
recordkeeping requirements specified in paragraph (h)(1) or (h)(2) of 
this section as alternatives to the provisions specified in Sec. 63.1314 
for storage vessels, Sec. 63.1315 or 63.1317, as appropriate, for 
continuous process vents, Sec. 63.1321 for batch process vents and 
aggregate batch vent streams, or Sec. 63.1330 for wastewater. The owner 
or operator shall retain for a period of 5 years each record required by 
paragraph (h)(1) or (h)(2) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator may retain only the daily average (or 
batch cycle daily average) value, and is not required to retain more 
frequent monitored operating parameter values, for a monitored parameter 
with respect to an item of equipment, if the requirements of paragraphs 
(h)(1)(i) through (h)(1)(vi) of this section are met. An owner or 
operator electing to comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of 
this section shall notify the Administrator in the Notification of 
Compliance Status or, if the Notification of Compliance Status has 
already been submitted, in the Periodic Report immediately preceding 
implementation of the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
    (i) The monitoring system is capable of detecting unrealistic or 
impossible data during periods of operation other than start-ups, 
shutdowns, or malfunctions (e.g., a temperature reading of -200  deg.C 
on a boiler), and will alert the operator by alarm or other means. The 
owner or operator shall record the occurrence. All instances of the 
alarm or other alert in an operating day constitute a single occurrence.
    (ii) The monitoring system generates, updated at least hourly 
throughout each operating day, a running average of the monitoring 
values that have been obtained during that operating day, and the 
capability to observe this running average is readily available to the 
Administrator on-site during the operating day. The owner or operator 
shall record the occurrence of any period meeting the criteria in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(ii)(A) through (h)(1)(ii)(C) of this section. All 
instances in an operating day constitute a single occurrence.
    (A) The running average is above the maximum or below the minimum 
established limits;
    (B) The running average is based on at least six 1-hour periods; and
    (C) The running average reflects a period of operation other than a 
start-up, shutdown, or malfunction.
    (iii) The monitoring system is capable of detecting unchanging data 
during periods of operation other than start-ups, shutdowns, or 
malfunctions, except in circumstances where the presence of unchanging 
data is the expected operating condition based on past experience (e.g., 
pH in some scrubbers), and will alert the operator by alarm or other 
means. The owner or operator shall record the occurrence. All instances 
of the alarm or other alert in an operating day constitute a single 
occurrence.
    (iv) The monitoring system will alert the owner or operator by an 
alarm, if the running average parameter value calculated under paragraph 
(h)(1)(ii) of this section reaches a set point that is appropriately 
related to the established limit for the parameter that is being 
monitored.

[[Page 265]]

    (v) The owner or operator shall verify the proper functioning of the 
monitoring system, including its ability to comply with the requirements 
of paragraph (h)(1) of this section, at the times specified in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(v)(A) through (h)(1)(v)(C). The owner or operator 
shall document that the required verifications occurred.
    (A) Upon initial installation.
    (B) Annually after initial installation.
    (C) After any change to the programming or equipment constituting 
the monitoring system, which might reasonably be expected to alter the 
monitoring system's ability to comply with the requirements of this 
section.
    (vi) The owner or operator shall retain the records identified in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(vi)(A) through (h)(1)(vi)(C) of this section.
    (A) Identification of each parameter, for each item of equipment, 
for which the owner or operator has elected to comply with the 
requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (B) A description of the applicable monitoring system(s), and of how 
compliance will be achieved with each requirement of paragraphs 
(h)(1)(i) through (h)(1)(v) of this section. The description shall 
identify the location and format (e.g., on-line storage, log entries) 
for each required record. If the description changes, the owner or 
operator shall retain both the current and the most recent superseded 
description.
    (C) A description, and the date, of any change to the monitoring 
system that would reasonably be expected to affect its ability to comply 
with the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
    (2) If an owner or operator has elected to implement the 
requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section for a monitored 
parameter with respect to an item of equipment and a period of 6 
consecutive months has passed without an excursion as defined in 
paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section, the owner or operator is no longer 
required to record the daily average (or batch cycle daily average) 
value for any operating day when the daily average (or batch cycle daily 
average) value is less than the maximum or greater than the minimum 
established limit. With approval by the Administrator, monitoring data 
generated prior to the compliance date of this subpart shall be credited 
toward the period of 6 consecutive months, if the parameter limit and 
the monitoring accomplished during the period prior to the compliance 
date was required and/or approved by the Administrator.
    (i) If the owner or operator elects not to retain the daily average 
(or batch cycle daily average) values, the owner or operator shall 
notify the Administrator in the next Periodic Report. The notification 
shall identify the parameter and unit of equipment.
    (ii) If, on any operating day after the owner or operator has ceased 
recording daily average (or batch cycle daily average) values as 
provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this section, there is an excursion as 
defined in paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section, the owner or operator 
shall immediately resume retaining the daily average (or batch cycle 
daily average) value for each operating day and shall notify the 
Administrator in the next Periodic Report. The owner or operator shall 
continue to retain each daily average (or batch cycle daily average) 
value until another period of 6 consecutive months has passed without an 
excursion as defined in paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall retain the records specified in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(i), (h)(1)(ii), and (h)(1)(vi) of this section, for 
the duration specified in paragraph (h) of this section. For any 
calendar week, if compliance with paragraphs (h)(1)(i) through 
(h)(1)(iv) of this section does not result in retention of a record of 
at least one occurrence or measured parameter value, the owner or 
operator shall record and retain at least one parameter value during a 
period of operation other than a start-up, shutdown, or malfunction.
    (iv) For purposes of paragraph (h) of this section, an excursion 
means that the daily average (or batch cycle daily average) value of 
monitoring data for a parameter is greater than the maximum, or less 
than the minimum established value, except as provided in paragraphs 
(h)(2)(iv)(A) and (h)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.
    (A) The daily average (or batch cycle daily average) value during 
any start-

[[Page 266]]

up, shutdown, or malfunction shall not be considered an excursion for 
purposes of paragraph (h)(2) of this section, if the owner or operator 
follows the applicable provisions of the start-up, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan required by Sec. 63.6(e)(3).
    (B) An excused excursion, as described in Sec. 63.1334(g), shall not 
be considered an excursion for purposes of paragraph (h)(2) of this 
section.

[61 FR 48229, Sept. 12, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 11553, Mar. 9, 1999]

                     Tables to Subpt. JJJ of Part 63

                  Table 1.--Applicability of General Provisions to Subpart JJJ Affected Sources
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     Reference                         Applies to  subpart JJJ                Comment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1(a)(1)........................................  Yes..........................  Sec.  63.1312 specifies
                                                                                    definitions in addition to
                                                                                    or that supersede
                                                                                    definitions in Sec.  63.2.
63.1(a)(2)-63.1(a)(3).............................  Yes.
63.1(a)(4)........................................  Yes..........................  Subpart JJJ (this table)
                                                                                    specifies the applicability
                                                                                    of each paragraph in subpart
                                                                                    A to subpart JJJ.
63.1(a)(5)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.1(a)(6)-63.1(a)(8).............................  Yes.
63.1(a)(9)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.1(a)(10).......................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ and other cross-
                                                                                    referenced subparts specify
                                                                                    calendar or operating day.
63.1(a)(11).......................................  Yes.
63.1(a)(12)-63.1(a)(14)...........................  Yes.
63.1(b)(1)........................................  Yes..........................  Subpart JJJ (this table)
                                                                                    specifies the applicability
                                                                                    of each paragraph in subpart
                                                                                    A to subpart JJJ.
63.1(b)(2)........................................  Yes.
63.1(b)(3)........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1310(b) provides
                                                                                    documentation requirements
                                                                                    for TPPUs not considered
                                                                                    affected sources.
63.1(c)(1)........................................  Yes..........................  Subpart JJJ (this table)
                                                                                    specifies the applicability
                                                                                    of each paragraph in subpart
                                                                                    A to subpart JJJ.
63.1(c)(2)........................................  No...........................  Area sources are not subject
                                                                                    to subpart JJJ.
63.1(c)(3)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.1(c)(4)........................................  Yes.
63.1(c)(5)........................................  Yes..........................  Except that affected sources
                                                                                    are not required to submit
                                                                                    notifications overridden by
                                                                                    this table.
63.1(d)...........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.1(e)...........................................  Yes.
63.2..............................................  Yes..........................  Sec.  63.1312 specifies those
                                                                                    subpart A definitions that
                                                                                    apply to subpart JJJ.
63.3..............................................  Yes..........................  Subpart JJJ specifies those
                                                                                    units of measure that apply
                                                                                    to subpart JJJ.
63.4(a)(1)-63.4(a)(3).............................  Yes.
63.4(a)(4)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.4(a)(5)........................................  Yes.
63.4(b)...........................................  Yes.
63.4(c)...........................................  Yes.
63.5(a)...........................................  Yes.
63.5(b)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.5(b)(2)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.5(b)(3)........................................  Yes.
63.5(b)(4)........................................  No...........................  Area sources are not subject
                                                                                    to subpart JJJ.
63.5(b)(5)........................................  Yes.
63.5(b)(6)........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1310(i) specifies
                                                                                    requirements.
63.5(c)...........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.5(d)(1)(i).....................................  No.
63.5(d)(1)(ii)....................................  Yes..........................  Except that for affected
                                                                                    sources subject to subpart
                                                                                    JJJ, emission estimates
                                                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                                                    63.5(d)(1)(ii)(H) are not
                                                                                    required.
63.5(d)(1)(iii)...................................  Yes..........................  Except that Sec.
                                                                                    63.1335(e)(5) specifies
                                                                                    Notification of Compliance
                                                                                    Status requirements.
63.5(d)(2)........................................  No.
63.5(d)(3)........................................  Yes..........................  Except Sec.  63.5(d)(3)(ii)
                                                                                    does not apply.
63.5(d)(4)........................................  Yes.
63.5(e)...........................................  Yes.
63.5(f)(1)........................................  Yes.

[[Page 267]]

 
63.5(f)(2)........................................  Yes..........................  Except that where Sec.
                                                                                    63.5(d)(1) is referred to,
                                                                                    Sec.  63.5(d)(1)(i) does not
                                                                                    apply.
63.6(a)...........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(2)........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(3)........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(4)........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(5)........................................  Yes.
63.6(b)(6)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.6(b)(7)........................................  Yes.
63.6(c)(1)........................................  Yes..........................  Sec.  63.1311 specifies the
                                                                                    compliance date.
63.6(c)(2)........................................  Yes.
63.6(c)(3)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.6(c)(4)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.6(c)(5)........................................  Yes.
63.6(d)...........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.6(e)...........................................  Yes..........................  Except the plan, and any
                                                                                    records or reports of start-
                                                                                    up, shutdown and malfunction
                                                                                    do not apply to Group 2
                                                                                    emission points, unless they
                                                                                    are included in an emissions
                                                                                    average.
63.6(f)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.6(f)(2)........................................  Yes..........................  Except Sec.  63.7(c), as
                                                                                    referred to in Sec.
                                                                                    63.6(f)(2)(iii)(D), does not
                                                                                    apply.
63.6(f)(3)........................................  Yes.
63.6(g)...........................................  Yes.
63.6(h)...........................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ does not require
                                                                                    opacity and visible emission
                                                                                    standards.
63.6(i)...........................................  Yes..........................  Except for Sec.  63.6(i)(15),
                                                                                    which is reserved.
63.6(j)...........................................  Yes.
63.7(a)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.7(a)(2)........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1335(e)(5) specifies
                                                                                    submittal dates.
63.7(a)(3)........................................  Yes.
63.7(b)...........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1333(a)(4) specifies
                                                                                    notification requirements.
63.7(c)...........................................  No.
63.7(d)...........................................  Yes.
63.7(e)...........................................  Yes..........................  Except that performance tests
                                                                                    must be conducted at maximum
                                                                                    representative operating
                                                                                    conditions. In addition,
                                                                                    some of the testing
                                                                                    requirements specified in
                                                                                    subpart JJJ are not
                                                                                    consistent with Sec.
                                                                                    63.7(e)(3).
63.7(f)...........................................  Yes.
63.7(g)...........................................  Yes..........................  Except that references to the
                                                                                    Notification of Compliance
                                                                                    Status report in Sec.
                                                                                    63.9(h) are replaced with
                                                                                    the requirements in Sec.
                                                                                    63.1335(e)(5).
63.7(h)...........................................  Yes..........................  Except Sec.  63.7(h)(4)(ii)
                                                                                    is not applicable, since the
                                                                                    site-specific test plans in
                                                                                    Sec.  63.7(c)(3) are not
                                                                                    required.
63.8(a)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.8(a)(2)........................................  No.
63.8(a)(3)........................................  No...........................  Reserved.
63.8(a)(4)........................................  Yes.
63.8(b)(1)........................................  Yes.
63.8(b)(2)........................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ specifies
                                                                                    locations to conduct
                                                                                    monitoring.
63.8(b)(3).
63.8(c)(1)(i).....................................  Yes.
63.8(c)(1)(ii)....................................  No.
63.8(c)(1)(iii)...................................  Yes.
63.8(c)(2)........................................  Yes.
63.8(c)(3)........................................  Yes.
63.8(c)(4)........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1334 specifies
                                                                                    monitoring frequency.
63.8(c)(5)-63.8(c)(8).............................  No.
63.8(d)...........................................  No.
63.8(e)...........................................  No.
63.8(f)(1)-63.8(f)(3).............................  Yes.
63.8(f)(4)(i).....................................  No...........................  Timeframe for submitting
                                                                                    request is specified in Sec.
                                                                                     63.1335(e).
63.8(f)(4)(ii)....................................  No.
63.8(f)(4)(iii)...................................  No.
63.8(f)(5)(i).....................................  Yes.
63.8(f)(5)(ii)....................................  No.
63.8(f)(5)(iii)...................................  Yes.
63.8(f)(6)........................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ does not require
                                                                                    continuous emission
                                                                                    monitors.

[[Page 268]]

 
63.8(g)...........................................  No...........................  Data reduction procedures
                                                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                                                    63.1335(d).
63.9(a)...........................................  Yes.
63.9(b)...........................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ does not require
                                                                                    an initial notification.
63.9(c)...........................................  Yes.
63.9(d)...........................................  Yes.
63.9(e)...........................................  No.
63.9(f)...........................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ does not require
                                                                                    opacity and visible emission
                                                                                    standards.
63.9(g)...........................................  No.
63.9(h)...........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1335(e)(5) specifies
                                                                                    Notification of Compliance
                                                                                    Status requirements.
63.9(i)...........................................  Yes.
63.9(j)...........................................  No.
63.10(a)..........................................  Yes.
63.10(b)(1).......................................  Yes.
63.10(b)(2).......................................  Yes.
63.10(b)(3).......................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1310(b) requires
                                                                                    documentation of sources
                                                                                    that are not affected
                                                                                    sources.
63.10(c)..........................................  No...........................  Sec.  63.1335 specifies
                                                                                    recordkeeping requirements.
63.10(d)(1).......................................  Yes.
63.10(d)(2).......................................  No.
63.10(d)(3).......................................  No...........................  Subpart JJJ does not require
                                                                                    opacity and visible emission
                                                                                    standards.
63.10(d)(4).......................................  Yes.
63.10(d)(5).......................................  Yes..........................  Except that reports required
                                                                                    by Sec.  63.10(d)(5)(i) may
                                                                                    be submitted at the same
                                                                                    time as Periodic Reports
                                                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                                                    63.1335(e)(6). The start-up,
                                                                                    shutdown, and malfunction
                                                                                    plan, and any records or
                                                                                    reports of start-up,
                                                                                    shutdown, and malfunction do
                                                                                    not apply to Group 2
                                                                                    emission points unless they
                                                                                    are included in an emissions
                                                                                    average.
63.10(e)..........................................  No.
63.10(f)..........................................  Yes.
63.10(d)(4).......................................  Yes.
63.12.............................................  Yes.
63.13.............................................  Yes.
63.14.............................................  Yes.
63.15.............................................  Yes.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


     Table 2.--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing Affected Sources
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Vapor pressure
             Vessel capacity (cubic meters)                      a
                                                           (kilopascals)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
75  capacity  151............................  13.
                                                                       1
151  capacity................................  5.2
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Maximum true vapor pressure of total organic HAP at storage
  temperature.


       Table 3 to Subpart JJJ.--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing Affected Sources Producing the Listed
                                                 Thermoplastics
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                  Vapor pressure
           Thermoplastic                      Chemical a          Vessel capacity (cubic meters)         b
                                                                                                   (kilopascals)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASA/AMSAN c........................  styrene/acrylonitrile         3.78..............     
                                      mixture.                                                              0.47
                                     acrylonitrile..............   75.7..............     
                                                                                                            1.62
Polystyrene, continuous processes..  all chemicals..............  75.7..........................     
                                                                                                            14.2
                                                                   75.7..............
                                                                                                     
                                                                                                             1.9
Nitrilec...........................  acrylonitrile..............   13.25.............     
                                                                                                             1.8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Vessel capacity and vapor pressure criteria are specific to the listed chemical or to ``all chemicals,'' as
  indicated.
b Maximum true vapor pressure of total organic HAP at storage temperature.
c The applicability criteria in Table 2 of this subpart shall be used for chemicals not specifically listed in
  this table (i.e., Table 3).

[64 FR 11553, Mar. 9, 1999]

[[Page 269]]


        Table 4.--Group 1 Storage Vessels at New Affected Sources
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Vapor
             Vessel capacity (cubic meters)                 pressure a
                                                           (kilopascals)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
38  capacity  151............................  13.
                                                                       1
151  capacity................................  0.7
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Maximum true vapor pressure of total organic HAP at storage
  temperature.


  Table 5 to Subpart JJJ.--Group 1 Storage Vessels at New Affected Sources Producing the Listed Thermoplastics
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Vessel capacity  (cubic          Vapor pressure b
          Thermoplastic                 Chemical a                meters)                   (kilopascals)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASA/AMSAN c......................  Styrene/              3.78...........   0.47
                                    acrylonitrile
                                    mixture.
                                   Acrylonitrile......   75.7...........   1.62
SAN, continuous d................  All chemicals......   2,271..........   0.5 and  0.7
                                                         151.......................   10
                                                         151............   0.7
Nitrile c........................  Acrylonitrile......   13.25..........   1.8
Polystyrene, continuous processes  All chemicals......   19.6 and 45.4..   7.48
                                                         45.4 and 109.8.   0.61
                                                         109.8..........   0.53
ABS, continuous mass.............  Styrene............   45.43..........   0.078
                                   All other chemicals   38 and  45.43..   13.1
                                                         45.43..........   0.53
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Vessel capacity and vapor pressure criteria are specific to the listed chemical, to ``all chemicals,'' or to
  ``all other chemicals,'' as indicated.
b Maximum true vapor pressure of total organic HAP at storage temperature.
c The applicability criteria in Table 4 of this subpart shall be used for chemicals not specifically listed in
  this table (i.e., Table 5).
d The control level for the first two sets of applicability criteria are specified in 63.1314 as 90% and 98%,
  respectively. The control level for the third set of applicability criteria is the HON control level of 95%.


[64 FR 11553, Mar. 9, 1999]

                                      Table 6.--Known Organic Hazardous Air Pollutants From Thermoplastic Products
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                      Organic HAP/chemical name (CAS No.)
                                                      --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
          Thermoplastic product/subcategory                                              1,3                      Ethylene
                                                       Acetaldehyde  Acrylonitrile    Butadiene    1,4-Dioxane  Glycol (107-  Methanol (67- Styrene (100-
                                                         (75-07-0)     (107-13-1)    (106-99-0)    (123-91-1)       21-1)         56-1)         42-5)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ABS latex............................................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
ABS using a batch emulsion process...................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
ABS using a batch suspension process.................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
ABS using a continuous emulsion process..............  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
ABS using a continuous mass process..................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
ASA/AMSAN............................................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
EPS..................................................  ............  .............  ............  ............  ............  ............      
MABS.................................................  ............                 ............  ............  ............      
MBS..................................................  ............  .............         ............  ............  ............      
Nitrile resin........................................  ............          ............  ............  ............  ............  ............
PET using a batch dimethyl terephthalate process.....         .............  ............                       ............
PET using a batch terephthalic acid process..........         .............  ............                ............  ............
PET using a continuous dimethyl terephthalate process         .............  ............                       ............
PET using a continuous terephthalic acid process.....         .............  ............                ............  ............

[[Page 270]]

 
PET using a continuous terephthalic acid high                 .............  ............                ............  ............
 viscosity multiple end finisher process.............
Polystyrene resin using a batch process..............  ............  .............  ............  ............  ............  ............      
Polystyrene resin using a continuous process.........  ............  .............  ............  ............  ............  ............      
SAN using a batch process............................  ............          ............  ............  ............  ............      
SAN using a continuous process.......................  ............          ............  ............  ............  ............      
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 AAACAS No.=Chemical Abstract Service Number.
 AAAABS=Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin.
 AAAASA/AMSAN=Acrylonitrile styrene resin/alpha methyl styrene acrylonitrile resin.
 AAAEPS=expandable polystyrene resin.
 AAAMABS=methyl methacrylate acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin.
 AAAPET=poly(ethylene terephthalate) resin.
 AAAAAN=styrene acrylonitrile resin.
 AAAMBS=methyl methacrylate butadiene styrene resin.


          Table 7.--Group 1 Batch Process Vents--Monitoring, Recordkeeping, and Reporting Requirements
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Parameters to be       Recordkeeping and reporting requirements for
            Control device                    monitored                       monitored parameters
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal Incinerator..................  Firebox temperature a..  1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(1).b
                                                                2. Record and report the average firebox
                                                                 temperature measured during the performance
                                                                 test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average firebox
                                                                 temperature as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average
                                                                 temperatures that are below the minimum
                                                                 operating temperature established in the NCS or
                                                                 operating permit and all instances when
                                                                 monitoring data are not collected--PR.d e
Catalytic Incinerator................  Temperature upstream     1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                        and downstream of the    63.1326(e)(1).b
                                        catalyst bed.           2. Record and report the average upstream and
                                                                 downstream temperatures and the average
                                                                 temperature difference across the catalyst bed
                                                                 measured during the performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average upstream
                                                                 temperature and temperature difference across
                                                                 catalyst bed as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average upstream
                                                                 temperatures that are below the minimum
                                                                 upstream temperature established in the NCS or
                                                                 operating permit--PR.d e
                                                                5. Report all batch cycle daily average
                                                                 temperature differences across the catalyst bed
                                                                 that are below the minimum difference
                                                                 established in the NCS or operating permit--
                                                                 PR.d e
                                                                6. Report all instances when monitoring data are
                                                                 not collected.e
Boiler or Process Heater with a        Firebox temperature a..  1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
 design heat input capacity less than                            63.1326(e)(1).b
 44 megawatts and where the batch                               2. Record and report the average firebox
 process vents or aggregate batch                                temperature measured during the performance
 vent streams are not introduced with                            test--NCS.c
 or used as the primary fuel.                                   3. Record the batch cycle daily average firebox
                                                                 temperature as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).d
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average
                                                                 temperatures that are below the minimum
                                                                 operating temperature established in the NCS or
                                                                 operating permit and all instances when
                                                                 monitoring data are not collected--PR.d e

[[Page 271]]

 
Flare................................  Presence of a flame at   1. Hourly records of whether the monitor was
                                        the pilot light.         continuously operating during batch emission
                                                                 episodes, or portions thereof, selected for
                                                                 control and whether the pilot flame was
                                                                 continuously present during said periods.
                                                                2. Record and report the presence of a flame at
                                                                 the pilot light over the full period of the
                                                                 compliance determination--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the times and durations of all periods
                                                                 during batch emission episodes, or portions
                                                                 thereof, selected for control when a pilot
                                                                 flame is absent or the monitor is not
                                                                 operating.
                                                                4. Report the times and durations of all periods
                                                                 during batch emission episodes, or portions
                                                                 thereof, selected for control when all pilot
                                                                 flames of a flare are absent--PR.d
Scrubber for halogenated batch         pH of scrubber           1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
 process vents or aggregate batch       effluent, and.           63.1326(e)(1).b
 vent streams (Note: Controlled by a                            2. Record and report the average pH of the
 combustion device other than a                                  scrubber effluent measured during the
 flare).                                                         performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average pH of
                                                                 the scrubber effluent as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average pH
                                                                 values of the scrubber effluent that are below
                                                                 the minimum operating pH established in the NCS
                                                                 or operating permit and all instances when
                                                                 monitoring data are not collected--PR.d e
    Do...............................  Scrubber liquid flow     1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                        rate.                    63.1326(e)(1).b
                                                                2. Record and report the scrubber liquid flow
                                                                 rate measured during the performance test--
                                                                 NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average scrubber
                                                                 liquid flow rate as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average scrubber
                                                                 liquid flow rates that are below the minimum
                                                                 flow rate established in the NCS or operating
                                                                 permit and all instances when monitoring data
                                                                 are not collected--PR.d e
Absorber f...........................  Exit temperature of the  1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                        absorbing liquid, and.   63.1326(e)(1).b
                                                                2. Record and report the average exit
                                                                 temperature of the absorbing liquid measured
                                                                 during the performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 temperature of the absorbing liquid as
                                                                 specified in Sec.  63.1326(e)(2) for each batch
                                                                 cycle.
                                                                4. Report all the batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 temperatures of the absorbing liquid that are
                                                                 below the minimum operating temperature
                                                                 established in the NCS or operating permit and
                                                                 all instances when monitoring data are not
                                                                 collected--PR.d e
    Do...............................  Exit specific gravity    1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                        for the absorbing        63.1326(e)(1).b
                                        liquid.                 2. Record and report the average exit specific
                                                                 gravity measured during the performance test--
                                                                 NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 specific gravity as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 specific gravity values that are below the
                                                                 minimum operating temperature established in
                                                                 the NCS or operating permit and all instances
                                                                 when monitoring data are not collected--PR.d e
Condenser f..........................  Exit (product side)      1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
                                        temperature.             63.1326(e)(1).b
                                                                2. Record and report the average exit
                                                                 temperature measured during the performance
                                                                 test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 temperature as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average exit
                                                                 temperatures that are above the maximum
                                                                 operating temperature established in the NCS or
                                                                 operating permit and all instances when
                                                                 monitoring data are not collected--PR.d e
Carbon Adsorber f....................  Total regeneration       1. Record the total regeneration stream mass
                                        stream mass flow         flow for each carbon bed regeneration cycle.
                                        during carbon bed       2. Record and report the total regeneration
                                        regeneration cycle(s),   stream mass flow during each carbon bed
                                        and.                     regeneration cycle measured during the
                                                                 performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Report all carbon bed regeneration cycles
                                                                 when the total regeneration stream mass flow is
                                                                 above the maximum mass flow rate established in
                                                                 the NCS or operating permit--PR.d e

[[Page 272]]

 
    Do...............................  Temperature of the       1. Record the temperature of the carbon bed
                                        carbon bed after         after each regeneration and within 15 minutes
                                        regeneration and         of completing any cooling cycle(s).
                                        within 15 minutes of    2. Record and report the temperature of the
                                        completing any cooling   carbon bed after each regeneration and within
                                        cycle(s).                15 minutes of completing any cooling cycles(s)
                                                                 measured during the performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Report all carbon bed regeneration cycles
                                                                 when the temperature of the carbon bed after
                                                                 regeneration, or within 15 minutes of
                                                                 completing any cooling cycle(s), is above the
                                                                 maximum temperature established in the NCS or
                                                                 operating permit--PR.d e
All Control Devices..................  Presence of flow         1. Hourly records of whether the flow indicator
                                        diverted to the          was operating during batch emission episodes,
                                        atmosphere from the      or portions thereof, selected for control and
                                        control device or.       whether flow was detected at any time during
                                                                 said periods as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(3).
                                                                2. Record and report the times and durations of
                                                                 all periods during batch emission episodes, or
                                                                 portions thereof, selected for control when
                                                                 emissions are diverted through a bypass line or
                                                                 the flow indicator is not operating--PR.d
    Do...............................  Monthly inspections of   1. Records that monthly inspections were
                                        sealed valves.           performed as specified in Sec.
                                                                 63.1326(e)(4)(i).
                                                                2. Record and report all monthly inspections
                                                                 that show the valves are not closed or the seal
                                                                 has been changed--PR.d
Absorber, Condenser, and Carbon        Concentration level or   1. Continuous records as specified in Sec.
 Adsorber (as an alternative to the     reading indicated by     63.1326(e)(1).b
 requirements previously presented in   an organic monitoring   2. Record and report the average concentration
 this table).                           device at the outlet     level or reading measured during the
                                        of the control device.   performance test--NCS.c
                                                                3. Record the batch cycle daily average
                                                                 concentration level or reading as specified in
                                                                 Sec.  63.1326(e)(2).
                                                                4. Report all batch cycle daily average
                                                                 concentration levels or readings that are above
                                                                 the maximum concentration or reading
                                                                 established in the NCS or operating permit and
                                                                 all instances when monitoring data are not
                                                                 collected--PR.d e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Monitor may be installed in the firebox or in the ductwork immediately downstream of the firebox before any
  substantial heat exchange is encountered.
b ``Continuous records'' is defined in Sec.  63.111.
c NCS = Notification of Compliance Status described in Sec.  63.1335(e)(5).
d PR = Periodic Reports described in Sec.  63.1335(e)(6).
e The periodic reports shall include the duration of periods when monitoring data are not collected as specified
  in Sec.  63.1335(e)(6)(iii)(C).
f Alternatively, these devices may comply with the organic monitoring device provisions listed at the end of
  this table.


 Table 8.--Operating Parameters for Which Levels Are Required to Be Established for Continuous and Batch Process
                                     Vents and Aggregate Batch Vent Streams
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                      Established operating
                 Device                         Parameters to be monitored                 parameter(s)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal incinerator.....................  Firebox temperature..................  Minimum temperature.
Catalytic incinerator...................  Temperature upstream and downstream    Minimum upstream temperature;
                                           of the catalyst bed.                   and minimum temperature
                                                                                  difference across the catalyst
                                                                                  bed.
Boiler or process heater................  Firebox temperature..................  Minimum temperature.
Scrubber for halogenated vents..........  pH of scrubber effluent; and scrubber  Minimum pH; and minimum flow
                                           liquid flow rate.                      rate.
Absorber................................  Exit temperature of the absorbing      Minimum temperature; and
                                           liquid; and exit specific gravity of   minimum specific gravity.
                                           the absorbing liquid.
Condenser...............................  Exit temperature.....................  Maximum temperature.
Carbon absorber.........................  Total regeneration stream mass flow    Maximum mass flow; and maximum
                                           during carbon bed regeneration         temperature.
                                           cycle; and temperature of the carbon
                                           bed after regeneration (and within
                                           15 minutes of completing any cooling
                                           cycle(s))..
Other devices (or as an alternate to the  HAP concentration level or reading at  Maximum HAP concentration or
 requirements previously presented in      outlet of device.                      reading.
 this table)a.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Concentration is measustead of an operating parameter.


[[Page 273]]

Subpart KKK  [Reserved]



 Subpart LLL--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
             From the Portland Cement Manufacturing Industry

    Source: 64 FR 31925, June 14, 1999, unless otherwise noted.

                                 General



Sec. 63.1340  Applicability and designation of affected sources.

    (a) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
the provisions of this subpart apply to each new and existing portland 
cement plant which is a major source or an area source as defined in 
Sec. 63.2.
    (b) The affected sources subject to this subpart are:
    (1) Each kiln and each in-line kiln/raw mill at any major or area 
source, including alkali bypasses, except for kilns and in-line kiln/raw 
mills that burn hazardous waste and are subject to and regulated under 
subpart EEE of this part;
    (2) Each clinker cooler at any portland cement plant which is a 
major source;
    (3) Each raw mill at any portland cement plant which is a major 
source;
    (4) Each finish mill at any portland cement plant which is a major 
source;
    (5) Each raw material dryer at any portland cement plant which is a 
major source and each greenfield raw material dryer at any portland 
cement plant which is a major or area source;
    (6) Each raw material, clinker, or finished product storage bin at 
any portland cement plant which is a major source;
    (7) Each conveying system transfer point at any portland cement 
plant which is a major source;
    (8) Each bagging system at any portland cement plant which is a 
major source; and
    (9) Each bulk loading or unloading system at any portland cement 
plant which is a major source.
    (c) For portland cement plants with on-site nonmetallic mineral 
processing facilities, the first affected source in the sequence of 
materials handling operations subject to this subpart is the raw 
material storage, which is just prior to the raw mill. The primary and 
secondary crushers and any other equipment of the on-site nonmetallic 
mineral processing plant which precedes the raw material storage are not 
subject to this subpart. Furthermore, the first conveyor transfer point 
subject to this subpart is the transfer point associated with the 
conveyor transferring material from the raw material storage to the raw 
mill.
    (d) The owner or operator of any affected source subject to the 
provisions of this subpart is subject to title V permitting 
requirements.



Sec. 63.1341  Definitions.

    All terms used in this subpart that are not defined in this section 
have the meaning given to them in the CAA and in subpart A of this part.
    Alkali bypass means a duct between the feed end of the kiln and the 
preheater tower through which a portion of the kiln exit gas stream is 
withdrawn and quickly cooled by air or water to avoid excessive buildup 
of alkali, chloride and/or sulfur on the raw feed. This may also be 
referred to as the ``kiln exhaust gas bypass''.
    Bagging system means the equipment which fills bags with portland 
cement.
    Clinker cooler means equipment into which clinker product leaving 
the kiln is placed to be cooled by air supplied by a forced draft or 
natural draft supply system.
    Continuous monitor means a device which continuously samples the 
regulated parameter specified in Sec. 63.1350 of this subpart without 
interruption, evaluates the detector response at least once every 15 
seconds, and computes and records the average value at least every 60 
seconds, except during allowable periods of calibration and except as 
defined otherwise by the continuous emission monitoring system 
performance specifications in appendix B to part 60 of this chapter.
    Conveying system means a device for transporting materials from one 
piece of equipment or location to another location within a facility. 
Conveying systems include but are not limited to the following: feeders, 
belt conveyors,

[[Page 274]]

bucket elevators and pneumatic systems.
    Conveying system transfer point means a point where any material 
including but not limited to feed material, fuel, clinker or product, is 
transferred to or from a conveying system, or between separate parts of 
a conveying system.
    Dioxins  and  furans  (D/F)  means tetra-, penta-, hexa-, hepta-, 
and octa-chlorinated dibenzo dioxins and furans.
    Facility means all contiguous or adjoining property that is under 
common ownership or control, including properties that are separated 
only by a road or other public right-of-way.
    Feed means the prepared and mixed materials, which include but are 
not limited to materials such as limestone, clay, shale, sand, iron ore, 
mill scale, cement kiln dust and flyash, that are fed to the kiln. Feed 
does not include the fuels used in the kiln to produce heat to form the 
clinker product.
    Finish mill means a roll crusher, ball and tube mill or other size 
reduction equipment used to grind clinker to a fine powder. Gypsum and 
other materials may be added to and blended with clinker in a finish 
mill. The finish mill also includes the air separator associated with 
the finish mill.
    Greenfield kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill, or raw material dryer means 
a kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill, or raw material dryer for which 
construction is commenced at a plant site (where no kilns and no in-line 
kiln/raw mills were in operation at any time prior to March 24, 1998) 
after March 24, 1998.
    Hazardous waste is defined in Sec. 261.3 of this chapter.
    In-line kiln/raw mill means a system in a portland cement production 
process where a dry kiln system is integrated with the raw mill so that 
all or a portion of the kiln exhaust gases are used to perform the 
drying operation of the raw mill, with no auxiliary heat source used. In 
this system the kiln is capable of operating without the raw mill 
operating, but the raw mill cannot operate without the kiln gases, and 
consequently, the raw mill does not generate a separate exhaust gas 
stream.
    Kiln means a device, including any associated preheater or 
precalciner devices, that produces clinker by heating limestone and 
other materials for subsequent production of portland cement.
    Kiln exhaust gas bypass means alkali bypass.
    Monovent means an exhaust configuration of a building or emission 
control device (e. g. positive pressure fabric filter) that extends the 
length of the structure and has a width very small in relation to its 
length (i. e., length to width ratio is typically greater than 5:1). The 
exhaust may be an open vent with or without a roof, louvered vents, or a 
combination of such features.
    New brownfield kiln, in-line kiln raw mill, or raw material dryer 
means a kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill or raw material dryer for which 
construction is commenced at a plant site (where kilns and/or in-line 
kiln/raw mills were in operation prior to March 24, 1998) after March 
24, 1998.
    One-minute average means the average of thermocouple or other sensor 
responses calculated at least every 60 seconds from responses obtained 
at least once during each consecutive 15 second period.
    Portland cement plant means any facility manufacturing portland 
cement.
    Raw material dryer means an impact dryer, drum dryer, paddle-
equipped rapid dryer, air separator, or other equipment used to reduce 
the moisture content of feed materials.
    Raw mill means a ball and tube mill, vertical roller mill or other 
size reduction equipment, that is not part of an in-line kiln/raw mill, 
used to grind feed to the appropriate size. Moisture may be added or 
removed from the feed during the grinding operation. If the raw mill is 
used to remove moisture from feed materials, it is also, by definition, 
a raw material dryer. The raw mill also includes the air separator 
associated with the raw mill.
    Rolling average means the average of all one-minute averages over 
the averaging period.
    Run average means the average of the one-minute parameter values for 
a run.
    TEQ means the international method of expressing toxicity 
equivalents for dioxins and furans as defined in U.S. EPA, Interim 
Procedures for Estimating Risks Associated with Exposures to Mixtures of 
Chlorinated Dibenzo-p-dioxins and -dibenzofurans

[[Page 275]]

(CDDs and CDFs) and 1989 Update, March 1989.

                 Emission Standards and Operating Limits



Sec. 63.1342  Standards: General.

    (a) Table 1 to this subpart provides cross references to the 40 CFR 
part 63, subpart A, general provisions, indicating the applicability of 
the general provisions requirements to subpart LLL.
    (b) Table 1 of this section provides a summary of emission limits 
and operating limits of this subpart.

                         Table 1 to Sec.  63.1342.--Emission Limits and Operating Limits
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Affected source                        Pollutant or opacity            Emission and operating limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills at  PM.....................................  0.15 kg/Mg of feed (dry
 major sources (including alkali         Opacity................................   basis).
 bypass).                                                                         20 percent.
All kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills at  D/F....................................  0.20 ng TEQ/dscm
 major and area sources (including                                                or
 alkali bypass).                                                                  0.40 ng TEQ/dscm when the
                                                                                   average of the performance
                                                                                   test run average particulate
                                                                                   matter control device (PMCD)
                                                                                   inlet temperatures is 204
                                                                                   deg. C or less. [Corrected to
                                                                                   7 percent oxygen]
                                                                                  Operate such that the three-
                                                                                   hour rolling average PMCD
                                                                                   inlet temperature is no
                                                                                   greater than the temperature
                                                                                   established at performance
                                                                                   test.
                                                                                  If activated carbon injection
                                                                                   is used: Operate such that
                                                                                   the three-hour rolling
                                                                                   average activated carbon
                                                                                   injection rate is no less
                                                                                   than rate established at
                                                                                   performance test. Operate
                                                                                   such that either the carrier
                                                                                   gas flow rate or carrier gas
                                                                                   pressure drop exceeds the
                                                                                   value established at
                                                                                   performance test. Inject
                                                                                   carbon of equivalent
                                                                                   specifications to that used
                                                                                   at performance test.
New greenfield kilns and in-line kiln/   THC....................................  50 ppmvd, as propane,
 raw mills at major and area sources.                                              corrected to 7 percent
                                                                                   oxygen.
All clinker coolers at major sources...  PM.....................................  0.050 kg/Mg of feed (dry
                                         Opacity................................   basis)
                                                                                  10 percent.
All raw mills and finish mills at major  Opacity................................  10 percent.
 sources.
New greenfield raw material dryers at    THC....................................  50 ppmvd, as propane,
 major and area sources.                                                           corrected to 7 percent
                                                                                   oxygen.
All raw material dryers and material     Opacity................................  10 percent.
 handling points at major sources.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 63.1343  Standards for kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills.

    (a) General. The provisions in this section apply to each kiln, each 
in-line kiln/raw mill, and any alkali bypass associated with that kiln 
or in-line kiln/raw mill.
    (b) Existing, reconstructed, or new brownfield/major sources. No 
owner or operator of an existing, reconstructed or new brownfield kiln 
or an existing, reconstructed or new brownfield in-line kiln/raw mill at 
a facility that is a major source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from these 
affected sources, any gases which:
    (1) Contain particulate matter (PM) in excess of 0.15 kg per Mg 
(0.30 lb per ton) of feed (dry basis) to the kiln. When there is an 
alkali bypass associated with a kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill, the 
combined particulate matter emissions from the kiln or in-line kiln/raw 
mill and the alkali bypass are subject to this emission limit.
    (2) Exhibit opacity greater than 20 percent.
    (3) Contain D/F in excess of:
    (i) 0.20 ng per dscm (8.7 x 10-11 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen; or
    (ii) 0.40 ng per dscm (1.7 x 10-10 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen, when the average of the performance 
test run average temperatures at the inlet to the particulate

[[Page 276]]

matter control device is 204  deg.C (400  deg.F) or less.
    (c) Greenfield/major sources. No owner or operator that commences 
construction of a greenfield kiln or greenfield inline kiln/raw mill at 
a facility which is a major source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from these 
affected sources any gases which:
    (1) Contain particulate matter in excess of 0.15 kg per Mg (0.30 lb 
per ton) of feed (dry basis) to the kiln. When there is an alkali bypass 
associated with a kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill, the combined 
particulate matter emissions from the kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill and 
the bypass stack are subject to this emission limit.
    (2) Exhibit opacity greater than 20 percent.
    (3) Contain D/F in excess of:
    (i) 0.20 ng per dscm (8.7 x 10-11 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen; or
    (ii) 0.40 ng per dscm (1.7 x 10-10 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen, when the average of the performance 
test run average temperatures at the inlet to the particulate matter 
control device is 204  deg.C (400  deg.F) or less.
    (4) Contain total hydrocarbon (THC), from the main exhaust of the 
kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill, in excess of 50 ppmvd as propane, 
corrected to seven percent oxygen.
    (d) Existing, reconstructed, or new brownfield/area sources. No 
owner or operator of an existing, reconstructed, or new brownfield kiln 
or an existing, reconstructed or new brownfield in-line kiln/raw mill at 
a facility that is an area source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from these 
affected sources any gases which contain D/F in excess of:
    (1) 0.20 ng per dscm (8.7 x 10-11 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen; or
    (2) 0.40 ng per dscm (1.7 x 10-10 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen, when the average of the performance 
test run average temperatures at the inlet to the particulate matter 
control device is 204  deg.C (400  deg.F) or less.
    (e) Greenfield/area sources. No owner or operator of a greenfield 
kiln or a greenfield in-line kiln/raw mill at a facility that is an area 
source subject to the provisions of this subpart shall cause to be 
discharged into the atmosphere from these affected sources any gases 
which:
    (1) Contain D/F in excess of:
    (i) 0.20 ng per dscm (8.7 x 10-11 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen; or
    (ii) 0.40 ng per dscm (1.7 x 10-11 gr per dscf) (TEQ) 
corrected to seven percent oxygen, when the average of the performance 
test run average temperatures at the inlet to the particulate matter 
control device is 204  deg.C (400  deg.F) or less.
    (2) Contain THC, from the main exhaust of the kiln or in-line kiln/
raw mill, in excess of 50 ppmvd as propane, corrected to seven percent 
oxygen.



Sec. 63.1344  Operating limits for kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills.

    (a) The owner or operator of a kiln subject to a D/F emission 
limitation under Sec. 63.1343 must operate the kiln such that the 
temperature of the gas at the inlet to the kiln particulate matter 
control device (PMCD) and alkali bypass PMCD, if applicable, does not 
exceed the applicable temperature limit specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section. The owner or operator of an in-line kiln/raw mill subject 
to a D/F emission limitation under Sec. 63.1343 must operate the in-line 
kiln/raw mill, such that:
    (1) When the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill is operating, the 
applicable temperature limit for the main in-line kiln/raw mill exhaust, 
specified in paragraph (b) of this section and established during the 
performance test when the raw mill was operating is not exceeded.
    (2) When the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill is not operating, 
the applicable temperature limit for the main in-line kiln/raw mill 
exhaust, specified in paragraph (b) of this section and established 
during the performance test when the raw mill was not operating, is not 
exceeded.

[[Page 277]]

    (3) If the in-line kiln/raw mill is equipped with an alkali bypass, 
the applicable temperature limit for the alkali bypass, specified in 
paragraph (b) of this section and established during the performance 
test when the raw mill was operating, is not exceeded.
    (b) The temperature limit for affected sources meeting the limits of 
paragraph (a) of this section or paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of 
this section is determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1349(b)(3)(iv).
    (c) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a D/F 
emission limitation under Sec. 63.1343 that employs carbon injection as 
an emission control technique must operate the carbon injection system 
in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section.
    (1) The three-hour rolling average activated carbon injection rate 
shall be equal to or greater than the activated carbon injection rate 
determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1349(b)(3)(vi).
    (2) The owner or operator shall either:
    (i) Maintain the minimum activated carbon injection carrier gas flow 
rate, as a three-hour rolling average, based on the manufacturer's 
specifications. These specifications must be documented in the test plan 
developed in accordance with Sec. 63.7(c), or
    (ii) Maintain the minimum activated carbon injection carrier gas 
pressure drop, as a three-hour rolling average, based on the 
manufacturer's specifications. These specifications must be documented 
in the test plan developed in accordance with Sec. 63.7(c).
    (d) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the owner 
or operator of an affected source subject to a D/F emission limitation 
under Sec. 63.1343 that employs carbon injection as an emission control 
technique must specify and use the brand and type of activated carbon 
used during the performance test until a subsequent performance test is 
conducted, unless the site-specific performance test plan contains 
documentation of key parameters that affect adsorption and the owner or 
operator establishes limits based on those parameters, and the limits on 
these parameters are maintained.
    (e) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a D/F 
emission limitation under Sec. 63.1343 that employs carbon injection as 
an emission control technique may substitute, at any time, a different 
brand or type of activated carbon provided that the replacement has 
equivalent or improved properties compared to the activated carbon 
specified in the site-specific performance test plan and used in the 
performance test. The owner or operator must maintain documentation that 
the substitute activated carbon will provide the same or better level of 
control as the original activated carbon.



Sec. 63.1345  Standards for clinker coolers.

    (a) No owner or operator of a new or existing clinker cooler at a 
facility which is a major source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from the 
clinker cooler any gases which:
    (1) Contain particulate matter in excess of 0.050 kg per Mg (0.10 lb 
per ton) of feed (dry basis) to the kiln.
    (2) Exhibit opacity greater than ten percent.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1346  Standards for new and reconstructed raw material dryers.

    (a) Brownfield/major sources. No owner or operator of a new or 
reconstructed brownfield raw material dryer at a facility which is a 
major source subject to this subpart shall cause to be discharged into 
the atmosphere from the new or reconstructed raw material dryer any 
gases which exhibit opacity greater than ten percent.
    (b) Greenfield/area sources. No owner or operator of a greenfield 
raw material dryer at a facility which is an area source subject to this 
subpart shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from the 
greenfield raw material dryer any gases which contain THC in excess of 
50 ppmvd, reported as propane, corrected to seven percent oxygen.
    (c) Greenfield/major sources. No owner or operator of a greenfield 
raw material dryer at a facility which is a major source subject to this 
subpart shall

[[Page 278]]

cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from the greenfield raw 
material dryer any gases which:
    (1) Contain THC in excess of 50 ppmvd, reported as propane, 
corrected to seven percent oxygen.
    (2) Exhibit opacity greater than ten percent.



Sec. 63.1347  Standards for raw and finish mills.

    The owner or operator of each new or existing raw mill or finish 
mill at a facility which is a major source subject to the provisions of 
this subpart shall not cause to be discharged from the mill sweep or air 
separator air pollution control devices of these affected sources any 
gases which exhibit opacity in excess of ten percent.



Sec. 63.1348  Standards for affected sources other than kilns; in-line kiln/raw mills; clinker coolers; new and reconstructed raw material dryers; and raw and 
          finish mills.

    The owner or operator of each new or existing raw material, clinker, 
or finished product storage bin; conveying system transfer point; 
bagging system; and bulk loading or unloading system; and each existing 
raw material dryer, at a facility which is a major source subject to the 
provisions of this subpart shall not cause to be discharged any gases 
from these affected sources which exhibit opacity in excess of ten 
percent.

                  Monitoring and Compliance Provisions



Sec. 63.1349  Performance testing requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to this 
subpart shall demonstrate initial compliance with the emission limits of 
Sec. 63.1343 and Secs. 63.1345 through 63.1348 using the test methods 
and procedures in paragraph (b) of this section and Sec. 63.7. 
Performance test results shall be documented in complete test reports 
that contain the information required by paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(a)(10) of this section, as well as all other relevant information. The 
plan to be followed during testing shall be made available to the 
Administrator prior to testing, if requested.
    (1) A brief description of the process and the air pollution control 
system;
    (2) Sampling location description(s);
    (3) A description of sampling and analytical procedures and any 
modifications to standard procedures;
    (4) Test results;
    (5) Quality assurance procedures and results;
    (6) Records of operating conditions during the test, preparation of 
standards, and calibration procedures;
    (7) Raw data sheets for field sampling and field and laboratory 
analyses;
    (8) Documentation of calculations;
    (9) All data recorded and used to establish parameters for 
compliance monitoring; and
    (10) Any other information required by the test method.
    (b) Performance tests to demonstrate initial compliance with this 
subpart shall be conducted as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through 
(b)(4) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator of a kiln subject to limitations on 
particulate matter emissions shall demonstrate initial compliance by 
conducting a performance test as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) 
through (b)(1)(iv) of this section. The owner or operator of an in-line 
kiln/raw mill subject to limitations on particulate matter emissions 
shall demonstrate initial compliance by conducting separate performance 
tests as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iv) of this 
section while the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill is under normal 
operating conditions and while the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill 
is not operating. The owner or operator of a clinker cooler subject to 
limitations on particulate matter emissions shall demonstrate initial 
compliance by conducting a performance test as specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of this section. The opacity exhibited 
during the period of the Method 5 of Appendix A to part 60 of this 
chapter performance tests required by paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this 
section shall be determined as required in paragraphs (b)(1)(v) through 
(vi) of this section.
    (i) EPA Method 5 of appendix A to part 60 of this chapter shall be 
used to determine PM emissions. Each performance test shall consist of 
three

[[Page 279]]

separate runs under the conditions that exist when the affected source 
is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably expected 
to occur. Each run shall be conducted for at least one hour, and the 
minimum sample volume shall be 0.85 dscm (30 dscf). The average of the 
three runs shall be used to determine compliance. A determination of the 
particulate matter collected in the impingers (``back half'') of the 
Method 5 particulate sampling train is not required to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the PM standards of this subpart. However this 
shall not preclude the permitting authority from requiring a 
determination of the ``back half'' for other purposes.
    (ii) Suitable methods shall be used to determine the kiln or inline 
kiln/raw mill feed rate, except for fuels, for each run.
    (iii) The emission rate, E, of PM shall be computed for each run 
using equation 1:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.001

Where:

E = emission rate of particulate matter, kg/Mg of kiln feed.
cs = concentration of PM, kg/dscm.
Qsd = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr.
P = total kiln feed (dry basis), Mg/hr.

    (iv) When there is an alkali bypass associated with a kiln or in-
line kiln/raw mill, the main exhaust and alkali bypass of the kiln or 
in-line kiln/raw mill shall be tested simultaneously and the combined 
emission rate of particulate matter from the kiln or in-line kiln/raw 
mill and alkali bypass shall be computed for each run using equation 2,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.002

Where:

Ec = the combined emission rate of particulate matter from 
          the kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill and bypass stack, kg/Mg of 
          kiln feed.
csk = concentration of particulate matter in the kiln or in-
          line kiln/raw mill effluent, kg/dscm.
    Qsdk = volumetric flow rate of kiln or in-line kiln/raw 
mill effluent, dscm/hr.
csb = concentration of particulate matter in the alkali 
          bypass gas, kg/dscm.
Qsdb = volumetric flow rate of alkali bypass gas, dscm/hr.
P=total kiln feed (dry basis), Mg/hr.

    (v) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section the 
opacity exhibited during the period of the Method 5 performance tests 
required by paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section shall be determined 
through the use of a continuous opacity monitor (COM). The maximum six-
minute average opacity during the three Method 5 test runs shall be 
determined during each Method 5 test run, and used to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the applicable opacity limits of 
Sec. 63.1343(b)(2), Sec. 63.1343(c)(2), or Sec. 63.1345(a)(2).
    (vi) Each owner or operator of a kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill, or 
clinker cooler subject to the provisions of this subpart using a fabric 
filter with multiple stacks or an electrostatic precipitator with 
multiple stacks may, in lieu of installing the continuous opacity 
monitoring system required by paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section, 
conduct an opacity test in accordance with Method 9 of appendix A to 
part 60 of this chapter during each Method 5 performance test required 
by paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. If the control device exhausts 
through a monovent, or if the use of a COM in accordance with the 
installation specifications of Performance Specification 1 (PS-1) of 
appendix B to part 60 of this chapter is not feasible, a test shall be 
conducted in accordance with Method 9 of appendix A to part 60 of this 
chapter during each Method 5 performance test required by paragraph 
(b)(1)(i) of this section. The maximum six-minute average opacity shall 
be determined during the three Method 5 test runs, and used to 
demonstrate initial compliance with the applicable opacity limits of 
Sec. 63.1343(b)(2), Sec. 63.1343(c)(2), or Sec. 63.1345(a)(2).
    (2) The owner or operator of any affected source subject to 
limitations on opacity under this subpart that is not subject to 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall demonstrate initial compliance 
with the affected source opacity limit by conducting a test in 
accordance with Method 9 of appendix A to part 60 of this chapter. The 
performance test shall be conducted under the conditions that exist when 
the affected

[[Page 280]]

source is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably 
expected to occur. The maximum six-minute average opacity exhibited 
during the test period shall be used to determine whether the affected 
source is in initial compliance with the standard. The duration of the 
Method 9 performance test shall be 3-hours (30 6-minute averages), 
except that the duration of the Method 9 performance test may be reduced 
to 1-hour if the conditions of paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (ii) of the 
section apply:
    (i) There are no individual readings greater than 10 percent 
opacity;
    (ii) There are no more than three readings of 10 percent for the 
first 1-hour period.
    (3) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to 
limitations on D/F emissions shall demonstrate initial compliance with 
the D/F emission limit by conducting a performance test using Method 23 
of appendix A to part 60 of this chapter. The owner or operator of an 
in-line kiln/raw mill shall demonstrate initial compliance by conducting 
separate performance tests while the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw 
mill is under normal operating conditions and while the raw mill of the 
in-line kiln/raw mill is not operating. The owner or operator of a kiln 
or in-line kiln/raw mill equipped with an alkali bypass shall conduct 
simultaneous performance tests of the kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill 
exhaust and the alkali bypass, however the owner or operator of an in-
line kiln/raw mill is not required to conduct a performance test of the 
alkali bypass exhaust when the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill is 
not operating.
    (i) Each performance test shall consist of three separate runs; each 
run shall be conducted under the conditions that exist when the affected 
source is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably 
expected to occur. The duration of each run shall be at least three 
hours and the sample volume for each run shall be at least 2.5 dscm (90 
dscf). The concentration shall be determined for each run and the 
arithmetic average of the concentrations measured for the three runs 
shall be calculated and used to determine compliance.
    (ii) The temperature at the inlet to the kiln or in-line kiln/raw 
mill PMCD, and where applicable, the temperature at the inlet to the 
alkali bypass PMCD, must be continuously recorded during the period of 
the Method 23 test, and the continuous temperature record(s) must be 
included in the performance test report.
    (iii) One-minute average temperatures must be calculated for each 
minute of each run of the test.
    (iv) The run average temperature must be calculated for each run, 
and the average of the run average temperatures must be determined and 
included in the performance test report and will determine the 
applicable temperature limit in accordance with Sec. 63.1344(b).
    (v) If activated carbon injection is used for D/F control, the rate 
of activated carbon injection to the kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill 
exhaust, and where applicable, the rate of activated carbon injection to 
the alkali bypass exhaust, must be continuously recorded during the 
period of the Method 23 test, and the continuous injection rate 
record(s) must be included in the performance test report. In addition, 
the performance test report must include the brand and type of activated 
carbon used during the performance test and a continuous record of 
either the carrier gas flow rate or the carrier gas pressure drop for 
the duration of the test. Activated carbon injection rate parameters 
must be determined in accordance with paragraphs (b)(3)(vi) of this 
section.
    (vi) The run average injection rate must be calculated for each run, 
and the average of the run average injection rates must be determined 
and included in the performance test report and will determine the 
applicable injection rate limit in accordance with Sec. 63.1344(c)(1).
    (4) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to 
limitations on emissions of THC shall demonstrate initial compliance 
with the THC limit by operating a continuous emission monitor in 
accordance with Performance Specification 8A of appendix B to part 60 of 
this chapter. The duration of the performance test shall be three

[[Page 281]]

hours, and the average THC concentration (as calculated from the one-
minute averages) during the three hour performance test shall be 
calculated. The owner or operator of an in-line kiln/raw mill shall 
demonstrate initial compliance by conducting separate performance tests 
while the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill is under normal 
operating conditions and while the raw mill of the in-line kiln/raw mill 
is not operating.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, performance 
tests required under paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section shall 
be repeated every five years, except that the owner or operator of a 
kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill or clinker cooler is not required to repeat 
the initial performance test of opacity for the kiln, in-line kiln/raw 
mill or clinker cooler.
    (d) Performance tests required under paragraph (b)(3) of this 
section shall be repeated every 30 months.
    (e) The owner or operator is required to repeat the performance 
tests for kilns or in-line kiln/raw mills as specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1) and (b)(3) of this section within 90 days of initiating any 
significant change in the feed or fuel from that used in the previous 
performance test.
    (f) Table 1 of this section provides a summary of the performance 
test requirements of this subpart.

   Table 1 to Sec.  63.1349.--Summary of Performance Test Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Affected source and pollutant               Performance test
------------------------------------------------------------------------
New and existing kiln and in-line  EPA Method 5.a
 kiln/raw mill b c PM.
New and existing kiln and in-line  COM if feasible d e or EPA Method 9
 kiln/raw mill b c Opacity.         visual opacity readings.
New and existing kiln and in-line  EPA Method 23h.
 kiln/raw mill b c f gD/F.
New greenfield kiln and in-line    THC CEM (EPA PS-8A) i.
 kiln/raw mill c THC.
New and existing clinker cooler    EPA Method 5 a.
 PM.
New and existing clinker cooler    COM d,j or EPA Method 9 visual
 opacity.                           opacity readings.
New and existing raw and finish    EPA Method 9.a j
 mill opacity.
New and existing raw material      EPA Method 9.a j
 dryer and materials handling
 processes (raw material storage,
 clinker storage, finished
 product storage, conveyor
 transfer points, bagging, and
 bulk loading and unloading
 systems) opacity.
New greenfield raw material dryer  THC CEM (EPA PS-8A).i
 THC.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Required initially and every 5 years thereafter.
b Includes main exhaust and alkali bypass.
c In-line kiln/raw mill to be tested with and without raw mill in
  operation.
d Must meet COM performance specification criteria. If the fabric filter
  or electrostatic precipitator has multiple stacks, daily EPA Method 9
  visual opacity readings may be taken instead of using a COM.
e Opacity limit is 20 percent.
f Alkali bypass is tested with the raw mill on.
g Temperature and (if applicable) activated carbon injection parameters
  determined separately with and without the raw mill operating.
h Required initially and every 30 months thereafter.
i EPA Performance Specification (PS)-8A of appendix B to 40 CFR part 60.
j Opacity limit is 10 percent.



Sec. 63.1350  Monitoring requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of each portland cement plant shall 
prepare for each affected source subject to the provisions of this 
subpart, a written operations and maintenance plan. The plan shall be 
submitted to the Administrator for review and approval as part of the 
application for a part 70 permit and shall include the following 
information:
    (1) Procedures for proper operation and maintenance of the affected 
source and air pollution control devices in order to meet the emission 
limits and operating limits of Secs. 63.1343 through 63.1348;
    (2) Corrective actions to be taken when required by paragraph (e) of 
this section;
    (3) Procedures to be used during an inspection of the components of 
the combustion system of each kiln and each in-line kiln raw mill 
located at the facility at least once per year; and
    (4) Procedures to be used to periodically monitor affected sources 
subject to opacity standards under Secs. 63.1346 and 63.1348. Such 
procedures must include the provisions of paragraphs

[[Page 282]]

(a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iv) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator must conduct a monthly 1-minute visible 
emissions test of each affected source in accordance with Method 22 of 
Appendix A to part 60 of this chapter. The test must be conducted while 
the affected source is in operation.
    (ii) If no visible emissions are observed in six consecutive monthly 
tests for any affected source, the owner or operator may decrease the 
frequency of testing from monthly to semi-annually for that affected 
source. If visible emissions are observed during any semi-annual test, 
the owner or operator must resume testing of that affected source on a 
monthly basis and maintain that schedule until no visible emissions are 
observed in six consecutive monthly tests.
    (iii) If no visible emissions are observed during the semi-annual 
test for any affected source, the owner or operator may decrease the 
frequency of testing from semi-annually to annually for that affected 
source. If visible emissions are observed during any annual test, the 
owner or operator must resume testing of that affected source on a 
monthly basis and maintain that schedule until no visible emissions are 
observed in six consecutive monthly tests.
    (iv) If visible emissions are observed during any Method 22 test, 
the owner or operator must conduct a 6-minute test of opacity in 
accordance with Method 9 of appendix A to part 60 of this chapter. The 
Method 9 test must begin within one hour of any observation of visible 
emissions.
    (b) Failure to comply with any provision of the operations and 
maintenance plan developed in accordance with paragraph (a) of this 
section shall be a violation of the standard.
    (c) The owner or operator of a kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill shall 
monitor opacity at each point where emissions are vented from these 
affected sources including alkali bypasses in accordance with paragraphs 
(c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section.
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall install, calibrate, maintain, and continuously 
operate a continuous opacity monitor (COM) located at the outlet of the 
PM control device to continuously monitor the opacity. The COM shall be 
installed, maintained, calibrated, and operated as required by subpart 
A, general provisions of this part, and according to PS-1 of appendix B 
to part 60 of this chapter.
    (2) The owner or operator of a kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill subject 
to the provisions of this subpart using a fabric filter with multiple 
stacks or an electrostatic precipitator with multiple stacks may, in 
lieu of installing the continuous opacity monitoring system required by 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section, monitor opacity in accordance with 
paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (ii) of this section. If the control device 
exhausts through a monovent, or if the use of a COM in accordance with 
the installation specifications of PS-1 of appendix B to part 60 of this 
chapter is not feasible, the owner or operator must monitor opacity in 
accordance with paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (ii) of this section.
    (i) Perform daily visual opacity observations of each stack in 
accordance with the procedures of Method 9 of appendix A of part 60 of 
this chapter. The Method 9 test shall be conducted while the affected 
source is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably 
expected to occur within the day. The duration of the Method 9 test 
shall be at least 30 minutes each day.
    (ii) Use the Method 9 procedures to monitor and record the average 
opacity for each six-minute period during the test.
    (3) To remain in compliance, the opacity must be maintained such 
that the 6-minute average opacity for any 6-minute block period does not 
exceed 20 percent. If the average opacity for any 6-minute block period 
exceeds 20 percent, this shall constitute a violation of the standard.
    (d) The owner or operator of a clinker cooler shall monitor opacity 
at each point where emissions are vented from the clinker cooler in 
accordance with paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(3) of this section.
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall install, calibrate, maintain,

[[Page 283]]

and continuously operate a COM located at the outlet of the clinker 
cooler PM control device to continuously monitor the opacity. The COM 
shall be installed, maintained, calibrated, and operated as required by 
subpart A, general provisions of this part, and according to PS-1 of 
appendix B to part 60 of this chapter.
    (2) The owner or operator of a clinker cooler subject to the 
provisions of this subpart using a fabric filter with multiple stacks or 
an electrostatic precipitator with multiple stacks may, in lieu of 
installing the continuous opacity monitoring system required by 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, monitor opacity in accordance with 
paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (ii) of this section. If the control device 
exhausts through a monovent, or if the use of a COM in accordance with 
the installation specifications of PS-1 of appendix B to part 60 of this 
chapter is not feasible, the owner or operator must monitor opacity in 
accordance with paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (ii) of this section.
    (i) Perform daily visual opacity observations of each stack in 
accordance with the procedures of Method 9 of appendix A of part 60 of 
this chapter. The Method 9 test shall be conducted while the affected 
source is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably 
expected to occur within the day. The duration of the Method 9 test 
shall be at least 30 minutes each day.
    (ii) Use the Method 9 procedures to monitor and record the average 
opacity for each six-minute period during the test.
    (3) To remain in compliance, the opacity must be maintained such 
that the 6-minute average opacity for any 6-minute block period does not 
exceed 10 percent. If the average opacity for any 6-minute block period 
exceeds 10 percent, this shall constitute a violation of the standard.
    (e) The owner or operator of a raw mill or finish mill shall monitor 
opacity by conducting daily visual emissions observations of the mill 
sweep and air separator PMCDs of these affected sources, in accordance 
with the procedures of Method 22 of appendix A of part 60 of this 
chapter. The Method 22 test shall be conducted while the affected source 
is operating at the highest load or capacity level reasonably expected 
to occur within the day. The duration of the Method 22 test shall be six 
minutes. If visible emissions are observed during any Method 22 visible 
emissions test, the owner or operator must:
    (1) Initiate, within one-hour, the corrective actions specified in 
the site specific operating and maintenance plan developed in accordance 
with paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this section; and
    (2) Within 24 hours of the end of the Method 22 test in which 
visible emissions were observed, conduct a visual opacity test of each 
stack from which visible emissions were observed in accordance with 
Method 9 of appendix A of part 60 of this chapter. The duration of the 
Method 9 test shall be thirty minutes.
    (f) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a 
limitation on D/F emissions shall monitor D/F emissions in accordance 
with paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(6) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall install, calibrate, maintain, and 
continuously operate a continuous monitor to record the temperature of 
the exhaust gases from the kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill and alkali 
bypass, if applicable, at the inlet to, or upstream of, the kiln, in-
line kiln/raw mill and/or alkali bypass PM control devices.
    (i) The recorder response range must include zero and 1.5 times 
either of the average temperatures established according to the 
requirements in Sec. 63.1349(b)(3)(iv).
    (ii) The reference method must be a National Institute of Standards 
and Technology calibrated reference thermocouple-potentiometer system or 
alternate reference, subject to approval by the Administrator.
    (2) The owner or operator shall monitor and continuously record the 
temperature of the exhaust gases from the kiln, in-line kiln/raw mill 
and alkali bypass, if applicable, at the inlet to the kiln, in-line 
kiln/raw mill and/or alkali bypass PMCD.
    (3) The three-hour rolling average temperature shall be calculated 
as the average of 180 successive one-minute average temperatures.

[[Page 284]]

    (4) Periods of time when one-minute averages are not available shall 
be ignored when calculating three-hour rolling averages. When one-minute 
averages become available, the first one-minute average is added to the 
previous 179 values to calculate the three-hour rolling average.
    (5) When the operating status of the raw mill of the in-line kiln/
raw mill is changed from off to on, or from on to off the calculation of 
the three-hour rolling average temperature must begin anew, without 
considering previous recordings.
    (6) The calibration of all thermocouples and other temperature 
sensors shall be verified at least once every three months.
    (g) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a 
limitation on D/F emissions that employs carbon injection as an emission 
control technique shall comply with the monitoring requirements of 
paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(6) and (g)(1) through (g)(6) of this 
section to demonstrate continuous compliance with the D/F emission 
standard.
    (1) Install, operate, calibrate and maintain a continuous monitor to 
record the rate of activated carbon injection. The accuracy of the rate 
measurement device must be 1 percent of the rate being 
measured.
    (2) Verify the calibration of the device at least once every three 
months.
    (3) The three-hour rolling average activated carbon injection rate 
shall be calculated as the average of 180 successive one-minute average 
activated carbon injection rates.
    (4) Periods of time when one-minute averages are not available shall 
be ignored when calculating three-hour rolling averages. When one-minute 
averages become available, the first one-minute average is added to the 
previous 179 values to calculate the three-hour rolling average.
    (5) When the operating status of the raw mill of the in-line kiln/
raw mill is changed from off to on, or from on to off the calculation of 
the three-hour rolling average activated carbon injection rate must 
begin anew, without considering previous recordings.
    (6) The owner or operator must install, operate, calibrate and 
maintain a continuous monitor to record the activated carbon injection 
system carrier gas parameter (either the carrier gas flow rate or the 
carrier gas pressure drop) established during the D/F performance test 
in accordance with paragraphs (g)(6)(i) through (g)(6)(iii) of this 
section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall install, calibrate, operate and 
maintain a device to continuously monitor and record the parameter 
value.
    (ii) The owner or operator must calculate and record three-hour 
rolling averages of the parameter value.
    (iii) Periods of time when one-minute averages are not available 
shall be ignored when calculating three-hour rolling averages. When one-
minute averages become available, the first one-minute average shall be 
added to the previous 179 values to calculate the three-hour rolling 
average.
    (h) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a 
limitation on THC emissions under this subpart shall comply with the 
monitoring requirements of paragraphs (h)(1) through (h)(3) of this 
section to demonstrate continuous compliance with the THC emission 
standard:
    (1) The owner or operator shall install, operate and maintain a THC 
continuous emission monitoring system in accordance with Performance 
Specification 8A, of appendix B to part 60 of this chapter and comply 
with all of the requirements for continuous monitoring systems found in 
the general provisions, subpart A of this part.
    (2) The owner or operator is not required to calculate hourly 
rolling averages in accordance with section 4.9 of Performance 
Specification 8A.
    (3) Any thirty-day block average THC concentration in any gas 
discharged from a greenfield raw material dryer, the main exhaust of a 
greenfield kiln, or the main exhaust of a greenfield in-line kiln/raw 
mill, exceeding 50 ppmvd, reported as propane, corrected to seven 
percent oxygen, is a violation of the standard.
    (i) The owner or operator of any kiln or in-line kiln/raw mill 
subject to a     D/F emission limit under this subpart shall conduct an 
inspection of the components of the combustion system of

[[Page 285]]

each kiln or in-line kiln raw mill at least once per year.
    (j) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a 
limitation on opacity under Sec. 63.1346 or Sec. 63.1348 shall monitor 
opacity in accordance with the operation and maintenance plan developed 
in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section.
    (k) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to a 
particulate matter standard under Sec. 63.1343 shall install, calibrate, 
maintain and operate a particulate matter continuous emission monitoring 
system (PM CEMS) to measure the particulate matter discharged to the 
atmosphere. The compliance deadline for installing the PM CEMS and all 
requirements relating to performance of the PM CEMS and implementation 
of the PM CEMS requirement is deferred pending further rulemaking.
    (l) An owner or operator may submit an application to the 
Administrator for approval of alternate monitoring requirements to 
demonstrate compliance with the emission standards of this subpart, 
except for emission standards for THC, subject to the provisions of 
paragraphs (l)(1) through (l)(6) of this section.
    (1) The Administrator will not approve averaging periods other than 
those specified in this section, unless the owner or operator documents, 
using data or information, that the longer averaging period will ensure 
that emissions do not exceed levels achieved during the performance test 
over any increment of time equivalent to the time required to conduct 
three runs of the performance test.
    (2) If the application to use an alternate monitoring requirement is 
approved, the owner or operator must continue to use the original 
monitoring requirement until approval is received to use another 
monitoring requirement.
    (3) The owner or operator shall submit the application for approval 
of alternate monitoring requirements no later than the notification of 
performance test. The application must contain the information specified 
in paragraphs (l)(3)(i) through (l)(3)(iii) of this section:
    (i) Data or information justifying the request, such as the 
technical or economic infeasibility, or the impracticality of using the 
required approach;
    (ii) A description of the proposed alternative monitoring 
requirement, including the operating parameter to be monitored, the 
monitoring approach and technique, the averaging period for the limit, 
and how the limit is to be calculated; and
    (iii) Data or information documenting that the alternative 
monitoring requirement would provide equivalent or better assurance of 
compliance with the relevant emission standard.
    (4) The Administrator will notify the owner or operator of the 
approval or denial of the application within 90 calendar days after 
receipt of the original request, or within 60 calendar days of the 
receipt of any supplementary information, whichever is later. The 
Administrator will not approve an alternate monitoring application 
unless it would provide equivalent or better assurance of compliance 
with the relevant emission standard. Before disapproving any alternate 
monitoring application, the Administrator will provide:
    (i) Notice of the information and findings upon which the intended 
disapproval is based; and
    (ii) Notice of opportunity for the owner or operator to present 
additional supporting information before final action is taken on the 
application. This notice will specify how much additional time is 
allowed for the owner or operator to provide additional supporting 
information.
    (5) The owner or operator is responsible for submitting any 
supporting information in a timely manner to enable the Administrator to 
consider the application prior to the performance test. Neither 
submittal of an application, nor the Administrator's failure to approve 
or disapprove the application relieves the owner or operator of the 
responsibility to comply with any provision of this subpart.
    (6) The Administrator may decide at any time, on a case-by-case 
basis that additional or alternative operating

[[Page 286]]

limits, or alternative approaches to establishing operating limits, are 
necessary to demonstrate compliance with the emission standards of this 
subpart.
    (m) A summary of the monitoring requirements of this subpart is 
given in Table 1 to this section.

           Table 1 to Sec.  63.1350.--Monitoring Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Affected source/pollutant or      Monitor type/          Monitoring
           opacity              operation/process       requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All affected sources........  Operations and        Prepare written plan
                               maintenance plan.     for all affected
                                                     sources and control
                                                     devices.
All kilns and in-line kiln    Continuous opacity    Install, calibrate,
 raw mills at major sources    monitor, if           maintain and
 (including alkali bypass)/    applicable.           operate in
 opacity.                                            accordance with
                                                     general provisions
                                                     and with PS-1.
                              Method 9 opacity      Daily test of at
                               test, if applicable.  least 30-minutes,
                                                     while kiln is at
                                                     highest load or
                                                     capacity level.
Kilns and in-line kiln raw    Particulate matter    Deferred.
 mills at major sources        continuous emission
 (including alkali bypass)/    monitoring system.
 particulate matter.
Kilns and in-line kiln raw    Combustion system     Conduct annual
 mills at major and area       inspection.           inspection of
 sources (including alkali                           components of
 bypass)/ D/F.                                       combustion system.
                              Continuous            Install, operate,
                               temperature           calibrate and
                               monitoring at PMCD    maintain continuous
                               inlet.                temperature
                                                     monitoring and
                                                     recording system;
                                                     calculate three-
                                                     hour rolling
                                                     averages; verify
                                                     temperature sensor
                                                     calibration at
                                                     least quarterly.
Kilns and in-line kiln raw    Activated carbon      Install, operate,
 mills at major and area       injection rate        calibrate and
 sources (including alkali     monitor, if           maintain continuous
 bypass)/ D/F (continued).     applicable.           activated carbon
                                                     injection rate
                                                     monitor; calculate
                                                     three-hour rolling
                                                     averages; verify
                                                     calibration at
                                                     least quarterly;
                                                     install, operate,
                                                     calibrate and
                                                     maintain carrier
                                                     gas flow rate
                                                     monitor or carrier
                                                     gas pressure drop
                                                     monitor; calculate
                                                     three-hour rolling
                                                     averages; document
                                                     carbon
                                                     specifications.
New greenfield kilns and in-  Total hydrocarbon     Install, operate,
 line kiln raw mills at        continuous emission   and maintain THC
 major and area sources/THC.   monitor.              CEM in accordance
                                                     with PS-8A;
                                                     calculate 30-day
                                                     block average THC
                                                     concentration.
Clinker coolers at major      Continuous opacity    Install, calibrate,
 sources/opacity.              monitor, if           maintain and
                               applicable.           operate in
                                                     accordance with
                                                     general provisions
                                                     and with PS-1.
                              Method 9 opacity      Daily test of at
                               test, if applicable.  least 30-minutes,
                                                     while kiln is at
                                                     highest load or
                                                     capacity level.
Raw mills and finish mills    Method 22 visible     Conduct daily 6-
 at major sources/opacity.     emissions test.       minute Method 22
                                                     visible emissions
                                                     test while mill is
                                                     operating at
                                                     highest load or
                                                     capacity level; if
                                                     visible emissions
                                                     are observed,
                                                     initiate corrective
                                                     action within one
                                                     hour and conduct 30-
                                                     minute Method 9
                                                     test within 24
                                                     hours.
New greenfield raw material   Total hydrocarbon     Install, operate,
 dryers at major and area      continuous emission   and maintain THC
 sources/THC.                  monitor.              CEM in accordance
                                                     with PS-8A;
                                                     calculate 30-day
                                                     block average THC
                                                     concentration.
Raw material dryers; raw      Method 22 visible     As specified in
 material, clinker, finished   emissions test.       operation and
 product storage bins;                               maintenance plan.
 conveying system transfer
 points; bagging systems;
 and bulk loading and
 unloading systems at major
 sources/opacity.
------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 63.1351  Compliance dates.

    (a) The compliance date for an owner or operator of an existing 
affected source subject to the provisions of this subpart is June 10, 
2002.
    (b) The compliance date for an owner or operator of an affected 
source subject to the provisions of this subpart that commences new 
construction or reconstruction after March 24, 1998 is

[[Page 287]]

June 9, 1999 or immediately upon startup of operations, whichever is 
later.



Sec. 63.1352  Additional test methods.

    (a) Owners or operators conducting tests to determine the rates of 
emission of hydrogen chloride (HCl) from kilns, in-line kiln/raw mills 
and associated bypass stacks at portland cement manufacturing 
facilities, for use in applicability determinations under Sec. 63.1340 
are permitted to use Method 320 or Method 321 of appendix A of this 
part.
    (b) Owners or operators conducting tests to determine the rates of 
emission of hydrogen chloride (HCl) from kilns, in-line kiln/raw mills 
and associated bypass stacks at portland cement manufacturing 
facilities, for use in applicability determinations under Sec. 63.1340 
are permitted to use Methods 26 or 26A of appendix A to part 60 of this 
chapter, except that the results of these tests shall not be used to 
establish status as an area source.
    (c) Owners or operators conducting tests to determine the rates of 
emission of specific organic HAP from raw material dryers, kilns and in-
line kiln/raw mills at portland cement manufacturing facilities, for use 
in applicability determinations under Sec. 63.1340 of this subpart are 
permitted to use Method 320 of appendix A to this part, or Method 18 of 
appendix A to part 60 of this chapter.

                Notification, Reporting and Recordkeeping



Sec. 63.1353  Notification requirements.

    (a) The notification provisions of 40 CFR part 63, subpart A that 
apply and those that do not apply to owners and operators of affected 
sources subject to this subpart are listed in Table 1 of this subpart. 
If any State requires a notice that contains all of the information 
required in a notification listed in this section, the owner or operator 
may send the Administrator a copy of the notice sent to the State to 
satisfy the requirements of this section for that notification.
    (b) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements of this 
subpart shall comply with the notification requirements in Sec. 63.9 as 
follows:
    (1) Initial notifications as required by Sec. 63.9(b) through (d). 
For the purposes of this subpart, a Title V or 40 CFR part 70 permit 
application may be used in lieu of the initial notification required 
under Sec. 63.9(b), provided the same information is contained in the 
permit application as required by Sec. 63.9(b), and the State to which 
the permit application has been submitted has an approved operating 
permit program under part 70 of this chapter and has received delegation 
of authority from the EPA. Permit applications shall be submitted by the 
same due dates as those specified for the initial notification.
    (2) Notification of performance tests, as required by Secs. 63.7 and 
63.9(e).
    (3) Notification of opacity and visible emission observations 
required by Sec. 63.1349 in accordance with Secs. 63.6(h)(5) and 
63.9(f).
    (4) Notification, as required by Sec. 63.9(g), of the date that the 
continuous emission monitor performance evaluation required by 
Sec. 63.8(e) is scheduled to begin.
    (5) Notification of compliance status, as required by Sec. 63.9(h).



Sec. 63.1354  Reporting requirements.

    (a) The reporting provisions of subpart A of this part that apply 
and those that do not apply to owners or operators of affected sources 
subject to this subpart are listed in Table 1 of this subpart. If any 
State requires a report that contains all of the information required in 
a report listed in this section, the owner or operator may send the 
Administrator a copy of the report sent to the State to satisfy the 
requirements of this section for that report.
    (b) The owner or operator of an affected source shall comply with 
the reporting requirements specified in Sec. 63.10 of the general 
provisions of this part 63, subpart A as follows:
    (1) As required by Sec. 63.10(d)(2), the owner or operator shall 
report the results of performance tests as part of the notification of 
compliance status.
    (2) As required by Sec. 63.10(d)(3), the owner or operator of an 
affected source shall report the opacity results from tests required by 
Sec. 63.1349.
    (3) As required by Sec. 63.10(d)(4), the owner or operator of an 
affected source

[[Page 288]]

who is required to submit progress reports as a condition of receiving 
an extension of compliance under Sec. 63.6(i) shall submit such reports 
by the dates specified in the written extension of compliance.
    (4) As required by Sec. 63.10(d)(5), if actions taken by an owner or 
operator during a startup, shutdown, or malfunction of an affected 
source (including actions taken to correct a malfunction) are consistent 
with the procedures specified in the source's startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3), the owner or operator 
shall state such information in a semiannual report. Reports shall only 
be required if a startup, shutdown, or malfunction occurred during the 
reporting period. The startup, shutdown, and malfunction report may be 
submitted simultaneously with the excess emissions and continuous 
monitoring system performance reports; and
    (5) Any time an action taken by an owner or operator during a 
startup, shutdown, or malfunction (including actions taken to correct a 
malfunction) is not consistent with the procedures in the startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan, the owner or operator shall make an 
immediate report of the actions taken for that event within 2 working 
days, by telephone call or facsimile (FAX) transmission. The immediate 
report shall be followed by a letter, certified by the owner or operator 
or other responsible official, explaining the circumstances of the 
event, the reasons for not following the startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan, and whether any excess emissions and/or parameter 
monitoring exceedances are believed to have occurred.
    (6) As required by Sec. 63.10(e)(2), the owner or operator shall 
submit a written report of the results of the performance evaluation for 
the continuous monitoring system required by Sec. 63.8(e). The owner or 
operator shall submit the report simultaneously with the results of the 
performance test.
    (7) As required by Sec. 63.10(e)(2), the owner or operator of an 
affected source using a continuous opacity monitoring system to 
determine opacity compliance during any performance test required under 
Sec. 63.7 and described in Sec. 63.6(d)(6) shall report the results of 
the continuous opacity monitoring system performance evaluation 
conducted under Sec. 63.8(e).
    (8) As required by Sec. 63.10(e)(3), the owner or operator of an 
affected source equipped with a continuous emission monitor shall submit 
an excess emissions and continuous monitoring system performance report 
for any event when the continuous monitoring system data indicate the 
source is not in compliance with the applicable emission limitation or 
operating parameter limit.
    (9) The owner or operator shall submit a summary report semiannually 
which contains the information specified in Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(vi). In 
addition, the summary report shall include:
    (i) All exceedences of maximum control device inlet gas temperature 
limits specified in Sec. 63.1344(a) and (b);
    (ii) All failures to calibrate thermocouples and other temperature 
sensors as required under Sec. 63.1350(f)(7) of this subpart; and
    (iii) All failures to maintain the activated carbon injection rate, 
and the activated carbon injection carrier gas flow rate or pressure 
drop, as applicable, as required under Sec. 63.1344(c).
    (iv) The results of any combustion system component inspections 
conducted within the reporting period as required under Sec. 63.1350(i).
    (v) All failures to comply with any provision of the operation and 
maintenance plan developed in accordance with Sec. 63.1350(a).
    (10) If the total continuous monitoring system downtime for any CEM 
or any continuous monitoring system (CMS) for the reporting period is 
ten percent or greater of the total operating time for the reporting 
period, the owner or operator shall submit an excess emissions and 
continuous monitoring system performance report along with the summary 
report.



Sec. 63.1355  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator shall maintain files of all information 
(including all reports and notifications) required by this section 
recorded in a form suitable and readily available for inspection and 
review as required by Sec. 63.10(b)(1). The files shall be retained for 
at least five years following the

[[Page 289]]

date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, 
report, or record. At a minimum, the most recent two years of data shall 
be retained on site. The remaining three years of data may be retained 
off site. The files may be maintained on microfilm, on a computer, on 
floppy disks, on magnetic tape, or on microfiche.
    (b) The owner or operator shall maintain records for each affected 
source as required by Sec. 63.10(b)(2) and (b)(3) of this part; and
    (1) All documentation supporting initial notifications and 
notifications of compliance status under Sec. 63.9;
    (2) All records of applicability determination, including supporting 
analyses; and
    (3) If the owner or operator has been granted a waiver under 
Sec. 63.8(f)(6), any information demonstrating whether a source is 
meeting the requirements for a waiver of recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.
    (c) In addition to the recordkeeping requirements in paragraph (b) 
of this section, the owner or operator of an affected source equipped 
with a continuous monitoring system shall maintain all records required 
by Sec. 63.10(c).

                                  Other



Sec. 63.1356  Exemption from new source performance standards.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this 
section, any affected source subject to the provisions of this subpart 
is exempted from any otherwise applicable new source performance 
standard contained in 40 CFR part 60, subpart F.
    (1) Kilns and in-line kiln/raw mills, as applicable under 40 CFR 
60.60(b), located at area sources are subject to PM and opacity limits 
and associated reporting and recordkeeping, under 40 CFR part 60, 
subpart F.
    (2) Greenfield raw material dryers, as applicable under 40 CFR 
60.60(b), located at area sources are subject to opacity limits and 
associated reporting and recordkeeping under 40 CFR part 60, subpart F.



Sec. 63.1357  Temporary, conditioned exemption from particulate matter and opacity standards.

    (a) Subject to the limitations of paragraphs (b) through (f) of this 
section, an owner or operator conducting PM CEMS correlation tests (that 
is, correlation with manual stack methods) is exempt from:
    (1) Any particulate matter and opacity standards of part 60 or part 
63 of this chapter that are applicable to cement kilns and in-line kiln/
raw mills.
    (2) Any permit or other emissions or operating parameter or other 
limitation on workplace practices that are applicable to cement kilns 
and in-line kiln raw mills to ensure compliance with any particulate 
matter and opacity standards of this part or part 60 of this chapter.
    (b) The owner or operator must develop a PM CEMS correlation test 
plan. The plan must be submitted to the Administrator for approval at 
least 90 days before the correlation test is scheduled to be conducted. 
The plan must include:
    (1) The number of test conditions and the number of runs for each 
test condition;
    (2) The target particulate matter emission level for each test 
condition;
    (3) How the operation of the affected source will be modified to 
attain the desired particulate matter emission rate; and
    (4) The anticipated normal particulate matter emission level.
    (c) The Administrator will review and approve or disapprove the 
correlation test plan in accordance with Sec. 63.7(c)(3)(i) and (iii). 
If the Administrator fails to approve or disapprove the correlation test 
plan within the time period specified in Sec. 63.7(c)(3)(iii), the plan 
shall be considered approved, unless the Administrator has requested 
additional information.
    (d) The stack sampling team must be on-site and prepared to perform 
correlation testing no later than 24 hours after operations are modified 
to attain the desired particulate matter emissions concentrations, 
unless the correlation test plan documents that a longer period is 
appropriate.

[[Page 290]]

    (e) The particulate matter and opacity standards and associated 
operating limits and conditions will not be waived for more than 96 
hours, in the aggregate, for a correlation test, including all runs and 
conditions.
    (f) The owner or operator must return the affected source to 
operating conditions indicative of compliance with the applicable 
particulate matter and opacity standards as soon as possible after 
correlation testing is completed.



Sec. 63.1358  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under subpart E of this part, the authorities contained in 
paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and 
not transferred to a State.
    (b) Authority which will not be delegated to States:
    (1) Approval of alternative non-opacity emission standards under 
Sec. 63.6(g).
    (2) Approval of alternative opacity standards under Sec. 63.6(h)(9).
    (3) Approval of major changes to test methods under 
Secs. 63.7(e)(2)(ii) and 63.7(f). A major change to a test method is a 
modification to a federally enforceable test method that uses unproven 
technology or procedures or is an entirely new method (sometimes 
necessary when the required test method is unsuitable).
    (4) Approval of major changes to monitoring under Sec. 63.8(f). A 
major change to monitoring is a modification to federally enforceable 
monitoring that uses unproven technology or procedures, is an entirely 
new method (sometimes necessary when the required monitoring is 
unsuitable), or is a change in the averaging period.
    (5) Waiver of recordkeeping under Sec. 63.10(f).



Sec. 63.1359  [Reserved]

                          Table 1 to Subpart LLL.--Applicability of General Provisions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 General Provisions 40 CFR Citation         Requirement         Applies to Subpart LLL           Comment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1(a)(1) through (4)..............  Applicability..........  Yes.                      .......................
63.1(a)(5)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.1(a)(6) through (a)(8)...........  Applicability..........  Yes.                      .......................
63.1(a)(9)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.1(a)(10) through (14)............  Applicability..........  Yes.                      .......................
63.1(b)(1)..........................  Initial Applicability    No......................  Sec.  63.1340 specifies
                                       Determination.                                     applicability.
63.1(b)(2) and (3)..................  Initial Applicability    Yes.                      .......................
                                       Determination.
63.1(c)(1)..........................  Applicability After      Yes.                      .......................
                                       Standard Established.
63.1(c)(2)..........................  Permit Requirements....  Yes.....................  Area sources must
                                                                                          obtain Title V
                                                                                          permits.
63.1(c)(3)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.1(c)(4) and (5)..................  Extensions,              Yes.                      .......................
                                       Notifications.
63.1(d).............................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.1(e).............................  Applicability of Permit  Yes.                      .......................
                                       Program.
63.2................................  Definitions............  Yes.                      Additional definitions
                                                                                          in Sec.  63.1341.
63.3(a) through (c).................  Units and Abbreviations  Yes.                      .......................
63.4(a)(1) through (a)(3)...........  Prohibited Activities..  Yes.                      .......................
63.4(a)(4)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.4(a)(5)..........................  Compliance date........  Yes.                      .......................
63.4(b) and (c).....................  Circumvention,           Yes.                      .......................
                                       Severability.
63.5(a)(1) and (2)..................  Construction/            Yes.                      .......................
                                       Reconstruction.
63.5(b)(1)..........................  Compliance Dates.......  Yes.                      .......................
63.5(b)(2)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.5(b)(3) through (6)..............  Construction Approval,   Yes.                      .......................
                                       Applicability.
63.5(c).............................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.5(d)(1) through (4)..............  Approval of              Yes.                      .......................
                                       Construction/
                                       Reconstruction.
63.5(e).............................  Approval of              Yes.                      .......................
                                       Construction/
                                       Reconstruction.
63.5(f)(1) and (2)..................  Approval of              Yes.                      .......................
                                       Construction/
                                       Reconstruction.
63.6(a).............................  Compliance for           Yes.                      .......................
                                       Standards and
                                       Maintenance.
63.6(b)(1) through (5)..............  Compliance Dates.......  Yes.                      .......................
63.6(b)(6)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].

[[Page 291]]

 
63.6(b)(7)..........................  Compliance Dates.......  Yes.
63.6(c)(1) and (2)..................  Compliance Dates.......  Yes.
63.6(c)(3) and (c)(4)...............  .......................  No......................  [Reserved].
63.6(c)(5)..........................  Compliance Dates.......  Yes.
63.6(d).............................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.6(e)(1) and (e)(2)...............  Operation & Maintenance  Yes.
63.6(e)(3)..........................  Startup, Shutdown        Yes.
                                       Malfunction Plan.
63.6(f)(1) through (3)..............  Compliance with          Yes.
                                       Emission Standards.
63.6(g)(1) through (g)(3)...........  Alternative Standard...  Yes.
63.6(h)(1) and (2)..................  Opacity/VE Standards...  Yes.
63.6(h)(3)..........................                           No......................  Reserved
63.6(h)(4) and (h)(5)(i)............  Opacity/VE Standards...  Yes.
63.6(h)(5)(ii) through (iv).........  Opacity/VE Standards...  No......................  Test duration specified
                                                                                          in Subpart LLL.
63.6(h)(6)..........................  Opacity/VE Standards...  Yes.
63.6(i)(1) through (i)(14)..........  Extension of Compliance  Yes.
63.6(i)(15).........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.6(i)(16).........................  Extension of Compliance  Yes.
63.6(j).............................  Exemption from           Yes.
                                       Compliance.
63.7(a)(1) through (a)(3)...........  Performance Testing      Yes.....................  Sec.  63.1349 has
                                       Requirements.                                      specific requirements.
63.7(b).............................  Notification...........  Yes.
63.7(c).............................  Quality Assurance/Test   Yes.
                                       Plan.
63.7(d).............................  Testing Facilities.....  Yes.
63.7(e)(1) through (4)..............  Conduct of Tests.......  Yes.
63.7(f).............................  Alternative Test Method  Yes.
63.7(g).............................  Data Analysis..........  Yes.
63.7(h).............................  Waiver of Tests........  Yes.
63.8(a)(1)..........................  Monitoring Requirements  Yes.
63.8(a)(2)..........................  Monitoring.............  No......................  Sec.  63.1350 includes
                                                                                          CEM requirements.
63.8(a)(3)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.8(a)(4)..........................  Monitoring.............  No......................  Flares not applicable.
63.8(b)(1) through (3)..............  Conduct of Monitoring..  Yes.
63.8(c)(1) through (8)..............  CMS Operation/           Yes.                      Performance
                                       Maintenance.                                       specification
                                                                                          supersedes
                                                                                          requirements for THC
                                                                                          CEM. Temperature and
                                                                                          activated carbon
                                                                                          injection monitoring
                                                                                          data reduction
                                                                                          requirements given in
                                                                                          subpart LLL.
63.8(d).............................  Quality Control........  Yes.
63.8(e).............................  Performance Evaluation   Yes.....................  Performance
                                       for CMS.                                           specification
                                                                                          supersedes
                                                                                          requirements for THC
                                                                                          CEM.
63.8(f)(1) through (f)(5)...........  Alternative Monitoring   Yes.....................  Additional requirements
                                       Method.                                            in Sec.  1350(l).
63.8(f)(6)..........................  Alternative to RATA      Yes.
                                       Test.
63.8(g).............................  Data Reduction.........  Yes.
63.9(a).............................  Notification             Yes.
                                       Requirements.
63.9(b)(1) through (5)..............  Initial Notifications..  Yes.
63.9(c).............................  Request for Compliance   Yes.
                                       Extension.
63.9(d).............................  New Source Notification  Yes.
                                       for Special Compliance
                                       Requirements.
63.9(e).............................  Notification of          Yes.
                                       Performance Test.
63.9(f).............................  Notification of VE/      Yes                       Notification not
                                       Opacity Test.                                      required for VE/
                                                                                          opacity test under
                                                                                          Sec.  63.1350(e) and
                                                                                          (j).
63.9(g).............................  Additional CMS           Yes.
                                       Notifications.
63.9(h)(1) through (h)(3)...........  Notification of          Yes.
                                       Compliance Status.
63.9(h)(4)..........................                           No......................  [Reserved].
63.9(h)(5) and (h)(6)...............  Notification of          Yes.
                                       Compliance Status.
63.9(i).............................  Adjustment of Deadlines  Yes.
63.9(j).............................  Change in Previous       Yes.
                                       Information.
63.10(a)............................  Recordkeeping/Reporting  Yes                       Yes.
63.10(b)............................  General Requirements...  Yes.
63.10(c)(1).........................  Additional CMS           Yes.....................  PS-8A applies.
                                       Recordkeeping.
63.10(c)(2) through (c)(4)..........                           No......................  Reserved]
63.10(c)(5) through (c)(8)..........  Additional CMS           Yes.....................  PS-8A applies instead
                                       Recordkeeping.                                     of requirements for
                                                                                          THC CEM.

[[Page 292]]

 
63.10(c)(9).........................                           No......................  [Reserved]
63.10(c)(10) through (15)...........  Additional CMS           Yes.....................  PS-8A applies instead
                                       Recordkeeping.                                     of requirements for
                                                                                          THC CEM.
63.10(d)(1).........................  General Reporting        Yes.
                                       Requirements.
63.10(d)(2).........................  Performance Test         Yes.
                                       Results.
63.10(d)(3).........................  Opacity or VE            Yes.
                                       Observations.
63.10(d)(4).........................  Progress Reports.......  Yes.
63.10(d)(5).........................  Startup, Shutdown,       Yes.
                                       Malfunction Reports.
63.10(e)(1) and (e)(2)..............  Additional CMS Reports.  Yes.
63.10(e)(3).........................  Excess Emissions and     Yes.....................  Exceedences are defined
                                       CMS Performance                                    in subpart LLL.
                                       Reports.
63.10(f)............................  Waiver for               Yes.
                                       Recordkeeping/
                                       Reporting.
63.11(a) and (b)....................  Control Device           No......................  Flares not applicable.
                                       Requirements.
63.12(a)-(c.........................  )State Authority and     Yes.
                                       Delegations.
63.13(a)-(c)........................  State/Regional           Yes.
                                       Addresses.
63.14(a) and (b)....................  Incorporation by         Yes.
                                       Reference.
63.15(a) and (b)....................  Availability of          Yes.
                                       Information.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



 Subpart MMM--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
               for Pesticide Active Ingredient Production

    Source: 64 FR 33589, June 23, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1360  Applicability.

    (a) Definition of affected source. The affected source subject to 
this subpart is the facility-wide collection of pesticide active 
ingredient manufacturing process units (PAI process units) that process, 
use, or produce HAP, and are located at a plant site that is a major 
source, as defined in section 112(a) of the CAA. An affected source also 
includes waste management units, heat exchange systems, and cooling 
towers that are associated with the PAI process units. Exemptions from 
an affected source are specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (b) New source applicability. A new affected source subject to this 
subpart and to which the requirements for new sources apply is defined 
according to the criteria in either paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this 
section.
    (1) An affected source for which construction or reconstruction 
commenced after November 10, 1997.
    (2) Any single PAI process unit that:
    (i) Is not part of a process unit group; and
    (ii) For which construction, as defined in Sec. 63.1361, commenced 
after November 10, 1997; and
    (iii) Has the potential to emit 10 tons/yr of any one HAP or 25 
tons/yr of combined HAP.
    (c) General provisions. Table 1 of this subpart specifies the 
provisions of subpart A of this part that apply to an owner or operator 
of an affected source subject to this subpart, and clarifies specific 
provisions in subpart A of this part as necessary for this subpart.
    (d) Exemptions from the requirements of this subpart. The provisions 
of this subpart do not apply to:
    (1) Research and development facilities;
    (2) PAI process units that are subject to subpart F of this part;
    (3) Production of ethylene; and
    (4) The following emission points listed:
    (i) Storm water from segregated sewers;
    (ii) Water from fire-fighting and deluge systems, including testing 
of such systems;
    (iii) Spills;
    (iv) Water from safety showers;
    (v) Noncontact steam boiler blowdown and condensate;
    (vi) Laundry water;
    (vii) Vessels storing material that contains no organic HAP or 
contains organic HAP as impurities only; and
    (viii) Equipment, as defined in Sec. 63.1363, that is intended to 
operate in

[[Page 293]]

organic HAP service for less than 300 hours during the calendar year.
    (e) Applicability of this subpart except during periods of startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction. (1) Each provision set forth in this subpart 
shall apply at all times except that emission limitations shall not 
apply during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction, as defined 
in Sec. 63.1361, if:
    (i) The startup, shutdown, or malfunction precludes the ability of 
the owner or operator of an affected source to comply with one or more 
specific emission limitations to which a particular emission point is 
subject; and
    (ii) The owner or operator follows the provisions for periods of 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction, as specified in Secs. 63.1367(a)(3) 
and 63.1368(i).
    (2) The provisions set forth in Sec. 63.1363 shall apply at all 
times except during periods of nonoperation of the PAI process unit (or 
specific portion thereof) in which the lines are drained and 
depressurized resulting in the cessation of the emissions to which 
Sec. 63.1363 applies.
    (3) The owner or operator shall not shut down items of equipment 
that are required or utilized for compliance with the emissions 
limitations of this subpart during times when emissions (or, where 
applicable, wastewater streams or residuals) are being routed to such 
items of equipment, if the shutdown would contravene emissions 
limitations of this subpart applicable to such items of equipment. This 
paragraph does not apply if the item of equipment is malfunctioning, or 
if the owner or operator must shut down the equipment to avoid damage 
due to a malfunction of the PAI process unit or portion thereof.
    (4) During startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions when the emissions 
limitations of this subpart do not apply pursuant to paragraphs (e)(1) 
through (3) of this section, the owner or operator shall implement, to 
the extent reasonably available, measures to prevent or minimize excess 
emissions. For purposes of this paragraph, ``excess emissions'' means 
emissions in excess of those that would have occurred if there were no 
startup, shutdown, or malfunction and the owner or operator complied 
with the relevant provisions of this subpart. The measures to be taken 
shall be identified in the applicable startup, shutdown, and malfunction 
plan, and may include, but are not limited to, air pollution control 
technologies, work practices, pollution prevention, monitoring, and/or 
changes in the manner of operation of the source. Back-up control 
devices are not required, but may be used if available.
    (f) Storage vessel applicability determination. An owner or operator 
shall follow the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (4) 
of this section to determine whether a storage vessel is part of the 
affected source to which this subpart applies.
    (1) If a storage vessel is already subject to another subpart of 40 
CFR part 63 on June 23, 1999, the storage vessel shall belong to the 
process unit subject to the other subpart.
    (2) Unless otherwise excluded under paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section, the storage vessel is part of a PAI process unit if either the 
input to the vessel from the PAI process unit is greater than or equal 
to the input from any other PAI or non-PAI process unit, or the output 
from the vessel to the PAI process unit is greater than or equal to the 
output to any other PAI or non-PAI process unit. If the greatest input 
to and/or output from a shared storage vessel is the same for two or 
more process units, including at least one PAI process unit, the owner 
or operator may assign the storage vessel to any one of the PAI process 
units that meet this condition. If the use varies from year to year, 
then the use for purposes of this subpart for existing sources shall be 
based on the utilization that occurred during the year preceding June 
23, 1999 or, if the storage vessel was not in operation during that 
year, the use shall be based on the expected use in the 5 years after 
startup. This determination shall be reported as part of an operating 
permit application or as otherwise specified by the permitting 
authority.
    (3) Unless otherwise excluded under paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section, where a storage vessel is located in a tank farm (including a 
marine tank farm), the applicability of this subpart shall be determined 
according to the provisions in

[[Page 294]]

paragraphs (f)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) The storage vessel may only be assigned to a process unit that 
utilizes the storage vessel and does not have an intervening storage 
vessel for that product (or raw material, as appropriate). With respect 
to a process unit, an intervening storage vessel means a storage vessel 
connected by hard-piping to the process unit and to the storage vessel 
in the tank farm so that product or raw material entering or leaving the 
process unit flows into (or from) the intervening storage vessel and 
does not flow directly into (or from) the storage vessel in the tank 
farm.
    (ii) If no PAI process unit meets the criteria of paragraph 
(f)(3)(i) of this section with respect to a storage vessel, this subpart 
does not apply to the storage vessel.
    (iii) If only one PAI process unit, and no non-PAI process unit, 
meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section with respect 
to a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned to that PAI 
process unit.
    (iv) If two or more process units, including at least one PAI 
process unit, meet the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section 
with respect to a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned 
to one of those process units according to the provisions of paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section. The input and output shall be determined among 
only those process units that meet the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) 
of this section. If the storage vessel is not assigned to a PAI process 
unit according to the provisions of paragraph (f)(2) of this section, 
this subpart does not apply to the storage vessel.
    (4) If the storage vessel begins receiving material from (or sending 
material to) another process unit, or ceasing to receive material from 
(or send material to) a PAI process unit, or if the applicability of 
this subpart has been determined according to the provisions of 
paragraph (f)(2) of this section, and there is a significant change in 
the use of the storage vessel, the owner or operator shall reevaluate 
the ownership determination for the storage vessel.
    (g) Designating production of an intermediate as a PAI process unit. 
Except as specified in paragraph (d) of this section, an owner or 
operator may elect to designate production of any intermediate that does 
not meet the definition of integral intermediate as a PAI process unit 
subject to this subpart. Any storage vessel containing the intermediate 
is assigned to a PAI process unit according to the procedures in 
paragraph (f) of this section. Any process tank containing the 
intermediate is part of the process unit used to produce the 
intermediate.
    (h) Applicability of process units included in a process unit group. 
(1) If any of the products produced in the process unit group are 
subject to 40 CFR part 63, subpart GGG (Pharmaceuticals MACT), the owner 
or operator may elect to comply with the requirements of subpart GGG for 
the PAI process unit(s) within the process unit group, except for the 
following:
    (i) The emission limit standard for process vents in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(i) shall apply in place of Sec. 63.1254(a)(1) of 
subpart GGG of this part;
    (ii) When the date of April 2, 1997 is provided in 
Sec. 63.1254(a)(iii) of subpart GGG of this part, the date of June 23, 
1999 shall apply for purposes of this subpart; and
    (iii) Requirements in Sec. 63.1367(a)(5) regarding application for 
approval of construction or reconstruction shall apply in place of the 
provisions in Sec. 63.1259(a)(5) of subpart GGG of this part.
    (2) If the primary product of a process unit group is determined to 
be a material that is subject to another subpart of 40 CFR part 63 on 
June 23, 1999 or startup of the process unit group, whichever is later, 
the owner or operator may elect to comply with the other subpart for any 
PAI process unit within the process unit group.
    (3) The primary product of the process unit group shall be 
determined according to paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) The primary product is the product that is produced for the 
greatest operating time over a 5 year period, based on expected 
utilization for the 5 years following the compliance date or following 
initial startup of the process unit group, whichever is later; or

[[Page 295]]

    (ii) If the process unit group produces multiple products equally 
based on operating time, then the product with the greatest production 
on a mass basis over 5 years shall represent the primary product of the 
process unit, based on expected utilization for the 5 years following 
the compliance date or following initial startup of the unit or unit 
group, whichever is later.
    (i) Overlap with other regulations. (1) Overlap with other MACT 
standards. After the compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1364, an 
affected source subject to the provisions of this subpart that is also 
subject to the provisions of any other subpart of 40 CFR part 63 may 
elect, to the extent the subparts are consistent, under which subpart to 
maintain records and report to EPA. The affected source shall identify 
in the Notification of Compliance Status report required by 
Sec. 63.1368(f) under which authority such records will be maintained.
    (2) Overlap with RCRA subparts AA, BB, and/or CC. After the 
compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1364, if any affected source 
subject to this subpart is also subject to monitoring, recordkeeping, 
and reporting requirements in 40 CFR part 264, subpart AA, BB, or CC, or 
is subject to monitoring and recordkeeping requirements in 40 CFR part 
265, subpart AA, BB, or CC, and the owner or operator complies with the 
periodic reporting requirements under 40 CFR part 264, subpart AA, BB, 
or CC that would apply to the device if the facility had final-permitted 
status, the owner or operator may elect to comply either with the 
monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements of this subpart, 
or with the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in 40 
CFR parts 264 and/or 265, as described in this paragraph, which shall 
constitute compliance with the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting 
requirements of this subpart. If the owner or operator elects to comply 
with the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in 40 CFR 
parts 264 and/or 265, the owner or operator shall report all excursions 
as required by Sec. 63.1368(g). The owner or operator shall identify in 
the Notification of Compliance Status report required by Sec. 63.1368(f) 
the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting authority under which the 
owner or operator will comply.
    (3) Overlap with NSPS subpart Kb. After the compliance dates 
specified in Sec. 63.1364, a Group 1 or Group 2 storage vessel that is 
also subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60, subpart Kb, is 
required to comply only with the provisions of this subpart MMM.
    (4) Overlap with subpart I. After the compliance dates specified in 
Sec. 63.1364, for all equipment within a process unit that contains 
equipment subject to subpart I of this part, an owner or operator may 
elect to comply with either the provisions of this subpart MMM or the 
provisions of subpart H of this part. The owner or operator shall 
identify in the Notification of Compliance Status report required by 
Sec. 63.1368(f) the provisions with which the owner or operator elects 
to comply.
    (5) Overlap with RCRA regulations for wastewater. After the 
compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1364, the owner or operator of an 
affected wastewater stream that is also subject to provisions in 40 CFR 
parts 260 through 272 shall comply with the more stringent control 
requirements (e.g., waste management units, numerical treatment 
standards, etc.) and the more stringent testing, monitoring, 
recordkeeping, and reporting requirements that overlap between the 
provisions of this subpart and the provisions of 40 CFR parts 260 
through 272. The owner or operator shall keep a record of the 
information used to determine which requirements were the most stringent 
and shall submit this information if requested by the Administrator.
    (6) Overlap with NSPS subparts III, NNN, and RRR. After the 
compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1364, if an owner or operator of a 
process vent subject to this subpart MMM that is also subject to the 
provisions of 40 CFR part 60, subpart III, or subpart NNN, or subpart 
RRR, elects to reduce organic HAP emissions from the process vent by 98 
percent as specified in Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(iii)(A), then the owner or 
operator is required to comply only with the provisions of this subpart 
MMM. Otherwise, the owner or operator shall comply with the provisions

[[Page 296]]

in both this subpart MMM and the provisions in 40 CFR part 60, subparts 
III, NNN, and RRR, as applicable.
    (j) Meaning of periods of time. All terms in this subpart MMM that 
define a period of time for completion of required tasks (e.g., weekly, 
monthly, quarterly, annual), unless specified otherwise in the section 
or subsection that imposes the requirement, refer to the standard 
calendar periods.
    (1) Notwithstanding time periods specified in the subpart MMM for 
completion of required tasks, such time periods may be changed by mutual 
agreement between the owner and operator and the Administrator, as 
specified in subpart A of this part (e.g., a period could begin on the 
compliance date or another date, rather than on the first day of the 
standard period). For each time period that is changed by agreement, the 
revised period shall remain in effect until it is changed. A new request 
is not necessary for each recurring period.
    (2) Where the period specified for compliance is a standard calendar 
period, if the initial compliance date occurs after the beginning of the 
period, compliance shall be required according to the schedule specified 
in paragraph (j)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Compliance shall be required before the end of the standard 
calendar period within which the compliance deadline occurs, if there 
remain at least 3 days for tasks that must be performed weekly, at least 
2 weeks for tasks that must be performed monthly, at least 1 month for 
tasks that must be performed each quarter, or at least 3 months for 
tasks that must be performed annually; or
    (ii) In all other cases, compliance shall be required before the end 
of the first full standard calendar period within which the initial 
compliance deadline occurs.
    (3) In all instances where a provision of this subpart MMM requires 
completion of a task during each of multiple successive periods, an 
owner or operator may perform the required task at any time during the 
specified period, provided the task is conducted at a reasonable 
interval after completion of the task in the previous period.



Sec. 63.1361  Definitions.

    Terms used in this subpart are defined in the CAA, in subpart A of 
this part, or in this section. If the same term is defined in subpart A 
of this part and in this section, it shall have the meaning given in 
this section for the purposes of this subpart MMM.
    Air pollution control device or control device means equipment 
installed on a process vent, storage vessel, wastewater treatment 
exhaust stack, or combination thereof that reduces the mass of HAP 
emitted to the air. The equipment may consist of an individual device or 
a series of devices. Examples include incinerators, carbon adsorption 
units, condensers, flares, boilers, process heaters, and gas absorbers. 
Process condensers are not considered air pollution control devices or 
control devices.
    Bag dump means equipment into which bags or other containers 
containing a powdered, granular, or other solid feedstock material are 
emptied. A bag dump is part of the process.
    Batch emission episode means a discrete venting episode that is 
associated with a single unit operation. A unit operation may have more 
than one batch emission episode. For example, a batch distillation unit 
operation may consist of batch emission episodes associated with 
charging and heating. Charging the vessel with HAP will result in one 
discrete batch emission episode that will last through the duration of 
the charge and will have an average flowrate equal to the rate of the 
charge. Another discrete batch emission episode will result from the 
expulsion of expanded vapor as the contents of the vessel are heated.
    Batch operation means a noncontinuous operation involving 
intermittent or discontinuous feed into PAI or integral intermediate 
manufacturing equipment, and, in general, involves the emptying of the 
equipment after the batch operation ceases and prior to beginning a new 
operation. Addition of raw material and withdrawal of product do not 
occur simultaneously in a batch operation. A batch process consists of a 
series of batch operations.
    Bench-scale batch process means a batch process (other than a 
research

[[Page 297]]

and development facility) that is capable of being located on a 
laboratory bench top. This bench-scale equipment will typically include 
reagent feed vessels, a small reactor and associated product separator, 
recovery and holding equipment. These processes are only capable of 
producing small quantities of product.
    Block means a time period equal to, at a maximum, the duration of a 
single batch.
    Car seal means a seal that is placed on a device that is used to 
change the position of a valve (e.g., from opened to closed) in such a 
way that the position of the valve cannot be changed without breaking 
the seal.
    Cleaning operation means routine rinsing, washing, or boil-off of 
equipment in batch operations between batches.
    Closed-loop system means an enclosed system that returns process 
fluid to the process and is not vented to the atmosphere except through 
a closed-vent system.
    Closed-purge system means a system or combination of system and 
portable containers, to capture purged liquids. Containers must be 
covered or closed when not being filled or emptied.
    Closed-vent system means a system that is not open to the atmosphere 
and is composed of piping, ductwork, connections, and, if necessary, 
flow inducing devices that transport gas or vapor from an emission point 
to a control device.
    Combustion device means an individual unit of equipment, such as a 
flare, incinerator, process heater, or boiler, used for the combustion 
of organic HAP vapors.
    Connector means flanged, screwed, or other joined fittings used to 
connect two pipe lines or a pipe line and a piece of equipment. A common 
connector is a flange. Joined fittings welded completely around the 
circumference of the interface are not considered connectors for the 
purpose of this regulation. For the purpose of reporting and record 
keeping, connector means joined fittings that are not inaccessible, 
ceramic, or ceramic-lined as described in Sec. 63.1255(b)(1)(vii) and 
63.1255(f)(3).
    Construction means the onsite fabrication, erection, or installation 
of an affected source or PAI process unit. Addition of new equipment to 
an existing PAI process unit does not constitute construction.
    Consumption means the makeup quantity of HAP entering a process that 
is not used as reactant. The quantity of material used as reactant is 
the theoretical amount needed assuming a 100 percent stoichiometric 
conversion. Makeup is the net amount of material that must be added to 
the process to replenish losses.
    Container, as used in the wastewater provisions, means any portable 
waste management unit that has a capacity greater than or equal to 0.1 
m3 in which a material is stored, transported, treated, or 
otherwise handled. Examples of containers are drums, barrels, tank 
trucks, barges, dumpsters, tank cars, dump trucks, and ships.
    Continuous process means a process where the inputs and outputs flow 
continuously throughout the duration of the process. Continuous 
processes typically approach steady state.
    Continuous seal means a seal that forms a continuous closure that 
completely covers the space between the wall of the storage vessel and 
the edge of the floating roof. A continuous seal may be a vapor-mounted, 
liquid-mounted, or metallic shoe seal.
    Controlled HAP emissions means the quantity of HAP components 
discharged to the atmosphere from an air pollution control device.
    Cover, as used in the wastewater provisions, means a device or 
system which is placed on or over a waste management unit containing 
wastewater or residuals so that the entire surface area is enclosed to 
minimize air emissions. A cover may have openings necessary for 
operation, inspection, and maintenance of the waste management unit such 
as access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells provided that each 
opening is closed when not in use. Examples of covers include a fixed 
roof installed on a wastewater tank, a lid installed on a container, and 
an air-supported enclosure installed over a waste management unit.

[[Page 298]]

    Double block and bleed system means two block valves connected in 
series with a bleed valve or line that can vent the line between the two 
block valves.
    Duct work means a conveyance system such as those commonly used for 
heating and ventilation systems. It is often made of sheet metal and 
often has sections connected by screws or crimping. Hard-piping is not 
ductwork.
    Equipment, for purposes of Sec. 63.1363, means each pump, 
compressor, agitator, pressure relief device, sampling connection 
system, open-ended valve or line, valve, connector, and instrumentation 
system in organic hazardous air pollutant service.
    External floating roof means a pontoon-type or double-deck type 
cover that rests on the liquid surface in a storage tank or waste 
management unit with no fixed roof.
    FIFRA means the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act.
    Fill or filling means the introduction of organic HAP into a storage 
tank or the introduction of a wastewater stream or residual into a waste 
management unit, but not necessarily to complete capacity.
    First attempt at repair means to take action for the purpose of 
stopping or reducing leakage of organic material to the atmosphere.
    Fixed roof means a cover that is mounted on a waste management unit 
or storage tank in a stationary manner and that does not move with 
fluctuations in liquid level.
    Flame ionization detector (FID) means a device in which the measured 
change in conductivity of a standard flame (usually hydrogen) due to the 
insertion of another gas or vapor is used to detect the gas or vapor.
    Floating roof means a cover consisting of a double deck, pontoon 
single deck, internal floating cover or covered floating roof, which 
rests upon and is supported by the liquid being contained, and is 
equipped with a continuous seal or seals to close the space between the 
roof edge and waste management unit or storage vessel wall.
    Flow indicator means a device that indicates whether gas flow is, or 
whether the valve position would allow gas flow to be, present in a 
line.
    Group 1 process vent means any process vent from a process at an 
existing or new affected source for which the uncontrolled organic HAP 
emissions from the sum of all process vents are greater than or equal to 
0.15 Mg/yr and/or the uncontrolled hydogen chloride (HCl) and chlorine 
emissions from the sum of all process vents are greater than or equal to 
6.8 Mg/yr.
    Group 2 process vent means any process vent that does not meet the 
definition of a Group 1 process vent.
    Group 1 storage vessel means a storage vessel at an existing 
affected source with a capacity equal to or greater than 75 m3 
and storing material with a maximum true vapor pressure greater than or 
equal to 3.45 kPa, or a storage vessel at a new affected source with a 
capacity equal to or greater than 40 m3 and storing material 
with a maximum true vapor pressure greater than or equal to 16.5 kPa and 
with a capacity greater than or equal to 75 m3 and storing 
material with a maximum true vapor pressure greater than or equal to 
3.45 kPa.
    Group 2 storage vessel means a storage vessel that does not meet the 
definition of a Group 1 storage vessel.
    Group 1 wastewater stream means process wastewater at an existing or 
new source that meets the criteria for Group 1 status in Sec. 63.132(c) 
of subpart G of this part for compounds in Table 9 of subpart G of this 
part or a maintenance wastewater stream that contains 5.3 Mg of HAP per 
discharge event.
    Group 2 wastewater stream means any wastewater stream that does not 
meet the definition of a Group 1 wastewater stream.
    Group of processes means all of the equipment associated with 
processes in a building, processing area, or facility-wide. A group of 
processes may consist of a single process.
    Halogenated compounds means organic compounds that contain chlorine 
atoms.
    Halogenated vent stream means a process, storage vessel, or waste 
management unit vent stream determined to have a concentration of 
halogenated compounds of greater than 20 ppmv, as determined through 
process knowledge, test results using Method 18 of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, or test results

[[Page 299]]

using any other test method that has been validated according to the 
procedures in Method 301 of appendix A of this part.
    Hard-piping means piping or tubing that is manufactured and properly 
installed using good engineering judgment and standards, such as ANSI 
B31-3.
    Impurity means a substance that is produced coincidentally with the 
product(s), or is present in a raw material. An impurity does not serve 
a useful purpose in the production or use of the product(s) and is not 
isolated.
    In gas/vapor service means that a piece of equipment in organic HAP 
service contains a gas or vapor at operating conditions.
    In heavy liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
HAP service is not in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service.
    In light liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic 
HAP service contains a liquid that meets the following conditions:
    (1) The vapor pressure of one or more of the organic compounds is 
greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 deg. C;
    (2) The total concentration of the pure organic compounds 
constituents having a vapor pressure greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 deg. C 
is equal to or greater than 20 percent by weight of the total process 
stream; and
    (3) The fluid is a liquid at operating conditions.

    Note: To definition of ``In light liquid service: Vapor pressures 
may be determined by the methods described in 40 CFR 60.485(e)(1).

    In liquid service means that a piece of equipment in organic HAP 
service is not in gas/vapor service.
    In organic hazardous air pollutant or in organic HAP service means 
that a piece of equipment either contains or contacts a fluid (liquid or 
gas) that is at least 5 percent by weight of total organic HAP as 
determined according to the provisions of Sec. 63.180(d) of subpart H of 
this part. The provisions of Sec. 63.180(d) of subpart H of this part 
also specify how to determine that a piece of equipment is not in 
organic HAP service.
    In vacuum service means that equipment is operating at an internal 
pressure which is at least 5 kPa below ambient pressure.
    In-situ sampling systems means nonextractive samplers or in-line 
samplers.
    Individual drain system means the stationary system used to convey 
wastewater streams or residuals to a waste management unit or to 
discharge or disposal. The term includes: hard piping; all process 
drains and junction boxes; and associated sewer lines, other junction 
boxes, manholes, sumps, and lift stations conveying wastewater streams 
or residuals. A segregated stormwater sewer system, which is a drain and 
collection system designed and operated for the sole purpose of 
collecting rainfall-runoff at a facility, and which is segregated from 
all other individual drain systems, is excluded from this definition.
    Instrumentation system means a group of equipment components used to 
condition and convey a sample of the process fluid to analyzers and 
instruments for the purpose of determining process operating conditions 
(e.g., composition, pressure, flow, etc.). Valves and connectors are the 
predominant type of equipment used in instrumentation systems; however, 
other types of equipment may also be included in these systems. Only 
valves nominally 0.5 inches and smaller and connectors nominally 0.75 
inches and smaller in diameter are considered instrumentation systems 
for the purposes of this subpart. Valves greater than nominally 0.5 
inches and connectors greater than nominally 0.75 inches associated with 
instrumentation systems are not considered part of instrumentation 
systems and must be monitored individually.
    Integral intermediate means an intermediate for which 50 percent or 
more of the annual production is used in on-site production of any 
PAI(s) and that is not stored before being used in the production of 
another integral intermediate or the PAI(s). For the purposes of this 
definition, an intermediate is stored if it is discharged to a storage 
vessel and at least one of the following conditions is met: the 
processing equipment that discharges to the storage vessel is shutdown 
before the processing equipment that withdraws from the storage vessel 
is started up; during an annual period, the material must be

[[Page 300]]

stored in the vessel for at least 30 days before being used to make a 
PAI; or the processing equipment that discharges to the storage vessel 
is located in a separate building (or processing area) of the plant than 
the processing equipment that uses material from the storage vessel as a 
feedstock, and control equipment is not shared by the two processing 
areas. Any process unit that produces an intermediate and is subject to 
subpart F of this part is not an integral intermediate.
    Intermediate means an organic compound that is produced by chemical 
reaction and that is further processed or modified in one or more 
additional chemical reaction steps to produce another intermediate or a 
PAI.
    Internal floating roof means a cover that rests or floats on the 
liquid surface (but not necessarily in complete contact with it) inside 
a storage tank or waste management unit that has a permanently affixed 
roof.
    Junction box means a manhole or access point to a wastewater sewer 
system line or a lift station.
    Large control device means a control device that controls process 
vents, and the total HAP emissions into the control device from all 
sources are greater than or equal to 10 tons/yr.
    Liquid-mounted seal means a foam- or liquid-filled seal mounted in 
contact with the liquid between the wall of the storage vessel or waste 
management unit and the floating roof. The seal is mounted continuously 
around the tank or unit.
    Liquids dripping means any visible leakage from the seal including 
dripping, spraying, misting, clouding, and ice formation. Indications of 
liquid dripping include puddling or new stains that are indicative of an 
existing evaporated drip.
    Maintenance wastewater means wastewater generated by the draining of 
process fluid from components in the PAI process unit into an individual 
drain system prior to or during maintenance activities. Maintenance 
wastewater can be generated through planned or unplanned shutdowns and 
during periods not associated with a shutdown. Examples of activities 
that can generate maintenance wastewaters include descaling of heat 
exchanger tubing bundles, cleaning of distillation column traps, 
draining of low legs and high point bleeds, draining of pumps into an 
individual drain system, and draining of portions of the PAI process 
unit for repair.
    Malfunction means any sudden, infrequent, and not reasonably 
preventable failure of air pollution control equipment, emissions 
monitoring equipment, process equipment, or a process to operate in a 
normal or usual manner. Failures that are caused all or in part by poor 
maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions.
    Maximum true vapor pressure means the equilibrium partial pressure 
exerted by the total organic HAP in the stored or transferred liquid at 
the temperature equal to the highest calendar-month average of the 
liquid storage or transferred temperature for liquids stored or 
transferred above or below the ambient temperature or at the local 
maximum monthly average temperature as reported by the National Weather 
Service for liquids stored or transferred at the ambient temperature, as 
determined:
    (1) In accordance with methods described in Chapter 19.2 of the 
American Petroleum Institute's Manual of Petroleum Measurement 
Standards, Evaporative Loss From Floating-Roof Tanks (incorporated by 
reference as specified in Sec. 63.14 in subpart A of this part); or
    (2) As obtained from standard reference texts; or
    (3) As determined by the American Society for Testing and Materials 
Method D2879-97, Test Method for Vapor Pressure-Temperature Relationship 
and Initial Decomposition Temperature of Liquids by Isoteniscope 
(incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 63.14 of subpart A of 
this part); or
    (4) Any other method approved by the Administrator.
    Metallic shoe seal or mechanical shoe seal means metal sheets that 
are held vertically against the wall of the storage tank by springs, 
weighted levers, or other mechanisms and connected to the floating roof 
by braces or other means. A flexible coated fabric (envelope) spans the 
annular space between the metal sheet and the floating roof.
    Nonrepairable means that it is technically infeasible to repair a 
piece of

[[Page 301]]

equipment from which a leak has been detected without a process 
shutdown.
    Open-ended valve or line means any valve, except pressure relief 
valves, having one side of the valve seat in contact with process fluid 
and one side open to atmosphere, either directly or through open piping.
    Operating scenario, for the purposes of reporting and recordkeeping, 
means a description of a PAI process unit, including: identification of 
each wastewater point of determination (POD) and process vent, their 
associated emissions episodes and durations, and their associated level 
of control and control devices, as applicable; calculations and 
engineering analyses required to demonstrate compliance; and a 
description of operating and/or testing conditions for any associated 
control device.
    Organic compound, as used in the definitions of intermediate and 
PAI, means any compound that contains both carbon and hydrogen with or 
without other elements.
    Organic HAP means those HAP listed in section 112(b) of the CAA that 
are measured according to the procedures of Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A.
    Pesticide active ingredient or PAI means any material that is an 
active ingredient within the meaning of FIFRA section 2(a); that is used 
to produce an insecticide, herbicide, or fungicide end use pesticide 
product; that consists of one or more organic compounds; and that must 
be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR part 156 for transfer, sale, or 
distribution. These materials are typically described by North American 
Industrial Classification System (NAICS) Codes 325199 and 32532 (i.e., 
previously known as Standard Industrial Classification System Codes 2869 
and 2879). These materials are identified by product classification 
codes 01, 21, 02, 04, 44, 07, 08, and 16 in block 19 on EPA form 3540-
16, the Pesticides Report for Pesticide-Producing Establishments.
    Pesticide active ingredient manufacturing process unit (PAI process 
unit) means a process unit that is used to produce a material that is 
primarily used as a PAI or integral intermediate. A PAI process unit 
consists of: the process, as defined in this subpart; associated storage 
vessels, as determined by the procedures in Sec. 63.1360(f); equipment 
identified in Sec. 63.1362(l); connected piping and ducts; and 
components such as pumps, compressors, agitators, pressure relief 
devices, sampling connection systems, open-ended valves or lines, 
valves, connectors, and instrumentation systems. A material is primarily 
used as a PAI or integral intermediate if more than 50 percent of the 
projected annual production from a process unit in the 3 years after 
June 23, 1999 or startup, whichever is later, is used as a PAI or 
integral intermediate; recordkeeping is required if the material is used 
as a PAI or integral intermediate, but not as the primary use. If the 
primary use changes to a PAI or integral intermediate, the process unit 
becomes a PAI process unit unless it is already subject to the HON. If 
the primary use changes from a PAI or integral intermediate to another 
use, the process unit remains a PAI process unit. Any process tank 
containing an integral intermediate is part of the PAI process unit used 
to produce the integral intermediate. A process unit that produces an 
intermediate that is not an integral intermediate may be designated as a 
PAI process unit according to the procedures of Sec. 63.1360(g). 
Formulation of pesticide products is not considered part of a PAI 
process unit. Quality assurance and quality control laboratories are not 
considered part of a PAI process unit.
    Plant site means all contiguous or adjoining property that is under 
common control, including properties that are separated only by a road 
or other public right-of-way. Common control includes properties that 
are owned, leased, or operated by the same entity, parent entity, 
subsidiary, or any combination thereof.
    Point of determination (POD) means each point where a wastewater 
stream exits the PAI process unit.

    Note to definition of ``point of determination'': The regulation 
allows determination of the characteristics of a wastewater stream: at 
the point of determination; or downstream of the point of determination 
if corrections are made for changes in flow rate and

[[Page 302]]

annual average concentration of Table 9 compounds as determined in 
Sec. 63.144 of subpart G of this part. Such changes include: losses by 
air emissions, reduction of annual average concentration or changes in 
flow rate by mixing with other water or wastewater streams, and 
reduction in flow rate or annual average concentration by treating or 
otherwise handling the wastewater stream to remove or destroy HAP.

    Pressure release means the emission of materials resulting from the 
system pressure being greater than the set pressure of the pressure 
relief device. This release can be one release or a series of releases 
over a short time period due to a malfunction in the process.
    Pressure relief device or valve means a safety device used to 
prevent operating pressures from exceeding the maximum allowable working 
pressure of the process equipment. A common pressure relief device is a 
spring-loaded pressure relief valve. Devices that are actuated either by 
a pressure of less than or equal to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge or 
by a vacuum are not pressure relief devices.
    Process means a logical grouping of processing equipment which 
collectively function to produce a product. For the purpose of this 
subpart, a PAI process includes all, or a combination of, reaction, 
recovery, separation, purification, treatment, cleaning, and other 
activities or unit operations, which are used to produce a PAI or 
integral intermediate. A PAI process and all integral intermediate 
processes for which 100 percent of the annual production is used in the 
production of the PAI may be linked together and defined as a single PAI 
process unit.
    Process condenser means a condenser whose primary purpose is to 
recover material as an integral part of a unit operation. The condenser 
must cause a vapor-to-liquid phase change for periods during which the 
temperature of liquid in the process equipment is at or above its 
boiling or bubble point. Examples of process condensers include 
distillation condensers, reflux condensers, and condensers used in 
stripping or flashing operation. In a series of condensers, all 
condensers up to and including the first condenser with an exit gas 
temperature below the boiling or bubble point of the liquid in the 
process equipment are considered to be process condensers. All 
condensers in line prior to the vacuum source are included in this 
definition.
    Process shutdown means a work practice or operational procedure that 
stops production from a process or part of a process during which it is 
technically feasible to clear process material from a process or part of 
a process consistent with safety constraints and during which repairs 
can be effected. An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure 
that stops production from a process or part of a process for less than 
24 hours is not a process shutdown. An unscheduled work practice or 
operational procedure that would stop production from a process or part 
of a process for a shorter period of time than would be required to 
clear the process or part of the process of materials and start up the 
process, and would result in greater emissions than delay of repair of 
leaking components until the next scheduled process shutdown, is not a 
process shutdown. The use of spare equipment and technically feasible 
bypassing of equipment without stopping production are not process 
shutdowns.
    Process tank means a tank that is used to collect material 
discharged from a feedstock storage vessel or equipment within the 
process and transfer of this material to other equipment within the 
process or a product storage vessel. Processing steps occur both 
upstream and downstream of the tank within a given process unit. Surge 
control vessels and bottoms receivers that fit these conditions are 
considered process tanks.
    Process unit means the equipment assembled and connected by pipes or 
ducts to process raw materials and to manufacture an intended product.
    Process unit group means a group of process units that manufacture 
PAI's and products other than PAI's by alternating raw materials or 
operating conditions, or by reconfiguring process equipment. Only 
process equipment that has been or could be part of a PAI process unit, 
because of its function or capacity, is included in a process unit 
group.

[[Page 303]]

    Process vent means a point of emission from processing equipment to 
the atmosphere or a control device. The vent may be the release point 
for an emission stream associated with an individual unit operation, or 
it may be the release point for emission streams from multiple unit 
operations that have been manifolded together into a common header. 
Examples of process vents include, but are not limited to, vents on 
condensers used for product recovery, bottom receivers, surge control 
vessels, reactors, filters, centrifuges, process tanks, and product 
dryers. A vent is not considered to be a process vent for a given 
emission episode if the undiluted and uncontrolled emission stream that 
is released through the vent contains less than 20 ppmv HAP, as 
determined through process knowledge that no HAP are present in the 
emission stream; using an engineering assessment as discussed in 
Sec. 63.1365(b)(2)(ii); from test data collected using Method 1818 of 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A; or from test data collected using any other 
test method that has been validated according to the procedures in 
Method 301 of appendix A of this part. Process vents do not include 
vents on storage vessels regulated under Sec. 63.1362(c), vents on 
wastewater emission sources regulated under Sec. 63.1362(d), or pieces 
of equipment regulated under Sec. 63.1363.
    Process wastewater means wastewater which, during manufacturing or 
processing, comes into direct contact with, or results from, the 
production or use of any raw material, intermediate product, finished 
product, by-product, or waste product. Examples include: product tank 
drawdown or feed tank drawdown; water formed during a chemical reaction 
or used as a reactant; water used to wash impurities from organic 
products or reactants; water used to clean process equipment; water used 
to cool or quench organic vapor streams through direct contact; and 
condensed steam from jet ejector systems pulling vacuum on vessels 
containing organics.
    Product means the compound(s) or chemical(s) that are produced or 
manufactured as the intended output of a process unit. Impurities and 
wastes are not considered products.
    Product dryer means equipment that is used to remove moisture or 
other liquid from granular, powdered, or other solid PAI or integral 
intermediate products prior to storage, formulation, shipment, or other 
uses. The product dryer is part of the process.
    Product dryer vent means a process vent from a product dryer through 
which a gas stream containing gaseous pollutants (i.e., organic HAP, 
HCl, or chlorine), particulate matter, or both are released to the 
atmosphere or are routed to a control device.
    Production-indexed HAP consumption factor (HAP factor) is the result 
of dividing the annual consumption of total HAP by the annual production 
rate, per process.
    Production-indexed VOC consumption factor (VOC factor) is the result 
of dividing the annual consumption of total VOC by the annual production 
rate, per process.
    Publicly owned treatment works (POTW) is defined at 40 CFR part 
403.3(0).
    Reactor means a device or vessel in which one or more chemicals or 
reactants, other than air, are combined or decomposed in such a way that 
their molecular structures are altered and one or more new organic 
compounds are formed.
    Recovery device, as used in the wastewater provisions, means an 
individual unit of equipment capable of, and normally used for the 
purpose of, recovering chemicals for fuel value (i.e., net positive 
heating value), use, reuse, or for sale for fuel value, use, or reuse. 
Examples of equipment that may be recovery devices include organic 
removal devices such as decanters, strippers, or thin-film evaporation 
units. To be a recovery device, a decanter and any other equipment based 
on the operating principle of gravity separation must receive only two-
phase liquid streams.
    Repaired means that equipment is adjusted, or otherwise altered, to 
eliminate a leak as defined in the applicable paragraphs of 
Sec. 63.1363.
    Research and development facility means any stationary source whose 
primary purpose is to conduct research and development, where the 
operations

[[Page 304]]

are under the close supervision of technically trained personnel, and is 
not engaged in the manufacture of products for commercial sale, except 
in a de minimis manner.
    Residual means any liquid or solid material containing Table 9 
compounds (as defined in Sec. 63.111 of subpart G of this part) that is 
removed from a wastewater stream by a waste management unit or treatment 
process that does not destroy organics (nondestructive unit). Examples 
of residuals from nondestructive wastewater management units include the 
organic layer and bottom residue removed by a decanter or organic-water 
separator and the overheads from a steam stripper or air stripper. 
Examples of materials which are not residuals include: silt; mud; 
leaves; bottoms from a steam stripper or air stripper; and sludges, ash, 
or other materials removed from wastewater being treated by destructive 
devices such as biological treatment units and incinerators.
    Safety device means a closure device such as a pressure relief 
valve, frangible disc, fusible plug, or any other type of device which 
functions exclusively to prevent physical damage or permanent 
deformation to a unit or its air emission control equipment by venting 
gases or vapors directly to the atmosphere during unsafe conditions 
resulting from an unplanned, accidental, or emergency event. For the 
purposes of this subpart, a safety device is not used for routine 
venting of gases or vapors from the vapor headspace underneath a cover 
such as during filling of the unit or to adjust the pressure in this 
vapor headspace in response to normal daily diurnal ambient temperature 
fluctuations. A safety device is designed to remain in a closed position 
during normal operations and open only when the internal pressure, or 
another relevant parameter, exceeds the device threshold setting 
applicable to the air emission control equipment as determined by the 
owner or operator based on manufacturer recommendations, applicable 
regulations, fire protection and prevention codes, standard engineering 
codes and practices, or other requirements for the safe handling of 
flammable, combustible, explosive, reactive, or hazardous materials.
    Sampling connection system means an assembly of equipment within a 
process unit used during periods of representative operation to take 
samples of the process fluid. Equipment used to take nonroutine grab 
samples is not considered a sampling connection system.
    Sensor means a device that measures a physical quantity or the 
change in a physical quantity, such as temperature, pressure, flow rate, 
pH, or liquid level.
    Set pressure means the pressure at which a properly operating 
pressure relief device begins to open to relieve atypical process system 
operating pressure.
    Sewer line means a lateral, trunk line, branch line, or other 
conduit including, but not limited to, grates, trenches, etc., used to 
convey wastewater streams or residuals to a downstream waste management 
unit.
    Shutdown means the cessation of operation of a continuous PAI 
process unit for any purpose. Shutdown also means the cessation of a 
batch PAI process unit or any related individual piece of equipment 
required or used to comply with this part or for emptying and degassing 
storage vessels for periodic maintenance, replacement of equipment, 
repair, or any other purpose not excluded from this definition. Shutdown 
does not apply to cessation of a batch PAI process unit at the end of a 
campaign or between batches (e.g., for rinsing or washing equipment), 
for routine maintenance, or for other routine operations.
    Small control device means a control device that controls process 
vents, and the total HAP emissions into the control device from all 
sources are less than 10 tons of HAP per year.
    Startup means the setting in operation of a continuous PAI process 
unit for any purpose, the first time a new or reconstructed batch PAI 
process unit begins production, or, for new equipment added, including 
equipment used to comply with this subpart, the first time the equipment 
is put into operation. For batch process units, startup does not apply 
to the first time the equipment is put into operation at the start of a 
campaign to produce a product that has been produced in the past,

[[Page 305]]

after a shutdown for maintenance, or when the equipment is put into 
operation as part of a batch within a campaign. As used in Sec. 63.1363, 
startup means the setting in operation of a piece of equipment or a 
control device that is subject to this subpart.
    Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that is used to store 
organic liquids that contain one or more HAP and that has been assigned, 
according to the procedures in Sec. 63.1360(f) or (g), to a PAI process 
unit that is subject to this subpart MMM. The following are not 
considered storage vessels for the purposes of this subpart:
    (1) Vessels permanently attached to motor vehicles such as trucks, 
railcars, barges, or ships;
    (2) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 
kilopascals and without emissions to the atmosphere;
    (3) Vessels storing material that contains no organic HAP or 
contains organic HAP only as impurities;
    (4) Wastewater storage tanks;
    (5) Process tanks; and
    (6) Nonwastewater waste tanks.
    Supplemental gases means any nonaffected gaseous streams (streams 
that are not from process vents, storage vessels, equipment or waste 
management units) that contain less than 20 ppmv TOC and less than 20 
ppmv total HCl and chlorine, as determined through process knowledge, 
and are combined with an affected vent stream. Supplemental gases are 
often used to maintain pressures in manifolds or for fire and explosion 
protection and prevention. Air required to operate combustion device 
burner(s) is not considered a supplemental gas.
    Surface impoundment means a waste management unit which is a natural 
topographic depression, manmade excavation, or diked area formed 
primarily of earthen materials (although it may be lined with manmade 
materials), which is designed to hold an accumulation of liquid wastes 
or waste containing free liquids. A surface impoundment is used for the 
purpose of treating, storing, or disposing of wastewater or residuals, 
and is not an injection well. Examples of surface impoundments are 
equalization, settling, and aeration pits, ponds, and lagoons.
    Total organic compounds (TOC) means those compounds measured 
according to the procedures of Method 18 or Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    Treatment process means a specific technique that removes or 
destroys the organics in a wastewater or residual stream such as a steam 
stripping unit, thin-film evaporation unit, waste incinerator, 
biological treatment unit, or any other process applied to wastewater 
streams or residuals to comply with Sec. 63.138 of subpart G of this 
part. Most treatment processes are conducted in tanks. Treatment 
processes are a subset of waste management units.
    Uncontrolled HAP emissions means a gas stream containing HAP which 
has exited the process (or process condenser, if any), but which has not 
yet been introduced into an air pollution control device to reduce the 
mass of HAP in the stream. If the process vent is not routed to an air 
pollution control device, uncontrolled emissions are those HAP emissions 
released to the atmosphere.
    Unit operation means those processing steps that occur within 
distinct equipment that are used, among other things, to prepare 
reactants, facilitate reactions, separate and purify products, and 
recycle materials. Equipment used for these purposes includes, but is 
not limited to, reactors, distillation units, extraction columns, 
absorbers, decanters, dryers, condensers, and filtration equipment.
    Vapor-mounted seal means a continuous seal that completely covers 
the annular space between the wall of the storage tank or waste 
management unit and the edge of the floating roof, and is mounted such 
that there is a vapor space between the stored liquid and the bottom of 
the seal.
    Volatile organic compounds are defined in 40 CFR 51.100.
    Waste management unit means the equipment, structure(s), and/or 
device(s) used to convey, store, treat, or dispose of wastewater streams 
or residuals. Examples of waste management units include wastewater 
tanks, surface impoundments, individual drain systems, and biological 
wastewater treatment units. Examples of

[[Page 306]]

equipment that may be waste management units include containers, air 
flotation units, oil-water separators or organic-water separators, or 
organic removal devices such as decanters, strippers, or thin-film 
evaporation units. If such equipment is a recovery device, then it is 
part of a PAI process unit and is not a waste management unit.
    Wastewater means water that meets either of the conditions described 
in paragraph (1) or (2) of this definition and is discarded from a PAI 
process unit that is at an affected source:
    (1) Is generated from a PAI process and contains either:
    (i) An annual average concentration of compounds in Table 9 of 
subpart G of this part of at least 5 ppmw and has an average flow rate 
of 0.02 L/min or greater; or
    (ii) An annual average concentration of compounds in Table 9 of 
subpart G of this part of at least 10,000 ppmw at any flow rate;
    (2) Is generated from a PAI process unit as a result of maintenance 
activities and contains at least 5.3 Mg of HAP per individual discharge 
event.
    Wastewater tank means a stationary waste management unit that is 
designed to contain an accumulation of wastewater or residuals and is 
constructed primarily of nonearthen materials (e.g., wood, concrete, 
steel, plastic) which provide structural support. Wastewater tanks used 
for flow equalization are included in this definition.
    Water seal controls means a seal pot, p-leg trap, or other type of 
trap filled with water (e.g., flooded sewers that maintain water levels 
adequate to prevent air flow through the system) that creates a water 
barrier between the sewer line and the atmosphere. The water level of 
the seal must be maintained in the vertical leg of a drain in order to 
be considered a water seal.



Sec. 63.1362  Standards.

    (a) On and after the compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1364, 
each owner or operator of an affected source subject to the provisions 
of this subpart shall control HAP emissions to the levels specified in 
this section and in Sec. 63.1363, as summarized in Table 2 of this 
subpart.
    (b) Process vents. (1) The owner or operator of an existing source 
shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this 
section. The owner or operator of a new source shall comply with the 
requirements of paragraphs (b)(4) and (5) of this section. Compliance 
with paragraphs (b)(2) through (b)(5) of this section shall be 
demonstrated through the applicable test methods and initial compliance 
procedures in Sec. 63.1365 and the monitoring requirements in 
Sec. 63.1366.
    (2) Organic HAP emissions from existing sources. The owner or 
operator of an existing affected source must comply with the 
requirements in either paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section or with the 
requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) The uncontrolled organic HAP emission rate shall not exceed 0.15 
Mg/yr from the sum of all process vents within a process.
    (ii) (A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B) of this 
section, uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from a process vent shall be 
reduced by 98 percent by weight or greater if the flow-weighted average 
flowrate for the vent as calculated using Equation 1 of this subpart is 
less than or equal to the flowrate calculated using Equation 2 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.000

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.001

Where:

FRa=flow-weighted average flowrate for the vent, scfm
Di=duration of each emission event, min
FRi=flowrate of each emission event, scfm
n=number of emission events
FR=flowrate, scfm
HL=annual uncontrolled organic HAP emissions, lb/yr, as defined in 
          Sec. 63.1361

    (B) If the owner or operator can demonstrate that a control device, 
installed on or before November 10, 1997 on a process vent otherwise 
subject to the requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A) of this section, 
reduces

[[Page 307]]

inlet emissions of total organic HAP by greater than or equal to 90 
percent by weight but less than 98 percent by weight, then the control 
device must be operated to reduce inlet emissions of total organic HAP 
by 90 percent by weight or greater.
    (iii) Excluding process vents that are subject to the requirements 
in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, uncontrolled organic HAP 
emissions from the sum of all process vents within a process shall be 
reduced by 90 percent or greater by weight.
    (iv) As an alternative to the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) 
and (iii) of this section, uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from any 
process vent may be reduced in accordance with any of the provisions in 
paragraphs (b)(2)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section. All remaining 
process vents within a process must be controlled in accordance with 
paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (A) To outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv as TOC; 
or
    (B) By a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (C) By a control device specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(4); or
    (D) In accordance with the alternative standard specified in 
paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
    (3) HCl and Cl2 emissions from existing sources. For each 
process, the owner or operator of an existing source shall comply with 
the requirements of either paragraph (b)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) The uncontrolled HCl and Cl2 emissions, including HCl 
generated from the combustion of halogenated process vent emissions, 
from the sum of all process vents within a process shall not exceed 6.8 
Mg/yr.
    (ii) HCl and Cl2 emissions, including HCl generated from 
combustion of halogenated process vent emissions, from the sum of all 
process vents within a process shall be reduced by 94 percent or greater 
or to outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv.
    (4) Organic HAP emissions from new sources. For each process, the 
owner or operator of a new source shall comply with the requirements of 
either paragraph (b)(4)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) The uncontrolled organic HAP emissions shall not exceed 0.15 Mg/
yr from the sum of all process vents within a process.
    (ii) The uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from the sum of all 
process vents within a process at a new affected source that are not 
controlled according to any of the requirements of paragraphs 
(b)(4)(ii)(A) through (C) or (b)(6) of this section shall be reduced by 
98 weight percent or greater.
    (A) To outlet concentrations less than or equal to 20 ppmv as TOC; 
or
    (B) By a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (C) By a control device specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(4).
    (5) HCl and Cl2 emissions from new sources. For each 
process, the owner or operator of a new source shall comply with the 
requirements of either paragraph (b)(5)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this 
section.
    (i) The uncontrolled HCl and Cl2 emissions, including HCl 
generated from combustion of halogenated process vent emissions, from 
the sum of all process vents within a process shall not exceed 6.8 Mg/
yr.
    (ii) If HCl and Cl2 emissions, including HCl generated 
from combustion of halogenated process vent emissions, from the sum of 
all process vents within a process are greater than or equal to 6.8 Mg/
yr and less than 191 Mg/yr, these HCl and Cl2 emissions shall 
be reduced by 94 percent or to an outlet concentration less than or 
equal to 20 ppmv.
    (iii) If HCl and Cl2 emissions, including HCl generated 
from combustion of halogenated process vent emissions, from the sum of 
all process vents within a process are greater than 191 Mg/yr, these HCl 
and Cl2 emissions shall be reduced by 99 percent or greater 
or to an outlet concentration less than or equal to 20 ppmv.
    (6) Alternative standard. As an alternative to the provisions in 
paragraphs (b) (2) through (5) of this section, the owner or operator 
may route emissions from a process vent to a control device or series of 
control devices achieving an outlet TOC concentration, as calibrated on 
methane or the predominant HAP, of 20 ppmv or less, and an outlet 
concentration of HCl and Cl2 of 20 ppmv

[[Page 308]]

or less. Any process vents within a process that are not routed to such 
a control device or series of control devices must be controlled in 
accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(2)(ii), (b)(2)(iii), 
(b)(2)(iv), (b)(3)(ii), (b)(3)(iii), (b)(4)(ii), (b)(5)(ii), or 
(b)(5)(iii) of this section, as applicable.
    (c) Storage vessels. (1) The owner or operator shall either 
determine the group status of a storage vessel or designate it as a 
Group 1 storage vessel. If the owner or operator elects to designate the 
storage vessel as a Group 1 storage vessel, the owner or operator is not 
required to determine the maximum true vapor pressure of the material 
stored in the storage vessel.
    (2) Standard for existing sources. Except as specified in paragraphs 
(c) (4) and (5) of this section, the owner or operator of a Group 1 
storage vessel at an existing affected source, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1361, shall equip the affected storage vessel with one of the 
following:
    (i) A fixed roof and internal floating roof, or
    (ii) An external floating roof, or
    (iii) An external floating roof converted to an internal floating 
roof, or
    (iv) A closed vent system meeting the conditions of paragraph (k) of 
this section and a control device that meets any of the following 
conditions:
    (A) Reduces organic HAP emissions by 95 percent by weight or 
greater; or
    (B) Reduces organic HAP emissions to outlet concentrations of 20 
ppmv or less as TOC; or
    (C) Is a flare that meets the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b); or
    (D) Is a control device specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(4).
    (3) Standard for new sources. Except as specified in paragraphs 
(c)(4) and (5) of this section, the owner or operator of a Group 1 
storage vessel at a new source, as defined in Sec. 63.1361, shall equip 
the affected storage vessel in accordance with any one of paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (4) Alternative standard. As an alternative to the provisions in 
paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section, the owner or operator of an 
existing or new affected source may route emissions from storage vessels 
to a control device or series of control devices achieving an outlet TOC 
concentration, as calibrated on methane or the predominant HAP, of 20 
ppmv or less, and an outlet concentration of hydrogen chloride and 
chlorine of 20 ppmv or less.
    (5) Planned routine maintenance. The owner or operator is exempt 
from the specifications in paragraphs (c)(2) through (4) of this section 
during periods of planned routine maintenance of the control device that 
do not exceed 240 hr/yr.
    (6) Compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of 
this section is demonstrated using the initial compliance procedures in 
Sec. 63.1365(d) and the monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1366. 
Compliance with the outlet concentrations in paragraph (c)(4) of this 
section shall be determined by the initial compliance provisions in 
Sec. 63.1365(a)(5) and the continuous emission monitoring requirements 
of Sec. 63.1366(b)(5).
    (d) Wastewater. The owner or operator of each affected source shall 
comply with the requirements of Secs. 63.131 through 63.147 of subpart G 
of this part, with the differences noted in paragraphs (d)(1) through 
(13) of this section for the purposes of this subpart.
    (1) When the determination of equivalence criteria in Sec. 63.102(b) 
is referred to in Secs. 63.132, 63.133, and 63.137 of subpart G of this 
part, the provisions in Sec. 63.6(g) of subpart A of this part shall 
apply.
    (2) When the storage tank requirements contained in Secs. 63.119 
through 63.123 of subpart G of this part are referred to in Secs. 63.132 
through 63.148 of subpart G of this part, Secs. 63.119 through 63.123 of 
subpart G of this part are applicable, with the exception of the 
differences noted in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) When the term ``storage vessel'' is used in Secs. 63.119 through 
63.123 of subpart G of this part, the definition of the term ``storage 
vessel'' in Sec. 63.1361 shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (ii) When December 31, 1992, is referred to in Sec. 63.119 of 
subpart G of this part, November 10, 1997 shall apply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (iii) When April 22, 1994 is referred to in Sec. 63.119 of subpart G 
of this part, June 23, 1999 shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.

[[Page 309]]

    (iv) When the phrase ``the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.100 
of subpart F of this part'' is referred to in Sec. 63.120 of subpart G 
of this part, the phrase ``the compliance date specified in 
Sec. 63.1364'' shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (v) When the phrase ``the maximum true vapor pressure of the total 
organic HAP in the stored liquid falls below the values defining Group 1 
storage vessels specified in Table 5 or Table 6 of this subpart'' is 
referred to in Sec. 63.120(b)(1)(iv) of subpart G of this part, the 
phrase, ``the maximum true vapor pressure of the total organic HAP in 
the stored liquid falls below the values defining Group 1 storage 
vessels specified in Sec. 63.1361'' shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (3) To request approval to monitor alternative parameters, as 
referred to in Sec. 63.146(a) of subpart G of this part, the owner or 
operator shall comply with the procedures in Sec. 63.8(f) of subpart A 
of this part, as referred to in Sec. 63.1366(b)(4), instead of the 
procedures in Sec. 63.151(f) or (g) of subpart G of this part.
    (4) When the Notification of Compliance Status report requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) of subpart G of this part are referred to in 
Sec. 63.146 of subpart G of this part, the Notification of Compliance 
Status report requirements in Sec. 63.1368(f) shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (5) When the recordkeeping requirements contained in Sec. 63.152(f) 
of subpart G of this part are referred to in Sec. 63.147(d) of subpart G 
of this part, the recordkeeping requirements in Sec. 63.1367 shall apply 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When the Periodic report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) of subpart G of this part are referred to in Secs. 63.146 
and 63.147 of subpart G of this part, the Periodic report requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.1368(g) shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (7) When the term ``process wastewater'' is referred to in 
Secs. 63.132 through 63.147 of subpart G of this part, the term 
``wastewater'' as defined in Sec. 63.1361 shall apply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (8) When the term ``Group 1 wastewater stream'' is used in 
Secs. 63.132 through 63.147 of subpart G of this part, the definition of 
the term ``Group 1 wastewater stream'' in Sec. 63.1361 shall apply for 
both new sources and existing sources for the purposes of this subpart.
    (9) The requirements in Secs. 63.132 through 63.147 for compounds 
listed on Table 8 of subpart G of this part shall not apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (10) When the total load of Table 9 compounds in the sum of all 
process wastewater from PAI process units at a new affected source is 
2,100 Mg/yr (2,300 tons/yr) or more, the owner or operator shall reduce, 
by removal or destruction, the mass flow rate of all compounds in Table 
9 of subpart G of this part in all wastewater (process and maintenance 
wastewater) by 99 percent or more. Alternatively, the owner or operator 
may treat the wastewater in a unit identified in and complying with 
Sec. 63.138(h) of subpart G of this part. The removal/destruction 
efficiency shall be determined by the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.145(c) of subpart G of this part, for noncombustion processes, 
or Sec. 63.145(d) of subpart G of this part, for combustion processes.
    (11) The compliance date for the affected source subject to the 
provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1364.
    (12) The option in Sec. 63.139 of subpart G of this part to reduce 
emissions from a control device to an outlet HAP concentration of 20 
ppmv shall not apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (13) The requirement to correct outlet concentrations from 
combustion devices to 3 percent oxygen in Sec. 63.139(c)(1)(ii) of 
subpart H of this part shall apply only if supplemental gases are 
combined with affected vent streams. If emissions are controlled with a 
vapor recovery system as specified in Sec. 63.139(c)(2) of subpart H of 
this part, the owner or operator must correct for supplemental gases as 
specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(7)(ii).
    (14) If wastewater is sent offsite for biological treatment, the 
waste management units up to the activated sludge unit must be covered, 
or the owner or operator must demonstrate that less than 5 percent of 
the total HAP on list 1 in Sec. 63.145(h) of subpart H

[[Page 310]]

of this part is emitted from these units.
    (e) Bag dumps and product dryers. (1) The owner or operator shall 
reduce particulate matter emissions to a concentration not to exceed 
0.01 gr/dscf from product dryers that dry a PAI or integral intermediate 
that is a HAP.
    (2) The owner or operator shall reduce particulate matter emissions 
to a concentration not to exceed 0.01 gr/dscf from bag dumps that 
introduce to a PAI process unit a feedstock that is a solid material and 
a HAP, excluding bag dumps where the feedstock contains HAP only as 
impurities.
    (3) Gaseous HAP emissions from product dryers and bag dumps shall be 
controlled in accordance with the provisions for process vent emissions 
in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (f) Heat exchange systems. Unless one or more of the conditions 
specified in Sec. 63.104(a)(1) through (6) of subpart F of this part are 
met, an owner or operator shall monitor each heat exchange system that 
is used to cool process equipment in PAI process units that are part of 
an affected source as defined in Sec. 63.1360(a) according to the 
provisions in either Sec. 63.104(b) or (c) of subpart F of this part. 
When the term ``chemical manufacturing process unit'' is used in 
Sec. 63.104(c) of subpart F of this part, the term ``PAI process unit'' 
shall apply for the purposes of this subpart. Whenever a leak is 
detected, the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements in 
Sec. 63.104(d) of subpart F of this part. Delay of repair of heat 
exchange systems for which leaks have been detected is allowed in 
accordance with the provisions of Sec. 63.104(e) of subpart F of this 
part.
    (g) Pollution prevention alternative. Except as provided in 
paragraph (g)(1) of this section, for a process that has an initial 
startup before November 10, 1997, an owner or operator may choose to 
meet the pollution prevention alternative requirement specified in 
either paragraph (g)(2) or (3) of this section for any PAI process unit, 
in lieu of the requirements specified in paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and 
(e) of this section and in Sec. 63.1363. Compliance with the 
requirements of paragraphs (g)(2) and (3) of this section shall be 
demonstrated through the procedures in Secs. 63.1365(g) and 63.1366(f).
    (1) A HAP must be controlled according to the requirements of 
paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e) of this section and Sec. 63.1363 if it 
is generated in the PAI process unit or an associated control device and 
it is not part of the production-indexed HAP consumption factor (HAP 
factor).
    (2) The HAP factor shall be reduced by at least 85 percent from a 3-
year average baseline beginning no earlier than the 1987 through 1989 
calendar years. Alternatively, for a process that has been operating for 
less than 3 years but more than 1 year, the baseline factor may be 
calculated for the time period from startup of the process until the 
present. For any reduction in the HAP factor achieved by reducing a HAP 
that is also a VOC, an equivalent reduction in the production-indexed 
VOC consumption factor (VOC factor) is also required (the equivalence is 
determined on a mass basis, not a percentage basis). For any reduction 
in the HAP factor that is achieved by reducing a HAP that is not a VOC, 
the VOC factor may not be increased.
    (3) As an alternative to the provisions in paragraph (g)(2) of this 
section, the owner or operator may combine pollution prevention with 
emissions control as specified in paragraphs (g)(3)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) The HAP factor shall be reduced as specified in paragraph (g)(2) 
of this section except that a reduction of at least 50 percent shall 
apply for the purposes of this paragraph.
    (ii) The total annual HAP emissions from the PAI process unit shall 
be reduced by an amount that, when divided by the annual production rate 
and added to the reduction of the HAP factor yields a value of at least 
85 percent of the baseline HAP factor. The total annual VOC emissions 
from the process unit must be reduced by an amount equivalent to the 
reduction in HAP emissions for each HAP that is a VOC (the equivalence 
is determined on a mass basis). For HAP emissions reductions that are 
achieved by reducing a HAP that is not a VOC, the total annual VOC 
emissions may not be increased. The reduction in HAP air

[[Page 311]]

emissions must be achieved using one of the following control devices:
    (A) Combustion control devices such as incinerators, flares, or 
process heaters.
    (B) Control devices such as condensers and carbon adsorbers whose 
recovered product is destroyed or shipped offsite for destruction.
    (C) Any control device that does not ultimately allow for recycling 
of material back to the PAI process unit.
    (D) Any control device for which the owner or operator can 
demonstrate that the use of the device in controlling HAP emissions will 
have no effect on the HAP factor for the PAI process unit.
    (h) Emissions averaging provisions. Except as provided in paragraphs 
(h)(1) through (7) of this section, the owner or operator of an existing 
affected facility may choose to comply with the emission standards in 
paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section by using emissions 
averaging procedures specified in Sec. 63.1365(h) for organic HAP 
emissions from any storage vessel, process, or waste management unit 
that is part of an affected source subject to this subpart.
    (1) A State may restrict the owner or operator of an existing source 
to use only the procedures in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this 
section to comply with the emission standards where State authorities 
prohibit averaging of HAP emissions.
    (2) Emission points that are controlled as specified in paragraphs 
(h)(2)(i) through (iii) may not be used to calculate emissions averaging 
credits, unless a nominal efficiency has been assigned according to the 
procedures in Sec. 63.150(i) of subpart G of this part. The nominal 
efficiency must exceed the percent reduction required by paragraphs (b) 
and (c) of this section for process vents and storage vessels, 
respectively, and exceed the percent reduction required in 
Sec. 63.138(e) or (f) of subpart G of this part for wastewater streams.
    (i) Group 1 storage vessels controlled with an internal floating 
roof meeting the specifications of Sec. 63.119(b) of subpart G of this 
part, an external floating roof meeting the specifications of 
Sec. 63.119(c) of subpart G of this part, or an external floating roof 
converted to an internal floating meeting the specifications of 
Sec. 63.119(d) of subpart G of this part.
    (ii) Emission points controlled with a flare.
    (iii) Wastewater controlled as specified in paragraphs 
(h)(2)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) With controls specified in Sec. 63.133 through Sec. 63.137 of 
subpart G of this part;
    (B) With a steam stripper meeting the specifications of 
Sec. 63.138(d) of subpart G of this part.
    (3) Process vents and storage vessels controlled with a control 
device to an outlet concentration of 20 ppmv and wastewater streams 
controlled in a treatment unit to an outlet concentration of 50 ppmw may 
not be used in any averaging group.
    (4) Maintenance wastewater streams and wastewater streams treated in 
biological treatment units may not be included in any averaging group.
    (5) Processes which have been permanently shut down and storage 
vessels permanently taken out of HAP service may not be included in any 
averaging group.
    (6) Emission points already controlled on or before November 15, 
1990 may not be used to generate emissions averaging credits, unless the 
level of control has been increased after November 15, 1990. In these 
cases, credit will be allowed only for the increase in control after 
November 15, 1990.
    (7) Emission points controlled to comply with a State or Federal 
rule other than this subpart may not be included in an emissions 
averaging group, unless the level of control has been increased after 
November 15, 1990, above what is required by the other State or Federal 
rule. Only the control above what is required by the other State or 
Federal rule will be credited. However, if an emission point has been 
used to generate emissions averaging credit in an approved emissions 
average, and the point is subsequently made subject to a State or 
Federal rule other than this subpart, the point can continue to generate 
emissions averaging credit for the purpose of complying with the 
previously approved average.

[[Page 312]]

    (i) Opening of a safety device. Opening of a safety device, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1361, is allowed at any time conditions require it to 
avoid unsafe conditions.
    (j) Closed-vent systems. The owner or operator of a closed-vent 
system that contains bypass lines that could divert a vent stream away 
from a control device used to comply with the requirements in paragraphs 
(b) through (d) of this section shall comply with the requirements of 
Table 3 of this subpart and paragraph (j)(1) or (2) of this section. 
Equipment such as low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, 
open-ended valves or lines, rupture disks and pressure relief valves 
needed for safety purposes are not subject to this paragraph.
    (1) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a flow indicator that 
determines whether vent stream flow is present at least once every 15 
minutes. Records shall be maintained as specified in Sec. 63.1367(f)(1). 
The flow indicator shall be installed at the entrance to any bypass line 
that could divert the vent stream away from the control device to the 
atmosphere; or
    (2) Secure the bypass line valve in the closed position with a car 
seal or lock and key type configuration. A visual inspection of the seal 
or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every month to 
ensure that the valve is maintained in the closed position and the vent 
stream is not diverted through the bypass line. Records shall be 
maintained as specified in Sec. 63.1367(f)(2).
    (k) Control requirements for certain liquid streams in open systems 
within a PAI process unit. (1) The owner or operator shall comply with 
the provisions of Table 4 of this subpart, for each item of equipment 
meeting all the criteria specified in paragraphs (k)(2) through (4) of 
this section and either paragraph (k)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (2) The item of equipment is of a type identified in Table 4 of this 
subpart;
    (3) The item of equipment is part of a PAI process unit as defined 
in Sec. 63.1361;
    (4) The item of equipment is controlled less stringently than in 
Table 4 of this subpart, and the item of equipment is not otherwise 
exempt from controls by the provisions of this subpart or subpart A of 
this part;
    (5) The item of equipment:
    (i) Is a drain, drain hub, manhole, lift station, trench, pipe, or 
oil/water separator that conveys water with a total annual average 
concentration greater than or equal to 10,000 ppm by weight of compounds 
in Table 9 of subpart G of this part at any flowrate; or a total annual 
average concentration greater than or equal to 1,000 ppm by weight of 
compounds in Table 9 of subpart G of this part at an annual average flow 
rate greater than or equal to 10 liters per minute; or
    (ii) Is a tank that receives one or more streams that contain water 
with a total annual average concentration greater than or equal to 1,000 
ppm by weight of compounds in Table 9 of subpart G of this part at an 
annual average flowrate greater than or equal to 10 liters per minute. 
The owner or operator of the source shall determine the characteristics 
of the stream as specified in paragraphs (k)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this 
section.
    (A) The characteristics of the stream being received shall be 
determined at the inlet to the tank.
    (B) The characteristics shall be determined according to the 
procedures in Sec. 63.144(b) and (c) of subpart G of this part.
    (l) Exemption for RCRA treatment units. An owner or operator shall 
be exempt from the initial compliance demonstrations and monitoring 
provisions in Secs. 63.1365 and 63.1366 and the associated recordkeeping 
and reporting requirements in Secs. 63.1367 and 63.1368 for emissions 
from process vents, storage vessels, and waste management units that are 
discharged to the following devices:
    (1) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which the 
owner or operator:
    (i) Has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and 
complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; or
    (ii) Has certified compliance with the interim status requirements 
of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (2) A hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator 
has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part

[[Page 313]]

270 and complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O, or 
has certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR 
part 265, subpart O.



Sec. 63.1363  Standards for equipment leaks.

    (a) General equipment leak requirements. (1) The provisions of this 
section apply to ``equipment'' as defined in Sec. 63.1361 and any 
closed-vent systems and control devices required by this subpart.
    (2) Consistency with other regulations. After the compliance date 
for a process, equipment subject to both this section and either of the 
following will be required to comply only with the provisions of this 
subpart:
    (i) 40 CFR part 60.
    (ii) 40 CFR part 61.
    (3) [Reserved]
    (4) The provisions in Sec. 63.1(a)(3) of subpart A of this part do 
not alter the provisions in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (5) Lines and equipment not containing process fluids are not 
subject to the provisions of this section. Utilities, and other 
nonprocess lines, such as heating and cooling systems which do not 
combine their materials with those in the processes they serve, are not 
considered to be part of a process.
    (6) The provisions of this section do not apply to bench-scale 
processes, regardless of whether the processes are located at the same 
plant site as a process subject to the provisions of this subpart MMM.
    (7) Each piece of equipment to which this section applies shall be 
identified such that it can be distinguished readily from equipment that 
is not subject to this section. Identification of the equipment does not 
require physical tagging of the equipment. For example, the equipment 
may be identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, or by 
designation of process boundaries by some form of weatherproof 
identification. If changes are made to the affected source subject to 
the leak detection requirements, equipment identification for each type 
of component shall be updated, if needed, within 15 calendar days of the 
end of each monitoring period for that component.
    (8) Equipment that is in vacuum service is excluded from the 
requirements of this section.
    (9) Equipment that is in organic HAP service, but is in such service 
less than 300 hours per calendar year, is excluded from the requirements 
of this section if it is identified as required in paragraph (g)(9) of 
this section.
    (10) When each leak is detected by visual, audible, or olfactory 
means, or by monitoring as described in Sec. 63.180(b) or (c) of subpart 
H of this part, the following requirements apply:
    (i) A weatherproof and readily visible identification, marked with 
the equipment identification number, shall be attached to the leaking 
equipment.
    (ii) The identification on a valve or connector in light liquid or 
gas/vapor service may be removed after it has been monitored as 
specified in paragraph (e)(7)(iii) of this section and Sec. 63.174(e) of 
subpart H of this part, and no leak has been detected during the follow-
up monitoring.
    (iii) The identification on equipment, except on a valve or 
connector in light liquid or gas/vapor service, may be removed after it 
has been repaired.
    (b) References. The owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions of subpart H of this part as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) 
through (3) of this section. When the term ``process unit'' is used in 
subpart H of this part, it shall mean any group of processes for the 
purposes of this subpart. Groups of processes as used in this subpart 
may be any individual process or combination of processes.
    (1) Sections 63.160, 63.161, 63.162, 63.163, 63.167, 63.168, 63.170, 
63.173, 63.175, 63.176, 63.181, and 63.182 of subpart H of this part 
shall not apply for the purposes of this subpart MMM. The owner or 
operator shall comply with the provisions specified in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section.
    (i) Sections 63.160 and 63.162 of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply, instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (a) of 
this section;
    (ii) Section 63.161 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with Sec. 63.1361;

[[Page 314]]

    (iii) Sections 63.163 and 63.173 of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply, instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (c) of 
this section;
    (iv) Section 63.167 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (d) of this 
section;
    (v) Section 63.168 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (e) of this 
section;
    (vi) Section 63.170 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with Sec. 63.1362(b);
    (vii) Section 63.181 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (g) of this 
section; and
    (viii) Section 63.182 of subpart H of this part shall not apply, 
instead the owner or operator shall comply with paragraph (h) of this 
section.
    (2) The owner or operator shall comply with Secs. 63.164, 63.165, 
63.166, 63.169, 63.177, and 63.179 of subpart H of this part in their 
entirety, except that when these sections reference other sections of 
subpart H of this part, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
revised sections as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (3) of this 
section. Section 63.164 of subpart H of this part applies to 
compressors. Section 63.165 of subpart H of this part applies to 
pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service. Section 63.166 of subpart 
H of this part applies to sampling connection systems. Section 63.169 of 
subpart H of this part applies to: pumps, valves, connectors, and 
agitators in heavy liquid service; instrumentation systems; and pressure 
relief devices in liquid service. Section 63.177 of subpart H of this 
subpart applies to general alternative means of emission limitation. 
Section 63.179 of subpart H of this part applies to alternative means of 
emission limitation for enclosed-vented process units.
    (3) The owner or operator shall comply with Secs. 63.171, 63.172, 
63.174, 63.178, and 63.180 of subpart H of this part with the 
differences specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (v) of this 
section.
    (i) Section 63.171, Delay of repair, shall apply except 
Sec. 63.171(a) shall not apply. Delay of repair of equipment for which 
leaks have been detected is allowed if one of the following conditions 
exist:
    (A) The repair is technically infeasible without a process shutdown. 
Repair of this equipment shall occur by the end of the next scheduled 
process shutdown.
    (B) The owner or operator determines that repair personnel would be 
exposed to an immediate danger if attempting to repair without a process 
shutdown. Repair of this equipment shall occur by the end of the next 
scheduled process shutdown.
    (ii) Section 63.172, Closed-vent systems and control devices, shall 
apply for closed-vent systems used to comply with this section, and for 
control devices used to comply with this section only, except:
    (A) Section 63.172(k) and (l) shall not apply. The owner or operator 
shall instead comply with paragraph (f) of this section.
    (B) Owners or operators may, instead of complying with the 
provisions of Sec. 63.172(f), design a closed-vent system to operate at 
a pressure below atmospheric pressure. The system shall be equipped with 
at least one pressure gauge or other pressure measurement device that 
can be read from a readily accessible location to verify that negative 
pressure is being maintained in the closed-vent system when the 
associated control device is operating.
    (iii) Section 63.174, Connectors, shall apply except:
    (A) Section 63.174(f) and (g) shall not apply. Instead of 
Sec. 63.174(f) and (g), the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (B) Days that the connectors are not in organic HAP service shall 
not be considered part of the 3-month period in Sec. 63.174(e).
    (C) Section 63.174(b)(3)(ii) of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply. Instead, if the percent leaking connectors in the group of 
process units was less than 0.5 percent, but equal to or greater than 
0.25 percent, during the last required monitoring period, monitoring 
shall be performed once every 4 years. An owner or operator may comply 
with the requirements of this paragraph by monitoring at least 40 
percent of the connectors in the first 2 years and the

[[Page 315]]

remainder of the connectors within the next 2 years. The percent leaking 
connectors will be calculated for the total of all monitoring performed 
during the 4-year period.
    (D) Section 63.174(b)(3)(iv) of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply. Instead, the owner or operator shall increase the monitoring 
frequency to once every 2 years for the next monitoring period if 
leaking connectors comprise at least 0.5 percent but less than 1.0 
percent of the connectors monitored within the 4 years specified in 
paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section, or the first 4 years specified 
in Sec. 63.174(b)(3)(iii) of subpart H of this part. At the end of that 
2-year monitoring period, the owner or operator shall monitor once per 
year while the percent leaking connectors is greater than or equal to 
0.5 percent; if the percent leaking connectors is less than 0.5 percent, 
the owner or operator may return to monitoring once every 4 years or may 
monitor in accordance with Sec. 63.174(b)(3)(iii) of subpart H of this 
part, if appropriate.
    (E) Section 63.174(b)(3)(v) of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply. Instead, if an owner or operator complying with the requirements 
of paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C) and (D) of this section or 
Sec. 63.174(b)(3)(iii) of subpart H of this part for a group of process 
units determines that 1 percent or greater of the connectors are 
leaking, the owner or operator shall increase the monitoring frequency 
to one time per year. The owner or operator may again elect to use the 
provisions of paragraphs (b)(3)(iii)(C) or (D) of this section after a 
monitoring period in which less than 0.5 percent of the connectors are 
determined to be leaking.
    (F) Section 63.174(b)(3)(iii) of subpart H of this part shall not 
apply. Instead, monitoring shall be required once every 8 years, if the 
percent leaking connectors in the group of process units was less than 
0.25 percent during the last required monitoring period. An owner or 
operator shall monitor at least 50 percent of the connectors in the 
first 4 years and the remainder of the connectors within the next 4 
years. If the percent leaking connectors in the first 4 years is equal 
to or greater than 0.35 percent, the monitoring program shall revert at 
that time to the appropriate monitoring frequency specified in 
paragraphs (b)(3)(iii)(C), (D), or (E) of this section.
    (iv) Section 63.178 of subpart H of this part, Alternative means of 
emission limitation: Batch processes, shall apply except that 
Sec. 63.178(b) of subpart H of this part, requirements for pressure 
testing, shall apply to all processes, not just batch processes;
    (v) Section 63.180 of subpart H of this part, Test methods and 
procedures, shall apply except Sec. 63.180(b)(4)(ii)(A) through (C) of 
subpart H of this part shall not apply. Calibration gases shall be a 
mixture of methane and air at a concentration of approximately, but less 
than, 10,000 parts per million methane for agitators, 2,000 parts per 
million for pumps, and 500 parts per million for all other equipment, 
except as provided in Sec. 63.180(b)(4)(iii) of subpart H of this part.
    (c) standards for pumps in light liquid service and agitators in 
gas/vapor service and in light liquid service. (1) The provisions of 
this section apply to each pump that is in light liquid service, and to 
each agitator in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service.
    (2)(i) Monitoring. Each pump and agitator subject to this section 
shall be monitored quarterly to detect leaks by the method specified in 
Sec. 63.180(b) of subpart H of this part, except as provided in 
Sec. 63.177 of subpart H of this part, paragraph (f) of this section, 
and paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(9) of this section.
    (ii) Leak definition. The instrument reading, as determined by the 
method as specified in Sec. 63.180(b) of subpart H of this part, that 
defines a leak is:
    (A) For agitators, an instrument reading of 10,000 parts per million 
or greater.
    (B) For pumps, an instrument reading of 2,000 parts per million or 
greater.
    (iii) Visual inspections. Each pump and agitator shall be checked by 
visual inspection each calendar week for indications of liquids dripping 
from the pump or agitator seal. If there are indications of liquids 
dripping from the seal, a leak is detected.
    (3) Repair provisions. (i) When a leak is detected, it shall be 
repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15

[[Page 316]]

calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in paragraph 
(b)(3)(i) of this section.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after the leak is detected. First attempts at repair 
include, but are not limited to, the following practices where 
practicable:
    (A) Tightening of packing gland nuts.
    (B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and 
temperature.
    (4) Calculation of percent leakers. (i) The owner or operator shall 
decide no later than the end of the first monitoring period what groups 
of processes will be developed. Once the owner or operator has decided, 
all subsequent percent calculations shall be made on the same basis.
    (ii) If, calculated on a 1 year rolling average, the greater of 
either 10 percent or three of the pumps in a group of processes leak, 
the owner or operator shall monitor each pump once per month.
    (iii) The number of pumps in a group of processes shall be the sum 
of all the pumps in organic HAP service, except that pumps found leaking 
in a continuous process within 1 quarter after startup of the pump shall 
not count in the percent leaking pumps calculation for that one 
monitoring period only.
    (iv) Percent leaking pumps shall be determined using Equation 3 of 
this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.002

where:

%PL = percent leaking pumps
PL = number of pumps found leaking as determined through 
          quarterly monitoring as required in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and 
          (ii) of this section.
PT = total pumps in organic HAP service, including those 
          meeting the criteria in paragraphs (c)(5) and (6) of this 
          section
PS = number of pumps in a continuous process leaking within 1 
          quarter of startup during the current monitoring period

    (5) Exemptions. Each pump or agitator equipped with a dual 
mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system is exempt 
from the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4)(iii) of this 
section, provided the following requirements are met:
    (i) Each dual mechanical seal system is:
    (A) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is at all 
times greater than the pump/agitator stuffing box pressure; or
    (B) Equipped with a barrier fluid degassing reservoir that is 
connected by a closed-vent system to a control device that complies with 
the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section; or
    (C) Equipped with a closed-loop system that purges the barrier fluid 
into a process stream.
    (ii) The barrier fluid is not in light liquid service.
    (iii) Each barrier fluid system is equipped with a sensor that will 
detect failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
    (iv) Each pump/agitator is checked by visual inspection each 
calendar week for indications of liquids dripping from the pump/agitator 
seal.
    (A) If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump/
agitator seal at the time of the weekly inspection, the pump/agitator 
shall be monitored as specified in Sec. 63.180(b) of subpart H of this 
part to determine if there is a leak of organic HAP in the barrier 
fluid.
    (B) If an instrument reading of 2,000 parts per million or greater 
is measured for pumps, or 10,000 parts per million or greater is 
measured for agitators, a leak is detected.
    (v) Each sensor as described in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this 
section is observed daily or is equipped with an alarm unless the pump 
is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site.
    (vi)(A) The owner or operator determines, based on design 
considerations and operating experience, criteria applicable to the 
presence and frequency of drips and to the sensor that indicate

[[Page 317]]

failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
    (B) If indications of liquids dripping from the pump/agitator seal 
exceed the criteria established in paragraph (c)(5)(vi)(A) of this 
section, or if, based on the criteria established in paragraph 
(c)(5)(vi)(A) of this section, the sensor indicates failure of the seal 
system, the barrier fluid system, or both, a leak is detected.
    (C) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as 
practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, 
except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
    (D) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar 
days after each leak is detected.
    (6) Any pump/agitator that is designed with no externally actuated 
shaft penetrating the pump/agitator housing is exempt from the 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section, except 
for the requirements of paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section and, for 
pumps, paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section.
    (7) Any pump/agitator equipped with a closed-vent system capable of 
capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals back to 
the process or to a control device that complies with the requirements 
of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section is exempt from the requirements 
of paragraphs (c)(2) through (5) of this section.
    (8) Any pump/agitator that is located within the boundary of an 
unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection 
requirement of paragraphs (c)(2)(iii) and (c)(5)(iv) of this section, 
and the daily requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section, 
provided that each pump/agitator is visually inspected as often as 
practicable and at least monthly.
    (9) If more than 90 percent of the pumps in a group of processes 
meet the criteria in either paragraph (c)(5) or (6) of this section, the 
process is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this 
section.
    (d) Standards: open-ended valves or lines. (1)(i) Each open-ended 
valve or line shall be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a 
second valve, except as provided in Sec. 63.177 of subpart H of this 
part and paragraphs (d)(4) through (6) of this section.
    (ii) The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve shall seal the 
open end at all times except during operations requiring process fluid 
flow through the open-ended valve or line, or during maintenance or 
repair. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve shall be in place 
within 1 hour of cessation of operations requiring process fluid flow 
through the open-ended valve or line, or within 1 hour of cessation of 
maintenance or repair.
    (2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve shall 
be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is 
closed before the second valve is closed.
    (3) When a double block and bleed system is being used, the bleed 
valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the 
line between the block valves but shall comply with paragraph (d)(1) of 
this section at all other times.
    (4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which 
are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this 
section.
    (5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would 
autocatalytically polymerize are exempt from the requirements of 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (6) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which could 
cause an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if 
capped or equipped with a double block and bleed system as specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section are exempt from the 
requirements of paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (e) Standards: valves in gas/vapor service and in light liquid 
service. (1) The provisions of this section apply to valves that are 
either in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service.
    (2) For existing and new affected sources, all valves subject to 
this section shall be monitored, except as provided in paragraph (f) of 
this section and in Sec. 63.177 of subpart H of this part, by no later 
than 1 year after the compliance date.

[[Page 318]]

    (3) Monitoring. The owner or operator of a source subject to this 
section shall monitor all valves, except as provided in paragraph (f) of 
this section and in Sec. 63.177 of subpart H of this part, at the 
intervals specified in paragraph (e)(4) of this section and shall comply 
with all other provisions of this section, except as provided in 
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section and Secs. 63.178 and 63.179 of 
subpart H of this part.
    (i) The valves shall be monitored to detect leaks by the method 
specified in Sec. 63.180(b) of subpart H of this part.
    (ii) An instrument reading of 500 parts per million or greater 
defines a leak.
    (4) Subsequent monitoring frequencies. After conducting the initial 
survey required in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall monitor valves for leaks at the intervals specified 
below:
    (i) For a group of processes with 2 percent or greater leaking 
valves, calculated according to paragraph (e)(6) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall monitor each valve once per month, except as 
specified in paragraph (e)(9) of this section.
    (ii) For a group of processes with less than 2 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator shall monitor each valve once each 
quarter, except as provided in paragraphs (e)(4)(iii) through (v) of 
this section.
    (iii) For a group of processes with less than 1 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
2 quarters.
    (iv) For a group of processes with less than 0.5 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
4 quarters.
    (v) For a group of processes with less than 0.25 percent leaking 
valves, the owner or operator may elect to monitor each valve once every 
2 years.
    (5) Calculation of percent leakers. For a group of processes to 
which this subpart applies, the owner or operator may choose to 
subdivide the valves in the applicable group of processes and apply the 
provisions of paragraph (e)(4) of this section to each subgroup. If the 
owner or operator elects to subdivide the valves in the applicable group 
of processes, then the provisions of paragraphs (e)(5)(i) through (viii) 
of this section apply.
    (i) The overall performance of total valves in the applicable group 
of processes must be less than 2 percent leaking valves, as detected 
according to paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section and as 
calculated according to paragraphs (e)(6)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (ii) The initial assignment or subsequent reassignment of valves to 
subgroups shall be governed by the provisions of paragraphs (e)(5)(ii) 
(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) The owner or operator shall determine which valves are assigned 
to each subgroup. Valves with less than 1 year of monitoring data or 
valves not monitored within the last 12 months must be placed initially 
into the most frequently monitored subgroup until at least 1 year of 
monitoring data have been obtained.
    (B) Any valve or group of valves can be reassigned from a less 
frequently monitored subgroup to a more frequently monitored subgroup 
provided that the valves to be reassigned were monitored during the most 
recent monitoring period for the less frequently monitored subgroup. The 
monitoring results must be included with the less frequently monitored 
subgroup's monitoring event and associated next percent leaking valves 
calculation for that group.
    (C) Any valve or group of valves can be reassigned from a more 
frequently monitored subgroup to a less frequently monitored subgroup 
provided that the valves to be reassigned have not leaked for the period 
of the less frequently monitored subgroup (e.g., for the last 12 months, 
if the valve or group of valves is to be reassigned to a subgroup being 
monitored annually). Nonrepairable valves may not be reassigned to a 
less frequently monitored subgroup.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall determine every 6 months if the 
overall performance of total valves in the applicable group of processes 
is less than 2 percent leaking valves and so indicate the performance in 
the next Periodic report. If the overall performance of total valves in 
the applicable group of processes is 2 percent leaking valves

[[Page 319]]

or greater, the owner or operator shall revert to the program required 
in paragraphs (e)(2) through (4) of this section. The overall 
performance of total valves in the applicable group of processes shall 
be calculated as a weighted average of the percent leaking valves of 
each subgroup according to Equation 4 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.003

where:

%VLO = overall performance of total valves in the applicable 
          group of processes
%VLi = percent leaking valves in subgroup i, most recent 
          value calculated according to the procedures in paragraphs 
          (e)(6)(ii) and (iii) of this section
Vi = number of valves in subgroup i
n = number of subgroups

    (iv) Records. In addition to records required by paragraph (g) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall maintain records specified in 
paragraphs (e)(5)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Which valves are assigned to each subgroup,
    (B) Monitoring results and calculations made for each subgroup for 
each monitoring period,
    (C) Which valves are reassigned and when they were reassigned, and
    (D) The results of the semiannual overall performance calculation 
required in paragraph (e)(5)(iii) of this section.
    (v) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator no later 
than 30 days prior to the beginning of the next monitoring period of the 
decision to subgroup valves. The notification shall identify the 
participating processes and the valves assigned to each subgroup.
    (vi) Semiannual reports. In addition to the information required by 
paragraph (h)(3) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit in 
the Periodic reports the information specified in paragraphs 
(e)(5)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) Valve reassignments occurring during the reporting period, and
    (B) Results of the semiannual overall performance calculation 
required by paragraph (e)(5)(iii) of this section.
    (vii) To determine the monitoring frequency for each subgroup, the 
calculation procedures of paragraph (e)(6)(iii) of this section shall be 
used.
    (viii) Except for the overall performance calculations required by 
paragraphs (e)(5)(i) and (iii) of this section, each subgroup shall be 
treated as if it were a process for the purposes of applying the 
provisions of this section.
    (6)(i) The owner or operator shall decide no later than the 
implementation date of this subpart or upon revision of an operating 
permit how to group the processes. Once the owner or operator has 
decided, all subsequent percentage calculations shall be made on the 
same basis.
    (ii) Percent leaking valves for each group of processes or subgroup 
shall be determined using Equation 5 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.004

Where:

%VL = percent leaking valves
VL = number of valves found leaking excluding nonrepairables 
          as provided in paragraph (e)(6)(iv)(A) of this section
VT = total valves monitored, in a monitoring period excluding 
          valves monitored as required by paragraph (e)(7)(iii) of this 
          section

    (iii) When determining monitoring frequency for each group of 
processes or subgroup subject to monthly, quarterly, or semiannual 
monitoring frequencies, the percent leaking valves shall be the 
arithmetic average of the percent leaking valves from the last two 
monitoring periods. When determining monitoring frequency for each group 
of processes or subgroup subject to annual or biennial (once every 2 
years) monitoring frequencies, the percent leaking valves shall be the 
arithmetic average of the percent leaking valves from the last three 
monitoring periods.
    (iv)(A) Nonrepairable valves shall be included in the calculation of 
percent leaking valves the first time the valve is identified as leaking 
and nonrepairable and as required to comply with paragraph (e)(6)(iv)(B) 
of this section.

[[Page 320]]

Otherwise, a number of nonrepairable valves (identified and included in 
the percent leaking calculation in a previous period) up to a maximum of 
1 percent of the total number of valves in organic HAP service at a 
process may be excluded from calculation of percent leaking valves for 
subsequent monitoring periods.
    (B) If the number of nonrepairable valves exceeds 1 percent of the 
total number of valves in organic HAP service at a process, the number 
of nonrepairable valves exceeding 1 percent of the total number of 
valves in organic HAP service shall be included in the calculation of 
percent leaking valves.
    (7) Repair provisions. (i) When a leak is detected, it shall be 
repaired as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days 
after the leak is detected, except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of 
this section.
    (ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 
calendar days after each leak is detected.
    (iii) When a leak is repaired, the valve shall be monitored at least 
once within the first 3 months after its repair. Days that the valve is 
not in organic HAP service shall not be considered part of this 3-month 
period.
    (8) First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the 
following practices where practicable:
    (i) Tightening of bonnet bolts,
    (ii) Replacement of bonnet bolts,
    (iii) Tightening of packing gland nuts, and
    (iv) Injection of lubricant into lubricated packing.
    (9) Any equipment located at a plant site with fewer than 250 valves 
in organic HAP service in the affected source is exempt from the 
requirements for monthly monitoring specified in paragraph (e)(4)(i) of 
this section. Instead, the owner or operator shall monitor each valve in 
organic HAP service for leaks once each quarter, or comply with 
paragraphs (e)(4)(iii) or (iv) of this section.
    (f) Unsafe to monitor, difficult to monitor, and inaccessible 
equipment. (1) Equipment that is designated as unsafe to monitor, 
difficult to monitor, or inaccessible is exempt from the requirements as 
specified in paragraphs (f)(1) (i) through (iv) of this section provided 
the owner or operator meets the requirements specified in paragraph (f) 
(2), (3), or (4) of this section, as applicable. Ceramic or ceramic-
lined connectors are subject to the same requirements as inaccessible 
connectors.
    (i) For pumps and agitators, paragraphs (c) (2), (3), and (4) of 
this section do not apply.
    (ii) For valves, paragraphs (e)(2) through (7) of this section do 
not apply.
    (iii) For closed-vent systems, Sec. 63.172(f)(1), (f)(2), and (g) of 
subpart H of this part do not apply.
    (iv) For connectors, Sec. 63.174(b) through (e) of subpart H of this 
part do not apply.
    (2) Equipment that is unsafe to monitor. (i) Equipment may be 
designated as unsafe to monitor if the owner or operator determines that 
monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a 
consequence of complying with the monitoring requirements identified in 
paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (ii) The owner or operator of equipment that is designated as 
unsafe-to-monitor must have a written plan that requires monitoring of 
the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, 
but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise 
applicable.
    (3) Equipment that is difficult to monitor. (i) Equipment may be 
designated as difficult to monitor if the owner or operator determines 
that the equipment cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring 
personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface or the equipment is 
not accessible at anytime in a safe manner;
    (ii) At an existing source, any equipment within a group of 
processes that meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section 
may be designated as difficult to monitor. At a new affected source, an 
owner or operator may designate no more than 3 percent of each type of 
equipment as difficult to monitor.
    (iii) The owner or operator of equipment designated as difficult to 
monitor must follow a written plan that requires monitoring of the 
equipment at least once per calendar year.

[[Page 321]]

    (4) Inaccessible equipment and ceramic or ceramic-lined connectors. 
(i) A connector, agitator, or valve may be designated as inaccessible if 
it is:
    (A) Buried;
    (B) Insulated in a manner that prevents access to the equipment by a 
monitor probe;
    (C) Obstructed by equipment or piping that prevents access to the 
equipment by a monitor probe;
    (D) Unable to be reached from a wheeled scissor-lift or hydraulic-
type scaffold which would allow access to equipment up to 7.6 meters 
above the ground; or
    (E) Not able to be accessed at any time in a safe manner to perform 
monitoring. Unsafe access includes, but is not limited to, the use of a 
wheeled scissor-lift on unstable or uneven terrain, the use of a 
motorized man-lift basket in areas where an ignition potential exists, 
or access would require near proximity to hazards such as electrical 
lines, or would risk damage to equipment.
    (ii) At an existing source, any connector, agitator, or valve that 
meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section may be 
designated as inaccessible. At a new affected source, an owner or 
operator may designate no more than 3 percent of each type of equipment 
as inaccessible.
    (iii) If any inaccessible equipment or ceramic or ceramic-lined 
connector is observed by visual, audible, olfactory, or other means to 
be leaking, the leak shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no 
later than 15 calendar days after the leak is detected, except as 
provided in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
    (g) Recordkeeping requirements. (1) An owner or operator of more 
than one group of processes subject to the provisions of this section 
may comply with the recordkeeping requirements for the groups of 
processes in one recordkeeping system if the system identifies with each 
record the program being implemented (e.g., quarterly monitoring) for 
each type of equipment. All records and information required by this 
section shall be maintained in a manner that can be readily accessed at 
the plant site. This could include physically locating the records at 
the plant site or accessing the records from a central location by 
computer at the plant site.
    (2) General recordkeeping. Except as provided in paragraph (g)(5) of 
this section, the following information pertaining to all equipment 
subject to the requirements in this section shall be recorded:
    (i)(A) A list of identification numbers for equipment (except 
instrumentation systems) subject to the requirements of this section. 
Connectors, except those subject to paragraph (f) of this section, need 
not be individually identified if all connectors in a designated area or 
length of pipe subject to the provisions of this section are identified 
as a group, and the number of subject connectors is indicated. The list 
for each type of equipment shall be completed no later than the 
completion of the initial survey required for that component. The list 
of identification numbers shall be updated, if needed, to incorporate 
equipment changes within 15 calendar days of the completion of each 
monitoring survey for the type of equipment component monitored.
    (B) A schedule for monitoring connectors subject to the provisions 
of Sec. 63.174(a) of subpart H of this part and valves subject to the 
provisions of paragraph (e)(4) of this section.
    (C) Physical tagging of the equipment is not required to indicate 
that it is in organic HAP service. Equipment subject to the provisions 
of this section may be identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, 
or by other appropriate methods.
    (ii)(A) A list of identification numbers for equipment that the 
owner or operator elects to equip with a closed-vent system and control 
device, under the provisions of paragraph (c)(7) of this section or 
Secs. 63.164(h) or 63.165(c) of subpart H of this part.
    (B) A list of identification numbers for compressors that the owner 
or operator elects to designate as operating with an instrument reading 
of less than 500 parts per million above background, under the 
provisions of Sec. 63.164(i) of subpart H of this part.
    (iii)(A) A list of identification numbers for pressure relief 
devices subject to the provisions in Sec. 63.165(a) of subpart H of this 
part.

[[Page 322]]

    (B) A list of identification numbers for pressure relief devices 
equipped with rupture disks, under the provisions of Sec. 63.165(d) of 
subpart H of this part.
    (iv) Identification of instrumentation systems subject to the 
provisions of this section. Individual components in an instrumentation 
system need not be identified.
    (v) The following information shall be recorded for each dual 
mechanical seal system:
    (A) Design criteria required by paragraph (c)(5)(vi)(A) of this 
section and Sec. 63.164(e)(2) of subpart H of this part, and an 
explanation of the design criteria; and
    (B) Any changes to these criteria and the reasons for the changes.
    (vi) A list of equipment designated as unsafe to monitor, difficult 
to monitor, or inaccessible under paragraphs (f) or (b)(3)(i)(B) of this 
section and a copy of the plan for monitoring or inspecting this 
equipment.
    (vii) A list of connectors removed from and added to the process, as 
described in Sec. 63.174(i)(1) of subpart H of this part, and 
documentation of the integrity of the weld for any removed connectors, 
as required in Sec. 63.174(j) of subpart H of this part. This is not 
required unless the net credits for removed connectors is expected to be 
used.
    (viii) For batch processes that the owner or operator elects to 
monitor as provided under Sec. 63.178(c) of subpart H of this part, a 
list of equipment added to batch product processes since the last 
monitoring period required in Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(ii) and (iii) of subpart 
H of this part. This list must be completed for each type of equipment 
within 15 calendar days of the completion of the each monitoring survey 
for the type of equipment monitored.
    (3) Records of visual inspections. For visual inspections of 
equipment subject to the provisions of paragraphs (c)(2)(iii) and 
(c)(5)(iv) of this section, the owner or operator shall document that 
the inspection was conducted and the date of the inspection. The owner 
or operator shall maintain records as specified in paragraph (g)(4) of 
this section for leaking equipment identified in this inspection, except 
as provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this section. These records shall be 
retained for 5 years.
    (4) Monitoring records. When each leak is detected as specified in 
paragraphs (c) and (e) of this section and Secs. 63.164, 63.169, 63.172, 
and 63.174 of subpart H of this part, the owner or operator shall record 
the information specified in paragraphs (g)(4)(i) through (ix) of this 
section. All records shall be retained for 5 years, in accordance with 
the requirements of Sec. 63.10(b)(1) of subpart A of this part.
    (i) The instrument and the equipment identification number and the 
operator name, initials, or identification number.
    (ii) The date the leak was detected and the date of first attempt to 
repair the leak.
    (iii) The date of successful repair of the leak.
    (iv) If postrepair monitoring is required, maximum instrument 
reading measured by Method 21 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, after it is 
successfully repaired or determined to be nonrepairable.
    (v) ``Repair delayed'' and the reason for the delay if a leak is not 
repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the leak.
    (A) The owner or operator may develop a written procedure that 
identifies the conditions that justify a delay of repair. The written 
procedures may be included as part of the startup/shutdown/malfunction 
plan, required by Sec. 63.1367(a), for the source or may be part of a 
separate document that is maintained at the plant site. Reasons for 
delay of repair may be documented by citing the relevant sections of the 
written procedure.
    (B) If delay of repair was caused by depletion of stocked parts, 
there must be documentation that the spare parts were sufficiently 
stocked onsite before depletion and the reason for depletion.
    (vi) If repairs were delayed, dates of process shutdowns that occur 
while the equipment is unrepaired.
    (vii)(A) If the alternative in Sec. 63.174(c)(1)(ii) of subpart H of 
this part is not in use for the monitoring period, identification, 
either by list, location

[[Page 323]]

(area or grouping), or tagging of connectors disturbed since the last 
monitoring period required in Sec. 63.174(b) of subpart H of this part, 
as described in Sec. 63.174(c)(1) of subpart H of this part.
    (B) The date and results of follow-up monitoring as required in 
Sec. 63.174(c) of subpart H of this part. If identification of disturbed 
connectors is made by location, then all connectors within the 
designated location shall be monitored.
    (viii) The date and results of the monitoring required in 
Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(i) of subpart H of this part for equipment added to a 
batch process since the last monitoring period required in 
Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(ii) and (iii) of subpart H of this part. If no leaking 
equipment is found in this monitoring, the owner or operator shall 
record that the inspection was performed. Records of the actual 
monitoring results are not required.
    (ix) Copies of the periodic reports as specified in paragraph (h)(3) 
of this section, if records are not maintained on a computerized data 
base capable of generating summary reports from the records.
    (5) Records of pressure tests. The owner or operator who elects to 
pressure test a process equipment train and supply lines between storage 
and processing areas to demonstrate compliance with this section is 
exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (g)(2), (3), (4), and (6) of 
this section. Instead, the owner or operator shall maintain records of 
the following information:
    (i) The identification of each product, or product code, produced 
during the calendar year. It is not necessary to identify individual 
items of equipment in the process equipment train.
    (ii) Records demonstrating the proportion of the time during the 
calendar year the equipment is in use in the process that is subject to 
the provisions of this subpart. Examples of suitable documentation are 
records of time in use for individual pieces of equipment or average 
time in use for the process unit. These records are not required if the 
owner or operator does not adjust monitoring frequency by the time in 
use, as provided in Sec. 63.178(c)(3)(iii) of subpart H of this part.
    (iii) Physical tagging of the equipment to identify that it is in 
organic HAP service and subject to the provisions of this section is not 
required. Equipment in a process subject to the provisions of this 
section may be identified on a plant site plan, in log entries, or by 
other appropriate methods.
    (iv) The dates of each pressure test required in Sec. 63.178(b) of 
subpart H of this part, the test pressure, and the pressure drop 
observed during the test.
    (v) Records of any visible, audible, or olfactory evidence of fluid 
loss.
    (vi) When a process equipment train does not pass two consecutive 
pressure tests, the following information shall be recorded in a log and 
kept for 2 years:
    (A) The date of each pressure test and the date of each leak repair 
attempt.
    (B) Repair methods applied in each attempt to repair the leak.
    (C) The reason for the delay of repair.
    (D) The expected date for delivery of the replacement equipment and 
the actual date of delivery of the replacement equipment.
    (E) The date of successful repair.
    (6) Records of compressor and pressure relief valve compliance 
tests. The dates and results of each compliance test required for 
compressors subject to the provisions in Sec. 63.164(i) of subpart H of 
this part and the dates and results of the monitoring following a 
pressure release for each pressure relief device subject to the 
provisions in Sec. 63.165(a) and (b) of subpart H of this part. The 
results shall include:
    (i) The background level measured during each compliance test.
    (ii) The maximum instrument reading measured at each piece of 
equipment during each compliance test.
    (7) Records for closed-vent systems. The owner or operator shall 
maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (g)(7)(i) 
through (iii) of this section for closed-vent systems and control 
devices subject to the provisions of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this 
section. The records specified in paragraph (g)(7)(i) of this section 
shall be retained for the life of the equipment. The records specified 
in paragraphs (g)(7)(ii) and (iii) of this section shall be retained for 
5 years.

[[Page 324]]

    (i) The design specifications and performance demonstrations 
specified in paragraphs (g)(7)(i)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Detailed schematics, design specifications of the control 
device, and piping and instrumentation diagrams.
    (B) The dates and descriptions of any changes in the design 
specifications.
    (C) The flare design (i.e., steam assisted, air assisted, or 
nonassisted) and the results of the compliance demonstration required by 
Sec. 63.11(b) of subpart A of this part.
    (D) A description of the parameter or parameters monitored, as 
required in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section, to ensure that control 
devices are operated and maintained in conformance with their design and 
an explanation of why that parameter (or parameters) was selected for 
the monitoring.
    (ii) Records of operation of closed-vent systems and control 
devices.
    (A) Dates and durations when the closed-vent systems and control 
devices required in paragraph (c) of this section and Secs. 63.164 
through 63.166 of subpart H of this part are not operated as designed as 
indicated by the monitored parameters, including periods when a flare 
pilot light system does not have a flame.
    (B) Dates and durations during which the monitoring system or 
monitoring device is inoperative.
    (C) Dates and durations of startups and shutdowns of control devices 
required in paragraph (c) of this section and Secs. 63.164 through 
63.166 of subpart H of this part.
    (iii) Records of inspections of closed-vent systems subject to the 
provisions of Sec. 63.172 of subpart H of this part.
    (A) For each inspection conducted in accordance with the provisions 
of Sec. 63.172(f)(1) or (2) of subpart H of this part during which no 
leaks were detected, a record that the inspection was performed, the 
date of the inspection, and a statement that no leaks were detected.
    (B) For each inspection conducted in accordance with the provisions 
of Sec. 63.172(f)(1) or (f)(2) of subpart H of this part during which 
leaks were detected, the information specified in paragraph (g)(4) of 
this section shall be recorded.
    (8) Records for components in heavy liquid service. Information, 
data, and analysis used to determine that a piece of equipment or 
process is in heavy liquid service shall be recorded. Such a 
determination shall include an analysis or demonstration that the 
process fluids do not meet the criteria of ``in light liquid or gas/
vapor service.'' Examples of information that could document this 
include, but are not limited to, records of chemicals purchased for the 
process, analyses of process stream composition, engineering 
calculations, or process knowledge.
    (9) Records of exempt components. Identification, either by list, 
location (area or group), or other method of equipment in organic HAP 
service less than 300 hr/yr subject to the provisions of this section.
    (10) Records of alternative means of compliance determination. 
Owners and operators choosing to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.179 of subpart H of this part shall maintain the following 
records:
    (i) Identification of the process(es) and the organic HAP they 
handle.
    (ii) A schematic of the process, enclosure, and closed-vent system.
    (iii) A description of the system used to create a negative pressure 
in the enclosure to ensure that all emissions are routed to the control 
device.
    (h) Reporting Requirements. (1) Each owner or operator of a source 
subject to this section shall submit the reports listed in paragraphs 
(h)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) A Notification of Compliance Status report described in 
paragraph (h)(2) of this section, and
    (ii) Periodic reports described in paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
    (2) Notification of compliance status report. Each owner or operator 
of a source subject to this section shall submit the information 
specified in paragraphs (h)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report described in Sec. 63.1368(f). 
Section 63.9(j) of subpart A of this part shall not apply to the 
Notification of Compliance Status report.
    (i) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section for each group of 
processes subject to

[[Page 325]]

the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (g) of this section.
    (A) Identification of the group of processes.
    (B) Approximate number of each equipment type (e.g., valves, pumps) 
in organic HAP service, excluding equipment in vacuum service.
    (C) Method of compliance with the standard (for example, ``monthly 
leak detection and repair'' or ``equipped with dual mechanical seals'').
    (ii) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section for each process 
subject to the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section and 
Sec. 63.178(b) of subpart H of this part.
    (A) Products or product codes subject to the provisions of this 
section, and
    (B) Planned schedule for pressure testing when equipment is 
configured for production of products subject to the provisions of this 
section.
    (iii) The notification shall provide the information listed in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section for each process 
subject to the requirements in Sec. 63.179 of subpart H of this part.
    (A) Process identification.
    (B) A description of the system used to create a negative pressure 
in the enclosure and the control device used to comply with the 
requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (3) Periodic reports. The owner or operator of a source subject to 
this section shall submit Periodic reports.
    (i) A report containing the information in paragraphs (h)(3)(ii), 
(iii), and (iv) of this section shall be submitted semiannually. The 
first Periodic report shall be submitted no later than 240 days after 
the date the Notification of Compliance Status report is due and shall 
cover the 6-month period beginning on the date the Notification of 
Compliance Status report is due. Each subsequent Periodic report shall 
cover the 6-month period following the preceding period.
    (ii) For equipment complying with the provisions of paragraphs (b) 
through (g) of this section, the Periodic report shall contain the 
summary information listed in paragraphs (h)(3)(ii)(A) through (L) of 
this section for each monitoring period during the 6-month period.
    (A) The number of valves for which leaks were detected as described 
in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, the percent leakers, and the total 
number of valves monitored;
    (B) The number of valves for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in paragraph (e)(7) of this section, identifying the number of 
those that are determined nonrepairable;
    (C) The number of pumps and agitators for which leaks were detected 
as described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the percent leakers, 
and the total number of pumps and agitators monitored;
    (D) The number of pumps and agitators for which leaks were not 
repaired as required in paragraph (c)(3) of this section;
    (E) The number of compressors for which leaks were detected as 
described in Sec. 63.164(f) of subpart H of this part;
    (F) The number of compressors for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in Sec. 63.164(g) of subpart H of this part;
    (G) The number of connectors for which leaks were detected as 
described in Sec. 63.174(a) of subpart H of this part, the percent of 
connectors leaking, and the total number of connectors monitored;
    (H) The number of connectors for which leaks were not repaired as 
required in Sec. 63.174(d) of subpart H of this part, identifying the 
number of those that are determined nonrepairable;
    (I) The facts that explain any delay of repairs and, where 
appropriate, why a process shutdown was technically infeasible.
    (J) The results of all monitoring to show compliance with 
Secs. 63.164(i), 63.165(a), and 63.172(f) of subpart H of this part 
conducted within the semiannual reporting period.
    (K) If applicable, the initiation of a monthly monitoring program 
under either paragraph (c)(4)(ii) or paragraph (e)(4)(i)(A) of this 
section.
    (L) If applicable, notification of a change in connector monitoring 
alternatives as described in Sec. 63.174(c)(1) of subpart H of this 
part.
    (iii) For owners or operators electing to meet the requirements of 
Sec. 63.178(b)

[[Page 326]]

of subpart H of this part, the Periodic report shall include the 
information listed in paragraphs (h)(3)(iii) (A) through (E) of this 
section for each process.
    (A) Product process equipment train identification;
    (B) The number of pressure tests conducted;
    (C) The number of pressure tests where the equipment train failed 
either the retest or two consecutive pressure tests;
    (D) The facts that explain any delay of repairs; and
    (E) The results of all monitoring to determine compliance with 
Sec. 63.172(f) of subpart H of this part.
    (iv) Any change in the information submitted under paragraph (h)(2) 
of this section shall be provided in the next Periodic report.



Sec. 63.1364  Compliance dates.

    (a) Compliance dates for existing sources. (1) An owner or operator 
of an existing affected source must comply with the provisions of this 
subpart within 3 years after June 23, 1999.
    (2) Pursuant to section 112(i)(3)(B) of the CAA, an owner or 
operator of an existing source may request an extension of up to 1 
additional year to comply with the provisions of this subpart if the 
additional time is needed for the installation of controls.
    (i) For purposes of this subpart, a request for an extension shall 
be submitted no later than 120 days prior to the compliance date 
specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, except as provided in 
paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section. The dates specified in 
Sec. 63.6(i) of subpart A of this part for submittal of requests for 
extensions shall not apply to sources subject to this subpart.
    (ii) An owner or operator may submit a compliance extension request 
after the date specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section provided 
the need for the compliance extension arose after that date and before 
the otherwise applicable compliance date, and the need arose due to 
circumstances beyond reasonable control of the owner or operator. This 
request shall include the data described in Sec. 63.6(i)(8)(A), (B), and 
(D) of subpart A of this part.
    (b) Compliance dates for new and reconstructed sources. An owner or 
operator of a new or reconstructed affected source must comply with the 
provisions of this subpart on June 23, 1999 or upon startup, whichever 
is later.



Sec. 63.1365  Test methods and initial compliance procedures.

    (a) General. Except as specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this 
section, the procedures specified in paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (f), and 
(g) of this section are required to demonstrate initial compliance with 
Sec. 63.1362(b), (c), (d), (f), and (g), respectively. The provisions in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section apply to design evaluations that are 
used to demonstrate compliance with the standards for process vents and 
storage vessels. The provisions in paragraph (a)(2) of this section 
apply to performance tests that are specified in paragraphs (c), (d), 
and (e) of this section. The provisions in paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section describe initial compliance procedures for flares. The 
provisions in paragraph (a)(5) of this section are used to demonstrate 
initial compliance with the alternative standards specified in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) and (c)(4). The provisions in paragraph (a)(6) of 
this section are used to comply with the outlet concentration 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(iv)(A), (b)(3)(ii), 
(b)(4)(ii)(A), (b)(5)(ii), and (b)(5)(iii).
    (1) Design evaluation. To demonstrate that a control device meets 
the required control efficiency, a design evaluation must address the 
composition and HAP concentration of the vent stream entering the 
control device. A design evaluation also must address other vent stream 
characteristics and control device operating parameters as specified in 
any one of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (vii) of this section, depending 
on the type of control device that is used. If the vent stream is not 
the only inlet to the control device, the efficiency demonstration also 
must consider all other vapors, gases, and liquids, other than fuels, 
received by the control device.
    (i) For an enclosed combustion device used to comply with the 
provisions of Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(iv), (b)(4)(ii), (c)(2)(iv)(B), or 
(c)(3) with a minimum residence time of 0.5 seconds and a minimum

[[Page 327]]

temperature of 760  deg.C, the design evaluation must document that 
these conditions exist.
    (ii) For a combustion control device that does not satisfy the 
criteria in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, the design evaluation 
must document control efficiency and address the following 
characteristics, depending on the type of control device:
    (A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, the design evaluation must 
consider the autoignition temperature of the organic HAP, must consider 
the vent stream flow rate, and must establish the design minimum and 
average temperature in the combustion zone and the combustion zone 
residence time.
    (B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, the design evaluation must 
consider the vent stream flow rate and must establish the design minimum 
and average temperatures across the catalyst bed inlet and outlet.
    (C) For a boiler or process heater, the design evaluation must 
consider the vent stream flow rate, must establish the design minimum 
and average flame zone temperatures and combustion zone residence time, 
and must describe the method and location where the vent stream is 
introduced into the flame zone.
    (iii) For a condenser, the design evaluation must consider the vent 
stream flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature, and must establish 
the design outlet organic HAP compound concentration level, design 
average temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream, and the design 
average temperatures of the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and 
outlet. The temperature of the gas stream exiting the condenser must be 
measured and used to establish the outlet organic HAP concentration.
    (iv) For a carbon adsorption system that regenerates the carbon bed 
directly onsite in the control device such as a fixed-bed adsorber, the 
design evaluation must consider the vent stream flow rate, relative 
humidity, and temperature, and must establish the design exhaust vent 
stream organic compound concentration level, adsorption cycle time, 
number of carbon beds and their capacities, type and working capacity of 
activated carbon used for the carbon beds, design total regeneration 
stream mass or volumetric flow over the period of each complete carbon 
bed regeneration cycle, design carbon bed temperature after 
regeneration, design carbon bed regeneration time, and design service 
life of carbon. For vacuum desorption, the pressure drop must be 
included.
    (v) For a carbon adsorption system that does not regenerate the 
carbon bed directly onsite in the control device such as a carbon 
canister, the design evaluation must consider the vent stream mass or 
volumetric flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature, and must 
establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration 
level, capacity of the carbon bed, type and working capacity of 
activated carbon used for the carbon bed, and design carbon replacement 
interval based on the total carbon working capacity of the control 
device and source operating schedule.
    (vi) For a scrubber, the design evaluation must consider the vent 
stream composition, constituent concentrations, liquid-to-vapor ratio, 
scrubbing liquid flow rate and concentration, temperature, and the 
reaction kinetics of the constituents with the scrubbing liquid. The 
design evaluation must establish the design exhaust vent stream organic 
compound concentration level and must include the additional information 
in paragraphs (a)(1)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section for trays and a 
packed column scrubber.
    (A) Type and total number of theoretical and actual trays;
    (B) Type and total surface area of packing for entire column, and 
for individual packed sections if column contains more than one packed 
section.
    (vii) For fabric filters, the design evaluation must include the 
pressure drop through the device and the net gas-to-cloth ratio (i.e., 
cubic feet of gas per square feet of cloth).
    (2) Calculation of TOC or total organic HAP concentration. The TOC 
concentration or total organic HAP concentration is the sum of the 
concentrations of the individual components. If compliance is being 
determined based on TOC, the owner or operator shall compute TOC for 
each run using Equation 6 of this subpart. If compliance with the

[[Page 328]]

percent reduction format of the standard is being determined based on 
total organic HAP, the owner or operator shall compute total organic HAP 
using Equation 6 of this subpart, except that only organic HAP compounds 
shall be summed; when determining compliance with the wastewater 
provisions of Sec. 63.1363(d), the organic HAP compounds shall consist 
of the organic HAP compounds in Table 9 of subpart G of this part.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.005

Where:

CGT = total concentration of TOC in vented gas stream, 
          average of samples, dry basis, ppmv
CGSi,j = concentration of sample components in vented gas 
          stream for sample j, dry basis, ppmv
n = number of compounds in the sample
m = number of samples in the sample run

    (3) Initial compliance using flares. When a flare is used to comply 
with the standards, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions in Sec. 63.11(b) of subpart A of this part.
    (i) The initial compliance determination shall consist of a visible 
emissions determination using Method 22 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, 
as described in Sec. 63.11(b)(4) of subpart A of this part, and a 
determination of net heating value of gas being combusted and exit 
velocity to comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.11(b)(6) through (8) 
of subpart A of this part. The net heating value and exit velocity shall 
be based on the results of performance testing under the conditions 
described in paragraphs (b)(10) and (11) of this section.
    (ii) An owner or operator is not required to conduct a performance 
test to determine percent emission reduction or outlet organic HAP or 
TOC concentration when a flare is used.
    (4) Exemptions from compliance demonstrations. An owner or operator 
using any control device specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (ii) 
of this section is exempt from the initial compliance provisions in 
paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.
    (i) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 
44 megawatts or greater.
    (ii) A boiler or process heater into which the emission stream is 
introduced with the primary fuel.
    (5) Initial compliance with alternative standard. Initial compliance 
with the alternative standards in Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) and (c)(4) is 
demonstrated when the outlet TOC concentration is 20 ppmv or less, and 
the outlet HCl and chlorine concentration is 20 ppmv or less. To 
demonstrate initial compliance, the owner or operator shall be in 
compliance with the monitoring provisions in Sec. 63.1366(b)(5) on the 
initial compliance date. The owner or operator shall use Method 18 of 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A to determine the predominant organic HAP in the 
emission stream if the TOC monitor is calibrated on the predominant HAP.
    (6) Initial compliance with the 20 ppmv outlet limit. Initial 
compliance with the 20 ppmv TOC and HCl and chlorine concentration is 
demonstrated when the outlet TOC concentration is 20 ppmv or less, and 
the outlet HCl and chlorine concentration is 20 ppmv or less. To 
demonstrate initial compliance, the operator shall use applicable test 
methods described in paragraphs (b)(1) through (9) of this section, and 
test under conditions described in paragraphs (b)(10) or (11) of this 
section, as applicable. The owner or operator shall comply with the 
monitoring provisions in Sec. 63.1366(b)(1) through (5) on the initial 
compliance date.
    (7) Outlet concentration correction for supplemental gases. If 
supplemental gases are added to a vent stream for which compliance with 
an outlet concentration standard in Sec. 63.1362 or 63.1363 will be 
demonstrated, the owner or operator must correct the outlet 
concentration as specified in paragraphs (a)(7)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) Combustion device. If the vent stream is controlled with a 
combustion device, the owner or operator must comply with the provisions 
in paragraphs (a)(7)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) To comply with a TOC outlet concentration standard in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(iv)(A), (b)(4)(ii)(A), (b)(6), (c)(2)(iv)(B), (c)(4), 
(d)(13), or Sec. 63.172 of

[[Page 329]]

subpart H of this part, the actual TOC outlet concentration must be 
corrected to 3 percent oxygen.
    (B) If the inlet stream to the combustion device contains any HCl, 
chlorine, or halogenated compounds, and the owner or operator elects to 
comply with a total HCl and chlorine outlet concentration standard in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(3)(ii), (b)(5)(ii), (b)(5)(iii), (b)(6), or (c)(4), the 
actual total HCl and chlorine outlet concentration must be corrected to 
3 percent oxygen.
    (C) The integrated sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3B of 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall be used to determine the actual oxygen 
concentration (%O2d). The samples shall be taken during the 
same time that the TOC and HCl and chlorine samples are taken. The 
concentration corrected to 3 percent oxygen (Cd) shall be 
computed using Equation 7 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.006

Where:

Cc = concentration of TOC or total HCl and chlorine corrected 
          to 3 percent oxygen, dry basis, ppmv
Cm = total concentration of TOC or total HCl and chlorine in 
          the vented gas stream, average of samples, dry basis, ppmv
%O2d = concentration of oxygen measured in vented gas stream, 
          dry basis, percent by volume

    (ii) Noncombustion devices. If a control device other than a 
combustion device, and not in series with a combustion device, is used 
to comply with a TOC or total HCl and chlorine outlet concentration 
standard, the owner or operator must correct the actual concentration 
for supplemental gases using Equation 8 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.007

Where:

Ca = corrected outlet TOC or total HCl and chlorine 
          concentration, dry basis, ppmv
Cm = actual TOC or total HCl and chlorine concentration 
          measured at control device outlet, dry basis, ppmv
Va = total volumetric flow rate of affected streams vented to 
          the control device
Vs = total volumetric flow rate of supplemental gases

    (b) Test methods and conditions. When testing is conducted to 
measure emissions from an affected source, the test methods specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (9) of this section shall be used. Compliance 
tests shall be performed under conditions specified in paragraphs 
(b)(10) and (11) of this section. Testing requirements for condensers 
are specified in paragraph (b)(12) of this section.
    (1) Method 1 or 1A of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used for 
sample and velocity traverses.
    (2) Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be 
used for velocity and volumetric flow rates.
    (3) Method 3 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used for gas 
analysis.
    (4) Method 4 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used for stack 
gas moisture.
    (5) Concentration measurements shall be adjusted to negate the 
dilution effects of introducing nonaffected gaseous streams into the 
vent streams prior to control or measurement. The following methods are 
specified for concentration measurements of organic compounds:
    (i) Method 18 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 may be used to 
determine HAP concentration in any control device efficiency 
determination.
    (ii) Method 25 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 may be used to 
determine total gaseous nonmethane organic concentration for control 
efficiency determinations in combustion devices.
    (iii) Method 25A of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 may be used to 
determine the HAP or TOC concentration for control device efficiency 
determinations under the conditions specified in Method 25 of appendix A 
of 40 CFR part 60 for direct measurement of an effluent with a flame 
ionization detector, or in demonstrating compliance with the 20 ppmv TOC 
outlet standard. If Method 25A of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 is used 
to determine the concentration of TOC for the 20 ppmv standard, the 
instrument shall be calibrated on methane or the predominant HAP. If 
calibrating on the predominant HAP, the use of Method 25A of appendix A 
of 40

[[Page 330]]

CFR part 60 shall comply with paragraphs (b)(5)(i)(A) through (C) of 
this section.
    (A) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A, shall be the single organic HAP representing 
the largest percent by volume.
    (B) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is acceptable 
if the response from the high level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (C) The span value of the analyzer must be less than 100 ppmv.
    (6) The methods in either paragraph (b)(6)(i) or (ii) of this 
section shall be used to determine the concentration, in mg/dscm, of 
total HCl and chlorine. Concentration measurements shall be adjusted to 
negate the dilution effects of introducing nonaffected gaseous streams 
into the vent streams prior to control or measurement.
    (i) Method 26 or 26A of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    (ii) Any other method if the method or data have been validated 
according to the applicable procedures of Method 301 of appendix A of 
this part.
    (7) Method 5 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to 
determine the concentration of particulate matter in exhaust gas streams 
from bag dumps and product dryers.
    (8) Wastewater analysis shall be conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.144(b)(5)(i) through (iii) of subpart G of this part.
    (9) Method 22 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to 
determine visible emissions from flares.
    (10) Testing conditions for continuous processes. Testing of process 
vents on equipment operating as part of a continuous process shall 
consist of three one-hour runs. Gas stream volumetric flow rates shall 
be measured every 15 minutes during each 1-hour run. Organic HAP 
concentration shall be determined from samples collected in an 
integrated sample over the duration of each one-hour test run, or from 
grab samples collected simultaneously with the flow rate measurements 
(every 15 minutes). If an integrated sample is collected for laboratory 
analysis, the sampling rate shall be adjusted proportionally to reflect 
variations in flow rate. For continuous gas streams, the emission rate 
used to determine compliance shall be the average emission rate of the 
three test runs.
    (11) Testing conditions for batch processes. Except as provided in 
paragraph (b)(12) of this section for condensers, testing of emissions 
on equipment where the flow of gaseous emissions is intermittent (batch 
operations) shall be conducted at absolute peak-case conditions or 
hypothetical peak-case conditions, as specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) 
and (ii) of this section, respectively. Gas stream volumetric flow rates 
shall be measured at 15-minute intervals. Organic HAP, TOC, or HCl and 
chlorine concentration shall be determined from samples collected in an 
integrated sample over the duration of the test, or from grab samples 
collected simultaneously with the flow rate measurements (every 15 
minutes). If an integrated sample is collected for laboratory analysis, 
the sampling rate shall be adjusted proportionally to reflect variations 
in flow rate. In all cases, a site-specific test plan shall be submitted 
to the Administrator for approval prior to testing in accordance with 
Sec. 63.7(c) of subpart A of this part. The test plan shall include the 
emissions profile described in paragraph (b)(11)(iii) of this section. 
The term ``HAP mass loading'' as used in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through 
(iii) of this section refers to the class of HAP, either organic or HCl 
and chlorine, that the control device is intended to control.
    (i) Absolute peak-case. If the most challenging conditions for the 
control device occur under maximum HAP load, the absolute peak-case 
conditions shall be characterized by the criteria presented in paragraph 
(b)(11)(i)(A) or (B) of this section. Otherwise, absolute peak-case 
conditions are defined by the conditions in paragraph (b)(11)(i)(C) of 
this section.
    (A) The period in which the inlet to the control device will contain 
at least 50 percent of the maximum HAP mass load that may be vented to 
the control device over any 8-hour period. An emission profile as 
described in paragraph

[[Page 331]]

(b)(11)(iii)(A) of this section shall be used to identify the 8-hour 
period that includes the maximum projected HAP load.
    (B) A 1-hour period of time in which the inlet to the control device 
will contain the highest hourly HAP mass loading rate that may be vented 
to the control device. An emission profile as described in paragraph 
(b)(11)(iii)(A) of this section shall be used to identify the 1-hour 
period of maximum HAP loading.
    (C) The period of time when a condition other than the maximum HAP 
load is most challenging for the control device. These conditions 
include, but are not limited to the following:
    (1) Periods when the streams contain the highest combined VOC and 
HAP hourly load, as described by the emission profiles in paragraph 
(b)(11)(iii) of this section; or
    (2) Periods when the streams contain HAP constituents that approach 
the limits of solubility for scrubbing media; or
    (3) Periods when the streams contain HAP constituents that approach 
the limits of adsorptivity for carbon adsorption systems.
    (ii) Hypothetical peak-case. Hypothetical peak-case conditions are 
simulated test conditions that, at a minimum, contain the highest total 
average hourly HAP load of emissions that would be predicted to be 
vented to the control device from the emissions profile described in 
either paragraph (b)(11)(iii)(B) or (C) of this section.
    (iii) Emissions profile. The owner or operator may choose to perform 
tests only during those periods of the peak-case episode(s) that the 
owner or operator selects to control as part of achieving the required 
emission reduction. The owner or operator shall develop an emission 
profile for the vent to the control device that describes the 
characteristics of the vent stream at the inlet to the control device 
under either absolute or hypothetical peak-case conditions. The 
emissions profile shall be developed based on the applicable procedures 
described in paragraphs (b)(11)(iii)(A) through (C) of this section, as 
required by paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (A) Emissions profile by process. The emissions profile must 
consider all emission episodes that could contribute to the vent stack 
for a period of time that is sufficient to include all processes venting 
to the stack and shall consider production scheduling. The profile shall 
describe the HAP load to the device that equals the highest sum of 
emissions from the episodes that can vent to the control device during 
the period of absolute peak-case conditions specified in paragraph 
(b)(11)(i)(A), (B), or (C) as appropriate. Emissions per episode shall 
be calculated using the procedures specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section. When complying with paragraph (b)(1)(i)(B) of this section, 
emissions per episode shall be divided by the duration of the episode if 
the duration of the episode is longer than 1 hour.
    (B) Emission profile by equipment. The emission profile must consist 
of emissions that meet or exceed the highest hourly HAP load that would 
be expected under actual processing conditions. The profile shall 
describe equipment configurations used to generate the emission events, 
volatility of materials processed in the equipment, and the rationale 
used to identify and characterize the emission events. The emissions may 
be based on using a compound more volatile than compounds actually used 
in the process(es), and the emissions may be generated from all 
equipment in the process(es) or only selected equipment.
    (C) Emission profile by capture and control device limitation. The 
emission profile shall consider the capture and control system 
limitations and the highest hourly emissions that can be routed to the 
control device, based on maximum flow rate and concentrations possible 
because of limitations on conveyance and control equipment (e.g., fans, 
LEL alarms and safety bypasses).
    (iv) Test duration. Three runs, at a minimum of 1 hour each, are 
required for performance testing. Each run must occur over the same 
absolute or hypothetical peak-case conditions, as defined in paragraph 
(b)(11)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (12) Testing requirements for condensers. For emission streams 
controlled using condensers, the owner or

[[Page 332]]

operator shall calculate the condenser outlet gas temperature that is 
needed to meet the required percent reduction.
    (c) Initial compliance with process vent provisions. The owner or 
operator of an affected source shall demonstrate compliance with the 
process vent standards in Sec. 63.1362(b) using the procedures described 
in paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (1) Compliance with the process vent standards in Sec. 63.1362(b) 
shall be demonstrated in accordance with the provisions specified in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section.
    (i) Initial compliance with the emission limit cutoffs in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(i) and (b)(4)(i) is demonstrated when the 
uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from the sum of all process vents 
within a process are less than or equal to 0.15 Mg/yr. Uncontrolled HAP 
emissions shall be determined using the procedures described in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (ii) Initial compliance with the emission limit cutoffs in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(3)(i) and (b)(5)(i) is demonstrated when the 
uncontrolled HCl and Cl2 emissions from the sum of all 
process vents within a process are less than or equal to 6.8 Mg/yr. 
Initial compliance with the emission limit cutoffs in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(5)(ii) and (iii) is demonstrated when the uncontrolled 
HCl and Cl2 emissions are greater than or equal to 6.8 Mg/yr 
or greater than or equal to 191 Mg/yr, respectively. Uncontrolled 
emissions shall be determined using the procedures described in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (iii) Initial compliance with the organic HAP percent reduction 
requirements specified in Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(ii), (b)(2)(iii), and 
(b)(4)(ii) is demonstrated by determining controlled HAP emissions using 
the procedures described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, 
determining uncontrolled HAP emissions using the procedures described in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, and calculating the applicable percent 
reduction.
    (iv) Initial compliance with the HCl and Cl2 percent 
reduction requirements specified in Sec. 63.1362(b)(3)(ii), (b)(5)(ii), 
and (b)(5)(iii) is demonstrated by determining controlled emissions of 
HCl and Cl2 using the procedures described in paragraph 
(c)(3) of this section, determining uncontrolled emissions of HCl and 
Cl2 using the procedures described in paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section, and calculating the applicable percent reduction.
    (v) Initial compliance with the outlet concentration limits in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(iv)(A), (b)(3)(ii), (b)(4)(ii)(A), (b)(5)(ii), and 
(b)(5)(iii) is demonstrated when the outlet TOC concentration is 20 ppmv 
or less and the outlet HCl and chlorine concentration is 20 ppmv or 
less. The owner or operator shall demonstrate compliance by fulfilling 
the requirements in paragraph (a)(6) of this section. If an owner or 
operator elects to develop an emissions profile by process as described 
in paragraph (b)(11)(iii)(A) of this section, uncontrolled emissions 
shall be determined using the procedures in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section.
    (vi) Initial compliance with the alternative standard in 
Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) is demonstrated by fulfilling the requirements in 
paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
    (vii) Initial compliance when using a flare is demonstrated by 
fulfilling the requirements in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (viii) No initial compliance demonstration is required for control 
devices specified in Sec. 63.1362(l).
    (2) Uncontrolled emissions. The owner or operator referred to from 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (v) of this section shall calculate 
uncontrolled emissions according to the procedures described in 
paragraph (c)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Emission estimation procedures. The owner or operator shall 
determine uncontrolled HAP emissions using emission measurements and/or 
calculations for each batch emission episode according to the 
engineering evaluation methodology in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A) through 
(H) of this section.
    (A) Individual HAP partial pressures in multicomponent systems shall 
be determined in accordance with the methods specified in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i)(A)(1) through (3) of this section. Chemical property data may 
be obtained from standard references.

[[Page 333]]

    (1) If the components are miscible in one another, use Raoult's law 
to calculate the partial pressures;
    (2) If the solution is a dilute aqueous mixture, use Henry's law 
constants to calculate partial pressures;
    (3) If Raoult's law or Henry's law are not appropriate or available, 
use any of the methods specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A)(3)(i) 
through (iii) of this section.
    (i) Use experimentally obtained activity coefficients;
    (ii) Use models such as the group-contribution models to predict 
activity coefficients;
    (iii) Assume the components of the system behave independently and 
use the summation of all vapor pressures from the HAP as the total HAP 
partial pressure;
    (B) Charging or filling. Emissions from vapor displacement due to 
transfer of material to a vessel shall be calculated using Equation 9 of 
this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.008

Where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP
V = volume of gas displaced from the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel vapor space; absolute
MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP

    (C) Purging. Emissions from purging shall be calculated using 
Equation 10 of this subpart, except that for purge flow rates greater 
than 100 scfm, the mole fraction of HAP will be assumed to be 25 percent 
of the saturated value.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.009

Where:

E = mass of HAP emitted
V = purge flow rate at the temperature and pressure of the vessel vapor 
          space
R = ideal gas law constant
T = temperature of the vessel vapor space; absolute
Pi = partial pressure of the individual HAP
Pj = partial pressure of individual condensable VOC compounds 
          (including HAP)
PT = pressure of the vessel vapor space
MWi = molecular weight of the individual HAP
t = time of purge
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
m = number of condensable VOC compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream

    (D) Heating. Emissions caused by heating the contents of a vessel to 
a temperature less than the boiling point shall be calculated using the 
procedures in either paragraph (c)(2)(i)(D)(1), (2), or (4) of this 
section, as appropriate. If the contents of a vessel are heated to the 
boiling point, emissions while boiling are assumed to be zero if the 
owner or operator is complying with the provisions in paragraph 
(d)(2)(i)(C)(3) of this section.
    (1) If the final temperature to which the vessel contents are heated 
is lower than 50 K below the boiling point of the HAP in the vessel, 
then emissions shall be calculated using Equations 11 through 14 of this 
subpart.
    (i) The mass of HAP emitted per episode shall be calculated using 
Equation 11 of this subpart:

[[Page 334]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.010

Where:
E = mass of HAP vapor displaced from the vessel being heated
(Pi)Tn = partial pressure of each HAP in the 
          vessel headspace at initial (n = 1) and final (n = 2) 
          temperatures
Pa1 = initial noncondensable gas pressure in the vessel, as 
          calculated using Equation 13 of this subpart
Pa2 = final noncondensable gas pressure in the vessel, as 
          calculated using Equation 13 of this subpart
 = number of moles of noncondensable gas displaced, 
          as calculated using Equation 12 of this subpart
MWHAP = The average molecular weight of HAP present in the 
          vessel, as calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart:
n = number of HAP compounds in the displaced vapor

    (ii) The moles of noncondensable gas displaced shall be calculated 
using Equation 12 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.011

where:

 = number of moles of noncondensable gas displaced
V = volume of free space in the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
Pa1 = initial noncondensable gas pressure in the vessel, as 
          calculated using Equation 13 of this subpart
Pa2 = final noncondensable gas pressure in the vessel, as 
          calculated using Equation 13 of this subpart
T1 = initial temperature of vessel contents, absolute
T2 = final temperature of vessel contents, absolute
    (iii) The initial and final pressure of the noncondensable gas in 
the vessel shall be calculated according to Equation 13 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.012

Where:

Pan = partial pressure of noncondensable gas in the vessel 
          headspace at initial (n = 1) and final (n = 2) temperatures
Patm = atmospheric pressure
(Pj)Tn = partial pressure of each condensable 
          volatile organic compound (including HAP) in the vessel 
          headspace at the initial temperature (n = 1) and final (n = 2) 
          temperature

    (iv) The average molecular weight of HAP in the displaced gas shall 
be calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.013

Where:

MWHAP = average molecular weight of HAP in the displaced gas
(Pi)Tn = partial pressure of each HAP in the 
          vessel headspace at the initial (T1) and final 
          (T2) temperatures
MWi = molecular weight of each HAP
n = number of HAP compounds in the emission stream

    (2) If the vessel contents are heated to a temperature greater than 
50 K below the boiling point, then emissions from the heating of a 
vessel shall be calculated as the sum of the emissions calculated in 
accordance with paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(D)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.

[[Page 335]]

    (i) For the interval from the initial temperature to the temperature 
50 K below the boiling point, emissions shall be calculated using 
Equation 11 of this subpart, where T2 is the temperature 50 K 
below the boiling point.
    (ii) For the interval from the temperature 50 K below the boiling 
point to the final temperature, emissions shall be calculated as the 
summation of emissions for each 5 K increment, where the emission for 
each increment shall be calculated using Equation 11 of this subpart. If 
the final temperature of the heatup is lower than 5 K below the boiling 
point, the final temperature for the last increment shall be the final 
temperature of the heatup, even if the last increment is less than 5 K. 
If the final temperature of the heatup is higher than 5 K below the 
boiling point, the final temperature for the last increment shall be the 
temperature 5 K below the boiling point, even if the last increment is 
less than 5 K.
    (3) While boiling, the vessel must be operated with a properly 
operated process condenser. An initial demonstration that a process 
condenser is properly operated is required for vessels that operate 
process condensers without secondary condensers that are air pollution 
control devices. The owner or operator must either measure the condenser 
exhaust gas temperature and show it is less than the boiling point of 
the substance(s) in the vessel, or perform a material balance around the 
vessel and condenser to show that at least 99 percent of the material 
vaporized while boiling is condensed. Uncontrolled emissions are assumed 
to be zero under these conditions. The initial demonstration shall be 
conducted for all appropriate operating scenarios and documented in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1368(f).
    (4)(i) As an alternative to the procedures described in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i)(D)(1) and (2) of this section, emissions caused by heating a 
vessel to any temperature less than the boiling point may be calculated 
using Equation 15 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.014

Where:

E = mass of HAP vapor displaced from the vessel being heated
Navg = average gas space molar volume during the heating 
          process, as calculated using Equation 16 of this subpart
PT = total pressure in the vessel
Pi,1 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
          T1
Pi,2 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
          T2
MWHAP = average molecular weight of the HAP compounds, as 
          calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart
nHAP,1 = number of moles of total HAP in the vessel headspace 
          at T1
nHAP,2 = number of moles of total HAP in the vessel headspace 
          at T2
m = number of condensable VOC compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream

    (ii) The average gas space molar volume during the heating process 
is calculated using Equation 16 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.015

Where:

Navg = average gas space molar volume during the heating 
          process
V = volume of free space in vessel
PT = total pressure in the vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = initial temperature of the vessel contents, absolute
T2 = final temperature of the vessel contents, absolute


[[Page 336]]


    (iii) The difference in the number of moles of total HAP in the 
vessel headspace between the initial and final temperatures is 
calculated using Equation 17 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.016

Where:

nHAP,2 = number of moles of total HAP in the vessel headspace 
          at T2
HAP,1 = number of moles of total HAP in the vessel headspace 
          at T1
V = volume of free space in vessel
R = ideal gas law constant
T1 = initial temperature of the vessel contents, absolute
T2 = final temperature of the vessel contents, absolute
Pi,1 = partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
          T1
Pi,2=partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds at 
          T2
n=number of HAP compounds in the emission stream

    (E) Depressurization. Emissions from depressurization shall be 
calculated using the procedures in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(E)(1) through 
(5) of this section. Alternatively, the owner or operator may elect to 
calculate emissions from depressurization using the procedures in 
paragraph (c)(2)(i)(E)(6) of this section.
    (1) The moles of HAP vapor initially in the vessel are calculated 
using Equation 18 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.017

Where:

nHAP=moles of HAP vapor in the vessel
Pi=partial pressure of each HAP in the vessel vapor space
V=free volume in the vessel being depressurized
R=ideal gas law constant
T=absolute temperature in vessel
n=number of HAP compounds in the emission stream

    (2) The initial and final moles of noncondensable gas present in the 
vessel are calculated using Equations 19 and 20 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.018

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.019

Where:

n1=initial number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
          vessel
n2=final number of moles of noncondensable gas in the vessel
V=free volume in the vessel being depressurized
Pnc1=initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
          calculated using Equation 21 of this subpart
Pnc2=final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
          calculated using Equation 22 of this subpart
R=ideal gas law constant
T=temperature, absolute

    (3) The initial and final partial pressures of the noncondensable 
gas in the vessel are determined using Equations 21 and 22 of this 
subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.020

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.021

where:

Pnc1=initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas
Pnc2=final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas
P1 = initial vessel pressure
P2=final vessel pressure
Pj*=vapor pressure of each condensable VOC (including HAP) in 
          the emission stream
Xj=mole fraction of each condensable VOC (including HAP) in 
          the emission stream
m=number of condensable VOC compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream


[[Page 337]]


    (4) The moles of HAP emitted during the depressurization are 
calculated by taking an approximation of the average ratio of moles of 
HAP to moles of noncondensable and multiplying by the total moles of 
noncondensables released during the depressurization, using Equation 23 
of this subpart:
Where:

nHAP,e=moles of HAP emitted

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.022


nHAP,1=moles of HAP vapor in vessel at the initial pressure, 
          as calculated using Equation 18 of this subpart
nHAP,2=moles of HAP vapor in vessel at the final pressure, as 
          calculated using Equation 18 of this subpart
n1=initial number of moles of noncondensable gas in the 
          vessel, as calculated using Equation 19 of this subpart
n2=final number of moles of noncondensable gas in the vessel, 
          as calculated using Equation 19 of this subpart

    (5) Use Equation 24 of this subpart to calculate the mass of HAP 
emitted:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.023

Where:

E=mass of HAP emitted
nHAP,e=moles of HAP emitted, as calculated using Equation 23 
          of this subpart
MWHAP=average molecular weight of the HAP as calculated using 
          Equation 14 of this subpart

    (6) As an alternative to the procedures in paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i)(E)(1) through (5) of this section, emissions from 
depressurization may be calculated using Equation 25 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.024

where:

V=free volume in vessel being depressurized
R=ideal gas law constant
T=temperature of the vessel, absolute
P1=initial pressure in the vessel
P2=final pressure in the vessel
Pi=partial pressure of the individual HAP compounds
Pj=partial pressure of individual condensable VOC compounds 
          (including HAP)
MWi=molecular weight of the individual HAP compounds
n=number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
m=number of condensable VOC compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream

    (F) Vacuum systems. Calculate emissions from vacuum systems using 
Equation 26 of this subpart:

[[Page 338]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.025

Where:

E=mass of HAP emitted
PT=absolute pressure of receiving vessel or ejector outlet 
          conditions, if there is no receiver
Pi=partial pressure of individual HAP at the receiver 
          temperature or the ejector outlet conditions
Pj=partial pressure of individual condensable VOC compounds 
          (including HAP) at the receiver temperature or the ejector 
          outlet conditions
La=total air leak rate in the system, mass/time
MWnc = molecular weight of noncondensable gas
t=time of vacuum operation
MWHAP=average molecular weight of HAP in the emission stream, 
          as calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart, with HAP 
          partial pressures calculated at the temperature of the 
          receiver or ejector outlet, as appropriate
n=number of HAP components in the emission stream
m=number of condensable VOC compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream

    (G) Gas evolution. Emissions from gas evolution shall be calculated 
using Equation 10 of this subpart with V calculated using Equation 27 of 
this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.026

Where:

V=volumetric flow rate of gas evolution
Wg=mass flow rate of gas evolution
R=ideal gas law constant
T=temperature at the exit, absolute
PT=vessel pressure
MWg=molecular weight of the evolved gas

    (H) Air drying. Use Equation 28 of this subpart to calculate 
emissions from air drying:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.027

Where:

E=mass of HAP emitted
B=mass of dry solids
PS1=HAP in material entering dryer, weight percent
PS2=HAP in material exiting dryer, weight percent.

    (ii) Engineering assessments. The owner or operator shall conduct an 
engineering assessment to determine uncontrolled HAP emissions for each 
emission episode that is not due to vapor displacement, purging, 
heating, depressurization, vacuum systems, gas evolution, or air drying. 
For a given emission episode caused by any of these seven types of 
activities, the owner or operator also may request approval to determine 
uncontrolled HAP emissions based on an engineering assessment. All data, 
assumptions, and procedures used in the engineering assessment shall be 
documented in the Precompliance plan in accordance with Sec. 63.1367(b). 
An engineering assessment includes, but is not limited to, the 
information and procedures described in paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(A) through 
(D) of this section:
    (A) Test results, provided the tests are representative of current 
operating practices at the process unit. If test data show a greater 
than 20 percent discrepancy between the test value and

[[Page 339]]

the estimated value, the owner or operator may estimate emissions based 
on the test data, and the results of the engineering assessment shall be 
included in the Notification of Compliance Status report.
    (B) Bench-scale or pilot-scale test data representative of the 
process under representative operating conditions.
    (C) Maximum flow rate, HAP emission rate, concentration, or other 
relevant parameter specified or implied within a permit limit applicable 
to the process vent.
    (D) Design analysis based on accepted chemical engineering 
principles, measurable process parameters, or physical or chemical laws 
or properties. Examples of analytical methods include, but are not 
limited to:
    (1) Use of material balances based on process stoichiometry to 
estimate maximum organic HAP concentrations;
    (2) Estimation of maximum flow rate based on physical equipment 
design such as pump or blower capacities; and
    (3) Estimation of HAP concentrations based on saturation conditions.
    (3) Controlled emissions. Except for condensers, the owner or 
operator shall determine controlled emissions using the procedures in 
either paragraph (c)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable. For 
condensers, controlled emissions shall be calculated using the emission 
estimation equations described in paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section. 
The owner or operator is not required to calculate controlled emissions 
from devices described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section or from 
flares for which compliance is demonstrated in accordance with paragraph 
(a)(3) of this section. If the owner or operator is complying with an 
outlet concentration standard and the control device uses supplemental 
gases, the outlet concentrations shall be corrected in accordance with 
the procedures described in paragraph (a)(7) of this section.
    (i) Small control devices, except condensers. Controlled emissions 
for each process vent that is controlled using a small control device, 
except for a condenser, shall be determined by using the design 
evaluation described in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section, or by 
conducting a performance test in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of 
this section.
    (A) Design evaluation. The design evaluation shall include 
documentation demonstrating that the control device being used achieves 
the required control efficiency under absolute or hypothetical peak-case 
conditions, as determined from the emission profile described in 
paragraph (b)(11)(iii) of this section. The control efficiency 
determined from this design evaluation shall be applied to uncontrolled 
emissions to estimate controlled emissions. The documentation must be 
conducted in accordance with the provisions in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section. The design evaluation shall also include the value(s) and basis 
for the parameter(s) monitored under Sec. 63.1366.
    (B) Whenever a small control device becomes a large control device, 
the owner or operator must comply with the provisions in paragraph 
(c)(3)(ii) of this section and submit the test report in the next 
Periodic report.
    (ii) Large control devices, except condensers. Controlled emissions 
for each process vent that is controlled using a large control device, 
except for a condenser, shall be determined by applying the control 
efficiency of the large control device to the estimated uncontrolled 
emissions. The control efficiency shall be determined by conducting a 
performance test on the control device as described in paragraphs 
(c)(3)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section, or by using the results of a 
previous performance test as described in paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(D) of 
this section. If the control device is intended to control only HCl and 
chlorine, the owner or operator may assume the control efficiency of 
organic HAP is 0 percent. If the control device is intended to control 
only organic HAP, the owner or operator may assume the control 
efficiency for HCl and chlorine is 0 percent.
    (A) Except for control devices that are intended to meet outlet TOC 
or HCl and chlorine concentrations of 20 ppmv, the performance test 
shall be conducted by performing emission testing on the inlet and 
outlet of the control device following the test methods and procedures 
of paragraph (b) of this

[[Page 340]]

section. For control devices that meet outlet TOC or HCl and chlorine 
concentrations of 20 ppmv, the performance testing shall be conducted by 
performing emission testing on the outlet of the control device 
following the test methods and procedures of paragraph (b) of this 
section. Concentrations shall be calculated from the data obtained 
through emission testing according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section.
    (B) Performance testing shall be conducted under absolute or 
hypothetical peak-case conditions, as defined in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) 
and (ii) of this section.
    (C) The owner or operator may elect to conduct more than one 
performance test on the control device for the purpose of establishing 
more than one operating condition at which the control device achieves 
the required control efficiency.
    (D) The owner or operator is not required to conduct a performance 
test for any control device for which a previous performance test was 
conducted, provided the test was conducted using the same procedures 
specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (11) of this section over 
conditions typical of the absolute or hypothetical peak-case, as defined 
in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section. The results of the 
previous performance test shall be used to demonstrate compliance.
    (iii) Condensers. The owner or operator using a condenser as a 
control device shall determine controlled emissions using exhaust gas 
temperature measurements and calculations for each batch emission 
episode according to the engineering methodology in paragraphs 
(c)(3)(iii)(A) through (G) of this section. Individual HAP partial 
pressures shall be calculated as specified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of 
this section.
    (A) Emissions from vapor displacement due to transfer of material to 
a vessel shall be calculated using Equation 9 of this subpart with T set 
equal to the temperature of the receiver and the HAP partial pressures 
determined at the temperature of the receiver.
    (B) Emissions from purging shall be calculated using Equation 10 of 
this subpart with T set equal to the temperature of the receiver and the 
HAP partial pressures determined at the temperature of the receiver.
    (C) Emissions from heating shall be calculated using Equation 29 of 
this subpart. In Equation 29 of this subpart,  is 
equal to the number of moles of noncondensable displaced from the 
vessel, as calculated using Equation 12 of this subpart. In Equation 29 
of this subpart, the HAP average molecular weight shall be calculated 
using Equation 14 with the HAP partial pressures determined at the 
temperature of the receiver.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.028

Where:

E=mass of HAP emitted
=moles of noncondensable gas displaced
PT=pressure in the receiver
Pi=partial pressure of the individual HAP at the receiver 
          temperature
Pj=partial pressure of the individual condensable VOC 
          (including HAP) at the receiver temperature
n=number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
MWHAP=the average molecular weight of HAP in vapor exiting 
          the receiver, as calculated using Equation 14 of this subpart
m=number of condensable VOC (including HAP) in the emission stream

    (D)(1) Emissions from depressurization shall be calculated using 
Equation 30 of this subpart.

[[Page 341]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.029

Where:

E=mass of HAP vapor emitted
Vnc1=initial volume of noncondensable in the vessel, 
          corrected to the final pressure, as calculated using Equation 
          31 of this subpart
Vnc2=final volume of noncondensable in the vessel, as 
          calculated using Equation 32 of this subpart
Pi=partial pressure of each individual HAP at the receiver 
          temperature
Pj=partial pressure of each condensable VOC (including HAP) 
          at the receiver temperature
PT=receiver pressure
T=temperature of the receiver, absolute
R=ideal gas law constant
MWHAP=the average molecular weight of HAP calculated using 
          Equation 14 of this subpart with partial pressures determined 
          at the receiver temperature
n=number of HAP compounds in the emission stream
m=number of condensable VOC (including HAP) in the emission stream

    (2) The initial and final volumes of noncondensable gas present in 
the vessel, adjusted to the pressure of the receiver, are calculated 
using Equations 31 and 32 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.030

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.031

Where:

Vnc1=initial volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
Vnc2=final volume of noncondensable gas in the vessel
V=free volume in the vessel being depressurized
Pnc1=initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
          calculated using Equation 33 of this subpart
Pnc2=final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas, as 
          calculated using Equation 34 of this subpart
PT=pressure of the receiver

    (3) Initial and final partial pressures of the noncondensable gas in 
the vessel are determined using Equations 33 and 34 of this subpart.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.032

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.033

Where:

Pnc1=initial partial pressure of the noncondensable gas in 
          the vessel
Pnc2=final partial pressure of the noncondensable gas in the 
          vessel
P1=initial vessel pressure
P2=final vessel pressure
Pj=partial pressure of each condensable VOC (including HAP) 
          in the vessel
m=number of condensable VOC (including HAP) in the emission stream

    (E) Emissions from vacuum systems shall be calculated using Equation 
26 of this subpart.
    (F) Emissions from gas evolution shall be calculated using Equation 
8 with V calculated using Equation 27 of this subpart, T set equal to 
the receiver temperature, and the HAP partial pressures determined at 
the receiver temperature. The term for time, t, in Equation 10 of this 
subpart is not needed for the purposes of this calculation.
    (G) Emissions from air drying shall be calculated using Equation 9 
of this subpart with V equal to the air flow rate and Pi 
determined at the receiver temperature.
    (d) Initial compliance with storage vessel provisions. The owner or 
operator of an existing or new affected source shall demonstrate initial 
compliance with the storage vessel standards in Sec. 63.1362(c)(2) 
through (4) by fulfilling the requirements in either paragraph

[[Page 342]]

(d)(1), (2), (3), (4), (5), or (6) of this section, as applicable. The 
owner or operator shall demonstrate initial compliance with the planned 
routine maintenance provision in Sec. 63.1362(c)(5) by fulfilling the 
requirements in paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
    (1) Percent reduction requirement for control devices. If the owner 
or operator equips a Group 1 storage vessel with a closed vent system 
and control device, the owner or operator shall demonstrate initial 
compliance with the percent reduction requirement of 
Sec. 63.1362(c)(2)(iv)(A) or (c)(3) either by calculating the efficiency 
of the control device using performance test data as specified in 
paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section, or by preparing a design evaluation 
as specified in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) Performance test option. If the owner or operator elects to 
demonstrate initial compliance based on performance test data, the 
efficiency of the control device shall be calculated as specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) At the reasonably expected maximum filling rate, Equations 35 
and 36 of this subpart shall be used to calculate the mass rate of total 
organic HAP at the inlet and outlet of the control device.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.034

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.035

Where:

Cij, Coj=concentration of sample component j of 
          the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, 
          respectively, dry basis, ppmv
Ei, Eo=mass rate of total organic HAP at the inlet 
          and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, kg/
          hr
Mij, Moj=molecular weight of sample component j of 
          the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, 
          respectively, g/gmole
Qi, Qo=flow rate of gas stream at the inlet and 
          outlet of the control device, respectively, dscmm
K2=constant, 2.494 x 10-6 (parts per 
          million)-1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) 
          (kilogram/gram) (minute/hour), where standard temperature is 
          20  deg.C

    (B) The percent reduction in total organic HAP shall be calculated 
using Equation 37 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.036

Where:

R=control efficiency of control device, percent
Ei=mass rate of total organic HAP at the inlet to the control 
          device as calculated under paragraph (d)(l)(i)(A) of this 
          section, kilograms organic HAP per hour
Eo=mass rate of total organic HAP at the outlet of the 
          control device, as calculated under paragraph (d)(1)(i)(A) of 
          this section, kilograms organic HAP per hour

    (C) A performance test is not required to be conducted if the 
control device used to comply with Sec. 63.1362(c) (storage tank 
provisions) is also used to comply with Sec. 63.1362(b) (process vent 
provisions), provided compliance with Sec. 63.1362(b) is demonstrated in 
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section and the demonstrated 
percent reduction is equal to or greater than 95 percent.
    (D) A performance test is not required for any control device for 
which a previous test was conducted, provided the test was conducted 
using the same procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (ii) Design evaluation option. If the owner or operator elects to 
demonstrate initial compliance by conducting a design evaluation, the 
owner or operator shall prepare documentation in accordance with the 
design evaluation provisions in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, as 
applicable. The design evaluation shall demonstrate that the control 
device being used achieves the required control efficiency when the 
storage vessel is filled at the reasonably expected maximum filling 
rate.
    (2) Outlet concentration requirement for control devices. If the 
owner or operator equips a Group 1 storage vessel with a closed vent 
system and control device,

[[Page 343]]

the owner or operator shall demonstrate initial compliance with the 
outlet concentration requirements of Sec. 63.1362(c)(2)(iv)(B) or (c)(3) 
by fulfilling the requirements of paragraph (a)(6) of this section.
    (3) Floating roof. If the owner or operator equips a Group 1 storage 
vessel with a floating roof to comply with the provisions in 
Sec. 63.1362(c)(2) or (c)(3), the owner or operator shall demonstrate 
initial compliance by complying with the procedures described in 
paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) Comply with Sec. 63.119(b), (c), or (d) of subpart G of this 
part, as applicable, with the differences specified in 
Sec. 63.1362(d)(2)(i) through (iii).
    (ii) Comply with the procedures described in Sec. 63.120(a), (b), or 
(c) of subpart G of this part, as applicable, with the differences 
specified in Sec. 63.1362(d)(2)(i), (iv), and (v).
    (4) Flares. If the owner or operator controls the emissions from a 
Group 1 storage vessel with a flare, initial compliance is demonstrated 
by fulfilling the requirements in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (5) Exemptions from initial compliance. No initial compliance 
demonstration is required for control devices specified in paragraph 
(a)(4) of this section.
    (6) Initial compliance with alternative standard. If the owner or 
operator equips a Group 1 storage vessel with a closed-vent system and 
control device, the owner or operator shall demonstrate initial 
compliance with the alternative standard in Sec. 63.1362(c)(4) by 
fulfilling the requirements of paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
    (7) Planned routine maintenance. The owner or operator shall 
demonstrate initial compliance with the planned routine maintenance 
provisions of Sec. 63.1362(c)(5) by including the anticipated periods of 
planned routine maintenance for the first reporting period in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1368(f).
    (e) Initial compliance with wastewater provisions. The owner or 
operator shall demonstrate initial compliance with the wastewater 
requirements by complying with the applicable provisions in Sec. 63.145 
of subpart G of this part, except that the owner or operator need not 
comply with the requirement to determine visible emissions that is 
specified in Sec. 63.145(j)(1) of subpart G of this part, and references 
to compounds in Table 8 of subpart G of this part are not applicable for 
the purposes of this subpart.
    (f) Initial compliance with the bag dump and product dryer 
provisions. Compliance with the particulate matter concentration limits 
specified in Sec. 63.1362(e) is demonstrated when the concentration of 
particulate matter is less than 0.01 gr/dscf, as measured using the 
method described in paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
    (g) Initial compliance with the pollution prevention alternative 
standard. The owner or operator shall demonstrate initial compliance 
with Sec. 63.1362(h)(2) and (3) for a PAI process unit by preparing the 
demonstration summary in accordance with paragraph (g)(1) of this 
section and by calculating baseline and target annual HAP and VOC 
factors in accordance with paragraphs (g)(2) and (3) of this section. To 
demonstrate initial compliance with Sec. 63.1362(h)(3), the owner or 
operator must also comply with the procedures for add-on control devices 
that are specified in paragraph (g)(4) of this section.
    (1) Demonstration summary. The owner or operator shall prepare a 
pollution prevention demonstration summary that shall contain, at a 
minimum, the information in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (iii) of this 
section. The demonstration summary shall be included in the 
Precompliance report as specified in Sec. 63.1368(e)(4).
    (i) Descriptions of the methodologies and forms used to measure and 
record consumption of HAP and VOC compounds.
    (ii) Descriptions of the methodologies and forms used to measure and 
record production of the product(s).
    (iii) Supporting documentation for the descriptions provided in 
accordance with paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section including, 
but not limited to, operator log sheets and copies of daily, monthly, 
and annual inventories of materials and products. The owner or operator 
must show how this documentation will be used to calculate the annual 
factors required in Sec. 63.1366(f)(1).
    (2) Baseline factors. The baseline HAP and VOC factors shall be 
calculated by

[[Page 344]]

dividing the consumption of total HAP and total VOC by the production 
rate, per process, for the first 3-year period in which the process was 
operational, beginning no earlier than the period consisting of the 1987 
through 1989 calendar years. Alternatively, for a process that has been 
operational for less than 3 years, but more than 1 year, the baseline 
factors shall be established for the time period from startup of the 
process until the present.
    (3) Target annual factors. The owner or operator must calculate 
target annual factors in accordance with either paragraph (g)(3)(i) or 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) To demonstrate initial compliance with Sec. 63.1362(h)(2), the 
target annual HAP factor must be equal to or less than 15 percent of the 
baseline HAP factor. For each reduction in a HAP that is also a VOC, the 
target annual VOC factor must be lower than the baseline VOC factor by 
an equivalent amount on a mass basis. For each reduction in a HAP that 
is not a VOC, the target annual factor must be equal to or less than the 
baseline VOC factor.
    (ii) To demonstrate initial compliance with Sec. 63.1362(h)(3)(i), 
the target annual HAP and VOC factors must be calculated as specified in 
paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section, except that when ``15 percent'' is 
referred to in paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section, ``50 percent'' shall 
apply for the purposes of this paragraph.
    (4) Requirements for add-on control devices. Initial compliance with 
the requirements for add-on control devices in Sec. 63.1362(h)(3)(ii) is 
demonstrated when the requirements in paragraphs (g)(4)(i) through (iii) 
of this section are met.
    (i) The yearly reductions associated with add-on controls that meet 
the criteria of Sec. 63.1362(h)(3)(ii)(A) through (D), must be equal to 
or greater than the amounts calculated using Equations 38 and 39 of this 
subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.037

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.038

Where:

HAPreduced = the annual HAP emissions reduction required by 
          add-on controls, kg/yr
HFbase = the baseline HAP factor, kg HAP consumed/kg product
RP2 = the fractional reduction in the annual HAP factor 
          achieved using pollution prevention where RP2 is 
          0.5
VOCreduced = required VOC emission reduction from add-on 
          controls, kg/yr
VFbase = baseline VOC factor, kg VOC emitted/kg production
VFP2 = reduction in VOC factor achieved by pollution 
          prevention, kg VOC emitted/kg production
VFannual = target annual VOC factor, kg VOC emitted/kg 
          production
Mprod = production rate, kg/yr

    (ii) Demonstration that the criteria in Sec. 63.1362(i)(3)(ii)(A) 
through (D) are met shall be accomplished through a description of the 
control device and of the material streams entering and exiting the 
control device.
    (iii) The annual reduction achieved by the add-on control shall be 
quantified using the methods described in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (h) Compliance with emissions averaging provisions. An owner or 
operator shall demonstrate compliance with the emissions averaging 
provisions of Sec. 63.1362(h) by fulfilling the requirements of 
paragraphs (h)(1) through (6) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall develop and submit for approval an 
Emissions Averaging Plan containing all the information required in 
Sec. 63.1367(d). The Emissions Averaging Plan shall be submitted no 
later than 18 months prior to the compliance date of the standard. The 
Administrator shall determine within 120 calendar days whether the 
Emissions Averaging Plan submitted by sources using emissions averaging 
presents sufficient information. The Administrator shall either

[[Page 345]]

approve the Emissions Averaging Plan, request changes, or request that 
the owner or operator submit additional information. Once the 
Administrator receives sufficient information, the Administrator shall 
approve, disapprove, or request changes to the plan within 120 days. If 
the Emissions Averaging Plan is disapproved, the owner or operator must 
still be in compliance with the standard by the compliance date.
    (2) For all points included in an emissions average, the owner or 
operator shall comply with the procedures that are specified in 
paragraphs (h)(2)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) Calculate and record monthly debits for all Group 1 emission 
points that are controlled to a level less stringent than the standard 
for those emission points. Equations in paragraph (h)(5) of this section 
shall be used to calculate debits.
    (ii) Calculate and record monthly credits for all Group 1 and Group 
2 emission points that are overcontrolled to compensate for the debits. 
Equations in paragraph (h)(6) of this section shall be used to calculate 
credits. All process vent, storage vessel, and wastewater emission 
points except those specified in Sec. 63.1362(h)(1) through (6) may be 
included in the credit calculation.
    (iii) Demonstrate that annual credits calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(6) of this section are greater than or equal to debits 
calculated according to paragraph (h)(5) of this section for the same 
annual compliance period. The initial demonstration in the Emissions 
Averaging Plan or operating permit application that credit-generating 
emission points will be capable of generating sufficient credits to 
offset the debit-generating emission points shall be made under 
representative operating conditions. After the compliance date, actual 
operating data shall be used for all debit and credit calculations.
    (iv) Demonstrate that debits calculated for a quarterly (3-month) 
period according to paragraph (h)(5) of this section are not more than 
1.30 times the credits for the same period calculated according to 
paragraph (h)(6) of this section. Compliance for the quarter shall be 
determined based on the ratio of credits and debits from that quarter, 
with 30 percent more debits than credits allowed on a quarterly basis.
    (v) Record and report quarterly and annual credits and debits as 
required in Secs. 63.1367(d) and 63.1368(d).
    (3) Credits and debits shall not include emissions during periods of 
malfunction. Credits and debits shall not include periods of startup and 
shutdown for continuous processes.
    (4) During periods of monitoring excursions, credits and debits 
shall be adjusted as specified in paragraphs (h)(4)(i) through (iii) of 
this section.
    (i) No credits shall be assigned to the credit-generating emission 
point.
    (ii) Maximum debits shall be assigned to the debit-generating 
emission point.
    (iii) The owner or operator may demonstrate to the Administrator 
that full or partial credits or debits should be assigned using the 
procedures in Sec. 63.150(l) of subpart G of this part.
    (5) Debits are generated by the difference between the actual 
emissions from a Group 1 emission point that is uncontrolled or 
controlled to a level less stringent than the applicable standard and 
the emissions allowed for the Group 1 emission point. Debits shall be 
calculated in accordance with the procedures specified in paragraphs 
(h)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) Source-wide debits shall be calculated using Equation 40 of this 
subpart.
    Debits and all terms of Equation 40 of this subpart are in units of 
Mg/month
Where:

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.039


[[Page 346]]


EPViU = uncontrolled emissions from process i calculated 
          according to the procedures specified in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) 
          of this section
EPViA = actual emissions from each Group 1 process i that is 
          uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less stringent than 
          the applicable standard. EPViA is calculated using 
          the procedures in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section
ESiU = uncontrolled emissions from storage vessel i 
          calculated according to the procedures specified in paragraph 
          (h)(5)(iii) of this section
ESiA = actual emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i 
          that is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less 
          stringent than the applicable standard. ESiA is 
          calculated using the procedures in paragraph (h)(5)(iii) of 
          this section
EWWiC = emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i if 
          the standard had been applied to the uncontrolled emissions. 
          EWWiC is calculated using the procedures in 
          paragraph (h)(5)(iv) of this section
EWWiA = actual emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream 
          i that is uncontrolled or is controlled to a level less 
          stringent than the applicable standard. EWWiA is 
          calculated using the procedures in paragraph (h)(5)(iv) of 
          this section
n = the number of emission points being included in the emissions 
          average; the value of n is not necessarily the same for 
          process vents, storage tanks, and wastewater

    (ii) Emissions from process vents shall be calculated in accordance 
with the procedures specified in paragraphs (h)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of 
this section.
    (A) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(C) of this section, 
uncontrolled emissions for process vents shall be calculated using the 
procedures that are specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (B) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(C) of this section, 
actual emissions for process vents shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section, as 
applicable.
    (C) As an alternative to the procedures described in paragraphs 
(h)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, for continuous processes, 
uncontrolled and actual emissions may be calculated by the procedures 
described in Sec. 63.150(g)(2) of subpart G of this part. For purposes 
of complying with this paragraph, a 90 percent reduction shall apply 
instead of the 98 percent reduction in Sec. 63.150(g)(2)(iii) of subpart 
G of this part, and the term ``process condenser'' shall apply instead 
of the term ``recovery device'' in Sec. 63.150(g)(2) for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    (iii) Uncontrolled emissions from storage vessels shall be 
calculated in accordance with the procedures described in paragraph 
(d)(1) of this section. Actual emissions from storage vessels shall be 
calculated using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(g)(3)(ii), 
(iii), or (iv) of subpart G of this subpart, as appropriate, except that 
when Sec. 63.150(g)(3)(ii)(B) refers to the procedures in Sec. 63.120(d) 
for determining percent reduction for a control device, 
Sec. 63.1365(d)(2) or (3) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (iv) Emissions from wastewater shall be calculated using the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(g)(5) of subpart G of this part.
    (6) Credits are generated by the difference between emissions that 
are allowed for each Group 1 and Group 2 emission point and the actual 
emissions from that Group 1 or Group 2 emission point that have been 
controlled after November 15, 1990 to a level more stringent than what 
is required in this subpart or any other State or Federal rule or 
statute. Credits shall be calculated in accordance with the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (h)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) Source-wide credits shall be calculated using Equation 41 of 
this subpart. Credits and all terms in Equation 41 of this subpart are 
in units of Mg/month, the baseline date is November 15, 1990, the terms 
consisting of a constant multiplied by the uncontrolled emissions are 
the emissions from each emission point subject to the standards in 
Sec. 63.1362(b) and (c) that is controlled to a level more stringent 
than the standard.
Where:


[[Page 347]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.040

EPV1iU = uncontrolled emissions from each Group 1 process i 
          calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 
          (h)(6)(iii)(A) of this section
EPV1iA = actual emissions from each Group 1 process i that is 
          controlled to a level more stringent than the applicable 
          standard. EPV1iA is calculated according to the 
          procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iii)(B) of this section
EPV2iB = emissions from each Group 2 process i at the 
          baseline date. EPV2iB is calculated according to 
          the procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iii)(C) of this section
EPV2iA = actual emissions from each Group 2 process i that is 
          controlled. EPV2iA is calculated according to the 
          procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iii)(C) of this section
ES1iU = uncontrolled emissions from each Group 1 storage 
          vessel i calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 
          (h)(6)(iv) of this section
ES1iA = actual emissions from each Group 1 storage vessel i 
          that is controlled to a level more stringent that the 
          applicable standard. ES1iA is calculated according 
          to the procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iv) of this section
ES2iB = emissions from each Group 2 storage vessel i at the 
          baseline date. ES2iB is calculated according to the 
          procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iv) of this section
ES2iA = actual emissions from each Group 2 storage vessel i 
          that is controlled. ES2iA is calculated according 
          to the procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(iv) of this section
EWW1iC = emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i if 
          the standard had been applied to the uncontrolled emissions. 
          EWW1iC is calculated according to the procedures in 
          paragraph (h)(6)(v) of this section
EWW1iA= emissions from each Group 1 wastewater stream i that 
          is controlled to a level more stringent that the applicable 
          standard. EWW1iA is calculated according to the 
          procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(v) of this section
EWW2iB = emissions from each Group 2 wastewater stream i at 
          the baseline date. EWW2iB is calculated according 
          to the procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(v) of this section
EWW2iA = actual emissions from each Group 2 wastewater stream 
          i that is controlled. EWW2iA is calculated 
          according to the procedures in paragraph (h)(6)(v) of this 
          section
n = number of Group 1 emission points that are included in the emissions 
          average. The value of n is not necessarily the same for 
          process vents, storage tanks, and wastewater
m = number of Group 2 emission points included in the emissions average. 
          The value of m is not necessarily the same for process vents, 
          storage tanks, and wastewater
D = discount factor equal to 0.9 for all credit-generating emission 
          points except those controlled by a pollution prevention 
          measure, which will not be discounted

    (ii) For an emission point controlled using a pollution prevention 
measure, the nominal efficiency for calculating credits shall be as 
determined as described in Sec. 63.150(j) of subpart G of this part.
    (iii) Emissions from process vents shall be calculated in accordance 
with the procedures specified in paragraphs (h)(6)(iii)(A) through (C) 
of this section.
    (A) Uncontrolled emissions from Group 1 process vents shall be 
calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(A) or (C) 
of this section.
    (B) Actual emissions from Group 1 process vents with a nominal 
efficiency greater than the applicable standard or a pollution 
prevention measure that achieves reductions greater than the applicable 
standard shall be calculated using Equation 42 of this subpart:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN99.041


[[Page 348]]


Where:

EPV1iA = actual emissions from each Group 1 process i that is 
          controlled to a level more stringent than the applicable 
          standard
EPV1iU = uncontrolled emissions from each Group 1 process i
Neff = nominal efficiency of control device or pollution 
          prevention measure, percent

    (C) Baseline and actual emissions from Group 2 process vents shall 
be calculated according to the procedures in Sec. 63.150(h)(2)(iii) and 
(iv) with the following modifications:
    (1) The term ``90 percent reduction'' shall apply instead of the 
term ``98 percent reduction''; and
    (2) When the phrase ``paragraph (g)(2)'' is referred to in 
Sec. 63.150(h)(2)(iii) and (iv), the provisions in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) 
of this section shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (iv) Uncontrolled emissions from storage vessels shall be calculated 
according to the procedures described in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section. Actual and baseline emissions from storage tanks shall be 
calculated according to the procedures specified in Sec. 63.150(h)(3) of 
subpart G of this part, except when Sec. 63.150(h)(3) refers to 
Sec. 63.150(g)(3)(i), paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall apply for 
the purposes of this subpart.
    (v) Emissions from wastewater shall be calculated using the 
procedures in Sec. 63.150(h)(5) of subpart G of this part.



Sec. 63.1366  Monitoring and inspection requirements.

    (a) To provide evidence of continued compliance with the standard, 
the owner or operator of any existing or new affected source shall 
install, operate, and maintain monitoring devices as specified in this 
section. During the initial compliance demonstration, maximum or minimum 
operating parameter levels, or other design and operating 
characteristics, as appropriate, shall be established for emission 
sources that will indicate the source is in compliance. Test data, 
calculations, or information from the evaluation of the control device 
design, as applicable, shall be used to establish the operating 
parameter level or characteristic.
    (b) Monitoring for control devices. (1) Parameters to monitor. 
Except as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, for each 
control device, the owner or operator shall install and operate 
monitoring devices and operate within the established parameter levels 
to ensure continued compliance with the standard. Monitoring parameters 
are specified for control scenarios in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through 
(xii) of this section, and are summarized in Table 3 of this subpart.
    (i) Periodic verification. For control devices that control vent 
streams containing total HAP emissions less than 0.91 Mg/yr, before 
control, monitoring shall consist of a periodic verification that the 
device is operating properly. This verification shall include, but not 
be limited to, a daily or more frequent demonstration that the unit is 
working as designed and may include the daily measurements of the 
parameters described in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (xii) of this 
section. This demonstration shall be included in the Precompliance plan, 
to be submitted 6 months prior to the compliance date of the standard.
    (ii) Scrubbers. For affected sources using liquid scrubbers, the 
owner or operator shall establish a minimum scrubber liquid flow rate or 
pressure drop as a site-specific operating parameter which must be 
measured and recorded at least once every 15 minutes during the period 
in which the scrubber is controlling HAP from an emission stream as 
required by the standards in Sec. 63.1362. If the scrubber uses a 
caustic solution to remove acid emissions, the pH of the effluent 
scrubber liquid shall also be monitored once a day. The minimum scrubber 
liquid flow rate or pressure drop shall be based on the conditions under 
which the initial compliance demonstration was conducted.
    (A) The monitoring device used to determine the pressure drop shall 
be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within a gage 
pressure of 10 percent of the maximum pressure drop 
measured.
    (B) The monitoring device used for measurement of scrubber liquid 
flowrate shall be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within 
10 percent of the design scrubber liquid flowrate.

[[Page 349]]

    (C) The monitoring device shall be calibrated annually.
    (iii) Condensers. For each condenser, the owner or operator shall 
establish the maximum condenser outlet gas temperature as a site-
specific operating parameter which must be measured and recorded at 
least once every 15 minutes during the period in which the condenser is 
controlling HAP from an emission stream as required by the standards in 
Sec. 63.1362.
    (A) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
2 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius or 
2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The temperature monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (iv) Regenerative carbon adsorbers. For each regenerative carbon 
adsorber, the owner or operator shall comply with the provisions in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(A) through (F) of this section.
    (A) Establish the regeneration cycle characteristics specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(A) (1) through (4) of this section under absolute 
or hypothetical peak-case conditions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1365(b)(11)(i) or (ii).
    (1) Minimum regeneration frequency (i.e., operating time since last 
regeneration);
    (2) Minimum temperature to which the bed is heated during 
regeneration;
    (3) Maximum temperature to which the bed is cooled, measured within 
15 minutes of completing the cooling phase; and
    (4) Minimum regeneration stream flow.
    (B) Monitor and record the regeneration cycle characteristics 
specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(B) (1) through (4) of this section 
for each regeneration cycle.
    (1) Regeneration frequency (i.e., operating time since end of last 
regeneration);
    (2) Temperature to which the bed is heated during regeneration;
    (3) Temperature to which the bed is cooled, measured within 15 
minutes of the completion of the cooling phase; and
    (4) Regeneration stream flow.
    (C) Use a temperature monitoring device that is accurate to within 
2 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius or 
2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (D) Use a regeneration stream flow monitoring device capable of 
recording the total regeneration stream flow to within 10 
percent of the established value (i.e., accurate to within 
10 percent of the reading).
    (E) Calibrate the temperature and flow monitoring devices annually.
    (F) Conduct an annual check for bed poisoning in accordance with 
manufacturer's specifications.
    (v) Nonregenerative carbon adsorbers. For each nonregenerative 
carbon adsorption system such as a carbon canister that does not 
regenerate the carbon bed directly onsite in the control device, the 
owner or operator shall replace the existing carbon bed in the control 
device with fresh carbon on a regular schedule based on one of the 
following procedures:
    (A) Monitor the TOC concentration level in the exhaust vent stream 
from the carbon adsorption system on a regular schedule, and replace the 
existing carbon with fresh carbon immediately when carbon breakthrough 
is indicated. The monitoring frequency shall be daily or at an interval 
no greater than 20 percent of the time required to consume the total 
carbon working capacity under absolute or hypothetical peak-case 
conditions as defined in Sec. 63.1365(b)(11)(i) or (ii), whichever is 
longer.
    (B) Establish the maximum time interval between replacement, and 
replace the existing carbon before this time interval elapses. The time 
interval shall be established based on the conditions anticipated under 
absolute or hypothetical peak-case, as defined in Sec. 63.1365(b)(11)(i) 
or (ii).
    (vi) Flares. For each flare, the presence of the pilot flame shall 
be monitored at least once every 15 minutes during the period in which 
the flare is controlling HAP from an emission stream subject to the 
standards in Sec. 63.1362. The monitoring device shall be calibrated 
annually.
    (vii) Thermal incinerators. For each thermal incinerator, the owner 
or operator shall monitor the temperature of the gases exiting the 
combustion chamber as the site-specific operating parameter which must 
be measured

[[Page 350]]

and recorded at least once every 15 minutes during the period in which 
the combustion device is controlling HAP from an emission stream subject 
to the standards in Sec. 63.1362.
    (A) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or 2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (viii) Catalytic incinerators. For each catalytic incinerator, the 
parameter levels that the owner or operator shall establish are the 
minimum temperature of the gas stream immediately before the catalyst 
bed and the minimum temperature difference across the catalyst bed. The 
owner or operator shall monitor the temperature of the gas stream 
immediately before and after the catalyst bed, and calculate the 
temperature difference across the catalyst bed, at least once every 15 
minutes during the period in which the catalytic incinerator is 
controlling HAP from an emission stream subject to the standards in 
Sec. 63.1362.
    (A) The temperature monitoring devices must be accurate to within 
0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or 2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (B) The temperature monitoring devices must be calibrated annually.
    (ix) Process heaters and boilers. (A) Except as specified in 
paragraph (b)(1)(ix)(B) of this section, for each boiler or process 
heater, the owner or operator shall monitor the temperature of the gases 
exiting the combustion chamber as the site-specific operating parameter 
which must be monitored and recorded at least every 15 minutes during 
the period in which the boiler or process heater is controlling HAP from 
an emission stream subject to the standards in Sec. 63.1362.
    (1) The temperature monitoring device must be accurate to within 
0.75 percent of the temperature measured in degrees Celsius 
or 2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.
    (2) The temperature monitoring device must be calibrated annually.
    (B) The owner or operator is exempt from the monitoring requirements 
specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ix)(A) of this section if either:
    (1) All vent streams are introduced with primary fuel; or
    (2) The design heat input capacity of the boiler or process heater 
is 44 megawatts or greater.
    (x) Continuous emission monitor. As an alternative to the parameters 
specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (ix) of this section, an 
owner or operator may monitor and record the outlet HAP concentration or 
both the outlet TOC concentration and outlet total HCl and chlorine 
concentration at least every 15 minutes during the period in which the 
control device is controlling HAP from an emission stream subject to the 
standards in Sec. 63.1362. The owner or operator need not monitor the 
total HCl and chlorine concentration if the owner or operator determines 
that the emission stream does not contain HCl or chlorine. The owner or 
operator need not monitor the TOC concentration if the owner or operator 
determines the emission stream does not contain organic compounds. The 
HAP or TOC monitor must meet the requirements of Performance 
Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B of part 60 and must be installed, 
calibrated, and maintained, according to Sec. 63.8 of subpart A of this 
part. As part of the QA/QC Plan, calibration of the device must include, 
at a minimum, quarterly cylinder gas audits. If supplemental gases are 
introduced before the control device, the monitored concentration shall 
be corrected as specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(7).
    (xi) Fabric filters. For each fabric filter used to control 
particulate matter emissions from bag dumps and product dryers subject 
to Sec. 63.1362(e), the owner or operator shall install, calibrate, 
maintain, and continuously operate a bag leak detection system that 
meets the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1)(xi)(A) through (G) of this 
section.
    (A) The bag leak detection system sensor must provide output of 
relative particulate matter emissions.
    (B) The bag leak detection system must be equipped with an alarm 
system that will sound when an increase in particulate matter emissions 
over a preset level is detected.

[[Page 351]]

    (C) For positive pressure fabric filters, a bag leak detector must 
be installed in each fabric filter compartment or cell. If a negative 
pressure or induced air filter is used, the bag leak detector must be 
installed downstream of the fabric filter. Where multiple bag leak 
detectors are required (for either type of fabric filter), the system 
instrumentation and alarm may be shared among detectors.
    (D) The bag leak detection system shall be installed, operated, 
calibrated and maintained in a manner consistent with available guidance 
from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or, in the absence of such 
guidance, the manufacturer's written specifications and instructions.
    (E) Calibration of the system shall, at a minimum, consist of 
establishing the relative baseline output level by adjusting the range 
and the averaging period of the device and establishing the alarm set 
points and the alarm delay time.
    (F) Following initial adjustment, the owner or operator shall not 
adjust the sensitivity or range, averaging period, alarm set points, or 
alarm delay time, except as established in an operation and maintenance 
plan that is to be submitted with the Precompliance plan. In no event 
shall the sensitivity be increased more than 100 percent or decreased by 
more than 50 percent over a 365-day period unless such adjustment 
follows a complete baghouse inspection which demonstrates the baghouse 
is in good operating condition.
    (G) If the alarm on a bag leak detection system is triggered, the 
owner or operator shall, within 1 hour of an alarm, initiate the 
procedures to identify the cause of the alarm and take corrective action 
as specified in the corrective action plan.
    (xii) For each waste management unit, treatment process, or control 
device used to comply with Sec. 63.1362(d), the owner or operator shall 
comply with the procedures specified in Sec. 63.143 of subpart G of this 
part, except that when the procedures to request approval to monitor 
alternative parameters according to the procedures in Sec. 63.151(f) are 
referred to in Sec. 63.143(d)(3), the procedures in paragraph (b)(4) of 
this section shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (xiii) Closed-vent system visual inspections. The owner or operator 
shall perform monthly visual inspections of each closed vent system as 
specified in Sec. 63.1362(j).
    (2) Averaging periods. Averaging periods for parametric monitoring 
levels shall be established according to paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through 
(iii) of this section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section, a 
daily (24-hour) or block average shall be calculated as the average of 
all values for a monitored parameter level set according to the 
procedures in (b)(3)(iii) of this section recorded during the operating 
day or block.
    (ii) The operating day or block shall be defined in the Notification 
of Compliance Status report. The operating day may be from midnight to 
midnight or another continuous 24-hour period. The operating block may 
be used as an averaging period only for vents from batch operations, and 
is limited to a period of time that is, at a maximum, equal to the time 
from the beginning to end of a series of consecutive batch operations.
    (iii) Monitoring values taken during periods in which the control 
devices are not controlling HAP from an emission stream subject to the 
standards in Sec. 63.1362, as indicated by periods of no flow or periods 
when only streams that are not subject to the standards in Sec. 63.1362 
are controlled, shall not be considered in the averages. Where flow to 
the device could be intermittent, the owner or operator shall install, 
calibrate and operate a flow indicator at the inlet or outlet of the 
control device to identify periods of no flow.
    (3) Procedures for setting parameter levels for control devices used 
to control emissions from process vents. (i) Small control devices. 
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, for devices 
controlling less than 10 tons/yr of HAP for which a performance test is 
not required, the parameteric levels shall be set based on the design 
evaluation required in Sec. 63.1365(c)(3)(i)(A). If a performance test 
is conducted, the

[[Page 352]]

monitoring parameter level shall be established according to the 
procedures in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) Large control devices. For devices controlling greater than or 
equal to 10 tons/yr of HAP for which a performance test is required, the 
parameter level must be established as follows:
    (A) If the operating parameter level to be established is a maximum 
or minimum, it must be based on the average of the average values from 
each of the three test runs.
    (B) The owner or operator may establish the parametric monitoring 
level(s) based on the performance test supplemented by engineering 
assessments and/or manufacturer's recommendations. Performance testing 
is not required to be conducted over the entire range of expected 
parameter values. The rationale for the specific level for each 
parameter, including any data and calculations used to develop the 
level(s) and a description of why the level indicates proper operation 
of the control device shall be provided in the Precompliance plan. 
Determination of the parametric monitoring level using these procedures 
is subject to review and approval by the Administrator.
    (iii) Parameter levels for control devices controlling batch process 
vents. For devices controlling batch process vents alone or in 
combination with other streams, the level(s) shall be established in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) A single level for the batch process(es) shall be calculated 
from the initial compliance demonstration.
    (B) The owner or operator may establish separate levels for each 
batch emission episode or combination of emission episodes selected to 
be controlled. If separate monitoring levels are established, the owner 
or operator must provide a record indicating at what point in the daily 
schedule or log of processes required to be recorded per the 
requirements of Sec. 63.1367(b)(7), the parameter being monitored 
changes levels and must record at least one reading of the new parameter 
level, even if the duration of monitoring for the new parameter level is 
less than 15 minutes.
    (4) Requesting approval to monitor alternative parameters. The owner 
or operator may request approval to monitor parameters other than those 
required by paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) through (xiii) of this section. The 
request shall be submitted according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.8(f) of subpart A of this part or in the Precompliance report 
(as specified in Sec. 63.1368(e)).
    (5) Monitoring for the alternative standards. For control devices 
that are used to comply with the provisions of Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) and 
(c)(4), the owner or operator shall monitor and record the outlet TOC 
concentration and the outlet total HCl and chlorine concentration at 
least once every 15 minutes during the period in which the device is 
controlling HAP from emission streams subject to the standards in 
Sec. 63.1362. A TOC monitor meeting the requirements of Performance 
Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60 shall be installed, 
calibrated, and maintained, according to Sec. 63.8 of subpart A of this 
part. The owner or operator need not monitor the total HCl and chlorine 
concentration if the owner or operator determines that the emission 
stream does not contain HCl or chlorine. The owner or operator need not 
monitor for TOC concentration if the owner or operator determines that 
the emission stream does not contain organic compounds. If supplemental 
gases are introduced before the control device, the monitored 
concentration shall be corrected as specified in Sec. 63.1365(a)(7).
    (6) Exceedances of operating parameters. An exceedance of an 
operating parameter is defined as one of the following:
    (i) If the parameter level, averaged over the operating day or 
block, is below a minimum value established during the initial 
compliance demonstration.
    (ii) If the parameter level, averaged over the operating day or 
block, is above the maximum value established during the initial 
compliance demonstration.
    (iii) A loss of all pilot flames for a flare during an operating day 
or block. Multiple losses of all pilot flames during an operating day 
constitutes one exceedance.

[[Page 353]]

    (iv) Each operating day or block for which the time interval between 
replacement of a nonregenerative carbon adsorber exceeds the interval 
established in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section.
    (v) Each instance in which procedures to initiate the response to a 
bag leak detector alarm within 1 hour of the alarm as specified in the 
corrective action plan.
    (7) Excursions. Excursions are defined by either of the two cases 
listed in paragraph (b)(7)(i) or (ii) of this section. An excursion also 
occurs if the periodic verification for a small control device is not 
conducted as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
    (i) When the period of control device operation is 4 hours or 
greater in an operating day or block and monitoring data are 
insufficient to constitute a valid hour of data, as defined in paragraph 
(b)(7)(iii) of this section, for at least 75 percent of the operating 
hours.
    (ii) When the period of control device operation is less than 4 
hours in an operating day or block and more than 1 of the hours during 
the period of operation does not constitute a valid hour of data due to 
insufficient monitoring data.
    (iii) Monitoring data are insufficient to constitute a valid hour of 
data, as used in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) and (ii) of this section, if 
measured values are unavailable for any of the required 15-minute 
periods within the hour.
    (8) Violations. Exceedances of parameters monitored according to the 
provisions of paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) and (b)(1) (iv) through (ix) of this 
section or excursions as defined by paragraphs (b)(7) (i) and (ii) of 
this section constitute violations of the operating limit according to 
paragraphs (b)(8) (i), (ii), and (iv) of this section. Exceedances of 
the temperature limit monitored according to the provisions of paragraph 
(b)(1)(iii) of this section or exceedances of the outlet concentrations 
monitored according to the provisions of paragraph (b)(1)(x) of this 
section constitute violations of the emission limit according to 
paragraphs (b)(8) (i), (ii), and (iv) of this section. Exceedances of 
the outlet concentrations monitored according to the provisions of 
paragraph (b)(5) of this section constitute violations of the emission 
limit according to the provisions of paragraphs (b)(8) (iii) and (iv) of 
this section.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for 
episodes occurring more than once per day, exceedances of established 
parameter limits or excursions will result in no more than one violation 
per operating day for each monitored item of equipment utilized in the 
process.
    (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, for 
control devices used for more than one process in the course of an 
operating day, exceedances or excursions will result in no more than one 
violation per operating day, per control device, for each process for 
which the control device is in service.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section, 
exceedances of the 20 ppmv TOC outlet emission limit, averaged over the 
operating day, will result in no more than one violation per day per 
control device. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this 
section, exceedances of the 20 ppmv HCl and chlorine outlet emission 
limit, averaged over the operating day, will result in no more than one 
violation per day per control device.
    (iv) Periods of time when monitoring measurements exceed the 
parameter values as well as periods of inadequate monitoring data do not 
constitute a violation if they occur during a startup, shutdown, or 
malfunction, and the facility follows its startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan.
    (c) Monitoring for uncontrolled emission rates. The owner or 
operator shall demonstrate continuous compliance with the emission limit 
in Sec. 63.1362 (b)(2)(i) or (b)(4)(i) by calculating daily a 365-day 
rolling summation of uncontrolled emissions based on the uncontrolled 
emissions per emission episode, as calculated using the procedures in 
Sec. 63.1365(c)(2), and records of the number of batches produced. Each 
day that the summation for a process exceeds 0.15 Mg/yr is considered a 
violation of the emission limit.
    (d) Monitoring for equipment leaks. The standard for equipment leaks 
is based

[[Page 354]]

on monitoring. All monitoring requirements for equipment leaks are 
specified in Sec. 63.1363.
    (e) Monitoring for heat exchanger systems. The standard for heat 
exchanger systems is based on monitoring. All monitoring requirements 
for heat exchanger systems are specified in Sec. 63.1362(f).
    (f) Monitoring for the pollution prevention alternative standard. 
The owner or operator of an affected source that chooses to comply with 
the requirements of Sec. 63.1362(g) (2) or (3) shall calculate annual 
rolling average values of the HAP and VOC factors in accordance with the 
procedures specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this section. If complying 
with Sec. 63.1362(g)(3), the owner or operator shall also comply with 
the monitoring requirements specified in paragraph (b) of this section 
for the applicable add-on air pollution control device.
    (1) Annual factors. The annual HAP and VOC factors shall be 
calculated in accordance with the procedures specified in paragraphs 
(f)(1) (i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) The consumption of both total HAP and total VOC shall be divided 
by the production rate, per process, for 12-month periods at the 
frequency specified in either paragraph (f)(1) (ii) or (iii) of this 
section, as applicable.
    (ii) For continuous processes, the annual factors shall be 
calculated every 30 days for the 12-month period preceding the 30th day 
(annual rolling average calculated every 30 days). A process with both 
batch and continuous operations is considered a continuous process for 
the purposes of this section.
    (iii) For batch processes, the annual factors shall be calculated 
every 10 batches for the 12-month period preceding the 10th batch 
(annual rolling average calculated every 10 batches). Additional annual 
factors shall be calculated every 12 months during the period before the 
10th batch if more than 12 months elapse before the 10th batch is 
produced.
    (2) Violations. Each rolling average that exceeds the target value 
established in Sec. 63.1365(g)(3) is considered a violation of the 
emission limit.
    (g) Monitoring for emissions averaging. The owner or operator of an 
affected source that chooses to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1362(h) shall meet all monitoring requirements specified in 
paragraph (b) of this section, as applicable, for all processes, storage 
tanks, and waste management units included in the emissions average.



Sec. 63.1367  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) Requirements of subpart A of this part. The owner or operator of 
an affected source shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements in 
subpart A of this part as specified in Table 1 of this subpart and in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) Data retention. Each owner or operator of an affected source 
shall keep copies of all records and reports required by this subpart 
for at least 5 years, as specified in Sec. 63.10(b)(1) of subpart A of 
this part.
    (2) Records of applicability determinations. The owner or operator 
of a stationary source that is not subject to this subpart shall keep a 
record of the applicability determination, as specified in 
Sec. 63.10(b)(3) of subpart A of this part.
    (3) Startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan. The owner or operator 
of an affected source shall develop and implement a written startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3) of 
subpart A of this part. This plan shall describe, in detail, procedures 
for operating and maintaining the affected source during periods of 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction and a program for corrective action 
for a malfunctioning process, air pollution control, and monitoring 
equipment used to comply with this subpart. The owner or operator of an 
affected source shall keep the current and superseded versions of this 
plan onsite, as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(v) of subpart A of this 
part. The owner or operator shall keep the startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction records specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (iii) of 
this section. Reports related to the plan shall be submitted as 
specified in Sec. 63.1368(i).
    (i) The owner or operator shall record the occurrence and duration 
of each malfunction of air pollution control equipment used to comply 
with this subpart, as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iii) of subpart A of 
this part.

[[Page 355]]

    (ii) The owner or operator shall record the occurrence and duration 
of each malfunction of continuous monitoring systems used to comply with 
this subpart.
    (iii) For each startup, shutdown, or malfunction, the owner or 
operator shall record all information necessary to demonstrate that the 
procedures specified in the affected source's startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan were followed, as specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iii) of 
subpart A of this part; alternatively, the owner or operator shall 
record any actions taken that are not consistent with the plan, as 
specified in Sec. 63.6(e)(3)(iv) of subpart A of this part.
    (4) Recordkeeping requirements for sources with continuous 
monitoring systems. The owner or operator of an affected source who 
installs a continuous monitoring system to comply with the alternative 
standards in Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) or (c)(4) shall maintain records 
specified in Sec. 63.10(c)(1) through (14) of subpart A of this part.
    (5) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. For 
new affected sources, each owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions regarding construction and reconstruction in Sec. 63.5 of 
subpart A of this part.
    (b) Records of equipment operation. The owner or operator must keep 
the following records up-to-date and readily accessible:
    (1) Each measurement of a control device operating parameter 
monitored in accordance with Sec. 63.1366 and each measurement of a 
treatment process parameter monitored in accordance with the provisions 
of Sec. 63.1362(d).
    (2) For processes subject to Sec. 63.1362(g), records of 
consumption, production, and the rolling average values of the HAP and 
VOC factors.
    (3) For each continuous monitoring system used to comply with the 
alternative standards in Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) and (c)(4), records 
documenting the completion of calibration checks and maintenance of the 
continuous monitoring systems.
    (4) For processes in compliance with the 0.15 Mg/yr emission limit 
of Sec. 63.1362(b)(2)(i) or (b)(4)(i), records of the rolling annual 
calculations of uncontrolled emissions.
    (5) For each bag leak detector used to monitor particulate HAP 
emissions from a fabric filter, the owner or operator shall maintain 
records of any bag leak detection alarm, including the date and time, 
with a brief explanation of the cause of the alarm and the corrective 
action taken.
    (6) The owner or operator of an affected source that complies with 
the standards for process vents, storage tanks, and wastewater systems 
shall maintain up-to-date, readily accessible records of the information 
specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(i) through (vii) of this section to 
document that HAP emissions or HAP loadings (for wastewater) are below 
the limits specified in Sec. 63.1362:
    (i) The initial calculations of uncontrolled and controlled 
emissions of gaseous organic HAP and HCl per batch for each process.
    (ii) The wastewater concentrations and flow rates per POD and 
process.
    (iii) The number of batches per year for each batch process.
    (iv) The operating hours per year for continuous processes.
    (v) The number of batches and the number of operating hours for 
processes that contain both batch and continuous operations.
    (vi) The number of tank turnovers per year, if used in an emissions 
average or for determining applicability of a new PAI process unit.
    (vii) A description of absolute or hypothetical peak-case operating 
conditions as determined using the procedures in Sec. 63.1365(b)(11).
    (viii) Periods of planned routine maintenance as described in 
Sec. 63.1362(c)(5).
    (7) Daily schedule or log of each operating scenario prior to its 
operation.
    (c) Records of equipment leak detection and repair. The owner or 
operator of an affected source subject to the equipment leak standards 
in Sec. 63.1363 shall implement the recordkeeping requirements specified 
in Sec. 63.1363(g). All records shall be retained for a period of 5 
years, in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.10(b)(1) of 
subpart A of this part.
    (d) Records of emissions averaging. The owner or operator of an 
affected source

[[Page 356]]

that chooses to comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.1362(h) shall 
maintain up-to-date records of the following information:
    (1) An Emissions Averaging Plan which shall include in the plan, for 
all emission points included in each of the emissions averages, the 
information listed in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (v) of this section.
    (i) The identification of all emission points in each emissions 
average.
    (ii) The values of all parameters needed for input to the emission 
debits and credits equations in Sec. 63.1365(h).
    (iii) The calculations used to obtain the debits and credits.
    (iv) The estimated values for all parameters required to be 
monitored under Sec. 63.1366(g) for each emission point included in an 
average. These parameter values, or as appropriate, limited ranges for 
parameter values, shall be specified as enforceable operating conditions 
for the operation of the process, storage vessel, or waste management 
unit, as appropriate. Changes to the parameters must be reported as 
required by Sec. 63.1368(k).
    (v) A statement that the compliance demonstration, monitoring, 
inspection, recordkeeping and reporting provisions in Sec. 63.1365(h), 
Sec. 63.1366(g), and Sec. 63.1368(k) that are applicable to each 
emission point in the emissions average will be implemented beginning on 
the date of compliance.
    (2) The Emissions Averaging Plan shall demonstrate that the 
emissions from the emission points proposed to be included in the 
average will not result in greater hazard or, at the option of the 
operating permit authority, greater risk to human health or the 
environment than if the emission points were controlled according to the 
provisions in Sec. 63.1362(b) through (d).
    (i) This demonstration of hazard or risk equivalency shall be made 
to the satisfaction of the operating permit authority.
    (A) The Administrator may require an owner or operator to use 
specific methodologies and procedures for making a hazard or risk 
determination.
    (B) The demonstration and approval of hazard or risk equivalency 
shall be made according to any guidance that the Administrator makes 
available for use or any other technically sound information or methods.
    (ii) An Emissions Averaging Plan that does not demonstrate hazard or 
risk equivalency to the satisfaction of the Administrator shall not be 
approved. The Administrator may require such adjustments to the 
Emissions Averaging Plan as are necessary in order to ensure that the 
average will not result in greater hazard or risk to human health or the 
environment than would result if the emission points were controlled 
according to Sec. 63.1362(b) through (d).
    (iii) A hazard or risk equivalency demonstration must satisfy the 
requirements specified in paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) (A) through (C) of this 
section.
    (A) Be a quantitative, comparative chemical hazard or risk 
assessment;
    (B) Account for differences between averaging and nonaveraging 
options in chemical hazard or risk to human health or the environment; 
and
    (C) Meet any requirements set by the Administrator for such 
demonstrations.
    (3) Records as specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
    (4) A calculation of the debits and credits as specified in 
Sec. 63.1365(h) for the last quarter and the prior four quarters.
    (e) The owner or operator of an affected source subject to the 
requirements for heat exchanger systems in Sec. 63.1362(g) shall retain 
the records as specified in Sec. 63.104(f)(1)(i) through (iv) of subpart 
G of this part.
    (f) For each vapor collection system or closed-vent system that 
contains bypass lines that could divert a vent stream away from the 
control device and to the atmosphere, the owner or operator shall keep a 
record of the information specified in either paragraph (f) (1) or (2) 
of this section.
    (1) Hourly records of whether the flow indicator specified under 
Sec. 63.1362(j)(1) was operating and whether a diversion was detected at 
any time during the hour, as well as records of the times and durations 
of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the control device 
or the flow indicator is not operating.

[[Page 357]]

    (2) Where a seal mechanism is used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1362(j)(2), hourly records of flow are not required. In such 
cases, the owner or operator shall record that the monthly visual 
inspection of the seals or closure mechanism has been done, and shall 
record the occurrence of all periods when the seal mechanism is broken, 
the bypass line valve position has changed, or the key for a lock-and-
key type lock has been checked out, and records of any car-seal that has 
broken.
    (g) Records of primary use. For a PAI process unit that is used to 
produce a given material for use as a PAI as well as for other purposes, 
the owner or operator shall keep records of the total production and the 
production for use as a PAI on a semiannual or more frequent basis if 
the use as a PAI is not the primary use.



Sec. 63.1368  Reporting requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of an affected source shall comply with 
the reporting requirements of paragraphs (b) through (l) of this 
section. The owner or operator shall also comply with applicable 
paragraphs of Secs. 63.9 and 63.10 of subpart A of this part, as 
specified in Table 1 of this subpart.
    (b) Initial notification. The owner or operator shall submit the 
applicable initial notification in accordance with Sec. 63.9(b) or (d) 
of subpart A of this part.
    (c) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. The 
owner or operator who is subject to Sec. 63.5(b)(3) of subpart A of this 
part shall submit to the Administrator an application for approval of 
the construc-tion of a new major source, the reconstruction of a major 
affected source, or the reconstruction of a major affected source 
subject to the standards. The application shall be prepared in 
accordance with Sec. 63.5(d) of subpart A of this part.
    (d) Notification of continuous monitoring system performance 
evaluation. An owner or operator who is required by the Administrator to 
conduct a performance evaluation for a continuous monitoring system that 
is used to comply with the alternative standard in Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) or 
(c)(4) shall notify the Administrator of the date of the performance 
evaluation as specified in Sec. 63.8(e)(2) of subpart A of this part.
    (e) Precompliance plan. The Precompliance plan shall be submitted at 
least 6 months prior to the compliance date of the standard. For new 
sources, the Precompliance plan shall be submitted to the Administrator 
with the application for approval of construction or reconstruction. The 
Administrator shall have 90 days to approve or disapprove the 
Precompliance plan. The Precompliance plan shall be considered approved 
if the Administrator either approves it in writing, or fails to 
disapprove it in writing within the 90-day time period. The 90-day 
period shall begin when the Administrator receives the Precompliance 
plan. If the Precompliance plan is disapproved, the owner or operator 
must still be in compliance with the standard by the compliance date. To 
change any of the information submitted in the Precompliance plan, the 
owner or operator shall notify the Administrator at least 90 days before 
the planned change is to be implemented; the change shall be considered 
approved if the Administrator either approves the change in writing, or 
fails to disapprove the change in writing within 90 days of receipt of 
the change. The Precompliance plan shall include the information 
specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (5) of this section.
    (1) Requests for approval to use alternative monitoring parameters 
or requests to set monitoring parameters according to 
Sec. 63.1366(b)(4).
    (2) Descriptions of the daily or per batch demonstrations to verify 
that control devices subject to Sec. 63.1366(b)(1)(i) are operating as 
designed.
    (3) Data and rationale used to support the parametric monitoring 
level(s) that are set according to Sec. 63.1366(b)(3)(ii)(B).
    (4) For owners and operators complying with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1362(i), the pollution prevention demonstration summary required 
in Sec. 63.1365(g)(3).
    (5) Data and rationale used to support an engineering assessment to 
calculate uncontrolled emissions from process vents as required in 
Sec. 63.1365(c)(2)(ii).

[[Page 358]]

    (6) For fabric filters that are monitored with bag leak detectors, 
an operation and maintenance plan that describes proper operation and 
maintenance procedures, and a corrective action plan that describes 
corrective actions to be taken, and the timing of those actions, when 
the particulate matter concentration exceeds the setpoint and activates 
the alarm.
    (f) Notification of compliance status report. The Notification of 
Compliance Status report required under Sec. 63.9(h) shall be submitted 
no later than 150 calendar days after the compliance date and shall 
include the information specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (7) of 
this section.
    (1) The results of any applicability determinations, emission 
calculations, or analyses used to identify and quantify HAP emissions 
from the affected source.
    (2) The results of emissions profiles, performance tests, 
engineering analyses, design evaluations, or calculations used to 
demonstrate compliance. For performance tests, results should include 
descriptions of sampling and analysis procedures and quality assurance 
procedures.
    (3) Descriptions of monitoring devices, monitoring frequencies, and 
the values of monitored parameters established during the initial 
compliance determinations, including data and calculations to support 
the levels established.
    (4) Operating scenarios.
    (5) Descriptions of absolute or hypothetical peak-case operating 
and/or testing conditions for control devices.
    (6) Identification of emission points subject to overlapping 
requirements described in Sec. 63.1360(h) and the authority under which 
the owner or operator will comply, and identification of emission 
sources discharging to devices described by Sec. 63.1362(l).
    (7) Anticipated periods of planned routine maintenance during which 
the owner or operator would not be in compliance with the provisions in 
Sec. 63.1362(c)(1) through (4).
    (8) Percentage of total production from a PAI process unit that is 
anticipated to be produced for use as a PAI in the 3 years after either 
June 23, 1999 or startup, whichever is later.
    (g) Periodic reports. The owner or operator shall prepare Periodic 
reports in accordance with paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section and 
submit them to the Administrator.
    (1) Submittal schedule. Except as provided in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) 
and (ii) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit Periodic 
reports semiannually, beginning 60 operating days after the end of the 
applicable reporting period. The first report shall be submitted no 
later than 240 days after the date the Notification of Compliance Status 
report is due and shall cover the 6-month period beginning on the date 
the Notification of Compliance Status report is due.
    (i) The Administrator may determine on a case-by-case basis that 
more frequent reporting is necessary to accurately assess the compliance 
status of the affected source.
    (ii) Quarterly reports shall be submitted when the monitoring data 
are used to comply with the alternative standards in Sec. 63.1362(b)(6) 
or (c)(4) and the source experiences excess emissions. Once an affected 
source reports excess emissions, the affected source shall follow a 
quarterly reporting format until a request to reduce reporting frequency 
is approved. If an owner or operator submits a request to reduce the 
frequency of reporting, the provisions in Sec. 63.10(e)(3) (ii) and 
(iii) of subpart A of this part shall apply, except that the term 
``excess emissions and continuous monitoring system performance report 
and/or summary report'' shall mean ``Periodic report'' for the purposes 
of this section.
    (2) Content of periodic report. The owner or operator shall include 
the information in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) through (vi) of this section, as 
applicable.
    (i) Each Periodic report must include the information in 
Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(vi)(A) through (M) of subpart A of this part, as 
applicable.
    (ii) If the total duration of excess emissions, parameter 
exceedances, or excursions for the reporting period is 1 percent or 
greater of the total operating time for the reporting period, or the 
total continuous monitoring system downtime for the reporting period

[[Page 359]]

is 5 percent or greater of the total operating time for the reporting 
period, the Periodic report must include the information in paragraphs 
(g)(2)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Monitoring data, including 15-minute monitoring values as well 
as daily average values of monitored parameters, for all operating days 
when the average values were outside the ranges established in the 
Notification of Compliance Status report or operating permit.
    (B) Duration of excursions, as defined in Sec. 63.1366(b)(7).
    (C) Operating logs and operating scenarios for all operating days 
when the values are outside the levels established in the Notification 
of Compliance Status report or operating permit.
    (D) When a continuous monitoring system is used, the information 
required in Sec. 63.10(c)(5) through (13) of subpart A of this part.
    (iii) For each vapor collection system or closed vent system with a 
bypass line subject to Sec. 63.1362(j)(1), records required under 
Sec. 63.1366(f) of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the 
control device through a bypass line. For each vapor collection system 
or closed vent system with a bypass line subject to Sec. 63.1362(j)(2), 
records required under Sec. 63.1366(f) of all periods in which the seal 
mechanism is broken, the bypass valve position has changed, or the key 
to unlock the bypass line valve was checked out.
    (iv) The information in paragraphs (g)(2)(iv)(A) through (D) of this 
section shall be stated in the Periodic report, when applicable.
    (A) No excess emissions.
    (B) No exceedances of a parameter.
    (C) No excursions.
    (D) No continuous monitoring system has been inoperative, out of 
control, repaired, or adjusted.
    (v) For each storage vessel subject to control requirements:
    (A) Actual periods of planned routine maintenance during the 
reporting period in which the control device does not meet the 
specifications of Sec. 63.1362(c)(5); and
    (B) Anticipated periods of planned routine maintenance for the next 
reporting period.
    (vi) For each PAI process unit that does not meet the definition of 
primary use, the percentage of the production in the reporting period 
produced for use as a PAI.
    (viii) Updates to the corrective action plan.
    (h) Notification of process change. (1) Except as specified in 
paragraph (h)(2) of this section, whenever a process change is made, or 
any of the information submitted in the Notification of Compliance 
Status report changes, the owner or operator shall submit a report 
quarterly. The report may be submitted as part of the next Periodic 
report required under paragraph (g) of this section. The report shall 
include:
    (i) A brief description of the process change;
    (ii) A description of any modifications to standard procedures or 
quality assurance procedures;
    (iii) Revisions to any of the information reported in the original 
Notification of Compliance Status report under paragraph (f) of this 
section; and
    (iv) Information required by the Notification of Compliance Status 
report under paragraph (f) of this section for changes involving the 
addition of processes or equipment.
    (2) The owner or operator must submit a report 60 days before the 
scheduled implementation date of either of the following:
    (i) Any change in the activity covered by the Precompliance report.
    (ii) A change in the status of a control device from small to large.
    (i) Reports of startup, shutdown, and malfunction. For the purposes 
of this subpart, the startup, shutdown, and malfunction reports shall be 
submitted on the same schedule as the Periodic reports required under 
paragraph (g) of this section instead of the schedule specified in 
Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i) of subpart A of this part. These reports shall 
include the information specified in Sec. 63.1367(a)(3)(i) through (iii) 
and shall contain the name, title, and signature of the owner or 
operator or other responsible official who is certifying its accuracy. 
Reports are only required if a startup, shutdown, or malfunction 
occurred during the reporting period. Any time an owner or operator 
takes an action that is not consistent with

[[Page 360]]

the procedures specified in the affected source's startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan, the owner or operator shall submit an immediate 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction report as specified in 
Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(ii) of subpart A of this part.
    (j) Reports of equipment leaks. The owner or operator of an affected 
source subject to the standards in Sec. 63.1363, shall implement the 
reporting requirements specified in Sec. 63.1363(h). Copies of all 
reports shall be retained as records for a period of 5 years, in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 63.10(b)(1) of subpart A of 
this part.
    (k) Reports of emissions averaging. The owner or operator of an 
affected source that chooses to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 63.1362(h) shall submit all information as specified in 
Sec. 63.1367(d) for all emission points included in the emissions 
average. The owner or operator shall also submit to the Administrator 
all information specified in paragraph (g) of this section for each 
emission point included in the emissions average.
    (1) The reports shall also include the information listed in 
paragraphs (k)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section:
    (i) Any changes to the processes, storage tanks, or waste management 
unit included in the average.
    (ii) The calculation of the debits and credits for the reporting 
period.
    (iii) Changes to the Emissions Averaging Plan which affect the 
calculation methodology of uncontrolled or controlled emissions or the 
hazard or risk equivalency determination.
    (iv) Any changes to the parameters monitored according to 
Sec. 63.1366(g).
    (2) Every second semiannual or fourth quarterly report, as 
appropriate, shall include the results according to Sec. 63.1367(d)(4) 
to demonstrate the emissions averaging provisions of Sec. 63.1362(h), 
Sec. 63.1365(h), Sec. 63.1366(g), and Sec. 63.1367(d) are satisfied.
    (l) Reports of heat exchange systems. The owner or operator of an 
affected source subject to the requirements for heat exchange systems in 
Sec. 63.1362(f) shall submit information about any delay of repairs as 
specified in Sec. 63.104(f)(2) of subpart F of this part, except that 
when the phrase ``periodic reports required by Sec. 63.152(c) of subpart 
G of this part'' is referred to in Sec. 63.104(f)(2) of subpart F of 
this part, the periodic reports required in paragraph (g) of this 
section shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (m) Notification of performance test and test Plan. The owner or 
operator of an affected source shall notify the Administrator of the 
planned date of a performance test at least 60 days before the test in 
accordance with Sec. 63.7(b) of subpart A of this part. The owner or 
operator also must submit the test Plan required by Sec. 63.7(c) of 
subpart A of this part and the emission profile required by 
Sec. 63.1365(b)(10)(ii) with the notification of the performance test.
    (n) Request for extension of compliance. The owner or operator may 
submit to the Administrator a request for an extension of compliance in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1364(a)(2).
    (o) The owner or operator who submits an operating permit 
application before the date the Emissions Averaging Plan is due shall 
submit the information specified in paragraphs (o)(1) through (3) of 
this section with the operating permit application instead of the 
Emissions Averaging Plan.
    (1) The information specified in Sec. 63.1367(d) for emission points 
included in the emissions average;
    (2) The information specified in Sec. 63.9(h) of subpart A of this 
part, as applicable; and
    (3) The information specified in paragraph (e) of this section, as 
applicable.



Sec. 63.1369  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under section 112(d) of the CAA, the authorities contained in 
paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and 
not transferred to a State.
    (b) The authority conferred in Sec. 63.177 of subpart H of this 
part, the authority to approve applications for determination of 
equivalent means of emission limitation, and the authority to approve 
alternative test methods shall not be delegated to any State.

[[Page 361]]



               Table 1 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--General Provisions Applicability to Subpart MMM
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Reference to subpart A          Applies to  subpart MMM                     Explanation
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  63.1(a)(1)....................  Yes.....................  Additional terms are defined in Sec.  63.1361.
Sec.  63.1(a)(2)-(3)................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(4)....................  Yes.....................  Subpart MMM (this table) specifies applicability
                                                                 of each paragraph in subpart A to subpart MMM.
Sec.  63.1(a)(5)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.1(a)(6)-(7)................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(a)(8)....................  No......................  Discusses State programs.
Sec.  63.1(a)(9)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.1(a)(10)-(14)..............  Yes
Sec.  63.1(b)(1)....................  No......................  Sec.  63.1360 specifies applicability.
Sec.  63.1(b)(2)-(3)................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(c)(1)....................  Yes.....................  Subpart MMM (this table) specifies the
                                                                 applicability of each paragraph in subpart A to
                                                                 sources subject to subpart MMM.
Sec.  63.1(c)(2)....................  No......................  Area sources are not subject to subpart MMM.
Sec.  63.1(c)(3)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.1(c)(4)-(5)................  Yes
Sec.  63.1(d).......................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.1(e).......................  Yes
Sec.  63.2..........................  Yes.....................  Additional terms are defined in Sec.  63.1361;
                                                                 when overlap between subparts A and MMM occurs,
                                                                 subpart MMM takes precedence.
Sec.  63.3..........................  Yes.....................  Other units used in subpart MMM are defined in
                                                                 that subpart.
Sec.  63.4(a)(1)-(3)................  Yes
Sec.  63.4(a)(4)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.4(a)(5)-(c)................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(a).......................  Yes.....................  Except the term ``affected source'' shall apply
                                                                 instead of the terms ``source'' and
                                                                 ``stationary source'' in Sec.  63.5(a)(1) of
                                                                 subpart A.
Sec.  63.5(b)(1)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(2)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.5(b)(3)-(5)................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(b)(6)....................  No......................  Sec.  63.1360(g) specifies requirements for
                                                                 determining applicability of added PAI
                                                                 equipment.
Sec.  63.5(c).......................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.5(d)-(e)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.5(f)(1)....................  Yes.....................  Except ``affected source'' shall apply instead
                                                                 of ``source'' in Sec.  63.5(f)(1) of subpart A.
Sec.  63.5(f)(2)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(a).......................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(1)-(2)................  No......................  Sec.  63.1364 specifies compliance dates.
Sec.  63.6(b)(3)-(4)................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(b)(5)....................  Yes.....................
Sec.  63.6(b)(6)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.6(b)(7)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(c)(1)-(2)................  Yes.....................  Except ``affected source'' shall apply instead
                                                                 of ``source'' in Sec.  63.6(c)(1)-(2) of
                                                                 subpart A.
Sec.  63.6(c)(3)-(4)................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.6(c)(5)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(d).......................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.6(e).......................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1360 specifies that the
                                                                 standards in subpart MMM apply during startup
                                                                 and shutdown for batch processes; therefore,
                                                                 these activities would not be covered in the
                                                                 startup, shutdown, and malfunction Plan.
Sec.  63.6(f).......................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1360 specifies that the
                                                                 standards in subpart MMM also apply during
                                                                 startup and shutdown for batch processes.
Sec.  63.6(g).......................  Yes.....................  An alternative standard has been proposed;
                                                                 however, affected sources will have the
                                                                 opportunity to demonstrate other alternatives
                                                                 to the Administrator.
Sec.  63.6(h).......................  No......................  Subpart MMM does not contain any opacity or
                                                                 visible emissions standards.
Sec.  63.6(i)(1)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(i)(2)....................  Yes.....................  Except ``affected source'' shall apply instead
                                                                 of ``source'' in Sec.  63.6(i)(2)(i) and (ii)
                                                                 of subpart A.
Sec.  63.6(i)(3)-(14)...............  Yes
Sec.  63.6(i)(15)...................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.6(i)(16)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.6(j).......................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(a)(1)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(a)(2)(i)-(vi)............  Yes.....................  Sec.  63.1368 specifies that test results must
                                                                 be submitted in the Notification of Compliance
                                                                 Status due 150 days after the compliance date.
Sec.  63.7(a)(2)(vii)-(viii)........  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.7(a)(2)(ix)-(c)............  Yes
Sec.  63.7(d).......................  Yes.....................  Except ``affected source'' shall apply instead
                                                                 of ``source'' in Sec.  63.7(d) of subpart A.
Sec.  63.7(e)(1)....................  Yes.....................  Sec.  63.1365 contains test methods specific to
                                                                 PAI sources.
Sec.  63.7(e)(2)....................  Yes

[[Page 362]]

 
Sec.  63.7(e)(3)....................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1365 specifies less than 3 runs
                                                                 for certain tests.
Sec.  63.7(e)(4)....................  Yes.
Sec.  63.7(f).......................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(g)(1)....................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1368(a) specifies that the
                                                                 results of the performance test be submitted
                                                                 with the Notification of Compliance Status
                                                                 report
Sec.  63.7(g)(2)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.7(g)(3)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.7(h).......................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(a)(1)-(2)................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(a)(3)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.8(a)(4)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(b)(1)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(b)(2)....................  No......................  Sec.  63.1366 specifies CMS requirements.
Sec.  63.8(b)(3)-(c)(3).............  Yes.....................  Except the submittal date of the immediate
                                                                 startup, shutdown, and malfunction reports for
                                                                 CMS events shall be 2 days as in Sec.
                                                                 63.6(e)(3)(iv).
Sec.  63.8(c)(4)....................  No......................  Sec.  63.1366 specifies monitoring frequencies.
Sec.  63.8(c)(5)-(8)................  No
Sec.  63.8(d)-(f)(3)................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(f)(4)....................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1368(b) specifies that requests
                                                                 may also be included in the Precompliance
                                                                 report.
Sec.  63.8(f)(5)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.8(f)(6)....................  No......................  Subpart MMM does not require CEM's.
Sec.  63.8(g).......................  No......................  Sec.  63.1366 specifies data reduction
                                                                 procedures.
Sec.  63.9(a)-(d)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(e).......................  No
Sec.  63.9(f).......................  No......................  Subpart MMM does not contain opacity and visible
                                                                 emission standards.
Sec.  63.9(g).......................  No
Sec.  63.9(h)(1)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(h)(2)(i).................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.1368(a)(1) specifies additional
                                                                 information to include in the Notification of
                                                                 Compliance Status report.
Sec.  63.9(h)(2)(ii)................  No......................  Sec.  63.1368 specifies the Notification of
                                                                 Compliance Status report is to be submitted
                                                                 within 150 days after the compliance date.
Sec.  63.9(h)(3)....................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(h)(4)....................  N/A.....................  Reserved.
Sec.  63.9(h)(5)-(6)................  Yes
Sec.  63.9(i)-(j)...................  Yes.....................  Except Sec.  63.9(j) does not apply for changes
                                                                 in information in the notification of
                                                                 compliance status report on equipment leaks as
                                                                 specified in Sec.  63.1363(h)(2).
Sec.  63.10(a)-(b)(1)...............  Yes
Sec.  63.10(b)(2)...................  No......................  Sec.  63.1367 specifies recordkeeping
                                                                 requirements.
 Sec.  63.10(b)(3)..................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(c)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(1)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(2)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(3)...................  No......................  Subpart MMM does not include opacity and visible
                                                                 emission standards.
Sec.  63.10(d)(4)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(d)(5)...................  Yes.....................  Except that actions and reporting for batch
                                                                 processes do not apply during startup and
                                                                 shutdown.
Sec.  63.10(e)(1)-(2)(i)............  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(2)(ii)...............  No......................  Subpart MMM does not include opacity monitoring
                                                                 requirements.
Sec.  63.10(e)(3)...................  Yes
Sec.  63.10(e)(4)...................  No......................  Subpart MMM does not include opacity monitoring
                                                                 requirements.
Sec.  63.10(f)......................  Yes
Sec.  63.11-Sec.  63.15.............  Yes.....................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


  Table 2 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--Standards for New and Existing PAI
                                 Sources
------------------------------------------------------------------------
      Emission source           Applicability           Requirement
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Process vents.............  Existing:
                              Processes having     90% for organic HAP
                             uncontrolled organic   per process or to
                             HAP emissions 0.15 Mg/yr.     of 20
                                                    ppmv TOC.
                              Processes having     94% for HCl and
                             uncontrolled HCl and   chlorine per process
                             chlorine emissions     or to outlet HCl and
                             6.8 Mg/yr.  chlorine
                                                    concentration of 20 ppmv.

[[Page 363]]

 
                              Individual process   98% gaseous organic
                             vents meeting flow     HAP control per vent
                             and mass emissions     or 20
                             criteria that have     ppmv TOC outlet
                             gaseous organic HAP    limit.
                             emissions controlled
                             to less than 90% on
                             or after November
                             10, 1997.
                            New:
                              Processes having     98% for organic HAP
                             uncontrolled organic   per process or 20 ppmv TOC.
                             thn-eq>0.15 Mg/yr.
                              Processes having     94% for HCl and
                             uncontrolled HCl and   chlorine per process
                             chlorine emissions     or to outlet
                             6.8 Mg/yr   concentration of 20 ppmv HCl
                                                    and chlorine.
                            Processes having       99% for HCl and
                             uncontrolled HCl and   chlorine per process
                             chlorine emissions     or to outlet
                             191 Mg/yr.  concentration of 20 ppmv HCl
                                                    and chlorine.
Storage vessels...........  Existing: 75 m\3\ capacity    roof, reduce HAP by
                             and vapor pressure     95% per vessel, or
                             3.45 kPa.   to outlet
                                                    concentration of 20 ppmv TOC.
                            New: 38     Same as for existing
                             m\3\ capacity and      sources.
                             vapor pressure 16.5 kPa.
                            75 m\3\     Same as for existing
                             capacity and vapor     sources.
                             pressure 3.45 kPa.
Wastewater a..............  Existing: Process      Reduce concentration
                             wastewater with 10,000 ppmw     compounds to 50 ppmw
                             Table 9 compounds at   (or other options).
                             any flowrate or 1,000 ppmw
                             Table 9 compounds at
                             10 L/min,
                             and maintenance
                             wastewater with HAP
                             load 5.3
                             Mg per discharge
                             event.
                            New:
                              Same criteria as     Reduce concentration
                             for existing sources.  of total Table 9
                                                    compounds to 50 ppmw
                                                    (or other options).
                              Total HAP load in    99% reduction of
                             wastewater POD         Table 9 compounds
                             streams 2,100 Mg/yr..
Equipment leaks...........  Subpart H............  Subpart H with minor
                                                    changes, including
                                                    monitoring
                                                    frequencies
                                                    consistent with the
                                                    proposed CAR.
Product dryers and bag      Dryers used to dry     Particulate matter
 dumps.                      PAI that is also a     concentration not to
                             HAP, and bag dumps     exceed 0.01 gr/dscf.
                             used to introduce
                             feedstock that is a
                             solid and a HAP.
Heat exchange systems.....  Each heat exchange     Monitoring and leak
                             system used to cool    repair program as in
                             process equipment in   HON.
                             PAI manufacturing
                             operations.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Table 9 is listed in the appendix to subpart G of 40 CFR part 63.


                Table 3 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--Monitoring Requirements for Control Devices a
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Monitoring equipment       Parameters to be
            Control device                     required                monitored                Frequency
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All control devices..................  1. Flow indicator        1. Presence of flow      Hourly records of
                                        installed at all         diverted from the        whether the flow
                                        bypass lines to the      control device to the    indicator was
                                        atmosphere and           atmosphere or.           operating and whether
                                        equipped with                                     a diversion was
                                        continuous recorder or.                           detected at any time
                                                                                          during each hour.
                                       2. Valves sealed closed  2. Monthly inspections   Monthly.
                                        with car-seal or lock-   of sealed valves.
                                        and-key configuration.
Scrubber.............................  Liquid flow rate or      1. Liquid flow rate      1. Every 15 minutes.
                                        pressure drop mounting   into or out of the
                                        device. Also a pH        scrubber or the
                                        monitor if the           pressure drop across
                                        scrubber is used to      the scrubber..
                                        control acid
                                        emissions..
                                                                2. pH of effluent        2. Once a day.
                                                                 scrubber liquid.
Thermal incinerator..................  Temperature monitoring   Firebox temperature....  Every 15 minutes.
                                        device installed in
                                        firebox or in ductwork
                                        immediately downstream
                                        of firebox b.
Catalytic incinerator................  Temperature monitoring   Temperature difference   Every 15 minutes.
                                        device installed in      across catalyst bed.
                                        gas stream immediately
                                        before and after
                                        catalyst bed.

[[Page 364]]

 
Flare................................  Heat sensing device      Presence of a flame at   Every 15 minutes.
                                        installed at the pilot   the pilot light.
                                        light.
Boiler or process heater 44 megawatts  Temperature monitoring   Combustion temperature.  Every 15 minutes.
 and vent stream is not mixed with      device installed in
 the primary fuel.                      firebox b.
Condenser............................  Temperature monitoring   Condenser exit (product  Every 15 minutes.
                                        device installed at      side) temperature.
                                        condenser exit.
Carbon adsorber (nonregenerative)....  None...................  Operating time since     N/A.
                                                                 last replacement.
Carbon adsorber (regenerative).......  Stream flow monitoring   1. Total regeneration    1. For each
                                        device, and.             stream mass or           regeneration cycle,
                                                                 volumetric flow during   record the total
                                                                 carbon bed               regeneration stream
                                                                 regeneration cycle(s).   mass or volumetric
                                                                                          flow.
                                       Carbon bed temperature   2. Temperature of        2. For each
                                        monitoring device.       carbon bed after         regeneration cycle,
                                                                 regeneration.            record the maximum
                                                                                          carbon bed-
                                                                                          temperature.
                                                                3. Temperature of        3. Within 15 minutes of
                                                                 carbon bed within 15     completing any cooling
                                                                 minutes of completing    cycle, record the
                                                                 any cooling cycle(s).    carbon bed
                                                                                          temperature.
                                                                4. Operating time since  4. Operating time to be
                                                                 end of last              based on worst-case
                                                                 regeneration.            conditions.
                                                                5. Check for bed         5. Yearly.
                                                                 poisoning.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a As an alternative to the monitoring requirements specified in this table, the owner or operator may use a CEM
  meeting the requirements of Performance Specifications 8 or 9 of appendix B of part 60 to monitor TOC every 15
  minutes.
b Monitor may be installed in the firebox or in the ductwork immediately downstream of the firebox before any
  substantial heat exchange is encountered.


  Table 4 to Subpart MMM of Part 63--Control Requirements for Items of
          Equipment That Meet the Criteria of Sec.  63.1362(k)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Item of equipment                  Control requirement a
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drain or drain hub............  (a) Tightly fitting solid cover (TFSC);
                                 or
                                (b) TFSC with a vent to either a
                                 process, or to a control device meeting
                                 the requirements of Sec.
                                 63.1256(h)(2); or
                                (c) Water seal with submerged discharge
                                 or barrier to protect discharge from
                                 wind.
Manhole b.....................  (a) TFSC; or
                                (b) TFSC with a vent to either a
                                 process, or to a fuel gas system, or to
                                 a control device meeting the
                                 requirements of Sec.  63.1256(h)(2); or
                                (c) If the item is vented to the
                                 atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                 operating water seal at the entrance or
                                 exit to the item to restrict
                                 ventilation in the collection system.
                                 The vent pipe shall be at least 90 cm
                                 in length and not exceeding 10.2 cm in
                                 nominal inside diameter.
Lift station..................  (a) TFSC; or
                                (b) TFSC with a vent to either a
                                 process, or to a control device meeting
                                 the requirements of Sec.
                                 63.1256(h)(2); or
                                (c) If the lift station is vented to the
                                 atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                 operating water seal at the entrance or
                                 exit to the item to restrict
                                 ventilation in the collection system.
                                 The vent pipe shall be at least 90 cm
                                 in length and not exceeding 10.2 cm in
                                 nominal inside diameter. The lift
                                 station shall be level controlled to
                                 minimize changes in the liquid level.
Trench........................  (a) TFSC; or
                                (b) TFSC with a vent to either a
                                 process, or to a control device meeting
                                 the requirements of Sec.
                                 63.1256(h)(2); or
                                (c) If the item is vented to the
                                 atmosphere, use a TFSC with a properly
                                 operating water seal at the entrance or
                                 exit to the item to restrict
                                 ventilation in the collection system.
                                 The vent pipe shall be at least 90 cm
                                 in length and not exceeding 10.2 cm in
                                 nominal inside diameter.
Pipe..........................  Each pipe shall have no visible gaps in
                                 joints, seals, or other emission
                                 interfaces.
Oil/Water separator...........  (a) Equip with a fixed roof and route
                                 vapors to a process, or equip with a
                                 closed-vent system that routes vapors
                                 to a control device meeting the
                                 requirements of Sec.  63.1256(h)(2); or
                                (b) Equip with a floating roof that
                                 meets the equipment specifications of
                                 Sec.  60.693 (a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii),
                                 (a)(2), (a)(3), and (a)(4).

[[Page 365]]

 
Tank..........................  Maintain a fixed roof.c If the tank is
                                 sparged d or used for heating or
                                 treating by means of an exothermic
                                 reaction, a fixed roof and a system
                                 shall be maintained that routes the
                                 organic hazardous air pollutants vapors
                                 to other process equipment or a fuel
                                 gas system, or a closed-vent system
                                 that routes vapors to a control device
                                 that meets the requirements of 40 CFR
                                 Sec.  63.119(e)(1) or (e)(2).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Where a tightly fitting solid cover is required, it shall be
  maintained with no visible gaps or openings, except during periods of
  sampling, inspection, or maintenance.
b Manhole includes sumps and other points of access to a conveyance
  system.
c A fixed roof may have openings necessary for proper venting of the
  tank, such as pressure/vacuum vent, j-pipe vent.
d The liquid in the tank is agitated by injecting compressed air or gas.



 Subpart NNN--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                    for Wool Fiberglass Manufacturing

    Source: 64 FR 31709, June 14, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1380  Applicability.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
the requirements of this subpart apply to the owner or operator of each 
wool fiberglass manufacturing facility that is a major source or is 
located at a facility that is a major source.
    (b) The requirements of this subpart apply to emissions of hazardous 
air pollutants (HAPs), as measured according to the methods and 
procedures in this subpart, emitted from the following new and existing 
sources at a wool fiberglass manufacturing facility subject to this 
subpart:
    (1) Each new and existing glass-melting furnace located at a wool 
fiberglass manufacturing facility;
    (2) Each new and existing rotary spin wool fiberglass manufacturing 
line producing a bonded wool fiberglass building insulation product; and
    (3) Each new and existing flame attenuation wool fiberglass 
manufacturing line producing a bonded pipe product and each new flame 
attenuation wool fiberglass manufacturing line producing a bonded heavy-
density product.
    (c) The requirements of this subpart do not apply to a wool 
fiberglass manufacturing facility that the owner or operator 
demonstrates to the Administrator is not a major source as defined in 
Sec. 63.2.
    (d) The provisions of this part 63, subpart A that apply and those 
that do not apply to this subpart are specified in Table 1 of this 
subpart.



Sec. 63.1381  Definitions.

    Terms used in this subpart are defined in the Clean Air Act, in 
Sec. 63.2, or in this section as follows:
    Bag leak detection system means systems that include, but are not 
limited to, devices using triboelectric, light scattering, and other 
effects to monitor relative or absolute particulate matter (PM) 
emissions.
    Bonded means wool fiberglass to which a phenol-formaldehyde binder 
has been applied.
    Building insulation means bonded wool fiberglass insulation, having 
a loss on ignition of less than 8 percent and a density of less than 32 
kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) (2 pounds per cubic foot 
[lb/ft3]).
    Cold top electric furnace means an all-electric glass-melting 
furnace that operates with a temperature of 120  deg.C (250  deg.F) or 
less as measured at a location 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 inches) 
above the molten glass surface.
    Flame attenuation means a process used to produce wool fiberglass 
where molten glass flows by gravity from melting furnaces, or pots, to 
form filaments that are drawn down and attenuated by passing in front of 
a high-velocity gas burner flame.
    Glass-melting furnace means a unit comprising a refractory vessel in 
which raw materials are charged, melted at high temperature, refined, 
and conditioned to produce molten glass. The

[[Page 366]]

unit includes foundations, superstructure and retaining walls, raw 
material charger systems, heat exchangers, melter cooling system, 
exhaust system, refractory brick work, fuel supply and electrical 
boosting equipment, integral control systems and instrumentation, and 
appendages for conditioning and distributing molten glass to forming 
processes. The forming apparatus, including flow channels, is not 
considered part of the glass-melting furnace.
    Glass pull rate means the mass of molten glass that is produced by a 
single glass-melting furnace or that is used in the manufacture of wool 
fiberglass at a single manufacturing line in a specified time period.
    Hazardous Air Pollutant (HAP) means any air pollutant listed in or 
pursuant to section 112(b) of the Clean Air Act.
    Heavy-density product means bonded wool fiberglass insulation 
manufactured on a flame attenuation manufacturing line and having a loss 
on ignition of 11 to 25 percent and a density of 8 to 48 kg/m\3\ (0.5 to 
3 lb/ft \3\).
    Incinerator means an enclosed air pollution control device that uses 
controlled flame combustion to convert combustible materials to 
noncombustible gases.
    Loss on ignition (LOI) means the percent decrease in weight of wool 
fiberglass after it has been ignited. The LOI is used to monitor the 
weight percent of binder in wool fiberglass.
    Manufacturing line means the manufacturing equipment for the 
production of wool fiberglass that consists of a forming section where 
molten glass is fiberized and a fiberglass mat is formed and which may 
include a curing section where binder resin in the mat is thermally set 
and a cooling section where the mat is cooled.
    New source means any affected source the construction or 
reconstruction of which is commenced after March 31, 1997.
    Pipe product means bonded wool fiberglass insulation manufactured on 
a flame attenuation manufacturing line and having a loss on ignition of 
8 to 14 percent and a density of 48 to 96 kg/m \3\ (3 to 6 lb/ft\3\).
    Rotary spin means a process used to produce wool fiberglass building 
insulation by forcing molten glass through numerous small orifices in 
the side wall of a spinner to form continuous glass fibers that are then 
broken into discrete lengths by high-velocity air flow. Any process used 
to produce bonded wool fiberglass building insulation by a process other 
than flame attenuation is considered rotary spin.
    Wool fiberglass means insulation materials composed of glass fibers 
made from glass produced or melted at the same facility where the 
manufacturing line is located.
    Wool fiberglass manufacturing facility means any facility 
manufacturing wool fiberglass on a rotary spin manufacturing line or on 
a flame attenuation manufacturing line.



Sec. 63.1382  Emission standards

    (a) Emission limits--(1) Glass-melting furnaces. On and after the 
date the initial performance test is completed or required to be 
completed under Sec. 63.7 of this part, whichever date is earlier, the 
owner or operator shall not discharge or cause to be discharged into the 
atmosphere in excess of 0.25 kilogram (kg) of particulate matter (PM) 
per megagram (Mg) (0.5 pound [lb] of PM per ton) of glass pulled for 
each new or existing glass-melting furnace.
    (2) Rotary spin manufacturing lines. On and after the date the 
initial performance test is completed or required to be completed under 
Sec. 63.7 of this part, whichever date is earlier, the owner or operator 
shall not discharge or cause to be discharged into the atmosphere in 
excess of:
    (i) 0.6 kg of formaldehyde per megagram (1.2 lb of formaldehyde per 
ton) of glass pulled for each existing rotary spin manufacturing line; 
and
    (ii) 0.4 kg of formaldehyde per megagram (0.8 lb of formaldehyde per 
ton) of glass pulled for each new rotary spin manufacturing line.
    (3) Flame attenuation manufacturing lines. On and after the date the 
initial performance test is completed or required to be completed under 
Sec. 63.7 of this part, whichever date is earlier, the owner or operator 
shall not discharge or cause to be discharged into the atmosphere in 
excess of:
    (i) 3.9 kg of formaldehyde per megagram (7.8 lb of formaldehyde per

[[Page 367]]

ton) of glass pulled for each new flame attenuation manufacturing line 
that produces heavy-density wool fiberglass; and
    (ii) 3.4 kg of formaldehyde per megagram (6.8 lb of formaldehyde per 
ton) of glass pulled from each existing or new flame attenuation 
manufacturing line that produces pipe product wool fiberglass.
    (b) Operating limits. On and after the date on which the performance 
test required to be conducted by Secs. 63.7 and 63.1384 is completed, 
the owner or operator must operate all affected control equipment and 
processes according to the following requirements.
    (1)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour of an alarm from a bag leak detection system and complete 
corrective actions in a timely manner according to the procedures in the 
operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a Quality Improvement Plan 
(QIP) consistent with the compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 
40 CFR part 64, subpart D when the bag leak detection system alarm is 
sounded for more than 5 percent of the total operating time in a 6-month 
block reporting period.
    (2)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when any 3-hour block average of the monitored electrostatic 
precipitator (ESP) parameter is outside the limit(s) established during 
the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 and complete 
corrective actions in a timely manner according to the procedures in the 
operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a QIP consistent with the 
compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 40 CFR part 64 subpart D 
when the monitored ESP parameter is outside the limit(s) established 
during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate the ESP such that the 
monitored ESP parameter is not outside the limit(s) established during 
the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 10 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (3)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when any 3-hour block average temperature of a cold top electric 
furnace as measured at a location 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 inches) 
above the molten glass surface, exceeds 120  deg.C (250  deg.F) and 
complete corrective actions in a timely manner according to the 
procedures in the operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator of a cold top electric furnace must 
implement a QIP consistent with the compliance assurance monitoring 
provisions of 40 CFR part 64, subpart D when the temperature, as 
measured at a location 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 inches) above the 
molten glass surface, exceeds 120  deg.C (250  deg.F) for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate the cold top electric 
furnace such that the temperature does not exceed 120  deg.C (250 
deg.F) as measured at a location 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 inches) 
above the molten glass surface, for more than 10 percent of the total 
operating time in a 6-month reporting period.
    (4)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when any 3-hour block average value for the monitored 
parameter(s) for a glass-melting furnace, which uses no add-on controls 
and which is not a cold top electric furnace, is outside the limit(s) 
established during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 and 
complete corrective actions in a timely manner according to the 
procedures in the operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a QIP consistent with the 
compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 40 CFR Part 64 subpart D 
when the monitored parameter(s) is outside the limit(s) established 
during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate a glass-melting furnace, 
which

[[Page 368]]

uses no add-on controls and which is not a cold top electric furnace, 
such that the monitored parameter(s) is not outside the limit(s) 
established during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for 
more than 10 percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block 
reporting period.
    (5)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when the average glass pull rate of any 4-hour block period for 
glass melting furnaces equipped with continuous glass pull rate 
monitors, or daily glass pull rate for glass melting furnaces not so 
equipped, exceeds the average glass pull rate established during the 
performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384, by greater than 20 
percent and complete corrective actions in a timely manner according to 
the procedures in the operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a QIP consistent with the 
compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 40 CFR part 64, subpart D 
when the glass pull rate exceeds, by more than 20 percent, the average 
glass pull rate established during the performance test as specified in 
Sec. 63.1384 for more than 5 percent of the total operating time in a 6-
month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate each glass-melting furnace 
such that the glass pull rate does not exceed, by more than 20 percent, 
the average glass pull rate established during the performance test as 
specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 10 percent of the total 
operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (6) The owner or operator must operate each incinerator used to 
control formaldehyde emissions from forming or curing such that any 3-
hour block average temperature in the firebox does not fall below the 
average established during the performance test as specified in 
Sec. 63.1384.
    (7)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when the average pressure drop, liquid flow rate, or chemical 
feed rate for any 3-hour block period is outside the limits established 
during the performance tests as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for each wet 
scrubbing control device and complete corrective actions in a timely 
manner according to the procedures in the operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a QIP consistent with the 
compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 40 CFR part 64, subpart D 
when any scrubber parameter is outside the limit(s) established during 
the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate each scrubber such that 
each monitored parameter is not outside the limit(s) established during 
the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 10 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (8)(i) The owner or operator must initiate corrective action within 
1 hour when the monitored process parameter level(s) is outside the 
limit(s) established during the performance test as specified in 
Sec. 63.1384 for the process modification(s) used to control 
formaldehyde emissions and complete corrective actions in a timely 
manner according to the procedures in the operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan.
    (ii) The owner or operator must implement a QIP consistent with the 
compliance assurance monitoring provisions of 40 CFR part 64, subpart D 
when the process parameter(s) is outside the limit(s) established during 
the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block reporting period.
    (iii) The owner or operator must operate the process modifications 
such that the monitored process parameter(s) is not outside the limit(s) 
established during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384 for 
more than 10 percent of the total operating time in a 6-month block 
reporting period.
    (9) The owner or operator must use a resin in the formulation of 
binder such that the free-formaldehyde content of the resin used does 
not exceed the free-formaldehyde range contained in the specification 
for the resin used during

[[Page 369]]

the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384.
    (10) The owner or operator must use a binder formulation that does 
not vary from the specification and operating range established and used 
during the performance test as specified in Sec. 63.1384. For the 
purposes of this standard, adding or increasing the quantity of urea 
and/or lignin in the binder formulation does not constitute a change in 
the binder formulation.



Sec. 63.1383  Monitoring requirements.

    On and after the date on which the performance test required to be 
conducted by Secs. 63.7 and 63.1384 is completed, the owner or operator 
must monitor all affected control equipment and processes according to 
the following requirements.
    (a) The owner or operator of each wool fiberglass manufacturing 
facility must prepare for each glass-melting furnace, rotary spin 
manufacturing line, and flame attenuation manufacturing line subject to 
the provisions of this subpart, a written operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan. The plan must be submitted to the Administrator for 
review and approval as part of the application for a part 70 permit. The 
plan must include the following information:
    (1) Procedures for the proper operation and maintenance of process 
modifications and add-on control devices used to meet the emission 
limits in Sec. 63.1382;
    (2) Procedures for the proper operation and maintenance of 
monitoring devices used to determine compliance, including quarterly 
calibration and certification of accuracy of each monitoring device 
according to the manufacturers's instructions; and
    (3) Corrective actions to be taken when process parameters or add-on 
control device parameters deviate from the limit(s) established during 
initial performance tests.
    (b)(1) Where a baghouse is used to control PM emissions from a 
glass-melting furnace, the owner or operator shall install, calibrate, 
maintain, and continuously operate a bag leak detection system.
    (i) The bag leak detection system must be certified by the 
manufacturer to be capable of detecting PM emissions at concentrations 
of 10 milligrams per actual cubic meter (0.0044 grains per actual cubic 
foot) or less.
    (ii) The bag leak detection system sensor must produce output of 
relative PM emissions.
    (iii) The bag leak detection system must be equipped with an alarm 
system that will sound automatically when an increase in relative PM 
emissions over a preset level is detected and the alarm must be located 
such that it can be heard by the appropriate plant personnel.
    (iv) For positive pressure fabric filter systems, a bag leak 
detection system must be installed in each baghouse compartment or cell. 
If a negative pressure or induced air baghouse is used, the bag leak 
detection system must be installed downstream of the baghouse. Where 
multiple bag leak detection systems are required (for either type of 
baghouse), the system instrumentation and alarm may be shared among the 
monitors.
    (v) A triboelectric bag leak detection system shall be installed, 
operated, adjusted, and maintained in a manner consistent with the U.S. 
Environmental Protection Agency guidance, ``Fabric Filter Bag Leak 
Detection Guidance'' (EPA-454/R-98-015, September 1997). Other bag leak 
detection systems shall be installed, operated, adjusted, and maintained 
in a manner consistent with the manufacturer's written specifications 
and recommendations.
    (vi) Initial adjustment of the system shall, at a minimum, consist 
of establishing the baseline output by adjusting the range and the 
averaging period of the device and establishing the alarm set points and 
the alarm delay time.
    (vii) Following the initial adjustment, the owner or operator shall 
not adjust the range, averaging period, alarm setpoints, or alarm delay 
time except as detailed in the approved operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan required under paragraph (a) of this section. In no 
event shall the range be increased by more than 100 percent or decreased 
more than 50 percent over a 365-day period unless a responsible official 
as defined in Sec. 63.2 of

[[Page 370]]

the general provisions in subpart A of this part certifies that the 
baghouse has been inspected and found to be in good operating condition.
    (2) The operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan required by 
paragraph (a) of this section must specify corrective actions to be 
followed in the event of a bag leak detection system alarm. Example 
corrective actions that may be included in the plan include the 
following:
    (i) Inspecting the baghouse for air leaks, torn or broken bags or 
filter media, or any other conditions that may cause an increase in 
emissions.
    (ii) Sealing off defective bags or filter media.
    (iii) Replacing defective bags or filter media, or otherwise 
repairing the control device.
    (iv) Sealing off a defective baghouse compartment.
    (v) Cleaning the bag leak detection system probe, or otherwise 
repairing the bag leak detection system.
    (vi) Shutting down the process producing the particulate emissions.
    (c)(1) Where an ESP is used to control PM emissions from a glass-
melting furnace, the owner or operator must monitor the ESP according to 
the procedures in the operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan. 
(2)The operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan for the ESP must 
contain the following information:
    (i) The ESP operating parameter(s), such as secondary voltage of 
each electrical field, to be monitored and the minimum and/or maximum 
value(s) that will be used to identify any operational problems;
    (ii) A schedule for monitoring the ESP operating parameter(s);
    (iii) Recordkeeping procedures, consistent with the recordkeeping 
requirements of Sec. 63.1386, to show that the ESP operating 
parameter(s) is within the limit(s) established during the performance 
test; and
    (iv) Procedures for the proper operation and maintenance of the ESP.
    (d) The owner or operator must measure and record at least once per 
shift the temperature 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 inches) above the 
surface of the molten glass in a cold top electric furnace that does not 
use any add-on controls to control PM emissions.
    (e)(1) Where a glass-melting furnace is operated without an add-on 
control device to control PM emissions, the owner or operator must 
monitor the glass-melting furnace according to the procedures in the 
operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan.
    (2) The operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan for the glass-
melting furnace must contain the following information:
    (i) The operating parameter(s) to be monitored and the minimum and/
or maximum value(s) that will be used to identify any operational 
problems;
    (ii) A schedule for monitoring the operating parameter(s) of the 
glass-melting furnace;
    (iii) Recordkeeping procedures, consistent with the recordkeeping 
requirements of Sec. 63.1386, to show that the glass-melting furnace 
parameter(s) is within the limit(s) established during the performance 
test; and
    (iv) Procedures for the proper operation and maintenance of the 
glass-melting furnace.
    (f)(1) The owner or operator of an existing glass-melting furnace 
equipped with continuous glass pull rate monitors must monitor and 
record the glass pull rate on an hourly basis. For glass-melting 
furnaces that are not equipped with continuous glass pull rate monitors, 
the glass pull rate must be monitored and recorded once per day.
    (2) On any new glass-melting furnace, the owner or operator must 
install, calibrate, and maintain a continuous glass pull rate monitor 
that monitors and records on an hourly basis the glass pull rate.
    (g)(1) The owner or operator who uses an incinerator to control 
formaldehyde emissions from forming or curing shall install, calibrate, 
maintain, and operate a monitoring device that continuously measures and 
records the operating temperature in the firebox of each incinerator.
    (2) The owner or operator must inspect each incinerator at least 
once per year according to the procedures in the operations, 
maintenance, and monitoring plan. At a minimum, an inspection must 
include the following:

[[Page 371]]

    (i) Inspect all burners, pilot assemblies, and pilot sensing devices 
for proper operation and clean pilot sensor, as necessary;
    (ii) Ensure proper adjustment of combustion air and adjust, as 
necessary;
    (iii) Inspect, when possible, internal structures, for example, 
baffles, to ensure structural integrity per the design specifications;
    (iv) Inspect dampers, fans, and blowers for proper operation;
    (v) Inspect for proper sealing;
    (vi) Inspect motors for proper operation;
    (vii) Inspect combustion chamber refractory lining and clean and 
repair/replace lining, as necessary;
    (viii) Inspect incinerator shell for corrosion and/or hot spots;
    (ix) For the burn cycle that follows the inspection, document that 
the incinerator is operating properly and make any necessary 
adjustments; and
    (x) Generally observe that the equipment is maintained in good 
operating condition.
    (xi) Complete all necessary repairs as soon as practicable.
    (h) The owner or operator who uses a wet scrubbing control device to 
control formaldehyde emissions must install, calibrate, maintain, and 
operate monitoring devices that continuously monitor and record the gas 
pressure drop across each scrubber and scrubbing liquid flow rate to 
each scrubber according to the procedures in the operations, 
maintenance, and monitoring plan. The pressure drop monitor is to be 
certified by its manufacturer to be accurate within 250 
pascals (1 inch water gauge) over its operating range, and 
the flow rate monitor is to be certified by its manufacturer to be 
accurate within 5 percent over its operating range. The 
owner or operator must also continuously monitor and record the feed 
rate of any chemical(s) added to the scrubbing liquid.
    (i)(1) The owner or operator who uses process modifications to 
control formaldehyde emissions must establish a correlation between 
formaldehyde emissions and a process parameter(s) to be monitored.
    (2) The owner or operator must monitor the established parameter(s) 
according to the procedures in the operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan.
    (3) The owner or operator must include as part of their operations, 
maintenance, and monitoring plan the following information:
    (i) Procedures for the proper operation and maintenance of the 
process;
    (ii) Process parameter(s) to be monitored to demonstrate compliance 
with the applicable emission limits in Sec. 63.1382. Examples of process 
parameters include LOI, binder solids content, and binder application 
rate;
    (iii) Correlation(s) between process parameter(s) to be monitored 
and formaldehyde emissions;
    (iv) A schedule for monitoring the process parameter(s); and
    (v) Recordkeeping procedures, consistent with the recordkeeping 
requirements of Sec. 63.1386, to show that the process parameter 
value(s) established during the performance test is not exceeded.
    (j) The owner or operator must monitor and record the free-
formaldehyde content of each resin shipment received and used in the 
formulation of binder.
    (k) The owner or operator must monitor and record the formulation of 
each batch of binder used.
    (l) The owner or operator must monitor and record at least once 
every 8 hours, the product LOI and product density of each bonded wool 
fiberglass product manufactured.
    (m) For all control device and process operating parameters measured 
during the initial performance tests, the owners or operators of glass-
melting furnaces, rotary spin manufacturing lines or flame attenuation 
manufacturing lines subject to this subpart may change the limits 
established during the initial performance tests if additional 
performance testing is conducted to verify that, at the new control 
device or process parameter levels, they comply with the applicable 
emission limits in Sec. 63.1382. The owner or operator shall conduct all 
additional performance tests according to the procedures in this part 
63, subpart A and in Sec. 63.1384.

[[Page 372]]



Sec. 63.1384  Performance test requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart 
shall conduct a performance test to demonstrate compliance with the 
applicable emission limits in Sec. 63.1382. Compliance is demonstrated 
when the emission rate of the pollutant is equal to or less than each of 
the applicable emission limits in Sec. 63.1382. The owner or operator 
shall conduct the performance test according to the procedures in 40 CFR 
part 63, subpart A and in this section.
    (1) All monitoring systems and equipment must be installed, 
operational, and calibrated prior to the performance test.
    (2) Unless a different frequency is specified in this section, the 
owner or operator must monitor and record process and/or add-on control 
device parameters at least every 15 minutes during the performance 
tests. The arithmetic average for each parameter must be calculated 
using all of the recorded measurements for the parameter.
    (3) During each performance test, the owner or operator must monitor 
and record the glass pull rate for each glass-melting furnace and, if 
different, the glass pull rate for each rotary spin manufacturing line 
and flame attenuation manufacturing line. Record the glass pull rate 
every 15 minutes during any performance test required by this subpart 
and determine the arithmetic average of the recorded measurements for 
each test run and calculate the average of the three test runs.
    (4) The owner or operator shall conduct a performance test for each 
existing and new glass-melting furnace.
    (5) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a glass-
melting furnace controlled by an ESP shall monitor and record the ESP 
parameter level(s), as specified in the operations, maintenance, and 
monitoring plan, and establish the minimum and/or maximum value(s) that 
will be used to demonstrate compliance after the initial performance 
test.
    (6) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a cold top 
electric furnace that is not equipped with an add-on control device for 
PM emissions control, must monitor and record the temperature 46 to 61 
centimeters (18 to 24 inches) above the molten glass surface to ensure 
that the maximum temperature does not exceed 120  deg.C (250  deg.F).
    (7) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a glass 
melting furnace (other than a cold top electric furnace) that is not 
equipped with an add-on control device for PM emissions control, must 
monitor and record the furnace parameter level, and establish the 
minimum and/or maximum value(s) that will be used to demonstrate 
compliance after the initial performance test.
    (8) The owner or operator must conduct a performance test for each 
rotary spin manufacturing line, subject to this subpart, while producing 
the building insulation with the highest LOI expected to be produced on 
that line; and for each flame attenuation manufacturing line, subject to 
this subpart, while producing the heavy-density product or pipe product 
with the highest LOI expected to be produced on the affected line.
    (9) The owner or operator of each rotary spin manufacturing line and 
flame attenuation manufacturing line regulated by this subpart must 
conduct performance tests using the resin with the highest free-
formaldehyde content. During the performance test of each rotary spin 
manufacturing line and flame attenuation manufacturing line regulated by 
this subpart, the owner or operator shall monitor and record the free-
formaldehyde content of the resin, the binder formulation used, and the 
product LOI and density.
    (10) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a rotary 
spin manufacturing line or flame attenuation manufacturing line who 
plans to use process modifications to comply with the emission limits in 
Sec. 63.1382 must monitor and record the process parameter level(s), as 
specified in the operations, maintenance, and monitoring plan, which 
will be used to demonstrate compliance after the initial performance 
test.
    (11) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a rotary 
spin manufacturing line or flame attenuation manufacturing line who 
plans to use a wet scrubbing control device to

[[Page 373]]

comply with the emission limits in Sec. 63.1382 must continuously 
monitor and record the pressure drop across the scrubber, the scrubbing 
liquid flow rate, and addition of any chemical to the scrubber, 
including the chemical feed rate, and establish the minimum and/or 
maximum value(s) that will be used to determine compliance after the 
initial performance test.
    (12) During the performance test, the owner or operator of a rotary 
spin manufacturing line or affected flame attenuation manufacturing line 
shall continuously record the operating temperature of each incinerator 
and record the average during each 1-hour test; the average operating 
temperature of the three 1-hour tests shall be used to monitor 
compliance.
    (13) Unless disapproved by the Administrator, an owner or operator 
of a rotary spin or flame attenuation manufacturing line regulated by 
this subpart may conduct short-term experimental production runs using 
binder formulations or other process modifications where the process 
parameter values would be outside those established during performance 
tests without first conducting performance tests. Such runs must not 
exceed 1 week in duration unless the Administrator approves a longer 
period. The owner or operator must notify the Administrator and postmark 
or deliver the notification at least 15 days prior to commencement of 
the short-term experimental production runs. The Administrator must 
inform the owner or operator of a decision to disapprove or must request 
additional information prior to the date of the short-term experimental 
production runs. Notification of intent to perform an experimental 
short-term production run shall include the following information:
    (i) The purpose of the experimental production run;
    (ii) The affected line;
    (iii) How the established process parameters will deviate from 
previously approved levels;
    (iv) The duration of the experimental production run;
    (v) The date and time of the experimental production run; and
    (vi) A description of any emission testing to be performed during 
the experimental production run.
    (b) To determine compliance with the PM emission limit for glass-
melting furnaces, use the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.040

Where:

E = Emission rate of PM, kg/Mg (lb/ton) of glass pulled;
C = Concentration of PM, g/dscm 
          (gr/dscf);
Q = Volumetric flow rate of exhaust gases, dscm/h (dscf/h);
K1 = Conversion factor, 1 kg/1,000 g (1 lb/7,000 gr); and
P = Average glass pull rate, Mg/h (tons/h).

    (c) To determine compliance with the emission limit for formaldehyde 
for rotary spin manufacturing lines and flame attenuation forming 
processes, use the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.041

Where:

    E = Emission rate of formaldehyde, kg/Mg (lb/ton) of glass pulled;
C = Measured volume fraction of formaldehyde, ppm;
MW = Molecular weight of formaldehyde, 30.03 g/g-mol;
Q = Volumetric flow rate of exhaust gases, dscm/h (dscf/h);
K1 = Conversion factor, 1 kg/1,000 g (1 lb/453.6 g);
K2 = Conversion factor, 1,000 L/m3 (28.3 L/
          ft3);
K3 = Conversion factor, 24.45 L/g-mol; and
P = Average glass pull rate, Mg/h (tons/h).



Sec. 63.1385  Test methods and procedures.

    (a) The owner or operator shall use the following methods to 
determine compliance with the applicable emission limits:
    (1) Method 1 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) for the selection of the 
sampling port location and number of sampling ports;
    (2) Method 2 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) for volumetric flow rate;
    (3) Method 3 or 3A (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) for O2 
and CO2 for diluent measurements needed to correct the 
concentration measurements to a standard basis;

[[Page 374]]

    (4) Method 4 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) for moisture content of 
the stack gas;
    (5) Method 5 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) for the concentration of 
PM. Each run shall consist of a minimum run time of 2 hours and a 
minimum sample volume of 60 dry standard cubic feet (dscf). The probe 
and filter holder heating system may be set to provide a gas temperature 
no greater than 177 14  deg.C (350 25  deg.F);
    (6) Method 316 or Method 318 (appendix A of this part) for the 
concentration of formaldehyde. Each run shall consist of a minimum run 
time of 1 hour;
    (7) Method contained in appendix A of this subpart for the 
determination of product LOI;
    (8) Method contained in appendix B of this subpart for the 
determination of the free-formaldehyde content of resin;
    (9) Method contained in appendix C of this subpart for the 
determination of product density;
    (10) An alternative method, subject to approval by the 
Administrator.
    (b) Each performance test shall consist of 3 runs. The owner or 
operator shall use the average of the three runs in the applicable 
equation for determining compliance.



Sec. 63.1386  Notification, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements.

    (a) Notifications. As required by Sec. 63.9(b) through (h) of this 
part, the owner or operator shall submit the following written initial 
notifications to the Administrator:
    (1) Notification for an area source that subsequently increases its 
emissions such that the source is a major source subject to the 
standard;
    (2) Notification that a source is subject to the standard, where the 
initial startup is before June 14, 2002.
    (3) Notification that a source is subject to the standard, where the 
source is new or has been reconstructed, the initial startup is after 
June 14, 2002, and for which an application for approval of construction 
or reconstruction is not required;
    (4) Notification of intention to construct a new major source or 
reconstruct a major source; of the date construction or reconstruction 
commenced; of the anticipated date of startup; of the actual date of 
startup, where the initial startup of a new or reconstructed source 
occurs after June 14, 2002, and for which an application for approval or 
construction or reconstruction is required (See Sec. 63.9(b)(4) and (5) 
of this part);
    (5) Notification of special compliance obligations;
    (6) Notification of performance test; and (7) Notification of 
compliance status.
    (b) Performance test report. As required by Sec. 63.10(d)(2) of the 
general provisions, the owner or operator shall report the results of 
the initial performance test as part of the notification of compliance 
status required in paragraph (a)(7) of this section.
    (c) Startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan and reports. (1) The 
owner or operator shall develop and implement a written plan as 
described in Sec. 63.6(e)(3) of this part that contains specific 
procedures to be followed for operating the source and maintaining the 
source during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction and a 
program of corrective action for malfunctioning process modifications 
and control systems used to comply with the standard. In addition to the 
information required in Sec. 63.6(e)(3), the plan shall include:
    (i) Procedures to determine and record the cause of the malfunction 
and the time the malfunction began and ended;
    (ii) Corrective actions to be taken in the event of a malfunction of 
a control device or process modification, including procedures for 
recording the actions taken to correct the malfunction or minimize 
emissions; and
    (iii) A maintenance schedule for each control device and process 
modification that is consistent with the manufacturer's instructions and 
recommendations for routine and long-term maintenance.
    (2) The owner or operator shall also keep records of each event as 
required by Sec. 63.10(b) of this part and record and report if an 
action taken during a startup, shutdown, or malfunction is not 
consistent with the procedures in the plan as described in 
Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(iv) of this part.

[[Page 375]]

    (d) Recordkeeping. (1) As required by Sec. 63.10(b) of this part, 
the owner or operator shall maintain files of all information (including 
all reports and notifications) required by the general provisions and 
this subpart:
    (i) The owner or operator must retain each record for at least 5 
years following the date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, 
corrective action, report, or record. The most recent 2 years of records 
must be retained at the facility. The remaining 3 years of records may 
be retained off site;
    (ii) The owner or operator may retain records on microfilm, on a 
computer, on computer disks, on magnetic tape, or on microfiche; and
    (iii) The owner or operator may report required information on paper 
or on a labeled computer disk using commonly available and EPA-
compatible computer software.
    (2) In addition to the general records required by Sec. 63.10(b)(2) 
of this part, the owner or operator shall maintain records of the 
following information:
    (i) Any bag leak detection system alarms, including the date and 
time of the alarm, when corrective actions were initiated, the cause of 
the alarm, an explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the 
cause of the alarm was corrected;
    (ii) ESP parameter value(s) used to monitor ESP performance, 
including any period when the value(s) deviated from the established 
limit(s), the date and time of the deviation, when corrective actions 
were initiated, the cause of the deviation, an explanation of the 
corrective actions taken, and when the cause of the deviation was 
corrected;
    (iii) Air temperature above the molten glass in an uncontrolled cold 
top electric furnace, including any period when the temperature exceeded 
120  deg.C (250  deg.F) at a location 46 to 61 centimeters (18 to 24 
inches) above the molten glass surface, the date and time of the 
exceedance, when corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the 
exceedance, an explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the 
cause of the exceedance was corrected;
    (iv) Uncontrolled glass-melting furnace (that is not a cold top 
electric furnace) parameter value(s) used to monitor furnace 
performance, including any period when the value(s) exceeded the 
established limit(s), the date and time of the exceedance, when 
corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the exceedance, an 
explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the cause of the 
exceedance was corrected;
    (v) The formulation of each binder batch and the LOI and density for 
each product manufactured on a rotary spin manufacturing line or flame 
attenuation manufacturing line subject to the provisions of this 
subpart, and the free formaldehyde content of each resin shipment 
received and used in the binder formulation;
    (vi) Process parameter level(s) for RS and FA manufacturing lines 
that use process modifications to comply with the emission limits, 
including any period when the parameter level(s) deviated from the 
established limit(s), the date and time of the deviation, when 
corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the deviation, an 
explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the cause of the 
deviation was corrected;
    (vii) Scrubber pressure drop, scrubbing liquid flow rate, and any 
chemical additive (including chemical feed rate to the scrubber), 
including any period when a parameter level(s) deviated from the 
established limit(s), the date and time of the deviation, when 
corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the deviation, an 
explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the cause of the 
deviation was corrected;
    (viii) Incinerator operating temperature and results of periodic 
inspection of incinerator components, including any period when the 
temperature fell below the established average or the inspection 
identified problems with the incinerator, the date and time of the 
problem, when corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the 
problem, an explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the 
cause of the problem was corrected;
    (ix) Glass pull rate, including any period when the pull rate 
exceeded the average pull rate established during the performance test 
by more than 20 percent, the date and time of the exceedance, when 
corrective actions were initiated, the cause of the exceedance,

[[Page 376]]

an explanation of the corrective actions taken, and when the cause of 
the exceedance was corrected.
    (e) Excess emissions report. As required by Sec. 63.10(e)(3)(v) of 
this part, the owner or operator shall report semiannually if measured 
emissions are in excess of the applicable standard or a monitored 
parameter deviates from the levels established during the performance 
test. The report shall contain the information specified in 
Sec. 63.10(c) of this part as well as the additional records required by 
the recordkeeping requirements of paragraph (d) of this section. When no 
deviations have occurred, the owner or operator shall submit a report 
stating that no excess emissions occurred during the reporting period.



Sec. 63.1387  Compliance dates.

    (a) Compliance dates. The owner or operator subject to the 
provisions of this subpart shall demonstrate compliance with the 
requirements of this subpart by no later than:
    (1) June 14, 2002, for an existing glass-melting furnace, rotary 
spin manufacturing line, or flame attenuation manufacturing line; or
    (2) Upon startup for a new glass-melting furnace, rotary spin 
manufacturing line, or flame attenuation manufacturing line.
    (b) Compliance extension. The owner or operator of an existing 
source subject to this subpart may request from the Administrator an 
extension of the compliance date for the emission standards for one 
additional year if such additional period is necessary for the 
installation of controls. The owner or operator shall submit a request 
for an extension according to the procedures in Sec. 63.6(i)(3) of this 
part.



Secs. 63.1388--63.1399  [Reserved]

[[Page 377]]



                   Table 1 to Subpart NNN of Part 63.--Applicability of General Provisions (40 CFR Part 63, Subpart A) to Subpart NNN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Applies to  subpart
   General provisions citation           Requirement                 NNN                                        Explanation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1(a)(1)-(a)(4)...............  Applicability...........  Yes.
63.1(a)(5)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.1(a)(6)-(a)(8)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.1(a)(9)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.1(a)(10)-(a)(14).............  ........................  Yes.
63.1(b)(1)-(b)(3)...............  Initial Applicability     Yes.
                                   Determination.
63.1(c)(1)-(c)(2)...............  Applicability After       Yes.
                                   Standard Established.
63.1(c)(3)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.1(c)(4)-(c)(5)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.1(d).........................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.1(e).........................  Applicability of Permit   Yes.
                                   Program.
63.2............................  Definitions.............  Yes.................  Additional definitions in Sec.  63.1381.
63.3(a)-(c).....................  Units and Abbreviations.  Yes.
63.4(a)(1)-(a)(3)...............  Prohibited Activities...  Yes.
63.4(a)(4)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.4(a)(5)......................  ........................  Yes.
63.4(b)-(c).....................  ........................  Yes.
63.5(a)(1)-(a)(2)...............  Construction/             Yes.
                                   Reconstruction.
63.5(b)(1)......................  Existing, New,            Yes.
                                   Reconstructed.
63.5(b)(2)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.5(b)(3)-(b)(6)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.5(c).........................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.5(d).........................  Approval of Construction/ Yes.
                                   Reconstruction.
63.5(e).........................  ........................  Yes.
63.5(f).........................  ........................  Yes.
63.6(a).........................  Compliance with           Yes.
                                   Standards and
                                   Maintenance
                                   Requirements.
63.6(b)(1)-(b)(5)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.6(b)(6)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.6(b)(7)......................  ........................  Yes.
63.6(c)(1)......................  Compliance Date for       Yes.................  Sec. 63.1387 specifies compliance dates.
                                   Existing Sources.
63.6(c)(2)......................  ........................  Yes.
63.6(c)(3)-(c)(4)...............  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.6(c)(5)......................  ........................  Yes.
63.6(d).........................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.6(e)(1)-(e)(2)...............  Operation & Maintenance.  Yes.................  Sec.  63.1383 specifies operations/maintenance plan.
63.6(e)(3)......................  Startup, Shutdown         Yes.
                                   Malfunction Plan.
63.6(f)(1)-(f)(3)...............  Compliance with           Yes.
                                   Nonopacity Emission
                                   Standards.
63.6(g)(1)-(g)(3)...............  Alternative Nonopacity    Yes.
                                   Standard.
63.6(h).........................  Opacity/VE Standards....  No..................  Subpart NNN-no COMS, VE or opacity standards.
63.6(i)(1)-(i)(14)..............  Extension of Compliance.  Yes.
63.6(i)(15).....................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.6(i)(16).....................  ........................  Yes.
63.6(j).........................  Exemption from            Yes.
                                   Compliance.

[[Page 378]]

 
63.7(a).........................  Performance Testing       Yes                   Sec.  63.1384 has specific requirements.
                                   Requirements.
63.7(b).........................  Notification............  Yes.
63.7(c).........................  Quality Assurance         Yes.
                                   Program/Test Plan.
63.7(d).........................  Performance Testing       Yes.
                                   Facilities.
63.7(e)(1)-(e)(4)...............  Conduct of Performance    Yes.
                                   Tests.
63.7(f).........................  Alternative Test Method.  Yes.
63.7(g).........................  Data Analysis...........  Yes.
63.7(h).........................  Waiver of Performance     Yes.
                                   Tests.
63.8(a)(1)-(a)(2)...............  Monitoring Requirements.  Yes.
63.8(a)(3)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.8(a)(4)......................  ........................  Yes.
63.8(b).........................  Conduct of Monitoring...  Yes.
63.8(c).........................  CMS Operation/            Yes.
                                   Maintenance.
63.8(d).........................  Quality Control Program.  Yes.
63.8(e).........................  Performance Evaluation    Yes.
                                   for CMS.
63.8(f).........................  Alternative Monitoring    Yes.
                                   Method.
63.8(g).........................  Reduction of Monitoring   Yes.
                                   Data.
63.9(a).........................  Notification              Yes.
                                   Requirements.
63.9(b).........................  Initial Notifications...  Yes.
63.9(c).........................  Request for Compliance    Yes.
                                   Extension.
63.9(d).........................  New Source Notification   Yes.
                                   for Special Compliance
                                   Requirements.
63.9(e).........................  Notification of           Yes.
                                   Performance Test.
63.9(f).........................  Notification of VE/       No..................  Opacity/VE tests not required.
                                   Opacity Test.
63.9(g).........................  Additional CMS            Yes.
                                   Notifications.
63.9(h)(1)-(h)(3)...............  Notification of           Yes.
                                   Compliance Status.
63.9(h)(4)......................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.9(h)(5)-(h)(6)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.9(i).........................  Adjustment of Deadlines.  Yes.
63.9(j).........................  Change in Previous        Yes.
                                   Information.
63.10(a)........................  Recordkeeping/Reporting.  Yes.
63.10(b)........................  General Requirements....  Yes.
63.10(c)(1).....................  Additional CMS            Yes.
                                   Recordkeeping.
63.10(c)(2)-(c)(4)..............  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.10(c)(5)-(c)(8)..............  ........................  Yes.
63.10(c)(9).....................  ........................  No..................  [Reserved].
63.10(c)(10)-(15)...............  ........................  Yes.
63.10(d)(1).....................  General Reporting         Yes.
                                   Requirements.
63.10(d)(2).....................  Performance Test Results  Yes.
63.10(d)(3).....................  Opacity or VE             No..................  No limits for VE/opacity.
                                   Observations.
63.10(d)(4).....................  Progress Reports........  Yes.
63.10(d)(5).....................  Startup, Shutdown,        Yes.
                                   Malfunction Reports.
63.10(e)(1)-(e)(3)..............  Additional CMS Reports..  Yes.
63.10(e)(4).....................  Reporting COM Data......  No..................  COM not required.
63.10(f)........................  Waiver of Recordkeeping/  Yes.
                                   Reporting.

[[Page 379]]

 
63.11(a)........................  Control Device            Yes.
                                   Requirements.
63.11(b)........................  Flares..................  No..................  Flares not applicable.
63.12...........................  State Authority and       Yes.
                                   Delegations.
63.13...........................  State/Regional Addresses  Yes.
63.14...........................  Incorporation by          No..................
                                   Reference.
63.15...........................  Availability of           Yes.
                                   Information.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 380]]

 Appendix A to Subpart NNN of Part 63--Method for the Determination of 
                                   LOI

                               1. Purpose

    The purpose of this test is to determine the LOI of cured blanket 
insulation. The method is applicable to all cured board and blanket 
products.

                              2. Equipment

    2.1  Scale sensitive to 0.1 gram.
    2.2  Furnace designed to heat to at least 540  deg.C (1,000  deg.F) 
and controllable to 10  deg.C (50  deg.F).
    2.3  Wire tray for holding specimen while in furnace.

                              3. Procedure

    3.1  Cut a strip along the entire width of the product that will 
weigh at least 10.0 grams. Sample should be free of dirt or foreign 
matter.

    Note: Remove all facing from sample.

    3.2  Cut the sample into pieces approximately 12 inches long, weigh 
to the nearest 0.1 gram and record. Place in wire tray. Sample should 
not be compressed or overhang on tray edges.

    Note: On air duct products, remove shiplaps and overspray.

    3.3  Place specimen in furnace at 540  deg.C (1,000  deg.F), 
10  deg.C (50  deg.F) for 15 to 20 minutes to insure 
complete oxidation. After ignition, fibers should be white and should 
not be fused together.
    3.4  Remove specimen from the furnace and cool to room temperature.
    3.5  Weigh cooled specimen and wire tray to the nearest 0.1 gram. 
Deduct the weight of the wire tray and then calculate the loss in weight 
as a percent of the original specimen weight.

  Appendix B to Subpart NNN of Part 63--Free Formaldehyde Analysis of 
            Insulation Resins by Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride

                                1. Scope

    This method was specifically developed for water-soluble phenolic 
resins that have a relatively high free-formaldehyde (FF) content such 
as insulation resins. It may also be suitable for other phenolic resins, 
especially those with a high FF content.

                              2. Principle

    2.1  a. The basis for this method is the titration of the 
hydrochloric acid that is liberated when hydroxylamine hydrochloride 
reacts with formaldehyde to form formaldoxine:

HCHO + NH2OH:HCl  CH2:NOH + H2O + HCl

    b. Free formaldehyde in phenolic resins is present as monomeric 
formaldehyde, hemiformals, polyoxymethylene hemiformals, and 
polyoxymethylene glycols. Monomeric formaldehyde and hemiformals react 
rapidly with hydroxylamine hydrochloride, but the polymeric forms of 
formaldehyde must hydrolyze to the monomeric state before they can 
react. The greater the concentration of free formaldehyde in a resin, 
the more of that formaldehyde will be in the polymeric form. The 
hydrolysis of these polymers is catalyzed by hydrogen ions.
    2.2  The resin sample being analyzed must contain enough free 
formaldehyde so that the initial reaction with hydroxylamine 
hydrochloride will produce sufficient hydrogen ions to catalyze the 
depolymerization of the polymeric formaldehyde within the time limits of 
the test method. The sample should contain approximately 0.3 grams free 
formaldehyde to ensure complete reaction within 5 minutes.

                              3. Apparatus

    3.1  Balance, readable to 0.01 g or better.
    3.2  pH meter, standardized to pH 4.0 with pH 4.0 buffer and pH 7 
with pH 7.0 buffer.
    3.3  50-mL burette for 1.0 N sodium hydroxide.
    3.4  Magnetic stirrer and stir bars.
    3.5  250-mL beaker.
    3.6  50-mL graduated cylinder.
    3.7  100-mL graduated cylinder.
    3.8  Timer.

                               4. Reagents

    4.1  Standardized 1.0 N sodium hydroxide solution.
    4.2  Hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution, 100 grams per liter, pH 
adjusted to 4.00.
    4.3  Hydrochloric acid solution, 1.0 N and 0.1 N.
    4.4  Sodium hydroxide solution, 0.1 N.
    4.5  50/50 v/v mixture of distilled water and methyl alcohol.

                              5. Procedure

    5.1  Determine the sample size as follows:
    a. If the expected FF is greater than 2 percent, go to Part A to 
determine sample size.
    b. If the expected FF is less than 2 percent, go to Part B to 
determine sample size.
    c. Part A: Expected FF  2 percent.

Grams resin = 60/expected percent FF

    i. The following table shows example levels:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Sample
                Expected % free formaldehyde                 size, grams
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2..........................................................         30.0
5..........................................................         12.0
8..........................................................          7.5
10.........................................................          6.0
12.........................................................          5.0

[[Page 381]]

 
15.........................................................          4.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    ii. It is very important to the accuracy of the results that the 
sample size be chosen correctly. If the milliliters of titrant are less 
than 15 mL or greater than 30 mL, reestimate the needed sample size and 
repeat the tests.
    d. Part B: Expected FF  2 percent

Grams resin = 30/expected percent FF

    i. The following table shows example levels:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Sample
                Expected % free formaldehyde                 size, grams
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2..........................................................           15
1..........................................................           30
0.5........................................................           60
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    ii. If the milliliters of titrant are less than 5 mL or greater than 
30 mL, reestimate the needed sample size and repeat the tests.
    5.2  Weigh the resin sample to the nearest 0.01 grams into a 250-mL 
beaker. Record sample weight.
    5.3  Add 100 mL of the methanol/water mixture and stir on a magnetic 
stirrer. Confirm that the resin has dissolved.
    5.4  Adjust the resin/solvent solution to pH 4.0, using the 
prestandardized pH meter, 1.0 N hydrochloric acid, 0.1 N hydrochloric 
acid, and 0.1 N sodium hydroxide.
    5.5  Add 50 mL of the hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution, measured 
with a graduated cylinder. Start the timer.
    5.6  Stir for 5 minutes. Titrate to pH 4.0 with standardized 1.0 N 
sodium hydroxide. Record the milliliters of titrant and the normality.

                             6. Calculations

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.042

                    7. Method Precision and Accuracy

    Test values should conform to the following statistical precision:

Variance = 0.005
Standard deviation = 0.07
95% Confidence Interval, for a single determination = 0.2

                                8. Author

    This method was prepared by K. K. Tutin and M. L. Foster, Tacoma R&D 
Laboratory, Georgia-Pacific Resins, Inc. (Principle written by R. R. 
Conner.)

                              9. References

    9.1  GPAM 2221.2.
    9.2  PR&C TM 2.035.
    9.3  Project Report, Comparison of Free Formaldehyde Procedures, 
January 1990, K. K. Tutin.

 Appendix C to Subpart NNN of Part 63--Method for the Determination of 
                             Product Density

                               1. Purpose

    The purpose of this test is to determine the product density of 
cured blanket insulation. The method is applicable to all cured board 
and blanket products.

                              2. Equipment

    One square foot (12 in. by 12 in.) template, or templates that are 
multiples of one square foot, for use in cutting insulation samples.

                              3. Procedure

    3.1  Obtain a sample at least 30 in. long across the machine width. 
Sample should be free of dirt or foreign matter.
    3.2  Lay out the cutting pattern according to the plant's written 
procedure for the designated product.
    3.2  Cut samples using one square foot (or multiples of one square 
foot) template.
    3.3  Weigh product and obtain area weight (lb/ft2).
    3.4  Measure sample thickness.
    3.5  Calculate the product density:
Density (lb/ft3) = area weight (lb/ft2)/thickness 
          (ft)

Subpart OOO  [Reserved]



  Subpart PPP--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutant 
               Emissions for Polyether Polyols Production

    Source: 64 FR 29439, June 1, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 63.1420  Applicability and designation of affected sources.

    (a) Definition of affected source. The provisions of this subpart 
apply to each affected source. Affected sources are described in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section.

[[Page 382]]

    (1) An affected source is either an existing affected source or a 
new affected source. Existing affected source is defined in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section, and new affected source is defined in paragraph 
(a)(3) of this section.
    (2) An existing affected source is defined as the group of one or 
more polyether polyol manufacturing process units (PMPUs) and associated 
equipment, as listed in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, that is not 
part of a new affected source, as defined in paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section, and that is located at a plant site that is a major source.
    (3) A new affected source is defined as a source that meets the 
criteria of paragraph (a)(3)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section. The 
situation described in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section is distinct 
from those situations described in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii) and (iii) of 
this section.
    (i) At a site without organic HAP emission points before September 
4, 1997 (i.e., a ``greenfield'' site), the group of one or more PMPUs 
and associated equipment, as listed in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, 
that is part of a major source, and on which construction for the 
PMPU(s) commenced after September 4, 1997;
    (ii) The group of one or more PMPUs meeting the criteria in 
paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section; or
    (iii) A reconstructed affected source meeting the criteria in 
paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section.
    (4) The affected source also includes the emission points and 
equipment specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (vi) of this section 
that are associated with a PMPU (or a group of PMPUs) making up an 
affected source, as defined in Sec. 63.1423.
    (i) Each waste management unit.
    (ii) Maintenance wastewater.
    (iii) Each heat exchange system.
    (iv) Equipment required by or utilized as a method of compliance 
with this subpart which may include control techniques and recovery 
devices.
    (v) Product finishing operation.
    (vi) Each feed or catalyst operation.
    (b) PMPUs without organic HAP. The owner or operator of a PMPU that 
is part of an affected source, as defined in paragraph (a) of this 
section, but that does not use or manufacture any organic HAP during the 
production of one or more products is only subject to the provisions of 
this subpart as specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section, as 
applicable. Products or raw material(s) containing organic HAP as 
impurities only are not considered organic HAP for the purposes of this 
paragraph.
    (1) If an organic HAP is not used or manufactured in the production 
of polyether polyols, the PMPU is not subject to any provisions of this 
subpart, except that the owner or operator shall comply with either 
paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. The owner or operator is 
not required to comply with the provisions of 40 CFR part 63, subpart A 
(the General Provisions) for that PMPU.
    (i) Retain information, data, and analyses used to document the 
basis for the determination that the PMPU does not use or manufacture 
any organic HAP. Types of information that could document this 
determination include, but are not limited to, records of chemicals 
purchased for the process, analyses of process stream composition, 
engineering calculations, or process knowledge.
    (ii) When requested by the Administrator, demonstrate that the PMPU 
does not use or manufacture any organic HAP.
    (2) If an organic HAP is used or manufactured in the production of 
polyether polyols, but an organic HAP is not used in the production of 
one or more products that are not polyether polyols, the PMPU is not 
subject to any provision of this subpart other than paragraph (b)(1)(i) 
or (ii) of this section during the production of the non-polyether 
polyol products that do not use or manufacture any organic HAP.
    (c) Emission points included in the affected source but not subject 
to the provisions of this subpart. The affected source includes the 
emission points listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (12) of this 
section, but these emission points are not subject to the requirements 
of this subpart or the provisions of 40 CFR part 63, subpart A.
    (1) Equipment that does not contain organic HAP or that contains 
organic

[[Page 383]]

HAP as impurities only and is located at a PMPU that is part of an 
affected source.
    (2) Stormwater managed in segregated sewers.
    (3) Water from fire-fighting and deluge systems in segregated 
sewers.
    (4) Spills.
    (5) Water from safety showers.
    (6) Water from testing of deluge systems.
    (7) Water from testing of firefighting systems.
    (8) Vessels that store and/or handle material that contains no 
organic HAP or organic HAP as impurities only.
    (9) Equipment that operates in organic HAP service for less than 300 
hours during the calendar year.
    (10) Loading racks, loading arms, or loading hoses that only 
transfer liquids containing HAP as impurities.
    (11) Loading racks, loading arms, or loading hoses that vapor 
balance during all loading operations.
    (12) Utility fluids, such as heat transfer fluids.
    (d) Processes exempted from the affected source. The processes 
specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section are not part 
of the affected source and are exempted from the requirements of both 
this subpart and subpart A of this part.
    (1) Research and development facilities.
    (2) Solvent reclamation, recovery, or recycling operations at 
hazardous waste treatment, storage, and disposal facilities (TSDF) 
requiring a permit under 40 CFR part 270 that are not part of a PMPU to 
which this subpart applies.
    (3) Reactions or processing that occur after the epoxide 
polymerization is complete and after all catalyst removal steps, if any, 
are complete.
    (e) Primary product determination and applicability. An owner or 
operator of a process unit that produces or plans to produce a polyether 
polyol shall determine if the process unit is subject to this subpart in 
accordance with this paragraph.
    (1) Initial primary product determination. The owner or operator 
shall initially determine the primary product of each process unit in 
accordance with paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) If a process unit manufactures only one product, then that 
product shall represent the primary product of the process unit.
    (ii) If a process unit produces more than one intended product at 
the same time, the primary product shall be determined in accordance 
with paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) The product for which the process unit has the greatest annual 
design capacity on a mass basis shall represent the primary product of 
the process unit, or
    (B) If a process unit has the same maximum annual design capacity on 
a mass basis for two or more products and if one of those products is a 
polyether polyol, then the polyether polyol shall represent the primary 
product of the process unit.
    (iii) If a process unit is designed and operated as a flexible 
operation unit, the primary product shall be determined as specified in 
paragraph (e)(1)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section based on the anticipated 
operations for the 5 years following September 4, 1997 for existing 
process units, or for the first year after the process unit begins 
production of any product for the new process units. If operations 
cannot be anticipated sufficiently to allow the determination of the 
primary product for the specified period, applicability shall be 
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (A) If the flexible operation unit will manufacture one product for 
the greatest operating time over the specified 5-year period for 
existing process units, or the specified 1-year period for new process 
units, then that product shall represent the primary product of the 
flexible operation unit.
    (B) If the flexible operation unit will manufacture multiple 
products equally based on operating time, then the product with the 
greatest expected production on a mass basis over the specified 5-year 
period for existing process units, or the specified 1-year period for 
new process units shall represent the primary product of the flexible 
operation unit.
    (iv) If, according to paragraph (e)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this 
section, the

[[Page 384]]

primary product of a process unit is a polyether polyol, then that 
process unit shall be designated as a PMPU. If the plant site is a major 
source, that PMPU and associated equipment, as listed in paragraph 
(a)(4) of this section, is either an affected source or part of an 
affected source comprised of one or more other PMPUs and associated 
equipment, as listed in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, and subject to 
this subpart. If the primary product of a process unit is not a 
polyether polyol, then that process unit is not a PMPU.
    (2) Provisions if primary product cannot be determined. If the 
primary product cannot be determined for a flexible operation unit in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, applicability 
shall be determined in accordance with this paragraph.
    (i) If the owner or operator can determine that a polyether polyol 
is not the primary product, then that flexible operation unit is not a 
PMPU.
    (ii) If the owner or operator cannot determine that a polyether 
polyol is not the primary product as specified in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of 
this section, applicability shall be determined in accordance with 
paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) If the flexible operation unit is an existing process unit, the 
flexible operation unit shall be designated as a PMPU if a polyether 
polyol was produced for 5 percent or greater of the total operating time 
of the flexible operation unit since September 4, 1997.
    (B) If the flexible operation unit is a new process unit, the 
flexible operation unit shall be designated as a PMPU if the owner or 
operator anticipates that a polyether polyol will be manufactured in the 
flexible operation unit at any time in the first year after the date the 
unit begins production of any product.
    (3) Annual applicability determination for non-PMPUs that have 
produced a polyether polyol. Once per year beginning June 1, 2004 the 
owner or operator of each flexible operation unit that is not designated 
as a PMPU, but that has produced a polyether polyol at any time in the 
preceding 5-year period or since the date that the unit began production 
of any product, whichever is shorter, shall perform the evaluation 
described in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) For each product produced in the flexible operation unit, the 
owner or operator shall calculate the percentage of total operating time 
over which the product was produced during the preceding 5-year period.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall identify the primary product as the 
product with the highest percentage of total operating time for the 
preceding 5-year period.
    (iii) If the primary product identified in paragraph (e)(3)(ii) is a 
polyether polyol, the flexible operation unit shall be designated as a 
PMPU. The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator no later than 
45 days after determining that the flexible operation unit is a PMPU, 
and shall comply with the requirements of this subpart in accordance 
with paragraph (g)(1) of this section for the flexible operation unit.
    (4) Applicability determination for non-PMPUs that have not produced 
a polyether polyol. The owner or operator that anticipates the 
production of a polyether polyol in a process unit that is not 
designated as a PMPU, and in which no polyether polyol products have 
been produced in the previous 5-year period or since the date that the 
process unit began production of any product, whichever is shorter, 
shall use the procedures in paragraph (e)(1) or (2) of this section to 
determine if the process unit is designated as a PMPU, with the 
exception that for existing process units, owners or operators shall 
project production for the 5 years following the date that the owner or 
operator anticipates initiating the production of a polyether polyol, 
instead of the 5 years following September 4, 1997. If the unit is 
designated as a PMPU, the owner or operator shall comply in accordance 
with paragraph (g)(1) of this section.
    (5) Applicability of requirements for PMPUs that are flexible 
operation units. The owner or operator of PMPUs that are flexible 
operation units shall comply with the provisions of this subpart in 
accordance with paragraphs (e)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section.
    (i) Control requirements. The owner or operator shall comply with 
the control

[[Page 385]]

requirements of this subpart in accordance with paragraphs (e)(5)(i)(A) 
and (B) of this section.
    (A) During periods when the PMPU produces polyether polyols, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the provisions of this subpart.
    (B) During periods when the PMPU produces products other than 
polyether polyols, the owner or operator is not required to install 
additional combustion, recovery, or recapture devices (to otherwise 
demonstrate compliance). However, the owner or operator shall continue 
to operate any existing combustion, recovery, or recapture devices that 
are required for compliance during the production of polyether polyols, 
with the exceptions provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section. If 
extended cookout (ECO) is the control technique chosen for epoxide 
emission reduction, then ECO or a control technique providing an 
equivalent reduction in epoxide emissions should continue to be used for 
epoxide emission reduction, if the non-polyether polyol being produced 
uses epoxide monomers.
    (ii) Monitoring requirements. The owner or operator shall comply 
with the monitoring requirements of this subpart in accordance with 
paragraphs (e)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, and paragraph 
(e)(5)(ii)(C) of this section if applicable.
    (A) The owner or operator shall establish a single parameter 
monitoring level (for each parameter required to be monitored at each 
device subject to monitoring requirements) in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1438(a) based on emission point and control technique 
characteristics when polyether polyol is being produced.
    (B) The owner or operator shall monitor each parameter at each 
device subject to monitoring requirements at all times (during periods 
when the PMPU produces polyether polyols, and during periods when the 
PMPU produces products other than polyether polyols), with the 
exceptions provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section.
    (C) If ECO is used to reduce epoxide emissions, a parameter 
monitoring level shall be established for the production of non-
polyether polyol products as the average of the established parameter 
levels for all product classes produced. During periods when products 
other than polyether polyols are produced, the ECO shall be performed so 
that the parameter monitoring level established for the production of 
non-polyether polyol products is maintained when the ECO is used as a 
control technique.
    (iii) Group determinations. For emission points where the owner or 
operator is required to determine if the emission point is Group 1 
according the definitions in Sec. 63.1423 (storage vessels, process 
vents for nonepoxide organic HAP emissions used to make or modify the 
product, and wastewater), the owner or operator shall determine the 
group status based on emission point characteristics when polyether 
polyol is being manufactured. Group 1 emission points shall be 
controlled in accordance with paragraph (e)(5)(i) of this section.
    (iv) Exceptions. During periods when products described in 
paragraphs (e)(5)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section are produced, the owner 
or operator is not required to comply with the provisions of this 
subpart.
    (A) Products in which no organic HAP is used or manufactured, 
provided that the owner or operator comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section.
    (B) Products that make the PMPU subject to 40 CFR part 63, subpart 
GGG (Pharmaceuticals Production NESHAP).
    (6)-(7) [Reserved]
    (8) Requirements for process units that are not PMPUs. If it is 
determined that a process unit is not subject to this subpart, the owner 
or operator shall either retain all information, data, and analysis used 
to document the basis for the determination that the process unit is not 
a PMPU, or, when requested by the Administrator, demonstrate that the 
process unit is not a PMPU.
    (9) PMPUs terminating production of polyether polyols products. If a 
PMPU terminates the production of polyether polyol and does not 
anticipate the production of a polyether polyol in the future, the 
process unit is no longer a PMPU and is not subject to this subpart 
after notification is made to the Administrator. This notification shall 
be accompanied by a rationale for why it is anticipated that no 
polyether

[[Page 386]]

polyol will be produced in the process unit in the future.
    (10) Redetermination of applicability to PMPUs that are flexible 
operation units. Whenever changes in production occur that could 
reasonably be expected to change the primary product of a PMPU that is 
operating as a flexible operation unit from a polyether polyol to a 
product that would make the process unit subject to another subpart of 
this part, the owner or operator shall reevaluate the primary product, 
in accordance with paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section. If the 
conditions in paragraphs (e)(10)(i) through (iii) of this section are 
met, the flexible operation unit shall no longer be designated as a PMPU 
after the compliance date of the other subpart, and shall no longer be 
subject to the provisions of this subpart after the date that the 
process unit is required to be in compliance with the provisions of the 
other subpart. If the conditions in paragraphs (e)(10)(i) through (iii) 
of this section are not met, the flexible operation unit shall continue 
to be considered a PMPU and subject to the requirements of this subpart.
    (i) The product identified as the primary product is not polyether 
polyol;
    (ii) The production of the product identified as the primary product 
is subject to another subpart of this part; and
    (iii) The owner or operator submits a notification to the 
Administrator of the pending change in applicability.
    (f) Storage vessel ownership determination. The owner or operator 
shall follow the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (7) 
of this section to determine to which process unit a storage vessel 
shall be assigned.
    (1) If a storage vessel is already subject to another subpart of 40 
CFR part 63 (National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
for Source Categories) on June 1, 1999, that storage vessel shall be 
assigned to the process unit subject to the other subpart, and none of 
the other provisions in this subpart shall apply to that storage vessel.
    (2) If a storage vessel is dedicated to a single process unit, the 
storage vessel shall be assigned to that process unit.
    (3) If a storage vessel is shared among process units, then the 
storage vessel shall be assigned to that process unit located on the 
same plant site as the storage vessel that has the greatest input into 
or output from the storage vessel (i.e., the process unit that has the 
predominant use of the storage vessel.)
    (4) If predominant use cannot be determined for a storage vessel 
that is shared among process units and if only one of those process 
units is a PMPU subject to this subpart, the storage vessel shall be 
assigned to that PMPU.
    (5) If predominant use cannot be determined for a storage vessel 
that is shared among process units and if more than one of the process 
units are PMPUs that have different primary products and that are 
subject to this subpart, then the owner or operator shall assign the 
storage vessel to any one of the PMPUs sharing the storage vessel.
    (6) If the predominant use of a storage vessel varies from year to 
year, then predominant use shall be determined based on the utilization 
that occurred during the year preceding June 1, 1999 or based on the 
expected utilization for the 5 years following June 1, 1999 for existing 
affected sources, whichever is more representative of the expected 
operations for that storage vessel, and based on the expected 
utilization for the 5 years after initial start-up for new affected 
sources. The determination of predominant use shall be reported in the 
Notification of Compliance Status, as required by Sec. 63.1439(e)(5)(v).
    (7) Where a storage vessel is located at a major source that 
includes one or more process units which place material into or receive 
material from the storage vessel, but the storage vessel is located in a 
tank farm (including a marine tank farm), the applicability of this 
subpart shall be determined according to the provisions in paragraphs 
(f)(7)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) The storage vessel may only be assigned to a process unit that 
utilizes the storage vessel and does not have an intervening storage 
vessel for that product (or raw materials, as appropriate). With respect 
to any process unit, an intervening storage vessel

[[Page 387]]

means a storage vessel connected by hard-piping to both the process unit 
and the storage vessel in the tank farm so that product or raw material 
entering or leaving the process unit flows into (or from) the 
intervening storage vessel and does not flow directly into (or from) the 
storage vessel in the tank farm.
    (ii) If there is no process unit at the major source that meets the 
criteria of paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section with respect to a 
storage vessel, this subpart does not apply to the storage vessel.
    (iii) If there is only one process unit at the major source that 
meets the criteria of paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section with respect 
to a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned to that 
process unit.
    (iv) If there are two or more process units at the major source that 
meet the criteria of paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section with respect to 
a storage vessel, the storage vessel shall be assigned to one of those 
process units according to the provisions of paragraphs (f)(3) through 
(6) of this section. The predominant use shall be determined among only 
those process units that meet the criteria of paragraph (f)(7)(i) of 
this section.
    (8) If the storage vessel begins receiving material from (or sending 
material to) a process unit that was not included in the initial 
determination, or ceases to receive material from (or send material to) 
a process unit that was included in the initial determination, the owner 
or operator shall reevaluate the applicability of this subpart to that 
storage vessel.
    (g) Changes or additions to plant sites. The provisions of this 
paragraph apply to the owner or operator that changes or adds to their 
plant site or affected source.
    (1) Adding a PMPU to a plant site. The provisions of paragraphs 
(g)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section apply to the owner or operator that 
adds one or more PMPUs to a plant site. A PMPU may be added to a plant 
site by constructing or reconstructing a process unit to produce 
polyether polyols. A PMPU may also be added to a plant site due to 
changes in production (anticipated production or actual past production) 
such that a polyether polyol becomes the primary product of a process 
unit that was not previously a PMPU.
    (i) If a group of one or more PMPUs is added to a plant site, the 
added group of one or more PMPUs and their associated equipment, as 
listed in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, shall be a new affected 
source and shall comply with the requirements for a new affected source 
in this subpart upon initial start-up or by June 1, 1999, whichever is 
later, if the criteria specified in paragraph (g)(1)(i)(A) is met and 
either the criteria in paragraph (g)(1)(i)(B) or (C) of this section are 
met.
    (A) The process units are new process units, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1423.
    (B) The added group of one or more PMPUs and associated equipment, 
as listed in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, has the potential to emit 
10 tons per year (9.1 megagrams per year) or more of any organic HAP or 
25 tons per year (22.7 megagrams per year) or more of any combination of 
organic HAP, and polyether polyols are currently produced at the plant 
site as the primary product of an affected source.
    (C) A polyether polyol is not currently produced at the plant site 
as the primary product of an affected source, and the plant site meets, 
or after the addition is constructed will meet, the General Provisions' 
definition of a major source in Sec. 63.2.
    (ii) If a group of one or more PMPUs is added to a plant site, and 
the added group of one or more PMPUs does not meet the criteria 
specified in paragraph (g)(1)(i)(A) of this section and one of the 
criteria specified in either paragraph (g)(1)(i)(B) or (C) of this 
section, and the plant site meets, or after the addition will meet, the 
definition of a major source, the owner or operator of the added group 
of one or more PMPUs and associated equipment, as listed in paragraph 
(a)(4) of this section, shall comply with the requirements for an 
existing affected source in this subpart upon initial start-up; by June 
1, 2002; or by 6 months after notifying the Administrator that a process 
unit has been designated as a PMPU (in accordance with paragraph (g)(3) 
of this section), whichever is later.
    (2) Adding emission points or making process changes to existing 
affected

[[Page 388]]

sources. The provisions of paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section 
apply to the owner or operator that adds emission points or makes 
process changes to an existing affected source.
    (i) If any process change or addition is made to an existing 
affected source that meets the criteria specified in paragraphs 
(g)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, the entire affected source shall 
be a new affected source and shall comply with the requirements for a 
new affected source in this subpart upon initial start-up or by June 1, 
1999.
    (A) It is a process change or addition that meets the definition of 
reconstruction in Sec. 63.1423(b). For purposes of determining whether 
the fixed capital cost of the new components exceeds 50 percent of the 
fixed capital cost that would be required to construct an entire 
affected source, the equivalent capital cost shall be the entire 
potentially affected source; and
    (B) Such reconstruction commenced after September 4, 1997.
    (ii) If any process change is made or emission point is added to an 
existing affected source, and the process change or addition does not 
meet the criteria specified in paragraph (g)(2)(i)(A) of this section, 
the resulting emission point(s) shall be subject to the requirements for 
an existing affected source in this subpart. The resulting emission 
point(s) shall be in compliance upon initial start-up or by the 
appropriate compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1422 (i.e., December 1, 
1999 for most equipment leak components, and June 1, 2002 for emission 
points other than equipment leaks).
    (3) Determining what are and are not process changes. For purposes 
of paragraph (g) of this section, examples of process changes include, 
but are not limited to, additions in process equipment resulting in 
changes in production capacity; production of a product outside the 
scope of the compliance demonstration; or whenever there is a 
replacement, removal, or addition of recovery equipment. For purposes of 
paragraph (g) of this section, process changes do not include: Process 
upsets, unintentional temporary process changes, and changes that are 
within the equipment configuration and operating conditions documented 
in the Notification of Compliance Status report required by 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (4) Reporting requirements for owners or operators that change or 
add to their plant site or affected source. An owner or operator that 
changes or adds to their plant site or affected source, as discussed in 
paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section, shall submit a report as 
specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(7)(ii).
    (h) Applicability of this subpart during periods of start-up, 
shutdown, malfunction, or non-operation. Paragraphs (h)(1) through (4) 
of this section shall be followed during periods of start-up, shutdown, 
malfunction, and non-operation of the affected source or any part 
thereof.
    (1) The emission limitations set forth in this subpart and the 
emission limitations referred to in this subpart shall apply at all 
times except during periods of non-operation of the affected source (or 
specific portion thereof) resulting in cessation of the emissions to 
which this subpart applies. These emission limitations shall not apply 
during periods of start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, during which the 
owner or operator shall follow the applicable provisions of the start-
up, shutdown, and malfunction plan required by Sec. 63.6(e)(3). However, 
if a start-up, shutdown, malfunction, or period of non-operation of one 
portion of an affected source does not affect the ability of a 
particular emission point to comply with the emission limitations to 
which it is subject, then that emission point shall still be required to 
comply with the applicable emission limitations of this subpart during 
the start-up, shutdown, malfunction, or period of non-operation. For 
example, if there is an overpressure in the reactor area, a storage 
vessel that is part of the affected source would still be required to be 
controlled in accordance with the storage tank provisions in 
Sec. 63.1432. Similarly, the degassing of a storage vessel would not 
affect the ability of a process vent to meet the emission limitations 
for process vents in Secs. 63.1425 through 63.1430.
    (2) The emission limitations set forth in 40 CFR part 63, subpart H, 
as referred to in the equipment leak provisions in Sec. 63.1434, shall 
apply at all

[[Page 389]]

times except during periods of non-operation of the affected source (or 
specific portion thereof) in which the lines are drained and 
depressurized resulting in cessation of the emissions to which 
Sec. 63.1434 applies, or during periods of start-up, shutdown, 
malfunction, or process unit shutdown (as defined in Sec. 63.161).
    (3) The owner or operator shall not shut down items of equipment 
that are required or utilized for compliance with this subpart during 
periods of start-up, shutdown, or malfunction during times when 
emissions (or, where applicable, wastewater streams or residuals) are 
being routed to such items of equipment if the shutdown would contravene 
requirements applicable to such items of equipment. This paragraph does 
not apply if the item of equipment is malfunctioning. This paragraph 
also does not apply if the owner or operator shuts down the compliance 
equipment (other than monitoring systems) to avoid damage due to a 
contemporaneous start-up, shutdown, or malfunction of the affected 
source or portion thereof. If the owner or operator has reason to 
believe that monitoring equipment would be damaged due to a 
contemporaneous start-up, shutdown, or malfunction of the affected 
source or portion thereof, the owner or operator shall provide 
documentation supporting such a claim in the Precompliance Report or in 
a supplement to the Precompliance Report, as provided for in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(4). Once approved by the Administrator in accordance 
with Sec. 63.1439(e)(4)(vii), the provision for ceasing to collect, 
during a start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, monitoring data that would 
otherwise be required by the provisions of this subpart shall be 
incorporated into the start-up, shutdown, malfunction plan for that 
affected source, as stated in Sec. 63.1439(b)(1).
    (4) During start-ups, shutdowns, and malfunctions when the emission 
limitations of this subpart do not apply pursuant to paragraphs (h)(1) 
through (3) of this section, the owner or operator shall implement, to 
the extent reasonably available, measures to prevent or minimize excess 
emissions to the extent practical. For purposes of this paragraph, the 
term ``excess emissions'' means emissions in excess of those that would 
have occurred if there were no start-up, shutdown, or malfunction and 
the owner or operator complied with the relevant provisions of this 
subpart. The measures to be taken shall be identified in the applicable 
start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan, and may include, but are not 
limited to, air pollution control technologies, recovery technologies, 
work practices, pollution prevention, monitoring, and/or changes in the 
manner of operation of the affected source. Use of back-up control 
techniques is not required, but is allowed, if available.



Sec. 63.1421  Delegation of authority.

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under section 112(l) of the Act, the authorities contained in 
paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and 
not transferred to a State.
    (b) Authorities which will not be delegated to the States: the 
permission to use an alternative means of emission limitation, from 
Sec. 63.6(g), and the authority of Sec. 63.177.



Sec. 63.1422  Compliance dates and relationship of this rule to existing applicable rules.

    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) New affected sources that commence construction or 
reconstruction after September 4, 1997 shall be in compliance with this 
subpart upon initial start-up or by June 1, 1999, whichever is later, as 
provided in Sec. 63.6(b).
    (c) Existing affected sources shall be in compliance with this 
subpart (except for Sec. 63.1434 for which compliance is covered by 
paragraph (d) of this section) no later than June 1, 2002, as provided 
in Sec. 63.6(c), unless an extension has been granted as specified in 
paragraph (e) of this section.
    (d) Except as provided for in paragraphs (d)(1) through (5) of this 
section, existing affected sources shall be in compliance with 
Sec. 63.1434 no later than December 1, 1999 unless an extension has been 
granted as specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (1) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur no

[[Page 390]]

later than June 1, 2000 for any compressor meeting one or more of the 
criteria in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section, if the 
work can be accomplished without a process unit shutdown, as defined in 
Sec. 63.161.
    (i) The seal system will be replaced.
    (ii) A barrier fluid system will be installed.
    (iii) A new barrier fluid will be utilized which requires changes to 
the existing barrier fluid system.
    (iv) The compressor shall be modified to permit connecting the 
compressor to a closed vent system.
    (2) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur no later than December 1, 2000, for any compressor meeting all the 
criteria in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) The compressor meets one or more of the criteria specified in 
paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (ii) The work can be accomplished without a process unit shutdown as 
defined in Sec. 63.161.
    (iii) The additional time is necessary, due to the unavailability of 
parts beyond the control of the owner or operator.
    (iv) The owner or operator submits the request for a compliance 
extension to the appropriate U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 
Regional Office at the addresses listed in Sec. 63.13 no later than 45 
days before December 1, 1999. The request for a compliance extension 
shall contain the information specified in Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i)(A), (B), 
and (D). Unless the EPA Regional Office objects to the request for a 
compliance extension within 30 days after receipt of the request, the 
request shall be deemed approved.
    (3) If compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 
cannot reasonably be achieved without a process unit shutdown, as 
defined in Sec. 63.161, the owner or operator shall achieve compliance 
no later than June 1, 2001. The owner or operator who elects to use this 
provision shall submit a request for an extension of compliance in 
accordance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this 
section.
    (4) Compliance with the compressor provisions of Sec. 63.164 shall 
occur not later than June 1, 2002 for any compressor meeting one or more 
of the criteria in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section. 
The owner or operator who elects to use these provisions shall submit a 
request for an extension of compliance in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Compliance cannot be achieved without replacing the compressor.
    (ii) Compliance cannot be achieved without recasting the distance 
piece.
    (iii) Design modifications are required to connect to a closed-vent 
system.
    (5) Compliance with the surge control vessel and bottoms receiver 
provisions of Sec. 63.170 shall occur no later than June 1, 2002.
    (e) Pursuant to section 112(i)(3)(B) of the Act, an owner or 
operator may request an extension allowing the existing affected source 
up to 1 additional year to comply with section 112(d) standards. For 
purposes of this subpart, a request for an extension shall be submitted 
to the permitting authority as part of the operating permit application 
or to the Administrator as a separate submittal or as part of the 
Precompliance Report. Requests for extensions shall be submitted no 
later than 120 days prior to the compliance dates specified in 
paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, except as discussed in 
paragraph (e)(3) of this section. The dates specified in Sec. 63.6(i) 
for submittal of requests for extensions shall not apply to this 
subpart.
    (1) A request for an extension of compliance shall include the data 
described in Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i)(A), (B), and (D).
    (2) The requirements in Sec. 63.6(i)(8) through (14) shall govern 
the review and approval of requests for extensions of compliance with 
this subpart.
    (3) An owner or operator may submit a compliance extension request 
after the date specified in paragraph (e) of this section, provided that 
the need for the compliance extension arose after that date, and the 
need arose due to circumstances beyond reasonable control of the owner 
or operator. This request shall include, in addition to the information 
specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, a statement of the 
reasons additional time is needed and

[[Page 391]]

the date when the owner or operator first learned of the problem.
    (f) Table 1 of this subpart specifies the requirements in 40 CFR 
part 63, subpart A (the General Provisions) that apply and those that do 
not apply to owners and operators of affected sources subject to this 
subpart. For the purposes of this subpart, Table 3 of 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart F is not applicable.
    (g) Table 2 of this subpart summarizes the provisions of 40 CFR part 
63, subparts F, G, and H (collectively known as the ``HON'') that apply 
and those that do not apply to owners and operators of affected sources 
subject to this subpart.
    (h)(1) After the compliance dates specified in this section, an 
affected source subject to this subpart that is also subject to the 
provisions of 40 CFR part 63, subpart I, is required to comply only with 
the provisions of this subpart.
    (2) Sources subject to the provisions in 40 CFR part 63, subpart I, 
that have elected to comply through a quality improvement program, as 
specified in Sec. 63.175 or Sec. 63.176 or both, may elect to continue 
these programs without interruption as a means of complying with this 
subpart. In other words, becoming subject to this subpart does not 
restart or reset the ``compliance clock'' as it relates to reduced 
burden earned through a quality improvement program.
    (i) After the compliance dates specified in this section, a storage 
vessel that is assigned to an affected source subject to this subpart 
that is also subject to the 40 CFR part 60, subpart Kb (Standards of 
Performance for Volatile Organic Liquid Storage Vessels (Including 
Petroleum Liquid Storage Vessels) for Which Construction, 
Reconstruction, or Modification Commenced after July 23, 1984) is 
required to comply only with the provisions of this subpart. After the 
compliance dates specified in this section, that storage vessel shall no 
longer be subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart Kb.
    (j) After the compliance dates specified in this subpart, if any 
combustion device, recovery device or recapture device subject to this 
subpart is also subject to monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting 
requirements for hazardous waste, disposal, and treatment facilities in 
40 CFR part 264, subpart AA (Air Emission Standards for Process Vents) 
or subpart CC (Air Emission Standards for Tanks, Surface Impoundment, 
and Containers), the owner or operator may comply with either paragraph 
(j)(1) or (2) of this section. If, after the compliance dates specified 
in this subpart, any combustion device, recovery device, or recapture 
device subject to this subpart is subject to monitoring and 
recordkeeping requirements hazardous waste treatment, storage, and 
disposal facilities in 40 CFR part 265, subpart AA (Air Emission 
Standards for Process Vents) or subpart CC (Air Emission Standards for 
Tanks, Surface Impoundments, and Containers), the owner or operator may 
comply with either paragraph (j)(1) or (3) of this section. If the owner 
or operator elects to comply with either paragraph (j)(2) or (3) of this 
section, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator of this 
choice in the Notification of Compliance Status required by 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (1) The owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring, 
recordkeeping and reporting requirements of this subpart.
    (2) The owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring, 
recordkeeping and reporting requirements in 40 CFR part 264, with the 
following exception. All excursions, as defined in Sec. 63.1438(f), 
shall be reported in the periodic report. Compliance with this paragraph 
shall constitute compliance with the monitoring, recordkeeping and 
reporting requirements of this subpart.
    (3) The owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring and 
recordkeeping requirements of 40 CFR part 265, subpart AA or subpart CC, 
and the periodic reporting requirements under 40 CFR part 264, subpart 
AA or subpart CC, that would apply to the device if the facility had 
final-permitted status, with the following exception. All excursions, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1438(f), shall be reported in the periodic report. 
Compliance with this paragraph shall constitute compliance with the 
monitoring, recordkeeping and reporting requirements of this subpart.

[[Page 392]]

    (k) Paragraphs (k)(1) and (2) of this section address instances in 
which requirements from other regulations overlap for the same heat 
exchange system(s) or waste management unit(s) that are subject to this 
subpart.
    (1) After the applicable compliance date specified in this subpart, 
if a heat exchange system subject to this subpart is also subject to a 
standard identified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, 
compliance with the applicable provisions of the standard identified in 
paragraph (k)(1)(i) or (ii) shall constitute compliance with the 
applicable provisions of this subpart with respect to that heat exchange 
system.
    (i) 40 CFR part 63, subpart F.
    (ii) A subpart of this part which requires compliance with the HON 
heat exchange system requirements in Sec. 63.104 (e.g., 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart JJJ or U).
    (2) After the applicable compliance date specified in this subpart, 
if any waste management unit subject to this subpart is also subject to 
a standard identified in paragraph (k)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, 
compliance with the applicable provisions of the standard identified in 
paragraph (k)(2)(i) or (ii) shall constitute compliance with the 
applicable provisions of this subpart with respect to that waste 
management unit.
    (i) 40 CFR part 63, subpart G.
    (ii) A subpart of this part which requires compliance with the HON 
process wastewater provisions in Secs. 63.132 through 63.147 (e.g., 
subpart JJJ or U).
    (l) All terms in this subpart that define a period of time for 
completion of required tasks (e.g., monthly, quarterly, annual), unless 
specified otherwise in the section or subsection that imposes the 
requirement, refer to the standard calendar periods, unless altered by 
mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator in 
accordance with paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
    (1) Notwithstanding time periods specified in this subpart for 
completion of required tasks, such time periods may be changed by mutual 
agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator, as 
specified in the General Provisions in 40 CFR part 63, subpart A (e.g., 
a period could begin on the compliance date or another date, rather than 
on the first day of the standard calendar period). For each time period 
that is changed by agreement, the revised period shall remain in effect 
until it is changed. A new request is not necessary for each recurring 
period.
    (2) Where the period specified for compliance is a standard calendar 
period, if the initial compliance date occurs after the beginning of the 
period, compliance shall be required according to the schedule specified 
in paragraphs (l)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) Compliance shall be required before the end of the standard 
calendar period within which the compliance deadline occurs, if there 
remains at least 2 weeks for tasks that shall be performed monthly, at 
least 1 month for tasks that shall be performed each quarter, or at 
least 3 months for tasks that shall be performed annually; or
    (ii) In all other cases, compliance shall be required before the end 
of the first full standard calendar period after the period within which 
the initial compliance deadline occurs.
    (3) In all instances where a provision of this subpart requires 
completion of a task during each of multiple successive periods, an 
owner or operator may perform the required task at any time during the 
specified period, provided that the task is conducted at a reasonable 
interval after completion of the task during the previous period.



Sec. 63.1423  Definitions.

    (a) The following terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning 
given them in subparts A (Sec. 63.2), F (Sec. 63.101), G (Sec. 63.111), 
and H (Sec. 63.161) as specified after each term:

Act (subpart A)
Administrator (subpart A)
Automated monitoring and recording system (subpart G)
Boiler (subpart G)
Bottoms receiver (subpart H)
By-product (subpart F)
Car-seal (subpart G)
Closed-vent system (subpart G)
Combustion device (subpart G)
Commenced (subpart A)
Compliance date (subpart A)

[[Page 393]]

Continuous monitoring system (subpart A)
Emission standard (subpart A)
EPA (subpart A)
Equipment (subpart H)
Flow indicator (subpart G)
Fuel gas (subpart F)
Fuel gas system (subpart F)
Hard-piping (subpart G)
Heat exchange system (subpart F)
Impurity (subpart F)
Incinerator (subpart G)
Major source (subpart A)
Malfunction (subpart A)
Open-ended valve or line (subpart H)
Operating permit (subpart F)
Organic monitoring device (subpart G)
Owner or operator (subpart A)
Performance evaluation (subpart A)
Performance test (subpart A)
Permitting authority (subpart A)
Plant site (subpart F)
Potential to emit (subpart A)
Primary fuel (subpart G)
Process heater (subpart G)
Process unit shutdown (subpart H)
Reactor (subpart G)
Recapture device (subpart G)
Relief valve (subpart G)
Research and development facility (subpart F)
Run (subpart A)
Secondary fuel (subpart G)
Sensor (subpart H)
Specific gravity monitoring device (subpart G)
Start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan (subpart F)
State (subpart A)
Surge control vessel (subpart H)
Temperature monitoring device (subpart G)
Test method (subpart A)
Total resource effectiveness index value (subpart G)
Treatment process (subpart G)
Visible emission (subpart A)

    (b) All other terms used in this subpart shall have the meaning 
given them in this section.
    Annual average concentration, as used in conjunction with the 
wastewater provisions, means the flow-weighted annual average 
concentration and is determined by the procedures in Sec. 63.144(b), 
except as provided in Sec. 63.1433(a)(2).
    Annual average flow rate, as used in conjunction with the wastewater 
provisions, is determined by the procedures in Sec. 63.144(c).
    Batch cycle means the step or steps, from start to finish, that 
occur in a batch unit operation.
    Batch unit operation means a unit operation involving intermittent 
or discontinuous feed into equipment, and, in general, involves the 
emptying of equipment after the batch cycle ceases and prior to 
beginning a new batch cycle. Mass, temperature, concentration and other 
properties of the process may vary with time. Addition of raw material 
and withdrawal of product do not simultaneously occur in a batch unit 
operation.
    Catalyst extraction means the removal of the catalyst using either 
solvent or physical extraction method.
    Construction means the on-site fabrication, erection, or 
installation of an affected source. Construction also means the on-site 
fabrication, erection, or installation of a process unit or a 
combination of process units which subsequently becomes an affected 
source or part of an affected source due to a change in primary product.
    Continuous record means documentation, either in hard copy or 
computer readable form, of data values measured at least once during 
approximately equal intervals of 15 minutes and recorded at the 
frequency specified in Sec. 63.1439(d).
    Continuous recorder is defined in Sec. 63.111, except that when the 
definition in Sec. 63.111 reads ``or records 15-minute or more frequent 
block average values,'' the phrase ``or records 1-hour or more frequent 
block average values'' shall apply for purposes of this subpart.
    Continuous unit operation means a unit operation where the inputs 
and outputs flow continuously. Continuous unit operations typically 
approach steady-state conditions. Continuous unit operations typically 
involve the simultaneous addition of raw material and withdrawal of the 
product.
    Control technique means any equipment or process control used for 
capturing, recovering, or oxidizing organic hazardous air pollutant 
vapors. Such equipment includes, but is not limited to, absorbers, 
adsorbers, boilers, condensers, flares, incinerators, process

[[Page 394]]

heaters, and scrubbers, or any combination thereof. Process control 
includes extended cookout (as defined in this section). Condensers 
operating as reflux condensers that are necessary for processing, such 
as liquid level control, temperature control, or distillation operation, 
shall be considered inherently part of the process and will not be 
considered control techniques.
    Emission point means an individual process vent, storage vessel, 
wastewater stream, or equipment leak.
    Epoxide means a chemical compound consisting of a three-membered 
cyclic ether. Only emissions of epoxides listed in Table 4 of this 
subpart (i.e., ethylene oxide and propylene oxide) are regulated by the 
provisions of this subpart.
    Equipment leak means emissions of organic HAP from a pump, 
compressor, agitator, pressure relief device, sampling connection 
system, open-ended valve or line, valve, surge control vessel, bottoms 
receiver, or instrumentation system in organic HAP service.
    Extended Cookout (ECO) means a control technique that reduces the 
amount of unreacted ethylene oxide (EO) and/or propylene oxide (PO) 
(epoxides) in the reactor. This is accomplished by allowing the product 
to react for a longer time period, thereby having less unreacted 
epoxides and reducing epoxides emissions that may have otherwise 
occurred.
    Flexible operation unit means a process unit that manufactures 
different chemical products by periodically alternating raw materials 
fed to the process unit or operating conditions at the process unit. 
These units are also referred to as campaign plants or blocked 
operations.
    Group 1 combination of batch process vents means a collection of 
process vents in a PMPU from batch unit operations that are associated 
with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product 
that meet all of the following conditions:
    (1) Has annual nonepoxide organic HAP emissions, determined in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1428(b), of 11,800 kg/yr or greater, and
    (2) Has a cutoff flow rate, determined in accordance with 
Sec. 63.1428(e), that is greater than or equal to the annual average 
flow rate, determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1428(d).
    Group 2 combination of batch process vents means a collection of 
process vents in a PMPU from batch unit operations that are associated 
with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product 
that is not classified as a Group 1 combination of batch process vents.
    Group 1 continuous process vent means a process vent from a 
continuous unit operation that is associated with the use of a 
nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product that meets all of 
the following conditions:
    (1) Has a flow rate greater than or equal to 0.005 standard cubic 
meters per minute,
    (2) Has a total organic HAP concentration greater than or equal to 
50 parts per million by volume, and
    (3) Has a total resource effectiveness index value, calculated in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1428(h)(1), less than or equal to 1.0.
    Group 2 continuous process vent means a process vent from a 
continuous unit operation that is associated with the use of a 
nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product that is not 
classified as a Group 1 continuous process vent.
    Group 1 storage vessel means a storage vessel that meets the 
applicability criteria specified in Table 3 of this subpart.
    Group 2 storage vessel means a storage vessel that does not fall 
within the definition of a Group 1 storage vessel.
    Group 1 wastewater stream means a process wastewater stream at an 
existing or new affected source that meets the criteria for Group 1 
status in Sec. 63.132(c), with the exceptions listed in 
Sec. 63.1433(a)(2) for the purposes of this subpart (i.e., for organic 
HAP listed on Table 4 of this subpart only).
    Group 2 wastewater stream means any process wastewater stream as 
defined in Sec. 63.101 at an existing affected source that does not meet 
the definition (in this section) of a Group 1 wastewater stream.
    In organic hazardous air pollutant service or in organic HAP service 
means that a piece of equipment either contains or contacts a fluid 
(liquid or gas) that is

[[Page 395]]

at least 5 percent by weight of total organic HAP (as defined in this 
section), as determined according to the provisions of Sec. 63.180(d). 
The provisions of Sec. 63.180(d) also specify how to determine that a 
piece of equipment is not in organic HAP service.
    Initial start-up means the first time a new or reconstructed 
affected source begins production, or, for equipment added or changed as 
described in Sec. 63.1420(g), the first time the equipment is put into 
operation to produce a polyether polyol. Initial start-up does not 
include operation solely for testing equipment. Initial start-up does 
not include subsequent start-ups of an affected source or portion 
thereof following malfunctions or shutdowns or following changes in 
product for flexible operation units. Further, for purposes of 
Sec. 63.1422, initial start-up does not include subsequent start-ups of 
affected sources or portions thereof following malfunctions or process 
unit shutdowns.
    Maintenance wastewater is defined in Sec. 63.101, except that the 
term ``polyether polyol manufacturing process unit'' shall apply 
whenever the term ``chemical manufacturing process unit'' is used. 
Further, the generation of wastewater from the routine rinsing or 
washing of equipment in batch operation between batches is not 
maintenance wastewater, but is considered to be process wastewater, for 
the purposes of this subpart.
    Make or modify the product means to produce the polyether polyol by 
polymerization of epoxides or other cyclic ethers with compounds having 
one or more reactive hydrogens, and to incorporate additives (e.g., 
preservatives, antioxidants, or diluents) in order to maintain the 
quality of the finished products before shipping. Making and modifying 
the product for this regulation does not include grafting, polymerizing 
the polyol, or reacting it with compounds other than EO or PO.
    Maximum true vapor pressure is defined in Sec. 63.111, except that 
the terms ``transfer'' and ``transferred'' shall not apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    New process unit means a process unit for which the construction or 
reconstruction commenced after September 4, 1997.
    On-site or on site means, with respect to records required to be 
maintained by this subpart or required by another subpart referenced by 
this subpart, a location within the plant site where the affected source 
is located. On-site storage of records includes, but is not limited to, 
a location at the affected source or PMPU to which the records pertain 
or a location elsewhere at the plant site where the affected source is 
located.
    Operating day refers to the 24-hour period defined by the owner or 
operator in the Notification of Compliance Status required by 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5). That 24-hour period may be from midnight to midnight 
or another 24-hour period. The operating day is the 24-hour period for 
which daily average monitoring values are determined.
    Organic hazardous air pollutant(s) (organic HAP) means one or more 
of the chemicals listed in Table 4 of this subpart, or any other 
chemical which:
    (1) Is knowingly produced or introduced into the manufacturing 
process other than as an impurity; and
    (2) Is listed in Table 2 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart F in the HON.
    Polyether polyol means a compound formed through the polymerization 
of EO or PO or other cyclic ethers with compounds having one or more 
reactive hydrogens (i.e., a hydrogen atom bonded to nitrogen, oxygen, 
phosphorus, sulfur, etc.) to form polyethers (i.e., compounds with two 
or more ether bonds). This definition of ``polyether polyol'' excludes 
hydroxy ethyl cellulose and materials regulated under 40 CFR part 63, 
subparts F, G, and H (the HON), such as glycols and glycol ethers.
    Polyether polyol manufacturing process unit (PMPU) means a process 
unit that manufactures a polyether polyol as its primary product, or a 
process unit designated as a polyether polyol manufacturing unit in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1420(e)(2). A polyether polyol manufacturing 
process unit consists of more than one unit operation. This collection 
of equipment includes purification systems, reactors and their 
associated product separators and recovery devices, distillation units 
and their associated distillate receivers and recovery

[[Page 396]]

devices, other associated unit operations, storage vessels, surge 
control vessels, bottoms receivers, product transfer racks, connected 
ducts and piping, combustion, recovery, or recapture devices or systems, 
and the equipment (i.e., all pumps, compressors, agitators, pressure 
relief devices, sampling connection systems, open-ended valves or lines, 
valves, connectors, and instrumentation systems that are associated with 
the PMPU) that are subject to the equipment leak provisions as specified 
in Sec. 63.1434.
    Pressure decay curve is the graph of the reactor pressure versus 
time from the point when epoxide feed is stopped until the reactor 
pressure is constant, indicating that most of the epoxide has reacted 
out of the vapor and liquid phases. This curve shall be determined with 
no leaks or vents from the reactor.
    Primary product is defined in and determined by the procedures 
specified in Sec. 63.1420(e).
    Process unit means a collection of equipment assembled and connected 
by pipes or ducts to process raw materials and to manufacture a product.
    Process vent means a point of emission from a unit operation having 
a gaseous stream that is discharged to the atmosphere either directly or 
after passing through one or more combustion, recovery, or recapture 
devices. A process vent from a continuous unit operation is a gaseous 
emission stream containing more than 0.005 weight-percent total organic 
HAP. A process vent from a batch unit operation is a gaseous emission 
stream containing more than 225 kilograms per year (500 pounds per year) 
of organic HAP emissions. Unit operations that may have process vents 
are condensers, distillation units, reactors, or other unit operations 
within the PMPU. Process vents exclude pressure relief valve discharges, 
gaseous streams routed to a fuel gas system(s), and leaks from equipment 
regulated under Sec. 63.1434. A gaseous emission stream is no longer 
considered to be a process vent after the stream has been controlled and 
monitored in accordance with the applicable provisions of this subpart.
    Process wastewater means wastewater which, during manufacturing or 
processing, comes into direct contact with or results from the 
production or use of any raw material, intermediate product, finished 
product, by-product, or waste product. Examples are product tank 
drawdown or feed tank drawdown; water formed during a chemical reaction 
or used as a reactant; water used to wash impurities from organic 
products or reactants; equipment washes between batches in a batch 
process; water used to cool or quench organic vapor streams through 
direct contact; and condensed steam from jet ejector systems pulling 
vacuum on vessels containing organics.
    Product means a compound or material which is manufactured by a 
process unit. By-products, isolated intermediates, impurities, wastes, 
and trace contaminants are not considered products.
    Product class means a group of polyether polyols with a similar 
pressure decay curve (or faster pressure decay curves) that are 
manufactured within a given set of operating conditions representing the 
decline in pressure versus time. All products within a product class 
shall have an essentially similar pressure decay curve, and operate 
within a given set of operating conditions. These operating conditions 
are: a minimum reaction temperature; the number of -OH groups in the 
polyol; a minimum catalyst concentration; the type of catalyst (e.g., 
self-catalyzed, base catalyst, or acid catalyst); the epoxide ratio, or 
a range for that ratio; and the reaction conditions of the system (e.g., 
the size of the reactor, or the size of the batch).
    Reactor liquid means the compound or material made in the reactor, 
even though the substance may be transferred to another vessel. This 
material may require further modifications before becoming a final 
product, in which case the reactor liquid is classified as an 
``intermediate.'' This material may be complete at this stage, in which 
case the reactor liquid is classified as a ``product.''
    Reconstruction means the replacement of components of an affected 
source or of a previously unaffected stationary source that becomes an 
affected source as a result of the replacement, to such an extent that:

[[Page 397]]

    (1) The fixed capital cost of the new components exceeds 50 percent 
of the fixed capital cost that would be required to construct a 
comparable new source; and
    (2) It is technologically and economically feasible for the 
reconstructed source to meet the provisions of this subpart.
    Recovery device means an individual unit of equipment capable of and 
normally used for the purpose of recovering chemicals for fuel value 
(i.e., net positive heating value), use, reuse, or for sale for fuel 
value, use, or reuse. Examples of equipment that may be recovery devices 
include absorbers, carbon adsorbers, condensers (except reflux 
condensers), oil-water separators or organic-water separators, or 
organic removal devices such as decanters, strippers, or thin film 
evaporation units. For the purposes of the monitoring, recordkeeping, or 
reporting requirements of this subpart, recapture devices are considered 
to be recovery devices.
    Residual is defined in Sec. 63.111, except that when the definition 
in Sec. 63.111 uses the term ``Table 9 compounds,'' the term ``organic 
HAP listed in Table 9 of subpart G'' shall apply, for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    Shutdown means the cessation of operation of an affected source, a 
PMPU within an affected source, a waste management unit or unit 
operation within an affected source, equipment required or used to 
comply with this subpart, or the emptying or degassing of a storage 
vessel. The purposes for a shutdown may include, but are not limited to, 
periodic maintenance, replacement of equipment, or equipment repairs. 
Shutdown does not include the normal periods between batch cycles. For 
continuous unit operations, shutdown includes transitional conditions 
due to changes in product for flexible operation units. For batch unit 
operations, shutdown does not include transitional conditions due to 
changes in product for flexible operation units. For purposes of the 
wastewater provisions, shutdown does not include the routine rinsing or 
washing of equipment between batch cycles.
    Start-up means the setting into operation of an affected source, a 
PMPU within the affected source, a waste management unit or unit 
operation within an affected source, equipment required or used to 
comply with this subpart, or a storage vessel after emptying and 
degassing. For all processes, start-up includes initial start-up and 
operation solely for testing equipment. Start-up does not include the 
recharging of batch unit operations. For continuous unit operations, 
start-up includes transitional conditions due to changes in product for 
flexible operation units. For batch unit operations, start-up does not 
include transitional conditions due to changes in product for flexible 
operation units.
    Steady-state conditions means that all variables (temperatures, 
pressures, volumes, flow rates, etc.) in a process do not vary 
significantly with time; minor fluctuations about constant mean values 
may occur.
    Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that is used to store 
liquids that contain one or more organic HAP. Storage vessels do not 
include:
    (1) Vessels permanently attached to motor vehicles such as trucks, 
railcars, barges, or ships;
    (2) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 
kilopascals and without emissions to the atmosphere;
    (3) Vessels with capacities smaller than 38 cubic meters;
    (4) Vessels and equipment storing and/or handling material that 
contains no organic HAP, or organic HAP as impurities only;
    (5) Surge control vessels and bottoms receiver tanks;
    (6) Wastewater storage tanks; and
    (7) Storage vessels assigned to another process unit regulated under 
another subpart of part 63.
    Total organic compounds (TOC) are those compounds, excluding methane 
and ethane, measured according to the procedures of Method 18 or Method 
25A of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    Unit operation means one or more pieces of process equipment used to 
make a single change to the physical or chemical characteristics of one 
or more process streams. Unit operations include, but are not limited 
to, reactors, distillation units, extraction columns, absorbers, 
decanters, condensers, and filtration equipment.

[[Page 398]]

    Vent stream, as used in reference to process vents, means the 
emissions from a process vent.
    Waste management unit is defined in Sec. 63.111, except that when 
the definition in Sec. 63.111 uses the term ``chemical manufacturing 
process unit,'' the term ``PMPU'' shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    Wastewater means water that:
    (1) Contains either
    (i) An annual average concentration of organic HAP listed in Table 4 
of this subpart of at least 5 parts per million by weight and has an 
annual average flow rate of 0.02 liter per minute or greater, or
    (ii) An annual average concentration of organic HAP listed on Table 
4 of this subpart of at least 10,000 parts per million by weight at any 
flow rate; and that
    (2) Is discarded from a PMPU that is part of an affected source. 
Wastewater is process wastewater or maintenance wastewater.



Sec. 63.1424  Emission standards.

    (a) Except as provided under paragraph (b) of this section, the 
owner or operator of an existing or new affected source shall comply 
with the provisions in:
    (1) Sections 63.1425 through 63.1430 for process vents;
    (2) Section 63.1432 for storage vessels;
    (3) Section 63.1433 for wastewater;
    (4) Section 63.1434 for equipment leaks;
    (5) Section 63.1435 for heat exchangers;
    (6) Section 63.1437 for additional test methods and procedures;
    (7) Section 63.1438 for monitoring levels and excursions; and
    (8) Section 63.1439 for general reporting and recordkeeping 
requirements.
    (b) When emissions of different kinds (i.e., emissions from process 
vents subject to Secs. 63.1425 through 63.1430, storage vessels subject 
to Sec. 63.1432, process wastewater, and/or in-process equipment subject 
to Sec. 63.149) are combined, and at least one of the emission streams 
would require control according to the applicable provision in the 
absence of combination with other emission streams, the owner or 
operator shall comply with the requirements of either paragraph (b)(1) 
or (2) of this section.
    (1) Comply with the applicable requirements of this subpart for each 
kind of emission in the stream as specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(5) of this section; or
    (2) Comply with the most stringent set of requirements that applies 
to any individual emission stream that is included in the combined 
stream, where either that emission stream would be classified as 
requiring control in the absence of combination with other emission 
streams, or the owner chooses to consider that emission stream to 
require control for the purposes of this paragraph.



Sec. 63.1425  Process vent control requirements.

    (a) Applicability of process vent control requirements. For each 
process vent at an affected source, the owner or operator shall comply 
with the provisions of this section. Owners and operators of all 
affected sources using epoxides in the production of polyether polyols 
are subject to the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section. Owners 
or operators are subject to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this 
section only if epoxides are used in the production of polyether polyols 
and nonepoxide organic HAP are used to make or modify the product. 
Similarly, owners or operators are subject to the requirements of 
paragraph (d) of this section only if epoxides are used in the 
production of polyether polyols and organic HAP are used in catalyst 
extraction. The owner or operator of an affected source where polyether 
polyol products are produced using tetrahydrofuran shall comply with 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (b) Requirements for epoxide emissions. The owner or operator of an 
affected source where polyether polyol products are produced using 
epoxides shall reduce epoxide emissions from process vents from batch 
unit operations and continuous unit operations within each PMPU in 
accordance with either paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) For new affected sources, the owner or operator shall comply 
with paragraph (b)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) this section. The owner or 
operator also has

[[Page 399]]

the option of complying with a combination of paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and 
(ii) of this section. If the owner or operator chooses to comply with a 
combination of paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, each 
process vent not controlled in accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of 
this section shall be part of the group of applicable process vents that 
shall then comply with paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
    (i) Reduce the total epoxide emissions from the group of applicable 
process vents by an aggregated 99.9 percent;
    (ii) Maintain an outlet concentration of total epoxides or TOC after 
each combustion, recapture, or recovery device of 20 ppmv or less; or
    (iii) Maintain an emission factor of no greater than 4.43  x  
10-3 kilogram epoxide emissions per megagram of product (4.43 
 x  10-3 pounds epoxide emissions per 1,000 pounds of 
product) for all process vents in the PMPU.
    (2) For existing affected sources, the owner or operator shall 
comply with either paragraph (b)(2)(i), (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this 
section. The owner or operator also has the option of complying with a 
combination of paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section. If the 
owner or operator chooses to comply with a combination of paragraphs 
(b)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section, each process vent that is not 
controlled in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section 
shall be part of the group of applicable process vents that shall then 
comply with paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section. The owner or operator 
also has the option of complying with a combination of paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i) and (iii) of this section.
    (i) Reduce the total epoxide emissions from each process vent using 
a flare;
    (ii) Reduce the total epoxide emissions from the group of applicable 
process vents by an aggregated 98 percent;
    (iii) Maintain an outlet concentration of total epoxides or TOC 
after each combustion, recapture or recovery devices of 20 ppmv or less; 
or
    (iv) Maintain an emission factor of no greater than 1.69  x  
10-2 kilogram epoxide emissions per megagram of product (1.69 
 x  10-2 pounds epoxide emissions per 1,000 pounds of 
product) for all process vents in the PMPU.
    (c) Requirements for nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from making or 
modifying the product. The owner or operator of a new or existing source 
where polyether polyols are produced using epoxides, and where 
nonepoxide organic HAP are used to make or modify the product, shall 
comply with this paragraph. For each process vent from a continuous unit 
operation that is associated with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP to 
make or modify the product, the owner or operator shall determine if the 
process vent is a Group 1 continuous process vent, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1423. For the combination of process vents from batch unit 
operations that are associated with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP 
to make or modify the product, the owner or operator shall determine if 
the combination of process vents is a Group 1 combination of batch 
process vents, as defined in Sec. 63.1423.
    (1) Requirements for Group 1 combinations of batch process vents. 
For each Group 1 combination of batch process vents, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1423, the owner or operator shall comply with either paragraph 
(c)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (i) Reduce nonepoxide organic HAP emissions using a flare.
    (ii) Reduce nonepoxide organic HAP emissions by 90 percent using a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device.
    (2) Requirements for Group 2 combinations of batch process vents. 
For each Group 2 combination of batch process vents, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1423, the owner or operator reassess the group status when 
process changes occur, in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1428(g). No control requirements apply to these process vents.
    (3) Requirements for Group 1 continuous process vents. For each 
Group 1 continuous process vent, as defined in Sec. 63.1423, the owner 
or operator shall comply with either paragraph (c)(3)(i) or (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) Reduce nonepoxide organic HAP emissions using a flare.
    (ii) Reduce nonepoxide organic HAP emissions by 98 percent using a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device.

[[Page 400]]

    (4) Requirements for Group 2 continuous process vents. For each 
Group 2 continuous process vent, as defined in Sec. 63.1423, the owner 
or operator shall comply with either paragraph (c)(4)(i) or (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) If the TRE for the process vent is greater than 1.0 but less 
than 4.0, the owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring 
provisions in Sec. 63.1429, the recordkeeping provisions in 
Sec. 63.1430(d), and recalculate the TRE index value when process 
changes occur, in accordance with the provisions in Sec. 63.1428(h)(2).
    (ii) If the TRE for the process vent is greater than 4.0, the owner 
or operator shall recalculate the TRE index value when process changes 
occur, in accordance with the provisions in Sec. 63.1428(h)(2).
    (d) Requirements for nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from catalyst 
extraction. The owner or operator of a new or existing affected source 
where polyether polyol products are produced using epoxide compounds 
shall comply with either paragraph (d)(1) or (2) of this section. A PMPU 
that does not use any nonepoxide organic HAP in catalyst extraction is 
exempt from the requirements of this paragraph.
    (1) Reduce emissions of nonepoxide organic HAP from all process 
vents associated with catalyst extraction using a flare; or
    (2) Reduce emissions of nonepoxide organic HAP from the sum total of 
all process vents associated with catalyst extraction by an aggregated 
90 percent for each PMPU.
    (e) [Reserved]
    (f) Requirements for process vents at PMPUs that produce polyether 
polyol products using tetrahydrofuran. For each process vent in a PMPU 
that uses tetrahydrofuran (THF) to produce one or more polyether polyol 
products that is, or is part of, an affected source, the owner or 
operator shall comply with the HON process vent requirements in 
Secs. 63.113 through 63.118, except as provided for in paragraphs (f)(1) 
through (10) of this section.
    (1) When December 31, 1992 is referred to in the HON process vent 
requirements in Sec. 63.113, it shall be replaced with September 4, 
1997, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (2) When Sec. 63.151(f), alternative monitoring parameters, and 
Sec. 63.152(e), submission of an operating permit application, are 
referred to in Secs. 63.114(c) and 63.117(e), Sec. 63.1439(f), 
alternative monitoring parameters, and Sec. 63.1439(e)(8), submission of 
an operating permit application, respectively, shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (3) When the Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in Secs. 63.114, 63.117, and 
63.118, the Notification of Compliance Status requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) When the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Secs. 63.117 and 63.118, the Periodic 
Report requirements contained in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6) shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (5) When the definition of excursion in Sec. 63.152(c)(2)(ii)(A) is 
referred to in Sec. 63.118(f)(2), the definition of excursion in 
Sec. 63.1438(f) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When Sec. 63.114(e) specifies that an owner or operator shall 
submit the information required in Sec. 63.152(b) in order to establish 
the parameter monitoring range, the owner or operator shall comply with 
the provisions of Sec. 63.1438 for establishing the parameter monitoring 
level and shall comply with Sec. 63.1439(e)(5)(ii) or Sec. 63.1439(e)(8) 
for the purposes of reporting information related to the establishment 
of the parameter monitoring level, for the purposes of this subpart. 
Further, the term ``level'' shall apply whenever the term ``range'' is 
used in Secs. 63.114, 63.117, and 63.118.
    (7) When reports of process changes are required under 
Sec. 63.118(g), (h), (i), or (j), paragraphs (f)(7)(i) through (iv) of 
this section shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (i) For the purposes of this subpart, whenever a process change, as 
defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is made that causes a Group 2 process vent to 
become a Group 1 process vent, the owner or operator shall submit a 
report within 180 days after the process change is made or the 
information regarding the process change is known to the owner or 
operator. This report may be included

[[Page 401]]

in the next Periodic Report. A description of the process change shall 
be included in this report.
    (ii) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with a TRE greater than 4.0 to 
become a Group 2 process vent with a TRE less than 4.0, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report within 180 days after the process change 
is made or the information regarding the process change is known to the 
owner or operator, unless the flow rate is less than 0.005 standard 
cubic meters per minute. This report may be included in the next 
Periodic Report. A description of the process change shall be included 
in this report.
    (iii) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with a flow rate less than 0.005 
standard cubic meter per minute (scmm) to become a Group 2 process vent 
with a flow rate of 0.005 scmm or greater and a TRE index value less 
than or equal to 4.0, the owner or operator shall submit a report within 
180 days after the process change is made or the information regarding 
the process change is known to the owner or operator, unless the organic 
HAP concentration is less than 50 ppmv. This report may be included in 
the next Periodic Report. A description of the process change shall be 
submitted with the report.
    (iv) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.115(e), is 
made that causes a Group 2 process vent with an organic HAP 
concentration less than 50 parts per million by volume (ppmv) to become 
a Group 2 process vent with an organic HAP concentration of 50 ppmv or 
greater and a TRE index value less than or equal to 4.0, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report within 180 days after the process change 
is made or the information regarding the process change is known to the 
owner or operator, unless the flow rate is less than 0.005 standard 
cubic meters per minute. This report may be included in the next 
Periodic Report. A description of the process change shall be submitted 
with this report.
    (8) When Sec. 63.118 refers to Sec. 63.152(f), the recordkeeping 
requirements in Sec. 63.1439(d) shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (9) When Secs. 63.115 and 63.116 refer to Table 2 of 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart F, the owner or operator shall only consider organic HAP as 
defined in this subpart.
    (10) When the provisions of Sec. 63.116(c)(3) and (4) specify that 
Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall be used, Method 18 or Method 
25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A may be used for the purposes of this 
subpart. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall comply 
with paragraphs (f)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.



Sec. 63.1426  Process vent requirements for determining organic HAP concentration, control efficiency, and aggregated organic HAP emission reduction for a PMPU.

    (a) Use of a flare. When a flare is used to comply with 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i) (in combination with other control techniques), 
(b)(2)(i), (c)(1)(i), (c)(3)(i), or (d)(1), the owner or operator shall 
comply with Sec. 63.1437(c), and is not required to demonstrate the 
control efficiency for the flare, if the owner or operator chooses to 
assume a 98 percent control efficiency for that flare, as allowed under 
paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section. In order to use only a flare to 
comply with Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), or to use a flare and apply a control 
efficiency greater than 98 percent, an owner or operator shall submit a 
request in accordance with Sec. 63.6(g) in either the Precompliance 
Report described in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or in a supplement to the 
precompliance report, as described in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4)(vii).
    (b) Exceptions to performance tests. An owner or operator is not 
required to conduct a performance test when a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device specified in paragraphs (b)(1)

[[Page 402]]

through (6) of this section is used to comply with Sec. 63.1425(b), (c), 
or (d).
    (1) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 
44 megawatts or greater.
    (2) A boiler or process heater where the process vent stream is 
introduced with the primary fuel or is used as the primary fuel.
    (3) A combustion, recovery, or recapture device for which a 
performance test was conducted within the preceding 5-year period, using 
the same Methods specified in this section and either no deliberate 
process changes have been made since the test, or the owner or operator 
can demonstrate that the results of the performance test, with or 
without adjustments, reliably demonstrate compliance despite process 
changes. The operating parameters reported under the previous 
performance test shall be sufficient to meet the parameter monitoring 
requirements in this subpart.
    (4) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which the 
owner or operator:
    (i) Has been issued a final hazardous waste permit under 40 CFR part 
270 and complies with the requirements for hazardous waste burned in 
boilers and industrial furnaces in 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; or
    (ii) Has certified compliance with the interim status requirements 
for hazardous waste burned in boilers and industrial furnaces in of 40 
CFR part 266, subpart H.
    (5) A hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator 
has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with 
the requirements for incinerators in 40 CFR part 264, subpart O, or has 
certified compliance with the interim status requirements for 
incinerators in 40 CFR part 265, subpart O.
    (6) Combustion, recovery or recapture device (except for condensers) 
performance may be determined by using the design evaluation described 
in paragraph (f) of this section, provided that the combustion, recovery 
or recapture device receives less than 10 tons per year (9.1 megagrams 
per year) of uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from one or more PMPUs, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. If a 
combustion, recovery or recapture device exempted from testing in 
accordance with this paragraph receives more than 10 tons per year (9.1 
megagrams per year) of uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from one or 
more PMPUs, the owner or operator shall comply with the performance test 
requirements in paragraph (c) of this section and shall submit the test 
report in the next Periodic Report.
    (c) Determination of organic HAP concentration and control 
efficiency. Except as provided in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section, an owner or operator using a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device to comply with an epoxide or organic HAP percent reduction 
efficiency requirement in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), (b)(2)(ii), (c)(1)(ii), 
(c)(3)(ii), or (d)(2); an epoxide concentration limitation in 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(ii) or (b)(2)(ii); or an annual epoxide emission 
limitation in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv), shall conduct a 
performance test using the applicable procedures in paragraphs (c)(1) 
through (4) of this section. The organic HAP or epoxide concentration 
and percent reduction may be measured as total epoxide, total organic 
HAP, or as TOC minus methane and ethane according to the procedures 
specified. When conducting testing in accordance with this section, the 
owner or operator is only required to measure HAP of concern for the 
specific requirement for which compliance is being determined. For 
instance, to determine compliance with the epoxide emission requirement 
of Sec. 63.1425(b), the owner or operator is only required to measure 
epoxide control efficiency or outlet concentration.
    (1) Sampling site location. The sampling site location shall be 
determined as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) For determination of compliance with a percent reduction of 
total epoxide requirement in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), (b)(2)(ii), or a 
percent reduction of total organic HAP requirement in 
Sec. 63.1425(c)(1)(ii), (c)(3)(ii), or (d)(2), sampling sites shall be 
located at the inlet of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device as 
specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(A), (B), and (C) of this section, and 
at the outlet of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device.

[[Page 403]]

    (A) For process vents from continuous unit operations, the inlet 
sampling site shall be determined in accordance with either paragraph 
(c)(1)(i)(A)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) To demonstrate compliance with either the provisions for epoxide 
emissions in Sec. 63.1425(b) or the provisions for nonepoxide organic 
HAP emissions from catalyst extraction in Sec. 63.1425(d), the inlet 
sampling site shall be located after the exit from the continuous unit 
operation but before any recovery devices, or
    (2) To demonstrate compliance with the requirements for nonepoxide 
organic HAP emissions from the use of nonepoxide organic HAP in making 
or modifying the product in Sec. 63.1425(c), the inlet sampling site 
shall be located after all control techniques to reduce epoxide 
emissions and after the final nonepoxide organic HAP recovery device.
    (B) For process vents from batch unit operations, the inlet sampling 
site shall be determined in accordance with either paragraph 
(c)(1)(i)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) To demonstrate compliance with either the provisions for epoxide 
emissions in Sec. 63.1425(b) or the provisions for nonepoxide organic 
HAP emissions from catalyst extraction in Sec. 63.1425(d), the inlet 
sampling site shall be located after the exit from the batch unit 
operation but before any recovery device.
    (2) To demonstrate compliance with the requirements for nonepoxide 
organic HAP emissions in making or modifying the product in 
Sec. 63.1425(c), the inlet sampling site shall be located after all 
control techniques to reduce epoxide emissions but before any nonepoxide 
organic HAP recovery device.
    (C) If a process vent stream is introduced with the combustion air 
or as a secondary fuel into a boiler or process heater with a design 
capacity less than 44 megawatts, selection of the location of the inlet 
sampling sites shall ensure the measurement of total organic HAP or TOC 
(minus methane and ethane) concentrations in all process vent streams 
and primary and secondary fuels introduced into the boiler or process 
heater.
    (ii) To determine compliance with a parts per million by volume 
total epoxide or TOC limit in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(ii) or (b)(2)(iii), the 
sampling site shall be located at the outlet of the combustion, 
recovery, or recapture device.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (3) Testing conditions and calculation of TOC or total organic HAP 
concentration. (i) Testing conditions shall be as specified in 
paragraphs (c)(3)(i)(A) through (E) of this section, as appropriate.
    (A) Testing of process vents from continuous unit operations shall 
be conducted at maximum representative operating conditions, as 
described in Sec. 63.1437(a)(1). Each test shall consist of three l-hour 
runs. Gas stream volumetric flow rates shall be measured at 
approximately equal intervals of about 15 minutes during each 1-hour 
run. The organic HAP concentration (of the HAP of concern) shall be 
determined from samples collected in an integrated sample over the 
duration of each l-hour test run, or from grab samples collected 
simultaneously with the flow rate measurements (at approximately equal 
intervals of about 15 minutes). If an integrated sample is collected for 
laboratory analysis, the sampling rate shall be adjusted proportionally 
to reflect variations in flow rate. For gas streams from continuous unit 
operations, the organic HAP concentration or control efficiency used to 
determine compliance shall be the average organic HAP concentration or 
control efficiency of the three test runs.
    (B) Testing of process vents from batch unit operations shall be 
conducted at absolute worst-case conditions or hypothetical worst-case 
conditions, as defined in paragraphs (c)(3)(i)(B)(1) through (5) of this 
section. Worst-case conditions are limited to the maximum production 
allowed in a State or Federal permit or regulation and the conditions 
specified in Sec. 63.1437(a)(1). Gas stream volumetric flow rates shall 
be measured at 15-minute intervals, or at least once during the emission 
episode. The organic HAP or TOC concentration shall be determined from 
samples collected in an integrated sample over the duration of the test, 
or from grab samples collected simultaneously with the flow rate 
measurements (at approximately

[[Page 404]]

equal intervals of about 15 minutes). If an integrated sample is 
collected for laboratory analysis, the sampling rate shall be adjusted 
proportionally to reflect variations in flow rate.
    (1) Absolute worst-case conditions are defined by the criteria 
presented in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section if the 
maximum load is the most challenging condition for the control device. 
Otherwise, absolute worst-case conditions are defined by the conditions 
in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(1)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The period in which the inlet to the control device will contain 
at least 50 percent of the maximum HAP load (in lbs) capable of being 
vented to the control device over any 8-hour period. An emission profile 
as described in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(3)(i) of this section shall be 
used to identify the 8-hour period that includes the maximum projected 
HAP load.
    (ii) A period of time in which the inlet to the control device will 
contain the highest HAP mass loading rate capable of being vented to the 
control device. An emission profile as described in paragraph 
(c)(3)(i)(B)(3)(i) of this section shall be used to identify the period 
of maximum HAP loading.
    (iii) The period of time when the HAP loading or stream composition 
(including non-HAP) is most challenging for the control device. These 
conditions include, but are not limited to the following: periods when 
the stream contains the highest combined VOC and HAP load described by 
the emission profiles in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(3) of this section; 
periods when the streams contain HAP constituents that approach limits 
of solubility for scrubbing media; or periods when the streams contain 
HAP constituents that approach limits of adsorptivity for carbon 
adsorption systems.
    (2) Hypothetical worst-case conditions are simulated test conditions 
that, at a minimum, contain the highest hourly HAP load of emissions 
that would be predicted to be vented to the control device from the 
emissions profile described in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(3)(ii) or (iii) of 
this section.
    (3) The owner or operator shall develop an emission profile for the 
vent to the control device that describes the characteristics of the 
vent stream at the inlet to the control device under worst case 
conditions. The emission profile shall be developed based on any one of 
the procedures described in paragraphs (c)(3)(i)(B)(3) (i) through (iii) 
of this section, as required by paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B) of this section.
    (i) The emission profile shall consider all emission episodes that 
could contribute to the vent stack for a period of time that is 
sufficient to include all processes venting to the stack and shall 
consider production scheduling. The profile shall describe the HAP load 
to the device that equals the highest sum of emissions from the episodes 
that can vent to the control device in any given period, not to exceed 1 
hour. Emissions per episode shall be divided by the duration of the 
episode only if the duration of the episode is longer than 1 hour, and 
emissions per episode shall be calculated using the procedures specified 
in Equation 1:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.000

Where:

E = Mass of HAP emitted.
V = Purge flow rate at the temperature and pressure of the vessel vapor 
          space.
R = Ideal gas law constant.
T = Temperature of the vessel vapor space (absolute).
Pi = Partial pressure of the individual HAP.
Pj = Partial pressure of individual condensable VOC compounds 
          (including HAP).
PT = Pressure of the vessel vapor space.
MWi = Molecular weight of the individual HAP.
t = Time of purge.
n = Number of HAP compounds in the emission stream.

[[Page 405]]

i = Identifier for a HAP compound.
j = Identifier for a condensable compound.
m = Number of condensable compounds (including HAP) in the emission 
          stream.

    (ii) The emission profile shall consist of emissions that meet or 
exceed the highest emissions that would be expected under actual 
processing conditions. The profile shall describe equipment 
configurations used to generate the emission events, volatility of 
materials processed in the equipment, and the rationale used to identify 
and characterize the emission events. The emissions may be based on 
using compounds more volatile than compounds actually used in the 
process(es), and the emissions may be generated from all equipment in 
the process(es) or only selected equipment.
    (iii) The emission profile shall consider the capture and control 
system limitations and the highest emissions that can be routed to the 
control device, based on maximum flow rate and concentrations possible 
because of limitations on conveyance and control equipment (e.g., fans, 
LEL alarms and safety bypasses).
    (4) Three runs, each at a minimum of the complete duration of the 
batch venting episode or 1 hour, whichever is shorter, and a maximum of 
8 hours, are required for performance testing. Each run shall occur over 
the same worst-case conditions, as defined in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B) of 
this section.
    (5) If a condenser is used to control the process vent stream(s), 
the worst case emission episode(s) shall represent a period of time in 
which a process vent from the batch cycle or combination of cycles (if 
more than one cycle is vented through the same process vent) will 
require the maximum heat removal capacity, in Btu/hr, to cool the 
process vent stream to a temperature that, upon calculation of HAP 
concentration, will yield the required removal efficiency for the entire 
cycle. The calculation of maximum heat load shall be based on the 
emission profile described in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(3) of this section 
that will allow calculation of sensible and latent heat loads.
    (ii) The concentration of either TOC (minus methane or ethane) or 
total organic HAP (of the HAP of concern) shall be calculated according 
to paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (A) The TOC concentration (CTOC) is the sum of the 
concentrations of the individual components and shall be computed for 
each run using Equation 2:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.001

Where:

CTOC = Concentration of TOC (minus methane and ethane), dry 
          basis, parts per million by volume.
Cji = Concentration of sample components j of sample i, dry 
          basis, parts per million by volume.
n = Number of components in the sample.
x = Number of samples in the sample run.

    (B) The total organic HAP concentration (CHAP) shall be 
computed according to Equation 2, except that only the organic HAP 
species shall be summed.
    (iii) The concentration of TOC or total organic HAP shall be 
corrected to 3 percent oxygen if a combustion device is used.
    (A) The emission rate correction factor or excess air, integrated 
sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3B of 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A shall be used to determine the oxygen concentration 
(%02d). The samples shall be taken during the same time that 
the TOC (minus methane or ethane) or total organic HAP samples are 
taken.
    (B) The concentration corrected to 3 percent oxygen shall be 
computed using Equation 3, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.002

Where:

Cc = Concentration of TOC or organic HAP corrected to 3 
          percent oxygen, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Cm = Concentration of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
          organic HAP, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
%02d = Concentration of oxygen, dry basis, percent by volume.

    (4) Test methods. When testing is conducted to measure emissions 
from an affected source, the test methods specified in paragraphs 
(c)(4)(i) through (iv)

[[Page 406]]

of this section shall be used, as applicable.
    (i) For sample and velocity traverses, Method 1 or 1A of appendix A 
of part 60 shall be used, as appropriate, except that references to 
particulate matter in Method 1A do not apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (ii) The velocity and gas volumetric flow rate shall be determined 
using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as 
appropriate.
    (iii) The concentration measurements shall be determined using the 
methods described in paragraphs (c)(4)(iii) (A) through (C) of this 
section.
    (A) Method 18 of appendix A of part 60 may be used to determine the 
HAP concentration in any control device efficiency determination.
    (B) Method 25 of appendix A of part 60 may be used to determine 
total gaseous nonmethane organic concentration for control efficiency 
determinations in combustion devices.
    (C) Method 25A of appendix A of part 60 may be used to determine the 
HAP or TOC concentration for control device efficiency determinations 
under the conditions specified in Method 25 of appendix A of part 60 for 
direct measurements of an effluent with a flame ionization detector, or 
in demonstrating compliance with the 20 ppmv standard, the instrument 
shall be calibrated on methane or the predominant HAP. If calibrating on 
the predominant HAP, the use of Method 25A of appendix A of part 60 
shall comply with paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(C) (1) through (3) of this 
section.
    (1) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A of 
appendix A of part 60 shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume.
    (2) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, is acceptable 
if the response from the high level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (3) The span value of the analyzer shall be less than 100 ppmv.
    (iv) Alternatively, any other method or data that have been 
validated according to the applicable procedures in 40 CFR part 63, 
appendix A, Method 301 may be used.
    (5) Calculation of percent reduction efficiency. The following 
procedures shall be used to calculate percent reduction efficiency:
    (i) Test duration shall be as specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) (A) 
through (B) of this section, as appropriate.
    (ii) The mass rate of either TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total 
organic HAP of the HAP of concern (Ei, Eo) shall 
be computed.
    (A) The following equations shall be used:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.003
    
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.004
    
Where:

Cij, Coj = Concentration of sample component j of 
          the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the combustion, 
          recovery, or recapture device, respectively, dry basis, parts 
          per million by volume.
Ei, Eo = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and 
          ethane) or total organic HAP at the inlet and outlet of the 
          combustion, recovery, or recapture device, respectively, dry 
          basis, kilogram per hour.
Mij, Moj = Molecular weight of sample component j 
          of the gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the combustion, 
          recovery, or recapture device, respectively, gram/gram-mole.
Qi, Qo = Flow rate of gas stream at the inlet and 
          outlet of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device, 
          respectively, dry standard cubic meter per minute.
K2 = Constant, 2.494  x  10 -6 (parts per million) 
          -1 (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/
          gram) (minute/hour), where standard temperature (gram-mole per 
          standard cubic meter) is 20  deg.C.

    (B) Where the mass rate of TOC is being calculated, all organic 
compounds (minus methane and ethane) measured by Method 18 of 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A are summed using Equations 4 and 5 in paragraph 
(c)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.
    (C) Where the mass rate of total organic HAP is being calculated, 
only the organic HAP species shall be summed using Equations 4 and 5 in 
paragraph (c)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.

[[Page 407]]

    (iii) The percent reduction in TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
total organic HAP shall be calculated using Equation 6 as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.005

Where:

    R = Control efficiency of combustion, recovery, or recapture device, 
percent.
    Ei = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total 
organic HAP at the inlet to the combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device as calculated under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section, 
kilograms TOC per hour or kilograms organic HAP per hour.
Eo = Mass rate of TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total 
          organic HAP at the outlet of the combustion, recovery, or 
          recapture device, as calculated under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of 
          this section, kilograms TOC per hour or kilograms organic HAP 
          per hour.

    (iv) If the process vent stream entering a boiler or process heater 
with a design capacity less than 44 megawatts is introduced with the 
combustion air or as a secondary fuel, the weight-percent reduction of 
total organic HAP or TOC (minus methane and ethane) across the device 
shall be determined by comparing the TOC (minus methane and ethane) or 
total organic HAP in all combusted process vent streams and primary and 
secondary fuels with the TOC (minus methane and ethane) or total organic 
HAP, respectively, exiting the combustion device.
    (d) Determination of uncontrolled organic HAP emissions. For each 
process vent at a PMPU that is complying with the process vent control 
requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(iii), (b)(2)(ii), 
(b)(2)(iv), (c)(1)(ii), or (d)(2) using a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device, the owner or operator shall determine the uncontrolled 
organic HAP emissions in accordance with the provisions of this 
paragraph, with the exceptions noted in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section. The provisions of Sec. 63.1427(c)(1) shall be used to calculate 
uncontrolled epoxide emissions prior to the onset of an extended cook 
out.
    (1) Exemptions. The owner or operator is not required to determine 
uncontrolled organic HAP emissions for process vents in a PMPU if the 
conditions in paragraph (d)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are 
met.
    (i) For PMPUs where all process vents subject to the epoxide 
emission reduction requirements of Sec. 63.1425(b) are controlled at all 
times using a combustion, recovery, or recapture device, or extended 
cookout, the owner or operator is not required to determine uncontrolled 
epoxide emissions.
    (ii) For PMPUs where the combination of process vents from batch 
unit operations associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to 
make or modify the product is subject to the Group 1 requirements of 
Sec. 63.1425(c)(1), the owner or operator is not required to determine 
uncontrolled nonepoxide organic HAP emissions for those process vents if 
every process vent from a batch unit operation associated with the use 
of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product in the PMPU is 
controlled at all times using a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device.
    (iii) For PMPUs where all process vents associated with catalyst 
extraction that are subject to the organic emission reduction 
requirements of Sec. 63.1425(d)(2) are controlled at all times using a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device, the owner or operator is not 
required to determine uncontrolled organic HAP emissions for those 
process vents.
    (2) Process vents from batch unit operations. The uncontrolled 
organic HAP emissions from an individual batch cycle for each process 
vent from a batch unit operation shall be determined using the 
procedures in the NESHAP for Group I Polymers and Resins (40 CFR part 
63, subpart U), Sec. 63.488(b)(1) through (9). Uncontrolled emissions 
from process vents from batch unit operations shall be determined after 
the exit from the batch unit operation but before any recovery device.
    (3) Process vents from continuous unit operations. The uncontrolled 
organic HAP emissions for each process vent from a continuous unit 
operation in a PMPU shall be determined at the location specified in 
paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this section, using the procedures in paragraph 
(d)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (i) For process vents subject to either the provisions for epoxide 
emissions in Sec. 63.1425(b) or the provisions for organic

[[Page 408]]

HAP emissions from catalyst extraction in Sec. 63.1425(d), uncontrolled 
emissions shall be determined after the exit from the continuous unit 
operation but before any recovery device.
    (ii) The owner or operator shall determine the hourly uncontrolled 
organic HAP emissions from each process vent from a continuous unit 
operation in accordance with paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, 
except that the emission rate shall be determined at the location 
specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section.
    (e) Determination of organic HAP emission reduction for a PMPU. (1) 
The owner or operator shall determine the organic HAP emission reduction 
for process vents in a PMPU that are complying with 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), (b)(2)(ii), (c)(1)(ii), or (d)(2) using Equation 
7. The organic HAP emission reduction shall be determined for each group 
of process vents subject to the same paragraph (i.e., paragraph (b), 
(c), or (d)) of Sec. 63.1425. For instance, process vents that emit 
epoxides are subject to paragraph (b) of Sec. 63.1425. Therefore, if the 
owner or operator of an existing affected source is complying with the 
98 percent reduction requirement in Sec. 63.1425(b)(2)(ii), the organic 
HAP (i.e., epoxide) emission reduction shall be determined for the group 
of vents in a PMPU that are subject to this paragraph.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.006

Where:

    REDPMPU = Organic HAP emission reduction for the group of 
process vents subject to the same paragraph of Sec. 63.1425, percent.
    Eunc,i = Uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from process 
vent i that is controlled using a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device, or extended cookout, kg/batch cycle for process vents from batch 
unit operations, kg/hr for process vents from continuous unit 
operations.
n = Number of process vents in the PMPU that are subject to the same 
          paragraph of Sec. 63.1425 and that are controlled using a 
          combustion, recovery, or recapture device, or extended 
          cookout.
    Ri = Control efficiency of the combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device, or extended cookout, used to control organic HAP 
emissions from vent i, determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of 
this section.
    Eunc,j = Uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from process 
vent j that is not controlled using a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device, kg/batch cycle for process vents from batch unit operations, kg/
hr for process vents from continuous unit operations.
m = Number of process vents in the PMPU that are subject to the same 
          paragraph of Sec. 63.1425 and that are not controlled using a 
          combustion, recovery, or recapture device.
    (2) The control efficiency, Ri, shall be assigned as 
specified below in paragraph (e)(2)(i), (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this 
section.
    (i) If the process vent is controlled using a flare (and the owner 
or operator has not previously obtained approval to assume a control 
efficiency greater than 98 percent in accordance with Sec. 63.6(g)) or a 
combustion device specified in paragraph (b)(1), (2), (4), or (5) of 
this section, and a performance test has not been conducted, the control 
efficiency shall be assumed to be 98 percent.
    (ii) If the process vent is controlled using a combustion, recovery, 
or recapture device for which a performance test has been conducted in 
accordance with the provisions of paragraph (c) of this section, or for 
which a performance test that meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(3) 
of this section has been previously performed, the control efficiency 
shall be the efficiency determined by the performance test.
    (iii) If epoxide emissions from the process vent are controlled 
using extended cookout, the control efficiency

[[Page 409]]

shall be the efficiency determined in accordance with Sec. 63.1427(e).
    (iv) If the process vent is controlled using a flare, and the owner 
or operator has obtained approval to assume a control efficiency greater 
than 98 percent in accordance with Sec. 63.6(g), the control efficiency 
shall be the efficiency approved in accordance with Sec. 63.6(g).
    (f) Design evaluation. A design evaluation is required for those 
control techniques that receive less than 10 tons per year (9.1 
megagrams per year) of uncontrolled organic HAP emissions from one or 
more PMPU, if the owner or operator has chosen not to conduct a 
performance test for those control techniques in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(6) of this section. The design evaluation shall include 
documentation demonstrating that the control technique being used 
achieves the required control efficiency under worst-case conditions, as 
determined from the emission profile described in 
Sec. 63.1426(c)(3)(i)(B)(3)(i).
    (1) Except for ECO whose design evaluation is presented in paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section, to demonstrate that a control technique meets 
the required control efficiency, a design evaluation shall address the 
composition and organic HAP concentration of the vent stream, 
immediately preceding the use of the control technique. A design 
evaluation shall also address other vent stream characteristics and 
control technique operating parameters, as specified in any one of 
paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section, depending on the type 
of control technique that is used. If the vent stream is not the only 
inlet to the control technique, the owner or operator shall also account 
for all other vapors, gases, and liquids, other than fuels, received 
into the control technique from one or more PMPUs, for purposes of the 
efficiency determination.
    (i) For an enclosed combustion technique used to comply with the 
provisions of Sec. 63.1425(b)(1), (c)(1), or (d), with a minimum 
residence time of 0.5 seconds and a minimum temperature of 760 deg. C, 
the design evaluation shall document that these conditions exist.
    (ii) For a combustion control technique that does not satisfy the 
criteria in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, the design evaluation 
shall document the control efficiency and address the characteristics 
listed in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section, 
depending on the type of control technique.
    (A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, in the design evaluation the 
owner or operator shall consider the autoignition temperature of the 
organic HAP, shall consider the vent stream flow rate, and shall 
establish the design minimum and average temperatures in the combustion 
zone and the combustion zone residence time.
    (B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, in the design evaluation the 
owner or operator shall consider the vent stream flow rate and shall 
establish the design minimum and average temperatures across the 
catalyst bed inlet and outlet.
    (C) For a boiler or process heater, in the design evaluation the 
owner or operator shall consider the vent stream flow rate; shall 
establish the design minimum and average flame zone temperatures and 
combustion zone residence time; and shall describe the method and 
location where the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone.
    (iii) For a condenser, in the design evaluation the owner or 
operator shall consider the vent stream flow rate, relative humidity, 
and temperature, and shall establish the design outlet organic HAP 
compound concentration level, design average temperature of the exhaust 
vent stream, and the design average temperatures of the coolant fluid at 
the condenser inlet and outlet. The temperature of the gas stream 
exiting the condenser shall be measured and used to establish the outlet 
organic HAP concentration.
    (iv) For a carbon adsorption system that regenerates the carbon bed 
directly onsite as part of the control technique (such as a fixed-bed 
adsorber), in the design evaluation the owner or operator shall consider 
the vent stream flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature, and shall 
establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration 
level,

[[Page 410]]

adsorption cycle time, number and capacity of carbon beds, type and 
working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon beds, design 
total regeneration stream mass or volumetric flow over the period of 
each complete carbon bed regeneration cycle, design carbon bed 
temperature after regeneration, design carbon bed regeneration time, and 
design service life of the carbon. For vacuum desorption, the pressure 
drop shall also be included.
    (v) For a carbon adsorption system that does not regenerate the 
carbon bed directly onsite as part of the control technique (such as a 
carbon canister), in the design evaluation the owner or operator shall 
consider the vent stream mass or volumetric flow rate, relative 
humidity, and temperature, and shall establish the design exhaust vent 
stream organic compound concentration level, capacity of the carbon bed, 
type and working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon bed, 
and design carbon replacement interval based on the total carbon working 
capacity of the control technique and source operating schedule.
    (vi) For a scrubber, in the design evaluation the owner or operator 
shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, 
liquid-to-vapor ratio, scrubbing liquid flow rate and concentration, 
temperature, and the reaction kinetics of the constituents with the 
scrubbing liquid. The design evaluation shall establish the design 
exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level and shall 
include the additional information in paragraphs (f)(1)(vi) (A) and (B) 
of this section for trays and a packed column scrubber.
    (A) Type and total number of theoretical and actual trays.
    (B) Type and total surface area of packing for entire column and for 
individual packed sections, if the column contains more than one packed 
section.
    (2) For ECO, the design evaluation shall establish the minimum 
duration (time) of the ECO, the maximum pressure at the end of the ECO, 
or the maximum epoxide concentration in the reactor liquid at the end of 
the ECO for each product class.



Sec. 63.1427  Process vent requirements for processes using extended cookout as an epoxide emission reduction technique.

    (a) Applicability of extended cookout requirements. Owners or 
operators of affected sources that produce polyether polyols using 
epoxides, and that are using ECO as a control technique to reduce 
epoxide emissions in order to comply with percent emission reduction 
requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i) or (b)(2)(ii) shall comply with 
the provisions of this section. The owner or operator that is using ECO 
in order to comply with the emission factor requirements in 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or Sec. 63.1425(b)(2)(iv) shall demonstrate that 
the specified emission factor is achieved by following the requirements 
in Sec. 63.1431. If additional control devices are used to further 
reduce the HAP emissions from a process vent already controlled by ECO, 
then the owner or operator shall also comply with the testing, 
monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements associated with 
the additional control device, as specified in Secs. 63.1426, 63.1429, 
and 63.1430, respectively.
    (1) For each product class, the owner or operator shall determine 
the batch cycle percent epoxide emission reduction for the most 
difficult to control product in the product class, where the most 
difficult to control product is the polyether polyol that is 
manufactured with the slowest pressure decay curve.
    (2) The owner or operator may determine the batch cycle percent 
epoxide emission reduction by directly measuring the concentration of 
the unreacted epoxide, or by using process knowledge, reaction kinetics, 
and engineering knowledge, in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(i) of 
this section.
    (i) If the owner or operator elects to use any method other than 
direct measurement, the epoxide concentration shall be determined by 
direct measurement for one product from each product class and compared 
with the epoxide concentration determined using the selected estimation 
method, with the exception noted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this 
section. If the difference between the directly determined epoxide 
concentration and the calculated epoxide concentration is

[[Page 411]]

less than 25 percent, then the selected estimation method will be 
considered to be an acceptable alternative to direct measurement for 
that class.
    (ii) If uncontrolled epoxide emissions prior to the end of the ECO 
are less than 10 tons per year (9.1 megagrams per year), the owner or 
operator is not required to perform the direct measurement required in 
paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section. Uncontrolled epoxide emissions 
prior to the end of the ECO shall be determined by the procedures in 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
    (b) Define the end of epoxide feed. The owner or operator shall 
define the end of the epoxide feed in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) 
or (2) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator shall determine the concentration of 
epoxide in the reactor liquid at the point in time when all epoxide has 
been added to the reactor and prior to any venting. This concentration 
shall be determined in accordance with the procedures in paragraph 
(f)(1)(i) of this section.
    (2) If the conditions in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of 
this section are met, the end of the epoxide feed may be defined by the 
reactor epoxide partial pressure at the point in time when all epoxide 
reactants have been added to the reactor. This reactor epoxide partial 
pressure shall be determined in accordance with the procedures in 
paragraph (g) of this section.
    (i) No epoxide is emitted before the end of the ECO;
    (ii) Extended cookout is the only control technique to reduce 
epoxide emissions; and
    (iii) The owner or operator elects to determine the percent epoxide 
emission reduction for the ECO using reactor epoxide partial pressure in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (c) Define the onset of the ECO. The owner or operator shall 
calculate the uncontrolled emissions for the batch cycle by calculating 
the epoxide emissions, if any, prior to the onset of the ECO, plus the 
epoxide emissions at the onset of the ECO. The onset of the ECO is 
defined as the point in time when the combined unreacted epoxide 
concentration in the reactor liquid is equal to 25 percent of the 
concentration of epoxides at the end of the epoxide feed, which was 
determined in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
    (1) The uncontrolled epoxide emissions for the batch cycle shall be 
determined using Equation 8.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.007

Where:

Ee,u = Uncontrolled epoxide emissions at the onset of the 
          ECO, kilograms per (kg/)batch.
Cliq,i = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor liquid at 
          the onset of the ECO, which is equal to 25 percent of the 
          concentration of epoxide at the end of the epoxide feed, 
          determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this 
          section, weight percent.
Vliq,i = Volume of reactor liquid at the onset of the ECO, 
          liters.
Dliq,i = Density of reactor liquid, kg/liter.
Cvap,i = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor vapor space 
          at the onset of the ECO, determined in accordance with 
          paragraph (f)(2) of this section, weight percent.
Vvap,i = Volume of the reactor vapor space at the onset of 
          the ECO, liters.
Dvap,i = Vapor density of reactor vapor space at the onset of 
          the ECO, kg/liter.
Eepox,bef = Epoxide emissions that occur prior to the onset 
          of the ECO, determined in accordance with the provisions of 
          Sec. 63.1426(d), kilograms.

    (2) If the conditions in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of 
this section are met, the owner or operator may define the onset of the 
ECO as the point in time when the reactor epoxide partial pressure 
equals 25 percent of the reactor epoxide partial pressure at the end of 
the epoxide feed, and is not required to determine the uncontrolled 
epoxide emissions in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
    (d) Determine emissions at the end of the ECO. The owner or operator 
shall calculate the epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO, where the 
end of the

[[Page 412]]

ECO is defined as the point immediately before the time when the reactor 
contents are emptied and/or the reactor vapor space purged to the 
atmosphere or to a combustion, recovery, or recapture device.
    (1) The epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO shall be determined 
using Equation 9.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.008

Where:

Ee,E = Epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO, kg.
Cliq,f = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor liquid at 
          the end of the ECO, determined in accordance with paragraph 
          (f)(1) of this section, weight percent.
Vliq,f = Volume of reactor liquid at the end of the ECO, 
          liters.
Dliq,f = Density of reactor liquid, kg/liter.
Cvap,f = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor vapor space 
          as it exits the reactor at the end of the ECO, determined in 
          accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section, weight 
          percent.
Vvap,f = Volume of the reactor vapor space as it exits the 
          reactor at the end of the ECO, liters.
Dvap,f = Vapor density of reactor vapor space at the end of 
          the ECO, kg/liter.

    (2) If the conditions in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of 
this section are met, the owner or operator may determine the reactor 
epoxide partial pressure at the end of the ECO instead of determining 
the uncontrolled epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO in accordance 
with paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
    (e) Determine percent epoxide emission reduction. (1) The owner or 
operator shall determine the percent epoxide emission reduction for the 
batch cycle using Equation 10.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.009

Where:

Rbatchcycle = Epoxide emission reduction for the batch cycle, 
          percent.
Ee,E = Epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO determined in 
          accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, kilograms.
Raddon,i = Control efficiency of combustion, recovery, or 
          recapture device that is used to control epoxide emissions 
          after the ECO, determined in accordance with the provisions of 
          Sec. 63.1426(c), percent .
Ee,o = Epoxide emissions that occur before the end of the 
          ECO, determined in accordance with the provisions of 
          Sec. 63.1426(d), kilograms.
Raddon,j = Control efficiency of combustion, recovery, or 
          recapture device that is used to control epoxide emissions 
          that occur before the end of the ECO, determined in accordance 
          with the provisions of Sec. 63.1426(c), percent.
Ee,u = Uncontrolled epoxide emissions determined in 
          accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, kilograms.

    (2) If the conditions in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of 
this section are met, the owner or operator may determine the percent 
epoxide emission reduction for the batch cycle using reactor epoxide 
partial pressure and Equation 11, instead of using the procedures in 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section.

[[Page 413]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN94.000

Where:

    Rbatchcycle = Epoxide emission reduction for the batch 
cycle, percent.
    Pepox,i = Reactor epoxide partial pressure at the onset 
of the ECO, determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section, mm Hg.
    Pepox,f = Reactor epoxide partial pressure at the end of 
the ECO, determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section, 
mm Hg.
    (f) Determination of epoxide concentrations. The owner or operator 
shall determine the epoxide concentrations in accordance with the 
procedures in this paragraph.
    (1) The owner or operator shall determine the concentration of 
epoxide in the reactor liquid using either direct measurement in 
accordance with paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, or reaction 
kinetics in accordance with paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section. An 
owner or operator may also request to use an alternative methodology in 
accordance with paragraph (f)(1)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall submit a standard operating 
procedure for obtaining the liquid sample, along with the test method 
used to determine the epoxide concentration. This information shall be 
submitted in the Precompliance Report.
    (ii) Determine the epoxide concentration in the reactor liquid using 
Equation 12. [Equation 12]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.011

    Cliq,f = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor liquid 
at the end of the time period, weight percent.
    Cliq,i = Concentration of epoxide in the reactor liquid 
at the beginning of the time period, weight percent.
k = Reaction rate constant, 1/hr.
t = Time, hours.

    Note: This equation assumes a first order reaction with respect to 
epoxide concentration. where:

    (iii) If the owner/operator deems that the methods listed in 
paragraphs (f)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section are not appropriate for 
the reaction system for a PMPU, then the owner/operator may submit a 
request for the use of an alternative method.
    (2) The owner or operator shall determine the concentration of 
epoxide in the reactor vapor space using either direct measurement in 
accordance with paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, or by engineering 
estimation in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section. An 
owner or operator may also request to use an alternative methodology in 
accordance with paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall take two representative samples from 
a bleed valve off the reactor's process vent. The owner or operator 
shall determine the total epoxide concentration using 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, Method 18.
    (ii) Determine the epoxide concentration in the vapor space using 
Raoult's Law or another appropriate phase equilibrium equation and the 
liquid epoxide concentration, determined in accordance with paragraph 
(f)(1) of this section.
    (iii) If the owner/operator deems that the methods listed in 
paragraphs (f)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section are not appropriate for 
the reaction system for a PMPU, then the owner/operator may submit a 
request for the use of an alternative method.
    (g) Determination of pressure. The owner or operator shall determine 
the total pressure of the system using standard pressure measurement 
devices calibrated according to the manufacturer's specifications or 
other written procedures that provide adequate assurance that the 
equipment would reasonably be expected to monitor accurately.
    (h) Determination if pressure decay curves are similar. The owner or 
operator shall determine the pressure decay curve as defined in 
Sec. 63.1423. Products with similar pressure decay curves constitute a 
product class. To determine if two pressure decay curves are similar 
when the pressure decay curves for products have different starting and 
finishing pressures, the owner or operator shall determine the time when 
the pressure has fallen to half its total pressure by using Equation 13:

[[Page 414]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.012

Where:

Phalf 1 = Half the total pressure of the epoxide 
          for product 1.
Time (Phalf 1) = Time when the pressure has fallen 
          to half its total pressure for product 1.
Phalf 2 = Half the total pressure of the epoxide 
          for product 2.
Time (Phalf 2) = Time when the pressure has fallen 
          to half its total pressure for product 2.
TAVG PAVG = The average time to cookout to the 
          point where the epoxide pressure is 25 percent of the epoxide 
          pressure at the end of the feed step for products 1 and 2.

    (i) ECO monitoring requirements. The owner or operator using ECO 
shall comply with the monitoring requirements of this paragraph to 
demonstrate continuous compliance with this subpart. Paragraphs (i)(1) 
through (3) of this section address monitoring of the extended cookout.
    (1) To comply with the provisions of this section, the owner or 
operator shall monitor one of the parameters listed in paragraphs 
(i)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, or may utilize the provision in 
paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Time from the end of the epoxide feed;
    (ii) The epoxide partial pressure in the closed reactor;
    (iii) Direct measurement of epoxide concentration in the reactor 
liquid at the end of the ECO, when the reactor liquid is still in the 
reactor, or after the reactor liquid has been transferred to another 
vessel; or
    (iv) An owner or operator may submit a request to the Administrator 
to monitor a parameter other than the parameters listed in paragraphs 
(i)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as described in 
Sec. 63.1439(f).
    (2) During the determination of the percent epoxide emission 
reduction in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section, the owner or 
operator shall establish, as a level that shall be maintained during 
periods of operation, one of the parameters in paragraphs (i)(2)(i) 
through (iii) of this section, or may utilize the procedure in paragraph 
(i)(2)(iv) of this section, for each product class.
    (i) The time from the end of the epoxide feed to the end of the ECO;
    (ii) The reactor epoxide partial pressure at the end of the ECO;
    (iii) The epoxide concentration in the reactor liquid at the end of 
the ECO, when the reactor liquid is still in the reactor, or after the 
reactor liquid has been transferred to another vessel; or
    (iv) An owner or operator may submit a request to the Administrator 
to monitor a parameter other than the parameters listed in paragraphs 
(i)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section, as described in 
Sec. 63.1439(f).
    (3) For each batch cycle where ECO is used to reduce epoxide 
emissions, the owner or operator shall record the value of the monitored 
parameter at the end of the ECO. This parameter is then compared with 
the level established in accordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this 
section to determine if an excursion has occurred. An ECO excursion is 
defined as one of the situations described in paragraphs (i)(3)(i) 
through (v) of this section.
    (i) When the time from the end of the epoxide feed to the end of the 
ECO is less than the time established in paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this 
section;
    (ii) When the reactor epoxide partial pressure at the end of the ECO 
is greater than the partial pressure established in paragraph (i)(2)(ii) 
of this section;
    (iii) When the epoxide concentration in the reactor liquid at the 
end of the ECO is greater than the epoxide concentration established in 
paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section;
    (iv) When the parameter is not measured and recorded at the end of 
the ECO; or
    (v) When the alternative monitoring parameter is outside the range 
established under Sec. 63.1439(f) for proper operation of the ECO as a 
control technique.
    (j) Recordkeeping requirements. (1) The owner or operator shall 
maintain the records specified in paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and (ii) of this 
section, for each product

[[Page 415]]

class. The owner or operator shall also maintain the records related to 
the initial determination of the percent epoxide emission reduction 
specified in paragraphs (j)(1)(iii) through (x) of this section, as 
applicable, for each product class.
    (i) Operating conditions of the product class, including:
    (A) Pressure decay curve;
    (B) Minimum reaction temperature;
    (C) Number of reactive hydrogens in the raw material;
    (D) Minimum catalyst concentration;
    (E) Ratio of EO/PO at the end of the epoxide feed; and
    (F) Reaction conditions, including the size of the reactor or batch.
    (ii) A listing of all products in the product class, along with the 
information specified in paragraphs (j)(1)(i)(A) through (F) of this 
section, for each product.
    (iii) The concentration of epoxide at the end of the epoxide feed, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
    (iv) The concentration of epoxide at the onset of the ECO, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (v) The uncontrolled epoxide emissions at the onset of the ECO, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The 
records shall also include all the background data, measurements, and 
assumptions used to calculate the uncontrolled epoxide emissions.
    (vi) The epoxide emissions at the end of the ECO, determined in 
accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section. The records shall also 
include all the background data, measurements, and assumptions used to 
calculate the epoxide emissions.
    (vii) The percent epoxide reduction for the batch cycle, determined 
in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section. The records shall 
also include all the background data, measurements, and assumptions used 
to calculate the percent reduction.
    (viii) The parameter level, established in accordance with paragraph 
(i)(3) of this section.
    (ix) If epoxide emissions occur before the end of the ECO, the owner 
or operator shall maintain records of the time and duration of all such 
emission episodes that occur during the initial demonstration of batch 
cycle efficiency.
    (x) If the conditions in paragraphs (b)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of 
this section are met, the owner or operator is not required to maintain 
the records specified in paragraphs (j)(1)(iii) through (iv) of this 
section, but shall maintain the records specified in paragraphs 
(j)(1)(x)(A), (B), and (C) of this section.
    (A) The reactor epoxide partial pressure at the following times:
    (1) At end of the epoxide feed, determined in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section;
    (2) At the onset of the ECO, established in accordance with 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section; or
    (3) At the end of the ECO, determined in accordance with paragraph 
(d)(2) of this section.
    (B) The percent epoxide reduction for the batch cycle, determined in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section. The records shall also 
include all the measurements and assumptions used to calculate the 
percent reduction.
    (C) The reactor epoxide partial pressure at the end of the ECO.
    (2) The owner or operator shall maintain the records specified in 
paragraphs (j)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
    (i) For each batch cycle, the product being produced and the product 
class to which it belongs.
    (ii) For each batch cycle, the owner or operator shall record the 
value of the parameter monitored in accordance with paragraph (i)(3) of 
this section.
    (iii) If a combustion, recovery, or recapture device is used in 
conjunction with ECO, the owner or operator shall record the information 
specified in Sec. 63.1430(d) and comply with the monitoring provisions 
in Sec. 63.1429.
    (iv) If a combustion, recovery, or recapture device is used to 
reduce emissions, the owner or operator shall maintain the records 
specified in Sec. 63.1430(d).
    (v) If epoxide emissions occur before the end of the ECO, the owner 
or operator shall maintain records of the time and duration of all such 
emission episodes.

[[Page 416]]

    (k) Reporting requirements. The owner or operator shall comply with 
the reporting requirements in this paragraph.
    (1) The information specified in paragraphs (k)(1)(i) through (ii) 
of this section shall be provided in the Precompliance Report, as 
specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4).
    (i) A standard operating procedure for obtaining the reactor liquid 
sample and a method that will be used to determine the epoxide 
concentration in the liquid, in accordance with paragraph (f)(1)(i) of 
this section.
    (ii) A request to monitor a parameter other than those specified in 
paragraph (i)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, as provided for in 
paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (2) The information specified in paragraphs (k)(2)(i) through (iv) 
of this section shall be provided in the Notification of Compliance 
Status, as specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (i) For each product class, the information specified in paragraphs 
(k)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) The operating conditions of this product class, as specified in 
paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section.
    (B) A list of all products in the product class.
    (C) The percent epoxide emission reduction, determined in accordance 
with paragraph (e) of this section.
    (ii) The parameter for each product class, as determined in 
accordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this section.
    (iii) If a combustion, recovery, or recapture device is used in 
addition to ECO to reduce emissions, the information specified in 
Sec. 63.1430(g)(1).
    (iv) If epoxide emissions occur before the end of the ECO, a listing 
of the time and duration of all such emission episodes that occur during 
the initial demonstration of batch cycle efficiency.
    (3) The information specified in paragraphs (k)(3)(i) through (iii) 
of this section shall be provided in the Periodic Report, as specified 
in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6).
    (i) Reports of each batch cycle for which an ECO excursion occurred, 
as defined in paragraph (i)(3) of this section.
    (ii) Notification of each batch cycle when the time and duration of 
epoxide emissions before the end of the ECO, recorded in accordance with 
paragraph (j)(2)(iv) of this section, exceed the time and duration of 
the emission episodes during the initial epoxide emission percentage 
reduction determination, as recorded in paragraph (j)(1)(viii) of this 
section.
    (iii) If a combustion, recovery, or recapture device is used to 
reduce emissions, the information specified in Sec. 63.1430(h).
    (l) New polyether polyol products. If an owner or operator wishes to 
utilize ECO as a control option for a polyether polyol not previously 
assigned to a product class and reported to the Agency in accordance 
with either paragraph (k)(2)(i)(B), (l)(1)(ii), or (l)(2)(iii) of this 
section, the owner or operator shall comply with the provisions of 
paragraph (l)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) If the operating conditions of the new polyether polyol are 
consistent with the operating conditions for an existing product class, 
the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements in paragraphs 
(l)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall update the list of products for the 
product class required by paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, and 
shall record the information in paragraphs (j)(1)(i)(A) through (F) of 
this section for the new product.
    (ii) Within 180 days after the production of the new polyether 
polyol, the owner or operator shall submit a report updating the product 
list previously submitted for the product class. This information may be 
submitted along with the next Periodic Report.
    (2) If the operating conditions of the new polyether polyol do not 
conform with the operating characteristics of an existing product class, 
the owner or operator shall establish a new product class and shall 
comply with provisions of paragraphs (l)(2)(i) through (iii) of this 
section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall establish the batch cycle percent 
epoxide emission reduction in accordance with paragraphs (b) through (g) 
of this section for the product class.

[[Page 417]]

    (ii) The owner or operator shall establish the records specified in 
paragraph (j)(1) of this section for the product class.
    (iii) Within 180 days of the production of the new polyether polyol, 
the owner or operator shall submit a report containing the information 
specified in paragraphs (k)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (m) Polyether polyol product changes. If a change in operation, as 
defined in paragraph (m)(1) of this section, occurs for a polyether 
polyol that has been assigned to a product class and reported to the 
Agency in accordance with paragraph (k)(2)(i)(B), (l)(1)(ii), or 
(l)(2)(iii) of this section, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
provisions of paragraphs (m)(2) through (3) of this section.
    (1) A change in operation for a polyether polyol is defined as a 
change in any one of the parameters listed in paragraphs (m)(1)(i) 
through (ix) of this section.
    (i) A significant change in reaction kinetics;
    (ii) Use of a different oxide reactant;
    (iii) Use of a different EO/PO ratio;
    (iv) A lower reaction temperature;
    (v) A lower catalyst feed on a mole/mole fraction OH basis;
    (vi) A shorter cookout;
    (vii) A lower reactor pressure;
    (viii) A different type of reaction, (e.g., a self-catalyzed vs. 
catalyzed reaction); or
    (ix) A marked change in reaction conditions (e.g., a markedly 
different liquid level).
    (2) If the operating conditions of the product after the change in 
operation remain within the operation conditions of the product class to 
which the product was assigned, the owner or operator shall update the 
records specified in paragraphs (j)(1)(i)(A) through (F) of this section 
for the product.
    (3) If the operating conditions of the product after the change in 
operation are outside of the operating conditions of the product class 
to which the product was assigned, the owner or operator shall comply 
with the requirements in paragraph (m)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section, as 
appropriate.
    (i) If the new operating conditions of the polyether polyol are 
consistent with the operating conditions for another existing product 
class, the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements in 
paragraphs (m)(3)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) The owner or operator shall update the list of products for the 
product class that the product is leaving, and for the product class 
that the product is entering, and shall record the new information in 
paragraphs (j)(1)(i)(A) through (F) of this section for the product.
    (B) Within 180 days after the change in operating conditions for the 
polyether polyol product, the owner or operator shall submit a report 
updating the product lists previously submitted for the product class. 
This information may be submitted along with the next Periodic Report.
    (ii) If the new operating conditions of the polyether polyol product 
do not conform with the operating characteristics of an existing product 
class, the owner or operator shall establish a new product class and 
shall comply with provisions of paragraphs (m)(3)(ii)(A) through (C) of 
this section.
    (A) The owner or operator shall establish the batch cycle percent 
epoxide emission reduction in accordance with paragraphs (b) through (g) 
of this section for the product class.
    (B) The owner or operator shall establish the records specified in 
paragraph (j)(1) of this section for the product class.
    (C) Within 180 days of the change in operating conditions for the 
polyether polyol, the owner or operator shall submit a report containing 
the information specified in paragraphs (k)(2)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.

[64 FR 29439, June 1, 1999; 64 FR 31895, June 14, 1999]



Sec. 63.1428  Process vent requirements for group determination of PMPUs using a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product.

    (a) Process vents from batch unit operations. The owner or operator 
shall determine, for each PMPU located at an affected source, if the 
combination of all process vents from batch unit operations that are 
associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or

[[Page 418]]

modify the product is a Group 1 combination of batch process vents, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1423. The annual uncontrolled nonepoxide organic HAP 
emissions, determined in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, 
and annual average flow rate, determined in accordance with paragraph 
(c) of this section, shall be determined for all process vents from 
batch unit operations associated with the use of a nonepoxide organic 
HAP to make or modify the product, with the exception of those vents 
specified in paragraph (i) of this section, at the location after all 
applicable control techniques have been applied to reduce epoxide 
emissions in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) If the owner or operator is using a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device to reduce epoxide emissions, this location shall be at 
the exit of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device.
    (2) If the owner or operator is using ECO to reduce epoxide 
emissions, this location shall be at the exit from the batch unit 
operation. For the purpose of these determinations, the primary 
condenser operating as a reflux condenser on a reactor or distillation 
column shall be considered part of the unit operation.
    (b) Determination of annual nonepoxide organic HAP emissions. The 
owner or operator shall determine, for each PMPU, the total annual 
nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from the combination of all process 
vents from batch unit operations that are associated with the use of a 
nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product in accordance with 
paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (1) The annual nonepoxide organic HAP emissions for each process 
vent from a batch unit operation associated with the use of a nonepoxide 
organic HAP to make or modify the product shall be determined using the 
batch process vent procedures in the NESHAP for Group I Polymers and 
Resins (40 CFR part 63, subpart U), Sec. 63.488(b).
    (2) The owner or operator shall sum the annual nonepoxide organic 
HAP emissions from all individual process vents from batch unit 
operations in a PMPU, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, to obtain the total nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from 
the combination of process vents associated with the use of a nonepoxide 
organic HAP to make or modify the product, for the PMPU.
    (c) Minimum emission level exemption. If the annual emissions of TOC 
or nonepoxide organic HAP from the combination of process vents from 
batch unit operations that are associated with the use of nonepoxide 
organic HAP to make or modify a polyether polyol for a PMPU are less 
than 11,800 kg/yr, the owner or operator of that PMPU is not required to 
comply with the provisions in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section.
    (d) Determination of average flow rate and annual average flow rate. 
The owner or operator shall determine, for each PMPU, the total annual 
average flow rate for the combination of all process vents from batch 
unit operations that are associated with the use of a nonepoxide organic 
HAP to make or modify a product in accordance with paragraphs (d)(1) and 
(2) of this section.
    (1) The annual average flow rate for each process vent from batch 
unit operations that is associated with the use of nonepoxide organic 
HAP to make or modify the product shall be determined using the batch 
process vent procedures in the NESHAP for Group I Polymers and Resins 
(40 CFR part 63, subpart U), Sec. 63.488(e).
    (2) The owner or operator shall sum the annual average flow rates 
from the individual process vents from batch unit operations in a PMPU, 
determined in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, to 
obtain the total annual average flow rate for the combination of process 
vents associated with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or 
modify the product, for the PMPU.
    (e) Determination of cutoff flow rate. For each PMPU at an affected 
source that uses nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product, 
the owner or operator shall calculate the cutoff flow rate using 
Equation 14.

[[Page 419]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.013

Where:

CFR = Cutoff flow rate, standard cubic meters per minute (scmm).
AE = Annual TOC or nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from the combination 
          of process vents from batch unit operations that are 
          associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or 
          modify the product, as determined in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
          section, kg/yr.

    (f) [Reserved]
    (g) Process changes affecting Group 2 combinations of process vents 
in a PMPU that are from batch unit operations. Whenever process changes, 
as described in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, are made that affect a 
Group 2 combination of batch process vents and that could reasonably be 
expected to change the group status from Group 2 to Group 1, the owner 
or operator shall comply with paragraphs (g)(2) and (3) of this section.
    (1) Examples of process changes include, but are not limited to, 
increases in production capacity or production rate, changes in 
feedstock type or catalyst type; or whenever there is replacement, 
removal, or modification of recovery equipment considered part of the 
batch unit operation. Any change that results in an increase in the 
annual nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from the estimate used in the 
previous group determination constitutes a process change for the 
purpose of these provisions. Process changes do not include: process 
upsets; unintentional, temporary process changes; and changes that are 
within the margin of variation on which the original group determination 
was based.
    (2) For each process affected by a process change, the owner or 
operator shall redetermine the group status by repeating the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section, as applicable, 
and determining if the combination of process vents is a Group 1 
combination of batch process vents, as defined in Sec. 63.1423. 
Alternatively, engineering assessment, as described in 
Sec. 63.488(b)(6)(i), may be used to determine the effects of the 
process change.
    (3) Based on the results of paragraph (g)(2) of this section, the 
owner or operator shall comply with either paragraph (g)(3)(i) or (ii) 
of this section.
    (i) If the redetermination described in paragraph (g)(2) of this 
section indicates that the group status of the combination of process 
vents from batch unit operations in a PMPU that are associated with the 
use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product changes from 
Group 2 to Group 1 as a result of the process change, the owner or 
operator shall submit a report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(6)(iii)(D)(1) and shall comply with Group 1 combination 
of batch process vents provisions in this subpart, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1420(g)(3).
    (ii) If the redetermination described in paragraph (g)(2) of this 
section indicates no change in group status, the owner or operator is 
not required to submit a report.
    (h) Process vents from continuous unit operations. (1) The owner or 
operator shall determine the total resource effectiveness (TRE) index 
value for each process vent from a continuous unit operation that is 
associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the 
product. To determine the TRE index value, the owner or operator shall 
conduct a TRE determination and calculate the TRE index value according 
to the HON process vent group determination procedures in 
Sec. 63.115(d)(1) or (2) and the TRE equation in Sec. 63.115(d)(3). The 
TRE index value shall be determined at the location after all applicable 
control techniques have been applied to reduce epoxide emissions in 
accordance with paragraph (h)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section.
    (i) If the owner or operator uses one or more nonepoxide recovery 
devices after all control techniques to reduce epoxide emissions, this 
location shall be after the last nonepoxide recovery device.
    (ii) If the owner or operator does not use a nonepoxide recovery 
device after a combustion, recovery, or recapture device to reduce 
epoxide emissions,

[[Page 420]]

this location shall be at the exit of the combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device.
    (iii) If the owner or operator does not use a nonepoxide recovery 
device after extended cookout to reduce epoxide emissions, this location 
shall be at the exit from the continuous unit operation. For the purpose 
of these determinations, the primary condenser operating as a reflux 
condenser on a reactor or distillation column shall be considered part 
of the unit operation.
    (2) The owner or operator of a Group 2 continuous process vent shall 
recalculate the TRE index value as necessary to determine whether the 
process vent is Group 1 or Group 2, whenever process changes are made 
that could reasonably be expected to change the process vent to Group 1. 
Examples of process changes include, but are not limited to, increases 
in production capacity or production rate, changes in feedstock type or 
catalyst type, or whenever there is replacement, removal, or addition of 
recovery equipment. For purposes of this paragraph, process changes do 
not include: process upsets; unintentional, temporary process changes; 
and changes that are within the range on which the original TRE 
calculation was based.
    (i) The TRE index value shall be recalculated based on measurements 
of process vent stream flow rate, TOC, and nonepoxide organic HAP 
concentrations, and heating values as specified in the HON process vent 
group determination procedures in Sec. 63.115(a), (b), (c), and (d), as 
applicable, or on best engineering assessment of the effects of the 
change. Engineering assessments shall meet the specifications in 
Sec. 63.115(d)(1).
    (ii) Where the recalculated TRE index value is less than or equal to 
1.0, or, where the TRE index value before the process change was greater 
than 4.0 and the recalculated TRE index value is less than or equal to 
4.0 but greater than 1.0, the owner or operator shall submit a report as 
specified in the process vent reporting and recordkeeping provisions in 
Sec. 63.1430(j) or (k), and shall comply with the appropriate provisions 
in the process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425 by the dates 
specified in Sec. 63.1422 (the section describing compliance dates for 
sources subject to this subpart).
    (iii) Where the recalculated TRE index value is greater than 4.0, 
the owner or operator is not required to submit a report.
    (i) Combination of process vents from batch unit operations and 
process vents from continuous unit operations. If an owner or operator 
combines a process vent from a batch unit operation that is associated 
with the use of a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product 
with a process vent from a continuous unit operation that is associated 
with the use of a nonepoxide prior to the epoxide control technique, or 
prior to a nonepoxide recovery device that is after the epoxide control 
technique, then the provisions in paragraphs (i)(1) and (2) of this 
section shall apply.
    (1) The process vent from the batch unit operation is not required 
to be included in the group determination required by paragraphs (a) 
through (e) of this section.
    (2) The TRE index value of the combined stream shall be determined 
in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section, and the TRE index 
value shall be calculated during a period when nonepoxide organic HAP 
emissions are being generated by the batch unit operation.



Sec. 63.1429  Process vent monitoring requirements.

    (a) Monitoring equipment requirements. The owner or operator of a 
process vent that uses a combustion, recovery, or recapture device to 
comply with the process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1), 
(b)(2), (c)(1), (c)(3), or (d) shall install monitoring equipment 
specified in paragraph (a)(1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), or (7) of this 
section, depending on the type of device used. Also, the owner or 
operator that uses a recovery or recapture device to comply with 
Sec. 63.1425(c)(4) shall install monitoring equipment as specified in 
paragraph (a)(4), (5), (6), or (7) of this section. All monitoring 
equipment shall be installed, calibrated, maintained, and operated 
according to manufacturers' specifications or other written procedures 
that provide adequate assurance

[[Page 421]]

that the equipment would reasonably be expected to monitor accurately.
    (1) Where an incinerator is used, a temperature monitoring device 
equipped with a continuous recorder is required.
    (i) Where an incinerator other than a catalytic incinerator is used, 
a temperature monitoring device shall be installed in the firebox or in 
the ductwork immediately downstream of the firebox in a position before 
any substantial heat exchange occurs.
    (ii) Where a catalytic incinerator is used, temperature monitoring 
devices shall be installed in the gas stream immediately before and 
after the catalyst bed.
    (2) Where a flare is used, the following monitoring equipment is 
required: a device (including but not limited to a thermocouple, ultra-
violet beam sensor, or infrared sensor) capable of continuously 
detecting the presence of a pilot flame.
    (3) Where a boiler or process heater of less than 44 megawatts 
design heat input capacity is used, the following monitoring equipment 
is required: a temperature monitoring device in the firebox equipped 
with a continuous recorder. Any boiler or process heater in which all 
process vent streams are introduced with primary fuel or are used as the 
primary fuel is exempt from this requirement.
    (4) Where an absorber is used, a scrubbing liquid flow rate meter or 
a pressure monitoring device is required and should be equipped with a 
continuous recorder. If an acid or base absorbent is used, a pH 
monitoring device to monitor scrubber effluent is also required. If two 
or more absorbers in series are used, a scrubbing liquid flow rate 
meter, or a pressure monitoring device, equipped with a continuous 
recorder, is required for each absorber in the series. An owner or 
operator may submit a request to instead install the scrubbing liquid 
flow rate meter, or a pressure monitoring device, equipped with a 
continuous recorder, on only the final absorber in a series, in 
accordance with the alternative parameter monitoring reporting 
requirements in Sec. 63.1439(f).
    (5) Where a condenser is used, a condenser exit temperature (product 
side) monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder is required.
    (6) Where a carbon adsorber is used, an integrating regeneration 
stream flow monitoring device having an accuracy of +10 percent or 
better, capable of recording the total regeneration stream mass or 
volumetric flow for each regeneration cycle, and a carbon bed 
temperature monitoring device, capable of recording the carbon bed 
temperature after each regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing 
any cooling cycle are required.
    (7) As an alternative to paragraphs (a)(4) through (6) of this 
section, the owner or operator may install an organic monitoring device 
equipped with a continuous recorder.
    (b) Alternative parameters. An owner or operator of a process vent 
may request approval to monitor parameters other than those listed in 
paragraph (a) of this section. The request shall be submitted according 
to the procedures specified in the process vent reporting and 
recordkeeping requirements in Sec. 63.1430(j) and the alternative 
parameter monitoring reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1439(f). Approval 
shall be requested if the owner or operator:
    (1) Uses a combustion device other than an incinerator, boiler, 
process heater, or flare; or
    (2) For a Group 2 continuous process vent, maintains a TRE greater 
than 1.0 but less than or equal to 4.0 without a recovery device or with 
a recovery device other than the recovery devices listed in paragraph 
(a) of this section; or
    (3) Uses one of the combustion, recovery, or recapture devices 
listed in paragraph (a) of this section, but seeks to monitor a 
parameter other than those specified in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) Monitoring of bypass lines. The owner or operator of a process 
vent using a process vent system that contains bypass lines that could 
divert a process vent stream away from the combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device used to comply with the process vent control 
requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), (c), or (d) shall comply with paragraph 
(c)(1) or (2) of this section. Equipment such as low leg drains, high 
point bleeds, analyzer vents, open-

[[Page 422]]

ended valves or lines, and pressure relief valves needed for safety 
purposes are not subject to paragraphs (c)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) Properly install, maintain, and operate a flow indicator that 
takes a reading at least once at approximately equal intervals of about 
15 minutes. Records shall be generated as specified in the process vent 
reporting and recordkeeping provisions in Sec. 63.1430(d)(3). The flow 
indicator shall be installed at the entrance to any bypass line that 
could divert emissions away from the combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device and to the atmosphere; or
    (2) Secure the bypass line valve in the non-diverting position with 
a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration. A visual inspection of 
the seal or closure mechanism shall be performed at least once every 
month to ensure that the valve is maintained in the non-diverting 
position and emissions are not diverted through the bypass line. Records 
shall be generated as specified in the process vent reporting and 
recordkeeping provisions in Sec. 63.1430(d)(4)(i).
    (d) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels. Parameter 
monitoring levels for process vents from continuous or batch unit 
operations using a combustion, recovery, or recapture device to comply 
with the process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), (c), or 
(d) shall be established as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) 
of this section.
    (1) For each parameter monitored under paragraph (a) or (b) of this 
section, the owner or operator shall establish a level, defined as 
either a maximum or minimum operating parameter as denoted in Table 5 of 
this subpart (the table listing the monitoring, recordkeeping, and 
reporting requirements for process vents from batch unit operations), 
that indicates that the combustion, recovery, or recapture device is 
operated in a manner to ensure compliance with the provisions of this 
subpart. The level shall be established in accordance with the 
procedures specified in the process vent control requirements in 
Sec. 63.1430(d). The level may be based upon a prior performance test 
conducted for determining compliance with a regulation promulgated by 
the EPA, and the owner or operator is not required to conduct a 
performance test under the process vent requirements for determining 
organic HAP concentration, control efficiency, and aggregated organic 
HAP emission reductions in Sec. 63.1426, provided that the prior 
performance test meets the conditions of Sec. 63.1426(b)(3).
    (2) The established level, along with supporting documentation, 
shall be submitted in the Notification of Compliance Status or the 
operating permit application as required in the Notification of 
Compliance Status requirements in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5) or in the operating 
permit application requirements in Sec. 63.1439(e)(8), respectively.
    (3) The operating day shall be defined as part of establishing the 
parameter monitoring level and shall be submitted with the information 
in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. The definition of operating day 
shall specify the time(s) at which an operating day begins and ends.



Sec. 63.1430  Process vent reporting and recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) Records to demonstrate compliance. The owner or operator 
complying with the process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), 
(c), or (d) shall keep the following records, as applicable, readily 
accessible:
    (1) When using a flare to comply with the process vent control 
requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b)(2)(i), (c)(1)(i), (c)(3)(i), or (d)(1):
    (i) The flare design (i.e., steam-assisted, air-assisted, or non-
assisted);
    (ii) All visible emission readings, heat content determinations, 
flow rate determinations, and exit velocity determinations made during 
the flare specification determination required by Sec. 63.1437(c); and
    (iii) All periods during the flare specification determination 
required by Sec. 63.1437(c) when all pilot flames are absent.
    (2) The following information when using a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device (other than a flare) to achieve compliance with the 
process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), (c), or (d):

[[Page 423]]

    (i) For a combustion, recovery, or recapture device being used to 
comply with a percent reduction requirement of Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(i), 
(b)(2)(ii), (c)(1)(ii), (c)(3)(ii), or (d)(2), or the annual epoxide 
emission limitation in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv), the 
percent reduction of organic HAP or TOC achieved, as determined using 
the procedures specified in the process vent requirements in 
Sec. 63.1426;
    (ii) For a combustion device being used to comply with an outlet 
concentration limitation of Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(ii) or (b)(2)(iii), the 
concentration of organic HAP or TOC outlet of the combustion device, as 
determined using the procedures specified in the process vent 
requirements in Sec. 63.1426;
    (iii) For a boiler or process heater, a description of the location 
at which the process vent stream is introduced into the boiler or 
process heater;
    (iv) For a boiler or process heater with a design heat input 
capacity of less than 44 megawatts and where the process vent stream is 
introduced with combustion air or is used as a secondary fuel and is not 
mixed with the primary fuel, the percent reduction of organic HAP or TOC 
achieved, as determined using the procedures specified in Sec. 63.1426.
    (c) Records related to the establishment of parameter monitoring 
levels. For each parameter monitored according to the process vent 
monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1429(a) and Table 5 of this subpart, 
or for alternate parameters and/or parameters for alternate control 
techniques monitored according to the alternative parameter monitoring 
reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1439(f) as allowed under 
Sec. 63.1429(b), maintain documentation showing the establishment of the 
level that indicates that the combustion, recovery, or recapture device 
is operated in a manner to ensure compliance with the provisions of this 
subpart, as required by the process vent monitoring requirements in 
Sec. 63.1429(d).
    (d) Records to demonstrate continuous compliance. The owner or 
operator that uses a combustion, recovery, or recapture device to comply 
with the process vent control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), (c), or 
(d) shall keep the following records readily accessible:
    (1) Continuous records of the equipment operating parameters 
specified to be monitored under the process vent monitoring requirements 
in Sec. 63.1429(a) as applicable, and listed in Table 5 of this subpart, 
or specified by the Administrator in accordance with the alternative 
parameter monitoring reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1439(f), as 
allowed under Sec. 63.1429(b). These records shall be kept as specified 
under Sec. 63.1439(d), except as specified in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) For flares, the records specified in Table 5 of this subpart 
shall be maintained in place of continuous records.
    (ii) For carbon adsorbers used for process vents from batch unit 
operations, the records specified in Table 5 of this subpart shall be 
maintained in place of daily averages.
    (2) Records of the daily average value for process vents from 
continuous unit operations or batch unit operations of each continuously 
monitored parameter, except as provided in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (ii) 
of this section.
    (i) Monitoring data recorded during periods of monitoring system 
breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero (low-level) and high-
level adjustments shall not be included in computing the daily averages. 
In addition, monitoring data recorded during periods of non-operation of 
the process (or specific portion thereof) resulting in cessation of 
organic HAP emissions, (or periods of start-up, shutdown, or 
malfunction) shall not be included in computing the daily averages.
    (ii) If all recorded values for a monitored parameter during an 
operating day are above the minimum or below the maximum parameter 
monitoring level established in accordance with the process vent 
monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1429(d), the owner or operator may 
record that all values were above the minimum or below the maximum level 
established, rather than calculating and recording a daily average for 
that operating day.
    (3) Hourly records of whether the flow indicator for bypass lines 
specified under Sec. 63.1429(c)(1) was operating and whether a diversion 
was detected at any time during the hour. Also, records

[[Page 424]]

of the time(s) of all periods when the process vent was diverted from 
the combustion, recovery, or recapture device, or the flow indicator 
specified in Sec. 63.1429(c)(1) was not operating.
    (4) Where a seal or closure mechanism is used to comply with the 
process vent monitoring requirements for bypass lines in 
Sec. 63.1429(c)(2), hourly records of flow are not required. For 
compliance with Sec. 63.1429(c)(2), the owner or operator shall record 
whether the monthly visual inspection of the seals or closure mechanism 
has been done, and shall record the occurrence of all periods when the 
seal mechanism is broken, the bypass line valve position has changed, or 
the key for a lock-and-key type configuration has been checked out, and 
records of any car-seal that has been broken.
    (5) Records specifying the times and duration of periods of 
monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero 
(low-level) and high level adjustments. In addition, records specifying 
any other periods of process or combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device operation when monitors are not operating.
    (e) Records related to the group determination for process vents 
that are associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or 
modify the product. (1) Process vents from batch unit operations. Except 
as provided in paragraphs (e)(1)(vi) and (vii) of this section, the 
owner or operator of an affected source shall maintain the records 
specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (v) of this section for each 
PMPU that uses a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product in 
batch unit operations. The records required to be maintained by this 
paragraph are limited to the information developed and used to make the 
group determination under the process vent requirements for processes 
using a nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product in 
Sec. 63.1428(a) through (e), as appropriate. If an owner or operator did 
not need to develop certain information (e.g., annual average flow rate) 
to determine the group status, the owner or operator is not required to 
develop additional information. The owner or operator may elect Group 1 
status for process vents without making a Group 1/Group 2 determination. 
In such event, none of the records specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) 
through (v) are required.
    (i) A description of, and an emission estimate for, each batch 
emission episode, and the total emissions associated with one batch 
cycle for each unique product class made in the PMPU.
    (ii) Total annual uncontrolled TOC or nonepoxide organic HAP 
emissions from the combination of process vents from batch unit 
operations associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or 
modify the product, as determined in accordance with the process vent 
requirements for group determinations in Sec. 63.1428(b).
    (iii) The annual average flow rate for the combination of process 
vents from batch unit operations associated with the use of organic HAP 
to make or modify the product, as determined in accordance with the 
process vent requirements for group determinations in Sec. 63.1428(d).
    (iv) The cutoff flow rate, determined in accordance with the process 
vent requirements for group determinations in Sec. 63.1428(e).
    (v) The results of the PMPU group determination (i.e., whether the 
combination of process vents is Group 1 or Group 2).
    (vi) If the combination of all process vents from batch unit 
operations associated with the use of an organic HAP to make or modify 
the product is subject to the Group 1 batch process vent control 
requirements for nonepoxide HAP emissions from making or modifying the 
product in Sec. 63.1425(c)(1), none of the records in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (v) of this section are required.
    (vii) If the total annual emissions from the combination of process 
vents from batch unit operations associated with the use of an organic 
HAP to make or modify the product are less than 11,800 kg per year, only 
the records in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section are 
required.
    (2) Process vents from continuous unit operations. The owner or 
operator of an affected source that uses nonepoxide organic HAP to make 
or modify the product in continuous unit operations

[[Page 425]]

shall keep records regarding the measurements and calculations performed 
to determine the TRE index value of each process vent stream. The owner 
or operator of Group 1 continuous process vents that are subject to the 
control requirements of Sec. 63.1425(c)(3) is not required to keep these 
records.
    (f) Records for Group 2 process vents that are associated with the 
use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product. The 
following records shall be maintained for PMPUs with a Group 2 
combination of batch process vents and/or one or more Group 2 continuous 
process vents.
    (1) Process vents from batch unit operations--emission records. The 
owner or operator shall maintain records of the combined total annual 
nonepoxide organic HAP emissions from process vents associated with the 
use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product for each 
PMPU where the combination of these process vents is classified as Group 
2.
    (2) Process vents from continuous unit operations--monitoring 
records for vents with TRE between 1.0 and 4.0. The owner or operator 
using a recovery device or other means to achieve and maintain a TRE 
index value greater than 1.0 but less than 4.0 as specified in the HON 
process vent requirements in Sec. 63.113(a)(3) or Sec. 63.113(d) shall 
keep the following records readily accessible:
    (i) Continuous records of the equipment operating parameters 
specified to be monitored under Sec. 63.114(b) and listed in Table 5 of 
this subpart or specified by the Administrator in accordance with 
Sec. 63.114(c) and Sec. 63.117(e); and
    (ii) Records of the daily average value of each continuously 
monitored parameter for each operating day determined according to the 
procedures specified in Sec. 63.152(f). If carbon adsorber regeneration 
stream flow and carbon bed regeneration temperature are monitored, the 
records specified in Table 5 of this subpart shall be kept instead of 
the daily averages.
    (3) Process vents from continuous unit operations--records related 
to process changes. The owner or operator subject to the provisions of 
this subpart who has elected to demonstrate compliance with the TRE 
index value greater than 4.0 under Sec. 63.113(e) or greater than 1.0 
under Sec. 63.113(a)(3) or Sec. 63.113(d) shall keep readily accessible 
records of:
    (i) Any process changes as defined in Sec. 63.115(e); and
    (ii) Any recalculation of the TRE index value pursuant to 
Sec. 63.115(e).
    (4) Process vents from continuous unit operations--records for vents 
with a flow rate less than 0.005 standard cubic meter per minute. The 
owner or operator who elects to comply by maintaining a flow rate less 
than 0.005 standard cubic meter per minute under Sec. 63.113(f), shall 
keep readily accessible records of:
    (i) Any process changes as defined in Sec. 63.115(e) that increase 
the process vent stream flow rate;
    (ii) Any recalculation or measurement of the flow rate pursuant to 
Sec. 63.115(e); and
    (iii) If the flow rate increases to 0.005 standard cubic meter per 
minute or greater as a result of the process change, the TRE 
determination performed according to the procedures of Sec. 63.115(d).
    (5) Process vents from continuous unit operations--records for vents 
with an organic HAP concentration less than 50 parts per million. The 
owner or operator who elects to comply by maintaining an organic HAP 
concentration less than 50 parts per million by volume organic HAP 
concentration under Sec. 63.113(g) shall keep readily accessible records 
of:
    (i) Any process changes as defined in Sec. 63.115(e) that increase 
the organic HAP concentration of the process vent stream;
    (ii) Any recalculation or measurement of the concentration pursuant 
to Sec. 63.115(e); and
    (iii) If the organic HAP concentration increases to 50 parts per 
million by volume or greater as a result of the process change, the TRE 
determination performed according to the procedures of Sec. 63.115(d).
    (g) Notification of Compliance Status. The owner or operator of an 
affected source shall submit the information specified in paragraphs 
(g)(1) through (3) of this section, as appropriate, as part of the 
Notification of Compliance Status specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (1) For the owner or operator complying with the process vent 
control requirements in Sec. 63.1425(b), (c)(1), (c)(3),

[[Page 426]]

or (d), the information specified in paragraph (b) of this section 
related to the compliance demonstration, and the information specified 
in paragraph (c) of this section related to the establishment of 
parameter monitoring levels,
    (2) For each PMPU where the combination of process vents from batch 
unit operations that are associated with the use of nonepoxide organic 
HAP to make or modify the product is Group 2, the information related to 
the group determination specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
    (3) For each process vent from a continuous unit operation that is 
associated with the use of nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the 
product that is Group 2, the information related to the group 
determination specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (h) Periodic Reports. The owner or operator of an affected source 
shall submit Periodic Reports of the recorded information specified in 
paragraphs (h)(1) through (6) of this section, as appropriate, according 
to the schedule for submitting Periodic Reports in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(6)(i).
    (1) Reports of daily average values of monitored parameters for all 
operating days when the daily average values recorded under paragraph 
(d)(2) of this section were above the maximum, or below the minimum, 
level established in the Notification of Compliance Status or operating 
permit.
    (2) Reports of the duration of periods when monitoring data are not 
collected for each excursion caused by insufficient monitoring data as 
defined in Sec. 63.1438(f)(1)(iv), (f)(2)(i)(B), or (f)(3)(ii).
    (3) Reports of the times and durations of all periods recorded under 
paragraph (d)(3) of this section when the process vent stream is 
diverted from the combustion, recovery, or recapture device through a 
bypass line.
    (4) Reports of all periods recorded under paragraph (d)(4) of this 
section in which the seal mechanism is broken, the bypass line valve 
position has changed, or the key to unlock the bypass line valve was 
checked out.
    (5) Reports of the times and durations of all periods recorded under 
paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section in which all pilot flames of a flare 
were absent.
    (6) Reports of all carbon bed regeneration cycles during which the 
parameters recorded under paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section were 
above the maximum, or below the minimum, levels established in the 
Notification of Compliance Status or operating permit.
    (i) Reports of process changes. Whenever a process change, as 
defined in Sec. 63.1420(g)(3), is made that causes a Group 2 combination 
of batch process vents at a PMPU that are associated with the use of 
nonepoxide organic HAP to make or modify the product to become Group 1, 
the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 days after the 
process change is made or the information regarding the process change 
is known to the owner or operator. This report may be included in the 
next Periodic Report or in a separate submittal to the Administrator, as 
specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6)(iii)(D)(1). A description of the process 
change shall be submitted with the report.
    (j) Reporting requirements for Group 2 continuous process vents. (1) 
Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1420(g)(3), is made 
that causes a Group 2 continuous process vent with a TRE greater than 
4.0 to become a Group 2 continuous process vent with a TRE less than 
4.0, the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 calendar 
days after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known, unless the flow rate is less than 0.005 
standard cubic meters per minute. The report may be submitted as part of 
the next periodic report. The report shall include:
    (i) A description of the process change;
    (ii) The results of the recalculation of the TRE index value 
required under Sec. 63.1428(h)(2), and recorded under paragraph (f)(3) 
of this section; and
    (iii) A statement that the owner or operator will comply with the 
process vent monitoring requirements specified in Sec. 63.1429, as 
appropriate.
    (2) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1420(g)(3), is 
made that causes a Group 2 continuous process vent with a flow rate less 
than 0.005 standard cubic meters per minute to become a Group 2 
continuous process

[[Page 427]]

vent with a flow rate of 0.005 standard cubic meters per minute or 
greater, the owner or operator shall submit a report within 180 calendar 
days after the process change is made or the information regarding the 
process change is known, unless the organic HAP concentration is less 
than 50 ppmv. The report may be submitted as part of the next periodic 
report. The report shall include:
    (i) A description of the process change;
    (ii) The results of the calculation of the TRE index value required 
under Sec. 63.1428(h)(2), and recorded under paragraph (f)(3) of this 
section; and
    (iii) A statement that the owner or operator will comply with the 
process vent monitoring requirements specified in Sec. 63.1429, as 
appropriate.
    (3) Whenever a process change, as defined in Sec. 63.1420(g)(3), is 
made that causes a Group 2 continuous process vent with an organic HAP 
concentration less than 50 ppmv to become a Group 2 continuous process 
vent with an organic HAP concentration of 50 ppmv or greater and a TRE 
index value less than 4.0, the owner or operator shall submit a report 
within 180 calendar days after the process change is made or the 
information regarding the process change is known, unless the flow rate 
is less than 0.005 standard cubic meters per minute. The report may be 
submitted as part of the next periodic report. The report shall include:
    (i) A description of the process change;
    (ii) The results of the calculation of the TRE index value required 
under Sec. 63.1428(h)(2), and recorded under paragraph (f)(3) of this 
section; and
    (iii) A statement that the owner or operator will comply with the 
process vent monitoring requirements specified in Sec. 63.1429, as 
appropriate.
    (k) Alternative requests. If an owner or operator uses a combustion, 
recovery, or recapture device other than those specified in the process 
vent monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1429(a)(1) through (7) and 
listed in Table 5 of this subpart; requests approval to monitor a 
parameter other than those specified in Sec. 63.1429(a)(1) through (7) 
and listed in Table 5 of this subpart; or uses ECO and requests to 
monitor a parameter other than those listed in Sec. 63.1427(i)(1)(i) 
through (iii), as allowed under Sec. 63.1427(i)(1)(iv), the owner or 
operator shall submit a description of planned reporting and 
recordkeeping procedures, as specified in Sec. 63.1439(f)(3), as part of 
the Precompliance Report as required under Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or to the 
Administrator as a separate submittal. The Administrator will specify 
appropriate reporting and recordkeeping requirements as part of the 
review of the Precompliance Report.



Sec. 63.1431  Process vent annual epoxides emission factor plan requirements.

    (a) Applicability of emission factor plan requirements. An owner or 
operator electing to comply with an annual epoxide emission factor 
limitation in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv) shall develop and 
implement an epoxides emission factor plan in accordance with the 
provisions of this section.
    (b) Emission factor plan requirements. The owner or operator shall 
develop an epoxides emission factor plan.
    (1) If epoxide emissions are maintained below the epoxide emission 
factor limitation through the use of a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device (without extended cookout), the owner or operator shall 
develop and implement the plan in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (2) If epoxide emissions are maintained below the epoxide emission 
factor limitation through the use of extended cookout (without a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device), the owner or operator shall 
develop and implement the plan in accordance with paragraph (d) of this 
section.
    (3) If epoxide emissions are maintained below the epoxide emission 
factor limitation through the use of extended cookout in conjunction 
with a combustion, recovery, or recapture device, the owner or operator 
shall develop and implement the plan in accordance with paragraph (e) of 
this section.
    (c) Compliance with epoxide emission factor limitation using a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device. (1) The owner or operator 
shall notify the Agency of the intent to use a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device to

[[Page 428]]

comply with the epoxide emission factor limitation in 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv). The owner or operator shall 
prepare an estimate of the annual epoxide emissions and the actual 
production rate in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iv) of 
this section. This notification and emission estimate shall be submitted 
in the Precompliance Report as specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or in 
the operating permit application, as allowed in Sec. 63.1439(e)(8).
    (i) Annual uncontrolled epoxide emissions. These emission estimates 
shall be determined in accordance with the batch process vent group 
determination procedures in the NESHAP for Group I Polymers and Resins 
(40 CFR part 63, subpart U, Sec. 63.488(b)) and shall be based on 
anticipated production.
    (ii) A description of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device, 
along with the expected percent efficiency.
    (iii) Annual emissions after the combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device. The expected annual emissions after control shall be determined 
using Equation 15.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN99.014

Where:

AEcontrol = Annual epoxide emissions after control, kg/yr.
AEuncontrolled = Annual uncontrolled epoxide emissions, 
          determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this 
          section, kg/yr.
R = Expected control efficiency of the combustion, recovery, or 
          recapture device, percent, as determined in Sec. 63.1426(c).

    (iv) The actual annual production rate means the annual mass of 
polyether polyol product produced from the applicable PMPU. This 
production rate shall be for the same annual time period as the annual 
emission estimate as calculated in accordance with paragraph (c)(1)(iii) 
of this section.
    (2) The owner or operator shall conduct a performance test in 
accordance with Sec. 63.1426(c) to determine the epoxide control 
efficiency of the combustion, recovery, or recapture device. The owner 
or operator shall then recalculate the annual epoxide emissions after 
control using Equation 15, except that the control efficiency, R, shall 
be the measured control efficiency. This information shall be submitted 
as part of the Notification of Compliance Status, as provided in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (3) The owner or operator shall comply with the process vent 
monitoring provisions in Sec. 63.1429.
    (4) The owner or operator shall comply with the process vent 
recordkeeping requirements in paragraphs Sec. 63.1430(b) through (d), 
and the process vent reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1430(g)(1) and 
(h).
    (d) Compliance with epoxide emission factor limitation using 
extended cookout. (1) The owner or operator shall notify the Agency of 
the intent to use extended cookout to comply with the epoxide emission 
factor limitation in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv). The owner or 
operator shall prepare an estimate of the annual epoxide emissions after 
the extended cookout. This notification and emission estimate shall be 
submitted in the Precompliance Report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or in the operating permit application, as allowed 
in Sec. 63.1439(e)(8).
    (2) The owner or operator shall determine the annual epoxide 
emissions in accordance with Sec. 63.1427(d), based on anticipated 
production. This information shall be submitted as part of the 
Notification of Compliance Status, as provided in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (3) The owner or operator shall comply with the ECO monitoring 
provisions in Sec. 63.1427(i).
    (4) The owner or operator shall comply with the process vent 
recordkeeping and reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1430.
    (e) Compliance with the epoxide emission factor limitation through 
the use of extended cookout in conjunction with one

[[Page 429]]

or more combustion, recovery, and/or recapture device. (1) The owner or 
operator shall notify the Agency of the intent to use extended cookout 
in conjunction with one or more combustion, recovery, and/or recapture 
device to comply with the annual epoxide emission factor limitation in 
Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or (b)(2)(iv). The owner or operator shall 
prepare an estimate of the annual epoxide emissions after control. This 
notification and emission estimate shall be submitted in the 
Precompliance Report as specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or in the 
operating permit application, as allowed under Sec. 63.1439(e)(8).
    (2) The owner or operator shall determine the annual epoxide 
emissions after control. This information shall be submitted as part of 
the Notification of Compliance Status, as provided in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (3) The owner or operator shall comply with the ECO monitoring 
provisions in Sec. 63.1427(i).
    (4) The owner or operator shall comply with the ECO recordkeeping 
and reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1427(j) and (k).
    (f) Compliance with epoxide emission factor limitation without using 
extended cookout or a combustion, recovery, or recapture device. (1) The 
owner or operator shall notify the Agency of the intent to comply with 
the epoxide emission factor limitation in Sec. 63.1425(b)(1)(iii) or 
(b)(2)(iv) without the use of ECO or a combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device. The owner or operator shall prepare an estimate of the 
annual epoxide emissions. This notification and emission estimate shall 
be submitted in the Precompliance Report as specified in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(4), or in the operating permit application, as allowed 
in Sec. 63.1439(e)(8).
    (2) Each year after the compliance date, the owner or operator shall 
calculate the epoxides emission factor for the previous year. This 
information shall be submitted in the second Periodic Report submitted 
each year, as specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6).



Sec. 63.1432  Storage vessel provisions.

    (a) For each storage vessel located at an affected source, the owner 
or operator shall comply with the HON storage vessel requirements of 
Secs. 63.119 through 63.123 and the HON leak inspection provisions in 
Sec. 63.148, with the differences noted in paragraphs (b) through (p) of 
this section, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (b) When the term ``storage vessel'' is used in the HON storage 
vessel requirements in Secs. 63.119 through 63.123, the definition of 
this term in Sec. 63.1423 shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (c) When the term ``Group 1 storage vessel'' is used in the HON 
storage vessel requirements in Secs. 63.119 through 63.123, the 
definition of this term in Sec. 63.1423 shall apply for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    (d) When the term ``Group 2 storage vessel'' is used in the HON 
storage vessel requirements in Secs. 63.119 through 63.123, the 
definition of this term in Sec. 63.1423 shall apply for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    (e) When the HON storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.119 refer to 
``December 31, 1992,'' the phrase ``September 4, 1997'' shall apply 
instead, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (f) When the HON storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.119 refer to 
``April 22, 1994,'' the phrase ``June 1, 1999,'' shall apply instead, 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (g) The owner or operator of an affected source shall comply with 
this paragraph instead of Sec. 63.120(d)(1)(ii) for the purposes of this 
subpart. If the combustion, recovery, or recapture device used to comply 
with Sec. 63.119(e) is also used to comply with any of the requirements 
found in Secs. 63.1425 through 63.1431 and/or Sec. 63.1433, the 
performance test required in or accepted by Secs. 63.1425 through 
63.1431 and/or Sec. 63.1433 is acceptable for demonstrating compliance 
with the HON storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.119(e), for the 
purposes of this subpart. The owner or operator will not be required to 
prepare a design evaluation for the combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device as described in Sec. 63.120(d)(1)(i), if the performance test 
meets the criteria specified in paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this 
section.
    (1) The performance test demonstrates that the combustion, recovery, 
or recapture device achieves greater than or equal to the required 
control efficiency specified in the HON storage

[[Page 430]]

vessel requirements in Sec. 63.119(e)(1) or (2), as applicable; and
    (2) The performance test is submitted as part of the Notification of 
Compliance Status required by Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (h) When the HON storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.120(d)(3)(i) 
uses the term ``operating range,'' the term ``level,'' shall apply 
instead, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (i) For purposes of this subpart, the monitoring plan required by 
the HON storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.120(d)(2) shall specify 
for which combustion, recovery, or recapture device the owner or 
operator has selected to follow the procedures for continuous monitoring 
specified in Sec. 63.1438. For the combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device(s) for which the owner or operator has selected not to follow the 
procedures for continuous monitoring specified in Sec. 63.1438, the 
monitoring plan shall include a description of the parameter(s) to be 
monitored to ensure that the combustion, recovery, or recapture device 
is being properly operated and maintained, an explanation of the 
criteria used for selection of that parameter(s), and the frequency with 
which monitoring will be performed (e.g., when the liquid level in the 
storage vessel is being raised), as specified in Sec. 63.120(d)(2)(i).
    (j) For purposes of this subpart, the monitoring plan required by 
Sec. 63.122(b) shall be included in the Notification of Compliance 
Status required by Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (k) When the HON Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in Secs. 63.120, 63.122, and 
63.123, the Notification of Compliance Status requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(5) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (l) When the HON Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in Secs. 63.120, 63.122, and 63.123, the 
Periodic Report requirements contained in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6) shall apply 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (m) When other reports as required in Sec. 63.152(d) are referred to 
in Sec. 63.122, the reporting requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(7) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (n) When the HON Initial Notification requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.151(b) are referred to in Sec. 63.119 through Sec. 63.123, the 
owner or operator shall comply with the Initial Notification 
requirements contained in Sec. 63.1439(e)(3), for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (o) When the determination of equivalence criteria in Sec. 63.102(b) 
are referred to in the HON storage vessel requirements in 
Sec. 63.121(a), the General Provisions' alternative nonopacity emission 
provisions in Sec. 63.6(g) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (p) The compliance date for storage vessels at affected sources 
subject to the provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1422.
    (q) In addition to the records required by Sec. 63.123, the owner or 
operator shall maintain records of all times when the storage tank is 
being filled (i.e., when the liquid level in the storage vessel is being 
raised). These records shall consist of documentation of the time when 
each filling period begins and ends.



Sec. 63.1433  Wastewater provisions.

    (a) Process wastewater. Except as specified in paragraph (c) of this 
section, the owner or operator of each affected source shall comply with 
the HON wastewater requirements in Secs. 63.132 through 63.147 for each 
process wastewater stream originating at an affected source, with the 
HON leak inspection requirements in Sec. 63.148, and with the HON 
requirements in Sec. 63.149 for equipment that is subject to 
Sec. 63.149, with the differences noted in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(20) of this section. Further, the owner or operator of each affected 
source shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 63.105(a) for 
maintenance wastewater, as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (1) Owners and operators of affected sources are not required to 
comply with the HON new source wastewater requirements in 
Sec. 63.132(b)(1) and Sec. 63.132(d), for the purposes of this subpart. 
Owners or operators of all new affected sources, as defined in this 
subpart, shall comply with the HON requirements for existing sources in 
Secs. 63.132 through 63.149.
    (2) When the HON requirements in Secs. 63.132 through 63.149 refer 
to Table 9 or Table 36 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart

[[Page 431]]

G, the owner or operator is only required to consider organic HAP listed 
in Table 9 or Table 36 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart G, that are also 
listed on Table 4 of this subpart, for the purposes of this subpart. 
Owners and operators are exempt from all requirements in Secs. 63.132 
through 63.149 that pertain solely and exclusively to organic HAP listed 
on Table 8 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart G. In addition, when Secs. 63.132 
through 63.149 refer to List 1 or List 2, as listed in Table 36 of 40 
CFR part 63, subpart G, the owner or operator is only required to 
consider organic HAP contained in those lists that are also listed on 
Table 4 of this subpart, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (3) When the determination of equivalence criteria in Sec. 63.102(b) 
is referred to in Secs. 63.132, 63.133, and 63.137, the General 
Provisions' alternative nonopacity emission standard provisions in 
Sec. 63.6(g) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) When the HON storage vessel requirements contained in 
Secs. 63.119 through 63.123 are referred to in Secs. 63.132 through 
63.148, the HON storage vessel requirements in Secs. 63.119 through 
63.123 are applicable, with the exception of the differences referred to 
in the storage vessel requirements in Sec. 63.1432, for the purposes of 
this subpart.
    (5) When the HON process wastewater reporting requirements in 
Sec. 63.146(a) require the submission of a request for approval to 
monitor alternative parameters according to the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.151(g) or Sec. 63.152(e), the owner or operator requesting to 
monitor alternative parameters shall follow the procedures specified in 
Sec. 63.1439(f), for the purposes of this subpart.
    (6) When the HON process wastewater recordkeeping requirements in 
Sec. 63.147(d) require the owner or operator to keep records of the 
daily average value of each continuously monitored parameter for each 
operating day as specified in the HON recordkeeping provisions in 
Sec. 63.152(f), the owner or operator shall instead keep records of the 
daily average value of each continuously monitored parameter as 
specified in Sec. 63.1439(d), for the purposes of this subpart.
    (7) When the HON requirements in Secs. 63.132 through 63.149 refer 
to an ``existing source,'' the term ``existing affected source,'' as 
defined in Sec. 63.1420(a)(3) shall apply, for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (8) When the HON requirements in Secs. 63.132 through 63.149 refer 
to a ``new source,'' the term ``new affected source,'' as defined in 
Sec. 63.1420(a)(4) shall apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (9) When the HON process wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.132 (a) 
and (b) refer to the ``applicable dates specified in Sec. 63.100 of 
subpart F of this part,'' the applicable compliance dates specified in 
Sec. 63.1422 shall apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (10) Whenever the HON process wastewater provisions in Secs. 63.132 
through 63.147 refer to a Group 1 wastewater stream or a Group 2 
wastewater stream, the definitions of these terms contained in 
Sec. 63.1423 shall apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (11) When the HON control requirements for certain liquid streams in 
open systems, in Sec. 63.149(d), refer to ``Sec. 63.100(f) of subpart 
F,'' the phrase ``Sec. 63.1420(c),'' shall apply for the purposes of 
this subpart. In addition, where Sec. 63.149(d) states ``and the item of 
equipment is not otherwise exempt from controls by the provisions of 
subparts A, F, G, or H of this part,'' the phrase ``and the item of 
equipment is not otherwise exempt from controls by the provisions of 
subparts A, F, G, H, or PPP of this part,'' shall apply for the purposes 
of this subpart.
    (12) When the HON control requirements for certain liquid streams in 
open systems, in Sec. 63.149(e) (1) and (2), refer to ``a chemical 
manufacturing process unit subject to the new source requirements of 40 
CFR 63.100(l) (1) or (2),'' the phrase ``a new affected source as 
described in Sec. 63.1420(a)(4),'' shall apply for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (13) When the HON Notification of Compliance Status requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.152(b) are referred to in the HON process 
wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.138 or Sec. 63.146, the Notification of 
Compliance Status requirements contained in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5) shall 
apply for the purposes of this subpart. In addition, when the HON 
process wastewater

[[Page 432]]

provisions in Sec. 63.138 or Sec. 63.146 require that information be 
reported according to Sec. 63.152(b) in the HON Notification of 
Compliance Status, owners or operators of affected sources shall report 
the specified information in the Notification of Compliance Status 
required by Sec. 63.1439(e)(5), for the purposes of this subpart.
    (14) When the HON Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.152(c) are referred to in the HON process wastewater provisions 
in Sec. 63.146, the Periodic Report requirements contained in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(6) shall apply for the purposes of this subpart. In 
addition, when Sec. 63.146 requires that information be reported in the 
HON Periodic Reports required in Sec. 63.152(c), owners or operators of 
affected sources shall report the specified information in the Periodic 
Reports required in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6), for the purposes of this 
subpart.
    (15) When the term ``range'' is used in the HON requirements in 
Secs. 63.132 through 63.149, the term ``level'' shall be used instead, 
for the purposes of this subpart. This level shall be determined using 
the procedures specified in parameter monitoring procedures in 
Sec. 63.1438.
    (16) When the HON process wastewater monitoring and inspection 
provisions in Sec. 63.143(f) specify that the owner or operator shall 
establish the range that indicates proper operation of the treatment 
process or control technique, the owner or operator shall instead comply 
with the requirements Sec. 63.1438 (c) or (d) for establishing parameter 
level maximums/minimums, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (17) When the HON process wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.146(b) 
(7) and (8) require that ``the information on parameter ranges specified 
in Sec. 63.152(b)(2)'' be reported in the HON Notification of Compliance 
Status, owners and operators of affected sources are instead required to 
report the information on parameter levels in the Notification of 
Compliance Status as specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5)(ii), for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (18) For the purposes of this subpart, the owner or operator is not 
required to comply with the HON process wastewater emission reduction 
provisions in Sec. 63.138(g).
    (19) When the provisions of HON process wastewater provisions in 
Sec. 63.139(c)(1)(ii), Sec. 63.145(d)(4), or Sec. 63.145(i)(2) specify 
that Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall be used, Method 18 or 
Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A may be used for the purposes of 
this subpart. The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A shall 
comply with paragraphs (a)(19) (i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) The organic HAP used as the calibration gas for Method 25A, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A shall be the single organic HAP representing the 
largest percent by volume of the emissions.
    (ii) The use of Method 25A, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A is acceptable 
if the response from the high-level calibration gas is at least 20 times 
the standard deviation of the response from the zero calibration gas 
when the instrument is zeroed on the most sensitive scale.
    (20) The owner or operator of a facility which receives a Group 1 
wastewater stream, or a residual removed from a Group 1 wastewater 
stream, for treatment pursuant to the HON provisions in Sec. 63.132(g) 
is subject to the requirements of Sec. 63.132(g), with the differences 
identified in this section, and is not subject to the NESHAP from off-
site waste and recovery operations in 40 CFR part 63, subpart DD, with 
respect to the received material.
    (b) Maintenance wastewater. The owner or operator of each affected 
source shall comply with the HON maintenance wastewater requirements in 
Sec. 63.105, with the exceptions noted in paragraphs (b) (1), (2), and 
(3) of this section.
    (1) When the HON maintenance wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.105(a) 
refer to ``organic HAPs,'' the definition of ``organic HAP'' in 
Sec. 63.1423 shall apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (2) When the term ``maintenance wastewater'' is used in the HON 
maintenance wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.105, the definition of 
``maintenance wastewater'' in Sec. 63.1423 shall apply, for the purposes 
of this subpart.

[[Page 433]]

    (3) When the term ``wastewater'' is used in the HON maintenance 
wastewater provisions in Sec. 63.105, the definition of ``wastewater'' 
in Sec. 63.1423 shall apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (c) Compliance date. The compliance date for the affected source 
subject to the provisions of this section is specified in Sec. 63.1422.



Sec. 63.1434  Equipment leak provisions.

    (a) The owner or operator of each affected source shall comply with 
the HON equipment leak requirements in 40 CFR part 63, subpart H for all 
equipment in organic HAP service, except as specified in paragraphs (b) 
through (g) of this section.
    (b) The compliance date for the equipment leak provisions in this 
section is provided in Sec. 63.1422(d).
    (c) Affected sources subject to the HON equipment leak provisions in 
40 CFR part 63, subpart I shall continue to comply with 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart I until the compliance date specified in Sec. 63.1422. After the 
compliance date in Sec. 63.1422, the source shall be subject to this 
subpart (40 CFR part 63, subpart PPP), and shall no longer be subject to 
40 CFR part 63, subpart I. However, sources subject to 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart I that have elected to comply through a quality improvement 
program, as specified in the HON quality improvement plans for valves or 
pumps in Sec. 63.175 or Sec. 63.176 or both, may elect to continue these 
programs without interruption as a means of complying with this subpart. 
In other words, becoming subject to this subpart does not restart or 
reset the ``compliance clock'' as it relates to reduced burden earned 
through a quality improvement program.
    (d) When the HON equipment leak Initial Notification requirements 
contained in Sec. 63.182(a)(1) and Sec. 63.182(b) are referred to in 40 
CFR part 63, subpart H, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
Initial Notification requirements contained in Sec. 63.1439(e)(3), for 
the purposes of this subpart. The Initial Notification shall be 
submitted no later than June 1, 2000 for existing sources, as stated in 
Sec. 63.1439(e)(3)(ii)(A).
    (e) The HON equipment leak Notification of Compliance Status 
required by Sec. 63.182(a)(2) and Sec. 63.182(c) shall be submitted 
within 150 days (rather than 90 days) of the applicable compliance date 
specified in Sec. 63.1422 for the equipment leak provisions. The 
notification may be submitted as part of the Notification of Compliance 
Status required by Sec. 63.1439(e)(5).
    (f) The Periodic Reports required by Sec. 63.182(a)(3) and 
Sec. 63.182(d) may be submitted as part of the Periodic Reports required 
by Sec. 63.1439(e)(6).
    (g) If specific items of equipment, comprising part of a process 
unit subject to this subpart, are managed by different administrative 
organizations (e.g., different companies, affiliates, departments, 
divisions, etc.), those items of equipment may be aggregated with any 
PMPU within the affected source for all purposes under subpart H, 
providing there is no delay in achieving the applicable compliance date.
    (h) The phrase ``the provisions of subparts F, I, or PPP of this 
part'' shall apply instead of the phrase ``the provisions of subparts F 
or I of this part,'' and instead of the phrase ``the provisions of 
subpart F or I of this part'' throughout Secs. 63.163 and 63.168, for 
the purposes of this subpart. In addition, the phrase ``subparts F, I, 
and PPP'' shall apply instead of the phrase ``subparts F and I'' in 
Sec. 63.174(c)(2)(iii), for the purposes of this subpart.



Sec. 63.1435  Heat exchanger provisions.

    (a) The owner or operator of each affected source shall comply with 
the requirements of Sec. 63.104 for heat exchange systems, with the 
exceptions noted in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section.
    (b) When the term ``chemical manufacturing process unit'' is used in 
Sec. 63.104, the term ``polyether polyols manufacturing process unit'' 
shall apply for the purposes of this subpart. Further, when the phrase 
``a chemical manufacturing process unit meeting the conditions of 
Sec. 63.100(b)(1) through (3) of this subpart, except for chemical 
manufacturing process units meeting the condition specified in 
Sec. 63.100(c) of this subpart'' is used in Sec. 63.104(a), the term 
``PMPU, except for PMPU meeting the conditions specified in

[[Page 434]]

Sec. 63.1420(b)'' shall apply for the purposes of this subpart.
    (c) When the HON heat exchange system requirements in 
Sec. 63.104(c)(3) and Sec. 63.104(f)(1) specify that the monitoring plan 
and records required by Sec. 63.104(f)(1)(i) through (iv) shall be kept 
as specified in the HON general compliance, reporting, and recordkeeping 
provisions in Sec. 63.103(c), the provisions of the general 
recordkeeping and reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1439(a) and the 
applicable provisions of the General Provisions in 40 CFR part 63, 
subpart A, as specified in Table 1 of this subpart, shall apply for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (d) When the HON heat exchange system requirements in 
Sec. 63.104(f)(2) require information to be reported in the Periodic 
Reports required by the HON general reporting provisions in 
Sec. 63.152(c), the owner or operator shall instead report the 
information specified in Sec. 63.104(f)(2) in the Periodic Reports 
required by the general reporting requirements in Sec. 63.1439(e)(6), 
for the purposes of this subpart.
    (e) When the HON heat exchange system requirements in Sec. 63.104 
refer to Table 4 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart F or Table 9 of 40 CFR part 
63, subpart G, the owner or operator is only required to consider 
organic HAP listed in Table 4 of 40 CFR part 63, subpart F or 40 CFR 
part 63, Table 9 of subpart G that are also listed on Table 4 of this 
subpart, for the purposes of this subpart.



Sec. 63.1436  [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1437  Additional requirements for performance testing.

    (a) Performance testing shall be conducted in accordance with 
Sec. 63.7(a)(1), (a)(3), (d), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(4), (g), and (h), with 
the exceptions specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this 
section and the additions specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (1) Performance tests shall be conducted according to the General 
Provisions' performance testing requirements in Sec. 63.7(e)(1) and (2), 
except that for all emission sources except process vents from batch 
unit operations, performance tests shall be conducted during maximum 
representative operating conditions for the process achievable during 
one of the time periods described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this 
section, without causing any of the situations described in paragraph 
(a)(1)(ii) or (iii) of this section to occur. For process vents from 
batch unit operations, performance tests shall be conducted at absolute 
worst-case conditions, as defined in Sec. 63.1426(c)(3)(i)(B), that are 
achievable during one of the time periods described in paragraph 
(a)(1)(i) of this section, without causing any of the situations 
described in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) or (iii) of this section to occur.
    (i) The 6-month period that ends 2 months before the Notification of 
Compliance Status is due, according to Sec. 63.1439(e)(5); or the 6-
month period that begins 3 months before the performance test and ends 3 
months after the performance test.
    (ii) Causing damage to equipment; necessitating that the owner or 
operator make a product that does not meet an existing specification for 
sale to a customer; or necessitating that the owner or operator make a 
product in excess of demand.
    (iii) Causing plant or testing personnel to be subject to unsafe 
conditions. Owners or operators that limit testing based on this 
paragraph shall maintain documentation that demonstrates the nature of 
the unsafe conditions and explains measures considered by the owner or 
operator to overcome these conditions. If requested, this documentation 
shall be provided to the Administrator.
    (2) When the General Provisions' data analysis, recordkeeping, and 
reporting requirements in Sec. 63.7(g) refer to the Notification of 
Compliance Status requirements in Sec. 63.9(h), the Notification of 
Compliance Status requirements in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5) shall instead 
apply, for the purposes of this subpart.
    (3) Because the General Provisions' site-specific test plan in 
Sec. 63.7(c)(3) is not required, the General Provisions' requirement for 
the Administrator to approve or deny site-specific test plans, in 
Sec. 63.7(h)(4)(ii), is not applicable for the purposes of this subpart.
    (4) The owner or operator of an affected source shall provide the 
Administrator at least 30 days prior notice of

[[Page 435]]

any performance test, except as specified under other subparts, to 
afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present. If 
after 30 days notice for an initially scheduled performance test, there 
is a delay (due to operational problems, etc.) in conducting the 
scheduled performance test, the owner or operator of an affected source 
shall notify the Administrator (or delegated State or local agency) as 
soon as possible of any delay in the original test date, either by 
providing at least 7 days prior notice of the rescheduled test date of 
the performance test, or by arranging a rescheduled date with the 
Administrator (or delegated State or local agency) by mutual agreement.
    (b) Data shall be reduced in accordance with the EPA approved 
methods specified in the applicable subpart or, if other test methods 
are used, the data and methods shall be validated according to the 
protocol in Method 301, 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.
    (c) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subpart, if an owner 
or operator of an affected source uses a flare to comply with any of the 
requirements of this subpart, the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section. The owner or operator is 
not required to conduct a performance test to determine percent emission 
reduction or outlet organic HAP or TOC concentration. If a compliance 
demonstration has been conducted previously for a flare, using the 
techniques specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section, 
that compliance demonstration may be used to satisfy the requirements of 
this paragraph if either no deliberate process changes have been made 
since the compliance demonstration, or the results of the compliance 
demonstration reliably demonstrate compliance despite process changes.
    (1) Conduct a visible emission test using the techniques specified 
in Sec. 63.11(b)(4) of the General Provisions;
    (2) Determine the net heating value of the gas being combusted, 
using the techniques specified in Sec. 63.11(b)(6) of the General 
Provisions; and
    (3) Determine the exit velocity using the techniques specified in 
either Sec. 63.11(b)(7)(i) (and Sec. 63.11(b)(7)(iii), where applicable) 
or Sec. 63.11(b)(8) of the General Provisions, as appropriate.



Sec. 63.1438  Parameter monitoring levels and excursions.

    (a) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels. The owner or 
operator of a combustion, recovery, or recapture device that has one or 
more parameter monitoring level requirements specified under this 
subpart shall establish a maximum or minimum level for each measured 
parameter. If a performance test is required by this subpart for a 
combustion, recovery, or recapture device, the owner or operator shall 
use the procedures in either paragraph (b) or (c) of this section to 
establish the parameter monitoring level(s). If a performance test is 
not required by this subpart for a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device, the owner or operator may use the procedures in paragraph (b), 
(c), or (d) of this section to establish the parameter monitoring 
levels. When using the procedures specified in paragraph (c) or (d) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall submit the information 
specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(4)(viii) for review and approval, as part 
of the Precompliance Report.
    (1) The owner or operator shall operate combustion, recovery, and 
recapture devices such that the daily average value of monitored 
parameters remains at or above the minimum established level, or remains 
at or below the maximum established level, except as otherwise provided 
in this subpart.
    (2) As specified in Sec. 63.1439(e)(5)(ii), all established levels, 
along with their supporting documentation and the definition of an 
operating day, shall be submitted as part of the Notification of 
Compliance Status.
    (3) Nothing in this section shall be construed to allow a monitoring 
parameter excursion caused by an activity that violates other applicable 
provisions of 40 CFR part 63, subparts A, F, G, or H.
    (b) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels based exclusively 
on performance tests. In cases where a performance test is required by 
this subpart, or the owner or operator of the affected source elects to 
do a performance test in accordance with the provisions of

[[Page 436]]

this subpart, and an owner or operator elects to establish a parameter 
monitoring level for a combustion, recovery, or recapture device based 
exclusively on parameter values measured during the performance test, 
the owner or operator of the affected source shall comply with the 
procedures in paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section, as applicable.
    (1) Process vents from continuous unit operations. During initial 
compliance testing, the appropriate parameter shall be continuously 
monitored during the required 1-hour runs for process vents from 
continuous unit operations. The monitoring level(s) shall then be 
established as the average of the maximum (or minimum) point values from 
the three 1-hour test runs. The average of the maximum values shall be 
used when establishing a maximum level, and the average of the minimum 
values shall be used when establishing a minimum level.
    (2) Process vents from batch unit operations. For process vents from 
batch unit operations, during initial compliance testing, the 
appropriate parameter shall be monitored continuously during the entire 
test period. The monitoring level(s) shall be those established during 
from the compliance test.
    (c) Establishment of parameter monitoring levels based on 
performance tests, supplemented by engineering assessments and/or 
manufacturer's recommendations. Parameter monitoring levels established 
under this paragraph shall be based on the parameter values measured 
during the performance test supplemented by engineering assessments and/
or manufacturer's recommendations. Performance testing is not required 
to be conducted over the entire range of expected parameter values. The 
information specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section shall 
be provided in the Notification of Compliance Status.
    (1) The specific level of the monitored parameter(s) for each 
emission point.
    (2) The rationale for the specific level for each parameter for each 
emission point, including any data and calculations used to develop the 
level and a description of why the level indicates proper operation of 
the combustion, recovery, or recapture device.
    (d) Establishment of parameter monitoring based on engineering 
assessments and/or manufacturer's recommendations. If a performance test 
is not required by this subpart for a combustion, recovery, or recapture 
device, the maximum or minimum level may be based solely on engineering 
assessments and/or manufacturers' recommendations. As required in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the determined level and all 
supporting documentation shall be provided in the Notification of 
Compliance Status.
    (e) Monitoring violations. (1) With the exception of excursions 
excused in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section, each 
excursion, as defined in paragraphs (f)(1)(i), (f)(2)(i)(A), (f)(2)(ii), 
(f)(3)(i), and (f)(4) of this section, constitutes a violation of the 
provisions of this subpart in accordance with paragraph (e)(1)(i), (ii), 
or (iii) of this section.
    (i) For each condenser, each excursion constitutes a violation of 
the emission limit.
    (ii) For each recovery or recapture device other than a condenser, 
where an organic monitoring device is used to monitor concentration, 
each excursion constitutes a violation of the emission limit.
    (iii) For each combustion, recovery, or recapture device other than 
a condenser, each excursion constitutes a violation of the operating 
limit.
    (2) With the exception of excursions excused in accordance with 
paragraph (g) of this section, each excursion, as defined in paragraphs 
(f)(1)(ii), (f)(1)(iii), (f)(2)(i)(B), and (f)(3)(ii) of this section 
constitutes a violation of the operating limit.
    (f) Parameter monitoring excursion definitions. Parameter monitoring 
excursions are defined in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (1) With respect to storage vessels (where the applicable monitoring 
plan specifies continuous monitoring), process vents from continuous 
unit operations using combustion, recovery, or recapture devices for 
purposes of compliance, and for process wastewater streams, an excursion 
means any of the

[[Page 437]]

three cases listed in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iii) of this 
section.
    (i) The daily average value of one or more monitored parameters is 
above the maximum level or below the minimum level established for the 
given parameters.
    (ii) The period of combustion, recovery, or recapture device 
operation, with the exception noted in paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this 
section, is 4 hours or greater in an operating day and monitoring data 
are insufficient, as defined in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of this section, to 
constitute a valid hour of data for at least 75 percent of the operating 
hours.
    (iii) The period of combustion, recovery, or recapture device 
operation, with the exception noted in paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this 
section, is less than 4 hours in an operating day and more than 2 of the 
hours during the period of operation do not constitute a valid hour of 
data due to insufficient monitoring data, as defined in paragraph 
(f)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (iv) Monitoring data are insufficient to constitute a valid hour of 
data, as used in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this section, if 
measured values are unavailable due to monitoring system breakdowns, 
repairs, calibrated checks, or zero (low-level) and high level 
adjustments, for any of the 15-minute periods within the hour. For data 
compression systems approved under Sec. 63.1439(g)(3), monitoring data 
are insufficient to calculate a valid hour of data if there are less 
than four data measurements made during the hour.
    (v) The periods listed in paragraphs (f)(1)(v)(A) through (D) of 
this section are not considered to be part of the period of combustion, 
recovery, or recapture device operation, for the purposes of paragraphs 
(f)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (A) Start-ups;
    (B) Shutdowns;
    (C) Malfunctions; or
    (D) Periods of non-operation of the affected source (or portion 
thereof), resulting in cessation of the emissions to which the 
monitoring applies.
    (2) For storage vessels where the applicable monitoring plan does 
not specify continuous monitoring, an excursion is defined in paragraph 
(f)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
    (i) If the monitoring plan specifies monitoring a parameter and 
recording its value at specific intervals (such as every 15 minutes or 
every hour), either of the cases listed in paragraph (f)(2)(i)(A) or (B) 
of this section is considered a single excursion for the combustion 
device.
    (A) When the average value of one or more parameters, averaged over 
the time during which the storage vessel is being filled (i.e., when the 
liquid level in the storage vessel is being raised), is above the 
maximum level or below the minimum level established for the given 
parameters.
    (B) When monitoring data are insufficient. Monitoring data shall be 
considered insufficient when measured values are not available, due to 
monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, or zero (low-
level) and high-level adjustments, for at least 75 percent of the 
specific intervals at which parameters are to be monitored and recorded, 
according to the storage vessel's monitoring plan, during which the 
storage vessel is being filled.
    (ii) If the monitoring plan does not specify monitoring a parameter 
and recording its value at specific intervals (for example, if the 
relevant operating requirement is to exchange a disposable carbon 
canister before expiration of its rated service life), the monitoring 
plan shall define an excursion in terms of the relevant operating 
requirement.
    (3) With respect to process vents from batch unit operations, an 
excursion means one of the two cases listed in paragraphs (f)(3)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (i) When the daily average value of one or more monitored parameters 
is above the maximum or below the minimum established level for the 
given parameters.
    (ii) When monitoring data are insufficient for an operating day. 
Monitoring data shall be considered insufficient when measured values 
are not available, due to monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, 
calibration checks, or zero (low-level) and high-level adjustments, for 
at least 75 percent of the 15-minute periods when batch emission 
episodes selected to be controlled are

[[Page 438]]

being vented to the control device during the operating day, using the 
procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(3)(ii)(A) through (D) of this 
section.
    (A) Determine the total amount of time during the operating day when 
batch emission episodes selected to be controlled are being vented to 
the control device.
    (B) Subtract the time during the periods listed in paragraphs 
(f)(3)(ii)(B)(1) through (4) of this section from the total amount of 
time determined above in paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, to 
obtain the operating time used to determine if monitoring data are 
insufficient.
    (1) Start-ups;
    (2) Shutdowns;
    (3) Malfunctions; or
    (4) Periods of non-operation of the affected source (or portion 
thereof), resulting in cessation of the emissions to which the 
monitoring applies.
    (C) Determine the total number of 15-minute periods in the operating 
time used to determine if monitoring data are insufficient, as was 
determined in accordance with paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.
    (D) If measured values are not available for at least 75 percent of 
the total number of 15-minute periods determined in paragraph 
(f)(3)(ii)(C) of this section, the monitoring data are insufficient for 
the operating day.
    (4) With respect to process vents using ECO to reduce epoxide 
emissions, an excursion means any of the situations described in 
Sec. 63.1427(i)(3)(i) through (v). For each excursion, the owner or 
operator shall be deemed out of compliance with the provisions of this 
subpart, in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, except as 
provided in paragraph (g) of this section.
    (g) Excused excursions. A number of excused excursions shall be 
allowed for each combustion, recovery, or recapture device for each 
semiannual period. The number of excused excursions for each semiannual 
period is specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (6) of this section. 
This paragraph applies to affected sources required to submit Periodic 
Reports semiannually or quarterly. The first semiannual period is the 6-
month period starting the date the Notification of Compliance Status is 
due.
    (1) For the first semiannual period--six excused excursions.
    (2) For the second semiannual period--five excused excursions.
    (3) For the third semiannual period--four excused excursions.
    (4) For the fourth semiannual period--three excused excursions.
    (5) For the fifth semiannual period--two excused excursions.
    (6) For the sixth and all subsequent semiannual periods--one excused 
excursion.



Sec. 63.1439  General recordkeeping and reporting provisions.

    (a) Data retention. Unless otherwise specified in this subpart, the 
owner or operator of an affected source shall keep copies of all 
applicable records and reports required by this subpart for at least 5 
years. All applicable records shall be maintained in such a manner that 
they can be readily accessed. The most recent 6 months of records shall 
be retained on site or shall be accessible from a central location by 
computer or other means that provide access within 2 hours after a 
request. The remaining 4 and one-half years of records may be retained 
offsite. Records may be maintained in hard copy or computer-readable 
form including, but not limited to, on microfilm, computer, floppy disk, 
magnetic tape, or microfiche. If an owner or operator submits copies of 
reports to the applicable EPA Regional Office, the owner or operator is 
not required to maintain copies of reports. If the EPA Regional Office 
has waived the requirement of Sec. 63.10(a)(4)(ii) for submittal of 
copies of reports, the owner or operator is not required to maintain 
copies of reports.
    (b) Subpart A requirements. The owner or operator of an affected 
source shall comply with the applicable recordkeeping and reporting 
requirements in 40 CFR part 63, subpart A (the General Provisions) as 
specified in Table 1 of this subpart. These requirements include, but 
are not limited to, the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and 
(2) of this section.
    (1) Start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan. The owner or operator 
of an

[[Page 439]]

affected source shall develop and implement a written start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan as specified in the General Provisions' 
requirements for a Startup, Shutdown, and Malfunction Plan in 
Sec. 63.6(e)(3). This plan shall describe, in detail, procedures for 
operating and maintaining the affected source during periods of start-
up, shutdown, and malfunction and a program for corrective action for 
malfunctioning process and air pollution control equipment used to 
comply with this subpart. A provision for ceasing to collect, during a 
start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, monitoring data that would otherwise 
be required by the provisions of this subpart may be included in the 
start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan only if the owner or operator 
has demonstrated to the Administrator, through the Precompliance Report 
or a supplement to the Precompliance Report, that the monitoring system 
would be damaged or destroyed if it were not shut down during the start-
up, shutdown, or malfunction. The owner or operator of the affected 
source shall keep the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan on site. 
In addition, if the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan is revised, 
the owner or operator shall keep previous (i.e., superseded) versions of 
the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan for a period of 5 years 
after each revision to the plan. If the new version of the start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan includes a provision for ceasing to 
collect, during a start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, monitoring data 
that would otherwise be required, the owner or operator shall submit a 
supplement to the Precompliance Report to the Administrator for the 
Administrator's approval, documenting that the monitoring system would 
be damaged or destroyed if it were not shut down during the start-up, 
shutdown, or malfunction. Records associated with the plan shall be kept 
as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. Reports 
related to the plan shall be submitted as specified in paragraph 
(b)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (i) The owner or operator shall keep the records specified in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) Records of the occurrence and duration of each start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction of operation of process equipment or 
combustion, recovery, or recapture devices or continuous monitoring 
systems used to comply with this subpart during which excess emissions 
(as defined in Sec. 63.1420(h)(4)) occur.
    (B) For each start-up, shutdown, or malfunction during which excess 
emissions (as defined in Sec. 63.1420(h)(4)) occur, records reflecting 
whether the procedures specified in the affected source's start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan were followed, and documentation of 
actions taken that are not consistent with the plan. For example, if a 
start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan includes procedures for routing 
a combustion, recovery, or recapture device to a backup combustion, 
recovery, or recapture device, records shall be kept of whether the plan 
was followed. These records may take the form of a ``checklist,'' or 
other form of recordkeeping that confirms conformance with the start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan for the event.
    (ii) For the purposes of this subpart, the semiannual start-up, 
shutdown, and malfunction reports shall be submitted on the same 
schedule as the Periodic Reports required under paragraph (e)(6) of this 
section instead of according to the General Provisions' Periodic 
Reporting schedule specified in Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i). The reports shall 
include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of 
this section and shall contain the name, title, and signature of the 
owner or operator or other responsible official who is certifying its 
accuracy.
    (2) Application for approval of construction or reconstruction. For 
new affected sources, the owner or operator shall comply with the 
General Provisions' requirements for the application for approval of 
construction or reconstruction, as specified in Sec. 63.5, excluding the 
provisions specified in Sec. 63.5(d)(1)(ii)(H), (d)(1)(iii), (d)(2), and 
(d)(3)(ii).
    (c) Subpart H requirements. The owner or operator of an affected 
source shall comply with the HON equipment leak

[[Page 440]]

reporting and recordkeeping requirements in 40 CFR part 63, subpart H, 
except as specified in Sec. 63.1434(b) through (g).
    (d) Recordkeeping and documentation. The owner or operator required 
to keep continuous records shall keep records as specified in paragraphs 
(d)(1) through (7) of this section, unless an alternative recordkeeping 
system has been requested and approved as specified in paragraph (g) of 
this section, and except as provided in paragraph (h) of this section. 
If a monitoring plan for storage vessels pursuant to Sec. 63.1432(i) 
requires continuous records, the monitoring plan shall specify which 
provisions, if any, of paragraphs (d)(1) through (7) of this section 
apply. As described in Sec. 63.1432(i), certain storage vessels are not 
required to keep continuous records as specified in this paragraph. The 
owner or operator of such storage vessels shall keep records as 
specified in the monitoring plan required by Sec. 63.1432(i).
    (1) The monitoring system shall measure data values at least once 
during approximately equal 15-minute intervals.
    (2) The owner or operator shall record either each measured data 
value or block average values for 1 hour or shorter periods calculated 
from all measured data values during each period. If values are measured 
more frequently than once per minute, a single value for each minute may 
be used to calculate the hourly (or shorter period) block average 
instead of all measured values. The owner or operator of process vents 
from batch unit operations shall record each measured data value.
    (3) Daily average values of each continuously monitored parameter 
shall be calculated for each operating day as specified in paragraphs 
(d)(3)(i) through (ii) of this section, except as specified in 
paragraphs (d)(6) and (7) of this section.
    (i) The daily average value shall be calculated as the average of 
all parameter values recorded during the operating day, except as 
specified in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. The calculated average 
shall cover a 24-hour period if operation is continuous. If intermittent 
emissions episodes occur resulting in emissions being vented to a 
combustion, recapture, or recovery device for a period of less than 24 
hours in the operating day, the daily average shall be calculated based 
only on the period when emissions are being vented to the combustion, 
recapture, or recovery device. For example, if a batch unit operation 
operates such that emissions are vented to a combustion device for 6 
hours, then the daily average is the average of the temperature 
measurements taken during those 6 hours.
    (ii) The operating day shall be the 24-hour period that the owner or 
operator specifies in the operating permit or the Notification of 
Compliance Status, for purposes of determining daily average values.
    (4)-(5) [Reserved]
    (6) If all recorded values for a monitored parameter during an 
operating day are above the minimum level or below the maximum level 
established in the Notification of Compliance Status or operating 
permit, the owner or operator may record that all values were above the 
minimum level or below the maximum level rather than calculating and 
recording a daily average for that operating day.
    (7) Monitoring data recorded during periods identified in paragraphs 
(d)(7)(i) through (v) of this section shall not be included in any 
average computed under this subpart. Records shall be kept of the times 
and durations of all such periods and any other periods during process 
or combustion, recovery, or recapture device operation when monitors are 
not operating.
    (i) Monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and 
zero (low-level) and high-level adjustments;
    (ii) Start-ups;
    (iii) Shutdowns;
    (iv) Malfunctions; or
    (v) Periods of non-operation of the affected source (or portion 
thereof), resulting in cessation of the emissions to which the 
monitoring applies.
    (8) For continuous monitoring systems used to comply with this 
subpart, records documenting the completion of calibration checks, and 
records documenting the maintenance of continuous monitoring systems 
that are specified in the manufacturer's instructions or that are 
specified in other

[[Page 441]]

written procedures that provide adequate assurance that the equipment 
would reasonably be expected to monitor accurately.
    (9) The owner or operator of an affected source granted a waiver of 
recordkeeping or reporting requirements under the General Provisions' 
recordkeeping and reporting requirements in Sec. 63.10(f) shall maintain 
the information, if any, specified by the Administrator as a condition 
of the waiver of recordkeeping or reporting requirements.
    (e) Reporting and notification. In addition to the reports and 
notifications required by 40 CFR part 63, subpart A, as specified in 
this subpart, the owner or operator of an affected source shall prepare 
and submit the reports listed in paragraphs (e)(3) through (8) of this 
section, as applicable. All reports required by this subpart, and the 
schedule for their submittal, are listed in Table 8 of this subpart.
    (1) Violation of reporting requirements. Owners and operators shall 
not be in violation of the reporting requirements of this paragraph (e) 
for failing to submit information required to be included in a specified 
report if the owner or operator meets the requirements in paragraphs 
(e)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section. Examples of circumstances where 
this paragraph may apply include information related to newly-added 
equipment or emission points, changes in the process, changes in 
equipment required or utilized for compliance with the requirements of 
this subpart, or changes in methods or equipment for monitoring, 
recordkeeping, or reporting.
    (i) The information was not known in time for inclusion in the 
report specified by this subpart.
    (ii) The owner or operator has been diligent in obtaining the 
information.
    (iii) The owner or operator submits a report according to the 
provisions of paragraphs (e)(1)(iii)(A) through (C) of this section.
    (A) If this subpart expressly provides for supplements to the report 
in which the information is required, the owner or operator shall submit 
the information as a supplement to that report. The information shall be 
submitted no later than 60 days after it is obtained, unless otherwise 
specified in this subpart.
    (B) If this subpart does not expressly provide for supplements, but 
the owner or operator must submit a request for revision of an operating 
permit pursuant to the State operating permit programs in part 70 or the 
Federal operating permit programs in part 71, due to circumstances to 
which the information pertains, the owner or operator shall submit the 
information with the request for revision to the operating permit.
    (C) In any case not addressed by paragraph (e)(1)(iii)(A) or (B) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall submit the information with 
the first Periodic Report, as required by this subpart, which has a 
submission deadline at least 60 days after the information is obtained.
    (2) Submittal of reports. All reports required under this subpart 
shall be sent to the Administrator at the applicable address listed in 
the General Provisions' list of addresses of State air pollution control 
agencies and EPA Regional Offices, in Sec. 63.13. If acceptable to both 
the Administrator and the owner or operator of a source, reports may be 
submitted on electronic media.
    (3) Initial Notification. The owner or operator of an existing or 
new affected source shall submit a written Initial Notification to the 
Administrator, containing the information described in paragraph 
(e)(3)(i) of this section, according to the schedule in paragraph 
(e)(3)(ii) of this section. The General Provisions' Initial Notification 
requirements in Sec. 63.9(b)(2), (3), and (6) shall not apply, for the 
purposes of this subpart.
    (i) The Initial Notification shall include the following 
information:
    (A) The name and address of the owner or operator;
    (B) The address (physical location) of the affected source;
    (C) An identification of the kinds of emission points within the 
affected source;
    (D) An identification of the relevant standard, or other 
requirement, that is the basis of the notification and the source's 
compliance date; and
    (E) A statement of whether or not the affected source is a major 
source.

[[Page 442]]

    (ii) The Initial Notification shall be submitted according to the 
schedule in paragraph (e)(3)(ii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section, as 
applicable.
    (A) For an existing source, the Initial Notification shall be 
submitted no later than June 1, 2000.
    (B) For a new source that has an initial start-up on or after August 
30, 1999, the application for approval of construction or reconstruction 
required by the General Provisions in Sec. 63.5(d) shall be submitted in 
lieu of the Initial Notification. The application shall be submitted as 
soon as practical before construction or reconstruction is planned to 
commence (but it need not be sooner than August 30, 1999).
    (C) For a new source that has an initial start-up prior to August 
30, 1999, the Initial Notification shall be submitted no later than 
August 30, 1999. The application for approval of construction or 
reconstruction described in the General Provisions' requirements in 
Sec. 63.5(d) is not required for these sources.
    (4) Precompliance Report. The owner or operator of an affected 
source requesting an extension for compliance; requesting approval to 
use alternative monitoring parameters, alternative continuous monitoring 
and recordkeeping, or alternative controls; requesting approval to 
incorporate a provision for ceasing to collect monitoring data, during a 
start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, into the start-up, shutdown, and 
malfunction plan, when that monitoring equipment would be damaged if it 
did not cease to collect monitoring data, as permitted under 
Sec. 63.1420(h)(3); or requesting approval to establish parameter 
monitoring levels according to the procedures contained in 
Sec. 63.1438(c) or (d) shall submit a Precompliance Report according to 
the schedule described in paragraph (e)(4)(i) of this section. The 
Precompliance Report shall contain the information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) through (viii) of this section, as appropriate.
    (i) The Precompliance Report shall be submitted to the Administrator 
no later than 12 months prior to the compliance date. Unless the 
Administrator objects to a request submitted in the Precompliance Report 
within 45 days after its receipt, the request shall be deemed approved. 
For new affected sources, the Precompliance Report shall be submitted to 
the Administrator with the application for approval of construction or 
reconstruction required in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Supplements 
to the Precompliance Report may be submitted as specified in paragraph 
(e)(4)(vii) of this section.
    (ii) A request for an extension for compliance, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1422(e), may be submitted in the Precompliance Report. The 
request for a compliance extension shall include the data outlined in 
the General Provisions' compliance requirements in 
Sec. 63.6(i)(6)(i)(A), (B), and (D), as required in Sec. 63.1422(e)(1).
    (iii) The alternative monitoring parameter information required in 
paragraph (f) of this section shall be submitted in the Precompliance 
Report if, for any emission point, the owner or operator of an affected 
source seeks to comply through the use of a control technique other than 
those for which monitoring parameters are specified in this subpart or 
in 40 CFR part 63, subpart G, or seeks to comply by monitoring a 
different parameter than those specified in this subpart or in 40 CFR 
part 63, subpart G.
    (iv) If the affected source seeks to comply using alternative 
continuous monitoring and recordkeeping as specified in paragraph (g) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall submit a request for approval 
in the Precompliance Report.
    (v) The owner or operator shall report the intent to use alternative 
controls to comply with the provisions of this subpart in the 
Precompliance Report. The Administrator may deem alternative controls to 
be equivalent to the controls required by the standard, under the 
procedures outlined in the General Provisions' requirements for use of 
an alternative nonopacity emission standard, in Sec. 63.6(g).
    (vi) If the owner or operator is requesting approval to incorporate 
a provision for ceasing to collect monitoring data, during a start-up, 
shutdown, or malfunction, into the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction 
plan, when that

[[Page 443]]

monitoring equipment would be damaged if it did not cease to collect 
monitoring data, the information specified in paragraphs (e)(4)(vi)(A) 
and (B) of this section shall be supplied in the Precompliance Report or 
in a supplement to the Precompliance Report. The Administrator shall 
evaluate the supporting documentation and shall approve the request only 
if, in the Administrator's judgment, the specific monitoring equipment 
would be damaged by the contemporaneous start-up, shutdown, or 
malfunction.
    (A) Documentation supporting a claim that the monitoring equipment 
would be damaged by the contemporaneous start-up, shutdown, or 
malfunction; and
    (B) A request to incorporate such a provision for ceasing to collect 
monitoring data during a start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, into the 
start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan.
    (vii) Supplements to the Precompliance Report may be submitted as 
specified in paragraph (e)(4)(vii)(A) of this section, or as specified 
in paragraph (e)(4)(vii)(B) of this section. Unless the Administrator 
objects to a request submitted in a supplement to the Precompliance 
Report within 45 days after its receipt, the request shall be deemed 
approved.
    (A) Supplements to the Precompliance Report may be submitted to 
clarify or modify information previously submitted.
    (B) Supplements to the Precompliance Report may be submitted to 
request approval to use alternative monitoring parameters, as specified 
in paragraph (e)(4)(iii) of this section; to use alternative continuous 
monitoring and recordkeeping, as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of 
this section; to use alternative controls, as specified in paragraph 
(e)(4)(v) of this section; or to include a provision for ceasing to 
collect monitoring data during a start-up, shutdown, or malfunction, in 
the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan, when that monitoring 
equipment would be damaged if it did not cease to collect monitoring 
data, as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(vi) of this section.
    (viii) If an owner or operator establishes parameter monitoring 
levels according to the procedures contained in the parameter monitoring 
provisions in Sec. 63.1438(c) or (d), the following information shall be 
submitted in the Precompliance Report:
    (A) Identification of which procedures (i.e., Sec. 63.1438(c) or 
(d)) are to be used; and
    (B) A description of how the parameter monitoring level is to be 
established. If the procedures in Sec. 63.1438(c) are to be used, a 
description of how performance test data will be used shall be included.
    (5) Notification of Compliance Status. For existing and new affected 
sources, a Notification of Compliance Status shall be submitted within 
150 days after the compliance dates specified in Sec. 63.1422. For 
equipment leaks subject to Sec. 63.1434, the owner or operator shall 
submit the information specified in the HON equipment leak Notification 
of Compliance Status requirements in Sec. 63.182(c), in the Notification 
of Compliance Status required by this paragraph. For all other emission 
points, including heat exchange systems, the Notification of Compliance 
Status shall contain the information listed in paragraphs (e)(5)(i) 
through (vii) of this section.
    (i) The results of any emission point group determinations, process 
section applicability determinations, performance tests, inspections, 
continuous monitoring system performance evaluations, any other 
information required by the test method to be in the test report used to 
demonstrate compliance, values of monitored parameters established 
during performance tests, and any other information required to be 
included in a Notification of Compliance Status under the requirements 
for overlapping regulations in Sec. 63.1422(j), the HON storage vessel 
reporting provisions in Sec. 63.122 and the storage vessel provisions in 
Sec. 63.1432, and the HON process wastewater reporting provisions in 
Sec. 63.146. In addition, the owner or operator shall comply with 
paragraphs (e)(5)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) For performance tests, group determinations, or determination 
that controls are needed, the Notification of Compliance Status shall 
include one complete test report, as described in

[[Page 444]]

paragraph (e)(5)(i)(B) of this section, for each test method used for a 
particular kind of emission point. For additional tests performed for 
the same kind of emission point using the same method, the results and 
any other information required by the test method to be in the test 
report shall be submitted, but a complete test report is not required.
    (B) A complete test report shall include a brief process 
description, sampling site description, description of sampling and 
analysis procedures and any modifications to standard procedures, 
quality assurance procedures, record of operating conditions during the 
test, record of preparation of standards (if the owner or operator 
prepares the standards), record of calibrations, raw data sheets for 
field sampling, raw data sheets for field and laboratory analyses, 
documentation of calculations, and any other information required by the 
test method to be in the test report.
    (ii) For each monitored parameter for which a maximum or minimum 
level is required to be established under the HON process vent 
monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.114(e) and the process vent 
monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.1429(d), the HON process wastewater 
parameter monitoring requirements in Sec. 63.143(f), paragraph (e)(8) of 
this section, or paragraph (f) of this section, the information 
specified in paragraphs (e)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section shall 
be submitted. Further, as described in the storage vessel provisions in 
Sec. 63.1432(k), for those storage vessels for which the parameter 
monitoring plan (required to be submitted under the HON Notification of 
Compliance Status requirements for storage vessels in Sec. 63.120(d)(3)) 
specifies compliance with the parameter monitoring provisions of 
Sec. 63.1438, the owner or operator shall provide the information 
specified in paragraphs (e)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section for 
each monitoring parameter. For those storage vessels for which the 
parameter monitoring plan required to be submitted under the HON 
Notification of Compliance Status requirements for storage vessels in 
Sec. 63.120(d)(2) does not require compliance with the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1438, the owner or operator shall provide the information 
specified in Sec. 63.120(d)(3) as part of the Notification of Compliance 
Status.
    (A) The required information shall include the specific maximum or 
minimum level of the monitored parameter(s) for each emission point.
    (B) The required information shall include the rationale for the 
specific maximum or minimum level for each parameter for each emission 
point, including any data and calculations used to develop the level and 
a description of why the level indicates that the combustion, recovery, 
or recapture device is operated in a manner to ensure compliance with 
the provisions of this subpart.
    (C) The required information shall include a definition of the 
affected source's operating day, as specified in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of 
this section, for purposes of determining daily average values of 
monitored parameters.
    (iii) The determination of applicability for flexible operation 
units as specified in Sec. 63.1420(e)(1)(iii).
    (iv) The parameter monitoring levels for flexible operation units, 
and the basis on which these levels were selected, or a demonstration 
that these levels are appropriate at all times, as specified in 
Sec. 63.1420(e)(7).
    (v) The results for each predominant use determination made under 
Sec. 63.1420(f)(1) through (7), for storage vessels assigned to an 
affected source subject to this subpart.
    (vi) If any emission point is subject to this subpart and to other 
standards as specified in Sec. 63.1422(j), and if the provisions of 
Sec. 63.1422(j) allow the owner or operator to choose which testing, 
monitoring, reporting, and recordkeeping provisions will be followed, 
then the Notification of Compliance Status shall indicate which rule's 
requirements will be followed for testing, monitoring, reporting, and 
recordkeeping.
    (vii) An owner or operator who transfers a Group 1 wastewater stream 
or residual removed from a Group 1 wastewater stream for treatment 
pursuant to Sec. 63.132(g) shall include in the Notification of 
Compliance Status the name and location of the transferee and a 
description of the Group 1 wastewater

[[Page 445]]

stream or residual sent to the treatment facility.
    (6) Periodic Reports. For existing and new affected sources, the 
owner or operator shall submit Periodic Reports as specified in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(i) through (viii) of this section. In addition, for 
equipment leaks subject to Sec. 63.1434, the owner or operator shall 
submit the information specified in the HON periodic reporting 
requirements in Sec. 63.182(d), and for heat exchange systems subject to 
Sec. 63.1434, the owner or operator shall submit the information 
specified in the HON heat exchange system reporting requirements in 
Sec. 63.104(f)(2), as part of the Periodic Report required by this 
paragraph (e)(6).
    (i) Except as specified in paragraphs (e)(6)(viii) of this section, 
a report containing the information in paragraph (e)(6)(ii) of this 
section or paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) through (vii) of this section, as 
appropriate, shall be submitted semiannually no later than 60 days after 
the end of each 180-day period. The first report shall be submitted no 
later than 240 days after the date the Notification of Compliance Status 
is due and shall cover the 6-month period beginning on the date the 
Notification of Compliance Status is due. Subsequent reports shall cover 
each preceding 6-month period.
    (ii) If none of the compliance exceptions in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) 
through (vii) of this section occurred during the 6-month period, the 
Periodic Report required by paragraph (e)(6)(i) of this section shall be 
a statement that there were no compliance exceptions, as described in 
this paragraph, for the 6-month period covered by that report and that 
none of the activities specified in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) through (vii) 
of this section occurred during the period covered by that report.
    (iii) For an owner or operator of an affected source complying with 
the provisions of Secs. 63.1432 through 63.1433 for any emission point, 
Periodic Reports shall include:
    (A) All information specified in the HON periodic reporting 
requirements in Sec. 63.122(a)(4) for storage vessels and in 
Sec. 63.146(c) through Sec. 63.146(f) for process wastewater.
    (B) The daily average values of monitored parameters for all 
excursions, as defined in Sec. 63.1438(f).
    (C) The periods when monitoring data were not collected shall be 
specified; and
    (D) The information in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii)(D)(1) through (3) of 
this section, as applicable:
    (1) Notification if a process change is made such that the group 
status of any emission point changes from Group 2 to Group 1. The owner 
or operator is not required to submit a notification of a process change 
if that process change caused the group status of an emission point to 
change from Group 1 to Group 2. However, until the owner or operator 
notifies the Administrator that the group status of an emission point 
has changed from Group 1 to Group 2, the owner or operator is required 
to continue to comply with the Group 1 requirements for that emission 
point. This notification may be submitted at any time.
    (2) Notification if one or more emission points (other than 
equipment leak components subject to Sec. 63.1434), or one or more PMPU 
is added to an affected source. The owner or operator shall submit the 
information contained in paragraphs (e)(6)(iii)(D)(2)(i) and (ii) of 
this section.
    (i) A description of the addition to the affected source.
    (ii) Notification of the group status or control requirement for the 
additional emission point or all emission points in the PMPU.
    (3) For process wastewater streams sent for treatment pursuant to 
Sec. 63.132(g), reports of changes in the identity of the treatment 
facility or transferee.
    (E) The information in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section for 
reports of start-up, shutdown, and malfunction.
    (iv) If any performance tests are reported in a Periodic Report, the 
following information shall be included:
    (A) One complete test report shall be submitted for each test method 
used for a particular kind of emission point tested. A complete test 
report shall contain the information specified in paragraph (e)(5)(i)(B) 
of this section.
    (B) For additional tests performed for the same kind of emission 
point using

[[Page 446]]

the same method, results and any other information required by the test 
method to be in the test report shall be submitted, but a complete test 
report is not required.
    (v) The results for each change made to a primary product 
determination for a PMPU made under Sec. 63.1420(e)(3) or (10).
    (vi) The results for each reevaluation of the applicability of this 
subpart to a storage vessel that begins receiving material from (or 
sending material to) a process unit that was not included in the initial 
determination, or a storage vessel that ceases to receive material from 
(or send material to) a process unit that was included in the initial 
determination, in accordance with Sec. 63.1420(f)(8).
    (vii) The Periodic Report required by the equipment leak provisions 
in Sec. 63.1434(f) shall be submitted as part of the Periodic Report 
required by paragraph (e)(6) of this section.
    (viii) The owner or operator of an affected source shall submit 
quarterly reports for particular emission points and process sections as 
specified in paragraphs (e)(6)(viii)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) The owner or operator of an affected source shall submit 
quarterly reports for a period of 1 year for an emission point or 
process section if the emission point or process section meets the 
conditions in paragraph (e)(6)(viii)(A)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) A combustion, recovery, or recapture device for a particular 
emission point or process section has more excursions, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1438(f), than the number of excused excursions allowed under 
Sec. 63.1438(g) for a semiannual reporting period; or
    (2) The Administrator requests the owner or operator to submit 
quarterly reports for that emission point or process section.
    (B) The quarterly reports shall include all information specified in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(iii) through (vii) of this section, as applicable to 
the emission point or process section for which quarterly reporting is 
required under paragraph (e)(6)(viii)(A) of this section. Information 
applicable to other emission points within the affected source shall be 
submitted in the semiannual reports required under paragraph (e)(6)(i) 
of this section.
    (C) Quarterly reports shall be submitted no later than 60 days after 
the end of each quarter.
    (D) After quarterly reports have been submitted for an emission 
point for 1 year without more excursions occurring (during that year) 
than the number of excused excursions allowed under Sec. 63.1438(g), the 
owner or operator may return to semiannual reporting for the emission 
point or process section.
    (7) Other reports. The notifications of inspections required by the 
storage vessel provisions in Sec. 63.1432 shall be submitted, as 
specified in the HON storage vessel provisions in Sec. 63.122(h)(1) and 
(2), and in paragraphs (e)(7)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) When the conditions in the HON storage vessel provisions in 
Secs. 63.1420(e)(3)(i) or 63.1420(e)(4)(i) are met, reports of changes 
to the primary product for a PMPU or process unit, as required by 
Sec. 63.1420(e)(3)(ii) or Sec. 63.1420(g)(3), respectively, shall be 
submitted.
    (ii) Owners or operators of PMPU or emission points (other than 
equipment leak components subject to Sec. 63.1434) that are subject to 
provisions for changes or additions to plant sites in Sec. 63.1420(g)(1) 
or (2) shall submit a report as specified in paragraphs (e)(7)(ii)(A) 
and (B) of this section.
    (A) Reports shall include:
    (1) A description of the process change or addition, as appropriate;
    (2) The planned start-up date and the appropriate compliance date, 
according to Sec. 63.1420(g)(1) or (2); and
    (3) Identification of the group status of emission points (except 
equipment leak components subject to the requirements in Sec. 63.1434) 
specified in paragraphs (e)(7)(ii)(A)(3)(i) through (iii) of this 
section, as applicable.
    (i) All the emission points in the added PMPU, as described in 
Sec. 63.1420(g)(1).
    (ii) All the emission points in an affected source designated as a 
new affected source under Sec. 63.1420(g)(2)(i).
    (iii) All the added or created emission points as described in 
Sec. 63.1420(g)(2)(ii).
    (4) If the owner or operator wishes to request approval to use 
alternative

[[Page 447]]

monitoring parameters, alternative continuous monitoring or 
recordkeeping, alternative controls, or wishes to establish parameter 
monitoring levels according to the procedures contained in 
Sec. 63.1438(c) or (d), a Precompliance Report shall be submitted in 
accordance with paragraph (e)(7)(ii)(B) of this section.
    (B) Reports shall be submitted as specified in paragraphs 
(e)(7)(ii)(B)(1) through (3) of this section, as appropriate.
    (1) Owners or operators of an added PMPU subject to 
Sec. 63.1420(g)(1) shall submit a report no later than 180 days prior to 
the compliance date for the PMPU.
    (2) Owners or operators of an affected source designated as a new 
affected source under Sec. 63.1420(g)(2)(i) shall submit a report no 
later than 180 days prior to the compliance date for the affected 
source.
    (3) Owners and operators of any emission point (other than equipment 
leak components subject to Sec. 63.1434) subject to 
Sec. 63.1420(g)(2)(ii) shall submit a report no later than 180 days 
prior to the compliance date for those emission points.
    (8) Operating permit application. An owner or operator who submits 
an operating permit application instead of a Precompliance Report shall 
submit the information specified in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, as 
applicable, with the operating permit application.
    (f) Alternative monitoring parameters. The owner or operator who has 
been directed by any section of this subpart, or any section of another 
subpart referenced by this subpart, that specifically references this 
paragraph to set unique monitoring parameters, or who requests approval 
to monitor a different parameter than those listed in Sec. 63.1432 for 
storage vessels, Sec. 63.1427 for ECO, Sec. 63.1429 for process vents, 
or Sec. 63.143 for process wastewater shall submit the information 
specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section in the 
Precompliance Report, as required by paragraph (e)(4) of this section. 
The owner or operator shall retain for a period of 5 years each record 
required by paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section.
    (1) The required information shall include a description of the 
parameter(s) to be monitored to ensure the combustion, recovery, or 
recapture device; control technique; or pollution prevention measure is 
operated in conformance with its design and achieves the specified 
emission limit, percent reduction, or nominal efficiency, and an 
explanation of the criteria used to select the parameter(s).
    (2) The required information shall include a description of the 
methods and procedures that will be used to demonstrate that the 
parameter indicates proper operation, the schedule for this 
demonstration, and a statement that the owner or operator will establish 
a level for the monitored parameter as part of the Notification of 
Compliance Status report required in paragraph (e)(5) of this section, 
unless this information has already been included in the operating 
permit application.
    (3) The required information shall include a description of the 
proposed monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting system, to include the 
frequency and content of monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting. 
Further, the rationale for the proposed monitoring, recordkeeping, and 
reporting system shall be included if either condition in paragraph 
(f)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section is met:
    (i) If monitoring and recordkeeping is not continuous; or
    (ii) If reports of daily average values will not be included in 
Periodic Reports when the monitored parameter value is above the maximum 
level or below the minimum level as established in the operating permit 
or the Notification of Compliance Status.
    (g) Alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping. An owner or 
operator choosing not to implement the continuous parameter operating 
and recordkeeping provisions listed in Sec. 63.1429 for process vents, 
and Sec. 63.1433 for wastewater, may instead request approval to use 
alternative continuous monitoring and recordkeeping provisions according 
to the procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) of this 
section. Requests shall be submitted in the Precompliance Report as 
specified in paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this

[[Page 448]]

section, and shall contain the information specified in paragraphs 
(g)(2)(ii) and (g)(3)(ii) of this section, as applicable.
    (1) The provisions in the General Provisions requirements for the 
use of an alternative monitoring method in Sec. 63.8(f)(5)(i) shall 
govern the review and approval of requests.
    (2) An owner or operator of an affected source that does not have an 
automated monitoring and recording system capable of measuring parameter 
values at least once during approximately equal 15-minute intervals and 
that does not generate continuous records may request approval to use a 
nonautomated system with less frequent monitoring, in accordance with 
paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (i) The requested system shall include visual reading and recording 
of the value of the relevant operating parameter no less frequently than 
once per hour. Daily averages shall be calculated from these hourly 
values and recorded.
    (ii) The request shall contain:
    (A) A description of the planned monitoring and recordkeeping 
system;
    (B) Documentation that the affected source does not have an 
automated monitoring and recording system;
    (C) Justification for requesting an alternative monitoring and 
recordkeeping system; and
    (D) Demonstration that the proposed monitoring frequency is 
sufficient to represent combustion, recovery, or recapture device 
operating conditions, considering typical variability of the specific 
process and combustion, recovery, or recapture device operating 
parameter being monitored.
    (3) An owner or operator may request approval to use an automated 
data compression recording system that does not record monitored 
operating parameter values at a set frequency (for example, once at 
approximately equal intervals of about 15 minutes), but that records all 
values that meet set criteria for variation from previously recorded 
values, in accordance with paragraphs (g)(3)(i) and (ii) of this 
section.
    (i) The requested system shall be designed to:
    (A) Measure the operating parameter value at least once during 
approximately equal 15-minute intervals;
    (B) Record at least four values each hour during periods of 
operation;
    (C) Record the date and time when monitors are turned off or on;
    (D) Recognize unchanging data that may indicate the monitor is not 
functioning properly, alert the operator, and record the incident;
    (E) Calculate daily average values of the monitored operating 
parameter based on all measured data; and
    (F) If the daily average is not an excursion, as defined in 
Sec. 63.1438(f), the data for that operating day may be converted to 
hourly average values and the four or more individual records for each 
hour in the operating day may be discarded.
    (ii) The request shall contain:
    (A) A description of the monitoring system and data compression 
recording system, including the criteria used to determine which 
monitored values are recorded and retained;
    (B) The method for calculating daily averages; and
    (C) A demonstration that the system meets all criteria in paragraph 
(g)(3)(i) of this section.
    (4) An owner or operator may request approval to use other 
alternative monitoring systems according to the procedures specified in 
the General Provisions' requirements for using an alternative monitoring 
method in Sec. 63.8(f)(4).
    (h) Reduced recordkeeping program. For any parameter with respect to 
any item of equipment, the owner or operator may implement the 
recordkeeping requirements in paragraph (h)(1) or (2) of this section as 
alternatives to the continuous operating parameter monitoring and 
recordkeeping provisions that would otherwise apply under this subpart. 
The owner or operator shall retain for a period of 5 years each record 
required by paragraph (h)(1) or (2) of this section.
    (1) The owner or operator may retain only the daily average value, 
and is not required to retain more frequent monitored operating 
parameter values, for a monitored parameter with respect to an item of 
equipment, if the requirements of paragraphs (h)(1)(i) through (iv) of 
this section are met. An owner

[[Page 449]]

or operator electing to comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) 
of this section shall notify the Administrator in the Notification of 
Compliance Status or, if the Notification of Compliance Status has 
already been submitted, in the Periodic Report immediately preceding 
implementation of the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
    (i) The monitoring system is capable of detecting unrealistic or 
impossible data during periods of operation other than start-ups, 
shutdowns or malfunctions (e.g., a temperature reading of -200 deg.C on 
a boiler), and will alert the operator by alarm or other means. The 
owner or operator shall record the occurrence. All instances of the 
alarm or other alert in an operating day constitute a single occurrence.
    (ii) The monitoring system generates, updated at least hourly 
throughout each operating day, a running average of the monitoring 
values that have been obtained during that operating day, and the 
capability to observe this running average is readily available to the 
Administrator on-site during the operating day. The owner or operator 
shall record the occurrence of any period meeting the criteria in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section. All instances in 
an operating day constitute a single occurrence.
    (A) The running average is above the maximum or below the minimum 
established limits;
    (B) The running average is based on at least six 1-hour average 
values; and
    (C) The running average reflects a period of operation other than a 
start-up, shutdown, or malfunction.
    (iii) The monitoring system is capable of detecting unchanging data 
during periods of operation other than start-ups, shutdowns or 
malfunctions, except in circumstances where the presence of unchanging 
data are the expected operating condition based on past experience 
(e.g., pH in some scrubbers), and will alert the operator by alarm or 
other means. The owner or operator shall record the occurrence. All 
instances of the alarm or other alert in an operating day constitute a 
single occurrence.
    (iv) The monitoring system will alert the owner or operator by an 
alarm or other means, if the running average parameter value calculated 
under paragraph (h)(1)(ii) of this section reaches a set point that is 
appropriately related to the established limit for the parameter that is 
being monitored.
    (v) The owner or operator shall verify the proper functioning of the 
monitoring system, including its ability to comply with the requirements 
of paragraph (h)(1) of this section, at the times specified in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(v)(A) through (C) of this section. The owner or 
operator shall document that the required verifications occurred.
    (A) Upon initial installation.
    (B) Annually after initial installation.
    (C) After any change to the programming or equipment constituting 
the monitoring system, which might reasonably be expected to alter the 
monitoring system's ability to comply with the requirements of this 
section.
    (vi) The owner or operator shall retain the records identified in 
paragraphs (h)(1)(vi)(A) through (D) of this section.
    (A) Identification of each parameter, for each item of equipment, 
for which the owner or operator has elected to comply with the 
requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (B) A description of the applicable monitoring system(s), and how 
compliance will be achieved with each requirement of paragraphs 
(h)(1)(i) through (v) of this section. The description shall identify 
the location and format (e.g., on-line storage, log entries) for each 
required record. If the description changes, the owner or operator shall 
retain both the current and the most recent superseded description, as 
specified in paragraph (h)(1)(vi)(D) of this section.
    (C) A description, and the date, of any change to the monitoring 
system that would reasonably be expected to affect its ability to comply 
with the requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
    (D) The owner or operator subject to paragraph (h)(1)(vi)(B) of this 
section shall retain the current description of the monitoring system as 
long as the

[[Page 450]]

description is current. The current description shall, at all times, be 
retained on-site or be accessible from a central location by computer or 
other means that provides access within 2 hours after a request. The 
owner or operator shall retain all superseded descriptions for at least 
5 years after the date of their creation. Superseded descriptions shall 
be retained on-site (or accessible from a central location by computer 
or other means that provides access within 2 hours after a request) for 
at least 6 months after their creation. Thereafter, superseded 
descriptions may be stored off-site.
    (2) If an owner or operator has elected to implement the 
requirements of paragraph (h)(1) of this section for a monitored 
parameter with respect to an item of equipment and a period of 6 
consecutive months has passed without an excursion as defined in 
paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section, the owner or operator is no longer 
required to record the daily average value, for any operating day when 
the daily average is less than the maximum, or greater than the minimum 
established limit. With approval by the Administrator, monitoring data 
generated prior to the compliance date of this subpart shall be credited 
toward the period of 6 consecutive months, if the parameter limit and 
the monitoring accomplished during the period prior to the compliance 
date was required and/or approved by the Administrator.
    (i) If the owner or operator elects not to retain the daily average 
values, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator in the next 
Periodic Report. The notification shall identify the parameter and unit 
of equipment.
    (ii) If, on any operating day after the owner or operator has ceased 
recording daily average values as provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this 
section, there is an excursion as defined in paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of 
this section, the owner or operator shall immediately resume retaining 
the daily average value for each operating day and shall notify the 
Administrator in the next Periodic Report. The owner or operator shall 
continue to retain each daily average value until another period of 6 
consecutive months has passed without an excursion as defined in 
paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (iii) The owner or operator shall retain the records specified in 
paragraph (h)(1) of this section, for the duration specified in 
paragraph (h) of this section. For any calendar week, if compliance with 
paragraphs (h)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section does not result in 
retention of a record of at least one occurrence or measured parameter 
value, the owner or operator shall record and retain at least one 
parameter value during a period of operation other than a start-up, 
shutdown, or malfunction.
    (iv) For the purposes of paragraph (h) of this section, an excursion 
means that the daily average of monitoring data for a parameter is 
greater than the maximum, or less than the minimum established value, 
except as provided in paragraphs (h)(2)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section.
    (A) The daily average value during any start-up, shutdown, or 
malfunction shall not be considered an excursion for purposes of 
paragraph (h)(2) of this section, if the owner or operator follows the 
applicable provisions of the start-up, shutdown, and malfunction plan 
required by the General Provisions in Sec. 63.6(e)(3).
    (B) An excused excursion, as described in Sec. 63.1438(g), shall not 
be considered an excursion for the purposes of paragraph (h)(2) of this 
section.

 Table 1 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Applicability of General Provisions
                     To Subpart PPP Affected Sources
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Applies to
           Reference               subpart PPP          Explanation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1(a)(1)....................  Yes..............  Sec.  63.1423
                                                    specifies
                                                    definitions in
                                                    addition to or that
                                                    apply instead of
                                                    definitions in Sec.
                                                    63.2.
63.1(a)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.1(a)(3)....................  Yes..............  Sec.  63.1422(f)
                                                    through (k) of this
                                                    subpart and Sec.
                                                    63.160(b) identify
                                                    those standards
                                                    which overlap with
                                                    the requirements of
                                                    subparts PPP and H
                                                    and specify how
                                                    compliance shall be
                                                    achieved.
63.1(a)(4)....................  Yes..............  Subpart PPP (this
                                                    table) specifies the
                                                    applicability of
                                                    each paragraph in
                                                    subpart A to subpart
                                                    PPP.

[[Page 451]]

 
63.1(a)(5)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.1(a)(6)-(8)................  Yes..............
63.1(a)(9)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.1(a)(10)...................  Yes..............
63.1(a)(11)...................  Yes..............
63.1(a)(12)-(14)..............  Yes..............
63.1(b)(1)....................  No...............  Sec.  63.1420(a)
                                                    contains specific
                                                    applicability
                                                    criteria.
63.1(b)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.1(b)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.1(c)(1)....................  Yes..............  Subpart PPP (this
                                                    table) specifies the
                                                    applicability of
                                                    each paragraph in
                                                    subpart A to subpart
                                                    PPP.
63.1(c)(2)....................  No...............  Area sources are not
                                                    subject to subpart
                                                    PPP.
63.1(c)(3)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.1(c)(4)....................  Yes..............
63.1(c)(5)....................  Yes..............  Except that affected
                                                    sources are not
                                                    required to submit
                                                    notifications
                                                    overridden by this
                                                    table.
63.1(d).......................  No...............  Reserved.
63.1(e).......................  Yes..............
63.2..........................  Yes..............  Sec.  63.1423
                                                    specifies those
                                                    subpart A
                                                    definitions that
                                                    apply to subpart
                                                    PPP.
63.3..........................  Yes..............
63.4(a)(1)-(3)................  Yes..............
63.4(a)(4)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.4(a)(5)....................  Yes..............
63.4(b).......................  Yes..............
63.4(c).......................  Yes..............
63.5(a)(1)....................  Yes..............  Except the terms
                                                    ``source'' and
                                                    ``stationary
                                                    source'' should be
                                                    interpreted as
                                                    having the same
                                                    meaning as
                                                    ``affected source''.
63.5(a)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.5(b)(1)....................  Yes..............  Except Sec.
                                                    63.1420(g) defines
                                                    when construction or
                                                    reconstruction is
                                                    subject to new
                                                    source standards.
63.5(b)(2)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.5(b)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.5(b)(4)....................  Yes..............  Except that the
                                                    Initial Notification
                                                    requirements in Sec.
                                                     63.1439(e)(3) shall
                                                    apply instead of the
                                                    requirements in Sec.
                                                     63.9(b).
63.5(b)(5)....................  Yes..............
 63.5(b)(6)...................  Yes..............  Except that Sec.
                                                    63.1420(g) defines
                                                    when construction or
                                                    reconstruction is
                                                    subject to the new
                                                    source standards.
63.5(c).......................  No...............  Reserved.
63.5(d)(1)(i).................  Yes..............
63.5(d)(1)(ii)................  Yes..............  Except that Sec.
                                                    63.5(d)(1)(ii)(H)
                                                    does not apply.
63.5(d)(1)(iii)...............  No...............  Sec.  63.1439(e)(5)
                                                    and Sec.  63.1434(e)
                                                    specify Notification
                                                    of Compliance Status
                                                    requirements.
63.5(d)(2)....................  No...............
63.5(d)(3)....................  Yes..............  Except Sec.
                                                    63.5(d)(3)(ii) does
                                                    not apply, and
                                                    equipment leaks
                                                    subject to Sec.
                                                    63.1434 are exempt.
63.5(d)(4)....................  Yes..............
63.5(e).......................  Yes..............
63.5(f)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.5(f)(2)....................  Yes..............  Except that where
                                                    Sec.  63.9(b)(2) is
                                                    referred to, the
                                                    owner or operator
                                                    need not comply.
63.6(a).......................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(4)....................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(5)....................  Yes..............
63.6(b)(6)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.6(b)(7)....................  No...............
63.6(c)(1)....................  Yes..............  Sec.  63.1422
                                                    specifies the
                                                    compliance date.
63.6(c)(2)....................  No...............
63.6(c)(3)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.6(c)(4)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.6(c)(5)....................  Yes..............
63.6(d).......................  No...............  Reserved.
63.6(e).......................  Yes..............  Except as otherwise
                                                    specified for
                                                    individual
                                                    paragraphs (below),
                                                    and Sec.  63.6(e)
                                                    does not apply to
                                                    Group 2 emission
                                                    points.a
63.6(e)(1)(i).................  No...............  This is addressed by
                                                    Sec.  63.1420(h)(4).
63.6(e)(1)(ii)................  Yes..............
63.6(e)(1)(iii)...............  Yes..............

[[Page 452]]

 
63.6(e)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(i).................  Yes..............  For equipment leaks
                                                    (subject to Sec.
                                                    63.1434), the start-
                                                    up, shutdown, and
                                                    malfunction plan
                                                    requirement of Sec.
                                                    63.6(e)(3)(i) is
                                                    limited to
                                                    combustion,
                                                    recovery, or
                                                    recapture devices
                                                    and is optional for
                                                    other equipment. The
                                                    start-up, shutdown,
                                                    and malfunction plan
                                                    may include written
                                                    procedures that
                                                    identify conditions
                                                    that justify a delay
                                                    of repair.
63.6(e)(3)(i)(A)..............  Yes..............  This is also
                                                    addressed by Sec.
                                                    63.1420(h)(4).
63.6(e)(3)(i)(B)..............  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(i)(C)..............  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(ii)................  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(iii)...............  No...............  Recordkeeping and
                                                    reporting are
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1439(b)(1).
63.6(e)(3)(iv)................  No...............  Recordkeeping and
                                                    reporting are
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1439(b)(1).
63.6(e)(3)(v).................  No...............  Requirement is
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1439(b)(1).
63.6(e)(3)(vi)................  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(vii)...............  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(vii)(A)............  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(vii)(B)............  Yes..............  Except the plan shall
                                                    provide for
                                                    operation in
                                                    compliance with Sec.
                                                     63.1420(i)(4).
63.6(e)(3)(vii)(C)............  Yes..............
63.6(e)(3)(viii)..............  Yes..............
63.6(f)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.6(f)(2)....................  Yes..............  Except 63.7(c), as
                                                    referred to in Sec.
                                                    63.6(f)(2)(iii)(D)
                                                    does not apply, and
                                                    except that Sec.
                                                    63.6(f)(2)(ii) does
                                                    not apply to
                                                    equipment leaks
                                                    subject to Sec.
                                                    63.1434.
63.6(f)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.6(g).......................  Yes..............
63.6(h).......................  No...............  Subpart PPP does not
                                                    require opacity and
                                                    visible emission
                                                    standards.
63.6(i)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.6(i)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.6(i)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.6(i)(4)(i)(A)..............  Yes..............
63.6(i)(4)(i)(B)..............  No...............  Dates are specified
                                                    in Sec.  63.1422(e)
                                                    and Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(4)(i) for
                                                    all emission points
                                                    except equipment
                                                    leaks, which are
                                                    covered under Sec.
                                                    63.182(a)(6)(i).
63.6(i)(4)(ii)................  No...............
63.6(i)(5)(14)................  Yes..............
63.6(i)(15)...................  No...............  Reserved.
63.6(i)(16)...................  Yes..............
63.6(j).......................  Yes..............
63.7(a)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.7(a)(2)....................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439(e)(5)
                                                    and Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(6)
                                                    specify the
                                                    submittal dates of
                                                    performance test
                                                    results for all
                                                    emission points
                                                    except equipment
                                                    leaks; for equipment
                                                    leaks, compliance
                                                    demonstration
                                                    results are reported
                                                    in the Periodic
                                                    Reports.
63.7(a)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.7(b).......................  No...............  Sec.  63.1437(a)(4)
                                                    specifies
                                                    notification
                                                    requirements.
63.7(c).......................  No...............  Except if the owner
                                                    or operator chooses
                                                    to submit an
                                                    alternative
                                                    nonopacity emission
                                                    standard for
                                                    approval under Sec.
                                                    63.6(g).
63.7(d).......................  Yes..............
63.7(e)(1)....................  Yes..............  Except that all
                                                    performance tests
                                                    shall be conducted
                                                    during worst case
                                                    operating
                                                    conditions.
63.7(e)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.7(e)(3)....................  No...............  Subpart PPP specifies
                                                    requirements.
63.7(e)(4)....................  Yes..............
63.7(f).......................  Yes..............  Since a site specific
                                                    test plan is not
                                                    required, the
                                                    notification
                                                    deadline in Sec.
                                                    63.7(f)(2)(i) shall
                                                    be 60 days prior to
                                                    the performance
                                                    test, and in Sec.
                                                    63.7(f)(3) approval
                                                    or disapproval of
                                                    the alternative test
                                                    method shall not be
                                                    tide to the site
                                                    specific test plan.
63.7(g).......................  Yes..............  Except that
                                                    references to the
                                                    Notification of
                                                    Compliance Status
                                                    report in Sec.
                                                    63.9(h) are replaced
                                                    with the
                                                    requirements in Sec.
                                                     63.1439(e)(5). In
                                                    addition, equipment
                                                    leaks subject to
                                                    Sec.  63.1434 are
                                                    not required to
                                                    conduct performance
                                                    tests.
63.7(h).......................  Yes..............  Except Sec.
                                                    63.7(h)(4)(ii) is
                                                    not applicable,
                                                    since the site-
                                                    specific test plans
                                                    in Sec.  63.7(c)(2)
                                                    are not required.
63.8(a)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.8(a)(2)....................  No...............
63.8(a)(3)....................  No...............  Reserved.
63.8(a)(4)....................  Yes..............
63.8(b)(1)....................  Yes..............

[[Page 453]]

 
63.8(b)(2)....................  No...............  Support PPP specifies
                                                    locations to conduct
                                                    monitoring.
63.8(b)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.8(c)(1)....................  Yes..............
63.8(c)(1)(i).................  Yes..............
63.8(c)(1)(ii)................  No...............  For all emission
                                                    points except
                                                    equipment leaks,
                                                    comply with Sec.
                                                    63.1439(b)(1)(i)(B);
                                                    for equipment leaks,
                                                    comply with Sec.
                                                    63.181(g)(2)(ii).
63.8(c)(1)(iii)...............  Yes..............
63.8(c)(2)....................  Yes..............
63.8(c)(3)....................  Yes..............
63.8(c)(4)....................  No...............  Sec.  63.1438
                                                    specifies monitoring
                                                    requirements; not
                                                    applicable to
                                                    equipment leaks,
                                                    because Sec.
                                                    63.1434 does not
                                                    require continuous
                                                    monitoring systems.
63.8(c)(5)-(8)................  No...............
63.8(d).......................  No...............
63.8(e).......................  No...............
63.8(f)(1)-(3)................  Yes..............
63.8(f)(4)(i).................  Yes..............  Except the timeframe
                                                    for submitting
                                                    request is specified
                                                    in Sec.  63.1439(f)
                                                    or (g); not
                                                    applicable to
                                                    equipment leaks,
                                                    because Sec.
                                                    63.1434 (through
                                                    subpart H) specifies
                                                    acceptable
                                                    alternative methods.
63.8(f)(4)(ii)................  Yes..............
63.8(f)(4)(iii)...............  Yes..............
63.8(f)(5)(i).................  Yes..............
63.8(f)(5)(ii)................  No...............
63.8(f)(5)(iii)...............  Yes..............
63.8(f)(6)....................  No...............  Subpart PPP does not
                                                    require CEM's.
63.8(g).......................  No...............  Data reduction
                                                    procedures specified
                                                    in Sec.  63.1439(d)
                                                    and (h); not
                                                    applicable to
                                                    equipment leaks.
63.9(a).......................  Yes..............
63.9(b).......................  No...............  The Initial
                                                    Notification
                                                    requirements are
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(3).
63.9(c).......................  Yes..............
63.9(d).......................  Yes..............
63.9(e).......................  No...............  Sec.  63.1437(a)(4)
                                                    specifies
                                                    notification
                                                    deadline.
63.9(f).......................  No...............  Subpart PPP does not
                                                    require opacity and
                                                    visible emission
                                                    standards.
63.9(g).......................  No...............
63.9(h).......................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439(e)(5)
                                                    specifies
                                                    Notification of
                                                    Compliance Status
                                                    requirements.
63.9(i).......................  Yes..............
63.9(j).......................  No...............
63.10(a)......................  Yes..............
63.10(b)(1)...................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439(a)
                                                    specifies record
                                                    retention
                                                    requirements.
63.10(b)(2)...................  No...............  Subpart PPP specifies
                                                    recordkeeping
                                                    requirements.
63.10(b)(3)...................  Yes..............
63.10(c)......................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439
                                                    specifies
                                                    recordkeeping
                                                    requirements.
63.10(d)(1)...................  Yes..............
63.10(d)(2)...................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439(e)(5)
                                                    and Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(6)
                                                    specify performance
                                                    test reporting
                                                    requirements; not
                                                    applicable to
                                                    equipment leaks.
63.10(d)(3)...................  No...............  Subpart PPP does not
                                                    require opacity and
                                                    visible emission
                                                    standards.
63.10(d)(4)...................  Yes..............
63.10(d)(5)...................  Yes..............  Except that reports
                                                    required by Sec.
                                                    63.10(d)(5)(i) shall
                                                    be submitted at the
                                                    same time as
                                                    Periodic Reports
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(6). The
                                                    start-up, shutdown,
                                                    and malfunction
                                                    plan, and any
                                                    records or reports
                                                    of start-up,
                                                    shutdown, and
                                                    malfunction do not
                                                    apply to Group 2
                                                    emission points.
63.10(e)......................  No...............  Sec.  63.1439
                                                    specifies reporting
                                                    requirements.
63.10(f)......................  Yes..............
63.11.........................  Yes..............
63.12.........................  Yes..............  Except that the
                                                    authority of Sec.
                                                    63.177 (for
                                                    equipment leaks)
                                                    will not be
                                                    delegated to States.
63.13-63.15...................  Yes..............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a The plan, and any records or reports of start-up, shutdown, and
  malfunction do not apply to Group 2 emission points.


[[Page 454]]


  Table 2 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Applicability of Subparts F, G, H, and U to Subpart PPP Affected Sources
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                           Applicable section of
             Reference                Applies to subpart PPP          Explanation               subpart PPP
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Subpart F:
    63.100.........................  No.....................
    63.101.........................  Yes....................  Several definitions from     63.1423.
                                                               63.101 are referenced at
                                                               63.1423.
    63.102-63.103..................  No.....................
    63.104.........................  Yes....................  With the differences noted   63.1435.
                                                               in 63.1435(b) through (d).
    63.105.........................  Yes....................  With the differences noted   63.1433.
                                                               in 63.1433(b).
    63.106.........................  No.....................
Subpart G:
    63.110.........................  No.....................
    63.111.........................  Yes....................  Several definitions from     63.1423.
                                                               63.111 are incorporated by
                                                               reference into 63.1423.
    63.112.........................  No.....................
    63.113-63.118..................  Yes....................  For THF facilities, with     63.1425.
                                                               the differences noted in
                                                               63.1425(f)(1) through
                                                               (f)(10).
                                     No.....................  For epoxide facilities,      63.1428.
                                                               except that 63.115(d) is
                                                               used for TRE
                                                               determinations.
    63.119-63.123..................  Yes....................  With the differences noted   63.1432.
                                                               in 63.1432(b) through
                                                               63.1432(p).
    63.124-63.125..................  No.....................  Reserved...................
    63.126-63.130..................  No.....................
    63.131.........................  No.....................  Reserved...................
    63.132-63.147..................  Yes....................  With the differences noted   63.1433.
                                                               in 63.1433(a)(1) through
                                                               63.1433(a)(19).
    63.148-63.149..................  Yes....................  With the differences noted   63.1432 and 63.1433.
                                                               in 63.1432(b) through
                                                               63.1432(p) and
                                                               63.1433(a)(1) through
                                                               63.1433(a)(19).
    63.150.........................  No.....................
    63.151-63.152..................  No.....................
Subpart H:
    63.160-63.182..................  Yes....................  Subpart PPP affected         63.1434.
                                                               sources shall comply with
                                                               all requirements of
                                                               subpart H, with the
                                                               differences noted in
                                                               63.1422(d), 63.1422(h),
                                                               and 63.1434(b) through (g).
Subpart U:
    63.480-63.487..................  No.....................
    63.488.........................  Yes....................  Portions of 63.488(b) and
                                                               (e) are cross-referenced
                                                               in subpart PPP..
    63.489-63.506..................  No.....................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


 Table 3 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Group 1 Storage Vessels at Existing
                        and New Affected Sources
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Vapor Pressure a
           Vessel capacity  (cubic meters)               (kilopascals)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
75  capacity  151.........................    13.1
  capacity  151...........................     5.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Maximum true vapor pressure of total organic HAP at storage
  temperature.


   Table 4 to Subpart PPP of Part 63--Known Organic Hap From Polyether
                             Polyol Products
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Organic HAP/Chemical Name  (CAS No.)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         1,3 Butadiene (106990)
                         Ethylene Oxide (75218)
                            n-Hexane (110543)
                            Methanol (67561)
                         Propylene Oxide (75569)
                            Toluene (108883)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAS No. = Chemical Abstracts Service Registry Number


[[Page 455]]


    Table 5 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Process Vents From Batch Unit
    Operations--Monitoring, Recordkeeping, and Reporting Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Recordkeeping and
                                 Parameter to be         reporting
       Control technique            monitored         requirements for
                                                    monitored parameters
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal Incinerator...........  Firebox            1. Continuous records
                                 temperature a.     as specified in Sec.
                                                     63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the average firebox
                                                    temperature measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
 
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average firebox
                                                    temperature as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
 
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average temperatures
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--
                                                    PR.nspe
Catalytic Incinerator.........  Temperature        1. Continuous records
                                 upstream and       as specified in Sec.
                                 downstream of       63.1429.b
                                 the catalyst bed. 2. Record and report
                                                    the average upstream
                                                    and downstream
                                                    temperatures and the
                                                    average temperature
                                                    difference across
                                                    the catalyst bed
                                                    measured during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average upstream
                                                    temperature and
                                                    temperature
                                                    difference across
                                                    catalyst bed as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average upstream
                                                    temperatures that
                                                    are below the
                                                    minimum upstream
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                                   5. Report all daily
                                                    average temperature
                                                    differences across
                                                    the catalyst bed
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum difference
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                                   6. Report all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected.e
Boiler or Process Heater with   Firebox            1. Continuous records
 a design heat input capacity    temperature a.     as specified in Sec.
 less than 44 megawatts and                          63.1429.b
 where the process vents are                       2. Record and report
 not introduced with or used                        the average firebox
 as the primary fuel.                               temperature measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average firebox
                                                    temperature as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.d
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average temperatures
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--PR.d
                                                    e
Flare.........................  Presence of a      1. Hourly records of
                                 flame at the       whether the monitor
                                 pilot light.       was continuously
                                                    operating during
                                                    batch emission
                                                    episodes selected
                                                    for control and
                                                    whether a flame was
                                                    continuously present
                                                    at the pilot light
                                                    during each hour.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the presence of a
                                                    flame at the pilot
                                                    light over the full
                                                    period of the
                                                    compliance
                                                    determination--NCS.c
                                                   3. Record the times
                                                    and durations of all
                                                    periods during batch
                                                    emission episodes
                                                    when all flames at
                                                    the pilot light of a
                                                    flare are absent or
                                                    the monitor is not
                                                    operating.
                                                   4. Report the times
                                                    and durations of all
                                                    periods during batch
                                                    emission episodes
                                                    selected for control
                                                    when all flames at
                                                    the pilot light of a
                                                    flare are absent--
                                                    Pr.d
Absorber f....................  Liquid flow rate   1. Records every 15
                                 into or out of     minutes, as
                                 the scrubber, or   specified in Sec.
                                 the pressure       63.1429.b
                                 drop across the   2. Record and report
                                 scrubber.          the average liquid
                                                    flow rate into or
                                                    out of the scrubber,
                                                    or the pressure drop
                                                    across the scrubber,
                                                    measured during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.
                                                   3. Record the liquid
                                                    flow rate into or
                                                    out of the scrubber,
                                                    or the pressure drop
                                                    across the scrubber,
                                                    every 15 minutes, as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   4. Report all
                                                    scrubber flow rates
                                                    or pressure drop
                                                    values that are
                                                    below the minimum
                                                    operating value
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--PR..d
                                                    e
                                pH of the          1. Once daily records
                                 scrubber.          as specified in Sec.
                                                     63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the average pH of
                                                    the scrubber
                                                    effluent measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
                                                   3. Record at least
                                                    once daily the pH of
                                                    the scrubber
                                                    effluent.

[[Page 456]]

 
                                                   4. Report all pH
                                                    scrubber effluent
                                                    readings out of the
                                                    range established in
                                                    the NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--
                                                    PR.d,e If a base
                                                    absorbent is used,
                                                    report all pH values
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    values. If an acid
                                                    absorbent is used,
                                                    report all pH values
                                                    that are above the
                                                    maximum operating
                                                    values.
Condenser f...................  Exit (product      1. Continuous records
                                 side)              as specified in Sec.
                                 temperature.        63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the average exit
                                                    temperature measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    temperature as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    temperatures that
                                                    are above the
                                                    maximum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--PR.d
                                                    e
Carbon Adsorber f.............  Total              1. Record of total
                                 regeneration       regeneration stream
                                 stream mass or     mass or volumetric
                                 volumetric flow    flow for each carbon
                                 during carbon      bed regeneration
                                 bed regeneration   cycle.
                                 cycle(s), and.    2. Record and report
                                                    the total
                                                    regeneration stream
                                                    mass or volumetric
                                                    flow during each
                                                    carbon bed
                                                    regeneration cycle
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
                                                   3. Report all carbon
                                                    bed regeneration
                                                    cycles when the
                                                    total regeneration
                                                    stream mass or
                                                    volumetric flow is
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    flow rate
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                Temperature of     1. Record the
                                 the carbon bed     temperature of the
                                 after              carbon bed after
                                 regeneration and   each regeneration
                                 within 15          and within 15
                                 minutes of         minutes of
                                 completing any     completing any
                                 cooling cycle(s).  cooling cycle(s).
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the temperature of
                                                    the carbon bed after
                                                    each regeneration
                                                    and within 15
                                                    minutes of
                                                    completing any
                                                    cooling cycle(s)
                                                    measured during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
                                                   3. Report all carbon
                                                    bed regeneration
                                                    cycles when the
                                                    temperature of the
                                                    carbon bed after
                                                    regeneration, or
                                                    within 15 minutes of
                                                    completing any
                                                    cooling cycle(s), is
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
Absorber, Condenser, and        Concentration      1. Continuous records
 Carbon Adsorber (as an          level or reading   as specified in Sec.
 alternative to the above).      indicated by an     63.1429.b
                                 organic           2. Record and report
                                 monitoring         the average
                                 device at the      concentration level
                                 outlet of the      or reading measured
                                 recovery device.   during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average
                                                    concentration level
                                                    or reading as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average
                                                    concentration levels
                                                    or readings that are
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    concentration or
                                                    reading established
                                                    in the NCS or
                                                    operating permit and
                                                    all instances when
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--PR.d
                                                    e
All Combustion, recovery, or    Diversion to the   1. Hourly records of
 recapture devices.              atmosphere from    whether the flow
                                 the combustion,    indicator was
                                 recovery, or       operating during
                                 recapture device   batch emission
                                 or.                episodes selected
                                                    for control and
                                                    whether a diversion
                                                    was detected at any
                                                    time during the
                                                    hour, as specified
                                                    in Sec.  63.1429.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the times of all
                                                    periods during batch
                                                    emission episodes
                                                    selected for control
                                                    when emissions are
                                                    diverted through a
                                                    bypass line, or the
                                                    flow indicator is
                                                    not operating--PR.d
                                Monthly            1. Records that
                                 inspections of     monthly inspections
                                 sealed valves.     were performed as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    all monthly
                                                    inspections that
                                                    show that valves are
                                                    in the diverting
                                                    position or that a
                                                    seal has been
                                                    broken--PR.d

[[Page 457]]

 
ECO...........................  Time from the end  1. Records at the end
                                 of the epoxide     of each batch, as
                                 feed, or the       specified in Sec.
                                 epoxide partial    63.1427(i).
                                 pressure in the   2. Record and report
                                 reactor or         the average
                                 direct             parameter value of
                                 measurement of     the parameters
                                 epoxide            chosen, measured
                                 concentration in   during the
                                 the reactor        performance test.
                                 liquid at the     3. Record the batch
                                 end of the ECO.    cycle ECO duration,
                                                    epoxide partial
                                                    pressure, or epoxide
                                                    concentration in the
                                                    liquid at the end of
                                                    the ECO
                                                   4. Report all batch
                                                    cycle parameter
                                                    values outside of
                                                    the ranges
                                                    established in
                                                    accordance with Sec.
                                                     63.1427(i)(3) and
                                                    all instances when
                                                    monitoring data were
                                                    not collected--PR.d
                                                    e
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Monitor may be installed in the firebox or in the ductwork immediately
  downstream of the firebox before any substantial heat exchange is
  encountered.
b ``Continuous records'' is defined in Sec.  63.111.
c NCS = Notification of Compliance Status described in Sec.  63.1429.
d PR = Periodic Reports described in Sec.  63.1429.
e The periodic reports shall include the duration of periods when
  monitoring data are not collected as specified in Sec.  63.1439.
f Alternatively, these devices may comply with the organic monitoring
  device provisions listed at the end of this table.


 Table 6 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Process Vents From Continuous Unit
    Operations--Monitoring, Recordkeeping, and Reporting Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Recordkeeping and
                                 Parameter to be         reporting
       Control technique            monitored         requirements for
                                                    monitored parameters
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal Incinerator...........  Firebox            1. Continuous records
                                 temperaturea.      as specified in Sec.
                                                     63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the average firebox
                                                    temperature measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS.c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average firebox
                                                    temperature for each
                                                    operating day.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average temperatures
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    sufficient
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    not collected--PR.d
                                                    e
Catalytic Incinerator.........  Temperature        1. Continuous records
                                 upstream and       as specified in Sec.
                                 downstream of       63.1429.b
                                 the catalyst bed. 2. Record and report
                                                    the average upstream
                                                    and downstream
                                                    temperatures and the
                                                    average temperature
                                                    difference across
                                                    the catalyst bed
                                                    measured during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average upstream
                                                    temperature and
                                                    temperature
                                                    difference across
                                                    catalyst bed for
                                                    each operating day.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average upstream
                                                    temperatures that
                                                    are below the
                                                    minimum upstream
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                                   5. Report all daily
                                                    average temperature
                                                    differences across
                                                    the catalyst bed
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum difference
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                                   6. Report all
                                                    operating days when
                                                    insufficient
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    collected.e
Boiler or Process Heater with   Firebox            1. Continuous records
 a design heat input capacity    temperature a.     as specified in Sec.
 less than 44 megawatts and                          63.1429.b
 where the process vents are                       2. Record and report
 not introduced with or used                        the average firebox
 as the primary fuel.                               temperature measured
                                                    during the
                                                    performance test--
                                                    NCS c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average firebox
                                                    temperature for each
                                                    operating day.d
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average temperatures
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit and all
                                                    instances when
                                                    insufficient
                                                    monitoring data are
                                                    collected--PR.d e
Flare.........................  Presence of a      1. Hourly records of
                                 flame at the       whether the monitor
                                 pilot light.       was continuously
                                                    operating and
                                                    whether a flame was
                                                    continuously present
                                                    at the pilot light
                                                    during each hour.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the presence of a
                                                    flame at the pilot
                                                    light over the full
                                                    period of the
                                                    compliance
                                                    determination--NCS.c
                                                   3. Record the times
                                                    and durations of all
                                                    periods when all
                                                    flames at the pilot
                                                    light of a flare are
                                                    absent or the
                                                    monitor is not
                                                    operating.

[[Page 458]]

 
                                                   4. Report the times
                                                    and durations of all
                                                    periods when all
                                                    flames at the pilot
                                                    light of a flare are
                                                    absent--Pr.d
Absorber f....................  Exit temperature   1. Continuous records
                                 of the absorbing   as specified in Sec.
                                 liquid, and.        63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the exit temperature
                                                    of the absorbing
                                                    liquid averaged over
                                                    the full period of
                                                    the TRE
                                                    determination--NCS.c
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    temperature of the
                                                    absorbing liquid for
                                                    each operating day.
                                                   4. Report all the
                                                    daily average exit
                                                    temperatures of the
                                                    absorbing liquid
                                                    that are below the
                                                    minimum operating
                                                    value established in
                                                    the NCS or
                                                    operating--PR.d e
                                Exit specific      1. Continuous records
                                 gravity for the    as specified in Sec.
                                 absorbing liquid.   63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the exit specific
                                                    gravity averaged
                                                    over the full period
                                                    of the TRE
                                                    determination--NCS.
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    specific gravity for
                                                    each operating day.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    specific gravity
                                                    values that are
                                                    below the minimum
                                                    operating value
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating--
                                                    PR.d e
Condenser f...................  Exit (product      1. Continuous records
                                 side)              as specified in Sec.
                                 temperature.        63.1429.b
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the exit temperature
                                                    averaged over the
                                                    full period of the
                                                    TRE determination--
                                                    NCS.
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    temperature for each
                                                    operating day.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average exit
                                                    temperatures that
                                                    are above the
                                                    maximum operating
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating--
                                                    PR.d e
Carbon Adsorber f.............  Total              1. Record of total
                                 regeneration       regeneration stream
                                 stream mass or     mass or volumetric
                                 volumetric flow    flow for each carbon
                                 during carbon      bed regeneration
                                 bed regeneration   cycle.
                                 cycle(s), and.    2. Record and report
                                                    the total
                                                    regeneration stream
                                                    mass or volumetric
                                                    flow during each
                                                    carbon bed
                                                    regeneration cycle
                                                    during the period of
                                                    the TRE
                                                    determination--NCS.c
                                                   3. Report all carbon
                                                    bed regeneration
                                                    cycles when the
                                                    total regeneration
                                                    stream mass or
                                                    volumetric flow is
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    flow rate
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d e
                                Temperature of     1. Record the
                                 the carbon bed     temperature of the
                                 after              carbon bed after
                                 regeneration and   each regeneration
                                 within 15          and within 15
                                 minutes of         minutes of
                                 completing any     completing any
                                 cooling cycle(s).  cooling cycle(s).
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the temperature of
                                                    the carbon bed after
                                                    each regeneration
                                                    during the period of
                                                    the TRE
                                                    determination--NCSc
                                                   3. Report all carbon
                                                    bed regeneration
                                                    cycles when the
                                                    temperature of the
                                                    carbon bed after
                                                    regeneration is
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    temperature
                                                    established in the
                                                    NCS or operating
                                                    permit--PR.d,e
Absorber, Condenser, and        Concentration      1. Continuous records
 Carbon Adsorber (as an          level or reading   as specified in Sec.
 alternative to the above).      indicated by an     63.1429.b
                                 organic           2. Record and report
                                 monitoring         the concentration
                                 device at the      level or reading
                                 outlet of the      averaged over the
                                 recovery device.   full period of the
                                                    TRE determination--
                                                    NCS.
                                                   3. Record the daily
                                                    average
                                                    concentration level
                                                    or reading for each
                                                    operating day.
                                                   4. Report all daily
                                                    average
                                                    concentration levels
                                                    or readings that are
                                                    above the maximum
                                                    concentration or
                                                    reading established
                                                    in the NCS or
                                                    operating--PR.d e
All Combustion, recovery, or    Diversion to the   1. Hourly records of
 recapture devices.              atmosphere from    whether the flow
                                 the combustion,    indicator was
                                 recovery, or       operating and
                                 recapture device   whether a diversion
                                 or.                was detected at any
                                                    time during each
                                                    hour.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    the times of all
                                                    periods when the
                                                    vent stream is
                                                    diverted through a
                                                    bypass line, or the
                                                    flow indicator is
                                                    not operating--PR.d
                                Monthly            1. Records that
                                 inspections of     monthly inspections
                                 sealed valves.     were performed as
                                                    specified in Sec.
                                                    63.1429.
                                                   2. Record and report
                                                    all monthly
                                                    inspections that
                                                    show that valves are
                                                    in the diverting
                                                    position or that a
                                                    seal has been
                                                    broken--PR.d
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Monitor may be installed in the firebox or in the ductwork immediately
  downstream of the firebox before any substantial heat exchange is
  encountered.
b ``Continuous records'' is defined in Sec.  63.111.
c NCS = Notification of Compliance Status described in Sec.  63.1429.
d PR = Periodic Reports described in Sec.  63.1429.

[[Page 459]]

 
e The periodic reports shall include the duration of periods when
  monitoring data are not collected as specified in Sec.  63.1439.
f Alternatively, these devices may comply with the organic monitoring
  device provisions listed at the end of this table.


   Table 7 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Operating Parameters For Which
   Monitoring Levels Are Required To Be Established For Process Vents
                                 Streams
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Established
      Control technique         Parameters to be          operating
                                    monitored           parameter(s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal incinerator.........  Firebox temperature.  Minimum temperature.
Catalytic incinerator.......  Temperature upstream  Minimum upstream
                               and downstream of     temperature; and
                               the catalyst bed.     minimum temperature
                                                     difference across
                                                     the catalyst bed.
Boiler or process heater....  Firebox temperature.  Minimum temperature.
Absorber....................  Liquid flow rate or   Minimum flow rate or
                               pressure drop; and    pressure drop; and
                               pH of scrubber        maximum pH if an
                               effluent, if an       acid absorbent is
                               acid or base          used, or minimum pH
                               absorbent is used.    if a base absorbent
                                                     is used.
Condenser...................  Exit temperature....  Maximum temperature.
Carbon adsorber.............  Total regeneration    Maximum mass or
                               stream mass or        volumetric flow;
                               volumetric flow       and maximum
                               during carbon bed     temperature.
                               regeneration cycle;
                               and temperature of
                               the carbon bed
                               after regeneration
                               (and within 15
                               minutes of
                               completing any
                               cooling cycle(s)).
Extended Cookout (ECO)......  Time from the end of  Minimum duration, or
                               the epoxide feed to   maximum partial
                               the end of the ECO,   pressure at the end
                               or the reactor        of ECO, or maximum
                               epoxide partial       epoxide
                               pressure at the end   concentration in
                               of the ECO, or the    the reactor liquid
                               epoxide               at the end of ECO.
                               concentration in
                               the reactor liquid
                               at the end of the
                               ECO.
Other devices (or as an       HAP concentration     Maximum HAP
 alternate to the above). a    level or reading at   concentration or
                               outlet of device.     reading.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Concentration is measured instead of an operating parameter.


  Table 8 to Subpart PPP of Part 63.--Routine Reports Required By This
                                 Subpart
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Description of
           Reference                  Report              Due Date
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  63.1439(b) and Subpart A  Refer to Sec.      Refer to subpart A.
                                 63.1439(b),
                                 Table 1 of this
                                 subpart, and to
                                 subpart A.
Sec.  63.1439(e)(3)...........  Initial            Existing affected
                                 notification.      sources: by 120 days
                                                    after June 1, 1999.
                                                   New affected sources
                                                    w/initial start-up
                                                    at least 90 days
                                                    after June 1, 1999:
                                                    submit the
                                                    application for
                                                    approval of
                                                    construction or
                                                    reconstruction in
                                                    lieu of the Initial
                                                    Notification.
                                                   New affected sources
                                                    w/initial start-up
                                                    prior to 90 days
                                                    after June 1, 1999:
                                                    by 90 days after
                                                    June 1, 1999.
Sec.  63.1439(e)(4)...........  Precompliance      Existing affected
                                 Report a.          sources: 12 months
                                                    prior to compliance
                                                    date.
                                                   New affected sources:
                                                    with the application
                                                    for approval of
                                                    construction or
                                                    reconstruction.
Sec.  63.1439(e)(5)...........  Notification of    Within 150 days after
                                 Compliance         the compliance date.
                                 Status b.
Sec.  63.1439(e)(6)...........  Periodic Reports.  Semiannually, no
                                                    later than 60 days
                                                    after the end of
                                                    each 6-month period.
                                                    See Sec.
                                                    63.1439(e)(6)(i) for
                                                    the due date for
                                                    this report.
Sec.  63.1439(e)(6)(v)(iii)...  Quarterly reports  No later than 60 days
                                 for sources with   after the end of
                                 excursions (upon   each quarter.
                                 request of the
                                 Administrator).
Sec.  63.506(e)(7)(i).........  Storage Vessels    At least 30 days
                                 Notification of    prior to the
                                 Inspection.        refilling of each
                                                    storage vessel or
                                                    the inspection of
                                                    each storage vessel.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a There may be two versions of this report due at different times; one
  for equipment subject to Sec.  63.1434 and one for other emission
  points subject to this subpart.
b There will be two versions of this report due at different times; one
  for equipment subject to Sec.  63.1434 and one for other emission
  points subject to this subpart.


[[Page 460]]

Subparts QQQ--SSS  [Reserved]



 Subpart TTT--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
                        for Primary Lead Smelting

    Source: 64 FR 30204, June 4, 1999, unless othewise noted.



Sec. 63.1541  Applicability.

    (a) The provisions of this subpart apply to the following affected 
sources at primary lead smelters: sinter machine, blast furnace, dross 
furnace, process fugitive sources, and fugitive dust sources. The 
provisions of this subpart do not apply to secondary lead smelters, lead 
refiners, or lead remelters.
    (b) Table 1 of this subpart specifies the provisions of subpart A 
that apply and those that do not apply to owners and operators of 
primary lead smelters. The following sections of part 63 apply to this 
subpart as stated in subpart A and Table 1: Sec. 63.1 (Applicability), 
Sec. 63.2 (Definitions), Sec. 63.3 (Units and abbreviations), Sec. 63.4 
(Prohibited activities and circumvention), Sec. 63.5 (Construction and 
reconstruction), Sec. 63.7 (Performance testing requirements), Sec. 63.8 
(Monitoring requirements), Sec. 63.12 (State authority and delegations), 
Sec. 63.13 (Addresses of State air pollution control agencies and EPA 
Regional Offices), Sec. 63.14 (Incorporations by reference), and 
Sec. 63.15 (Availability of information confidentiality). The following 
sections of part 63 apply to the extent specified in this subpart and 
Table 1: Sec. 63.6 (Compliance with standards and maintenance 
requirements), Sec. 63.9 (Notification requirements), and Sec. 63.10 
(Recordkeeping and reporting requirements). Section Sec. 63.11 (Control 
device requirements) does not apply to this subpart.



Sec. 63.1542  Definitions.

    Terms used in this subpart are defined in the Act, in subpart A of 
this part, or in this section as follows:
    Bag leak detection system means a system that is capable of 
continuously monitoring relative particulate matter (dust) loadings in 
the exhaust of a baghouse in order to detect bag leaks and other upset 
conditions. A bag leak detection system includes, but is not limited to, 
an instrument that operates on triboelectric, light scattering, light 
transmittance, or other effect to continuously monitor relative 
particulate matter loadings.
    Blast furnace means any reduction furnace to which sinter is charged 
and which forms separate layers of molten slag and lead bullion.
    Building means a roofed and walled structure with limited openings 
to allow access and egress for people and vehicles.
    Charging location means the physical opening through which raw 
materials are introduced into a sinter machine, blast furnace, or dross 
furnace.
    Dross furnace means any smelting furnace to which drosses are 
charged and which chemically and physically separates lead from other 
impurities.
    Drossing and refining kettle means an open-top vessel that is 
constructed of cast iron or steel and is indirectly heated from below 
and contains molten lead for the purpose of drossing, refining, or 
alloying lead. Included are pot furnaces, receiving kettles, and holding 
kettles.
    Fugitive dust source means a stationary source of hazardous air 
pollutant emissions at a primary lead smelter resulting from the 
handling, storage, transfer, or other management of lead-bearing 
materials where the source is not associated with a specific process, 
process vent, or stack. Fugitive dust sources include roadways, storage 
piles, materials handling transfer points, and materials transport 
areas.
    Furnace area means any area of a primary lead smelter in which a 
blast furnace or dross furnace is located.
    Malfunction means any sudden, infrequent, and not reasonably 
preventable failure of air pollution control equipment, process 
equipment, or a process to operate in a normal or usual manner. Failures 
that are caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are 
not malfunctions.
    Materials storage and handling area means any area of a primary lead 
smelter in which lead-bearing materials (including ore concentrate, 
sinter, granulated lead, dross, slag, and flue dust) are stored or 
handled between process steps, including areas in which

[[Page 461]]

materials are stored in piles, bins, or tubs, and areas in which 
material is prepared for charging to a sinter machine or smelting 
furnace.
    Operating time means the period of time in hours that an affected 
source is in operation beginning at a startup and ending at the next 
shutdown.
    Plant operating time means the period of time in hours that either a 
sinter machine or blast furnace is in operation.
    Plant roadway means any area of a primary lead smelter that is 
subject to vehicle traffic, including traffic by fork lifts, front-end 
loaders, or vehicles carrying ore concentrates or cast lead ingots. 
Excluded from this definition are employee and visitor parking areas, 
provided they are not subject to traffic by vehicles carrying lead-
bearing materials.
    Primary lead smelter means any facility engaged in the production of 
lead metal from lead sulfide ore concentrates through the use of 
pyrometallurgical techniques.
    Process fugitive source means a source of hazardous air pollutant 
emissions at a primary lead smelter that is associated with lead 
smelting or refining but is not the primary exhaust stream and is not a 
fugitive dust source. Process fugitive sources include sinter machine 
charging locations, sinter machine discharge locations, sinter crushing 
and sizing equipment, furnace charging locations, furnace taps, drossing 
kettles, and refining kettles.
    Refining and casting area means any area of a primary lead smelter 
in which drossing or refining operations occur, or casting operations 
occur.
    Shutdown means the cessation of operation of an affected source for 
any purpose.
    Sinter machine means any device in which a lead sulfide ore 
concentrate charge is heated in the presence of air to eliminate sulfur 
contained in the charge and to agglomerate the charge into a hard porous 
mass called sinter.
    Sinter machine area means any area of a primary lead smelter where a 
sinter machine, or sinter crushing and sizing equipment is located.
    Sinter machine discharge end means the physical opening at the end 
of a sinter machine where the sinter exits the sinter machine.
    Startup means the setting in operation of an affected source for any 
purpose.
    Tapping location means the opening thru which lead and slag are 
removed from the furnace.



Sec. 63.1543  Standards for process and process fugitive sources.

    (a) No owner or operator of any existing, new, or reconstructed 
primary lead smelter shall discharge or cause to be discharged into the 
atmosphere lead compounds in excess of 500 grams of lead per megagram of 
lead metal produced (1.0 pounds of lead per ton of lead metal produced) 
from the aggregation of emissions discharged from the air pollution 
control devices used to control emissions from the sources listed in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(9) of this section.
    (1) Sinter machine;
    (2) Blast furnace;
    (3) Dross furnace;
    (4) Dross furnace charging location;
    (5) Blast furnace and dross furnace tapping location;
    (6) Sinter machine charging location;
    (7) Sinter machine discharge end;
    (8) Sinter crushing and sizing equipment; and
    (9) Sinter machine area.
    (b) The process fugitive sources listed in paragraphs (a)(4) through 
(a)(8) of this section shall be equipped with a hood and shall be 
ventilated to a baghouse or equivalent control device. The hood design 
and ventilation rate shall be consistent with American Conference of 
Governmental Industrial Hygienists recommended practices.
    (c) The sinter machine area shall be enclosed in a building that is 
ventilated to a baghouse or equivalent control device at a rate that 
maintains a positive in-draft through any doorway opening.
    (d) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, following 
the initial test to demonstrate compliance with paragraph (a) of this 
section, the owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall conduct a 
compliance test for lead compounds on an annual basis (no later than 12 
calendar months following any previous compliance test).

[[Page 462]]

    (e) If the three most recent compliance tests demonstrate compliance 
with the emission limit specified in paragraph (a) of this section, the 
owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall be allowed up to 24 
calendar months from the last compliance test to conduct the next 
compliance test for lead compounds.
    (f) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall maintain 
and operate each baghouse used to control emissions from the sources 
listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(9) of this section such that the 
alarm on a bag leak detection system required under Sec. 63.1547(c)(9) 
does not sound for more than five percent of the total operating time in 
a 6-month reporting period.
    (g) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall record the 
date and time of a bag leak detection system alarm and initiate 
procedures to determine the cause of the alarm according to the 
corrective action plan required under Sec. 63.1547(c)(9) within 1 hour 
of the alarm. The cause of the alarm shall be corrected as soon as 
practicable.



Sec. 63.1544  Standards for fugitive dust sources.

    (a) Each owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall prepare, 
and at all times operate according to, a standard operating procedures 
manual that describes in detail the measures that will be put in place 
to control fugitive dust emissions from the sources listed in paragraphs 
(a)(1) through (a)(5) of this section:
    (1) Plant roadways;
    (2) Material storage and handling area(s);
    (3) Sinter machine area(s);
    (4) Furnace area(s); and
    (5) Refining and casting area(s).
    (b) Not withstanding paragraph (c) of this section, the standard 
operating procedures manual shall be submitted to the Administrator or 
delegated authority for review and approval.
    (c) Existing manuals that describe the measures in place to control 
fugitive dust sources required as part of a State implementation plan 
for lead shall satisfy the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section 
provided they address the sources listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(a)(5) of this section.



Sec. 63.1545  Compliance dates.

    (a) Each owner or operator of an existing primary lead smelter shall 
achieve compliance with the requirements of this subpart no later than 
May 4, 2001.
    (b) Each owner or operator of a primary lead smelter that commences 
construction or reconstruction after April 17, 1998, shall achieve 
compliance with the requirements of this subpart by June 4, 1999 or upon 
startup of operations, whichever is later.



Sec. 63.1546  Test methods.

    (a) The following procedure shall be used to determine compliance 
with the emissions standard for lead compounds under Sec. 63.1543(a):
    (1) The lead compound emission rate, in units of grams of lead per 
hour, for each source listed in Sec. 63.1543(a)(1) through 
Sec. 63.1543(a)(9) shall be determined according to the following test 
methods in appendix A of part 60 of this chapter:
    (i) Method 1 shall be used to select the sampling port location and 
the number of traverse points.
    (ii) Method 2 shall be used to measure volumetric flow rate.
    (iii) Method 3 shall be used for gas analysis.
    (iv) Method 4 shall be used to determine moisture content of the 
stack gas
    (v) Method 12 shall be used to measure the lead emission rate of the 
stack gas. The minimum sample volume shall be 0.85 dry standard cubic 
meters (30 dry standard cubic feet) and the minimum sampling time shall 
be 60 minutes for each run. Three runs shall be performed and the 
average of the three runs shall be used to determine compliance.
    (2) The lead production rate, in units of megagrams per hour, shall 
be determined based on production data for the previous 12 calendar 
months according to the procedures detailed in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) 
through (a)(2)(v) of this section:
    (i) Total lead products production multiplied by the fractional lead 
content shall be determined in units of megragrams.

[[Page 463]]

    (ii) Total copper matte production multiplied by the fractional lead 
content shall be determined in units of megragrams.
    (iii) Total copper speiss production multiplied by the fractional 
lead content shall be determined in units of megragrams.
    (iv) Total lead production shall be determined by summing the values 
obtained in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (v) The lead production rate, in units of megragrams per hours, 
shall be calculated based on the total lead production, as determined in 
accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section, divided by the 
total plant operating time, in hours, for the previous 12 months.
    (3) The sum of lead compound emission rates for the sources in 
Sec. 63.1543(a)((1) through (a)(9), as determined in accordance with 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section, shall be divided by the lead 
production rate, as determined in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(v) of 
this section, to obtain a production-based, lead compound emission rate 
in units of grams of lead per megagram of lead metal produced. The 
production-based, lead compound emission rate shall be used to determine 
compliance with the emissions standard for lead compounds under 
Sec. 63.1543(a).
    (b) Owner and operators shall perform an initial compliance test to 
demonstrate compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirements of 
Sec. 63.1543(c) at each doorway opening in accordance with paragraphs 
(b)(1) through (b)(4) of this section.
    (1) Use a propeller anemometer or equivalent device.
    (2) Determine doorway in-draft by placing the anemometer in the 
plane of the doorway opening near its center.
    (3) Determine doorway in-draft for each doorway that is open during 
normal operation with all remaining doorways in their customary position 
during normal operation.
    (4) Do not determine doorway in-draft when ambient wind speed 
exceeds 2 meters per second.



Sec. 63.1547  Monitoring requirements.

    (a) Owners and operators of primary lead smelters shall prepare, and 
at all times operate according to, a standard operating procedures 
manual that describes in detail the procedures for inspection, 
maintenance, and bag leak detection and corrective action for all 
baghouses that are used to control process, process fugitive, or 
fugitive dust emissions from any source subject to the lead emission 
standards in Secs. 63.1543 and 63.1544, including those used to control 
emissions from general ventilation systems.
    (b) The standard operating procedures manual for baghouses required 
by paragraph (a) of this section shall be submitted to the Administrator 
or delegated authority for review and approval.
    (c) The procedures specified in the standard operating procedures 
manual for inspections and routine maintenance shall, at a minimum, 
include the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(9) of this 
section.
    (1) Daily monitoring of pressure drop across each baghouse cell to 
ensure pressure drop is within the normal operating range identified in 
the standard operating procedures manual.
    (2) Weekly confirmation that dust is being removed from hoppers 
through visual inspection or equivalent means of ensuring the proper 
functioning of removal mechanisms.
    (3) Daily check of compressed air supply for pulse-jet baghouses.
    (4) An appropriate methodology for monitoring cleaning cycles to 
ensure proper operation.
    (5) Monthly check of bag cleaning mechanisms for proper functioning 
through visual inspection or equivalent means.
    (6) Quarterly visual check of bag tension on reverse air and shaker-
type baghouses to ensure that bags are not kinked (kneed or bent) or 
laying on their sides. Such checks are not required for shaker-type 
baghouses using self-tensioning (spring loaded) devices.
    (7) Quarterly confirmation of the physical integrity of the baghouse 
through visual inspection of the baghouse interior for air leaks.
    (8) Quarterly inspection of fans for wear, material buildup, and 
corrosion

[[Page 464]]

through visual inspection, vibration detectors, or equivalent means.
    (9) Except as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, continuous 
operation of a bag leak detection system.
    (d) The procedures specified in the standard operating procedures 
manual for maintenance shall, at a minimum, include a preventative 
maintenance schedule that is consistent with the baghouse manufacturer's 
instructions for routine and long-term maintenance.
    (e) The bag leak detection system required by paragraph (c)(9) of 
this section shall meet the specifications and requirements of (e)(1) 
through (e)(8) of this section.
    (1) The bag leak detection system must be certified by the 
manufacturer to be capable of detecting particulate matter emissions at 
concentrations of 10 milligram per actual cubic meter (0.0044 grains per 
actual cubic foot) or less.
    (2) The bag leak detection system sensor must provide output of 
relative particulate matter loadings, and the owner or operator shall 
continuously record the output from the bag leak detection system.
    (3) The bag leak detection system must be equipped with an alarm 
system that will sound when an increase in relative particulate loading 
is detected over a preset level, and the alarm must be located such that 
it can be heard by the appropriate plant personnel.
    (4) Each bag leak detection system that works based on the 
triboelectric effect shall be installed, calibrated, and maintained in a 
manner consistent with guidance provided in the U.S. Environmental 
Protection Agency guidance document ``Fabric Filter Bag Leak Detection 
Guidance'' (EPA-454/R-98-015). Other bag leak detection systems shall be 
installed, calibrated, and maintained in a manner consistent with the 
manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations.
    (5) The initial adjustment of the system shall, at a minimum, 
consist of establishing the baseline output by adjusting the sensitivity 
(range) and the averaging period of the device, and establishing the 
alarm set points and the alarm delay time.
    (6) Following initial adjustment, the owner or operator shall not 
adjust the sensitivity or range, averaging period, alarm set points, or 
alarm delay time, except as detailed in the approved SOP required under 
paragraph (a) of this section. In no event shall the sensitivity be 
increased by more than 100 percent or decreased more than 50 percent 
over a 365-day period unless a responsible official certifies that the 
baghouse has been inspected and found to be in good operating condition.
    (7) For negative pressure, induced air baghouses, and positive 
pressure baghouses that are discharged to the atmosphere through a 
stack, the bag leak detector must be installed downstream of the 
baghouse and upstream of any wet acid gas scrubber.
    (8) Where multiple detectors are required, the system's 
instrumentation and alarm may be shared among detectors.
    (f) The standard operating procedures manual required by paragraph 
(a) of this section shall include a corrective action plan that 
specifies the procedures to be followed in the event of a bag leak 
detection system alarm. The corrective action plan shall include, at a 
minimum, procedures to be used to determine the cause of an alarm, as 
well as actions to be taken to minimize emissions, which may include, 
but are not limited to, the following.
    (1) Inspecting the baghouse for air leaks, torn or broken bags or 
filter media, or any other condition that may cause an increase in 
emissions.
    (2) Sealing off defective bags or filter media.
    (3) Replacing defective bags or filter media, or otherwise repairing 
the control device.
    (4) Sealing off a defective baghouse compartment.
    (5) Cleaning the bag leak detection system probe, or otherwise 
repairing the bag leak detection system.
    (6) Shutting down the process producing the particulate emissions.
    (g) The percentage of total operating time the alarm on the bag leak 
detection system sounds in a 6-month reporting period shall be 
calculated in order to determine compliance with the five percent 
operating limit in Sec. 63.1543(f). The percentage of time the

[[Page 465]]

alarm on the bag leak detection system sounds shall be determined 
according to paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(5) of this section.
    (1) Alarms that occur due solely to a malfunction of the bag leak 
detection system shall not be included in the calculation.
    (2) Alarms that occur during startup, shutdown, or malfunction shall 
not be included in the calculation if the condition is described in the 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan and the owner or operator 
follows all the procedures in the plan defined for this condition.
    (3) For each alarm where the owner or operator initiates procedures 
to determine the cause of an alarm within 1 hour of the alarm, 1 hour of 
alarm time shall be counted.
    (4) For each alarm where the owner or operator does not initiate 
procedures to determine the cause of the alarm within 1 hour of the 
alarm, alarm time will be counted as the actual amount of time taken by 
the owner or operator to initiate procedures to determine the cause of 
the alarm.
    (5) The percentage of time the alarm on the bag leak detection 
system sounds shall be calculated as the ratio of the sum of alarm times 
to the total operating time multiplied by 100.
    (h) Baghouses equipped with HEPA filters as a secondary filter used 
to control process or process fugitive sources subject to the lead 
emission standards in Sec. 63.1543 are exempt from the requirement in 
Sec. 63.1543(c)(9) to be equipped with a bag leak detector. The owner or 
operator of an affected source that uses a HEPA filter shall monitor and 
record the pressure drop across the HEPA filter system daily. If the 
pressure drop is outside the limit(s) specified by the filter 
manufacturer, the owner or operator must take appropriate corrective 
measures, which may include, but not be limited to, the following:
    (1) Inspecting the filter and filter housing for air leaks and torn 
or broken filters.
    (2) Replacing defective filter media, or otherwise repairing the 
control device.
    (3) Sealing off a defective control device by routing air to other 
control devices.
    (4) Shutting down the process producing the particulate emissions.
    (i) Owners and operators shall monitor sinter machine building in-
draft to demonstrate continued compliance with the operating standard 
specified in Sec. 63.1543(c) in accordance with either paragraph (i)(1), 
(i)(2), or (i)(3) of this section.
    (1) Owners and operators shall check and record on a daily basis 
doorway in-draft at each doorway in accordance with the methodology 
specified in Sec. 63.1546(b).
    (2) Owners and operators shall establish and maintain baseline 
ventilation parameters which result in a positive in-draft according to 
paragraphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(iv) of this section.
    (i) Owners and operators shall install, calibrate, maintain, and 
operate a monitoring device that continuously records the actual 
volumetric flow rate through each separately ducted hood; or install, 
calibrate, maintain, and operate a monitoring device that continuously 
records the volumetric flow rate at the control device inlet of each 
exhaust system ventilating the building. The flow rate monitoring 
device(s) can be installed in any location in the exhaust duct such that 
reproducible flow rate monitoring will result. The flow rate monitoring 
device(s) shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 10 percent over its 
normal operating range and shall be calibrated according to 
manufacturer's instructions.
    (ii) During the initial demonstration of sinter building in-draft, 
and at any time the owner or operator wishes to re-establish the 
baseline ventilation parameters, the owner or operator shall 
continuously record the volumetric flow rate through each separately 
ducted hood, or continuously record the volumetric flow rate at the 
control device inlet of each exhaust system ventilating the building and 
record exhaust system damper positions. The owner or operator shall 
determine the average volumetric flow rate(s) corresponding to the 
period of time the in-draft compliance determinations are being 
conducted.

[[Page 466]]

    (iii) The owner or operator shall maintain the volumetric flow 
rate(s) at or above the value(s) established during the most recent in-
draft determination at all times the sinter machine is in operation. 
Volumetric flow rate(s) shall be calculated as a 15-minute average.
    (iv) If the volumetric flow rate is monitored at the control device 
inlet, the owner or operator shall check and record damper positions 
daily to ensure they are in the positions they were in during the most 
recent in-draft determination.
    (3) An owner or operator may request an alternative monitoring 
method by following the procedures and requirements in Sec. 63.8(f) of 
the General Provisions.



Sec. 63.1548  Notification requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall comply 
with all of the notification requirements of Sec. 63.9 of subpart A, 
General Provisions.
    (b) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall submit the 
fugitive dust control standard operating procedures manual required 
under Sec. 63.1544(a) and the standard operating procedures manual for 
baghouses required under Sec. 63.1547(a) to the Administrator or 
delegated authority along with a notification that the smelter is 
seeking review and approval of these plans and procedures. Owners or 
operators of existing primary lead smelters shall submit this 
notification no later than November 6, 2000. The owner or operator of a 
primary lead smelter that commences construction or reconstruction after 
April 17, 1998, shall submit this notification no later than 180 days 
before startup of the constructed or reconstructed primary lead smelter, 
but no sooner than September 2, 1999.



Sec. 63.1549  Recordkeeping and reporting requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall comply 
with all of the recordkeeping requirements of Sec. 63.10 of subpart A, 
General Provisions.
    (b) In addition to the general records required by paragraph (a) of 
this section, each owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall 
maintain for a period of 5 years, records of the information listed in 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(8) of this section.
    (1) Production records of the weight and lead content of lead 
products, copper matte, and copper speiss.
    (2) Records of the bag leak detection system output.
    (3) An identification of the date and time of all bag leak detection 
system alarms, the time that procedures to determine the cause of the 
alarm were initiated, the cause of the alarm, an explanation of the 
actions taken, and the date and time the cause of the alarm was 
corrected.
    (4) Any recordkeeping required as part of the practices described in 
the standard operating procedures manual required under Sec. 63.1544(a) 
for the control of fugitive dust emissions.
    (5) Any recorkeeping required as part of the practices described in 
the standard operating procedures manual for baghouses required under 
Sec. 63.1547(a).
    (6) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(1), 
the records of the daily doorway in-draft checks, an identification of 
the periods when there was not a positive in-draft, and an explanation 
of the corrective actions taken.
    (7) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(2), 
the records of the output from the continuous volumetric flow 
monitor(s), an identification of the periods when the 15-minute 
volumetric flow rate dropped below the minimum established during the 
most recent in-draft determination, and an explanation of the corrective 
actions taken.
    (8) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(2), 
and volumetric flow rate is monitored at the baghouse inlet, records of 
the daily checks of damper positions, an identification of the days that 
the

[[Page 467]]

damper positions were not in the positions established during the most 
recent in-draft determination, and an explanation of the corrective 
actions taken.
    (c) Records for the most recent 2 years of operation must be 
maintained on site. Records for the previous 3 years may be maintained 
off site.
    (d) The owner or operator of a primary lead smelter shall comply 
with all of the reporting requirements of Sec. 63.10 of subpart A, 
General Provisions.
    (e) In addition to the information required under Sec. 63.10 of the 
General Provisions, the owner or operator shall provide semi-annual 
reports containing the information specified in paragraphs (e)(1) 
through (e)(7) of this section to the Administrator or designated 
authority.
    (1) The reports shall include records of all alarms from the bag 
leak detection system specified in Sec. 63.1547(e).
    (2) The reports shall include a description of the actions taken 
following each bag leak detection system alarm pursuant to 
Sec. 63.1547(f).
    (3) The reports shall include a calculation of the percentage of 
time the alarm on the bag leak detection system sounded during the 
reporting period pursuant to Sec. 63.1547(g).
    (4) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(1), 
the reports shall contain an identification of the periods when there 
was not a positive in-draft, and an explanation of the corrective 
actions taken.
    (5) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(2), 
the reports shall contain an identification of the periods when the 15-
minute volumetric flow rate(s) dropped below the minimum established 
during the most recent in-draft determination, and an explanation of the 
corrective actions taken.
    (6) If an owner or operator chooses to demonstrate continuous 
compliance with the sinter building in-draft requirement under 
Sec. 63.1543(c) by employing the method allowed in Sec. 63.1546(i)(2), 
and volumetric flow rate is monitored at the baghouse inlet, the reports 
shall contain an identification of the days that the damper positions 
were not in the positions established during the most recent in-draft 
determination, and an explanation of the corrective actions taken.
    (7) The reports shall contain a summary of the records maintained as 
part of the practices described in the standard operating procedures 
manual for baghouses required under Sec. 63.1547(a), including an 
explanation of the periods when the procedures were not followed and the 
corrective actions taken.
    (8) The reports shall contain a summary of the fugitive dust control 
measures performed during the required reporting period, including an 
explanation of any periods when the procedures outlined in the standard 
operating procedures manual required by Sec. 63.1544(a) were not 
followed and the corrective actions taken. The reports shall not contain 
copies of the daily records required to demonstrate compliance with the 
requirements of the standard operating procedures manuals required under 
Secs. 63.1544(a) and Sec. 63.1547(a).



Sec. 63.1550  Delegation of authority

    (a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a 
State under section 112(1) of the act, the authorities contained in 
paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and 
not transferred to a State.
    (b) Authorities which will not be delegated to States: no 
restrictions.

 Table 1 of Subpart TTT--General Provisions Applicability to Subpart TTT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                               Applies to subpart
          Reference                    TTT                Comment
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  63.1...................                Yes
Sec.  63.2...................                Yes
Sec.  63.3...................                Yes
Sec.  63.4...................                Yes
Sec.  63.5...................                Yes

[[Page 468]]

 
Sec.  63.6(a), (b), (c), (e),                Yes
 (f), (g), (i) and (j).
Sec.  63.6(d) and (h)........                 No   No opacity limits in
                                                    rule.
Sec.  63.7...................                Yes
Sec.  63.8...................                Yes
Sec.  63.9 (a), (b), (c),                    Yes
 (d), (e), (g), (h)(1)
 through (3), (h)(5) and (6),
 (i) and (j).
Sec.  63.9(f) and (h)(4).....                 No   No opacity or visible
                                                    emission limits in
                                                    rule.
Sec.  63.10..................                Yes
Sec.  63.11..................                 No   Flares will not be
                                                    used to comply with
                                                    the emission limits.
Sec.  63.12 through 63.15....                Yes
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Subparts UUU--WWW  [Reserved]



 Subpart XXX--National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants 
     for Ferroalloys Production: Ferromanganese and Silicomanganese

    Source: 64 FR 27458, May 20, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



Secs. 63.1620-63.1649  [Reserved]



Sec. 63.1650  Applicability and compliance dates.

    (a) This subpart applies to all new and existing ferromanganese and 
silicomanganese production facilities that manufacture ferromanganese or 
silicomanganese and are major sources or are co-located at major sources 
of hazardous air pollutant emissions.
    (b) The following sources at a ferromanganese and silicomanganese 
production facility are subject to this subpart:
    (1) Submerged arc furnaces.
    (2) Metal oxygen refining (MOR) process.
    (3) Crushing and screening operations.
    (4) Fugitive dust sources.
    (c) A new affected source is one for which construction or 
reconstruction commenced after August 4, 1998.
    (d) The following table specifies which provisions of subpart A of 
this part apply to owners and operators of ferromanganese and 
silicomanganese production facilities subject to this subpart:

[[Page 469]]



                                 General Provisions Applicability to Subpart XXX
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Reference, Subpart A General       Applies to Subpart XXX,
             Provisions                    63.1620-63.1679                           Comment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63.1-63.5...........................  Yes.....................
63.6(a)-(g), (i)-(j)................  Yes.....................
63.6(h)(1)-(h)(6), (h)(8)-(h)(9)....  Yes.....................
63.7(h)(7)..........................  No......................  Sec.  63.6(h)(7), use of continuous opacity
                                                                 monitoring system, not applicable.
63.7................................  Yes.....................
63.8................................  Yes.....................
63.9................................  Yes.....................  Notification of performance test results changed
                                                                 to a 30-day notification period.
63.10...............................  Yes.....................  Allow changes in dates by which periodic reports
                                                                 are submitted by mutual agreement between the
                                                                 owner or operator and the State to occur any
                                                                 time after the source's compliance date.
63.11...............................  No......................  Flares will not be used to comply with the
                                                                 emission limits.
63.12-63.15.........................  Yes.....................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 470]]

    (e) Compliance dates. (1) Each owner or operator of an existing 
affected source must comply with the requirements of this subpart no 
later than May 21, 2001.
    (2) Each owner or operator of a new or reconstructed affected source 
that commences construction or reconstruction after August 4, 1998, must 
comply with the requirements of this subpart by May 20, 1999 or upon 
startup of operations, whichever is later.



Sec. 63.1651  Definitions.

    Terms in this subpart are defined in the Clean Air Act (Act), in 
subpart A of this part, or in this section as follows:
    Bag leak detection system means a system that is capable of 
continuously monitoring particulate matter (dust) loadings in the 
exhaust of a baghouse in order to detect bag leaks and other upset 
conditions. A bag leak detection system includes, but is not limited to, 
an instrument that operates on triboelectric, light scattering, light 
transmittance, or other effect to continuously monitor relative 
particulate matter loadings.
    Capture system means the equipment (including hoods, ducts, fans, 
dampers, etc.) used to capture or transport particulate matter generated 
by an affected submerged arc furnace.
    Casting means the period of time from when molten ferroalloy falls 
from the furnace tapping runner into the ladle until pouring into molds 
is completed. This includes the following operations: ladle filling, 
pouring alloy from one ladle to another, slag separation, slag removal, 
and ladle transfer by crane, truck, or other conveyance.
    Crushing and screening equipment means the crushers, grinders, 
mills, screens and conveying systems used to crush, size, and prepare 
for packing manganese-containing materials, including raw materials, 
intermediate products, and final products.
    Fugitive dust source means a stationary source from which manganese-
bearing particles are discharged to the atmosphere due to wind or 
mechanical inducement such as vehicle traffic. Fugitive dust sources 
include plant roadways, yard areas, and outdoor material storage and 
transfer operations.
    Furnace power input means the resistive electrical power consumption 
of a submerged arc furnace, expressed as megawatts (MW).
    Malfunction means any sudden, infrequent, and not reasonably 
preventable failure of air pollution control equipment, process 
equipment, or a process to operate in a normal or usual manner. Failures 
caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not 
malfunctions.
    Metal oxygen refining (MOR) process means the reduction of the 
carbon content of ferromanganese through the use of oxygen.
    Open submerged arc furnace means an electric submerged arc furnace 
that is equipped with a canopy hood above the furnace to collect primary 
emissions.
    Operating time means the period of time in hours that the affected 
source is in operation beginning at a startup and ending at the next 
shutdown.
    Plant roadway means any area at a ferromanganese and silicomanganese 
production facility that is subject to plant mobile equipment, such as 
fork lifts, front end loaders, or trucks, carrying manganese-bearing 
materials. Excluded from this definition are employee and visitor 
parking areas, provided they are not subject to traffic by plant mobile 
equipment.
    Primary emissions means gases and emissions collected by hoods and 
ductwork located above an open furnace or under the cover of a semi-
closed or sealed furnace.
    Sealed submerged arc furnace means an electric submerged arc furnace 
equipped with a total enclosure or cover from which primary emissions 
are evacuated directly.
    Semi-closed submerged arc furnace means an electric submerged arc 
furnace equipped with a partially sealed cover over the furnace. This 
cover is equipped with openings to allow penetration of the electrodes 
into the furnace. Mix is introduced into the furnace around the 
electrode holes forming a partial seal between the electrodes and the 
cover. Furnace emissions generated under the cover are ducted to an 
emission control device. Emissions that escape the cover are collected 
and vented through stacks directly to the atmosphere.

[[Page 471]]

    Shop means the building which houses one or more submerged arc 
furnaces.
    Shutdown means the cessation of operation of an affected source for 
any purpose.
    Startup means the setting in operation of an affected source for any 
purpose.
    Submerged arc furnace means any furnace wherein electrical energy is 
converted to heat energy by transmission of current between electrodes 
partially submerged in the furnace charge. The furnace may be of an 
open, semi-sealed, or sealed design.
    Tapping emissions means a source of air pollutant emissions that 
occur during the process of removing the molten product from the 
furnace.
    Tapping period means the time from when a tap hole is opened until 
the time a tap hole is closed.



Sec. 63.1652  Emission standards.

    (a) New and reconstructed submerged arc furnaces. No owner or 
operator shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from any new 
or reconstructed submerged arc furnace exhaust gases (including primary 
and tapping) containing particulate matter in excess of one of the 
following:
    (1) 0.23 kilograms per hour per megawatt (kg/hr/MW) (0.51 pounds per 
hour per megawatt [lb/hr/MW]), or
    (2) 35 milligrams per dry standard cubic meter (mg/dscm) (0.015 
grains per dry standard cubic foot [gr/dscf]).
    (b) Existing open submerged arc furnaces. No owner or operator shall 
cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from any existing open 
submerged arc furnace exhaust gases (including primary and tapping) 
containing particulate matter in excess of one of the following:
    (1) 16.3 kilograms per hour (kg/hr) (35.9 pounds per hour [lb/hr]) 
when producing silicomanganese, or
    (2) 6.4 kg/hr (14.0 lb/hr) when producing ferromanganese.
    (c) Existing semi-sealed submerged arc furnaces. No owner or 
operator shall cause to be discharged into the atmosphere from any 
existing semi-sealed submerged arc furnace exhaust gases (including 
primary, tapping, and vent stacks) containing particulate matter in 
excess of 11.2 kg/hr (24.7 lb/hr) when producing ferromanganese.
    (d) MOR process. No owner or operator shall cause to be discharged 
into the atmosphere from any new, reconstructed, or existing MOR process 
exhaust gases containing particulate matter in excess of 69 mg/dscm 
(0.03 gr/dscf).
    (e) Crushing and screening equipment. (1) New and reconstructed 
equipment. No owner or operator shall cause to be discharged into the 
atmosphere from any new or reconstructed piece of equipment associated 
with crushing and screening exhaust gases containing particulate matter 
in excess of 50 mg/dscm (0.022 gr/dscf).
    (2) Existing equipment. No owner or operator shall cause to be 
discharged into the atmosphere from any existing piece of equipment 
associated with crushing and screening exhaust gases containing 
particulate matter in excess of 69 (mg/dscm) (0.03 gr/dscf).



Sec. 63.1653  Opacity standards.

    No owner or operator shall cause emissions exiting from a shop due 
solely to operations of any affected submerged arc furnace, to exceed 20 
percent opacity for more than one 6-minute period during any performance 
test, with the following exceptions:
    (a) Visible particulate emissions from a shop due solely to 
operation of a semi-closed submerged arc furnace, may exceed 20 percent 
opacity, measured as a 6-minute average, one time during any performance 
test, so long as the emissions never exceed 60 percent opacity, measured 
as a 6-minute average.
    (b) Blowing taps, poling and oxygen lancing of the tap hole; 
burndowns associated with electrode measurements; and maintenance 
activities associated with submerged arc furnaces and casting operations 
are exempt from the opacity standards specified in this section.



Sec. 63.1654  Operational and work practice standards.

    (a) Fugitive dust sources. (1) Each owner or operator of an affected 
ferromanganese and silicomanganese production facility must prepare, and

[[Page 472]]

at all times operate according to, a fugitive dust control plan that 
describes in detail the measures that will be put in place to control 
fugitive dust emissions from the individual fugitive dust sources at the 
facility.
    (2) The owner or operator must submit a copy of the fugitive dust 
control plan to the designated permitting authority on or before the 
applicable compliance date for the affected source as specified in 
Sec. 63.1650(e). The requirement for the owner or operator to operate 
the facility according to a written fugitive dust control plan must be 
incorporated in the operating permit for the facility that is issued by 
the designated permitting authority under part 70 of this chapter.
    (3) The owner or operator may use existing manuals that describe the 
measures in place to control fugitive dust sources required as part of a 
State implementation plan or other federally enforceable requirement for 
particulate matter to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section.
    (b) Baghouses equipped with bag leak detection systems. The owner or 
operator of a new or reconstructed submerged arc furnace must install 
and continuously operate a bag leak detection system if the furnace's 
primary and/or tapping emissions are ducted to a negative pressure 
baghouse or to a positive pressure baghouse equipped with a stack. The 
owner or operator must maintain and operate each baghouse such that the 
following conditions are met:
    (1) The alarm on the system does not sound for more than 5 percent 
of the total operating time in a 6-month reporting period.
    (2) A record is made of the date and time of each alarm and 
procedures to determine the cause of the alarm are initiated within 1 
hour of the alarm according to the plan for corrective action required 
under Sec. 63.1657(a)(7).



Sec. 63.1655  Maintenance requirements.

    (a) The owner or operator of an affected source must comply with the 
requirements of Sec. 63.6(e) of subpart A.
    (b)(1) The owner or operator must develop and implement a written 
maintenance plan for each air pollution control device associated with 
submerged arc furnaces, metal oxygen refining processes, and crushing 
and screening operations subject to the provisions of this part. The 
owner or operator must keep the maintenance plan on record and available 
for the Administrator's inspection for the life of the air pollution 
control device or until the affected source is no longer subject to the 
provisions of this part.
    (2) To satisfy the requirement to develop maintenance plans, the 
owner or operator may use the affected source's standard operating 
procedures (SOP) manual or other plan, provided the alternative plan 
meets the requirements of this paragraph and is made available for 
inspection when requested by the Administrator.
    (c) The procedures specified in the maintenance plan must include a 
preventive maintenance schedule that is consistent with good air 
pollution control practices for minimizing emissions and, for baghouses, 
ensure that the requirements specified in Sec. 63.1657(a) are met.
    (d) The owner or operator must perform monthly inspections of the 
equipment that is important to the performance of the furnace capture 
system. This inspection must include an examination of the physical 
condition of the equipment, suitable for detecting holes in ductwork or 
hoods, flow constrictions in ductwork due to dents or accumulated dust, 
and operational status of flow rate controllers (pressure sensors, 
dampers, damper switches, etc.). Any deficiencies must be recorded and 
proper maintenance and repairs performed.



Sec. 63.1656  Performance testing, test methods, and compliance demonstrations.

    (a) Performance testing. (1) All performance tests must be conducted 
according to the requirements in Sec. 63.7 of subpart A.
    (2) Each performance test must consist of three separate and 
complete runs using the applicable test methods.
    (3) Each run must be conducted under conditions that are 
representative of normal process operations.
    (4) Performance tests conducted on air pollution control devices 
serving submerged arc furnaces must be conducted such that at least one 
tapping

[[Page 473]]

period, or at least 20 minutes of a tapping period, whichever is less, 
is included in at least two of the three runs. The sampling time for 
each run must be at least as long as three times the average tapping 
period of the tested furnace, but no less than 60 minutes.
    (5) The sample volume for each run must be at least 0.9 dscm (30 
dscf).
    (b) Test methods. The following test methods in Appendix A of part 
60 of this chapter must be used to determine compliance with the 
emission standards.
    (1) Method 1 to select the sampling port location and the number of 
traverse points.
    (2) Method 2 to determine the volumetric flow rate of the stack gas.
    (3) Method 3 to determine the dry molecular weight of the stack gas.
    (4) Method 4 to determine the moisture content of the stack gas.
    (5) Method 5 to determine the particulate matter concentration of 
the stack gas for negative pressure baghouses and positive pressure 
baghouses with stacks.
    (6) Method 5D to determine particulate matter concentration and 
volumetric flow rate of the stack gas for positive pressure baghouses 
without stacks.
    (7) Method 9 to determine opacity.
    (8) The owner or operator may use equivalent alternative measurement 
methods approved by the Administrator following the procedures described 
in Sec. 63.7(f) of subpart A.
    (c) Compliance demonstration with the emission standards. (1) The 
owner or operator must conduct an initial performance test for air 
pollution control devices or vent stacks subject to Sec. 63.1652(a) 
through (e) to demonstrate compliance with the applicable emission 
standards.
    (2) The owner or operator must conduct annual performance tests for 
the air pollution control devices and vent stacks associated with the 
submerged arc furnaces, with the exception of any air pollution control 
devices that serve tapping emissions combined with non-furnace 
emissions, such as the MOR process or equipment associated with crushing 
and screening. Also excluded are air pollution control devices that 
serve dedicated non-furnace emissions, such as the MOR process or 
equipment associated with crushing and screening. The results of these 
annual tests will be used to demonstrate compliance with the emission 
standards in Sec. 63.1652(a) through (e), as applicable.
    (3) Following development, and approval, if required, of the site-
specific test plan, the owner or operator must conduct a performance 
test for each air pollution control device or vent stack to measure 
particulate matter and determine compliance with the applicable 
standard.
    (i) An owner or operator of sources subject to the particulate 
matter concentration standards in Sec. 63.1652(a)(2), (d), or (e), must 
determine compliance as follows:
    (A) Determine the particulate matter concentration using Method 5 or 
5D, as applicable.
    (B) Compliance is demonstrated if the average concentration for the 
three runs comprising the performance test does not exceed the standard.
    (ii) An owner or operator of sources subject to the particulate mass 
rate standards in Sec. 63.1652(b) or (c) must determine compliance as 
follows:
    (A) Determine the particulate matter concentration and volumetric 
flow rate using Method 5 or 5D, as applicable.
    (B) Compute the mass rate (EM) of particulate matter for 
each run using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY99.000

Where:

EM = mass rate of particulate matter, kg/hr (lb/hr).
N = total number of exhaust streams at which emissions are quantified.
Csi = concentration of particulate matter from exhaust stream 
          ``i'', mg/dscm (gr/dscf).
Qsdi = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas from exhaust 
          stream ``i'', dscm/hr (dscf/hr)
K = conversion factor, 1  x  106 mg/kg (7,000 gr/lb).

    (C) Compliance is demonstrated if the average of the mass rates for 
the three runs comprising the performance test does not exceed the 
standard.
    (iii) An owner or operator of sources subject to the particulate 
matter process-weighted rate standard in

[[Page 474]]

Sec. 63.1652(a)(1) must determine compliance as follows:
    (A) Determine particulate matter concentration and volumetric flow 
rate using Method 5 or 5D, as applicable.
    (B) Compute the process-weighted mass rate (EP) of 
particulate matter for each run using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY99.001

Where:

EP = process-weighted mass rate of particulate matter, kg/hr/
          MW (lb/hr/MW).
N = total number of exhaust streams at which emissions are quantified.
Csi = concentration of particulate matter from exhaust stream 
          ``i'', mg/dscm (gr/dscf)
Qsdi = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas from exhaust 
          stream ``i'', dscm/hr (dscf/hr)
P = Average furnace power input, MW
K = conversion factor, 1  x  106 mg/kg (7,000 gr/lb).

    (C) Compliance is demonstrated if the average process-weighted mass 
rate for the three runs comprising the performance test does not exceed 
the standard.
    (4) If a venturi scrubber is used to comply with the emission 
standards, the owner or operator must establish as a site-specific 
operating parameter the lowest average pressure drop on any individual 
complying run in the three runs constituting any compliant test. The 
pressure drop must be monitored at least every 5 minutes during the test 
and hourly averages recorded.
    (i) [Reserved]
    (ii) The owner or operator may augment the data obtained under 
paragraph (a)(4) of this section by conducting multiple performance 
tests to establish a range of compliant operating parameter values. The 
lowest value of this range would be selected as the operating parameter 
monitoring value. The use of historic compliance data may be used to 
establish the compliant operating parameter value if the previous values 
were recorded during performance tests using the same test methods 
specified in this subpart and established as required in paragraph 
(a)(4) of this section.
    (d) Compliance demonstration with opacity standards. (1)(i) The 
owner or operator subject to Sec. 63.1653 must conduct initial opacity 
observations of the shop building to demonstrate compliance with the 
applicable opacity standards according to Sec. 63.6(h)(5), which 
addresses the conduct of opacity or visible emission observations.
    (ii) In conducting the opacity observations of the shop building, 
the observer must limit his or her field of view to the area of the shop 
building roof monitor that corresponds to the placement of the affected 
submerged arc furnaces.
    (iii) The owner or operator must conduct the opacity observations 
according to EPA Method 9 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, for a minimum 
of 60 minutes.
    (2)(i) When demonstrating initial compliance with the shop building 
opacity standard, as required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the 
owner or operator must simultaneously establish parameter values for one 
of the following: the control system fan motor amperes and all capture 
system damper positions, the total volumetric flow rate to the air 
pollution control device and all capture system damper positions, or 
volumetric flow rate through each separately ducted hood that comprises 
the capture system.
    (ii) The owner or operator may petition the Administrator to 
reestablish these parameters whenever he or she can demonstrate to the 
Administrator's satisfaction that the submerged arc furnace operating 
conditions upon which the parameters were previously established are no 
longer applicable. The values of these parameters determined during the 
most recent demonstration of compliance must be maintained at the 
appropriate level for each applicable period.
    (3) The owner or operator must demonstrate continuing compliance 
with the opacity standards by following the monitoring requirements 
specified in Sec. 63.1657(c) and the reporting and recordkeeping 
requirements specified in Secs. 63.1659(b)(4) and 63.1660(b).
    (e) Compliance demonstration with the operational and work practice 
standards. (1) Fugitive dust sources. Failure to have a fugitive dust 
control plan or failure to report deviations from the plan and take 
necessary corrective action would

[[Page 475]]

be a violation of the general duty to ensure that fugitive dust sources 
are operated and maintained in a manner consistent with good air 
pollution control practices for minimizing emissions per 
Sec. 63.6(e)(1)(i) of subpart A.
    (2) Baghouses equipped with bag leak detection systems. The owner or 
operator demonstrates compliance with the bag leak detection system 
requirements by submitting reports as required by Sec. 63.1659(b)(5) 
showing that the alarm on the system does not sound for more than 5 
percent of the total operating time in a 6-month period. Calculate the 
percentage of total operating time the alarm on the bag leak detection 
system sounds as follows:
    (i) Do not include alarms that occur due solely to a malfunction of 
the bag leak detection system in the calculation.
    (ii) Do not include alarms that occur during startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction in the calculation if the condition is described in the 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan and the owner or operator 
follows all the procedures in the plan defined for this condition.
    (iii) Count 1 hour of alarm time for each alarm where the owner or 
operator initiates procedures to determine the cause within 1 hour of 
the alarm.
    (iv) Count the actual time it takes the owner or operator to 
initiate procedures to determine the cause of the alarm for each alarm 
where the owner or operator does not initiate procedures to determine 
the cause within 1 hour of the alarm.
    (v) Calculate the percentage of time the alarm on the bag leak 
detection system sounds as the ratio of the sum of alarm times to the 
total operating time multiplied by 100.



Sec. 63.1657  Monitoring requirements.

    (a) Baghouses. (1) For the baghouses serving the submerged arc 
furnaces, the metal oxygen refining process, and crushing and screening 
operations, the owner or operator must observe on a daily basis for the 
presence of any visible emissions.
    (2) In addition to the daily visible emissions observation, the 
owner or operator must conduct the following activities:
    (i) Daily monitoring of pressure drop across each baghouse cell, or 
across the baghouse if it is not possible to monitor each cell 
individually, to ensure the pressure drop is within the normal operating 
range identified in the baghouse maintenance plan.
    (ii) Weekly confirmation that dust is being removed from hoppers 
through visual inspection, or equivalent means of ensuring the proper 
functioning of removal mechanisms.
    (iii) Daily check of compressed air supply for pulse-jet baghouses.
    (iv) An appropriate methodology for monitoring cleaning cycles to 
ensure proper operation.
    (v) Monthly check of bag cleaning mechanisms for proper functioning 
through visual inspection or equivalent means.
    (vi) Quarterly visual check of bag tension on reverse air and 
shaker-type baghouses to ensure that the bags are not kinked (kneed or 
bent) or laying on their sides. Such checks are not required for shaker-
type baghouses using self-tensioning (spring loaded) devices.
    (vii) Quarterly confirmation of the physical integrity of the 
baghouse structure through visual inspection of the baghouse interior 
for air leaks.
    (viii) Semiannual inspection of fans for wear, material buildup, and 
corrosion through visual inspection, vibration detectors, or equivalent 
means.
    (3) In addition to meeting the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) and 
(a)(2) of this section, the owner or operator of a new or reconstructed 
submerged arc furnace must install and continuously operate a bag leak 
detection system if the furnace primary and/or tapping emissions are 
ducted to a negative pressure baghouse or to a positive pressure 
baghouse equipped with a stack. The bag leak detection system must meet 
the following requirements:
    (i) The bag leak detection system must be certified by the 
manufacturer to be capable of detecting particulate matter emissions at 
concentrations of 10 milligrams per actual cubic meter (0.0044 grains 
per actual cubic foot) or less.
    (ii) The bag leak detection system sensor must provide output of 
relative particulate matter loadings, and the

[[Page 476]]

owner or operator must continuously record the output from the bag leak 
detection system.
    (iii) The bag leak detection system must be equipped with an alarm 
system that will sound when an increase in relative particulate loadings 
is detected over a preset level. The alarm must be located where it can 
be heard by the appropriate plant personnel.
    (iv) Each bag leak detection system that works based on the 
triboelectric effect must be installed, calibrated, operated, and 
maintained consistent with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 
guidance document ``Fabric Filter Bag Leak Detection Guidance'' (EPA-
454/R-98-015). Other bag leak detection systems must be installed, 
calibrated, and maintained consistent with the manufacturer's written 
specifications and recommendations.
    (v) The initial adjustment of the system must, at a minimum, consist 
of establishing the baseline output by adjusting the sensitivity (range) 
and the averaging period of the device, and establishing the alarm set 
points and the alarm delay time.
    (vi) Following initial adjustment, the owner or operator must not 
adjust the sensitivity or range, averaging period, alarm set points, or 
alarm delay time, except as detailed in the maintenance plan required 
under Sec. 63.1655(b). In no event must the sensitivity be increased by 
more than 100 percent or decreased more than 50 percent over a 365-day 
period unless a responsible official certifies the baghouse has been 
inspected and found to be in good operating condition.
    (vii) Where multiple detectors are required, the system's 
instrumentation and alarm may be shared among detectors.
    (4) As part of the maintenance plan required by Sec. 63.1655(b), the 
owner or operator must develop and implement corrective action 
procedures to be followed in the case of a bag leak detection system 
alarm (for baghouses equipped with such a system), the observation of 
visible emissions from the baghouse, or the indication through the 
periodic baghouse system inspections that the system is not operating 
properly. The owner or operator must initiate corrective action as soon 
as practicable after the occurrence of the observation or event 
indicating a problem.
    (5) The corrective action plan must include procedures used to 
determine the cause of an alarm or other indications of problems as well 
as actions to minimize emissions. These actions may include the 
following:
    (i) Inspecting the baghouse for air leaks, torn or broken bags or 
filter media, or any other condition that may cause an increase in 
emissions.
    (ii) Sealing off defective bags or filter media.
    (iii) Replacing defective bags or filter media, or otherwise 
repairing the control device.
    (iv) Sealing off a defective baghouse compartment.
    (v) Cleaning the bag leak detection system probe, or otherwise 
repairing the bag leak detection system.
    (vi) Shutting down the process producing the particulate matter 
emissions.
    (6) Failure to monitor or failure to take corrective action under 
the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section would be a violation 
of the general duty to operate in a manner consistent with good air 
pollution control practices that minimizes emissions per 
Sec. 63.6(e)(1)(i) of subpart A.
    (b) Venturi scrubbers. (1) The owner or operator must monitor the 
pressure drop across the venturi at least every 5 minutes and record the 
average hourly pressure drop. Measurement of an average hourly pressure 
drop less than the pressure drop operating parameter limit established 
during a successful compliance demonstration would be a violation of the 
applicable emission standard, unless the excursion in the pressure drop 
is due to a malfunction.
    (2) As part of the maintenance plan required by Sec. 63.1655(b), the 
owner or operator must develop and implement corrective action 
procedures to be followed in the case of a violation of the pressure 
drop requirement. The owner or operator must initiate corrective action 
as soon as practicable after the excursion.
    (3) Failure to monitor or failure to take corrective action under 
the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section is a violation of the 
general duty

[[Page 477]]

to operate in a manner consistent with good air pollution control 
practices that minimizes emissions per Sec. 63.6(e)(1)(i).
    (c) Shop opacity. The owner or operator subject to the opacity 
standards in Sec. 63.1653 must comply with one of the monitoring options 
in paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2) or (c)(3) of this section. The selected 
option must be consistent with that selected during the initial 
performance test described in Sec. 63.1656(d)(2). Alternatively, the 
owner or operator may use the provisions of Sec. 63.8(f) to request 
approval to use an alternative monitoring method.
    (1) The owner or operator must check and record the control system 
fan motor amperes and capture system damper positions once per shift.
    (2) The owner or operator must install, calibrate, and maintain a 
monitoring device that continuously records the volumetric flow rate 
through each separately ducted hood.
    (3) The owner or operator must install, calibrate, and maintain a 
monitoring device that continuously records the volumetric flow rate at 
the inlet of the air pollution control device and must check and record 
the capture system damper positions once per shift.
    (4) The flow rate monitoring devices must meet the following 
requirements:
    (i) Be installed in an appropriate location in the exhaust duct such 
that reproducible flow rate monitoring will result.
    (ii) Have an accuracy 10 percent over its normal 
operating range and be calibrated according to the manufacturer's 
instructions.
    (5) The Administrator may require the owner or operator to 
demonstrate the accuracy of the monitoring device(s) relative to Methods 
1 and 2 of appendix A of part 60 of this chapter.
    (6) Failure to maintain the appropriate capture system parameters 
(fan motor amperes, flow rate, and/or damper positions) establishes the 
need to initiate corrective action as soon as practicable after the 
monitoring excursion in order to minimize excess emissions.
    (7) Failure to monitor or failure to take corrective action under 
the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section is a violation of the 
general duty to operate in a manner consistent with good air pollution 
control practices that minimizes emissions per Sec. 63.6(e)(1)(i).



Sec. 63.1658  Notification requirements.

    (a) As required by Sec. 63.9(b) of subpart A, unless otherwise 
specified in this subpart, the owner or operator must submit the 
following written notifications to the Administrator:
    (1) The owner or operator of an area source that subsequently 
becomes subject to the requirements of the standard must provide 
notification to the applicable permitting authority as required by 
Sec. 63.9(b)(1).
    (2) As required by Sec. 63.9(b)(2), the owner or operator of an 
affected source that has an initial startup before the effective date of 
the standard must notify the Administrator that the source is subject to 
the requirements of the standard. The notification must be submitted no 
later than 120 calendar days after May 20, 1999 (or within 120 calendar 
days after the source becomes subject to this standard) and must contain 
the information specified in Sec. 63.9(b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(v).
    (3) As required by Sec. 63.9(b)(3), the owner or operator of a new 
or reconstructed affected source, or a source that has been 
reconstructed such that it is an affected source, that has an initial 
startup after the effective date and for which an application for 
approval of construction or reconstruction is not required under 
Sec. 63.5(d), must notify the Administrator in writing that the source 
is subject to the standards no later than 120 days after initial 
startup. The notification must contain the information specified in 
Sec. 63.9(b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(v), delivered or postmarked with the 
notification required in Sec. 63.9(b)(5).
    (4) As required by Sec. 63.9(b)(4), the owner or operator of a new 
or reconstructed major affected source that has an initial startup after 
the effective date of this standard and for which an application for 
approval of construction or reconstruction is required under 
Sec. 63.5(d) must provide the information specified in 
Sec. 63.9(b)(4)(i) through (b)(4)(v).

[[Page 478]]

    (5) As required by Sec. 63.9(b)(5), the owner or operator who, after 
the effective date of this standard, intends to construct a new affected 
source or reconstruct an affected source subject to this standard, or 
reconstruct a source such that it becomes an affected source subject to 
this standard, must notify the Administrator, in writing, of the 
intended construction or reconstruction.
    (b) Request for extension of compliance. As required by 
Sec. 63.9(c), if the owner or operator of an affected source cannot 
comply with this standard by the applicable compliance date for that 
source, or if the owner or operator has installed BACT or technology to 
meet LAER consistent with Sec. 63.6(i)(5), he or she may submit to the 
Administrator (or the State with an approved permit program) a request 
for an extension of compliance as specified in Sec. 63.6(i)(4) through 
(i)(6).
    (c) Notification that source is subject to special compliance 
requirements. As required by Sec. 63.9(d), an owner or operator of a new 
source that is subject to special compliance requirements as specified 
in Sec. 63.6(b)(3) and (b)(4) must notify the Administrator of his or 
her compliance obligations no later than the notification dates 
established in Sec. 63.9(b) for new sources that are not subject to the 
special provisions.
    (d) Notification of performance test. As required by Sec. 63.9(e), 
the owner or operator of an affected source must notify the 
Administrator in writing of his or her intention to conduct a 
performance test at least 30 calendar days before the performance test 
is scheduled to begin to allow the Administrator to review and approve 
the site-specific test plan required under Sec. 63.7(c) and to have an 
observer present during the test.
    (e) Notification of opacity and visible emission observations. As 
required by Sec. 63.9(f), the owner or operator of an affected source 
must notify the Administrator in writing of the anticipated date for 
conducting the opacity or visible emission observations specified in 
Sec. 63.6(h)(5). The notification must be submitted with the 
notification of the performance test date, as specified in paragraph (d) 
of this section, or if visibility or other conditions prevent the 
opacity or visible emission observations from being conducted 
concurrently with the initial performance test required under Sec. 63.7, 
the owner or operator must deliver or postmark the notification not less 
than 30 days before the opacity or visible emission observations are 
scheduled to take place.
    (f) Notification of compliance status. The owner or operator of an 
affected source must submit a notification of compliance status as 
required by Sec. 63.9(h). The notification must be sent before the close 
of business on the 60th day following completion of the relevant 
compliance demonstration.



Sec. 63.1659  Reporting requirements.

    (a) General reporting requirements. The owner or operator of a 
ferromanganese and silicomanganese production facility must comply with 
all of the reporting requirements under Sec. 63.10 of subpart A, unless 
otherwise specified in this subpart.
    (1) Frequency of reports. As provided by Sec. 63.10(a)(5), if the 
owner or operator is required to submit periodic reports to a State on 
an established time line, he or she may change the dates by which 
periodic reports submitted under this part may be submitted (without 
changing the frequency of reporting) to be consistent with the State's 
schedule by mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the 
State. This provision may be applied at any point after the source's 
compliance date.
    (2) Reporting results of performance tests. As required by 
Sec. 63.10(d)(2), the owner or operator of an affected source must 
report the results of the initial performance test as part of the 
notification of compliance status required in Sec. 63.1658(f).
    (3) [Reserved]
    (4) Periodic startup, shutdown, and malfunction reports. (i) As 
required by Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(i), if actions taken by an owner or 
operator during a startup, shutdown, or malfunction of an affected 
source (including actions taken to correct a malfunction) are consistent 
with the procedures specified in the startup, shutdown, and malfunction 
plan, the owner or operator must state such information in a semiannual 
report. The report, to be certified by

[[Page 479]]

the owner or operator or other responsible official, must be submitted 
semiannually and delivered or postmarked by the 30th day following the 
end of each calendar half; and
    (ii) Any time an action taken by an owner or operator during a 
startup, shutdown, or malfunction (including actions taken to correct a 
malfunction) is not consistent with the procedures in the startup, 
shutdown, and malfunction plan, the owner or operator must comply with 
all requirements of Sec. 63.10(d)(5)(ii).
    (b) Specific reporting requirements. In addition to the information 
required under Sec. 63.10, reports required under paragraph (a) of this 
section must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) 
through (b)(5) of this section. As allowed by Sec. 63.10(a)(3), if any 
State requires a report that contains all of the information required in 
a report listed in this section, an owner or operator may send the 
Administrator a copy of the report sent to the State to satisfy the 
requirements of this section for that report.
    (1) Air pollution control devices. The owner or operator must submit 
reports that summarize the records maintained as part of the practices 
described in the maintenance plan for air pollution control devices 
required under Sec. 63.1655(b), including an explanation of the periods 
when the procedures were not followed and the corrective actions taken.
    (2) Venturi scrubbers. In addition to the information required to be 
submitted in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the owner or operator 
must submit reports that identify the periods when the average hourly 
pressure drop of venturi scrubbers used to control particulate emissions 
dropped below the levels established in Sec. 63.1656(c)(4), and an 
explanation of the corrective actions taken.
    (3) Fugitive dust. The owner or operator must submit reports that 
explain the periods when the procedures outlined in the fugitive dust 
control plan pursuant to Sec. 63.1654(a) were not followed and the 
corrective actions taken.
    (4) Capture system. The owner or operator must submit reports that 
summarize the monitoring parameter excursions measured pursuant to 
Sec. 63.1657(c) and the corrective actions taken.
    (5) Bag leak detection system. The owner or operator must submit 
reports including the following information:
    (i) Records of all alarms.
    (ii) Description of the actions taken following each bag leak 
detection system alarm.
    (iii) Calculation of the percent of time the alarm on the bag leak 
detection system sounded during the reporting period.
    (6) Frequency of reports. (i) The owner or operator must submit 
reports pursuant to Sec. 63.10(e)(3) that are associated with excess 
emissions events such as the excursion of the scrubber pressure drop 
limit per paragraph (b)(2) of this section. These reports are to be 
submitted on a quarterly basis, unless the owner or operator can satisfy 
the requirements in Sec. 63.10(e)(3) to reduce the frequency to a 
semiannual basis.
    (ii) All other reports specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(5) 
of this section must be submitted semiannually.



Sec. 63.1660  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) General recordkeeping requirements. (1) The owner or operator of 
a ferromanganese and silicomanganese production facility must comply 
with all of the recordkeeping requirements under Sec. 63.10.
    (2) As required by Sec. 63.10(b)(2), the owner or operator must 
maintain records for 5 years from the date of each record of:
    (i) The occurrence and duration of each startup, shutdown, or 
malfunction of operation (i.e., process equipment and control devices);
    (ii) The occurrence and duration of each malfunction of the source 
or air pollution control equipment;
    (iii) All maintenance performed on the air pollution control 
equipment;
    (iv) Actions taken during periods of startup, shutdown, and 
malfunction (including corrective actions to restore malfunctioning 
process and air pollution control equipment to its normal or usual 
manner of operation) when such actions are different from the procedures 
specified in the startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan;
    (v) All information necessary to demonstrate conformance with the 
startup, shutdown, and malfunction plan when

[[Page 480]]

all actions taken during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction 
(including corrective actions) are consistent with the procedures 
specified in such plan. This information can be recorded in a checklist 
or similar form (see Sec. 63.10(b)(2)(v));
    (vi) All required measurements needed to demonstrate compliance with 
the standard and to support data that the source is required to report, 
including, but not limited to, performance test measurements (including 
initial and any subsequent performance tests) and measurements as may be 
necessary to determine the conditions of the initial test or subsequent 
tests;
    (vii) All results of initial or subsequent performance tests;
    (viii) If the owner or operator has been granted a waiver from 
recordkeeping or reporting requirements under Sec. 63.10(f), any 
information demonstrating whether a source is meeting the requirements 
for a waiver of recordkeeping or reporting requirements;
    (ix) If the owner or operator has been granted a waiver from the 
initial performance test under Sec. 63.7(h), a copy of the full request 
and the Administrator's approval or disapproval;
    (x) All documentation supporting initial notifications and 
notifications of compliance status required by Sec. 63.9; and
    (xi) As required by Sec. 63.10(b)(3), records of any applicability 
determination, including supporting analyses.
    (b) Specific recordkeeping requirements. (1) In addition to the 
general records required by paragraph (a) of this section, the owner or 
operator must maintain records for 5 years from the date of each record 
of:
    (i) Records of pressure drop across the venturi if a venturi 
scrubber is used.
    (ii) Records of manufacturer certification that monitoring devices 
are accurate to within 5 percent (unless otherwise specified in this 
subpart) and of calibrations performed at the manufacturer's recommended 
frequency, or at a frequency consistent with good engineering practice, 
or as experience dictates.
    (iii) Records of bag leak detection system output.
    (iv) An identification of the date and time of all bag leak 
detection system alarms, the time that procedures to determine the cause 
of the alarm were initiated, the cause of the alarm, an explanation of 
the actions taken, and the date and time the alarm was corrected.
    (v) Copy of the written maintenance plan for each air pollution 
control device.
    (vi) Copy of the fugitive dust control plan.
    (vii) Records of each maintenance inspection and repair, 
replacement, or other corrective action.
    (2) All records for the most recent 2 years of operation must be 
maintained on site. Records for the previous 3 years may be maintained 
off site.



Sec. 63.1661  Delegation of authorities.

    In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State 
under subpart E of this part, the Administrator retains no authorities.



Secs. 63.1662--63.1679  [Reserved]

                   Appendix A to Part 63--Test Methods

   Method 301--Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods from 
                           Various Waste Media

                     1. Applicability and principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method, as specified in the applicable 
subpart, is to be used whenever a source owner or operator (hereafter 
referred to as an ``analyst'') proposes a test method to meet a U.S. 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirement in the absence of a 
validated method. This Method includes procedures for determining and 
documenting the quality, i.e., systematic error (bias) and random error 
(precision), of the measured concentrations from an effected source. 
This method is applicable to various waste media (i.e., exhaust gas, 
wastewater, sludge, etc.).
    1.1.1  If EPA currently recognizes an appropriate test method or 
considers the analyst's test method to be satisfactory for a particular 
source, the Administrator may waive the use of this protocol or may 
specify a less rigorous validation procedure. A list of validated 
methods may be obtained by contacting the Emission Measurement Technical 
Information Center (EMTIC), Mail Drop 19, U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, (919) 541-0200. Procedures for 
obtaining a waiver are in Section 12.0.

[[Page 481]]

    1.1.2  This method includes optional procedures that may be used to 
expand the applicability of the proposed method. Section 7.0 involves 
ruggedness testing (Laboratory Evaluation), which demonstrates the 
sensitivity of the method to various parameters. Section 8.0 involves a 
procedure for including sample stability in bias and precision for 
assessing sample recovery and analysis times; Section 9.0 involves a 
procedure for the determination of the practical limit of quantitation 
for determining the lower limit of the method. These optional procedures 
are required for the waiver consideration outlined in Section 12.0.
    1.2  Principle. The purpose of these procedures is to determine bias 
and precision of a test method at the level of the applicable standard. 
The procedures involve (a) introducing known concentrations of an 
analyte or comparing the test method against a validated test method to 
determine the method's bias and (b) collecting multiple or collocated 
simultaneous samples to determine the method's precision.
    1.2.1  Bias. Bias is established by comparing the method's results 
against a reference value and may be eliminated by employing a 
correction factor established from the data obtained during the 
validation test. An offset bias may be handled accordingly. Methods that 
have bias correction factors outside 0.7 to 1.3 are unacceptable. 
Validated method to proposed method comparisons, section 6.2, requires a 
more restrictive test of central tendency and a lower correction factor 
allowance of 0.90 to 1.10.
    1.2.2  Precision. At the minimum, paired sampling systems shall be 
used to establish precision. The precision of the method at the level of 
the standard shall not be greater than 50 percent relative standard 
deviation. For a validated method to proposed method equivalency 
comparisons, section 6.2, the analyst must demonstrate that the 
precision of the proposed test method is as precise as the validated 
method for acceptance.

                             2. Definitions

    2.1  Negative bias. Bias resulting when the measured result is less 
than the ``true'' value.
    2.2  Paired sampling system. A sampling system capable of obtaining 
two replicate samples that were collected as closely as possible in 
sampling time and sampling location.
    2.3  Positive bias. Bias resulting when the measured result is 
greater than the ``true'' value.
    2.4  Proposed method. The sampling and analytical methodology 
selected for field validation using the method described herein.
    2.5  Quadruplet sampling system. A sampling system capable of 
obtaining four replicate samples that were collected as closely as 
possible in sampling time and sampling location.
    2.6  Surrogate compound. A compound that serves as a model for the 
types of compounds being analyzed (i.e., similar chemical structure, 
properties, behavior). The model can be distinguished by the method from 
the compounds being analyzed.

                          3. Reference Material

    The reference materials shall be obtained or prepared at the level 
of the standard. Additional runs with higher and lower reference 
material concentrations may be made to expand the applicable range of 
the method, in accordance with the ruggedness test procedures.
    3.1  Exhaust Gas Tests. The analyst shall obtain a known 
concentration of the reference material (i.e., analyte of concern) from 
an independent source such as a specialty gas manufacturer, specialty 
chemical company, or commercial laboratory. A list of vendors may be 
obtained from EMTIC (see Section 1.1.1). The analyst should obtain the 
manufacturer's stability data of the analyte concentration and 
recommendations for recertification.
    3.2  Other Waste Media Tests. The analyst shall obtain pure liquid 
components of the reference materials (i.e., analytes of concern) from 
an independent manufacturer and dilute them in the same type matrix as 
the source waste. The pure reference materials shall be certified by the 
manufacturer as to purity and shelf life. The accuracy of all diluted 
reference material concentrations shall be verified by comparing their 
response to independently-prepared materials (independently prepared in 
this case means prepared from pure components by a different analyst).
    3.3  Surrogate Reference Materials. The analyst may use surrogate 
compounds, e.g., for highly toxic or reactive organic compounds, 
provided the analyst can demonstrate to the Administrator's satisfaction 
that the surrogate compound behaves as the analyte. A surrogate may be 
an isotope or one that contains a unique element (e.g., chlorine) that 
is not present in the source or a derivation of the toxic or reactive 
compound, if the derivative formation is part of the method's procedure. 
Laboratory experiments or literature data may be used to show behavioral 
acceptability.
    3.4  Isotopically Labeled Materials. Isotope mixtures may contain 
the isotope and the natural analyte. For best results, the isotope 
labeled analyte concentration should be more than five times the natural 
concentration of the analyte.

                    4. EPA Performance Audit Material

    4.1  To assess the method bias independently, the analyst shall use 
(in addition to

[[Page 482]]

the reference material) an EPA performance audit material, if it is 
available. The analyst may contact EMTIC (see section 1.1.1) to receive 
a list of currently available EPA audit materials. If the analyte is 
listed, the analyst should request the audit material at least 30 days 
before the validation test. If an EPA audit material is not available, 
request documentation from the validation report reviewing authority 
that the audit material is currently not available from EPA. Include 
this documentation with the field validation report.
    4.2  The analyst shall sample and analyze the performance audit 
sample three times according to the instructions provided with the audit 
sample. The analyst shall submit the three results with the field 
validation report. Although no acceptance criteria are set for these 
performance audit results, the analyst and reviewing authority may use 
them to assess the relative error of sample recovery, sample 
preparation, and analytical procedures and then consider the relative 
error in evaluating the measured emissions.

    5. Procedure for Determination of Bias and Precision in the Field

    The analyst shall select one of the sampling approaches below to 
determine the bias and precision of the data. After analyzing the 
samples, the analyst shall calculate the bias and precision according to 
the procedure described in section 6.0. When sampling a stationary 
source, follow the probe placement procedures in section 5.4.
    5.1  Isotopic Spiking. This approach shall be used only for methods 
that require mass spectrometry (MS) analysis. Bias and precision are 
calculated by procedures described in section 6.1.
    5.1.1  Number of Samples and Sampling Runs. Collect a total of 12 
replicate samples by either obtaining six sets of paired samples or 
three sets of quadruplet samples.
    5.1.2  Spiking Procedure. Spike all 12 samples with the reference 
material at the level of the standard. Follow the appropriate spiking 
procedures listed below for the applicable waste medium.
    5.1.2.1  Exhaust Gas Testing. The spike shall be introduced as close 
to the tip of the sampling probe as possible.
    5.1.2.1.1  Gaseous Reference Material with Sorbent or Impinger 
Sampling Trains. Sample the reference material (in the laboratory or in 
the field) at a concentration which is close to the allowable 
concentration standard for the time required by the method, and then 
sample the gas stream for an equal amount of time. The time for sampling 
both the reference material and gas stream should be equal; however, the 
time should be adjusted to avoid sorbent breakthrough.
    5.1.2.1.2  Gaseous Reference Material with Sample Container (Bag or 
Canister). Spike the sample containers after completion of each test run 
with an amount equal to the allowable concentration standard of the 
emission point. The final concentration of the reference material shall 
approximate the level of the emission concentration in the stack. The 
volume amount of reference material shall be less than 10 percent of the 
sample volume.
    5.1.2.1.3  Liquid and Solid Reference Material with Sorbent or 
Impinger Trains. Spike the trains with an amount equal to the allowable 
concentration standard before sampling the stack gas. The spiking should 
be done in the field; however, it may be done in the laboratory.
    5.1.2.1.4  Liquid and Solid Reference Material with Sample Container 
(Bag or Canister). Spike the containers at the completion of each test 
run with an amount equal to the level of the emission standard.
    5.1.2.2  Other Waste Media. Spike the 12 replicate samples with the 
reference material either before or directly after sampling in the 
field.
    5.2  Comparison Against a Validated Test Method. Bias and precision 
are calculated using the procedures described in section 6.2. This 
approach shall be used when a validated method is available and an 
alternative method is being proposed.
    5.2.1  Number of Samples and Sampling Runs. Collect nine sets of 
replicate samples using a paired sampling system (a total of 18 samples) 
or four sets of replicate samples using a quadruplet sampling system (a 
total of 16 samples). In each sample set, the validated test method 
shall be used to collect and analyze half of the samples.
    5.2.2  Performance Audit Exception. Conduct the performance audit as 
required in section 4.0 for the validated test method. Conducting a 
performance audit on the test method being evaluated is recommended.
    5.3  Analyte Spiking. This approach shall be used when sections 5.1 
and 5.2 are not applicable. Bias and precision are calculated using the 
procedures described in Section 6.3.
    5.3.1  Number of Samples and Sampling Runs. Collect a total of 24 
samples using the quadruplet sampling system (a total of 6 sets of 
replicate samples).
    5.3.2  In each quadruplet set, spike half of the samples (two out of 
the four) with the reference material according to the applicable 
procedure in section 5.1.2.1 or 5.1.2.2.
    5.4  Probe Placement and Arrangement for Stationary Source Stack or 
Duct Sampling. The probes shall be placed in the same horizontal plane. 
For paired sample probes the arrangement should be that the probe tip is 
2.5 cm from the outside edge of the other with a pitot tube on the 
outside of each probe. Other paired arrangements for the pitot tube may 
be acceptable. For quadruplet sampling probes, the tips should be in a 
6.0 cm  x  6.0 cm square area measured from the center line of the 
opening of the probe tip with a single

[[Page 483]]

pitot tube in the center or two pitot tubes with their location on 
either side of the probe tip configuration. An alternative arrangement 
should be proposed whenever the cross-sectional area of the probe tip 
configuration is approximately 5 percent of the stack or duct cross-
sectional area.

                             6. Calculations

    Data resulting from the procedures specified in section 5.0 shall be 
treated as follows to determine bias, correction factors, relative 
standard deviations, precision, and data acceptance.
    6.1  Isotopic Spiking. Analyze the data for isotopic spiking tests 
as outlined in sections 6.1.1 through 6.1.6.
    6.1.1  Calculate the numerical value of the bias using the results 
from the analysis of the isotopically spiked field samples and the 
calculated value of the isotopically labeled spike:

B=CS-Sm    Eq. 301=1

where:

B=Bias at the spike level.
Sm=Mean of the measured values of the isotopically spiked 
          samples.
CS=Calculated value of the isotopically labeled spike.
    6.1.2  Calculate the standard deviation of the Si values 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.048


Eq. 301-2

where:

S i=Measured value of the isotopically labeled analyte in the 
          ith field sample,
n=Number of isotopically spiked samples, 12.
    6.1.3.  Calculate the standard deviation of the mean (SDM) as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.049


Eq. 301-3
    6.1.4 Test the bias for statistical significance by calculating the 
t-statistic,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.050

Eq. 301-4

and compare it with the critical value of the two-sided t-distribution 
at the 95-percent confidence level and n-1 degrees of freedom. This 
critical value is 2.201 for the eleven degrees of freedom when the 
procedure specified in section 5.1.2 is followed. If the calculated t-
value is greater than the critical value the bias is statistically 
significant and the analyst should proceed to evaluate the correction 
factor.
    6.1.5  Calculation of a Correction Factor. If the t-test does not 
show that the bias is statistically significant, use all analytical 
results without correction and proceed to the precision evaluation. If 
the method's bias is statistically significant, calculate the correction 
factor, CF, using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.051

Eq. 301-5
If the CF is outside the range of 0.70 to 1.30, the data and method are 
considered unacceptable. For correction factors within the range, 
multiply all analytical results by the CF to obtain the final values.
    6.1.6  Calculation of the Relative Standard Deviation (Precision). 
Calculate the relative standard deviation as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.052

Eq. 301-6
where Sm is the measured mean of the isotopically labeled 
spiked samples.
    6.2  Comparison with Validated Method. Analyze the data for 
comparison with a validated method as outlined in sections 6.2.1 or 
6.2.2, as appropriate. Conduct these procedures in order to determine if 
a proposed method produces results equivalent to a validated method. 
Make all necessary bias corrections for the validated method, as 
appropriate. If the proposed method fails either test, the method 
results are unacceptable, and conclude that the proposed method is not 
as precise or accurate as the validated method. For highly variable 
sources, additional precision checks may be necessary. The analyst 
should consult with the Administrator if a highly variable source is 
suspected.
    6.2.1  Paired Sampling Systems.
    6.2.1.1.  Precision. Determine the acceptance of the proposed 
method's variance with respect to the variability of the validated 
method results. If a significant difference is determined, the proposed 
method and the results are rejected. Proposed methods demonstrating F-
values equal to or less than the critical value have acceptable 
precision.
    6.2.1.2  Calculate the variance of the proposed method, 
Sp2, and the variance of the validated method, 
Sv2, using the following equation:

S(porv)2=SD2     Eq. 301-7

where:


[[Page 484]]


SDv=Standard deviation provided with the validated method,
SDp=Standard deviation of the proposed method calculated 
          using Equation 301-9a.

    6.2.1.3  The F-test. Determine if the variance of the proposed 
method is significantly different from that of the validated method by 
calculating the F-value using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.053

Eq. 301-8
    Compare the experimental F value with the critical value of F. The 
critical value is 1.0 when the procedure specified in section 5.2.1 for 
paired trains is followed. If the calculated F is greater than the 
critical value, the difference in precision is significant and the data 
and proposed method are unacceptable.
    6.2.1.4  Bias Analysis. Test the bias for statistical significance 
by calculating the t-statistic and determine if the mean of the 
differences between the proposed method and the validated method is 
significant at the 80-percent confidence level. This procedure requires 
the standard deviation of the validated method, SDv, to be 
known. Employ the value furnished with the method. If the standard 
deviation of the validated method is not available, the paired replicate 
sampling procedure may not be used. Determine the mean of the paired 
sample differences, dm, and the standard deviation, 
SDd, of the differences, d1's, using Equation 301-
2 where: di replaces Si, dm replaces 
Sm. Calculate the standard deviation of the proposed method, 
SDp, as follows:

SDp=SDd-SDv    Eq. 301-9a

(If SDv>SDd, let SD=SDd/1.414).

    Calculate the value of the t-statistic using the following equation:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.054
    
Eq. 301-9

where n is the total number of paired samples. For the procedure in 
section 5.2.1, n equals nine. Compare the calculated t-statistic with 
the corresponding value from the table of the t-statistic. When nine 
runs are conducted, as specified in section 5.2.1, the critical value of 
the t-statistic is 1.397 for eight degrees of freedom. If the calculated 
t-value is greater than the critical value the bias is statistically 
significant and the analyst should proceed to evaluate the correction 
factor.
    6.2.1.5  Calculation of a Correction Factor. If the statistical test 
cited above does not show a significant bias with respect to the 
reference method, assume that the proposed method is unbiased and use 
all analytical results without correction. If the method's bias is 
statistically significant, calculate the correction factor, CF, as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.055

Eq. 301-10

where Vm is the mean of the validated method's values.
    Multiply all analytical results by CF to obtain the final values. 
The method results, and the method, are unacceptable if the correction 
factor is outside the range of 0.9 to 1.10.
    6.2.2  Quadruplet Replicate Sampling Systems.
    6.2.2.1  Precision. Determine the acceptance of the proposed 
method's variance with respect to the variability of the validated 
method results. If a significant difference is determined the proposed 
method and the results are rejected.
    6.2.2.2  Calculate the variance of the proposed method, 
Sp2, using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.056

Eq. 301-11

where the di's are the differences between the validated 
method values and the proposed method values.

    6.2.2.3  The F-test. Determine if the variance of the proposed 
method is more variable than that of the validated method by calculating 
the F-value using Equation 301-8. Compare the experimental F value with 
the critical value of F. The critical value is 1.0 when the procedure 
specified in section 5.2.2 for quadruplet trains is followed. The 
calculated F should be less than or equal to the critical value. If the 
difference in precision is significant the results and the proposed 
method are unacceptable.
    6.2.2.4  Bias Analysis. Test the bias for statistical significance 
at the 80 percent confidence level by calculating the t-statistic. 
Determine the bias (mean of the differences between the proposed method 
and the validated method, dm) and the standard deviation, 
SDd, of the differences. Calculate the standard deviation of 
the differences, SDd, using Equation 301-2 and substituting 
di for Si. The following equation is used to 
calculate di:

[[Page 485]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.057

Eq. 301-12

and: V1i=First measured value of the validated method in the 
          ith test sample.
P1i=First measured value of the proposed method in the ith 
          test sample.

    Calculate the t-statistic using Equation 301-9 where n is the total 
number of test sample differences (di). For the procedure in 
section 5.2.2, n equals four. Compare the calculated t-statistic with 
the corresponding value from the table of the t-statistic and determine 
if the mean is significant at the 80-percent confidence level. When four 
runs are conducted, as specified in section 5.2.2, the critical value of 
the t-statistic is 1.638 for three degrees of freedom. If the calculated 
t-value is greater than the critical value the bias is statistically 
significant and the analyst should proceed to evaluate the correction 
factor.
    6.2.2.5  Correction Factor Calculation. If the method's bias is 
statistically significant, calculate the correction factor, CF, using 
Equation 301-10. Multiply all analytical results by CF to obtain the 
final values. The method results, and the method, are unacceptable if 
the correction factor is outside the range of 0.9 to 1.10.
    6.3  Analyte Spiking. Analyze the data for analyte spike testing as 
outlined in Sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.3.
    6.3.1  Precision.
    6.3.1.1  Spiked Samples. Calculate the difference, di, 
between the pairs of the spiked proposed method measurements for each 
replicate sample set. Determine the standard deviation (SDs) 
of the spiked values using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.058

Eq. 301-13

where: n = Number of runs.
    Calculate the relative standard deviation of the proposed spiked 
method using Equation 301-6 where Sm is the measured mean of 
the analyte spiked samples. The proposed method is unacceptable if the 
RSD is greater than 50 percent.
    6.3.1.2  Unspiked Samples. Calculate the standard deviation of the 
unspiked values using Equation 301-13 and the relative standard 
deviation of the proposed unspiked method using Equation 301-6 where 
Sm is the measured mean of the analyte spiked samples. The 
RSD must be less than 50 percent.
    6.3.2  Bias. Calculate the numerical value of the bias using the 
results from the analysis of the spiked field samples, the unspiked 
field samples, and the calculated value of the spike:

B=Sm-Mm-CS
Eq. 301-14

where: B = Bias at the spike level.
Sm = Mean of the spiked samples.
Mm = Mean of the unspiked samples.
CS = Calculated value of the spiked level.
    6.3.2.1  Calculate the standard deviation of the mean using the 
following equation where SDs and SDu are the 
standard deviations of the spiked and unspiked sample values 
respectively as calculated using Equation 301-13.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.059

Eq. 301-15

    6.3.2.2  Test the bias for statistical significance by calculating 
the t-statistic using Equation 301-4 and comparing it with the critical 
value of the two-sided t-distribution at the 95-percent confidence level 
and n-1 degrees of freedom. This critical value is 2.201 for the eleven 
degrees of freedom.
    6.3.3  Calculation of a Correction Factor. If the t-test shows that 
the bias is not statistically significant, use all analytical results 
without correction. If the method's bias is statistically significant, 
calculate the correction factor using Equation 301-5. Multiply all 
analytical results by CF to obtain the final values.

                    7. Ruggedness Testing (Optional)

    7.1  Laboratory Evaluation.
    7.1.1  Ruggedness testing is a useful and cost-effective laboratory 
study to determine the sensitivity of a method to certain parameters 
such as sample collection rate, interferant concentration, collecting 
medium temperature, or sample recovery temperature. This Section 
generally discusses the principle of the ruggedness test. A more 
detailed description is presented in citation 10 of Section 13.0.
    7.1.2  In a ruggedness test, several variables are changed 
simultaneously rather than one variable at a time. This reduces the 
number of experiments required to evaluate the effect of a variable. For 
example, the effect of seven variables can be determined in eight 
experiments rather than 128 (W.J. Youden, Statistical Manual of the 
Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Association of Official 
Analytical Chemists, Washington, DC, 1975, pp. 33-36).
    7.1.3  Data from ruggedness tests are helpful in extending the 
applicability of a test method to different source concentrations or 
source categories.

[[Page 486]]

   8. Procedure for Including Sample Stability in Bias and Precision 
                               Evaluations

    8.1  Sample Stability.
    8.1.1  The test method being evaluated must include procedures for 
sample storage and the time within which the collected samples shall be 
analyzed.
    8.1.2  This section identifies the procedures for including the 
effect of storage time in bias and precision evaluations. The evaluation 
may be deleted if the test method specifies a time for sample storage.
    8.2  Stability Test Design. The following procedures shall be 
conducted to identify the effect of storage times on analyte samples. 
Store the samples according to the procedure specified in the test 
method. When using the analyte spiking procedures (section 5.3), the 
study should include equal numbers of spiked and unspiked samples.
    8.2.1  Stack Emission Testing.
    8.2.1.1  For sample container (bag or canister) and impinger 
sampling systems, sections 5.1 and 5.3, analyze six of the samples at 
the minimum storage time. Then analyze the same six samples at the 
maximum storage time.
    8.2.1.2  For sorbent and impinger sampling systems, sections 5.1 and 
5.3, that require extraction or digestion, extract or digest six of the 
samples at the minimum storage time and extract or digest six other 
samples at the maximum storage time. Analyze an aliquot of the first six 
extracts (digestates) at both the minimum and maximum storage times. 
This will provide some freedom to analyze extract storage impacts.
    8.2.1.3  For sorbent sampling systems, sections 5.1 and 5.3, that 
require thermal desorption, analyze six samples at the minimum storage 
time. Analyze another set of six samples at the maximum storage time.
    8.2.1.4  For systems set up in accordance with section 5.2, the 
number of samples analyzed at the minimum and maximum storage times 
shall be half those collected (8 or 9). The procedures for samples 
requiring extraction or digestion should parallel those in section 
8.2.1.
    8.2.2  Other Waste Media Testing. Analyze half of the replicate 
samples at the minimum storage time and the other half at the maximum 
storage time in order to identify the effect of storage times on analyte 
samples.

   9. Procedure for Determination of Practical Limit of Quantitation 
                               (Optional)

    9.1  Practical Limit of Quantitation.
    9.1.1  The practical limit of quantitation (PLQ) is the lowest level 
above which quantitative results may be obtained with an acceptable 
degree of confidence. For this protocol, the PLQ is defined as 10 times 
the standard deviation, so, at the blank level. This PLQ 
corresponds to an uncertainty of 30 percent at the 99-
percent confidence level.
    9.1.2  The PLQ will be used to establish the lower limit of the test 
method.
    9.2  Procedure I for Estimating so. This procedure is 
acceptable if the estimated PLQ is no more than twice the calculated 
PLQ. If the PLQ is greater than twice the calculated PLQ use Procedure 
II.
    9.2.1  Estimate the PLQ and prepare a test standard at this level. 
The test standard could consist of a dilution of the reference material 
described in section 3.0.
    9.2.2  Using the normal sampling and analytical procedures for the 
method, sample and analyze this standard at least seven times in the 
laboratory.
    9.2.3  Calculate the standard deviation, so, of the 
measured values.
    9.2.4  Calculate the PLQ as 10 times so.
    9.3  Procedure II for Estimating so. This procedure is to 
be used if the estimated PLQ is more than twice the calculated PLQ.
    9.3.1  Prepare two additional standards at concentration levels 
lower than the standard used in Procedure I.
    9.3.2  Sample and analyze each of these standards at least seven 
times.
    9.3.3  Calculate the standard deviation for each concentration 
level.
    9.3.4  Plot the standard deviations of the three test standards as a 
function of the standard concentrations.
    9.3.5  Draw a best-fit straight line through the data points and 
extrapolate to zero concentration. The standard deviation at zero 
concentration is S0.
    9.3.6  Calculate the PLQ as 10 times S0.

                10.0 Field Validation Report Requirements

    The field validation report shall include a discussion of the 
regulatory objectives for the testing which describe the reasons for the 
test, applicable emission limits, and a description of the source. In 
addition, validation results shall include:
    10.1  Summary of the results and calculations shown in section 6.0.
    10.2  Reference material certification and value(s).
    10.3  Performance audit results or letter from the reviewing 
authority stating the audit material is currently not available.
    10.4  Laboratory demonstration of the quality of the spiking system.
    10.5  Discussion of laboratory evaluations.
    10.6  Discussion of field sampling.
    10.7  Discussion of sample preparations and analysis.
    10.8  Storage times of samples (and extracts, if applicable).
    10.9  Reasons for eliminating any results.

                          11. Followup Testing

    The correction factor calculated in section 6.0 shall be used to 
adjust the sample concentrations in all followup tests conducted

[[Page 487]]

at the same source. These tests shall consist of at least three 
replicate samples, and the average shall be used to determine the 
pollutant concentration. The number of samples to be collected and 
analyzed shall be as follows, depending on the validated method 
precision level:
    11.1  Validated relative standard deviation (RSD)  
15 Percent. Three replicate samples.
    11.2  Validated RSD  30 Percent. Six 
replicate samples.
    11.3  Validated RSD  50 Percent. Nine 
replicate samples.
    11.4  Equivalent method. Three replicate samples.

                  12. Procedure for Obtaining a Waiver

    12.1  Waivers. These procedures may be waived or a less rigorous 
protocol may be granted for site-specific applications. The following 
are three example situations for which a waiver may be considered.
    12.1.1  ``Similar'' Sources. If the test method has been validated 
previously at a ``similar'' source, the procedures may be waived 
provided the requester can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the 
Administrator that the sources are ``similar.'' The methods's 
applicability to the ``similar'' source may be demonstrated by 
conducting a ruggedness test as described in section 6.0.
    12.1.2  ``Documented'' Methods. In some cases, bias and precision 
may have been documented through laboratory tests or protocols different 
from this method. If the analyst can demonstrate to the satisfaction of 
the Administrator that the bias and precision apply to a particular 
application, the Administrator may waive these procedures or parts of 
the procedures.
    12.1.3  ``Conditional'' Test Methods. When the method has been 
demonstrated to be valid at several sources, the analyst may seek a 
``conditional'' method designation from the Administrator. 
``Conditional'' method status provides an automatic waiver from the 
procedures provided the test method is used within the stated 
applicability.
    12.2  Application for Waiver. In general, the requester shall 
provide a thorough description of the test method, the intended 
application, and results of any validation or other supporting 
documents. Because of the many potential situations in which the 
Administrator may grant a waiver, it is neither possible nor desirable 
to prescribe the exact criteria for a waiver. At a minimum, the 
requester is responsible for providing the following.
    12.2.1  A clearly written test method, preferably in the format of 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A Test Methods. The method must include an 
applicability statement, concentration range, precision, bias 
(accuracy), and time in which samples must be analyzed.
    12.2.2.2  Summaries (see section 10.0) of previous validation tests 
or other supporting documents. If a different procedure from that 
described in this method was used, the requester shall provide 
appropriate documents substantiating (to the satisfaction of the 
Administrator) the bias and precision values.
    12.2.2.3  Results of testing conducted with respect to sections 7.0, 
8.0, and 9.0.
    12.2.3  Discussion of the applicability statement and arguments for 
approval of the waiver. This discussion should address as applicable the 
following: Applicable regulation, emission standards, effluent 
characteristics, and process operations.
    12.3  Requests for Waiver. Each request shall be in writing and 
signed by the analyst. Submit requests to the Director, OAQPS, Technical 
Support Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research 
Triangle Park, NC 27711.

                            13. Bibliography

    1. Albritton, J.R., G.B. Howe, S.B. Tompkins, R.K.M. Jayanty, and 
C.E. Decker, 1989. Stability of Parts-Per-Million Organic Cylinder Gases 
and Results of Source Test Analysis Audits, Status Report No. 11. 
Environmental Protection Agency Contract 68-02-4125. Research Triangle 
Institute, Research Triangle Park, NC. September.
    2. DeWees, W.G., P.M. Grohse, K.K. Luk, and F.E. Butler. 1989. 
Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Methodology for Speciating Nickel 
Emissions from Stationary Sources. EPA Contract 68-02-4442. Prepared for 
Atmospheric Research and Environmental Assessment Laboratory, Office of 
Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research 
Triangle Park, NC 27711. January.
    3. Keith, L.H., W. Crummer, J. Deegan Jr., R.A. Libby, J.K. Taylor, 
and G. Wentler. 1983. Principles of Environmental Analysis. American 
Chemical Society, Washington, DC.
    4. Maxwell, E.A. 1974. Estimating variances from one or two 
measurements on each sample. Amer. Statistician 28:96-97.
    5. Midgett, M.R. 1977. How EPA Validates NSPS Methodology. Environ. 
Sci. & Technol. 11(7):655-659.
    6. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. 1976. Means to evaluate 
performance of stationary source test methods. Environ. Sci. & Technol. 
10:85-88.
    7. Plackett, R.L., and J.P. Burman. 1946. The design of optimum 
multifactorial experiments. Biometrika, 33:305.
    8. Taylor, J.K. 1987. Quality Assurance of Chemical Measurements. 
Lewis Publishers, Inc., pp. 79-81.
    9. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1978. Quality Assurance 
Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems: Volume III. Stationary 
Source Specific Methods.

[[Page 488]]

Publication No. EPA-600/4-77-027b. Office of Research and Development 
Publications, 26 West St. Clair St., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
    10. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1981. A Procedure for 
Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of 
Standards Standard Reference Materials. Publication No. EPA-600/7-81-
010. Available from the U.S. EPA, Quality Assurance Division (MD-77), 
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
    11. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1991. Protocol for The 
Field Validation of Emission Concentrations From Stationary Sources. 
Publication No. 450/4-90-015. Available from the U.S. EPA, Emission 
Measurement Technical Information Center, Technical Support Division 
(MD-14), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
    12. Youdon, W.J. Statistical techniques for collaborative tests. In: 
Statistical Manual of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, 
Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Washington, DC, 1975, pp. 
33-36.

Method 303--Determination of Visible Emissions From By-Product Coke Oven 
                                Batteries

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method applies to the determination of 
visible emissions (VE) from the following by-product coke oven battery 
sources: Charging systems during charging, doors, topside port lids, and 
offtake systems on operating coke ovens; and collecting mains. In order 
for the test method results to be indicative of plant performance, the 
time of day of the run should vary.
    1.2  Principle. A certified observer visually determines the VE from 
coke oven battery sources (the certification procedures are described in 
section 2). This method does not require that opacity of emissions be 
determined or that magnitude be differentiated.
    1.3  Definitions.
    1.3.1  Bench. The platform structure in front of the oven doors.
    1.3.2  By-product Coke Oven Battery. A source consisting of a group 
of ovens connected by common walls, where coal undergoes destructive 
distillation under positive pressure to produce coke and coke oven gas, 
from which by-products are recovered.
    1.3.3  Charge or Charging Period. The period of time that commences 
when coal begins to flow into an oven through a topside port and ends 
when the last charging port is recapped.
    1.3.4  Charging System. An apparatus used to charge coal to a coke 
oven (e.g., a larry car for wet coal charging systems).
    1.3.5  Coke Oven Door. Each end enclosure on the pusher side and the 
coking side of an oven. The chuck, or leveler-bar, door is considered 
part of the pusher side door. The coke oven door area includes the 
entire area on the vertical face of a coke oven between the bench and 
the top of the battery between two adjacent buck stays.
    1.3.6  Coke Side. The side of a battery from which the coke is 
discharged from ovens at the end of the coking cycle.
    1.3.7  Collecting Main. Any apparatus that is connected to one or 
more offtake systems and that provides a passage for conveying gases 
under positive pressure from the by-product coke oven battery to the by-
product recovery system.
    1.3.8  Consecutive Charges. Charges observed successively, excluding 
any charge during which the observer's view of the charging system or 
topside ports is obscured.
    1.3.9  Damper-off. To close off the gas passage between the coke 
oven and the collecting main, with no flow of raw coke oven gas from the 
collecting main into the oven or into the oven's offtake system(s).
    1.3.10  Decarbonization Period. The period of time for combusting 
oven carbon that commences when the oven lids are removed from an empty 
oven or when standpipe caps of an oven are opened. The period ends with 
the initiation of the next charging period for that oven.
    1.3.11  Larry Car. An apparatus used to charge coal to a coke oven 
with a wet coal charging system.
    1.3.12  Log Average. Logarithmic average as calculated in section 
3.8.
    1.3.13  Offtake System. Any individual oven apparatus that is 
stationary and provides a passage for gases from an oven to a coke oven 
battery collecting main or to another oven. Offtake system components 
include the standpipe and standpipe caps, goosenecks, stationary jumper 
pipes, mini-standpipes, and standpipe and gooseneck connections.
    1.3.14  Operating Oven. Any oven not out of operation for rebuild or 
maintenance work extensive enough to require the oven to be skipped in 
the charging sequence.
    1.3.15  Oven. A chamber in the coke oven battery in which coal 
undergoes destructive distillation to produce coke.
    1.3.16  Push Side. The side of the battery from which the coke is 
pushed from ovens at the end of the coking cycle.
    1.3.17  Run. The observation of visible emissions from topside port 
lids, offtake systems, coke oven doors, or the charging of a single oven 
in accordance with this method.
    1.3.18  Shed. Structures for capturing coke oven emissions on the 
coke side or pusher side of the coke oven battery, which route the 
emissions to a control device or system.
    1.3.19  Standpipe Cap. An apparatus used to cover the opening in the 
gooseneck of an offtake system.
    1.3.20  Topside Port Lid. A cover, removed during charging or 
decarbonizing, that is placed over the opening through which coal

[[Page 489]]

can be charged into the oven of a by-product coke oven battery.
    1.3.21  Traverse Time. Accumulated time for a traverse as measured 
by a stopwatch. Traverse time includes time to stop and write down oven 
numbers but excludes time waiting for obstructions of view to clear or 
for time to walk around obstacles.
    1.3.22  Visible Emissions (VE). Any emission seen by the unaided 
(except for corrective lenses) eye, excluding steam or condensing water.

                        2. Observer Certification

    2.1  Certification Procedures. This method requires only the 
determination of whether VE occur and does not require the determination 
of opacity levels; therefore, observer certification according to Method 
9 in appendix A to part 60 of this chapter is not required to obtain 
certification under this method. However, in order to receive Method 303 
observer certification, the first-time observer (trainee) shall have 
attended the lecture portion of the Method 9 certification course. In 
addition, the trainee shall successfully complete the Method 303 
training course, satisfy the field observation requirement, and 
demonstrate adequate performance and sufficient knowledge of Method 303. 
The Method 303 training course shall be conducted by or under the 
sanction of the EPA and shall consist of classroom instruction and field 
observations, and a proficiency test.
    2.1.1  The classroom instruction shall familiarize the trainees with 
Method 303 through lecture, written training materials, and a Method 303 
demonstration video. A successful completion of the classroom portion of 
the Method 303 training course shall be demonstrated by a perfect score 
on a written test. If the trainee fails to answer all of the questions 
correctly, the trainee may review the appropriate portion of the 
training materials and retake the test.
    2.1.2  The field observations shall be a minimum of 12 hours and 
shall be completed before attending the Method 303 certification course. 
Trainees shall observe the operation of a coke oven battery as it 
pertains to Method 303, including topside operations, and shall also 
practice conducting Method 303 or similar methods. During the field 
observations, trainees unfamiliar with coke battery operations shall 
receive instruction from an experienced coke oven observer familiar with 
Method 303 or similar methods and the operation of coke batteries. The 
trainee must verify completion of at least 12 hours of field observation 
prior to attending the Method 303 certification course.
    2.1.3  All trainees must demonstrate proficiency in the application 
of Method 303 to a panel of three certified Method 303 observers, 
including an ability to differentiate coke oven emissions from 
condensing water vapor and smoldering coal. Each panel member shall have 
at least 120 days experience in reading visible emissions from coke 
ovens. The visible emissions inspections that will satisfy the 
experience requirement must be inspections of coke oven battery fugitive 
emissions from the emission points subject to emission standards under 
subpart L of this part (i.e., coke oven doors, topside port lids, 
offtake system(s), and charging operations), using either Method 303 or 
predecessor State or local test methods. A ``day's experience'' for a 
particular inspection is a day on which one complete inspection was 
performed for that emission point under Method 303 or a predecessor 
State or local method. A ``day's experience'' does not mean 8 or 10 
hours performing inspections, or any particular time expressed in 
minutes or hours that may have been spent performing them. Thus, it 
would be possible for an individual to qualify as a Method 303 panel 
member for some emission points, but not others (e.g., an individual 
might satisfy the experience requirement for coke oven doors, but not 
topside port lids). Until November 15, 1994, the EPA may waive the 
certification requirement (but not the experience requirement) for panel 
members. The composition of the panel shall be approved by the EPA. The 
panel shall observe the trainee in a series of training runs and a 
series of certification runs. There shall be a minimum of 1 training run 
for doors, topside port lids, and offtake systems, and a minimum of 5 
training runs (i.e., 5 charges) for charging. During training runs, the 
panel can advise the trainee on proper procedures. There shall be a 
minimum of 3 certification runs for doors, topside port lids, and 
offtake systems, and a minimum of 15 certification runs for charging 
(i.e., 15 charges). The certifications runs shall be unassisted. 
Following the certification test runs, the panel shall approve or 
disapprove certification based on the trainee's performance during the 
certification runs. To obtain certification, the trainee shall 
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the panel a high degree of 
proficiency in performing Method 303. To aid in evaluating the trainee's 
performance, a checklist, provided by the EPA, will be used.
    Caution: Because coke oven batteries have hazardous environments, 
the training materials and the field training shall cover the 
precautions required by the company to address health and safety 
hazards. Special emphasis shall be given to the Occupational Safety and 
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations pertaining to exposure of coke 
oven workers (see Citation 3 in the Bibliography). In general, the 
regulation requires that special fire-retardant clothing and respirators 
be worn in certain restricted areas of the coke oven battery. The OSHA 
regulation also prohibits certain activities, such as

[[Page 490]]

chewing gum, smoking, and eating in these areas.
    2.2  Observer Certification/Recertification. The coke oven observer 
certification is valid for 1 year from date of issue. The observer shall 
recertify annually by viewing the training video and answering all of 
the questions on the certification test correctly. Every 3 years, an 
observer shall be required to pass the proficiency test in section 2.1.3 
in order to be certified.
    2.3  The EPA (or applicable enforcement agency) shall maintain 
records reflecting a certified observer's successful completion of the 
proficiency test, which shall include the completed proficiency test 
checklists for the certification runs.
    2.4  An owner or operator of a coke oven battery subject to subpart 
L of this part may observe a training and certification program under 
this section.

  3. Procedure for Determining VE From Charging Systems During Charging

    3.1  Number of Oven Charges. Refer to Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of this part 
for the number of oven charges to observe. The observer shall observe 
consecutive charges. Charges that are nonconsecutive can only be 
observed when necessary to replace observations terminated prior to the 
completion of a charge because of visual interferences. (See section 
3.5.)
    3.2  Data Records. Record all the information requested at the top 
of the charging system inspection sheet (Figure 303-1). For each charge, 
record the identification number of the oven being charged, the 
approximate beginning time of the charge, and the identification of the 
larry car used for the charge.
    3.3  Observer Position. Stand in an area or move to positions on the 
topside of the coke oven battery with an unobstructed view of the entire 
charging system. For wet coal charging systems or non-pipeline coal 
charging systems, the observer should have an unobstructed view of the 
emission points of the charging system, including larry car hoppers, 
drop sleeves, and the topside ports of the oven being charged. Some 
charging systems are configured so that all emission points can only be 
seen from a distance of five ovens. For other batteries, distances of 8 
to 12 ovens are adequate.
    3.4  Observation. The charging period begins when coal begins to 
flow into the oven and ends when the last charging port is recapped. 
During the charging period, observe all of the potential sources of VE 
from the entire charging system. For wet coal charging systems or non-
pipeline coal charging systems, sources of VE typically include the 
larry car hoppers, drop sleeves, slide gates, and topside ports on the 
oven being charged. Any VE from an open standpipe cap on the oven being 
charged is included as charging VE.
    3.4.1  Using an accumulative-type stopwatch with unit divisions of 
at least 0.5 seconds, determine the total time VE are observed as 
follows. Upon observing any VE emerging from any part of the charging 
system, start the stopwatch. Stop the watch when VE are no longer 
observed emerging, and restart the watch when VE reemerges.
    3.4.2  When VE occur simultaneously from several points during a 
charge, consider the sources as one. Time overlapping VE as continuous 
VE. Time single puffs of VE only for the time it takes for the puff to 
emerge from the charging system. Continue to time VE in this manner for 
the entire charging period. Record the accumulated time to the nearest 
0.5 second under ``Visible emissions, seconds'' on Figure 303-1.
    3.5  Visual Interference. If fugitive VE from other sources at the 
coke oven battery site (e.g., door leaks or condensing water vapor from 
the coke oven wharf) prevent a clear view of the charging system during 
a charge, stop the stopwatch and make an appropriate notation under 
``Comments'' on Figure 303-1. Label the observation an observation of an 
incomplete charge, and observe another charge to fulfill the 
requirements of section 3.1.
    3.6  VE Exemptions. Do not time the following VE:
    3.6.1  The VE from burning or smoldering coal spilled on top of the 
oven, topside port lid, or larry car surfaces;
    Note: The VE from smoldering coal are generally white or gray. These 
VE generally have a plume of less than 1 meter long. If the observer 
cannot safely and with reasonable confidence determine that VE are from 
charging, do not count them as charging emissions.

    3.6.2  The VE from the coke oven doors or from the leveler bar; or
    3.6.3  The VE that drift from the top of a larry car hopper if the 
emissions had already been timed as VE from the drop sleeve.

    Note: When the slide gate on a larry car hopper closes after the 
coal has been added to the oven, the seal may not be airtight. On 
occasions, a puff of smoke observed at the drop sleeves is forced past 
the slide gate up into the larry car hopper and may drift from the top; 
time these VE either at the drop sleeves or the hopper. If the larry car 
hopper does not have a slide gate or the slide gate is left open or 
partially closed, VE may quickly pass through the larry car hopper 
without being observed at the drop sleeves and will appear as a strong 
surge of smoke; time these as charging VE.

    3.7  Total Time Record. Record the total time that VE were observed 
for each charging operation in the appropriate column on the charging 
system inspection sheet.
    3.8  Five charging observations (runs) obtained in accordance with 
this method shall

[[Page 491]]

be considered a valid set of observations for that day. No observation 
of an incomplete charge shall be included in a daily set of observations 
that is lower than the lowest reading for a complete charge. If both 
complete and incomplete charges have been observed, the daily set of 
observations shall include the five highest values observed. Four or 
three charging observations (runs) obtained in accordance with this 
method shall be considered a valid set of charging observations only 
where it is not possible to obtain five charging observations, because 
of visual interferences (see section 3.5) or inclement weather prevent a 
clear view of the charging system during charging. However, observations 
from three or four charges that satisfy these requirements shall not be 
considered a valid set of charging observations if use of such set of 
observations in a calculation under section 3.9 would cause the value of 
A to be less than 145.
    3.9  Log Average. For each day on which a valid daily set of 
observations is obtained, calculate the daily 30-day rolling log average 
of seconds of visible emissions from the charging operation for each 
battery using these data and the 29 previous valid daily sets of 
observations, in accordance with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.003

where

e=2.72,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.004

ln=Natural logarithm, and
Xi=Seconds of VE during the ith charge.
A=150 or the number of valid observations (runs). The value of A shall 
          not be less than 145, except for purposes of determinations 
          under Sec. 63.306(c) (work practice plan implementation) or 
          Sec. 63.306(d) (work practice plan revisions) of this part. No 
          set of observations shall be considered valid for such a 
          recalculation that otherwise would not be considered a valid 
          set of observations for a calculation under this paragraph.

        4. Procedure for Determining VE From Coke Oven Door Areas

    The intent of this procedure is to determine VE from coke oven door 
areas by carefully observing the door area from a standard distance 
while walking at a normal pace.
    4.1  Number of Runs. Refer to Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of this part for the 
appropriate number of runs.
    4.2  Battery Traverse. To conduct a battery traverse, walk the 
length of the battery on the outside of the pusher machine and quench 
car tracks at a steady, normal walking pace, pausing to make appropriate 
entries on the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303-2). A single test 
run consists of two timed traverses, one for the coke side and one for 
the push side. The walking pace shall not exceed an average rate of 4 
seconds per oven door, excluding time spent moving around stationary 
obstructions or waiting for other obstructions to move from positions 
blocking the view of a series of doors. Extra time is allowed for each 
leak for the observer to make the proper notation. A walking pace of 3 
seconds per oven door has been found to be typical. Record the actual 
traverse time with a stopwatch.
    4.2.1  Time only the time spent observing the doors and recording 
door leaks. To measure actual traverse time, use an accumulative-type 
stopwatch with unit divisions of 0.5 seconds or less. Exclude 
interruptions to the traverse and time required for the observer to move 
to positions where the view of the battery is unobstructed, or for 
obstructions, such as the door machine, to move from positions blocking 
the view of a series of doors.
    4.2.2  Various situations may arise that will prevent the observer 
from viewing a door or a series of doors. Prior to the door inspection, 
the owner or operator may elect to temporarily suspend charging 
operations for the duration of the inspection, so that all of the doors 
can be viewed by the observer. The observer has two options for dealing 
with obstructions to view: (a) Stop the stopwatch and wait for the 
equipment to move or the fugitive emissions to dissipate before 
completing the traverse; or (b) stop the stopwatch, skip the affected 
ovens, and move to a position to continue the traverse. Restart the 
stopwatch and continue the traverse. After the completion of the 
traverse, if the equipment has moved or the fugitive emissions have 
dissipated, inspect the affected doors. If the equipment is still 
preventing the observer from viewing the doors, then the affected doors 
may be counted as not observed. If option (b) is used because of doors 
blocked by machines during charging operations, then, of the affected 
doors, exclude the door from the most recently charged oven from the 
inspection. Record the oven numbers and make an appropriate notation 
under ``Comments'' on the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303-2).
    4.2.3  When batteries have sheds to control emissions, conduct the 
inspection from outside the shed unless the doors cannot be adequately 
viewed. In this case, conduct the inspection from the bench. Be aware of 
special safety considerations pertinent to walking on the bench and 
follow the instructions of company personnel on the required equipment 
and operations procedures. If possible, conduct the bench traverse 
whenever the bench is clear of the door machine and hot coke guide.

[[Page 492]]

    4.3  Observations. Record all the information requested at the top 
of the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303-2), including the number 
of inoperable ovens. Record the clock time at the start of the traverse 
on each side of the battery. Record which side is being inspected, i.e., 
coke side or push side. Other information may be recorded at the 
discretion of the observer, such as the location of the leak (i.e., top 
of the door, chuck door, etc.), the reason for any interruption of the 
traverse, or the position of the sun relative to the battery and sky 
conditions (i.e., overcast, partly sunny, etc.).
    4.3.1  Begin the test run by starting the stopwatch and traversing 
either the coke side or the push side of the battery. After completing 
one side, stop the watch. Complete this procedure on the other side. If 
inspecting more than one battery, the observer may view the push sides 
and the coke sides sequentially.
    4.3.2  During the traverse, look around the entire perimeter of each 
oven door. The door is considered leaking if VE are detected in the coke 
oven door area. The coke oven door area includes the entire area on the 
vertical face of a coke oven between the bench and the top of the 
battery between two adjacent buck stays (e.g., the oven door, chuck 
door, between the masonry brick, buck stay or jamb, or other sources). 
Record the oven number and make the appropriate notation on the door 
area inspection sheet (Figure 303-2).

    Note: Multiple VE from the same door area (e.g., VE from both the 
chuck door and the push side door) are counted as only one emitting 
door, not as multiple emitting doors.
    4.3.3  Do not record the following sources as door area VE:
    4.3.3.1  VE from ovens with doors removed. Record the oven number 
and make an appropriate notation under ``Comments;''
    4.3.3.2  VE from ovens taken out of service. The owner or operator 
shall notify the observer as to which ovens are out of service. Record 
the oven number and make an appropriate notation under ``Comments;'' or
    4.3.3.3  VE from hot coke that has been spilled on the bench as a 
result of pushing.
    4.4  Criteria for Acceptance. After completing the run, calculate 
the maximum time allowed to observe the ovens by the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.005

where

T=Total time allowed for traverse, seconds;
Dt=Total number of oven doors on the battery; and
L=Number of doors with VE.
    4.4.1  If the total traverse time exceeds T, void the run, and 
conduct another run to satisfy the requirements of Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of 
this part.
    4.5  Calculations for Percent Leaking Doors (PLD). Determine the 
total number of doors for which observations were made on the coke oven 
battery as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.006

where

Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens;
Di=Number of doors on nonoperating ovens;
Dno=Number of doors not observed; and
N=Total number of ovens in the battery.
    4.5.1  For each test run (one run includes both the coke side and 
the push side traverses), sum the number of doors with door area VE. For 
batteries subject to an approved alternative standard under Sec. 63.305 
of this part, calculate the push side and the coke side PLD separately.
    4.5.2  Calculate percent leaking doors by using the following 
equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.007

where

PLD=Percent leaking doors for the test run;
Ly=Number of doors with VE observed from the yard; and
Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens.
    4.5.3  When traverses are conducted from the bench under sheds, 
calculate the coke side and the push side separately. Use the following 
equation to calculate a yard-equivalent reading:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.008

where

N=Total number of ovens on the battery;
Lb=Yard-equivalent reading; and
Ls=Number of doors with VE observed from the bench under 
          sheds.

    If Lb is less than zero, use zero for Lb in 
Equation 303-6 in the calculation of PLD.
    4.5.3.1  Use the following equation to calculate PLD:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.009
    
where

PLD=Percent leaking coke oven doors for the run;
Lb=Yard equivalent reading;
Ly=Number of doors with VE observed from the yard on the push 
          side; and
Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens.


[[Page 493]]


    Round off PLD to the nearest hundredth of 1 percent and record as 
the percent leaking coke oven doors for the run.
    4.5.3.2  30-day Rolling Average. For each day on which a valid 
observation is obtained, calculate the daily 30-day rolling average for 
each battery using these data and the 29 previous valid daily 
observations, in accordance with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.010

   5. Procedure for Determining VE from Topside Port Lids and Offtake 
                                 Systems

    5.1  Number of Runs. Refer to Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of this part for the 
number of runs to be conducted. Simultaneous runs or separate runs for 
the topside port lids and offtake systems may be conducted.
    5.2  Battery Traverse. To conduct a topside traverse of the battery, 
walk the length of the battery at a steady, normal walking pace, pausing 
only to make appropriate entries on the topside inspection sheet (Figure 
303-3). The walking pace shall not exceed an average rate of 4 seconds 
per oven, excluding time spent moving around stationary obstructions or 
waiting for other obstructions to move from positions blocking the view. 
Extra time is allowed for each leak for the observer to make the proper 
notation. A walking pace of 3 seconds per oven is typical. Record the 
actual traverse time with a stopwatch.
    5.3  Topside Port Lid Observations. To observe lids of the ovens 
involved in the charging operation, the observer shall wait to view the 
lids until approximately 5 minutes after the completion of the charge. 
Record all the information requested on the topside inspection sheet 
(Figure 303-3). Record the clock time when traverses begin and end. If 
the observer's view is obstructed during the traverse (e.g., steam from 
the coke wharf, larry car, etc.), follow the guidelines given in section 
4.2.2.
    5.3.1  To perform a test run, conduct a single traverse on the 
topside of the battery. The observer shall walk near the center of the 
battery but may deviate from this path to avoid safety hazards (such as 
open or closed charging ports, luting buckets, lid removal bars, and 
topside port lids that have been removed) and any other obstacles. Upon 
noting VE from the topside port lid(s) of an oven, record the oven 
number and port number, then resume the traverse. If any oven is 
dampered-off from the collecting main for decarbonization, note this 
under ``Comments'' for that particular oven.

    Note: Count the number of topside ports, not the number of points, 
exhibiting VE, i.e., if a topside port has several points of VE, count 
this as one port exhibiting VE.

    5.3.2  Do not count the following as topside port lid VE:
    5.3.2.1  VE from between the brickwork and oven lid casing or VE 
from cracks in the oven brickwork. Note these VE under ``Comments;''
    5.3.2.2  VE from topside ports involved in a charging operation. 
Record the oven number, and make an appropriate notation (i.e., not 
observed because ports open for charging) under ``Comments;''
    5.3.2.3  Topside ports having maintenance work done. Record the oven 
number and make an appropriate notation under ``Comments;'' or
    5.3.2.4  Condensing water from wet-sealing material. Ports with only 
visible condensing water from wet-sealing material are counted as 
observed but not as having VE.
    5.3.2.5  Visible emissions from the flue inspection ports and caps.
    5.4  Offtake Systems Observations. To perform a test run, traverse 
the battery as in section 5.3.1. Look ahead and back two to four ovens 
to get a clear view of the entire offtake system for each oven. Consider 
visible emissions from the following points as offtake system VE: (a) 
the flange between the gooseneck and collecting main (``saddle''), (b) 
the junction point of the standpipe and oven (``standpipe base''), (c) 
the other parts of the offtake system (e.g., the standpipe cap), and (d) 
the junction points with ovens and flanges of jumper pipes.
    5.4.1  Do not stray from the traverse line in order to get a 
``closer look'' at any part of the offtake system unless it is to 
distinguish leaks from interferences from other sources or to avoid 
obstacles.
    5.4.2  If the centerline does not provide a clear view of the entire 
offtake system for each oven (e.g., when standpipes are longer than 15 
feet), the observer may conduct the traverse farther from (rather than 
closer to) the offtake systems.
    5.4.3  Upon noting a leak from an offtake system during a traverse, 
record the oven number. Resume the traverse. If the oven is dampered-off 
from the collecting main for decarbonization and VE are observed, note 
this under ``Comments'' for that particular oven.

[[Page 494]]

    5.4.4  If any part or parts of an offtake system have VE, count it 
as one emitting offtake system. Each stationary jumper pipe is 
considered a single offtake system.
    5.4.5  Do not count standpipe caps open for a decarbonization period 
or standpipes of an oven being charged as source of offtake system VE. 
Record the oven number and write ``Not observed'' and the reason (i.e., 
decarb or charging) under ``Comments.''

    Note: VE from open standpipes of an oven being charged count as 
charging emissions. All VE from closed standpipe caps count as offtake 
leaks.

    5.5  Criteria for Acceptance. After completing the run (allow 2 
traverses for batteries with double mains), calculate the maximum time 
allowed to observe the topside port lids and/or offtake systems by the 
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.011

where

T=Total time allowed for traverse, seconds;
N=Total number of ovens in the battery; and
Z=Number of topside port lids or offtake systems with VE.
    5.5.1  If the total traverse time exceeds T, void the run and 
conduct another run to satisfy the requirements of Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of 
this part.
    5.6  In determining the percent leaking topside port lids and 
percent leaking offtake systems, do not include topside port lids or 
offtake systems with VE from the following ovens:
    5.6.1  Empty ovens, including ovens undergoing maintenance, which 
are properly dampered off from the main.
    5.6.2  Ovens being charged or being pushed.
    5.6.3  Up to 3 full ovens that have been dampered off from the main 
prior to pushing.
    5.6.4  Up to 3 additional full ovens in the pushing sequence that 
have been dampered off from the main for offtake system cleaning, for 
decarbonization, for safety reasons, or when a charging/pushing schedule 
involves widely separated ovens (e.g., a Marquard system); or that have 
been dampered off from the main for maintenance near the end of the 
coking cycle. Examples of reasons that ovens are dampered off for safety 
reasons are to avoid exposing workers in areas with insufficient 
clearance between standpipes and the larry car, or in areas where 
workers could be exposed to flames or hot gases from open standpipes, 
and to avoid the potential for removing a door on an oven that is not 
dampered off from the main.
    5.6.5  Topside Port Lids. Determine the percent leaking topside port 
lids for each run as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.012

where

PLL=Percent leaking topside port lids for the run;
PVE=Number of topside port lids with VE;
Povn=Number of ports per oven;
N=Total number of ovens in the battery;
Ni=Number of inoperable ovens; and
PNO=Number of ports not observed.
    5.6.5.1  Round off this percentage to the nearest hundredth of 1 
percent and record this percentage as the percent leaking topside port 
lids for the run.
    5.6.5.2  30-day Rolling Average. For each day on which a valid daily 
observation is obtained, calculate the daily 30-day rolling average for 
each battery using these data and the 29 previous valid daily 
observations, in accordance with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.013


[[Page 495]]


    5.6.6  Offtake Systems. Determine the percent leaking offtake 
systems for the run as follows:

where
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.014

PLO=Percent leaking offtake systems;
TVE=Number of offtake systems with VE;
Tovn=Number of offtake systems (excluding jumper pipes) per 
          oven;
N=Total number of ovens in the battery;
Ni=Total number of inoperable ovens;
TNO=Number of offtake systems not observed; and
J=Number of stationary jumper pipes.
    5.6.6.1  Round off this percentage to the nearest hundredth of 1 
percent and record this percentage as the percent leaking offtake 
systems for the run.
    5.6.6.2  30-day Rolling Average. For each day on which a valid daily 
observation is obtained, calculate the daily 30-day rolling average for 
each battery using these data and the 29 previous valid daily 
observations, in accordance with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.015

    6. Procedure for Determining VE From Collecting Mains
    6.1  Traverse. To perform a test run, traverse both the collecting 
main catwalk and the battery topside along the side closest to the 
collecting main. If the battery has a double main, conduct two sets of 
traverses for each run, i.e., one set for each main.
    6.2  Data Recording. Upon noting VE from any portion of a collection 
main, identify the source and approximate location of the source of VE 
and record the time under ``Collecting main'' on Figure 303-3; then 
resume the traverse.
    6.3  Collecting Main Pressure Check. After the completion of the 
door traverse, the topside port lids, and offtake systems, compare the 
collecting main pressure during the inspection to the collecting main 
pressure during the previous 8 to 24 hours. Record the following: (a) 
The pressure during inspection, (b) presence of pressure deviation from 
normal operations, and (c) the explanation for any pressure deviation 
from normal operations, if any, offered by the operators. The owner or 
operator of the coke battery shall maintain the pressure recording 
equipment and conduct the quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) 
necessary to ensure reliable pressure readings and shall keep the QA/QC 
records for at least 6 months. The observer may periodically check the 
QA/QC records to determine their completeness. The owner or operator 
shall provide access to the records within 1 hour of an observer's 
request.

                             7. Bibliography

    1. Missan, R., and A. Stein. Guidelines for Evaluation of Visible 
Emissions Certification, Field Procedures, Legal Aspects, and Background 
Material. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. EPA Publication No. EPA-
340/1-75-007. April 1975.
    2. Wohlschlegel, P., and D.E. Wagoner. Guideline for Development of 
a Quality Assurance Program: Volume IX--Visual Determination of Opacity 
Emission from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 
EPA Publication No. EPA-650/4-005i. November 1975.
    3. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Code of 
Federal Regulations. Title 29, chapter XVII, Sec. 1910.1029(g). 
Washington, DC Government Printing Office. July 1, 1990.
    4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. National Emission Standards 
for Hazardous Air Pollutants; Coke Oven Emissions from Wet-Coal Charged 
By-Product Coke Oven Batteries; Proposed Rule and Notice of Public 
Hearing. Washington, DC Federal Register. Vol. 52, No. 78 (13586). April 
23, 1987.

[[Page 496]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.060

      

[[Page 497]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.061

      

[[Page 498]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.062

 Method 303A--Determination of Visible Emissions From Nonrecovery Coke 
                             Oven Batteries

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method determines percent leaking doors.
    1.2  Principle. A certified observer visually determines the VE from 
coke oven battery sources. This method does not require that opacity of 
emissions be determined or that magnitude be differentiated.
    1.3  Definitions.
    1.3.1  Bench. The platform structure in front of the oven doors.
    1.3.2  Nonrecovery Coke Oven Battery. A source consisting of a group 
of ovens connected by common walls and operated as a unit, where coal 
undergoes destructive distillation under negative pressure to produce 
coke, and which is designed for the combustion of coke oven gas from 
which by-products are not recovered.
    1.3.3  Coke Oven Door. Each end enclosure on the pusher side and the 
coking side of an oven.
    1.3.4  Coke Side. The side of a battery from which the coke is 
discharged from ovens at the end of the coking cycle.
    1.3.5  Operating Oven. Any oven not out of operation for rebuild or 
maintenance work

[[Page 499]]

extensive enough to require the oven to be skipped in the charging 
sequence.
    1.3.6  Oven. A chamber in the coke oven battery in which coal 
undergoes destructive distillation to produce coke.
    1.3.7  Push Side. The side of the battery from which the coke is 
pushed from ovens at the end of the coking cycle.
    1.3.8  Run. The observation of visible emissions from coke oven 
doors in accordance with the procedures in this method.
    1.3.9  Shed. An enclosure that covers the side of the coke oven 
battery, captures emissions from pushing operations and from leaking 
coke oven doors on the coke side or pusher side of the coke oven 
battery, and routes the emissions to a control device or system.

                               2. Training

    2.1  Training. This method requires only the determination of 
whether VE occur and does not require the determination of opacity 
levels; therefore, observer certification according to Method 9 in 
appendix A to part 60 of this chapter is not required. However, the 
first-time observer (trainee) shall have attended the lecture portion of 
the Method 9 certification course. Furthermore, before conducting any VE 
observations, an observer shall become familiar with nonrecovery coke 
oven battery operations and with this test method by observing for a 
minimum of 4 hours the operation of a nonrecovery coke oven battery.

        3. Procedure for Determining VE From Coke Oven Door Areas

    The intent of this procedure is to determine VE from coke oven door 
areas by carefully observing the door area while walking at a normal 
pace.
    3.1  Number of Runs. Refer to Sec. 63.309(c)(1) of this part for the 
appropriate number of runs.
    3.2  Battery Traverse. To conduct a battery traverse, walk the 
length of the battery on the outside of the pusher machine and quench 
car tracks at a steady, normal walking pace, pausing to make appropriate 
entries on the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303A-1). A single test 
run consists of two timed traverses, one for the coke side and one for 
the push side.
    3.2.1  Various situations may arise that will prevent the observer 
from viewing a door or a series of doors. The observer has two options 
for dealing with obstructions to view: (a) Wait for the equipment to 
move or the fugitive emissions to dissipate before completing the 
traverse; or (b) skip the affected ovens and move to a position to 
continue the traverse. Continue the traverse. After the completion of 
the traverse, if the equipment has moved or the fugitive emissions have 
dissipated, complete the traverse by inspecting the affected doors. 
Record the oven numbers and make an appropriate notation under 
``Comments'' on the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303A-1).
    3.2.2  When batteries have sheds to control pushing emissions, 
conduct the inspection from outside the shed, if the shed allows such 
observations, or from the bench. Be aware of special safety 
considerations pertinent to walking on the bench and follow the 
instructions of company personnel on the required equipment and 
operations procedures. If possible, conduct the bench traverse whenever 
the bench is clear of the door machine and hot coke guide.
    3.3  Observations. Record all the information requested at the top 
of the door area inspection sheet (Figure 303A-1), including the number 
of inoperable ovens. Record which side is being inspected, i.e., coke 
side or push side. Other information may be recorded at the discretion 
of the observer, such as the location of the leak (e.g., top of the 
door), the reason for any interruption of the traverse, or the position 
of the sun relative to the battery and sky conditions (i.e., overcast, 
partly sunny, etc.).
    3.3.1  Begin the test run by traversing either the coke side or the 
push side of the battery. After completing one side, traverse the other 
side.
    3.3.2  During the traverse, look around the entire perimeter of each 
oven door. The door is considered leaking if VE are detected in the coke 
oven door area. The coke oven door area includes the entire area on the 
vertical face of a coke oven between the bench and the top of the 
battery. Record the oven number and make the appropriate notation on the 
door area inspection sheet (Figure 303A-1).
    3.3.3  Do not record the following sources as door area VE:
    3.3.3.1  VE from ovens with doors removed. Record the oven number 
and make an appropriate notation under ``Comments;''
    3.3.3.2  VE from ovens where maintenance work is being conducted. 
Record the oven number and make an appropriate notation under 
``Comments;'' or
    3.3.3.3  VE from hot coke that has been spilled on the bench as a 
result of pushing.
    3.4  Calculations for percent leaking doors (PLD). Determine the 
total number of doors for which observations were made on the coke oven 
battery as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.016

where

Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens;
Di=Number of doors on nonoperating ovens;
Dno=Number of doors not observed; and
N=Total number of ovens in the battery.

[[Page 500]]

    3.4.1  For each test run (one run includes both the coke side and 
the push side traverses), sum the number of doors with door area VE.
    Note: Multiple VE from the same door area are counted as only one 
emitting door, not as multiple emitting doors.
    3.4.2  Calculate percent leaking doors by using the following 
equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.017

where

PLD=Percent leaking doors for the test run;
Ly=Number of doors with VE observed from the yard; and
Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens.

    3.4.3  When traverses are conducted from the bench under sheds, 
calculate the coke side and the push side reading separately. Use the 
following equation to calculate a yard-equivalent reading for the coke 
side:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.018

    where

N=Total number of ovens on the battery;
Lb=Yard-equivalent reading; and
Ls=Number of doors with VE observed from the bench under 
          sheds.

    If Lb is less than zero, use zero for Lb in 
Equation 303A-4 in the calculation of PLD.
    3.4.3.1  Use the following equation to calculate PLD:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.019
    
    where

PLD=Percent leaking coke oven doors for the run;
Lb=Yard equivalent reading;
Ly=Number of doors with VE observed from the yard on the push 
          side; and
Dob=Total number of doors observed on operating ovens.
    Round off PLD to the nearest hundredth of 1 percent and record as 
the percent leaking coke oven doors for the run.
    3.4.3.2  30-day Rolling Average. For each day on which a valid 
observation is obtained, calculate the daily 30-day rolling average for 
each battery using these data and the 29 previous valid daily 
observations, in accordance with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27OC93.020

                             4. Bibliography

    1. Missan, R., and A. Stein. Guidelines for Evaluation of Visible 
Emissions Certification, Field Procedures, Legal Aspects, and Background 
Material. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. EPA Publication No. EPA-
340/1-75-007. April 1975.
    2. Wohlschlegel, P., and D.E. Wagoner. Guideline for Development of 
a Quality Assurance Program: Volume IX--Visual Determination of Opacity 
Emission from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 
EPA Publication No. EPA-650/4-005i. November 1975.
    3. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Code of 
Federal Regulations. Title 29, chapter XVII, Sec. 1910.1029(g). 
Washington, DC Government Printing Office. July 1, 1990.
    4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. National Emission Standards 
for Hazardous Air Pollutants; Coke Oven Emissions from Wet-Coal Charged 
By-Product Coke Oven Batteries; Proposed Rule and Notice of Public 
Hearing. Washington, DC Federal Register. Vol. 52, No. 78 (13586). April 
23, 1987.

[[Page 501]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.063

Method 304A: Determination of Biodegradation Rates of Organic Compounds 
                              (Vent Option)

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination 
of biodegradation rates of organic compounds in an activated sludge 
process. The test method is designed to evaluate the ability of an 
aerobic biological reaction system to degrade or destroy specific 
components in waste streams. The method may also be used to determine 
the effects of changes in wastewater composition on operation. The 
biodegradation rates determined by utilizing this method are not 
representative of a full-scale system. The rates measured by this method 
shall be used in conjunction with the procedures listed in appendix C of 
this part to calculate the fraction emitted to the air versus the 
fraction biodegraded.
    1.2  Principle. A self-contained benchtop bioreactor system is 
assembled in the laboratory. A sample of mixed liquor is added and the 
waste stream is then fed continuously. The benchtop bioreactor is 
operated under conditions nearly identical to the target full-scale 
activated sludge process. Bioreactor temperature, dissolved oxygen 
concentration, average residence time in the reactor, waste composition, 
biomass concentration, and biomass composition of the full-scale process 
are the parameters which are duplicated in the benchtop bioreactor. 
Biomass shall be removed from the target full-scale activated sludge 
unit and held for no more than 4 hours prior to use in the benchtop 
bioreactor. If antifoaming agents are used in the full-scale system, 
they shall

[[Page 502]]

also be used in the benchtop bioreactor. The feed flowing into and the 
effluent exiting the benchtop bioreactor are analyzed to determine the 
biodegradation rates of the target compounds. The flow rate of the exit 
vent is used to calculate the concentration of target compounds 
(utilizing Henry's law) in the exit gas stream. If Henry's law constants 
for the compounds of interest are not known, this method cannot be used 
in the determination of the biodegradation rate and Method 304B is the 
suggested method. The choice of analytical methodology for measuring the 
compounds of interest at the inlet and outlet to the benchtop bioreactor 
are left to the discretion of the source, except where validated methods 
are available.

                              2. Apparatus

    Figure 1 illustrates a typical laboratory apparatus used to measure 
biodegradation rates. While the following description refers to Figure 
1, the EPA recognizes that alternative reactor configurations, such as 
alternative reactor shapes and locations of probes and the feed inlet, 
will also meet the intent of this method. Ensure that the benchtop 
bioreactor system is self-contained and isolated from the atmosphere 
(except for the exit vent stream) by leak-checking fittings, tubing, 
etc.
    2.1  Laboratory apparatus.
    2.1.1  Benchtop Bioreactor. The biological reaction is conducted in 
a biological oxidation reactor of at least 6 liters capacity. The 
benchtop bioreactor is sealed and equipped with internal probes for 
controlling and monitoring dissolved oxygen and internal temperature. 
The top of the reactor is equipped for aerators, gas flow ports, and 
instrumentation (while ensuring that no leaks to the atmosphere exist 
around the fittings).

[[Page 503]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.019

    2.1.2  Aeration gas. Aeration gas is added to the benchtop 
bioreactor through three diffusers, which are glass tubes that extend to 
the bottom fifth of the reactor depth. A pure oxygen pressurized 
cylinder is recommended in order to maintain the specified oxygen 
concentration. Install a blower (e.g., Diaphragm Type, 15 SCFH capacity) 
to blow the

[[Page 504]]

aeration gas into the reactor diffusers. Measure the aeration gas flow 
rate with a rotameter (e.g., 0-15 SCFH recommended). The aeration gas 
will rise through the benchtop bioreactor, dissolving oxygen into the 
mixture in the process. The aeration gas must provide sufficient 
agitation to keep the solids in suspension. Provide an exit for the 
aeration gas from the top flange of the benchtop bioreactor through a 
water-cooled (e.g., Allihn-type) vertical condenser. Install the 
condenser through a gas-tight fitting in the benchtop bioreactor 
closure. Install a splitter which directs a portion of the gas to an 
exit vent and the rest of the gas through an air recycle pump back to 
the benchtop bioreactor. Monitor and record the flow rate through the 
exit vent at least 3 times per day throughout the day.
    2.1.3  Wastewater Feed. Supply the wastewater feed to the benchtop 
bioreactor in a collapsible low-density polyethylene container or 
collapsible liner in a container (e.g., 20 L) equipped with a spigot cap 
(collapsible containers or liners of other material may be required due 
to the permeability of some volatile compounds through polyethylene). 
Obtain the wastewater feed by sampling the wastewater feed in the target 
process. A representative sample of wastewater shall be obtained from 
the piping leading to the aeration tank. This sample may be obtained 
from existing sampling valves at the discharge of the wastewater feed 
pump, or collected from a pipe discharging to the aeration tank, or by 
pumping from a well-mixed equalization tank upstream from the aeration 
tank. Alternatively, wastewater can be pumped continuously to the 
laboratory apparatus from a bleed stream taken from the equalization 
tank of the full-scale treatment system.
    2.1.3.1  Refrigeration System. Keep the wastewater feed cool by ice 
or by refrigeration to 4  deg.C. If using a bleed stream from the 
equalization tank, refrigeration is not required if the residence time 
in the bleed stream is less than five minutes.
    2.1.3.2  Wastewater Feed Pump. The wastewater is pumped from the 
refrigerated container using a variable-speed peristaltic pump drive 
equipped with a peristaltic pump head. Add the feed solution to the 
benchtop bioreactor through a fitting on the top flange. Determine the 
rate of feed addition to provide a retention time in the benchtop 
bioreactor that is numerically equivalent to the retention time in the 
full-scale system. The wastewater shall be fed at a rate sufficient to 
achieve 90 to 100 percent of the full-scale system residence time.
    2.1.3.3  Treated wastewater feed. The benchtop bioreactor effluent 
exits at the bottom of the reactor through a tube and proceeds to the 
clarifier.
    2.1.4  Clarifier. The effluent flows to a separate closed clarifier 
that allows separation of biomass and effluent (e.g., 2-liter pear-
shaped glass separatory funnel, modified by removing the stopcock and 
adding a 25-mm OD glass tube at the bottom). Benchtop bioreactor 
effluent enters the clarifier through a tube inserted to a depth of 0.08 
m (3 in.) through a stopper at the top of the clarifier. System effluent 
flows from a tube inserted through the stopper at the top of the 
clarifier to a drain (or sample bottle when sampling). The underflow 
from the clarifier leaves from the glass tube at the bottom of the 
clarifier. Flexible tubing connects this fitting to the sludge recycle 
pump. This pump is coupled to a variable speed pump drive. The discharge 
from this pump is returned through a tube inserted in a port on the side 
of the benchtop bioreactor. An additional port is provided near the 
bottom of the benchtop bioreactor for sampling the reactor contents. The 
mixed liquor from the benchtop bioreactor flows into the center of the 
clarifier. The clarified system effluent separates from the biomass and 
flows through an exit near the top of the clarifier. There shall be no 
headspace in the clarifier.
    2.1.5  Temperature Control Apparatus. Capable of maintaining the 
system at a temperature equal to the temperature of the full-scale 
system. The average temperature should be maintained within 
2  deg.C of the set point.
    2.1.5.1  Temperature Monitoring Device. A resistance type 
temperature probe or a thermocouple connected to a temperature readout 
with a resolution of 0.1  deg.C or better.
    2.1.5.2  Benchtop Bioreactor Heater. The heater is connected to the 
temperature control device.
    2.1.6  Oxygen Control System. Maintain the dissolved oxygen 
concentration at the levels present in the full-scale system. Target 
full-scale activated sludge systems with dissolved oxygen concentration 
below 2 mg/L are required to maintain the dissolved oxygen concentration 
in the benchtop bioreactor within 0.5 mg/L of the target dissolved 
oxygen level. Target full-scale activated sludge systems with dissolved 
oxygen concentration above 2 mg/L are required to maintain the dissolved 
oxygen concentration in the benchtop bioreactor within 1.5 mg/L of the 
target dissolved oxygen concentration; however, for target full-scale 
activated sludge systems with dissolved oxygen concentrations above 2 
mg/L, the dissolved oxygen concentration in the benchtop bioreactor may 
not drop below 1.5 mg/L. If the benchtop bioreactor is outside the 
control range, the dissolved oxygen is noted and the reactor operation 
is adjusted.
    2.1.6.1  Dissolved Oxygen Monitor. Dissolved oxygen is monitored 
with a polarographic probe (gas permeable membrane) connected to a 
dissolved oxygen meter (e.g., 0 to 15 mg/L, 0 to 50  deg.C).

[[Page 505]]

    2.1.6.2  Benchtop bioreactor Pressure Monitor. The benchtop 
bioreactor pressure is monitored through a port in the top flange of the 
reactor. This is connected to a gauge control with a span of 13-cm water 
vacuum to 13-cm water pressure or better. A relay is activated when the 
vacuum exceeds an adjustable setpoint which opens a solenoid valve 
(normally closed), admitting oxygen to the system. The vacuum setpoint 
controlling oxygen addition to the system shall be set at approximately 
2.5  0.5 cm water and maintained at this setting except 
during brief periods when the dissolved oxygen concentration is 
adjusted.
    2.1.7  Connecting Tubing. All connecting tubing shall be Teflon or 
equivalent in impermeability. The only exception to this specification 
is the tubing directly inside the pump head of the wastewater feed pump, 
which may be Viton, Silicone or another type of flexible tubing. Note: 
Mention of trade names or products does not constitute endorsement by 
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    2.2  Analysis. If the identity of the compounds of interest in the 
wastewater is not known, a representative sample of the wastewater shall 
be analyzed in order to identify all of the compounds of interest 
present. A gas chromatography/mass spectrometry screening method is 
recommended.
    2.2.1  After identifying the compounds of interest in the 
wastewater, develop and/or use one or more analytical techniques capable 
of measuring each of those compounds (more than one analytical technique 
may be required, depending on the characteristics of the wastewater). 
Test Method 18, found in appendix A of 40 CFR part 60, may be used as a 
guideline in developing the analytical technique. Purge and trap 
techniques may be used for analysis providing the target components are 
sufficiently volatile to make this technique appropriate. The limit of 
quantitation for each compound shall be determined.\1\ If the effluent 
concentration of any target compound is below the limit of quantitation 
determined for that compound, the operation of the Method 304 unit may 
be altered to attempt to increase the effluent concentration above the 
limit of quantitation. Modifications to the method shall be approved 
prior to the test. The request should be addressed to Method 304 
contact, Emissions Measurement Center, Mail Drop 19, U.S. Environmental 
Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
    2.2.2  Calibration Standards. Prepare calibration standards from 
pure certified standards in an aqueous medium. Prepare and analyze three 
concentrations of calibration standards for each target component (or 
for a mixture of components) in triplicate daily throughout the analyses 
of the test samples. At each concentration level, a single calibration 
shall be within 5 percent of the average of the three calibration 
results. The low and medium calibration standards shall bracket the 
expected concentration of the effluent (treated) wastewater. The medium 
and high standards shall bracket the expected influent concentration.

                               3. Reagents

    3.1  Wastewater. Obtain a representative sample of wastewater at the 
inlet to the full-scale treatment plant if there is an existing full-
scale treatment plant (see section 2.1.3). If there is no existing full-
scale treatment plant, obtain the wastewater sample as close to the 
point of determination as possible. Collect the sample by pumping the 
wastewater into the 20-L collapsible container. The loss of volatiles 
shall be minimized from the wastewater by collapsing the container 
before filling, by minimizing the time of filling, and by avoiding a 
headspace in the container after filling. If the wastewater requires the 
addition of nutrients to support the biomass growth and maintain biomass 
characteristics, those nutrients are added and mixed with the container 
contents after the container is filled.
    3.2  Biomass. Obtain the biomass or activated sludge used for rate 
constant determination in the bench-scale process from the existing 
full-scale process or from a representative biomass culture (e.g., 
biomass that has been developed for a future full-scale process). This 
biomass is preferentially obtained from a thickened acclimated mixed 
liquor sample. Collect the sample either by bailing from the mixed 
liquor in the aeration tank with a weighted container, or by collecting 
aeration tank effluent at the effluent overflow weir. Transport the 
sample to the laboratory within no more than 4 hours of collection. 
Maintain the biomass concentration in the benchtop bioreactor at the 
level of the full-scale system +10 percent throughout the sampling 
period of the test method.
    4. Procedure. Safety Note: If explosive gases are produced as a 
byproduct of biodegradation and could realistically pose a hazard, 
closely monitor headspace concentration of these gases to ensure 
laboratory safety. Placement of the benchtop bioreactor system inside a 
laboratory hood is recommended regardless of byproducts produced.
    4.1  Benchtop Bioreactor Operation. Charge the mixed liquor to the 
benchtop bioreactor, minimizing headspace over the liquid surface to 
minimize entrainment of mixed liquor in the circulating gas. Fasten the 
benchtop bioreactor headplate to the reactor over the liquid surface. 
Maintain the temperature of the contents of the benchtop bioreactor 
system at the temperature of the target full-scale system, +2  deg.C, 
throughout the testing period. Monitor and record the temperature of the 
benchtop bioreactor contents at least to the nearest 0.1  deg.C.

[[Page 506]]

    4.1.1  Wastewater Storage. Collect the wastewater sample in the 20-L 
collapsible container. Store the container at 4  deg.C throughout the 
testing period. Connect the container to the benchtop bioreactor feed 
pump.
    4.1.2  Wastewater Flow Rate. The hydraulic residence time of the 
aeration tank is calculated as the ratio of the volume of the tank (L) 
to the flow rate (L/min). At the beginning of a test, the container 
shall be connected to the feed pump and solution shall be pumped to the 
benchtop bioreactor at the required flow rate to achieve the calculated 
hydraulic residence time of wastewater in the aeration tank.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.020

Where:
Qtest=wastewater flow rate (L/min)
Qffs=average flow rate of full-scale process (L/min)
Vfs=volume of full-scale aeration tank (L)
    The target flow rate in the test apparatus is the same as the flow 
rate in the target full-scale process multiplied by the ratio of 
benchtop bioreactor volume (e.g., 6 L) to the volume of the full-scale 
aeration tank. The hydraulic residence time shall be maintained at 90 to 
100 percent of the residence time maintained in the full-scale unit. A 
nominal flow rate is set on the pump based on a pump calibration. 
Changes in the elasticity of the tubing in the pump head and the 
accumulation of material in the tubing affect this calibration. The 
nominal pumping rate shall be changed as necessary based on volumetric 
flow measurements. Discharge the benchtop bioreactor effluent to a 
wastewater storage, treatment, or disposal facility, except during 
sampling or flow measurement periods.
    4.1.3  Sludge Recycle Rate. Set the sludge recycle rate at a rate 
sufficient to prevent accumulation in the bottom of the clarifier. Set 
the air circulation rate sufficient to maintain the biomass in 
suspension.
    4.1.4  Benchtop Bioreactor Operation and Maintenance. Temperature, 
dissolved oxygen concentration, exit vent flow rate, benchtop bioreactor 
effluent flow rate, and air circulation rate shall be measured and 
recorded three times throughout each day of benchtop bioreactor 
operation. If other parameters (such as pH) are measured and maintained 
in the target full-scale unit, these parameters, where appropriate, 
shall be monitored and maintained to target full-scale specifications in 
the benchtop bioreactor. At the beginning of each sampling period 
(section 4.2), sample the benchtop bioreactor contents for suspended 
solids analysis. Take this sample by loosening a clamp on a length of 
tubing attached to the lower side port. Determine the suspended solids 
gravimetrically by the Gooch crucible/glass fiber filter method for 
total suspended solids, in accordance with Standard Methods 3 
or equivalent. When necessary, sludge shall be wasted from the lower 
side port of the benchtop bioreactor, and the volume that is wasted 
shall be replaced with an equal volume of the reactor effluent. Add 
thickened activated sludge mixed liquor as necessary to the benchtop 
bioreactor to increase the suspended solids concentration to the desired 
level. Pump this mixed liquor to the benchtop bioreactor through the 
upper side port (Item 24 in Figure 1). Change the membrane on the 
dissolved oxygen probe before starting the test. Calibrate the oxygen 
probe immediately before the start of the test and each time the 
membrane is changed.
    4.1.5  Inspection and Correction Procedures. If the feed line tubing 
becomes clogged, replace with new tubing. If the feed flow rate is not 
within 5 percent of target flow any time the flow rate is measured, 
reset pump or check the flow measuring device and measure flow rate 
again until target flow rate is achieved.
    4.2  Test Sampling. At least two and one half hydraulic residence 
times after the system has reached the targeted specifications shall be 
permitted to elapse before the first sample is taken. Effluent samples 
of the clarifier discharge (Item 20 in Figure 1) and the influent 
wastewater feed are collected in 40-mL septum vials to which two drops 
of 1:10 hydrochloric acid (HCl) in water have been added. Sample the 
clarifier discharge directly from the drain line. These samples will be 
composed of the entire flow from the system for a period of several 
minutes. Feed samples shall be taken from the feed pump suction line 
after temporarily stopping the benchtop bioreactor feed, removing a 
connector, and squeezing the collapsible feed container. Store both 
influent and effluent samples at 4  deg.C immediately after collection 
and analyze within 8 hours of collection.
    4.2.1  Frequency of Sampling. During the test, sample and analyze 
the wastewater feed and the clarifier effluent at least six times. The 
sampling intervals shall be separated by at least 8 hours. During any 
individual sampling interval, sample the wastewater feed simultaneously 
with or immediately after the effluent sample. Calculate the relative 
standard deviation (RSD) of the amount removed (i.e., effluent 
concentration--wastewater feed concentration). The RSD values shall be  
15 percent. If an RSD value is > 15 percent, continue sampling and 
analyzing influent and effluent sets of samples until the RSD values are 
within specifications.
    4.2.2  Sampling After Exposure of System to Atmosphere. If, after 
starting sampling procedures, the benchtop bioreactor system is exposed 
to the atmosphere (due to leaks, maintenance, etc.), allow at least one 
hydraulic residence time to elapse before resuming sampling.

[[Page 507]]

                  5. Operational Checks and Calibration

    5.1  Dissolved Oxygen. Fluctuation in dissolved oxygen concentration 
may occur for numerous reasons, including undetected gas leaks, 
increases and decreases in mixed liquor suspended solids resulting from 
cell growth and solids loss in the effluent stream, changes in diffuser 
performance, cycling of effluent flow rate, and overcorrection due to 
faulty or sluggish dissolved oxygen probe response. Control the 
dissolved oxygen concentration in the benchtop bioreactor by changing 
the proportion of oxygen in the circulating aeration gas. Should the 
dissolved oxygen concentration drift below the designated experimental 
condition, bleed a small amount of aeration gas from the system on the 
pressure side (i. e., immediately upstream of one of the diffusers). 
This will create a vacuum in the system, triggering the pressure 
sensitive relay to open the solenoid valve and admit oxygen to the 
system. Should the dissolved oxygen concentration drift above the 
designated experimental condition, slow or stop the oxygen input to the 
system until the dissolved oxygen concentration approaches the correct 
level.
    5.2  Sludge Wasting. Determine the suspended solids concentration 
(section 4.1.4) at the beginning of a test, and once per day thereafter 
during the test. If the test is completed within a two day period, 
determine the suspended solids concentration after the final sample set 
is taken. If the suspended solids concentration exceeds the specified 
concentration, remove a fraction of the sludge from the benchtop 
bioreactor. The required volume of mixed liquor to remove is determined 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.021

Where:
Vw is the wasted volume (Liters),
Vr is the volume of the benchtop bioreactor (Liters),
Sm is the measured solids (g/L), and
Ss is the specified solids (g/L).

    Remove the mixed liquor from the benchtop bioreactor by loosening a 
clamp on the mixed liquor sampling tube and allowing the required volume 
to drain to a graduated flask. Clamp the tube when the correct volume 
has been wasted. Replace the volume of the liquid wasted by pouring the 
same volume of effluent back into the benchtop bioreactor. Dispose of 
the waste sludge properly.
    5.3  Sludge Makeup. In the event that the suspended solids 
concentration is lower than the specifications, add makeup sludge back 
into the benchtop bioreactor. Determine the amount of sludge added by 
the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.022

Where:
Vw is the volume of sludge to add (Liters),
Vr is the volume of the benchtop bioreactor (Liters),
Sw is the solids in the makeup sludge (g/L),
Sm is the measured solids (g/L), and
Ss is the specified solids (g/L).

    5.4  Wastewater Pump Calibration. Determine the wastewater flow rate 
by collecting the system effluent for a time period of at least one 
hour, and measuring the volume with a graduated cylinder. Record the 
collection time period and volume collected. Determine flow rate. Adjust 
the pump speed to deliver the specified flow rate.

                             6. Calculations

6.1  Nomenclature. The following symbols are used in the calculations.

Ci=Average inlet feed concentration for a compound of 
          interest, as analyzed (mg/L)
Co=Average outlet (effluent) concentration for a compound of 
          interest, as analyzed (mg/L)
X=Biomass concentration, mixed liquor suspended solids (g/L)
t=Hydraulic residence time in the benchtop bioreactor (hours)
V=Volume of the benchtop bioreactor (L)
Q=Flow rate of wastewater into the benchtop bioreactor, average (L/hour)
    6.2  Residence Time. The hydraulic residence time of the benchtop 
bioreactor is equal to the ratio of the volume of the benchtop 
bioreactor (L) to the flow rate (L/h)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.023

    6.3  Rate of Biodegradation. Calculate the rate of biodegradation 
for each component with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.024


[[Page 508]]


    6.4  First-Order Biorate Constant. Calculate the first-order biorate 
constant (K1) for each component with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.025

    6.5  Relative Standard Deviation (RSD). Determine the standard 
deviation of both the influent and effluent sample concentrations (S) 
using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.026

    6.6  Determination of Percent Air Emissions and Percent Biodegraded. 
Use the results from this test method and follow the applicable 
procedures in appendix C of 40 CFR part 63, entitled, ``Determination of 
the Fraction Biodegraded (Fbio) in a Biological Treatment 
Unit'' to determine Fbio.

                             7. Bibliography

    1. ``Guidelines for data acquisition and data quality evaluation in 
Environmental Chemistry'', Daniel MacDoughal, Analytical Chemistry, 
Volume 52, p. 2242, 1980.
    2. Test Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    3. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 
16th Edition, Method 209C, Total Suspended Solids Dried at 103-105 
deg.C, APHA, 1985.
    4. Water7, Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal 
Facilities (TSDF)--Air Emission Models, U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, EPA-450/3-87-026, Review Draft, November 1989.
    5. Chemdat7, Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal 
Facilities (TSDF)--Air Emission Models, U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, EPA-450/3-87-026, Review Draft, November 1989.

Method 304B: Determination of Biodegradation Rates of Organic Compounds 
                            (Scrubber Option)

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination 
of biodegradation rates of organic compounds in an activated sludge 
process. The test method is designed to evaluate the ability of an 
aerobic biological reaction system to degrade or destroy specific 
components in waste streams. The method may also be used to determine 
the effects of changes in wastewater composition on operation. The 
biodegradation rates determined by utilizing this method are not 
representative of a full-scale system. Full-scale systems embody 
biodegradation and air emissions in competing reactions. This method 
measures biodegradation in absence of air emissions. The rates measured 
by this method shall be used in conjunction with the procedures listed 
in appendix C of this part to calculate the fraction emitted to the air 
versus the fraction biodegraded.
    1.2  Principle. A self-contained benchtop bioreactor system is 
assembled in the laboratory. A sample of mixed liquor is added and the 
waste stream is then fed continuously. The benchtop bioreactor is 
operated under conditions nearly identical to the target full-scale 
activated sludge process, except that air emissions are not a factor. 
The benchtop bioreactor temperature, dissolved oxygen concentration, 
average residence time in the reactor, waste composition, biomass 
concentration, and biomass composition of the target full-scale process 
are the parameters which are duplicated in the laboratory system. 
Biomass shall be removed from the target full-scale activated sludge 
unit and held for no more than 4 hours prior to use in the benchtop 
bioreactor. If antifoaming agents are used in the full-scale system, 
they shall also be used in the benchtop bioreactor. The feed flowing 
into and the effluent exiting the benchtop bioreactor are analyzed to 
determine the biodegradation rates of the target compounds. The choice 
of analytical methodology for measuring the compounds of interest at the 
inlet and outlet to the benchtop bioreactor are left to the discretion 
of the source, except where validated methods are available.

                              2. Apparatus

    Figure 1 illustrates a typical laboratory apparatus used to measure 
biodegradation rates. While the following description refers to Figure 
1, the EPA recognizes that alternative reactor configurations, such as 
alternative reactor shapes and locations of probes and the feed inlet, 
will also meet the intent of this method. Ensure that the benchtop

[[Page 509]]

bioreactor system is self-contained and isolated from the atmosphere by 
leak-checking fittings, tubing, etc.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.062


[[Page 510]]


    2.1  Laboratory apparatus.
    2.1.1  Benchtop Bioreactor. The biological reaction is conducted in 
a biological oxidation reactor of at least 6-liters capacity. The 
benchtop bioreactor is sealed and equipped with internal probes for 
controlling and monitoring dissolved oxygen and internal temperature. 
The top of the benchtop bioreactor is equipped for aerators, gas flow 
ports, and instrumentation (while ensuring that no leaks to the 
atmosphere exist around the fittings).
    2.1.2  Aeration gas. Aeration gas is added to the benchtop 
bioreactor through three diffusers, which are glass tubes that extend to 
the bottom fifth of the reactor depth. A pure oxygen pressurized 
cylinder is recommended in order to maintain the specified oxygen 
concentration. Install a blower (e.g., Diaphragm Type, 15 SCFH capacity) 
to blow the aeration gas into the benchtop bioreactor diffusers. Measure 
the aeration gas flow rate with a rotameter (e.g., 0-15 SCFH 
recommended). The aeration gas will rise through the benchtop 
bioreactor, dissolving oxygen into the mixture in the process. The 
aeration gas must provide sufficient agitation to keep the solids in 
suspension. Provide an exit for the aeration gas from the top flange of 
the benchtop bioreactor through a water-cooled (e.g., Allihn-type) 
vertical condenser. Install the condenser through a gas-tight fitting in 
the benchtop bioreactor closure. Design the system so that at least 10 
percent of the gas flows through an alkaline scrubber containing 175 mL 
of 45 percent by weight solution of potassium hydroxide (KOH) and 5 
drops of 0.2 percent alizarin yellow dye. Route the balance of the gas 
through an adjustable scrubber bypass. Route all of the gas through a 1-
L knock-out flask to remove entrained moisture and then to the intake of 
the blower. The blower recirculates the gas to the benchtop bioreactor.
    2.1.3  Wastewater Feed. Supply the wastewater feed to the benchtop 
bioreactor in a collapsible low-density polyethylene container or 
collapsible liner in a container (e.g., 20 L) equipped with a spigot cap 
(collapsible containers or liners of other material may be required due 
to the permeability of some volatile compounds through polyethylene). 
Obtain the wastewater feed by sampling the wastewater feed in the target 
process. A representative sample of wastewater shall be obtained from 
the piping leading to the aeration tank. This sample may be obtained 
from existing sampling valves at the discharge of the wastewater feed 
pump, or collected from a pipe discharging to the aeration tank, or by 
pumping from a well-mixed equalization tank upstream from the aeration 
tank. Alternatively, wastewater can be pumped continuously to the 
laboratory apparatus from a bleed stream taken from the equalization 
tank of the full-scale treatment system.
    2.1.3.1  Refrigeration System. Keep the wastewater feed cool by ice 
or by refrigeration to 4 deg.C. If using a bleed stream from the 
equalization tank, refrigeration is not required if the residence time 
in the bleed stream is less than five minutes.
    2.1.3.2  Wastewater Feed Pump. The wastewater is pumped from the 
refrigerated container using a variable-speed peristaltic pump drive 
equipped with a peristaltic pump head. Add the feed solution to the 
benchtop bioreactor through a fitting on the top flange. Determine the 
rate of feed addition to provide a retention time in the benchtop 
bioreactor that is numerically equivalent to the retention time in the 
target full-scale system. The wastewater shall be fed at a rate 
sufficient to achieve 90 to 100 percent of the target full-scale system 
residence time.
    2.1.3.3  Treated wastewater feed. The benchtop bioreactor effluent 
exits at the bottom of the reactor through a tube and proceeds to the 
clarifier.
    2.1.4  Clarifier. The effluent flows to a separate closed clarifier 
that allows separation of biomass and effluent (e.g., 2-liter pear-
shaped glass separatory funnel, modified by removing the stopcock and 
adding a 25-mm OD glass tube at the bottom). Benchtop bioreactor 
effluent enters the clarifier through a tube inserted to a depth of 0.08 
m (3 in.) through a stopper at the top of the clarifier. System effluent 
flows from a tube inserted through the stopper at the top of the 
clarifier to a drain (or sample bottle when sampling). The underflow 
from the clarifier leaves from the glass tube at the bottom of the 
clarifier. Flexible tubing connects this fitting to the sludge recycle 
pump. This pump is coupled to a variable speed pump drive. The discharge 
from this pump is returned through a tube inserted in a port on the side 
of the benchtop bioreactor. An additional port is provided near the 
bottom of the benchtop bioreactor for sampling the reactor contents. The 
mixed liquor from the benchtop bioreactor flows into the center of the 
clarifier. The clarified system effluent separates from the biomass and 
flows through an exit near the top of the clarifier. There shall be no 
headspace in the clarifier.
    2.1.5  Temperature Control Apparatus. Capable of maintaining the 
system at a temperature equal to the temperature of the full-scale 
system. The average temperature should be maintained within 
2 deg.C of the set point.
    2.1.5.1  Temperature Monitoring Device. A resistance type 
temperature probe or a thermocouple connected to a temperature readout 
with a resolution of 0.1 deg.C or better.
    2.1.5.2  Benchtop Bioreactor Heater. The heater is connected to the 
temperature control device.
    2.1.6  Oxygen Control System. Maintain the dissolved oxygen 
concentration at the levels present in the full-scale system. Target 
full-

[[Page 511]]

scale activated sludge systems with dissolved oxygen concentration below 
2 mg/L are required to maintain the dissolved oxygen concentration in 
the benchtop bioreactor within 0.5 mg/L of the target dissolved oxygen 
level. Target full-scale activated sludge systems with dissolved oxygen 
concentration above 2 mg/L are required to maintain the dissolved oxygen 
concentration in the benchtop bioreactor within 1.5 mg/L of the target 
dissolved oxygen concentration; however, for target full-scale activated 
sludge systems with dissolved oxygen concentrations above 2 mg/L, the 
dissolved oxygen concentration in the benchtop bioreactor may not drop 
below 1.5 mg/L. If the benchtop bioreactor is outside the control range, 
the dissolved oxygen is noted and the reactor operation is adjusted.
    2.1.6.1  Dissolved Oxygen Monitor. Dissolved oxygen is monitored 
with a polarographic probe (gas permeable membrane) connected to a 
dissolved oxygen meter (e.g., 0 to 15 mg/L, 0 to 50 deg.C).
    2.1.6.2  Benchtop Bioreactor Pressure Monitor. The benchtop 
bioreactor pressure is monitored through a port in the top flange of the 
reactor. This is connected to a gauge control with a span of 13-cm water 
vacuum to 13-cm water pressure or better. A relay is activated when the 
vacuum exceeds an adjustable setpoint which opens a solenoid valve 
(normally closed), admitting oxygen to the system. The vacuum setpoint 
controlling oxygen addition to the system shall be set at approximately 
2.5  0.5 cm water and maintained at this setting except 
during brief periods when the dissolved oxygen concentration is 
adjusted.
    2.1.7  Connecting Tubing. All connecting tubing shall be Teflon or 
equivalent in impermeability. The only exception to this specification 
is the tubing directly inside the pump head of the wastewater feed pump, 
which may be Viton, Silicone or another type of flexible tubing. Note: 
Mention of trade names or products does not constitute endorsement by 
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    2.2  Analysis. If the identity of the compounds of interest in the 
wastewater is not known, a representative sample of the wastewater shall 
be analyzed in order to identify all of the compounds of interest 
present. A gas chromatography/mass spectrometry screening method is 
recommended.
    2.2.1  After identifying the compounds of interest in the 
wastewater, develop and/or use one or more analytical technique capable 
of measuring each of those compounds (more than one analytical technique 
may be required, depending on the characteristics of the wastewater). 
Method 18, found in appendix A of 40 CFR part 60, may be used as a 
guideline in developing the analytical technique. Purge and trap 
techniques may be used for analysis providing the target components are 
sufficiently volatile to make this technique appropriate. The limit of 
quantitation for each compound shall be determined.\1\ If the effluent 
concentration of any target compound is below the limit of quantitation 
determined for that compound, the operation of the Method 304 unit may 
be altered to attempt to increase the effluent concentration above the 
limit of quantitation. Modifications to the method shall be approved 
prior to the test. The request should be addressed to Method 304 
contact, Emissions Measurement Center, Mail Drop 19, U.S. Environmental 
Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
    2.2.2  Calibration Standards. Prepare calibration standards from 
pure certified standards in an aqueous medium. Prepare and analyze three 
concentrations of calibration standards for each target component (or 
for a mixture of components) in triplicate daily throughout the analyses 
of the test samples. At each concentration level, a single calibration 
shall be within 5 percent of the average of the three calibration 
results. The low and medium calibration standards shall bracket the 
expected concentration of the effluent (treated) wastewater. The medium 
and high standards shall bracket the expected influent concentration.

                               3. Reagents

    3.1  Wastewater. Obtain a representative sample of wastewater at the 
inlet to the full-scale treatment plant if there is an existing full-
scale treatment plant (See Section 2.1.3). If there is no existing full-
scale treatment plant, obtain the wastewater sample as close to the 
point of determination as possible. Collect the sample by pumping the 
wastewater into the 20-L collapsible container. The loss of volatiles 
shall be minimized from the wastewater by collapsing the container 
before filling, by minimizing the time of filling, and by avoiding a 
headspace in the container after filling. If the wastewater requires the 
addition of nutrients to support the biomass growth and maintain biomass 
characteristics, those nutrients are added and mixed with the container 
contents after the container is filled.
    3.2  Biomass. Obtain the biomass or activated sludge used for rate 
constant determination in the bench-scale process from the existing 
full-scale process or from a representative biomass culture (e.g., 
biomass that has been developed for a future full-scale process). This 
biomass is preferentially obtained from a thickened acclimated mixed 
liquor sample. Collect the sample either by bailing from the mixed 
liquor in the aeration tank with a weighted container, or by collecting 
aeration tank effluent at the effluent overflow weir. Transport the 
sample to the laboratory within no more than 4 hours of

[[Page 512]]

collection. Maintain the biomass concentration in the benchtop 
bioreactor at the level of the target full-scale system +10 percent 
throughout the sampling period of the test method.

                              4. Procedure

    Safety Note: If explosive gases are produced as a byproduct of 
biodegradation and could realistically pose a hazard, closely monitor 
headspace concentration of these gases to ensure laboratory safety. 
Placement of the benchtop bioreactor system inside a laboratory hood is 
recommended regardless of byproducts produced.
    4.1 Benchtop Bioreactor Operation. Charge the mixed liquor to the 
benchtop bioreactor, minimizing headspace over the liquid surface to 
minimize entrainment of mixed liquor in the circulating gas. Fasten the 
benchtop bioreactor headplate to the reactor over the liquid surface. 
Maintain the temperature of the contents of the benchtop bioreactor 
system at the temperature of the target full-scale system, +2  deg.C, 
throughout the testing period. Monitor and record the temperature of the 
reactor contents at least to the nearest 0.1  deg.C.
    4.1.1  Wastewater Storage. Collect the wastewater sample in the 20-L 
collapsible container. Store the container at 4  deg.C throughout the 
testing period. Connect the container to the benchtop bioreactor feed 
pump.
    4.1.2  Wastewater Flow Rate. The hydraulic residence time of the 
aeration tank is calculated as the ratio of the volume of the tank (L) 
to the flow rate (L/min). At the beginning of a test, the container 
shall be connected to the feed pump and solution shall be pumped to the 
benchtop bioreactor at the required flow rate to achieve the calculated 
hydraulic residence time of wastewater in the aeration tank.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.027

Where:
Qtest=wastewater flow rate (L/min)
Qfs=average flow rate of full-scale process (L/min)
Vfs=volume of full-scale aeration tank (L)

The target flow rate in the test apparatus is the same as the flow rate 
in the target full-scale process multiplied by the ratio of benchtop 
bioreactor volume (e.g., 6 L) to the volume of the full-scale aeration 
tank. The hydraulic residence time shall be maintained at 90 to 100 
percent of the residence time maintained in the target full-scale unit. 
A nominal flow rate is set on the pump based on a pump calibration. 
Changes in the elasticity of the tubing in the pump head and the 
accumulation of material in the tubing affect this calibration. The 
nominal pumping rate shall be changed as necessary based on volumetric 
flow measurements. Discharge the benchtop bioreactor effluent to a 
wastewater storage, treatment, or disposal facility, except during 
sampling or flow measurement periods.
    4.1.3 Sludge Recycle Rate. Set the sludge recycle rate at a rate 
sufficient to prevent accumulation in the bottom of the clarifier. Set 
the air circulation rate sufficient to maintain the biomass in 
suspension.
    4.1.4 Benchtop Bioreactor Operation and Maintenance. Temperature, 
dissolved oxygen concentration, flow rate, and air circulation rate 
shall be measured and recorded three times throughout each day of 
testing. If other parameters (such as pH) are measured and maintained in 
the target full-scale unit, these parameters shall, where appropriate, 
be monitored and maintained to full-scale specifications in the benchtop 
bioreactor. At the beginning of each sampling period (section 4.2), 
sample the benchtop bioreactor contents for suspended solids analysis. 
Take this sample by loosening a clamp on a length of tubing attached to 
the lower side port. Determine the suspended solids gravimetrically by 
the Gooch crucible/glass fiber filter method for total suspended solids, 
in accordance with Standard Methods3 or equivalent. When 
necessary, sludge shall be wasted from the lower side port of the 
benchtop bioreactor, and the volume that is wasted shall be replaced 
with an equal volume of the benchtop bioreactor effluent. Add thickened 
activated sludge mixed liquor as necessary to the benchtop bioreactor to 
increase the suspended solids concentration to the desired level. Pump 
this mixed liquor to the benchtop bioreactor through the upper side port 
(Item 24 in Figure 1). Change the membrane on the dissolved oxygen probe 
before starting the test. Calibrate the oxygen probe immediately before 
the start of the test and each time the membrane is changed. The 
scrubber solution shall be replaced each weekday with 175 mL 45 percent 
W/W KOH solution to which five drops of 0.2 percent alizarin yellow 
indicator in water have been added. The potassium hydroxide solution in 
the alkaline scrubber shall be changed if the alizarin yellow dye color 
changes.
    4.1.5 Inspection and Correction Procedures. If the feed line tubing 
becomes clogged, replace with new tubing. If the feed flow rate is not 
within 5 percent of target flow any time the flow rate is measured, 
reset pump or check the flow measuring device and measure flow rate 
again until target flow rate is achieved.
    4.2 Test Sampling. At least two and one half hydraulic residence 
times after the system has reached the targeted specifications shall be 
permitted to elapse before the first sample is taken. Effluent samples 
of the clarifier discharge (Item 20 in Figure 1) and the influent 
wastewater feed are collected in 40-mL

[[Page 513]]

septum vials to which two drops of 1:10 hydrochloric acid (HCl) in water 
have been added. Sample the clarifier discharge directly from the drain 
line. These samples will be composed of the entire flow from the system 
for a period of several minutes. Feed samples shall be taken from the 
feed pump suction line after temporarily stopping the benchtop 
bioreactor feed, removing a connector, and squeezing the collapsible 
feed container. Store both influent and effluent samples at 4 deg.C 
immediately after collection and analyze within 8 hours of collection.
    4.2.1 Frequency of Sampling. During the test, sample and analyze the 
wastewater feed and the clarifier effluent at least six times. The 
sampling intervals shall be separated by at least 8 hours. During any 
individual sampling interval, sample the wastewater feed simultaneously 
with or immediately after the effluent sample. Calculate the RSD of the 
amount removed (i.e., effluent concentration--wastewater feed 
concentration). The RSD values shall be  15 percent. If an RSD value is 
> 15 percent, continue sampling and analyzing influent and effluent sets 
of samples until the RSD values are within specifications.
    4.2.2 Sampling After Exposure of System to Atmosphere. If, after 
starting sampling procedures, the benchtop bioreactor system is exposed 
to the atmosphere (due to leaks, maintenance, etc.), allow at least one 
hydraulic residence time to elapse before resuming sampling.

                  5. Operational Checks and Calibration

    5.1 Dissolved Oxygen. Fluctuation in dissolved oxygen concentration 
may occur for numerous reasons, including undetected gas leaks, 
increases and decreases in mixed liquor suspended solids resulting from 
cell growth and solids loss in the effluent stream, changes in diffuser 
performance, cycling of effluent flow rate, and overcorrection due to 
faulty or sluggish dissolved oxygen probe response. Control the 
dissolved oxygen concentration in the benchtop bioreactor by changing 
the proportion of oxygen in the circulating aeration gas. Should the 
dissolved oxygen concentration drift below the designated experimental 
condition, bleed a small amount of aeration gas from the system on the 
pressure side (i.e., immediately upstream of one of the diffusers). This 
will create a vacuum in the system, triggering the pressure sensitive 
relay to open the solenoid valve and admit oxygen to the system. Should 
the dissolved oxygen concentration drift above the designated 
experimental condition, slow or stop the oxygen input to the system 
until the dissolved oxygen concentration approaches the correct level.
    5.2  Sludge Wasting. Determine the suspended solids concentration 
(section 4.1.4) at the beginning of a test, and once per day thereafter 
during the test. If the test is completed within a two day period, 
determine the suspended solids concentration after the final sample set 
is taken. If the suspended solids concentration exceeds the specified 
concentration, remove a fraction of the sludge from the benchtop 
bioreactor. The required volume of mixed liquor to remove is determined 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.028

Where:
Vw is the wasted volume (Liters),
Vr is the volume of the benchtop bioreactor (Liters),
Sm is the measured solids (g/L), and
Ss is the specified solids (g/L).

    Remove the mixed liquor from the benchtop bioreactor by loosening a 
clamp on the mixed liquor sampling tube and allowing the required volume 
to drain to a graduated flask. Clamp the tube when the correct volume 
has been wasted. Replace the volume of the liquid wasted by pouring the 
same volume of effluent back into the benchtop bioreactor. Dispose of 
the waste sludge properly.
    5.3  Sludge Makeup. In the event that the suspended solids 
concentration is lower than the specifications, add makeup sludge back 
into the benchtop bioreactor. Determine the amount of sludge added by 
the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.029

Where:
Vw is the volume of sludge to add (Liters),
Vr is the volume of the benchtop bioreactor (Liters),
Sw is the solids in the makeup sludge (g/L),
Sm is the measured solids (g/L), and
Ss is the specified solids (g/L).

    5.4  Wastewater Pump Calibration. Determine the wastewater flow rate 
by collecting the system effluent for a time period of at least one 
hour, and measuring the volume with a graduated cylinder. Record the 
collection time period and volume collected. Determine flow rate. Adjust 
the pump speed to deliver the specified flow rate.

                             6. Calculations

    6.1  Nomenclature. The following symbols are used in the 
calculations.
Ci=Average inlet feed concentration for a compound of 
          interest, as analyzed (mg/L)
Co=Average outlet (effluent) concentration for a compound of 
          interest, as analyzed (mg/L)

[[Page 514]]

X=Biomass concentration, mixed liquor suspended solids (g/L)
t=Hydraulic residence time in the benchtop bioreactor (hours)
V=Volume of the benchtop bioreactor (L)
Q=Flow rate of wastewater into the benchtop bioreactor, average (L/hour)
    6.2  Residence Time. The hydraulic residence time of the benchtop 
bioreactor is equal to the ratio of the volume of the benchtop 
bioreactor (L) to the flow rate (L/h)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.030

    6.3  Rate of Biodegradation. Calculate the rate of biodegradation 
for each component with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.031

    6.4  First-Order Biorate Constant. Calculate the first-order biorate 
constant (K1) for each component with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.032

    6.5  Relative Standard Deviation (RSD). Determine the standard 
deviation of both the influent and effluent sample concentrations (S) 
using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.033

    6.6  Determination of Percent Air Emissions and Percent Biodegraded. 
Use the results from this test method and follow the applicable 
procedures in appendix C of 40 CFR part 63, entitled, ``Determination of 
the Fraction Biodegraded (Fbio) in a Biological Treatment 
Unit'' to determine Fbio.

                             7. Bibliography

    1. ``Guidelines for data acquisition and data quality evaluation in 
Environmental Chemistry'', Daniel MacDoughal, Analytical Chemistry, 
Volume 52, p. 2242, 1980.
    2. Test Method 18, 40 CFR part 60, Appendix A.
    3. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 
16th Edition, Method 209C, Total Suspended Solids Dried at 
103-105  deg.C, APHA, 1985.
    4. Water\7\, Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and disposal 
Facilities (TSDF)--Air Emission Models, U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, EPA-450/3-87-026, Review Draft, November 1989.
    5. Chemdat\7\, Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal 
Facilities (TSDF)--Air Emission Models, U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, EPA-450/3-87-026, Review Draft, November 1989.

  Method 305: Measurement of Emission Potential of Individual Volatile 
                       Organic Compounds in Waste

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    This procedure is used to determine the emission potential of 
individual volatile organics (VOs) in waste. The heated purge conditions 
established by Method 25D (40 CFR part 60, Appendix A) are used to 
remove VOs from a 10-g sample of waste suspended in a 50/50 solution of 
polyethylene glycol (PEG) and water. The purged VOs are quantified by 
using the sample collection and analytical techniques appropriate for 
the VOs present in the waste. The recovery efficiency of the sample 
collection and analytical technique is determined for each waste matrix. 
A correction factor is determined for each compound (if acceptable 
recovery criteria requirements are met of 70 to 130 percent recovery for 
every target compound), and the measured waste concentration is 
corrected with the correction factor for each compound. A minimum of 
three replicate waste samples shall be analyzed.

                       2. Apparatus and Materials

    2.1  Method 25D Purge Apparatus.

[[Page 515]]

    2.1.1  Purge Chamber. The purge chamber shall accommodate the 10-g 
sample of waste suspended in a matrix of 50 mL of PEG and 50 mL of 
deionized, hydrocarbon-free water. Three fittings are used on the glass 
chamber top. Two #7 Ace-threads are used for the purge gas inlet and 
outlet connections. A #50 Ace-thread is used to connect the top of the 
chamber to the base (see Figure 1). The base of the chamber has a side-
arm equipped with a #22 Sovirel fitting to allow for easy sample 
introductions into the chamber. The dimensions of the chamber are shown 
in Figure 1.
    2.1.2  Flow Distribution Device (FDD). The FDD enhances the gas-to-
liquid contact for improved purging efficiency. The FDD is a 6 mm OD by 
30 cm long glass tube equipped with four arm bubblers as shown in Figure 
1. Each arm shall have an opening of 1 mm in diameter.
    2.1.3  Coalescing Filter. The coalescing filter serves to discourage 
aerosol formation of sample gas once it leaves the purge chamber. The 
glass filter has a fritted disc mounted 10 cm from the bottom. Two #7 
Ace-threads are used for the inlet and outlet connections. The 
dimensions of the chamber are shown in Figure 2.
    2.1.4  Oven. A forced convection airflow oven capable of maintaining 
the purge chamber and coalescing filter at 752 deg.C.
    2.1.5  Toggle Valve. An on/off valve constructed from brass or 
stainless steel rated to 100 psig. This valve is placed in line between 
the purge nitrogen source and the flow controller.

[[Page 516]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.066

      

[[Page 517]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.067

    2.1.6  Flow Controller. High-quality stainless steel flow controller 
capable of restricting a flow of nitrogen to 60.06 L/min at 
40 psig.
    2.1.7  Polyethylene Glycol Cleaning System.
    2.1.7.1  Round-Bottom Flask. One liter, three-neck glass round-
bottom flask for cleaning PEG. Standard taper 24/40 joints are mounted 
on each neck.
    2.1.7.2  Heating Mantle. Capable of heating contents of the 1-L 
flask to 120 deg.C.
    2.1.7.3  Nitrogen Bubbler. Teflon or glass tube, 0.25 in. OD.
    2.1.7.4  Thermometer. Partial immersion glass thermometer.
    2.1.7.5  Hose Adapter. Glass with 24/40 standard tapered joint.
    2.1.8  Reagents.
    2.1.8.1  Polyethylene Glycol. Ninety-eight percent pure organic 
polymer with an average molecular weight of 400. Volatile organics are 
removed from the PEG prior to use by heating to 1205 deg.C 
and purging with pure nitrogen at 1 L/min for 2 hours. The PEG is stored 
at room temperature under a nitrogen purge maintained at 1 L/min until 
used. A typical apparatus used to clean the PEG is shown in Figure 3.
    2.1.8.2  Water. Organic-free deionized water is required.

[[Page 518]]

    2.1.8.3  Nitrogen. High-purity nitrogen (less than 0.5 ppm total 
hydrocarbons) is used to remove test compounds from the purge matrix. 
The source of nitrogen shall be regulated continuously to 40 psig before 
the on/off toggle valve.
    2.2  Volatile Organic Recovery System.
    2.2.1  Splitter Valve (Optional). Stainless steel cross-pattern 
valve capable of splitting nominal flow rates from the purge flow of 6 
L/min. The valve shall be maintained at 752 deg.C in the 
heated zone and shall be placed downstream of the coalescing filter. It 
is recommended that 0.125 in. OD tubing be used to direct the split vent 
flow from the heated zone. The back pressure caused by the 0.125 in. OD 
tubing is critical for maintaining proper split valve operation. Note: 
The splitter valve design is optional; it may be used in cases where the 
concentration of a pollutant would saturate the adsorbents.
    2.2.2  Injection Port. Stainless steel 1/4 in. OD compression 
fitting tee with a 6-mm septum fixed on the top port. The injection port 
is the point of entry for the recovery study solution. If using a 
gaseous standard to determine recovery efficiency, connect the gaseous 
standard to the injection port of the tee.
    2.2.3  Knockout Trap (Optional but Recommended). A 25-mL capacity 
glass reservoir body with a full-stem impinger (to avoid leaks, a 
modified midget glass impinger with a screw cap and ball/socket clamps 
on the inlet and outlet is recommended). The empty impinger is placed in 
an ice water bath between the injection port and the sorbent cartridge. 
Its purpose is to reduce the water content of the purge gas (saturated 
at 75 deg.C) before the sorbent cartridge.

[[Page 519]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.068

    2.2.4  Insulated Ice Bath. A 350-mL dewar or other type of insulated 
bath is used to maintain ice water around the knockout trap.
    2.2.5  Sorbent Cartridges. Commercially available glass or stainless 
steel cartridge packed with one or more appropriate sorbents. The amount 
of adsorbent packed in the cartridge depends on the breakthrough volume 
of the test compounds but is limited by back pressure caused by the 
packing (not to exceed 7 psig). More than one sorbent cartridge placed 
in series may be necessary depending upon the mixture of the measured 
components.
    2.2.6  Volumetric Glassware. Type A glass 10-mL volumetric flasks 
for measuring a final volume from the water catch in the knockout trap.
    2.2.7  Thermal Desorption Unit. A clam-shell type oven, used for the 
desorption of direct thermal desorption sorbent tubes. The oven shall be 
capable of increasing the temperature of the desorption tubes rapidly to 
recommended desorption temperature.
    2.2.8  Ultrasonic Bath. Small bath used to agitate sorbent material 
and desorption solvent. Ice water shall be used in the bath because of 
heat transfer caused by operation of the bath.
    2.2.9  Desorption Vials. Four-dram (15-mL) capacity borosilicate 
glass vials with Teflon-lined caps.
    2.2.10 Reagents.

[[Page 520]]

    2.2.10.1  Water. Same as specified in Section 2.1.8.2.
    2.2.10.2  Desorption Solvent (when used). Appropriate high-purity 
(99.99 percent) solvent for desorption shall be used. Analysis shall be 
performed (utilizing the same analytical technique as that used in the 
analysis of the waste samples) on each lot to determine purity.
    2.3  Analytical System. A gas chromatograph (GC) is commonly used to 
separate and quantify compounds from the sample collection and recovery 
procedure. Method 18 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) may be used as a 
guideline for determining the appropriate GC column and GC detector 
based on the test compounds to be determined. Other types of analytical 
instrumentation may be used (i.e., HPLC) in lieu of GC systems as long 
as the recovery efficiency criteria of this method are met.
    2.3.1  Gas Chromatograph. The GC shall be equipped with a constant-
temperature liquid injection port or a heated sampling loop/valve 
system, as appropriate. The GC oven shall be temperature-programmable 
over the useful range of the GC column. The choice of detectors is based 
on the test compounds to be determined.
    2.3.2  GC Column. Select the appropriate GC column based on (1) 
literature review or previous experience, (2) polarity of the analytes, 
(3) capacity of the column, or (4) resolving power (i.e., length, 
diameter, film thickness) required.
    2.3.3  Data System. A programmable electronic integrator for 
recording, analyzing, and storing the signal generated by the detector.
    2.3.4  Reagents. The gases required for GC operation shall be of the 
highest obtainable purity (hydrocarbon free). Consult the operating 
manual for recommended settings.

                              3. Procedure

    Assemble the glassware and associated fittings (see Figures 4 or 5, 
as appropriate) and leak-check the system (approximately 7 psig is the 
target pressure). After an initial leak check, mark the pressure gauge 
and use the initial checkpoint to monitor for leaks throughout 
subsequent analyses. If the pressure in the system drops below the 
target pressure at any time during analysis, that analysis shall be 
considered invalid.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.069

    3.1  Recovery Efficiency Determination. Determine the individual 
recovery efficiency (RE) for each of the target compounds in duplicate 
before the waste samples are analyzed. To determine the RE, generate a 
water blank (Section 3.2.4) and use the injection port to introduce a 
known volume of spike solution (or certified gaseous standard)

[[Page 521]]

containing all of the target compounds at the levels expected in the 
waste sample. Introduce the spike solution immediately after the 
nitrogen purge has been started (Section 3.2.2). Follow the procedures 
outlined in Section 3.2.3. Analyze the recovery efficiency samples using 
the techniques described in Section 3.3.  Determine the recovery 
efficiency (Equation 1, Section 4.2) by comparing the amount of compound 
recovered to the theoretical amount spiked. Determine the RE twice for 
each compound; the RSD shall be  10 percent for each 
compound. If the RSD for any compound is not  10 percent, 
modify the sampling/analytical procedure and complete an RE study in 
duplicate, or continue determining RE until the RSD meets the acceptable 
criteria. The average RE shall be 0.70RE1.30 for 
each compound. If the average RE does not meet these criteria, an 
alternative sample collection and/or analysis technique shall be 
developed and the recovery efficiency determination shall be repeated 
for that compound until the criteria are met for every target compound. 
Example modifications of the sampling/analytical system include changing 
the adsorbent material, changing the desorption solvent, utilizing 
direct thermal desorption of test compounds from the sorbent tubes, 
utilizing another analytical technique.
    3.2  Sample Collection and Recovery.
    3.2.1  The sample collection procedure in Method 25D shall be used 
to collect (into a preweighed vial) 10 g of waste into PEG, cool, and 
ship to the laboratory. Remove the sample container from the cooler and 
wipe the exterior to remove any ice or water. Weigh the container and 
sample to the nearest 0.01 g and record the weight. Pour the sample from 
the container into the purge flask. Rinse the sample container three 
times with approximately 6 mL of PEG (or the volume needed to total 50 
mL of PEG in the purge flask), transferring the rinses to the purge 
flask. Add 50 mL of organic-free deionized water to the purge flask. Cap 
the purge flask tightly in between each rinse and after adding all the 
components into the flask.
    3.2.2  Allow the oven to equilibrate to 75  deg.C. Begin 
the sample recovery process by turning the toggle valve on, thus 
allowing a 6-L/min flow of pure nitrogen through the purge chamber.
    3.2.3  Stop the purge after 30 min. Immediately remove the sorbent 
tube(s) from the apparatus and cap both ends. Remove the knockout trap 
and transfer the water catch to a 10-mL volumetric flask. Rinse the trap 
with organic-free deionized water and transfer the rinse to the 
volumetric flask. Dilute to the 10-mL mark with water. Transfer the 
water sample to a sample vial and store at 4 deg.C with zero headspace. 
The analysis of the contents of the water knockout trap is optional for 
this method. If the target compounds are water soluble, analysis of the 
water is recommended; meeting the recovery efficiency criteria in these 
cases would be difficult without adding the amount captured in the 
knockout trap.
    3.2.4  Water Blank. A water blank shall be analyzed daily to 
determine the cleanliness of the purge and recovery system. A water 
blank is generated by adding 60 mL of organic-free deionized water to 50 
mL of PEG in the purge chamber. Treat the blank as described in Section 
3.2.2 and 3.2.3. The purpose of the water blank is to insure that no 
contaminants exist in the sampling and analytical apparatus which would 
interfere with the quantitation of the target compounds. If contaminants 
are present, locate the source of contamination, remove it, and repeat 
the water blank analysis.
    3.3  Sample Analysis. Sample analysis in the context of this method 
refers to techniques to remove the target compounds from the sorbent 
tubes, separate them using a chromatography technique, and quantify them 
with an appropriate detector. Two types of sample extraction techniques 
typically used for sorbents include solvent desorption or direct thermal 
desorption of test compounds to a secondary focusing unit (either 
sorbent or cryogen based). The test compounds are then typically 
transferred to a GC system for analysis. Other analytical systems may be 
used (i.e., HPLC) in lieu of GC systems as long as the recovery 
efficiency criteria of this method are met.
    3.3.1  Recover the test compounds from the sorbent tubes that 
require solvent desorption by transferring the adsorbent material to a 
sample vial containing the desorption solvent. The desorption solvent 
shall be the same as the solvent used to prepare calibration standards. 
The volume of solvent depends on the amount of adsorbed material to be 
desorbed (1.0 mL per 100 mg of adsorbent material) and also on the 
amount of test compounds present. Final volume adjustment and or 
dilution can be made so that the concentration of test compounds in the 
desorption solvent is bracketed by the concentration of the calibration 
solutions. Ultrasonicate the desorption solvent for 15 min in an ice 
bath. Allow the sample to sit for a period of time so that the adsorbent 
material can settle to the bottom of the vial. Transfer the solvent with 
a pasteur pipet (minimizing the amount of adsorbent material taken) to 
another vial and store at 4  deg.C.
    3.3.2  The analytical instrument shall be calibrated with a minimum 
of three levels of standards for each compound whose concentrations 
bracket the concentration of test compounds from the sorbent tubes. 
Liquid calibration standards shall be used for calibration in the 
analysis of the solvent extracts. The liquid calibration standards shall 
be prepared in the desorption solvent matrix. The calibration standards 
may be prepared

[[Page 522]]

and injected individually or as a mixture. If thermal desorption and 
focusing (onto another sorbent or cryogen focusing) are used, a 
certified gaseous mixture or a series of gaseous standards shall be used 
for calibration of the instrument. The gaseous standards shall be 
focused and analyzed in the same manner as the samples.
    3.3.3  The analytical system shall be certified free from 
contaminants before a calibration is performed (see Section 3.2.4). The 
calibration standards are used to determine the linearity of the 
analytical system. Perform an initial calibration and linearity check by 
analyzing the three calibration standards for each target compound in 
triplicate starting with the lowest level and continuing to the highest 
level. If the triplicate analyses do not agree within 5 percent of their 
average, additional analyses will be needed until the 5 percent criteria 
is met. Calculate the response factor (Equation 3, Section 4.4) from the 
average area counts of the injections for each concentration level. 
Average the response factors of the standards for each compound. The 
linearity of the detector is acceptable if the response factor of each 
compound at a particular concentration is within 10 percent of the 
overall mean response factor for that compound. Analyze daily a mid-
level calibration standard in duplicate and calculate a new response 
factor. Compare the daily response factor average to the average 
response factor calculated for the mid-level calibration during the 
initial linearity check; repeat the three-level calibration procedure if 
the daily average response factor differs from the initial linearity 
check mid-level response factor by more than 10 percent. Otherwise, 
proceed with the sample analysis.
    3.3.4  Analyze the desorption solvent or direct thermal desorption 
tubes from each sample using the same analytical parameters used for the 
calibration standard. Calculate the total weight detected for each 
compound (Equation 4, Section 4.5). The slope (area/amount) and y-
intercept are calculated from the line bracketed between the two closest 
calibration points. Correct the concentration of each waste sample with 
the appropriate recovery efficiency factor and the split flow ratio (if 
used). The final concentration of each individual test compound is 
calculated by dividing the corrected measured weight for that compound 
by the weight of the original sample determined in Section 3.2.1 
(Equation 5, Section 4.6).
    3.4  Repeat the sample collection, recovery, and analysis twice 
more, for a total of three samples. Report the corrected concentration 
of each of the waste samples, average waste concentration, and relative 
standard deviation (Equation 6, Section 4.7).

                             4. Calculations

                     4.1  Definitions and Variables

AS=Mean area counts of test compound in standard.
Au=Mean area counts of test compound in sample desorption 
          solvent.
b=y-intercept of the line formed between the two closest calibration 
          standards that bracket the concentration of the sample.
CT=Amount of test compound (g) in calibration 
          standard.
CF=Correction for adjusting final amount of sample detected for losses 
          during individual sample runs.
Fp=Nitrogen flow through the purge chamber (6 L/min).
Fs=Nitrogen split flow directed to the sample recovery system 
          (use 6 L/min if split flow design was not used).
PPM=Final concentration of test compound in waste sample (g/g).
RE=Recovery efficiency for adjusting final amount of sample detected for 
          losses due to inefficient trapping and desorption techniques.
R.F.=Response factor for test compound, calculated from a calibration 
          standard.
S=Slope of the line (area counts/CT) formed between two 
          closest calibration points that bracket the concentration of 
          the sample.
WC=Weight of test compound expected to be recovered in spike 
          solution based on theoretical amount.
WE=Weight of vial and PEG (g).
WF=Weight of vial, PEG and waste sample (g).
WS=Weight of original waste sample (g).
WT=Corrected weight of test compound measured (g) in 
          sample.
WX=Weight of test compound measured during analysis of 
          recovery efficiency spike samples (g).
    4.2  Recovery efficiency for determining trapping/desorption 
efficiency of individual test compounds in the spike solution, decimal 
value.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.309

    4.3  Weight of waste sample (g).
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.310
    
    4.4  Response Factor for individual test compounds.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.311
    
    4.5  Corrected weight of a test compound in the sample, in 
g.

[[Page 523]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.312

    4.6  Final concentration of a test compound in the sample in ppmw.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.313
    
    4.7  Relative standard deviation (RSD) calculation.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22AP94.314
    
Method 306--Determination of Chromium Emissions From Decorative and Hard 
            Chromium Electroplating and Anodizing Operations

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the determination of 
chromium (Cr) in emissions from decorative and hard chrome 
electroplating facilities and anodizing operations.
    1.2 Principle. (a) A sample is extracted isokinetically from the 
source using an unheated Method 5 sampling train (40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A), with a glass nozzle and probe liner, but with the filter 
omitted. The sample time has to be at least 2 hours. The Cr emissions 
are collected in an alkaline solution: 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH) or 
0.1 N sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3). The collected samples 
remain in the alkaline solution until analysis. Samples with high Cr 
concentrations may be analyzed using inductively coupled plasma emission 
spectrometry (ICP) at 267.72 nm. Alternatively, if improved detection 
limits are required, a portion of the alkaline impinger solution is 
digested with nitric acid and analyzed by graphite furnace atomic 
absorption spectroscopy (GFAAS) at 357.9 nm.
    (b) If it is desirable to determine hexavalent chromium 
(Cr+6) emissions, the samples may be analyzed using an ion 
chromatograph equipped with a post-column reactor (IC/PCR) and a visible 
wavelength detector. To increase sensitivity for trace levels of 
Cr+6, a preconcentration system can be used in conjunction 
with the IC/PCR.

           2. Range, Sensitivity, Precision, and Interferences

    2.1  Range. The recommended analytical range for each of the three 
analytical techniques is given below. The upper limit of all three 
techniques can be extended indefinitely by appropriate dilution.
    2.1.1  GFAAS Range. As reported in Method 7191 of SW-846 (Citation 5 
in Bibliography), the optimum concentration range for GFAAS is 5 to 100 
g Cr/l of concentrated analyte.
    2.1.2  ICP Range. A linear response curve for ICP can be obtained in 
the range of 10 to at least 500 g Cr/l of absorbing solution.
    2.1.3  IC/PCR Range. In 40 CFR part 266, appendix IX, the lower 
limit of the detection range for IC/PCR when employing a 
preconcentration procedure is reported to be about 0.1 g 
Cr+6/l of absorbing solution.
    2.2  Sensitivity.
    2.2.1  Analytical Sensitivity.
    2.2.1.1  ICP Analytical Sensitivity. The minimum detection limit for 
ICP, as reported in Method 6010A of SW-846, is 7 g Cr/l.
    2.2.1.2  GFAAS Analytical Sensitivity. The minimum detection limit 
for GFAAS, as reported in Method 7191 of SW-846, is 1 g Cr/l.
    2.2.1.3  IC/PCR Analytical Sensitivity. The minimum detection limit 
for IC/PCR with a preconcentrator, as reported in 40 CFR part 266, 
appendix IX is 0.05 g Cr+6/l.
    2.2.2  In-stack Sensitivity. The in-stack sensitivity depends upon 
the analytical detection limit, the volume of stack gas sampled, and the 
total volume of the impinger absorbing solution plus the rinses. Using 
the analytical detection limits given in sections 2.2.1.1, 2.2.1.2, and 
2.2.1.3; a stack gas sample volume of 1.7 dscm; and a total liquid 
sample volume of 500 ml; the corresponding in-stack detection limits are 
0.0021 mg Cr/dscm for ICP, 0.00015 mg Cr/dscm for GFAAS, and 0.000015 mg 
Cr+6/dscm for IC/PCR with preconcentration. However, it is 
recommended that the concentration of Cr in the analytical solutions be 
at least five times the analytical detection limit to optimize 
sensitivity in the analyses. Using this guideline and the same 
assumptions for impinger sample volume and stack gas sample volume (500 
ml and 1.7 dscm, respectively), the recommended minimum stack 
concentrations for optimum sensitivity are 0.0103 mg Cr/dscm for ICP, 
0.00074 mg Cr/dscm for GFAAS, and 0.000074 mg Cr+6/dscm for 
IC/

[[Page 524]]

PCR with preconcentration. If required, the in-stack detection limits 
can be improved by either increasing the stack gas sample volume, 
reducing the volume of the digested sample for GFAAS, improving the 
analytical detection limits, or any combination of the three.
    2.3  Precision. The following precision data have been reported for 
the three analytical methods. In the case of the GFAAS there is also 
bias data. In all cases, when sampling precision is combined with 
analytical precision, the resulting overall precision may be lower.
    2.3.1  GFAAS Precision. As reported in Method 7191 of SW-846, in a 
single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at 
concentrations of 19, 48, and 77 g Cr/l, the standard 
deviations were 0.1, 0.2, and 0.8, 
respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 97 percent, 101 percent, 
and 102 percent, respectively.
    2.3.2  ICP Precision. As reported in Method 6010A of SW-846, in an 
EPA round-robin Phase 1 study, seven laboratories applied the ICP 
technique to acid/distilled water matrices that had been spiked with 
various metal concentrates. For true values of 10, 50, and 150 
g Cr/l; the mean reported values were 10, 50, and 149 
g Cr/l; and the mean percent relative standard deviations were 
18, 3.3, and 3.8 percent, respectively.
    2.3.3  IC/PCR Precision. As reported in 40 CFR part 266, appendix 
IX, the precision of the IC/PCR with sample preconcentration is 5 to 10 
percent; the overall precision for sewage sludge incinerators emitting 
120 ng/dscm of Cr+6 and 3.5 g/dscm of total Cr is 25 
percent and 9 percent for Cr+6 and total Cr, respectively; 
and for hazardous waste incinerators emitting 300 ng/dscm of 
Cr+6 the precision is 20 percent.
    2.4  Interferences.
    2.4.1  GFAAS Interferences. Low concentrations of calcium and/or 
phosphate may cause interferences; at concentrations above 200 
g/l, calcium's effect is constant and eliminates the effect of 
phosphate. Calcium nitrate is therefore added to the concentrated 
analyte to ensure a known constant effect. Other matrix modifiers 
recommended by the instrument manufacturer may also be suitable. 
Nitrogen should not be used as the purge gas due to cyanide band 
interference. Background correction may be required because of possible 
significant levels of nonspecific absorption and scattering at the 357.9 
nm analytical wavelength. Zeeman or Smith-Hieftje background correction 
is recommended to correct for interferences due to high levels of 
dissolved solids in the alkaline impinger solutions.
    2.4.2  ICP Interferences.
    2.4.2.1  ICP Spectral Interferences. (a) Spectral interferences are 
caused by:
    (1) Overlap of a spectral line from another element;
    (2) Unresolved overlap of molecular band spectra;
    (3) Background contribution from continuous or recombination 
phenomena; and
    (4) Stray light from the line emission of high-concentration 
elements.
    (b) Spectral overlap may be compensated for by computer correcting 
the raw data after monitoring and measuring the interfering element. At 
the 267.72-nm Cr analytical wavelength, iron, manganese, and uranium are 
potential interfering elements. Background and stray light interferences 
can usually be compensated for by a background correction adjacent to 
the analytical line. Unresolved overlap requires the selection of an 
alternative Cr wavelength. Consult the instrument manufacturer's 
operation manual for interference correction procedures.
    2.4.2.2  ICP Physical Interferences. High levels of dissolved solids 
in the samples may cause significant inaccuracies due to salt buildup at 
the nebulizer and torch tips. This problem can be controlled by diluting 
the sample or providing for extended rinse times between sample 
analyses. Standards are prepared in the same matrix as the samples 
(i.e., 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3).
    2.4.2.3  ICP Chemical Interferences. These include molecular 
compound formation, ionization effects and solute vaporization effects, 
and are usually not significant in ICP, especially if the standards and 
samples are matrix matched.
    2.4.3  IC/PCR Interferences. Components in the sample matrix may 
cause Cr+6 to convert to trivalent chromium (Cr+3) 
or cause Cr+3 to convert to Cr+6. The 
chromatographic separation of Cr+6 using ion chromatography 
reduces the potential for other metals to interfere with the post-column 
reaction. For the IC/PCR analysis, only compounds that coelute with 
Cr+6 and affect the diphenylcarbazide reaction will cause 
interference. Periodic analyses of reagent water blanks are used to 
demonstrate that the analytical system is essentially free of 
contamination. Sample cross-contamination that can occur when high-level 
and low-level samples or standards are analyzed alternately is 
eliminated by thorough purging of the sample loop. Purging can easily be 
achieved by increasing the injection volume of the samples to ten times 
the size of the sample loop.

                              3. Apparatus

    3.1  Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this 
method is shown in Figure 306-1. The train is the same as Method 5, 
section 2.1 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A), except that the filter is 
omitted, and quartz or borosilicate glass must be used for the probe 
nozzle and liner in place of stainless steel. It is not necessary to 
heat the probe liner. Probe fittings of plastic such as

[[Page 525]]

Teflon, polypropylene, etc. are recommended over metal fittings to 
prevent contamination. If desired, a single combined probe nozzle and 
liner may be used, but such a single glass piece is not a requirement of 
this methodology. Use 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3 in the 
impingers in place of water.
    3.2  Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 2.2 (40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A), with the following exceptions:
    3.2.1  Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Brushes are not 
necessary for sample recovery. If a probe brush is used, it must be 
nonmetallic.
    3.2.2  Sample Recovery Solution. Use 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N 
NaHCO3, whichever was used as the impinger absorbing 
solution, in place of acetone to recover the sample.
    3.2.3  Sample Storage Containers. Polyethylene, with leak-free screw 
cap, 500 ml or 1,000 ml.
    3.2.4  Filtration Apparatus for IC/PCR. Teflon, or equivalent, 
filter holder and 0.45 m acetate, or equivalent, filter.
    3.3  Analysis. For analysis, the following equipment is needed.
    3.3.1  General.
    3.3.1.1  Phillips Beakers. (Phillips beakers are preferred, but 
regular beakers can also be used.)
    3.3.1.2  Hot Plate.
    3.3.1.3   Volumetric Flasks. Class A, various sizes as appropriate.
    3.3.1.4  Assorted Pipettes.
    3.3.2  Analysis by GFAAS.
    3.3.2.1  Chromium Hollow Cathode Lamp or Electrodeless Discharge 
Lamp.
    3.3.2.2  Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer.

    3.3.3  Analysis by ICP.

    3.3.3.1  ICP Spectrometer. Computer-controlled emission spectrometer 
with background correction and radio frequency generator.
    3.3.3.2  Argon Gas Supply. Welding grade or better.
    3.3.4  Analysis by IC/PCR.

    3.3.4.1  IC/PCR System. High performance liquid chromatograph pump, 
sample injection valve, post-column reagent delivery and mixing system, 
and a visible detector, capable of operating at 520 nm, all with a 
nonmetallic (or inert) flow path. An electronic peak area mode is 
recommended, but other recording devices and integration techniques are 
acceptable provided the repeatability criteria and the linearity 
criteria for the calibration curve described in section 6.4.1 can be 
satisfied. A sample loading system will be required if preconcentration 
is employed.
    3.3.4.2  Analytical Column. A high performance ion chromatograph 
(HPIC) nonmetallic column with anion separation characteristics and a 
high loading capacity designed for separation of metal chelating 
compounds to prevent metal interference. Resolution described in section 
5.5 must be obtained. A nonmetallic guard column with the same ion-
exchange material is recommended.
    3.3.4.3  Preconcentration Column. An HPIC nonmetallic column with 
acceptable anion retention characteristics and sample loading rates as 
described in section 5.5.

[[Page 526]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.070

    3.3.4.4  0.45-m Filter Cartridge. For the removal of 
insoluble material. To be used just prior to sample injection/analysis.

                               4. Reagents

    Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents shall conform to the 
specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of 
the American Chemical Society

[[Page 527]]

(ACS reagent grade). Where such specifications are not available, use 
the best available grade.
    4.1  Sampling.
    4.1.1  Water. Reagent water that conforms to ASTM Specification 
D1193-77, Type II (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 63.14). It is 
recommended that water blanks be checked prior to preparing sampling 
reagents to ensure that the Cr content is less than the analytical 
detection limit.
    4.1.2  Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N or Sodium 
Bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N. Dissolve 4.0 
g of sodium hydroxide in 1 l of water, or dissolve 8.5 g of sodium 
bicarbonate in 1 l of water.
    4.2  Sample Recovery.
    4.2.1  0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3. See section 4.1.2. Use 
the same solution for recovery as was used in the impingers.
    4.2.2  pH Indicator Strip, for IC/PCR. pH indicator capable of 
determining the pH of solutions between the pH range of 7 and 12, at 0.5 
pH intervals.
    4.3  Sample Preparation and Analysis.
    4.3.1  Nitric Acid (HNO3), Concentrated, for GFAAS. Trace 
metals grade or better HNO3 must be used for reagent 
preparation. The ACS reagent grade HNO3 is acceptable for 
cleaning glassware.
    4.3.2  HNO3, 1.0 percent (v/v), for GFAAS. Add, with 
stirring, 10 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 800 ml of water. 
Dilute to 1,000 ml with water. This reagent shall contain less than 
0.001 mg Cr/l.
    4.3.3  Calcium Nitrate Ca(NO3)2 Solution (10 g 
Ca/ml) for GFAAS. Prepare the solution by weighing 36 mg of 
Ca(NO3)2 into a 1 l volumetric flask. Dilute with 
water to 1 l.
    4.3.4  Matrix Modifier, for GFAAS. See instrument manufacturer's 
manual for suggested matrix modifier.
    4.3.5  Chromatographic Eluent, for IC/PCR. The eluent used in the 
analytical system is ammonium sulfate based. Prepare by adding 6.5 ml of 
29 percent ammonium hydroxide (NH4 OH) and 33 g of ammonium 
sulfate ((NH4)2 SO4) to 500 ml of 
reagent water. Dilute to 1 l with reagent water and mix well. Other 
combinations of eluents and/or columns may be employed provided peak 
resolution, as described in section 5.5, repeatability and linearity, as 
described in section 6.4.1, and analytical sensitivity are acceptable.
    4.3.6  Post-Column Reagent, for IC/PCR. An effective post-column 
reagent for use with the chromatographic eluent described in section 
4.3.5 is a diphenylcarbazide (DPC) based system. Dissolve 0.5 g of 1,5-
diphenylcarbazide in 100 ml of ACS grade methanol. Add 500 ml of reagent 
water containing 50 ml of 96 percent spectrophotometric grade sulfuric 
acid. Dilute to 1 l with reagent water.
    4.3.7  Chromium Standard Stock Solution (1,000 mg/l). Procure a 
certified aqueous standard or dissolve 2.829 g of potassium dichromate 
(K2 Cr2 O7,) in water and dilute to 1 
l.
      4.3.8  Calibration Standards for GFAAS. Chromium solutions for 
GFAAS calibration shall be prepared to contain 1.0 percent (v/v) 
HNO3. The zero standard shall be 1.0 percent (v/v) 
HNO3. Calibration standards should be prepared daily by 
diluting the Cr standard stock solution (section 4.3.7) with 1.0 percent 
HNO3. Use at least four standards to make the calibration 
curve. Suggested levels are 0, 5, 50, and 100 g Cr/l.
    4.3.9  Calibration Standards for ICP or IC/PCR. Prepare calibration 
standards for ICP or IC/PCR by diluting the Cr standard stock solution 
(section 4.3.7) with 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3, whichever 
was used as the impinger absorbing solution, to achieve a matrix similar 
to the actual field samples. Suggested levels are 0, 25, 50, and 100 
g Cr/l for ICP, and 0, 0.5, 5, and 10 g 
Cr+6/l for IC/PCR.
    4.4  Glassware Cleaning Reagents.
    4.4.1  HNO3, Concentrated. The ACS reagent grade or 
equivalent.
    4.4.2  Water. Reagent water that conforms to ASTM Specification 
D1193-77, Type II, (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 63.14).
    4.4.3 HNO3, 10 percent (v/v). Add with stirring 500 ml of 
concentrated HNO3 to a flask containing approximately 4,000 
ml of water. Dilute to 5,000 ml with water. Mix well. The reagent shall 
contain less than 2 g Cr/l.

                              5. Procedure

    5.1  Sampling. (a) Same as Method 5, section 4.1 (40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A), except omit the filter and filter holder from the sampling 
train, use a glass nozzle and probe liner, do not heat the probe, place 
100 ml of 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3 in each of the first two 
impingers, and record the data for each run on a data sheet such as the 
one shown in Figure 306-2.
    (b) Clean all glassware prior to sampling in hot soapy water 
designed for laboratory cleaning of glassware. Next, rinse the glassware 
three times with tap water, followed by three additional rinses with 
reagent water. Then soak all glassware in 10 percent (v/v) 
HNO3 solution for a minimum of 4 hours, rinse three times 
with reagent water, and allowed to air dry. Cover all glassware openings 
where contamination can occur with Parafilm, or equivalent, until the 
sampling train is assembled for sampling.
    (c) If the sample is going to be analyzed for Cr+6 using 
IC/PCR, determine the pH of the solution in the first impinger at the 
end of the sampling run using a pH indicator strip. The pH of the 
solution should be greater than 8.5. If not, the concentration of the 
NaOH or NaHCO3 impinger absorbing solution should be 
increased to 0.5 N and the sample should be rerun.

[[Page 528]]

    5.2  Sample Recovery. Follow the basic procedures of Method 5, 
section 4.2, with the exceptions noted below; a filter is not recovered 
from this train.
    5.2.1  Container No. 1. Measure the volume of the liquid in the 
first, second, and third impingers and quantitatively transfer into a 
labelled sample container. Use approximately 200 to 300 ml of 0.1 N NaOH 
or 0.1 N NaHCO3 to rinse the probe nozzle, probe liner, three 
impingers, and connecting glassware; add this rinse to the same 
container.
    5.2.2  Container No. 2 (Reagent Blank). Place approximately 500 ml 
of 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3 absorbing solution in a labeled 
sample container.
    5.2.3  Sample Filtration for IC/PCR. If the sample is to be analyzed 
for Cr+6 by IC/PCR, it must be filtered immediately following 
recovery to remove any insoluble matter. Nitrogen gas may be used as a 
pressure assist to the filtration process. Filter the entire contents of 
Container No. 1 through a 0.45-m acetate filter (or 
equivalent), and collect the filtrate in a 1,000 ml graduated cylinder. 
Rinse the sample container with reagent water three separate times, pass 
these rinses through the filter, and add the rinses to the sample 
filtrate. Determine the final volume of the filtrate and rinses and 
return them to the rinsed polyethylene sample container.
    5.2.4  Sample Preservation. Refrigerate samples upon receipt. 
(Containers Nos. 1 and 2).
    5.3  Sample Preparation and Analysis for GFAAS. For analysis by 
GFAAS, an acid digestion of the alkaline impinger solution is required. 
Two types of blanks are required for the analysis. The calibration blank 
is used in establishing the analytical curve, and the reagent blank is 
used to assess possible contamination resulting from the sample 
processing. The 1.0 percent HNO3 is the calibration blank. 
The 0.1 N NaOH solution or the 0.1 N NaHCO3 from section 
5.2.2 is the reagent blank. The reagent blank must be carried through 
the complete analytical procedure, including the acid digestion, and 
must contain the same acid concentration in the final solution as the 
sample solutions.
    5.3.1  Acid Digestion for GFAAS. (a) In a beaker, add 10 ml of 
concentrated HNO3 to a sample aliquot of 100 ml taken for 
analysis. Cover the beaker with a watch glass. Place the beaker on a hot 
plate and reflux the sample down to near dryness. Add another 5 ml of 
concentrated HNO3 to complete the digestion. Carefully reflux 
the sample volume down to near dryness. Wash down the beaker walls and 
watch glass with reagent water. The final concentration of 
HNO3 in the solution should be 1 percent (v/v). Transfer the 
digested sample to a 50 ml volumetric flask. Add 0.5 ml of concentrated 
HNO3, and 1 ml of the 10 g/ml of Ca 
(NO3)2.
    (b) Dilute to 50 ml with reagent water. A different final volume may 
be used, based on the expected Cr concentration, but the HNO3 
concentration must be maintained at 1 percent (v/v).

[[Page 529]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.071

    5.3.2 Sample Analysis by GFAAS. (a) The 357.9-nm wavelength line 
shall be used. Follow the manufacturer's operating instructions for all 
other spectrophotometer parameters.

[[Page 530]]

    (b) Furnace parameters suggested by the manufacturer should be 
employed as guidelines. Since temperature-sensing mechanisms and 
temperature controllers can vary between instruments and/or with time, 
the validity of the furnace parameters must be periodically confirmed by 
systematically altering the furnace parameters while analyzing a 
standard. In this manner, losses of analyte due to higher-than-necessary 
temperature settings or losses in sensitivity due to less than optimum 
settings can be minimized. Similar verification of furnace parameters 
may be required for complex sample matrices. Calibrate the GFAAS system 
following the procedures specified in section 6.
    (c) Inject a measured aliquot of digested sample into the furnace 
and atomize. If the concentration found exceeds the calibration range, 
the sample should be diluted with the calibration blank solution (1.0 
percent HNO3) and reanalyzed. Consult the operator's manual 
for suggested injection volumes. The use of multiple injections can 
improve accuracy and help detect furnace pipetting errors.
    (d) Analyze a minimum of one matrix-matched reagent blank per sample 
batch to determine if contamination or any memory effects are occurring. 
Analyze a calibration blank and a midpoint calibration check standard 
after approximately every 10 sample injections.
    (e) Calculate the Cr concentrations:
    (1) By the method of standard additions (see operator's manual),
    (2) From the calibration curve, or
    (3) Directly from the instrument's concentration readout. All 
dilution or concentration factors must be taken into account. All 
results should be reported in g Cr/ml with up to three 
significant figures.
    5.4  Sample Analysis by ICP. (a) The ICP measurement is performed 
directly on the alkaline impinger solution; acid digestion is not 
necessary provided the samples and standards are matrix matched. 
However, ICP should only be used when the solution analyzed has a Cr 
concentration greater than 35 g/l.
    (b) Two types of blanks are required for the analysis. The 
calibration blank is used in establishing the analytical curve, and the 
reagent blank is used to assess possible contamination resulting from 
sample processing. Use either 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3, 
whichever was used for the impinger absorbing solution, for the 
calibration blank. The calibration blank can be prepared fresh in the 
laboratory; it does not have to be from the same batch of solution that 
was used in the field. Prepare a sufficient quantity to flush the system 
between standards and samples. The reagent blank (section 5.2.2) is a 
sample of the impinger solution used for sample collection that is 
collected in the field during the testing program.
    (c) Set up the instrument with proper operating parameters including 
wavelength, background correction settings (if necessary), and 
interfering element correction settings (if necessary). The instrument 
must be allowed to become thermally stable before beginning performance 
of measurements (usually requiring at least 30 min of operation prior to 
calibration). During this warmup period, the optical calibration and 
torch position optimization may be performed (consult the operator's 
manual).
    (d) Calibrate the instrument according to the instrument 
manufacturer's recommended procedures, and the procedures specified in 
section 6.3. Before analyzing the samples, reanalyze the highest 
calibration standard as if it were a sample. Concentration values 
obtained should not deviate from the actual values by more than 5 
percent, or the established control limits, whichever is lower (see 
sections 6 and 7). If they do, follow the recommendations of the 
instrument manufacturer to correct for this condition.
    (e) Flush the system with the calibration blank solution for at 
least 1 min before the analysis of each sample or standard. Analyze the 
midpoint calibration standard and the calibration blank after each 10 
samples. Use the average intensity of multiple exposures for both 
standardization and sample analysis to reduce random error.
    (f) Dilute and reanalyze samples that are more concentrated than the 
linear calibration limit or use an alternate, less sensitive Cr 
wavelength for which quality control data are already established.
    (g) If dilutions are performed, the appropriate factors must be 
applied to sample values. All results should be reported in g 
Cr/ml with up to three significant figures.
    5.5  Sample Analyses by IC/PCR. (a) The Cr+6 content of 
the sample filtrate is determined by IC/PCR. To increase sensitivity for 
trace levels of chromium, a preconcentration system is also used in 
conjunction with the IC/PCR.
    (b) Prior to preconcentration and/or analysis, filter all field 
samples through a 0.45-m filter. This filtration should be 
conducted just prior to sample injection/analysis.
    (c) The preconcentration is accomplished by selectively retaining 
the analyte on a solid absorbent (as described in section 3.4.3.3), 
followed by removal of the analyte from the absorbent. Inject the sample 
into a sample loop of the desired size (use repeated loadings or a 
larger size loop for greater sensitivity). The Cr+6 is 
collected on the resin bed of the column. Switch the injection valve so 
that the eluent displaces the concentrated Cr+6 sample, 
moving it off the preconcentration column and onto the IC anion 
separation column. After separation from other sample components, the 
Cr+6 forms a specific complex in the post-column reactor with 
the DPC reaction solution, and

[[Page 531]]

the complex is detected by visible absorbance at a wavelength of 520 nm. 
The amount of absorbance measured is proportional to the concentration 
of the Cr+6 complex formed. Compare the IC retention time and 
the absorbance of the Cr+6 complex with known Cr+6 
standards analyzed under identical conditions to provide both 
qualitative and quantitative analyses.
    (d) Two types of blanks are required for the analysis. The 
calibration blank is used in establishing the analytical curve, and the 
reagent blank is used to assess possible contamination resulting from 
sample processing. Use either 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3, 
whichever was used for the impinger solution, for the calibration blank. 
The calibration blank can be prepared fresh in the laboratory; it does 
not have to be from the same batch of solution that was used in the 
field. The reagent blank (section 5.2.2) is a sample of the impinger 
solution used for sample collection that is collected in the field 
during the testing program.
    (e) Prior to sample analysis, establish a stable baseline with the 
detector set at the required attenuation by setting the eluent flow rate 
at approximately 1 ml/min and the post-column reagent flow rate at 
approximately 0.5 ml/min. Note: As long as the ratio of eluent flow rate 
to PCR flow rate remains constant, the standard curve should remain 
linear. Inject a sample of reagent water to ensure that no 
Cr+6 appears in the water blank.
    (f) First, inject the calibration standards prepared, as described 
in section 4.3.9 to cover the appropriate concentration range, starting 
with the lowest standard first. Next, inject, in duplicate, the 
calibration reference standard (as described in section 7.3.1), followed 
by the reagent blank (section 5.2.2), and the field samples. Finally, 
repeat the injection of the calibration standards to assess instrument 
drift. Measure areas or heights of the Cr+6/DPC complex 
chromatogram peaks. The response for replicate, consecutive injections 
of samples must be within 5 percent of the average response, or the 
injection should be repeated until the 5 percent criterion can be met. 
Use the average response (peak areas or heights) from the duplicate 
injections of calibration standards to generate a linear calibration 
curve. From the calibration curve, determine the concentrations of the 
field samples employing the average response from the duplicate 
injections.

                             6. Calibration

    6.1  Sampling Train Calibration. Perform all of the calibrations 
described in Method 5, section 5 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A). The 
alternate calibration procedures described in section 7 of Method 5 (40 
CFR part 60, appendix A) may also be used.
    6.2  GFAAS Calibration. Either run a series of chromium standards 
and a calibration blank and construct a calibration curve by plotting 
the concentrations of the standards against the absorbencies, or using 
the method of standard additions, plot added concentration versus 
absorbance. For instruments that read directly in concentration, set the 
curve corrector to read out the proper concentration, if applicable. 
This is customarily performed automatically with most instrument 
computer-based data systems.
    6.2.1  GFAAS Calibration Curve. If a calibration curve is used, it 
should be prepared daily with a minimum of a calibration blank and three 
standards. Calibration standards for total chromium should start with 1 
percent v/v HNO3 with no chromium for the calibration blank, 
with appropriate increases in total chromium concentration for the other 
calibration standards (see section 4.3.9.). Calibration standards should 
be prepared fresh daily.
    6.3  ICP Calibration. Calibrate the instrument according to the 
instrument manufacturer's recommended procedures, using a calibration 
blank and three standards for the initial calibration. Calibration 
standards should be prepared fresh daily, as described in section 4.3.9. 
Be sure that samples and calibration standards are matrix matched. Flush 
the system with the calibration blank between each standard. Use the 
average intensity of multiple exposures for both standardization and 
sample analysis to reduce random error.
    6.4  IC/PCR Calibration. Prepare a calibration curve using the 
calibration blank and three calibration standards prepared fresh daily 
as described in section 4.3.9. Run the standards with the field samples 
as described in section 5.5.

                           7. Quality Control

    7.1  GFAAS Quality Control
    7.1.1  GFAAS Calibration Reference Standards. If a calibration curve 
is used, it must be verified by use of at least one calibration 
reference standard (made from a reference material or other independent 
standard material) at or near the mid-range of the calibration curve. 
The calibration reference standard must be measured within 10 percent of 
it's true value for the curve to be considered valid. The curve must be 
validated before sample analyses are performed.
    7.1.2  GFAAS Check Standards. (a) Run a check standard and a 
calibration blank after approximately every 10 sample injections, and at 
the end of the analytical run. These standards are run, in part, to 
monitor the life and performance of the graphite tube. Lack of 
reproducibility or a significant change in the signal for the check 
standard indicates that the graphite tube should be replaced. Check 
standards can be the mid-range calibration standard or the reference 
standard. The results of the check standard shall agree within 10 
percent of the expected

[[Page 532]]

value. If not, terminate the analyses, correct the problem, recalibrate 
the instrument, and reanalyze all samples analyzed subsequent to the 
last acceptable check standard analysis.
    (b) The results of the calibration blank are to agree within three 
standard deviations of the mean blank value. If not, repeat the analysis 
two more times and average the results. If the average is not within 
three standard deviations of the background mean, terminate the 
analyses, correct the problem, recalibrate, and reanalyze all samples 
analyzed subsequent to the last acceptable calibration blank analysis.
    7.1.3  GFAAS Duplicate Samples. Run one duplicate sample for every 
20 samples, (or one per source test, whichever is more frequent). 
Duplicate samples are brought through the whole sample preparation and 
analytical process separately. Duplicate samples shall agree within 10 
percent.
    7.1.4  GFAAS Matrix Spiking. Spiked samples shall be prepared and 
analyzed daily to ensure that correct procedures are being followed and 
that all equipment is operating properly. Spiked sample recovery 
analyses should indicate a recovery for the Cr spike of between 75 and 
125 percent. Spikes are added prior to any sample preparation. Cr levels 
in the spiked sample should provide final solution concentrations that 
fall within the linear portion of the calibration curve.
    7.1.5  GFAAS Method of Standard Additions. Whenever sample matrix 
problems are suspected and standard/sample matrix matching is not 
possible or whenever a new sample matrix is being analyzed, the method 
of standard additions shall be used for the analysis of all extracts. 
Section 5.4.2 of Method 12 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) specifies a 
performance test to determine if the method of standard additions is 
necessary.
    7.1.6  GFAAS Reagent Blank Samples. Analyze a minimum of one matrix-
matched reagent blank (section 5.2.2) per sample batch to determine if 
contamination or memory effects are occurring. The results should agree 
within three standard deviations of the mean blank value.
    7.2  ICP Quality Control.
    7.2.1  ICP Interference Check. Prepare an interference check 
solution to contain known concentrations of interfering elements that 
will provide an adequate test of the correction factors in the event of 
potential spectral interferences. Two potential interferences, iron and 
manganese, may be prepared as 1,000 g/ml and 200 g/ml 
solutions, respectively. The solutions should be prepared in dilute 
HNO3 (1-5 percent). Particular care must be taken to ensure 
that the solutions and/or salts used to prepare the solutions are of ICP 
grade purity (i.e., that no measurable Cr contamination exists in the 
salts/solutions). Commercially prepared interfering element check 
standards are available. Verify the interelement correction factors 
every three months by analyzing the interference check solution. The 
correction factors are calculated according to the instrument 
manufacturer's directions. If interelement correction factors are used 
properly, no false Cr should be detected.
    7.2.2  ICP Calibration Reference Standards. Prepare a calibration 
reference standard in the same alkaline matrix as the calibration 
standards; it should be at least 10 times the instrumental detection 
limit. This reference standard should be prepared from a different Cr 
stock solution source than that used for preparation of the calibration 
curve standards and is used to verify the accuracy of the calibration 
curve. Prior to sample analysis, analyze at least one reference 
standard. The calibration reference standard must be measured within 10 
percent of it's true value for the curve to be considered valid. The 
curve must be validated before sample analyses are performed.
    7.2.3  ICP Check Standards. Run a check standard and a calibration 
blank after every 10 samples, and at the end of the analytical run. 
Check standards can be the mid-range calibration standard or the 
reference standard. The results of the check standard shall agree within 
10 percent of the expected value; if not, terminate the analyses, 
correct the problem, recalibrate the instrument, and rerun all samples 
analyzed subsequent to the last acceptable check standard analysis. The 
results of the calibration blank are to agree within three standard 
deviations of the mean blank value. If not, repeat the analysis two more 
times and average the results. If the average is not within three 
standard deviations of the background mean, terminate the analyses, 
correct the problem, recalibrate, and reanalyze all samples analyzed 
subsequent to the last acceptable calibration blank analysis.
    7.2.4  ICP Duplicate Samples. Analyze one duplicate sample for every 
20 samples, (or one per source test, whichever is more frequent). 
Duplicate samples are brought through the whole sample preparation and 
analytical process. Duplicate samples shall agree within 10 percent.
    7.2.5  ICP Reagent Blank Samples. Analyze a minimum of one matrix-
matched reagent blank (section 5.2.2) per sample batch to determine if 
contamination or memory effects are occurring. The results should agree 
within three standard deviations of the mean blank value.
    7.3  IC/PCR Quality Control.
    7.3.1  IC/PCR Calibration Reference Standards. Prepare a calibration 
reference standard in the same alkaline matrix as the calibration 
standards at a concentration that is at or near the mid-point of the 
calibration curve. This reference standard should be prepared from a 
different Cr stock solution source than that used for preparing the 
calibration curve standards. The reference

[[Page 533]]

standard is used to verify the accuracy of the calibration curve. Prior 
to sample analysis, analyze at least one reference standard. The results 
of this analysis of the reference standard must be within 10 percent of 
the true value of the reference standard for the calibration curve to be 
considered valid. The curve must be validated before sample analyses are 
performed.
    7.3.2  IC/PCR Check Standards. (a) Run the calibration blank and 
calibration standards with the field samples as described in section 
5.5. For each standard, determine the peak areas (recommended) or the 
peak heights, calculate the average response from the duplicate 
injections, and plot the average response against the Cr+6 concentration 
in g/l. The individual responses for each calibration standard 
determined before and after field sample analysis must be within 5 
percent of the average response for the analysis to be valid. If the 5 
percent criteria is exceeded, excessive drift and/or instrument 
degradation may have occurred, and must be corrected before further 
analyses are performed.
    (b) Employing linear regression, calculate a predicted value for 
each calibration standard using the average response for the duplicate 
injections. Each predicted value must be within 7 percent of the actual 
value for the calibration curve to be considered acceptable. If not 
acceptable, remake and/or rerun the calibration standards. If the 
calibration curve is still unacceptable, reduce the range of the curve.
    7.3.3  IC/PCR Duplicate Samples. Analyze one duplicate sample for 
every 20 samples, (or one per source test, whichever is more frequent). 
Duplicate samples are brought through the whole sample preparation and 
analytical process. Duplicate samples shall agree within 10 percent.
    7.3.4  ICP Reagent Blank Samples. Analyze a minimum of one matrix-
matched reagent blank (section 5.2.2) per sample batch to determine if 
contamination or memory effects are occurring. The results should agree 
within three standard deviations of the mean blank value.

                        8. Emission Calculations

    Carry out the calculations, retaining one extra decimal figure 
beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final 
calculations.
    8.1 Total Cr in Sample. Calculate MCr, the total 
g Cr in each sample, as follows:

MCr = (Vml) (CS) (F) (D)    Eq.306-1
where:

Vml = Volume of impinger contents plus rinses, ml.
CS = Concentration of Cr in sample solution, g Cr/
          ml.
F = Dilution factor.
= Volume of aliquot after dilution, ml; Volume of aliquot before 
          dilution, ml
D = Digestion factor.
= Volume of sample aliquot after digestion, ml; Volume of sample aliquot 
          submitted to digestion, ml
    8.2  Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure 
Drop. Same as Method 5, section 6.2.
    8.3  Dry Gas Volume, Volume of Water Vapor, Moisture Content. Same 
as Method 5, sections 6.3, 6.4, and 6.5, respectively.
    8.4 Cr  Emission Concentration. Calculate CCr, the Cr 
concentration in the stack gas, in mg/dscm on a dry basis, corrected to 
standard conditions, as follows:

CCr=(10-3 mg/g) (MCr/
          Vm(std))    Eq. 306-2
where:

Vm(std)=Gas sample volume measured by the dry gas meter, 
          corrected to dry standard conditions, dscm.

    8.5  Isokinetic Variation, Acceptable Results. Same as Method 5, 
sections 6.11 and 6.12, respectively.

                             9. Bibliography

    1. ``Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical 
Methods,'' U. S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication SW-846, 2nd 
Edition, July 1982.
    2. Cox, X.B., R.W. Linton, and F.E. Butler. Determination of 
Chromium Speciation in Environmental Particles--A Multitechnique Study 
of Ferrochrome Smelter Dust. Accepted for publication in Environmental 
Science and Technology.
    3. Same as Bibliography of Method 5, Citations 2 to 5 and 7.
    4. California Air Resources Board, ``Determination of Total Chromium 
and Hexavalent Chromium Emissions from Stationary Sources.'' Method 425, 
September 12, 1990.
    5. ``Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical 
Methods'', U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication SW-846, 3rd 
Edition, November 1986 as amended by Update I, November 1990.

  Method 306A--Determination of Chromium Emissions From Decorative and 
          Hard Chromium Electroplating and Anodizing Operations

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method applies to the determination of 
chromium (Cr) in emissions from decorative and hard chromium 
electroplating facilities and anodizing operations. The method is less 
expensive and less complex to conduct than Method 306 of this appendix. 
Correctly applied, the precision and bias of the sample results will be 
comparable to those obtained with the isokinetic Method 306 of this 
appendix. This method is applicable under ambient moisture, air, and 
temperature conditions.

[[Page 534]]

    1.2  Principle. A sample is extracted from the source at a constant 
sampling rate determined by a critical orifice and collected in a probe 
and impingers. The sampling time at the sampling traverse points is 
varied according to the stack gas velocity at each point to obtain a 
proportional sample. The concentration is determined by the same 
analytical procedures used in Method 306 of this appendix: inductively-
coupled plasma emission spectrometry (ICP), graphite furnace atomic 
absorption spectrometry (GFAAS), or ion chromatography with a post-
column reactor (IC/PCR).

           2. Range, Sensitivity, Precision, and Interferences

    Same as Method 306, section 2 of this appendix.

                              3. Apparatus

    Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not 
constitute endorsement by the Environmental Protection Agency.
    3.1  Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train is shown in 
Figure 306A-1. The components of the train are available commercially, 
but some fabrication and assembly are required. If Method 306 equipment 
is available, the sampling train may be assembled as specified in Method 
306 of this appendix and the sampling rate of the meter box set at the 
delta H@ specified for the calibrated orifice; this train is 
then operated as specified in this method.
    3.1.1  Probe Nozzle/Tubing and Sheath. Use approximately 1/4 in. 
inside diameter (ID) glass or rigid plastic tubing about 8 in. long with 
a short 90 deg. bend at one end to form the nozzle. Grind a slight taper 
on the nozzle end before making the bend. Attach the nozzle to flexible 
tubing of sufficient length to collect a sample from the stack. Use a 
straight piece of larger diameter rigid tubing (such as metal conduit or 
plastic water pipe) to form a sheath that begins about 1 in. from the 
90 deg. bend on the nozzle and encases the flexible tubing.

[[Page 535]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.072

    3.1.2  S-Type Pitot. Same as Method 2, section 3 (40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A).
    3.1.3  Sample Line. Use thick wall flexible plastic tubing (e.g., 
polyethylene, polypropylene, or polyvinylchloride) about \1/4\ in. to 
\3/8\ in. ID to connect the train components. A combination of rigid 
plastic tubing and thin wall flexible tubing may be used as long as 
neither tubing collapses when leak-checking the train. Metal tubing 
cannot be used.
    3.1.4  Impingers. One quart capacity ``Mason'' glass canning jars 
with vacuum seal lids are used. Three impingers are required: the first 
is for collecting the pollutant in the absorbing solution, the second is 
empty and is used to collect any absorbing solution carried over from 
the first impinger, and the third contains the drying agent. Install 
leak-tight inlet and outlet tubes in the lids of each impinger for 
assembly with the train. The tubes may be made of approximately \1/4\ 
in. ID glass or rigid plastic tubing. For the inlet tube of the first 
impinger, heat the glass or plastic tubing and

[[Page 536]]

draw until the tubing separates. Cut the tip off until the tip orifice 
is \3/32\ in. in diameter. When fabricating the first impinger, place 
the tip orifice \3/16\ in. above the bottom of the jar when assembled. 
For the second impinger, the inlet tube need not be drawn and sized, but 
the tip should be approximately 2 in. above the bottom of the jar. The 
inlet tube of the third impinger should extend to about \1/2\ in. above 
the bottom of the jar. Locate the outlet tube end of all impingers about 
\1/2\ in. beneath the bottom of the lid.
    3.1.5  Manometer. Inclined/vertical type, or equivalent device, as 
described in section 2.2 of Method 2 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A).
    3.1.6  Critical Orifice. The critical orifice is a small restriction 
in the sample line (approximately \1/16\ in. in diameter) that is 
located upstream of the vacuum pump and sets the sample rate at about 
0.75 cfm. An orifice can be made of \3/32\ in. brass tubing 
approximately \9/16\ in. long sealed inside larger diameter, 
approximately \5/16\ in., brass tubing to serve as a critical orifice 
giving a constant sample flow. Materials other than brass can be used to 
construct the critical orifice as long as the flow through the sampling 
train is approximately 0.75 cfm.
    3.1.7  Connecting Hardware. Standard pipe and fittings, \1/4\ in. or 
\1/8\ in., are used to install the vacuum pump and dry gas meter in the 
sampling train.
    3.1.8  Pump Oiler. A glass oil reservoir with a wick mounted at the 
vacuum pump inlet lubricates the pump vanes. The oiler should be an 
inline type and not vented to the atmosphere.
    3.1.9  Vacuum Pump. Gast Model 0522-V103-G18DX, or equivalent, 
capable of delivering at least 1.5 cfm at 15 in. Hg vacuum.
    3.1.10  Oil Trap. An empty glass oil reservoir without wick is 
mounted at pump outlet to prevent oil from reaching the dry gas meter.
    3.1.11  Dry Gas Meter. A Rockwell model 175-s test meter, or 
equivalent, with a thermometer installed to monitor meter temperature. 
The dry gas meter must be capable of measuring volume to within 2 
percent.
    3.2  Sample Recovery.
    3.2.1   Wash Bottles. These are glass or inert plastic, 500 or 1000 
ml, with spray tube.
    3.2.2  Sample Containers. The first mason jar impinger of the 
sampling train serves as the sample container. A new lid and plastic 
wrap are substituted for the impinger inlet/outlet assembly.
    3.3  Analysis. Same as Method 306, section 3.3 of this appendix.

                               4. Reagents

    4.1  Sampling. Same as Method 306, section 4.1 of this appendix.
    4.2  Sample Recovery. Same as Method 306, section 4.2 of this 
appendix.

                              5. Procedure

    5.1  Sampling.
    5.1.1  Pretest Preparation.
    5.1.1.1  Port Location. Locate the sampling ports as specified in 
section 2.1 of Method 1 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A). Use a total of 24 
sampling points for round ducts and 25 points for rectangular ducts. 
Locate the sampling points as specified in section 2.3 of Method 1 (40 
CFR part 60, Appendix A). Mark the pitot and sampling probe with thin 
strips of tape to permit velocity pressure and sample traversing. For 
ducts less than 12 in. in diameter, use a total of 16 points.
    5.1.1.2  Velocity Pressure Traverse. (a) Perform a velocity pressure 
traverse before the first sample run. Figure 306A-2 may be used to 
record velocity pressure data. If testing occurs over several days, 
perform the traverse at the beginning of each day. Perform velocity 
pressure traverses as specified in section 3 of Method 2 (40 CFR part 
60, appendix A), but record only the  p (velocity head) values 
for each sampling point.
    (b) Check for cyclonic flow during the first traverse to verify that 
it does not exist; if cyclonic flow does exist, make sure that the 
absolute average angle of misalignment does not exceed 20 deg.. If the 
average angle of misalignment exceeds 20 deg. at an outlet location, 
install straightening vanes to eliminate the cyclonic flow. If it is 
necessary to test an inlet location where cyclonic flow exists, it may 
not be possible to install straightening vanes. In this case, a 
variation of the alignment method must be used. This must be approved by 
the Administrator.

[[Page 537]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.073

    5.1.1.3  Point Sampling Times. Since the sampling rate of the train 
is held constant by the critical orifice, it is necessary to calculate 
specific sampling times for each point in order to obtain a proportional 
sample. If all sampling can be completed in a single day, it is 
necessary to calculate the point sampling times only once. If sampling 
occurs over several days, recalculate the point sample times each day. 
Determine the average of

[[Page 538]]

the  p values obtained during the traverse (Figure 306A-2). 
Calculate the sampling times for each point using Equation 306A-1. 
Convert the decimal parts of minutes to seconds. If the stack diameter 
is less than 12 in., use 7.5 minutes in place of 5 minutes in the 
equation and 16 sampling points.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA95.003

Where:

n=Sampling point number.
 p=Velocity head measured by Type-S pitot tube, in. 
          H2 O

    5.1.1.4 Preparation of Sampling Train. Assemble the sampling train 
as shown in Figure 306A-1. Secure the nozzle-liner assembly to the 
sheath to prevent slipping when sampling. Before charging, rinse the 
first mason jar impinger with either 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH) or 
0.1 N sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3); discard the solution. Put 
250 ml of 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3 absorbing solution into 
the first mason jar impinger. Similarly, rinse the second mason jar 
impinger and leave empty. Put silica gel into the third mason jar 
impinger until the impinger is half full. Place the impingers into an 
ice bath and check to ensure that the lids are tight.
    5.1.1.5  Train Leak Check Procedure. Wait until the ice has cooled 
the impingers. Next, seal the nozzle with a finger covered by a piece of 
clear plastic wrap and turn on the pump. The vacuum in the line between 
the pump and the critical orifice must be at least 15 in. Hg. Observe 
any leak rate on the dry gas meter. The leak rate should not exceed 0.02 
cfm.
    5.1.2  Sampling Train Operation.
    5.1.2.1  Record all pertinent process and sampling data on the data 
sheet (see Figure 306A-3). Ensure that the process operation is suitable 
for sample collection.

[[Page 539]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.074

    5.1.2.2  Place the probe/nozzle into the duct at the first sampling 
point and seal the port. Turn on the pump. A minimum vacuum of 15 in. Hg 
or 0.47 atmosphere between the critical orifice and pump is required to 
maintain critical flow. Sample for the time interval previously 
determined for that point. Move to the second point and sample for the 
time interval determined for that point; sample all points on the 
traverse in this manner.

[[Page 540]]

Keep ice around the impingers during the run. Complete the traverse and 
turn off the pump. Move to the next sampling port and repeat. Record the 
final dry gas meter reading. (NOTE: If an approximate mass emission rate 
is desired, record the stack temperature before and after the run.)
    5.1.2.3  Post Test Leak Check. Remove the probe assembly and 
flexible tubing from the first impinger. Do not cover the nozzle. Seal 
the inlet tube of the first impinger with a finger covered by clear 
plastic wrap and turn on the pump. The vacuum in the line between the 
pump and the critical orifice must be at least 15 in. Hg. Observe any 
leak rate on the dry gas meter. If the leak rate exceeds 0.02 cfm, 
reject the run. If the leak rate is acceptable, take the probe assembly 
and impinger assembly to the sample recovery area.
    5.2  Sample Recovery.
    5.2.1   Container No. 1. (a) After the train has been moved to the 
sample recovery area, disconnect the tubing that joins the first 
impinger with the second.
    (b) The first impinger jar is also used as the sample container jar. 
Unscrew the lid from the first impinger jar. Lift the inlet/outlet tube 
assembly almost out of the jar, and using the wash bottle, rinse the 
outside of the impinger tip that was immersed in the impinger jar with 
extra absorbing solution; rinse the inside of the tip as well.
    (c) Recover the second impinger by removing the lid and pouring any 
contents from the second impinger into the first impinger. Rinse the 
second impinger including the inside and outside of the impinger stem as 
well as any connecting plastic tubing with extra absorbing solution and 
place the rinse into the first impinger.
    (d) Hold the nozzle and connecting plastic tubing in a vertical 
position so that the tubing forms a ``U.'' Using the wash bottle, 
partially fill the tubing with sampling reagent. Raise and lower the end 
of the plastic tubing several times to cause the reagent to contact the 
major portion of the internal parts of the assembly thoroughly. Do not 
raise the solution level too high or part of the sample will be lost. 
Place the nozzle end of the assembly over the mouth of the first 
impinger jar (sample container) and elevate the plastic tubing so that 
the solution flows rapidly out of the nozzle. Perform this procedure 
three times. Next, repeat the recovery procedure but allow the solution 
to flow rapidly out the open end of the plastic tubing into the first 
impinger jar.
    (e) Place a piece of clear plastic wrap over the mouth of the first 
impinger jar. Use a standard lid and band assembly to seal the jar. 
Label the jar with the sample number and mark the liquid level to gauge 
any losses during handling.
    5.2.2  Container No. 2 (Reagent Blank). Place approximately 500 ml 
of the 0.1 N NaOH or 0.1 N NaHCO3 absorbing solution in a 
labeled sample container.
    5.2.3  Sample Filtration for IC/PCR. If the sample is to be analyzed 
for Cr+6 by IC/PCR, it must be filtered immediately following 
recovery as described in section 5.2.3 of Method 306 of this appendix.
    5.3  Analysis. Sample preparation and analysis procedures are 
identical to Method 306, section 5.3 of this appendix.

                             6. Calibration

    6.1  Dry Gas Meter. (a) Dry gas meter calibrations may be performed 
by either the manufacturer, a firm who provides calibration services, or 
the tester. The dry gas meter calibration coefficient (Ym) 
must be determined prior to initial use of the meter, and must be 
checked following each field use.
    (b) If the dry gas meter is new, the manufacturer will have 
specified the Ym for the meter. The manufacturer may also 
have included a calibration orifice and a data sheet with the meter that 
may be used for calibration purposes. The sheet will specify a standard 
cubic foot volume and a sample time, and these values were determined 
when the orifice was used to set the initial Ym for the 
meter. The Ym may be checked by disconnecting the critical 
orifice in the sampling train and replacing it with the calibration 
orifice. The inlet side of the calibration orifice is open to the 
atmosphere and is not reconnected to the sample train. Record the 
initial dry gas meter volume and meter temperature. Turn on the pump and 
operate it for the number of minutes specified by the manufacturer's 
data sheet. Stop the pump and record the final dry gas meter volume and 
temperature. Subtract the start volume from the stop volume and average 
the temperatures. Check the Ym for the dry gas meter after 
the test by using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA95.004

Where:

Ft.3m=Cubic feet given by meter manufacturer
Tm=Temperature of meter in degrees Fahrenheit
Ft3pt=Cubic feet from dry gas meter, post test
Pbar=Barometric pressure in inches of mercury
    Compare the Ym just calculated with the Ym given by the 
manufacturer:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA95.005


[[Page 541]]


    If this value is between 0.95 and 1.05, the Ym of the 
meter is acceptable. If the value lies outside the specified range, the 
test series shall either be voided, or calculations for the test series 
shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before 
and after) that gives the lower value of total sample volume. Return the 
dry gas meter to the manufacturer for recalibration. The calibration may 
also be conducted as specified in section 5.3.1 or section 7 of Method 5 
(40 CFR part 60, appendix A), except that it is only necessary to check 
the calibration at an approximate flow rate of 0.75 cfm. The calibration 
of the dry gas meter must be checked after each field use in the same 
manner. If the values of Ym obtained before and after a test 
series differ by more than 5%, the test series shall either be voided, 
or calculations for the test series shall be performed using whichever 
meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) that gives the lower 
value of total sample volume.
    6.2  GFAA Spectrometer. Same as Method 306, section 6.2 of this 
appendix.
    6.3  ICP Spectrometer. Same as Method 306, section 6.3 of this 
appendix.

                           7. Quality Control

    Same as Method 306, section 7 of this appendix.

                             8. Calculations

    8.1  Pollutant Concentration. Calculate Ccr, the Cr 
concentration in the stack gas, in mg/dscm on a dry basis as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA95.006

where:

MCr=Amount of Cr in sample from Method 306 of this appendix, 
          Eq. 306-1, g.
Tm=Dry gas meter temperature,  deg.F.
Ym=Dry gas meter correction factor, dimensionless.
Vm=Dry gas meter volume, ft3.
Pbar=Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
    8.2  Approximate Mass Emission Rate (Optional). Calculate an 
approximate mass emission rate of Cr in kg/hr using the following 
equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA95.007

where:

r=Radius of stack, in.
( p)avg=Average of  p 
          values.
Ts=Stack temperature,  deg.F.
Pbar=Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
CCr=Concentration of Cr, mg/dscm.
    Note: The emission rate calculated using Equation 306A-3 is based on 
an assumed moisture content of 2%.

                             9. Bibliography

    1. Clay, F.R. Memo, Impinger Collection Efficiency--Mason Jars vs. 
Greenburg-Smith Impingers, Dec. 1989.
    2. Segall, R.R., W.G. DeWees, F.R. Clay, and J.W. Brown. Development 
of Screening Methods for Use in Chromium Emissions Measurement and 
Regulations Enforcement. In: Proceedings of the 1989 EPA/A&WMA 
International Symposium--Measurement of Toxic and Related Air 
Pollutants, A&WMA Publication VIP-13, EPA Report No. 600/9-89-060, p. 
785.
    3. Clay, F.R. Chromium Sampling Method. In: Proceedings of the 1990 
EPA/A&WMA International Symposium--Measurement of Toxic and Related Air 
Pollutants, A&WMA Publication VIP-17, EPA Report No. 600/9-90-026, p. 
576.
    4. Clay, F.R. Proposed Sampling Method 306A for the Determination of 
Hexavalent Chromium Emissions from Electroplating and Anodizing 
Facilities. In: Proceedings of the 1992 EPA/A&WMA International 
Symposium--Measurement of Toxic and Related Air Pollutants, A&WMA 
Publication VIP-25, EPA Report No. 600/R-92/131, p. 209.

[[Page 542]]

Method 306-B--Surface Tension Measurement and Recordkeeping for Chromium 
      Plating Tanks Used at Electroplating and Anodizing Facilities

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method is applicable to all decorative 
plating and anodizing operations where a wetting agent is used in the 
tank as the primary mechanism for reducing emissions from the surface of 
the solution.
    1.2  Principle. During an electroplating or anodizing operation, gas 
bubbles generated during the process rise to the surface of the tank 
liquid and burst. Upon bursting, tiny droplets of chromic acid become 
entrained in ambient air. The addition of a wetting agent to the tank 
bath reduces the surface tension of the liquid and diminishes the 
formation of these droplets.

                              2. Apparatus

    2.1  Stalagmometer. Any commercially available stalagmometer or 
equivalent surface tension measuring device may be used to measure the 
surface tension of the plating or anodizing tank liquid.
    2.2  Tensiometer. A tensiometer may be used to measure the surface 
tension of the tank liquid provided the procedures specified in ASTM 
Method D 1331-89, Standard Test Methods for Surface and Interfacial 
Tension of Solutions of Surface Active Agents (incorporated by 
reference--see Sec. 63.14) are followed.

                              3. Procedure

    3.1  The surface tension of the tank bath may be measured by using a 
tensiometer, a stalagmometer or any other device suitable for measuring 
surface tension in dynes per centimeter. If the tensiometer is used, the 
instructions given in ASTM Method D 1331-89, Standard Test Methods for 
Surface and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of Surface Active Agents 
(incorporated by reference--see Sec. 63.14) must be followed. If a 
stalagmometer or other device is used to measure surface tension, the 
instructions that came with the measuring device must be followed.
    3.2  (a) Measurements of the bath surface tension are done using a 
progressive system which minimizes the number of surface tension 
measurements required when the proper surface tension is maintained. 
Initially, measurements must be made every 4 hours of tank operation for 
the first 40 hours of tank operation after the compliance date. Once 
there are no exceedances during 40 hours of tank operation, measurements 
may be conducted once every 8 hours of tank operation. Once there are no 
exceedances during 40 hours of tank operation, measurements may be 
conducted once every 40 hours of tank operation on an on-going basis, 
until an exceedance occurs. The maximum time interval for measurements 
is once every 40 hours of tank operation.
    (b) If a measurement of the surface tension of the solution is above 
the 45 dynes per centimeter limit, the time interval reverts back to the 
original monitoring schedule of once every 4 hours. A subsequent 
decrease in frequency would then be allowed according to the previous 
paragraph.

                            4. Recordkeeping

    4.1  Log book of surface tension measurements and fume suppressant 
additions. The surface tension of the plating or anodizing tank bath 
must be measured as specified in section 3.2. The measurements must be 
recorded in the log book. In addition to the record of surface tension 
measurements, the frequency of fume suppressant maintenance additions 
and the amount of fume suppressant added during each maintenance 
addition will be recorded in the log book. The log book will be readily 
available for inspection by regulatory personnel.
    4.2  Instructions for apparatus used in measuring surface tension. 
Also included with the log book must be a copy of the instructions for 
the apparatus used for measuring the surface tension of the plating or 
anodizing bath. If a tensiometer is used, a copy of ASTM Method D 1331-
89, Standard Methods for Surface and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of 
Surface Active Agents (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 63.14) must 
be included with the log book.

 Method 307--Determination of Emissions From Halogenated Solvent Vapor 
            Cleaning Machines Using a Liquid Level Procedure

                     1. Applicability and Principle

    1.1  Applicability. This method is applicable to the determination 
of the halogenated solvent emissions from solvent vapor cleaners in the 
idling mode.
    1.2  Principle. The solvent level in the solvent cleaning machine is 
measured using inclined liquid level indicators. The change in liquid 
level corresponds directly to the amount of solvent lost from the 
solvent cleaning machine.

                              2. Apparatus

    Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not 
constitute endorsement by the Environmental Protection Agency.
    2.1  Inclined Liquid Level Indicator. A schematic of the inclined 
liquid level indicators used in this method is shown in figure 307-1; 
two inclined liquid level indicators having 0.05 centimeters divisions 
or smaller shall be used. The liquid level indicators shall be made of 
glass, Teflon, or any similar material that will not react with the 
solvent

[[Page 543]]

being used. A 6-inch by 1-inch slope is recommended; however the slope 
may vary depending on the size and design of the solvent cleaning 
machine.
    Note: It is important that the inclined liquid level indicators be 
constructed with ease of reading in mind. The inclined liquid level 
indicators should also be mounted so that they can be raised or lowered 
if necessary to suit the solvent cleaning machine size.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.075

    2.2  Horizontal Indicator. Device to check the inclined liquid level 
indicators orientation relative to horizontal.
    2.3  Velocity Meter. Hotwire and vane anemometers, or other devices 
capable of measuring the flow rates ranging from 0 to 15.2 meters per 
minute across the solvent cleaning machine.

                              3. Procedure

    3.1  Connection of the Inclined Liquid Level Indicator. Connect one 
of the inclined liquid level indicators to the boiling sump drain and 
the other inclined liquid level indicator to the immersion sump drain 
using Teflon tubing and the appropriate fittings. A schematic diagram is 
shown in figure 307-2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.076

    3.2  Positioning of Velocity Meter. Position the velocity meter so 
that it measures the flow rate of the air passing directly across the 
solvent cleaning machine.
    3.3  Level the Inclined Liquid Level Indicators.
    3.4  Initial Inclined Liquid Level Indicator Readings. Open the sump 
drainage valves. Allow the solvent cleaning machine to operate long 
enough for the vapor zone to form and the system to stabilize (check 
with manufacturer). Record the inclined liquid level indicators readings 
and the starting time on the data sheet. A sample data sheet is provided 
in figure 307-3.

Date____________________________________________________________________

Run_____________________________________________________________________

Solvent type____________________________________________________________

Solvent density, g/m \3\ (lb/ft \3\)____________________________________

Length of boiling sump (SB), m (ft)__________________________

Width of boiling sump (WB), m (ft)___________________________

Length of immersion sump (SI), m (ft)________________________

Width of immersion sump (WI), m (ft)_________________________

Length of solvent vapor/air interface (SV), m (ft) 
____________

Width of solvent vapor/air interface (WV), m (ft) 
____________

[[Page 544]]


------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Boiling   Immersion
               Clock time                   sump       sump    Flow rate
                                          reading    reading    reading
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                        Figure 307-3. Data sheet.

    3.5  Final Inclined Liquid Level Indicator Readings. At the end of 
the 16-hour test run, check to make sure the inclined liquid level 
indicators are level; if not, make the necessary adjustments. Record the 
final inclined liquid level indicators readings and time.
    3.6  Determination of Solvent Vapor/Air Interface Area for Each 
Sump. Determine the area of the solvent/air interface of the individual 
sumps. Whenever possible, physically measure these dimensions, rather 
than using factory specifications. A schematic of the dimensions of a 
solvent cleaning machine is provided in figure 307-4.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MY92.077

                             4. Calculations

    4.1   Nomenclature.
AB = area of boiling sump interface, m\2\ (ft\2\).
AI = area of immersion sump interface, m\2\ (ft\2\).
AV = area of solvent/air interface, m\2\ (ft\2\).
E = emission rate, kg/m\2\-hr (lb/ft\2\-hr).
K = 100,000 cm . g/m . kg for metric units.
    = 12 in./ft for English units.
LBF = final boiling sump inclined liquid level indicators 
          reading, cm (in.).
LBi = initial boiling sump inclined liquid level indicators 
          reading, cm (in.).
LIf = final immersion sump inclined liquid level indicators 
          reading, cm (in.).
LIi = initial immersion sump inclined liquid level indicators 
          reading, cm (in.).
SB = length of the boiling sump, m (ft).
SI = length of the immersion sump, m (ft).
SV = length of the solvent vapor/air interface, m (ft).
WB = width of the boiling sump, m (ft).
WI = width of the immersion sump, m (ft).
WV = width of the solvent vapor/air interface, m (ft).
     = density of solvent, g/m3 (lb/ft3).
     = test time, hr.
    4.2  Area of Sump Interfaces. Calculate the areas of the boiling and 
immersion sump interfaces as follows:

AB = SB WB    Eq. 307-1
AI = SI WI    Eq. 307-2

    4.3  Area of Solvent/Air Interface. Calculate the area of the 
solvent vapor/air interface as follows:

AV = SV WV    Eq. 307-3
    4.4  Emission Rate. Calculate the emission rate as follows:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR02DE94.007
    
   Method 308--Procedure for Determination of Methanol Emission From 
                           Stationary Sources

                       1.0  Scope and Application

    1.1  Analyte. Methanol. Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) No. 67-56-1.
    1.2  Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of 
methanol emissions from specified stationary sources.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    A gas sample is extracted from the sampling point in the stack. The 
methanol is collected in deionized distilled water and adsorbed on 
silica gel. The sample is returned to the laboratory where the methanol 
in the water fraction is separated from other organic compounds with a 
gas chromatograph

[[Page 545]]

(GC) and is then measured by a flame ionization detector (FID). The 
fraction adsorbed on silica gel is extracted with an aqueous solution of 
n-propanol and is then separated and measured by GC/FID.

                       3.0  Definitions [Reserved]

                      4.0  Interferences [Reserved]

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, 
operations, and equipment. This test method does not purport to address 
all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the 
responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate 
safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of 
regulatory limitations before performing this test method.
    5.2  Methanol Characteristics. Methanol is flammable and a dangerous 
fire and explosion risk. It is moderately toxic by ingestion and 
inhalation.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample 
collection:
    6.1.1  Sampling Train. The sampling train is shown in Figure 308-1 
and component parts are discussed below.
    6.1.1.1  Probe. Teflon, approximately 6-millimeter (mm) 
(0.24 inch) outside diameter.
    6.1.1.2  Impinger. A 30-milliliter (ml) midget impinger. The 
impinger must be connected with leak-free glass connectors. Silicone 
grease may not be used to lubricate the connectors.
    6.1.1.3  Adsorbent Tube. Glass tubes packed with the required amount 
of the specified adsorbent.
    6.1.1.4  Valve. Needle valve, to regulate sample gas flow rate.
    6.1.1.5  Pump. Leak-free diaphragm pump, or equivalent, to pull gas 
through the sampling train. Install a small surge tank between the pump 
and rate meter to eliminate the pulsation effect of the diaphragm pump 
on the rotameter.
    6.1.1.6  Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring 
flow rate to within 2 percent of the selected flow rate of up to 1000 
milliliter per minute (ml/min). Alternatively, the tester may use a 
critical orifice to set the flow rate.
    6.1.1.7  Volume Meter. Dry gas meter (DGM), sufficiently accurate to 
measure the sample volume to within 2 percent, calibrated at the 
selected flow rate and conditions actually encountered during sampling, 
and equipped with a temperature sensor (dial thermometer, or equivalent) 
capable of measuring temperature accurately to within 3  deg.C (5.4 
deg.F).
    6.1.1.8  Barometer. Mercury (Hg), aneroid, or other barometer 
capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 inch) 
Hg. See the NOTE in Method 5 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A), section 
6.1.2.
    6.1.1.9  Vacuum Gauge and Rotameter. At least 760-mm (30-inch) Hg 
gauge and 0- to 40-ml/min rotameter, to be used for leak-check of the 
sampling train.
    6.2  Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample 
recovery:
    6.2.1  Wash Bottles. Polyethylene or glass, 500-ml, two.
    6.2.2  Sample Vials. Glass, 40-ml, with Teflon-lined 
septa, to store impinger samples (one per sample).
    6.2.3  Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml size.
    6.3  Analysis. The following are required for analysis:
    6.3.1  Gas Chromatograph. GC with an FID, programmable temperature 
control, and heated liquid injection port.
    6.3.2  Pump. Capable of pumping 100 ml/min. For flushing sample 
loop.
    6.3.3  Flow Meter. To monitor accurately sample loop flow rate of 
100 ml/min.
    6.3.4  Regulators. Two-stage regulators used on gas cylinders for GC 
and for cylinder standards.
    6.3.5  Recorder. To record, integrate, and store chromatograms.
    6.3.6  Syringes. 1.0- and 10-microliter (l) size, calibrated, for 
injecting samples.
    6.3.7  Tubing Fittings. Stainless steel, to plumb GC and gas 
cylinders.
    6.3.8  Vials. Two 5.0-ml glass vials with screw caps fitted with 
Teflon-lined septa for each sample.
    6.3.9  Pipettes. Volumetric type, assorted sizes for preparing 
calibration standards.
    6.3.10  Volumetric Flasks. Assorted sizes for preparing calibration 
standards.
    6.3.11  Vials. Glass 40-ml with Teflon-lined septa, to 
store calibration standards (one per standard).

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    Note: Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents must conform to the 
specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of 
the American Chemical Society. Where such specifications are not 
available, use the best available grade.

    7.1  Sampling. The following are required for sampling:
    7.1.1  Water. Deionized distilled to conform to the American Society 
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specification D 1193-77, Type 3. At the 
option of the analyst, the potassium permanganate (KMnO4) 
test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high 
concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
    7.1.2  Silica Gel. Deactivated chromatographic grade 20/40 mesh 
silica gel packed in glass adsorbent tubes. The silica

[[Page 546]]

gel is packed in two sections. The front section contains 520 milligrams 
(mg) of silica gel, and the back section contains 260 mg.
    7.2  Analysis. The following are required for analysis:
    7.2.1  Water. Same as specified in section 7.1.1.
    7.2.2  n-Propanol, 3 Percent. Mix 3 ml of n-propanol with 97 ml of 
water.
    7.2.3  Methanol Stock Standard. Prepare a methanol stock standard by 
weighing 1 gram of methanol into a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to 
100 ml with water.
    7.2.3.1  Methanol Working Standard. Prepare a methanol working 
standard by pipetting 1 ml of the methanol stock standard into a 100-ml 
volumetric flask. Dilute the solution to 100 ml with water.
    7.2.3.2  Methanol Standards For Impinger Samples. Prepare a series 
of methanol standards by pipetting 1, 2, 5, 10, and 25 ml of methanol 
working standard solution respectively into five 50-ml volumetric 
flasks. Dilute the solutions to 50 ml with water. These standards will 
have 2, 4, 10, 20, and 50 g/ml of methanol, respectively. After 
preparation, transfer the solutions to 40-ml glass vials capped with 
Teflon septa and store the vials under refrigeration. 
Discard any excess solution.
    7.2.3.3  Methanol Standards for Adsorbent Tube Samples. Prepare a 
series of methanol standards by first pipetting 10 ml of the methanol 
working standard into a 100-ml volumetric flask and diluting the 
contents to exactly 100 ml with 3 percent n-propanol solution. This 
standard will contain 10 g/ml of methanol. Pipette 5, 15, and 
25 ml of this standard, respectively, into four 50-ml volumetric flasks. 
Dilute each solution to 50 ml with 3 percent n-propanol solution. These 
standards will have 1, 3, and 5 g/ml of methanol, respectively. 
Transfer all four standards into 40-ml glass vials capped with 
Teflon-lined septa and store under refrigeration. Discard 
any excess solution.
    7.2.4  GC Column. Capillary column, 30 meters (100 feet) long with 
an inside diameter (ID) of 0.53 mm (0.02 inch), coated with DB 624 to a 
film thickness of 3.0 micrometers, (m) or an equivalent column. 
Alternatively, a 30-meter capillary column coated with polyethylene 
glycol to a film thickness of 1 m such as AT-WAX or its 
equivalent.
    7.2.5  Helium. Ultra high purity.
    7.2.6  Hydrogen. Zero grade.
    7.2.7  Oxygen. Zero grade.

                             8.0  Procedure

    8.1  Sampling. The following items are required for sampling:
    8.1.1  Preparation of Collection Train. Measure 20 ml of water into 
the midget impinger. The adsorbent tube must contain 520 mg of silica 
gel in the front section and 260 mg of silica gel in the backup section. 
Assemble the train as shown in Figure 308-1. An optional, second 
impinger that is left empty may be placed in front of the water-
containing impinger to act as a condensate trap. Place crushed ice and 
water around the impinger.


[[Page 547]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15AP98.014


    8.1.2  Leak Check. A leak check prior to the sampling run is 
optional; however, a leak check after the sampling run is mandatory. The 
leak-check procedure is as follows:
    Temporarily attach a suitable (e.g., 0-to 40-ml/min) rotameter to 
the outlet of the DGM, and place a vacuum gauge at or near the probe 
inlet. Plug the probe inlet, pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm (10 inch) 
Hg, and note the flow rate as indicated by the rotameter. A leakage rate 
not in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate is acceptable.

    Note: Carefully release the probe inlet plug before turning off the 
pump.

    8.1.3  Sample Collection. Record the initial DGM reading and 
barometric pressure. To begin sampling, position the tip of the 
Teflon tubing at the sampling point, connect the tubing to 
the impinger, and start the pump. Adjust the sample flow to a constant 
rate between 200 and 1000 ml/min as indicated by the rotameter. Maintain 
this constant rate (10 percent) during the entire sampling 
run. Take readings (DGM, temperatures at DGM and at impinger outlet, and 
rate meter) at least every 5 minutes. Add more ice during the run to 
keep the temperature of the gases leaving the last impinger at 20  deg.C 
(68  deg.F) or less. At the conclusion of each run,

[[Page 548]]

turn off the pump, remove the Teflon tubing from the stack, 
and record the final readings. Conduct a leak check as in section 8.1.2. 
(This leak check is mandatory.) If a leak is found, void the test run or 
use procedures acceptable to the Administrator to adjust the sample 
volume for the leakage.
    8.2  Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample 
recovery:
    8.2.1  Impinger. Disconnect the impinger. Pour the contents of the 
midget impinger into a graduated cylinder. Rinse the midget impinger and 
the connecting tubes with water, and add the rinses to the graduated 
cylinder. Record the sample volume. Transfer the sample to a glass vial 
and cap with a Teflon septum. Discard any excess sample. 
Place the samples in an ice chest for shipment to the laboratory.
    8.2.2.  Adsorbent Tubes. Seal the silica gel adsorbent tubes and 
place them in an ice chest for shipment to the laboratory.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures. The following quality 
control measures are required:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Section         Quality control measure           Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.1.2, 8.1.3, 10.1..  Sampling equipment leak   Ensures accurate
                       check and calibration.    measurement of sample
                                                 volume.
10.2................  GC calibration..........  Ensures precision of GC
                                                 analysis.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    9.2  Applicability. When the method is used to analyze samples to 
demonstrate compliance with a source emission regulation, an audit 
sample must be analyzed, subject to availability.
    9.3  Audit Procedure. Analyze an audit sample with each set of 
compliance samples. Concurrently analyze the audit sample and a set of 
compliance samples in the same manner to evaluate the technique of the 
analyst and the standards preparation. The same analyst, analytical 
reagents, and analytical system shall be used both for the compliance 
samples and the EPA audit sample.
    9.4  Audit Sample Availability. Audit samples will be supplied only 
to enforcement agencies for compliance tests. Audit samples may be 
obtained by writing: Source Test Audit Coordinator (MD-77B), Air 
Measurement Research Division, National Exposure Research Laboratory, 
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711; 
or by calling the Source Test Audit Coordinator (STAC) at (919) 541-
7834. The audit sample request must be made at least 30 days prior to 
the scheduled compliance sample analysis.
    9.5  Audit Results. Calculate the audit sample concentration 
according to the calculation procedure provided in the audit 
instructions included with the audit sample. Fill in the audit sample 
concentration and the analyst's name on the audit response form included 
with the audit instructions. Send one copy to the EPA Regional Office or 
the appropriate enforcement agency and a second copy to the STAC. The 
EPA Regional office or the appropriate enforcement agency will report 
the results of the audit to the laboratory being audited. Include this 
response with the results of the compliance samples in relevant reports 
to the EPA Regional Office or the appropriate enforcement agency.

                  10.0  Calibration and Standardization

    10.1  Metering System. The following items are required for the 
metering system:
    10.1.1  Initial Calibration.
    10.1.1.1  Before its initial use in the field, first leak-check the 
metering system (drying tube, needle valve, pump, rotameter, and DGM) as 
follows: Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet to the drying tube, and pull 
a vacuum of 250 mm (10 inch) Hg; plug or pinch off the outlet of the 
flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum shall remain stable 
for at least 30 seconds. Carefully release the vacuum gauge before 
releasing the flow meter end.
    10.1.1.2  Next, remove the drying tube, and calibrate the metering 
system (at the sampling flow rate specified by the method) as follows: 
Connect an appropriately sized wet test meter (e.g., 1 liter per 
revolution (0.035 cubic feet per revolution)) to the inlet of the drying 
tube. Make three independent calibrations runs, using at least five 
revolutions of the DGM per run. Calculate the calibration factor, Y (wet 
test meter calibration volume divided by the DGM volume, both volumes 
adjusted to the same reference temperature and pressure), for each run, 
and average the results. If any Y-value deviates by more than 2 percent 
from the average, the metering system is unacceptable for use. 
Otherwise, use the average as the calibration factor for subsequent test 
runs.
    10.1.2  Posttest Calibration Check. After each field test series, 
conduct a calibration check as in section 10.1.1 above, except for the 
following variations: (a) The leak check is not to be conducted, (b) 
three, or more revolutions of the DGM may be used, and (c) only two 
independent runs need be made. If the calibration factor does not 
deviate by more than 5 percent from the initial calibration factor 
(determined in section 10.1.1), then the DGM volumes obtained during the 
test series are acceptable. If the calibration factor deviates by more 
than 5 percent, recalibrate the metering system as in section 10.1.1, 
and for the calculations, use the calibration factor (initial or 
recalibration) that yields the lower gas volume for each test run.
    10.1.3  Temperature Sensors. Calibrate against mercury-in-glass 
thermometers.

[[Page 549]]

    10.1.4  Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should 
be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.
    10.1.5  Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.
    10.2  Gas Chromatograph. The following procedures are required for 
the gas chromatograph:
    10.2.1  Initial Calibration. Inject 1 l of each of the 
standards prepared in sections 7.2.3.3 and 7.2.3.4 into the GC and 
record the response. Repeat the injections for each standard until two 
successive injections agree within 5 percent. Using the mean response 
for each calibration standard, prepare a linear least squares equation 
relating the response to the mass of methanol in the sample. Perform the 
calibration before analyzing each set of samples.
    10.2.2  Continuing Calibration. At the beginning of each day, 
analyze the mid level calibration standard as described in section 
10.5.1. The response from the daily analysis must agree with the 
response from the initial calibration within 10 percent. If it does not, 
the initial calibration must be repeated.

                       11.0  Analytical Procedure

    11.1  Gas Chromatograph Operating Conditions. The following 
operating conditions are required for the GC:
    11.1.1  Injector. Configured for capillary column, splitless, 200 
deg.C (392  deg.F).
    11.1.2  Carrier. Helium at 10 ml/min.
    11.1.3  Oven. Initially at 45  deg.C for 3 minutes; then raise by 10 
 deg.C to 70  deg.C; then raise by 70  deg.C/min to 200  deg.C.
    11.2  Impinger Sample. Inject 1 l of the stored sample into 
the GC. Repeat the injection and average the results. If the sample 
response is above that of the highest calibration standard, either 
dilute the sample until it is in the measurement range of the 
calibration line or prepare additional calibration standards. If the 
sample response is below that of the lowest calibration standard, 
prepare additional calibration standards. If additional calibration 
standards are prepared, there shall be at least two that bracket the 
response of the sample. These standards should produce approximately 50 
percent and 150 percent of the response of the sample.
    11.3  Silica Gel Adsorbent Sample. The following items are required 
for the silica gel adsorbent samples:
    11.3.1  Preparation of Samples. Extract the front and backup 
sections of the adsorbent tube separately. With a file, score the glass 
adsorbent tube in front of the first section of silica gel. Break the 
tube open. Remove and discard the glass wool. Transfer the first section 
of the silica gel to a 5-ml glass vial and stopper the vial. Remove the 
spacer between the first and second section of the adsorbent tube and 
discard it. Transfer the second section of silica gel to a separate 5-ml 
glass vial and stopper the vial.
    11.3.2  Desorption of Samples. Add 3 ml of the 10 percent n-propanol 
solution to each of the stoppered vials and shake or vibrate the vials 
for 30 minutes.
    11.3.3  Inject a 1-l aliquot of the diluted sample from 
each vial into the GC. Repeat the injection and average the results. If 
the sample response is above that of the highest calibration standard, 
either dilute the sample until it is in the measurement range of the 
calibration line or prepare additional calibration standards. If the 
sample response is below that of the lowest calibration standard, 
prepare additional calibration standards. If additional calibration 
standards are prepared, there shall be at least two that bracket the 
response of the sample. These standards should produce approximately 50 
percent and 150 percent of the response of the sample.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations

    12.1  Nomenclature.

Caf=Concentration of methanol in the front of the adsorbent 
          tube, g/ml.
Cab=Concentration of methanol in the back of the adsorbent 
          tube, g/ml.
Ci=Concentration of methanol in the impinger portion of the 
          sample train, g/ml.
E=Mass emission rate of methanol, g/hr (lb/hr).
Mtot=Total mass of methanol collected in the sample train, 
          g.
Pbar=Barometric pressure at the exit orifice of the DGM, mm 
          Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Qstd=Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to standard 
          conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Tm=Average DGM absolute temperature, degrees K ( deg.R).
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 degrees K (528 
          deg.R).
Vaf=Volume of front half adsorbent sample, ml.
Vab=Volume of back half adsorbent sample, ml.
Vi=Volume of impinger sample, ml.
Vm=Dry gas volume as measured by the DGM, dry cubic meters 
          (dcm), dry cubic feet (dcf).
Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the DGM, corrected to 
          standard conditions, dry standard cubic meters (dscm), dry 
          standard cubic feet (dscf).

    12.2  Mass of Methanol. Calculate the total mass of methanol 
collected in the sampling train using Equation 308-1.


[[Page 550]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15AP98.015

    12.3  Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected to Standard Conditions. 
Calculate the volume of gas sampled at standard conditions using 
Equation 308-2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15AP98.016

    12.4  Mass Emission Rate of Methanol. Calculate the mass emission 
rate of methanol using Equation 308-3.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15AP98.017

                   13.0  Method Performance [Reserved]

                  14.0  Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

                    15.0  Waste Management [Reserved]

                           16.0  Bibliography

    1. Rom, J.J. ``Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic 
Source Sampling Equipment.'' Office of Air Programs, Environmental 
Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576 March 1972.
    2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 31; Water, Atmospheric 
Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 
1974. pp. 40-42.
    3. Westlin, P.R. and R.T. Shigehara. ``Procedure for Calibrating and 
Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards.'' Source 
Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3(1) :17-30. February 1978.
    4. Yu, K.K. ``Evaluation of Moisture Effect on Dry Gas Meter 
Calibration.'' Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 5(1) :24-28. 
February 1980.
    5. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, Volume 2. U.S. Department of 
Health and Human Services National Institute for Occupational Safety and 
Health. Center for Disease Control. 4676 Columbia Parkway, Cincinnati, 
OH 45226. (available from the Superintendent of Documents, Government 
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.)
    6. Pinkerton, J.E. ``Method for Measuring Methanol in Pulp Mill Vent 
Gases.'' National Council of the Pulp and Paper Industry for Air and 
Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, NY.

         17.0  Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

    [Reserved]

Method 310A--Determination of Residual Hexane Through Gas Chromatography

                       1.0  Scope and Application

    1.1  This method is used to analyze any crumb rubber or water 
samples for residual hexane content.
    1.2  The sample is heated in a sealed bottle with an internal 
standard and the vapor is analyzed by gas chromatography.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    2.1  This method, utilizing a capillary column gas chromatograph 
with a flame ionization detector, determines the concentration of 
residual hexane in rubber crumb samples.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  The definitions are included in the text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  There are no known interferences.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to 
establish safety and health practices applicable to their specific 
operation.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Gas Chromatograph with a flame ionization detector and data 
handling station

[[Page 551]]

equipped with a capillary column 30 meters long.
    6.2  Chromatograph conditions for Sigma 1:
    6.2.1  Helium pressure: 50# inlet A, 14# aux
    6.2.2  Carrier flow: 25 cc/min
    6.2.3  Range switch: 100x
    6.2.4  DB: 1 capillary column
    6.3  Chromatograph conditions for Hewlett-Packard GC:
    6.3.1  Initial temperature: 40  deg.C
    6.3.2  Initial time: 8 min
    6.3.3  Rate: 0
    6.3.4  Range: 2
    6.3.5  DB: 1705 capillary column
    6.4  Septum bottles and stoppers
    6.5  Gas Syringe--0.5 cc

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Chloroform, 99.9+%, A.S.C. HPLC grade

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, and Storage

    8.1  A representative sample should be caught in a clean 8 oz. 
container with a secure lid.
    8.2  The container should be labeled with sample identification, 
date and time.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  The instrument is calibrated by injecting calibration solution 
(Section 10.2 of this method) five times.
    9.2  The retention time for components of interest and relative 
response of monomer to the internal standard is determined.
    9.3  Recovery efficiency must be determined once for each sample 
type and whenever modifications are made to the method.
    9.3.1  Determine the percent hexane in three separate dried rubber 
crumb samples.
    9.3.2  Weigh a portion of each crumb sample into separate sample 
bottles and add a known amount of hexane (10 microliters) by microliter 
syringe and 20 microliters of internal standard. Analyze each by the 
described procedure and calculate the percent recovery of the known 
added hexane.
    9.3.3  Repeat the previous step using twice the hexane level (20 
microliters), analyze and calculate the percent recovery of the known 
added hexane.
    9.3.4  Set up two additional sets of samples using 10 microliters 
and 20 microliters of hexane as before, but add an amount of water equal 
to the dry crumb used. Analyze and calculate percent recovery to show 
the effect of free water on the results obtained.
    9.3.5  A value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.3.6  R shall be used to correct all reported results for each 
compound by dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for 
that compound for the same sample type.

                10.0  Calibration and Instrument Settings

    10.1  Calibrate the chromatograph using a standard made by injecting 
10 l of fresh hexane and 20 l of chloroform into a 
sealed septum bottle. This standard will be 0.6 wt.% total hexane based 
on 1 gram of dry rubber.
    10.2  Analyze the hexane used and calculate the percentage of each 
hexane isomer (2-methylpentane, 3-methylpentane, n-hexane, and 
methylcyclo-pentane). Enter these percentages into the method 
calibration table.
    10.3  Heat the standard bottle for 30 minutes in a 105  deg.C oven.
    10.4  Inject about 0.25 cc of vapor into the gas chromatograph and 
after the analysis is finished, calibrate according to the procedures 
described by the instrument manufacturer.

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Using a cold mill set at a wide roller gap (125-150 mm), mill 
about 250 grams of crumb two times to homogenize the sample.
    11.2  Weigh about 2 grams of wet crumb into a septum bottle and cap 
with a septum ring. Add 20 l of chloroform with a syringe and 
place in a 105  deg.C oven for 45 minutes.
    11.3  Run the moisture content on a separate portion of the sample 
and calculate the grams of dry rubber put into the septum bottle.
    11.4  Set up the data station on the required method and enter the 
dry rubber weight in the sample weight field.
    11.5  Inject a 0.25 cc vapor sample into the chromatograph and push 
the start button.
    11.6  At the end of the analysis, the data station will print a 
report listing the concentration of each identified component.
    11.7  To analyze water samples, pipet 5 ml of sample into the septum 
bottle, cap and add 20 l of chloroform. Place in a 105  deg.C 
oven for 30 minutes.
    11.8  Enter 5 grams into the sample weight field.
    11.9  Inject a 0.25 cc vapor sample into the chromatograph and push 
the start button.
    11.10  At the end of the analysis, the data station will print a 
report listing the concentration of each identified component.

                   12.0  Data Analysis and Calculation

    12.1  For samples that are prepared as in section 11 of this method, 
ppm n-hexane is read directly from the computer.
    12.2  The formulas for calculation of the results are as follows:

    ppmhexane=(Ahexane x Rhexane)/
(Ais x Ris)

    Where:
    Ahexane=area of hexane
    Rhexane=response of hexane
    Ais=area of the internal standard
    Ris=response of the internal standard

[[Page 552]]

    % hexane in crumb=(ppmhexane/sample amount)100
    12.3  Correct the results by the value of R (as determined in 
sections 9.3.4, 9.3.5, and 9.3.6 of this method).

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  The test has a standard deviation of 0.14 wt% at 0.66 wt% 
hexane. Spike recovery of 12 samples at two levels of hexane averaged 
102.3%. Note: Recovery must be determined for each type of sample. The 
values given here are meant to be examples of method performance.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible. Sample 
size should be an amount necessary to adequately run the analysis.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  All waste shall be handled in accordance with federal and 
state environmental regulations.

                    16.0  References and Publications

    16.1  DSM Copolymer Test Method T-3380.

Method 310B--Determination of Residual Hexane Through Gas Chromatography

                       1.0  Scope and Application

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                       Method sensitivity (5.5g
                 Analyte                       CAS No.               Matrix                  sample size)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hexane...................................        110-54-3  Rubber crumb.............  .01 wt%.
Ethylidene norbornene (ENB)..............      16219-75-3  Rubber crumb.............  .001 wt%.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    1.1  Data Quality Objectives:
    In the production of ethylene-propylene terpolymer crumb rubber, the 
polymer is recovered from solution by flashing off the solvent with 
steam and hot water. The resulting water-crumb slurry is then pumped to 
the finishing units. Certain amounts of solvent (hexane being the most 
commonly used solvent) and diene monomer remain in the crumb. The 
analyst uses the following procedure to determine those amounts.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    2.1  The crumb rubber sample is dissolved in toluene to which 
heptane has been added as an internal standard. Acetone is then added to 
this solution to precipitate the crumb, and the supernatant is analyzed 
for hexane and diene by a gas chromatograph equipped with a flame 
ionization detector (FID).

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  Included in text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  None known.
    4.2  Benzene, introduced as a contaminant in the toluene solvent, 
elutes between methyl cyclopentane and cyclohexane. However, the benzene 
peak is completely resolved.
    4.3  2,2-dimethyl pentane, a minor component of the hexane used in 
our process, elutes just prior to methyl cyclopentane. It is included as 
``hexane'' in the analysis whether it is integrated separately or 
included in the methyl cyclopentane peak.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  This procedure does not purport to address all of the safety 
concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 
of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices 
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
    5.2  Chemicals used in this analysis are flammable and hazardous 
(see specific toxicity information below). Avoid contact with sources of 
ignition during sample prep. All handling should be done beneath a hood. 
Playtex or nitrile gloves recommended.
    5.3  Hexane is toxic by ingestion and inhalation. Vapor inhalation 
causes irritation of nasal and respiratory passages, headache, 
dizziness, nausea, central nervous system depression. Chronic 
overexposure can cause severe nerve damage. May cause irritation on 
contact with skin or eyes. May cause damage to kidneys.
    5.3  ENB may be harmful by inhalation, ingestion, or skin 
absorption. Vapor or mist is irritating to the eyes, mucous membranes, 
and upper respiratory tract. Causes skin irritation.
    5.4  Toluene is harmful or fatal if swallowed. Vapor harmful if 
inhaled. Symptoms: headache, dizziness, hallucinations, distorted 
perceptions, changes in motor activity, nausea, diarrhea, respiratory 
irritation, central nervous system depression, unconsciousness, liver, 
kidney and lung damage. Contact can cause severe eye irritation. May 
cause skin irritation. Causes irritation of eyes, nose, and throat.

[[Page 553]]

    5.5  Acetone, at high concentrations or prolonged overexposure, may 
cause headache, dizziness, irritation of eyes and respiratory tract, 
loss of strength, and narcosis. Eye contact causes severe irritation; 
skin contact may cause mild irritation. Concentrations of 20,000 ppm are 
immediately dangerous to life and health.
    5.6  Heptane is harmful if inhaled or swallowed. May be harmful if 
absorbed through the skin. Vapor or mist is irritating to the eyes, 
mucous membranes, and upper respiratory tract. Prolonged or repeated 
exposure to skin causes defatting and dermatitis.
    5.7  The steam oven used to dry the polymer in this procedure is set 
at 110 deg. C. Wear leather gloves when removing bottles from the oven.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  4000-ml volumetric flask
    6.2  100-ml volumetric pipette
    6.3  1000-ml volumetric flask
    6.4  8-oz. French Square sample bottles with plastic-lined caps
    6.5  Top-loading balance
    6.6  Laboratory shaker
    6.7  Laboratory oven set at 110 deg. C (steam oven)
    6.8  Gas chromatograph, Hewlett-Packard 5890A, or equivalent, 
interfaced with HP 7673A (or equivalent) autosampler (equipped with 
nanoliter adapter and robotic arm), and HP 3396 series II or 3392A (or 
equivalent) integrator/controller.
    6.9  GC column, capillary type, 50m  x  0.53mm, methyl silicone, 5 
micron film thickness, Quadrex, or equivalent.
    6.10  Computerized data acquisition system, such as CIS/CALS
    6.11  Crimp-top sample vials and HP p/n 5181-1211 crimp caps.
    6.12  Glass syringes, 5-ml, with ``Luer-lock'' fitting
    6.13  Filters, PTFE, .45m pore size, Gelman Acrodisc or 
equivalent, to fit on Luer-lock syringes (in 6.12, above).

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Reagent toluene, EM Science Omnisolv
    Purity Check: Prior to using any bottle of reagent toluene, analyze 
it according to section 11.2 of this method. Use the bottle only if 
hexane, heptane, and ENB peak areas are less than 15 each (note that an 
area of 15 is equivalent to less than 0.01 wt% in a 10g sample).
    7.2  Reagent acetone, EM Science Omnisolv HR-GC
    Purity Check: Prior to using any bottle of reagent acetone, analyze 
it according to section 11.2 of this method. Use the bottle only if 
hexane, heptane, and ENB peak areas are less than 15 each.
    7.3  Reagent heptane, Aldrich Chemical Gold Label, Cat #15,487-3
    Purity Check: Prior to using any bottle of reagent heptane, analyze 
it according to section 11.2 of this method. Use the bottle only if 
hexane and ENB peak areas are less than 5 each.
    7.4  Internal standard solution--used as a concentrate for 
preparation of the more dilute Polymer Dissolving Solution. It contains 
12.00g heptane/100ml of solution which is 120.0g per liter.
    Preparation of internal standard solution (polymer dissolving stock 
solution):

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Action                               Notes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.4.1  Tare a clean, dry 1-liter         If the 1-liter volumetric flask
 volumetric flask on the balance.         is too tall to fit in the
 Record the weight to three places.       balance case, you can shield
                                          the flask from drafts by
                                          inverting a paint bucket with
                                          a hole cut in the bottom over
                                          the balance cover. Allow the
                                          neck of the flask to project
                                          through the hole in the
                                          bucket.
7.4.2  Weigh 120.00 g of n-heptane into  Use 99+% n-heptane from Aldrich
 the flask. Record the total weight of    or Janssen Chimica.
 the flask and heptane as well as the
 weight of heptane added.
7.4.3  Fill the flask close to the mark  Use EM Science Omnisolve
 with toluene, about 1 to 2" below the    toluene, Grade TX0737-1, or
 mark.                                    equivalent.
7.4.4  Shake the flask vigorously to     Allow any bubbles to clear
 mix the contents.                        before proceeding to the next
                                          step.
7.4.5  Top off the flask to the mark
 with toluene. Shake vigorously, as in
 section 5.4.4 of this method, to mix
 well.
7.4.6  Weigh the flask containing the
 solution on the three place balance
 record the weight
7.4.7 Transfer the contents of the       Discard any excess solution
 flask to a 1 qt Boston round bottle.
7.4.8  Label the bottle with the         Be sure to include the words
 identity of the contents, the weights    ``Hexane in Crumb Polymer
 of heptane and toluene used, the date    Dissolving Stock Solution'' on
 of preparation and the preparer's name.  the label.
7.4.9  Refrigerate the completed blend
 for the use of the routine Technicians.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    7.5  Polymer Dissolving Solution (``PDS'')--Heptane (as internal 
standard) in toluene. This solution contains 0.3g of

[[Page 554]]

heptane internal standard per 100 ml of solution.
    7.5.1  Fill a 4000ml volumetric flask about \3/4\ full with toluene.
    7.5.2  Add 100 ml of the internal standard solution (section 7.4 of 
this method) to the flask using the 100ml pipette.
    7.5.3  Fill the flask to the mark with toluene. Discard any excess.
    7.5.4  Add a large magnetic stirring bar to the flask and mix by 
stirring.
    7.5.5  Transfer the polymer solvent solution to the one-gallon 
labeled container with 50ml volumetric dispenser attached.
    7.5.6  Purity Check: Analyze according to section 11.2. NOTE: You 
must ``precipitate'' the sample with an equal part of acetone (thus 
duplicating actual test conditions-- see section 11.1 of this method, 
sample prep) before analyzing. Analyze the reagent 3 times to quantify 
the C6 and ENB interferences. Inspect the results to ensure 
good agreement among the three runs (within 10%).
    7.5.7  Tag the bottle with the following information:

        POLYMER DISSOLVING SOLUTION FOR C6 IN CRUMB ANALYSIS
        PREPARER'S NAME
        DATE
        CALS FILE ID'S OF THE THREE ANALYSES FOR PURITY (from section 
7.5.6 of this method)

    7.6  Quality Control Solution: the quality control solution is 
prepared by adding specific amounts of mixed hexanes (barge hexane), n-
nonane and ENB to some polymer dissolving solution. Nonane elutes in the 
same approximate time region as ENB and is used to quantify in that 
region because it has a longer shelf life. ENB, having a high tendency 
to polymerize, is used in the QC solution only to ensure that both ENB 
isomers elute at the proper time.
    First, a concentrated stock solution is prepared; the final QC 
solution can then be prepared by diluting the stock solution.
    7.6.1  In preparation of stock solution, fill a 1-liter volumetric 
flask partially with polymer dissolving solution (PDS)--see section 7.5 
of this method. Add 20.0 ml barge hexane, 5.0 ml n-nonane, and 3 ml ENB. 
Finish filling the volumetric to the mark with PDS.
    7.6.2  In preparation of quality control solution, dilute the 
quality control stock solution (above) precisely 1:10 with PDS, i.e. 10 
ml of stock solution made up to 100 ml (volumetric flask) with PDS. Pour 
the solution into a 4 oz. Boston round bottle and store in the 
refrigerator.

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage

    8.1  Line up facility to catch crumb samples. The facility is a 
special facility where the sample is drawn.
    8.1.1  Ensure that the cock valve beneath facility is closed.
    8.1.2  Line up the system from the slurry line cock valve to the 
cock valve at the nozzle on the stripper.
    8.1.3  Allow the system to flush through facility for a period of 30 
seconds.
    8.2  Catch a slurry crumb sample.
    8.2.1  Simultaneously close the cock valves upstream and downstream 
of facility.
    8.2.2  Close the cock valve beneath the slurry line in service.
    8.2.3  Line up the cooling tower water through the sample bomb water 
jacket to the sewer for a minimum of 30 minutes.
    8.2.4  Place the sample catching basket beneath facility and open 
the cock valve underneath the bomb to retrieve the rubber crumb.
    8.2.5  If no rubber falls by gravity into the basket, line up 
nitrogen to the bleeder upstream of the sample bomb and force the rubber 
into the basket.
    8.2.6  Close the cock valve underneath the sample bomb.
    8.3  Fill a plastic ``Whirl-pak'' sample bag with slurry crumb and 
send it to the lab immediately.
    8.4  Once the sample reaches the lab, it should be prepped as soon 
as possible to avoid hexane loss through evaporation. Samples which have 
lain untouched for more than 30 minutes should be discarded.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    Quality control is monitored via a computer program that tracks 
analyses of a prepared QC sample (from section 7.6.2 of this method). 
The QC sample result is entered daily into the program, which plots the 
result as a data point on a statistical chart. If the data point does 
not satisfy the ``in-control'' criteria (as defined by the lab quality 
facilitator), an ``out-of-control'' flag appears, mandating corrective 
action.
    In addition, the area of the n-heptane peak is monitored so that any 
errors in making up the polymer dissolving solution will be caught and 
corrected. Refer to section 12.4 of this method.

    9.1  Fill an autosampler vial with the quality control solution 
(from section 7.6.2 of this method) and analyze on the GC as normal (per 
section 11 of this method).
    9.2  Add the concentrations of the 5 hexane isomers as they appear 
on the CALS printout. Also include the 2,2-dimethyl-pentane peak just 
ahead of the methyl cyclopentane (the fourth major isomer) peak in the 
event that the peak integration split this peak out. Do not include the 
benzene peak in the sum. Note the nonane concentration. Record both 
results (total hexane and nonane) in the QC computer program. If out of 
control, and GC appears to be functioning within normal parameters, 
reanalyze a fresh control sample.

[[Page 555]]

If the fresh QC is not in control, check stock solution for contaminants 
or make up a new QC sample with the toluene currently in use. If 
instrument remains out-of-control, more thorough GC troubleshooting may 
be needed.
    Also, verify that the instrument has detected both isomers of ENB 
(quantification not necessary--see section 7.0 of this method).
    9.3  Recovery efficiency must be determined for each sample type and 
whenever modifications are made to the method. Recovery shall be between 
70 and 130 percent. All test results must be corrected by the recovery 
efficiency value (R).
    9.3.1  Approximately 10 grams of wet EPDM crumb (equivalent to about 
5 grams of dry rubber) shall be added to six sample bottles containing 
100 ml of hexane in crumb polymer dissolving solution (toluene 
containing 0.3 gram n-heptane/100 ml solution). The polymer shall be 
dissolved by agitating the bottles on a shaker for 4 hours. The polymer 
shall be precipitated using 100 ml acetone.
    9.3.2  The supernatant liquid shall be decanted from the polymer. 
Care shall be taken to remove as much of the liquid phase from the 
sample as possible to minimize the effect of retained liquid phase upon 
the next cycle of the analysis. The supernatant liquid shall be analyzed 
by gas chromatography using an internal standard quantitation method 
with heptane as the internal standard.
    9.3.3  The precipitated polymer from the steps described above shall 
be re-dissolved using toluene as the solvent. The toluene solvent and 
acetone precipitant shall be determined to be free of interfering 
compounds.
    9.3.4  The rubber which was dissolved in the toluene shall be 
precipitated with acetone as before, and the supernatant liquid decanted 
from the precipitated polymer. The liquid shall be analyzed by gas 
chromatography and the rubber phase dried in a steam-oven to determine 
the final polymer weight.
    9.3.5  The ratios of the areas of the hexane peaks and of the 
heptane internal standard peak shall be calculated for each of the six 
samples in the two analysis cycles outlined above. The area ratios of 
the total hexane to heptane (R1) shall be determined for the two 
analysis cycles of the sample set. The ratio of the values of R1 from 
the second analysis cycle to the first cycle shall be determined to give 
a second ratio (R2).

                  10.0  Calibration and Standardization

    The procedure for preparing a Quality Control sample with the 
internal standard in it is outlined in section 7.6 of this method.

    10.1  The relative FID response factors for n-heptane, the internal 
standard, versus the various hexane isomers and ENB are relatively 
constant and should seldom need to be altered. However Baseline 
construction is a most critical factor in the production of good data. 
For this reason, close attention should be paid to peak integration. 
Procedures for handling peak integration will depend upon the data 
system used.
    10.2  If recalibration of the analysis is needed, make up a 
calibration blend of the internal standard and the analytes as detailed 
below and analyze it using the analytical method used for the samples.
    10.2.1  Weigh 5 g heptane into a tared scintillation vial to five 
places.
    10.2.2  Add 0.2 ml ENB to the vial and reweigh.
    10.2.3  Add 0.5 ml hexane to the vial and reweigh.
    10.2.4  Cap, and shake vigorously to mix.
    10.2.5  Calculate the weights of ENB and of hexane added and divide 
their weights by the weight of the n-heptane added. The result is the 
known of given value for the calibration.
    10.2.6  Add 0.4 ml of this mixture to a mixture of 100 ml toluene 
and 100 ml of acetone. Cap and shake vigorously to mix.
    10.2.7  Analyze the sample.
    10.2.8  Divide the ENB area and the total areas of the hexane peaks 
by the n-heptane area. This result is the ``found'' value for the 
calibration.
    10.2.9  Divide the appropriate ``known'' value from 10.2.5 by the 
found value from 10.2.8. The result is the response factor for the 
analyte in question. Previous work has shown that the standard deviation 
of the calibration method is about 1% relative.

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  SAMPLE PREPARATION
    11.1.1  Tare an 8oz sample bottle--Tag attached, cap off; record 
weight and sample ID on tag in pencil.
    11.1.2  Place crumb sample in bottle: RLA-1: 20g; RLA-3: 10g--(gives 
a dry wt of 10g); (gives a dry wt of 5.5g).
    11.1.3  Dispense 100ml of PDS into each bottle. SAMPLE SHOULD BE 
PLACED INTO SOLUTION ASAP TO AVOID HEXANE LOSS--Using ``Dispensette'' 
pipettor. Before dispensing, ``purge'' the dispensette (25% of its 
volume) into a waste bottle to eliminate any voids.
    11.1.4  Tightly cap bottles and load samples into shaker.
    11.1.5  Insure that ``ON-OFF'' switch on the shaker itself is 
``ON.''
    11.1.6  Locate shaker timer. Insure that toggle switch atop timer 
control box is in the middle (``off'') position. If display reads 
``04:00'' (4 hours), move toggle switch to the left position. Shaker 
should begin operating.
    11.1.7  After shaker stops, add 100 ml acetone to each sample to 
precipitate polymer. Shake minimum of 5 minutes on shaker--

[[Page 556]]

Vistalon sample may not have fully dissolved; nevertheless, for purposes 
of consistency, 4 hours is the agreed-upon dissolving time.
    11.1.8  Using a 5-ml glass Luer-lock syringe and Acrodisc filter, 
filter some of the supernatant liquid into an autosampler vial; crimp 
the vial and load it into the GC autosampler for analysis (section 11.2 
of this method)--The samples are filtered to prevent polymer buildup in 
the GC. Clean the syringes in toluene.
    11.1.9  Decant remaining supernatant into a hydrocarbon waste sink, 
being careful not to discard any of the polymer. Place bottle of 
precipitate into the steam oven and dry for six hours--Some grades of 
Vistalon produce very small particles in the precipitate, thus making 
complete decanting impossible without discarding some polymer. In this 
case, decant as much as possible and put into the oven as is, allowing 
the oven to drive off remaining supernatant (this practice is avoided 
for environmental reasons). WARNING: OVEN IS HOT--110  deg.C (230 deg. 
F).
    11.1.10  Cool, weigh and record final weight of bottle.
    11.2  GC ANALYSIS
    11.2.1  Initiate the CALS computer channel.
    11.2.2  Enter the correct instrument method into the GC's 
integrator.
    11.2.3  Load sample vial(s) into autosampler.
    11.2.4  Start the integrator.
    11.2.5  When analysis is complete, plot CALS run to check baseline 
skim.

                   12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

    12.1  Add the concentrations of the hexane peaks as they appear on 
the CALS printout. Do not include the benzene peak in the sum.
    12.2  Subtract any hexane interferences found in the PDS (see 
section 7.5.6 of this method); record the result.
    12.3  Note the ENB concentration on the CALS printout. Subtract any 
ENB interference found in the PDS and record this result in a ``% ENB by 
GC'' column in a logbook.
    12.4  Record the area (from CALS printout) of the heptane internal 
standard peak in a ``C7 area'' column in the logbook. This helps track 
instrument performance over the long term.
    12.5  After obtaining the final dry weight of polymer used (section 
11.1.10 of this method), record that result in a ``dry wt.'' column of 
the logbook.
    12.6  Divide the %C6 by the dry weight to obtain the total PHR 
hexane in crumb. Similarly, divide the %ENB by the dry weight to obtain 
the total PHR ENB in crumb. Note that PHR is an abbreviation for ``parts 
per hundred''. Record both the hexane and ENB results in the logbook.
    12.7  Correct all results by the recovery efficiency value (R).

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  The method has been shown to provide 100% recovery of the 
hexane analyte. The method was found to give a 6% relative standard 
deviation when the same six portions of the same sample were carried 
through the procedure. Note: These values are examples; each sample type 
must be tested for sample recovery.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    14.1  Dispose of all hydrocarbon liquids in the appropriate disposal 
sink system; never pour hydrocarbons down a water sink.
    14.2  As discussed in section 11.1.9 of this method, the analyst can 
minimize venting hydrocarbon vapor to the atmosphere by decanting as 
much hydrocarbon liquid as possible before oven drying.

                         15.0  Waste Mamagement

    15.1  The Technician conducting the analysis should follow the 
proper waste management practices for their laboratory location.

                            16.0  References

    16.1  Baton Rouge Chemical Plant Analytical Procedure no. BRCP 1302
    16.2  Material Safety Data Sheets (from chemical vendors) for 
hexane, ENB, toluene, acetone, and heptane

 Method 310C--Determination of Residual N-Hexane in EPDM Rubber Through 
                           Gas Chromatography

                       1.0  Scope and Application

    1.1  This method describes a procedure for the determination of 
residual hexane in EPDM wet crumb rubber in the 0.01--2% range by 
solvent extraction of the hexane followed by gas chromatographic 
analysis where the hexane is detected by flame ionization and quantified 
via an internal standard.
    1.2  This method may involve hazardous materials operations and 
equipment. This method does not purport to address all the safety 
problems associated with it use, if any. It is the responsibility of the 
user to consult and establish appropriate safety and health practices 
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

                              2.0  Summary

    2.1  Residual hexane contained in wet pieces of EPDM polymer is 
extracted with MIBK. A known amount of an internal standard (IS) is 
added to the extract which is subsequently analyzed via gas 
chromatography where the hexane and IS are separated and detected 
utilizing a megabore column and flame ionization detection (FID). From 
the

[[Page 557]]

response to the hexane and the IS, the amount of hexane in the EPDM 
polymer is calculated.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  Hexane--refers to n-hexane
    3.2  Heptane--refers to n-heptane
    3.3  MIBK--methyl isobutyl ketone (4 methyl 2--Pentanone)

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  Material eluting at or near the hexane and/or the IS will cause 
erroneous results. Prior to extraction, solvent blanks must be analyzed 
to confirm the absence of interfering peaks.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  Review Material Safety Data Sheets of the chemicals used in 
this method.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  4 oz round glass jar with a wide mouth screw cap lid.
    6.2  Vacuum oven.
    6.3  50 ml pipettes.
    6.4  A gas chromatograph with an auto sampler and a 50 meter, 0.53 
ID, methyl silicone column with 5 micron phase thickness.
    6.5  Shaker, large enough to hold 10, 4 oz. jars.
    6.6  1000 and 4000 ml volumetric flasks.
    6.7  Electronic integrator or equivalent data system.
    6.8  GC autosampler vials.
    6.9  50 uL syringe.

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Reagent grade Methyl-Iso-Butyl-Ketone (MIBK)
    7.2  n-heptane, 99% + purity
    7.3  n-hexane, 99% + purity

                         8.0  Sample Collection

    8.1  Trap a sample of the EPDM crumb slurry in the sampling 
apparatus. Allow the crumb slurry to circulate through the sampling 
apparatus for 5 minutes; then close off the values at the bottom and top 
of the sampling apparatus, trapping the crumb slurry. Run cooling water 
through the water jacket for a minimum of 30 minutes. Expel the cooled 
crumb slurry into a sample catching basket. If the crumb does not fall 
by gravity, force it out with demineralized water or nitrogen. Send the 
crumb slurry to the lab for analysis.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  The Royalene crumb sample is extracted three times with MIBK 
containing an internal standard. The hexane from each extraction is 
added together to obtain a total hexane content. The percent hexane in 
the first extraction is then calculated and used as the recovery factor 
for the analysis.
    9.2  Follow this test method through section 11.4 of the method. 
After removing the sample of the first extraction to be run on the gas 
chromatograph, drain off the remainder of the extraction solvent, 
retaining the crumb sample in the sample jar. Rinse the crumb with 
demineralized water to remove any MIBK left on the surface of the crumb. 
Repeat the extraction procedure with fresh MIBK with internal standard 
two more times.
    9.3  After the third extraction, proceed to section 11.5 of this 
method and obtain the percent hexane in each extraction. Use the sample 
weight obtained in section 12.1 of this method to calculate the percent 
hexane in each of the extracts.
    9.4  Add the percent hexane obtained from the three extractions for 
a total percent hexane in the sample.
    9.5  Use the following equations to determine the recovery factor 
(R):
    % Recovery of the first extraction=(% hexane in the first extract/
total % hexane) x 100
    Recovery Factor (R)=(% Hexane Recovered in the first extract)/100

                            10.0  Calibration

    10.1  Preparation of Internal Standard (IS) solution:
    Accuracy weigh 30 grams of n-heptane into a 1000 ml volumetric 
flask. Dilute to the mark with reagent grade MIBK. Label this Solution 
``A''. Pipette 100 mls. of Solution A into a 4 liter volumetric flask. 
Fill the flask to the mark with reagent MIBK. Label this Solution ``B''. 
Solution ``B'' will have a concentration of 0.75 mg/ml of heptane.
    10.2  Preparation of Hexane Standard Solution (HS):
    Using a 50 uL syringe, weigh by difference, 20 mg of n-hexane into a 
50 ml volumetric flask containing approximately 40 ml of Solution B. 
Fill the flask to the mark with Solution B and mix well.
    10.3  Conditions for GC analysis of standards and samples:
    Temperature:
    Initial=40  deg.C
    Final=150  deg.C
    Injector=160  deg.C
    Detector=280  deg.C
    Program Rate=5.0  deg.C/min

    Initial Time=5 minutes Final Time=6 minutes
    Flow Rate=5.0 ml/min
    Sensitivity=detector response must be adjusted to keep the hexane 
and IS on scale.
    10.4  Fill an autosampler vial with the HS, analyze it three times 
and calculate a Hexane Relative Response Factor (RF) as follows:

    RF=(AIS  x  CHS  x  PHS)/
(AHS  x  CIS  x  PIS)    (1)


[[Page 558]]


    Where:
    AIS=Area of IS peak (Heptane)
    AHS=Area of peak (Hexane Standard)
    CHS=Mg of Hexane/50 ml HS
    CIS=Mg of Heptane/50 ml IS Solution B
    PIS=Purity of the IS n-heptane
    PHS=Purity of the HS n-hexane

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Weight 10 grams of wet crumb into a tared (W1), wide mouth 4 
oz. jar.
    11.2  Pipette 50 ml of Solution B into the jar with the wet crumb 
rubber.
    11.3  Screw the cap on tightly and place it on a shaker for 4 hours.
    11.4  Remove the sample from the shaker and fill an autosampler vial 
with the MIBK extract.
    11.5  Analyze the sample two times.
    11.6  Analyze the HS twice, followed by the samples. Inject the HS 
twice at the end of each 10 samples or at the end of the run.

                           12.0  Calculations

    12.1  Drain off the remainder of the MIBK extract from the polymer 
in the 4 oz. jar. Retain all the polymer in the jar. Place the uncovered 
jar and polymer in a heated vacuum oven until the polymer is dry. 
Reweigh the jar and polymer (W2) and calculate the dried sample weight 
of the polymer as follows:

    Dried SW=W2--W1 (2)

    12.2  Should the polymer be oil extended, pipette 10 ml of the MIBK 
extract into a tared evaporating dish (W1) and evaporate to dryness on a 
steam plate.
    Reweigh the evaporating dish containing the extracted oil (W2). 
Calculate the oil content of the polymer as follows:

    Gram of oil extracted =5 (W2--W1)  (3)

% Hexane in polymer=(As X RF X CIS X 
          PIS)/(AIS X SW)  (4)
    Where:
    As=Area of sample hexane sample peak.
    AIS=Area of IS peak in sample.
    CIS=Concentration of IS in 50 ml.
    PIS=Purity of IS.
    SW=Weight of dried rubber after extraction. (For oil extended 
polymer, the amount of oil extracted is added to the dry rubber weight).
    % Corrected Hexane=(% Hexane in Polymer)/R (5)
    R=Recovery factor determined in section 9 of this method.

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  Performance must be determined for each sample type by 
following the procedures in section 9 of this method.

                         14.0  Waste Generation

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  All waste shall be handled in accordance with Federal and 
State environmental regulations.

                            16.0  References

    [Reserved]

Method 311--Analysis of Hazardous Air Pollutant Compounds in Paints and 
          Coatings by Direct Injection Into a Gas Chromatograph

                        1. Scope and Application

    1.1  Applicability. This method is applicable for determination of 
most compounds designated by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency as 
volatile hazardous air pollutants (HAP's) (See Reference 1) that are 
contained in paints and coatings. Styrene, ethyl acrylate, and methyl 
methacrylate can be measured by ASTM D 4827-93 or ASTM D 4747-87. 
Formaldehyde can be measured by ASTM PS 9-94 or ASTM D 1979-91. Toluene 
diisocyanate can be measured in urethane prepolymers by ASTM D 3432-89. 
Method 311 applies only to those volatile HAP's which are added to the 
coating when it is manufactured, not to those which may form as the 
coating cures (reaction products or cure volatiles). A separate or 
modified test procedure must be used to measure these reaction products 
or cure volatiles in order to determine the total volatile HAP emissions 
from a coating. Cure volatiles are a significant component of the total 
HAP content of some coatings. The term ``coating'' used in this method 
shall be understood to mean paints and coatings.
    1.2  Principle. The method uses the principle of gas chromatographic 
separation and quantification using a detector that responds to 
concentration differences. Because there are many potential analytical 
systems or sets of operating conditions that may represent useable 
methods for determining the concentrations of the compounds cited in 
Section 1.1 in the applicable matrices, all systems that employ this 
principle, but differ only in details of equipment and operation, may be 
used as alternative methods, provided that the prescribed quality 
control, calibration, and method performance requirements are met. 
Certified product data sheets (CPDS) may also include information 
relevant to the analysis of the coating sample including, but not 
limited to, separation column, oven temperature, carrier gas, injection 
port temperature, extraction solvent, and internal standard.

                          2. Summary of Method

    Whole coating is added to dimethylformamide and a suitable internal 
standard compound is added. An aliquot of the sample mixture is injected 
onto a

[[Page 559]]

chromatographic column containing a stationary phase that separates the 
analytes from each other and from other volatile compounds contained in 
the sample. The concentrations of the analytes are determined by 
comparing the detector responses for the sample to the responses 
obtained using known concentrations of the analytes.

                        3. Definitions [Reserved]

                            4. Interferences

    4.1  Coating samples of unknown composition may contain the compound 
used as the internal standard. Whether or not this is the case may be 
determined by following the procedures of Section 11 and deleting the 
addition of the internal standard specified in Section 11.5.3. If 
necessary, a different internal standard may be used.
    4.2  The GC column and operating conditions developed for one 
coating formulation may not ensure adequate resolution of target 
analytes for other coating formulations. Some formulations may contain 
nontarget analytes that coelute with target analytes. If there is any 
doubt about the identification or resolution of any gas chromatograph 
(GC) peak, it may be necessary to analyze the sample using a different 
GC column or different GC operating conditions.
    4.3  Cross-contamination may occur whenever high-level and low-level 
samples are analyzed sequentially. The order of sample analyses 
specified in Section 11.7 is designed to minimize this problem.
    4.4  Cross-contamination may also occur if the devices used to 
transfer coating during the sample preparation process or for injecting 
the sample into the GC are not adequately cleaned between uses. All such 
devices should be cleaned with acetone or other suitable solvent and 
checked for plugs or cracks before and after each use.

                                5. Safety

    5.1  Many solvents used in coatings are hazardous. Precautions 
should be taken to avoid unnecessary inhalation and skin or eye contact. 
This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. 
This test method does not purport to address all of the safety problems 
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 
test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to 
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations in regards to the 
performance of this test method.
    5.2  Dimethylformamide is harmful if inhaled or absorbed through the 
skin. The user should obtain relevant health and safety information from 
the manufacturer. Dimethylformamide should be used only with adequate 
ventilation. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothing. In case of 
contact, immediately flush skin or eyes with plenty of water for at 
least 15 minutes. If eyes are affected, consult a physician. Remove and 
wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
    5.3  User's manuals for the gas chromatograph and other related 
equipment should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken 
related to their use.

                        6. Equipment and Supplies

    Note: Certified product data sheets (CPDS) may also include 
information relevant to the analysis of the coating sample including, 
but not limited to, separation column, oven temperature, carrier gas, 
injection port temperature, extraction solvent, and internal standard.

    6.1  Sample Collection.
    6.1.1  Sampling Containers. Dual-seal sampling containers, four to 
eight fluid ounce capacity, should be used to collect the samples. Glass 
sample bottles or plastic containers with volatile organic compound 
(VOC) impermeable walls must be used for corrosive substances (e.g., 
etch primers and certain coating catalysts such as methyl ethyl ketone 
(MEK) peroxide). Sample containers, caps, and inner seal liners must be 
inert to the compounds in the sample and must be selected on a case-by-
case basis.
    6.1.1.1  Other routine sampling supplies needed include waterproof 
marking pens, tubing, scrappers/spatulas, clean rags, paper towels, 
cooler/ice, long handle tongs, and mixing/stirring paddles.
    6.1.2  Personal safety equipment needed includes eye protection, 
respiratory protection, a hard hat, gloves, steel toe shoes, etc.
    6.1.3  Shipping supplies needed include shipping boxes, packing 
material, shipping labels, strapping tape, etc.
    6.1.4  Data recording forms and labels needed include coating data 
sheets and sample can labels.

    Note: The actual requirements will depend upon the conditions 
existing at the source sampled.

    6.2  Laboratory Equipment and Supplies.
    6.2.1  Gas Chromatograph (GC). Any instrument equipped with a flame 
ionization detector and capable of being temperature programmed may be 
used. Optionally, other types of detectors (e.g., a mass spectrometer), 
and any necessary interfaces, may be used provided that the detector 
system yields an appropriate and reproducible response to the analytes 
in the injected sample. Autosampler injection may be used, if available.
    6.2.2  Recorder. If available, an electronic data station or 
integrator may be used to record the gas chromatogram and associated 
data. If a strip chart recorder is used, it must

[[Page 560]]

meet the following criteria: A 1 to 10 millivolt (mV) linear response 
with a full scale response time of 2 seconds or less and a maximum noise 
level of 0.03 percent of full scale. Other types of 
recorders may be used as appropriate to the specific detector installed 
provided that the recorder has a full scale response time of 2 seconds 
or less and a maximum noise level of 0.03 percent of full 
scale.
    6.2.3  Column. The column must be constructed of materials that do 
not react with components of the sample (e.g., fused silica, stainless 
steel, glass). The column should be of appropriate physical dimensions 
(e.g., length, internal diameter) and contain sufficient suitable 
stationary phase to allow separation of the analytes. DB-5, DB-Wax, and 
FFAP columns are commonly used for paint analysis; however, it is the 
responsibility of each analyst to select appropriate columns and 
stationary phases.
    6.2.4  Tube and Tube Fittings. Supplies to connect the GC and gas 
cylinders.
    6.2.5  Pressure Regulators. Devices used to regulate the pressure 
between gas cylinders and the GC.
    6.2.6  Flow Meter. A device used to determine the carrier gas flow 
rate through the GC. Either a digital flow meter or a soap film bubble 
meter may be used to measure gas flow rates.
    6.2.7  Septa. Seals on the GC injection port through which liquid or 
gas samples can be injected using a syringe.
    6.2.8  Liquid Charging Devices. Devices used to inject samples into 
the GC such as clean and graduated 1, 5, and 10 microliter (l) 
capacity syringes.
    6.2.9  Vials. Containers that can be sealed with a septum in which 
samples may be prepared or stored. The recommended size is 25 ml 
capacity. Mininert valves have been found satisfactory and 
are available from Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, Illinois.
    6.2.10  Balance. Device used to determine the weights of standards 
and samples. An analytical balance capable of accurately weighing to 
0.0001 g is required.

                        7. Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Purity of Reagents. Reagent grade chemicals shall be used in 
all tests. Unless otherwise specified, all reagents shall conform to the 
specifications of the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American 
Chemical Society, where such specifications are available. Other grades 
may be used provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of 
sufficient purity to permit its use without lessening the accuracy of 
determination.
    7.2  Carrier Gas. Helium carrier gas shall have a purity of 99.995 
percent or higher. High purity nitrogen may also be used. Other carrier 
gases that are appropriate for the column system and analyte may also be 
used. Ultra-high purity grade hydrogen gas and zero-grade air shall be 
used for the flame ionization detector.
    7.3  Dimethylformamide (DMF). Solvent for all standards and samples. 
Some other suitable solvent may be used if DMF is not compatible with 
the sample or coelutes with a target analyte.

    Note: DMF may coelute with ethylbenzene or p-xylene under the 
conditions described in the note under Section 6.2.3.

    7.4  Internal Standard Materials. The internal standard material is 
used in the quantitation of the analytes for this method. It shall be 
gas chromatography spectrophotometric quality or, if this grade is not 
available, the highest quality available. Obtain the assay for the 
internal standard material and maintain at that purity during use. The 
recommended internal standard material is 1-propanol; however, selection 
of an appropriate internal standard material for the particular coating 
and GC conditions used is the responsibility of each analyst.
    7.5  Reference Standard Materials. The reference standard materials 
are the chemicals cited in Section 1.1 which are of known identity and 
purity and which are used to assist in the identification and 
quantification of the analytes of this method. They shall be the highest 
quality available. Obtain the assays for the reference standard 
materials and maintain at those purities during use.
    7.6  Stock Reference Standards. Stock reference standards are 
dilutions of the reference standard materials that may be used on a 
daily basis to prepare calibration standards, calibration check 
standards, and quality control check standards. Stock reference 
standards may be prepared from the reference standard materials or 
purchased as certified solutions.
    7.6.1  Stock reference standards should be prepared in 
dimethylformamide for each analyte expected in the coating samples to be 
analyzed. The concentrations of analytes in the stock reference 
standards are not specified but must be adequate to prepare the 
calibration standards required in the method. A stock reference standard 
may contain more than one analyte provided all analytes are chemically 
compatible and no analytes coelute. The actual concentrations prepared 
must be known to within 0.1 percent (e.g., 0.1000  0.0001 g/
g solution). The following procedure is suggested. Place about 35 ml of 
dimethylformamide into a tared ground-glass stoppered 50 ml volumetric 
flask. Weigh the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg. Add 12.5 g of the 
reference standard material and reweigh the flask. Dilute to volume with 
dimethylformamide and reweigh. Stopper the flask and mix the contents by 
inverting the flask several times. Calculate the concentration in grams 
per

[[Page 561]]

gram of solution from the net gain in weights, correcting for the 
assayed purity of the reference standard material.

    Note: Although a glass-stoppered volumetric flask is convenient, any 
suitable glass container may be used because stock reference standards 
are prepared by weight.

    7.6.2  Transfer the stock reference standard solution into one or 
more Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store, with minimal headspace, at 
-10 deg.C to 0 deg.C and protect from light.
    7.6.3  Prepare fresh stock reference standards every six months, or 
sooner if analysis results from daily calibration check standards 
indicate a problem. Fresh stock reference standards for very volatile 
HAP's may have to be prepared more frequently.
    7.7  Calibration Standards. Calibration standards are used to 
determine the response of the detector to known amounts of reference 
material. Calibration standards must be prepared at a minimum of three 
concentration levels from the stock reference standards (see Section 
7.6). Prepare the calibration standards in dimethylformamide (see 
Section 7.3). The lowest concentration standard should contain a 
concentration of analyte equivalent either to a concentration of no more 
than 0.01% of the analyte in a coating or to a concentration that is 
lower than the actual concentration of the analyte in the coating, 
whichever concentration is higher. The highest concentration standard 
should contain a concentration of analyte equivalent to slightly more 
than the highest concentration expected for the analyte in a coating. 
The remaining calibration standard should contain a concentration of 
analyte roughly at the midpoint of the range defined by the lowest and 
highest concentration calibration standards. The concentration range of 
the standards should thus correspond to the expected range of analyte 
concentrations in the prepared coating samples (see Section 11.5). Each 
calibration standard should contain each analyte for detection by this 
method expected in the actual coating samples (e.g., some or all of the 
compounds listed in Section 1.1 may be included). Each calibration 
standard should also contain an appropriate amount of internal standard 
material (response for the internal standard material is within 25 to 75 
percent of full scale on the attenuation setting for the particular 
reference standard concentration level). Calibration Standards should be 
stored for 1 week only in sealed vials with minimal headspace. If the 
stock reference standards were prepared as specified in Section 7.6, the 
calibration standards may be prepared by either weighing each addition 
of the stock reference standard or by adding known volumes of the stock 
reference standard and calculating the mass of the standard reference 
material added. Alternative 1 (Section 7.7.1) specifies the procedure to 
be followed when the stock reference standard is added by volume. 
Alternative 2 (Section 7.7.2) specifies the procedure to be followed 
when the stock reference standard is added by weight.

    Note: To assist with determining the appropriate amount of internal 
standard to add, as required here and in other sections of this method, 
the analyst may find it advantageous to prepare a curve showing the area 
response versus the amount of internal standard injected into the GC.

    7.7.1  Preparation Alternative 1. Determine the amount of each stock 
reference standard and dimethylformamide solvent needed to prepare 
approximately 25 ml of the specific calibration concentration level 
desired. To a tared 25 ml vial that can be sealed with a crimp-on or 
Mininert valve, add the total amount of dimethylformamide 
calculated to be needed. As quickly as practical, add the calculated 
amount of each stock reference standard using new pipets (or pipet tips) 
for each stock reference standard. Reweigh the vial and seal it. Using 
the known weights of the standard reference materials per ml in the 
stock reference standards, the volumes added, and the total weight of 
all reagents added to the vial, calculate the weight percent of each 
standard reference material in the calibration standard prepared. Repeat 
this process for each calibration standard to be prepared.
    7.7.2  Preparation Alternative 2. Determine the amount of each stock 
reference standard and dimethylformamide solvent needed to prepare 
approximately 25 ml of the specific calibration concentration level 
desired. To a tared 25 ml vial that can be sealed with a crimp-on or 
Mininert valve, add the total amount of dimethylformamide 
calculated to be needed. As quickly as practical, add the calculated 
amount of a stock reference standard using a new pipet (or pipet tip) 
and reweigh the vial. Repeat this process for each stock reference 
standard to be added. Seal the vial after obtaining the final weight. 
Using the known weight percents of the standard reference materials in 
the stock reference standards, the weights of the stock reference 
standards added, and the total weight of all reagents added to the vial, 
calculate the weight percent of each standard reference material in the 
calibration standard prepared. Repeat this process for each calibration 
standard to be prepared.

       8. Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage

    8.1  Copies of material safety data sheets (MSDS's) for each sample 
should be obtained prior to sampling. The MSDS's contain information on 
the ingredients, and physical and chemical properties data. The MSDS's 
also

[[Page 562]]

contain recommendations for proper handling or required safety 
precautions. Certified product data sheets (CPDS) may also include 
information relevant to the analysis of the coating sample including, 
but not limited to, separation column, oven temperature, carrier gas, 
injection port temperature, extraction solvent, and internal standard.
    8.2  A copy of the blender's worksheet can be requested to obtain 
data on the exact coating being sampled. A blank coating data sheet form 
(see Section 18) may also be used. The manufacturer's formulation 
information from the product data sheet should also be obtained.
    8.3  Prior to sample collection, thoroughly mix the coating to 
ensure that a representative, homogeneous sample is obtained. It is 
preferred that this be accomplished using a coating can shaker or 
similar device; however, when necessary, this may be accomplished using 
mechanical agitation or circulation systems.
    8.3.1  Water-thinned coatings tend to incorporate or entrain air 
bubbles if stirred too vigorously; mix these types of coatings slowly 
and only as long as necessary to homogenize.
    8.3.2  Each component of multicomponent coatings that harden when 
mixed must be sampled separately. The component mix ratios must be 
obtained at the facility at the time of sampling and submitted to the 
analytical laboratory.
    8.4  Sample Collection. Samples must be collected in a manner that 
prevents or minimizes loss of volatile components and that does not 
contaminate the coating reservoir. A suggested procedure is as follows. 
Select a sample collection container which has a capacity at least 25 
percent greater than the container in which the sample is to be 
transported. Make sure both sample containers are clean and dry. Using 
clean, long-handled tongs, turn the sample collection container upside 
down and lower it into the coating reservoir. The mouth of the sample 
collection container should be at approximately the midpoint of the 
reservoir (do not take the sample from the top surface). Turn the sample 
collection container over and slowly bring it to the top of the coating 
reservoir. Rapidly pour the collected coating into the sample container, 
filling it completely. It is important to fill the sample container 
completely to avoid any loss of volatiles due to volatilization into the 
headspace. Return any unused coating to the reservoir or dispose as 
appropriate.

    Note: If a company requests a set of samples for its own analysis, a 
separate set of samples, using new sample containers, should be taken at 
the same time.

    8.5  Once the sample is collected, place the sample container on a 
firm surface and insert the inner seal in the container by placing the 
seal inside the rim of the container, inverting a screw cap, and 
pressing down on the screw cap which will evenly force the inner seal 
into the container for a tight fit. Using clean towels or rags, remove 
all residual coating material from the outside of the sample container 
after inserting the inner seal. Screw the cap onto the container.
    8.5.1  Affix a sample label (see Section 18) clearly identifying the 
sample, date collected, and person collecting the sample.
    8.5.2  Prepare the sample for transportation to the laboratory. The 
sample should be maintained at the coating's recommended storage 
temperature specified on the Material Safety Data Sheet, or, if no 
temperature is specified, the sample should be maintained within the 
range of 5 deg.C to 38 deg.C.
    8.9  The shipping container should adhere to U.S. Department of 
Transportation specification DOT 12-B. Coating samples are considered 
hazardous materials; appropriate shipping procedures should be followed.

                           9. Quality Control

    9.1  Laboratories using this method should operate a formal quality 
control program. The minimum requirements of the program should consist 
of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing 
analysis of blanks and quality control samples to evaluate and document 
quality data. The laboratory must maintain records to document the 
quality of the data generated. When results indicate atypical method 
performance, a quality control check standard (see Section 9.4) must be 
analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-
control mode of operation.
    9.2  Before processing any samples, the analyst must demonstrate, 
through analysis of a reagent blank, that there are no interferences 
from the analytical system, glassware, and reagents that would bias the 
sample analysis results. Each time a set of analytical samples is 
processed or there is a change in reagents, a reagent blank should be 
processed as a safeguard against chronic laboratory contamination. The 
blank samples should be carried through all stages of the sample 
preparation and measurement steps.
    9.3  Required instrument quality control parameters are found in the 
following sections:
    9.3.1  Baseline stability must be demonstrated to be 5 
percent of full scale using the procedures given in Section 10.1.
    9.3.2  The GC calibration is not valid unless the retention time 
(RT) for each analyte at each concentration is within 0.05 
min of the retention time measured for that analyte in the stock 
standard.
    9.3.3  The retention time (RT) of any sample analyte must be within 
0.05 min of the average RT of the analyte in the calibration

[[Page 563]]

standards for the analyte to be considered tentatively identified.
    9.3.4  The GC system must be calibrated as specified in Section 
10.2.
    9.3.5  A one-point daily calibration check must be performed as 
specified in Section 10.3.
    9.4  To establish the ability to generate results having acceptable 
accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following 
operations.
    9.4.1  Prepare a quality control check standard (QCCS) containing 
each analyte expected in the coating samples at a concentration expected 
to result in a response between 25 percent and 75 percent of the limits 
of the calibration curve when the sample is prepared as described in 
Section 11.5. The QCCS may be prepared from reference standard materials 
or purchased as certified solutions. If prepared in the laboratory, the 
QCCS must be prepared independently from the calibration standards.
    9.4.2  Analyze three aliquots of the QCCS according to the method 
beginning in Section 11.5.3 and calculate the weight percent of each 
analyte using Equation 1, Section 12.
    9.4.3  Calculate the mean weight percent (X) for each analyte from 
the three results obtained in Section 9.4.2.
    9.4.4  Calculate the percent accuracy for each analyte using the 
known concentrations (Ti) in the QCCS using Equation 3, Section 12.
    9.4.5  Calculate the percent relative standard deviation (percent 
RSD) for each analyte using Equation 7, Section 12, substituting the 
appropriate values for the relative response factors (RRF's) in said 
equation.
    9.4.6  If the percent accuracy (Section 9.4.4) for all analytes is 
within the range 90 percent to 110 percent and the percent RSD (Section 
9.4.5) for all analytes is 20 percent, system performance is 
acceptable and sample analysis may begin. If these criteria are not met 
for any analyte, then system performance is not acceptable for that 
analyte and the test must be repeated for those analytes only. Repeated 
failures indicate a general problem with the measurement system that 
must be located and corrected. In this case, the entire test, beginning 
at Section 9.4.1, must be repeated after the problem is corrected.
    9.5  Great care must be exercised to maintain the integrity of all 
standards. It is recommended that all standards be stored at -10  deg.C 
to 0  deg.C in screw-cap amber glass bottles with Teflon liners.
    9.6  Unless otherwise specified, all weights are to be recorded 
within 0.1 mg.

                  10. Calibration and Standardization.

    10.1  Column Baseline Drift. Before each calibration and series of 
determinations and before the daily calibration check, condition the 
column using procedures developed by the laboratory or as specified by 
the column supplier. Operate the GC at initial (i.e., before sample 
injection) conditions on the lowest attenuation to be used during sample 
analysis. Adjust the recorder pen to zero on the chart and obtain a 
baseline for at least one minute. Initiate the GC operating cycle that 
would be used for sample analysis. On the recorder chart, mark the pen 
position at the end of the simulated sample analysis cycle. Baseline 
drift is defined as the absolute difference in the pen positions at the 
beginning and end of the cycle in the direction perpendicular to the 
chart movement. Calculate the percent baseline drift by dividing the 
baseline drift by the chart width representing full-scale deflection and 
multiply the result by 100.
    10.2  Calibration of GC. Bring all stock standards and calibration 
standards to room temperature while establishing the GC at the 
determined operating conditions.
    10.2.1  Retention Times (RT's) for Individual Compounds.

    Note: The procedures of this subsection are required only for the 
initial calibration. However, it is good laboratory practice to follow 
these procedures for some or all analytes before each calibration. The 
procedures were written for chromatograms output to a strip chart 
recorder. More modern instruments (e.g., integrators and electronic data 
stations) determine and print out or display retention times 
automatically.

    The RT for each analyte should be determined before calibration. 
This provides a positive identification for each peak observed from the 
calibration standards. Inject an appropriate volume (see Note in Section 
11.5.2) of one of the stock reference standards into the gas 
chromatograph and record on the chart the pen position at the time of 
the injection (see Section 7.6.1). Dilute an aliquot of the stock 
reference standard as required in dimethylformamide to achieve a 
concentration that will result in an on-scale response. Operate the gas 
chromatograph according to the determined procedures. Select the peak(s) 
that correspond to the analyte(s) [and internal standard, if used] and 
measure the retention time(s). If a chart recorder is used, measure the 
distance(s) on the chart from the injection point to the peak maxima. 
These distances, divided by the chart speed, are defined as the RT's of 
the analytes in question. Repeat this process for each of the stock 
reference standard solutions.

    Note: If gas chromatography with mass spectrometer detection (GC-MS) 
is used, a stock reference standard may contain a group of analytes, 
provided all analytes are adequately separated during the analysis. Mass 
spectral library matching can be used to identify the analyte associated 
with each peak in the gas chromatogram. The retention time for the 
analyte then becomes the

[[Page 564]]

retention time of its peak in the chromatogram.

    10.2.2  Calibration. The GC must be calibrated using a minimum of 
three concentration levels of each potential analyte. (See Section 7.7 
for instructions on preparation of the calibration standards.) Beginning 
with the lowest concentration level calibration standard, carry out the 
analysis procedure as described beginning in Section 11.7. Repeat the 
procedure for each progressively higher concentration level until all 
calibration standards have been analyzed.
    10.2.2.1  Calculate the RT's for the internal standard and for each 
analyte in the calibration standards at each concentration level as 
described in Section 10.2.1. The RT's for the internal standard must not 
vary by more than 0.10 minutes. Identify each analyte by comparison of 
the RT's for peak maxima to the RT's determined in Section 10.2.1.
    10.2.2.2  Compare the retention times (RT's) for each potential 
analyte in the calibration standards for each concentration level to the 
retention times determined in Section 10.2.1. The calibration is not 
valid unless all RT's for all analytes meet the criteria given in 
Section 9.3.2.
    10.2.2.3  Tabulate the area responses and the concentrations for the 
internal standard and each analyte in the calibration standards. 
Calculate the response factor for the internal standard 
(RFis) and the response factor for each compound relative to 
the internal standard (RRF) for each concentration level using Equations 
5 and 6, Section 12.
    10.2.2.4  Using the RRF's from the calibration, calculate the 
percent relative standard deviation (percent RSD) for each analyte in 
the calibration standard using Equation 7, Section 12. The percent RSD 
for each individual calibration analyte must be less than 15 percent. 
This criterion must be met in order for the calibration to be valid. If 
the criterion is met, the mean RRF's determined above are to be used 
until the next calibration.
    10.3  Daily Calibration Checks. The calibration curve (Section 
10.2.2) must be checked and verified at least once each day that samples 
are analyzed. This is accomplished by analyzing a calibration standard 
that is at a concentration near the midpoint of the working range and 
performing the checks in Sections 10.3.1, 10.3.2, and 10.3.3.
    10.3.1  For each analyte in the calibration standard, calculate the 
percent difference in the RRF from the last calibration using Equation 
8, Section 12. If the percent difference for each calibration analyte is 
less than 10 percent, the last calibration curve is assumed to be valid. 
If the percent difference for any analyte is greater than 5 percent, the 
analyst should consider this a warning limit. If the percent difference 
for any one calibration analyte exceeds 10 percent, corrective action 
must be taken. If no source of the problem can be determined after 
corrective action has been taken, a new three-point (minimum) 
calibration must be generated. This criterion must be met before 
quantitative analysis begins.
    10.3.2  If the RFis for the internal standard changes by 
more than 20 percent from the last daily calibration check, 
the system must be inspected for malfunctions and corrections made as 
appropriate.
    10.3.3  The retention times for the internal standard and all 
calibration check analytes must be evaluated. If the retention time for 
the internal standard or for any calibration check analyte changes by 
more than 0.10 min from the last calibration, the system must be 
inspected for malfunctions and corrections made as required.

                              11. Procedure

    11.1  All samples and standards must be allowed to warm to room 
temperature before analysis. Observe the given order of ingredient 
addition to minimize loss of volatiles.
    11.2  Bring the GC system to the determined operating conditions and 
condition the column as described in Section 10.1.

    Note: The temperature of the injection port may be an especially 
critical parameter.Information about the proper temperature may be found 
on the CPDS.

    11.3  Perform the daily calibration checks as described in Section 
10.3. Samples are not to be analyzed until the criteria in Section 10.3 
are met.
    11.4  Place the as-received coating sample on a paint shaker, or 
similar device, and shake the sample for a minimum of 5 minutes to 
achieve homogenization.
    11.5  Note: The steps in this section must be performed rapidly and 
without interruption to avoid loss of volatile organics. These steps 
must be performed in a laboratory hood free from solvent vapors. All 
weights must be recorded to the nearest 0.1 mg.
    11.5.1  Add 16 g of dimethylformamide to each of two tared vials (A 
and B) capable of being septum sealed.
    11.5.2  To each vial add a weight of coating that will result in the 
response for the major constituent being in the upper half of the linear 
range of the calibration curve.

    Note: The magnitude of the response obviously depends on the amount 
of sample injected into the GC as specified in Section 11.8. This volume 
must be the same as used for preparation of the calibration curve, 
otherwise shifts in compound retention times may occur. If a sample is 
prepared that results in a response outside the limits of the 
calibration curve, new samples must be prepared; changing the volume 
injected to bring the response within the calibration curve limits is 
not permitted.


[[Page 565]]


    11.5.3  Add a weight of internal standard to each vial (A and B) 
that will result in the response for the internal standard being between 
25 percent and 75 percent of the linear range of the calibration curve.
    11.5.4  Seal the vials with crimp-on or Mininert septum 
seals.
    11.6  Shake the vials containing the prepared coating samples for 60 
seconds. Allow the vials to stand undisturbed for ten minutes. If solids 
have not settled out on the bottom after 10 minutes, then centrifuge at 
1,000 rpm for 5 minutes. The analyst also has the option of injecting 
the sample without allowing the solids to settle.
    11.7  Analyses should be conducted in the following order: daily 
calibration check sample, method blank, up to 10 injections from sample 
vials (i.e., one injection each from up to five pairs of vials, which 
corresponds to analysis of 5 coating samples).
    11.8  Inject the prescribed volume of supernatant from the 
calibration check sample, the method blank, and the sample vials onto 
the chromatographic column and record the chromatograms while operating 
the system under the specified operating conditions.
    Note: The analyst has the option of injecting the unseparated 
sample.

                   12. Data Analysis and Calculations

    12.1 Qualitative Analysis. An analyte (e.g., those cited in Section 
1.1) is considered tentatively identified if two criteria are satisfied: 
(1) elution of the sample analyte within 0.05 min of the 
average GC retention time of the same analyte in the calibration 
standard; and (2) either (a) confirmation of the identity of the 
compound by spectral matching on a gas chromatograph equipped with a 
mass selective detector or (b) elution of the sample analyte within 
0.05 min of the average GC retention time of the same 
analyte in the calibration standard analyzed on a dissimilar GC column.
    12.1.1 The RT of the sample analyte must meet the criteria specified 
in Section 9.3.3.
    12.1.2 When doubt exists as to the identification of a peak or the 
resolution of two or more components possibly comprising one peak, 
additional confirmatory techniques (listed in Section 12.1) must be 
used.
    12.2 Quantitative Analysis. When an analyte has been identified, the 
quantification of that compound will be based on the internal standard 
technique.
    12.2.1 A single analysis consists of one injection from each of two 
sample vials (A and B) prepared using the same coating. Calculate the 
concentration of each identified analyte in the sample as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.003

    12.2.2 Report results for duplicate analysis (sample vials A and B) 
without correction.
    12.3 Precision Data. Calculate the percent difference between the 
measured concentrations of each analyte in vials A and B as follows.
    12.3.1 Calculate the weight percent of the analyte in each of the 
two sample vials as described in Section 12.2.1.
    12.3.2 Calculate the percent difference for each analyte as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.004
    
where Ai and Bi are the measured concentrations of 
the analyte in vials A and B.
    12.4 Calculate the percent accuracy for analytes in the QCCS (See 
Section 9.4) as follows:

[[Page 566]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.005

where Xx is the mean measured value and Tx is the 
known true value of the analyte in the QCCS.
    12.5 Obtain retention times (RT's) from data station or integrator 
or, for chromatograms from a chart recorder, calculate the RT's for 
analytes in the calibration standards (See Section 10.2.2.2) as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.006

    12.6 Calculate the response factor for the internal standard (See 
Section 10.2.2.3) as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.007

where:
    Ais = Area response of the internal standard.
    Cis = Weight percent of the internal standard.
    12.7 Calculate the relative response factors for analytes in the 
calibration standards (See Section 10.2.2.3) as follows:
where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.008

    RRFx = Relative response factor for an individual 
analyte.
    Ax = Area response of the analyte being measured.
    Cx = Weight percent of the analyte being measured.
    12.8 Calculate the percent relative standard deviation of the 
relative response factors for analytes in the calibration standards (See 
Section 10.2.2.4) as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.009

    12.9 Calculate the percent difference in the relative response 
factors between the calibration curve and the daily calibration checks 
(See Section 10.3) as follows:

[[Page 567]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE95.010

    13. Measurement of Reaction Byproducts That are HAP. [Reserved]
    14. Method Performance. [Reserved]
    15. Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
    16. Waste Management
    16.1 The coating samples and laboratory standards and reagents may 
contain compounds which require management as hazardous waste. It is the 
laboratory's responsibility to ensure all wastes are managed in 
accordance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    16.2 To avoid excessive laboratory waste, obtain only enough sample 
for laboratory analysis.
    16.3 It is recommended that discarded waste coating solids, used 
rags, used paper towels, and other nonglass or nonsharp waste materials 
be placed in a plastic bag before disposal. A separate container, 
designated ``For Sharp Objects Only,'' is recommended for collection of 
discarded glassware and other sharp-edge items used in the laboratory. 
It is recommended that unused or excess samples and reagents be placed 
in a solvent-resistant plastic or metal container with a lid or cover 
designed for flammable liquids. This container should not be stored in 
the area where analytical work is performed. It is recommended that a 
record be kept of all compounds placed in the container for 
identification of the contents upon disposal.

                             17. References

    1. Clean Air Act Amendments, Public Law 101-549, Titles I-XI, 
November, 1990.
    2. Standard Test Method for Water Content of Water-Reducible Paints 
by Direct Injection into a Gas Chromatograph. ASTM Designation D3792-79.
    3. Standard Practice for Sampling Liquid Paints and Related Pigment 
Coatings. ASTM Designation D3925-81.
    4. Standard Test Method for Determination of Dichloromethane and 
1,1,1-Trichloroethane in Paints and Coatings by Direct Injection into a 
Gas Chromatograph. ASTM Designation D4457-85.
    5. Standard Test Method for Determining the Unreacted Monomer 
Content of Latexes Using Capillary Column Gas Chromatography. ASTM 
Designation D4827-93.
    6. Standard Test Method for Determining Unreacted Monomer Content of 
Latexes Using Gas-Liquid Chromatography. ASTM Designation D 4747-87.
    7. Method 301--``Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods 
from Various Waste Media,'' 40 CFR 63, Appendix A.
    8. ``Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications,'' 
American Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the 
testing of reagents not listed by the American Chemical Society, see 
``Reagent Chemicals and Standards'' by Joseph Rosin, D. Van Nostrand 
Co., Inc., New York, NY and the ``United States Pharmacopeia.''

          18. Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Agency:_________________________________________________________________
Inspector:______________________________________________________________
Date/Time:______________________________________________________________
Sample ID:_____________________________________________________________
Source ID:______________________________________________________________
Coating Name/Type:______________________________________________________
Plant Witness:__________________________________________________________
Type Analysis Required:_________________________________________________
Special Handling:_______________________________________________________

                         Sample Container Label

                              Coating Data

Date:___________________________________________________________________

Source:_________________________________________________________________

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Data                     Sample ID No.   Sample ID No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coating:
    Supplier Name.......................  ..............  ..............
    Name and Color of Coating...........  ..............  ..............
    Type of Coating (primer, clearcoat,   ..............  ..............
     etc.)..............................
    Identification Number for Coating...  ..............  ..............
    Coating Density (lbs/gal)...........  ..............  ..............

[[Page 568]]

 
    Total Volatiles Content (wt percent)  ..............  ..............
    Water Content (wt percent)..........  ..............  ..............
    Exempt Solvents Content (wt percent)  ..............  ..............
    VOC Content (wt percent)............  ..............  ..............
    Solids Content (vol percent)........  ..............  ..............
Diluent Properties:
    Name................................
    Identification Number...............  ..............  ..............
    Diluent Solvent Density (lbs/gal)...  ..............  ..............
    VOC Content (wt percent)............  ..............  ..............
    Water Content (wt percent)..........  ..............  ..............
    Exempt Solvent Content (wt percent).  ..............  ..............
    Diluent/Solvent Ratio (gal diluent    ..............  ..............
     solvent/gal coating)...............
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                        Stock Reference Standard

Name of Reference Material:_____________________________________________

Supplier Name:__________________________________________________________

Lot Number:_____________________________________________________________

Purity:_________________________________________________________________

Name of Solvent Material: Dimethylformamide_____________________________

Supplier Name:__________________________________________________________

Lot Number:_____________________________________________________________

Purity:_________________________________________________________________

Date Prepared:__________________________________________________________

Prepared By:____________________________________________________________

Notebook/page no.:______________________________________________________

                         Preparation Information
1. Weight Empty Flask..................  ________,g
2. Weight Plus DMF.....................  ________,g
3. Weight Plus Reference Material......  ________,g
4. Weight After Made to Volume.........  ________,g
5. Weight DMF (lines 2-1+3-4)..........  ________,g
6. Weight Ref. Material (lines 3-2)....  ________,g
7. Corrected Weight of Reference         ________,g
 Material (line 6 times purity).
8. Fraction Reference Material in        ________,g/g
 Standard (Line 7  Line 5) soln.
9. Total Volume of Standard Solution...  ________, ml
10. Weight Reference Material per ml of  ________,g/ml
 Solution (Line 7  Line 9).
Laboratory ID No. for this Standard....  ________
Expiration Date for this Standard......  ________
 

                          CALIBRATION STANDARD

Date Prepared:__________________________________________________________

Date Expires:___________________________________________________________

Prepared By:____________________________________________________________

Notebook/page:__________________________________________________________
Calibration Standard Identification No.:
_______________________________________________________________________

                         Preparation Information
Final Weight Flask Plus Reagents.......  ________, g
Weight Empty Flask.....................  ________, g
Total Weight Of Reagents...............  ________, g
 


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Amount of stock reference standard added (by
                                                                  Stock                    volume or by weight)                  Calculated     Weight
                                                                reference  ----------------------------------------------------    weight      percent
                        Analyte name a                         standard ID                Amount in                 Amount in     analyte     analyte in
                                                                   No.         Volume    standard, g/    Weight    standard, g/   added, g   calibration
                                                                             added, ml        ml        added, g      g soln                  standard b
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Include internal standard(s).
b Weight percent = weight analyte added  total weight of reagents.


[[Page 569]]

                     Quality Control Check Standard

Date Prepared:__________________________________________________________

Date Expires:___________________________________________________________

Prepared By:____________________________________________________________

Notebook/page:__________________________________________________________

Quality Control Check Standard Identification No.:
_______________________________________________________________________

                         Preparation Information
Final Weight Flask Plus Reagents.......  ________,g
Weight Empty Flask.....................  ________,g
Total Weight Of Reagents...............  ________,g
 


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Amount of stock reference standard added (by
                                                                  Stock                    volume or by weight)                  Calculated     Weight
                                                                reference  ----------------------------------------------------    weight      percent
                        Analyte name a                         standard ID                Amount in                 Amount in     analyte     analyte in
                                                                   No.         Volume    standard, g/    Weight    standard, g/   added, g       QCC
                                                                             added, ml        ml        added, g      g soln                  standard b
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
                                                               ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Include internal Standard(s).
b Weight percent=weight analyte added  total weight of reagents.

                 Quality Control Check Standard Analysis

Date OCCS Analyzed:_____________________________________________________

OCCS Identification No._________________________________________________

Analyst:________________________________________________________________

QCC Expiration Date:____________________________________________________

                                                                    Analysis Results
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     Weight percent determined                                        Meets criteria in
                                                                 ---------------------------------                                      Section 9.4.6
                             Analyte                                                                Mean Wt    Percent    Percent  ---------------------
                                                                    Run 1      Run 2      Run 3     percent    accuracx     RSD      Percent    Percent
                                                                                                                                     accuracy     RSD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
                                                                  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........  .........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                    Calibration of Gas Chromatograph

Calibration Date:_______________________________________________________

Calibrated By:__________________________________________________________

                                                    Part 1.--Retention Times for Individual Analytes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Recorder chart speed        Distance from injection point
                                                               Stock     --------------------------------         to peak maximum            Retention
                         Analyte                           standard. ID                                  --------------------------------  time, minutes
                                                                No.         Inches/min.       cm/min.         Inches        Centimeters          a
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............

[[Page 570]]

 
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Retention time=distance to peak maximachart speed.

                    CALIBRATION OF GAS CHROMATOGRAPH

Calibration Date:_______________________________________________________

Calibrated By:__________________________________________________________

                                   Part 2.--Analysis of Calibration Standards
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                   Calib. STD ID   Calib. STD ID   Calib. STD ID
                             Analyte                                    No.             No.             No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
Internal Standard Name:
    Conc. in STD................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    Area Response...............................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
    RT..........................................................  ..............  ..............  ..............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                    Calibration of Gas Chromatograph

Calibration Date:_______________________________________________________

Calibrated By:__________________________________________________________

                                                    Part 3.--Data Analysis for Calibration Standards
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                             Is RT within
                                                           Calib. STD   Calib. STD   Calib. STD               percent RSD  0.05   Is percent
                         Analyte                               ID           ID           ID          Mean        of RF       min of RT for   RSD 30% (Y/
                                                                                                                             stock? (Y/N)         N)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........

[[Page 571]]

 
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
Name:
    RT..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
    RF..................................................  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ................  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                         Daily Calibration Check

Date:___________________________________________________________________

Analyst:________________________________________________________________
Calibration Check Standard ID No.:

Expiration Date:________________________________________________________

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                        Retention Time (RT)                            Response Factor (RF)
                         Analyte                         -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Last            This        Difference a        Last            This        Difference b
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
                                                          ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............  ..............
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Retention time (RT) change (difference) must be less than 0.10 minutes.
b Response factor (RF) change (difference) must be less than 20 percent for each analyte and for the internal standard.

                             Sample Analysis

Vial A ID No.:__________________________________________________________

Vial B ID No.:__________________________________________________________

Analyzed By:____________________________________________________________

Date:___________________________________________________________________


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      Sample preparation information                            Vial A (g)         Vial B (g)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Measured:
    wt empty vial.........................................................
    wt plus DMF...........................................................
    wt plus sample........................................................
    wt plus internal......................................................
    standard..............................................................
Calculated:
    wt DMF................................................................
    wt sample.............................................................
    wt internal standard..................................................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                           Analysis Results: Duplicate Samples
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                   Area response                                       Wt percent in sample
                         Analyte                         --------------------------------       RF       -----------------------------------------------
                                                              Vial A          Vial B                          Vial A          Vial B          Average
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ......................................................

[[Page 572]]

 
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
  ......................................................
Internal Standard.......................................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Method 312A--Determination of Styrene in Latex Styrene-Butadiene Rubber, 
                       Through Gas Chromatography

                        1.  Scope and Application

    1.1  This method describes a procedure for determining parts per 
million (ppm) styrene monomer (CAS No. 100-42-5) in aqueous samples, 
including latex samples and styrene stripper water.
    1.2  The sample is separated in a gas chromatograph equipped with a 
packed column and a flame ionization detector.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    2.1  This method utilizes a packed column gas chromatograph with a 
flame ionization detector to determine the concentration of residual 
styrene in styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) latex samples.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  The definitions are included in the text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  In order to reduce matrix effects and emulsify the styrene, 
similar styrene free latex is added to the internal standard. There are 
no known interferences.
    4.2  The operating parameters are selected to obtain resolution 
necessary to determine styrene monomer concentrations in latex.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to 
establish appropriate safety and health practices.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Adjustable bottle-top dispenser, set to deliver 3 ml. (for 
internal standard), Brinkmann Dispensette, or equivalent.
    6.2  Pipettor, set to 10 ml., Oxford Macro-set, or equivalent.
    6.3  Volumetric flask, 100-ml, with stopper.
    6.4  Hewlett Packard Model 5710A dual channel gas chromatograph 
equipped with flame ionization detector.
    6.4.1  11 ft.  x  \1/8\ in. stainless steel column packed with 10% 
TCEP on 100/120 mesh Chromosorb P, or equivalent.
    6.4.2  Perkin Elmer Model 023 strip chart recorder, or equivalent.
    6.5  Helium carrier gas, zero grade.
    6.6  Liquid syringe, 25-l.
    6.7  Digital MicroVAX 3100 computer with VG Multichrom software, or 
equivalent data handling system.
    6.6  Wire Screens, circular, 70-mm, 80-mesh diamond weave.
    6.7  DEHA--(N,N-Diethyl hydroxylamine), 97+% purity, CAS No. 3710-
84-7
    6.8  p-Dioxane, CAS No. 123-91-1

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Internal standard preparation.
    7.1.1  Pipette 5 ml p-dioxane into a 1000-ml volumetric flask and 
fill to the mark with distilled water and mix thoroughly.
    7.2  Calibration solution preparation.
    7.2.1  Pipette 10 ml styrene-free latex (eg: NBR latex) into a 100-
ml volumetric flask.
    7.2.2  Add 3 ml internal standard (section 7.1.1 of this method).
    7.2.3  Weigh exactly 10l fresh styrene and record the 
weight.
    7.2.4  Inject the styrene into the flask and mix well.
    7.2.5  Add 2 drops of DEHA, fill to the mark with water and mix well 
again.
    7.2.6  Calculate concentration of the calibration solution as 
follows:

    mg/l styrene=(mg styrene added)/0.1 L

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, and Storage

    8.1  A representative SBR emulsion sample should be caught in a 
clean, dry 6-oz. teflon lined glass container. Close it properly to 
assure no sample leakage.
    8.2  The container should be labeled with sample identification, 
date and time.

[[Page 573]]

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  The instrument is calibrated by injecting calibration solution 
(Section 7.2 of this method) five times.
    9.2  The retention time for components of interest and relative 
response of monomer to the internal standard is determined.
    9.3  Recovery efficiency must be determined once for each sample 
type and whenever modifications are made to the method.
    9.3.1  A set of six latex samples shall be collected. Two samples 
shall be prepared for analysis from each sample. Each sample shall be 
analyzed in duplicate.
    9.3.2  The second set of six latex samples shall be analyzed in 
duplicate before spiking each sample with approximately 1000 ppm 
styrene. The spiked samples shall be analyzed in duplicate.
    9.3.3  For each hydrocarbon, calculate the average recovery 
efficiency (R) using the following equations:

    where:
    R=(Rn)/6

    where:
    Rn=(cns-cv)/Sn

    n=sample number
    cns=concentration of compound measured in spiked sample 
number n.
    cnu= concentration of compound measured in unspiked 
sample number n.
    Sn=theoretical concentration of compound spiked into 
sample n.
    9.3.4  A value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.3.5  R is used to correct all reported results for each compound 
by dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for that 
compound for the same sample type.

                10.0  Calibration and Instrument Settings

    10.1  Injection port temperature, 250 deg.C.
    10.2  Oven temperature, 110 deg.C, isothermal.
    10.3  Carrier gas flow, 25 cc/min.
    10.4  Detector temperature, 250 deg.C.
    10.5  Range, 1X.

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Turn on recorder and adjust baseline to zero.
    11.2  Prepare sample.
    11.2.1  For latex samples, add 3 ml Internal Standard (section 7.1 
of this method) to a 100-ml volumetric flask. Pipet 10 ml sample into 
the flask using the Oxford pipettor, dilute to the 100-ml mark with 
water, and shake well.
    11.2.2  For water samples, add 3 ml Internal Standard (section 7.1 
of this method) to a 100-ml volumetric flask and fill to the mark with 
sample. Shake well.
    11.3  Flush syringe with sample.
    11.4  Carefully inject 2 l of sample into the gas 
chromatograph column injection port and press the start button.
    11.5  When the run is complete the computer will print a report of 
the analysis.

                   12.0  Data Analysis and Calculation

    12.1  For samples that are prepared as in section 11.2.1 of this 
method:

    ppm styrene = A x D

    Where:
    A = ``ppm'' readout from computer
    D = dilution factor (10 for latex samples)

    12.2  For samples that are prepared as in section 11.2.2 of this 
method, ppm styrene is read directly from the computer.

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  This test has a standard deviation (1) of 3.3 ppm at 100 ppm 
styrene. The average Spike Recovery from six samples at 1000 ppm Styrene 
was 96.7 percent. The test method was validated using 926 ppm styrene 
standard. Six analysis of the same standard provided average 97.7 
percent recovery. Note: These are example recoveries and do not replace 
quality assurance procedures in this method.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible. Sample 
size should be an amount necessary to adequately run the analysis.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  All waste shall be handled in accordance with Federal and 
State environmental regulations.

                    16.0  References and Publications

    16.1  40 CFR 63 Appendix A--Method 301 Test Methods Field Validation 
of Pollutant Measurement
    16.2  DSM Copolymer Test Method T-3060, dated October 19, 1995, 
entitled: Determination of Residual Styrene in Latex, Leonard, C.D., 
Vora, N.M.et al

  Method 312B--Determination of Residual Styrene in Styrene-Butadiene 
           (SBR) Rubber Latex by Capillary Gas Chromatography

                               1.0  Scope

    1.1  This method is applicable to SBR latex solutions.
    1.2  This method quantitatively determines residual styrene 
concentrations in SBR latex solutions at levels from 80 to 1200 ppm.

                        2.0  Principle of Method

    2.1  A weighed sample of a latex solution is coagulated with an 
ethyl alcohol (EtOH) solution containing a specific amount of alpha-
methyl styrene (AMS) as the internal standard. The extract of this 
coagulation is then

[[Page 574]]

injected into a gas chromatograph and separated into individual 
components. Quantification is achieved by the method of internal 
standardization.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  The definitions are included in the text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    [Reserved]

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and 
equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the safety 
problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 
of this method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and 
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Analytical balance, 160 g capacity, and 0.1 mg resolution
    6.2  Bottles, 2-oz capacity, with poly-cap screw lids
    6.3  Mechanical shaker
    6.4  Syringe, 10-ul capacity
    6.5  Gas chromatograph, Hewlett Packard model 5890A, or equivalent, 
configured with FID with a megabore jet, splitless injector packed with 
silanized glass wool.
    6.5.1  Establish the following gas chromatographic conditions, and 
allow the system to thoroughly equilibrate before use.

    Injection technique = Splitless
    Injector temperature = 225 deg C
    Oven temperature = 70 deg C (isothermal)
    Detector: temperature = 300 deg C
    range = 5
    attenuation = 0
    Carrier gas: helium = 47 ml/min
    Detector gases: hydrogen = 30 ml/min
    air = 270 ml/min
    make-up = 0 ml/min
    Analysis time: = 3.2 min at the specified carrier gas flow rate and 
column temperature.
    6.6  Gas chromatographic column, DB-1, 30 M X 0.53 ID, or 
equivalent, with a 1.5 micron film thickness.
    6.7  Data collection system, Perkin-Elmer/Nelson Series Turbochrom 4 
Series 900 Interface, or equivalent.
    6.8  Pipet, automatic dispensing, 50-ml capacity, and 2-liter 
reservoir.
    6.9  Flasks, volumetric, class A, 100-ml and 1000-ml capacity.
    6.10  Pipet, volumetric delivery, 10-ml capacity, class A.

                       7.0  Chemicals and Reagents

    CHEMICALS:
    7.1  Styrene, C8H8, 99+%, CAS 100-42-5
    7.2  Alpha methyl styrene, C9H10, 99%, CAS 98-83-9
    7.3  Ethyl alcohol, C2H5OH, denatured formula 2B, CAS 64-17-5

    REAGENTS:
    7.4  Internal Standard Stock Solution: 5.0 mg/ml AMS in ethyl 
alcohol.
    7.4.1  Into a 100-ml volumetric flask, weigh 0.50 g of AMS to the 
nearest 0.1 mg.
    7.4.2  Dilute to the mark with ethyl alcohol. This solution will 
contain 5.0 mg/ml AMS in ethyl alcohol and will be labeled the AMS STOCK 
SOLUTION.
    7.5  Internal Standard Working Solution: 2500 ug/50 ml of AMS in 
ethyl alcohol.
    7.5.1  Using a 10 ml volumetric pipet, quantitatively transfer 10.0 
ml of the AMS STOCK SOLUTION into a 1000-ml volumetric flask.
    7.5.2  Dilute to the mark with ethyl alcohol. This solution will 
contain 2500 ug/50ml of AMS in ethyl alcohol and will be labeled the AMS 
WORKING SOLUTION.
    7.5.3  Transfer the AMS WORKING SOLUTION to the automatic dispensing 
pipet reservoir.
    7.6  Styrene Stock Solution: 5.0 mg/ml styrene in ethyl alcohol.
    7.6.1  Into a 100-ml volumetric flask, weigh 0.50 g of styrene to 
the nearest 0.1 mg.
    7.6.2  Dilute to the mark with ethyl alcohol. This solution will 
contain 5.0 mg/ml styrene in ethyl alcohol and will be labeled the 
STYRENE STOCK SOLUTION.
    7.7  Styrene Working Solution: 5000 ug/10 ml of styrene in ethyl 
alcohol.
    7.7.1  Using a 10-ml volumetric pipet, quantitatively transfer 10.0 
ml of the STYRENE STOCK SOLUTION into a 100-ml volumetric flask.
    7.7.2  Dilute to the mark with ethyl alcohol. This solution will 
contain 5000 ug/10 ml of styrene in ethyl alcohol and will be labeled 
the STYRENE WORKING SOLUTION.

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage

    8.1  Label a 2-oz sample poly-cap lid with the identity, date and 
time of the sample to be obtained.
    8.2  At the sample location, open sample valve for at least 15 
seconds to ensure that the sampling pipe has been properly flushed with 
fresh sample.
    8.3  Fill the sample jar to the top (no headspace) with sample, then 
cap it tightly.
    8.4  Deliver sample to the Laboratory for testing within one hour of 
sampling.
    8.5  Laboratory testing will be done within two hours of the 
sampling time.
    8.6  No special storage conditions are required unless the storage 
time exceeds 2 hours in which case refrigeration of the sample is 
recommended.

[[Page 575]]

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  For each sample type, 12 samples of SBR latex shall be obtained 
from the process for the recovery study. Half the vials and caps shall 
be tared, labeled ``spiked'', and numbered 1 through 6. The other vials 
are labeled ``unspiked'' and need not be tared, but are also numbered 1 
through 6.
    9.2  The six vials labeled ``spiked'' shall be spiked with an amount 
of styrene to approximate 50% of the solution's expected residual 
styrene level.
    9.3  The spiked samples shall be shaken for several hours and 
allowed to cool to room temperature before analysis.
    9.4  The six samples of unspiked solution shall be coagulated and a 
mean styrene value shall be determined, along with the standard 
deviation, and the percent relative standard deviation.
    9.5  The six samples of the spiked solution shall be coagulated and 
the results of the analyses shall be determined using the following 
equations:

    Mr=Ms-Mu
    R=Mr/S

    where:
    Mu=Mean value of styrene in the unspiked sample
    Ms=Measured amount of styrene in the spiked sample
    Mr=Measured amount of the spiked compound
    S=Amount of styrene added to the spiked sample
    R=Fraction of spiked styrene recovered

    9.6  A value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.7  R is used to correct all reported results for each compound by 
dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for that 
compound for the same sample type.

                            10.0  Calibration

    10.1  Using a 10-ml volumetric pipet, quantitatively transfer 10.0 
ml of the STYRENE WORKING SOLUTION (section 7.7.2 of this method) into a 
2-oz bottle.
    10.2  Using the AMS WORKING SOLUTION equipped with the automatic 
dispensing pipet (section 7.5.3 of this method), transfer 50.0 ml of the 
internal standard solution into the 2-oz bottle.
    10.3  Cap the 2-oz bottle and swirl. This is the calibration 
standard, which contains 5000 g of styrene and 2500 g 
of AMS.
    10.4  Using the conditions prescribed (section 6.5 of this method), 
chromatograph 1 l of the calibration standard.
    10.5  Obtain the peak areas and calculate the relative response 
factor as described in the calculations section (section 12.1 of this 
method).

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Into a tared 2-oz bottle, weigh 10.0 g of latex to the nearest 
0.1 g.
    11.2  Using the AMS WORKING SOLUTION equipped with the automatic 
dispensing pipet (section 7.5.3 of this method), transfer 50.0 ml of the 
internal standard solution into the 2-oz bottle.
    11.3  Cap the bottle. Using a mechanical shaker, shake the bottle 
for at least one minute or until coagulation of the latex is complete as 
indicated by a clear solvent.
    11.4  Using the conditions prescribed (section 6.5 of this method), 
chromatograph 1 ul of the liquor.
    11.5  Obtain the peak areas and calculate the concentration of 
styrene in the latex as described in the calculations section (Section 
12.2 of this method).

                           12.0  Calculations

    12.1  Calibration:

    RF=(Wx x Ais) / 
(Wis x Ax)

    where:
    RF=the relative response factor for styrene
    Wx=the weight (ug) of styrene
    Ais=the area of AMS
    Wis=the weight (ug) of AMS
    Ax=the area of styrene
    12.2  Procedure:

    ppmstyrene=(Ax RF x Wis) / 
(Ais x Ws)

    where:
    ppmstyrene=parts per million of styrene in the latex
    Ax=the area of styrene
    RF=the response factor for styrene
    Wis=the weight (ug) of AMS
    Ais=the area of AMS
    Ws=the weight (g) of the latex sample
    12.3  Correct for recovery (R) as determined by section 9.0 of this 
method.

                             13.0  Precision

    13.1  Precision for the method was determined at the 80, 144, 590, 
and 1160 ppm levels. The standard deviations were 0.8, 1.5, 5 and 9 ppm 
respectively. The percent relative standard deviations (%RSD) were 1% or 
less at all levels. Five degrees of freedom were used for all precision 
data except at the 80 ppm level, where nine degrees of freedom were 
used. Note: These are example results and do not replace quality 
assurance procedures in this method.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible. Sample 
size should be an amount necessary to adequately run the analysis.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  Discard liquid chemical waste into the chemical waste drum.

[[Page 576]]

    15.2  Discard latex sample waste into the latex waste drum.
    15.3  Discard polymer waste into the polymer waste container.

                            16.0  References

    16.1  This method is based on Goodyear Chemical Division Test Method 
E-889.

Method 312C--Determination of Residual Styrene in SBR Latex Produced by 
                         Emulsion Polymerization

                               1.0  Scope

    1.1  This method is applicable for determining the amount of 
residual styrene in SBR latex as produced in the emulsion polymerization 
process.

                        2.0  Principle of Method

    2.1  A weighed sample of latex is coagulated in 2-propanol which 
contains alpha-methyl styrene as an Internal Standard. The extract from 
the coagulation will contain the alpha-methyl styrene as the Internal 
Standard and the residual styrene from the latex. The extract is 
analyzed by a Gas Chromatograph. Percent styrene is calculated by 
relating the area of the styrene peak to the area of the Internal 
Standard peak of known concentration.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  The definitions are included in the text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    [Reserved]

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  When using solvents, avoid contact with skin and eyes. Wear 
hand and eye protection. Wash thoroughly after use.
    5.2  Avoid overexposure to solvent vapors. Handle only in well 
ventilated areas.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Gas Chromatograph--Hewlett Packard 5890, Series II with flame 
ionization detector, or equivalent.
    Column--HP 19095F-123, 30m  x  0.53mm, or equivalent. Substrate HP 
FFAP (cross-linked) film thickness 1 micrometer. Glass injector port 
liners with silanized glass wool plug.
    Integrator--HP 3396, Series II, or equivalent.
    6.2  Wrist action shaker
    6.3  Automatic dispenser
    6.4  Automatic pipet, calibrated to deliver 5.0 0.01 
grams of latex
    6.5  Four-ounce wide-mouth bottles with foil lined lids
    6.6  Crimp cap vials, 2ml, teflon lined septa
    6.7  Disposable pipets
    6.8  Qualitative filter paper
    6.9  Cap crimper
    6.10  Analytical balance
    6.11  10ml pipette
    6.12  Two-inch funnel

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  2-Propanol (HP2C grade)
    7.2  Alpha methyl styrene (99+% purity)
    7.3  Styrene (99+% purity)
    7.4  Zero air
    7.5  Hydrogen (chromatographic grade)
    7.6  Helium
    7.7  Internal Standard preparation
    7.7.1  Weigh 5.000-5.005 grams of alpha-methyl styrene into a 100ml 
volumetric flask and bring to mark with 2-propanol to make Stock ``A'' 
Solution.

    Note: Shelf life--6 months.

    7.7.2  Pipette 10ml of Stock ``A'' Solution into a 100ml volumetric 
flask and bring to mark with 2-propanol to prepare Stock ``B'' Solution.
    7.7.3  Pipette 10ml of the Stock ``B'' solution to a 1000ml 
volumetric flask and bring to the mark with 2-propanol. This will be the 
Internal Standard Solution (0.00005 grams/ml).
    7.8  Certification of Internal Standard--Each batch of Stock ``B'' 
Solution will be certified to confirm concentration.
    7.8.1  Prepare a Standard Styrene Control Solution in 2-propanol by 
the following method:
    7.8.1.1  Weigh 5.000 .005g of styrene to a 100ml 
volumetric flask and fill to mark with 2-propanol to make Styrene Stock 
``A'' Solution.
    7.8.1.2  Pipette 10ml of Styrene Stock ``A'' Solution to a 100ml 
volumetric flask and fill to mark with 2-propanol to make Styrene Stock 
``B'' Solution.
    7.8.1.3  Pipette 10ml of Styrene Stock ``B'' soluion to a 250ml 
volumtric flask and fill to mark wtih 2-propanol to make the 
Certification Solution.
    7.8.2  Certify Alpha-Methyl Styrene Stock ``B'' Solution.
    7.8.2.1  Pipette 5ml of the Certification Solution and 25ml of the 
Alpha Methyl Styrene Internal Standard Solution to a 4-oz. bottle, cap 
and shake well.
    7.8.2.2  Analyze the resulting mixture by GC using the residual 
styrene method. (11.4-11.6 of this method)
    7.8.2.3  Calculate the weight of alpha methyl styrene present in the 
25ml aliquat of the new Alpha Methyl Styrene Standard by the following 
equation:

    Wx = Fx xWis(Ax/
Ais)

    Where
    Ax = Peak area of alpha methyl styrene
    Ais = Peak area of styrene
    Wx = Weight of alpha methyl styrene
    Wis = Weight of styrene (.00100)
    Fx = Analyzed response factor = 1


[[Page 577]]


    The Alpha Methyl Styrene Stock Solution used to prepare the Internal 
Standard Solution may be considered certified if the weight of alpha 
methyl styrene analyzed by this method is within the range of .00121g to 
.00129g.

                              8.0  Sampling

    8.1  Collect a latex sample in a capped container. Cap the bottle 
and identify the sample as to location and time.
    8.2  Deliver sample to Laboratory for testing within one hour.
    8.3  Laboratory will test within two hours.
    8.4  No special storage conditions are required.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  The laboratory is required to operate a formal quality control 
program. This consists of an initial demonstration of the capability of 
the method as well as ongoing analysis of standards, blanks, and spiked 
samples to demonstrate continued performance.
    9.1.1  When the method is first set up, a calibration is run and the 
recovery efficiency for each type of sample must be determined.
    9.1.2  If new types of samples are being analyzed, then recovery 
efficiency for each new type of sample must be determined. New type 
includes any change, such as polymer type, physical form or a 
significant change in the composition of the matrix.
    9.2  Recovery efficiency must be determined once for each sample 
type and whenever modifications are made to the method.
    9.2.1 In determining the recovery efficiency, the quadruplet 
sampling system shall be used. Six sets of samples (for a total of 24) 
shall be taken. In each quadruplet set, half of the samples (two out of 
the four) shall be spiked with styrene.
    9.2.2 Prepare the samples as described in section 8 of this method. 
To the vials labeled ``spiked'', add a known amount of styrene that is 
expected to be present in the latex.
    9.2.3 Run the spiked and unspiked samples in the normal manner. 
Record the concentrations of styrene reported for each pair of spiked 
and unspiked samples with the same vial number.
    9.2.4 For each hydrocarbon, calculate the average recovery 
efficiency (R) using the following equation:

    R=(Rn)/12
    Where: n = sample number
    Rn=(Ms-Mu)/S
    Ms=total mass of compound (styrene) measured in spiked 
sample (g)
    Mu=total mass of compound (styrene) measured in unspiked 
sample (g)
    S=theoretical mass of compound (styrene) spiked into sample 
(g)
    R=fraction of spiked compound (styrene) recovered

    9.2.5  A different R value should be obtained for each sample type. 
A value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.2.6 R  is used to correct all reported results for each compound 
by dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for that 
compound for the same sample type.

                            10.0  Calibration

    A styrene control sample will be tested weekly to confirm the FID 
response and calibration.

    10.1  Using the Styrene Certification Solution prepared in 7.8.1, 
perform test analysis as described in 7.8.2 using the equation in 
7.8.2.3 to calculate results.
    10.2  Calculate the weight of styrene in the styrene control sample 
using the following equation:

    Wsty=(Fx xAsty 
xWis)Ais

    The instrument can be considered calibrated if the weight of the 
styrene analyzed is within range of 0.00097--0.00103gms.

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Using an auto pipet, add 25ml of Internal Standard Solution to 
a 4 oz. wide-mouth bottle.
    11.2  Using a calibrated auto pipet, add 5.0  0.01g 
latex to the bottle containing the 25ml of Internal Standard Solution.
    11.3  Cap the bottle and place on the wrist action shaker. Shake the 
sample for a minimum of five minutes using the timer on the shaker. 
Remove from shaker.
    11.4  Using a disposable pipet, fill the 2ml sample vial with the 
clear alcohol extract. (If the extract is not clear, it should be 
filtered using a funnel and filter paper.) Cap and seal the vial.
    11.5  Place the sample in the autosampler tray and start the GC and 
Integrator. The sample will be injected into the GC by the auto-
injector, and the Integrator will print the results.
    11.6  Gas Chromatograph Conditions

    Oven Temp--70  deg.C
    Injector Temp--225  deg.C
    Detector Temp--275  deg.C
    Helium Pressure--500 KPA
    Column Head Pressure--70 KPA
    Makeup Gas--30 ml/min.
    Column--HP 19095F--123, 30m x 0.53mm Substrate: HP--FFAP (cross-
linked) 1 micrometer film thickness

                           12.0  Calculations

    12.1  The integrator is programmed to do the following calculation 
at the end of the analysis:

    %ResidualStyrene=(Ax XWis)/(Ais 
XWx)XFx X100

    Where:
    Ax=Peak area of styrene
    Ais=Peak area of internal standard

[[Page 578]]

    Wx=Weight of sample = 5g
    Wis=Weight of internal std. = 0.00125g
    Fx=Analyzed response factor = 1.0

    12.2  The response factor is determined by analyzing a solution of 
0.02g of styrene and 0.02g of alpha methyl styrene in 100ml of 2-
propanol. Calculate the factor by the following equation:

    Fx=(Wx xAis)/(Wis 
xAx)

    Where:
    Wx=Weight of styrene
    Ax=Peak area of styrene
    Wis=Weight of alpha methyl styrene
    Ais=Peak area of alpha methyl styrene

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  Performance must be determined for each sample type by 
following the procedures in section 9 of this method.

                         14.0  Waste Generation

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  All waste shall be handled in accordance with Federal and 
State environmental regulations.
    16.0  References
    [Reserved]

   Method 313A--Determination of Residual Hydrocarbons in Rubber Crumb

                       1.0  Scope and Application

    1.1  This method determines residual toluene and styrene in stripper 
crumb of the of the following types of rubber: polybutadiene (PBR) and 
styrene/butadiene rubber (SBR), both derived from solution 
polymerization processes that utilize toluene as the polymerization 
solvent.
    1.2  The method is applicable to a wide range of concentrations of 
toluene and styrene provided that calibration standards cover the 
desired range. It is applicable at least over the range of 0.01 to 10.0 
% residual toluene and from 0.1 to 3.0 % residual styrene. It is 
probably applicable over a wider range, but this must be verified prior 
to use.
    1.3  The method may also be applicable to other process samples as 
long as they are of a similar composition to stripper crumb. See section 
3.1 of this method for a description of stripper crumb.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    2.1  The wet crumb is placed in a sealed vial and run on a headspace 
sampler which heats the vial to a specified temperature for a specific 
time and then injects a known volume of vapor into a capillary GC. The 
concentration of each component in the vapor is proportional to the 
level of that component in the crumb sample and does not depend on water 
content of the crumb.
    2.2  Identification of each component is performed by comparing the 
retention times to those of known standards.
    2.3  Results are calculated by the external standard method since 
injections are all performed in an identical manner. The response for 
each component is compared with that obtained from dosed samples of 
crumb.
    2.4  Measured results of each compound are corrected by dividing 
each by the average recovery efficiency determined for the same compound 
in the same sample type.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  Stripper crumb refers to pieces of rubber resulting from the 
steam stripping of a toluene solution of the same polymer in a water 
slurry. The primary component of this will be polymer with lesser 
amounts of entrained water and residual toluene and other hydrocarbons. 
The amounts of hydrocarbons present must be such that the crumb is a 
solid material, generally less that 10 % of the dry rubber weight.

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  Contamination is not normally a problem since samples are 
sealed into vials immediately on sampling.
    4.2  Cross contamination in the headspace sampler should not be a 
problem if the correct sampler settings are used. This should be 
verified by running a blank sample immediately following a normal or 
high sample. Settings may be modified if necessary if this proves to be 
a problem, or a blank sample may be inserted between samples.
    4.3  Interferences may occur if volatile hydrocarbons are present 
which have retention times close to that of the components of interest. 
Since the solvent makeup of the processes involved are normally fairly 
well defined this should not be a problem. If it is found to be the 
case, switching to a different chromatographic column will probably 
resolve the situation.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  The chemicals specified in this method should all be handled 
according to standard laboratory practices as well as any special 
precautions that may be listed in the MSDS for that compound.
    5.2  Sampling of strippers or other process streams may involve high 
pressures and temperatures or may have the potential for exposure to 
chemical fumes. Only personnel who have been trained in the specific 
sampling procedures required for that process should perform this 
operation. An understanding of the process involved is necessary. Proper 
personal protective equipment should be worn. Any sampling devices 
should be inspected prior to use. A detailed sampling

[[Page 579]]

procedure which specifies exactly how to obtain the sample must be 
written and followed.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Hewlett Packard (HP) 7694 Headspace sampler, or equivalent, 
with the following conditions:

    Times (min.): GC cycle time 6.0 , vial equilibration 30.0 , 
pressurization 0.25 , loop fill 0.25, loop equilibration 0.05 , inject 
0.25
    Temperatures (deg C): oven 70, loop 80, transfer line 90
    Pressurization gas: He @ 16 psi

    6.2  HP 5890 Series II capillary gas chromatograph, or equivalent, 
with the following conditions:

    Column: Supelco SPB-1, or equivalent, 15m  x  .25mm  x  .25 
film
    Carrier: He @ 6 psi
    Run time: 4 minutes
    Oven: 70 deg C isothermal
    Injector: 200 deg C split ratio 50:1
    Detector: FID @ 220 deg C

    6.3  HP Chemstation consisting of computer, printer and Chemstation 
software, or an equivalent chromatographic data system.
    6.4  20 ml headspace vials with caps and septa.
    6.5  Headspace vial crimper.
    6.6  Microliter pipetting syringes.
    6.7  Drying oven at 100 deg C vented into cold trap or other means 
of trapping hydrocarbons released.
    6.8  Laboratory shaker or tumbler suitable for the headspace vials.
    6.9  Personal protective equipment required for sampling the process 
such as rubber gloves and face and eye protection.

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Toluene, 99.9+% purity, HPLC grade.
    7.2  Styrene, 99.9+% purity, HPLC grade.
    7.3  Dry rubber of same type as the stripper crumb samples.

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage

    8.1  Collect a sample of crumb in a manner appropriate for the 
process equipment being sampled.
    8.1.1  If conditions permit, this may be done by passing a stream of 
the crumb slurry through a strainer, thus separating the crumb from the 
water. Allow the water to drain freely, do not attempt to squeeze any 
water from the crumb. Results will not depend on the exact water content 
of the samples. Immediately place several pieces of crumb directly into 
a headspace vial. This should be done with rubber gloves to protect the 
hands from both the heat and from contact with residual hydrocarbons. 
The vial should be between \1/4\ and \1/3\ full. Results do not depend 
on sample size as long as there is sufficient sample to reach an 
equilibrium vapor pressure in the headspace of the vial. Cap and seal 
the vial. Prepare each sample at least in duplicate. This is to minimize 
the effect of the variation that naturally occurs in the composition of 
non homogeneous crumb. The free water is not analyzed by this method and 
should be disposed of appropriately along with any unused rubber crumb.
    8.1.2  Alternatively the process can be sampled in a specially 
constructed sealed bomb which can then be transported to the laboratory. 
The bomb is then cooled to ambient temperature by applying a stream of 
running water. The bomb can then be opened and the crumb separated from 
the water and the vials filled as described in section 8.1.1 of this 
method. The bomb may be stored up to 8 hours prior to transferring the 
crumb into vials.
    8.2  The sealed headspace vials may be run immediately or may be 
stored up to 72 hours prior to running. It is possible that even longer 
storage times may be acceptable, but this must be verified for the 
particular type of sample being analyzed (see section 9.2.3 of this 
method). The main concern here is that some types of rubber eventually 
may flow, thus compacting the crumb so that the surface area is reduced. 
This may have some effect on the headspace equilibration.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  The laboratory is required to operate a formal quality control 
program. This consists of an initial demonstration of the capability of 
the method as well as ongoing analysis of standards, blanks and spiked 
samples to demonstrate continued performance.
    9.1.1  When the method is first set up a calibration is run 
(described in section 10 of this method) and an initial demonstration of 
method capability is performed (described in section 9.2 of this 
method). Also recovery efficiency for each type of sample must be 
determined (see section 9.4 of this method).
    9.1.2  It is permissible to modify this method in order to improve 
separations or make other improvements, provided that all performance 
specifications are met. Each time a modification to the method is made 
it is necessary to repeat the calibration (section 10 of this method), 
the demonstration of method performance (section 9.2 of this method) and 
the recovery efficiency for each type of sample (section 9.4 of this 
method).
    9.1.3  Ongoing performance should be monitored by running a spiked 
rubber standard. If this test fails to demonstrate that the analysis is 
in control, then corrective action must be taken. This method is 
described in section 9.3 of this method.
    9.1.4  If new types of samples are being analyzed then recovery 
efficiency for each new type of sample must be determined. New type 
includes any change, such as polymer

[[Page 580]]

type, physical form or a significant change in the composition of the 
matrix.
    9.2  Initial demonstration of method capability to establish the 
accuracy and precision of the method. This is to be run following the 
calibration described in section 10 of this method.
    9.2.1  Prepare a series of identical spiked rubber standards as 
described in section 9.3 of this method. A sufficient number to 
determine statistical information on the test should be run. Ten may be 
a suitable number, depending on the quality control methodology used at 
the laboratory running the tests. These are run in the same manner as 
unknown samples (see section 11 of this method).
    9.2.2  Determine mean and standard deviation for the results. Use 
these to determine the capability of the method and to calculate 
suitable control limits for the ongoing performance check which will 
utilize the same standards.
    9.2.3  Prepare several additional spiked rubber standards and run 2 
each day to determine the suitability of storage of the samples for 24, 
48 and 72 hours or longer if longer storage times are desired.
    9.3   A spiked rubber standard should be run on a regular basis to 
verify system performance. This would probably be done daily if samples 
are run daily. This is prepared in the same manner as the calibration 
standards (section 10.1 of this method), except that only one 
concentration of toluene and styrene is prepared. Choose concentrations 
of toluene and styrene that fall in the middle of the range expected in 
the stripper crumb and then do not change these unless there is a major 
change in the composition of the unknowns. If it becomes necessary to 
change the composition of this standard the initial performance 
demonstration must be repeated with the new standard (section 9.2 of 
this method).
    9.3.1  Each day prepare one spiked rubber standard to be run the 
following day. The dry rubber may be prepared in bulk and stored for any 
length of time consistent with the shelf life of the product. The 
addition of water and hydrocarbons must be performed daily and all the 
steps described under section 10.1 of this method must be followed.
    9.3.2  Run the spiked rubber standard prepared the previous day. 
Record the results and plot on an appropriate control chart or other 
means of determining statistical control.
    9.3.3  If the results for the standard indicate that the test is out 
of control then corrective action must be taken. This may include a 
check on procedures, instrument settings, maintenance or recalibration. 
Samples may be stored (see section 8.2 of this method) until compliance 
is demonstrated.
    9.4  Recovery efficiency must be determined once for each sample 
type and whenever modifications are made to the method.
    9.4.1  For each sample type collect 12 samples from the process 
(section 8.1 of this method). This should be done when the process is 
operating in a normal manner and residual hydrocarbon levels are in the 
normal range. Half the vials and caps should be tared, labeled 
``spiked'' and numbered 1 through 6. The other vials are labeled 
``unspiked'' and need not be tared but are also numbered 1 through 6. 
Immediately on sampling, the vials should be capped to prevent loss of 
volatiles. Allow all the samples to cool completely to ambient 
temperature. Reweigh each of the vials labeled ``spiked'' to determine 
the weight of wet crumb inside.
    9.4.2  The dry weight of rubber present in the wet crumb is 
estimated by multiplying the weight of wet crumb by the fraction of 
nonvolatiles typical for the sample. If this is not known, an additional 
quantity of crumb may be sampled, weighed, dried in an oven and 
reweighed to determine the fraction of volatiles and nonvolatiles prior 
to starting this procedure.
    9.4.3  To the vials labeled ``spiked'' add an amount of a mixture of 
toluene and styrene that is between 40 and 60 % of the amount expected 
in the crumb. This is done by removing the cap, adding the mixture by 
syringe, touching the tip of the needle to the sample in order to remove 
the drop and then immediately recapping the vials. The mixture is not 
added through the septum, because a punctured septum may leak and vent 
vapors as the vial is heated. The weights of toluene and styrene added 
may be calculated from the volumes of the mixture added, its composition 
and density, or may be determined by the weight of the vials and caps 
prior to and after addition. The exact dry weight of rubber present and 
the concentration of residual toluene and styrene are not known at this 
time so an exact calculation of the concentration of hydrocarbons is not 
possible until the test is completed.
    9.4.4  Place all the vials onto a shaker or tumbler for 24 
 2 hours. This is essential in order for the hydrocarbons to 
be evenly distributed and completely absorbed into the rubber. If this 
is not followed the toluene and styrene will be mostly at the surface of 
the rubber and high results will be obtained.
    9.4.5  Remove the vials from the shaker and tap them so that all the 
crumb settles to the bottom of the vials. Allow them to stand for 1 hour 
prior to analysis to allow any liquid to drain fully to the bottom.
    9.4.6  Run the spiked and unspiked samples in the normal manner. 
Record the concentrations of toluene and styrene reported for each pair 
of spiked and unspiked samples with the same vial number.
    9.4.7  Open each of the vials labeled ``spiked'', remove all the 
rubber crumb and

[[Page 581]]

place it into a tarred drying pan. Place in a 100 deg C oven for two 
hours, cool and reweigh. Subtract the weight of the tare to give the dry 
weight of rubber in each spiked vial. Calculate the concentration of 
toluene and styrene spiked into each vial as percent of dry rubber 
weight. This will be slightly different for each vial since the weights 
of dry rubber will be different.
    9.4.8  For each hydrocarbon calculate the average recovery 
efficiency (R) using the following equations:

    R=R__(Pn)/6 (average of the 6 individual 
Rn values)

    Where:
    Rn=(Cns--Cnu) / Sn

    Where:
    n=vial number
    Cns=concentration of compound measured in spiked sample number n.
    Cnu=concentration of compound measured in unspiked sample number n.
    Sn=theoretical concentration of compound spiked into sample n 
calculated in step 9.4.7

    9.4.9  A different R value should be obtained for each compound 
(styrene and toluene) and for each sample type.
    9.4.10  A value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.4.11  R is used to correct all reported results for each compound 
by dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for that 
compound for the same sample type (see section 12.2 of this method.)

                            10.0  Calibration

    10.1  Calibration standards are prepared by dosing known amounts of 
the hydrocarbons of interest into vials containing known amounts of 
rubber and water.
    10.1.1  Cut a sufficient quantity of dry rubber of the same type as 
will be analyzed into pieces about the same size as that of the crumb. 
Place these in a single layer on a piece of aluminum foil or other 
suitable surface and place into a forced air oven at 100 deg. C for four 
hours. This is to remove any residual hydrocarbons that may be present. 
This step may be performed in advance.
    10.1.2  Into each of a series of vials add 3.0 g of the dry rubber.
    10.1.3  Into each vial add 1.0 ml distilled water or an amount that 
is close to the amount that will be present in the unknowns. The exact 
amount of water present does not have much effect on the analysis, but 
it is necessary to have a saturated environment. The water will also aid 
in the uniform distribution of the spiked hydrocarbons over the surface 
of the rubber after the vials are placed on the shaker (in step 10.1.5 
of this method).
    10.1.4  Into each vial add varying amounts of toluene and styrene by 
microliter syringe and cap the vials immediately to prevent loss. The 
tip of the needle should be carefully touched to the rubber in order to 
transfer the last drop to the rubber. Toluene and styrene may first be 
mixed together in suitable proportions and added together if desired. 
The weights of toluene and styrene added may be calculated from the 
volumes of the mixture added, its composition and density, or may be 
determined by the weight of the vials and caps prior to and after 
addition. Concentrations of added hydrocarbons are calculated as percent 
of the dry rubber weight. At least 5 standards should be prepared with 
the amounts of hydrocarbons added being calculated to cover the entire 
range possible in the unknowns. Retain two samples with no added 
hydrocarbons as blanks.
    10.1.5  Place all the vials onto a shaker or tumbler for 24 
 2 hours. This is essential in order for the hydrocarbons to 
be evenly distributed and completely absorbed into the rubber. If this 
is not followed the toluene and styrene will be mostly at the surface of 
the rubber and high results will be obtained.
    10.1.6  Remove the vials from the shaker and tap them so that all 
the crumb settles to the bottom of the vials. Allow them to stand for 1 
hour prior to analysis to allow any liquid to drain fully to the bottom.
    10.2  Run the standards and blanks in the same manner as described 
for unknowns (section 11 of this method), starting with a blank, then in 
order of increasing hydrocarbon content and ending with the other blank.
    10.3  Verify that the blanks are sufficiently free from toluene and 
styrene or any interfering hydrocarbons.
    10.3.1  It is possible that trace levels may be present even in dry 
product. If levels are high enough that they will interfere with the 
calibration then the drying procedure in section 10.1.1 of this method 
should be reviewed and modified as needed to ensure that suitable 
standards can be prepared.
    10.3.2  It is possible that the final blank is contaminated by the 
previous standard. If this is the case review and modify the sampler 
parameters as needed to eliminate this problem. If necessary it is 
possible to run blank samples between regular samples in order to reduce 
this problem, though it should not be necessary if the sampler is 
properly set up.
    10.4  Enter the amounts of toluene and styrene added to each of the 
samples (as calculated in section 10.1.4 of this method) into the 
calibration table and perform a calibration utilizing the external 
standard method of analysis.
    10.5  At low concentrations the calibration should be close to 
linear. If a wide range of levels are to be determined it may be 
desirable to apply a nonlinear calibration to get the best fit.

[[Page 582]]

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Place the vials in the tray of the headspace sampler. Enter 
the starting and ending positions through the console of the sampler. 
For unknown samples each is run in duplicate to minimize the effect of 
variations in crumb composition. If excessive variation is noted it may 
be desirable to run more than two of each sample.
    11.2  Make sure the correct method is loaded on the Chemstation. 
Turn on the gas flows and light the FID flame.
    11.3  Start the sequence on the Chemstation. Press the START button 
on the headspace unit. The samples will be automatically injected after 
equilibrating for 30 minutes in the oven. As each sample is completed 
the Chemstation will calculate and print out the results as percent 
toluene and styrene in the crumb based on the dry weight of rubber.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations

    12.1  For each set of duplicate samples calculate the average of the 
measured concentration of toluene and styrene. If more than two 
replicates of each sample are run calculate the average over all 
replicates.
    12.2  For each sample correct the measured amounts of toluene and 
styrene using the following equation:

    Corrected Result = Cm/R

    Where:
    Cm = Average measured concentration for that compound.
    R = Recovery efficiency for that compound in the same sample type 
(see section 9.4 of this method)

    12.3  Report the recovery efficiency (R) and the corrected results 
of toluene and styrene for each sample.

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  This method can be very sensitive and reproducible. The actual 
performance depends largely on the exact nature of the samples being 
analyzed. Actual performance must be determined by each laboratory for 
each sample type.
    13.2  The main source of variation is the actual variation in the 
composition of non homogeneous crumb in a stripping system and the small 
sample sizes employed here. It therefore is the responsibility of each 
laboratory to determine the optimum number of replicates of each sample 
required to obtain accurate results.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    14.1  Samples should be kept sealed when possible in order to 
prevent evaporation of hydrocarbons.
    14.2  When drying of samples is required it should be done in an 
oven which vents into a suitable device that can trap the hydrocarbons 
released.
    14.3  Dispose of samples as described in section 15.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  Excess stripper crumb and water as well as the contents of the 
used sample vials should be properly disposed of in accordance with 
local and federal regulations.
    15.2  Preferably this will be accomplished by having a system of 
returning unused and spent samples to the process.

                            16.0  References

    16.1  ``HP 7694 Headspace Sampler--Operating and Service Manual'', 
Hewlett-Packard Company, publication number G1290-90310, June 1993.

   Method 313B--The Determination of Residual Hydrocarbon in Solution 
                Polymers by Capillary Gas Chromatography

                               1.0  Scope

    1.1  This method is applicable to solution polymerized polybutadiene 
(PBD).
    1.2  This method quantitatively determines n-hexane in wet crumb 
polymer at levels from 0.08 to 0.15% by weight.
    1.3  This method may be extended to the determination of other 
hydrocarbons in solution produced polymers with proper experimentation 
and documentation.

                        2.0  Principle of Method

    2.1  A weighed sample of polymer is dissolved in chloroform and the 
cement is coagulated with an isopropyl alcohol solution containing a 
specific amount of alpha-methyl styrene (AMS) as the internal standard. 
The extract of this coagulation is then injected into a gas 
chromatograph and separated into individual components. Quantification 
is achieved by the method of internal standardization.

                            3.0  Definitions

    3.1  The definitions are included in the text as needed.

                           4.0  Interferences

    [Reserved]

                               5.0 Safety

    5.1  This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and 
equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the safety 
problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 
of this method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and 
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

[[Page 583]]

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    6.1  Analytical balance, 160 g capacity, 0.1 mg resolution
    6.2  Bottles, 2-oz capacity with poly-cap screw lids
    6.3  Mechanical shaker
    6.4  Syringe, 10-ul capacity
    6.5  Syringe, 2.5-ml capacity, with 22 gauge 1.25 inch needle, PP/PE 
material, disposable
    6.6  Gas chromatograph, Hewlett-Packard model 5890, or equivalent, 
configured with FID, split injector packed with silanized glass wool.
    6.6.1  Establish the following gas chromatographic conditions, and 
allow the system to thoroughly equilibrate before use.
    6.6.2  Injector parameters:

    Injection technique=Split
    Injector split flow=86 ml/min
    Injector temperature=225 deg C

    6.6.3  Oven temperature program:
    Initial temperature=40 deg C
    Initial time=6 min
    Program rate=10 deg C/min
    Upper limit temperature=175 deg C
    Upper limit interval=10 min

    6.6.4  Detector parameters:
    Detector temperature=300 deg C
    Hydrogen flow=30 ml/min
    Air flow=350 ml/min
    Nitrogen make up=26 ml/min

    6.7  Gas chromatographic columns: SE-54 (5%-phenyl) (1%-vinyl)-
methylpolysiloxane, 15 M x 0.53 mm ID with a 1.2 micron film thickness, 
and a Carbowax 20M (polyethylene glycol), 15 M x 0.53 mm ID with a 1.2 
micron film thickness.
    6.7.1  Column assembly: using a 0.53 mm ID butt connector union, 
join the 15 M x 0.53 mm SE-54 column to the 15 M x 0.53 mm Carbowax 20M. 
The SE-54 column will be inserted into the injector and the Carbowax 20M 
inserted into the detector after they have been joined.
    6.7.2  Column parameters:

    Helium flow=2.8 ml/min
    Helium headpressure=2 psig

    6.8  Centrifuge
    6.9  Data collection system, Hewlett-Packard Model 3396, or 
equivalent
    6.10  Pipet, 25-ml capacity, automatic dispensing, and 2 liter 
reservoir
    6.11  Pipet, 2-ml capacity, volumetric delivery, class A
    6.12  Flasks, 100 and 1000-ml capacity, volumetric, class A
    6.13  Vial, serum, 50-ml capacity, red rubber septa and crimp ring 
seals
    6.14  Sample collection basket fabricated out of wire mesh to allow 
for drainage

                       7.0  Chemicals and Reagents

    CHEMICALS:
    7.1  alpha-Methyl Styrene, C9H10, 99+% purity, CAS 98-83-9
    7.2  n-Hexane, C6H14, 99+% purity, CAS 110-54-3
    7.3  Isopropyl alcohol, C3H8O 99.5+% purity, reagent grade, CAS 67-
63-0
    7.4  Chloroform, CHCl3, 99% min., CAS 67-66-3
    REAGENTS:
    7.5  Internal Standard Stock Solution: 10 mg/25 ml AMS in isopropyl 
alcohol.
    7.5.1  Into a 25-ml beaker, weigh 0.4 g of AMS to the nearest 0.1 
mg.
    7.5.2  Quantitatively transfer this AMS into a 1-L volumetric flask. 
Dilute to the mark with isopropyl alcohol.
    7.5.3  Transfer this solution to the automatic dispensing pipet 
reservoir. This will be labeled the AMS STOCK SOLUTION.
    7.6  n-Hexane Stock Solution: 13mg/2ml hexane in isopropyl alcohol.
    7.6.1  Into a 100-ml volumetric flask, weigh 0.65 g of n-hexane to 
the nearest 0.1 mg.
    7.6.2  Dilute to the mark with isopropyl alcohol. This solution will 
be labeled the n-HEXANE STOCK SOLUTION.

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage

    8.1  A sampling device similar to Figure 1 is used to collect a non-
vented crumb rubber sample at a location that is after the stripping 
operation but before the sample is exposed to the atmosphere.
    8.2  The crumb rubber is allowed to cool before opening the sampling 
device and removing the sample.
    8.3  The sampling device is opened and the crumb rubber sample is 
collected in the sampling basket.
    8.4  One pound of crumb rubber sample is placed into a polyethylene 
bag. The bag is labeled with the time, date and sample location.
    8.5  The sample should be delivered to the laboratory for testing 
within one hour of sampling.
    8.6  Laboratory testing will be done within 3 hours of the sampling 
time.
    8.7  No special storage conditions are required unless the storage 
time exceeds 3 hours in which case refrigeration of the samples is 
recommended.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  For each sample type, 12 samples shall be obtained from the 
process for the recovery study. Half of the vials and caps shall be 
tared, labeled ``spiked'', and numbered 1 through 6. The other vials 
shall be labeled ``unspiked'' and need not be tared, but are also 
numbered 1 through 6.
    9.2  Determine the % moisture content of the crumb sample. After 
determining the % moisture content, the correction factor for

[[Page 584]]

calculating the dry crumb weight can be determined by using the equation 
in section 12.2 of this method.
    9.3  Run the spiked and unspiked samples in the normal manner. 
Record the concentrations of the n-hexane content of the mixed hexane 
reported for each pair of spiked and unspiked samples.
    9.4  For the recovery study, each sample of crumb shall be dissolved 
in chloroform containing a known amount of mixed hexane solvent.
    9.5  For each hydrocarbon, calculate the recovery efficiency (R) 
using the following equations:

    Mr=Ms-Mu
    R=Mr/S

    Where:
    Mu=Measured amount of compound in the unspiked sample
    Ms=Measured amount of compound in the spiked sample
    Mr=Measured amount of the spiked compound
    S=Amount of compound added to the spiked sample
    R=Fraction of spiked compound recovered

    9.6  Normally a value of R between 0.70 and 1.30 is acceptable.
    9.7  R is used to correct all reported results for each compound by 
dividing the measured results of each compound by the R for that 
compound for the same sample type.

                            10.0  Calibration

    10.1  Using the AMS STOCK SOLUTION equipped with the automatic 
dispensing pipet (7.5.3 of this method), transfer 25.0 ml of the 
internal standard solution into an uncapped 50-ml serum vial.
    10.2  Using a 2.0 ml volumetric pipet, quantitatively transfer 2.0 
ml of the n-HEXANE STOCK SOLUTION (7.6.2 of this method) into the 50-ml 
serum vial and cap. This solution will be labeled the CALIBRATION 
SOLUTION.
    10.3  Using the conditions prescribed (6.6 of this method), inject 1 
l of the supernate.
    10.4  Obtain the peak areas and calculate the response factor as 
described in the calculations section (12.1 of this method).

                             11.0  Procedure

    11.1  Determination of Dry Polymer Weight
    11.1.1  Remove wet crumb from the polyethylene bag and place on 
paper towels to absorb excess surface moisture.
    11.1.2  Cut small slices or cubes from the center of the crumb 
sample to improve sample uniformity and further eliminate surface 
moisture.
    11.1.3  A suitable gravimetric measurement should be made on a 
sample of this wet crumb to determine the correction factor needed to 
calculate the dry polymer weight.
    11.2  Determination of n-Hexane in Wet Crumb
    11.2.1  Remove wet crumb from the polyethylene bag and place on 
paper towels to absorb excess surface moisture.
    11.2.2  Cut small slices or cubes from the center of the crumb 
sample to improve sample uniformity and further eliminate surface 
moisture.
    11.2.3  Into a tared 2 oz bottle, weigh 1.5 g of wet polymer to the 
nearest 0.1 mg.
    11.2.4  Add 25 ml of chloroform to the 2 oz bottle and cap.
    11.2.5   Using a mechanical shaker, shake the bottle until the 
polymer dissolves.
    11.2.6  Using the autodispensing pipet, add 25.0 ml of the AMS STOCK 
SOLUTION (7.5.3 of this method) to the dissolved polymer solution and 
cap.
    11.2.7  Using a mechanical shaker, shake the bottle for 10 minutes 
to coagulate the dissolved polymer.
    11.2.8  Centrifuge the sample for 3 minutes at 2000 rpm.
    11.2.9  Using the conditions prescribed (6.6 of this method), 
chromatograph 1 l of the supernate.
    11.2.10  Obtain the peak areas and calculate the concentration of 
the component of interest as described in the calculations (12.2 of this 
method).

                           12.0  Calculations

    12.1  Calibration:

    RFx=(Wx  x  Ais) / (Wis 
x  Ax)

    Where:
    RFx=the relative response factor for n-hexane
    Wx=the weight (g) of n-hexane in the CALIBRATION
    SOLUTION
    Ais=the area of AMS
    Wis=the weight (g) of AMS in the CALIBRATION SOLUTION
    Ax=the area of n-hexane

    12.2  Procedure:
    12.2.1  Correction Factor for calculating dry crumb weight.

    F=1--(% moisture / 100)

    Where:
    F=Correction factor for calculating dry crumb weight
    % moisture determined by appropriate method

    12.2.2  Moisture adjustment for chromatographic determination.

    Ws=F  x  Wc

    Where:
    Ws=the weight (g) of the dry polymer corrected for 
moisture
    F=Correction factor for calculating dry crumb weight
    Wc=the weight (g) of the wet crumb in section 9.6


[[Page 585]]


    12.2.3  Concentration (ppm) of hexane in the wet crumb.

    ppmx=(Ax * RFx * Wis * 
10000) / (Ais * Ws)

    Where:
    ppmx=parts per million of n-hexane in the polymer
    Ax=the area of n-hexane
    RFx=the relative response factor for n-hexane
    Wis=the weight (g) of AMS in the sample solution
    Ais=the area of AMS
    Ws=the weight (g) of the dry polymer corrected for 
moisture

                        13.0  Method Performance

    13.1  Precision for the method was determined at the 0.08% level.

    The standard deviation was 0.01 and the percent relative standard 
deviation (RSD) was 16.3 % with five degrees of freedom.

                         14.0  Waste Generation

    14.1  Waste generation should be minimized where possible.

                         15.0  Waste Management

    15.1  Discard liquid chemical waste into the chemical waste drum.
    15.2  Discard polymer waste into the polymer waste container.

                            16.0  References

    16.1  This method is based on Goodyear Chemical Division Test Method 
E-964.

    Method 315--Determination of Particulate and Methylene Chloride 
  Extractable Matter (MCEM) From Selected Sources at Primary Aluminum 
                          Production Facilities

    Note: This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., 
equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) 
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference 
from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, 
persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least 
the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and 
Method 5 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.

                       1.0  Scope and Application.

    1.1  Analytes. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned. 
Methylene chloride extractable matter (MCEM). No CAS number assigned.
    1.2  Applicability. This method is applicable for the simultaneous 
determination of PM and MCEM when specified in an applicable regulation. 
This method was developed by consensus with the Aluminum Association and 
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and has limited precision 
estimates for MCEM; it should have similar precision to Method 5 for PM 
in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A since the procedures are similar for PM.
    1.3  Data quality objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this 
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant 
sampling methods.

                         2.0  Summary of Method.

    Particulate matter and MCEM are withdrawn isokinetically from the 
source. PM is collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a 
temperature in the range of l20  14  deg.C (248 
25  deg.F) or such other temperature as specified by an 
applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for 
a particular application. The PM mass, which includes any material that 
condenses on the probe and is subsequently removed in an acetone rinse 
or on the filter at or above the filtration temperature, is determined 
gravimetrically after removal of uncombined water. MCEM is then 
determined by adding a methylene chloride rinse of the probe and filter 
holder, extracting the condensable hydrocarbons collected in the 
impinger water, adding an acetone rinse followed by a methylene chloride 
rinse of the sampling train components after the filter and before the 
silica gel impinger, and determining residue gravimetrically after 
evaporating the solvents.

                      3.0  Definitions. [Reserved]

                     4.0  Interferences. [Reserved]

                              5.0  Safety.

    This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and 
equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the safety 
problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 
of this method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and 
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to 
performing this test method.

                      6.0  Equipment and Supplies.

    Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not 
constitute endorsement by the EPA.

    6.1  Sample collection. The following items are required for sample 
collection:
    6.1.1  Sampling train. A schematic of the sampling train used in 
this method is shown in Figure 5-1, Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A. Complete construction details are given in APTD-0581 (Reference 2 in 
section 17.0 of this method); commercial models of this train are also 
available. For changes from APTD-0581 and for allowable modifications of 
the train shown in Figure 5-1, Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, see 
the following subsections.


[[Page 586]]


    Note: The operating and maintenance procedures for the sampling 
train are described in APTD-0576 (Reference 3 in section 17.0 of this 
method). Since correct usage is important in obtaining valid results, 
all users should read APTD-0576 and adopt the operating and maintenance 
procedures outlined in it, unless otherwise specified herein. The use of 
grease for sealing sampling train components is not recommended because 
many greases are soluble in methylene chloride. The sampling train 
consists of the following components:

    6.1.1.1  Probe nozzle. Glass or glass lined with sharp, tapered 
leading edge. The angle of taper shall be 30 deg., and the 
taper shall be on the outside to preserve a constant internal diameter. 
The probe nozzle shall be of the button-hook or elbow design, unless 
otherwise specified by the Administrator. Other materials of 
construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. 
A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling should be 
available. Typical nozzle sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm (\1/8\ to \1/
2\ in.) inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm (\1/16\ in.). 
Larger nozzle sizes are also available if higher volume sampling trains 
are used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated according to the procedures 
outlined in section 10.0 of this method.
    6.1.1.2  Probe liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing with a 
heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature at the 
exit end during sampling of 12014 deg.C 
(24825 deg.F), or such other temperature as specified by an 
applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for 
a particular application. Because the actual temperature at the outlet 
of the probe is not usually monitored during sampling, probes 
constructed according to APTD-0581 and using the calibration curves of 
APTD-0576 (or calibrated according to the procedure outlined in APTD-
0576) will be considered acceptable. Either borosilicate or quartz glass 
probe liners may be used for stack temperatures up to about 480 deg.C 
(900 deg.F); quartz liners shall be used for temperatures between 480 
and 900 deg.C (900 and 1,650 deg.F). Both types of liners may be used at 
higher temperatures than specified for short periods of time, subject to 
the approval of the Administrator. The softening temperature for 
borosilicate glass is 820 deg.C (1,500 deg.F) and for quartz glass it is 
1,500 deg.C (2,700 deg.F).
    6.1.1.3  Pitot tube. Type S, as described in section 6.1 of Method 
2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, or other device approved by the 
Administrator. The pitot tube shall be attached to the probe (as shown 
in Figure 5-1 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A) to allow constant 
monitoring of the stack gas velocity. The impact (high pressure) opening 
plane of the pitot tube shall be even with or above the nozzle entry 
plane (see Method 2, Figure 2-6b, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A) during 
sampling. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient, 
determined as outlined in section 10.0 of Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A.
    6.1.1.4  Differential pressure gauge. Inclined manometer or 
equivalent device (two), as described in section 6.2 of Method 2, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A. One manometer shall be used for velocity head (Dp) 
readings, and the other, for orifice differential pressure readings.
    6.1.1.5  Filter holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass frit filter 
support and a silicone rubber gasket. The holder design shall provide a 
positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The 
holder shall be attached immediately at the outlet of the probe (or 
cyclone, if used).
    6.1.1.6  Filter heating system. Any heating system capable of 
maintaining a temperature around the filter holder of 
12014 deg.C (24825 deg.F) during sampling, or 
such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the 
standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application. 
Alternatively, the tester may opt to operate the equipment at a 
temperature lower than that specified. A temperature gauge capable of 
measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C (5.4 deg.F) shall be installed 
so that the temperature around the filter holder can be regulated and 
monitored during sampling. Heating systems other than the one shown in 
APTD-0581 may be used.
    6.1.1.7  Temperature sensor. A temperature sensor capable of 
measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C (5.4 deg.F) shall be 
installed so that the sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in direct 
contact with the sample gas, and the temperature around the filter 
holder can be regulated and monitored during sampling.
    6.1.1.8  Condenser. The following system shall be used to determine 
the stack gas moisture content: four glass impingers connected in series 
with leak-free ground glass fittings. The first, third, and fourth 
impingers shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing 
the tip with a 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) ID glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm 
(1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. The second impinger shall be of 
the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. The first and second 
impingers shall contain known quantities of water (section 8.3.1 of this 
method), the third shall be empty, and the fourth shall contain a known 
weight of silica gel or equivalent desiccant. A temperature sensor 
capable of measuring temperature to within 1 deg.C (2 deg.F) shall be 
placed at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring.
    6.1.1.9  Metering system. Vacuum gauge, leak-free pump, temperature 
sensors capable of measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C (5.4 deg.F), 
dry gas meter (DGM) capable of measuring volume to within 2 percent, and

[[Page 587]]

related equipment, as shown in Figure 5-1 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A. Other metering systems capable of maintaining sampling rates 
within 10 percent of isokinetic and of determining sample volumes to 
within 2 percent may be used, subject to the approval of the 
Administrator. When the metering system is used in conjunction with a 
pitot tube, the system shall allow periodic checks of isokinetic rates.
    6.1.1.10  Sampling trains using metering systems designed for higher 
flow rates than that described in APTD-0581 or APTD-0576 may be used 
provided that the specifications of this method are met.
    6.1.2  Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of 
measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg.

    Note: The barometric reading may be obtained from a nearby National 
Weather Service station. In this case, the station value (which is the 
absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested and an adjustment for 
elevation differences between the weather station and sampling point 
shall be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) 
elevation increase or plus 2.5 mm (0.1 in) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) 
elevation decrease.

    6.1.3  Gas density determination equipment. Temperature sensor and 
pressure gauge, as described in sections 6.3 and 6.4 of Method 2, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A, and gas analyzer, if necessary, as described in 
Method 3, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. The temperature sensor shall, 
preferably, be permanently attached to the pitot tube or sampling probe 
in a fixed configuration, such that the tip of the sensor extends beyond 
the leading edge of the probe sheath and does not touch any metal. 
Alternatively, the sensor may be attached just prior to use in the 
field. Note, however, that if the temperature sensor is attached in the 
field, the sensor must be placed in an interference-free arrangement 
with respect to the Type S pitot tube openings (see Method 2, Figure 2-
4, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A). As a second alternative, if a difference 
of not more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is to be 
introduced, the temperature sensor need not be attached to the probe or 
pitot tube. (This alternative is subject to the approval of the 
Administrator.)
    6.2  Sample recovery. The following items are required for sample 
recovery:
    6.2.1  Probe-liner and probe-nozzle brushes. Nylon or 
Teflon bristle brushes with stainless steel wire handles. 
The probe brush shall have extensions (at least as long as the probe) 
constructed of stainless steel, nylon, Teflon, or similarly 
inert material. The brushes shall be properly sized and shaped to brush 
out the probe liner and nozzle.
    6.2.2  Wash bottles. Glass wash bottles are recommended. 
Polyethylene or tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) wash bottles may be used, but 
they may introduce a positive bias due to contamination from the bottle. 
It is recommended that acetone not be stored in polyethylene or TFE 
bottles for longer than a month.
    6.2.3  Glass sample storage containers. Chemically resistant, 
borosilicate glass bottles, for acetone and methylene chloride washes 
and impinger water, 500 ml or 1,000 ml. Screw-cap liners shall either be 
rubber-backed Teflon or shall be constructed so as to be 
leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by acetone or methylene 
chloride. (Narrow-mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone 
to leakage.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles may be used.
    6.2.4  Petri dishes. For filter samples, glass, unless otherwise 
specified by the Administrator.
    6.2.5  Graduated cylinder and/or balance. To measure condensed 
water, acetone wash and methylene chloride wash used during field 
recovery of the samples, to within 1 ml or 1 g. Graduated cylinders 
shall have subdivisions no greater than 2 ml. Most laboratory balances 
are capable of weighing to the nearest 0.5 g or less. Any such balance 
is suitable for use here and in section 6.3.4 of this method.
    6.2.6  Plastic storage containers. Air-tight containers to store 
silica gel.
    6.2.7  Funnel and rubber policeman. To aid in transfer of silica gel 
to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
    6.2.8  Funnel. Glass or polyethylene, to aid in sample recovery.
    6.3  Sample analysis. The following equipment is required for sample 
analysis:
    6.3.1  Glass or Teflon weighing dishes.
    6.3.2  Desiccator. It is recommended that fresh desiccant be used to 
minimize the chance for positive bias due to absorption of organic 
material during drying.
    6.3.3  Analytical balance. To measure to within 0.l mg.
    6.3.4  Balance. To measure to within 0.5 g.
    6.3.5   Beakers. 250 ml.
    6.3.6  Hygrometer. To measure the relative humidity of the 
laboratory environment.
    6.3.7  Temperature sensor. To measure the temperature of the 
laboratory environment.
    6.3.8  Buchner fritted funnel. 30 ml size, fine (50 micron)-porosity 
fritted glass.
    6.3.9  Pressure filtration apparatus.
    6.3.10  Aluminum dish. Flat bottom, smooth sides, and flanged top, 
18 mm deep and with an inside diameter of approximately 60 mm.

                      7.0  Reagents and Standards.

    7.l  Sample collection. The following reagents are required for 
sample collection:
    7.1.1  Filters. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder, 
exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (0.05 percent penetration) 
on

[[Page 588]]

0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency test 
shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Method D 2986-95A 
(incorporated by reference in Sec. 63.841 of this part). Test data from 
the supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose. 
In sources containing S02 or S03, the filter 
material must be of a type that is unreactive to S02 or 
S03. Reference 10 in section 17.0 of this method may be used 
to select the appropriate filter.
    7.1.2  Silica gel. Indicating type, 6 to l6 mesh. If previously 
used, dry at l75 deg.C (350 deg.F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be 
used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent 
or better) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
    7.1.3  Water. When analysis of the material caught in the impingers 
is required, deionized distilled water shall be used. Run blanks prior 
to field use to eliminate a high blank on test samples.
    7.1.4  Crushed ice.
    7.1.5  Stopcock grease. Acetone-insoluble, heat-stable silicone 
grease. This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon'' 
sleeves, or similar, are used. Alternatively, other types of stopcock 
grease may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. 
[Caution: Many stopcock greases are methylene chloride-soluble. Use 
sparingly and carefully remove prior to recovery to prevent 
contamination of the MCEM analysis.]
    7.2  Sample recovery. The following reagents are required for sample 
recovery:
    7.2.1  Acetone. Acetone with blank values  1 ppm, by weight residue, 
is required. Acetone blanks may be run prior to field use, and only 
acetone with low blank values may be used. In no case shall a blank 
value of greater than 1E-06 of the weight of acetone used be subtracted 
from the sample weight.

    Note: This is more restrictive than Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A. At least one vendor (Supelco Incorporated located in 
Bellefonte, Pennsylvania) lists 1 mg/l as residue for its Environmental 
Analysis Solvents.

    7.2.2  Methylene chloride. Methylene chloride with a blank value 1.5 
ppm, by weight, residue. Methylene chloride blanks may be run prior to 
field use, and only methylene chloride with low blank values may be 
used. In no case shall a blank value of greater than 1.6E-06 of the 
weight of methylene chloride used be subtracted from the sample weight.

    Note: A least one vendor quotes 1 mg/l for Environmental Analysis 
Solvents-grade methylene chloride.

    7.3  Sample analysis. The following reagents are required for sample 
analysis:
    7.3.l  Acetone. Same as in section 7.2.1 of this method.
    7.3.2  Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, indicating type. 
Alternatively, other types of desiccants may be used, subject to the 
approval of the Administrator.
    7.3.3  Methylene chloride. Same as in section 7.2.2 of this method.

      8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.

    Note: The complexity of this method is such that, in order to obtain 
reliable results, testers should be trained and experienced with the 
test procedures.

    8.11  Pretest preparation. It is suggested that sampling equipment 
be maintained according to the procedures described in APTD-0576.
    8.1.1  Weigh several 200 g to 300 g portions of silica gel in 
airtight containers to the nearest 0.5 g. Record on each container the 
total weight of the silica gel plus container. As an alternative, the 
silica gel need not be preweighed but may be weighed directly in its 
impinger or sampling holder just prior to train assembly.
    8.1.2  A batch of glass fiber filters, no more than 50 at a time, 
should placed in a soxhlet extraction apparatus and extracted using 
methylene chloride for at least 16 hours. After extraction, check 
filters visually against light for irregularities, flaws, or pinhole 
leaks. Label the shipping containers (glass or plastic petri dishes), 
and keep the filters in these containers at all times except during 
sampling and weighing.
    8.1.3  Desiccate the filters at 20 5.6 deg.C (68 
10 deg.F) and ambient pressure for at least 24 hours and 
weigh at intervals of at least 6 hours to a constant weight, i.e., 0.5 
mg change from previous weighing; record results to the nearest 0.1 mg. 
During each weighing the filter must not be exposed to the laboratory 
atmosphere for longer than 2 minutes and a relative humidity above 50 
percent. Alternatively (unless otherwise specified by the 
Administrator), the filters may be oven-dried at 104 deg.C (220 deg.F) 
for 2 to 3 hours, desiccated for 2 hours, and weighed. Procedures other 
than those described, which account for relative humidity effects, may 
be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
    8.2  Preliminary determinations.
    8.2.1  Select the sampling site and the minimum number of sampling 
points according to Method 1, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A or as specified 
by the Administrator. Determine the stack pressure, temperature, and the 
range of velocity heads using Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A; it 
is recommended that a leak check of the pitot lines (see section 8.1 of 
Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A) be performed. Determine the 
moisture content using Approximation Method 4 (section 1.2 of Method 4, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A) or its alternatives to make isokinetic 
sampling rate settings. Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight,

[[Page 589]]

as described in section 8.6 of Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A; if 
integrated Method 3 sampling is used for molecular weight determination, 
the integrated bag sample shall be taken simultaneously with, and for 
the same total length of time as, the particulate sample run.
    8.2.2  Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads 
such that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to 
maintain isokinetic sampling rates. During the run, do not change the 
nozzle size. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is 
chosen for the range of velocity heads encountered (see section 8.2 of 
Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A).
    8.2.3  Select a suitable probe liner and probe length such that all 
traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, consider sampling from 
opposite sides of the stack to reduce the required probe length.
    8.2.4  Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the 
minimum total sampling time specified in the test procedures for the 
specific industry such that: (1) The sampling time per point is not less 
than 2 minutes (or some greater time interval as specified by the 
Administrator); and (2) the sample volume taken (corrected to standard 
conditions) will exceed the required minimum total gas sample volume. 
The latter is based on an approximate average sampling rate.
    8.2.5  The sampling time at each point shall be the same. It is 
recommended that the number of minutes sampled at each point be an 
integer or an integer plus one-half minute, in order to eliminate 
timekeeping errors.
    8.2.6  In some circumstances (e.g., batch cycles), it may be 
necessary to sample for shorter times at the traverse points and to 
obtain smaller gas sample volumes. In these cases, the Administrator's 
approval must first be obtained.
    8.3  Preparation of sampling train.
    8.3.1  During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep 
all openings where contamination can occur covered until just prior to 
assembly or until sampling is about to begin. Place l00 ml of water in 
each of the first two impingers, leave the third impinger empty, and 
transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from its 
container to the fourth impinger. More silica gel may be used, but care 
should be taken to ensure that it is not entrained and carried out from 
the impinger during sampling. Place the container in a clean place for 
later use in the sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight of the 
silica gel plus impinger may be determined to the nearest 0.5 g and 
recorded.
    8.3.2  Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a 
labeled (identified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be sure 
that the filter is properly centered and the gasket properly placed so 
as to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter. Check 
the filter for tears after assembly is completed.
    8.3.3  When glass liners are used, install the selected nozzle using 
a Viton A 0-ring when stack temperatures are less than 260 deg.C 
(500 deg.F) and an asbestos string gasket when temperatures are higher. 
See APTD-0576 for details. Mark the probe with heat-resistant tape or by 
some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct 
for each sampling point.
    8.3.4  Set up the train as in Figure 5-1 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A, using (if necessary) a very light coat of silicone 
grease on all ground glass joints, greasing only the outer portion (see 
APTD-0576) to avoid possibility of contamination by the silicone grease. 
Subject to the approval of the Administrator, a glass cyclone may be 
used between the probe and filter holder when the total particulate 
catch is expected to exceed 100 mg or when water droplets are present in 
the stack gas.
    8.3.5  Place crushed ice around the impingers.
    8.4  Leak-check procedures.
    8.4.1  Leak check of metering system shown in Figure 5-1 of Method 
5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. That portion of the sampling train from 
the pump to the orifice meter should be leak-checked prior to initial 
use and after each shipment. Leakage after the pump will result in less 
volume being recorded than is actually sampled. The following procedure 
is suggested (see Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A): 
Close the main valve on the meter box. Insert a one-hole rubber stopper 
with rubber tubing attached into the orifice exhaust pipe. Disconnect 
and vent the low side of the orifice manometer. Close off the low side 
orifice tap. Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm (5 to 7 in.) water 
column by blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing, and 
observe the manometer for 1 minute. A loss of pressure on the manometer 
indicates a leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must be corrected.
    8.4.2  Pretest leak check. A pretest leak-check is recommended but 
not required. If the pretest leak-check is conducted, the following 
procedure should be used.
    8.4.2.1  After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and 
set the filter and probe heating systems to the desired operating 
temperatures. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. If a Viton A 
0-ring or other leak-free connection is used in assembling the probe 
nozzle to the probe liner, leak-check the train at the sampling site by 
plugging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum.

    Note: A lower vacuum may be used, provided that it is not exceeded 
during the test.


[[Page 590]]


    8.4.2.2  If an asbestos string is used, do not connect the probe to 
the train during the leak check. Instead, leak-check the train by first 
plugging the inlet to the filter holder (cyclone, if applicable) and 
pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. (See NOTE in section 8.4.2.1 of 
this method). Then connect the probe to the train and perform the leak 
check at approximately 25 mm (1 in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe 
may be leak-checked with the rest of the sampling train, in one step, at 
380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent of the 
average sampling rate or 0.00057 m\3\/min (0.02 cfm), whichever is less, 
are unacceptable.
    8.4.2.3  The following leak check instructions for the sampling 
train described in APTD-0576 and APTD-058l may be helpful. Start the 
pump with the bypass valve fully open and the coarse adjust valve 
completely closed. Partially open the coarse adjust valve and slowly 
close the bypass valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not 
reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as this will cause water to 
back up into the filter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, 
either leak-check at this higher vacuum or end the leak check as shown 
below and start over.
    8.4.2.4  When the leak check is completed, first slowly remove the 
plug from the inlet to the probe, filter holder, or cyclone (if 
applicable) and immediately turn off the vacuum pump. This prevents the 
water in the impingers from being forced backward into the filter holder 
and the silica gel from being entrained backward into the third 
impinger.
    8.4.3  Leak checks during sample run. If, during the sampling run, a 
component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes necessary, 
a leak check shall be conducted immediately before the change is made. 
The leak check shall be done according to the procedure outlined in 
section 8.4.2 of this method, except that it shall be done at a vacuum 
equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that point in 
the test. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 
m\3\/min (0.02 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever 
is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction will need to be 
applied to the total volume of dry gas metered; if, however, a higher 
leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and plan to 
correct the sample volume as shown in section 12.3 of this method or 
void the sample run.

    Note: Immediately after component changes, leak checks are optional; 
if such leak checks are done, the procedure outlined in section 8.4.2 of 
this method should be used.

    8.4.4  Post-test leak check. A leak check is mandatory at the 
conclusion of each sampling run. The leak check shall be performed in 
accordance with the procedures outlined in section 8.4.2 of this method, 
except that it shall be conducted at a vacuum equal to or greater than 
the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the leakage rate 
is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m\3\/min (0.02 cfm) or 4 percent 
of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are 
acceptable, and no correction need be applied to the total volume of dry 
gas metered. If, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either 
record the leakage rate and correct the sample volume, as shown in 
section 12.4 of this method, or void the sampling run.
    8.5  Sampling train operation. During the sampling run, maintain an 
isokinetic sampling rate (within l0 percent of true isokinetic unless 
otherwise specified by the Administrator) and a temperature around the 
filter of 120 14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F), or such other temperature as 
specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the 
Administrator.
    8.5.1  For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such 
as the one shown in Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. 
Be sure to record the initial reading. Record the DGM readings at the 
beginning and end of each sampling time increment, when changes in flow 
rates are made, before and after each leak-check, and when sampling is 
halted. Take other readings indicated by Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A at least once at each sample point during each time 
increment and additional readings when significant changes (20 percent 
variation in velocity head readings) necessitate additional adjustments 
in flow rate. Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level 
and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make 
periodic checks during the traverse.
    8.5.2  Clean the portholes prior to the test run to minimize the 
chance of sampling deposited material. To begin sampling, remove the 
nozzle cap and verify that the filter and probe heating systems are up 
to temperature and that the pitot tube and probe are properly 
positioned. Position the nozzle at the first traverse point with the tip 
pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start the pump and 
adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. Nomographs are available, 
which aid in the rapid adjustment of the isokinetic sampling rate 
without excessive computations. These nomographs are designed for use 
when the Type S pitot tube coefficient (Cp) is 0.85  0.02 
and the stack gas equivalent density (dry molecular weight) is 29 
 4. APTD-0576 details the procedure for using the 
nomographs. If Cp and Md are outside the above-
stated ranges, do not use the nomographs unless appropriate steps (see 
Reference 7 in section 17.0 of this method) are taken to compensate for 
the deviations.
    8.5.3  When the stack is under significant negative pressure (height 
of impinger stem), close the coarse adjust valve before inserting

[[Page 591]]

the probe into the stack to prevent water from backing into the filter 
holder. If necessary, the pump may be turned on with the coarse adjust 
valve closed.
    8.5.4  When the probe is in position, block off the openings around 
the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas 
stream.
    8.5.5  Traverse the stack cross-section, as required by Method 1, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A or as specified by the Administrator, being 
careful not to bump the probe nozzle into the stack walls when sampling 
near the walls or when removing or inserting the probe through the 
portholes; this minimizes the chance of extracting deposited material.
    8.5.6  During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the 
temperature around the filter holder at the proper level; add more ice 
and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 deg.C 
(68 deg.F) at the condenser/silica gel outlet. Also, periodically check 
the level and zero of the manometer.
    8.5.7  If the pressure drop across the filter becomes too high, 
making isokinetic sampling difficult to maintain, the filter may be 
replaced in the midst of the sample run. It is recommended that another 
complete filter assembly be used rather than attempting to change the 
filter itself. Before a new filter assembly is installed, conduct a leak 
check (see section 8.4.3 of this method). The total PM weight shall 
include the summation of the filter assembly catches.
    8.5.8  A single train shall be used for the entire sample run, 
except in cases where simultaneous sampling is required in two or more 
separate ducts or at two or more different locations within the same 
duct, or in cases where equipment failure necessitates a change of 
trains. In all other situations, the use of two or more trains will be 
subject to the approval of the Administrator.

    Note: When two or more trains are used, separate analyses of the 
front-half and (if applicable) impinger catches from each train shall be 
performed, unless identical nozzle sizes were used in all trains, in 
which case the front-half catches from the individual trains may be 
combined (as may the impinger catches) and one analysis of the front-
half catch and one analysis of the impinger catch may be performed.

    8.5.9  At the end of the sample run, turn off the coarse adjust 
valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, 
record the final DGM reading, and then conduct a post-test leak check, 
as outlined in section 8.4.4 of this method. Also leak-check the pitot 
lines as described in section 8.1 of Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A. The lines must pass this leak check in order to validate the velocity 
head data.
    8.6  Calculation of percent isokinetic. Calculate percent isokinetic 
(see Calculations, section 12.12 of this method) to determine whether a 
run was valid or another test run should be made. If there was 
difficulty in maintaining isokinetic rates because of source conditions, 
consult the Administrator for possible variance on the isokinetic rates.
    8.7 Sample recovery.
    8.7.1  Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is 
removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the 
probe to cool.
    8.7.2  When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external 
PM near the tip of the probe nozzle and place a cap over it to prevent 
losing or gaining PM. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the 
sampling train is cooling down. This would create a vacuum in the filter 
holder, thus drawing water from the impingers into the filter holder.
    8.7.3  Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove 
the probe from the sample train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap 
the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that 
might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the filter inlet 
where the probe was fastened and cap it. Remove the umbilical cord from 
the last impinger and cap the impinger. If a flexible line is used 
between the first impinger or condenser and the filter holder, 
disconnect the line at the filter holder and let any condensed water or 
liquid drain into the impingers or condenser. After wiping off the 
silicone grease, cap off the filter holder outlet and impinger inlet. 
Ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps may be used to close 
these openings.
    8.7.4  Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the 
cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so 
that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be 
minimized.
    8.7.5  Save a portion of the acetone and methylene chloride used for 
cleanup as blanks. Take 200 ml of each solvent directly from the wash 
bottle being used and place it in glass sample containers labeled 
``acetone blank'' and ``methylene chloride blank,'' respectively.
    8.7.6  Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly and note 
any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
    8.7.6.1  Container No. 1. Carefully remove the filter from the 
filter holder, and place it in its identified petri dish container. Use 
a pair of tweezers and/or clean disposable surgical gloves to handle the 
filter. If it is necessary to fold the filter, do so such that the PM 
cake is inside the fold. Using a dry nylon bristle brush and/or a sharp-
edged blade, carefully transfer to the petri dish any PM and/or filter 
fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket. Seal the container.
    8.7.6.2  Container No. 2. Taking care to see that dust on the 
outside of the probe or other

[[Page 592]]

exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover 
PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, 
and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with 
acetone and placing the wash in a glass container. Perform the acetone 
rinse as follows:
    8.7.6.2.1  Carefully remove the probe nozzle and clean the inside 
surface by rinsing with acetone from a wash bottle and brushing with a 
nylon bristle brush. Brush until the acetone rinse shows no visible 
particles, after which make a final rinse of the inside surface with 
acetone.
    8.7.6.2.2  Brush and rinse the inside parts of the Swagelok fitting 
with acetone in a similar way until no visible particles remain.
    8.7.6.2.3  Rinse the probe liner with acetone by tilting and 
rotating the probe while squirting acetone into its upper end so that 
all inside surfaces are wetted with acetone. Let the acetone drain from 
the lower end into the sample container. A funnel (glass or 
polyethylene) may be used to aid in transferring liquid washes to the 
container. Follow the acetone rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe 
in an inclined position, squirt acetone into the upper end as the probe 
brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe, hold a 
sample container under the lower end of the probe, and catch any acetone 
and PM that is brushed from the probe. Run the brush through the probe 
three times or more until no visible PM is carried out with the acetone 
or until none remains in the probe liner on visual inspection. With 
stainless steel or other metal probes, run the brush through in the 
above-described manner at least six times, since metal probes have small 
crevices in which PM can be entrapped. Rinse the brush with acetone and 
quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the 
brushing, make a final acetone rinse of the probe as described above.
    8.7.6.2.4  It is recommended that two people clean the probe to 
minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and 
protected from contamination.
    8.7.6.2.5  After ensuring that all joints have been wiped clean of 
silicone grease, clean the inside of the front half of the filter holder 
by rubbing the surfaces with a nylon bristle brush and rinsing with 
acetone. Rinse each surface three times or more if needed to remove 
visible particulate. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder. 
Carefully rinse out the glass cyclone also (if applicable).
    8.7.6.2.6  After rinsing the nozzle, probe, and front half of the 
filter holder with acetone, repeat the entire procedure with methylene 
chloride and save in a separate No. 2M container.
    8.7.6.2.7  After acetone and methylene chloride washings and PM have 
been collected in the proper sample containers, tighten the lid on the 
sample containers so that acetone and methylene chloride will not leak 
out when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid 
level to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label each 
container to identify clearly its contents.
    8.7.6.3  Container No. 3. Note the color of the indicating silica 
gel to determine whether it has been completely spent, and make a 
notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth 
impinger to its original container and seal the container. A funnel may 
make it easier to pour the silica gel without spilling. A rubber 
policeman may be used as an aid in removing the silica gel from the 
impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of dust 
particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to 
remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture 
calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the 
silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, follow the procedure 
for Container No. 3 in section 11.2.3 of this method.
    8.7.6.4  Impinger water. Treat the impingers as follows:
    8.7.6.4.1  Make a notation of any color or film in the liquid catch. 
Measure the liquid that is in the first three impingers to within 1 ml 
by using a graduated cylinder or by weighing it to within 0.5 g by using 
a balance (if one is available). Record the volume or weight of liquid 
present. This information is required to calculate the moisture content 
of the effluent gas.
    8.7.6.4.2  Following the determination of the volume of liquid 
present, rinse the back half of the train with water, add it to the 
impinger catch, and store it in a container labeled 3W (water).
    8.7.6.4.3  Following the water rinse, rinse the back half of the 
train with acetone to remove the excess water to enhance subsequent 
organic recovery with methylene chloride and quantitatively recover to a 
container labeled 3S (solvent) followed by at least three sequential 
rinsings with aliquots of methylene chloride. Quantitatively recover to 
the same container labeled 3S. Record separately the amount of both 
acetone and methylene chloride used to the nearest 1 ml or 0.5g.

    Note: Because the subsequent analytical finish is gravimetric, it is 
okay to recover both solvents to the same container. This would not be 
recommended if other analytical finishes were required.

    8.8  Sample transport. Whenever possible, containers should be 
shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.

[[Page 593]]

                          9.0  Quality Control.

    9.1  Miscellaneous quality control measures.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Quality control
             Section                    measure             Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4, 10.1-10.6..................  Sampling and        Ensure accurate
                                   equipment leak      measurement of
                                   check and           stack gas flow
                                   calibration.        rate, sample
                                                       volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    9.2  Volume metering system checks. The following quality control 
procedures are suggested to check the volume metering system calibration 
values at the field test site prior to sample collection. These 
procedures are optional.
    9.2.1  Meter orifice check. Using the calibration data obtained 
during the calibration procedure described in section 10.3 of this 
method, determine the Ha for the metering system 
orifice. The Ha is the orifice pressure 
differential in units of in. H20 that correlates to 0.75 cfm 
of air at 528 deg.R and 29.92 in. Hg. The Ha is 
calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.008

Where

0.0319 = (0.0567 in. Hg/ deg.R)(0.75 cfm)2;
H = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter, 
          in. H20;
Tm = Absolute average DGM temperature,  deg.R;
 = Total sampling time, min;
Pbar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg;
Y = DGM calibration factor, dimensionless;
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by DGM, dcf.

    9.2.1.1  Before beginning the field test (a set of three runs 
usually constitutes a field test), operate the metering system (i.e., 
pump, volume meter, and orifice) at the Ha pressure 
differential for 10 minutes. Record the volume collected, the DGM 
temperature, and the barometric pressure. Calculate a DGM calibration 
check value, Yc, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.009

Where

Yc = DGM calibration check value, dimensionless;
10 = Run time, min.

    9.2.1.2  Compare the Yc value with the dry gas meter 
calibration factor Y to determine that: 0.97 Y  Yc  1.03Y. If 
the Yc value is not within this range, the volume metering 
system should be investigated before beginning the test.
    9.2.2  Calibrated critical orifice. A calibrated critical orifice, 
calibrated against a wet test meter or spirometer and designed to be 
inserted at the inlet of the sampling meter box, may be used as a 
quality control check by following the procedure of section 16.2 of this 
method.

                  10.0 Calibration and Standardization.

    Note: Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.

    10.1  Probe nozzle. Probe nozzles shall be calibrated before their 
initial use in the field. Using a micrometer, measure the ID of the 
nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). Make three separate 
measurements using different diameters each time, and obtain the average 
of the measurements. The difference between the high and low numbers 
shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). When nozzles become nicked, dented, 
or corroded, they shall be reshaped, sharpened, and recalibrated before 
use. Each nozzle shall be permanently and uniquely identified.
    10.2  Pitot tube assembly. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be 
calibrated according to the procedure outlined in section 10.1 of Method 
2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    10.3  Metering system.
    10.3.1  Calibration prior to use. Before its initial use in the 
field, the metering system shall be calibrated as follows: Connect the 
metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet test meter that is accurate 
to within 1 percent. Refer to Figure 5-5 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A. The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/
revolution (1 ft3/rev). A spirometer of 400 liters (14 
ft3) or more capacity, or equivalent, may be used for this 
calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The 
wet test meter should be periodically calibrated with a spirometer or a 
liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. 
Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that 
the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained. Run the 
metering system pump for about 15 minutes with the orifice manometer 
indicating a median reading, as expected in field use, to allow the pump 
to warm up and to

[[Page 594]]

permit the interior surface of the wet test meter to be thoroughly 
wetted. Then, at each of a minimum of three orifice manometer settings, 
pass an exact quantity of gas through the wet test meter and note the 
gas volume indicated by the DGM. Also note the barometric pressure and 
the temperatures of the wet test meter, the inlet of the DGM, and the 
outlet of the DGM. Select the highest and lowest orifice settings to 
bracket the expected field operating range of the orifice. Use a minimum 
volume of 0.15 m3 (5 cf) at all orifice settings. Record all 
the data on a form similar to Figure 5-6 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, and calculate Y (the DGM calibration factor) and 
Ha (the orifice calibration factor) at each orifice 
setting, as shown on Figure 5-6 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. 
Allowable tolerances for individual Y and Ha values 
are given in Figure 5-6 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. Use the 
average of the Y values in the calculations in section 12 of this 
method.
    10.3.1.1  Before calibrating the metering system, it is suggested 
that a leak check be conducted. For metering systems having diaphragm 
pumps, the normal leak check procedure will not detect leakages within 
the pump. For these cases the following leak check procedure is 
suggested: make a 10-minute calibration run at 0.00057 m3/min 
(0.02 cfm); at the end of the run, take the difference of the measured 
wet test meter and DGM volumes; divide the difference by 10 to get the 
leak rate. The leak rate should not exceed 0.00057 m3/min 
(0.02 cfm).
    10.3.2  Calibration after use. After each field use, the calibration 
of the metering system shall be checked by performing three calibration 
runs at a single, intermediate orifice setting (based on the previous 
field test) with the vacuum set at the maximum value reached during the 
test series. To adjust the vacuum, insert a valve between the wet test 
meter and the inlet of the metering system. Calculate the average value 
of the DGM calibration factor. If the value has changed by more than 5 
percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of orifice settings, 
as previously detailed.

    Note: Alternative procedures, e.g., rechecking the orifice meter 
coefficient, may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

    10.3.3  Acceptable variation in calibration. If the DGM coefficient 
values obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5 
percent, either the test series shall be voided or calculations for the 
test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value 
(i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of total sample volume.
    10.4  Probe heater calibration. Use a heat source to generate air 
heated to selected temperatures that approximate those expected to occur 
in the sources to be sampled. Pass this air through the probe at a 
typical sample flow rate while measuring the probe inlet and outlet 
temperatures at various probe heater settings. For each air temperature 
generated, construct a graph of probe heating system setting versus 
probe outlet temperature. The procedure outlined in APTD-0576 can also 
be used. Probes constructed according to APTD-0581 need not be 
calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD-0576 are used. Also, probes 
with outlet temperature monitoring capabilities do not require 
calibration.

    Note: The probe heating system shall be calibrated before its 
initial use in the field.

    10.5  Temperature sensors. Use the procedure in section 10.3 of 
Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A to calibrate in-stack temperature 
sensors. Dial thermometers, such as are used for the DGM and condenser 
outlet, shall be calibrated against mercury-in-glass thermometers.
    10.6  Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.

                       11.0  Analytical Procedure.

    11.1  Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in 
Figure 315-1 of this method.
    11.2  Handle each sample container as follows:
    11.2.1  Container No. 1.
    11.2.1.1  PM analysis. Leave the contents in the shipping container 
or transfer the filter and any loose PM from the sample container to a 
tared glass weighing dish. Desiccate for 24 hours in a desiccator 
containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Weigh to a constant weight and 
report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For purposes of this section, 
the term ``constant weight'' means a difference of no more than 0.5 mg 
or 1 percent of total weight less tare weight, whichever is greater, 
between two consecutive weighings, with no less than 6 hours of 
desiccation time between weighings (overnight desiccation is a common 
practice). If a third weighing is required and it agrees within 
0.5 mg, then the results of the second weighing should be 
used. For quality assurance purposes, record and report each individual 
weighing; if more than three weighings are required, note this in the 
results for the subsequent MCEM results.
    11.2.1.2  MCEM analysis. Transfer the filter and contents 
quantitatively into a beaker. Add 100 ml of methylene chloride and cover 
with aluminum foil. Sonicate for 3 minutes then allow to stand for 20 
minutes. Set up the filtration apparatus. Decant the solution into a 
clean Buchner fritted funnel. Immediately pressure filter the solution 
through the tube into another clean, dry beaker. Continue decanting and 
pressure filtration until all the solvent is transferred.

[[Page 595]]

Rinse the beaker and filter with 10 to 20 ml methylene chloride, decant 
into the Buchner fritted funnel and pressure filter. Place the beaker on 
a low-temperature hot plate (maximum 40 deg.C) and slowly evaporate 
almost to dryness. Transfer the remaining last few milliliters of 
solution quantitatively from the beaker (using at least three aliquots 
of methylene chloride rinse) to a tared clean dry aluminum dish and 
evaporate to complete dryness. Remove from heat once solvent is 
evaporated. Reweigh the dish after a 30-minute equilibrium in the 
balance room and determine the weight to the nearest 0.1 mg. Conduct a 
methylene chloride blank run in an identical fashion.
    11.2.2  Container No. 2.
    11.2.2.1  PM analysis. Note the level of liquid in the container, 
and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during 
transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void 
the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, 
to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container 
either volumetrically to 1 ml or gravimetrically to 
10.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker and 
evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 
24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the 
nearest 0.1 mg.
    11.2.2.2  MCEM analysis. Add 25 ml methylene chloride to the beaker 
and cover with aluminum foil. Sonicate for 3 minutes then allow to stand 
for 20 minutes; combine with contents of Container No. 2M and pressure 
filter and evaporate as described for Container 1 in section 11.2.1.2 of 
this method.

                         Notes for MCEM Analysis

    1. Light finger pressure only is necessary on 24/40 adaptor. A 
Chemplast adapter #15055-240 has been found satisfactory.
    2. Avoid aluminum dishes made with fluted sides, as these may 
promote solvent ``creep,'' resulting in possible sample loss.
    3. If multiple samples are being run, rinse the Buchner fritted 
funnel twice between samples with 5 ml solvent using pressure 
filtration. After the second rinse, continue the flow of air until the 
glass frit is completely dry. Clean the Buchner fritted funnels 
thoroughly after filtering five or six samples.

    11.2.3  Container No. 3. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel 
plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be 
conducted in the field.
    11.2.4  Container 3W (impinger water).
    11.2.4.1  MCEM analysis. Transfer the solution into a 1,000 ml 
separatory funnel quantitatively with methylene chloride washes. Add 
enough solvent to total approximately 50 ml, if necessary. Shake the 
funnel for 1 minute, allow the phases to separate, and drain the solvent 
layer into a 250 ml beaker. Repeat the extraction twice. Evaporate with 
low heat (less than 40 deg.C) until near dryness. Transfer the remaining 
few milliliters of solvent quantitatively with small solvent washes into 
a clean, dry, tared aluminum dish and evaporate to dryness. Remove from 
heat once solvent is evaporated. Reweigh the dish after a 30-minute 
equilibration in the balance room and determine the weight to the 
nearest 0.1 mg.

    11.2.5  Container 3S (solvent).
    11.2.5.1  MCEM analysis. Transfer the mixed solvent to 250 ml 
beaker(s). Evaporate and weigh following the procedures detailed for 
container 3W in section 11.2.4 of this method.
    11.2.6  Blank containers. Measure the distilled water, acetone, or 
methylene chloride in each container either volumetrically or 
gravimetrically. Transfer the ``solvent'' to a tared 250 ml beaker, and 
evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. (Conduct a 
solvent blank on the distilled deionized water blank in an identical 
fashion to that described in section 11.2.4.1 of this method.) Desiccate 
for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the 
nearest 0.l mg.

    Note: The contents of Containers No. 2, 3W, and 3M as well as the 
blank containers may be evaporated at temperatures higher than ambient. 
If evaporation is done at an elevated temperature, the temperature must 
be below the boiling point of the solvent; also, to prevent ``bumping,'' 
the evaporation process must be closely supervised, and the contents of 
the beaker must be swirled occasionally to maintain an even temperature. 
Use extreme care, as acetone and methylene chloride are highly flammable 
and have a low flash point.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations.

    12.1  Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal 
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the 
final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as 
they give equivalent results.
    12.2  Nomenclature.

An = Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m3 
          (ft3).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Ca = Acetone blank residue concentration, mg/g.
Cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry 
          basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (g/dscf).
I = Percent of isokinetic sampling.
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest 
          leak check or for a leak check following a component change; 
          equal to 0.00057 m3/min (0.02 cfm) or 4 percent of 
          the average sampling rate, whichever is less.

[[Page 596]]

Li = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak check 
          conducted prior to the ``ith'' component change (I 
          = l, 2, 3...n), m3/min (cfm).
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak check, 
          m3/min (cfm).
ma = Mass of residue of acetone after evaporation, mg.
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-
          mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in 
          Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg)(m3)]/[( deg.K) (g-
          mole)] '61'21.85 [(in. Hg)(ft3)]/[( deg.R)(lb-
          mole)'61'].
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter (DGM) temperature (see 
          Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A),  deg.K 
          ( deg.R).
Ts = Absolute average stack gas temperature (see Figure 5-2 
          of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A),  deg.K( deg.R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 deg.K (528 deg.R).
Va = Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
Vt = Volume of methylene chloride blank, ml.
Vtw = Volume of methylene chloride used in wash, ml.
Vlc = Total volume liquid collected in impingers and silica 
          gel (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A), 
          ml.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm 
          (dcf).
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas meter, 
          corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vw(std) = Volume of water vapor in the gas sample, corrected 
          to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Vs = Stack gas velocity, calculated by Equation 2-9 in Method 
          2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, using data obtained from Method 
          5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, m/sec (ft/sec).
Wa = Weight of residue in acetone wash, mg.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
H = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter 
          (see Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A), mm 
          H2O (in H2O).
a = Density of acetone, 785.1 mg/ml (or see label on 
          bottle).
w = Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml (0.00220l lb/ml).
t = Density of methylene chloride, 1316.8 mg/ml (or 
          see label on bottle).
 = Total sampling time, min.
1 = Sampling time interval, from the beginning of 
          a run until the first component change, min.
1 = Sampling time interval, between two successive 
          component changes, beginning with the interval between the 
          first and second changes, min.
p = Sampling time interval, from the final 
          (nth) component change until the end of the 
          sampling run, min.
13.6 = Specific gravity of mercury.
60 = Sec/min.
100 = Conversion to percent.

    12.3 Average dry gas meter temperature and average orifice pressure 
drop. See data sheet (Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A).
    12.4 Dry gas volume. Correct the sample volume measured by the dry 
gas meter to standard conditions (20 deg.C, 760 mm Hg or 68 deg.F, 29.92 
in Hg) by using Equation 315-1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.010

Where

Kl = 0.3858  deg.K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64  deg.R/in Hg for English units.

    Note: Equation 315-1 can be used as written unless the leakage rate 
observed during any of the mandatory leak checks (i.e., the post-test 
leak check or leak checks conducted prior to component changes) exceeds 
La. If Lp or Li exceeds La, 
Equation 315-1 must be modified as follows:
    (a) Case I. No component changes made during sampling run. In this 
case, replace Vm in Equation 315-1 with the expression:

[Vm--(Lp--La) ]
    (b) Case II. One or more component changes made during the sampling 
run. In this case, replace Vm in Equation 315-1 by the 
expression:

[[Page 597]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.011

and substitute only for those leakage rates (Li or 
Lp) which exceed La.
    12.5  Volume of water vapor condensed.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.012
    
Where

K2 = 0.001333 m3/ml for metric units;
    = 0.04706 ft3/ml for English units.

12.6  Moisture content.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.013

    Note: In saturated or water droplet-laden gas streams, two 
calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made, one 
from the impinger analysis (Equation 315-3), and a second from the 
assumption of saturated conditions. The lower of the two values of 
Bws shall be considered correct. The procedure for 
determining the moisture content based upon assumption of saturated 
conditions is given in section 4.0 of Method 4, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A. For the purposes of this method, the average stack gas temperature 
from Figure 5-2 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A may be used to 
make this determination, provided that the accuracy of the in-stack 
temperature sensor is 1 deg.C (2 deg.F).

    12.7  Acetone blank concentration.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.014
    
    12.8  Acetone wash blank.

Wa = Ca Vaw a Eq. 315-5

    12.9  Total particulate weight. Determine the total PM catch from 
the sum of the weights obtained from Containers l and 2 less the acetone 
blank associated with these two containers (see Figure 315-1).

    Note: Refer to section 8.5.8 of this method to assist in calculation 
of results involving two or more filter assemblies or two or more 
sampling trains.

    12.10  Particulate concentration.

cs = K3 mn/Vm(std)      Eq. 
          315-6

where

K = 0.001 g/mg for metric units;
    = 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.

    12.11  Conversion factors.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              From                       To              Multiply by
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ft \3\.........................  m \3\............  0.02832
gr.............................  mg...............  64.80004
gr/ft\3\.......................  mg/m\3\..........  2288.4
mg.............................  g................  0.001
gr.............................  lb...............  1.429 x 10-4
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    12.12  Isokinetic variation.
    12.12.1  Calculation from raw data.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.015
    
where
K4 = 0.003454 [(mm Hg)(m3)]/[(m1)( deg.K)] for 
          metric units;
    = 0.002669 [(in Hg)(ft3)]/[(m1)( deg.R)] for English 
units.

    12.12.2  Calculation from intermediate values.

[[Page 598]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.016

where

K5 = 4.320 for metric units;
    = 0.09450 for English units.

    12.12.3  Acceptable results. If 90 percent  I  
110 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PM or MCEM results are 
low in comparison to the standard, and ``I'' is over 110 percent or less 
than 90 percent, the Administrator may opt to accept the results. 
Reference 4 in the Bibliography may be used to make acceptability 
judgments. If ``I'' is judged to be unacceptable, reject the results, 
and repeat the test.
    12.13  Stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate. Calculate the 
average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using 
data obtained in this method and the equations in sections 5.2 and 5.3 
of Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    12.14  MCEM results. Determine the MCEM concentration from the 
results from Containers 1, 2, 2M, 3W, and 3S less the acetone, methylene 
chloride, and filter blanks value as determined in the following 
equation:

mmcem = Smtotal - wa - wt - 
          fb

    13.0  Method Performance. [Reserved]
    14.0  Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
    15.0  Waste Management. [Reserved]
    16.0  Alternative Procedures.
    16.1  Dry gas meter as a calibration standard. A DGM may be used as 
a calibration standard for volume measurements in place of the wet test 
meter specified in section 16.1 of this method, provided that it is 
calibrated initially and recalibrated periodically as follows:
    16.1.1 Standard dry gas meter calibration.
    16.1.1.1. The DGM to be calibrated and used as a secondary reference 
meter should be of high quality and have an appropriately sized 
capacity, e.g., 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft \3\/rev). A spirometer (400 liters 
or more capacity), or equivalent, may be used for this calibration, 
although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The wet test meter 
should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft \3\/rev) and be capable of 
measuring volume to within 1.0 percent; wet test meters should be 
checked against a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure 
the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of 
other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the 
procedure are maintained.
    16.1.1.2  Set up the components as shown in Figure 5-7 of Method 5, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A. A spirometer, or equivalent, may be used in 
place of the wet test meter in the system. Run the pump for at least 5 
minutes at a flow rate of about 10 liters/min (0.35 cfm) to condition 
the interior surface of the wet test meter. The pressure drop indicated 
by the manometer at the inlet side of the DGM should be minimized (no 
greater than 100 mm H2O [4 in. H2O] at a flow rate 
of 30 liters/min [1 cfm]). This can be accomplished by using large-
diameter tubing connections and straight pipe fittings.
    16.1.1.3  Collect the data as shown in the example data sheet (see 
Figure 5-8 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A). Make triplicate 
runs at each of the flow rates and at no less than five different flow 
rates. The range of flow rates should be between 10 and 34 liters/min 
(0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or over the expected operating range.
    16.1.1.4  Calculate flow rate, Q, for each run using the wet test 
meter volume, Vw, and the run time, q. Calculate the DGM 
coefficient, Yds, for each run. These calculations are as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.017

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.018

Where

K1 = 0.3858 for international system of units (SI); 17.64 for 
          English units;
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in Hg);
Vw = Wet test meter volume, liter (ft\3\);
tw = Average wet test meter temperature,  deg.C ( deg.F);

[[Page 599]]

tstd = 273 deg.C for SI units; 460'F for English units;
 = Run time, min;
tds = Average dry gas meter temperature,  deg.C ( deg.F);
Vds = Dry gas meter volume, liter (ft\3\);
p = Dry gas meter inlet differential pressure, mm 
          H2O (in H2O).

    16.1.1.5  Compare the three Yds values at each of the 
flow rates and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference 
between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no 
greater than 0.030. Extra sets of triplicate runs may be made in order 
to complete this requirement. In addition, the meter coefficients should 
be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications cannot be met in three 
sets of successive triplicate runs, the meter is not suitable as a 
calibration standard and should not be used as such. If these 
specifications are met, average the three Yds values at each 
flow rate resulting in five average meter coefficients, Yds.
    16.1.1.6  Prepare a curve of meter coefficient, Yds, 
versus flow rate, Q, for the DGM. This curve shall be used as a 
reference when the meter is used to calibrate other DGMs and to 
determine whether recalibration is required.
    16.1.2  Standard dry gas meter recalibration.
    16.1.2.1  Recalibrate the standard DGM against a wet test meter or 
spirometer annually or after every 200 hours of operation, whichever 
comes first. This requirement is valid provided the standard DGM is kept 
in a laboratory and, if transported, cared for as any other laboratory 
instrument. Abuse to the standard meter may cause a change in the 
calibration and will require more frequent recalibrations.
    16.1.2.2  As an alternative to full recalibration, a two-point 
calibration check may be made. Follow the same procedure and equipment 
arrangement as for a full recalibration, but run the meter at only two 
flow rates (suggested rates are 14 and 28 liters/min [0.5 and 1.0 cfm]). 
Calculate the meter coefficients for these two points, and compare the 
values with the meter calibration curve. If the two coefficients are 
within 1.5 percent of the calibration curve values at the same flow 
rates, the meter need not be recalibrated until the next date for a 
recalibration check.
    6.2  Critical orifices as calibration standards. Critical orifices 
may be used as calibration standards in place of the wet test meter 
specified in section 10.3 of this method, provided that they are 
selected, calibrated, and used as follows:
    16.2.1  Selection of critical orifices.
    16.2.1.1  The procedure that follows describes the use of hypodermic 
needles or stainless steel needle tubing that has been found suitable 
for use as critical orifices. Other materials and critical orifice 
designs may be used provided the orifices act as true critical orifices; 
i.e., a critical vacuum can be obtained, as described in section 
7.2.2.2.3 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. Select five critical 
orifices that are appropriately sized to cover the range of flow rates 
between 10 and 34 liters/min or the expected operating range. Two of the 
critical orifices should bracket the expected operating range. A minimum 
of three critical orifices will be needed to calibrate a Method 5 DGM; 
the other two critical orifices can serve as spares and provide better 
selection for bracketing the range of operating flow rates. The needle 
sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 315-1 give the approximate flow 
rates indicated in the table.
    16.2.1.2  These needles can be adapted to a Method 5 type sampling 
train as follows: Insert a serum bottle stopper, 13 x 20 mm sleeve type, 
into a 0.5 in Swagelok quick connect. Insert the needle into the stopper 
as shown in Figure 5-9 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    16.2.2  Critical orifice calibration. The procedure described in 
this section uses the Method 5 meter box configuration with a DGM as 
described in section 6.1.1.9 of this method to calibrate the critical 
orifices. Other schemes may be used, subject to the approval of the 
Administrator.
    16.2.2.1  Calibration of meter box. The critical orifices must be 
calibrated in the same configuration as they will be used; i.e., there 
should be no connections to the inlet of the orifice.
    16.2.2.1.1  Before calibrating the meter box, leak-check the system 
as follows: Fully open the coarse adjust valve and completely close the 
bypass valve. Plug the inlet. Then turn on the pump and determine 
whether there is any leakage. The leakage rate shall be zero; i.e., no 
detectable movement of the DGM dial shall be seen for 1 minute.
    16.2.2.1.2  Check also for leakages in that portion of the sampling 
train between the pump and the orifice meter. See section 5.6 of Method 
5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A for the procedure; make any corrections, 
if necessary. If leakage is detected, check for cracked gaskets, loose 
fittings, worn 0-rings, etc. and make the necessary repairs.
    16.2.2.1.3  After determining that the meter box is leakless, 
calibrate the meter box according to the procedure given in section 5.3 
of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. Make sure that the wet test 
meter meets the requirements stated in section 7.1.1.1 of Method 5, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A. Check the water level in the wet test meter. 
Record the DGM calibration factor, Y.
    16.2.2.2  Calibration of critical orifices. Set up the apparatus as 
shown in Figure 5-10 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    16.2.2.2.1  Allow a warm-up time of 15 minutes. This step is 
important to equilibrate

[[Page 600]]

the temperature conditions through the DGM.
    16.2.2.2.2  Leak-check the system as in section 7.2.2.1.1 of Method 
5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. The leakage rate shall be zero.
    16.2.2.2.3  Before calibrating the critical orifice, determine its 
suitability and the appropriate operating vacuum as follows: turn on the 
pump, fully open the coarse adjust valve, and adjust the bypass valve to 
give a vacuum reading corresponding to about half of atmospheric 
pressure. Observe the meter box orifice manometer reading, DH. Slowly 
increase the vacuum reading until a stable reading is obtained on the 
meter box orifice manometer. Record the critical vacuum for each 
orifice. Orifices that do not reach a critical value shall not be used.
    16.2.2.2.4  Obtain the barometric pressure using a barometer as 
described in section 6.1.2 of this method. Record the barometric 
pressure, Pbar, in mm Hg (in. Hg).
    16.2.2.2.5  Conduct duplicate runs at a vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 
to 2 in. Hg) above the critical vacuum. The runs shall be at least 5 
minutes each. The DGM volume readings shall be in increments of complete 
revolutions of the DGM. As a guideline, the times should not differ by 
more than 3.0 seconds (this includes allowance for changes in the DGM 
temperatures) to achieve 0.5 percent in K'. Record the 
information listed in Figure 5-11 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A.
    16.2.2.2.6 Calculate K' using Equation 315-11.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07OC97.019
    
where

K' = Critical orifice coefficient, [m\3\)( deg.K)1/2]/[(mm 
          Hg)(min)] '61'[(ft\3\)( deg.R)1/2)]/[(in. 
          Hg)(min)]'61'
Tamb = Absolute ambient temperature,  deg.K ( deg.R).

    16.2.2.2.7  Average the K' values. The individual K' values should 
not differ by more than 0.5 percent from the average.
    16.2.3  Using the critical orifices as calibration standards.
    16.2.3.1  Record the barometric pressure.
    16.2.3.2  Calibrate the metering system according to the procedure 
outlined in sections 7.2.2.2.1 to 7.2.2.2.5 of Method 5, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A. Record the information listed in Figure 5-12 of Method 5, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A.
    16.2.3.3  Calculate the standard volumes of air passed through the 
DGM and the critical orifices, and calculate the DGM calibration factor, 
Y, using the equations below:

Vm(std) = K1 Vm [Pbar + 
          (H/13.6)]/Tm Eq. 315-12
Vcr(std) = K' (Pbar )/
          Tamb1/2 Eq. 315-13
Y = Vcr(std)/Vm(std) Eq. 315-14
where

Vcr(std) = Volume of gas sample passed through the critical 
          orifice, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
K' = 0.3858  deg.K/mm Hg for metric units
    = 17.64  deg.R/in Hg for English units.

    16.2.3.4  Average the DGM calibration values for each of the flow 
rates. The calibration factor, Y, at each of the flow rates should not 
differ by more than 2 percent from the average.
    16.2.3.5  To determine the need for recalibrating the critical 
orifices, compare the DGM Y factors obtained from two adjacent orifices 
each time a DGM is calibrated; for example, when checking orifice 13/
2.5, use orifices 12/10.2 and 13/5.1. If any critical orifice yields a 
DGM Y factor differing by more than 2 percent from the others, 
recalibrate the critical orifice according to section 7.2.2.2 of Method 
5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    17.0  References.
    1. Addendum to Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal 
Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. December 6, 1967.
    2. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-
Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle 
Park, NC. APTD-0581. April 1971.
    3. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of 
Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. 
Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576. March 1972.
    4. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. Todd. A Method of 
Interpreting Stack Sampling Data. Paper Presented at the 63rd Annual 
Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO. June 
14-19, 1970.
    5. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling Improved and Simplified 
With New Equipment. APCA Paper No. 67-119. 1967.
    6. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. 
PHS, NCAPC. 1967.
    7. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustment in the EPA Nomograph for Different 
Pitot Tube Coefficients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Sampling News 
2:4-11. October 1974.

[[Page 601]]

    8. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available Instrumentation 
for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. Environmental 
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, 
NC. November 1976 (unpublished paper).
    9. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 26. Gaseous Fuels; Coal and 
Coke; Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. 
Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 617-622.
    10. Felix, L.G., G.I. Clinard, G.E. Lacy, and J.D. McCain. Inertial 
Cascade Impactor Substrate Media for Flue Gas Sampling. U.S. 
Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. 
Publication No. EPA-600/7-77-060. June 1977. 83 p.
    11. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and 
Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation 
Society Newsletter. 3(1):17-30. February 1978.
    12. Lodge, J.P., Jr., J.B. Pate, B.E. Ammons, and G.A. Swanson. The 
Use of Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air Sampling. J. Air 
Pollution Control Association. 16:197-200. 1966.
    18.0  Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

                       TABLE 315-1. Flow Rates for Various Needle Sizes and Tube Lengths.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Flow rate                                            Flow rate
              Gauge/length  (cm)                  (liters/             Gauge/length  (cm)              (liters/
                                                    min)                                                 min)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12/7.6........................................        32.56  14/2.5................................        19.54
12/10.2.......................................        30.02  14/5.1................................        17.27
13/2.5........................................        25.77  14/7.6................................        16.14
13/5.1........................................        23.50  15/3.2................................        14.16
13/7.6........................................        22.37  15/7.6................................        11.61
13/10.2.......................................        20.67  115/10.2..............................        10.48
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


               Figure 315-1. Particulate and MCEM Analyses
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Particulate Analysis
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
Plant............................  .....................................
Date.............................  .....................................
Run No...........................  .....................................
Filter No........................  .....................................
Amount liquid lost during          .....................................
 transport.
Acetone blank volume (ml)........  .....................................
Acetone blank concentration (Eq.   .....................................
 315-4) (mg/mg).
Acetone wash blank (Eq. 315-5)     .....................................
 (mg).
------------------------------------------------------------------------


 
                                Final weight   Tare weight   Weight gain
                                    (mg)           (mg)          (mg)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Container No. 1..............  .............
Container No. 2..............  .............
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
    Total....................  .............
Less Acetone blank...........  .............
Weight of particulate matter.  .............
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
                                Final volume     Initial        Liquid
                                    (mg)        volume (mg)   collected
                                                                 (mg)
      Moisture Analysis
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
Impingers....................  Note 1         Note 1
Silica gel...................  .............
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
    Total....................  .............
  Note 1: Convert volume of
 water to weight by
 multiplying by the density
 of water (1 g/ml).
------------------------------------------------------------------------



 
                                                 Tare of                                            Methylene
          Container No.              Final       aluminum      Weight gain      Acetone wash      chloride wash
                                  weight (mg)   dish (mg)                        volume (ml)       volume (ml)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  MCEM Analysis
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
1...............................

[[Page 602]]

 
2+2M............................
3W..............................
3S..............................
ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½ï¿½
    Total.......................  ...........  ...........  <3-ln-grk-S>mtot  <3-ln-grk-S>Vaw   <3-ln-grk-S>Vtw
                                                             al
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Less acetone wash blank (mg) (not to exceed 1 mg/l of   wa = capa <3-ln-grk-S>Vaw
 acetone used).
 
Less methylene chloride wash blank (mg) (not to exceed  wt = ctpt <3-ln-grk-S>Vtw
 1.5 mg/l of methylene chloride used).
 
Less filter blank (mg) (not to exceed . . . (mg/        Fb
 filter).
 
MCEM weight (mg)......................................  mMCEOM = <3-ln-grk-S>mtotal - wa - wt- fb
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

   Method 316--Sampling and Analysis for Formaldehyde Emissions From 
  Stationary Sources in the Mineral Wool and Wool Fiberglass Industries

                            1.0  Introduction

    This method is applicable to the determination of formaldehyde, CAS 
Registry number 50-00-0, from stationary sources in the mineral wool and 
wool fiber glass industries. High purity water is used to collect the 
formaldehyde. The formaldehyde concentrations in the stack samples are 
determined using the modified pararosaniline method. Formaldehyde can be 
detected as low as 8.8  x  1010 lbs/cu ft (11.3 ppbv) or as 
high as 1.8  x  103 lbs/cu ft (23,000,000 ppbv), at standard 
conditions over a 1 hour sampling period, sampling approximately 30 cu 
ft.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    Gaseous and particulate pollutants are withdrawn isokinetically from 
an emission source and are collected in high purity water. Formaldehyde 
present in the emissions is highly soluble in high purity water. The 
high purity water containing formaldehyde is then analyzed using the 
modified pararosaniline method. Formaldehyde in the sample reacts with 
acidic pararosaniline, and the sodium sulfite, forming a purple 
chromophore. The intensity of the purple color, measured 
spectrophotometrically, provides an accurate and precise measure of the 
formaldehyde concentration in the sample.

                            3.0  Definitions

    See the definitions in the General Provisions of this Subpart.

                           4.0  Interferences

    Sulfite and cyanide in solution interfere with the pararosaniline 
method. A procedure to overcome the interference by each compound has 
been described by Miksch, et al.

                         5.0  Safety. (Reserved)

                      6.0  Apparatus and Materials

    6.1  A schematic of the sampling train is shown in Figure 1. This 
sampling train configuration is adapted from EPA Method 5, 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A, procedures.


[[Page 603]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.050

    The sampling train consists of the following components: probe 
nozzle, probe liner, pitot tube, differential pressure gauge, impingers, 
metering system, barometer, and gas density determination equipment.
    6.1.1  Probe Nozzle:  Quartz, glass, or stainless steel with sharp, 
tapered (30 deg. angle) leading edge. The taper shall be on the outside 
to preserve a constant inner diameter. The nozzle shall be buttonhook or 
elbow design. A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling 
should be available in increments of 0.15 cm (\1/16\ in), e.g., 0.32 to 
1.27 cm (\1/8\ to \1/2\ in), or larger if higher volume sampling trains 
are used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated according to the procedure 
outlined in Section 10.1.
    6.1.2  Probe Liner: Borosilicate glass or quartz shall be used for 
the probe liner. The probe shall be maintained at a temperature of 
120 deg.C  14 deg.C (248 deg.F  25 deg.F).
    6.1.3  Pitot Tube: The pitot tube shall be Type S, as described in 
Section 2.1 of EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, or any other 
appropriate device. The pitot tube shall be attached to the probe to 
allow constant monitoring of the stack gas velocity. The impact (high 
pressure) opening plane of the pitot tube shall be even with or above 
the nozzle entry plane (see Figure 2-6b, EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A) during sampling. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a 
known coefficient, determined as outlined in Section 4 of EPA Method 2, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    6.1.4  Differential Pressure Gauge: The differential pressure gauge 
shall be an inclined manometer or equivalent device as described in 
Section 2.2 of EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. One manometer 
shall be used for velocity-head reading and the other for orifice 
differential pressure readings.
    6.1.5  Impingers: The sampling train requires a minimum of four 
impingers, connected as shown in Figure 1, with ground glass (or 
equivalent) vacuum-tight fittings. For the first, third, and fourth 
impingers, use the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip 
with a 1.3 cm inside diameters (\1/2\ in) glass tube extending to 1.3 cm 
(\1/2\ in) from the bottom of the flask. For the second impinger, use a 
Greenburg-Smith impinger with the standard tip. Place a thermometer 
capable of measuring temperature

[[Page 604]]

to within 1 deg.C (2 deg.F) at the outlet of the fourth impinger for 
monitoring purposes.
    6.1.6  Metering System: The necessary components are a vacuum gauge, 
leak-free pump, thermometers capable of measuring temperatures within 
3 deg.C (5.4 deg.F), dry-gas meter capable of measuring volume to within 
1 percent, and related equipment as shown in Figure 1. At a minimum, the 
pump should be capable of 4 cfm free flow, and the dry gas meter should 
have a recording capacity of 0-999.9 cu ft with a resolution of 0.005 cu 
ft. Other metering systems may be used which are capable of maintaining 
sample volumes to within 2 percent. The metering system may be used in 
conjunction with a pitot tube to enable checks of isokinetic sampling 
rates.
    6.1.7  Barometer: The barometer may be mercury, aneroid, or other 
barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg 
(0.1 in Hg). In many cases, the barometric reading may be obtained from 
a nearby National Weather Service Station, in which case the station 
value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) is requested and an 
adjustment for elevation differences between the weather station and 
sampling point is applied at a rate of minus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in Hg) per 
30 m (100 ft) elevation increase (rate is plus 2.5 mm Hg per 30 m (100 
ft) of elevation decrease).
    6.1.8  Gas Density Determination Equipment: Temperature sensor and 
pressure gauge (as described in Sections 2.3 and 2.3 of EPA Method 2, 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A), and gas analyzer, if necessary (as described 
in EPA Method 3, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A). The temperature sensor 
ideally should be permanently attached to the pitot tube or sampling 
probe in a fixed configuration such that the top of the sensor extends 
beyond the leading edge of the probe sheath and does not touch any 
metal. Alternatively, the sensor may be attached just prior to use in 
the field. Note, however, that if the temperature sensor is attached in 
the field, the sensor must be placed in an interference-free arrangement 
with respect to the Type S pitot openings (see Figure 2-7, EPA Method 2, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A). As a second alternative, if a difference of 
no more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is to be 
introduced, the temperature gauge need not be attached to the probe or 
pitot tube.

                          6.2  Sample Recovery

    6.2.1  Probe Liner: Probe nozzle and brushes; bristle brushes with 
stainless steel wire handles are required. The probe brush shall have 
extensions of stainless steel, Teflon TM, or inert material 
at least as long as the probe. The brushes shall be properly sized and 
shaped to brush out the probe liner, the probe nozzle, and the 
impingers.
    6.2.2  Wash Bottles: One wash bottle is required. Polyethylene, 
Teflon TM, or glass wash bottles may be used for sample 
recovery.
    6.2.3  Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance: A graduated cylinder or 
balance is required to measure condensed water to the nearest 1 ml or 1 
g. Graduated cylinders shall have division not >2 ml. Laboratory 
balances capable of weighing to  0.5 g are required.
    6.2.4  Polyethylene Storage Containers: 500 ml wide-mouth 
polyethylene bottles are required to store impinger water samples.
    6.2.5  Rubber Policeman and Funnel: A rubber policeman and funnel 
are required to aid the transfer of material into and out of containers 
in the field.

                          6.3  Sample Analysis

    6.3.1  Spectrophotometer--B&L 70, 710, 2000, etc., or equivalent; 1 
cm pathlength cuvette holder.
    6.3.2  Disposable polystyrene cuvettes, pathlengh 1 cm, volume of 
about 4.5 ml.
    6.3.3  Pipettors--Fixed-volume Oxford pipet (250 l; 500 
l; 1000 l); adjustable volume Oxford or equivalent 
pipettor 1-5 ml model, set to 2.50 ml.
    6.3.4  Pipet tips for pipettors above.
    6.3.5  Parafilm, 2 deg. wide; cut into about 1'' squares.

                              7.0  Reagents

    7.1  High purity water: All references to water in this method refer 
to high purity water (ASTM Type I water or equivalent). The water purity 
will dictate the lower limits of formaldehyde quantification.
    7.2  Silica Gel: Silica gel shall be indicting type, 6-16 mesh. If 
the silica gel has been used previously, dry at 175 deg.C (350 deg.F) 
for 2 hours before using. New silica gel may be used as received. 
Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be 
used.
    7.3  Crushed Ice: Quantities ranging from 10-50 lbs may be necessary 
during a sampling run, depending upon ambient temperature. Samples which 
have been taken must be stored and shipped cold; sufficient ice for this 
purpose must be allowed.
    7.4  Quaternary ammonium compound stock solution: Prepare a stock 
solution of dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride (98 percent minimum assay, 
reagent grade) by dissolving 1.0 gram in 1000 ml water. This solution 
contains nominally 1000 g/ml quaternary ammonium compound, and 
is used as a biocide for some sources which are prone to microbial 
contamination.
    7.5  Pararosaniline: Weigh 0.16 grams pararosaniline (free base; 
assay of 95 percent or greater, C.I. 42500; Sigma P7632 has been found 
to be acceptable) into a 100 ml flask. Exercise care, since 
pararosaniline is a dye and will stain. Using a wash bottle with

[[Page 605]]

high-purity water, rinse the walls of the flask. Add no more than 25 ml 
water. Then, carefully add 20 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid to 
the flask. The flask will become warm after the addition of acid. Add a 
magnetic stir bar to the flask, cap, and place on a magnetic stirrer for 
approximately 4 hours. Then, add additional water so the total volume is 
100 ml. This solution is stable for several months when stored tightly 
capped at room temperature.
    7.6  Sodium sulfite: Weigh 0.10 grams anhydrous sodium sulfite into 
a 100 ml flask. Dilute to the mark with high purity water. Invert 15-20 
times to mix and dissolve the sodium sulfite. This solution must be 
prepared fresh every day.
    7.7  Formaldehyde standard solution: Pipet exactly 2.70 ml of 37 
percent formaldehyde solution into a 1000 ml volumetric flask which 
contains about 500 ml of high-purity water. Dilute to the mark with 
high-purity water. This solution contains nominally 1000 g/ml 
of formaldehyde, and is used to prepare the working formaldehyde 
standards. The exact formaldehyde concentration may be determined if 
needed by suitable modification of the sodium sulfite method (Reference: 
J.F. Walker, Formaldehyde (Third Edition), 1964.). The 1000 g/
ml formaldehyde stock solution is stable for at least a year if kept 
tightly closed, with the neck of the flask sealed with Parafilm. Store 
at room temperature.
    7.8  Working formaldehyde standards: Pipet exactly 10.0 ml of the 
1000 g/ml formaldehyde stock solution into a 100 ml volumetric 
flask which is about half full of high-purity water. Dilute to the mark 
with high-purity water, and invert 15-20 times to mix thoroughly. This 
solution contains nominally 100 g/ml formaldehyde. Prepare the 
working standards from this 100 g/ml standard solution and 
using the Oxford pipets:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Volumetric
                                                 L     flask
                                                   or 100       volume
        Working standard, /mL          g/   (dilute to
                                                mL solution   mark with
                                                                water)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.250.........................................          250          100
0.500.........................................          500          100
1.00..........................................         1000          100
2.00..........................................         2000          100
3.00..........................................         1500           50
------------------------------------------------------------------------

The 100 g/ml stock solution is stable for 4 weeks if kept 
refrigerated between analyses. The working standards (0.25-3.00 
g/ml) should be prepared fresh every day, consistent with good 
laboratory practice for trace analysis. If the laboratory water is not 
of sufficient purity, it may be necessary to prepare the working 
standards every day. The laboratory must establish that the working 
standards are stable--DO NOT assume that your working standards are 
stable for more than a day unless you have verified this by actual 
testing for several series of working standards.

                         8.0  Sample Collection

    8.1  Because of the complexity of this method, field personnel 
should be trained in and experienced with the test procedures in order 
to obtain reliable results.

                       8.2  Laboratory Preparation

    8.2.1  All the components shall be maintained and calibrated 
according to the procedure described in APTD-0576, unless otherwise 
specified.
    8.2.2  Weigh several 200 to 300 g portions of silica gel in airtight 
containers to the nearest 0.5 g. Record on each container the total 
weight of the silica gel plus containers. As an alternative to 
preweighing the silica gel, it may instead be weighed directly in the 
impinger or sampling holder just prior to train assembly.

                  8.3  Preliminary Field Determinations

    8.3.1  Select the sampling site and the minimum number of sampling 
points according to EPA Method 1, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, or other 
relevant criteria. Determine the stack pressure, temperature, and range 
of velocity heads using EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. A 
leak-check of the pitot lines according to Section 3.1 of EPA Method 2, 
40 CFR part 60, appendix A, must be performed. Determine the stack gas 
moisture content using EPA Approximation Method 4,40 CFR part 60, 
appendix A, or its alternatives to establish estimates of isokinetic 
sampling rate settings. Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight, as 
described in EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, Section 3.6. If 
integrated EPA Method 3, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, sampling is used 
for molecular weight determination, the integrated bag sample shall be 
taken simultaneously with, and for the same total length of time as, the 
sample run.
    8.3.2  Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads so 
that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain 
isokinetic sampling rates below 28 l/min (1.0 cfm). During the run do 
not change the nozzle. Ensure that the proper differential pressure 
gauge is chosen for the range of velocity heads encountered (see Section 
2.2 of EPA Method 2, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A).
    8.3.3  Select a suitable probe liner and probe length so that all 
traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, to reduce the length 
of the probe, consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack.
    8.3.4  A minimum of 30 cu ft of sample volume is suggested for 
emission sources with stack concentrations not greater than 23,000,000 
ppbv. Additional sample volume

[[Page 606]]

shall be collected as necessitated by the capacity of the water reagent 
and analytical detection limit constraint. Reduced sample volume may be 
collected as long as the final concentration of formaldehyde in the 
stack sample is greater than 10 (ten) times the detection limit.
    8.3.5  Determine the total length of sampling time needed to obtain 
the identified minimum volume by comparing the anticipated average 
sampling rate with the volume requirement. Allocate the same time to all 
traverse points defined by EPA Method 1, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. To 
avoid timekeeping errors, the length of time sampled at each traverse 
point should be an integer or an integer plus 0.5 min.
    8.3.6  In some circumstances (e.g., batch cycles) it may be 
necessary to sample for shorter times at the traverse points and to 
obtain smaller gas-volume samples. In these cases, careful documentation 
must be maintained in order to allow accurate calculations of 
concentrations.

                  8.4  Preparation of Collection Train

    8.4.1  During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep 
all openings where contamination can occur covered with 
TeflonTM film or aluminum foil until just prior to assembly 
or until sampling is about to begin.
    8.4.2  Place 100 ml of water in each of the first two impingers, and 
leave the third impinger empty. If additional capacity is required for 
high expected concentrations of formaldehyde in the stack gas, 200 ml of 
water per impinger may be used or additional impingers may be used for 
sampling. Transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of pre-weighed silica gel 
from its container to the fourth impinger. Care should be taken to 
ensure that the silica gel is not entrained and carried out from the 
impinger during sampling. Place the silica gel container in a clean 
place for later use in the sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight of 
the silica gel plus impinger may be determined to the nearest 0.5 g and 
recorded.
    8.4.3  With a glass or quartz liner, install the selected nozzle 
using a Viton-A O-ring when stack temperatures are 260 deg.C (500 deg.F) 
and a woven glass-fiber gasket when temperatures are higher. See APTD-
0576 for details. Other connection systems utilizing either 316 
stainless steel or TeflonTM ferrules may be used. Mark the 
probe with heat-resistant tape or by some other method to denote the 
proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point.
    8.4.4  Assemble the train as shown in Figure 1. During assembly, a 
very light coating of silicone grease may be used on ground-glass joints 
of the impingers, but the silicone grease should be limited to the outer 
portion (see APTD-0576) of the ground-glass joints to minimize silicone 
grease contamination. If necessary, TeflonTM tape may be used 
to seal leaks. Connect all temperature sensors to an appropriate 
potentiometer/display unit. Check all temperature sensors at ambient 
temperatures.
    8.4.5  Place crushed ice all around the impingers.
    8.4.6  Turn on and set the probe heating system at the desired 
operating temperature. Allow time for the temperature to stabilize.

                       8.5  Leak-Check Procedures

    8.5.1  Pre-test Leak-check: Recommended, but not required. If the 
tester elects to conduct the pre-test leak-check, the following 
procedure shall be used.
    8.5.1.1  After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and 
set probe heating system at the desired operating temperature. Allow 
time for the temperature to stabilize. If a Viton-a O-ring or other 
leak-free connection is used in assembling the probe nozzle to the probe 
liner, leak-check the train at the sampling site by plugging the nozzle 
and pulling a 381 mm Hg (15 in Hg) vacuum.

    Note: A lower vacuum may be used, provided that the lower vacuum is 
not exceeded during the test.

    If a woven glass fiber gasket is used, do not connect the probe to 
the train during the leak-check. Instead, leak-check the train by first 
attaching a carbon-filled leak-check impinger to the inlet and then 
plugging the inlet and pulling a 381 mm Hg (15 in Hg) vacuum. (A lower 
vacuum may be used if this lower vacuum is not exceeded during the 
test.) Next connect the probe to the train and leak-check at about 25 mm 
Hg (1 in Hg) vacuum. Alternatively, leak-check the probe with the rest 
of the sampling train in one step at 381 mm Hg (15 in Hg) vacuum. 
Leakage rates in excess of (a) 4 percent of the average sampling rate or 
(b) 0.00057 m3/min (0.02 cfm), whichever is less, are 
unacceptable.
    8.5.1.2  The following leak-check instructions for the sampling 
train described in APTD-0576 and APTD-0581 may be helpful. Start the 
pump with the fine-adjust valve fully open and coarse-valve completely 
closed. Partially open the coarse-adjust valve and slowly close the 
fine-adjust valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not reverse 
direction of the fine-adjust valve, as liquid will back up into the 
train. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, either perform the leak-check 
at this higher vacuum or end the leak-check, as described below, and 
start over.
    8.5.1.3  When the leak-check is completed, first slowly remove the 
plug from the inlet to the probe. When the vacuum drops to 127 mm (5 in) 
Hg or less, immediately close the coarse-adjust valve. Switch off the 
pumping system and reopen the fine-adjust valve. Do not reopen the fine-
adjust valve until the

[[Page 607]]

coarse-adjust valve has been closed to prevent the liquid in the 
impingers from being forced backward in the sampling line and silica gel 
from being entrained backward into the third impinger.
    8.5.2  Leak-checks During Sampling Run:
    8.5.2.1  If, during the sampling run, a component change (e.g., 
impinger) becomes necessary, a leak-check shall be conducted immediately 
after the interruption of sampling and before the change is made. The 
leak-check shall be done according to the procedure described in Section 
10.3.3, except that it shall be done at a vacuum greater than or equal 
to the maximum value recorded up to that point in the test. If the 
leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.0057 m3/min 
(0.02 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is 
less), the results are acceptable. If a higher leakage rate is obtained, 
the tester must void the sampling run.

    Note: Any correction of the sample volume by calculation reduces the 
integrity of the pollutant concentration data generated and must be 
avoided.

    8.5.2.2  Immediately after component changes, leak-checks are 
optional. If performed, the procedure described in section 8.5.1.1 shall 
be used.
    8.5.3  Post-test Leak-check:
    8.5.3.1  A leak-check is mandatory at the conclusion of each 
sampling run. The leak-check shall be done with the same procedures as 
the pre-test leak-check, except that the post-test leak-check shall be 
conducted at a vacuum greater than or equal to the maximum value reached 
during the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater 
than 0.00057 m3/min (0.02 cfm) or 4 percent of the average 
sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable. If, 
however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, the tester shall record the 
leakage rate and void the sampling run.

                      8.6  Sampling Train Operation

    8.6.1  During the sampling run, maintain an isokinetic sampling rate 
to within 10 percent of true isokinetic, below 28 l/min (1.0 cfm). 
Maintain a temperature around the probe of 120 deg.C  
14 deg.C (248 deg.  25 deg.F).
    8.6.2  For each run, record the data on a data sheet such as the one 
shown in Figure 2. Be sure to record the initial dry-gas meter reading. 
Record the dry-gas meter readings at the beginning and end of each 
sampling time increment, when changes in flow rates are made, before and 
after each leak-check, and when sampling is halted. Take other readings 
required by Figure 2 at least once at each sample point during each time 
increment and additional readings when significant adjustments (20 
percent variation in velocity head readings) necessitate additional 
adjustments in flow rate. Level and zero the manometer. Because the 
manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature 
changes, make periodic checks during the traverse.

[[Page 608]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.051

      

[[Page 609]]



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                               Gas sample                    Temperature
                                                                                   Pressure                temperature at dry                   of gas
                                                         Stack       Velocity    differential     Gas           gas meter          Filter      leaving
                                 Sampling    Vacuum   temperature      head         across       sample  ----------------------    holder     condenser
     Traverse point number      time  (e)    mm Hg        (T )     (P)     orifice      volume                         temperature    or last
                                   min.     (in. Hg)    deg.C (    mm  (in) H2O    meter  mm       m3       Inlet      Outlet      deg.C (     impinger
                                                         deg.F)                    H2O  (in.     (ft3)     deg.C (    deg.C (      deg.F)      deg.C (
                                                                                     H2O)                   deg.F)     deg.F)                   deg.F)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........  .........  .........  ...........  ...........
                                .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........  .........  .........  ...........  ...........
                                .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........  .........  .........  ...........  ...........
                                .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........  .........  .........  ...........  ...........
                                .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........  .........  .........  ...........  ...........
    Total.....................  .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........       Avg.       Avg.  ...........  ...........
                                                                                                         ----------------------
Average.......................  .........  .........  ...........  ............  ............  .........       Avg.  .........  ...........  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 610]]

    8.6.3  Clean the stack access ports prior to the test run to 
eliminate the chance of sampling deposited material. To begin sampling, 
remove the nozzle cap, verify that the probe heating system are at the 
specified temperature, and verify that the pitot tube and probe are 
properly positioned. Position the nozzle at the first traverse point, 
with the tip pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start 
the pump and adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. Nomographs, which 
aid in the rapid adjustment of the isokinetic sampling rate without 
excessive computations, are available. These nomographs are designed for 
use when the Type S pitot tube coefficient is 0.84  0.02 and 
the stack gas equivalent density (dry molecular weight) is equal to 29 
 4. APTD-0576 details the procedure for using the 
nomographs. If the stack gas molecular weight and the pitot tube 
coefficient are outside the above ranges, do not use the nomographs 
unless appropriate steps are taken to compensate for the deviations.
    8.6.4  When the stack is under significant negative pressure 
(equivalent to the height of the impinger stem), take care to close the 
coarse-adjust valve before inserting the probe into the stack in order 
to prevent liquid from backing up through the train. If necessary, a low 
vacuum on the train may have to be started prior to entering the stack.
    8.6.5  When the probe is in position, block off the openings around 
the probe and stack access port to prevent unrepresentative dilution of 
the gas stream.
    8.6.6  Traverse the stack cross section, as required by EPA Method 
1, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, being careful not to bump the probe 
nozzle into the stack walls when sampling near the walls or when 
removing or inserting the probe through the access port, in order to 
minimize the chance of extracting deposited material.
    8.6.7  During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the 
temperature around the probe at the proper levels. Add more ice and, if 
necessary, salt, to maintain a temperature of <20 deg.C (68 deg.F) at 
the silica gel outlet.
    8.6.8  A single train shall be used for the entire sampling run, 
except in cases where simultaneous sampling is required in two or more 
separate ducts or at two or more different locations within the same 
duct, or in cases where equipment failure necessitates a change of 
trains. An additional train or trains may also be used for sampling when 
the capacity of a single train is exceeded.
    8.6.9  When two or more trains are used, separate analyses of 
components from each train shall be performed. If multiple trains have 
been used because the capacity of a single train would be exceeded, 
first impingers from each train may be combined, and second impingers 
from each train may be combined.
    8.6.10  At the end of the sampling run, turn off the coarse-adjust 
valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, 
record the final dry gas meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak-
check. Also, check the pitot lines as described in EPA Method 2, 40 CFR 
part 60, appendix A. The lines must pass this leak-check in order to 
validate the velocity-head data.
    8.6.11  Calculate percent isokineticity (see Method 2) to determine 
whether the run was valid or another test should be made.

                  8.7  Sample Preservation and Handling

    8.7.1  Samples from most sources applicable to this method have 
acceptable holding times using normal handling practices (shipping 
samples iced, storing in refrigerator at 2 deg.C until analysis). 
However, forming section stacks and other sources using waste water 
sprays may be subject to microbial contamination. For these sources, a 
biocide (quaternary ammonium compound solution) may be added to 
collected samples to improve sample stability and method ruggedness.
    8.7.2  Sample holding time: Samples should be analyzed within 14 
days of collection. Samples must be refrigerated/kept cold for the 
entire period preceding analysis. After the samples have been brought to 
room temperature for analysis, any analyses needed should be performed 
on the same day. Repeated cycles of warming the samples to room 
temperature/refrigerating/rewarming, then analyzing again, etc., have 
not been investigated in depth to evaluate if analyte levels remain 
stable for all sources.
    8.7.3  Additional studies will be performed to evaluate whether 
longer sample holding times are feasible for this method.

                          8.8  Sample Recovery

    8.8.1  Preparation:
    8.8.1.1  Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is 
removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the 
probe to cool. When the probe can be handled safely, wipe off all 
external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle and place a 
cap over the tip to prevent losing or gaining particulate matter. Do not 
cap the probe tightly while the sampling train is cooling because a 
vacuum will be created, drawing liquid from the impingers back through 
the sampling train.
    8.8.1.2  Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, 
remove the probe from the sampling train and cap the open outlet, being 
careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Remove the 
umbilical cord from the last impinger and cap the impinger. If a 
flexible line is used, let any condensed water or liquid drain into the 
impingers. Cap off any open impinger inlets and outlets. Ground glass 
stoppers, Teflon TM caps, or

[[Page 611]]

caps of other inert materials may be used to seal all openings.
    8.8.1.3  Transfer the probe and impinger assembly to an area that is 
clean and protected from wind so that the chances of contaminating or 
losing the sample are minimized.
    8.8.1.4  Inspect the train before and during disassembly, and note 
any abnormal conditions.
    8.8.1.5  Save a portion of the washing solution (high purity water) 
used for cleanup as a blank.
    8.8.2  Sample Containers:
    8.8.2.1  Container 1: Probe and Impinger Catches. Using a graduated 
cylinder, measure to the nearest ml, and record the volume of the 
solution in the first three impingers. Alternatively, the solution may 
be weighed to the nearest 0.5 g. Include any condensate in the probe in 
this determination. Transfer the combined impinger solution from the 
graduated cylinder into the polyethylene bottle. Taking care that dust 
on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into 
the sample, clean all surfaces to which the sample is exposed (including 
the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, first three impingers, and 
impinger connectors) with water. Use less than 400 ml for the entire 
waste (250 ml would be better, if possible). Add the rinse water to the 
sample container.
    8.8.2.1.1  Carefully remove the probe nozzle and rinse the inside 
surface with water from a wash bottle. Brush with a bristle brush and 
rinse until the rinse shows no visible particles, after which make a 
final rinse of the inside surface. Brush and rinse the inside parts of 
the Swagelok (or equivalent) fitting with water in a similar way.
    8.8.2.1.2  Rinse the probe liner with water. While squirting the 
water into the upper end of the probe, tilt and rotate the probe so that 
all inside surfaces will be wetted with water. Let the water drain from 
the lower end into the sample container. The tester may use a funnel 
(glass or polyethylene) to aid in transferring the liquid washes to the 
container. Follow the rinse with a bristle brush. Hold the probe in an 
inclined position, and squirt water into the upper end as the probe 
brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe. Hold the 
sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any 
water and particulate matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the 
brush through the probe three times or more. Rinse the brush with water 
and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After 
the brushing, make a final rinse of the probe as describe above.

    Note: Two people should clean the probe in order to minimize sample 
losses. Between sampling runs, brushes must be kept clean and free from 
contamination.

    8.8.2.1.3  Rinse the inside surface of each of the first three 
impingers (and connecting tubing) three separate times. Use a small 
portion of water for each rinse, and brush each surface to which the 
sample is exposed with a bristle brush to ensure recovery of fine 
particulate matter. Make a final rinse of each surface and of the brush, 
using water.
    8.8.2.1.4  After all water washing and particulate matter have been 
collected in the sample container, tighten the lid so the sample will 
not leak out when the container is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the 
height of the fluid level to determine whether leakage occurs during 
transport. Label the container clearly to identify its contents.
    8.8.2.1.5  If the first two impingers are to be analyzed separately 
to check for breakthrough, separate the contents and rinses of the two 
impingers into individual containers. Care must be taken to avoid 
physical carryover from the first impinger to the second. Any physical 
carryover of collected moisture into the second impinger will invalidate 
a breakthrough assessment.
    8.8.2.2  Container 2: Sample Blank. Prepare a blank by using a 
polyethylene container and adding a volume of water equal to the total 
volume in Container 1. Process the blank in the same manner as Container 
1.
    8.8.2.3  Container 3: Silica Gel. Note the color of the indicating 
silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent and make a 
notation of its condition. The impinger containing the silica gel may be 
used as a sample transport container with both ends sealed with tightly 
fitting caps or plugs. Ground-glass stoppers or TeflonTM caps 
maybe used. The silica gel impinger should then be labeled, covered with 
aluminum foil, and packaged on ice for transport to the laboratory. If 
the silica gel is removed from the impinger, the tester may use a funnel 
to pour the silica gel and a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel 
from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of 
dust particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to 
remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture 
calculations, do not use water or other liquids to transfer the silica 
gel. If a balance is available in the field, the spent silica gel (or 
silica gel plus impinger) may be weighed to the nearest
0.5 g.
    8.8.2.4  Sample containers should be placed in a cooler, cooled by 
(although not in contact with) ice. Putting sample bottles in Zip-
LockTM bags can aid in maintaining the integrity of the 
sample labels. Sample containers should be placed vertically to avoid 
leakage during shipment. Samples should be cooled during shipment so 
they will be received cold at the laboratory. It is critical that 
samples be chilled immediately after recovery. If the source is 
susceptible to microbial contamination from wash water (e.g.

[[Page 612]]

forming section stack), add biocide as directed in section 8.2.5.
    8.8.2.5  A quaternary ammonium compound can be used as a biocide to 
stabilize samples against microbial degradation following collection. 
Using the stock quaternary ammonium compound (QAC) solution; add 2.5 ml 
QAC solution for every 100 ml of recovered sample volume (estimate of 
volume is satisfactory) immediately after collection. The total volume 
of QAC solution must be accurately known and recorded, to correct for 
any dilution caused by the QAC solution addition.
    8.8.3  Sample Preparation for Analysis 8.8.3.1 The sample should be 
refrigerated if the analysis will not be performed on the day of 
sampling. Allow the sample to warm at room temperature for about two 
hours (if it has been refrigerated) prior to analyzing.
    8.8.3.2  Analyze the sample by the pararosaniline method, as 
described in Section 11. If the color-developed sample has an absorbance 
above the highest standard, a suitable dilution in high purity water 
should be prepared and analyzed.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    9.1  Sampling: See EPA Manual 600/4-77-02b for Method 5 quality 
control.
    9.2  Analysis: The quality assurance program required for this 
method includes the analysis of the field and method blanks, and 
procedure validations. The positive identification and quantitation of 
formaldehyde are dependent on the integrity of the samples received and 
the precision and accuracy of the analytical methodology. Quality 
assurance procedures for this method are designed to monitor the 
performance of the analytical methodology and to provide the required 
information to take corrective action if problems are observed in 
laboratory operations or in field sampling activities.
    9.2.1  Field Blanks: Field blanks must be submitted with the samples 
collected at each sampling site. The field blanks include the sample 
bottles containing aliquots of sample recover water, and water reagent. 
At a minimum, one complete sampling train will be assembled in the field 
staging area, taken to the sampling area, and leak-checked at the 
beginning and end of the testing (or for the same total number of times 
as the actual sampling train). The probe of the blank train must be 
heated during the sample test. The train will be recovered as if it were 
an actual test sample. No gaseous sample will be passed through the 
blank sampling train.
    9.2.2  Blank Correction: The field blank formaldehyde concentrations 
will be subtracted from the appropriate sample formaldehyde 
concentrations. Blank formaldehyde concentrations above 0.25 g/
ml should be considered suspect, and subtraction from the sample 
formaldehyde concentrations should be performed in a manner acceptable 
to the Administrator.
    9.2.3  Method Blanks: A method blank must be prepared for each set 
of analytical operations, to evaluate contamination and artifacts that 
can be derived from glassware, reagents, and sample handling in the 
laboratory.

                             10  Calibration

    10.1  Probe Nozzle: Probe nozzles shall be calibrated before their 
initial use in the field. Using a micrometer, measure the inside 
diameter of the nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in). Make 
measurements at three separate places across the diameter and obtain the 
average of the measurements. The difference between the high and low 
numbers shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in). When the nozzle becomes 
nicked or corroded, it shall be repaired and calibrated, or replaced 
with a calibrated nozzle before use. Each nozzle must be permanently and 
uniquely identified.
    10.2  Pitot Tube: The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be calibrated 
according to the procedure outlined in Section 4 of EPA Method 2, or 
assigned a nominal coefficient of 0.84 if it is not visibly nicked or 
corroded and if it meets design and intercomponent spacing 
specifications.

                          10.3  Metering System

    10.3.1  Before its initial use in the field, the metering system 
shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in APTD-0576. 
Instead of physically adjusting the dry-gas meter dial readings to 
correspond to the wet-test meter readings, calibration factors may be 
used to correct the gas meter dial readings mathematically to the proper 
values. Before calibrating the metering system, it is suggested that a 
leak-check be conducted. For metering systems having diaphragm pumps, 
the normal leak-check procedure will not delete leakages with the pump. 
For these cases, the following leak-check procedure will apply: Make a 
ten-minute calibration run at 0.00057 m3/min (0.02 cfm). At 
the end of the run, take the difference of the measured wet-test and 
dry-gas meter volumes and divide the difference by 10 to get the leak 
rate. The leak rate should not exceed 0.00057 m3/min (0.02 
cfm).
    10.3.2  After each field use, check the calibration of the metering 
system by performing three calibration runs at a single intermediate 
orifice setting (based on the previous field test). Set the vacuum at 
the maximum value reached during the test series. To adjust the vacuum, 
insert a valve between the wet-test meter and the inlet of the metering 
system. Calculate the average

[[Page 613]]

value of the calibration factor. If the calibration has changed by more 
than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of orifice 
settings, as outlined in APTD-0576.
    10.3.3  Leak-check of metering system: The portion of the sampling 
train from the pump to the orifice meter (see Figure 1) should be leak-
checked prior to initial use and after each shipment. Leakage after the 
pump will result in less volume being recorded than is actually sampled. 
Use the following procedure: Close the main valve on the meter box. 
Insert a one-hole rubber stopper with rubber tubing attached into the 
orifice exhaust pipe. Disconnect and vent the low side of the orifice 
manometer. Close off the low side orifice tap. Pressurize the system to 
13-18 cm (5-7 in) water column by blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch 
off the tubing and observe the manometer for 1 min. A loss of pressure 
on the manometer indicates a leak in the meter box. Leaks must be 
corrected.

    Note: If the dry-gas meter coefficient values obtained before and 
after a test series differ by >5 percent, either the test series must be 
voided or calculations for test series must be performed using whichever 
meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of 
total sample volume.

    10.4  Probe Heater: The probe heating system must be calibrated 
before its initial use in the field according to the procedure outlined 
in APTD-0576. Probes constructed according to APTD-0581 need not be 
calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD-0576 are used.
    10.5  Temperature gauges: Use the procedure in section 4.3 of USEPA 
Method 2 to calibrate in-stack temperature gauges. Dial thermometers 
such as are used for the dry gas meter and condenser outlet, shall be 
calibrated against mercury-in-glass thermometers.
    10.6  Barometer: Adjust the barometer initially and before each test 
series to agree to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in Hg) of the 
mercury barometer. Alternately, if a National Weather Service Station 
(NWSS) is located at the same altitude above sea level as the test site, 
the barometric pressure reported by the NWSS may be used.
    10.7  Balance: Calibrate the balance before each test series, using 
Class S standard weights. The weights must be within 0.5 
percent of the standards, or the balance must be adjusted to meet these 
limits.

                      11.0  Procedure for Analysis.

    The working formaldehyde standards (0.25, 0.50, 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 
g/ml) are analyzed and a calibration curve is calculated for 
each day's analysis. The standards should be analyzed first to ensure 
that the method is working properly prior to analyzing the samples. In 
addition, a sample of the high-purity water should also be analyzed and 
used as a ``0'' formaldehyde standard.
    The procedure for analysis of samples and standards is identical: 
Using the pipet set to 2.50 ml, pipet 2.50 ml of the solution to be 
analyzed into a polystyrene cuvette. Using the 250 l pipet, 
pipet 250 l of the pararosaniline reagent solution into the 
cuvette. Seal the top of the cuvette with a Parafilm square and shake at 
least 30 seconds to ensure the solution in the cuvette is well-mixed. 
Peel back a corner of the Parafilm so the next reagent can be added. 
Using the 250 l pipet, pipet 250 l of the sodium 
sulfite reagent solution into the cuvette. Reseal the cuvette with the 
Parafilm, and again shake for about 30 seconds to mix the solution in 
the cuvette. Record the time of addition of the sodium sulfite and let 
the color develop at room temperature for 60 minutes. Set the 
spectrophotometer to 570 nm and set to read in Absorbance Units. The 
spectrophotometer should be equipped with a holder for the 1-cm 
pathlength cuvettes. Place cuvette(s) containing high-purity water in 
the spectrophotometer and adjust to read 0.000 AU.
    After the 60 minutes color development period, read the standard and 
samples in the spectrophotometer. Record the absorbance reading for each 
cuvette. The calibration curve is calculated by linear regression, with 
the formaldehyde concentration as the ``x'' coordinate of the pair, and 
the absorbance reading as the ``y'' coordinate. The procedure is very 
reproducible, and typically will yield values similar to these for the 
calibration curve:

Correlation Coefficient: 0.9999
Slope: 0.50
Y-Intercept: 0.090

The formaldehyde concentration of the samples can be found by using the 
trend-line feature of the calculator or computer program used for the 
linear regression. For example, the TI-55 calculators use the ``X'' key 
(this gives the predicted formaldehyde concentration for the value of 
the absorbance you key in for the sample). Multiply the formaldehyde 
concentration from the sample by the dilution factor, if any, for the 
sample to give the formaldehyde concentration of the original, 
undiluted, sample (units will be micrograms/ml).

               11.1  Notes on the Pararosaniline Procedure

    11.1.1  The pararosaniline method is temperature-sensitive. However, 
the small fluctuations typical of a laboratory will not significantly 
affect the results.
    11.1.2  The calibration curve is linear to beyond 4 ``g/
ml'' formaldehyde, however, a

[[Page 614]]

research-grade spectrophotometer is required to reproducibly read the 
high absorbance values. Consult your instrument manual to evaluate the 
capability of the spectrophotometer.
    11.1.3  The quality of the laboratory water used to prepare 
standards and make dilutions is critical. It is important that the 
cautions given in the Reagents section be observed. This procedure 
allows quantitation of formaldehyde at very low levels, and thus it is 
imperative to avoid contamination from other sources of formaldehyde and 
to exercise the degree of care required for trace analyses.
    11.1.4  The analyst should become familiar with the operation of the 
Oxford or equivalent pipettors before using them for an analysis. Follow 
the instructions of the manufacturer; one can pipet water into a tared 
container on any analytical balance to check pipet accuracy and 
precision. This will also establish if the proper technique is being 
used. Always use a new tip for each pipetting operation.
    11.1.5  This procedure follows the recommendations of ASTM Standard 
Guide D 3614, reading all solutions versus water in the reference cell. 
This allows the absorbance of the blank to be tracked on a daily basis. 
Refer to ASTM D 3614 for more information.

                           12.0  Calculations

    Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure 
beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final 
calculations.

                12.1  Calculations of Total Formaldehyde

    12.1.1  To determine the total formaldehyde in mg, use the following 
equation if biocide was not used:
    Total mg formaldehyde=
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.043
    
Where:
    Cd = measured conc. formaldehyde, g/ml
V = total volume of stack sample, ml
DF = dilution factor

    12.1.2  To determine the total formaldehyde in mg, use the following 
equation if biocide was used:
    Total mg formaldehyde=
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.044
    
Where:

Cd = measured conc. formaldehyde, g/ml
V = total volume of stack sample, ml
B = total volume of biocide added to sample, ml
DF = dilution factor

    12.2  Formaldehyde concentration (mg/m3) in stack gas. 
Determine the formaldehyde concentration (mg/m3) in the stack 
gas using the following equation: Formaldehyde concentration (mg/
m3) =
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.045

Where:

K = 35.31 cu ft/m3 for Vm(std) in English units, 
          or
K = 1.00 m3/m3 for Vm(std) in metric 
          units
Vm(std) = volume of gas sample measured by a dry gas meter, 
          corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf)

    12.3  Average dry gas meter temperature and average orifice pressure 
drop are obtained from the data sheet.
    12.4  Dry Gas Volume: Calculate Vm(std) and adjust for 
leakage, if necessary, using the equation in Section 6.3 of EPA Method 
5, 40 CFR part 60, appendix A.
    12.5  Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content: Calculated the 
volume of water vapor and moisture content from equations 5-2 and 5-3 of 
EPA Method 5.

                        13.0  Method Performance

    The precision of this method is estimated to be better than 
5 percent, expressed as  the percent relative 
standard deviation.

                 14.0  Pollution Prevention. (Reserved)

                   15.0  Waste Management. (Reserved)

                            16.0  References

R.R. Miksch, et al., Analytical Chemistry, November 1981, 53 pp. 2118-
          2123.
J.F. Walker, Formaldehyde, Third Edition, 1964.
US EPA 40 CFR, part 60, Appendix A, Test Methods 1-5

Method 318--Extractive FTIR Method for the Measurement of Emissions From 
             the Mineral Wool and Wool Fiberglass Industries

                       1.0  Scope and Application

    This method has been validated and approved for mineral wool and 
wool fiberglass sources. This method may not be applied to other source 
categories without validation and approval by the Administrator 
according to the procedures in Test Method 301, 40 CFR part 63, appendix 
A. For sources seeking to apply FTIR to other source categories, Test 
Method 320 (40 CFR part 63, appendix A) may be utilized.
    1.1  Scope. The analytes measured by this method and their CAS 
numbers are:

Carbon Monoxide  630-08-0
Carbonyl Sulfide  463-58-1
Formaldehyde  50-00-0
Methanol  1455-13-6
Phenol  108-95-2

[[Page 615]]

                           1.2  Applicability

    1.2.1  This method is applicable for the determination of 
formaldehyde, phenol, methanol, carbonyl sulfide (COS) and carbon 
monoxide (CO) concentrations in controlled and uncontrolled emissions 
from manufacturing processes using phenolic resins. The compounds are 
analyzed in the mid-infrared spectral region (about 400 to 4000 cm-1 or 
25 to 2.5 m). Suggested analytical regions are given below 
(Table 1). Slight deviations from these recommended regions may be 
necessary due to variations in moisture content and ammonia 
concentration from source to source.

                                  *COM025*Table 1.--Example Analytical Regions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Compound                Analytical region (cm-1)  FLm - FUm           Potential interferants
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Formaldehyde.....................  2840.93-2679.83.......................  Water, Methane.
Phenol...........................  1231.32-1131.47.......................  Water, Ammonia, Methane.
Methanol.........................  1041.56-1019.95.......................  Water, Ammonia.
COSa.............................  2028.4-2091.9.........................  Water, CO2, CO.
COa..............................  2092.1-2191.8.........................  Water, CO2, COS.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Suggested analytical regions assume about 15 percent moisture and CO2, and that COS and CO have about the same
  absorbance (in the range of 10 to 50 ppm). If CO and COS are hundreds of ppm or higher, then CO2 and moisture
  interference is reduced. If CO or COS is present at high concentration and the other at low concentration,
  then a shorter cell pathlength may be necessary to measure the high concentration component.

1.2.2  This method does not apply when: (a) Polymerization of 
formaldehyde occurs, (b) moisture condenses in either the sampling 
system or the instrumentation, and (c) when moisture content of the gas 
stream is so high relative to the analyte concentrations that it causes 
severe spectral interference.

                    1.3  Method Range and Sensitivity

    1.3.1  The analytical range is a function of instrumental design and 
composition of the gas stream. Theoretical detection limits depend, in 
part, on (a) the absorption coefficient of the compound in the 
analytical frequency region, (b) the spectral resolution, (c) 
interferometer sampling time, (d) detector sensitivity and response, and 
(e) absorption pathlength.
    1.3.2  Practically, there is no upper limit to the range. The 
practical lower detection limit is usually higher than the theoretical 
value, and depends on (a) moisture content of the flue gas, (b) presence 
of interferants, and (c) losses in the sampling system. In general, a 22 
meter pathlength cell in a suitable sampling system can achieve 
practical detection limits of 1.5 ppm for three compounds (formaldehyde, 
phenol, and methanol) at moisture levels up to 15 percent by volume. 
Sources with uncontrolled emissions of CO and COS may require a 4 meter 
pathlength cell due to high concentration levels. For these two 
compounds, make sure absorbance of highest concentration component is 
1.0.

                      1.4  Data Quality Objectives

1.4.1  In designing or configuring the system, the analyst first sets 
the data quality objectives, i.e., the desired lower detection limit 
(DLi) and the desired analytical uncertainty (AUi) 
for each compound. The instrumental parameters (factors b, c, d, and e 
in Section 1.3.1) are then chosen to meet these requirements, using 
Appendix D of the FTIR Protocol.
1.4.2  Data quality for each application is determined, in part, by 
measuring the RMS (Root Mean Square) noise level in each analytical 
spectral region (Appendix C of the FTIR Protocol). The RMS noise is 
defined as the RMSD (Root Mean Square Deviation) of the absorbance 
values in an analytical region from the mean absorbance value of the 
region. Appendix D of the FTIR Protocol defines the MAUim 
(minimum analyte uncertainty of the ith analyte in the 
mth analytical region). The MAU is the minimum analyte 
concentration for which the analytical uncertainty limit 
(AUi) can be maintained: if the measured analyte 
concentration is less than MAUi, then data quality is 
unacceptable. Table 2 gives some example DL and AU values along with 
calculated areas and MAU values using the protocol procedures.

[[Page 616]]


                                                    Table 2.--Example Pre-Test Protocol Calculations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Protocol value                         Form                        Phenol                      Methanol                Protocol  appendix
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference concentrationa (ppm-        3.016                        3.017                        5.064                        ...........................
 meters)/K.
Reference Band Area.................  8.2544                       16.6417                      4.9416                       B
DL (ppm-meters)/K...................  0.1117                       0.1117                       0.1117                       B
AU..................................  0.2                          0.2                          0.2                          B
CL..................................  0.02234                      0.02234                      0.02234                      B
FL..................................  2679.83                      1131.47                      1019.95                      B
FU..................................  2840.93                      1231.32                      1041.56                      B
FC..................................  2760.38                      1181.395                     1030.755                     B
AAI (ppm-meters)/K..................  0.18440                      0.01201                      0.00132                      B
RMSD................................  2.28E-03                     1.21E-03                     1.07E-03                     C
MAU (ppm-meters)/K..................  4.45E-02                     7.26E-03                     4.68E-03                     D
MAU (ppm at 22).....................  0.0797                       0.0130                       0.0084                       D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Concentration units are: ppm concentration of the reference sample (ASC), times the path length of the FTIR cell used when the reference spectrum was
  measured (meters), divided by the absolute temperature of the reference sample in Kelvin (K), or (ppm-meters)/K.


[[Page 617]]

                         2.0  Summary of Method

                             2.1  Principle

    2.1.1  Molecules are composed of chemically bonded atoms, which are 
in constant motion. The atomic motions result in bond deformations (bond 
stretching and bond-angle bending). The number of fundamental (or 
independent) vibrational motions depends on the number of atoms (N) in 
the molecule. At typical testing temperatures, most molecules are in the 
ground-state vibrational state for most of their fundamental vibrational 
motions. A molecule can undergo a transition from its ground state (for 
a particular vibration) to the first excited state by absorbing a 
quantum of light at a frequency characteristic of the molecule and the 
molecular motion. Molecules also undergo rotational transitions by 
absorbing energies in the far-infrared or microwave spectral regions. 
Rotational transition absorbencies are superimposed on the vibrational 
absorbencies to give a characteristic shape to each rotational-
vibrational absorbance ``band.''
    2.1.2  Most molecules exhibit more than one absorbance band in 
several frequency regions to produce an infrared spectrum (a 
characteristic pattern of bands or a ``fingerprint'') that is unique to 
each molecule. The infrared spectrum of a molecule depends on its 
structure (bond lengths, bond angles, bond strengths, and atomic 
masses). Even small differences in structure can produce significantly 
different spectra.
    2.1.3  Spectral band intensities vary with the concentration of the 
absorbing compound. Within constraints, the relationship between 
absorbance and sample concentration is linear. Sample spectra are 
compared to reference spectra to determine the species and their 
concentrations.

                       2.2  Sampling and Analysis

    2.2.1  Flue gas is continuously extracted from the source, and the 
gas or a portion of the gas is conveyed to the FTIR gas cell, where a 
spectrum of the flue gas is recorded. Absorbance band intensities are 
related to sample concentrations by Beer's Law.
Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.046

A = absorbance of the ith component at the given 
          frequency, .
a = absorption coefficient of the ith component at the 
          frequency, .
b = path length of the cell.
c = concentration of the ith compound in the sample at 
          frequency .

    2.2.2  After identifying a compound from the infrared spectrum, its 
concentration is determined by comparing band intensities in the sample 
spectrum to band intensities in ``reference spectra'' of the 
formaldehyde, phenol, methanol, COS and CO. These reference spectra are 
available in a permanent soft copy from the EPA spectral library on the 
EMTIC bulletin board. The source may also prepare reference spectra 
according to Section 4.5 of the FTIR Protocol.

    Note: Reference spectra not prepared according to the FTIR Protocol 
are not acceptable for use in this test method. Documentation detailing 
the FTIR Protocol steps used in preparing any non-EPA reference spectra 
shall be included in each test report submitted by the source.

    2.3  Operator Requirements. The analyst must have some knowledge of 
source sampling and of infrared spectral patterns to operate the 
sampling system and to choose a suitable instrument configuration. The 
analyst should also understand FTIR instrument operation well enough to 
choose an instrument configuration consistent with the data quality 
objectives.

                            3.0  Definitions

    See Appendix A of the FTIR Protocol.

                           4.0  Interferences

    4.1  Analytical (or Spectral) Interferences. Water vapor. High 
concentrations of ammonia (hundreds of ppm) may interfere with the 
analysis of low concentrations of methanol (1 to 5 ppm). For CO, carbon 
dioxide and water may be interferants. In cases where COS levels are low 
relative to CO levels, CO and water may be interferants.
    4.2  Sampling System Interferences. Water, if it condenses, and 
ammonia, which reacts with formaldehyde.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  Formaldehyde is a suspected carcinogen; therefore, exposure to 
this compound must be limited. Proper monitoring and safety precautions 
must be practiced in any atmosphere with potentially high concentrations 
of CO.
    5.2  This method may involve sampling at locations having high 
positive or negative pressures, high temperatures, elevated heights, 
high concentrations of hazardous or toxic pollutants, or other diverse 
sampling conditions. It is the responsibility of the tester(s) to ensure 
proper safety and health practices, and to determine the applicability 
of regulatory limitations before performing this test method.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    The equipment and supplies are based on the schematic of a sampling 
train shown in Figure 1. Either the evacuated or purged sampling 
technique may be used with this sampling train. Alternatives may be 
used,

[[Page 618]]

provided that the data quality objectives of this method are met.
    6.1  Sampling Probe. Glass, stainless steel, or other appropriate 
material of sufficient length and physical integrity to sustain heating, 
prevent adsorption of analytes, and to reach gas sampling point.
    6.2  Particulate Filters. A glass wool plug (optional) inserted at 
the probe tip (for large particulate removal) and a filter rated at 1-
micron (e.g., BalstonTM) for fine particulate removal, placed 
immediately after the heated probe.
    6.3  Sampling Line/Heating System. Heated (maintained at 250 
 25 degrees F) stainless steel, TeflonTM, or 
other inert material that does not adsorb the analytes, to transport the 
sample to analytical system.
    6.4  Stainless Steel Tubing. Type 316, e.g., \3/8\ in. diameter, and 
appropriate length for heated connections.
    6.5  Gas Regulators. Appropriate for individual gas cylinders.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.052
    
    6.6  TeflonTM Tubing. Diameter (e.g., \3/8\ in.) and 
length suitable to connect cylinder regulators.
    6.7  Sample Pump. A leak-free pump (e.g., KNF TM), with 
by-pass valve, capable of pulling sample through entire sampling system 
at a rate of about 10 to 20 L/min. If placed before the analytical 
system, heat the pump and use a pump fabricated from materials non-
reactive to the target pollutants. If the

[[Page 619]]

pump is located after the instrument, systematically record the sample 
pressure in the gas cell.
    6.8  Gas Sample Manifold. A heated manifold that diverts part of the 
sample stream to the analyzer, and the rest to the by-pass discharge 
vent or other analytical instrumentation.
    6.9  Rotameter. A calibrated 0 to 20 L/min range rotameter.
    6.10  FTIR Analytical System. Spectrometer and detector, capable of 
measuring formaldehyde, phenol, methanol, COS and CO to the 
predetermined minimum detectable level. The system shall include a 
personal computer with compatible software that provides real-time 
updates of the spectral profile during sample collection and spectral 
collection.
    6.11  FTIR Cell Pump. Required for the evacuated sampling technique, 
capable of evacuating the FTIR cell volume within 2 minutes. The FTIR 
cell pump should allow the operator to obtain at least 8 sample spectra 
in 1 hour.
    6.12  Absolute Pressure Gauge. Heatable and capable of measuring 
pressure from 0 to 1000 mmHg to within 2.5 mmHg (e.g., 
BaratronTM).
    6.13  Temperature Gauge. Capable of measuring the cell temperature 
to within 2 deg.C.

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Ethylene (Calibration Transfer Standard). Obtain NIST traceable 
(or Protocol) cylinder gas.
    7.2  Nitrogen. Ultra high purity (UHP) grade.
    7.3  Reference Spectra. Obtain reference spectra for the target 
pollutants at concentrations that bracket (in ppm-meter/K) the emission 
source levels. Also, obtain reference spectra for SF6 and 
ethylene. Suitable concentrations are 0.0112 to 0.112 (ppm-meter)/K for 
SF6 and 5.61 (ppm-meter)/K or less for ethylene. The 
reference spectra shall meet the criteria for acceptance outlined in 
Section 2.2.2. The optical density (ppm-meters/K) of the reference 
spectrum must match the optical density of the sample spectrum within 
(less than) 25 percent.

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, and Storage

    Sampling should be performed in the following sequence: Collect 
background, collect CTS spectrum, collect samples, collect post-test CTS 
spectrum, verify that two copies of all data were stored on separate 
computer media.
    8.1  Pretest Preparations and Evaluations. Using the procedure in 
Section 4.0 of the FTIR Protocol, determine the optimum sampling system 
configuration for sampling the target pollutants. Table 2 gives some 
example values for AU, DL, and MAU. Based on a study (Reference 1), an 
FTIR system using 1 cm-1 resolution, 22 meter path length, 
and a broad band MCT detector was suitable for meeting the requirements 
in Table 2. Other factors that must be determined are:
    a. Test requirements: AUi, CMAXi, 
DLi, OFUi, and tAN for each.
    b. Interferants: See Table 1.
    c. Sampling system: LS', Pmin, PS', 
TS', tSS, VSS; fractional error, MIL.
    d. Analytical regions: 1 through Nm, FLm, 
FCm, and FUm, plus interferants, FFUm, 
FFLm, wavenumber range FNU to FNL. See Tables 1 and 2.
    8.1.1  If necessary, sample and acquire an initial spectrum. Then 
determine the proper operational pathlength of the instrument to obtain 
non-saturated absorbances of the target analytes.
    8.1.2  Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 1.
    8.2  Sampling System Leak-check. Leak-check from the probe tip to 
pump outlet as follows: Connect a 0- to 250-mL/min rate meter (rotameter 
or bubble meter) to the outlet of the pump. Close off the inlet to the 
probe, and note the leakage rate. The leakage rate shall be 
200 mL/min.
    8.3  Analytical System Leak-check.
    8.3.1  For the evacuated sample technique, close the valve to the 
FTIR cell, and evacuate the absorption cell to the minimum absolute 
pressure Pmin. Close the valve to the pump, and determine the 
change in pressure Pv after 2 minutes.
    8.3.2  For both the evacuated sample and purging techniques, 
pressurize the system to about 100 mmHg above atmospheric pressure. 
Isolate the pump and determine the change in pressure 
Pp after 2 minutes.
    8.3.3  Measure the barometric pressure, Pb in mmHg.
    8.3.4  Determine the percent leak volume %VL for the 
signal integration time tSS and for Pmax, 
i.e., the larger of Pv or Pp, as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.047

Where:

50 = 100% divided by the leak-check time of 2 minutes.

    8.3.5  Leak volumes in excess of 4 percent of the sample system 
volume VSS are unacceptable.
    8.4  Background Spectrum. Evacuate the gas cell to 5 
mmHg, and fill with dry nitrogen gas to ambient pressure. Verify that no 
significant amounts of absorbing species (for example water vapor and 
CO2) are present. Collect a background spectrum, using a 
signal averaging period equal to or greater than the averaging period 
for the sample spectra. Assign a unique file name to the background

[[Page 620]]

spectrum. Store the spectra of the background interferogram and 
processed single-beam background spectrum on two separate computer media 
(one is used as the back-up). If continuous sampling will be used during 
sample collection, collect the background spectrum with nitrogen gas 
flowing through the cell at the same pressure and temperature as will be 
used during sampling.
    8.5  Pre-Test Calibration Transfer Standard. Evacuate the gas cell 
to 5 mmHg absolute pressure, and fill the FTIR cell to 
atmospheric pressure with the CTS gas. Or, purge the cell with 10 cell 
volumes of CTS gas. Record the spectrum. If continuous sampling will be 
used during sample collection, collect the CTS spectrum with CTS gas 
flowing through the cell at the same pressure and temperature as will be 
used during sampling.

                              8.6  Samples

    8.6.1  Evacuated Samples. Evacuate the absorbance cell to 
5 mmHg absolute pressure. Fill the cell with flue gas to 
ambient pressure and record the spectrum. Before taking the next sample, 
evacuate the cell until no further evidence of absorption exists. Repeat 
this procedure to collect at least 8 separate spectra (samples) in 1 
hour.
    8.6.2  Purge Sampling. Purge the FTIR cell with 10 cell volumes of 
flue gas and at least for about 10 minutes. Discontinue the gas cell 
purge, isolate the cell, and record the sample spectrum and the 
pressure. Before taking the next sample, purge the cell with 10 cell 
volumes of flue gas.
    8.6.3  Continuous Sampling. Spectra can be collected continuously 
while the FTIR cell is being purged. The sample integration time, 
tss, the sample flow rate through the FTIR gas cell, and the 
total run time must be chosen so that the collected data consist of at 
least 10 spectra with each spectrum being of a separate cell volume of 
flue gas. More spectra can be collected over the run time and the total 
run time (and number of spectra) can be extended as well.

              8.7  Sampling QA, Data Storage and Reporting

    8.7.1  Sample integration times should be sufficient to achieve the 
required signal-to-noise ratios. Obtain an absorbance spectrum by 
filling the cell with nitrogen. Measure the RMSD in each analytical 
region in this absorbance spectrum. Verify that the number of scans is 
sufficient to achieve the target MAU (Table 2).
    8.7.2  Identify all sample spectra with unique file names.
    8.7.3  Store on two separate computer media a copy of sample 
interferograms and processed spectra. The data shall be available to the 
Administrator on request for the length of time specified in the 
applicable regulation.
    8.7.4  For each sample spectrum, document the sampling conditions, 
the sampling time (while the cell was being filled), the time the 
spectrum was recorded, the instrumental conditions (path length, 
temperature, pressure, resolution, integration time), and the spectral 
file name. Keep a hard copy of these data sheets.
    8.8  Signal Transmittance. While sampling, monitor the signal 
transmittance through the instrumental system. If signal transmittance 
(relative to the background) drops below 95 percent in any spectral 
region where the sample does not absorb infrared energy, obtain a new 
background spectrum.
    8.9  Post-run CTS. After each sampling run, record another CTS 
spectrum.

                           8.10  Post-test QA

    8.10.1  Inspect the sample spectra immediately after the run to 
verify that the gas matrix composition was close to the expected 
(assumed) gas matrix.
    8.10.2  Verify that the sampling and instrumental parameters were 
appropriate for the conditions encountered. For example, if the moisture 
is much greater than anticipated, it will be necessary to use a shorter 
path length or dilute the sample.
    8.10.3  Compare the pre and post-run CTS spectra. They shall agree 
to within -5 percent. See FTIR Protocol, Appendix E.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    Follow the quality assurance procedures in the method, including the 
analysis of pre and post-run calibration transfer standards (Sections 
8.5 and 8.9) and the post-test quality assurance procedures in Section 
8.10.

                  10.0  Calibration and Standardization

    10.1  Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N). The S/N shall be sufficient to 
meet the MAU in each analytical region.
    10.2  Absorbance Pathlength. Verify the absorbance path length by 
comparing CTS spectra to reference spectra of the calibration gas(es). 
See FTIR Protocol, Appendix E.
    10.3  Instrument Resolution. Measure the line width of appropriate 
CTS band(s) and compare to reference CTS spectra to verify instrumental 
resolution.
    10.4  Apodization Function. Choose appropriate apodization function. 
Determine any appropriate mathematical transformations that are required 
to correct instrumental errors by measuring the CTS. Any mathematical 
transformations must be documented and reproducible.
    10.5  FTIR Cell Volume. Evacuate the cell to 5 mmHg. 
Measure the initial absolute temperature (Ti) and absolute 
pressure (Pi). Connect a wet test meter (or a calibrated dry 
gas meter), and slowly draw room air into the cell. Measure the meter 
volume (Vm), meter absolute temperature (Tm), and 
meter

[[Page 621]]

absolute pressure (Pm), and the cell final absolute 
temperature (Tf) and absolute pressure (Pf). 
Calculate the FTIR cell volume Vss, including that of the 
connecting tubing, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.048

As an alternative to the wet test 
meter/calibrated dry gas meter procedure, measure the inside dimensions 
of the cell cylinder and calculate its volume.

                             11.0  Procedure

    Refer to Sections 4.6-4.11, Sections 5, 6, and 7, and the appendices 
of the FTIR Protocol.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations

    a. Data analysis is performed using appropriate reference spectra 
whose concentrations can be verified using CTS spectra. Various 
analytical programs are available to relate sample absorbance to a 
concentration standard. Calculated concentrations should be verified by 
analyzing spectral baselines after mathematically subtracting scaled 
reference spectra from the sample spectra. A full description of the 
data analysis and calculations may be found in the FTIR Protocol 
(Sections 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 and appendices).
    b. Correct the calculated concentrations in sample spectra for 
differences in absorption pathlength between the reference and sample 
spectra by:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.049

Where:

Ccorr = The pathlength corrected concentration.
Ccalc = The initial calculated concentration (output of the 
          Multicomp program designed for the compound).
Lr = The pathlength associated with the reference spectra.
Ls = The pathlength associated with the sample spectra.
Ts = The absolute temperature (K) of the sample gas.
Tr = The absolute gas temperature (K) at which reference 
          spectra were recorded.

                    13.0  Reporting and Recordkeeping

    All interferograms used in determining source concentration shall be 
stored for the period of time required in the applicable regulation. The 
Administrator has the option of requesting the interferograms recorded 
during the test in electronic form as part of the test report.

                        14.0  Method Performance

    Refer to the FTIR Protocol.

                 15.0  Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]

                         16.0  Waste Management

    Laboratory standards prepared from the formaldehyde and phenol are 
handled according to the instructions in the materials safety data 
sheets (MSDS).

                            17.0  References

    (1) ``Field Validation Test Using Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) 
Spectrometry To Measure Formaldehyde, Phenol and Methanol at a Wool 
Fiberglass Production Facility.'' Draft. U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency Report, Entropy, Inc., EPA Contract No. 68D20163, Work Assignment 
I-32, December 1994 (docket item II-A-13).
    (2) ``Method 301--Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods 
from Various Waste Media,'' 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.

 Method 319--Determination of Filtration Efficiency for Paint Overspray 
                                Arrestors

                       1.0  Scope and Application.

    1.1  This method applies to the determination of the initial, 
particle size dependent, filtration efficiency for paint arrestors over 
the particle diameter range from 0.3 to 10 m. The method 
applies to single and multiple stage paint arrestors or paint arrestor 
media. The method is applicable to efficiency determinations from 0 to 
99 percent. Two test aerosols are used--one liquid phase and one solid 
phase. Oleic acid, a low-volatility liquid (CAS Number 112-80-1), is 
used to simulate the behavior of wet paint overspray. The solid-phase 
aerosol is potassium chloride salt (KCl, CAS Number 7447-40-7) and is 
used to simulate the behavior of a dry overspray. The method is limited 
to determination of the initial, clean filtration efficiency of the 
arrestor. Changes in efficiency (either increase or decrease) due to the 
accumulation of paint overspray on and within the arrestor are not 
evaluated.
    1.2  Efficiency is defined as 1--Penetration (e.g., 70 percent 
efficiency is equal to 0.30 penetration). Penetration is based on the 
ratio of the downstream particle concentration to the upstream 
concentration. It is often more useful, from a mathematical or 
statistical point of view, to discuss the upstream and downstream counts 
in terms of penetration rather than the derived efficiency value. Thus, 
this document uses both penetration and efficiency as appropriate.

[[Page 622]]

    1.3  For a paint arrestor system or subsystem which has been tested 
by this method, adding additional filtration devices to the system or 
subsystem shall be assumed to result in an efficiency of at least that 
of the original system without the requirement for additional testing. 
(For example, if the final stage of a three-stage paint arrestor system 
has been tested by itself, then the addition of the other two stages 
shall be assumed to maintain, as a minimum, the filtration efficiency 
provided by the final stage alone. Thus, in this example, if the final 
stage has been shown to meet the filtration requirements of Table 1 of 
Sec. 63.745 of subpart GG, then the final stage in combination with any 
additional paint arrestor stages also passes the filtration 
requirements.)

                         2.0  Summary of Method.

    2.1  This method applies to the determination of the fractional 
(i.e., particle-size dependent) aerosol penetration of several types of 
paint arrestors. Fractional penetration is computed from aerosol 
concentrations measured upstream and downstream of an arrestor installed 
in a laboratory test rig. The aerosol concentrations upstream and 
downstream of the arrestors are measured with an aerosol analyzer that 
simultaneously counts and sizes the particles in the aerosol stream. The 
aerosol analyzer covers the particle diameter size range from 0.3 to 10 
m in a minimum of 12 contiguous sizing channels. Each sizing 
channel covers a narrow range of particle diameters. For example, 
Channel 1 may cover from 0.3 to 0.4 m, Channel 2 from 0.4 to 
0.5 m, * * * By taking the ratio of the downstream to upstream 
counts on a channel by channel basis, the penetration is computed for 
each of the sizing channels.
    2.2  The upstream and downstream aerosol measurements are made while 
injecting the test aerosol into the air stream upstream of the arrestor 
(ambient aerosol is removed with HEPA filters on the inlet of the test 
rig). This test aerosol spans the particle size range from 0.3 to 10 
m and provides sufficient upstream concentration in each of the 
optical particle counter (OPC) sizing channels to allow accurate 
calculation of penetration, down to penetrations of approximately 0.01 
(i.e., 1 percent penetration; 99 percent efficiency). Results are 
presented as a graph and a data table showing the aerodynamic particle 
diameter and the corresponding fractional efficiency.

                            3.0  Definitions.

    Aerodynamic Diameter--diameter of a unit density sphere having the 
same aerodynamic properties as the particle in question.
    Efficiency is defined as equal to 1--Penetration.
    Optical Particle Counter (OPC)--an instrument that counts particles 
by size using light scattering. An OPC gives particle diameters based on 
size, index of refraction, and shape.
    Penetration--the fraction of the aerosol that penetrates the filter 
at a given particle diameter. Penetration equals the downstream 
concentration divided by the upstream concentration.

                           4.0  Interferences.

    4.1  The influence of the known interferences (particle losses) are 
negated by correction of the data using blanks.

                              5.0  Safety.

    5.1  There are no specific safety precautions for this method above 
those of good laboratory practice. This standard does not purport to 
address all of the safety problems, if any, associated with its use. It 
is the responsibility of the user of this method to establish 
appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability 
of regulatory limitations prior to use.

                      6.0  Equipment and Supplies.

    6.1  Test Facility. A schematic diagram of a test duct used in the 
development of the method is shown in Figure 319-1.


[[Page 623]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.008


    6.1.1  The test section, paint spray section, and attached 
transitions are constructed of stainless and galvanized steel. The 
upstream and downstream ducting is 20 cm diameter polyvinyl chloride 
(PVC). The upstream transition provides a 7 deg. angle of expansion to 
provide a uniform air flow distribution to the paint arrestors. Aerosol 
concentration is

[[Page 624]]

measured upstream and downstream of the test section to obtain the 
challenge and penetrating aerosol concentrations, respectively. Because 
the downstream ducting runs back under the test section, the challenge 
and penetrating aerosol taps are located physically near each other, 
thereby facilitating aerosol sampling and reducing sample-line length. 
The inlet nozzles of the upstream and downstream aerosol probes are 
designed to yield isokinetic sampling conditions.
    6.1.2  The configuration and dimensions of the test duct can deviate 
from those of Figure 319-1 provided that the following key elements are 
maintained: the test duct must meet the criteria specified in Table 319-
1; the inlet air is HEPA filtered; the blower is on the upstream side of 
the duct thereby creating a positive pressure in the duct relative to 
the surrounding room; the challenge air has a temperature between 
50 deg. and 100 deg.F and a relative humidity of less than 65 percent; 
the angle of the upstream transition (if used) to the paint arrestor 
must not exceed 7 deg.; the angle of the downstream transition (if used) 
from the paint arrestor must not exceed 30 deg.; the test duct must 
provide a means for mixing the challenge aerosol with the upstream flow 
(in lieu of any mixing device, a duct length of 15 duct diameters 
fulfills this requirement); the test duct must provide a means for 
mixing any penetrating aerosol with the downstream flow (in lieu of any 
mixing device, a duct length of 15 duct diameters fulfills this 
requirement); the test section must provide a secure and leak-free 
mounting for single and multiple stage arrestors; and the test duct may 
utilize a 180 deg. bend in the downstream duct.

                     Table 319-1.--QC Control Limits
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Frequency and
                                   description         Control limits
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPC zero count..............  Each Test. OPC        50 counts per
                               samples HEPA-         minute.
                               filtered air.
OPC sizing accuracy check...  Daily. Sample         Peak of distribution
                               aerosolized PSL       should be in
                               spheres.              correct OPC
                                                     channel.
Minimum counts per channel    Each Test...........  Minimum total of 500
 for challenge aerosol.                              particle counts per
                                                     channel.
Maximum particle              Each Test. Needed to  10% of
 concentration.                ensure OPC is not     manufacturer's
                               overloaded.           claimed upper limit
                                                     corresponding to a
                                                     10% count error.
Standard Deviation of         Computed for each     0.10 for 0.3 to 3
 Penetration.                  test based on the     m
                               CV of the upstream    diameter.
                               and downstream       0.30 for >3 m diameter.
0% Penetration..............  Monthly.............  0.01.
100% Penetration--KCl.......  Triplicate tests      0.3 to 1 m:
                               performed             0.90 to 1.10.
                               immediately before,  1 to 3 m:
                               during, or after      0.75 to 1.25.
                               triplicate arrestor  3 to 10 m:
                               tests.                0.50 to 1.50.
100% Penetration--Oleic Acid  Triplicate tests      0.3 to 1 m:
                               performed             0.90 to 1.10.
                               immediately before,  1 to 3 m:
                               during, or after      0.75 to 1.25.
                               triplicate arrestor  3 to 10 m:
                               tests.                0.50 to 1.50.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    6.2  Aerosol Generator. The aerosol generator is used to produce a 
stable aerosol covering the particle size range from 0.3 to 10 
m diameter. The generator used in the development of this 
method consists of an air atomizing nozzle positioned at the top of a 
0.30-m (12-in.) diameter, 1.3-m (51-in.) tall, acrylic, transparent, 
spray tower. This tower allows larger sized particles, which would 
otherwise foul the test duct and sample lines, to fall out of the 
aerosol. It also adds drying air to ensure that the KCl droplets dry to 
solid salt particles. After generation, the aerosol passes through an 
aerosol neutralizer (Kr85 radioactive source) to neutralize any 
electrostatic charge on the aerosol (electrostatic charge is an 
unavoidable consequence of most aerosol generation methods). To improve 
the mixing of the aerosol with the air stream, the aerosol is injected 
counter to the airflow. Generators of other designs may be used, but 
they must produce a stable aerosol concentration over the 0.3 to 10 
m diameter size range; provide a means of ensuring the complete 
drying of the KCl aerosol; and utilize a charge neutralizer to 
neutralize any electrostatic charge on the aerosol. The resultant 
challenge aerosol must meet the minimum count per channel and maximum 
concentration criteria of Table 319-1.
    6.3  Installation of Paint Arrestor. The paint arrestor is to be 
installed in the test duct in a manner that precludes air bypassing the 
arrestor. Since arrestor media are often sold unmounted, a mounting 
frame may be used to provide back support for the media in addition to 
sealing it into the duct. The mounting frame for 20 in. x 20 in. 
arrestors will have minimum open internal dimensions of 18 in. square. 
Mounting frames for 24 in. x 24 in. arrestors will have minimum open 
internal dimensions of 22 in. square. The open internal dimensions of 
the mounting frame shall not be less than 75 percent of the approach 
duct dimensions.

[[Page 625]]

    6.4  Optical Particle Counter. The upstream and downstream aerosol 
concentrations are measured with a high-resolution optical particle 
counter (OPC). To ensure comparability of test results, the OPC shall 
utilize an optical design based on wide-angle light scattering and 
provided a minimum of 12 contiguous particle sizing channels from 0.3 to 
10m diameter (based on response to PSL) where, for each 
channel, the ratio of the diameter corresponding to the upper channel 
bound to the lower channel bound must not exceed 1.5.
    6.5  Aerosol Sampling System. The upstream and downstream sample 
lines must be made of rigid electrically-grounded metallic tubing having 
a smooth inside surface, and they must be rigidly secured to prevent 
movement during testing. The upstream and downstream sample lines are to 
be nominally identical in geometry. The use of a short length (100 mm 
maximum) of straight flexible tubing to make the final connection to the 
OPC is acceptable. The inlet nozzles of the upstream and downstream 
probes must be sharp-edged and of appropriate entrance diameter to 
maintain isokinetic sampling within 20 percent of the air velocity.
    6.5.1  The sampling system may be designed to acquire the upstream 
and downstream samples using (a) sequential upstream-downstream sampling 
with a single OPC, (b) simultaneous upstream and downstream sampling 
with two OPC's, or (c) sequential upstream-downstream sampling with two 
OPC's.
    6.5.2  When two particle counters are used to acquire the upstream 
and downstream counts, they must be closely matched in flowrate and 
optical design.
    6.6  Airflow Monitor. The volumetric airflow through the system 
shall be measured with a calibrated orifice plate, flow nozzle, or 
laminar flow element. The measurement device must have an accuracy of 5 
percent or better.
    7.0  Reagents and Standards.
    7.1  The liquid test aerosol is reagent grade, 98 percent pure, 
oleic acid (Table 319-2). The solid test aerosol is KCl aerosolized from 
a solution of KCl in water. In addition to the test aerosol, a 
calibration aerosol of monodisperse polystyrene latex (PSL) spheres is 
used to verify the calibration of the OPC.

                          Table 319-2.--Properties of the Test and Calibration Aerosols
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Density,  g/
                                        Refractive index             cm \3\                  Shape
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oleic Acid (liquid-phase       1.46 nonabsorbing................         0.89  Spherical.
 challenge aerosol).
KCl (solid-phase challenge     1.49.............................         1.98  Cubic or agglomerated cubes.
 aerosol).
PSL (calibration aerosol)....  1.59 nonabsorbing................         1.05  Spherical.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

           8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, and Storage.

    8.1  In this test, all sampling occurs in real-time, thus no samples 
are collected that require preservation or storage during the test. The 
paint arrestors are shipped and stored to avoid structural damage or 
soiling. Each arrestor may be shipped in its original box from the 
manufacturer or similar cardboard box. Arrestors are stored at the test 
site in a location that keeps them clean and dry. Each arrestor is 
clearly labeled for tracking purposes.

                          9.0  Quality Control.

    9.1  Table 319-1 lists the QC control limits.
    9.2  The standard deviation () of the penetration (P) for a 
given test at each of the 15 OPC sizing channels is computed from the 
coefficient of variation (CV, the standard deviation divided by the 
mean) of the upstream and downstream measurements as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.009

For a properly operating system, the standard deviation of the 
penetration is  0.10 at particle diameters from 0.3 to 3 m and 
less than 0.30 at diameters > 3 m.
    9.3  Data Quality Objectives (DQO).
    9.3.1  Fractional Penetration. From the triplicate tests of each 
paint arrestor model, the standard deviation for the penetration 
measurements at each particle size (i.e., for each sizing channel of the 
OPC) is computed as:

[[Page 626]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.010

where Pi represents an individual penetration measurement, 
and P the average of the 3 (n = 3) individual measurements.
    9.3.2  Bias of the fractional penetration values is determined from 
triplicate no-filter and HEPA filter tests. These tests determine the 
measurement bias at 100 percent penetration and 0 percent penetration, 
respectively.
    9.3.3  PSL-Equivalent Light Scattering Diameter. The precision and 
bias of the OPC sizing determination are based on sampling a known 
diameter of PSL and noting whether the particle counts peak in the 
correct channel of the OPC. This is a pass/fail measurement with no 
calculations involved.
    9.3.4  Airflow. The precision of the measurement must be within 5 
percent of the set point.

                 10.0  Calibration and Standardization.

    10.1  Optical Particle Counter. The OPC must have an up-to-date 
factory calibration. Check the OPC zero at the beginning and end of each 
test by sampling HEPA-filtered air. Verify the sizing accuracy on a 
daily basis (for days when tests are performed) with 1-size PSL spheres.
    10.2  Airflow Measurement. Airflow measurement devices must have an 
accuracy of 5 percent or better. Manometers used in conjunction with the 
orifice plate must be inspected prior to use for proper level, zero, and 
mechanical integrity. Tubing connections to the manometer must be free 
from kinks and have secure connections.
    10.3  Pressure Drop. Measure pressure drop across the paint arrestor 
with an inclined manometer readable to within 0.01 in. H2O. 
Prior to use, the level and zero of the manometer, and all tubing 
connections, must be inspected and adjusted as needed.

                            11.0  Procedure.

    11.1  Filtration Efficiency. For both the oleic acid and KCl 
challenges, this procedure is performed in triplicate using a new 
arrestor for each test.
    11.1.1  General Information and Test Duct Preparation
    11.1.1.1  Use the ``Test Run Sheet'' form (Figure 319-2) to record 
the test information.

                                Run Sheet

                       Part 1. General Information

Date and Time:__________________________________________________________

Test Operator:__________________________________________________________

Test #:_________________________________________________________________

Paint Arrestor:
  Brand/Model___________________________________________________________

  Arrestor Assigned ID #________________________________________________
    Condition of arrestor (i.e., is there any damage? Must be new 
condition to proceed):

_______________________________________________________________________
    Manometer zero and level confirmed?

_______________________________________________________________________

                      Part 2. Clean Efficiency Test

Date and Time:__________________________________________________________
Optical Particle Counter:
  20 min. warm up_______________________________________________________

  Zero count ( 50 counts/min)___________________________________________

  Daily PSL check_______________________________________________________

    PSL Diam: ______ m

  File name for OPC data:_______________________________________________

Test Conditions:
    Air Flow: ______

    Temp & RH: Temp ______  deg.F RH ______ %

    Atm. Pressure: ______in. Hg
(From mercury barometer)

Aerosol Generator: (record all operating parameters)

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Test Aerosol:
  (Oleic acid or KCl)___________________________________________________
Arrestor:
    Pressure drop: at start ______ in. H2O

    at end ______ in. H2O

    Condition of arrestor at end of test (note any physical 
deterioration):

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

                      Figure 319-2. Test Run Sheet

    Other report formats which contain the same information are 
acceptable.
    11.1.1.2  Record the date, time, test operator, Test #, paint 
arrestor brand/model and its assigned ID number. For tests with no 
arrestor, record none.
    11.1.1.3  Ensure that the arrestor is undamaged and is in ``new'' 
condition.
    11.1.1.4  Mount the arrestor in the appropriate frame. Inspect for 
any airflow leak paths.
    11.1.1.5  Install frame-mounted arrestor in the test duct. Examine 
the installed arrestor to verify that it is sealed in the duct. For 
tests with no arrestor, install the empty frame.

[[Page 627]]

    11.1.1.6  Visually confirm the manometer zero and level. Adjust as 
needed.
    11.1.2  Clean Efficiency Test.
    11.1.2.1  Record the date and time upon beginning this section.
    11.1.2.2  Optical Particle Counter.
    11.1.2.2.1  General: Operate the OPC per the manufacturer's 
instructions allowing a minimum of 20 minutes warm up before making any 
measurements.
    11.1.2.2.2  Overload: The OPC will yield inaccurate data if the 
aerosol concentration it is attempting to measure exceeds its operating 
limit. To ensure reliable measurements, the maximum aerosol 
concentration will not exceed 10 percent of the manufacturer's claimed 
upper concentration limit corresponding to a 10 percent count error. If 
this value is exceeded, reduce the aerosol concentration until the 
acceptable conditions are met.
    11.1.2.2.3  Zero Count: Connect a HEPA capsule to the inlet of the 
OPC and obtain printouts for three samples (each a minimum of 1-minute 
each). Record maximum cumulative zero count. If the count rate exceeds 
50 counts per minute, the OPC requires servicing before continuing.
    11.1.2.2.4  PSL Check of OPC Calibration: Confirm the calibration of 
the OPC by sampling a known size PSL aerosol. Aerosolize the PSL using 
an appropriate nebulizer. Record whether the peak count is observed in 
the proper channel. If the peak is not seen in the appropriate channel, 
have the OPC recalibrated.
    11.1.2.3  Test Conditions:
    11.1.2.3.1  Airflow: The test airflow corresponds to a nominal face 
velocity of 120 FPM through the arrestor. For arrestors having nominal 
20 in. x 20 in. face dimensions, this measurement corresponds to an 
airflow of 333 cfm. For arrestors having nominal face dimensions of 24 
in. x 24 in., this measurement corresponds to an airflow of 480 cfm.
    11.1.2.3.2  Temperature and Relative Humidity: The temperature and 
relative humidity of the challenge air stream will be measured to within 
an accuracy of +/-2 deg.F and +/-10 percent RH. To protect the probe 
from fouling, it may be removed during periods of aerosol generation.
    11.1.2.3.3  Barometric Pressure: Use a mercury barometer. Record the 
atmospheric pressure.
    11.1.2.4  Upstream and Downstream Background Counts.
    11.1.2.4.1  With the arrestor installed in the test duct and the 
airflow set at the proper value, turn on the data acquisition computer 
and bring up the data acquisition program.
    11.1.2.4.2  Set the OPC settings for the appropriate test sample 
duration with output for both printer and computer data collection.
    11.1.2.4.3  Obtain one set of upstream-downstream background 
measurements.
    11.1.2.4.4  After obtaining the upstream-downstream measurements, 
stop data acquisition.
    11.1.2.5  Efficiency Measurements:
    11.1.2.5.1  Record the arrestor pressure drop.
    11.1.2.5.2  Turn on the Aerosol Generator. Begin aerosol generation 
and record the operating parameters.
    11.1.2.5.3  Monitor the particle counts. Allow a minimum of 5 
minutes for the generator to stabilize.
    11.1.2.5.4  Confirm that the total particle count does not exceed 
the predetermined upper limit. Adjust generator as needed.
    11.1.2.5.5  Confirm that a minimum of 50 particle counts are 
measured in the upstream sample in each of the OPC channels per sample. 
(A minimum of 50 counts per channel per sample will yield the required 
minimum 500 counts per channel total for the 10 upstream samples as 
specified in Table 319-1.) Adjust generator or sample time as needed.
    11.1.2.5.6  If you are unable to obtain a stable concentration 
within the concentration limit and with the 50 count minimum per 
channel, adjust the aerosol generator.
    11.1.2.5.7  When the counts are stable, perform repeated upstream-
downstream sampling until 10 upstream-downstream measurements are 
obtained.
    11.1.2.5.8  After collection of the 10 upstream-downstream samples, 
stop data acquisition and allow 2 more minutes for final purging of 
generator.
    11.1.2.5.9  Obtain one additional set of upstream-downstream 
background samples.
    11.1.2.5.10  After obtaining the upstream-downstream background 
samples, stop data acquisition.
    11.1.2.5.11  Record the arrestor pressure drop.
    11.1.2.5.12  Turn off blower.
    11.1.2.5.13  Remove the paint arrestor assembly from the test duct. 
Note any signs of physical deterioration.
    11.1.2.5.14  Remove the arrestor from the frame and place the 
arrestor in an appropriate storage bag.
    11.2  Control Test: 100 Percent Penetration Test. A 100 percent 
penetration test must be performed immediately before each individual 
paint arrestor test using the same challenge aerosol substance (i.e., 
oleic acid or KCl) as to be used in the arrestor test. These tests are 
performed with no arrestor installed in the test housing. This test is a 
relatively stringent test of the adequacy of the overall duct, sampling, 
measurement, and aerosol generation system. The test is performed as a 
normal penetration test except the paint arrestor is not used. A perfect 
system would yield a measured penetration of 1 at all particle sizes. 
Deviations from 1

[[Page 628]]

can occur due to particle losses in the duct, differences in the degree 
of aerosol uniformity (i.e., mixing) at the upstream and downstream 
probes, and differences in particle transport efficiency in the upstream 
and downstream sampling lines.
    11.3  Control Test: 0 Percent Penetration. One 0 percent penetration 
test must be performed at least monthly during testing. The test is 
performed by using a HEPA filter rather than a paint arrestor. This test 
assesses the adequacy of the instrument response time and sample line 
lag.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations.

    12.1  Analysis. The analytical procedures for the fractional 
penetration and flow velocity measurements are described in Section 11. 
Note that the primary measurements, those of the upstream and downstream 
aerosol concentrations, are performed with the OPC which acquires the 
sample and analyzes it in real time. Because all the test data are 
collected in real time, there are no analytical procedures performed 
subsequent to the actual test, only data analysis.
    12.2  Calculations.
    12.2.1  Penetration.

                              Nomenclature

U = Upstream particle count
D = Downstream particle count
Ub = Upstream background count
Db = Downstream background count
P100 = 100 percent penetration value determined immediately 
          prior to the arrestor test computed for each channel as:
          [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.011
          
P = Penetration of the arrestor corrected for P100
= sample standard deviation
CV = coefficient of variation = /mean
E = Efficiency.

    Overbar denotes arithmetic mean of quantity.
    Analysis of each test involves the following quantities:
     P100 value for each sizing channel from the 100 
percent penetration control test,
     2 upstream background values,
     2 downstream background values,
     10 upstream values with aerosol generator on, and
     10 downstream values with aerosol generator on.
    Using the values associated with each sizing channel, the 
penetration associated with each particle-sizing channel is calculated 
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.012

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.013

    Most often, the background levels are small compared to the values 
when the aerosol generator is on.
    12.3  The relationship between the physical diameter 
(DPhysical) as measured by the OPC to the aerodynamic 
diameter (DAero) is given by:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR98.014

Where:

pO = unit density of 1 g/cm3.
pParticle = the density of the particle, 0.89 g/
          cm3 for oleic acid.
CCFPhysical = the Cunningham Correction Factor at 
          DPhysical.
CCFAero = the Cunningham Correction Factor at 
          DAero.

    12.4  Presentation of Results. For a given arrestor, results will be 
presented for:
     Triplicate arrestor tests with the liquid-phase challenge 
aerosol,
    sbull; Triplicate arrestor tests with the solid-phase challenge 
aerosol,
    sbull; Triplicate 100 percent penetration tests with the liquid-
phase challenge aerosol,
    sbull; Triplicate 100 percent penetration tests with the solid-phase 
challenge aerosol, and
    sbull; One 0 percent filter test (using either the liquid-phase or 
solid-phase aerosol and performed at least monthly).
    12.4.1  Results for the paint arrestor test must be presented in 
both graphical and tabular form. The X-axis of the graph will be a 
logarithmic scale of aerodynamic diameter from 0.1 to 100 m. 
The Y-axis will be efficiency (%) on a linear scale from 0 to 100. Plots 
for each individual run and a plot of

[[Page 629]]

the average of triplicate solid-phase and of the average triplicate 
liquid-phase tests must be prepared. All plots are to be based on point-
to-point plotting (i.e., no curve fitting is to be used). The data are 
to be plotted based on the geometric mean diameter of each of the OPC's 
sizing channels.
    12.4.2  Tabulated data from each test must be provided. The data 
must include the upper and lower diameter bound and geometric mean 
diameter of each of the OPC sizing channels, the background particle 
counts for each channel for each sample, the upstream particle counts 
for each channel for each sample, the downstream particle counts for 
each channel for each sample, the 100 percent penetration values 
computed for each channel, and the 0 percent penetration values computed 
for each channel.

                       13.0  Pollution Prevention.

    13.1  The quantities of materials to be aerosolized should be 
prepared in accord with the amount needed for the current tests so as to 
prevent wasteful excess.

                         14.0  Waste Management.

    14.1  Paint arrestors may be returned to originator, if requested, 
or disposed of with regular laboratory waste.

                            15.0  References.

    1. Hanley, J.T., D.D. Smith and L. Cox. ``Fractional Penetration of 
Paint Overspray Arrestors, Draft Final Report,'' EPA Cooperative 
Agreement CR-817083-01-0, January 1994.
    2. Hanley, J.T., D.D. Smith, and D.S. Ensor. ``Define a Fractional 
Efficiency Test Method that is Compatible with Particulate Removal Air 
Cleaners Used in General Ventilation,'' Final Report, 671-RP, American 
Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., 
December 1993.
    3. ``Project Work and Quality Assurance Plan: Fractional Penetration 
of Paint Overspray Arrestors, Category II,'' EPA Cooperative Agreement 
No. CR-817083, July 1994.

   Test Method 320--Measurement of Vapor Phase Organic and Inorganic 
 Emissions by Extractive Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopy

                           1.0  Introduction.

    Persons unfamiliar with basic elements of FTIR spectroscopy should 
not attempt to use this method. This method describes sampling and 
analytical procedures for extractive emission measurements using Fourier 
transform infrared (FTIR) spectroscopy. Detailed analytical procedures 
for interpreting infrared spectra are described in the ``Protocol for 
the Use of Extractive Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectrometry in 
Analyses of Gaseous Emissions from Stationary Sources,'' hereafter 
referred to as the ``Protocol.'' Definitions not given in this method 
are given in appendix A of the Protocol. References to specific sections 
in the Protocol are made throughout this Method. For additional 
information refer to references 1 and 2, and other EPA reports, which 
describe the use of FTIR spectrometry in specific field measurement 
applications and validation tests. The sampling procedure described here 
is extractive. Flue gas is extracted through a heated gas transport and 
handling system. For some sources, sample conditioning systems may be 
applicable. Some examples are given in this method.

    Note: sample conditioning systems may be used providing the method 
validation requirements in Sections 9.2 and 13.0 of this method are met.

                      1.1  Scope and Applicability.

    1.1.1  Analytes. Analytes include hazardous air pollutants (HAPs) 
for which EPA reference spectra have been developed. Other compounds can 
also be measured with this method if reference spectra are prepared 
according to section 4.6 of the protocol.
    1.1.2  Applicability. This method applies to the analysis of vapor 
phase organic or inorganic compounds which absorb energy in the mid-
infrared spectral region, about 400 to 4000 cm-1 (25 to 2.5 
m). This method is used to determine compound-specific 
concentrations in a multi-component vapor phase sample, which is 
contained in a closed-path gas cell. Spectra of samples are collected 
using double beam infrared absorption spectroscopy. A computer program 
is used to analyze spectra and report compound concentrations.
    1.2  Method Range and Sensitivity. Analytical range and sensitivity 
depend on the frequency-dependent analyte absorptivity, instrument 
configuration, data collection parameters, and gas stream composition. 
Instrument factors include: (a) spectral resolution, (b) interferometer 
signal averaging time, (c) detector sensitivity and response, and (d) 
absorption path length.
    1.2.1  For any optical configuration the analytical range is between 
the absorbance values of about .01 (infrared transmittance relative to 
the background = 0.98) and 1.0
(T = 0.1). (For absorbance > 1.0 the relation between absorbance and 
concentration may not be linear.)
    1.2.2  The concentrations associated with this absorbance range 
depend primarily on the cell path length and the sample temperature. An 
analyte absorbance greater than 1.0, can be lowered by decreasing the 
optical path length. Analyte absorbance increases with a longer path 
length. Analyte detection also depends on the presence of other species 
exhibiting absorbance in the same analytical

[[Page 630]]

region. Additionally, the estimated lower absorbance (A) limit
(A = 0.01) depends on the root mean square deviation (RMSD) noise in the 
analytical region.
    1.2.3  The concentration range of this method is determined by the 
choice of optical configuration.
    1.2.3.1  The absorbance for a given concentration can be decreased 
by decreasing the path length or by diluting the sample. There is no 
practical upper limit to the measurement range.
    1.2.3.2  The analyte absorbance for a given concentration may be 
increased by increasing the cell path length or (to some extent) using a 
higher resolution. Both modifications also cause a corresponding 
increased absorbance for all compounds in the sample, and a decrease in 
the signal throughput. For this reason the practical lower detection 
range (quantitation limit) usually depends on sample characteristics 
such as moisture content of the gas, the presence of other interferants, 
and losses in the sampling system.
    1.3  Sensitivity. The limit of sensitivity for an optical 
configuration and integration time is determined using appendix D of the 
Protocol: Minimum Analyte Uncertainty, (MAU). The MAU depends on the 
RMSD noise in an analytical region, and on the absorptivity of the 
analyte in the same region.
    1.4  Data Quality. Data quality shall be determined by executing 
Protocol pre-test procedures in appendices B to H of the protocol and 
post-test procedures in appendices I and J of the protocol.
    1.4.1  Measurement objectives shall be established by the choice of 
detection limit (DLi) and analytical uncertainty 
(AUi) for each analyte.
    1.4.2  An instrumental configuration shall be selected. An estimate 
of gas composition shall be made based on previous test data, data from 
a similar source or information gathered in a pre-test site survey. 
Spectral interferants shall be identified using the selected 
DLi and AUi and band areas from reference spectra 
and interferant spectra. The baseline noise of the system shall be 
measured in each analytical region to determine the MAU of the 
instrument configuration for each analyte and interferant 
(MIUi).
    1.4.3  Data quality for the application shall be determined, in 
part, by measuring the RMS (root mean square) noise level in each 
analytical spectral region (appendix C of the Protocol). The RMS noise 
is defined as the RMSD of the absorbance values in an analytical region 
from the mean absorbance value in the region.
    1.4.4  The MAU is the minimum analyte concentration for which the 
AUi can be maintained; if the measured analyte concentration 
is less than MAUi then data quality are unacceptable.

                         2.0  Summary of Method

    2.1  Principle. References 4 through 7 provide background material 
on infrared spectroscopy and quantitative analysis. A summary is given 
in this section.
    2.1.1  Infrared absorption spectroscopy is performed by directing an 
infrared beam through a sample to a detector. The frequency-dependent 
infrared absorbance of the sample is measured by comparing this detector 
signal (single beam spectrum) to a signal obtained without a sample in 
the beam path (background).
    2.1.2  Most molecules absorb infrared radiation and the absorbance 
occurs in a characteristic and reproducible pattern. The infrared 
spectrum measures fundamental molecular properties and a compound can be 
identified from its infrared spectrum alone.
    2.1.3  Within constraints, there is a linear relationship between 
infrared absorption and compound concentration. If this frequency 
dependent relationship (absorptivity) is known (measured), it can be 
used to determine compound concentration in a sample mixture.
    2.1.4  Absorptivity is measured by preparing, in the laboratory, 
standard samples of compounds at known concentrations and measuring the 
FTIR ``reference spectra'' of these standard samples. These ``reference 
spectra'' are then used in sample analysis: (1) Compounds are detected 
by matching sample absorbance bands with bands in reference spectra, and 
(2) concentrations are measured by comparing sample band intensities 
with reference band intensities.
    2.1.5  This method is self-validating provided that the results meet 
the performance requirement of the QA spike in sections 8.6.2 and 9.0 of 
this method, and results from a previous method validation study support 
the use of this method in the application.
    2.2  Sampling and Analysis. In extractive sampling a probe assembly 
and pump are used to extract gas from the exhaust of the affected source 
and transport the sample to the FTIR gas cell. Typically, the sampling 
apparatus is similar to that used for single-component continuous 
emission monitor (CEM) measurements.
    2.2.1  The digitized infrared spectrum of the sample in the FTIR gas 
cell is measured and stored on a computer. Absorbance band intensities 
in the spectrum are related to sample concentrations by what is commonly 
referred to as Beer's Law.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.003

Where:

Ai = absorbance at a given frequency of the ith sample 
          component.
ai = absorption coefficient (absorptivity) of the ith sample 
          component.
b = path length of the cell.

[[Page 631]]

ci = concentration of the ith sample component.

    2.2.2  Analyte spiking is used for quality assurance (QA). In this 
procedure (section 8.6.2 of this method) an analyte is spiked into the 
gas stream at the back end of the sample probe. Analyte concentrations 
in the spiked samples are compared to analyte concentrations in unspiked 
samples. Since the concentration of the spike is known, this procedure 
can be used to determine if the sampling system is removing the spiked 
analyte(s) from the sample stream.
    2.3  Reference Spectra Availability. Reference spectra of over 100 
HAPs are available in the EPA FTIR spectral library on the EMTIC 
(Emission Measurement Technical Information Center) computer bulletin 
board service and at internet address http://info.arnold.af.mil/epa/
welcome.htm. Reference spectra for HAPs, or other analytes, may also be 
prepared according to section 4.6 of the Protocol.
    2.4  Operator Requirements. The FTIR analyst shall be trained in 
setting up the instrumentation, verifying the instrument is functioning 
properly, and performing routine maintenance. The analyst must evaluate 
the initial sample spectra to determine if the sample matrix is 
consistent with pre-test assumptions and if the instrument configuration 
is suitable. The analyst must be able to modify the instrument 
configuration, if necessary.
    2.4.1  The spectral analysis shall be supervised by someone familiar 
with EPA FTIR Protocol procedures.
    2.4.2  A technician trained in instrumental test methods is 
qualified to install and operate the sampling system. This includes 
installing the probe and heated line assembly, operating the analyte 
spike system, and performing moisture and flow measurements.

                            3.0  Definitions

    See appendix A of the Protocol for definitions relating to infrared 
spectroscopy. Additional definitions are given in sections 3.1 through 
3.29.
    3.1  Analyte. A compound that this method is used to measure. The 
term ``target analyte'' is also used. This method is multi-component and 
a number of analytes can be targeted for a test.
    3.2  Reference Spectrum. Infrared spectrum of an analyte prepared 
under controlled, documented, and reproducible laboratory conditions 
according to procedures in section 4.6 of the Protocol. A library of 
reference spectra is used to measure analytes in gas samples.
    3.3  Standard Spectrum. A spectrum that has been prepared from a 
reference spectrum through a (documented) mathematical operation. A 
common example is de-resolving of reference spectra to lower-resolution 
standard spectra (Protocol, appendix K to the addendum of this method). 
Standard spectra, prepared by approved, and documented, procedures can 
be used as reference spectra for analysis.
    3.4  Concentration. In this method concentration is expressed as a 
molar concentration, in ppm-meters, or in (ppm-meters)/K, where K is the 
absolute temperature (Kelvin). The latter units allow the direct 
comparison of concentrations from systems using different optical 
configurations or sampling temperatures.
    3.5  Interferant. A compound in the sample matrix whose infrared 
spectrum overlaps with part of an analyte spectrum. The most accurate 
analyte measurements are achieved when reference spectra of interferants 
are used in the quantitative analysis with the analyte reference 
spectra. The presence of an interferant can increase the analytical 
uncertainty in the measured analyte concentration.
    3.6  Gas Cell. A gas containment cell that can be evacuated. It is 
equipped with the optical components to pass the infrared beam through 
the sample to the detector. Important cell features include: path length 
(or range if variable), temperature range, materials of construction, 
and total gas volume.
    3.7  Sampling System. Equipment used to extract the sample from the 
test location and transport the sample gas to the FTIR analyzer. This 
includes sample conditioning systems.
    3.8  Sample Analysis. The process of interpreting the infrared 
spectra to obtain sample analyte concentrations. This process is usually 
automated using a software routine employing a classical least squares 
(cls), partial least squares (pls), or K- or P-matrix method.
    3.9  One hundred percent line. A double beam transmittance spectrum 
obtained by combining two background single beam spectra. Ideally, this 
line is equal to 100 percent transmittance (or zero absorbance) at every 
frequency in the spectrum. Practically, a zero absorbance line is used 
to measure the baseline noise in the spectrum.
    3.10  Background Deviation. A deviation from 100 percent 
transmittance in any region of the 100 percent line. Deviations greater 
than 5 percent in an analytical region are unacceptable 
(absorbance of 0.021 to -0.022). Such deviations indicate a change in 
the instrument throughput relative to the background single beam.
    3.11  Batch Sampling. A procedure where spectra of discreet, static 
samples are collected. The gas cell is filled with sample and the cell 
is isolated. The spectrum is collected. Finally, the cell is evacuated 
to prepare for the next sample.
    3.12  Continuous Sampling. A procedure where spectra are collected 
while sample gas

[[Page 632]]

is flowing through the cell at a measured rate.
    3.13  Sampling resolution. The spectral resolution used to collect 
sample spectra.
    3.14  Truncation. Limiting the number of interferogram data points 
by deleting points farthest from the center burst (zero path difference, 
ZPD).
    3.15  Zero filling. The addition of points to the interferogram. The 
position of each added point is interpolated from neighboring real data 
points. Zero filling adds no information to the interferogram, but 
affects line shapes in the absorbance spectrum (and possibly analytical 
results).
    3.16  Reference CTS. Calibration Transfer Standard spectra that were 
collected with reference spectra.
    3.17  CTS Standard. CTS spectrum produced by applying a de-
resolution procedure to a reference CTS.
    3.18  Test CTS. CTS spectra collected at the sampling resolution 
using the same optical configuration as for sample spectra. Test spectra 
help verify the resolution, temperature and path length of the FTIR 
system.
    3.19  RMSD. Root Mean Square Difference, defined in EPA FTIR 
Protocol, appendix A.
    3.20  Sensitivity. The noise-limited compound-dependent detection 
limit for the FTIR system configuration. This is estimated by the MAU. 
It depends on the RMSD in an analytical region of a zero absorbance 
line.
    3.21  Quantitation Limit. The lower limit of detection for the FTIR 
system configuration in the sample spectra. This is estimated by 
mathematically subtracting scaled reference spectra of analytes and 
interferences from sample spectra, then measuring the RMSD in an 
analytical region of the subtracted spectrum. Since the noise in 
subtracted sample spectra may be much greater than in a zero absorbance 
spectrum, the quantitation limit is generally much higher than the 
sensitivity. Removing spectral interferences from the sample or 
improving the spectral subtraction can lower the quantitation limit 
toward (but not below) the sensitivity.
    3.22  Independent Sample. A unique volume of sample gas; there is no 
mixing of gas between two consecutive independent samples. In continuous 
sampling two independent samples are separated by at least 5 cell 
volumes. The interval between independent measurements depends on the 
cell volume and the sample flow rate (through the cell).
    3.23  Measurement. A single spectrum of flue gas contained in the 
FTIR cell.
    3.24  Run. A run consists of a series of measurements. At a minimum 
a run includes 8 independent measurements spaced over 1 hour.
    3.25  Validation. Validation of FTIR measurements is described in 
sections 13.0 through 13.4 of this method. Validation is used to verify 
the test procedures for measuring specific analytes at a source. 
Validation provides proof that the method works under certain test 
conditions.
    3.26  Validation Run. A validation run consists of at least 24 
measurements of independent samples. Half of the samples are spiked and 
half are not spiked. The length of the run is determined by the interval 
between independent samples.
    3.27  ning. Screening is used when there is little or no available 
information about a source. The purpose of screening is to determine 
what analytes are emitted and to obtain information about important 
sample characteristics such as moisture, temperature, and interferences. 
Screening results are semi-quantitative (estimated concentrations) or 
qualitative (identification only). Various optical and sampling 
configurations may be used. Sample conditioning systems may be evaluated 
for their effectiveness in removing interferences. It is unnecessary to 
perform a complete run under any set of sampling conditions. Spiking is 
not necessary, but spiking can be a useful screening tool for evaluating 
the sampling system, especially if a reactive or soluble analyte is used 
for the spike.
    3.28  Emissions Test. An FTIR emissions test is performed according 
specific sampling and analytical procedures. These procedures, for the 
target analytes and the source, are based on previous screening and 
validation results. Emission results are quantitative. A QA spike 
(sections 8.6.2 and 9.2 of this method) is performed under each set of 
sampling conditions using a representative analyte. Flow, gas 
temperature and diluent data are recorded concurrently with the FTIR 
measurements to provide mass emission rates for detected compounds.
    3.29  Surrogate. A surrogate is a compound that is used in a QA 
spike procedure (section 8.6.2 of this method) to represent other 
compounds. The chemical and physical properties of a surrogate shall be 
similar to the compounds it is chosen to represent. Under given sampling 
conditions, usually a single sampling factor is of primary concern for 
measuring the target analytes: for example, the surrogate spike results 
can be representative for analytes that are more reactive, more soluble, 
have a lower absorptivity, or have a lower vapor pressure than the 
surrogate itself.

                           4.0  Interferences

    Interferences are divided into two classifications: analytical and 
sampling.
    4.1  Analytical Interferences. An analytical interference is a 
spectral feature that complicates (in extreme cases may prevent) the 
analysis of an analyte. Analytical interferences are classified as 
background or spectral interference.
    4.1.1  Background Interference. This results from a change in 
throughput relative to the

[[Page 633]]

single beam background. It is corrected by collecting a new background 
and proceeding with the test. In severe instances the cause must be 
identified and corrected. Potential causes include: (1) Deposits on 
reflective surfaces or transmitting windows, (2) changes in detector 
sensitivity, (3) a change in the infrared source output, or (4) failure 
in the instrument electronics. In routine sampling throughput may 
degrade over several hours. Periodically a new background must be 
collected, but no other corrective action will be required.
    4.1.2  Spectral Interference. This results from the presence of 
interfering compound(s) (interferant) in the sample. Interferant 
spectral features overlap analyte spectral features. Any compound with 
an infrared spectrum, including analytes, can potentially be an 
interferant. The Protocol measures absorbance band overlap in each 
analytical region to determine if potential interferants shall be 
classified as known interferants (FTIR Protocol, section 4.9 and 
appendix B). Water vapor and CO2 are common spectral 
interferants. Both of these compounds have strong infrared spectra and 
are present in many sample matrices at high concentrations relative to 
analytes. The extent of interference depends on the (1) interferant 
concentration, (2) analyte concentration, and (3) the degree of band 
overlap. Choosing an alternate analytical region can minimize or avoid 
the spectral interference. For example, CO2 interferes with 
the analysis of the 670 cm-1 benzene band. However, benzene 
can also be measured near 3000 cm-1 (with less sensitivity).
    4.2  Sampling System Interferences. These prevent analytes from 
reaching the instrument. The analyte spike procedure is designed to 
measure sampling system interference, if any.
    4.2.1  Temperature. A temperature that is too low causes 
condensation of analytes or water vapor. The materials of the sampling 
system and the FTIR gas cell usually set the upper limit of temperature.
    4.2.2  Reactive Species. Anything that reacts with analytes. Some 
analytes, like formaldehyde, polymerize at lower temperatures.
    4.2.3  Materials. Poor choice of material for probe, or sampling 
line may remove some analytes. For example, HF reacts with glass 
components.
    4.2.4  Moisture. In addition to being a spectral interferant, 
condensed moisture removes soluble compounds.

                               5.0  Safety

    The hazards of performing this method are those associated with any 
stack sampling method and the same precautions shall be followed. Many 
HAPs are suspected carcinogens or present other serious health risks. 
Exposure to these compounds should be avoided in all circumstances. For 
instructions on the safe handling of any particular compound, refer to 
its material safety data sheet. When using analyte standards, always 
ensure that gases are properly vented and that the gas handling system 
is leak free. (Always perform a leak check with the system under maximum 
vacuum and, again, with the system at greater than ambient pressure.) 
Refer to section 8.2 of this method for leak check procedures. This 
method does not address all of the potential safety risks associated 
with its use. Anyone performing this method must follow safety and 
health practices consistent with applicable legal requirements and with 
prudent practice for each application.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not 
constitute endorsement by the Environmental Protection Agency.

    The equipment and supplies are based on the schematic of a sampling 
system shown in Figure 1. Either the batch or continuous sampling 
procedures may be used with this sampling system. Alternative sampling 
configurations may also be used, provided that the data quality 
objectives are met as determined in the post-analysis evaluation. Other 
equipment or supplies may be necessary, depending on the design of the 
sampling system or the specific target analytes.
    6.1  Sampling Probe. Glass, stainless steel, or other appropriate 
material of sufficient length and physical integrity to sustain heating, 
prevent adsorption of analytes, and to transport analytes to the 
infrared gas cell. Special materials or configurations may be required 
in some applications. For instance, high stack sample temperatures may 
require special steel or cooling the probe. For very high moisture 
sources it may be desirable to use a dilution probe.
    6.2  Particulate Filters. A glass wool plug (optional) inserted at 
the probe tip (for large particulate removal) and a filter (required) 
rated for 99 percent removal efficiency at 1-micron (e.g., Balston'') 
connected at the outlet of the heated probe.
    6.3  Sampling Line/Heating System. Heated (sufficient to prevent 
condensation) stainless steel, polytetrafluoroethane, or other material 
inert to the analytes.
    6.4  Gas Distribution Manifold. A heated manifold allowing the 
operator to control flows of gas standards and samples directly to the 
FTIR system or through sample conditioning systems. Usually includes 
heated flow meter, heated valve for selecting and sending sample to the 
analyzer, and a by-pass vent. This is typically constructed of stainless 
steel tubing and fittings, and high-temperature valves.
    6.5  Stainless Steel Tubing. Type 316, appropriate diameter (e.g., 
3/8 in.) and length for

[[Page 634]]

heated connections. Higher grade stainless may be desirable in some 
applications.
    6.6  Calibration/Analyte Spike Assembly. A three way valve assembly 
(or equivalent) to introduce analyte or surrogate spikes into the 
sampling system at the outlet of the probe upstream of the out-of-stack 
particulate filter and the FTIR analytical system.
    6.7  Mass Flow Meter (MFM). These are used for measuring analyte 
spike flow. The MFM shall be calibrated in the range of 0 to 5 L/min and 
be accurate to  2 percent (or better) of the flow meter 
span.
    6.8  Gas Regulators. Appropriate for individual gas standards.
    6.9  Polytetrafluoroethane Tubing. Diameter (e.g., \3/8\ in.) and 
length suitable to connect cylinder regulators to gas standard manifold.
    6.10  Sample Pump. A leak-free pump (e.g., KNFTM), with 
by-pass valve, capable of producing a sample flow rate of at least 10 L/
min through 100 ft of sample line. If the pump is positioned upstream of 
the distribution manifold and FTIR system, use a heated pump that is 
constructed from materials non-reactive to the analytes. If the pump is 
located downstream of the FTIR system, the gas cell sample pressure will 
be lower than ambient pressure and it must be recorded at regular 
intervals.
    6.11  Gas Sample Manifold. Secondary manifold to control sample flow 
at the inlet to the FTIR manifold. This is optional, but includes a by-
pass vent and heated rotameter.
    6.12  Rotameter. A 0 to 20 L/min rotameter. This meter need not be 
calibrated.
    6.13  FTIR Analytical System. Spectrometer and detector, capable of 
measuring the analytes to the chosen detection limit. The system shall 
include a personal computer with compatible software allowing automated 
collection of spectra.
    6.14  FTIR Cell Pump. Required for the batch sampling technique, 
capable of evacuating the FTIR cell volume within 2 minutes. The pumping 
speed shall allow the operator to obtain 8 sample spectra in 1 hour.
    6.15  Absolute Pressure Gauge. Capable of measuring pressure from 0 
to 1000 mmHg to within 2.5 mmHg (e.g., 
BaratronTM).
    6.16  Temperature Gauge. Capable of measuring the cell temperature 
to within  2 deg.C.
    6.17  Sample Conditioning. One option is a condenser system, which 
is used for moisture removal. This can be helpful in the measurement of 
some analytes. Other sample conditioning procedures may be devised for 
the removal of moisture or other interfering species.
    6.17.1  The analyte spike procedure of section 9.2 of this method, 
the QA spike procedure of section 8.6.2 of this method, and the 
validation procedure of section 13 of this method demonstrate whether 
the sample conditioning affects analyte concentrations. Alternatively, 
measurements can be made with two parallel FTIR systems; one measuring 
conditioned sample, the other measuring unconditioned sample.
    6.17.2  Another option is sample dilution. The dilution factor 
measurement must be documented and accounted for in the reported 
concentrations. An alternative to dilution is to lower the sensitivity 
of the FTIR system by decreasing the cell path length, or to use a 
short-path cell in conjunction with a long path cell to measure more 
than one concentration range.

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    7.1  Analyte(s) and Tracer Gas. Obtain a certified gas cylinder 
mixture containing all of the analyte(s) at concentrations 
within 2 percent of the emission source levels (expressed in 
ppm-meter/K). If practical, the analyte standard cylinder shall also 
contain the tracer gas at a concentration which gives a measurable 
absorbance at a dilution factor of at least 10:1. Two ppm SF6 
is sufficient for a path length of 22 meters at 250  deg.F.
    7.2  Calibration Transfer Standard(s). Select the calibration 
transfer standards (CTS) according to section 4.5 of the FTIR Protocol. 
Obtain a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable 
gravimetric standard of the CTS ( 2 percent).
    7.3  Reference Spectra. Obtain reference spectra for each analyte, 
interferant, surrogate, CTS, and tracer. If EPA reference spectra are 
not available, use reference spectra prepared according to procedures in 
section 4.6 of the EPA FTIR Protocol.

                  8.0  Sampling and Analysis Procedure

    Three types of testing can be performed: (1) Screening, (2) 
emissions test, and (3) validation. Each is defined in section 3 of this 
method. Determine the purpose(s) of the FTIR test. Test requirements 
include: (a) AUi, DLi, overall fractional 
uncertainty, OFUi, maximum expected concentration 
(CMAXi), and tAN for each, (b) potential 
interferants, (c) sampling system factors, e.g., minimum absolute cell 
pressure, (Pmin), FTIR cell volume (VSS), 
estimated sample absorption pathlength, LS', estimated sample 
pressure, PS', TS', signal integration time 
(tSS), minimum instrumental linewidth, MIL, fractional error, 
and (d) analytical regions, e.g., m = 1 to M, lower wavenumber position, 
FLm, center wavenumber position, FCm, and upper wavenumber 
position, FUm, plus interferants, upper wavenumber position 
of the CTS absorption band, FFUm, lower wavenumber position 
of the CTS absorption band, FFLm, wavenumber range FNU to 
FNL. If necessary, sample and acquire an initial spectrum. From analysis 
of this preliminary spectrum determine a suitable operational path 
length. Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 1 or use an 
appropriate alternative configuration. Sections 8.1 through 8.11 of this 
method provide guidance on pre-

[[Page 635]]

test calculations in the EPA protocol, sampling and analytical 
procedures, and post-test protocol calculations.
    8.1  Pretest Preparations and Evaluations. Using the procedure in 
section 4.0 of the FTIR Protocol, determine the optimum sampling system 
configuration for measuring the target analytes. Use available 
information to make reasonable assumptions about moisture content and 
other interferences.
    8.1.1  Analytes. Select the required detection limit 
(DLi) and the maximum permissible analytical uncertainty 
(AUi) for each analyte (labeled from 1 to i). Estimate, if 
possible, the maximum expected concentration for each analyte, 
CMAXi. The expected measurement range is fixed by 
DLi and CMAXi for each analyte (i).
    8.1.2  Potential Interferants. List the potential interferants. This 
usually includes water vapor and CO2, but may also include 
some analytes and other compounds.
    8.1.3.  Optical Configuration. Choose an optical configuration that 
can measure all of the analytes within the absorbance range of .01 to 
1.0 (this may require more than one path length). Use Protocol sections 
4.3 to 4.8 for guidance in choosing a configuration and measuring CTS.
    8.1.4  Fractional Reproducibility Uncertainty (FRUi). The 
FRU is determined for each analyte by comparing CTS spectra taken before 
and after the reference spectra were measured. The EPA para-xylene 
reference spectra were collected on 10/31/91 and 11/01/91 with 
corresponding CTS spectra ``cts1031a,'' and ``cts1101b.'' The CTS 
spectra are used to estimate the reproducibility (FRU) in the system 
that was used to collect the references. The FRU must be AU. Appendix E 
of the protocol is used to calculate the FRU from CTS spectra. Figure 2 
plots results for 0.25 cm-1 CTS spectra in EPA reference 
library: S3 (cts1101b-cts1031a), and S4 
[(cts1101b+cts1031a)/2]. The RMSD (SRMS) is calculated in the subtracted 
baseline, S3, in the corresponding CTS region from 850 to 
1065 cm-1. The area (BAV) is calculated in the same region of 
the averaged CTS spectrum, S4.
    8.1.5  Known Interferants. Use appendix B of the EPA FTIR Protocol.
    8.1.6  Calculate the Minimum Analyte Uncertainty, MAU (section 1.3 
of this method discusses MAU and protocol appendix D gives the MAU 
procedure). The MAU for each analyte, i, and each analytical region, m, 
depends on the RMS noise.
    8.1.7  Analytical Program. See FTIR Protocol, section 4.10. Prepare 
computer program based on the chosen analytical technique. Use as input 
reference spectra of all target analytes and expected interferants. 
Reference spectra of additional compounds shall also be included in the 
program if their presence (even if transient) in the samples is 
considered possible. The program output shall be in ppm (or ppb) and 
shall be corrected for differences between the reference path length, 
LR, temperature, TR, and pressure, PR, 
and the conditions used for collecting the sample spectra. If sampling 
is performed at ambient pressure, then any pressure correction is 
usually small relative to corrections for path length and temperature, 
and may be neglected.

                             8.2  Leak-Check

    8.2.1  Sampling System. A typical FTIR extractive sampling train is 
shown in Figure 1. Leak check from the probe tip to pump outlet as 
follows: Connect a 0-to 250-mL/min rate meter (rotameter or bubble 
meter) to the outlet of the pump. Close off the inlet to the probe, and 
record the leak rate. The leak rate shall be 200 mL/min.
    8.2.2  Analytical System Leak check. Leak check the FTIR cell under 
vacuum and under pressure (greater than ambient). Leak check connecting 
tubing and inlet manifold under pressure.
    8.2.2.1  For the evacuated sample technique, close the valve to the 
FTIR cell, and evacuate the absorption cell to the minimum absolute 
pressure Pmin. Close the valve to the pump, and determine the 
change in pressure Pv after 2 minutes.
    8.2.2.2  For both the evacuated sample and purging techniques, 
pressurize the system to about 100 mmHg above atmospheric pressure. 
Isolate the pump and determine the change in pressure 
Pp after 2 minutes.
    8.2.2.3  Measure the barometric pressure, Pb in mmHg.
    8.2.2.4  Determine the percent leak volume %VL for the 
signal integration time tSS and for 
Pmax, i.e., the larger of Pv 
or Pp, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.004

where 50 = 100% divided by the leak-check time of 2 minutes. 8.2.2.5 
Leak volumes in excess of 4 percent of the FTIR system volume 
VSS are unacceptable.
    8.3  Detector Linearity. Once an optical configuration is chosen, 
use one of the procedures of sections 8.3.1 through 8.3.3 to verify that 
the detector response is linear. If the detector response is not linear, 
decrease the aperture, or attenuate the infrared beam. After a change in 
the instrument configuration perform a linearity check until it is 
demonstrated that the detector response is linear.
    8.3.1  Vary the power incident on the detector by modifying the 
aperture setting. Measure the background and CTS at three instrument 
aperture settings: (1) at the aperture setting to be used in the 
testing, (2) at one half this aperture and (3) at twice the proposed 
testing aperture. Compare the

[[Page 636]]

three CTS spectra. CTS band areas shall agree to within the uncertainty 
of the cylinder standard and the RMSD noise in the system. If test 
aperture is the maximum aperture, collect CTS spectrum at maximum 
aperture, then close the aperture to reduce the IR throughput by half. 
Collect a second background and CTS at the smaller aperture setting and 
compare the spectra again.
    8.3.2  Use neutral density filters to attenuate the infrared beam. 
Set up the FTIR system as it will be used in the test measurements. 
Collect a CTS spectrum. Use a neutral density filter to attenuate the 
infrared beam (either immediately after the source or the 
interferometer) to approximately \1/2\ its original intensity. Collect a 
second CTS spectrum. Use another filter to attenuate the infrared beam 
to approximately \1/4\ its original intensity. Collect a third 
background and CTS spectrum. Compare the CTS spectra. CTS band areas 
shall agree to within the uncertainty of the cylinder standard and the 
RMSD noise in the system.
    8.3.3  Observe the single beam instrument response in a frequency 
region where the detector response is known to be zero. Verify that the 
detector response is ``flat'' and equal to zero in these regions.
    8.4  Data Storage Requirements. All field test spectra shall be 
stored on a computer disk and a second backup copy must stored on a 
separate disk. The stored information includes sample interferograms, 
processed absorbance spectra, background interferograms, CTS sample 
interferograms and CTS absorbance spectra. Additionally, documentation 
of all sample conditions, instrument settings, and test records must be 
recorded on hard copy or on computer medium. Table 1 gives a sample 
presentation of documentation.
    8.5  Background Spectrum. Evacuate the gas cell to 5 
mmHg, and fill with dry nitrogen gas to ambient pressure (or purge the 
cell with 10 volumes of dry nitrogen). Verify that no significant 
amounts of absorbing species (for example water vapor and 
CO2) are present. Collect a background spectrum, using a 
signal averaging period equal to or greater than the averaging period 
for the sample spectra. Assign a unique file name to the background 
spectrum. Store two copies of the background interferogram and processed 
single-beam spectrum on separate computer disks (one copy is the back-
up).
    8.5.1  Interference Spectra. If possible, collect spectra of known 
and suspected major interferences using the same optical system that 
will be used in the field measurements. This can be done on-site or 
earlier. A number of gases, e.g. CO2, SO2, CO, 
NH3, are readily available from cylinder gas suppliers.
    8.5.2  Water vapor spectra can be prepared by the following 
procedure. Fill a sample tube with distilled water. Evacuate above the 
sample and remove dissolved gasses by alternately freezing and thawing 
the water while evacuating. Allow water vapor into the FTIR cell, then 
dilute to atmospheric pressure with nitrogen or dry air. If quantitative 
water spectra are required, follow the reference spectrum procedure for 
neat samples (protocol, section 4.6). Often, interference spectra need 
not be quantitative, but for best results the absorbance must be 
comparable to the interference absorbance in the sample spectra.

                       8.6  Pre-Test Calibrations

    8.6.1  Calibration Transfer Standard. Evacuate the gas cell to 
 5 mmHg absolute pressure, and fill the FTIR cell to 
atmospheric pressure with the CTS gas. Alternatively, purge the cell 
with 10 cell volumes of CTS gas. (If purge is used, verify that the CTS 
concentration in the cell is stable by collecting two spectra 2 minutes 
apart as the CTS gas continues to flow. If the absorbance in the second 
spectrum is no greater than in the first, within the uncertainty of the 
gas standard, then this can be used as the CTS spectrum.) Record the 
spectrum.
    8.6.2  QA Spike. This procedure assumes that the method has been 
validated for at least some of the target analytes at the source. For 
emissions testing perform a QA spike. Use a certified standard, if 
possible, of an analyte, which has been validated at the source. One 
analyte standard can serve as a QA surrogate for other analytes which 
are less reactive or less soluble than the standard. Perform the spike 
procedure of section 9.2 of this method. Record spectra of at least 
three independent (section 3.22 of this method) spiked samples. 
Calculate the spiked component of the analyte concentration. If the 
average spiked concentration is within 0.7 to 1.3 times the expected 
concentration, then proceed with the testing. If applicable, apply the 
correction factor from the Method 301 of this appendix validation test 
(not the result from the QA spike).
    8.7  Sampling. If analyte concentrations vary rapidly with time, 
continuous sampling is preferable using the smallest cell volume, 
fastest sampling rate and fastest spectra collection rate possible. 
Continuous sampling requires the least operator intervention even 
without an automated sampling system. For continuous monitoring at one 
location over long periods, Continuous sampling is preferred. Batch 
sampling and continuous static sampling are used for screening and 
performing test runs of finite duration. Either technique is preferred 
for sampling several locations in a matter of days. Batch sampling gives 
reasonably good time resolution and ensures that each spectrum measures 
a discreet (and unique) sample volume. Continuous static (and 
continuous) sampling provide a very stable background over long periods. 
Like batch sampling, continuous static

[[Page 637]]

sampling also ensures that each spectrum measures a unique sample 
volume. It is essential that the leak check procedure under vacuum 
(section 8.2 of this method) is passed if the batch sampling procedure 
is used. It is essential that the leak check procedure under positive 
pressure is passed if the continuous static or continuous sampling 
procedures are used. The sampling techniques are described in sections 
8.7.1 through 8.7.2 of this method.
    8.7.1  Batch Sampling. Evacuate the absorbance cell to 5 
mmHg absolute pressure. Fill the cell with exhaust gas to ambient 
pressure, isolate the cell, and record the spectrum. Before taking the 
next sample, evacuate the cell until no spectral evidence of sample 
absorption remains. Repeat this procedure to collect eight spectra of 
separate samples in 1 hour.
    8.7.2  Continuous Static Sampling. Purge the FTIR cell with 10 cell 
volumes of sample gas. Isolate the cell, collect the spectrum of the 
static sample and record the pressure. Before measuring the next sample, 
purge the cell with 10 more cell volumes of sample gas.

                     8.8  Sampling QA and Reporting

    8.8.1  Sample integration times shall be sufficient to achieve the 
required signal-to-noise ratio. Obtain an absorbance spectrum by filling 
the cell with N2. Measure the RMSD in each analytical region in this 
absorbance spectrum. Verify that the number of scans used is sufficient 
to achieve the target MAU.
    8.8.2  Assign a unique file name to each spectrum.
    8.8.3  Store two copies of sample interferograms and processed 
spectra on separate computer disks.
    8.8.4  For each sample spectrum, document the sampling conditions, 
the sampling time (while the cell was being filled), the time the 
spectrum was recorded, the instrumental conditions (path length, 
temperature, pressure, resolution, signal integration time), and the 
spectral file name. Keep a hard copy of these data sheets.
    8.9  Signal Transmittance. While sampling, monitor the signal 
transmittance. If signal transmittance (relative to the background) 
changes by 5 percent or more (absorbance = -.02 to .02) in any 
analytical spectral region, obtain a new background spectrum.
    8.10  Post-test CTS. After the sampling run, record another CTS 
spectrum.
    8.11  Post-test QA
    8.11.1  Inspect the sample spectra immediately after the run to 
verify that the gas matrix composition was close to the expected 
(assumed) gas matrix.
    8.11.2  Verify that the sampling and instrumental parameters were 
appropriate for the conditions encountered. For example, if the moisture 
is much greater than anticipated, it may be necessary to use a shorter 
path length or dilute the sample.
    8.11.3  Compare the pre- and post-test CTS spectra. The peak 
absorbance in pre- and post-test CTS must be 5 percent of 
the mean value. See appendix E of the FTIR Protocol.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    Use analyte spiking (sections 8.6.2, 9.2 and 13.0 of this method) to 
verify that the sampling system can transport the analytes from the 
probe to the FTIR system.
    9.1  Spike Materials. Use a certified standard (accurate to 
2 percent) of the target analyte, if one can be obtained. If 
a certified standard cannot be obtained, follow the procedures in 
section 4.6.2.2 of the FTIR Protocol.
    9.2  Spiking Procedure. QA spiking (section 8.6.2 of this method) is 
a calibration procedure used before testing. QA spiking involves 
following the spike procedure of sections 9.2.1 through 9.2.3 of this 
method to obtain at least three spiked samples. The analyte 
concentrations in the spiked samples shall be compared to the expected 
spike concentration to verify that the sampling/analytical system is 
working properly. Usually, when QA spiking is used, the method has 
already been validated at a similar source for the analyte in question. 
The QA spike demonstrates that the validated sampling/analytical 
conditions are being duplicated. If the QA spike fails then the 
sampling/analytical system shall be repaired before testing proceeds. 
The method validation procedure (section 13.0 of this method) involves a 
more extensive use of the analyte spike procedure of sections 9.2.1 
through 9.2.3 of this method. Spectra of at least 12 independent spiked 
and 12 independent unspiked samples are recorded. The concentration 
results are analyzed statistically to determine if there is a systematic 
bias in the method for measuring a particular analyte. If there is a 
systematic bias, within the limits allowed by Method 301 of this 
appendix, then a correction factor shall be applied to the analytical 
results. If the systematic bias is greater than the allowed limits, this 
method is not valid and cannot be used.
    9.2.1  Introduce the spike/tracer gas at a constant flow rate of 
10 percent of the total sample flow, when possible.
    Note: Use the rotameter at the end of the sampling train to estimate 
the required spike/tracer gas flow rate.

    Use a flow device, e.g., mass flow meter ( 2 
percent), to monitor the spike flow rate. Record the spike flow rate 
every 10 minutes.
    9.2.2  Determine the response time (RT) of the system by 
continuously collecting spectra of the spiked effluent until the 
spectrum of the spiked component is constant for 5 minutes. The RT is 
the interval from the

[[Page 638]]

first measurement until the spike becomes constant. Wait for twice the 
duration of the RT, then collect spectra of two independent spiked gas 
samples. Duplicate analyses of the spiked concentration shall be within 
5 percent of the mean of the two measurements.
    9.2.3  Calculate the dilution ratio using the tracer gas as follows: 
where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.005

Where:

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.006

DF=Dilution factor of the spike gas; this value shall be 10.
SF6(dir)=SF6 (or tracer gas) concentration 
          measured directly in undiluted spike gas.
SF6(spk)=Diluted SF6 (or tracer gas) concentration 
          measured in a spiked sample.
Spikedir=Concentration of the analyte in the spike standard 
          measured by filling the FTIR cell directly.
CS=Expected concentration of the spiked samples.
Unspike=Native concentration of analytes in unspiked samples.

                  10.0  Calibration and Standardization

    10.1  Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N). The RMSD in the noise must be 
less than one tenth of the minimum analyte peak absorbance in each 
analytical region. For example if the minimum peak absorbance is 0.01 at 
the required DL, then RMSD measured over the entire analytical region 
must be 0.001.
    10.2  Absorbance Path length. Verify the absorbance path length by 
comparing reference CTS spectra to test CTS spectra. See appendix E of 
the FTIR Protocol.
    10.3  Instrument Resolution. Measure the line width of appropriate 
test CTS band(s) to verify instrument resolution. Alternatively, compare 
CTS spectra to a reference CTS spectrum, if available, measured at the 
nominal resolution.
    10.4  Apodization Function.In transforming the sample interferograms 
to absorbance spectra use the same apodization function that was used in 
transforming the reference spectra.
    10.5  FTIR Cell Volume. Evacuate the cell to 5 mmHg. 
Measure the initial absolute temperature (Ti) and absolute 
pressure (Pi). Connect a wet test meter (or a calibrated dry 
gas meter), and slowly draw room air into the cell. Measure the meter 
volume (Vm), meter absolute temperature (Tm), and 
meter absolute pressure (Pm); and the cell final absolute 
temperature (Tf) and absolute pressure (Pf). 
Calculate the FTIR cell volume VSS, including that of the connecting 
tubing, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.007

                  11.0  Data Analysis and Calculations

    Analyte concentrations shall be measured using reference spectra 
from the EPA FTIR spectral library. When EPA library spectra are not 
available, the procedures in section 4.6 of the Protocol shall be 
followed to prepare reference spectra of all the target analytes.
    11.1  Spectral De-resolution. Reference spectra can be converted to 
lower resolution standard spectra (section 3.3 of this method) by 
truncating the original reference sample and background interferograms. 
Appendix K of the FTIR Protocol gives specific deresolution procedures. 
Deresolved spectra shall be transformed using the same apodization 
function and level of zero filling as the sample spectra. Additionally, 
pre-test FTIR protocol calculations (e.g., FRU, MAU, FCU) shall be 
performed using the de-resolved standard spectra.
    11.2  Data Analysis. Various analytical programs are available for 
relating sample absorbance to a concentration standard. Calculated 
concentrations shall be verified by analyzing residual baselines after 
mathematically subtracting scaled reference spectra from the sample 
spectra. A full description of the data analysis and calculations is 
contained in the FTIR Protocol (sections 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 and appendices). 
Correct the calculated concentrations in the sample spectra for 
differences in absorption path length and temperature between the 
reference and sample spectra using equation 6,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.008

Where:

Ccorr=Concentration, corrected for path length.

[[Page 639]]

Ccalc=Concentration, initial calculation (output of the 
          analytical program designed for the compound).
Lr=Reference spectra path length.
Ls=Sample spectra path length.
Ts=Absolute temperature of the sample gas, K.
Tr=Absolute gas temperature of reference spectra, K.
Ps=Sample cell pressure.
Pr=Reference spectrum sample pressure.

                        12.0  Method Performance

    12.1  Spectral Quality. Refer to the FTIR Protocol appendices for 
analytical requirements, evaluation of data quality, and analysis of 
uncertainty.
    12.2  Sampling QA/QC. The analyte spike procedure of section 9 of 
this method, the QA spike of section 8.6.2 of this method, and the 
validation procedure of section 13 of this method are used to evaluate 
the performance of the sampling system and to quantify sampling system 
effects, if any, on the measured concentrations. This method is self-
validating provided that the results meet the performance requirement of 
the QA spike in sections 9.0 and 8.6.2 of this method and results from a 
previous method validation study support the use of this method in the 
application. Several factors can contribute to uncertainty in the 
measurement of spiked samples. Factors which can be controlled to 
provide better accuracy in the spiking procedure are listed in sections 
12.2.1 through 12.2.4 of this method.
    12.2.1  Flow meter. An accurate mass flow meter is accurate to 
1 percent of its span. If a flow of 1 L/min is monitored 
with such a MFM, which is calibrated in the range of 0-5 L/min, the flow 
measurement has an uncertainty of 5 percent. This may be improved by re-
calibrating the meter at the specific flow rate to be used.
    12.2.2  Calibration gas. Usually the calibration standard is 
certified to within  2 percent. With reactive analytes, such 
as HCl, the certified accuracy in a commercially available standard may 
be no better than  5 percent.
    12.2.3  Temperature. Temperature measurements of the cell shall be 
quite accurate. If practical, it is preferable to measure sample 
temperature directly, by inserting a thermocouple into the cell chamber 
instead of monitoring the cell outer wall temperature.
    12.2.4  Pressure. Accuracy depends on the accuracy of the barometer, 
but fluctuations in pressure throughout a day may be as much as 2.5 
percent due to weather variations.

                    13.0  Method Validation Procedure

    This validation procedure, which is based on EPA Method 301 (40 CFR 
part 63, appendix (A), may be used to validate this method for the 
analytes in a gas matrix. Validation at one source may also apply to 
another type of source, if it can be shown that the exhaust gas 
characteristics are similar at both sources.
    13.1  Section 5.3 of Method 301 (40 CFR part 63, appendix A), the 
Analyte Spike procedure, is used with these modifications. The 
statistical analysis of the results follows section 6.3 of EPA Method 
301. Section 3 of this method defines terms that are not defined in 
Method 301.
    13.1.1  The analyte spike is performed dynamically. This means the 
spike flow is continuous and constant as spiked samples are measured.
    13.1.2  The spike gas is introduced at the back of the sample probe.
    13.1.3  Spiked effluent is carried through all sampling components 
downstream of the probe.
    13.1.4  A single FTIR system (or more) may be used to collect and 
analyze spectra (not quadruplicate integrated sampling trains).
    13.1.5  All of the validation measurements are performed 
sequentially in a single ``run'' (section 3.26 of this method).
    13.1.6  The measurements analyzed statistically are each independent 
(section 3.22 of this method).
    13.1.7  A validation data set can consist of more than 12 spiked and 
12 unspiked measurements.
    13.2  Batch Sampling. The procedure in sections 13.2.1 through 
13.2.2 may be used for stable processes. If process emissions are highly 
variable, the procedure in section 13.2.3 shall be used.
    13.2.1  With a single FTIR instrument and sampling system, begin by 
collecting spectra of two unspiked samples. Introduce the spike flow 
into the sampling system and allow 10 cell volumes to purge the sampling 
system and FTIR cell. Collect spectra of two spiked samples. Turn off 
the spike and allow 10 cell volumes of unspiked sample to purge the FTIR 
cell. Repeat this procedure until the 24 (or more) samples are 
collected.
    13.2.2  In batch sampling, collect spectra of 24 distinct samples. 
(Each distinct sample consists of filling the cell to ambient pressure 
after the cell has been evacuated.)
    13.2.3  Alternatively, a separate probe assembly, line, and sample 
pump can be used for spiked sample. Verify and document that sampling 
conditions are the same in both the spiked and the unspiked sampling 
systems. This can be done by wrapping both sample lines in the same 
heated bundle. Keep the same flow rate in both sample lines. Measure 
samples in sequence in pairs. After two spiked samples are measured, 
evacuate the FTIR cell, and turn the manifold valve so that spiked 
sample flows to the FTIR cell. Allow the connecting line from the 
manifold to the FTIR cell to purge thoroughly (the

[[Page 640]]

time depends on the line length and flow rate). Collect a pair of spiked 
samples. Repeat the procedure until at least 24 measurements are 
completed.
    13.3  Simultaneous Measurements With Two FTIR Systems. If unspiked 
effluent concentrations of the target analyte(s) vary significantly with 
time, it may be desirable to perform synchronized measurements of spiked 
and unspiked sample. Use two FTIR systems, each with its own cell and 
sampling system to perform simultaneous spiked and unspiked 
measurements. The optical configurations shall be similar, if possible. 
The sampling configurations shall be the same. One sampling system and 
FTIR analyzer shall be used to measure spiked effluent. The other 
sampling system and FTIR analyzer shall be used to measure unspiked flue 
gas. Both systems shall use the same sampling procedure (i.e., batch or 
continuous).
    13.3.1  If batch sampling is used, synchronize the cell evacuation, 
cell filling, and collection of spectra. Fill both cells at the same 
rate (in cell volumes per unit time).
    13.3.2  If continuous sampling is used, adjust the sample flow 
through each gas cell so that the same number of cell volumes pass 
through each cell in a given time (i.e. TC1 = 
TC2).
    13.4  Statistical Treatment. The statistical procedure of EPA Method 
301 of this appendix, section 6.3 is used to evaluate the bias and 
precision. For FTIR testing a validation ``run'' is defined as spectra 
of 24 independent samples, 12 of which are spiked with the analyte(s) 
and 12 of which are not spiked.
    13.4.1  Bias. Determine the bias (defined by EPA Method 301 of this 
appendix, section 6.3.2) using equation 7:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.009

Where:

B = Bias at spike level.
Sm = Mean concentration of the analyte spiked samples.
CS = Expected concentration of the spiked samples.

    13.4.2  Correction Factor. Use section 6.3.2.2 of Method 301 of this 
appendix to evaluate the statistical significance of the bias. If it is 
determined that the bias is significant, then use section 6.3.3 of 
Method 301 to calculate a correction factor (CF). Analytical results of 
the test method are multiplied by the correction factor, if 0.7 
 CF  1.3. If is determined that the bias is 
significant and CF >  30 percent, then the test method is 
considered to ``not valid.''
    13.4.3  If measurements do not pass validation, evaluate the 
sampling system, instrument configuration, and analytical system to 
determine if improper set-up or a malfunction was the cause. If so, 
repair the system and repeat the validation.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention.

    The extracted sample gas is vented outside the enclosure containing 
the FTIR system and gas manifold after the analysis. In typical method 
applications the vented sample volume is a small fraction of the source 
volumetric flow and its composition is identical to that emitted from 
the source. When analyte spiking is used, spiked pollutants are vented 
with the extracted sample gas. Approximately 1.6  x  10-\4\ to 3.2  x  
10-\4\ lbs of a single HAP may be vented to the atmosphere in a typical 
validation run of 3 hours. (This assumes a molar mass of 50 to 100 g, 
spike rate of 1.0 L/min, and a standard concentration of 100 ppm). 
Minimize emissions by keeping the spike flow off when not in use.

                         15.0  Waste Management.

    Small volumes of laboratory gas standards can be vented through a 
laboratory hood. Neat samples must be packed and disposed according to 
applicable regulations. Surplus materials may be returned to supplier 
for disposal.
    16.0  References.
    1. ``Field Validation Test Using Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) 
Spectrometry To Measure Formaldehyde, Phenol and Methanol at a Wool 
Fiberglass Production Facility.'' Draft. U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency Report, EPA Contract No. 68D20163, Work Assignment I-32, 
September 1994.
    2. ``FTIR Method Validation at a Coal-Fired Boiler''. Prepared for 
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. 
Publication No.: EPA-454/R95-004, NTIS No.: PB95-193199. July, 1993.
    3. ``Method 301--Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods 
from Various Waste Media,'' 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.
    4. ``Molecular Vibrations; The Theory of Infrared and Raman 
Vibrational Spectra,'' E. Bright Wilson, J. C. Decius, and P. C. Cross, 
Dover Publications, Inc., 1980. For a less intensive treatment of 
molecular rotational-vibrational spectra see, for example, ``Physical 
Chemistry,'' G. M. Barrow, chapters 12, 13, and 14, McGraw Hill, Inc., 
1979.
    5. ``Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrometry,'' Peter R. Griffiths 
and James de Haseth, Chemical Analysis, 83, 16-25,(1986), P. J. Elving, 
J. D. Winefordner and I. M. Kolthoff (ed.), John Wiley and Sons.
    6. ``Computer-Assisted Quantitative Infrared Spectroscopy,'' Gregory 
L. McClure (ed.), ASTM Special Publication 934 (ASTM), 1987.
    7. ``Multivariate Least-Squares Methods Applied to the Quantitative 
Spectral Analysis of Multicomponent Mixtures,'' Applied Spectroscopy, 
39(10), 73-84, 1985.

[[Page 641]]



                                                Table 1.--Example Presentation of Sampling Documentation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Sample time                   Spectrum file name          Background file name         Sample conditioning           Process condition
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


 
          Sample time              Spectrum file      Interferogram        Resolution        Scans        Apodization         Gain        CTS Spectrum
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 642]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.010

      
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.011
    

[[Page 643]]



Addendum to Test Method 320--Protocol for the Use of Extractive Fourier 
   Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectrometry for the Analyses of Gaseous 
                    Emissions from Stationary Sources

                            1.0  Introduction

    The purpose of this addendum is to set general guidelines for the 
use of modern FTIR spectroscopic methods for the analysis of gas samples 
extracted from the effluent of stationary emission sources. This 
addendum outlines techniques for developing and evaluating such methods 
and sets basic requirements for reporting and quality assurance 
procedures.

                            1.1  Nomenclature

    1.1.1  Appendix A to this addendum lists definitions of the symbols 
and terms used in this Protocol, many of which have been taken directly 
from American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) publication E 
131-90a, entitled ``Terminology Relating to Molecular Spectroscopy.''
    1.1.2  Except in the case of background spectra or where otherwise 
noted, the term ``spectrum'' refers to a double-beam spectrum in units 
of absorbance vs. wavenumber (cm-1).
    1.1.3  The term ``Study'' in this addendum refers to a publication 
that has been subjected to EPA- or peer-review.

               2.0  Applicability and Analytical Principle

    2.1  Applicability. This Protocol applies to the determination of 
compound-specific concentrations in single- and multiple-component gas 
phase samples using double-beam absorption spectroscopy in the mid-
infrared band. It does not specifically address other FTIR applications, 
such as single-beam spectroscopy, analysis of open-path (non-enclosed) 
samples, and continuous measurement techniques. If multiple 
spectrometers, absorption cells, or instrumental linewidths are used in 
such analyses, each distinct operational configuration of the system 
must be evaluated separately according to this Protocol.

                        2.2  Analytical Principle

    2.2.1  In the mid-infrared band, most molecules exhibit 
characteristic gas phase absorption spectra that may be recorded by FTIR 
systems. Such systems consist of a source of mid-infrared radiation, an 
interferometer, an enclosed sample cell of known absorption pathlength, 
an infrared detector, optical elements for the transfer of infrared 
radiation between components, and gas flow control and measurement 
components. Adjunct and integral computer systems are used for 
controlling the instrument, processing the signal, and for performing 
both Fourier transforms and quantitative analyses of spectral data.
    2.2.2  The absorption spectra of pure gases and of mixtures of gases 
are described by a linear absorbance theory referred to as Beer's Law. 
Using this law, modern FTIR systems use computerized analytical programs 
to quantify compounds by comparing the absorption spectra of known 
(reference) gas samples to the absorption spectrum of the sample gas. 
Some standard mathematical techniques used for comparisons are classical 
least squares, inverse least squares, cross-correlation, factor 
analysis, and partial least squares. Reference A describes several of 
these techniques, as well as additional techniques, such as 
differentiation methods, linear baseline corrections, and non-linear 
absorbance corrections.

            3.0  General Principles of Protocol Requirements

    The characteristics that distinguish FTIR systems from gas analyzers 
used in instrumental gas analysis methods (e.g., Methods 6C and 7E of 
appendix A to part 60 of this chapter) are: (1) Computers are necessary 
to obtain and analyze data; (2) chemical concentrations can be 
quantified using previously recorded infrared reference spectra; and (3) 
analytical assumptions and results, including possible effects of 
interfering compounds, can be evaluated after the quantitative analysis. 
The following general principles and requirements of this Protocol are 
based on these characteristics.
    3.1  Verifiability and Reproducibility of Results. Store all data 
and document data analysis techniques sufficient to allow an independent 
agent to reproduce the analytical results from the raw interferometric 
data.
    3.2  Transfer of Reference Spectra. To determine whether reference 
spectra recorded under one set of conditions (e.g., optical bench, 
instrumental linewidth, absorption pathlength, detector performance, 
pressure, and temperature) can be used to analyze sample spectra taken 
under a different set of conditions, quantitatively compare 
``calibration transfer standards'' (CTS) and reference spectra as 
described in this Protocol.
    Note:  The CTS may, but need not, include analytes of interest). To 
effect this, record the absorption spectra of the CTS (a) immediately 
before and immediately after recording reference spectra and (b) 
immediately after recording sample spectra.
    3.3  Evaluation of FTIR Analyses. The applicability, accuracy, and 
precision of FTIR measurements are influenced by a number of 
interrelated factors, which may be divided into two classes:
    3.3.1  Sample-Independent Factors. Examples are system configuration 
and performance (e.g., detector sensitivity and infrared source output), 
quality and applicability of reference absorption spectra, and type of

[[Page 644]]

mathematical analyses of the spectra. These factors define the 
fundamental limitations of FTIR measurements for a given system 
configuration. These limitations may be estimated from evaluations of 
the system before samples are available. For example, the detection 
limit for the absorbing compound under a given set of conditions may be 
estimated from the system noise level and the strength of a particular 
absorption band. Similarly, the accuracy of measurements may be 
estimated from the analysis of the reference spectra.
    3.3.2  Sample-Dependent Factors. Examples are spectral interferants 
(e.g., water vapor and CO2) or the overlap of spectral 
features of different compounds and contamination deposits on reflective 
surfaces or transmitting windows. To maximize the effectiveness of the 
mathematical techniques used in spectral analysis, identification of 
interferants (a standard initial step) and analysis of samples (includes 
effect of other analytical errors) are necessary. Thus, the Protocol 
requires post-analysis calculation of measurement concentration 
uncertainties for the detection of these potential sources of 
measurement error.

               4.0  Pre-Test Preparations and Evaluations

    Before testing, demonstrate the suitability of FTIR spectrometry for 
the desired application according to the procedures of this section.
    4.1  Identify Test Requirements. Identify and record the test 
requirements described in sections 4.1.1 through 4.1.4 of this addendum. 
These values set the desired or required goals of the proposed analysis; 
the description of methods for determining whether these goals are 
actually met during the analysis comprises the majority of this 
Protocol.
    4.1.1  Analytes (specific chemical species) of interest. Label the 
analytes from i = 1 to I.
    4.1.2  Analytical uncertainty limit (AUi). The 
AUi is the maximum permissible fractional uncertainty of 
analysis for the ith analyte concentration, expressed as a 
fraction of the analyte concentration in the sample.
    4.1.3  Required detection limit for each analyte (DLi, 
ppm). The detection limit is the lowest concentration of an analyte for 
which its overall fractional uncertainty (OFUi) is required 
to be less than its analytical uncertainty limit (AUi).
    4.1.4  Maximum expected concentration of each analyte 
(CMAXi, ppm).
    4.2  Identify Potential Interferants. Considering the chemistry of 
the process or results of previous studies, identify potential 
interferants, i.e., the major effluent constituents and any relatively 
minor effluent constituents that possess either strong absorption 
characteristics or strong structural similarities to any analyte of 
interest. Label them 1 through Nj, where the subscript ``j'' 
pertains to potential interferants. Estimate the concentrations of these 
compounds in the effluent (CPOTj, ppm).
    4.3  Select and Evaluate the Sampling System. Considering the 
source, e.g., temperature and pressure profiles, moisture content, 
analyte characteristics, and particulate concentration), select the 
equipment for extracting gas samples. Recommended are a particulate 
filter, heating system to maintain sample temperature above the dew 
point for all sample constituents at all points within the sampling 
system (including the filter), and sample conditioning system (e.g., 
coolers, water-permeable membranes that remove water or other compounds 
from the sample, and dilution devices) to remove spectral interferants 
or to protect the sampling and analytical components. Determine the 
minimum absolute sample system pressure (Pmin, mmHg) and the 
infrared absorption cell volume (VSS, liter). Select the 
techniques and/or equipment for the measurement of sample pressures and 
temperatures.
    4.4  Select Spectroscopic System. Select a spectroscopic 
configuration for the application. Approximate the absorption pathlength 
(LS', meter), sample pressure (PS', kPa), absolute 
sample temperature TS', and signal integration period 
(tSS, seconds) for the analysis. Specify the nominal minimum 
instrumental linewidth (MIL) of the system. Verify that the fractional 
error at the approximate values PS' and TS' is 
less than one half the smallest value AUi (see section 4.1.2 
of this addendum).
    4.5  Select Calibration Transfer Standards (CTS's). Select CTS's 
that meet the criteria listed in sections 4.5.1, 4.5.2, and 4.5.3 of 
this addendum.
    Note: It may be necessary to choose preliminary analytical regions 
(see section 4.7 of this addendum), identify the minimum analyte 
linewidths, or estimate the system noise level (see section 4.12 of this 
addendum) before selecting the CTS. More than one compound may be needed 
to meet the criteria; if so, obtain separate cylinders for each 
compound.
    4.5.1  The central wavenumber position of each analytical region 
shall lie within 25 percent of the wavenumber position of at least one 
CTS absorption band.
    4.5.2  The absorption bands in section 4.5.1 of this addendum shall 
exhibit peak absorbances greater than ten times the value 
RMSEST (see section 4.12 of this addendum) but less than 1.5 
absorbance units.
    4.5.3  At least one absorption CTS band within the operating range 
of the FTIR instrument shall have an instrument-independent linewidth no 
greater than the narrowest analyte absorption band. Perform and document 
measurements or cite Studies to determine analyte and CTS compound 
linewidths.

[[Page 645]]

    4.5.4  For each analytical region, specify the upper and lower 
wavenumber positions (FFUm and FFLm, respectively) 
that bracket the CTS absorption band or bands for the associated 
analytical region. Specify the wavenumber range, FNU to FNL, containing 
the absorption band that meets the criterion of section 4.5.3 of this 
addendum.
    4.5.5  Associate, whenever possible, a single set of CTS gas 
cylinders with a set of reference spectra. Replacement CTS gas cylinders 
shall contain the same compounds at concentrations within 5 percent of 
that of the original CTS cylinders; the entire absorption spectra (not 
individual spectral segments) of the replacement gas shall be scaled by 
a factor between 0.95 and 1.05 to match the original CTS spectra.

                     4.6  Prepare Reference Spectra

    Note: Reference spectra are available in a permanent soft copy from 
the EPA spectral library on the EMTIC (Emission Measurement Technical 
Information Center) computer bulletin board; they may be used if 
applicable.
    4.6.1  Select the reference absorption pathlength (LR) of 
the cell.
    4.6.2  Obtain or prepare a set of chemical standards for each 
analyte, potential and known spectral interferants, and CTS. Select the 
concentrations of the chemical standards to correspond to the top of the 
desired range.
    4.6.2.1  Commercially-Prepared Chemical Standards. Chemical 
standards for many compounds may be obtained from independent sources, 
such as a specialty gas manufacturer, chemical company, or commercial 
laboratory. These standards (accurate to within 2 percent) 
shall be prepared according to EPA Traceability Protocol (see Reference 
D) or shall be traceable to NIST standards. Obtain from the supplier an 
estimate of the stability of the analyte concentration. Obtain and 
follow all of the supplier's recommendations for recertifying the 
analyte concentration.
    4.6.2.2  Self-Prepared Chemical Standards. Chemical standards may be 
prepared by diluting certified commercially prepared chemical gases or 
pure analytes with ultra-pure carrier (UPC) grade nitrogen according to 
the barometric and volumetric techniques generally described in 
Reference A, section A4.6.
    4.6.3  Record a set of the absorption spectra of the CTS {R1{time} , 
then a set of the reference spectra at two or more concentrations in 
duplicate over the desired range (the top of the range must be less than 
10 times that of the bottom), followed by a second set of CTS spectra 
{R2{time} . (If self-prepared standards are used, see section 4.6.5 of 
this addendum before disposing of any of the standards.) The maximum 
accepted standard concentration-pathlength product (ASCPP) for each 
compound shall be higher than the maximum estimated concentration-
pathlength products for both analytes and known interferants in the 
effluent gas. For each analyte, the minimum ASCPP shall be no greater 
than ten times the concentration-pathlength product of that analyte at 
its required detection limit.
    4.6.4  Permanently store the background and interferograms in 
digitized form. Document details of the mathematical process for 
generating the spectra from these interferograms. Record the sample 
pressure (PR), sample temperature (TR), reference 
absorption pathlength (LR), and interferogram signal 
integration period (tSR). Signal integration periods for the 
background interferograms shall be tSR. Values of 
PR, LR, and tSR shall not deviate by 
more than 1 percent from the time of recording [R1] to that 
of recording [R2].
    4.6.5  If self-prepared chemical standards are employed and spectra 
of only two concentrations are recorded for one or more compounds, 
verify the accuracy of the dilution technique by analyzing the prepared 
standards for those compounds with a secondary (non-FTIR) technique in 
accordance with sections 4.6.5.1 through 4.6.5.4 of this addendum.
    4.6.5.1  Record the response of the secondary technique to each of 
the four standards prepared.
    4.6.5.2  Perform a linear regression of the response values 
(dependant variable) versus the accepted standard concentration (ASC) 
values (independent variable), with the regression constrained to pass 
through the zero-response, zero ASC point.
    4.6.5.3  Calculate the average fractional difference between the 
actual response values and the regression-predicted values (those 
calculated from the regression line using the four ASC values as the 
independent variable).
    4.6.5.4  If the average fractional difference value calculated in 
section 4.6.5.3 of this addendum is larger for any compound than the 
corresponding AUi, the dilution technique is not sufficiently 
accurate and the reference spectra prepared are not valid for the 
analysis.
    4.7  Select Analytical Regions. Using the general considerations in 
section 7 of Reference A and the spectral characteristics of the 
analytes and interferants, select the analytical regions for the 
application. Label them m = 1 to M. Specify the lower, center and upper 
wavenumber positions of each analytical region (FLm, 
FCm, and FUm, respectively). Specify the analytes 
and interferants which exhibit absorption in each region.
    4.8  Determine Fractional Reproducibility Uncertainties. Using 
appendix E of this addendum, calculate the fractional reproducibility 
uncertainty for each analyte (FRUi) from a comparison of [R1] 
and [R2]. If FRUi > AUi for any analyte, the 
reference spectra generated

[[Page 646]]

in accordance with section 4.6 of this addendum are not valid for the 
application.
    4.9  Identify Known Interferants. Using appendix B of this addendum, 
determine which potential interferants affect the analyte concentration 
determinations. Relabel these potential interferant as ``known'' 
interferants, and designate these compounds from k = 1 to K. Appendix B 
to this addendum also provides criteria for determining whether the 
selected analytical regions are suitable.

             4.10  Prepare Computerized Analytical Programs

    4.10.1  Choose or devise mathematical techniques (e.g, classical 
least squares, inverse least squares, cross-correlation, and factor 
analysis) based on equation 4 of Reference A that are appropriate for 
analyzing spectral data by comparison with reference spectra.
    4.10.2  Following the general recommendations of Reference A, 
prepare a computer program or set of programs that analyzes all of the 
analytes and known interferants, based on the selected analytical 
regions (section 4.7 of this addendum) and the prepared reference 
spectra (section 4.6 of this addendum). Specify the baseline correction 
technique (e.g., determining the slope and intercept of a linear 
baseline contribution in each analytical region) for each analytical 
region, including all relevant wavenumber positions.
    4.10.3  Use programs that provide as output [at the reference 
absorption pathlength (LR), reference gas temperature 
(TR), and reference gas pressure (PR)] the analyte 
concentrations, the known interferant concentrations, and the baseline 
slope and intercept values. If the sample absorption pathlength 
(LS), sample gas temperature (TS), or sample gas 
pressure (PS) during the actual sample analyses differ from 
LR, TR, and PR, use a program or set of 
programs that applies multiplicative corrections to the derived 
concentrations to account for these variations, and that provides as 
output both the corrected and uncorrected values. Include in the report 
of the analysis (see section 7.0 of this addendum) the details of any 
transformations applied to the original reference spectra (e.g., 
differentiation), in such a fashion that all analytical results may be 
verified by an independent agent from the reference spectra and data 
spectra alone.
    4.11  Determine the Fractional Calibration Uncertainty. Calculate 
the fractional calibration uncertainty for each analyte (FCUi) according 
to appendix F of this addendum, and compare these values to the 
fractional uncertainty limits (AUi; see section 4.1.2 of this 
addendum). If FCUi >AUi, either the reference 
spectra or analytical programs for that analyte are unsuitable.
    4.12  Verify System Configuration Suitability. Using appendix C of 
this addendum, measure or obtain estimates of the noise level 
(RMSEST, absorbance) of the FTIR system. Alternatively, 
construct the complete spectrometer system and determine the values 
RMSSm using appendix G of this addendum. Estimate the minimum 
measurement uncertainty for each analyte (MAUi, ppm) and 
known interferant (MIUk, ppm) using appendix D of this 
addendum. Verify that (a) MAUi  
(AUi)(DLi), FRUi  AUi, and FCUi  
AUi for each analyte and that (b) the CTS chosen meets the 
requirements listed in sections 4.5.1 through 4.5.5 of this addendum.

                  5.0  Sampling and Analysis Procedure

    5.1  Analysis System Assembly and Leak-Test. Assemble the analysis 
system. Allow sufficient time for all system components to reach the 
desired temperature. Then, determine the leak-rate (LR) and 
leak volume (VL), where VL=LR 
tSS. Leak volumes shall be 4 percent of 
VSS.
    5.2  Verify Instrumental Performance. Measure the noise level of the 
system in each analytical region using the procedure of appendix G of 
this addendum. If any noise level is higher than that estimated for the 
system in section 4.12 of this addendum, repeat the calculations of 
appendix D of this addendum and verify that the requirements of section 
4.12 of this addendum are met; if they are not, adjust or repair the 
instrument and repeat this section.

             5.3  Determine the Sample Absorption Pathlength

    Record a background spectrum. Then, fill the absorption cell with 
CTS at the pressure PR and record a set of CTS spectra [R3]. 
Store the background and unscaled CTS single beam interferograms and 
spectra. Using appendix H of this addendum, calculate the sample 
absorption pathlength (LS) for each analytical region. The 
values LS shall not differ from the approximated sample 
pathlength LS' (see section 4.4 of this addendum) by more 
than 5 percent.
    5.4  Record Sample Spectrum. Connect the sample line to the source. 
Either evacuate the absorption cell to an absolute pressure below 5 mmHg 
before extracting a sample from the effluent stream into the absorption 
cell, or pump at least ten cell volumes of sample through the cell 
before obtaining a sample. Record the sample pressure PS. 
Generate the absorbance spectrum of the sample. Store the background and 
sample single beam interferograms, and document the process by which the 
absorbance spectra are generated from these data. (If necessary, apply 
the spectral transformations developed in section 5.6.2 of this 
addendum). The resulting sample spectrum is referred to below as 
SS.

    Note: Multiple sample spectra may be recorded according to the 
procedures of section

[[Page 647]]

5.4 of this addendum before performing sections 5.5 and 5.6 of this 
addendum.

    5.5  Quantify Analyte Concentrations. Calculate the unscaled analyte 
concentrations RUAi and unscaled interferant concentrations 
RUIK using the programs developed in section 4 of this 
addendum. To correct for pathlength and pressure variations between the 
reference and sample spectra, calculate the scaling factor, 
RLPS using equation A.1,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.012

Calculate the final analyte and interferant concentrations 
RSAi and RSIk using equations A.2 and A.3,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.013

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.014

    5.6  Determine Fractional Analysis Uncertainty. Fill the absorption 
cell with CTS at the pressure PS. Record a set of CTS spectra 
[R4]. Store the background and CTS single beam interferograms. Using 
appendix H of this addendum, calculate the fractional analysis 
uncertainty (FAU) for each analytical region. If the FAU indicated for 
any analytical region is greater than the required accuracy requirements 
determined in sections 4.1.1 through 4.1.4 of this addendum, then 
comparisons to previously recorded reference spectra are invalid in that 
analytical region, and the analyst shall perform one or both of the 
procedures of sections 5.6.1 through 5.6.2 of this addendum.
    5.6.1  Perform instrumental checks and adjust the instrument to 
restore its performance to acceptable levels. If adjustments are made, 
repeat sections 5.3, 5.4 (except for the recording of a sample 
spectrum), and 5.5 of this addendum to demonstrate that acceptable 
uncertainties are obtained in all analytical regions.
    5.6.2  Apply appropriate mathematical transformations (e.g., 
frequency shifting, zero-filling, apodization, smoothing) to the spectra 
(or to the interferograms upon which the spectra are based) generated 
during the performance of the procedures of section 5.3 of this 
addendum. Document these transformations and their reproducibility. Do 
not apply multiplicative scaling of the spectra, or any set of 
transformations that is mathematically equivalent to multiplicative 
scaling. Different transformations may be applied to different 
analytical regions. Frequency shifts shall be less than one-half the 
minimum instrumental linewidth, and must be applied to all spectral data 
points in an analytical region. The mathematical transformations may be 
retained for the analysis if they are also applied to the appropriate 
analytical regions of all sample spectra recorded, and if all original 
sample spectra are digitally stored. Repeat sections 5.3, 5.4 (except 
the recording of a sample spectrum), and 5.5 of this addendum to 
demonstrate that these transformations lead to acceptable calculated 
concentration uncertainties in all analytical regions.

                     6.0  Post-Analysis Evaluations

    Estimate the overall accuracy of the analyses performed in 
accordance with sections 5.1 through 5.6 of this addendum using the 
procedures of sections 6.1 through 6.3 of this addendum.
    6.1  Qualitatively Confirm the Assumed Matrix. Examine each 
analytical region of the sample spectrum for spectral evidence of 
unexpected or unidentified interferants. If found, identify the 
interfering compounds (see Reference C for guidance) and add them to the 
list of known interferants. Repeat the procedures of section 4 of this 
addendum to include the interferants in the uncertainty calculations and 
analysis procedures. Verify that the MAU and FCU values do not increase 
beyond acceptable levels for the application requirements. Re-calculate 
the analyte concentrations (section 5.5 of this addendum) in the 
affected analytical regions.
    6.2  Quantitatively Evaluate Fractional Model Uncertainty (FMU). 
Perform the procedures of either section 6.2.1 or 6.2.2 of this 
addendum:
    6.2.1  Using appendix I of this addendum, determine the fractional 
model error (FMU) for each analyte.
    6.2.2  Provide statistically determined uncertainties FMU for each 
analyte which are equivalent to two standard deviations at the 95 
percent confidence level. Such determinations, if employed, must be 
based on mathematical examinations of the pertinent sample spectra (not 
the reference spectra alone). Include in the report of the analysis (see 
section 7.0 of this addendum) a complete description of the 
determination of the concentration uncertainties.
    6.3  Estimate Overall Concentration Uncertainty (OCU). Using 
appendix J of this addendum, determine the overall concentration 
uncertainty (OCU) for each analyte. If the OCU is larger than the 
required accuracy for any analyte, repeat sections 4 and 6 of this 
addendum.

                       7.0  Reporting Requirements

[Documentation pertaining to virtually all the procedures of sections 4, 
5, and 6 will be required. Software copies of reference spectra and 
sample spectra will be retained for some minimum time following the 
actual testing.]

                             8.0  References

    (A) Standard Practices for General Techniques of Infrared 
Quantitative Analysis

[[Page 648]]

(American Society for Testing and Materials, Designation E 168-88).
    (B) The Coblentz Society Specifications for Evaluation of Research 
Quality Analytical Infrared Reference Spectra (Class II); Anal. 
Chemistry 47, 945A (1975); Appl. Spectroscopy 444, pp. 211-215, 1990.
    (C) Standard Practices for General Techniques for Qualitative 
Infrared Analysis, American Society for Testing and Materials, 
Designation E 1252-88.
    (D) ``EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of 
Gaseous Calibration Standards,'' U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 
Publication No. EPA/600/R-93/224, December 1993.

 Appendix A to Addendum to Method 320--Definitions of Terms and Symbols

    A.1  Definitions of Terms. All terms used in this method that are 
not defined below have the meaning given to them in the CAA and in 
subpart A of this part.
    Absorption band means a contiguous wavenumber region of a spectrum 
(equivalently, a contiguous set of absorbance spectrum data points) in 
which the absorbance passes through a maximum or a series of maxima.
    Absorption pathlength means the distance in a spectrophotometer, 
measured in the direction of propagation of the beam of radiant energy, 
between the surface of the specimen on which the radiant energy is 
incident and the surface of the specimen from which it is emergent.
    Analytical region means a contiguous wavenumber region 
(equivalently, a contiguous set of absorbance spectrum data points) used 
in the quantitative analysis for one or more analytes.

    Note: The quantitative result for a single analyte may be based on 
data from more than one analytical region.

    Apodization means modification of the ILS function by multiplying 
the interferogram by a weighing function whose magnitude varies with 
retardation.
    Background spectrum means the single beam spectrum obtained with all 
system components without sample present.
    Baseline means any line drawn on an absorption spectrum to establish 
a reference point that represents a function of the radiant power 
incident on a sample at a given wavelength.
    Beers's law means the direct proportionality of the absorbance of a 
compound in a homogeneous sample to its concentration.
    Calibration transfer standard (CTS) gas means a gas standard of a 
compound used to achieve and/or demonstrate suitable quantitative 
agreement between sample spectra and the reference spectra; see section 
4.5.1 of this addendum.
    Compound means a substance possessing a distinct, unique molecular 
structure.
    Concentration (c) means the quantity of a compound contained in a 
unit quantity of sample. The unit ``ppm'' (number, or mole, basis) is 
recommended.
    Concentration-pathlength product means the mathematical product of 
concentration of the species and absorption pathlength. For reference 
spectra, this is a known quantity; for sample spectra, it is the 
quantity directly determined from Beer's law. The units ``centimeters-
ppm'' or ``meters-ppm'' are recommended.
    Derivative absorption spectrum means a plot of rate of change of 
absorbance or of any function of absorbance with respect to wavelength 
or any function of wavelength.
    Double beam spectrum means a transmission or absorbance spectrum 
derived by dividing the sample single beam spectrum by the background 
spectrum.

    Note: The term ``double-beam'' is used elsewhere to denote a 
spectrum in which the sample and background interferograms are collected 
simultaneously along physically distinct absorption paths. Here, the 
term denotes a spectrum in which the sample and background 
interferograms are collected at different times along the same 
absorption path.

    Fast Fourier transform (FFT) means a method of speeding up the 
computation of a discrete FT by factoring the data into sparse matrices 
containing mostly zeros.
    Flyback means interferometer motion during which no data are 
recorded.
    Fourier transform (FT) means the mathematical process for converting 
an amplitude-time spectrum to an amplitude-frequency spectrum, or vice 
versa.
    Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) spectrometer means an analytical 
system that employs a source of mid-infrared radiation, an 
interferometer, an enclosed sample cell of known absorption pathlength, 
an infrared detector, optical elements that transfer infrared radiation 
between components, and a computer system. The time-domain detector 
response (interferogram) is processed by a Fourier transform to yield a 
representation of the detector response vs. infrared frequency.

    Note: When FTIR spectrometers are interfaced with other instruments, 
a slash should be used to denote the interface; e.g., GC/FTIR; HPCL/
FTIR, and the use of FTIR should be explicit; i.e., FTIR not IR.

    Frequency, v means the number of cycles per unit time.
    Infrared means the portion of the electromagnetic spectrum 
containing wavelengths from approximately 0.78 to 800 microns.
    Interferogram, I() means record of the modulated component 
of the interference

[[Page 649]]

signal measured as a function of retardation by the detector.
    Interferometer means device that divides a beam of radiant energy 
into two or more paths, generates an optical path difference between the 
beams, and recombines them in order to produce repetitive interference 
maxima and minima as the optical retardation is varied.
    Linewidth means the full width at half maximum of an absorption band 
in units of wavenumbers (cm-1).
    Mid-infrared means the region of the electromagnetic spectrum from 
approximately 400 to 5000 cm-1.
    Reference spectra means absorption spectra of gases with known 
chemical compositions, recorded at a known absorption pathlength, which 
are used in the quantitative analysis of gas samples.
    Retardation,  means optical path difference between two 
beams in an interferometer; also known as ``optical path difference'' or 
``optical retardation.''
    Scan means digital representation of the detector output obtained 
during one complete motion of the interferometer's moving assembly or 
assemblies.
    Scaling means application of a multiplicative factor to the 
absorbance values in a spectrum.
    Single beam spectrum means Fourier-transformed interferogram, 
representing the detector response vs. wavenumber.

    Note: The term ``single-beam'' is used elsewhere to denote any 
spectrum in which the sample and background interferograms are recorded 
on the same physical absorption path; such usage differentiates such 
spectra from those generated using interferograms recorded along two 
physically distinct absorption paths (see ``double-beam spectrum'' 
above). Here, the term applies (for example) to the two spectra used 
directly in the calculation of transmission and absorbance spectra of a 
sample.

    Standard reference material means a reference material, the 
composition or properties of which are certified by a recognized 
standardizing agency or group.

    Note: The equivalent ISO term is ``certified reference material.''

    Transmittance, T means the ratio of radiant power transmitted by the 
sample to the radiant power incident on the sample. Estimated in FTIR 
spectroscopy by forming the ratio of the single-beam sample and 
background spectra.
    Wavenumber, v means the number of waves per unit length.

    Note: The usual unit of wavenumber is the reciprocal centimeter, 
cm-1. The wavenumber is the reciprocal of the wavelength, 
, when  is expressed in centimeters.

    Zero-filling means the addition of zero-valued points to the end of 
a measured interferogram.

    Note: Performing the FT of a zero-filled interferogram results in 
correctly interpolated points in the computed spectrum.

    A.2  Definitions of Mathematical Symbols. The symbols used in 
equations in this protocol are defined as follows:
    (1) A, absorbance = the logarithm to the base 10 of the reciprocal 
of the transmittance (T).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.015

    (2) AAIim = band area of the ith analyte in 
the mth analytical region, at the concentration 
(CLi) corresponding to the product of its required detection 
limit (DLi) and analytical uncertainty limit (AUi) 
.
    (3) AAVim = average absorbance of the ith 
analyte in the mth analytical region, at the concentration 
(CLi) corresponding to the product of its required detection 
limit (DLi) and analytical uncertainty limit 
(AUi).
    (4) ASC, accepted standard concentration = the concentration value 
assigned to a chemical standard.
    (5) ASCPP, accepted standard concentration-pathlength product = for 
a chemical standard, the product of the ASC and the sample absorption 
pathlength. The units ``centimeters-ppm'' or ``meters-ppm'' are 
recommended.
    (6) AUi, analytical uncertainty limit = the maximum 
permissible fractional uncertainty of analysis for the ith 
analyte concentration, expressed as a fraction of the analyte 
concentration determined in the analysis.
    (7) AVTm = average estimated total absorbance in the 
mth analytical region.
    (8) CKWNk = estimated concentration of the kth 
known interferant.
    (9) CMAXi = estimated maximum concentration of the 
ith analyte.
    (10) CPOTj = estimated concentration of the 
jth potential interferant.
    (11) DLi, required detection limit = for the 
ith analyte, the lowest concentration of the analyte for 
which its overall fractional uncertainty (OFUi) is required 
to be less than the analytical uncertainty limit (AUi).
    (12) FCm = center wavenumber position of the 
mth analytical region.
    (13) FAUi, fractional analytical uncertainty = calculated 
uncertainty in the measured concentration of the ith analyte 
because of errors in the mathematical comparison of reference and sample 
spectra.
    (14) FCUi, fractional calibration uncertainty = 
calculated uncertainty in the measured concentration of the 
ith analyte because of errors in Beer's law modeling of the 
reference spectra concentrations.

[[Page 650]]

    (15) FFLm = lower wavenumber position of the CTS 
absorption band associated with the mth analytical region.
    (16) FFUm = upper wavenumber position of the CTS 
absorption band associated with the mth analytical region.
    (17) FLm = lower wavenumber position of the 
mth analytical region.
    (18) FMUi, fractional model uncertainty = calculated 
uncertainty in the measured concentration of the ith analyte 
because of errors in the absorption model employed.
    (19) FNL = lower wavenumber position of the CTS spectrum 
containing an absorption band at least as narrow as the analyte 
absorption bands.
    (20) FNU = upper wavenumber position of the CTS spectrum 
containing an absorption band at least as narrow as the analyte 
absorption bands.
    (21) FRUi, fractional reproducibility uncertainty = 
calculated uncertainty in the measured concentration of the 
ith analyte because of errors in the reproducibility of 
spectra from the FTIR system.
    (22) FUm = upper wavenumber position of the 
mth analytical region.
    (23) IAIjm = band area of the jth potential 
interferant in the mth analytical region, at its expected 
concentration (CPOTj).
    (24) IAVim = average absorbance of the ith 
analyte in the mth analytical region, at its expected 
concentration (CPOTj).
    (25) ISCi or k, indicated standard concentration = the 
concentration from the computerized analytical program for a single-
compound reference spectrum for the ith analyte or 
kth known interferant.
    (26) kPa = kilo-Pascal (see Pascal).
    (27) LS' = estimated sample absorption pathlength.
    (28) LR = reference absorption pathlength.
    (29) LS = actual sample absorption pathlength.
    (30) MAUi = mean of the MAUim over the 
appropriate analytical regions.
    (31) MAUim, minimum analyte uncertainty = the calculated 
minimum concentration for which the analytical uncertainty limit 
(AUi) in the measurement of the ith analyte, based 
on spectral data in the mth analytical region, can be 
maintained.
    (32) MIUj = mean of the MIUjm over the 
appropriate analytical regions.
    (33) MIUjm, minimum interferant uncertainty = the 
calculated minimum concentration for which the analytical uncertainty 
limit CPOTj/20 in the measurement of the jth 
interferant, based on spectral data in the mth analytical 
region, can be maintained.
    (34) MIL, minimum instrumental linewidth = the minimum linewidth 
from the FTIR system, in wavenumbers.

    Note: The MIL of a system may be determined by observing an 
absorption band known (through higher resolution examinations) to be 
narrower than indicated by the system. The MIL is fundamentally limited 
by the retardation of the interferometer, but is also affected by other 
operational parameters (e.g., the choice of apodization).

    (35) Ni = number of analytes.
    (36) Nj = number of potential interferants.
    (37) Nk = number of known interferants.
    (38) Nscan = the number of scans averaged to obtain an 
interferogram.
    (39) OFUi = the overall fractional uncertainty in an 
analyte concentration determined in the analysis (OFUi = 
MAX[FRUi, FCUi, FAUi, 
FMUi]).
    (40) Pascal (Pa) = metric unit of static pressure, equal to one 
Newton per square meter; one atmosphere is equal to 101,325 Pa; 1/760 
atmosphere (one Torr, or one millimeter Hg) is equal to 133.322 Pa.
    (41) Pmin = minimum pressure of the sampling system 
during the sampling procedure.
    (42) PS' = estimated sample pressure.
    (43) PR = reference pressure.
    (44) PS = actual sample pressure.
    (45) RMSSm = measured noise level of the FTIR system in 
the mth analytical region.
    (46) RMSD, root mean square difference = a measure of accuracy 
determined by the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.016

Where:

n = the number of observations for which the accuracy is determined.
ei = the difference between a measured value of a property 
          and its mean value over the n observations.

    Note: The RMSD value ``between a set of n contiguous absorbance 
values (Ai) and the mean of the values'' (AM) is 
defined as
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.017

    (47) RSAi = the (calculated) final concentration of the 
ith analyte.
    (48) RSIk = the (calculated) final concentration of the 
kth known interferant.
    (49) tscan, scan time = time used to acquire a single 
scan, not including flyback.
    (50) tS, signal integration period = the period of time 
over which an interferogram is averaged by addition and scaling of 
individual scans. In terms of the number of scans Nscan and 
scan time tscan, tS = 
Nscantscan.
    (51) tSR = signal integration period used in recording 
reference spectra.
    (52) tSS = signal integration period used in recording 
sample spectra.
    (53) TR = absolute temperature of gases used in recording 
reference spectra.
    (54) TS = absolute temperature of sample gas as sample 
spectra are recorded.

[[Page 651]]

    (55) TP, Throughput = manufacturer's estimate of the fraction of the 
total infrared power transmitted by the absorption cell and transfer 
optics from the interferometer to the detector.
    (56) VSS = volume of the infrared absorption cell, 
including parts of attached tubing.
    (57) Wik = weight used to average over analytical regions 
k for quantities related to the analyte i; see appendix D of this 
addendum.

 Appendix B to Addendum to Method 320--Identifying Spectral Interferants

                              B.1  General

    B.1.1  Assume a fixed absorption pathlength equal to the value 
LS'.
    B.1.2  Use band area calculations to compare the relative absorption 
strengths of the analytes and potential interferants. In the 
mth analytical region (FLm to FUm), use 
either rectangular or trapezoidal approximations to determine the band 
areas described below (see Reference A, sections A.3.1 through A.3.3). 
Document any baseline corrections applied to the spectra.
    B.1.3  Use the average total absorbance of the analytes and 
potential interferants in each analytical region to determine whether 
the analytical region is suitable for analyte concentration 
determinations.

    Note: The average absorbance in an analytical region is the band 
area divided by the width of the analytical region in wavenumbers. The 
average total absorbance in an analytical region is the sum of the 
average absorbances of all analytes and potential interferants.

                            B.2  Calculations

    B.2.1  Prepare spectral representations of each analyte at the 
concentration CLi = (DLi)(AUi), where 
DLi is the required detection limit and AUi is the 
maximum permissible analytical uncertainty. For the mth 
analytical region, calculate the band area (AAIim) and 
average absorbance (AAVim) from these scaled analyte spectra.
    B.2.2  Prepare spectral representations of each potential 
interferant at its expected concentration (CPOTj). For the 
mth analytical region, calculate the band area 
(IAIjm) and average absorbance (IAVjm) from these 
scaled potential interferant spectra.
    B.2.3  Repeat the calculation for each analytical region, and record 
the band area results in matrix form as indicated in Figure B.1.
    B.2.4  If the band area of any potential interferant in an 
analytical region is greater than the one-half the band area of any 
analyte (i.e., IAIjm > 0.5 AAIim for any pair ij 
and any m), classify the potential interferant as a known interferant. 
Label the known interferants k = 1 to K. Record the results in matrix 
form as indicated in Figure B.2.
    B.2.5  Calculate the average total absorbance (AVTm) for 
each analytical region and record the values in the last row of the 
matrix described in Figure B.2. Any analytical region where 
AVTm > 2.0 is unsuitable.

[[Page 652]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.018


[[Page 653]]



      Appendix C to Addendum to Method 320--Estimating Noise Levels

                              C.1  General

    C.1.1  The root-mean-square (RMS) noise level is the standard 
measure of noise in this addendum. The RMS noise level of a contiguous 
segment of a spectrum is defined as the RMS difference (RMSD) between 
the absorbance values which form the segment and the mean value of that 
segment (see appendix A of this addendum).
    C.1.2  The RMS noise value in double-beam absorbance spectra is 
assumed to be inversely proportional to: (a) the square root of the 
signal integration period of the sample single beam spectra from which 
it is formed, and (b) the total infrared power transmitted through the 
interferometer and absorption cell.
    C.1.3  Practically, the assumption of C.1.2 allows the RMS noise 
level of a complete system to be estimated from the quantities described 
in sections C.1.3.1 through C.1.3.4:
    C.1.3.1  RMSMAN, the noise level of the system (in 
absorbance units), without the absorption cell and transfer optics, 
under those conditions necessary to yield the specified minimum 
instrumental linewidth, e.g., Jacquinot stop size.
    C.1.3.2  tMAN, the manufacturer's signal integration time 
used to determine RMSMAN.
    C.1.3.3  tSS, the signal integration time for the 
analyses.
    C.1.3.4  TP, the manufacturer's estimate of the fraction of the 
total infrared power transmitted by the absorption cell and transfer 
optics from the interferometer to the detector.

                            C.2  Calculations

    C.2.1  Obtain the values of RMSMAN, tMAN, and 
TP from the manufacturers of the equipment, or determine the noise level 
by direct measurements with the completely constructed system proposed 
in section 4 of this addendum.
    C.2.2  Calculate the noise value of the system (RMSEST) 
using equation C.1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.019

 Appendix D to Addendum to Method 320--Estimating Minimum Concentration 
                 Measurement Uncertainties (MAU and MIU)

                              D.1  General

    Estimate the minimum concentration measurement uncertainties for the 
ith analyte (MAUi) and jth interferant 
(MIUj) based on the spectral data in the mth 
analytical region by comparing the analyte band area in the analytical 
region (AAIim) and estimating or measuring the noise level of 
the system (RMSEST or RMSSM).

    Note: For a single analytical region, the MAU or MIU value is the 
concentration of the analyte or interferant for which the band area is 
equal to the product of the analytical region width (in wavenumbers) and 
the noise level of the system (in absorbance units). If data from more 
than one analytical region are used in the determination of an analyte 
concentration, the MAU or MIU is the mean of the separate MAU or MIU 
values calculated for each analytical region.

                            D.2  Calculations

    D.2.1  For each analytical region, set 
RMS = RMSSM if measured (appendix G of this addendum), or set 
RMS = RMSEST 
if estimated (appendix C of this addendum).
    D.2.2  For each analyte associated with the analytical region, 
calculate MAUim using equation D.1,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.020

    D.2.3  If only the mth analytical region is used to 
calculate the concentration of the ith analyte, set 
MAUi = MAUim.
    D.2.4  If more than one analytical region is used to calculate the 
concentration of the ith analyte, set MAUi equal 
to the weighted mean of the appropriate MAUim values 
calculated above; the weight for each term in the mean is equal to the 
fraction of the total wavenumber range used for the calculation

[[Page 654]]

represented by each analytical region. Mathematically, if the set of 
analytical regions employed is [m'], then the MAU for each analytical 
region is given by equation D.2.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.021

where the weight Wik is defined for each term in the sum as
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.022

    D.2.5  Repeat sections D.2.1 through D.2.4 of this appendix to 
calculate the analogous values MIUj for the interferants j = 
1 to J. Replace the value (AUi) (DLi) in equation 
D.1 with CPOTj/20; replace the value AAIim in 
equation D.1 with IAIjm.

      Appendix E to Addendum to Method 320--Determining Fractional 
                   Reproducibility Uncertainties (FRU)

                              E.1  General

    To estimate the reproducibility of the spectroscopic results of the 
system, compare the CTS spectra recorded before and after preparing the 
reference spectra. Compare the difference between the spectra to their 
average band area. Perform the calculation for each analytical region on 
the portions of the CTS spectra associated with that analytical region.

                            E.2  Calculations

    E.2.1  The CTS spectra {R1{time}  consist of N spectra, denoted by 
S1i, i=1, N. Similarly, the CTS spectra {R2{time}  consist of 
N spectra, denoted by S2i, i=1, N. Each Ski is the 
spectrum of a single compound, where i denotes the compound and k 
denotes the set {Rk{time}  of which Ski is a member. Form the 
spectra S3 according to S3i = 
S2i-S1i for each i. Form the spectra S4 
according to S4i = [S2i+S1i]/2 for each 
i.
    E.2.2  Each analytical region m is associated with a portion of the 
CTS spectra S2i and S1i, for a particular i, with 
lower and upper wavenumber limits FFLm and FFUm, 
respectively.
    E.2.3  For each m and the associated i, calculate the band area of 
S4i in the wavenumber range FFUm to 
FFLm. Follow the guidelines of section B.1.2 of this addendum 
for this band area calculation. Denote the result by BAVm.
    E.2.4  For each m and the associated i, calculate the RMSD of 
S3i between the absorbance values and their mean in the 
wavenumber range FFUm to FFLm. Denote the result 
by SRMSm.
    E.2.5  For each analytical region m, calculate FMm using 
equation E.1,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.023

    E.2.6  If only the mth analytical region is used to 
calculate the concentration of the ith analyte, set 
FRUi = FMm.
    E.2.7  If a number pi of analytical regions are used to 
calculate the concentration of the ith analyte, set 
FRUi equal to the weighted mean of the appropriate 
FMm values calculated according to section E.2.5. 
Mathematically, if the set of analytical regions employed is {m'{time} , 
then FRUi is given by equation E.2,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.024

where the Wik are calculated as described in appendix D of 
this addendum.

Appendix F of Addendum to Method 320--Determining Fractional Calibration 
                           Uncertainties (FCU)

                              F.1  General

    F.1.1  The concentrations yielded by the computerized analytical 
program applied to each single-compound reference spectrum are defined 
as the indicated standard concentrations (ISC's). The ISC values for a 
single compound spectrum should ideally equal the accepted standard 
concentration (ASC) for one analyte or interferant, and should ideally 
be zero for all other compounds. Variations from these results are 
caused by errors in the ASC values, variations from the Beer's law (or 
modified Beer's law) model

[[Page 655]]

used to determine the concentrations, and noise in the spectra. When the 
first two effects dominate, the systematic nature of the errors is often 
apparent and the analyst shall take steps to correct them.
    F.1.2  When the calibration error appears non-systematic, apply the 
procedures of sections F.2.1 through F.2.3 of this appendix to estimate 
the fractional calibration uncertainty (FCU) for each compound. The FCU 
is defined as the mean fractional error between the ASC and the ISC for 
all reference spectra with non-zero ASC for that compound. The FCU for 
each compound shall be less than the required fractional uncertainty 
specified in section 4.1 of this addendum.
    F.1.3  The computerized analytical programs shall also be required 
to yield acceptably low concentrations for compounds with ISC = 0 when 
applied to the reference spectra. The ISC of each reference spectrum for 
each analyte or interferant shall not exceed that compound's minimum 
measurement uncertainty (MAU or MIU).

                            F.2  Calculations

    F.2.1  Apply each analytical program to each reference spectrum. 
Prepare a similar table to that in Figure F.1 to present the ISC and ASC 
values for each analyte and interferant in each reference spectrum. 
Maintain the order of reference file names and compounds employed in 
preparing Figure F.1.
    F.2.2  For all reference spectra in Figure F.1, verify that the 
absolute values of the ISC's are less than the compound's MAU (for 
analytes) or MIU (for interferants).
    F.2.3  For each analyte reference spectrum, calculate the quantity 
(ASC-ISC)/ASC. For each analyte, calculate the mean of these values (the 
FCUi for the ith analyte) over all reference 
spectra. Prepare a similar table to that in Figure F.2 to present the 
FCUi and analytical uncertainty limit (AUi) for 
each analyte.

                                       Figure F.1.--Presentation of Accepted Standard Concentrations (ASC's) and Indicated Standard Concentrations (ISC's)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
          Compound name           Reference spectrum       ASC (ppm)                                                             ISC (ppm)
                                       file name
                                                                                                                         Analytes    Interferants
                                                                                                                             i=1           I
                                                                                                                             j=1           J
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


  Figure F.2--Presentation of Fractional Calibration Uncertainties (FCU's) and Analytical Uncertainties (AU's)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Analyte name                                FCU (%)                         AU (%)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      Appendix G to Addendum to Method 320--Measuring Noise Levels

                              G.1  General

    The root-mean-square (RMS) noise level is the standard measure of 
noise. The RMS noise level of a contiguous segment of a spectrum is the 
RMSD between the absorbance values that form the segment and the mean 
value of the segment (see appendix A of this addendum).

                            G.2  Calculations

    G.2.1  Evacuate the absorption cell or fill it with UPC grade 
nitrogen at approximately one atmosphere total pressure.
    G.2.2  Record two single beam spectra of signal integration period 
tSS.
    G.2.3  Form the double beam absorption spectrum from these two 
single beam spectra, and calculate the noise level RMSSm in 
the M analytical regions.

[[Page 656]]

  Appendix H of Addendum to Method 320--Determining Sample Absorption 
 Pathlength (LS) and Fractional Analytical Uncertainty (FAU)

                              H.1  General

    Reference spectra recorded at absorption pathlength (LR), 
gas pressure (PR), and gas absolute temperature 
(TR) may be used to determine analyte concentrations in 
samples whose spectra are recorded at conditions different from that of 
the reference spectra, i.e., at absorption pathlength (LS), 
absolute temperature (TS), and pressure (PS). This 
appendix describes the calculations for estimating the fractional 
uncertainty (FAU) of this practice. It also describes the calculations 
for determining the sample absorption pathlength from comparison of CTS 
spectra, and for preparing spectra for further instrumental and 
procedural checks.
    H.1.1  Before sampling, determine the sample absorption pathlength 
using least squares analysis. Determine the ratio LS/
LR by comparing the spectral sets {R1{time}  and {R3{time} , 
which are recorded using the same CTS at LS and 
LR, and TS and TR, but both at 
PR.
    H.1.2  Determine the fractional analysis uncertainty (FAU) for each 
analyte by comparing a scaled CTS spectral set, recorded at 
LS, TS, and PS, to the CTS reference 
spectra of the same gas, recorded at LR, TR, and 
PR. Perform the quantitative comparison after recording the 
sample spectra, based on band areas of the spectra in the CTS absorbance 
band associated with each analyte.

                            H.2  Calculations

    H.2.1  Absorption Pathlength Determination. Perform and document 
separate linear baseline corrections to each analytical region in the 
spectral sets {R1{time}  and {R3{time} . Form a one-dimensional array 
AR containing the absorbance values from all segments of 
{R1{time}  that are associated with the analytical regions; the members 
of the array are ARi, i = 1, n. Form a similar one-
dimensional array AS from the absorbance values in the 
spectral set {R3{time} ; the members of the array are ASi, i 
= 1, n. Based on the model AS = rAR + E, determine 
the least-squares estimate of r, the value of r which minimizes the 
square error E2. Calculate the sample absorption pathlength, 
LS, using equation H.1,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.025

    H.2.2  Fractional Analysis Uncertainty. Perform and document 
separate linear baseline corrections to each analytical region in the 
spectral sets {R1{time}  and {R4{time} . Form the arrays AS 
and AR as described in section H.2.1 of this appendix, using 
values from {R1{time}  to form AR, and values from {R4{time}  
to form AS. Calculate NRMSE and IAAV 
using equations H.2 and H.3,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.026

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.027

    The fractional analytical uncertainty, FAU, is given by equation 
H.4,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.028

   Appendix I to Addendum to Method 320--Determining Fractional Model 
                           Uncertainties (FMU)

                              I.1  General

    To prepare analytical programs for FTIR analyses, the sample 
constituents must first be assumed. The calculations in this appendix, 
based upon a simulation of the sample spectrum, shall be used to verify 
the appropriateness of these assumptions. The simulated spectra consist 
of the sum of single compound reference spectra scaled to represent 
their contributions to the sample absorbance spectrum; scaling factors 
are based on the indicated standard concentrations (ISC) and measured 
(sample) analyte and interferant concentrations, the sample and 
reference absorption pathlengths, and the sample and reference gas 
pressures. No band-shape correction for differences in the temperature 
of the sample and reference spectra gases is made; such errors are 
included in the FMU estimate. The actual and simulated sample spectra 
are quantitatively compared to determine the fractional model 
uncertainty; this comparison uses the reference

[[Page 657]]

spectra band areas and residuals in the difference spectrum formed from 
the actual and simulated sample spectra.

                            I.2  Calculations

    I.2.1  For each analyte (with scaled concentration RSAi), 
select a reference spectrum SAi with indicated standard 
concentration ISCi. Calculate the scaling factors, 
RAi, using equation I.1,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.029

Form the spectra SACi by scaling each SAi by the 
factor RAi.
    I.2.2  For each interferant, select a reference spectrum 
SIk with indicated standard concentration ISCk. 
Calculate the scaling factors, RIk, using equation I.2,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.030

Form the spectra SICk by scaling each SIk by the 
factor RIk.
    I.2.3  For each analytical region, determine by visual inspection 
which of the spectra SACi and SICk exhibit 
absorbance bands within the analytical region. Subtract each spectrum 
SACi and SICk exhibiting absorbance from the 
sample spectrum SS to form the spectrum SUBS. To 
save analysis time and to avoid the introduction of unwanted noise into 
the subtracted spectrum, it is recommended that the calculation be made 
(1) only for those spectral data points within the analytical regions, 
and (2) for each analytical region separately using the original 
spectrum SS.
    I.2.4  For each analytical region m, calculate the RMSD of 
SUBS between the absorbance values and their mean in the 
region FFUm to FFLm. Denote the result by 
RMSSm.
    I.2.5  For each analyte i, calculate FMm, using equation 
I.3,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.031

for each analytical region associated with the analyte.
    I.2.6  If only the mth analytical region is used to 
calculate the concentration of the ith analyte, set 
FMUi=FMm.
    I.2.7  If a number of analytical regions are used to calculate the 
concentration of the ith analyte, set FMi equal to 
the weighted mean of the appropriate FMm values calculated 
using equation I-3. Mathematically, if the set of analytical regions 
employed is {m'{time} , then the fractional model uncertainty, FMU, is 
given by equation I.4,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.032

where Wik is calculated as described in appendix D of this 
addendum.

Appendix J of Addendum to Method 320--Determining Overall Concentration 
                           Uncertainties (OCU)

    The calculations in this addendum estimate the measurement 
uncertainties for various FTIR measurements. The lowest possible overall 
concentration uncertainty (OCU) for an analyte is its MAU value, which 
is an estimate of the absolute concentration uncertainty when spectral 
noise dominates the measurement error. However, if the product of the 
largest fractional concentration uncertainty (FRU, FCU, FAU, or FMU) and 
the measured concentration of an analyte exceeds the MAU for the 
analyte, then the OCU is this product. In mathematical terms, set 
OFUi = MAX{FRUi, FCUi, FAUi, 
FMUi} and OCUi = 
MAX{RSAi*OFUi, MAUi}.

 Test Method 321--Measurement of Gaseous Hydrogen Chloride Emissions At 
 Portland Cement Kilns by Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopy

                            1.0  Introduction

    This method should be performed by those persons familiar with the 
operation of Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) instrumentation in the 
application to source sampling. This document describes the sampling 
procedures for use in the application of FTIR spectrometry for the 
determination of vapor phase hydrogen chloride (HCl) concentrations both 
before and after particulate matter control devices installed at 
portland cement kilns. A procedure for analyte spiking is included for 
quality assurance. This method is considered to be self validating 
provided that the requirements listed in section 9 of this method are 
followed. The analytical procedures for interpreting infrared spectra 
from emission measurements are described in the ``Protocol For The Use 
of Extractive

[[Page 658]]

Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectrometry in Analyses of Gaseous 
Emissions From Stationary Industrial Sources'', included as an addendum 
to proposed Method 320 of this appendix (hereafter referred to as the 
``FTIR Protocol)''. References 1 and 2 describe the use of FTIR 
spectrometry in field measurements. Sample transport presents the 
principal difficulty in directly measuring HCl emissions. This identical 
problem must be overcome by any extractive measurement method. HCl is 
reactive and water soluble. The sampling system must be adequately 
designed to prevent sample condensation in the system.

                       1.1  Scope and Application

    This method is specifically designed for the application of FTIR 
Spectrometry in extractive measurements of gaseous HCl concentrations in 
portland cement kiln emissions.

                           1.2  Applicability

    This method applies to the measurement of HCl [CAS No. 7647-01-0]. 
This method can be applied to the determination of HCl concentrations 
both before and after particulate matter control devices installed at 
portland cement manufacturing facilities. This method applies to either 
continuous flow through measurement (with isolated sample analysis) or 
grab sampling (batch analysis). HCl is measured using the mid-infrared 
spectral region for analysis (about 400 to 4000 cm-1 or 25 to 
2.5 m). Table 1 lists the suggested analytical region for 
quantification of HCl taking the interference from water vapor into 
consideration.

               Table 1.--Example Analytical Region for HCl
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Analytical           Potential
           Compound               region  (cm-1)        interferants
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrogen chloride.............          2679-2840  Water.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                    1.3  Method Range and Sensitivity

    1.3.1  The analytical range is determined by the instrumental design 
and the composition of the gas stream. For practical purposes there is 
no upper limit to the range because the pathlength may be reduced or the 
sample may be diluted. The lower detection range depends on (1) the 
absorption coefficient of the compound in the analytical frequency 
region, (2) the spectral resolution, (3) the interferometer sampling 
time, (4) the detector sensitivity and response, and (5) the absorption 
pathlength.
    1.3.2  The practical lower quantification range is usually higher 
than the instrument sensitivity allows and is dependent upon (1) the 
presence of interfering species in the exhaust gas including 
H2O, CO2, and SO2, (2) analyte losses 
in the sampling system, (3) the optical alignment of the gas cell and 
transfer optics, and (4) the quality of the reflective surfaces in the 
cell (cell throughput). Under typical test conditions (moisture content 
of up to 30% and CO2 concentrations from 1 to 15 percent), a 
22 meter path length cell with a suitable sampling system may achieve a 
lower quantification range of from 1 to 5 ppm for HCl.

                      1.4  Data Quality Objectives

    1.4.1  In designing or configuring the analytical system, data 
quality is determined by measuring of the root mean square deviation 
(RMSD) of the absorbance values within a chosen spectral (analytical) 
region. The RMSD provides an indication of the signal-to-noise ratio (S/
N) of the spectral baseline. Appendix D of the FTIR Protocol (the 
addendum to Method 320 of this appendix) presents a discussion of the 
relationship between the RMSD, lower detection limit, DLi, 
and analytical uncertainty, AUi. It is important to consider 
the target analyte quantification limit when performing testing with 
FTIR instrumentation, and to optimize the system to achieve the desired 
detection limit.
    1.4.2  Data quality is determined by measuring the root mean square 
(RMS) noise level in each analytical spectral region (appendix C of the 
FTIR Protocol). The RMS noise is defined as the root mean square 
deviation (RMSD) of the absorbance values in an analytical region from 
the mean absorbance value in the same region. Appendix D of the FTIR 
Protocol defines the minimum analyte uncertainty (MAU), and how the RMSD 
is used to calculate the MAU. The MAUim is the minimum 
concentration of the ith analyte in the mth analytical region for which 
the analytical uncertainty limit can be maintained. Table 2 presents 
example values of AU and MAU using the analytical region presented in 
Table 1.

 Table 2.--Example Pre-Test Protocol Calculations for Hydrogen Chloride
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 HCl
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference concentration (ppm-meters)/K.....................         11.2
Reference Band area........................................        2.881
DL (ppm-meters)/K..........................................       0.1117
AU.........................................................          0.2
CL (DL  x  AU).............................................      0.02234

[[Page 659]]

 
FL (cm-1)..................................................      2679.83
FU (cm-1)..................................................      2840.93
FC (cm-1)..................................................      2760.38
AAI (ppm-meters)/K.........................................      0.06435
RMSD.......................................................     2.28E-03
MAU (ppm-meters)/K.........................................     1.28E-01
MAU ppm at 22 meters and 250  deg.F........................      .0.2284
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                         2.0  Summary of Method

                             2.1  Principle

    See Method 320 of this appendix. HCl can also undergo rotation 
transitions by absorbing energy in the far-infrared spectral region. The 
rotational transitions are superimposed on the vibrational fundamental 
to give a series of lines centered at the fundamental vibrational 
frequency, 2885 cm-\1\. The frequencies of absorbance and the pattern of 
rotational/vibrational lines are unique to HCl. When this distinct 
pattern is observed in an infrared spectrum of an unknown sample, it 
unequivocally identifies HCl as a component of the mixture. The infrared 
spectrum of HCl is very distinctive and cannot be confused with the 
spectrum of any other compound. See Reference 6.
    2.2  Sampling and Analysis. See Method 320 of this appendix.
    2.3  Operator Requirements. The analyst must have knowledge of 
spectral patterns to choose an appropriate absorption path length or 
determine if sample dilution is necessary. The analyst should also 
understand FTIR instrument operation well enough to choose instrument 
settings that are consistent with the objectives of the analysis.

                            3.0  Definitions

    See appendix A of the FTIR Protocol.

                           4.0  Interferences

    This method will not measure HCl under conditions: (1) where the 
sample gas stream can condense in the sampling system or the 
instrumentation, or (2) where a high moisture content sample relative to 
the analyte concentrations imparts spectral interference due to the 
water vapor absorbance bands. For measuring HCl the first (sampling) 
consideration is more critical. Spectral interference from water vapor 
is not a significant problem except at very high moisture levels and low 
HCl concentrations.
    4.1  Analytical Interferences. See Method 320 of this appendix.
    4.1.1  Background Interferences. See Method 320 of this appendix.
    4.1.2  Spectral interferences. Water vapor can present spectral 
interference for FTIR gas analysis of HCl. Therefore, the water vapor in 
the spectra of kiln gas samples must be accounted for. This means 
preparing at least one spectrum of a water vapor sample where the 
moisture concentration is close to that in the kiln gas.
    4.2  Sampling System Interferences. The principal sampling system 
interferant for measuring HCl is water vapor. Steps must be taken to 
ensure that no condensation forms anywhere in the probe assembly, sample 
lines, or analytical instrumentation. Cold spots anywhere in the 
sampling system must be avoided. The extent of sampling system bias in 
the FTIR analysis of HCl depends on concentrations of potential 
interferants, moisture content of the gas stream, temperature of the gas 
stream, temperature of sampling system components, sample flow rate, and 
reactivity of HCl with other species in the gas stream (e.g., ammonia). 
For measuring HCl in a wet gas stream the temperatures of the gas 
stream, sampling components, and the sample flow rate are of primary 
importance. Analyte spiking with HCl is performed to demonstrate the 
integrity of the sampling system for transporting HCl vapor in the flue 
gas to the FTIR instrument. See section 9 of this method for a complete 
description of analyte spiking.

                               5.0  Safety

    5.1  Hydrogen chloride vapor is corrosive and can cause irritation 
or severe damage to respiratory system, eyes and skin. Exposure to this 
compound should be avoided.
    5.2  This method may involve sampling at locations having high 
positive or negative pressures, or high concentrations of hazardous or 
toxic pollutants, and can not address all safety problems encountered 
under these diverse sampling conditions. It is the responsibility of the 
tester(s) to ensure proper safety and health practices, and to determine 
the applicability of regulatory limitations before performing this test 
method. Leak-check procedures are outlined in section 8.2 of Method 320 
of this appendix.

                       6.0  Equipment and Supplies

    Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not 
constitute endorsement by the Environmental Protection Agency.

    6.1  FTIR Spectrometer and Detector. An FTIR Spectrometer system 
(interferometer, transfer optics, gas cell and detector) having the 
capability of measuring HCl to the predetermined minimum detectable 
level required (see section 4.1.3 of the FTIR Protocol). The system must 
also include an accurate means to control and/or measure the temperature 
of the FTIR gas analysis cell, and a personal computer with compatible 
software that provides real-time updates of the spectral profile during 
sample and spectral collection.

[[Page 660]]

    6.2  Pump. Capable of evacuating the FTIR cell volume to 1 Torr 
(133.3 Pascals) within two minutes (for batch sample analysis).
    6.3  Mass Flow Meters/Controllers. To accurately measure analyte 
spike flow rate, having the appropriate calibrated range and a stated 
accuracy of 2 percent of the absolute measurement value. 
This device must be calibrated with the major component of the 
calibration/spike gas (e.g., nitrogen) using an NIST traceable bubble 
meter or equivalent. Single point calibration checks should be performed 
daily in the field. When spiking HCl, the mass flow meter/controller 
should be thoroughly purged before and after introduction of the gas to 
prevent corrosion of the interior parts.
    6.4  Polytetrafluoroethane tubing. Diameter and length suitable to 
connect cylinder regulators.
    6.5  Stainless Steel tubing. Type 316 of appropriate length and 
diameter for heated connections.
    6.6  Gas Regulators. Purgeable HCl regulator.
    6.7  Pressure Gauge. Capable of measuring pressure from 0 to 1000 
Torr (133.3 Pa=1 Torr) within 5 percent.
    6.8  Sampling Probe. Glass, stainless steel or other appropriate 
material of sufficient length and physical integrity to sustain heating, 
prevent adsorption of analytes and capable of reaching gas sampling 
point.
    6.9  Sampling Line. Heated 180  deg.C (360  deg.F) and fabricated of 
either stainless steel, polytetrafluoroethane or other material that 
prevents adsorption of HCl and transports effluent to analytical 
instrumentation. The extractive sample line must have the capability to 
transport sample gas to the analytical components as well as direct 
heated calibration spike gas to the calibration assembly located at the 
sample probe. It is important to minimize the length of heated sample 
line.
    6.10  Particulate Filters. A sintered stainless steel filter rated 
at 20 microns or greater may be placed at the inlet of the probe (for 
removal of large particulate matter). A heated filter (Balston or 
equivalent) rated at 1 micron is necessary for primary particulate 
matter removal, and shall be placed immediately after the heated probe. 
The filter/filter holder temperature should be maintained at 180  deg.C 
(360  deg.F).
    6.11  Calibration/Analyte Spike Assembly. A heated three-way valve 
assembly (or equivalent) to introduce surrogate spikes into the sampling 
system at the outlet of the probe before the primary particulate filter.
    6.12  Sample Extraction Pump. A leak-free heated head pump (KNF 
Neuberger or equivalent) capable of extracting sample effluent through 
entire sampling system at a rate which prevents analyte losses and 
minimizes analyzer response time. The pump should have a heated by-pass 
and may be placed either before the FTIR instrument or after. If the 
sample pump is located upstream of the FTIR instrument, it must be 
fabricated from materials non-reactive to HCl. The sampling system and 
FTIR measurement system shall allow the operator to obtain at least six 
sample spectra during a one-hour period.
    6.13  Barometer. For measurement of barometric pressure.
    6.14  Gas Sample Manifold. A distribution manifold having the 
capabilities listed in sections 6.14.1 through 6.14.4;
    6.14.1  Delivery of calibration gas directly to the analytical 
instrumentation;
    6.14.2  Delivery of calibration gas to the sample probe (system 
calibration or analyte spike) via a heated traced sample line;
    6.14.3  Delivery of sample gas (kiln gas, spiked kiln gas, or system 
calibrations) to the analytical instrumentation;
    6.14.4  Delivery (optional) of a humidified nitrogen sample stream.
    6.15  Flow Measurement Device. Type S Pitot tube (or equivalent) and 
Magnahelic set for measurement of volumetric flow rate.

                       7.0  Reagents and Standards

    HCl can be purchased in a standard compressed gas cylinder. The most 
stable HCl cylinder mixture available has a concentration certified at 
5 percent. Such a cylinder is suitable for performing 
analyte spiking because it will provide reproducible samples. The 
stability of the cylinder can be monitored over time by periodically 
performing direct FTIR analysis of cylinder samples. It is recommended 
that a 10-50 ppm cylinder of HCl be prepared having from 2-5 ppm SF6 as 
a tracer compound. (See sections 7.1 through 7.3 of Method 320 of this 
appendix for a complete description of the use of existing HCl reference 
spectra. See section 9.1 of Method 320 of this appendix for a complete 
discussion of standard concentration selection.)

            8.0  Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage

    See also Method 320 of this appendix.
    8.1  Pretest. A screening test is ideal for obtaining proper data 
that can be used for preparing analytical program files. Information 
from literature surveys and source personnel is also acceptable. 
Information about the sampling location and gas stream composition is 
required to determine the optimum sampling system configuration for 
measuring HCl. Determine the percent moisture of the kiln gas by Method 
4 of appendix A to part 60 of this chapter or by performing a wet bulb/
dry bulb measurement. Perform a preliminary traverse of the sample duct 
or stack and select the sampling point(s). Acquire an initial spectrum 
and determine the optimum operational pathlength of the instrument.

[[Page 661]]

    8.2  Leak-Check. See Method 320 of this appendix, section 8.2 for 
direction on performing leak-checks.
    8.3  Background Spectrum. See Method 320 of this appendix, section 
8.5 for direction in background spectral acquisition.
    8.4  Pre-Test Calibration Transfer Standard (Direct Instrument 
Calibration). See Method 320 of this appendix, section 8.3 for direction 
in CTS spectral acquisition.
    8.5  Pre-Test System Calibration. See Method 320 of this appendix, 
sections 8.6.1 through 8.6.2 for direction in performing system 
calibration.

                              8.6  Sampling

    8.6.1  Extractive System. An extractive system maintained at 180 
deg.C (360  deg.F) or higher which is capable of directing a total flow 
of at least 12 L/min to the sample cell is required (References 1 and 
2). Insert the probe into the duct or stack at a point representing the 
average volumetric flow rate and 25 percent of the cross sectional area. 
Co-locate an appropriate flow monitoring device with the sample probe so 
that the flow rate is recorded at specified time intervals during 
emission testing (e.g., differential pressure measurements taken every 
10 minutes during each run).
    8.6.2  Batch Samples. Evacuate the absorbance cell to 5 Torr (or 
less) absolute pressure before taking first sample. Fill the cell with 
kiln gas to ambient pressure and record the infrared spectrum, then 
evacuate the cell until there is no further evidence of infrared 
absorption. Repeat this procedure, collecting a total of six separate 
sample spectra within a 1-hour period.
    8.6.3  Continuous Flow Through Sampling. Purge the FTIR cell with 
kiln gas for a time period sufficient to equilibrate the entire sampling 
system and FTIR gas cell. The time required is a function of the 
mechanical response time of the system (determined by performing the 
system calibration with the CTS gas or equivalent), and by the chemical 
reactivity of the target analytes. If the effluent target analyte 
concentration is not variable, observation of the spectral up-date of 
the flowing gas sample should be performed until equilibration of the 
sample is achieved. Isolate the gas cell from the sample flow by 
directing the purge flow to vent. Record the spectrum and pressure of 
the sample gas. After spectral acquisition, allow the sample gas to 
purge the cell with at least three volumes of kiln gas. The time 
required to adequately purge the cell with the required volume of gas is 
a function of (1) cell volume, (2) flow rate through the cell, and (3) 
cell design. It is important that the gas introduction and vent for the 
FTIR cell provides a complete purge through the cell.
    8.6.4  Continuous Sampling. In some cases it is possible to collect 
spectra continuously while the FTIR cell is purged with sample gas. The 
sample integration time, tss, the sample flow rate through 
the gas cell, and the sample integration time must be chosen so that the 
collected data consist of at least 10 spectra with each spectrum being 
of a separate cell volume of flue gas. Sampling in this manner may only 
be performed if the native source analyte concentrations do not affect 
the test results.

                        8.7  Sample Conditioning

    8.7.1  High Moisture Sampling. Kiln gas emitted from wet process 
cement kilns may contain 3- to 40 percent moisture. Zinc selenide 
windows or the equivalent should be used when attempting to analyze hot/
wet kiln gas under these conditions to prevent dissolution of water 
soluble window materials (e.g., KBr).
    8.7.2  Sample Dilution. The sample may be diluted using an in-stack 
dilution probe, or an external dilution device provided that the sample 
is not diluted below the instrument's quantification range. As an 
alternative to using a dilution probe, nitrogen may be dynamically 
spiked into the effluent stream in the same manner as analyte spiking. A 
constant dilution rate shall be maintained throughout the measurement 
process. It is critical to measure and verify the exact dilution ratio 
when using a dilution probe or the nitrogen spiking approach. 
Calibrating the system with a calibration gas containing an appropriate 
tracer compound will allow determination of the dilution ratio for most 
measurement systems. The tester shall specify the procedures used to 
determine the dilution ratio, and include these calibration results in 
the report.
    8.8  Sampling QA, Data Storage and Reporting. See the FTIR Protocol. 
Sample integration times shall be sufficient to achieve the required 
signal-to-noise ratio, and all sample spectra should have unique file 
names. Two copies of sample interferograms and processed spectra will be 
stored on separate computer media. For each sample spectrum the analyst 
must document the sampling conditions, the sampling time (while the cell 
was being filled), the time the spectrum was recorded, the instrumental 
conditions (path length, temperature, pressure, resolution, integration 
time), and the spectral file name. A hard copy of these data must be 
maintained until the test results are accepted.
    8.9  Signal Transmittance. Monitor the signal transmittance through 
the instrumental system. If signal transmittance (relative to the 
background) drops below 95 percent in any spectral region where the 
sample does not absorb infrared energy, then a new background spectrum 
must be obtained.

[[Page 662]]

    8.10  Post-test CTS. After the sampling run completion, record the 
CTS spectrum. Analysis of the spectral band area used for quantification 
from pre- and post-test CTS spectra should agree to within 5 
percent or corrective action must be taken.
    8.11  Post-test QA. The sample spectra shall be inspected 
immediately after the run to verify that the gas matrix composition was 
close to the assumed gas matrix, (this is necessary to account for the 
concentrations of the interferants for use in the analytical analysis 
programs), and to confirm that the sampling and instrumental parameters 
were appropriate for the conditions encountered.

                          9.0  Quality Control

    Use analyte spiking to verify the effectiveness of the sampling 
system for the target compounds in the actual kiln gas matrix. QA 
spiking shall be performed before and after each sample run. QA spiking 
shall be performed after the pre- and post-test CTS direct and system 
calibrations. The system biases calculated from the pre- and post-test 
dynamic analyte spiking shall be within 30 percent for the 
spiked surrogate analytes for the measurements to be considered valid. 
See sections 9.3.1 through 9.3.2 for the requisite calculations. 
Measurement of the undiluted spike (direct-to-cell measurement) involves 
sending dry, spike gas to the FTIR cell, filling the cell to 1 
atmosphere and obtaining the spectrum of this sample. The direct-to-cell 
measurement should be performed before each analyte spike so that the 
recovery of the dynamically spiked analytes may be calculated. Analyte 
spiking is only effective for assessing the integrity of the sampling 
system when the concentration of HCl in the source does not vary 
substantially. Any attempt to quantify an analyte recovery in a variable 
concentration matrix will result in errors in the expected concentration 
of the spiked sample. If the kiln gas target analyte concentrations vary 
by more than 5 percent (or 5 ppm, whichever is greater) in 
the time required to acquire a sample spectrum, it may be necessary to: 
(1) Use a dual sample probe approach, (2) use two independent FTIR 
measurement systems, (3) use alternate QA/QC procedures, or (4) postpone 
testing until stable emission concentrations are achieved. (See section 
9.2.3 of this method). It is recommended that a laboratory evaluation be 
performed before attempting to employ this method under actual field 
conditions. The laboratory evaluation shall include (1) performance of 
all applicable calculations in section 4 of the FTIR Protocol; (2) 
simulated analyte spiking experiments in dry (ambient) and humidified 
sample matrices using HCl; and (3) performance of bias (recovery) 
calculations from analyte spiking experiments. It is not necessary to 
perform a laboratory evaluation before every field test. The purpose of 
the laboratory study is to demonstrate that the actual instrument and 
sampling system configuration used in field testing meets the 
requirements set forth in this method.
    9.1  Spike Materials. Perform analyte spiking with an HCl standard 
to demonstrate the integrity of the sampling system.
    9.1.1  An HCl standard of approximately 50 ppm in a balance of ultra 
pure nitrogen is recommended. The SF6 (tracer) concentration 
shall be 2 to 5 ppm depending upon the measurement pathlength. The spike 
ratio (spike flow/total flow) shall be no greater than 1:10, and an 
ideal spike concentration should approximate the native effluent 
concentration.
    9.1.2  The ideal spike concentration may not be achieved because the 
target concentration cannot be accurately predicted prior to the field 
test, and limited calibration standards will be available during 
testing. Therefore, practical constraints must be applied that allow the 
tester to spike at an anticipated concentration. For these tests, the 
analyte concentration contributed by the HCl standard spike should be 1 
to 5 ppm or should more closely approximate the native concentration if 
it is greater.

                          9.2  Spike Procedure

     9.2.1  A spiking/sampling apparatus is shown in Figure 2. Introduce 
the spike/tracer gas mixture at a constant flow (2 percent) 
rate at approximately 10 percent of the total sample flow. (For example, 
introduce the surrogate spike at 1 L/min  20 cc/min, into a total sample 
flow rate of 10 L/min). The spike must be pre-heated before introduction 
into the sample matrix to prevent a localized condensation of the gas 
stream at the spike introduction point. A heated sample transport 
line(s) containing multiple transport tubes within the heated bundle may 
be used to spike gas up through the sampling system to the spike 
introduction point. Use a calibrated flow device (e.g., mass flow meter/
controller), to monitor the spike flow as indicated by a calibrated flow 
meter or controller, or alternately, the SF6 tracer ratio may 
be calculated from the direct measurement and the diluted measurement. 
It is often desirable to use the tracer approach in calculating the 
spike/total flow ratio because of the difficulty in accurately measuring 
hot/wet total flow. The tracer technique has been successfully used in 
past validation efforts (Reference 1).
    9.2.2  Perform a direct-to-cell measurement of the dry, undiluted 
spike gas. Introduce the spike directly to the FTIR cell, bypassing the 
sampling system. Fill cell to 1 atmosphere and collect the spectrum of 
this sample. Ensure that the spike gas has equilibrated to the 
temperature of the measurement cell before acquisition of the spectra. 
Inspect the spectrum and verify that the gas

[[Page 663]]

is dry and contains negligible CO2. Repeat the process to 
obtain a second direct-to-cell measurement. Analysis of spectral band 
areas for HCl from these duplicate measurements should agree to within 
5 percent of the mean.
    9.2.3  Analyte Spiking. Determine whether the kiln gas contains 
native concentrations of HCl by examination of preliminary spectra. 
Determine whether the concentration varies significantly with time by 
observing a continuously up-dated spectrum of sample gas in the flow-
through sampling mode. If the concentration varies by more than 
5 percent during the period of time required to acquire a 
spectra, then an alternate approach should be used. One alternate 
approach uses two sampling lines to convey sample to the gas 
distribution manifold. One of the sample lines is used to continuously 
extract unspiked kiln gas from the source. The other sample line serves 
as the analyte spike line. One FTIR system can be used in this 
arrangement. Spiked or unspiked sample gas may be directed to the FTIR 
system from the gas distribution manifold, with the need to purge only 
the components between the manifold and the FTIR system. This approach 
minimizes the time required to acquire an equilibrated sample of spiked 
or unspiked kiln gas. If the source varies by more than 5 
percent (or 5 ppm, whichever is greater) in the time it takes to switch 
from the unspiked sample line to the spiked sample line, then analyte 
spiking may not be a feasible means to determine the effectiveness of 
the sampling system for the HCl in the sample matrix. A second 
alternative is to use two completely independent FTIR measurement 
systems. One system would measure unspiked samples while the other 
system would measure the spiked samples. As a last option, (where no 
other alternatives can be used) a humidified nitrogen stream may be 
generated in the field which approximates the moisture content of the 
kiln gas. Analyte spiking into this humidified stream can be employed to 
assure that the sampling system is adequate for transporting the HCl to 
the FTIR instrumentation.
    9.2.3.1  Adjust the spike flow rate to approximately 10 percent of 
the total flow by metering spike gas through a calibrated mass flowmeter 
or controller. Allow spike flow to equilibrate within the sampling 
system before analyzing the first spiked kiln gas samples. A minimum of 
two consecutive spikes are required. Analysis of the spectral band area 
used for quantification should agree to within 5 percent or 
corrective action must be taken.
    9.2.3.2  After QA spiking is completed, the sampling system 
components shall be purged with nitrogen or dry air to eliminate traces 
of the HCl compound from the sampling system components. Acquire a 
sample spectra of the nitrogen purge to verify the absence of the 
calibration mixture.
    9.2.3.3  Analyte spiking procedures must be carefully executed to 
ensure that meaningful measurements are achieved. The requirements of 
sections 9.2.3.3.1 through 9.2.3.3.4 shall be met.
    9.2.3.3.1  The spike must be in the vapor phase, dry, and heated to 
(or above) the kiln gas temperature before it is introduced to the kiln 
gas stream.
    9.2.3.3.2  The spike flow rate must be constant and accurately 
measured.
    9.2.3.3.3  The total flow must also be measured continuously and 
reliably or the dilution ratio must otherwise be verified before and 
after a run by introducing a spike of a non-reactive, stable compound 
(i.e., tracer).
    9.2.3.3.4  The tracer must be inert to the sampling system 
components, not contained in the effluent gas, and readily detected by 
the analytical instrumentation. Sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) has 
been used successfully (References 1 and 2) for this purpose.

                            9.3  Calculations

    9.3.1  Recovery. Calculate the percent recovery of the spiked 
analytes using equations 1 and 2.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.033

Sm = Mean concentration of the analyte spiked effluent 
          samples (observed).
          [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.034
          
Ce = Expected concentration of the spiked samples 
          (theoretical).
Df = dilution Factor (Total flow/Spike flow). total flow = 
          spike flow plus effluent flow.
Cs = cylinder concentration of spike gas.
Su = native concentration of analytes in unspiked samples.

The spike dilution factor may be confirmed by measuring the total flow 
and the spike flow directly. Alternately, the spike dilution can be 
verified by comparing the concentration of the tracer compound in the 
spiked samples (diluted) to the tracer concentration in the direct 
(undiluted) measurement of the spike gas.
If SF6 is the tracer gas, then
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.035

[SF6]spike = the diluted SF6 
          concentration measured in a spiked sample.
[SF6]direct = the SF6 concentration 
          measured directly.

    9.3.2  Bias. The bias may be determined by the difference between 
the observed spike value and the expected response (i.e., the equivalent 
concentration of the spiked material plus the analyte concentration 
adjusted

[[Page 664]]

for spike dilution). Bias is defined by section 6.3.1 of EPA Method 301 
of this appendix (Reference 8) as,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.036

Where:
B = Bias at spike level.
Sm = Mean concentration of the analyte spiked samples.
Ce = Expected concentration of the analyte in spiked samples.

Acceptable recoveries for analyte spiking are 30 percent. 
Application of correction factors to the data based upon bias and 
recovery calculations is subject to the approval of the Administrator.

                  10.0  Calibration and Standardization

    10.1  Calibration transfer standards (CTS). The EPA Traceability 
Protocol gases or NIST traceable standards, with a minimum accuracy of 
2 percent shall be used. For other requirements of the CTS, 
see the FTIR Protocol section 4.5.
    10.2  Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N). The S/N shall be less than the 
minimum acceptable measurement uncertainty in the analytical regions to 
be used for measuring HCl.
    10.3  Absorbance Pathlength. Verify the absorbance path length by 
comparing CTS spectra to reference spectra of the calibration gas(es).
    10.4  Instrument Resolution. Measure the line width of appropriate 
CTS band(s) to verify instrumental resolution.
    10.5  Apodization Function. Choose the appropriate apodization 
function. Determine any appropriate mathematical transformations that 
are required to correct instrumental errors by measuring the CTS. Any 
mathematical transformations must be documented and reproducible. 
Reference 9 provides additional information about FTIR instrumentation.

                       11.0  Analytical Procedure

    A full description of the analytical procedures is given in sections 
4.6-4.11, sections 5, 6, and 7, and the appendices of the FTIR Protocol. 
Additional description of quantitative spectral analysis is provided in 
References 10 and 11.

                  12.0  Data Analysis and Calculations

    Data analysis is performed using appropriate reference spectra whose 
concentrations can be verified using CTS spectra. Various analytical 
programs (References 10 and 11) are available to relate sample 
absorbance to a concentration standard. Calculated concentrations should 
be verified by analyzing spectral baselines after mathematically 
subtracting scaled reference spectra from the sample spectra. A full 
description of the data analysis and calculations may be found in the 
FTIR Protocol (sections 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 and appendices).
    12.1  Calculated concentrations in sample spectra are corrected for 
differences in absorption pathlength between the reference and sample 
spectra by
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.037

Where:

Ccorr = The pathlength corrected concentration.
Ccalc = The initial calculated concentration (output of the 
          multicomponent analysis program designed for the compound).
Lr = The pathlength associated with the reference spectra.
Ls = The pathlength associated with the sample spectra.
Ts = The absolute temperature (K) of the sample gas.
Tr = The absolute temperature (K) at which reference spectra 
          were recorded.

    12.2  The temperature correction in equation 5 is a volumetric 
correction. It does not account for temperature dependence of 
rotational-vibrational relative line intensities. Whenever possible, the 
reference spectra used in the analysis should be collected at a 
temperature near the temperature of the FTIR cell used in the test to 
minimize the calculated error in the measurement (FTIR Protocol, 
appendix D). Additionally, the analytical region chosen for the analysis 
should be sufficiently broad to minimize errors caused by small 
differences in relative line intensities between reference spectra and 
the sample spectra.

                        13.0  Method Performance

    A description of the method performance may be found in the FTIR 
Protocol. This method is self validating provided the results meet the 
performance specification of the QA spike in sections 9.0 through 9.3 of 
this method.

                       14.0  Pollution Prevention

    This is a gas phase measurement. Gas is extracted from the source, 
analyzed by the instrumentation, and discharged through the instrument 
vent.

[[Page 665]]

                         15.0  Waste Management

    Gas standards of HCl are handled according to the instructions 
enclosed with the material safety data sheet.

                            16.0  References

    1. ``Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Methodology for 
Determination of Hydrogen Chloride Emissions From Municipal and 
Hazardous Waste Incinerators,'' S.C. Steinsberger and J.H. Margeson. 
Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle 
Park, NC. NTIS Report No. PB89-220586. (1989).
    2. ``Evaluation of HCl Measurement Techniques at Municipal and 
Hazardous Waste Incinerators,'' S.A. Shanklin, S.C. Steinsberger, and L. 
Cone, Entropy, Inc. Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 
Research Triangle Park, NC. NTIS Report No. PB90-221896. (1989).
    3. ``Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Method Validation at a Coal 
Fired-Boiler,'' Entropy, Inc. Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA Publication No. EPA-454/R95-004. 
NTIS Report No. PB95-193199. (1993).
    4. ``Field Validation Test Using Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) 
Spectrometry To Measure Formaldehyde, Phenol and Methanol at a Wool 
Fiberglass Production Facility.'' Draft. U.S. Environmental Protection 
Agency Report, Entropy, Inc., EPA Contract No. 68D20163, Work Assignment 
I-32.
    5. Kinner, L.L., Geyer, T.G., Plummer, G.W., Dunder, T.A., Entropy, 
Inc. ``Application of FTIR as a Continuous Emission Monitoring System.'' 
Presentation at 1994 International Incineration Conference, Houston, TX. 
May 10, 1994.
    6. ``Molecular Vibrations; The Theory of Infrared and Raman 
Vibrational Spectra,'' E. Bright Wilson, J.C. Decius, and P.C. Cross, 
Dover Publications, Inc., 1980. For a less intensive treatment of 
molecular rotational-vibrational spectra see, for example, ``Physical 
Chemistry,'' G.M. Barrow, chapters 12, 13, and 14, McGraw Hill, Inc., 
1979.
    7. ``Laboratory and Field Evaluations of Ammonium Chloride 
Interference in Method 26,'' U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 
Report, Entropy, Inc., EPA Contract No. 68D20163, Work Assignment No. I-
45.
    8. 40 CFR 63, appendix A. Method 301--Field Validation of Pollutant 
Measurement Methods from Various Waste Media.
    9. ``Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrometry,'' Peter R. Griffiths 
and James de Haseth, Chemical Analysis, 83, 16-25, (1986), P.J. Elving, 
J.D. Winefordner and I.M. Kolthoff (ed.), John Wiley and Sons.
    10. ``Computer-Assisted Quantitative Infrared Spectroscopy,'' 
Gregory L. McClure (ed.), ASTM Special Publication 934 (ASTM), 1987.
    11. ``Multivariate Least-Squares Methods Applied to the Quantitative 
Spectral Analysis of Multicomponent Mixtures,'' Applied Spectroscopy, 
39(10), 73-84, 1985.

[[Page 666]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.038

      

[[Page 667]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14JN99.039


[[Page 668]]



[57 FR 61992, Dec. 29, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 57924, Oct. 27, 1993; 
59 FR 1992, Jan. 13, 1994; 59 FR 19590, Apr. 22, 1994; 59 FR 61816, Dec. 
2, 1994; 60 FR 4979, Jan. 25, 1995; 60 FR 33122, 33123, June 27, 1995; 
60 FR 62952, Dec. 7, 1995; 62 FR 2793, Jan. 17, 1997; 62 FR 12549, Mar. 
17, 1997; 62 FR 52418, Oct. 7, 1997; 63 FR 15027, Mar. 27, 1998; 63 FR 
18630, Apr. 15, 1998; 63 FR 46535, Sept. 1, 1998; 64 FR 31718, 31937, 
June 14, 1999]

  Appendix B to Part 63--Sources Defined for Early Reduction Provisions

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Source                       Location of definition
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Organic Process Equipment in Volatile    56 FR 9315, March 6, 1991,
 Hazardous Air Pollutant Service at          Announcement of Negotiated
 Chemical Plants and Other Designated        Rulemaking
 Facilities.
 
    a. All valves in gas or light liquid
     service within a process unit
    b. All pumps in light liquid service
     within a process unit
    c. All connectors in gas or light
     liquid service within a process unit
    d. Each compressor
    e. Each product accumulator vessel
    f. Each agitator
    g. Each pressure relief device
    h. Each open-ended valve or line
    i. Each sampling connection system
    j. Each instrumentation system
    k. Each pump, valve, or connector in
     heavy liquid service
    l. Each closed vent system and control
     device
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Appendix C to Part 63--Determination of the Fraction Biodegraded 
            (Fbio) in a Biological Treatment Unit

                               I. Purpose

    The purpose of this appendix is to define the procedures for an 
owner or operator to use to calculate the site specific fraction of 
organic compounds biodegraded (Fbio) in a biological 
treatment unit. If an acceptable level of organic compounds is destroyed 
rather than emitted to the air or remaining in the effluent, the 
biological treatment unit may be used to comply with the applicable 
treatment requirements without the unit being covered and vented through 
a closed vent system to an air pollution control device.
    The determination of Fbio shall be made on a system as it 
would exist under the rule. The owner or operator should anticipate 
changes that would occur to the wastewater flow and concentration of 
organics, to be treated by the biological treatment unit, as a result of 
enclosing the collection and treatment system as required by the rule.
    The forms presented in this appendix are designed to be applied to 
thoroughly mixed treatment units. A thoroughly mixed treatment unit is a 
unit that is designed and operated to approach or achieve uniform 
biomass distribution and organic compound concentration throughout the 
aeration unit by quickly dispersing the recycled biomass and the 
wastewater entering the unit. Systems that are not thoroughly mixed 
treatment units should be subdivided into a series of zones that have 
uniform characteristics within each zone. The number of zones required 
to characterize a biological treatment system will depend on the design 
and operation of the treatment system. Each zone should then be modeled 
as a separate unit. The amount of air emissions and biodegradation from 
the modeling of these separate zones can then be added to reflect the 
entire system.

                             II. Definitions

    Biological treatment unit = wastewater treatment unit designed and 
operated to promote the growth of bacteria to destroy organic materials 
in wastewater.

fbio = The fraction of individual applicable organic 
          compounds in the wastewater biodegraded in a biological 
          treatment unit.
Fbio = The fraction of total applicable organic compounds in 
          the wastewater biodegraded in a biological treatment unit.
Fe = The fraction of applicable organic compounds emitted from the 
          wastewater to the atmosphere.
K1 = First order biodegradation rate constant, L/g MLVSS-hr
KL = liquid-phase mass transfer coefficient, m/s
M = compound specific mass flow weighted average of organic compounds in 
          the wastewater, Mg/Yr

          III. Procedures for Determination of fbio

    The first step in the analysis to determine if a biological 
treatment unit may be used without being covered and vented through a 
closed-vent system to an air pollution control device, is to determine 
the compound-specific fbio. The following four procedures may 
be used to determine fbio:
    (1) EPA Test Method 304A or 304B (appendix A, part 63)--Method for 
the Determination of Biodegradation Rates of Organic Compounds,
    (2) Performance data with and without biodegradation,
    (3) Inlet and outlet concentration measurements,
    (4) Batch Tests.
    All procedures must be executed so that the resulting 
Fbio is based on the collection system and waste management 
units being

[[Page 669]]

in compliance with the regulation. If the collection system and waste 
management units meet the suppression requirements at the time of the 
test, any of the four procedures may be chosen. If the collection system 
and waste management units are not in compliance at the time of the 
performance test, then only Method 304A, 304B, or the Batch Test shall 
be chosen. If Method 304A, 304B, or the Batch Test is used, any 
anticipated changes to the influent of the full-scale biological 
treatment unit that will occur after the facility has enclosed the 
collection system must be represented in the influent feed to the 
benchtop bioreactor unit, or test unit.
    Select one or more appropriate procedures from the four listed above 
based on the availability of site specific data. If the facility does 
not have site-specific data on the removal efficiency of its biological 
treatment unit, then Procedure 1 or Procedure 4 may be used. Procedure 1 
allows the use of a bench top bioreactor to determine the first-order 
biodegradation rate constant. An owner or operator may elect to assume 
the first order biodegradation rate constant is zero for any regulated 
compound(s) present in the wastewater. Procedure 4 explains two types of 
batch tests which may be used to estimate the first order biodegradation 
rate constant. An owner or operator may elect to assume the first order 
biodegradation rate constant is zero for any regulated compound(s) 
present in the wastewater. Procedure 3 would be used if the facility 
has, or measures to determine, data on the inlet and outlet individual 
organic compound concentration for the biological treatment unit. 
Procedure 3 may only be used on a thoroughly mixed treatment unit. 
Procedure 2 is used if a facility has or obtains performance data on a 
biotreatment unit prior to and after addition of the microbial mass. An 
example where Procedure 2 could be used, is an activated sludge unit 
where measurements have been taken on inlet and exit concentration of 
organic compounds in the wastewater prior to seeding with the microbial 
mass and start-up of the unit. The flow chart in figure 1 outlines the 
steps to use for each of the procedures.

                  A. Method 304A or 304B (Procedure 1)

    If the first procedure is selected, follow the instructions in 
appendix A of part 63 Method 304A ``Method for the Determination of 
Biodegradation Rates of Organic Compounds (Vented Option)'' or Method 
304B ``Method for the Determination of Biodegradation Rates of Organic 
Compounds (Scrubber Option).'' Method 304A or 304B provides instruction 
on setting up and operating a self-contained benchtop bioreactor system 
which is operated under conditions representative of the target full-
scale system. Method 304A uses a benchtop bioreactor system with a vent, 
and uses modeling to estimate any air emissions. Method 304B uses a 
benchtop bioreactor system which is equipped with a scrubber and is not 
vented.
    There are some restrictions on which method a source may use. If the 
facility is measuring the rate of biodegradation of compounds that may 
tend to react or hydrolyze in the scrubber of Method 304B, this method 
shall not be used and Method 304A is the required method. If a Henry's 
law value is not available to use with Form V, then Method 304A shall 
not be used and Method 304B is the required method. When using either 
method, the feed flow to the benchtop bioreactor shall be representative 
of the flow and concentration of the wastewater that will be treated by 
the full-scale biological treatment unit after the collection and 
treatment system has been enclosed as required under the applicable 
subpart.
    The conditions under which the full-scale biological treatment unit 
is run establish the operating parameters of Method 304A or 304B. If the 
biological treatment unit is operated under abnormal operating 
conditions (conditions outside the range of critical parameters examined 
and confirmed in the laboratory), the EPA believes this will adversely 
affect the biodegradation rate and is an unacceptable treatment option. 
The facility would be making multiple runs of the test method to 
simulate the operating range for its biological treatment unit. For wide 
ranges of variation in operating parameters, the facility shall 
demonstrate the biological treatment unit is achieving an acceptable 
level of control, as required by the regulation, across the ranges and 
not only at the endpoints.
    If Method 304A is used, complete Form V initially. Form V is used to 
calculate K1 from the Method 304A results. Form V uses the Henry's law 
constant to estimate the fraction lost from the benchtop reactor vent. 
The owner or operator shall use the Henry's law values in Table I. Form 
V also gives direction for calculating an equivalent KL. Note on Form V 
if the calculated number for line 11 is greater than the calculated 
value for line 13, this procedure shall not be used to demonstrate the 
compound is biodegradable. If line 11 is greater than line 13, this is 
an indication the fraction emitted from the vent is greater than the 
fraction biodegraded. The equivalent KL determined on Form V is used in 
Form II (line 6). Estimation of the Fe and fbio must be done 
following the steps in Form III. Form III uses the previously calculated 
values of K1 and KL (equivalent KL), and site-specific parameters of the 
full-scale bioreactor as input to the calculations. Forms II, III, and V 
must be completed for each organic compound in the wastewater to 
determine Fe and fbio.
    If Method 304B is used, perform the method and use the measurements 
to determine K1, which is the first-order biodegradation rate

[[Page 670]]

constant. Form I lists the sequence of steps in the procedure for 
calculating K1 from the Method 304B results. Once K1 is determined, KL 
must be calculated by use of mass transfer equations. Form II outlines 
the procedure to follow for use of mass transfer equations to determine 
KL. A computer program which incorporates these mass transfer equations 
may be used. Water7 is a program that incorporates these mass transfer 
equations and may be used to determine KL. Refer to Form II-A to 
determine KL, if Water7 or the most recent update to this model is used. 
In addition, the Bay Area Sewage Toxics Emission (BASTE) model version 
3.0 or equivalent upgrade and the TOXCHEM (Environment Canada's 
Wastewater Technology Centre and Environmega, Ltd.) model version 1.10 
or equivalent upgrade may also be used to determine KL for the 
biological treatment unit with several stipulations. The programs must 
be altered to output a KL value which is based on the site-specific 
parameters of the unit modeled, and the Henry's law values listed in 
Table I must be substituted for the existing Henry's law values in the 
programs. Input values used in the model and corresponding output values 
shall become documentation of the fbio determination. The 
owner or operator should be aware these programs do not allow modeling 
of certain units. To model these units, the owner or operator shall use 
one of the other appropriate procedures as outlined in this appendix. 
The owner or operator shall not use a default value for KL. The KL value 
determined by use of these models shall be based on the site-specific 
parameters of the specific unit. This KL value shall be inserted in Form 
II (line 6). Estimation of the Fe and fbio must be done 
following the steps in Form III. Form III uses the previously calculated 
values of K1 and KL, and site-specific parameters of the full-scale 
bioreactor as input to the calculations. Forms I, II, and III must be 
completed for each organic compound in the wastewater to determine Fe 
and fbio.

    B. Performance Data With and Without Biodegradation (Procedure 2)

    Procedure 2 uses site-specific performance data that represents or 
characterizes operation of the unit both with and without 
biodegradation. As previously mentioned, proper determination of 
fbio must be made on a system as it would exist under the 
rule. Using Form IV, calculate KL and K1. After KL and K1 are 
determined, Form III is used to calculate Fe and fbio for 
each organic compound present in the wastewater.

      C. Inlet and Outlet Concentration Measurements (Procedure 3)

    Procedure 3 uses measured inlet and outlet organic compound 
concentrations for the unit. This procedure may only be used on a 
thoroughly mixed treatment unit. Again, proper determination of 
fbio must be made on a system as it would exist under the 
rule. The first step in using this procedure is to calculate KL using 
Form II. A computer model may be used. If the Water7 model or the most 
recent update to this model is used, then use Form II-A to calculate KL. 
After KL is determined using field data, complete Form VI to calculate 
K1. The TOXCHEM or BASTE model may also be used to calculate KL for the 
biological treatment unit, with the stipulations listed in procedure 
304B. After KL and K1 are determined, Form III is used to calculate Fe 
and fbio for each organic compound.

                      D. Batch Tests (Procedure 4)

    Two types of batch tests which may be used to determine kinetic 
parameters are: (1) The aerated reactor test and (2) the sealed reactor 
test. The aerated reactor test is also known as the BOX test (batch test 
with oxygen addition). The sealed reactor test is also known as the 
serum bottle test. These batch tests should be conducted only by persons 
familiar with procedures for determining biodegradation kinetics. 
Detailed discussions of batch procedures for determining biodegradation 
kinetic parameters can be found in references 1-4.
    For both batch test approaches, a biomass sample from the activated 
sludge unit of interest is collected, aerated, and stored for no more 
than 4 hours prior to testing. To collect sufficient data when 
biodegradation is rapid, it may be necessary to dilute the biomass 
sample. If the sample is to be diluted, the biomass sample shall be 
diluted using treated effluent from the activated sludge unit of 
interest to a concentration such that the biodegradation test will last 
long enough to make at least six concentration measurements. It is 
recommended that the tests not be terminated until the compound 
concentration falls below the limit of quantitation (LOQ). Measurements 
that are below the LOQ should not be used in the data analysis. Biomass 
concentrations shall be determined using standard methods for 
measurement of mixed liquor volatile suspended solids (MLVSS) (reference 
5).
    The change in concentration of a test compound may be monitored by 
either measuring the concentration in the liquid or in the reactor 
headspace. The analytical technique chosen for the test should be as 
sensitive as possible. For the batch test procedures described in this 
section, equilibrium conditions must exist between the liquid and gas 
phases of the experiments because the data analysis procedures are based 
on this premise. To use the headspace sampling approach, the reactor 
headspace must be in equilibrium with the liquid so that the headspace 
concentrations can be correlated

[[Page 671]]

with the liquid concentrations. Before the biodegradation testing is 
conducted, the equilibrium assumption must be verified. A discussion of 
the equilibrium assumption verification is given below in sections D.1 
and D.2 since different approaches are required for the two types of 
batch tests.
    To determine biodegradation kinetic parameters in a batch test, it 
is important to choose an appropriate initial substrate (compound(s) of 
interest) concentration for the test. The outcome of the batch 
experiment may be influenced by the initial substrate (SO) to 
biomass (XO) ratio (see references 3, 4, and 6). This ratio 
is typically measured in chemical oxygen demand (COD) units. When the 
SO/XO ratio is low, cell multiplication and growth 
in the batch test is negligible and the kinetics measured by the test 
are representative of the kinetics in the activated sludge unit of 
interest. The SO/XO ratio for a batch test is 
determined with the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.034

Where:

SO/XO=initial substrate to biomass ratio on a COD 
          basis
Si=initial substrate concentration in COD units (g COD/L)
X=biomass concentration in the batch test (g MLVSS/L)
1.42 = Conversion factor to convert to COD units

    For the batch tests described in this section, the SO/
XO ratio (on a COD basis) must be initially less than 0.5.
    1. Aerated Reactor Test. An aerated draft tube reactor may be used 
for the biokinetics testing (as an example see Figure 2 of appendix C). 
Other aerated reactor configurations may also be used. Air is bubbled 
through a porous frit at a rate sufficient to aerate and keep the 
reactor uniformly mixed. Aeration rates typically vary from 50 to 200 
ml/min for a 1 liter system. A mass flow rate controller is used to 
carefully control the air flow rate because it is important to have an 
accurate measure of this rate. The dissolved oxygen (DO) concentration 
in the system must not fall below 2 mg/liter so that the biodegradation 
observed will not be DO-limited. Once the air flow rate is established, 
the test mixture (or compound) of interest is then injected into the 
reactor and the concentration of the compound(s) is monitored over time. 
Concentrations may be monitored in the liquid or in the headspace. A 
minimum of six samples shall be taken over the period of the test. 
However, it is necessary to collect samples until the compound 
concentration falls below the LOQ. If liquid samples are collected, they 
must be small enough such that the liquid volume in the batch reactor 
does not change by more than 10%.
    Before conducting experiments with biomass, it is necessary to 
verify the equilibrium assumption. The equilibrium assumption can be 
verified by conducting a stripping experiment using the effluent (no 
biomass) from the activated sludge unit of interest. Effluent is 
filtered with a 0.45 um or smaller filter and placed in the draft tube 
reactor. Air is sparged into the system and the compound concentration 
in the liquid or headspace is monitored over time. This test with no 
biomass may provide an estimate of the Henry's law constant. If the 
system is at equilibrium, the Henry's law constant may be estimated with 
the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.035

Where:

C=cencentration at time, t (min)
CO=concentration at t=0
G=volumetric gas flow rate (ml/min)
V=liquid volume in the batch reactor (ml)
Keq=Henry's law constant (mg/L-gas)/(mg/L-liquid)
t=time (min)

    A plot of--ln(C/Co) as a function of t will have a slope 
equal to GKeq/V. The equilibrium assumption can be verified 
by comparing the experimentally determined Keq for the system 
to literature values of the Henry's Law constant (including those listed 
in this appendix). If Keq does not match the Henry's law 
constant, Keq shall be determined from analysis of the 
headspace and liquid concentration in a batch system.
    The concentration of a compound decreases in the bioreactor due to 
both biodegradation and stripping. Biodegradation processes are 
typically described with a Monod model. This model and a stripping 
expression are combined to give a mass balance for the aerated draft 
tube reactor ):

[[Page 672]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.036

Where:

s=test compound concentration, mg/liter
G=volumetric gas flow rate, liters/hr
Keq=Henry's Law constant measured in the system, (mg/liter 
          gas)/(mg/liter liquid)
V=volume of liquid in the reactor, liters
X=biomass concentration (g MLVSS/liter)
Qm=maximum rate of substrate removal, mg/g MLVSS/hr
KS=Monod biorate constant at half the maximum rate, mg/liter

    Equation App.C-3 has the analytical solution:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.037
    
Where:

A=GKeq KS+ Qm VX
B=GKeq
SO=test compound concentration at t=0

    This equation is used along with the substrate concentration versus 
time data to determine the best fit parameters (Qm and 
KS) to describe the biodegradation process in the aerated 
reactor. If the aerated reactor test is used, the following procedure is 
used to analyze the data. Evaluate Keq for the compound of 
interest with Form XI. The concentration in the vented headspace or 
liquid is measured as a function of time and the data is entered on Form 
XI. A plot is made from the data and attached to the Form XI. 
Keq is calculated on Form XI and the results are contrasted 
with the expected value of Henry's law obtained from Form IX. If the 
comparison is satisfactory, the stripping constant is calculated from 
Keq, completing Form XI. The values of Keq may 
differ because the theoretical value of Keq may not be 
applicable to the system of interest. If the comparison of the 
calculated Keq from the form and the expected value of 
Henry's law is unsatisfactory, Form X can alternatively be used to 
validate Keq. If the aerated reactor is demonstrated to not 
be at equilibrium, either modify the reactor design and/or operation, or 
use another type of batch test.
    The compound-specific biorate constants are then measured using Form 
XII. The stripping constant that was determined from Form XI and a 
headspace correction factor of 1 are entered on Form XII. The aerated 
reactor biotest may then be run, measuring concentrations of each 
compound of interest as a function of time. If headspace concentrations 
are measured instead of liquid concentrations, then the corresponding 
liquid concentrations are calculated from the headspace measurements 
using the Keq determined on Form XI and entered on Form XII.
    The concentration data on Form XII may contain scatter that can 
adversely influence the data interpretation. It is possible to curve fit 
the concentration data and enter the concentrations on the fitted curve 
instead of the actual data. If curve fitting is used, the curve-fitting 
procedure must be based upon the Equation App. C-4. When curve fitting 
is used, it is necessary to attach a plot of the actual data and the 
fitted curve to Form XII.
    If the stripping rate constant is relatively large when compared to 
the biorate at low concentrations, it may be difficult to obtain 
accurate evaluations of the first-order biorate constant. In these 
cases, either reducing the stripping rate constant by lowering the 
aeration rate, or increasing the biomass concentrations should be 
considered.
    The final result of the batch testing is the measurement of a 
biorate that can be used to estimate the fraction biodegraded, 
fbio. The number transferred to Form III is obtained from 
Form XII, line 9.
    2. Sealed Reactor Test. This test uses a closed system to prevent 
losses of the test compound by volatilization. This test may be 
conducted using a serum bottle or a sealed draft tube reactor (for an 
example see Figure 3 of appendix C). Since no air is supplied, it is 
necessary to ensure that sufficient oxygen is present in the system. The 
DO concentration in the system must not fall below 2 mg/liter so that 
the biodegradation observed will not be DO-limited. As an alternative, 
oxygen may be supplied by electrolysis as needed to maintain the DO 
concentration above 2 mg/liter. The reactor contents must be uniformly 
mixed, by stirring

[[Page 673]]

or agitation using a shaker or similar apparatus. The test mixture (or 
compound) of interest is injected into the reactor and the concentration 
is monitored over time. A minimum of six samples shall be taken over the 
period of the test. However, it is necessary to monitor the 
concentration until it falls below the LOQ.
    The equilibrium assumption must be verified for the batch reactor 
system. In this case, Keq may be determined by simultaneously 
measuring gas and liquid phase concentrations at different times within 
a given experiment. A constant ratio of gas/liquid concentrations 
indicates that equilibrium conditions are present and Keq is 
not a function of concentration. This ratio is then taken as the 
Keq for the specific compound in the test. It is not 
necessary to measure Keq for each experiment. If the ratio is 
not constant, the equilibrium assumption is not valid and it is 
necessary to (1) increase mixing energy for the system and retest for 
the equilibrium assumption, or (2) use a different type of test (for 
example, a collapsible volume reactor).
    The concentration of a compound decreases in the bioreactor due to 
biodegradation according to Equation App. C-5:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.038

Where:

s=test compound concentration (mg/liters)
Vl=the average liquid volume in the reactor (liters)
Vg=the average gas volume in the reactor (liters)
Qm=maximum rate of substrate removal (mg/g ML VSS/hr)
Keq=Henry's Law constant determined for the test, (mg/liter 
          gas)/(mg/liter liquid)
Ks=Monod biorate constant at one-half the maximum rate (mg/
          liter)
t=time (hours)
X=biomass concentration (g ML VSS/liter )
so=test compound concentration at time t=0

    Equation App. C-5 can be solved analytically to give:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.039
    
    This equation is used along with the substrate concentration versus 
time data to determine the best fit parameters (Qm and 
Ks) to describe the biodegradation process in the sealed 
reactor.
    If the sealed reactor test is used, Form X is used to determine the 
headspace correction factor. The disappearance of a compound in the 
sealed reactor test is slowed because a fraction of the compound is not 
available for biodegradation because it is present in the headspace. If 
the compound is almost entirely in the liquid phase, the headspace 
correction factor is approximately one. If the headspace correction 
factor is substantially less than one, improved mass transfer or reduced 
headspace may improve the accuracy of the sealed reactor test. A 
preliminary sealed reactor test must be conducted to test the 
equilibrium assumption. As the compound of interest is degraded, 
simultaneous headspace and liquid samples should be collected and Form X 
should be used to evaluate Keq. The ratio of headspace to 
liquid concentrations must be constant in order to confirm that 
equilibrium conditions exist. If equilibrium conditions are not present, 
additional mixing or an alternate reactor configuration may be required.
    The compound-specific biorate constants are then calculated using 
Form XII. For the sealed reactor test, a stripping rate constant of zero 
and the headspace correction factor that was determined from Form X are 
entered on Form XII. The sealed reactor test may then be run, measuring 
the concentrations of each compound of interest as a function of time. 
If headspace concentrations are measured instead of liquid 
concentrations, then the corresponding liquid concentrations are 
calculated from the headspace measurements using Keq from 
Form X and entered on Form XII.
    The concentration data on Form XII may contain scatter that can 
adversely influence the data interpretation. It is possible to

[[Page 674]]

curve fit the concentration data and enter the concentrations on the 
fitted curve instead of the actual data. If curve fitting is used, the 
curve-fitting procedure must be based upon Equation App. C-6. When curve 
fitting is used, it is necessary to attach a plot of the actual data and 
the fitted curve to Form XII.
    If a sealed collapsible reactor is used that has no headspace, the 
headspace correction factor will equal 1, but the stripping rate 
constant may not equal 0 due to diffusion losses through the reactor 
wall. The ratio of the rate of loss of compound to the concentration of 
the compound in the reactor (units of per hour) must be evaluated. This 
loss ratio has the same units as the stripping rate constant and may be 
entered as the stripping rate constant on line 1 of Form XII.
    If the loss due to diffusion through the walls of the collapsible 
reactor is relatively large when compared to the biorate at low 
concentrations, it may be difficult to obtain accurate evaluations of 
the first-order biorate constant. In these cases, either replacing the 
materials used to construct the reactor with materials of low 
permeability or increasing the biomass concentration should be 
considered.
    The final result of the batch testing is the measurement of a 
biorate that can be used to estimate the fraction biodegraded, 
fbio. The number transferred to Form III is obtained from 
Form XII, line 9.
    The number on Form XII line 9 will equal the Monod first-order 
biorate constant if the full-scale system is operated in the first-order 
range. If the full-scale system is operated at concentrations above that 
of the Monod first-order range, the value of the number on line 9 will 
be somewhat lower than the Monod first-order biorate constant. With 
supporting biorate data, the Monod model used in Form XII may be used to 
estimate the effective biorate constant K1 for use in Form III.
    If a reactor with headspace is used, analysis of the data using 
equation App. C-6 is valid only if Vl and Vg do 
not change more than 10% (i.e., they can be approximated as constant for 
the duration of the test). Since biodegradation is occurring only in the 
liquid, as the liquid concentration decreases it is necessary for mass 
to transfer from the gas to the liquid phase. This may require vigorous 
mixing and/or reducing the volume in the headspace of the reactor.
    If there is no headspace (e.g., a collapsible reactor), equation 
App. C-6 is independent of V1 and there are no restrictions 
on the liquid volume. If a membrane or bag is used as the collapsible-
volume reactor, it may be important to monitor for diffusion losses in 
the system. To determine if there are losses, the bag should be used 
without biomass and spiked with the compound(s) of interest. The 
concentration of the compound(s) in the reactor should be monitored over 
time. The data are analyzed as described above for the sealed reactor 
test.
    3. Quality Control/Quality Assurance (QA/QC). A QA/QC plan outlining 
the procedures used to determine the biodegradation rate constants shall 
be prepared and a copy maintained at the source. The plan should 
include, but may not be limited to:
    1. A description of the apparatus used (e.g., size, volume, method 
of supplying air or oxygen, mixing, and sampling procedures) including a 
simplified schematic drawing.
    2. A description of how biomass was sampled from the activated 
sludge unit.
    3. A description of how biomass was held prior to testing (age, 
etc.).
    4. A description of what conditions (DO, gas-liquid equilibrium, 
temperature, etc.) are important, what the target values are, how the 
factors were controlled, and how well they were controlled.
    5. A description of how the experiment was conducted, including 
preparation of solutions, dilution procedures, sampling procedures, 
monitoring of conditions, etc.
    6. A description of the analytical instrumentation used, how the 
instruments were calibrated, and a summary of the precision for that 
equipment.
    7. A description of the analytical procedures used. If appropriate, 
reference to an ASTM, EPA or other procedure may be used. Otherwise, 
describe how the procedure is done, what is done to measure precision, 
accuracy, recovery, etc., as appropriate.
    8. A description of how data are captured, recorded, and stored.
    9. A description of the equations used and their solutions, 
including a reference to any software used for calculations and/or 
curve-fitting.

                      IV. Calculation of Fbio

    At this point, the individual fbios determined by 
the previously explained procedures must be summed to obtain the total 
Fbio. To determine the Fbio multiply each compound 
specific fbio by the compound-specific average mass flow rate 
of the organic compound in the wastewater stream (see regulation for 
instruction on calculation of average mass flow rate). Sum these 
products and divide by the total wastewater stream average mass flow 
rate of organic compounds.

[[Page 675]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.040

M=compound specific average mass flow rate of the organic compounds in 
          the wastewater (Mg/Yr)
n=number of organic compounds in the wastewater

    The Fbio is then used in the applicable compliance 
equations in the regulation to determine if biodegradation may be used 
to comply with the treatment standard without covering and venting to an 
air pollution control device.

                               References

    1. Rajagopalan, S. et al. ``Comparison of Methods for Determining 
Biodegradation Kinetics of Volatile Organic Compounds.'' Proceedings of 
Water Environment Federation. 67th Annual Conference, October 15-19, 
1994.
    2. Ellis, T.G. et al. ``Determination of Toxic Organic Chemical 
Biodegradation Kinetics Using Novel Respirometric Technique''. 
Proceedings Water Environment Federation, 67th Annual Conference, 
October 15-19, 1994.
    3. Pitter, P. and J. Chudoba. Biodegradability of Organic Substances 
in the Aquatic Environment. CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL. 1990.
    4. Grady, C.P.L., B. Smets, and D. Barbeau. Variability in kinetic 
parameter estimates: A review of possible causes and a proposed 
terminology. Wat. Res. 30 (3), 742-748, 1996.
    5. Eaton, A.D., et al. eds., Standard Methods for the Examination of 
Water and Wastewater, 19th Edition, American Public Health Association, 
Washington, DC, 1995.
    6. Chudoba P., B. Capdeville, and J. Chudoba. Explanation of 
biological meaning of the So/Xo ratio in batch cultivation. Wat. Sci. 
Tech. 26 (3/4), 743-751, 1992.

                                 Table I
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   HL @ 25 deg.C (atm/    HL @ 100 deg.C
            Compound                   mole frac)        (atm/mole frac)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1  Acetaldehyde................  4.87e+00                5.64e+01
3  Acetonitrile................  1.11e+00                1.78e+01
4  Acetophenone................  5.09e-01                2.25e+01
5  Acrolein....................  4.57e+00                6.61e+01
8  Acrylonitrile...............  5.45e+00                6.67e+01
9  Allyl chloride..............  5.15e+02                2.26e+03
10  Aniline....................  9.78e-02                1.42e+00
12  Benzene....................  3.08e+02                1.93e+03
14  Benzyl chloride............  1.77e+01                2.88e+02
15  Biphenyl...................  2.27e+01                1.27e+03
17  Bromoform..................  2.96e+01                3.98e+02
18  1,3-Butadiene..............  3.96e+03                1.56e+04
20  Carbon disulfide...........  1.06e+03                3.60e+03
21  Carbon tetrachloride.......  1.68e+03                1.69e+04
23  2-Chloroacetophenone.......  4.84e-02                1.43e+01
24  Chlorobenzene..............  2.09e+02                3.12e+03
25  Chloroform.................  2.21e+02                1.34e+03
26  Chloroprene................  5.16e+01                1.74e+02
29  o-Cresol...................  9.12e-02                2.44e+01
31  Cumene.....................  7.28e+02                7.15e+03
32  1,4-Dichlorobenzene(p).....  1.76e+02                1.95e+03
33  Dichloroethyl ether........  1.14e+00                3.57e+01
34  1,3-Dichloropropene........  1.97e+02                1.44e+03
36  N,N-Dimethylaniline........  7.70e-01                5.67e+02
37  Diethyl sulfate............  3.41e-01                4.22e+01
38  3,3'-Dimethylbenzidine.....  7.51e-05                5.09e-01
40  1,1-Dimethylhydrazine......  9.11e-02                1.57e+01
42  Dimethyl sulfate...........  2.23e-01                1.43e+01
43  2,4-Dinitrophenol..........  2.84e-01                1.50e+02
44  2,4-Dinitrotoluene.........  4.00e-01                9.62e+00
45  1,4-Dioxane................  3.08e-01                9.53e+00
47  Epichlorohydrin............  1.86e+00                4.34e+01
48  Ethyl acrylate.............  1.41e+01                3.01e+02
49  Ethylbenzene...............  4.38e+02                4.27e+03
50  Ethyl chloride               6.72e+02                3.10e+03
 (chloroethane).

[[Page 676]]

 
51  Ethylene dibromide.........  3.61e+01                5.15e+02
52  Ethylene dichloride (1,2-    6.54e+01                5.06e+02
 Dichloroethane).
54  Ethylene oxide.............  1.32e+01                9.09e+01
55  Ethylidene dichloride (1,1-  3.12e+02                2.92e+03
 Dichloroethane).
57  Ethylene glycol dimethyl     1.95e+00                4.12e+01
 ether.
60  Ethylene glycol monoethyl    9.86e-02                6.03e+00
 ether acetate.
62  Ethylene glycol monomethyl   1.22e-01                6.93e+00
 ether acetate.
64  Diethylene glycol dimethyl   8.38e-02                4.69e+00
 ether.
69  Diethylene glycol diethyl    1.19e-01                7.71e+00
 ether.
72  Ethylene glycol monobutyl    2.75e-01                2.50e+01
 ether acetate.
73  Hexachlorobenzene..........  9.45e+01                2.57e+04
74  Hexachlorobutadiene........  5.72e+02                6.92e+03
75  Hexachloroethane...........  4.64e+02                7.49e+04
76  Hexane.....................  4.27e+04                9.44e+04
78  Isophorone.................  3.68e-01                1.68e+01
80  Methanol...................  2.89e-01                7.73e+00
81  Methyl bromide               3.81e+02                2.12e+03
 (Bromomethane).
82  Methyl chloride              4.90e+02                2.84e+03
 (Chloromethane).
83  Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-    9.67e+02                5.73e+03
 Trichloroethane).
84  Methyl ethyl ketone (2-      7.22e+00                5.92e+01
 Butanone).
86  Methyl isobutyl ketone       2.17e+01                3.72e+02
 (Hexone).
88  Methyl methacrylate........  7.83e+00                9.15e+01
89  Methyl tert-butyl ether....  3.08e+01                2.67e+02
90  Methylene chloride           1.64e+02                9.15e+02
 (Dichloromethane).
93  Naphthalene................  2.68e+01                7.10e+02
94  Nitrobenzene...............  1.33e+00                2.80e+01
96  2-Nitropropane.............  6.61e+00                8.76e+01
99  Phosgene...................  7.80e+02                3.51e+03
102  Propionaldehyde...........  3.32e+00                1.42e+02
103  Propylene dichloride......  1.59e+02                1.27e+03
104  Propylene oxide...........  1.98e+01                1.84e+02
106  Styrene...................  1.45e+02                1.72e+03
107  1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane.  1.39e+01                1.99e+02
108  Tetrachloroethylene         9.83e+02                1.84e+04
 (Perchloroethylene).
109  Toluene...................  3.57e+02                2.10e+03
112  o-Toluidine...............  1.34e-01                1.15e+01
113  1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene....  1.07e+02                1.04e+03
114  1,1,2-Trichloroethane.....  4.58e+01                5.86e+02
115  Trichloroethylene.........  5.67e+02                7.66e+03
116  2,4,5-Trichlorophenol.....  4.84e-01                6.27e+01
117  Triethylamine.............  6.94e+00                2.57e+02
118  2,2,4-Trimethylpentane....  1.85e+05                9.74e+05
119  Vinyl acetate.............  2.82e+01                2.80e+02
120  Vinyl chloride............  1.47e+03                6.45e+03
121  Vinylidene chloride (1,1-   1.44e+03                1.40e+04
 Dichloroethylene).
123  m-Xylene..................  4.13e+02                3.25e+03
124  o-Xylene..................  2.71e+02                2.55e+03
125  p-Xylene..................  4.13e+02                3.20e+03
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 677]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.041

      

[[Page 678]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.042

      

[[Page 679]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.043

      

[[Page 680]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.044


[[Page 681]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.045

      

[[Page 682]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.046

      

[[Page 683]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.047

      

[[Page 684]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.048

      

[[Page 685]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.049

      

[[Page 686]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.050

      

[[Page 687]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.051

      

[[Page 688]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.052

      

[[Page 689]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.053

      

[[Page 690]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.054

      

[[Page 691]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.055

      

[[Page 692]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.056

      

[[Page 693]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.057

      

[[Page 694]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.058

      

[[Page 695]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.059

      

[[Page 696]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.060

      

[[Page 697]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JA97.061

[62 FR 2801, Jan. 17, 1997, as amended at 63 FR 67794, Dec. 9, 1998]

[[Page 698]]

 Appendix D to Part 63--Alternative Validation Procedure for EPA Waste 
                         and Wastewater Methods

                            1. Applicability

    This procedure is to be applied exclusively to Environmental 
Protection Agency methods developed by the Office of Water and the 
Office of Solid Waste. Alternative methods developed by any other group 
or agency shall be validated according to the procedures in Sections 5.1 
and 5.3 of Test Method 301, 40 CFR Part 63, Appendix A. For the purposes 
of this appendix, ``waste'' means waste and wastewater.

                              2. Procedure

    This procedure shall be applied once for each waste matrix. Waste 
matrix in the context of this procedure refers to the target compound 
mixture in the waste as well as the formulation of the medium in which 
the target compounds are suspended. The owner or operator shall prepare 
a sampling plan. Wastewater samples shall be collected using sampling 
procedures which minimize loss of organic compounds during sample 
collection and analysis and maintain sample integrity. The sample plan 
shall include procedures for determining recovery efficiency of the 
relevant compounds regulated in the applicable subpart. An example of an 
acceptable sampling plan would be one that incorporates similar sampling 
and sample handling requirements to those of Method 25D of 40 CFR part 
60, appendix A.

                       2.1. Sampling and Analysis

    2.1.1. For each waste matrix, collect twice the number of samples 
required by the applicable regulation. Designate and label half the 
sample vials the ``spiked'' sample set, and the other half the 
``unspiked'' sample set. Immediately before or immediately after 
sampling (immediately after in the context of this procedure means after 
placing the sample into the sample vial, but before the sample is 
capped, cooled, and shipped to the laboratory for analysis), inject, 
either individually or as a solution, all the target compounds into each 
spiked sample.
    2.1.2. The mass of each spiked compound shall be 40 to 60 percent of 
the mass expected to be present in the waste matrix. If the 
concentration of the target compounds in the waste are not known, the 
mass of each spiked compound shall be 40 to 60 percent of the limit 
allowed in the applicable regulation. Analyze both sets of samples 
(spiked and unspiked) with the chosen method.

                             3. Calculations

    For each pair of spiked and unspiked samples, determine the fraction 
of spiked compound recovered (R) using the following equations.

where:
mr = mass spiked compound measured ( g).
ms = total mass of compound measured in spiked sample 
( g).
mu = total mass of compound measured in unspiked sample 
( g).
where:
S = theoretical mass of compound spiked into spiked sample ( 
g).

                         3.1.  Method Evaluation

    In order for the chosen method to be acceptable for a compound, 
0.70R1.30 (R in this case is an average value of 
all the spiked and unspiked sample set R values). If the average R value 
does not meet this criterion for a target compound, the chosen method is 
not acceptable for that compound, and therefore another method shall be 
evaluated for acceptance (by repeating the procedures outlined above 
with another method).

                        3.2.  Records and Reports

    Report the average R value in the test report and correct all 
reported measurements made with the method with the calculated R value 
for that compound by using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JY96.048

                     3.3.  Optional Correction Step

    If the applicable regulation allows for correction of the mass of 
the compound in the waste by a published fm value, multiply 
the reported result calculated above with the appropriate fm 
value for that compound.

[61 FR 34200, July 1, 1996]

[[Page 699]]



                              FINDING AIDS




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

  A list of CFR titles, subtitles, chapters, subchapters and parts and 
an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are included in 
the CFR Index and Finding Aids volume to the Code of Federal Regulations 
which is published separately and revised annually.

  Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference
  Table of CFR Titles and Chapters
  Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR
  List of CFR Sections Affected

[[Page 701]]

            Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference

                      (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

  The Director of the Federal Register has approved under 5 U.S.C. 
552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51 the incorporation by reference of the following 
publications. This list contains only those incorporations by reference 
effective as of the revision date of this volume. Incorporations by 
reference found within a regulation are effective upon the effective 
date of that regulation. For more information on incorporation by 
reference, see the preliminary pages of this volume.


40 CFR (63.1200 TO END)

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                                                                  40 CFR


American Petroleum Institute

  1220 L Street, NW., Washington, DC 20005-4070; 
  Telephone: (202) 682-8000
API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards                    63.1251
  (MPMS), Chapter 19.2, Evaporative Loss from 
  Floating-Roof Tanks (formerly API publications 
  2517 and 2519), April 1997.


American Society for Testing and Materials

  100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 
  19428-2959; Telephone: (610) 832-9585, FAX: 
  (610) 832-9555
ASTM D 1193-77, Standard Specification for Reagent  Par. 4.1.1 and par. 
  Water.                                            4.4.2 of Appendix A 
                                                              to Part 63
ASTM D 1331-89, Standard Test Methods for Surface  Par. 3.1 and par. 4.2 
  and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of Surface  of Appendix A to Part 
  Active Agents.                                                      63
ASTM D2879-97, Standard Test Method for Vapor                    63.1251
  Pressure-Temperature Relationship and Initial 
  Decomposition Temperature of Liquids by 
  Isoteniscope.
ASTM D3574-91, Standard Test Methods for Flexible             63.1304(b)
  Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and Molded 
  Urethane Foams.


National Institute of Standards and Technology

  Springfield, VA 22161
Handbook 44, Specifications, Tolerances, and Other         63.1303(e)(3)
  Technical Requirements for Weighing and 
  Measuring Devices, 1998.

[[Page 703]]



                    Table of CFR Titles and Chapters




                      (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

                      Title 1--General Provisions

         I  Administrative Committee of the Federal Register 
                (Parts 1--49)
        II  Office of the Federal Register (Parts 50--299)
        IV  Miscellaneous Agencies (Parts 400--500)

                          Title 2--[Reserved]

                        Title 3--The President

         I  Executive Office of the President (Parts 100--199)

                           Title 4--Accounts

         I  General Accounting Office (Parts 1--99)
        II  Federal Claims Collection Standards (General 
                Accounting Office--Department of Justice) (Parts 
                100--299)

                   Title 5--Administrative Personnel

         I  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1--1199)
        II  Merit Systems Protection Board (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  Office of Management and Budget (Parts 1300--1399)
        IV  Advisory Committee on Federal Pay (Parts 1400--1499)
         V  The International Organizations Employees Loyalty 
                Board (Parts 1500--1599)
        VI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Parts 
                1600--1699)
       VII  Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations 
                (Parts 1700--1799)
      VIII  Office of Special Counsel (Parts 1800--1899)
        IX  Appalachian Regional Commission (Parts 1900--1999)
        XI  Armed Forces Retirement Home (Part 2100)
       XIV  Federal Labor Relations Authority, General Counsel of 
                the Federal Labor Relations Authority and Federal 
                Service Impasses Panel (Parts 2400--2499)
        XV  Office of Administration, Executive Office of the 
                President (Parts 2500--2599)
       XVI  Office of Government Ethics (Parts 2600--2699)
       XXI  Department of the Treasury (Parts 3100--3199)

[[Page 704]]

      XXII  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Part 3201)
     XXIII  Department of Energy (Part 3301)
      XXIV  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (Part 3401)
       XXV  Department of the Interior (Part 3501)
      XXVI  Department of Defense (Part 3601)
    XXVIII  Department of Justice (Part 3801)
      XXIX  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 3900--3999)
       XXX  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4099)
      XXXI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 4100--4199)
    XXXIII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Part 4301)
      XXXV  Office of Personnel Management (Part 4501)
        XL  Interstate Commerce Commission (Part 5001)
       XLI  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Part 5101)
      XLII  Department of Labor (Part 5201)
     XLIII  National Science Foundation (Part 5301)
       XLV  Department of Health and Human Services (Part 5501)
      XLVI  Postal Rate Commission (Part 5601)
     XLVII  Federal Trade Commission (Part 5701)
    XLVIII  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Part 5801)
         L  Department of Transportation (Part 6001)
       LII  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Part 6201)
      LIII  Department of Education (Parts 6300--6399)
       LIV  Environmental Protection Agency (Part 6401)
      LVII  General Services Administration (Part 6701)
     LVIII  Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Part 
                6801)
       LIX  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Part 
                6901)
        LX  United States Postal Service (Part 7001)
       LXI  National Labor Relations Board (Part 7101)
      LXII  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Part 7201)
     LXIII  Inter-American Foundation (Part 7301)
       LXV  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Part 
                7501)
      LXVI  National Archives and Records Administration (Part 
                7601)
      LXIX  Tennessee Valley Authority (Part 7901)
      LXXI  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Part 8101)
     LXXIV  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission (Part 
                8401)
     LXXVI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Part 8601)
    LXXVII  Office of Management and Budget (Part 8701)

                          Title 6--[Reserved]

                         Title 7--Agriculture

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Agriculture 
                (Parts 0--26)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Department of 
                Agriculture

[[Page 705]]

         I  Agricultural Marketing Service (Standards, 
                Inspections, Marketing Practices), Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 27--209)
        II  Food and Nutrition Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 210--299)
       III  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         V  Agricultural Research Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Natural Resources Conservation Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Farm Service Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                700--799)
      VIII  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Federal Grain Inspection Service), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Fruits, Vegetables, Nuts), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 900--999)
         X  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Milk), Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1000--1199)
        XI  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Miscellaneous Commodities), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1200--1299)
      XIII  Northeast Dairy Compact Commission (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Commodity Credit Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  Foreign Agricultural Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Rural Telephone Bank, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      XVII  Rural Utilities Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Rural Housing Service, Rural Business-Cooperative 
                Service, Rural Utilities Service, and Farm Service 
                Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1800--
                2099)
      XXVI  Office of Inspector General, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 2600--2699)
     XXVII  Office of Information Resources Management, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of Operations, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                2800--2899)
      XXIX  Office of Energy, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                2900--2999)
       XXX  Office of the Chief Financial Officer, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3000--3099)
      XXXI  Office of Environmental Quality, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3100--3199)
     XXXII  Office of Procurement and Property Management, 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 3200--3299)

[[Page 706]]

    XXXIII  Office of Transportation, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3300--3399)
     XXXIV  Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension 
                Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3400--
                3499)
      XXXV  Rural Housing Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3500--3599)
     XXXVI  National Agricultural Statistics Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 3600--3699)
    XXXVII  Economic Research Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3700--3799)
   XXXVIII  World Agricultural Outlook Board, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3800--3899)
       XLI  [Reserved]
      XLII  Rural Business-Cooperative Service and Rural Utilities 
                Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 4200--
                4299)

                    Title 8--Aliens and Nationality

         I  Immigration and Naturalization Service, Department of 
                Justice (Parts 1--499)

                 Title 9--Animals and Animal Products

         I  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1--199)
        II  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Packers and Stockyards Programs), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--299)
       III  Food Safety and Inspection Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 300--599)

                           Title 10--Energy

         I  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Department of Energy (Parts 200--699)
       III  Department of Energy (Parts 700--999)
         X  Department of Energy (General Provisions) (Parts 
                1000--1099)
      XVII  Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board (Parts 1700--
                1799)

                      Title 11--Federal Elections

         I  Federal Election Commission (Parts 1--9099)

                      Title 12--Banks and Banking

         I  Comptroller of the Currency, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 1--199)
        II  Federal Reserve System (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Parts 300--399)

[[Page 707]]

        IV  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 400--
                499)
         V  Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Credit Union Administration (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Federal Financing Bank (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Federal Housing Finance Board (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XIV  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 1400--
                1499)
        XV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1500--1599)
      XVII  Office of Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                1700--1799)
     XVIII  Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, 
                Department of the Treasury (Parts 1800--1899)

               Title 13--Business Credit and Assistance

         I  Small Business Administration (Parts 1--199)
       III  Economic Development Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)

                    Title 14--Aeronautics and Space

         I  Federal Aviation Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--199)
        II  Office of the Secretary, Department of Transportation 
                (Aviation Proceedings) (Parts 200--399)
       III  Commercial Space Transportation, Federal Aviation 
                Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 400--499)
         V  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)

                 Title 15--Commerce and Foreign Trade

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Commerce (Parts 
                0--29)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Commerce and 
                Foreign Trade
         I  Bureau of the Census, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                30--199)
        II  National Institute of Standards and Technology, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Foreign-Trade Zones Board, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 400--499)
       VII  Bureau of Export Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 700--799)

[[Page 708]]

      VIII  Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 800--899)
        IX  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Technology Administration, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
      XIII  East-West Foreign Trade Board (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Minority Business Development Agency (Parts 1400--
                1499)
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Foreign Trade 
                Agreements
        XX  Office of the United States Trade Representative 
                (Parts 2000--2099)
            Subtitle D--Regulations Relating to Telecommunications 
                and Information
     XXIII  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                2300--2399)

                    Title 16--Commercial Practices

         I  Federal Trade Commission (Parts 0--999)
        II  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Parts 1000--1799)

             Title 17--Commodity and Securities Exchanges

         I  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Parts 1--199)
        II  Securities and Exchange Commission (Parts 200--399)
        IV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 400--499)

          Title 18--Conservation of Power and Water Resources

         I  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, Department of 
                Energy (Parts 1--399)
       III  Delaware River Basin Commission (Parts 400--499)
        VI  Water Resources Council (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Susquehanna River Basin Commission (Parts 800--899)
      XIII  Tennessee Valley Authority (Parts 1300--1399)

                       Title 19--Customs Duties

         I  United States Customs Service, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 1--199)
        II  United States International Trade Commission (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)

[[Page 709]]

                     Title 20--Employees' Benefits

         I  Office of Workers' Compensation Programs, Department 
                of Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Railroad Retirement Board (Parts 200--399)
       III  Social Security Administration (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 500--599)
         V  Employment and Training Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 600--699)
        VI  Employment Standards Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 700--799)
       VII  Benefits Review Board, Department of Labor (Parts 
                800--899)
      VIII  Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries (Parts 
                900--999)
        IX  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans' 
                Employment and Training, Department of Labor 
                (Parts 1000--1099)

                       Title 21--Food and Drugs

         I  Food and Drug Administration, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1--1299)
        II  Drug Enforcement Administration, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 1300--1399)
       III  Office of National Drug Control Policy (Parts 1400--
                1499)

                      Title 22--Foreign Relations

         I  Department of State (Parts 1--199)
        II  Agency for International Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Peace Corps (Parts 300--399)
        IV  International Joint Commission, United States and 
                Canada (Parts 400--499)
         V  United States Information Agency (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Parts 700--
                799)
        IX  Foreign Service Grievance Board Regulations (Parts 
                900--999)
         X  Inter-American Foundation (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  International Boundary and Water Commission, United 
                States and Mexico, United States Section (Parts 
                1100--1199)
       XII  United States International Development Cooperation 
                Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
      XIII  Board for International Broadcasting (Parts 1300--
                1399)
       XIV  Foreign Service Labor Relations Board; Federal Labor 
                Relations Authority; General Counsel of the 
                Federal Labor Relations Authority; and the Foreign 
                Service Impasse Disputes Panel (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  African Development Foundation (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Japan-United States Friendship Commission (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      XVII  United States Institute of Peace (Parts 1700--1799)

[[Page 710]]

                          Title 23--Highways

         I  Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--999)
        II  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and 
                Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 1300--1399)

                Title 24--Housing and Urban Development

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Housing and Urban Development (Parts 0--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Housing and Urban 
                Development
         I  Office of Assistant Secretary for Equal Opportunity, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                100--199)
        II  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing-Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Government National Mortgage Association, Department 
                of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Multifamily Housing Assistance 
                Restructuring, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 600--699) [Reserved]
       VII  Office of the Secretary, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Housing Assistance Programs and 
                Public and Indian Housing Programs) (Parts 700--
                799)
      VIII  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Section 8 Housing Assistance 
                Programs, Section 202 Direct Loan Program, Section 
                202 Supportive Housing for the Elderly Program and 
                Section 811 Supportive Housing for Persons With 
                Disabilities Program) (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Public and Indian 
                Housing, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 900--999)
         X  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Interstate Land Sales 
                Registration Program) (Parts 1700--1799)
       XII  Office of Inspector General, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 2000--2099)
        XX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 3200--3899)
       XXV  Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation (Parts 4100--
                4199)

[[Page 711]]

                           Title 25--Indians

         I  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--299)
        II  Indian Arts and Crafts Board, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 300--399)
       III  National Indian Gaming Commission, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 500--599)
        IV  Office of Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation (Parts 
                700--799)
         V  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior, 
                and Indian Health Service, Department of Health 
                and Human Services (Part 900)
        VI  Office of the Assistant Secretary-Indian Affairs, 
                Department of the Interior (Part 1001)
       VII  Office of the Special Trustee for American Indians, 
                Department of the Interior (Part 1200)

                      Title 26--Internal Revenue

         I  Internal Revenue Service, Department of the Treasury 
                (Parts 1--799)

           Title 27--Alcohol, Tobacco Products and Firearms

         I  Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 1--299)

                   Title 28--Judicial Administration

         I  Department of Justice (Parts 0--199)
       III  Federal Prison Industries, Inc., Department of Justice 
                (Parts 300--399)
         V  Bureau of Prisons, Department of Justice (Parts 500--
                599)
        VI  Offices of Independent Counsel, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Independent Counsel (Parts 700--799)

                            Title 29--Labor

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Labor (Parts 
                0--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Labor
         I  National Labor Relations Board (Parts 100--199)
        II  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Railroad Adjustment Board (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 400--499)
         V  Wage and Hour Division, Department of Labor (Parts 
                500--899)
        IX  Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission 
                (Parts 900--999)
         X  National Mediation Board (Parts 1200--1299)

[[Page 712]]

       XII  Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (Parts 
                1400--1499)
       XIV  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Parts 1600--
                1699)
      XVII  Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 
                Department of Labor (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2200--2499)
       XXV  Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration, 
                Department of Labor (Parts 2500--2599)
     XXVII  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2700--2799)
        XL  Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4999)

                      Title 30--Mineral Resources

         I  Mine Safety and Health Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Minerals Management Service, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 200--299)
       III  Board of Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Geological Survey, Department of the Interior (Parts 
                400--499)
        VI  Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior (Parts 
                600--699)
       VII  Office of Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 700--999)

                 Title 31--Money and Finance: Treasury

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Treasury 
                (Parts 0--50)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Money and Finance
         I  Monetary Offices, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                51--199)
        II  Fiscal Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                200--399)
        IV  Secret Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                400--499)
         V  Office of Foreign Assets Control, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Bureau of Engraving and Printing, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of International Investment, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 800--899)

                      Title 32--National Defense

            Subtitle A--Department of Defense
         I  Office of the Secretary of Defense (Parts 1--399)
         V  Department of the Army (Parts 400--699)
        VI  Department of the Navy (Parts 700--799)

[[Page 713]]

       VII  Department of the Air Force (Parts 800--1099)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to National 
                Defense
       XII  Defense Logistics Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
       XVI  Selective Service System (Parts 1600--1699)
       XIX  Central Intelligence Agency (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Information Security Oversight Office, National 
                Archives and Records Administration (Parts 2000--
                2099)
       XXI  National Security Council (Parts 2100--2199)
      XXIV  Office of Science and Technology Policy (Parts 2400--
                2499)
     XXVII  Office for Micronesian Status Negotiations (Parts 
                2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of the Vice President of the United States 
                (Parts 2800--2899)
      XXIX  Presidential Commission on the Assignment of Women in 
                the Armed Forces (Part 2900)

               Title 33--Navigation and Navigable Waters

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1--
                199)
        II  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 
                200--399)
        IV  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                          Title 34--Education

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Education (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Offices of the 
                Department of Education
         I  Office for Civil Rights, Department of Education 
                (Parts 100--199)
        II  Office of Elementary and Secondary Education, 
                Department of Education (Parts 200--299)
       III  Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative 
                Services, Department of Education (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Vocational and Adult Education, Department 
                of Education (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Bilingual Education and Minority Languages 
                Affairs, Department of Education (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Office of Postsecondary Education, Department of 
                Education (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Educational Research and Improvement, 
                Department of Education (Parts 700--799)
        XI  National Institute for Literacy (Parts 1100--1199)
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Education
       XII  National Council on Disability (Parts 1200--1299)

[[Page 714]]

                        Title 35--Panama Canal

         I  Panama Canal Regulations (Parts 1--299)

             Title 36--Parks, Forests, and Public Property

         I  National Park Service, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
        II  Forest Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--
                299)
       III  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  American Battle Monuments Commission (Parts 400--499)
         V  Smithsonian Institution (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Library of Congress (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Advisory Council on Historic Preservation (Parts 800--
                899)
        IX  Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation (Parts 
                900--999)
         X  Presidio Trust (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance 
                Board (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)
       XIV  Assassination Records Review Board (Parts 1400--1499)

             Title 37--Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights

         I  Patent and Trademark Office, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 1--199)
        II  Copyright Office, Library of Congress (Parts 200--299)
        IV  Assistant Secretary for Technology Policy, Department 
                of Commerce (Parts 400--499)
         V  Under Secretary for Technology, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 500--599)

           Title 38--Pensions, Bonuses, and Veterans' Relief

         I  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 0--99)

                       Title 39--Postal Service

         I  United States Postal Service (Parts 1--999)
       III  Postal Rate Commission (Parts 3000--3099)

                  Title 40--Protection of Environment

         I  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1--799)
         V  Council on Environmental Quality (Parts 1500--1599)
       VII  Environmental Protection Agency and Department of 
                Defense; Uniform National Discharge Standards for 
                Vessels of the Armed Forces (Parts 1700--1799)

          Title 41--Public Contracts and Property Management

            Subtitle B--Other Provisions Relating to Public 
                Contracts

[[Page 715]]

        50  Public Contracts, Department of Labor (Parts 50-1--50-
                999)
        51  Committee for Purchase From People Who Are Blind or 
                Severely Disabled (Parts 51-1--51-99)
        60  Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal 
                Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor (Parts 
                60-1--60-999)
        61  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans 
                Employment and Training, Department of Labor 
                (Parts 61-1--61-999)
            Subtitle C--Federal Property Management Regulations 
                System
       101  Federal Property Management Regulations (Parts 101-1--
                101-99)
       105  General Services Administration (Parts 105-1--105-999)
       109  Department of Energy Property Management Regulations 
                (Parts 109-1--109-99)
       114  Department of the Interior (Parts 114-1--114-99)
       115  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 115-1--115-99)
       128  Department of Justice (Parts 128-1--128-99)
            Subtitle D--Other Provisions Relating to Property 
                Management [Reserved]
            Subtitle E--Federal Information Resources Management 
                Regulations System
       201  Federal Information Resources Management Regulation 
                (Parts 201-1--201-99) [Reserved]
            Subtitle F--Federal Travel Regulation System
       300  General (Parts 300-1--300.99)
       301  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances (Parts 301-1--
                301-99)
       302  Relocation Allowances (Parts 302-1--302-99)
       303  Payment of Expenses Connected with the Death of 
                Certain Employees (Parts 303-1--303-2)
       304  Payment from a Non-Federal Source for Travel Expenses 
                (Parts 304-1--304-99)

                        Title 42--Public Health

         I  Public Health Service, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 1--199)
        IV  Health Care Financing Administration, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Inspector General-Health Care, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 1000--1999)

                   Title 43--Public Lands: Interior

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Lands
         I  Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 200--499)
        II  Bureau of Land Management, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1000--9999)

[[Page 716]]

       III  Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation 
                Commission (Parts 10000--10005)

             Title 44--Emergency Management and Assistance

         I  Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 0--399)
        IV  Department of Commerce and Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                       Title 45--Public Welfare

            Subtitle A--Department of Health and Human Services 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Welfare
        II  Office of Family Assistance (Assistance Programs), 
                Administration for Children and Families, 
                Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  Office of Child Support Enforcement (Child Support 
                Enforcement Program), Administration for Children 
                and Families, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Refugee Resettlement, Administration for 
                Children and Families Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 400--499)
         V  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United 
                States, Department of Justice (Parts 500--599)
        VI  National Science Foundation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Commission on Civil Rights (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 800--899)
         X  Office of Community Services, Administration for 
                Children and Families, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                1200--1299)
      XIII  Office of Human Development Services, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 1300--1399)
       XVI  Legal Services Corporation (Parts 1600--1699)
      XVII  National Commission on Libraries and Information 
                Science (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation (Parts 1800--
                1899)
       XXI  Commission on Fine Arts (Parts 2100--2199)
      XXII  Christopher Columbus Quincentenary Jubilee Commission 
                (Parts 2200--2299)
     XXIII  Arctic Research Commission (Part 2301)
      XXIV  James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation (Parts 
                2400--2499)
       XXV  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                2500--2599)

[[Page 717]]

                          Title 46--Shipping

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1--
                199)
        II  Maritime Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 200--399)
       III  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage), Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Federal Maritime Commission (Parts 500--599)

                      Title 47--Telecommunication

         I  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Office of Science and Technology Policy and National 
                Security Council (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                300--399)

           Title 48--Federal Acquisition Regulations System

         1  Federal Acquisition Regulation (Parts 1--99)
         2  Department of Defense (Parts 200--299)
         3  Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 300--
                399)
         4  Department of Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         5  General Services Administration (Parts 500--599)
         6  Department of State (Parts 600--699)
         7  United States Agency for International Development 
                (Parts 700--799)
         8  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 800--899)
         9  Department of Energy (Parts 900--999)
        10  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1000--1099)
        12  Department of Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
        13  Department of Commerce (Parts 1300--1399)
        14  Department of the Interior (Parts 1400--1499)
        15  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1500--1599)
        16  Office of Personnel Management Federal Employees 
                Health Benefits Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                1600--1699)
        17  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1700--1799)
        18  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1800--1899)
        19  United States Information Agency (Parts 1900--1999)
        20  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 2000--2099)
        21  Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees 
                Group Life Insurance Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation (Parts 2100--2199)
        23  Social Security Administration (Parts 2300--2399)
        24  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                2400--2499)
        25  National Science Foundation (Parts 2500--2599)
        28  Department of Justice (Parts 2800--2899)
        29  Department of Labor (Parts 2900--2999)

[[Page 718]]

        34  Department of Education Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                3400--3499)
        35  Panama Canal Commission (Parts 3500--3599)
        44  Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 4400--4499)
        51  Department of the Army Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5100--5199)
        52  Department of the Navy Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5200--5299)
        53  Department of the Air Force Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation Supplement (Parts 5300--5399)
        54  Defense Logistics Agency, Department of Defense (Part 
                5452)
        57  African Development Foundation (Parts 5700--5799)
        61  General Services Administration Board of Contract 
                Appeals (Parts 6100--6199)
        63  Department of Transportation Board of Contract Appeals 
                (Parts 6300--6399)
        99  Cost Accounting Standards Board, Office of Federal 
                Procurement Policy, Office of Management and 
                Budget (Parts 9900--9999)

                       Title 49--Transportation

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Transportation 
                (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to 
                Transportation
         I  Research and Special Programs Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 100--199)
        II  Federal Railroad Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 400--
                499)
         V  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Federal Transit Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK) 
                (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  National Transportation Safety Board (Parts 800--999)
         X  Surface Transportation Board, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1000--1399)
        XI  Bureau of Transportation Statistics, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1400--1499)

                   Title 50--Wildlife and Fisheries

         I  United States Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of 
                the Interior (Parts 1--199)

[[Page 719]]

        II  National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Fishing and Related Activities (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  Joint Regulations (United States Fish and Wildlife 
                Service, Department of the Interior and National 
                Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic and 
                Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce); Endangered Species Committee 
                Regulations (Parts 400--499)
         V  Marine Mammal Commission (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Fishery Conservation and Management, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 600--699)

                      CFR Index and Finding Aids

            Subject/Agency Index
            List of Agency Prepared Indexes
            Parallel Tables of Statutory Authorities and Rules
            List of CFR Titles, Chapters, Subchapters, and Parts
            Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR

[[Page 721]]





           Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR




                      (Revised as of July 1, 1999)

                                                  CFR Title, Subtitle or 
                     Agency                               Chapter

Administrative Committee of the Federal Register  1, I
Advanced Research Projects Agency                 32, I
Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental          5, VII
     Relations
Advisory Committee on Federal Pay                 5, IV
Advisory Council on Historic Preservation         36, VIII
African Development Foundation                    22, XV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 57
Agency for International Development, United      22, II
     States
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
Agricultural Marketing Service                    7, I, IX, X, XI
Agricultural Research Service                     7, V
Agriculture Department
  Agricultural Marketing Service                  7, I, IX, X, XI
  Agricultural Research Service                   7, V
  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service      7, III; 9, I
  Chief Financial Officer, Office of              7, XXX
  Commodity Credit Corporation                    7, XIV
  Cooperative State Research, Education, and      7, XXXIV
       Extension Service
  Economic Research Service                       7, XXXVII
  Energy, Office of                               7, XXIX
  Environmental Quality, Office of                7, XXXI
  Farm Service Agency                             7, VII, XVIII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 4
  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation              7, IV
  Food and Nutrition Service                      7, II
  Food Safety and Inspection Service              9, III
  Foreign Agricultural Service                    7, XV
  Forest Service                                  36, II
  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards        7, VIII; 9, II
       Administration
  Information Resources Management, Office of     7, XXVII
  Inspector General, Office of                    7, XXVI
  National Agricultural Library                   7, XLI
  National Agricultural Statistics Service        7, XXXVI
  Natural Resources Conservation Service          7, VI
  Operations, Office of                           7, XXVIII
  Procurement and Property Management, Office of  7, XXXII
  Rural Business-Cooperative Service              7, XVIII, XLII
  Rural Development Administration                7, XLII
  Rural Housing Service                           7, XVIII, XXXV
  Rural Telephone Bank                            7, XVI
  Rural Utilities Service                         7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
  Secretary of Agriculture, Office of             7, Subtitle A
  Transportation, Office of                       7, XXXIII
  World Agricultural Outlook Board                7, XXXVIII
Air Force Department                              32, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement       48, 53
Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of          27, I
AMTRAK                                            49, VII
American Battle Monuments Commission              36, IV
American Indians, Office of the Special Trustee   25, VII
Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service        7, III; 9, I
Appalachian Regional Commission                   5, IX

[[Page 722]]

Architectural and Transportation Barriers         36, XI
     Compliance Board
Arctic Research Commission                        45, XXIII
Armed Forces Retirement Home                      5, XI
Army Department                                   32, V
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 51
Assassination Records Review Board                36, XIV
Benefits Review Board                             20, VII
Bilingual Education and Minority Languages        34, V
     Affairs, Office of
Blind or Severely Disabled, Committee for         41, 51
     Purchase From People Who Are
Board for International Broadcasting              22, XIII
Census Bureau                                     15, I
Central Intelligence Agency                       32, XIX
Chief Financial Officer, Office of                7, XXX
Child Support Enforcement, Office of              45, III
Children and Families, Administration for         45, II, III, IV, X
Christopher Columbus Quincentenary Jubilee        45, XXII
     Commission
Civil Rights, Commission on                       45, VII
Civil Rights, Office for                          34, I
Coast Guard                                       33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)                46, III
Commerce Department                               44, IV
  Census Bureau                                   15, I
  Economic Affairs, Under Secretary               37, V
  Economic Analysis, Bureau of                    15, VIII
  Economic Development Administration             13, III
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Export Administration, Bureau of                15, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 13
  Fishery Conservation and Management             50, VI
  Foreign-Trade Zones Board                       15, IV
  International Trade Administration              15, III; 19, III
  National Institute of Standards and Technology  15, II
  National Marine Fisheries Service               50, II, IV, VI
  National Oceanic and Atmospheric                15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
       Administration                             VI
  National Telecommunications and Information     15, XXIII; 47, III
       Administration
  National Weather Service                        15, IX
  Patent and Trademark Office                     37, I
  Productivity, Technology and Innovation,        37, IV
       Assistant Secretary for
  Secretary of Commerce, Office of                15, Subtitle A
  Technology, Under Secretary for                 37, V
  Technology Administration                       15, XI
  Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for      37, IV
Commercial Space Transportation                   14, III
Commodity Credit Corporation                      7, XIV
Commodity Futures Trading Commission              5, XLI; 17, I
Community Planning and Development, Office of     24, V, VI
     Assistant Secretary for
Community Services, Office of                     45, X
Comptroller of the Currency                       12, I
Construction Industry Collective Bargaining       29, IX
     Commission
Consumer Product Safety Commission                5, LXXI; 16, II
Cooperative State Research, Education, and        7, XXXIV
     Extension Service
Copyright Office                                  37, II
Corporation for National and Community Service    45, XII, XXV
Cost Accounting Standards Board                   48, 99
Council on Environmental Quality                  40, V
Customs Service, United States                    19, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Department                                5, XXVI; 32, Subtitle A; 
                                                  40, VII
  Advanced Research Projects Agency               32, I
  Air Force Department                            32, VII

[[Page 723]]

  Army Department                                 32, V; 33, II; 36, III, 
                                                  48, 51
  Defense Intelligence Agency                     32, I
  Defense Logistics Agency                        32, I, XII; 48, 54
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 2
  National Imagery and Mapping Agency             32, I
  Navy Department                                 32, VI; 48, 52
  Secretary of Defense, Office of                 32, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Intelligence Agency                       32, I
Defense Logistics Agency                          32, XII; 48, 54
Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board           10, XVII
Delaware River Basin Commission                   18, III
Drug Enforcement Administration                   21, II
East-West Foreign Trade Board                     15, XIII
Economic Affairs, Under Secretary                 37, V
Economic Analysis, Bureau of                      15, VIII
Economic Development Administration               13, III
Economic Research Service                         7, XXXVII
Education, Department of                          5, LIII
  Bilingual Education and Minority Languages      34, V
       Affairs, Office of
  Civil Rights, Office for                        34, I
  Educational Research and Improvement, Office    34, VII
       of
  Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of   34, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 34
  Postsecondary Education, Office of              34, VI
  Secretary of Education, Office of               34, Subtitle A
  Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,  34, III
       Office of
  Vocational and Adult Education, Office of       34, IV
Educational Research and Improvement, Office of   34, VII
Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of     34, II
Employees' Compensation Appeals Board             20, IV
Employees Loyalty Board                           5, V
Employment and Training Administration            20, V
Employment Standards Administration               20, VI
Endangered Species Committee                      50, IV
Energy, Department of                             5, XXIII; 10, II, III, X
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 9
  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission            5, XXIV; 18, I
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 109
Energy, Office of                                 7, XXIX
Engineers, Corps of                               33, II; 36, III
Engraving and Printing, Bureau of                 31, VI
Environmental Protection Agency                   5, LIV; 40, I, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 15
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 115
Environmental Quality, Office of                  7, XXXI
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission           5, LXII; 29, XIV
Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant Secretary  24, I
     for
Executive Office of the President                 3, I
  Administration, Office of                       5, XV
  Environmental Quality, Council on               40, V
  Management and Budget, Office of                25, III, LXXVII; 48, 99
  National Drug Control Policy, Office of         21, III
  National Security Council                       32, XXI; 47, 2
  Presidential Documents                          3
  Science and Technology Policy, Office of        32, XXIV; 47, II
  Trade Representative, Office of the United      15, XX
       States
Export Administration, Bureau of                  15, VII
Export-Import Bank of the United States           5, LII; 12, IV
Family Assistance, Office of                      45, II
Farm Credit Administration                        5, XXXI; 12, VI
Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation          5, XXX; 12, XIV
Farm Service Agency                               7, VII, XVIII
Federal Acquisition Regulation                    48, 1

[[Page 724]]

Federal Aviation Administration                   14, I
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
Federal Claims Collection Standards               4, II
Federal Communications Commission                 5, XXIX; 47, I
Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office of   41, 60
Federal Crop Insurance Corporation                7, IV
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation             5, XXII; 12, III
Federal Election Commission                       11, I
Federal Emergency Management Agency               44, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 44
Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal    48, 21
     Acquisition Regulation
Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition     48, 16
     Regulation
Federal Energy Regulatory Commission              5, XXIV; 18, I
Federal Financial Institutions Examination        12, XI
     Council
Federal Financing Bank                            12, VIII
Federal Highway Administration                    23, I, II; 49, III
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation            1, IV
Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight Office       12, XVII
Federal Housing Finance Board                     12, IX
Federal Labor Relations Authority, and General    5, XIV; 22, XIV
     Counsel of the Federal Labor Relations 
     Authority
Federal Law Enforcement Training Center           31, VII
Federal Maritime Commission                       46, IV
Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service        29, XII
Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission  5, LXXIV; 29, XXVII
Federal Pay, Advisory Committee on                5, IV
Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                   28, III
Federal Procurement Policy Office                 48, 99
Federal Property Management Regulations           41, 101
Federal Property Management Regulations System    41, Subtitle C
Federal Railroad Administration                   49, II
Federal Register, Administrative Committee of     1, I
Federal Register, Office of                       1, II
Federal Reserve System                            12, II
  Board of Governors                              5, LVIII
Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board        5, VI, LXXVI
Federal Service Impasses Panel                    5, XIV
Federal Trade Commission                          5, XLVII; 16, I
Federal Transit Administration                    49, VI
Federal Travel Regulation System                  41, Subtitle F
Fine Arts, Commission on                          45, XXI
Fiscal Service                                    31, II
Fish and Wildlife Service, United States          50, I, IV
Fishery Conservation and Management               50, VI
Food and Drug Administration                      21, I
Food and Nutrition Service                        7, II
Food Safety and Inspection Service                9, III
Foreign Agricultural Service                      7, XV
Foreign Assets Control, Office of                 31, V
Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the       45, V
     United States
Foreign Service Grievance Board                   22, IX
Foreign Service Impasse Disputes Panel            22, XIV
Foreign Service Labor Relations Board             22, XIV
Foreign-Trade Zones Board                         15, IV
Forest Service                                    36, II
General Accounting Office                         4, I, II
General Services Administration                   5, LVII
  Contract Appeals, Board of                      48, 61
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 5
  Federal Property Management Regulations System  41, 101, 105
  Federal Travel Regulation System                41, Subtitle F
  General                                         41, 300
  Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel    41, 304
       Expenses
  Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death    41, 303
       of Certain Employees
  Relocation Allowances                           41, 302

[[Page 725]]

  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances          41, 301
Geological Survey                                 30, IV
Government Ethics, Office of                      5, XVI
Government National Mortgage Association          24, III
Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards          7, VIII; 9, II
     Administration
Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation            45, XVIII
Health and Human Services, Department of          5, XLV; 45, Subtitle A
  Child Support Enforcement, Office of            45, III
  Children and Families, Administration for       45, II, III, IV, X
  Community Services, Office of                   45, X
  Family Assistance, Office of                    45, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 3
  Food and Drug Administration                    21, I
  Health Care Financing Administration            42, IV
  Human Development Services, Office of           45, XIII
  Indian Health Service                           25, V
  Inspector General (Health Care), Office of      42, V
  Public Health Service                           42, I
  Refugee Resettlement, Office of                 45, IV
Health Care Financing Administration              42, IV
Housing and Urban Development, Department of      5, LXV; 24, Subtitle B
  Community Planning and Development, Office of   24, V, VI
       Assistant Secretary for
  Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant          24, I
       Secretary for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 24
  Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, Office    12, XVII
       of
  Government National Mortgage Association        24, III
  Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office   24, II, VIII, X, XX
       of Assistant Secretary for
  Inspector General, Office of                    24, XII
  Multifamily Housing Assistance Restructuring,   24, IV
       Office of
  Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant  24, IX
       Secretary for
  Secretary, Office of                            24, Subtitle A, VII
Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office of  24, II, VIII, X, XX
     Assistant Secretary for
Human Development Services, Office of             45, XIII
Immigration and Naturalization Service            8, I
Independent Counsel, Office of                    28, VII
Indian Affairs, Bureau of                         25, I, V
Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant           25, VI
     Secretary
Indian Arts and Crafts Board                      25, II
Indian Health Service                             25, V
Information Agency, United States                 22, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 19
Information Resources Management, Office of       7, XXVII
Information Security Oversight Office, National   32, XX
     Archives and Records Administration
Inspector General
  Agriculture Department                          7, XXVI
  Health and Human Services Department            42, V
  Housing and Urban Development Department        24, XII
Institute of Peace, United States                 22, XVII
Inter-American Foundation                         5, LXIII; 22, X
Intergovernmental Relations, Advisory Commission  5, VII
     on
Interior Department
  American Indians, Office of the Special         25, VII
       Trustee
  Endangered Species Committee                    50, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 14
  Federal Property Management Regulations System  41, 114
  Fish and Wildlife Service, United States        50, I, IV
  Geological Survey                               30, IV
  Indian Affairs, Bureau of                       25, I, V
  Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant         25, VI
       Secretary
  Indian Arts and Crafts Board                    25, II
  Land Management, Bureau of                      43, II
  Minerals Management Service                     30, II
  Mines, Bureau of                                30, VI

[[Page 726]]

  National Indian Gaming Commission               25, III
  National Park Service                           36, I
  Reclamation, Bureau of                          43, I
  Secretary of the Interior, Office of            43, Subtitle A
  Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board   30, III
       of
  Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,     30, VII
       Office of
Internal Revenue Service                          26, I
International Boundary and Water Commission,      22, XI
     United States and Mexico, United States 
     Section
International Development, United States Agency   22, II
     for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
International Development Cooperation Agency,     22, XII
     United States
  International Development, United States        22, II; 48, 7
       Agency for
  Overseas Private Investment Corporation         5, XXXIII; 22, VII
International Fishing and Related Activities      50, III
International Investment, Office of               31, VIII
International Joint Commission, United States     22, IV
     and Canada
International Organizations Employees Loyalty     5, V
     Board
International Trade Administration                15, III; 19, III
International Trade Commission, United States     19, II
Interstate Commerce Commission                    5, XL
James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation      45, XXIV
Japan-United States Friendship Commission         22, XVI
Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries       20, VIII
Justice Department                                5, XXVIII; 28, I
  Drug Enforcement Administration                 21, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 28
  Federal Claims Collection Standards             4, II
  Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                 28, III
  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the     45, V
       United States
  Immigration and Naturalization Service          8, I
  Offices of Independent Counsel                  28, VI
  Prisons, Bureau of                              28, V
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 128
Labor Department                                  5, XLII
  Benefits Review Board                           20, VII
  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board           20, IV
  Employment and Training Administration          20, V
  Employment Standards Administration             20, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 29
  Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office    41, 60
       of
  Federal Procurement Regulations System          41, 50
  Labor-Management Standards, Office of           29, II, IV
  Mine Safety and Health Administration           30, I
  Occupational Safety and Health Administration   29, XVII
  Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration     29, XXV
  Public Contracts                                41, 50
  Secretary of Labor, Office of                   29, Subtitle A
  Veterans' Employment and Training, Office of    41, 61; 20, IX
       the Assistant Secretary for
  Wage and Hour Division                          29, V
  Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of       20, I
Labor-Management Standards, Office of             29, II, IV
Land Management, Bureau of                        43, II
Legal Services Corporation                        45, XVI
Library of Congress                               36, VII
  Copyright Office                                37, II
Management and Budget, Office of                  5, III, LXXVII; 48, 99
Marine Mammal Commission                          50, V
Maritime Administration                           46, II
Merit Systems Protection Board                    5, II
Micronesian Status Negotiations, Office for       32, XXVII
Mine Safety and Health Administration             30, I
Minerals Management Service                       30, II
Mines, Bureau of                                  30, VI

[[Page 727]]

Minority Business Development Agency              15, XIV
Miscellaneous Agencies                            1, IV
Monetary Offices                                  31, I
Multifamily Housing Assistance Restructuring,     24, IV
     Office of
National Aeronautics and Space Administration     5, LIX; 14, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 18
National Agricultural Library                     7, XLI
National Agricultural Statistics Service          7, XXXVI
National Archives and Records Administration      5, LXVI; 36, XII
  Information Security Oversight Office           32, XX
National Bureau of Standards                      15, II
National Capital Planning Commission              1, IV
National Commission for Employment Policy         1, IV
National Commission on Libraries and Information  45, XVII
     Science
National and Community Service, Corporation for   45, XII, XXV
National Council on Disability                    34, XII
National Credit Union Administration              12, VII
National Drug Control Policy, Office of           21, III
National Foundation on the Arts and the           45, XI
     Humanities
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration    23, II, III; 49, V
National Imagery and Mapping Agency               32, I
National Indian Gaming Commission                 25, III
National Institute for Literacy                   34, XI
National Institute of Standards and Technology    15, II
National Labor Relations Board                    5, LXI; 29, I
National Marine Fisheries Service                 50, II, IV, VI
National Mediation Board                          29, X
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration   15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
                                                  VI
National Park Service                             36, I
National Railroad Adjustment Board                29, III
National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK)  49, VII
National Science Foundation                       5, XLIII; 45, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 25
National Security Council                         32, XXI
National Security Council and Office of Science   47, II
     and Technology Policy
National Telecommunications and Information       15, XXIII; 47, III
     Administration
National Transportation Safety Board              49, VIII
National Weather Service                          15, IX
Natural Resources Conservation Service            7, VI
Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation, Office of      25, IV
Navy Department                                   32, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 52
Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation             24, XXV
Northeast Dairy Compact Commission                7, XIII
Nuclear Regulatory Commission                     5, XLVIII; 10, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 20
Occupational Safety and Health Administration     29, XVII
Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission  29, XX
Offices of Independent Counsel                    28, VI
Operations Office                                 7, XXVIII
Overseas Private Investment Corporation           5, XXXIII; 22, VII
Panama Canal Commission                           48, 35
Panama Canal Regulations                          35, I
Patent and Trademark Office                       37, I
Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel      41, 304
     Expenses
Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death of   41, 303
     Certain Employees
Peace Corps                                       22, III
Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation       36, IX
Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration       29, XXV
Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation              29, XL
Personnel Management, Office of                   5, I, XXXV; 45, VIII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 17
  Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal  48, 21
     Acquisition Regulation
[[Page 728]]

  Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition   48, 16
       Regulation
Postal Rate Commission                            5, XLVI; 39, III
Postal Service, United States                     5, LX; 39, I
Postsecondary Education, Office of                34, VI
President's Commission on White House             1, IV
     Fellowships
Presidential Commission on the Assignment of      32, XXIX
     Women in the Armed Forces
Presidential Documents                            3
Presidio Trust                                    36, X
Prisons, Bureau of                                28, V
Procurement and Property Management, Office of    7, XXXII
Productivity, Technology and Innovation,          37, IV
     Assistant Secretary
Public Contracts, Department of Labor             41, 50
Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant    24, IX
     Secretary for
Public Health Service                             42, I
Railroad Retirement Board                         20, II
Reclamation, Bureau of                            43, I
Refugee Resettlement, Office of                   45, IV
Regional Action Planning Commissions              13, V
Relocation Allowances                             41, 302
Research and Special Programs Administration      49, I
Rural Business-Cooperative Service                7, XVIII, XLII
Rural Development Administration                  7, XLII
Rural Housing Service                             7, XVIII, XXXV
Rural Telephone Bank                              7, XVI
Rural Utilities Service                           7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation     33, IV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of          32, XXIV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of, and     47, II
     National Security Council
Secret Service                                    31, IV
Securities and Exchange Commission                17, II
Selective Service System                          32, XVI
Small Business Administration                     13, I
Smithsonian Institution                           36, V
Social Security Administration                    20, III; 48, 23
Soldiers' and Airmen's Home, United States        5, XI
Special Counsel, Office of                        5, VIII
Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,    34, III
     Office of
State Department                                  22, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 6
Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board of  30, III
Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,       30, VII
     Office of
Surface Transportation Board                      49, X
Susquehanna River Basin Commission                18, VIII
Technology Administration                         15, XI
Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for        37, IV
Technology, Under Secretary for                   37, V
Tennessee Valley Authority                        5, LXIX; 18, XIII
Thrift Supervision Office, Department of the      12, V
     Treasury
Trade Representative, United States, Office of    15, XX
Transportation, Department of                     5, L
  Coast Guard                                     33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)              46, III
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
  Contract Appeals, Board of                      48, 63
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 12
  Federal Aviation Administration                 14, I
  Federal Highway Administration                  23, I, II; 49, III
  Federal Railroad Administration                 49, II
  Federal Transit Administration                  49, VI
  Maritime Administration                         46, II
  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  23, II, III; 49, V
  Research and Special Programs Administration    49, I
  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation   33, IV

[[Page 729]]

  Secretary of Transportation, Office of          14, II; 49, Subtitle A
  Surface Transportation Board                    49, X
  Transportation Statistics Bureau                49, XI
Transportation, Office of                         7, XXXIII
Transportation Statistics Brureau                 49, XI
Travel Allowances, Temporary Duty (TDY)           41, 301
Treasury Department                               5, XXI; 12, XV; 17, IV
  Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of        27, I
  Community Development Financial Institutions    12, XVIII
       Fund
  Comptroller of the Currency                     12, I
  Customs Service, United States                  19, I
  Engraving and Printing, Bureau of               31, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 10
  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center         31, VII
  Fiscal Service                                  31, II
  Foreign Assets Control, Office of               31, V
  Internal Revenue Service                        26, I
  International Investment, Office of             31, VIII
  Monetary Offices                                31, I
  Secret Service                                  31, IV
  Secretary of the Treasury, Office of            31, Subtitle A
  Thrift Supervision, Office of                   12, V
Truman, Harry S. Scholarship Foundation           45, XVIII
United States and Canada, International Joint     22, IV
     Commission
United States and Mexico, International Boundary  22, XI
     and Water Commission, United States Section
Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation      43, III
     Commission
Veterans Affairs Department                       38, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 8
Veterans' Employment and Training, Office of the  41, 61; 20, IX
     Assistant Secretary for
Vice President of the United States, Office of    32, XXVIII
Vocational and Adult Education, Office of         34, IV
Wage and Hour Division                            29, V
Water Resources Council                           18, VI
Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of         20, I
World Agricultural Outlook Board                  7, XXXVIII

[[Page 731]]



List of CFR Sections Affected




All changes in this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations which were 
made by documents published in the Federal Register since January 1, 
1986, are enumerated in the following list. Entries indicate the nature 
of the changes effected. Page numbers refer to Federal Register pages. 
The user should consult the entries for chapters and parts as well as 
sections for revisions.
Title 40 was established at 36 FR 12213, June 29, 1971. For the period 
before January 1, 1986, see the ``List of CFR Sections Affected, 1964-
1972, 1964-1972, and 1973-1985,'' published in seven separate volumes.

                               1986--1991

                       (No Regulations Published)

                                  1992

40 CFR
                                                                   57 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter I
63  Added..........................................................61992

                                  1993

40 CFR
                                                                   58 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter I
63  Appendix A amended.............................................57924

                                  1994

40 CFR
                                                                   59 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter I
63  Appendix A amended.............................................61816

                                  1995

40 CFR
                                                                   60 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter I
63  Appendix A amended.......................................4979, 62952

                                  1996

40 CFR
                                                                   61 FR
                                                                    Page
63.1310--63.1335 (Subpart JJJ)  Added..............................48229
63  Appendix D added...............................................34200

                                  1997

40 CFR
                                                                   62 FR
                                                                    Page
63.1311  (d) introductory text, (2) introductory text and (ii) 
        revised.....................................................1838
    (b) and (d) introductory text revised; (d)(6) added; eff. 7-
27-97..............................................................30995
63.1331  (a) introductory text revised; (a)(10) added..............37722
63  Appendix A amended................................2793, 12549, 52418
    Appendix C revised..............................................2801

                                  1998

40 CFR
                                                                   63 FR
                                                                    Page
63.1211--63.1216 (Subpart EEE)  Added..............................33820
63.1250--63.1261 (Subpart GGG)  Added..............................50326
63.1290--63.1309 (Subpart III)  Added..............................53996
63.1310--63.1335 (Subpart JJJ)  Regulation at 61 FR 48229 eff. 
        date corrected to 2-27-98...................................9944
63.1311  (b), (d) introductory text and (1) introductory text 
        revised.....................................................9945
    (c) introductory text revised..................................15315
63  Appendix A amended...............................15027, 18630, 46535
    Appendix C amended.............................................67794

[[Page 732]]

                                  1999

    (Reulations published from January 1, 1999, through July 1, 1999)

40 CFR
                                                                   64 FR
                                                                    Page
63.1270--63.1289 (Subpart HHH)  Added..............................32647
63.1311  (d)(1)(ii), (iii) and (4) revised; (d)(1)(iv) added.......11547
    (b) and (d)(6) revised; eff. 8-9-99............................30409
    (b) and (c) revised; eff. 8-30-99..............................35028
63.1312  (b) amended...............................................11547
63.1314  (b)(3) added..............................................11547
63.1315  (a) introductory text revised; (a)(18) and (e) added......11547
63.1316  Heading, (b)(1)(i), (2)(i) and (ii) revised; (b)(1)(v) 
        and (2)(v) added...........................................11548
63.1321  (d) added.................................................11549
63.1322  (b)(2) revised............................................11549
63.1323  (a)(2) revised............................................11549
63.1325  (e) introductory text revised; (e)(3) added...............11549
63.1326  (b)(4) introductory text revised; (b)(5) added............11549
63.1330  (d) and (e) added.........................................11549
63.1332  (a)(2), (3) introductory text, (c) introductory text, 
        (3), (d)(5), (e)(3)(ii), (5), (g)(1), (2)(ii)(A), 
        (7)(ii)(A), (h)(1) introductory text, (6)(ii) introductory 
        text, (7)(ii) introductory text, (i)(1) introductory text, 
        (iii), (2), (3), (5) introductory text, (i), (j)(2) 
        introductory text, (ii)(B), (iv), (v), (k) introductory 
        text, (4) introductory text and (l) introductory text 
        revised....................................................11549
63.1335  (e)(4)(ii)(L)(1) revised..................................11553
63.1310--63.1335 (Subpart JJJ)  Tables 3 and 5 revised.............11553
63.1340--63.1358 (Subpart LLL)  Added..............................31925
63.1360--63.1369 (Subpart MMM)  Added..............................33589
63.1380--63.1387 (Subpart NNN)  Added..............................31708
63.1420--63.1439 (Subpart PPP)  Added..............................29439
63.1427  (e)(2) Equation 11 corrected..............................31895
63.1541--63.1550 (Subpart TTT)  Added..............................30204
63.1650--63.1661 (Subpart XXX)  Added..............................27458
63  Appendix A amended......................................31718, 31937